Free Autodesk Software User Guide, Download Instruction Manual and Support
A9'wr ©n:ÉA'nA©> ¶'wrA@ KK§
6w'©Ow dÉ9'
April 2006
Copyright© 2006 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, 3ds max, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, backdraft, Biped, bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), cleaner, Codec Central, combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, IntroDV, Kinetix, lustre, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), burn, Buzzsaw.com, CAiCE, Cinestream, Civil 3D, cleaner central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.
Autodesk Canada Co. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, Multi-Master Editing.
Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpellTM Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShieldTM 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2006 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServerTM. WindowBlinds: DirectSkinTM OCX © Stardock®
AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents
Part 1
Workflow and User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Finding Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Online Help Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Project Cycle Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Contacting Autodesk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sales Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 2 The Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Understanding the Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 How to Use the Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Starting Autodesk Architectural Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Workspace Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pulldown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 AutoCAD Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Drawing Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Application Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Communication Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Project Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Changing Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 A Guideline to the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Working with Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Opening the Tool Palettes Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Controlling the Appearance of the Tool Palettes Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Specifying Different Tool Palettes for the Tool Palettes Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Creating a New Tool Palettes Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Creating a New Tool Palettes Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Creating a New Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Defining the Appearance of Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Text and Separator Lines to Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating an Object with a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Changing the Tool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Changing a Tool Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Refreshing a Tool Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Creating a Tool from an Object in the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Copying a Tool from a Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Creating a Tool from the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Contents | v
Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Creating a Command Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Working with Tools from a Central Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Applying the Properties of a Tool to an Existing Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Re-Importing Styles for a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Deleting a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 The Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Opening the Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Setting the Appearance of the Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 The Design Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 The Extended Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Grip Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Grip Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Using the CTRL Key with Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Trigger Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Dynamic Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Grip Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Temporary Grip Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 In-Place Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 In-Place Editing of Polyline-Based Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 In-Place Editing of Profile-Based Objects and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 In-Place Editing of 3D Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 In-Place Editing of Material Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Aligning the UCS to an Object Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Isolating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Isolating Objects to Edit in a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Isolating Objects to Edit in an Elevation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Isolating Objects to Edit in a Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Isolating Objects to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Isolating Objects to Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Ending the Object Isolation in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Saving Isolated Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Isolating Objects in External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Styles and Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Integration of Autodesk Architectural Desktop and AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 3 Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Understanding the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Exploring the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Viewing a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Using the Items in a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Managing Your Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Creating a New Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Creating a Tool Catalog from Content Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Adding Tools from Content Drawings to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Adding an Existing Tool Catalog to Your Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Creating a Catalog Install File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Publishing Tool Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding a Website to Your Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Editing Tool Catalog Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Creating Catalog Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Sorting Catalogs in the Library View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Filtering Catalogs in the Library View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Removing a Tool Catalog or Website Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Opening a Different Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Renaming a Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Searching for Items in a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
vi | Contents
Performing a Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding Content to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Defining Categories in a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Adding a Tool Palette to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Adding a Tool Package to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Adding Tools to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Copying and Moving Tool Palettes and Tool Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Copying and Moving Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Customizing a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Deleting Tool Catalog Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Using Tool Catalog Items in Autodesk Architectural Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Linked and Unlinked Tool Catalog Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Using a Tool in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Copying a Tool Palette to the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Copying a Tool Package to the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Refreshing Linked Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Refreshing Linked Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Specifying Refresh Options for Linked Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Working with Multiple Content Browser Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Opening a Tool Catalog in a New Content Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Opening Catalog Items in a New Content Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Dragging Catalog Items Between Content Browser Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Starting the Content Browser from a Windows Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
About Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Creating a Drawing from a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Creating a Drawing Without a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Opening Legacy Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Setting Up a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Specifying the Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Specifying the Drawing Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Specifying a Layer Standard and a Layer Key Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Specifying the Default Display Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Specifying AEC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Changing the AEC Editor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Changing the AEC Content Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Specifying AEC Object Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Changing the AEC Project Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Sharing Drawings with Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Comparing Methods of Sharing Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Generating Proxy Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Exporting a Drawing to AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Exporting a Drawing to a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Viewport Layer Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Importing LandXML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Schema Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Supported Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 File Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Importing LandXML Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Selecting Layer Keys for LandXML Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Publishing Drawing Files to Autodesk MapGuide and Autodesk Envision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Published Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Generating a MWX File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 An Overview of the Published Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 An Overview of the Database Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Contents | vii
Publishing Data to Autodesk MapGuide or Autodesk Envision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Exporting Property Set Data to an MDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Publishing Drawings to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Publishing Property Data to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Process Overview: Publishing a DWG File with Property Set Data to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Setting the Publishing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating a New Published Property List (PPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Publishing a DWF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Chapter 6 Drawing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Concepts of Drawing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Before You Begin: External References Within a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Before You Begin: Working in a Network Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Process Overview: Working in a Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Project Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Working with Design Teams Located Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Opening a Project From a Mapped Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Setting the Default Project Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Creating a Sheet Set Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating a Template from an Existing Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Creating a Template from Existing Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 The Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Using the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 The Project Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Setting a Project Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Defining the Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Moving a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Renaming a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Closing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Electronically Transmitting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Closing the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Removing the Project Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 The Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Opening the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 The Tabs of the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Using the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 The Project Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Displaying the Project Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Creating a New Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Copying a Level with Assigned Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Changing the Properties of a Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Deleting a Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Changing Levels: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Creating a New Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Changing a Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Deleting a Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Changing Divisions: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Creating a Category in the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Creating a Category from Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Changing the Subcategory of a Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Deleting a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
viii | Contents
When to Start with Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Processing Constructs in the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 The Content of Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Creating a New Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Copying Constructs to Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Converting a Legacy Drawing to a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Opening and Closing a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Dragging Objects into a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Referencing Elements into Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Displaying External References of a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Changing the Properties of a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Electronically Transmitting a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Deleting a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Converting a Construct to an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Changing Constructs: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 When to Start with Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Processing Elements in the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Creating a New Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Converting a Legacy Drawing to an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Opening and Closing an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Dragging Objects into an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Changing the Properties of an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Electronically Transmitting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Deleting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Referencing an Element into Another Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Displaying External References of an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Converting an Element to a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Changing Elements: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 When to Start with Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Process Overview: Creating a General View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Creating a New General View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Displaying External References of a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Opening and Closing a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Creating a Specialized View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Changing the Properties of a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Regenerating a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Electronically Transmitting a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Deleting a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Creating a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Placing a Model Space View onto a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Changing the Properties of a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Deleting Model Space Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Changing Views: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Plotting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 When to Start with Plotting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Setting the Properties of the Project Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Setting the Properties of a Sheet Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Creating a Sheet Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Removing a Sheet Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Creating a New Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Importing Sheets into the Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Registering the Current Sheet in the Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Opening and Closing a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Changing the Properties of a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Removing a Sheet from the Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Deleting a Sheet from the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Creating a New Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Contents | ix
Opening a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Numbering Sheet Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Deleting a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Displaying External References of a Sheet Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Inserting a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Changing a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Updating the Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Refreshing the Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Creating a Sheet Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Activating a Sheet Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Deleting a Sheet Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Electronically Transmitting Sheets and Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Archiving a Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Publishing Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Changing Plotting Sheets: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Updating (Re-path) the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Refreshing the Project View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Object Display in External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Using the External Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Using the External Display Configuration with the Object Enabler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Example: Displaying Part of the Model as Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Annotating a Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Generating Spaces and Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Tagging a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Property Set Data and Schedule Tables in Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Creating a Title Block for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Dimensioning a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Working with Cut Planes in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Global Cut Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Object-Specific Cut Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Running Drawing Management from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Command Line: Opening the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Command Line: Opening the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Command Line: Refreshing the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Command Line: Regenerating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Command Line: Selecting a New Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Command Line: Closing the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Frequently Asked Questions about Drawing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Appendix 1: Template Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Understanding Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Levels and Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Project File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Understanding Constructs Included in the Commercial Template Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Understanding the Element File Included in the Commercial Template Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Understanding Views Included in the Template Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Understanding Sheets Included in the Template Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chapter 7 Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Project Standards Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Project Standards Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 AutoCAD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Standard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Synchronizing the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Process Overview: Using Standards in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Using Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Prerequisites for Working with Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Setting up Standards in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
x | Contents
Creating a New Project with Predefined Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Configuring Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Setting up Standard Tools in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Adding a Project Catalog to a Content Browser Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Building the Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Copying the Project Tool Palettes to the Tool Palette File Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Adding the Project Profile to the Tool Palette File Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Adding Standards to a Project Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Project Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Adding Standard Styles from Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Adding Standard Styles from Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Adding Standard Display Settings from Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Synchronizing a Project with the Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Synchronization Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Synchronizing a Project with AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Synchronization Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Synchronizing Selected Styles and Display Settings with AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Generating a Synchronization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Synchronizing a Project with AutoCAD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AutoCAD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Auditing a Project or a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Showing Display Overrides in Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Editing Project Drawings Outside the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Creating a New Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Updating Project Standards Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Process Overview: Updating AEC Standards in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Versioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Change Types in Project Standards Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Adding Standard Objects from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Editing the Version History of a Standard Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Versioning a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Purging the Version History from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Editing Project Standards Drawings Outside the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Scripting Project Standards Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Chapter 8 Layer Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Layer Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Managing Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Opening the Layer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Making a Layer Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Creating a Layer with a Layer Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Creating a Nonstandard Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Renaming a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Deleting a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Changing the Layer Standard of a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Editing the Description of a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Changing AEC Object Displays for a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Working with Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Types of Layer Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Creating a Group Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Creating a Property Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Contents | xi
Creating a Layer Standards Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Adding Layers to Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Changing the Properties of a Layer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Renaming and Deleting Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Converting a Property Filter to a Group Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Working with Layer Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Creating a Layer Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Editing a Layer Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Restoring a Layer Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Deleting a Layer Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Exporting a Layer Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Importing a Layer Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Working with Layer Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Default Layer Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Default Layer Key Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Creating a Layer Key Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Creating a Layer Key Style from an LY File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Editing Layer Key Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Attaching Notes and Files to a Layer Key Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Layer Key Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Creating and Editing Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Component Fields in Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating a Layer Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Editing Component Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Editing Descriptive Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Editing Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Editing Description Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Purging Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Importing Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Exporting Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Chapter 9 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Display System Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Display Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Display Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 The Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Opening the Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Viewing Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Viewing Display Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Viewing Display Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Viewing an Object in a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Viewing the Display Representation of an Object in a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Accessing the Default Display Properties of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Creating and Editing Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Process Overview: Creating a Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Tips for Working with Display Configurations, Sets, and Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Creating a Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Creating a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Creating a Display Representation for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Editing a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Assigning a Display Representation to a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Comparing Display Representations Between Display Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Assigning a Display Set to a View Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Assigning a Display Configuration to a Viewport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Specifying a Display Set as a Default Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Specifying the Default Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Specifying the Display Configurations Used in Xref Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Changing the Display Configuration Used in Xref Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
xii | Contents
Displaying Objects by Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Specifying Settings for Live Sections and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Managing Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Renaming a Display Configuration or a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Renaming a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Deleting a Display Configuration or a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Deleting a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Adding Notes and Reference Files to a Display Configuration or a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Using Display Settings in Multiple Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Purging a Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Purging a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Purging a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Working with Standard Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Excluding Display Settings from Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Updating Standard Display Settings in a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Updating Standard Display Settings in the Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing . . . . . . 444 Adding Standard Display Settings from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . 445 Editing the Version History of a Standard Display Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Purging the Version History from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Troubleshooting the Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Object Not Displayed in a Viewport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Viewport Not Updating Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Objects Copied from Another Drawing Display Differently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Verifying the Existence of Objects Not Displayed in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Object Linetype Displayed Incorrectly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Chapter 10 Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Getting Started with the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Sorting Styles in the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Viewing Styles in the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Viewing Styles Across Multiple Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Working with Drawings and Templates in the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Creating a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Copying and Assigning a Style to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Creating a Tool from a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Renaming a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Copying Styles Between Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Sending Styles to Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Purging Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Chapter 11 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Objects That Support Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Working with the Material Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Using the Material Tool to Add Materials to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Creating a Material Tool from a Material Definition in Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Copying a Material Tool on a Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Creating an AEC Material Tool from a VIZ Render Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Creating a Material Tool from a Render Material in the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Applying Material Tool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Material Components and Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Linework Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Plan Hatch Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 3D Body Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Surface Hatch Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 2D Section/Elevation Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Contents | xiii
Section Hatch Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Displaying Materials in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Working with Surface Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Surface Hatches on Curved Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Surface Hatches on Multiple Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Surface Hatches on Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Surface Hatches on Free Form Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Overriding the Surface Hatch on Individual Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Hiding a Surface Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Displaying a Hidden Surface Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Specifying the Rotation of a Surface Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Specifying the Horizontal and Vertical Offset of a Surface Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Editing Surface Hatch Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Displaying a List of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Displaying a Material Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Process Overview: Creating and Assigning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Creating and Editing Material Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Creating a Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Specifying the Plan and Section Hatch Patterns of a Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Assigning Render Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Excluding a Material Definition from 2D Section Shrinkwrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Controlling the Display of Hidden Lines by Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Merging Material Definitions in a 2D Section/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Attaching Notes and Files to a Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
General Content Standards and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Content Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 National CAD Standard Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Content Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Template Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Style Library Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Template Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Tool Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Style-Based Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Architectural Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Documentation Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Multi-Purpose Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Symbol & Tool-Based Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Palette-Based and Miscellaneous Annotation Tool Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Part 2
Conceptual Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Mass Elements and Mass Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Editing Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Mass Element Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Using Materials for Mass Elements and Mass Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 Displaying the Model Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Using Display Commands in the Model Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 Viewing Objects on a Nonvisible Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 Maintaining Zoom Percentage and Position of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
xiv | Contents
Using Toolbar Commands in the Model Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 Creating Slice Floorplates from a Conceptual Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Generating a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Specifying the Slice Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Attaching Objects to a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Detaching Objects from a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Converting a Slice to a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Changing the Location of a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Chapter 14 Quick Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Quick Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Creating a Quick Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Chapter 15 Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Using the Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Chapter 16 Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Creating a Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 Editing a Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Part 3
Designing with Architectural Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Chapter 17 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Workflow Overview: Adding Walls to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Specifying Drawing Defaults for Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Using Wall Tools To Create Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 Creating a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 Creating a Wall with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Creating a Wall from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 Creating a Wall from a 3D Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Creating a Wall Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Editing Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Using Grips to Edit Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 Changing the Shape of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Changing the Wall Width while Maintaining the Wall Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Changing the Wall Width while Maintaining the Opposite Face of the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Changing the Wall Base Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Changing the Wall Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 Changing the Wall Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Moving a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Offsetting New Walls from Existing Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Repositioning a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Adjusting the Position of Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Changing the Style of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Overriding Individual Wall Endcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Changing the Location of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Merging Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Removing Individual Merge Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 Removing All Merged Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 Joining Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 Filleting Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 Chamfering Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 Trimming Walls at L and T Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 Reversing the Direction of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Using AutoCAD Commands to Edit Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Contents | xv
Specifying the Materials of Individual Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Changing the Display Properties of Individual Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 Specifying the Cleanup of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 Cleanup Circles and Wall Graphlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Wall Cleanups and Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 Guidelines for Successful Wall Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 Assigning a Different Wall Cleanup Group Definition to Existing Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 Specifying Cleanup for Individual Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 Changing the Position of the Wall Graphline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Overriding the Wall Cleanup Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Overriding Component Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Troubleshooting Wall Cleanups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Cleanup Group Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Adding Objects to Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Adding a Window to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Adding an Opening to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Adding a Door to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Adding a Door/Window Assembly to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Removing Windows, Openings, Doors, or Door/Window Assemblies from a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Anchoring an Object to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Detaching Objects from a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Creating Special Conditions and Customized Wall Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Working with Wall Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Working with Wall Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Working with Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 Working with Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Creating a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Adding Property Set Data to a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 Specifying the Endcap Styles Used in a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Specifying the Components of a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Specifying the Materials of a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 Adding Classifications to a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Defining a Wall Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Wall Endcap Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 About Polylines Used in Wall Endcap Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 Creating and Applying a Wall Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 Creating a Wall Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 About Editing Wall Endcap Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Editing the Geometry of a Wall Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707 Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 Opening Endcap Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 Creating and Applying Opening Endcap Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Creating and Editing an Opening Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Attaching Notes and Files to an Opening Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Chapter 18 Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Using Curtain Wall Tools To Create Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Creating a Straight Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 Creating a Curtain Wall with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 Creating a Curved Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 Creating a Curtain Wall that References a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Creating a Curtain Wall from an Elevation Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Converting a Wall to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
xvi | Contents
Converting a 3D Face to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 Creating a Curtain Wall Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Curtain Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725 Process Overview: Creating a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Tips for Working Efficiently with Curtain Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 Creating a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728 Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 Defining Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 Defining Curtain Wall Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748 Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748 Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749 Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758 Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Defining a Curtain Wall Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 Using Overrides in Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 Overriding Curtain Wall Infills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 Overriding Curtain Wall Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 Removing Curtain Wall Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 Modifying Element Definitions for Curtain Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 Editing Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 Using Grips to Edit Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 Applying the Properties of an Existing Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Changing the Dimensions of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Changing the Curtain Wall Location Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Adding an Interference Condition to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 Removing an Interference Condition from a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 Mitering Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 Specifying a Miter Angle for a Curtain Wall Adjacent to Another Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Offsetting or Projecting the Roof Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Offsetting or Projecting the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 Adding a Gable to the Roof Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 Adding a Step to the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Specifying Gable Settings for a Roof Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 Specifying Step Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 Specifying Vertex Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Editing Objects Anchored in Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 Changing the Orientation of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 Changing the Alignment of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 Changing the Offset of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 Swapping Two Objects Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 Releasing an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Creating Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 Creating a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 Creating a Curtain Wall Unit with a Custom Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Contents | xvii
Curtain Wall Unit Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 Defining Curtain Wall Unit Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Using Overrides in Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842 Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Infills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842 Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Frames and Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848 Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853 Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Editing Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 Using Grips to Edit Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 Matching the Properties of an Existing Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 Changing the Dimensions of a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 Specifying a Miter Angle for a Curtain Wall Unit Adjacent to Another Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 Changing the Location of a Freestanding Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 Modifying the Position of Anchored Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 Using Door and Window Assembly Tools to Create Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 Creating a Door and Window Assembly Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 Door and Window Assembly Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873 Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912 Modifying Element Definitions for Door and Window Assembly Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Editing Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Editing Objects Anchored in Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Chapter 20 AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 Using AEC Polygon Tools to Create AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 Creating an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 Creating an AEC Polygon with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 Creating an AEC Polygon from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 Creating an AEC Polygon from a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 Creating an AEC Polygon Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 Editing AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Using Grips to Edit AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 Changing the AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 Merging Two AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 Creating a Hole in an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 Creating AEC Polygons from the Intersection of Other AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947 Trimming an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948 Dividing an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948 Adding a Vertex to an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 Removing a Vertex from an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 Converting an AEC Polygon to a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 Converting an AEC Polygon to a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
xviii | Contents
Changing the Rotation of an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 Changing the Elevation of an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 Changing the Location of an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 AEC Polygon Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 Creating an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 Changing the Width and Justification of the AEC Polygon Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 Masking Underlying Objects with AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 Specifying the Display Properties of an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 Setting the Colors of the True Color Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 Adding Classifications to an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 Rendering the Exact Colors of an AEC Polygon by Defeating Lighting and Shading Effects . . . . . . . . . . 957 Changing the 3D Graphics System Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 Changing the Ambient Light Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 Modifying the Global Rendering Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Chapter 21 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960 Using Door Tools to Create Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 Creating a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 Creating a Door with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 Creating a Door in a Door and Window Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Creating a Door from Door/Window Assemblies, Openings, and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Creating a Door Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Editing Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Using Grips to Edit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 Changing the Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Changing the Door Leaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Changing How Door Width Is Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Changing the Door Swing Angle or Opening Percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973 Changing the Vertical Alignment of a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 Moving a Door Along a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 Moving a Door Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976 Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Using Anchors to Change the Position of a Door Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 Changing the Orientation of a Door to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 Moving a Door to a Different Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Releasing a Door from a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Changing the Opening Endcap Assigned to a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Changing the Location of a Freestanding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 Door Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 Creating a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Specifying the Dimensions of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Specifying the Design Rules of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Creating a Custom Door Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Replacing the Door Shape in a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Editing the Geometry of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 About Door Display Components and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Defining a Door Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Attaching Notes and Files to a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Creating Muntins in a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Chapter 22 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Using Window Tools to Create Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Contents | xix
Creating a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 Creating a Window with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 Creating a Window in a Door and Window Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Creating a Window from Doors, Door/Window Assemblies and Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 Creating a Window Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 Editing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Using Grips to Edit Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 Changing the Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 Changing How Window Width is Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 Changing the Window Swing Angle or Opening Percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 Changing the Vertical Alignment of a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 Moving a Window Along a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 Moving a Window Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029 Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031 Using Anchors to Change the Position of a Window Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 Changing the Orientation of a Window to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033 Changing the Opening Endcap Assigned to a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 Changing the Location of a Freestanding Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 Window Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 Creating a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 Specifying the Dimensions of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036 Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037 Creating a Custom Window Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037 Specifying the Design Rules of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038 Editing the Geometry of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 About Window Display Components and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040 Assigning Materials to a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 Adding Classifications to a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 Defining a Window Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046 Attaching Notes and Files to a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 Creating Muntins in a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Chapter 23 Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066 Using Opening Tools to Create Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066 Creating an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067 Creating an Opening with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068 Creating an Opening from Doors, Door/Window Assemblies and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069 Creating and Editing Custom Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
Creating a Profile for a Custom Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069 Creating an Opening with a Custom Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069 Editing the Geometry of a Custom Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071 Creating an Opening Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 Editing Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074 Using Grips to Edit Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074 Changing the Shape and Dimensions of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 Flipping an Opening along the X or Y Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 Changing Endcap Style for an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 Repositioning an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078 Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079 Changing the Position of an Opening Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080 Changing the Orientation of an Opening to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 Specifying the Display of Sills for an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082 Changing the Location of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
xx | Contents
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083 Changing the Display Properties of Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Specifying the Display Properties of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083 Specifying the Hatching of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084 Using Custom Blocks to Create Opening Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085 Adding Components to an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085 Turning Off Custom Components in an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 Removing Custom Components from an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Chapter 24 Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 Specifying AEC Options for Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Creating a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Creating a Straight Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092 Creating a Multi-Landing Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094 Creating an L-Shaped Stair with 45-Degree Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 Creating a U-Shaped Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100 Creating a Spiral Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104 Creating a Custom Stair from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 Creating a Custom Stair from Tread Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 Modifying Custom Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111 Creating a Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 Creating a Stair Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114 Editing Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Using Grips to Edit Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115 Changing the Width of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129 Changing the Shape of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130 Changing the Shape of a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 Changing the Side of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132 Changing the Height of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139 Changing the Justification of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139 Changing the Style of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139 Changing the Horizontal Direction of a Spiral or U-Shaped Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140 Changing the Constraints of a Spiral Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140 Changing the Outside Edge of a Spiral Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141 Changing the Dimensions of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143 Changing the Floor Settings of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144 Adjusting Stair Length Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Changing the Length Limits of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146 Anchoring a Stair to a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 Releasing Anchored Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148 Editing Winders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148 Working with Stair Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161 Stair Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166 Changing the Alignment of a U-Shaped Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175 Changing the Components of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 Changing the Components of a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 About the Dimensions of Landing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178 Changing the Extension of a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178 Specifying Stair Component Display by Cut Plane Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179 Changing the Display of an Overlapping Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183 Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184 Changing the Location of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184 Specifying the Materials of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185 Changing the Display Properties of Individual Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 Stair Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 Managing Stair Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Contents | xxi
Creating a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 Specifying the Design Rules of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192 Specifying the Stringers of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192 Specifying Mitered Corners for Center Stringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 Specifying the Components of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 Specifying the Landing Extension of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196 Assigning Materials to Components in a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198 Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 Specifying the Riser Numbering Display of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 Specifying Classifications for a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 Adding Notes and Files to a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 Stair Winder Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 Creating a Stair Winder Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 Adding Notes and Files to a Stair Winder Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 Stair Tower Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 Creating a Stair Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 Modifying a Stair Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Chapter 25 Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210 Using Railing Tools to Create Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211 Creating a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211 Creating an Attached Railing with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212 Creating a Freestanding Railing with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214 Creating a Railing from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 Creating a Railing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 Editing Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
Using Grips to Edit Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217 Adding a Post to a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 Removing a Post from a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 Redistributing Posts on a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Hiding Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Showing Hidden Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Reversing the Direction of the Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Anchoring an Existing Railing to a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219 Anchoring an Existing Railing to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220 Releasing an Anchored Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221 Adding a Custom Profile to a Railing Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221 Editing a Custom Profile of a Railing Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222 Changing the Style of a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224 Changing the Upper Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224 Changing the Bottom Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225 Changing the Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225 Changing the Railing Extensions at Floor Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226 Changing the Railing Extensions at Landings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226 Changing the Anchor Properties of a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227 Specifying Perpendicular Railing Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228 Changing the Location of a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229 Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 Railing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231 Creating a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 Specifying the Upper Rails of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 Specifying the Bottom Rails of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233 Specifying Posts of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234 Specifying the Components of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235 Creating a Profile for a Custom Railing Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 Specifying the Railing Extensions of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
xxii | Contents
Specifying the Materials of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 Specifying Classifications for a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 Attaching Notes and Files to a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240 Adding Custom Railing Blocks and Profiles to a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240 Adding a Custom Block to a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240 Adding a Custom Profile to a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243 Turning Off a Custom Block or Custom Profile in a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245 Removing a Custom Block from a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
Chapter 26 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 Using Roof Tools to Create Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 Creating a Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 Creating a Gable Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 Creating Dormers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 Creating a Slope Roof with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251 Creating a Gable Roof with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252 Creating a Roof from Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252 Creating a Roof from Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253 Creating a Roof Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254 Editing Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
Using Grips to Edit Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 Changing the Dimensions of a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 Changing the Edges and Faces of a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256 Converting a Roof to Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257 Specifying the Material of a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257 Specifying the Display Properties of a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258 Specifying the Hatching of a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258 Changing the Location of a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260
Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
Overview of Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 Using Tools to Create Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 Creating a Slab or a Roof Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 Creating a Slab/Roof Slab with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267 Creating a Roof Slab from a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268 Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269 Creating a Slab from a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271 Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 Editing Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274 Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Slab/Roof Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287 Changing the Properties of Slabs or Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 Creating a Clipped Gable Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305 Creating a Dormer in a Roof Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 Slab and Roof Slab Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307 Specifying the Components of a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308 Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312 Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 Adding Classifications to a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316 Defining a Slab/Roof Slab Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316 Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317 Slab and Roof Slab Edge Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317 Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Contents | xxiii
Specifying the Overhang, Edge Cut, and Angle of a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319 Creating Profiles for the Fascia and Soffit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320 Controlling Profile Edges and Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 Specifying a Fascia and a Soffit for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Editing the Geometry of Fascia and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324 Turning on Materials for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325 Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
Chapter 28 Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 Process Overview: Creating Structural Members with the Structural Member Catalog or Structural Member
Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331 Creating Structural Member Styles in the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Opening the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332 Creating a Style from a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 Locating a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog from a Structural Member in a Drawing . . . . . . 1334 Opening a Catalog File in the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 Creating a Structural Member Style with the Structural Member Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 Creating Structural Member Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 Creating a Beam Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 Creating a Brace Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 Creating a Column Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 Using Structural Member Tools to Create Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 Creating a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 Creating Beams with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 Creating a Brace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348 Creating a Brace with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349 Creating a Freestanding Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352 Creating a Freestanding Column with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352 Creating a Grid-Anchored Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354 Creating a Grid-Anchored Column with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355 Creating a Structural Member from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 Editing Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358 Using Grips To Edit Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358 Changing the Structural Member Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362 Changing the Structural Member Start and End Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 Changing the Structural Member Start Point and Endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364 Changing the Structural Member Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 Changing the Radius of a Curved Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366 About Curved Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 Changing the Structural Member Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 Changing the Structural Member Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 Trimming Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 Changing the Style of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374 Applying Tool Properties to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374 Working with Structural Member Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375 Adding a Body Modifier to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375 Subtracting a Body Modifier from a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376 Replacing a Structural Member with a Body Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377 Editing the Geometry of a Body Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377 Managing Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378 Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379 Working with Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379 Creating Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 Removing Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 Editing Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 Structural Member Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 Creating a Structural Member Style in the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
xxiv | Contents
Specifying the Materials of a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384 Specifying Classifications for a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 Defining a Structural Member Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 Attaching Notes and Files to a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 Creating Custom Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391 Understanding the Design Rules of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392 Changing the Shape in the Style of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394 Adding a Shape to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394 Process Overview: Creating a Single-Component Structural Member (Tapered Column) . . . . . . . . . 1395 Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member (Composite Column) . . . . . . . 1397 Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member Using Multiple Segments (Rigid
Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 Creating Custom Shapes for Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
Part 4
Design Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
Chapter 29 Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410 Working with Object Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
Adding Object Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411 Releasing Object Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411 Working with Curve Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412 Adding Curve Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412 Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413 Anchoring Objects to New Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416 Working with Leader Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417 Adding Leader Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417 Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Layout Nodes with Leader Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . 1417 Grip-Editing Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418 Extending Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418 Copying Objects to All Layout Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418 Working with Node Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419 Adding Node Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419 Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Layout Nodes with Node Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420 Anchoring Objects to Different Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420 Copying Objects to All Layout Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421 Working with Cell Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 Adding Cell Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 Changing the Position and Size of Objects Anchored to Layout Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 Anchoring Objects to a Different Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423 Copying Objects to All Layout Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423 Working with Volume Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424 Adding Volume Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424 Changing the Position and Size of Objects Anchored to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424 Anchoring Objects to a Different Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425 Copying Objects to All Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425 Releasing and Positioning Anchored Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426 Releasing Anchored Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426 Positioning Anchored Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426 Creating an Anchor Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
Layout Curves and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 Using Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
Creating a Layout Curve Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 Adding Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431 Adding Nodes to Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433 Removing Nodes from Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434 Changing the Offsets of Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
Contents | xxv
Changing the Node Spacing of a Layout Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435 Changing the Node Positions on a Layout Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436 Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436 Switching Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437 Changing the Display Properties of Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438 Using Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438 Creating a Layout Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439 Adding Radial Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439 Changing Radial Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 Adding Rectangular Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 Changing Rectangular Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 Adding Grid Lines to Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 Removing Grid Lines from Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 Changing the Display Properties of Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Creating and Removing Boundaries for Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Creating Holes in Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Removing Holes from Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Changing the Location of Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445 Using Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446 Creating a Layout Volume Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446 Adding Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447 Changing Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448 Adding Grid Lines to Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448 Removing Grid Lines from Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 Changing the Display Properties of Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 Changing the Location of Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
Chapter 31 Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 Using Column Grid Tools to Create Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 Creating a Column Grid with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 Creating a Column Grid from a Layout Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457 Creating a Column Grid from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457 Creating a Column Grid Dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458 Creating a Structural Column Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458 Working with Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459 Labeling Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459 Extending Column Grid Lines Beyond the Grid Boundary or Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460 Dimensioning Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460 Editing Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 Changing the Dimensions of a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 Changing the Lines of a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 Attaching Clipping Profiles to Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466 Changing the Location of Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 Changing the Display of Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 Changing the Node Radius Display of Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468 Using Ceiling Grid Tools to Create Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468 Creating a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468 Creating a Ceiling Grid with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469 Creating a Ceiling Grid from a Layout Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469 Creating a Ceiling Grid from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470 Creating a Ceiling Grid Dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
xxvi | Contents
Creating a Ceiling Grid with a Clipping Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 Creating a Ceiling Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 Editing Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472 Changing the Dimensions of a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472 Changing the Lines of a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472 Attaching Clipping Profiles to Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477 Changing the Location of Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478 Changing the Display of Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482 Creating Construction Lines From Existing Objects/Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482 Creating Construction Lines Independently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Hatch Productivity Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 Repositioning a Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 Generating a Hatch Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485 Redefining a Hatch Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
AEC Modify Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488 Trimming Linework or Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488 Trimming Linework or Profile-Based Objects to an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489 Extending Linework to an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490 Dividing Linework and Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 Subtracting from Linework and Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492 Obscuring Regions of Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493 Merging Linework or Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494 Cropping Linework or Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495 Shrinkwrapping Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496 Creating Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496 Repositioning from a Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497 Evenly Spacing Linework or Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497 Centering Linework or Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
Chapter 33 Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 Creating Mask Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500
Creating a Mask Block Definition from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 Creating a Mask Block Definition from an Existing Mask Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 Importing Mask Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 Exporting Mask Block Definitions to a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 Exporting Mask Block Definitions to an Existing Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 Editing a Mask Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503 Adding Classifications to a Mask Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503 Purging Mask Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 Using Mask Block Tools to Create Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 Adding a Mask Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 Adding a Mask Block with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 Creating a Mask Block from Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 Creating a Mask Block Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506 Attaching Mask Blocks to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 Detaching Mask Blocks from Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508 Editing Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508 Using Grips to Move Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508 Changing the Location of a Mask Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 Editing the Profile of a Mask Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Mask Block Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510 Changing Display Properties of Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Mask Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513
Contents | xxvii
Multi-View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 Creating Multi-View Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
Process Overview: Creating Multi-View Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515 Creating View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515 Creating a New Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 Connecting View Blocks to View Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 Defining a Multi-View Block Definition as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 Attaching Notes and Files to a Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 Adding Classifications to a Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 Adding a Multi-View Block Definition to DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 Creating a Multi-View Block Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519 Adding Multi-View Blocks to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 Inserting a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 Modifying Multi-View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 Changing the Rotation of a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 Changing the Associated Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 Changing the Scale Factor of a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 Changing the Offset of a Multi-View Block Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523 Changing the Location of a Multi-View Block Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524 Editing the Location and Rotation of Attributes in a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525 Updating Multi-View Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526
Part 5
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
Chapter 35 Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
Unifying Spatial Objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530 Other Space Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532
Space Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532 Space Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534
Working with Spaces (High Level Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534 Working with Associative Spaces - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534 Working with Boundary Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 Working with Calculation Cut Planes - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536 Working with List Definitions - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537 Working with Calculation Modifiers - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537 Working with Zones - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538 Working Space Evaluations - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539 Space Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540 Using Space Tools to Create Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543 Generating Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 Bounding Objects for Associative 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 Setting an Object Style as Bounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546 Setting an Object Instance as Bounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547 Generating Associative 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547 Generating Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Spaces from Bounding Walls, Linework, and Object
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550 Creating Non-Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
Drawing a Non-Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554 Converting Objects, Profiles, and Polylines to Non-Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559 Creating a Space Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562 Editing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1564 Editing General Space Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565 Renaming a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565 Changing the Style of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565 Changing the Boundary Offset Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566 Changing the Geometry of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566 Changing the Geometry Type of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567 Editing Space Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568
xxviii | Contents
Activating Manual Space Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 Grip-Editing Space Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570 Resetting Manual Space Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 Changing the Location of a Manual Space Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 Changing the Height Dimensions of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577 Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578 Changing the Geometry of an Associative Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588 Changing Space Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589 Trimming a Space by Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590 Splitting the Surface of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591 Joining Surfaces of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592 Grip-Editing the Surfaces of a 3D Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593 Changing Surface Data (Extruded 3D Spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596 Changing the Associativity of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 Making a Non-Associative Space Associative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 Making an Associative Space Non-Associative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 Changing the Calculated Values of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers for Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606 Setting Calculation Cut Planes for 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606 Attaching Spaces to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 Attaching a Space to a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 Detaching a Space from a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 Viewing Information About Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 Exporting Space Information to a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608 Space Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608 Creating a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608 Specifying Target Dimensions for the Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609 Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609 Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610 Specifying Classifications for a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 Specifying the Materials of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613 Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615 Setting the Object Cut Plane of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 Attaching Notes and Files to a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 Converting Area Styles to Space Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 Space Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617 Displaying the Space Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618 Specifying Layer/Color/Linetype Settings of the Space Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618 Specifying the Type of Space Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619 Specifying Text Settings for Space Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 Calculation Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 Creating a Calculation Modifier Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 Specifying the Application for a Calculation Modifier Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 Defining the Formula for a Calculation Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623 Attaching Notes and Files to a Calculation Modifier Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624 List Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624 Creating a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625 Specifying the Application for a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 Editing a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 Attaching Notes and Files to a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627 Using Zone Tools to Create Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628 Zone Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628 Creating a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629 Creating Zones with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630 Creating Zone Structures from a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631 Creating a Zone Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632 Converting Area Groups to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
Contents | xxix
Zones and Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634 Attaching Spaces and Zones to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634 Detaching Spaces and Zones from Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635 Selecting Spaces and Zones Attached to a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
Editing Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635 Renaming a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635 Changing the Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636 Changing the Zone Boundary Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636 Changing the Content Rules of a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637 Changing the Calculation Type of a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637 Changing Calculation Modifiers for a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637 Ordering Zone Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638 Creating Polylines from Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
Zone Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640 Creating a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640 Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641 Restricting the Content of a Zone Based on the Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641 Specifying Classifications for a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642 Specifying the Display Properties of a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642 Attaching Notes or Files to a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645 Converting Area Group Styles to Zone Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
Zone Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647 Creating a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647 Building the Structure of a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648 Attaching Notes and Files to a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649 Converting Area Group Templates to Zone Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
Space Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650 Preparing the Space Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
Selecting Spaces and Zones for Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651 Evaluation Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652 Image Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653 Data Format Style Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653 Setting the Default Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654 Creating the Space Evaluation Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655 Creating an XLS Evaluation Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655 Creating a TXT Evaluation Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655 Creating XLT Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656 Conversion of Space Boundaries to Walls and Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656 Appendix 1: Command Changes for Spaces and Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657 Area Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657 Area Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657 Space Boundary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
Chapter 36 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1660 Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663 Process Overview: Creating a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665 Drawing and Editing Section Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
Drawing a Section Line and Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666 Changing the Height of a Section Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 Changing the Lower Extension of a Section Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668 Changing the Length of a Section Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669 Changing the Angle Dimensions of a Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1670 Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1670 Changing a Subdivision Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671 Changing Section Mark Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671 Changing the Location of a Section Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671 Modifying a Section Line Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
xxx | Contents
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Section Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672 Creating a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673 Creating a Horizontal 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1674 Creating and Editing a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
Creating a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676 Updating a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676 Displaying the Sectioned Body in a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676 Removing a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677 Editing a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678 Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678 Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679 Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680 Reversing a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680 Changing the Style of a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681 Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681 Editing a Material Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681 Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684 Changing the Location of a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685 Updating a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685 Globally Updating 2D Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686 Supported Project Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687 Globally Updating 2D Sections and Elevations in a Project or a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687 Updating Drawings from an Earlier Version of Autodesk Architectural Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688 2D Section Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689 Creating a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690 Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691 Removing a Display Component from a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691 About 2D and 3D Section Display Components and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691 Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695 Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Section Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695 Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696 Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697 Removing a Design Rule from a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697 Adding Classifications to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697 Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698 Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698
Chapter 37 Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
Working With Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702 Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705 Drawing and Editing Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
Drawing an Elevation Line and Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708 Changing the Height of an Elevation Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710 Changing the Lower Extension of an Elevation Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710 Changing the Length of an Elevation Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711 Changing the Angle Dimensions of an Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712 Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712 Changing Elevation Mark Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713 Changing the Location of an Elevation Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713 Modifying an Elevation Line Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes and Files to an Elevation Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714 Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714 Creating a Horizontal 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716 Editing a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717 Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717 Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718 Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719 Reversing a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719
Contents | xxxi
Changing the Style of a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720 Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720 Editing a Material Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720 Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722 Changing the Location of a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724 Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724 Globally Updating 2D Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725 Supported Project Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726 Globally Updating 2D Sections and Elevations in a Project or a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726 Updating Drawings from an Earlier Version of Autodesk Architectural Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727 2D Elevation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728 Creating a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729 Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730 Removing a Display Component from a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730 About 2D and 3D Elevation Display Components and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730 Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Elevation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1732 Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Elevation Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733 Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734 Removing a Design Rule from a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734 Adding Classifications to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734 Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735 Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735
Chapter 38 Hidden Line Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737
Hidden Line Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738 Creating a Hidden Line Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738
Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1740 Dimension Options and Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741
Associative Dimensions from Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741 Associative Dimensions from Picked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741 Non-Associative Dimensions from Picked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742 AutoCAD Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742 Process Overview: Creating AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742 Associative Dimensions from Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743 Dimension Points for Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743 Dimension Points for Wall Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 Dimension Points for Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 Dimension Points for Other Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746 AutoCAD Dimension Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746 Associative Dimensions in External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748 Associative Dimensions From Picked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748 Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749 Creating AEC Dimensions Using AEC Dimension Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 Creating an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 Creating an AEC Dimension with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 Use Cases for AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753 Converting an AutoCAD Dimension to an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 Copying Properties of AEC Dimensions to AutoCAD Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759 Creating an AEC Dimension Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759 Editing AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1760 Adding Points to an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1760 Detaching Dimension Points from an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1762 Restoring Object Points Set in the AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764 Removing Non-Style Defined Dimension Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764 Reversing the Direction of an AEC Wall Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765 Overriding Associative Wall Component Dimension Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766
xxxii | Contents
Repositioning Dimension Texts, Extension Lines, and Dimension Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768 Resetting Repositioned Dimension Texts, Extension Lines and Dimension Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769 Overriding Dimension Values and Hiding Dimension Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770 Changing the AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772 AEC Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 AEC Dimension Styles and AutoCAD Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 The AEC Dimension Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 Creating AutoCAD Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774 Creating an AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774 Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775 Changing the AEC Dimension Display Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775 Defining Dimensioned Objects in the AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776 Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777 Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . 1778 Changing Style Properties with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779 Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 Q and A for Working with AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 Changing Color, Text Size and Arrowheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 Updating AEC Dimensions On Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 Changing the Text Height of Superscripted Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781 Fixing the Error Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782 Finding More Dimension Points than Expected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
Chapter 40 Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783
Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784 Using Elevation Label Tools to Create Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1784
Creating an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785 Creating Elevation Labels with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785 Creating an Elevation Label Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786 Modifying Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786 Changing the Elevation of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786 Changing the Coordinate System of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787 Changing the Associated Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787 Changing the Scale Factor of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787 Changing the Offset of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787 Display the View Blocks and Attributes of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 Creating User-Defined Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 Creating a Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789 Adding Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789 Creating a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790 Creating a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790 Adding the Elevation Label to the AutoCAD DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790
Chapter 41 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793
Fields Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1794 Inserting Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795
Inserting Fields in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795 Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795 Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797 Adding Fields to Object Style Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1798 Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 Editing Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801 Editing the Field Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802 Updating Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 Converting Fields to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 Autodesk Architectural Desktop Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 Project Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 Selecting a Project Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804
Contents | xxxiii
Sheet Set Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 Selecting a Sheet Set Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 Keynote Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 Selecting a Keynote Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1808 Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809 Selecting a Database Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809 Creating a Data Link to an ODBC Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1811
Chapter 42 Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1815
Understanding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816 Inserting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816
Stamp Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817 Linear Array Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817 Backfill Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818 Bookends Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819 Countable Linear Array Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819 Surface Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1820 Dynamically Sized Surface Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821 Bolt Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821 Editing Detail Components in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822 Using Detail Component Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823 Adding Detail Component Tools to a Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823 Modifying Detail Component Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825 Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827 Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework from a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827 Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework from the Detail Component Manager . . . . . . . 1827 Using the Detail Component Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828 Locating a Detail Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828 Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1830 Configuring Detail Component Database Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846 Adding a Detail Component Database to Available Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846 Removing a Detail Component Database from Available Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847 Setting Detail Component Database Permissions in a Multi-User Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848 Merging Old and New Detail Component Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848
Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849
The Basic Annotation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1850 Creating a Text-Only Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854 Creating a Text-with-Leader Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854 Creating a Break Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854 Creating a Block-Based Annotation with a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855 Editing a Text-Based Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855 Editing a Masking Break Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856 Editing a Block-Based Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856
Keynoting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857 Configuring the Annotation Tool for Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857 Using Keynote Insertion Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1859 Using Keynote Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861 Viewing and Editing Keynotes in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866 Specifying Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869 Working with Keynote Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871
Chapter 44 Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883
Working with Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884 Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885
Process Overview: Placing a Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887 The Properties of a Callout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888 Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892 Placing Title Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893
Placing a Title Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893
xxxiv | Contents
Placing Detail Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893 Creating a Detail in the Current View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894 Creating a Detail in an Existing Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895 Creating a Detail in a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896
Placing Section Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897 Creating a Section in the Current Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897 Creating a Section in an Existing Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898 Creating a Section in a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900
Placing Elevation Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901 Placing a Single Elevation Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901 Placing a Four-Way Interior Elevation Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903 Placing a Four-Way Exterior Elevation Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904
Placing a Callout Without a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905 Referencing a Callout to an Existing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906 Opening a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906 Deleting a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907 Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907 Working with Callouts Outside a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1909
Placing a Callout in a Non-Project Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1909 Opening Model Space Views in a Non-Project Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 Deleting Model Space Views in a Non-Project Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 Creating New Callout Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 Using Fields in Callout Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 Creating a Callout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1911
Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1915
Overview of Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1916 Schedule Table Terminology in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1916 Process Overview: Using Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1917
Property Sets and Property Set Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918 Basic Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920
Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 Creating a Schedule Table Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921 Adding Objects to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922 Removing Objects from a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 Reselecting Objects for a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 Turning Off the Out-of-Date Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 Updating a Schedule Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923 Locating and Viewing Scheduled Objects in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1924 Schedule Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1924 Adding Tags Using Schedule Tag Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1924 Creating a Schedule Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1927 Creating a Schedule Tag Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928 Anchoring an Existing Schedule Tag to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930 Releasing an Anchored Schedule Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931 Viewing the Connection Between Tags and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931 Renumbering Property Set Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931 Managing Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1932 Working with Schedule Table Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933 Exporting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1945 Exporting Schedule Data for Selected Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946 Specifying the Display Properties of a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946 Changing General Schedule Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1947 Changing the Selection Criteria for a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1947 Changing the Location of a Schedule Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948 Changing External Source Properties of a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948 Adding Table Breaks to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949 Adding Documentation Information to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949 Editing Table Cell Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950
Contents | xxxv
Adding Property Set Data to All Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951 Property Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951 Expanding the Scope of Scheduled Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955 Property Set Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1956 Attaching Property Set Data to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1956 Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1956 Editing or Updating Fields in Manual Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1957 Converting Fields in Manual Properties to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1957 Removing Property Set Data from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958 Attaching Property Set Data to Styles and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958 Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Styles and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958 Editing Style-Based Property Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959 Editing Style-Based Property Sets Attached to Objects in External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1960 Removing Property Set Data from a Style or Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1961 Browsing Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1962 Property Set Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1963 Understanding Automatic Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1965 Understanding Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967 Creating a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973 Attaching Notes or Reference Files to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973 Specifying How the Property Set Definition is Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1974 Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1975 Adding a Field to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976 Adding an Automatic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1977 Adding a Location Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1978 Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979 Adding a Material Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1981 Adding a Project Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1982 Adding an Anchor Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983 Adding a Graphic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983 Sequencing Property Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1985 Hiding Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1985 Editing a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1985 Removing All Property Sets from Objects and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987 Merging Property Set Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987 List Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1988 Creating a List Definition for a Manual Property Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1988 Editing List Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989 Changing the List Item for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1990 Attaching Notes or Reference Files to a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1990 Classification Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1990 Process Overview: Including Classification Data in Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991 A Classification Use Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991 Creating a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993 Specifying the Object Types for a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1994 Adding Classifications to a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 Attaching Property Set Definitions to a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 Editing a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1996 Changing the Classification of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997 Attaching Notes and Files to a Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997 Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998 Process Overview: Creating Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998 Creating and Editing Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999 Creating a Display Theme Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 Adding a Display Theme to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2001 Disabling Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2001 Activating Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2002 Display Theme Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2002 Creating a Display Theme Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003
xxxvi | Contents
Troubleshooting Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 Question Marks in Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 Object not Listed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 Which Property Sets to Attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 Changing Data in the Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 Object Numbers Out of Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005 Locating an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006 Selecting an Empty Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006 INVALID in a Table Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006
Troubleshooting Schedule Table Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006 Add Column Button Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006 Property Sets Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006 Quantity Column not Totalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006 Matrix Column Displaying Data Instead of a Matrix Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006
Troubleshooting Classification Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006 Empty Classification Tab in Style Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007 Long Title for a Classification Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007 Classifications Property to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007 Including Classifications in a Schedule Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007 Objects Not Included in the Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007 Classifications Selected but Object Not Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007
Troubleshooting Schedule Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007 Difference Between Schedule Tags and Project Schedule Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007
Troubleshooting Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008 Values on the Extended Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008
Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2009
Overview of AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010 Predefined AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010
AEC Content in the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010 AEC Content in DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2011 Adding AEC Content to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2012 Adding Content from the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2012 Adding Content from DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013 Adding Fixture Layouts from DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013 Moving Content Between DesignCenter and the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013 Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014 Creating Custom AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014 Using the AEC Content Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014 Editing AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2022 Modifying DesignCenter Content with the AEC Content Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2022 Modifying Fixture Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2022 Turning Off the Dimension Scale Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2022
Part 6
Other Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2025
Chapter 47 Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2027
Adjusting the Camera Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2028
Chapter 48 Converting Objects to 3D Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2029
Converting Objects to 3D Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030 Converting Objects to 3D Solid Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030
Chapter 49 Visual Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031
Working with Visual Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032 Performing a Visual Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032
Chapter 50 Reference AEC Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033
Creating an AEC Entity Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2034 Adding a Reference to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2034 Attaching an Object to an Existing Entity Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2034
Contents | xxxvii
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an Entity Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2034 Changing the Location of an Entity Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2035
Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2037
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2038 A Walkthrough of the Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2038 Component Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040 Recipe Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2043 Jigs and JigEnts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055 Common Jigs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2056 Recipe Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2060 Blocks and Block Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064
Using Optimal Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064 Naming Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065 Base Points for Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065 Collecting Similar Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065 Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2066 Layer Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2066 Removing Unnecessary Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2066
Chapter 52 Migrating Detail Component and Keynote Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2069
Migrating Your Database Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2070 Running the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2070
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2077
xxxviii | Contents
Workflow and User Interface
1
1
2 | Chapter 1 Workflow and User Interface
Introduction
1
Welcome to Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007! Built on the new AutoCAD® 2007 platform, this release expands on some of the innovations of Architectural Desktop 2006 and offers many new features designed to help you achieve the following goals: Documentation Enhancements Spaces, schedules, and AEC dimensions have been improved to present an even more complete solution for annotating and documenting a building project. Spaces In Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, spaces have undergone a major revision to simplify the various space-related features from previous versions of Autodesk Architectural Desktop, and to enhance the existing capabilities to present the user with a comprehensive solution for all spatial needs and tasks.
Associative spaces
Spaces now contain the properties of spaces and areas, as well as engineering properties for working in Autodesk Building Systems. Spaces can be associatively generated as 3D freeform objects from bounding objects like walls and slabs. Spaces have individual boundaries for base area, net area, usable area, and gross area. You can define the offsets between boundaries by style or manually. Spaces can be grouped into zones and processed in space evaluation.
3
Tool palette containing space tools
AEC Dimensions AEC dimensions can now be used to dimension a large selection of points and objects in a drawing. You can dimension object points defined in the AEC dimension style, points picked on objects, and user-defined non-associative points in the drawing.
Attaching objects to an AEC dimension
4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Adding and offsetting non-style defined dimension point to an AEC dimension
The dimensioning of wall component has been enhanced to provide a powerful solution for dimensioning complex multi-component walls.
Schedules Schedules now allow you to anchor a schedule property of one object to another object to draw data from. You can determine an order for properties to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. When you have many object properties in a property set definition, it can be helpful to see the most important properties first rather than the default alphabetical order. You can also hide properties from the Properties palette, making it easier to focus on the relevant properties. List definition properties allow you define an allowed list of values for a manual property, thereby ensuring consistent naming and evaluation of properties.
| 5
Object Enhancements Stairs, slabs, and structural members are now more powerful and versatile than before. Body Modifiers and Interferences Slabs, structural members, and stairs can interact with body modifiers and interferences. You can modify the geometry of a slab, roof slab, structural member, or stair by using another object to create an interference condition within the object. The object used to create an interference condition remains partially or wholly embedded in the object, cutting out and replacing a part of its geometry. By using an additive or subtractive mechanism you can determine whether the outline of the interference condition is included or excluded from the shrink wrap outline of the object in plan view.
Creating a slab and stair interference condition
Like interference conditions, body modifiers let you modify the geometry of an object by incorporating another three-dimensional (3D) object. However, where interference conditions always subtract from the mass of an object and affect only components that they touch, body modifiers can be used to add to, subtract from, or completely replace a specific component. You can create a body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with a 3D body. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or AutoCAD blocks that form 3D bodies.
6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Multi-Component Slabs slabs and roof slabs can now consist of multiple components. Slab and roof slab components represent the physical structures of the slab or roof slab, such as concrete, metal deck, insulation, and so on. Components are defined in the slab style, where you assign a name, a thickness, and a thickness offset to each component. Each component can have a specific material assigned. Stair and Railing Improvements Custom stairs can now be created from linework and from tread profiles. Stairs and railings have additional display components for the "Down" direction. Railings can be oriented perpendicular or vertical when anchored to stairs or other objects. The first and last posts of a railing can be defined as separate components.
Multi-Site Project Workflow Autodesk Architectural Desktop supports mapped drives within the Drawing Management feature. You use the same identifying drive on different servers with the same project structure. If you use mapped drives within an Architectural Desktop project, you are not prompted to repath each time you open the project drawing files. A file lock prevents more than one person from editing drawings at the same time. When everyone uses the same mapped drive, members of an extended team can work on the project regardless of their physical location without needing to repath the drawing files as they are opened.
| 7
Enhanced Integration with other Autodesk Products Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 is offering a workflow solution that is tighter integrated with other Autodesk products like AutoCAD and the Autodesk Building Systems suite than ever before. New AutoCAD features like visual styles, materials, cameras, and improved workspaces are integrated in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop user interface. Architectural Desktop features like AEC dimensions are more aligned with AutoCAD dimensions and are now more powerful and more easy to use to new users and cross-grade users from AutoCAD. The Autodesk Architectural Desktop space object combines features from Autodesk Architectural Desktop and Autodesk Building Systems, like surface calculations, automatic adjacencies, and engineering properties. Publishing drawing files to DWF has been made more powerful and better integrated with the AutoCAD DWF publishing commands.
8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Finding Help
With Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can move smoothly from 2D drafting to building information modeling in an AutoCAD-based environment. Architectural Desktop supports your current practices and helps you to take advantage of your knowledge of AutoCAD. Intelligent architectural objects and other powerful design and documentation features offered by Architectural Desktop will help you reap productivity benefits by minimizing tedious drafting and rework.
Autodesk provides many resources to ensure that you quickly become productive with Architectural Desktop and the many new features available in this release. Online and print documentation, real-world tutorials, and technical support channels are all available to answer your questions as you begin working with the software.
Online Help Resources
There are various available resources to help you learn about Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 and AutoCAD® 2007.
Documentation
Description
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Installation Guide
Explains how to install and configure Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Help
Explains Autodesk Architectural Desktop concepts and provides step-bystep procedures.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Project Cycle Navigator
The Project Cycle Navigator provides links to key workflow topics and animations. There are 10 phases of a project, which range from PreDesign and Planning to Post Construction. A user can select the phase in which they are interested, and select from a list of topics.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Printed Getting Started Guide 'The printed Getting Started tutorial gives you a quick, but comprehensive introduction in the concepts of working with Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Online Tutorials
A set of exercises designed to give you an overview of the capabilities and features of Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 New Features Workshop
Gives an overview over the new features in Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007.
AutoCAD 2007 User's Guide
Provides conceptual and overview material with step-by-step procedures for AutoCAD 2007.
AutoCAD 2007 New Features Workshop
Gives an overview over the new features in AutoCAD 2007.
The advantage of online manuals is that they present information quickly while you are in a drawing session. Although online Help topics provide some conceptual and overview material, their main purpose is to help you get a task done efficiently. Therefore, the Architectural Desktop online Help emphasizes step-by-step procedures relevant to command selection. It also incorporates visual examples and links to more information.
Online tutorials are also an excellent way to become familiar with Architectural Desktop. When you use the tutorials to learn program concepts, you can keep the tutorial window open in the drawing area while you perform the steps.
To access Architectural Desktop 2007 Help
1 On the Help menu, click Help.
2 When the Help window is displayed, click the Architectural Desktop 2007 Help book on the Contents tab, and then browse the contents to locate the information you need. Or use the Index or Search tabs to find specific topics. Icons with a red marker indicate topics that include information about new features.
Finding Help | 9
Red marker indicates topic covering new feature
To access Architectural Desktop 2007 New Features Workshop
1 On the Help menu, click New Features Workshop. 2 On the Main Menu page, click the category for the feature you want to learn about.
To access Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Tutorials
1 On the Help menu, click Tutorials. 2 When the Help window is displayed, browse the Contents tab to locate the exercise you want to perform. The
tutorials include datasets that correspond to each exercise.
To access AutoCAD 2007 Help
1 On the Help menu, click Help. 2 When the Help window is displayed, click the AutoCAD Help book on the Contents tab, and then browse the
contents to locate the information you need. Or use the Index or Search tabs to find specific topics.
To access AutoCAD 2007 New Features Workshop
1 On the Help menu, click Help. 2 When the Help window is displayed, click the AutoCAD Help book, and then click the New Features Workshop
link under General Information.
Project Cycle Navigator
A new feature in Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Help is the Project Cycle Navigator. There are animations and links to topics that explain Architectural Desktop features and workflows.
Click on a project cycle segment to select a project phase. Click on a topic segment. Click the Back button from a Help
topic or click the icon
in an animation to return to the Project Cycle Navigator.
10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Project Cycle Navigator process
Contacting Autodesk
Autodesk, Inc. 111 McInnis Parkway San Rafael, CA 94903 USA Phone: 415-507-5000 Website: http://www.autodesk.com
Sales Information
To purchase additional Autodesk software, contact your local reseller. For the name of the authorized reseller nearest you, call 1-800-964-6432 or access the Resellers and Training Centers website, http://www.autodesk.com/resellers/index.htm.
Technical Support
If you have technical questions about the products, you should contact your local reseller or check the frequently asked questions (Technical Solutions & FAQS) section and Discussion Groups on the website for Architectural Desktop at http://www.autodesk.com/archdesktop. News groups are another good source of information. You can look through the questions that have already been posted, or you can post your own questions.
Feedback
Please let us know what you think! Whether you have a suggestion for product enhancement, a compliment, or a complaint, or if you think you have found a bug, we would like to know about it. To make comments and find additional information, visit our website at http://www.autodesk.com/archdesktop.
Contacting Autodesk | 11
12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The Workspace
2
The Autodesk® Architectural Desktop workspace is designed to appeal to architectural professionals. The workspace presents controls and commands in a visual context.
13
Understanding the Workspace
This chapter describes the user interface of the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop workspace. Design tool palette with Material tool selected
The Architectural Desktop workspace
Workspaces Workspaces are sets of menus, toolbars, and palettes that are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented drawing environment. When you use a workspace, only the menus, toolbars, and palettes that are relevant to a task are displayed. In addition, several workspaces shipped with Autodesk Architectural Desktop automatically display the dashboard, a special palette with task-specific control panels. You can create your own workspaces and modify the default workspaces. For more information, see "Changing Workspaces" on page 24 and "Create Task-Based Workspaces" in the AutoCAD help. Tools and Tool Palettes Tools and tool palettes provide a visual and tactile way to design. By simply clicking a tool, you can then use it to create an architectural object, annotation, block, or schedule in the drawing area. You can also add a hatch pattern or solid 14 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
fill to a 2D AutoCAD® object. you can easily create the object You can use the stock tools provided with the software, or you can create your own tools and organize them in tool palettes for easy access. For more information, see "Working with Tool Palettes" on page 33. Customized tools and tool palettes can be saved in a tool catalog and accessed from the Content Browser. For more information, see "Tools" on page 43 and "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
Properties Palette
As you draw an object with a tool, the Properties palette displays the properties of the object. After you draw the object, use the Properties palette to edit the object properties. Design options are arranged hierarchically on the Properties palette, beginning with the most basic options and ending with the more advanced worksheet options. For more information, see "The Properties Palette" on page 54.
Project Navigator
The Project Navigator palette is the centralized location from which you manage projects created with the Drawing Management feature. Drawing Management formalizes and automates the processes related to building model design and documentation. The feature provides automated tools that aid you in the management, viewing, and construction of your building and documents. You have consistency throughout all aspects of the project with Drawing Management. Every user on the design team has a centralized project environment for accessing the most current documents, from project templates to sections and elevations. For more information, see "Drawing Management" on page 145.
Dashboard
The Dashboard is a special palette that displays buttons and controls that are associated with a task-based workspace, and it is used primarily for 3D modeling, viewing, and rendering. The dashboard provides a single interface element for modeling and rendering operations. It eliminates the need to display many toolbars and reduces the clutter in the application window. Thus, you can maximize the area available for 3D work, and use a single interface for speed and convenience. The dashboard is organized into a series of control panels. Each control panel includes related tools and controls that are similar to the tools in toolbars and controls in dialog boxes. For more information, see "The Dashboard" in the AutoCAD help.
Drawing Window Status Bar
The drawing window status bar contains a number of practical features concerning the whole drawing. You can adjust the drawing scale and display configuration here, add layer key overrides, turn the surface hatch of objects on or off, and isolate and hide drawing objects. You can also select which Drawing Window Status Bar tools you want to display. For more information, see "Drawing Window Status Bar" on page 22.
Content Browser
The Content Browser stores tools and design content. The Content Browser provides a central location where you can store project-specific tools to share among your design team. You can browse tool catalogs in the Content Browser, and drag and drop tools onto your tool palettes. When you change a tool in the Content Browser, you can refresh it in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, so that it is updated with the changed tool properties. You can also drag and drop tools and tool palettes from Architectural Desktop to the Content Browser to fill and modify your tool catalogs. For more information, see "Tool Palettes" on page 20 and "Content Browser" on page 77.
Direct Manipulation
You can make design changes in the workspace without using dialog boxes. With a single click you can perform changes such as adjusting door width and window height, modifying a wall roofline, or reversing the wall direction. For some grips, the CTRL key gives you additional manipulation options. These are indicated in the grip tips. An added enhancement is dynamic dimensions. As you make design changes, dynamic dimensions appear, ensuring that your changes are precise and accurate. You can enter values directly in the drawing, which eliminates the need to enter values at the command line. For more information, see "Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions" on page 58.
Understanding the Workspace | 15
In-Place Editing
In-place editing allows you to make direct on-screen changes to object components. These include wall endcaps, roof and floor lines, and profile-based custom components such as rails and posts or curtain wall mullions and frames. Additionally, you can in-place edit a 3D body modifier on a wall, and the surface hatch of a material. You can save changes from the in-place edit session back to the style you started from or create a new style. The in-place editing work mode is invoked from the context menu of an object. For more information, see "In-Place Editing" on page 64.
Templates and Styles
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers metric and imperial template sets for designing the building model and creating plotting sheets. The templates work optimally with the new Drawing Management feature. For more information, see "Drawing Management" on page 145. To make the templates smaller, object styles have been moved out of the templates and into Styles drawings. The new tool palette concept makes it easy to define the style location of each tool you use. For more information, see "Tools" on page 43 and "Styles and Support Files" on page 74.
How to Use the Information in This Chapter
This chapter offers an overview of the workspace components and the workspace concepts in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. You will find general descriptions of the user interface and workflow, and usage examples. For detailed instructions on working with specific objects in the workspace, refer to the sections for individual objects. For example, the Properties Palette section in this chapter introduces the concept of accessing and using object properties from a palette. It describes how to start the Properties palette, how to set its appearance, and how to work with its tabs. For detailed information about using the Properties palette for creating a specific object--for example, a wall--refer to that object's section, such as "Creating a Wall with User-Specified Settings" on page 615. That section contains specific steps for creating a wall with the Properties palette.
Starting Autodesk Architectural Desktop
Use one of these methods to start Autodesk® Architectural Desktop:
Double-click the Architectural Desktop icon on your desktop. The icon is displayed on your desktop if you chose to create it when you installed the software.
Windows 2000 only: On the Start menu, click Programs Autodesk Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007.
Windows XP only: On the Start menu, click All Programs Autodesk Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007.
Customizing Startup
You can use command-line switches in the properties of the desktop icon to specify Architectural Desktop startup options:
Run a startup script when you start the software. Start the software with a specific template. Start the software with a specific profile (ARG file). Create several desktop icons, each with different startup options.
For more information, see "Customize Startup" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
16 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Workspace Components
You use the workspace environment as you design and interact with an architectural project. With this release of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, a number of new, intuitive workspace components enhance the architectural workflow. You can configure the workspace according to your needs, and save specific workspace layouts in a user profile.
The Architectural Desktop workspace
This section presents an overview of the workspace components.
Pulldown Menus
Pulldown menu commands are grouped according to the workflow.
Menu File Edit View Insert Format Window
Help
Contents
drawing transmittal and publishing commands, access to the Project Browser, Link to Autodesk VIZ Render, and drawing utilities
standard Microsoft Windows editing commands, such as Copy and Paste
commands that change the working view; access to Keynote Display and Cameras
general insertion commands for external files and file types; access to DesignCenter and Detail Component Manager
formatting and management commands, such as Style Manager, Layer Management, Display Manager, Structural Members, Define Schedule Tag, and Options
commands that affect the workspace and the windows contained within the workspace, such as Project Navigator, Markup Set Manager, Tool Palettes, and Properties Palette; access to commands that add the CAD Manager, AutoCAD® 3D Solids, and the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop legacy Design and Document pulldown menus to the menu bar
access to the online Help, tutorials, and other resources to help you learn and use Architectural Desktop
Workspace Components | 17
In addition to the standard pulldown menus, you can load these menus:
Menu Design Document CAD Manager
3D Solids
Contents
contains a pulldown menu similar to the Design menu in previous versions of Architectural Desktop
contains a pulldown menu similar to the Documentation menu in previous versions of Architectural Desktop
contains advanced features like AEC Project Standards, Tool Catalog Generator, Keynote Editor, VBA Manager, Visual Basic Editor, Visual LISP Editor, the Script command, and Visual Audit; when the CAD Manager menu is loaded, you also have access to the CAD Manager toolbar that contains buttons for Style Manager, Display Manager, Visual Audit, and the AutoCAD features Configure CAD Standards, Check CAD Standards, and Layer Translator and the AEC Project Standards toolbar that contains buttons for Configure, Synchronize Project, Synchronize Drawing, Audit Project, Audit Drawing, and Update Project Standards
provides access to Convert to 3D Solids and the AutoCAD 3D Solids objects and commands; when the 3D Solids menu is loaded, you also have access to the Solids toolbar and the Solids Editing toolbar
To load the additional pulldown menus, click Pulldowns on the Window menu, and then select the menu you want to add to the menu bar.
Toolbars
Toolbars contain only those commands that the user often needs in the drawing session, like those items found on the Standard toolbar, the Navigation toolbar, and the Shapes toolbar. Objects and object-related commands are accessed primarily from the tool palettes, the Properties palette, the context menus, and through grip-editing.
Examples of frequently used toolbars
These toolbars are available in Architectural Desktop: Toolbar Standard
Navigation
Layer Properties, Layers II Shapes
Contents
standard drawing commands like opening, saving, publishing and printing drawings; also contains Copy, Paste, Undo, and Regenerate Model
commands for opening the Content Browser, the Project Navigator Palette, the Tool Palettes Set, the Properties Palette, and DesignCenter; also contains flyout toolbars for Zoom, Views, UCS, and Shading
commands to start the Layer Manager and change the status of a layer
commands for adding 2D AutoCAD® objects like lines, arcs, polylines and splines; use these 2D shapes to help sketch out and convert to ADT objects or during edit-in-place operations of ADT objects
18 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Toolbar 3D Orbit Dimension Inquiry
Mapping Modify
Contents
commands for moving the model in 3D space
commands for working with AutoCAD dimensions
commands for measuring distances, areas, and volumes; also contains the AutoCAD Point tool and the List command
commands for mapping materials
standard commands for editing objects and linework; includes Copy, Erase, Move, Scale, Mirror, Offset, Array, Stretch, Trim, Extend, Break, Chamfer, Fillet, and Explode
NOTE These commands are also available from the general context menu.
Object Snap Properties
Refedit Render Shading UCS, UCS II View/Viewpoint Visual Styles Workspaces Zoom Solids Solids Editing
commands for setting the Object Snap commands for changing color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale for an object commands for working with external references in the drawing Light, Material, and Render commands commands for different shade modes commands for setting and changing the UCS of the drawing commands for switching between 2D and 3D views of the drawing commands for specifying the visual styles displaying objects commands for working with workspaces commands for zooming and panning the drawing commands for adding 3D solids to the drawing commands for editing 3D solids
To access the toolbars, right-click in the toolbar area below the menu, and click ADT. A flyout in the context menu displays the available toolbars.
Accessing the toolbars
Context Menu
The context menu of an object is the central location for any object-related commands. Objects have different command shortcuts, depending on the object type. To work with these shortcuts, simply select an object and right-click. Only those commands available in the particular context are displayed.
Context Menu | 19
Wall context menu
A general context menu is also available when you right-click in the drawing area without having selected an object. This menu contains all general modify commands. General drawing context menu
Tool Palettes
Tool palettes provide the main method for accessing tools to create objects in your model. You can have tools for standard objects as well as for objects with specific styles and properties. Tool palettes are organized by tool palette groups in a tool palettes set. You can create your own tool palettes, or you can copy existing tool palettes from the Content Browser.
20 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Design tool palette with tools for standard design objects
For more information, see "Working with Tool Palettes" on page 33.
Properties Palette
The Properties palette offers a centralized location to enter and change object properties. You can enter information about the style, dimensions, location, property set data, and other important properties. You typically keep the Properties palette open during an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop session. Wall Properties Palette
For more information, see "The Properties Palette" on page 54.
AutoCAD Dashboard
The dashboard is a special palette that displays buttons and controls that are associated with a task-based workspace, and it is used primarily for 3D modeling, viewing, and rendering. The dashboard provides a single interface element for modeling and rendering operations. It eliminates the need to display many toolbars and reduces the clutter in the application window. Thus, you can maximize the area available for 3D work, and use a single interface for speed and convenience. The dashboard is organized into a series of control panels. Each control panel includes related tools and controls that are similar to the tools in toolbars and controls in dialog boxes. For more information, see "The Dashboard" in the AutoCAD help.
Properties Palette | 21
The dashboard contains mainly AutoCAD specific commands for 3D modelling, like settings for lighting, visual styles, and rendering.
Command Line
You can directly enter commands using the command line.
Drawing Window Status Bar
The drawing window status bar provides a quick and intuitive way to display status information about the current drawing.
Open drawing menu: When you click in the drawing window status bar, a context menu with frequently used commands is displayed. These commands are available on the standard pulldown menus as well; the Open drawing menu icon provides a shortcut to them.
Project information: If the drawing is part of an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project, the drawing window status bar displays the name of the project, as well as the type of file such as whether it is a View or a Construct in the project. For more information, see "Drawing Management" on page 145.
Scale: When working with viewports, you can select a new scale for the current viewport from a list of available scales. In model space, you can select an annotation scale.
Level of detail: Shows the display configuration of the active viewport. You can see and change the current display configuration.
Surface hatch toggle: Toggles on or off the display of surface hatching. Layer key overrides: Displays the Layer Key Overrides dialog box and toggles on or off the layer key overrides. Isolate objects: With the light bulb icon, you can hide or display objects you have selected in the drawing. For
more information, see "Isolating Objects" on page 70.
22 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
AEC Project Standards: You can synchronize or configure standards for the current project. Manage Xrefs: Displays the Xref Manager dialog box and allows you to reload xrefs that are associated with your
current drawing. Missing Standards File(s): Displays a warning that standards files are missing in the current drawing and you can
check settings for the standards and configure them as necessary. Drawing window drop-down list: You can select tray settings to display commands frequently used in the drawing
window status bar.
Application Status Bar
The application status bar contains settings valid for the whole drawing session in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. Some settings, such as options for different elevations, only display if you are working within a project. For more information, see "The Project Status Bar" on page 198.
The application status bar gives access to these settings:
Cursor coordinate values: Controls the coordinate format as either relative or absolute. Snap: On/Off/Settings Grid: On/Off/Settings Ortho: On/Off Polar Tracking: On/Off/Settings Object Snap (OSnap): On/Off/Settings Object Track (OTrack): On/Off/Settings Dynamic UCS: With the dynamic UCS feature, you can temporarily and automatically align the XY plane of the
UCS with a plane on a solid model while creating objects. Dynamic Input (DYN): Toggles on or off dynamic input. You can specify how information displays as you enter
the data. Lineweight (LWT): On/Off/Settings Model or Paper Space: Toggles between layouts. Elevation: Select a level for the calculation of the elevation offset. Elevation relative to construct's level: Opens Elevation Offset worksheet to enter or pick the Z offset. Replace Z value with current elevation: Toggles on or off, replacing the existing Z value with the current elevation. Communication Center: On/Off/Settings Drawing Status Bar Toggle: On/Off Performance Tuner: The performance tuner examines your graphics card and 3D display driver and decides whether
to use software or hardware implementation for features that support both. Unlock Toolbar/Window positions: Here you can switch between docked windows and toolbars and floating
windows and toolbars. Clean Screen Mode: InAutodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, the AutoCAD Clean Screen feature replaces the
Architectural Desktop Screen Clean feature. For more information, see "Clean Screen" in the AutoCAD Help. Toolbar/Window Positions: Locks or unlocks floating and docked toolbars and palettes in place. Application status bar drop-down list: You can select tray settings to display commands frequently used in the
application status bar.
To turn one of these components on or off, click its button. To change the settings for one of these components, right-click the button, and select Settings.
Application Status Bar | 23
Communication Center
This in-product notification system keeps you up to date on service pack availability and provides information for Autodesk® Subscription Program members, such as extension availability, product tips and tricks, and product support information. You can set the Communication Center to notify you of any updates or other important information at specified intervals. Alternatively, you can update on demand.
When new updates are available, the Communication Center icon (
) displays with a yellow exclamation mark.
When you click the icon, the Communication Center is displayed, allowing you to download the latest updates. To
specify the update properties, click the Communication Center icon, and click Settings.
Communication Center dialog box
Project Navigator Palette
The Project Navigator palette is the central location to create, modify, and access Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project files. You typically have the Project Navigator palette open in the workspace while you work on a project. For more information, see "Drawing Management" on page 145.
Project Navigator palette
Changing Workspaces
Workspaces are sets of menus, toolbars, and palettes that are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented drawing environment. When you use a workspace, only the menus, toolbars, and palettes that are relevant to a task are displayed. In addition, several workspaces shipped with Autodesk Architectural Desktop automatically display the dashboard, a special palette with task-specific control panels. You can create your own workspaces and modify the default workspaces. For more information, see and "Create Task-Based Workspaces" in the AutoCAD help.
Workspaces work with and complement the control over your drawing environment provided by profiles. Workspaces control the display of menus, toolbars, and palettes in the drawing area. When you use or switch a workspace, you change the display of your drawing area. You manage your workspaces from the Customize User Interface dialog box and from the Workspaces toolbar.
Profiles save environment settings including many of your user options, drafting settings, paths, and other values. Profiles are updated each time you make a change to an option, setting, or other value. You can manage your profiles from the Options dialog box. For more information, see "Save and Restore Interface Settings (Profiles)" in the AutoCAD help.
24 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
1 Display the Workspaces toolbar in the drawing window.
2 To use one of the workspaces shipped with Autodesk Architectural Desktop, select the desired workspace from the drop-down menu. These workspaces are available for Autodesk Architectural Desktop: Design Document Detailing Visualize
3 To edit an existing workspace or create a new workspace, select Customize, and create and edit workspaces as described in "Customize Workspaces" in the AutoCAD Help.
A Guideline to the User Interface
The user interface of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers a visual guide to the workflow and intuitive access to objects and commands. The interface differs from both AutoCAD® and previous releases of Architectural Desktop. Experienced users might, at first glance, ask, "Where are my objects and commands?" To help you find your way through the user interface, refer to the following guidelines. Adding Objects You add objects to the drawing with tools. Tools generally have preset creation parameters called properties. When you click an object tool to add an object in the drawing, the Properties palette opens so that you can change properties for the new object if desired. If not, you can go ahead and place the object in the drawing. For more information, see "Tools" on page 43. Adding a wall to the drawing
Tools are arranged on tool palettes for easy access. To open the tool palettes, click Tool Palettes on the Window menu. The Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog is installed by default. The Sample Palette is organized into Design, Document, and Detailing palette groups and contains the following tool palettes:
A Guideline to the User Interface | 25
Design, Document, and Detailing tool palettes
Palette Group Design
Tool Palette Design
Design
Doors
26 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Contents This is a good starting point for exploring the new workspace. This palette contains tools for standard design objects. Objects are inserted with the Standard style, and with standard properties. This tool palette contains the following objects and tools:
Ceiling Grid Curtain Wall Door Door/Window Assembly Horizontal Section Material Opening Railing Roof Roof Slab Slab Space Space Auto Generate Stair Stair Tower Generate Structural Beam Structural Brace Structural Column Structural Column Grid Vertical Section Wall Window
This palette contains door style tools representing styles from the Door Styles drawings. When you start a door style tool, a door with this style is inserted in the drawing.
Palette Group Design
Tool Palette Massing
Design Design Detailing
Walls Windows Basic
Contents This palette contains tools for predefined mass element shapes. The mass elements are inserted with the Standard style. This tool palette contains the following mass elements:
Arch Barrel Vault Box Cone Cylinder Dome Drape Extrusion Gable Isosceles Triangle Pyramid Revolution Right Triangle Sphere
This palette also contains the following tools: Camera Convert to Mass Element Mass Group Slice
This palette contains wall style tools representing styles from the Wall Styles drawings. When you start a wall style tool, a wall with this style is inserted in the drawing. This tool palette contains a number of window style tools representing the window styles from the Window Styles drawings. When you start a window style tool, a window with this style is inserted in the drawing. This palette contains basic detail component tools covering top-level groups in the default detail component database. This palette is localespecific, and it contains the following tools:
02 - Sitework 03 - Concrete 04 - Masonry 05 - Metals 06 - Woods & Plastics 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection 08 - Doors & Windows 09 - Finishes 10 - Specialties 11 - Equipment 12 - Furnishings
A Guideline to the User Interface | 27
Palette Group
Tool Palette
Detailing
Doors & Windows
Detailing
Exterior
Detailing
Finishes
28 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Contents
13 - Special Construction 14 - Conveying Systems 15 - Mechanical 16 - Electrical Shrink Wrap Welding Symbols
This palette contains a sampling of door and window-related detail component tools. This palette is locale-specific, and it contains the following tools:
5 1/2" Double Rabbet HM Door Frame 5 1/2" HM Cased Opening Frame Aluminum Fixed Window Head/Jamb Aluminum Fixed Window Mullion Aluminum Fixed Window Sill Automatic Metal Door Bottom Seal Brush Weatherstrip Corner Storefront Mullion Storefront Door Jamb at Finish Storefront Head at Finish Storefront Sill at Finish Thermal Break Panic Saddle Threshold
This palette contains a sampling of exterior-related detail component tools. This palette is locale-specific, and it contains the following tools:
2" Sand Setting Bed 3" Base Course 6" Granite Curb 6" Truss Tie 8" x 8" x 16" CMU 8" x 8" x 16" Split Face CMU 8" x 8" x 8" Split Face CMU Mortar Standard Brick - 3/8" Jt
This palette contains a sampling of finish-related detail component tools. This palette is locale-specific, and it contains the following tools:
1 x 3 Wood Flooring 4" Resilient Flat Base 4" Rolled Base 5/8" Plywood Brick Pavers
Palette Group
Tool Palette
Detailing
Interiors
Detailing
Roofing
Document
Annotation
Contents Carpet Carpet Edge Carpet Pad Resilient Flooring
This palette contains a sampling of interior-related detail component tools. This palette is locale-specific, and it contains the following tools:
1/2" Gypsum Wallboard 1/2" Plywood 1-5/8" Metal Runner 1-5/8" Metal Studs 2 x 10 Lumber 2 x 4 Lumber 3-1/2" Acoustical Batt Insulation 3-5/8" Metal Runner 3-5/8" Metal Studs 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard 5/8" Plywood 5/8" Type "X" Gypsum Wallboard 7/8" Hat Channel Corner Bead
This palette contains a sampling of roofing-related detail component tools. This palette is locale-specific, and it contains the following tools:
1 1/2" Fire Stop 1" Sprayed-On Fireproofing 1.5 NR 18 Roof Deck 3' 0" Single-Leaf Domed Roof Hatch/Smoke Vent 3" Gypsum Concrete Topping 3" Rigid Insulation 3/4" Plywood 36" Single Glazed Domed Skylight 4" Concrete Topping 4" Insulated Skylight Curb (Double Glazed) Aluminum Flashing Asphalt Shingles Roof Drain
This palette contains a sampling of annotation-related tools: AEC Dimension Angular
A Guideline to the User Interface | 29
Palette Group
Tool Palette
Document
Callouts
Document
Drafting
Document
Scheduling
30 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Contents
Column Bubble Cut Line (1) Medium Arcs & Tag Plan Elevation Label (1) Radius Reference Keynote Reference Keynote - Straight Leader Reference Keynote - Legend Sheet Keynote Sheet Keynote - Legend Square - Straight Leader Text - Straight Leader Text Tool
This palette contains the following tools: Detail Boundary A, B, C Detail Mark A1, A1T, A2, A2T Elevation Mark A1, A2 Exterior Elevation Mark A3 Interior Elevation Mark B1, B2, C1, C2 Section Mark A1, A1T, A2, A2T, A3T Title Mark, Title Mark with Number
This palette contains the following tools: Area Chamfer Distance Fillet - 0" Fillet - 24" Hatch and Gradient Line Hatch Linear Gradient Mask Block Sample Pantone hatch tools Point ID
These are sample tools. You can copy and paste them on the tool palette to create new tools. This palette contains the following tools for the documentation phase of the architectural workflow:
Space
Palette Group
Tool Palette
Contents
Zone Zone from Template Space Evaluation Door Schedule Door Schedule - Project Based Door Tag Door Tag - Project Based Room Finish Schedule (Sample) Room Tag Room Tag - Project Based Space Inventory Schedule (Sample) Theme by Space Size Theme by Fire Rating Theme by Space Type - Commercial Window Schedule (Sample) Window Tag
In addition, the palette contains these command tools: Browse Property Data Edit Property Set Data Renumber Data
For more information about command tools, see "Creating a Command Tool" on page 49.
Modifying Objects You can modify an object using any of the following methods:
Properties palette: The Properties palette is the central location for entering and changing information about an object. This palette has categories that correspond to the tabs in the Properties dialog boxes from earlier releases of the software. For detailed information, see "The Properties Palette" on page 54.
A Guideline to the User Interface | 31
Modifying a wall with the Properties palette
Context menu: Right-click the object to display its available commands. Wall context menu
Direct editing with grips: Commands for modifying objects are accessible from the object's grips. Click an object in two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D) view to display its grips. For detailed information about object grips, see "Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions" on page 58. Information about grip-editing is also covered in the individual object sections.
32 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Window grips for direct editing
Selecting Similar Objects Use this procedure to create a selection set of objects on the same layer and that have the same style. You may want to select a number of objects that are on the same layer and that have the same style in order perform a global change. The AutoCAD® QSELECT command allows a single selection criterion, like layer or style. With the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Select Similar command, you can select objects on the same layer that have the same style. NOTE Block references are selected based on their layer and block definition.
1 Select the first object in the selection set. 2 Right-click, and click Select Similar.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click Edit Select Similar, and then select the first object. As a shortcut, you can select the first object, and then press CTRL+SHIFT+A.
Working with Tool Palettes
Tool palettes provide instant access to a complete inventory of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop tools--such as walls, doors, and windows--in one consistent user interface. Highly visual, tool palettes include previews of styles. You can create custom tool palettes that address your specific design needs. For example, you can create a palette to store a list of commonly used curtain wall, stair, and window tools.
Working with Tool Palettes | 33
Tool palette components
Tool Palettes Set Tool palettes sets contain groups of tool palettes. You can rename the default tool palettes set or create a custom tool palettes set. Additionally, you can add, remove, and rearrange palettes and groups in the set. You can add tool palettes to the tool palettes set from a tool catalog. For example, you could create one tool palette set for imperial tools and another for metric tools. For more information, see "Specifying Different Tool Palettes for the Tool Palettes Set" on page 36. Only one tool palettes set can be active during an Architectural Desktop session, although you can specify different tool palettes for different user profiles. When that profile is used, the collected tool palettes will be combined into one tool palettes set. Tool Palettes Group A tool palettes group is a collection of tool palettes. Three tool palettes groups are available when you start Architectural Desktop: Design, Document, and Detailing. You can add, rename, remove, export, import, and rearrange tool palettes groups. Tool palettes groups are contained in the tool palettes set. For more information, see "Organize Tool Palettes" and "Save and Share Tool Palettes" in the AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics. Tool Palettes Tool palettes contain collections of tools and represent the individual tabs of a tool palettes group. A number of tool palettes are available from the Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog. You can create new tool palettes in Architectural Desktop or in the Content Browser. Usually you place tools on tool palettes according to tool type or design phase. For example, you could place your wall tools on a tool palette called "Walls" or your preliminary conceptual tools on a tool palette called "Massing Study." When you create a tool palette in the Content Browser, you can link it to Architectural Desktop. Whenever the tool palette is updated in the Content Browser, the changes are updated in the tool palette in Architectural Desktop too. This is useful for large projects where consistency of styles and tools is necessary. For more information, see "Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location" on page 40.
34 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Tools
Tools represent the individual objects you can add to a drawing. A tool contains creation parameters for the object it creates. When you add an object with a specific tool, the object has the settings you defined in the tool. This eases the design process and enhances consistency across a project.
For example, you might define a wall tool that contains the style "CMU 8 Furring" and that has automatic cleanup and a baseline offset of 1". Whenever you add a wall with this tool, the wall has the style "CMU 8 Furring," it cleans up automatically, and it has an offset of 1". For more information, see "Tools" on page 43.
Tool Palettes and the Content Browser
When multiple users are working on a large project, consistency of tools is especially important. Typically, the objects for the project and their styles and properties are set up by a CAD manager or system administrator, and then distributed to the team. The administrator can put tools and palettes in a central location in the Content Browser and link them to each user's computer. Whenever the tools or palettes are updated in the Content Browser, they are updated on the users' computers too. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78 and "Working with Tools from a Central Location" on page 50.
Project Tool Palettes
When you are working with an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, you can design and associate a project tool palette group to the project. The project tool palettes contain the tools used in the project, and can be based on project standards. For detailed information about setting up project tool palettes, see "Setting up Standard Tools in a Project" on page 339.
Opening the Tool Palettes Set
Use this procedure to open the tool palettes set.
On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes.
Alternatively, you can click
on the Navigation toolbar, or press CTRL+3.
Tool palettes set with tool palettes
Controlling the Appearance of the Tool Palettes Set
Typically, the tool palettes set remains open during the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop session. It is the central location from which you add objects to the drawing and start object-related commands. A number of user-definable display options let you optimally integrate the tool palettes with your workspace. Docking the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to dock the tool palettes set on the left or right side of your workspace.
1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click Allow Docking. 2 Position the cursor over the title bar, and drag the tool palettes set to one side of your workspace.
Opening the Tool Palettes Set | 35
A preview graphic shows the new position of the tool palettes set. 3 Release the tool palettes set when it is in the location you want. Hiding the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to hide the tool palettes set when it is not in use. The tool palettes set becomes hidden when you move the cursor away from it, leaving only the title bar visible. When you move the cursor over the title bar, the tool palettes set is re-displayed. Tool palettes set hidden (left) and re-displayed (right)
1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click (Auto-hide). The tool palettes set is hidden, except for the title bar.
2 To re-display the tool palettes set, move the cursor over the title bar. Adjusting the Transparency of the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to adjust the transparency of the tool palettes set. The more transparent the tool palettes set, the more easily you can see objects in your drawing underneath it. NOTE Transparency is not available if hardware acceleration is enabled.
1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click Transparency. 2 To adjust the transparency of the tool palettes set, move the slider. 3 To turn off transparency, select Turn off window transparency. 4 Click OK. Renaming the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to rename the tool palettes set. You may want to name it with a project or company name. 1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click Rename Palette Set. 2 Enter a name for the tool palettes set, and press ENTER.
Specifying Different Tool Palettes for the Tool Palettes Set
Use this procedure to switch between different palette combinations in the tool palettes set. Only one tool palettes set can be active during an Architectural Desktop session. You can, however, set different tool palettes for different user profiles. You do this by collecting tool palettes from several locations (paths) in a profile and letting the workspace combine them into one tool palettes set.
1 On the Format menu, click Options.
36 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
2 Define the tool palettes used for the current session: If you have created a workspace profile containing a tool palettes path, click the Profiles tab, select the desired profile, and click Set Current. If you have not created a workspace profile, click the Files tab, and click the Tool Palettes File Location entry. Then click Browse, and browse for a folder containing the desired tool palette. Add paths to all additional tool palettes to be included in the tool palettes set of this profile.
3 Click OK.
Creating a New Tool Palettes Set
Use this procedure to create a new tool palettes set. 1 Create a folder in which you will create the new tool palettes set. The default tool palettes set is in \Documents and Settings\<Username>\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Support\WorkspaceCatalog (Imperial/Metric). 2 On the Format menu, click Options. 3 Click the Profiles tab. 4 Click Add to List, and create a profile to contain the new tool palettes set; for example, "Design - Metric Palette Set." 5 Select the new profile, and click Set Current. 6 Click the Files tab. 7 Under Tool Palettes File Locations, select the support path for the previously defined folder in which you will create the new tool palettes set. NOTE If you point to a folder already containing a tool palettes set, a new tool palettes set is not created; instead, the existing tool palettes set is used in the profile. 8 Click OK. In the Architectural Desktop workspace, an empty tool palettes set is displayed. New tool palettes set
9 To rename the tool palettes set, click , and then click Rename Palette Set.
Creating a New Tool Palettes Set | 37
10 Add tool palettes and tools to the new set: If you want to... add a new empty tool palette add a tool palette from the Content Browser
add a tool to a palette
Then...
see "Creating a New Tool Palette" on page 38.
see "Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser" on page 41.
see "Creating a Tool from an Object in the Drawing" on page 47.
The changes you make are saved to the tool palettes set in the new profile you created. To revert back to your original tool palettes set, select your original profile in the Options dialog box.
Creating a New Tool Palettes Group
Use this procedure to create a new tool palettes group.
1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click Customize Tool Palettes. 2 Select a palette group, right-click, and click New Group.
3 Enter a name for the new group, and press ENTER. 4 Drag the new group folder to the correct position in the tree structure. 5 Select a tool palette from the left pane for the new tool palettes group, and drag it into the new group
folder. 6 Click Close.
TIP The Customize dialog can be very useful for adding palettes to project palette groups. For more information, see "Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group" on page 347.
Creating a New Tool Palette
Use this procedure to add an empty tool palette to your tool palettes set. After creating the tool palette, you can add tools to it. For more information, see "Tools" on page 43.
1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click New Palette. 2 Enter a name for the new tool palette, and press ENTER.
Defining the Appearance of Tool Palettes
Use this procedure to define the appearance of individual tool palettes.
38 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
The display of the tool palettes depends on the settings you specify for the overall tool palettes set, (as described in "Controlling the Appearance of the Tool Palettes Set" on page 35), and the settings you specify for individual tool palettes. In the tool palettes set, you specify the transparency, size, position, and auto-hide of the tool palettes set. On the tool palette, you specify the size of tool images and their arrangement on the tool palette. Tool palettes with different sized icons displayed
When you change tool images to a smaller size, you can display more tools on a tool palette. This might become important if you display different palettes at the same time, such as the Properties palette or the Project Navigator palette. To save space, you can also display tool images without tool text below them. This method is best suited when the icons for your tools are easy to differentiate. If the icon alone proves insufficient to identify a tool, the tooltip for each icon provides additional guidance. Icon-only display on the tool palette
You can also display tools in a single column on the tool palette. When you are using a single-column list, tool texts is always displayed.
Defining the Appearance of Tool Palettes | 39
Tool palette in list view
1 Open the tool palette that you want to change. 2 Right-click the palette, and click View Options. 3 In the View Options worksheet, select the desired View style:
If you want to...
Then...
view only tool icons
select Icon only for View style.
view tool icons and tool text
select Icon with text for View style.
view tool icons and tool text in a single column list
select List view for View style.
4 To apply these changes to all palettes in the tool palettes set, select All Palettes for Apply to. 5 Click OK.
Adding Text and Separator Lines to Tool Palettes
Use this procedure to add separator lines and text to a tool palette. Separator lines can be useful if you want to create subdivisions on a tool palette containing many tools. To annotate a separator line, you can insert a text element.
1 Open the tool palette to which you want to add separator lines and text. 2 Right-click in the palette between the tools where the separator should go, and click Add Separator.
A separator line is inserted between the tools.
3 To add text above the separator line, right-click either to the right of the last tool before the separator line, or to the left of the separator line itself, and click Add Text.
4 Enter the text you want to display above the separator line, and press ENTER. 5 To edit the text, select the text item, right-click, and click Rename. Then, edit the text as necessary. 6 To delete a separator line or a text annotation, select the separator line or text, right-click, and click Delete.
Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location
When multiple users are working on a large project, consistency of tools is especially important. Typically, the objects for the project and their styles and properties are set up by a CAD manager or system administrator, and then distributed to the team. The administrator can put tools and palettes in a central location in the Content Browser and link them
40 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
to each user's computer. Whenever the tools or palettes are updated in the Content Browser, they are updated on the users' computers too. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78. Using tool palettes from the Content Browser
TIP If you are working with an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, you can generate a tool catalog based on the standard styles of the project. For more information, see "Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project" on page 341. Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser Use this procedure to link a tool palette from a tool catalog in the Content Browser to the tool palettes set in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. For information on creating tool palettes in the Content Browser, see "Adding Content to a Tool Catalog" on page 92.
1 On the Window menu, click Content Browser. Alternatively, you can click on the Navigation toolbar, or press CTRL+4.
2 Select the tool catalog containing the tool palette you want to copy, right-click, and click Properties. 3 Select Link items when added to workspace, and click OK. 4 Open the tool catalog, and navigate to the tool palette. 5 Move the pointer over the i-drop® icon next to the tool palette so that the pointer image changes to an
eyedropper ( ). To copy multiple tool palettes, press and hold CTRL while clicking each palette; then position the eyedropper over any of the selected palettes. 6 Drag the palette to the tool palettes set in the Architectural Desktop workspace. The tool palette is dropped into the tool palettes set.
Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location | 41
7 Right-click on the palette, and click Properties.
The text below the check box displays the name of the catalog in the Content Browser from which the palette is updated.
If you click that name, it opens the catalog from which the tool palette was linked.
8 Select or clear Enable Auto-Refresh:
If you want to...
Then...
automatically update the linked tool palette from the Content select Enable Auto-Refresh. Browser when starting Autodesk Architectural Desktop
update the linked tool palette manually with one of the
clear Enable Auto-Refresh.
methods described in "Updating a Tool Palette from a Tool
Catalog in the Content Browser" on page 42
The name of the tool palette in the Content Browser (from which the selected tool palette is updated) is displayed under Name.
9 Click OK.
Updating a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser
Use this procedure to update a linked tool palette in the tool palettes set from its source tool catalog in the Content Browser.
1 Link a tool palette from a catalog in the Content Browser to the tool palettes set, as described in "Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser" on page 41.
When a tool palette is linked to the tool palettes set from a catalog in the Content Browser, a Refresh button is displayed at the bottom of the palette. 2 Click the Refresh button to update your local tool palette with the latest changes from the catalog in the Content Browser. Alternatively, you can right-click the palette, and click Refresh Palette.
42 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
NOTE You can also update the whole palette set by clicking in the tool palettes set, and then clicking Refresh Palette Set. This command updates all linked tool palettes in the tool palettes set.
Tools
Tools represent the individual objects you can add to a drawing. A tool contains creation parameters for the object it represents. When you add an object with a specific tool, the object has the settings you defined in the tool. This eases the design process and enhances consistency across a project. For example, you might define a wall tool that contains the style "CMU 8 Furring" and has automatic cleanup and a baseline offset of 1". Whenever you add a wall with this wall tool, the wall has the style "CMU 8 Furring," it cleans up automatically, and it has an offset of 1". Standard object tools
Based on the tool type, some general properties you can define may include: Tool name Tool description (also used as the tooltip and as the tool description when the tool is copied to a tool catalog in the Content Browser) Description of objects inserted with this tool Layer key of objects inserted with this tool Layer overrides of objects inserted with this tool Object style Location of object style
In addition, you can define object-specific properties that apply to this tool type. For example, if you create a wall tool, you can set the wall cleanup, width, height, baseline settings, and the roof/floor lines of walls that are inserted with this tool. Style Location Object styles are now located in Styles drawings, rather than in templates as in earlier releases of Architectural Desktop. To assign a style to an object tool, you can either point to a style in the current drawing or to a style in an external drawing. For more information, see "Styles and Support Files" on page 74.
Tools | 43
Tool Types
Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop fall into three categories.
Tool Category Object tools Command tools
AEC Content tools
Description
An object tool inserts a design object--such as a wall or a window assembly--into a drawing. An object tool has a specific style and specific object properties: for example, a wall tool might have the style "Brick-4 Brick-4."
Command tools are a graphical representation of an object-related command. For example, the Browse Property Data tool opens a dialog box for browsing the property data of all objects in a drawing; the Renumber Data tool renumbers property data in selected property sets by increment or by a user-defined number. You can also create your own tools for each command. An AutoCAD general-purpose command tool lets you associate any command or macro. For commands that create an object, you can also assign basic AutoCAD object properties. For a list of available Architectural Desktop command tools, see "Creating a Command Tool" on page 49.
You can create tools for frequently used AEC Content items that were created with the AEC Content Wizard. For more information, see "Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter" on page 49.
Project Standard Tools
When you are working with an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, you can set up standard styles that are updated and synchronized throughout the project lifecycle. For more information, see "Setting up Standards in a Project" on page 330.
Creating an Object with a Tool
Use this procedure to create an object with a tool.
1 On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes. 2 Click the tool palette that contains the tool for the object you want to insert.
For example, if you want to insert a bifold double door, click the Doors palette, and navigate to the Bifold Double Door tool. 3 Click the tool. 4 On the Properties palette, enter any changes you want to make to the default.
44 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
NOTE Certain values can be set only when inserting the object; for example, the position of a door along the wall into which it is inserted can be defined only when inserting the door. You cannot change the position later
for an existing door. Values that can be set only during insertion are marked with this symbol Properties palette.
on the
5 Click in the drawing where you want to insert the object. 6 Follow any additional prompts as required to insert the objects in the drawing, and then press ENTER.
Changing the Tool Properties
Use this procedure to change the properties of a tool on a tool palette. You can set these general properties for an object tool:
Tool name Tool description (also used as the tooltip and as the tool description when the copied to a tool catalog in the
Content Browser) Description of objects inserted with this tool Layer key of objects inserted with this tool Layer overrides of objects inserted with this tool Object style (if the tool is style-based) Location of object style (if the tool is style-based)
In addition, you can define object-specific properties that apply to this object type. For example, if you create a wall tool, you can set the wall cleanup, width, height, baseline settings, and the roof/floor lines for all walls inserted with this tool.
1 On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes. 2 Click a tool palette. 3 Select the tool, right-click, and click Properties.
Changing the Tool Properties | 45
4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the objects that you can create using this tool. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides; otherwise, the layer assignments specified in the layer key
style in the drawing are used. 9 Click Browse for Style location, if the location is other than the current drawing to select an object style. 10 Add object-specific properties.
NOTE When you click a property to enter a value, the value underneath the current property is hidden and the property field is highlighted. Enter a value for the current property in the appropriate location.
11 Click OK.
Changing a Tool Icon
Use this procedure to change the icon of a tool. A new tool is inserted with either the icon of the tool it was copied from or with a default icon. You can change the icon by selecting a new one from an image file or from an object in the drawing. You can also choose to display the icon as simple monochrome linework. Changing the tool icon
You can use the following image formats for tool icons: PNG GIF JPG BMP TIFF
NOTE PNG is the recommended image format for tool icons. Icons in the tool palettes can have a maximum size of 64 x 64 pixels. Larger images are scaled when inserted. In the tool itself, you can only define the tool icon. To change the display size of the tool on the palette, see "Defining the Appearance of Tool Palettes" on page 38.
1 On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes. 2 Click the tool palette that contains the tool for which you want to select a new icon. 3 Select the tool, right-click, and click Properties.
46 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
4 On the Tool Properties worksheet, right-click the existing icon, and click Specify Image.
5 In the Select Image File dialog box, select the image you want to use as a tool icon, and click Open. 6 Click OK. 7 To display a tool as simple monochrome linework, on the Tool Properties worksheet, right-click the existing
icon, and click Monochrome. The monochrome option is not available for all tools. To create an icon from an object in the drawing, select the tool in the tool palette, right-click, and Set Image from Selection. Then select the object in the drawing you want to use as a tool icon, and press ENTER. The tool icon is created with the last-used view direction and display configuration set in the viewer of the properties of this tool type. For example, if the tool viewer of the last-used wall is set to Top view and the Medium Detail display configuration, any wall you select in the drawing as a tool icon is displayed in Top view and with the Medium Detail display configuration. You cannot create icons from objects that contain custom blocks, curtain walls, or door/window assemblies with nested styles. If you need to create an icon based on a custom block, specify an external image.
Refreshing a Tool Icon
Use this procedure to refresh a tool icon after editing the viewer settings of the tool. 1 On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes. 2 Click the tool palette that contains the tool icon you want to refresh. 3 Select the tool, right-click, and click Properties. 4 On the Tool Properties worksheet, change the Viewer settings of the tool. For example, switch from a SW Isometric view to a Top view. 5 Right-click the existing icon, and click Refresh Image.
6 Click OK.
Creating a Tool from an Object in the Drawing
Use this procedure to create a tool from an object in the drawing. You can create only object tools with this method. For information on creating command tools, see "Creating a Command Tool" on page 49.
Refreshing a Tool Icon | 47
Creating a tool from an object in the drawing
1 Create an object with the appropriate style and properties in the drawing. IMPORTANT The drawing containing the style should be saved to a location where it will be available in the future. Otherwise, the tool will not be able to access the style, and will revert to the Standard style.
2 Open the tool palette where you want to create the new tool. 3 Select the object, and drag it to the tool palette. 4 Define additional properties for the tool, if necessary.
For more information, see "Changing the Tool Properties" on page 45.
Copying a Tool from a Tool Palette
Use this procedure to copy a tool from one tool palette to another. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to copy. 2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Copy. 3 Open the tool palette onto which you want to copy the tool, right-click, and click Paste. 4 Change the properties of the tool, if necessary. For more information, see "Changing the Tool Properties" on page 45.
Creating a Tool from the Style Manager
Use this procedure to create a tool from a style in the Style Manager. Creating a tool from the Style Manager
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create the new tool. 2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager, and navigate to the style you want to use.
For example, if you want to create a wall tool with the Demolition style, expand Wall Styles, and select the Demolition style. 3 Drag the style to the tool palette.
48 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
A new tool with the selected style is inserted in the tool palette. 4 Click OK to close the Style Manager. 5 Define additional properties for the tool in the tool palette, if necessary.
For more information, see "Changing the Tool Properties" on page 45.
Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter
Use this procedure to create a tool on a tool palette from an AEC Content item in DesignCenter. NOTE You can also create tools from blocks in DesignCenter, but they have slightly different tool options. You can drag and drop AEC content items from a DesignCenter folder to a tool palette. For more information on creating AEC Content, see "Adding AEC Content to Drawings" on page 2012. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides the Design Tool Catalog and the Documentation Tool Catalog in the Content Browser. These catalogs already have tools set up for predefined AEC Content and sample object styles. The catalogs are available for both metric and imperial units. Creating a tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create the new tool. 2 On the Insert menu, click DesignCenter, and navigate to the AEC Content item from which you want to
create a tool. 3 Drag the item to the tool palette.
A new tool is inserted on the tool palette. To change the icon of the new tool, see "Changing a Tool Icon" on page 46. NOTE An AEC Content tool uses the last-used Viewer settings of this tool type to generate the tool icon. If the last-used Viewer setting is Gouraud 3D view, and the user creates a tool from a 2D AEC Content item, the tool icon will be invisible. In this case, you need to change the Viewer setting of the tool to a Top view, and wireframe. 4 Define additional properties for the tool, if necessary. For more information, see "Changing the Tool Properties" on page 45.
Creating a Command Tool
Use this procedure to create a tool for a command in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter | 49
You can either copy an existing command tool from a tool palette and change the command, or use the Command Tool or Command Tool with Properties from the Stock Tool Catalog in the Content Browser.
Command tool properties
1 Place a copy of a command tool on another tool palette:
If you want to...
Then...
copy an existing command tool from a tool palette
navigate to the tool palette, right-click the command tool, and click Copy. Then navigate to the tool palette on which to insert the new command tool, right-click, and click Paste.
use a command tool from the Stock Tool Catalog
open the Content Browser, and navigate to Stock Tool Catalog Helper Tools. Move the pointer over the i-drop icon next to one of the command tools, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
2 Select the command tool, right-click, and click Properties.
3 For Command, enter the command to be initiated when starting the tool.
4 Click OK.
Working with Tools from a Central Location
You can use the Content Browser to store and organize catalog tools in a central location. A number of stock tools are available in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Stock Tool Catalog. Additionally, sample catalogs contain tools with styles from the Styles drawings. You can copy these tools to a tool palette and modify them. You can also create your own tool palettes and tools in a catalog in the Content Browser, copy them to a tool palette, and retain the link from the Content Browser to the tool palette. In this case, the tool is refreshed on the tool palette when it is modified in the catalog in the Content Browser.
NOTE If you want to link a complete tool palette from the Content Browser to Architectural Desktop, see "Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser" on page 41.
Linking a Tool from a Catalog in the Content Browser Use this procedure to link a tool from a catalog in the Content Browser to a tool palette in Architectural Desktop.
50 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Linking a tool from a catalog in the Content Browser
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to place a tool from the Content Browser. 2 On the Window menu, click Content Browser, and navigate to the tool palette or category in the tool
catalog that contains the tool you want to copy. For more information, see "Searching for Items in a Tool Catalog" on page 91. 3 Move the pointer over the i-drop icon next to the tool, so that the pointer image changes to an eyedropper ( ). To copy multiple tools, press and hold CTRL while clicking each tool; then position the eyedropper over any of the selected tools. You can also select all the tools in the current category by right-clicking, and clicking Select All. 4 Drag the eyedropper to a tool palette in the tool palettes set. 5 To refresh the tool, select it, right-click, and click Refresh Tool. Alternatively, you can select the tool in the tool palette, right-click, and click Properties. Then select Refresh from on the Properties worksheet.
Working with Tools from a Central Location | 51
Updating a tool from the Properties worksheet
NOTE When you select Refresh from, all tool properties on the worksheet are set to read-only. Properties for this tool must be changed in the Content Browser. 6 Click OK. Updating a Tool in Autodesk Architectural Desktop from the Content Browser Use this procedure to update a tool in an Architectural Desktop palette that has a link to the Content Browser. NOTE You cannot change and update tools from the Stock Tool Catalog in the Content Browser. Those tools are read-only. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to update. 2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Refresh Tool. Updating a Tool in the Content Browser from a Linked Tool in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Use this procedure to update a tool in a catalog in the Content Browser with the properties of a linked tool from Architectural Desktop. For example, perhaps you have a tool in the Content Browser that adds a Box mass element of 3 x 3 x 3 meters. You want to change the tool so that it adds a Box mass element of 4 x 4 x 4 meters. You would first link the mass element tool from the Content Browser to a tool palette in Architectural Desktop. Then, temporarily deactivate the link and change the dimension properties of the tool to 4 x 4 x 4 meters. Next, copy the tool back to the Content Browser. The Content Browser catalog is updated with the new tool properties. Finally, reactivate the link from the Content Browser tool to the Architectural Desktop palette. 1 Link a tool from a catalog in the Content Browser to a tool palette as described in "Linking a Tool from a Catalog in the Content Browser" on page 50. 2 Select the tool in the tool palette, right-click, and click Properties. 3 On the Tool Properties worksheet, clear Refresh from. The tool properties can now be edited. 4 Make the necessary changes to the tool properties.
52 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
5 Click OK. 6 Select the tool in the tool palette, and copy it to its original location in the Content Browser catalog.
NOTE You can copy a tool to a catalog in the Content Browser using the Copy and Paste commands from the context menu, or by dragging the tool onto the Content Browser icon in the Windows task bar. To select multiple tools in a tool palette, use CTRL-A to select all or drag while holding the CTRL key to create a selection window.
7 Click Yes when prompted to overwrite the previous version of the tool. 8 If you want to refresh the tool in the Architectural Desktop tool palette from the new version stored in the
Content Browser, go back to the Architectural Desktop tool, right-click, and on the Tool Properties worksheet, reactivate Refresh from.
Removing the Link of a Tool to a Catalog in the Content Browser Use this procedure to permanently remove the link of a tool to its source tool in the Content Browser.
NOTE This action cannot be undone.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to unlink from a catalog in the Content Browser.
2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Remove Catalog Link.
Applying the Properties of a Tool to an Existing Object
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a tool to an existing object.
You can apply the properties of a tool to an existing object in two ways:
Apply the properties of a tool to an object of the same type: For example, apply the properties of a wall tool to an existing wall. All object tools have this functionality. In earlier releases of Architectural Desktop, you used the Match command to do this.
Apply the properties of a tool to a different object type: Using this method, you convert the object to an object of the same type as the tool. For example, when you apply the properties of a wall tool to a polyline, the polyline is converted to a wall with the settings defined in the wall tool. Depending on their type, various object tool types may have commands for converting other objects. For detailed information, see the chapters for the individual objects.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool with the properties you want to apply to a different object. 2 Select the tool, and right-click. 3 Define the object type to which to apply the tool properties:
if you want to...
Then...
apply the properties of the tool to an object of the same type click Apply Tool Properties to <Object>. For example, to apply the tool properties of a door tool to an existing door, click Apply Tool Properties to Door.
apply the properties of the tool to an object of a different type
click Apply Tool Properties to <Object>. For example, to apply the tool properties of a door tool to an opening, click Apply Tool Properties to Door/Window Assembly, Opening, Window.
4 Select the object to which to apply the tool properties, and press ENTER.
Re-Importing Styles for a Tool
Use this procedure to re-import the style of a tool that uses a style from an external Styles drawing. When you create a tool, you can assign a style from the current drawing or from an external Styles drawing. Usually you assign a style from an external Styles drawing because you can then use that the tool in other drawings as well.
Applying the Properties of a Tool to an Existing Object | 53
When the style in the external Styles drawing is changed, you need to update the tool to reflect these changes. NOTE When you update the style of a tool, all existing objects inserted with this tool are also updated.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool for which you want to update the style. 2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Import <Style Name> <Object Name> Style.
For example, if you want to update the Brick-4 Furring-4 style of a wall tool, click Import `Brick-4 Furring-4' Wall Style.
Deleting a Tool
Use this procedure to delete a tool from a tool palette. When you delete a tool from a tool palette, objects in the drawing that were inserted with this tool are not deleted. NOTE If you linked a tool palette from the Content Browser to the tool palettes set as described in "Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser" on page 41, you cannot delete individual tools from it. To delete the tool, delete it from the palette in the Content Browser, and then update the palette in Architectural Desktop as described in "Updating a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser" on page 42.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to delete. 2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Delete Tool.
The Properties Palette
The Properties palette provides a central location to enter and change the properties of an object. You can enter information about the style, dimensions, location, property set data, and other characteristics of an object. You typically keep the Properties palette open during an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop session.
Opening the Properties Palette
Use one of these procedures to open the Properties palette: On the Window menu, click Properties Palette.
54 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Click on the Navigation toolbar. Press CTRL+1. Select an object in the drawing, right-click, and click Properties. Double-click an object in the drawing.
Setting the Appearance of the Properties Palette
The Properties palette is usually kept open during an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop session, because it is the central location from which you add and change properties of an object. Docking the Properties Palette Use this procedure to dock the Properties palette on the left or right side of your workspace.
1 In the title bar of the Properties palette, click , and then click Allow Docking. 2 Position the cursor over the title bar, and drag the Properties palette to one side of your workspace.
A preview graphic shows the new position of the Properties palette. 3 Release the Properties palette at the correct location. Hiding the Properties Palette Use this procedure to hide the Properties palette when it is not in use. The Properties palette can be configured to hide when you move the cursor away from it, leaving only the title bar visible. When you move the cursor over the title bar, the Properties palette is re-displayed. Properties palette hidden (left) and re-displayed (right)
1 In the title bar of the Properties palette, click (Auto-hide). The Properties palette is hidden, except for the title bar.
2 To re-display the Properties palette, move the cursor over the title bar. Adjusting the Transparency of the Properties Palette Use this procedure to adjust the transparency of the Properties palette. The more transparent the Properties palette, the better you can see objects in your drawing underneath it. NOTE Transparency is not available if hardware acceleration is enabled.
1 In the title bar of the Properties palette, click , and then click Transparency. 2 To adjust the transparency of the Properties palette, drag the slider towards Less or More. 3 To turn off transparency, select Turn off window transparency. 4 Click OK.
Setting the Appearance of the Properties Palette | 55
The Design Tab
Most properties of an object are entered on the Design tab of the Properties palette. Design tab of a wall
Based on the object, some general object properties you can enter may include: Description of the object Layer key of the object Layer overrides of the object Object style Location of object style
These properties are defined by the properties set in the tool used to create the object. You can change these properties for an individual object instance. For more information, see "Changing the Tool Properties" on page 45. On the Design tab, you also enter object-specific design properties. The properties that are available depend on the object you are editing.
Dimensions: Most objects in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop have dimension settings for width, height, and other basic features. Many objects have additional settings and the option to use AutoCAD QuickCalc. A wall, for example, has additional length and baseline justification settings, and you can use QuickCalc to calculate and apply a new rotation. For more information, see "Use the QuickCalc Calculator" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Location: Most objects in Architectural Desktop have settings for the object location. Anchored objects like windows and doors also have Anchor properties.
For detailed information about entering properties for a specific object, see the individual object sections.
The Extended Data Tab
The Extended Data tab of the Properties palette contains the following object properties: Hyperlink: You can add a hyperlink to an object. For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
56 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics. Text Notes and Reference Files: You can add a note or an associated reference file to an object. Property Sets: You can add, edit, and remove property set data for an object. For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956. Property Sets From Style: You can add, edit, and remove property set data for the object style. For more information, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956. Detail Component Data: You can add, edit, and remove detail component data for an object. For more information, see "Editing Detail Components in a Drawing" on page 1822. Property set data on the Extended Data tab
Worksheets
The properties of an object are entered and changed on the Properties palette. Most properties are directly entered and immediately updated on screen. Some objects have complex properties that are entered in worksheets within the Properties palette. Worksheets are designed to focus on a particular task of an object. They appear only when they are launched from a palette or from an object. They cannot be accessed from the pulldown menus, as they always refer to a specific object or object tool.
Worksheets | 57
Opening the Anchor worksheet
A worksheet is a modal dialog box that must be closed before continuing to work in the drawing.
Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions
You can make design changes in the workspace without using dialog boxes. With a single click, you can perform design changes such as adjusting door width and window height, modifying a wall roofline, or reversing the wall direction. For some grips, the CTRL key gives you additional manipulation options. These are indicated in the grip tips. For example, the "Width" grip of a wall can maintain either the wall baseline or the opposite face of the wall when dragging. To switch between these two options, you use the CTRL key. As you make design changes, dynamic dimensions appear, ensuring that your changes are precise and accurate. Window dimension grips in Plan view and Model view
Different grips are available, depending on the object type. For example, a wall and a freestanding railing have a direction (arrow) grip to change the direction of the object. A railing that is attached to a stair or a structural member does not have a direction grip. Objects can also have different grips depending on the current view. For example, a structural beam has an additional "Roll" grip in Model views that is not visible in Plan views. Because rolling a beam is a 3D operation that you can
58 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
perform only in an isometric view, it makes no sense to display the Roll grip in Plan views. Similarly, roof and floor line grips are useful only in a 3D view; therefore, they are displayed only in Model views.
Curtain wall grips in Plan view and Model view
For detailed information about the grips for Autodesk® Architectural Desktop objects, refer to the illustrations and descriptions in the grip-editing sections of the individual object sections.
Grip Tips
For a quick description of the function of a specific grip, you can hover your pointing device over the grip to display its grip tip. Each grip has its name displayed in the grip tip, for example, "Flip" or "Lengthen." In some cases, the grip tip contains additional information about the grip's function.
Viewing the door Flip grip
Grip Color
The color of a grip specifies whether the grip modifies a selected object or other objects in a drawing. Typically, a grip is used to change a property of a selected object. However, some grips might change the properties of all other objects in a drawing with the same style as the selected object. Other grips do not change the selected object at all, but are used to change the grip-editing mode of the object.
Grip Type and Default Color Object (Cyan) Style (Magenta)
Auxiliary (Gray)
Function
changes a property of a selected object changes a property of a selected object and all other objects with the same style in the current drawing does not change any property of any object
Grip Tips | 59
Different grip types display in different colors in an in-place editing session
You can change the color of these grips on the AEC Editor tab in the Options. For more information, see "Changing the AEC Editor Settings" on page 114.
Using the CTRL Key with Grips
Some object grips have multiple functions. For example, a face grip on a free form mass element has these possible grip modes:
Move ortho Move Move plane Pull ortho Pull Push ortho When a grip has multiple modes, this information is displayed in the grip tip. To switch between the different grip modes, use the CTRL key.
1 Select the object with the grip. 2 Hover your pointing device over the grip, to see what grip modes are available.
The first mode listed is the mode that will be started when you select the grip without using the CTRL key. 3 Select the grip. 4 Press CTRL to toggle to the next editing mode.
NOTE You need to press the CTRL key only once, and then release it. This toggles the grip to the next editing mode. After releasing the CTRL key, you can start editing the grip. Do not keep pressing CTRL while editing the grip.
Trigger Grips
Trigger grips are a special type of grip. A trigger grip immediately performs an action on an object when you select it, as opposed to a normal drag grip, which changes a dimension property only when you drag it. You can use trigger grips to set discrete properties of an object, such as the swing direction of a door or the justification of a wall. You can also use trigger grips to change the grip-edit mode of an object. For example, selecting the Edit Grid grip in a curtain wall initiates an in-place editing mode for the curtain wall grid. Selecting the Edit In Place grip in an AEC dimension activates additional grips for the individual dimension chains, text strings, and extension lines. A trigger grip typically displays with a circle or an arrow. AEC dimension before and after activating Trigger grip
60 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
In some cases, such as with the AEC Dimension trigger grip, the grip-edit mode is exited when the object is no longer selected. In other cases, you must click the trigger grip again to exit the grip-edit mode.
Dynamic Dimensions
When you use grips to change the dimension or angle of an object, temporary dimension objects show you the changes you are making. Use Dynamic Input to enter a precise value instead of moving a grip. This is active by default, and selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. Click DYN on the application status bar to toggle this off. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Dynamic Dimensions | 61
Using dynamic dimensions to change window width
These dynamic dimensions give you instant feedback about your changes. You can also use the dynamic dimensions to enter new dimension values directly on screen.
62 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Three types of dynamic dimensions display on grips:
Focal dimensions, which display highlighted in a white rectangular box. If you type a value while a dynamic dimension is focused, the edit box is displayed at the dimension text location.
Editable dimensions, which display based on the drafting settings you specify. If you press TAB while a dynamic dimension is focused, the dimension focus shifts forward to the next editable dimension. You can continue pressing TAB to cycle forward through all editable dimensions, or press SHIFT+TAB to cycle backward through all editable dimensions.
Non-editable dimensions, which display in black text. These dimensions typically display the current value of a property that you can modify with a grip.
You can apply different settings, such as the color of the dynamic dimension text box, on the Dynamic Input tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. You can select the color of grips and the dynamic dimension linetype on the AEC Editor tab in Options. For more information, see "Changing the AEC Editor Settings" on page 114.
NOTE When a dimension edit box is displayed, pressing ENTER sets the value of the property that you are editing and ends the grip operation. Pressing TAB sets the value, changes the focused dimension, and continues the same grip-editing operation.
NOTE When one or more editable dimensions are displayed, you can always press TAB to a state where no dimension has focus, during which you can use normal entry on the command line. You can always reach this non-focused state by pressing SHIFT+TAB immediately after selecting a grip.
1 Select the grip representing the dimension you want to change. For example, to change the length of a curtain wall, select one of its Lengthen grips.
2 Enter the new value on screen.
Grip Constraints
When you select and drag a grip, its final position might not be the same as the current cursor position, which might be constrained. For example, for the Lengthen grip on a linear wall, the cursor position is projected to the nearest point on the wall. Whenever the constrained position of a grip differs from the current cursor position, dotted lines or arcs are drawn from the cursor to the grip to indicate how the grip was constrained.
Grip Constraints | 63
A square-shaped grip typically indicates that the cursor movement is constrained to a plane. An isosceles triangle-shaped grip indicates that the cursor movement is constrained to a line or curve.
Temporary Grip Coordinate Systems
When you drag a grip, the current cursor position is typically projected to the XY plane of the current User Coordinate System (UCS). Some grip-editing operations are not possible in the current coordinate system. For example, if the current UCS is in plan, you cannot change the height of a wall while in an isometric view. For this reason, some grips have their own coordinate system that is temporarily set while the grip is active. Once the grip-editing operation is complete, the UCS is set back to its previous state. To identify whether a grip is setting a temporary coordinate system, set UCSICON to on, and display the icon at the origin.
In-Place Editing
In-place editing is a special editing mode for making on-screen changes to components of an object. For example, you can edit wall endcaps, wall or curtain wall roof lines, profile-based railing posts, or extruded mass element outlines. While in-place editing mode is active, all other commands and objects in the drawing are "frozen." To access the commands and objects again, exit the in-place editing mode. When you enter an in-place editing session, a temporary in-place edit profile is drawn around the object being edited. After making changes, you exit the in-place edit session, and save the changes. You may also discard changes upon exiting the in-place session, and the object reverts to the state it was in before the in-place editing session began. In-place edit profile of extruded mass element
The in-place edit profile is displayed in a different color and hatching from the object it outlines. You can change the display of the in-place edit profile by changing its colors, lineweights, and hatching. Sometimes, multiple in-place editing entities are created in a single session. This is the case for walls that have multiple sweeps or modifiers, or for roof slabs and slabs that have both a fascia and a soffit profile. The in-place editing mode is invoked from the context menu of an object. Invoking in-place editing from the context menu of a wall
To access the context menu, select the object, and right-click. Then select the appropriate in-place editing command. When you enter the in-place editing mode, a special toolbar helps you to zoom to the active in-place profile, to save changes to the component, or to discard all changes. When you exit the in-place editing mode, the toolbar is closed.
64 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
In-Place Editing of Polyline-Based Components
The following objects in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop can have custom components based on polylines attached to them:
Wall endcaps Wall/curtain wall roof and floor lines Wall plan modifiers Once you assign a polyline-based component to an object--for example, a wall endcap to a wall--you can edit it on screen with in-place editing. During an in-place editing session, the selected polyline is isolated for editing so that you can perform changes on its shape, such as grip-editing or adding and removing vertex points. Before you exit the in-place edit session, you can save the changes to the existing style, save to a new style, or discard the changes. Endcap polyline highlighted for in-place editing
You can use in-place editing to modify the polyline-based components of a wall either in two-dimensional (2D) plan views or in three-dimensional (3D) model views. When you edit a component in a 3D view, the UCS is aligned to the component, so that you can easily add or remove vertices and grip-edit the component. The editing commands available for polyline-based components are listed on the context menu of the in-place editing profile. To access the context menu, select the in-place editing profile, and right-click. The commands for editing polyline-based objects vary, depending on the object type. For example, a wall endcap in-place edit profile has commands for adding and removing vertices and hiding and replacing endcap components; the in-place edit profile of a wall roof/floor line has commands for adding gables and steps and projecting the roof and floor lines to a polyline. For more information, see the sections on the individual objects. In-place editing:Adding a vertex to a wall endcap
In-Place Editing of Profile-Based Objects and Components
You can use in-place editing for profile-based objects and object components. You can change the shape of the profile, add and remove rings and, for some profiles, move the insertion point.
In-Place Editing of Polyline-Based Components | 65
The following objects are profile based or can have profile-based components to edit with in-place editing: Mass elements (extrusions) Mask blocks Wall sweeps Fascia and soffits of roof slabs and slabs Frames and mullions of curtain walls, curtain wall units, and window assemblies Custom (profile-based) shapes of doors, openings, windows, and window assemblies Custom (profile-based) shapes of rails and posts in railings
In-place edit profile on extruded mass elements
NOTE In-place editing for the objects in the previous list is available only if one or more components of the object are based on profiles. For example, if you have a railing for which no rails or posts are based on profiles, the in-place editing command is not available. However, if one or more railing components are based on a profile definition, you can select the appropriate in-place editing command from the context menu of the object. Profile-based baluster in a railing
66 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Context menu of railing component in-place edit profile
The following commands are available to edit a profile-based object component:
Command Add Vertex Remove Vertex Add Ring
Replace Ring
Save Changes Save as New Profile Discard All Changes
Edit Object Display
Description
adds a vertex to the selected profile
removes a vertex from the selected profile
adds a closed polyline, circle, ellipse, or spline to the selected profile; you have the option to add the ring to the profile or to subtract it
replaces the selected profile with a closed polyline, circle, ellipse, or spline
saves the changed geometry back to the profile
saves the changed geometry to a new profile definition
discards all changes to the geometry of the profile and reverts to the profile shape before the in-place edit session
changes the display of the in-place edit profile; you can change the display of the profile boundary, the profile hatch and--for polylinebased profiles--the display of the modifiable and hidden edges
For detailed information, see the sections for the individual objects.
In-Place Editing of 3D Body Modifiers
You can use in-place editing to edit a 3D body modifier on a wall. You can change the shape of the body and perform Boolean operations on the 3D body modifier.
In-Place Editing of 3D Body Modifiers | 67
Context menu of 3D body modifier in in-place edit mode
The following commands are available to edit a 3D body modifier:
Command Boolean Union Boolean Subtract Boolean Intersect
Split Face Join Faces Save Changes Discard All Changes
Edit Object Display
Description joins the body modifier with a selected 3D object
subtracts a selected 3D object from the 3D body modifier
creates an intersection object of the 3D body modifier and a selected object Splits a face of the selected 3D body modifier Joins two previously split faces of a 3D body modifier saves the changed geometry back to the 3D body modifier discards all changes to the geometry of the 3D body modifier and reverts to the body shape before the in-place edit session changes the display of the in-place edit profile
In-Place Editing of Material Hatches
You can make changes to the surface hatch of an object with an in-place edit profile, provided the surface hatch is coming from a material. Unlike the other in-place edit types, you do not change the shape of the object but only the display of the hatch on a specific object face.
In-place edit profile on a hatched wall
When you use the in-place edit profile to change the appearance of a surface hatch on an object face, you create a hatch override. You can perform the following changes to a material hatch with in-place editing:
Display/hide the surface hatch Change the rotation of the hatch pattern
68 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Change the vertical and horizontal offsets of the hatch pattern You can apply these overrides to all corresponding object faces with the same material or to only the selected object face. In-place editing a surface hatch
For more information, see "Working with Surface Hatches" on page 478. Changing the hatch rotation with in-place editing
Aligning the UCS to an Object Face
Use this procedure to align the currently active UCS to the face of an object. You can align the UCS to the face of an AEC object or to the face of an AutoCAD solid. For detailed information about the UCS, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help. For more information about working with objects in a temporary section, elevation or plan view with the UCS correctly aligned, see "Isolating Objects" on page 70. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Aligning the UCS to an Object Face | 69
Aligning the UCS to a pyramid face
1 On the View menu, click New UCS Face.
Alternatively, you can click
on the UCS toolbar.
2 Select an object face to align to the UCS.
You can select the face of an AEC object or an AutoCAD solid here. When you hover your pointing device over a face, it is highlighted with a temporary hatch.
3 Select the UCS origin point on the selected face. 4 Enter a rotation value for the new UCS.
The UCS is aligned to the object face.
Isolating Objects
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers an easy-to-use feature for temporarily hiding and displaying selected objects in your drawing. This feature is useful when you want to focus on individual areas of your drawing. You can perform the following operations with the Isolate Objects feature:
Create an object selection set to hide or display Fine-tune the selection set by adding objects Save a drawing with the visibility settings you have selected Edit objects in a temporary section, elevation or plan view with the UCS aligned
Selecting objects to isolate
70 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Displaying only the isolated objects from previous illustration
You can select specific objects and work on them in a temporary section, elevation or plan view regardless of the view you are working in currently. When you use Edit in View, the objects you select are isolated and switched to the temporary view. The UCS is aligned appropriate to the temporary view you selected and makes complex design projects easier to modify. All other objects in the drawing are hidden from view while you make modifications. You are returned to the view and UCS you were working in previously, and all objects that were hidden become visible, when you exit Edit in View. For example, if you are working in a design with an angled wall and want to add a body modifier in an elevation view, you can switch to a temporary elevation, add the detail, and exit the elevation. You are returned to your working view, and you must save any modifications at this point. This option might also be useful if you were working in an isometric view and wanted to look at the endcaps of a wall opening in a section view or wanted to change the UCS to add a section line through objects at an angle.
Isolating Objects to Edit in a Section View
Use this procedure to modify your drawing in a temporary section view. When you isolate objects to look at them in a section view, other objects in the drawing are hidden from view as you work. You must save your drawing after you exit Edit In Section.
1 Select the objects you want to edit, right-click and click Isolate Objects Edit In Section. The Edit in View Toolbar opens.
2 Specify the first and second points for the section line or press ENTER to change the UCS. 3 Specify the extent of the section.
Only the objects you selected are displayed. 4 Modify the objects in the section view.
5 Click to exit Edit In View. You are returned to the view you were working in previously.
6 Save your changes to your drawing after you exit Edit In View.
Isolating Objects to Edit in an Elevation View
Use this procedure to modify your drawing in a temporary elevation view. When you isolate objects to look at them in an elevation view, other objects in the drawing are hidden from view as you work. You must save your drawing after you exit Edit In Elevation.
1 Select the objects you want to edit, right-click and click Isolate Objects Edit In Elevation. The Edit in View toolbar opens.
2 Select linework, the face of an object or a reference point for the view direction. Only the objects you selected are displayed.
3 Modify the objects in the elevation view.
4 Click to exit Edit In View. You are returned to the view you were working in previously.
5 Save your changes after you exit Edit in View.
Isolating Objects to Edit in a Section View | 71
Isolating Objects to Edit in a Plan View
Use this procedure to modify your drawing in a temporary plan view. When you isolate objects to look at them in a plan view, other objects in the drawing are hidden from view as you work. You must save your drawing after you exit Edit In Plan.
1 Select the objects you want to edit, right-click and click Isolate Objects Edit In Plan. Only the objects you selected are displayed.
2 Modify the objects in the plan view. 3 Click to exit Edit In Plan.
You are returned to the view you were working in previously. 4 Save your changes after you exit Edit in View.
Isolating Objects to Display
Use this procedure to isolate objects that you want to display in a drawing. This method of working is preferable when you have a large drawing with many objects and need to display only a small number of them. Displaying only a chair and a cabinet in a drawing
You can work with the Isolate Object command from the context menu of an object, or from the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing window status bar. Isolate Objects command on the drawing window status bar
1 Select the objects in the drawing that you want to isolate and display. 2 Right-click, and click Isolate Objects Isolate Selected Objects.
Alternatively, you can click on the right side of the drawing window status bar, then click Isolate Objects, and select the objects to isolate. NOTE When you have isolated objects in your drawing, the light bulb in the drawing window status bar turns red . 3 If you want to isolate additional objects in your selection set, select one or more isolated objects, and run the Isolate Objects command again. Alternatively, you can click the red light bulb in the drawing window status bar, and click Isolate Additional Objects.
72 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
When you end the object isolation, as described in "Ending the Object Isolation in a Drawing" on page 73, all objects are redisplayed.
Isolating Objects to Hide
Use this procedure to isolate objects that you want to hide in a drawing. This method of work is preferable when you want to display a large number of objects and hide only a few of them. Hiding a chair and a cabinet in a drawing
1 Select the objects in the drawing that you want to hide. 2 Right-click, and click Isolate Objects Hide Selected Objects.
The objects you selected are now hidden in the drawing. Alternatively, you can click the light bulb in the drawing window status bar, and click Hide Objects. NOTE After isolating and hiding objects multiple times, it may be difficult to know whether any objects are hidden, or whether all objects are displayed in the drawing. When you have isolated objects in your drawing, the light bulb on the right side of the drawing window status bar is displayed in red . When all objects are displayed and none are isolated or hidden, the light bulb is displayed in yellow . Alternatively, to ascertain that no objects are hidden, select an object in the drawing, right-click, and click Isolate Objects. If the End Object Isolation command is unavailable, all objects are displayed. If the context menu command End Object Isolation is active, there are hidden objects in the drawing. To display all objects, see "Ending the Object Isolation in a Drawing" on page 73.
Ending the Object Isolation in a Drawing
Use this procedure to end the object isolation in a drawing and to redisplay all hidden objects. Redisplaying all objects in a drawing
1 Select an object in the drawing. 2 Right-click, and click Isolate Objects End Object Isolation.
Isolating Objects to Hide | 73
Alternatively, you can click on the right side of the drawing window status bar, and click End Object Isolation.
NOTE If no objects have been isolated, the End Object Isolation command is unavailable and the light bulb in the drawing window status bar is displayed in yellow . In that case, no further action is necessary.
Saving Isolated Objects
You can save a drawing in which some objects are isolated for viewing while others are hidden. The next time you open the drawing, it displays with the isolation settings you defined.
For example, you could save a specific view setting to distribute the file to a contractor who needs to see only a specific part of the drawing. You could also save a specific view setting in a drawing that is used as an external reference within another drawing.
To save a drawing with isolated objects, create the appropriate object selection set as described in "Isolating Objects to Display" on page 72 and "Isolating Objects to Hide" on page 73, and then save the drawing. The isolation settings you chose are saved in the drawing and are displayed accordingly when you reopen the drawing.
NOTE If you want to distribute a drawing with isolated objects, make sure that you and the recipient of the drawing are working with the same version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. A recipient who is working with an earlier version of Architectural Desktop, plain AutoCAD, or Object Enabler is not able to display the hidden objects. In this case, end the object isolation before saving and distributing the drawing.
Isolating Objects in External References
When you are working with external references, you can hide and isolate objects. Consider the following points:
You can isolate an external reference within a host drawing as a whole by selecting it and isolating at as described in "Isolating Objects to Display" on page 72.
You can isolate individual objects within an external reference by opening the external reference, isolating and hiding objects as needed, saving the external reference drawing, and then reloading the external reference.
You cannot isolate or hide objects in an external reference while editing it with REFEDIT in the host drawing. You need to use XOPEN and save the desired Hide/Isolate settings within the external reference.
You cannot redisplay hidden objects in an external reference while editing it with REFEDIT in the host drawing. You need to use XOPEN and save the desired Hide/Isolate settings within the external reference.
Styles and Support Files
Styles are contained in Styles drawings from which you select a style to add to your drawing. This ensures smaller templates and a clearer structure of your drawings. In previous releases, these same style drawings existed and contained the same styles that were also in the templates. In addition, to conform to Microsoft® Windows® standards some file paths have changed.
Support files are in the following locations:
Files Plotter Configurations Plot Styles DesignCenter Content
Location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Plotters C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Plot Styles C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\AEC Content
74 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Files Details
Layer Standards drawing Styles drawings Material Definitions
Schedule Tables
Drawing templates Area Evaluation templates
Sample Drawing Management Project
Default User Workspace Catalog
Stock Tool Catalog Structural Member Catalog Sample Tool Palette Catalogs
Sample Render Material Catalog VIZ Sample Catalogs
Location
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Details\<UK or US>
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Layers
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\<Imperial or Metric>\Material Definitions.dwg
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\<Imperial or Metric>\Schedule Tables.dwg
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template\Evaluation Templates
\\Program Files\Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007\Sample\Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Project
C:\Documents and Settings\<Username>\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Support\WorkspaceCatalog (Imperial/Metric)
\\Program Files\Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007\Catalogs\StockToolCatalog
\\Program Files\Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007\Catalogs\Structural
\\Program Files\Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007\Sample\Sample Palette Catalog (Imperial/Metric)
\\Program Files\Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007\Sample\Autodesk Render Material Catalog
\\Program Files\Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007\Default Catalogs\ToolCatalogs
Integration of Autodesk Architectural Desktop and AutoCAD
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop is integrated with the AutoCAD® design platform. The commands and features of both applications are blended within the tool palettes, menus, and toolbars. There are some differences between working in a pure AutoCAD environment and accessing AutoCAD commands from within Architectural Desktop. These differences are listed in this section.
AutoCAD Tools
Differences with the AutoCAD tools:
AutoCAD tools do not use the Properties palette during adding them to the drawing. AutoCAD tools do not have the same tool properties as Architectural Desktop tools; for example, the layer key. AutoCAD Hatch tools and Block tools cannot have a user-defined tool image. The tool properties of AutoCAD tools cannot be applied to an existing AutoCAD object in the drawing.
AutoCAD Tool Palettes
Differences with the AutoCAD tool palettes:
When working in plain AutoCAD, you cannot create and link AutoCAD tool palettes from the Content Browser. When working in plain AutoCAD, AutoCAD tool palettes do not support palette properties.
Integration of Autodesk Architectural Desktop and AutoCAD | 75
Other Differences Other differences with AutoCAD:
Properties Palette: When working in plain AutoCAD, you cannot set the AutoCAD Properties palette to be transparent.
Revision clouds: The Revision cloud feature in AutoCAD is not identical to the Revision cloud feature in Architectural Desktop. Revision clouds in Architectural Desktop have additional scaling and layer key functionality, as well as the option of adding a Delta symbol.
Units: Running the UNITS command from the command line opens the Architectural Desktop Drawing Setup dialog box. If you want to open the AutoCAD Units dialog box, enter ddunits on the command line. WARNING To change the drawing setup of Architectural Desktop, you must use the Drawing Setup command of Architectural Desktop. If you change the units in the AutoCAD Units dialog box, Architectural Desktop drawing units are not affected.
76 | Chapter 2 The Workspace
Content Browser
3
The Content Browser lets you store, share, and exchange Autodesk® Architectural Desktop content, tools, and tool palettes. The Content Browser runs independently of the software, allowing you to exchange tools and tool palettes with other Autodesk applications, such as VIZ® Render.
77
Understanding the Content Browser
The Content Browser is a library of tool catalogs containing tools, tool palettes, and tool packages. You can publish catalogs so that multiple users have access to standard tools for projects.
Tool Catalogs and Websites
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop tools and content are shared in the Content Browser using tool catalogs and websites. A tool catalog can contain one or more of the following items:
Tools: For example, you might select a tool to create a customized wall used throughout a building project.
Tool palettes: These contain tools used to support a particular workflow or task. For example, a tool palette may contain a set of annotation tools used in a project, or a set of tools to draw each type of door used in a project. A tool palette is treated as a single object.
Tool packages: These are collections of tools that users can select and use. For example, a tool package may contain a set of productivity tools and utilities.
A single copy of a tool catalog can be shared among users on your local area network. If tools in the catalog are updated, you have immediate access to the latest version of the tools.
Websites containing Autodesk Architectural Desktop tools, and content that you can download using i-drop® technology, can also function as tool catalogs.
Several tool catalogs are provided with Autodesk Architectural Desktop, and you can create additional catalogs of your own.
Catalog Libraries
Tool catalogs are organized into catalog libraries, and each Autodesk Architectural Desktop user has a personal catalog library.
Tool catalog data is not stored in the catalog library. Rather, the catalog library contains pointers to the physical tool catalogs. It is like the card catalog in a real library--it tells you where to find a book, but it does not contain the book itself.
You can sort the catalogs in the library by Last Used, Publisher, Title, or Type. You can filter the list of catalogs by Type.
You cannot create additional catalog libraries, but you can open catalog libraries created by other users if you are authorized to do so.
Tool Catalogs Supplied with Autodesk Architectural Desktop
The following tool catalogs are supplied with your personal catalog library:
Catalog Name Architectural Desktop & VIZ Render Plug-ins Design Tool Catalog - Imperial
Design Tool Catalog - Metric
Documentation Tool Catalog - Imperial Documentation Tool Catalog - Metric My Tool Catalog
Render Material Catalog
Sample Palette Catalog - Imperial
Contents
Links to 3rd party plug-ins for Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
Content tools in imperial units for design and documentation of multi-view blocks and symbols.
Content tools in metric units for design and documentation of multiview blocks and symbols.
Content tools in imperial units for annotation and documentation.
Content tools in metric units for annotation and documentation.
An empty tool catalog provided so that you can create your own tool set.
Architectural render materials for use with Autodesk Architectural Desktop and Autodesk VIZ® Render.
A sampling of tools in imperial units for objects such as doors, walls, and windows.
78 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
Catalog Name Sample Palette Catalog - Metric
Stock Tool Catalog
Contents
A sampling of tools in metric units for objects such as doors, walls, and windows.
A catalog that contains the standard stock tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
You cannot add or remove items from the Autodesk-supplied tool catalogs, but you can create your own tool catalogs. You can also copy other tool catalogs and website links into your catalog library using the Publish catalog feature.
Exploring the Content Browser
To open the Content Browser, click on the Navigation toolbar.
The Content Browser window usually is divided into two panes (web pages displayed in the Content Browser occupy the entire window). Tool catalogs and their contents are displayed in the right pane. When you start the Content Browser, your personal catalog library, named <user_name>'s Catalog Library, displays in the right pane. The left pane is used for navigation, searching for tools, sorting catalogs, and filtering catalog display. The buttons at the top of the
left pane work much like the equivalent controls in a web browser. Click to display the top level of the catalog library in the right pane. This view is either all the catalogs in the library, or a group of catalogs filtered by type.
You can have more than one instance of the Content Browser open at a time. To open an additional Content Browser window, press CTRL+N. For more information, see "Working with Multiple Content Browser Windows" on page 102.
Viewing a Tool Catalog
To view a tool catalog, click the catalog in the catalog library. For example, click the Stock Tool catalog to display a window like the following illustration:
View of the Stock Tool catalog
Exploring the Content Browser | 79
When you open the Stock Tool catalog, a cover page describing the catalog is displayed in the right pane. If no cover page is defined for a tool catalog, items contained in the tool catalog are displayed in the right pane. For information about specifying a cover page, see "Editing Tool Catalog Properties" on page 89. To continue past the cover page to the contents of the tool catalog, click the catalog name in the left pane of the Content Browser window. The contents of a tool catalog can be organized into categories. When a tool catalog is open in the right pane, any categories are listed in the left pane. For example, the Stock Tool catalog is organized into the categories shown in the previous illustration. Categories can be subdivided into one or more levels. If subcategories exist, a list of subcategories appears when you move the pointer over the category name in the left pane. For example, in the Stock Tool catalog, move the pointer over Modeling Tools to see the Mass Element Tools and 3D Solids subcategories. Displaying subcategories in a category
To open a category or subcategory, click it. For example, click Mass Element Tools to display the following window: Mass Element Tools category of the Stock Tool catalog
Associated with each item in the tool catalog is the following i-drop® icon: . You click the i-drop icon to drag a tool or other tool catalog item into the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop workspace or into another catalog, tool palette, or tool package. You can modify the contents and properties of a tool catalog if you are authorized to do so, unless the catalog is read-only. Read-only tool catalogs are identified in the Content Browser title bar when you open the catalog. A tool catalog category may contain more items than can fit on a page. If multiple pages are needed, navigation controls appear at the top and bottom of each page. The Mass Element Tools category shown earlier requires two pages to display its contents. You can specify the page to be displayed by clicking the page number or by clicking Next or Prev. (Note that these controls appear at the bottom of the page too.) You can also change the number of items that display on a Content Browser page. Specifying the Number of Rows on a Content Browser Page Use this procedure to specify the number of rows that display on a Content Browser page.
1 Click to display the catalog library.
80 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
2 Click
to display the Content Browser Preferences dialog box.
3 In the Content Browser Preferences dialog box, enter the number of rows to be displayed on each page. You can specify up to 100 rows, and you must specify at least 5.
4 Click OK.
Using the Items in a Tool Catalog
To use a tool catalog item in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, drag the item into the software's workspace. Dragging a tool palette into the workspace adds the tool palette to the default tool palette set.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop tool palette set, with added tool palette
Once added to the tool palette set, the palette remains a part of the set and is available each time you start Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
You can drag a tool directly into the drawing area from the Content Browser. For example, with the Mass Element Tools category open in the Stock Tool Catalog, drag the Arch tool into the drawing area with the i-drop® icon to begin adding an Arch mass element to your drawing.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop tool palette set, with added tool palette
If you use a tool frequently, you will save time if you add the tool to a palette in the tool palette set, where you can access it without using the Content Browser.
Using the Items in a Tool Catalog | 81
Managing Your Catalog Library
You manage your catalog library by adding and deleting tool catalogs and website links and by setting catalog properties as needed. You can create a new catalog or customize existing ones to meet your needs. You can reorganize tool catalogs by moving and copying items among them.
Creating a New Tool Catalog
Use this procedure to create a new tool catalog in your catalog library.
1 Click to display the catalog library.
2 Click
to create a catalog.
3 In the Add Catalog dialog box, select Create a new catalog.
4 Enter a name for your tool catalog.
Tool catalog names can include spaces and can contain any characters except the following:\ / : * ? " < > |
NOTE The full path name of the catalog file cannot exceed 255 characters, so be careful about using long catalog names.
The name you assign is used for both the file containing the catalog definition and the folder containing the catalog's contents. The name is also used in the title identifying the tool catalog in the catalog library. You can change the title displayed in the catalog library without affecting the file and folder name. For information about changing the title, see "Editing Tool Catalog Properties" on page 89.
5 Identify the folder in which to store your tool catalog:
If you want to...
Then...
store the tool catalog in the default location
click OK.
store the tool catalog in a different location
click Browse, select the folder in which to store the catalog, and then click OK.
The tool catalog is displayed in the catalog library with the following default graphic image:
. For information
about changing the graphic image and other tool catalog properties, see "Editing Tool Catalog Properties" on page 89.
Creating a Tool Catalog from Content Drawings
Use this procedure to create a new tool catalog based on existing standards from the styles in one or more drawings. You specify the styles from which tools will be created and whether the new tools are organized in categories or palettes. Note that Content Browser does not have to be open to create a tool catalog.
WARNING Converting large numbers of tools can slow down your computer considerably. Depending on your processor and RAM equipment the conversion process can take a long time and the application may appear to be non-responsive. To avoid this, do not convert more than 3000 tools in one Tool Catalog Generator session. Instead, break up the source drawings, and use multiple instances of Tool Catalog Generator to achieve the conversion.
1 Click CAD Manager menu Tool Catalog Generator.
NOTE If the CAD Manager menu is not visible in your menu bar, click Window menu Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
82 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
2 Under Catalog, select Create New Catalog. 3 Enter a name for the new catalog. 4 Click Browse to define the location of the catalog.
By default, a new catalog is saved in C:\My Documents.
5 Under Content Source, specify whether you want the new catalog to be created from multiple drawings in a folder or from a single drawing. Then, enter the path for the folder or drawing.
NOTE When you specify a folder as the catalog source, any nested folders are included in the new tool catalog.
6 Under Tool Organization, specify how you want the tools organized in the new catalog.
To organize the new tools by their source drawing, select Group tools by source drawing. This option is well suited for a tool catalog that is generated from a number of styles drawings. The resulting tools could be placed in categories or palettes named "Wall Styles - Concrete (Imperial)", "Wall Styles - Brick (Imperial)," etc.
To organize the new tools by their object type, select Group tools by object type. This option is well suited if you want to merge styles from various drawings into palettes or categories. The resulting tools will be placed in categories or palettes named "Walls", "Doors," etc.
NOTE If both options are enabled, the catalog is first grouped by the drawings and then by the object type, generating categories from the drawings, and palettes from the object types. This is implemented because palettes cannot be nested. In this case the radio buttons for categories and palettes are disabled, and the Create tools in palettes option is selected for the catalog.
NOTE If neither of the two options is enabled, all new tools will be generated in the top category of the catalog.
To organize the new tools in categories, select Create Tools in Categories. If you select Group tools by source drawing, a category will be created for each source drawing. If you select Group tools by object type, a category will be created for each object type.
To organize the new tools in palettes, select Create Tools in Palettes. If you have selected to group tools by their source drawing, then for each source drawing a palette will be created. If you have selected to group tools by their object type, then for each object type a palette will be created.
7 Under Create tools for the following objects, select the object styles you want to appear as tools in the new catalog.
Creating a Tool Catalog from Content Drawings | 83
By default, all available style types are selected. Use the Select All and Clear All buttons as necessary. 8 Click OK.
A progress bar in the application status bar informs you of the progress of the catalog generation. This can take a few moments for a large catalog. NOTE Each category and each palette is created in its own ATC file. The category and palette ATC files are stored in the Palettes or Categories subfolders within the folder where the new catalog is created. After creating a new catalog, you can add it to your Content Browser library, as described in "Adding an Existing Tool Catalog to Your Catalog Library" on page 85.
Adding Tools from Content Drawings to a Tool Catalog
Use this procedure to add tools from one or more drawings to an existing catalog. WARNING Converting large numbers of tools can slow down your computer considerably. Depending on your processor and RAM equipment the conversion process can take a long time and the application may appear to be non-responsive. To avoid this, do not convert more than 3000 tools in one Tool Catalog Generator session. Instead, break up the source drawings, and use multiple instances of Tool Catalog Generator to achieve the conversion.
1 On the CAD Manager menu Tool Catalog Generator. NOTE If the CAD Manager menu is not visible in your menu bar, click Window menu Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
2 Under Catalog, select Add to an existing catalog. 3 Enter the name and the path of the catalog. 4 Click Append to Catalog and select Ignore Duplicate Styles if you want existing styles from being overwritten
by styles with the same name and file path from the appended drawing. If you clear Ignore Duplicate Styles, existing styles are overwritten with styles from the appended drawing if they have the same name and file path. 5 If you want to overwrite the existing catalog, click Overwrite Catalog. This deletes the whole catalog and replaces it with the palettes, categories, and tools from the source drawing(s). WARNING You should use that option with great caution, as it will delete the complete existing catalog. If you just want to overwrite tools with their up-to-date versions from a content drawing, select Append to Catalog instead, and verify that Ignore Duplicate Styles is cleared.
84 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
6 Under Content Source, select a project standards drawing or standards folder to use as source for the new tools.
If you want to...
Then...
add tools from multiple drawings in a folder select Create from drawings in folder, and then enter the path and folder name under Type the source location.
add tools from a single drawing
select Create from drawing, and then enter the path and drawing name under Type the source drawing.
7 Under Tool Organization, specify how the tools should be organized in the catalog.
To organize the resulting tools by their source drawing, select Group tools by source drawing. This option is well suited for a tool catalog that is generated from a number of styles drawings. The resulting tools could be placed in categories or palettes named "Wall Styles - Concrete (Imperial)," "Wall Styles - CMU (Imperial)," etc.
To organize the resulting tools by their object type, select Group tools by object type. This option is well suited if you want to merge styles from various drawings into a new catalog. The resulting tools will be placed in categories or palettes named "Walls," Doors," etc.
NOTE If both options are enabled, then the tools are first grouped by the drawings and then by the object type, generating categories from the drawings, and palettes from the object types. This is implemented because palettes cannot be nested. In this case the radio buttons below are disabled and the Create tools in palettes option is selected for the tools.
NOTE If neither of the two options are enabled, all new tools will be generated in the top category of the catalog.
To organize the new tools in categories, select Create Tools in Categories. If you have selected to group tools by their source drawing, then for each source drawing a category will be created. If you have selected to group tools by their object type, then for each object type a category will be created.
To organize the new tools in palettes, select Create Tools in Palettes. If you have selected to group tools by their source drawing, then for each source drawing a palette will be created. If you have selected to group tools by their object type, then for each object type a palette will be created.
8 Under Create tools for the following objects, select which object styles should appear as tools in the catalog. By default, all available style types are selected. Use the Select All and Clear All buttons as needed to make your selections.
9 Click OK. A progress bar in the application status bar indicates the progress of the tool generation. When a large number of tools are being added, the process can take a few moments.
NOTE Each category and each palette is created in its own ATC file. The category and palette ATC files are stored in the Palettes or Categories subfolders in the folder in which the new catalog is created.
Adding an Existing Tool Catalog to Your Catalog Library
Use this procedure to add an existing tool catalog to your catalog library. Adding a tool catalog to a catalog library does not physically move or copy any files. Instead, a pointer to the catalog's location is added to the catalog library. If you add a tool catalog that resides on another computer, and then a tool in that catalog is updated, you always reference the latest version of the tool in the catalog library.
Adding an Existing Tool Catalog to Your Catalog Library | 85
1 Click to display the catalog library.
2 Click
to create a catalog.
3 In the Add Catalog dialog box, select Add an existing catalog or website.
4 Enter the location of the tool catalog you want to add, or click Browse and select a catalog.
Tool catalog files typically have the extension .atc.
5 Click OK.
NOTE Alternatively, you can drag and drop an ATC file from Windows Explorer to the Content Browser library pane.
Creating a Catalog Install File
Use this procedure to create a registry file that adds catalogs to other users' Content Browser libraries. When you add a catalog in Content Browser, it is automatically added to your Content Browser library (CBL). However, as a CAD manager, you might also want to automatically install new catalogs into other user's libraries. In that case, you can either add a pointer to a catalog in an existing registry file, or create a new registry file that adds that catalog to the user's library.
Creating a catalog install file
1 Click on the Navigation toolbar to open Content Browser. 2 Select the catalog that you want to add to a registry file.
When you add a catalog to a registry file, make sure that the network location of the catalog and all its affiliated files can be accessed by all users to whom you want the catalog distributed.
3 Shift-Rightclick the catalog.
4 Click Convert to Registry File. If you want to... create a new registry file for the catalog
enter the catalog into an existing registry file
Then...
browse to the desired folder location, enter a name for the registry file, and click Open. In that case, a new registry file (REG) is created, containing the registry information for the selected catalog.
browse for the registry file, select it and click Open. In that case, an entry containing the registry information for the selected catalog is appended to the registry file.
NOTE When you select an existing registry file, the file is not overwritten, as in standard Windows Save dialogs; the catalog entry is simply added to the registry file. If you want to overwrite an existing registry file, you need to delete it from Windows Explorer, and then create a new one of the same name.
86 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
Entering a catalog in a users' library
5 To enter the catalog reference into the local registry, and thereby into the user's catalog library (CBL), run the new registry file.
6 Either place the generated REG file on a generally accessible network folder, or copy it to the local user machine where the catalog should be entered.
7 Double-click the REG file on the user's computer. 8 Click Yes when asked whether you want to add the information into the local registry.
The catalog is entered into the users' registry and catalog library.
Catalog added to the registry
Publishing Tool Catalogs
The Publish Catalog feature helps you make tool catalogs available for use by multiple users on a network. You can move and copy catalogs or make them available from their current location. The feature handles dependent file paths during the publish catalog operation.
1 Right-click the tool catalog you want to publish, and click Publish <catalog_name>.
2 In the Publish Tool Catalog - Step 1 of 4 dialog box, do one of the following:
If you want to... move the catalog to a new location when publishing it
Then... click Move it to a new location.
copy the catalog to a different location
click Copy to another location.
publish the catalog from its current location
click Leave it in its current location.
3 Click Next. If you are moving or copying the catalog, you are prompted to specify the destination location.
4 In the Publish Tool Catalog - Step 2 of 4 dialog box, specify the destination for the tool catalog. You can enter a path, or click [...] to navigate to the destination location. You can specify an existing location or create a new folder.
5 Click Next. 6 In the Publish Tool Catalog - Step 3 of 4 dialog box, specify the location for any dependent files.
You can enter a path, or click [...] to navigate to the destination location. You can specify an existing location or create a new folder.
Publishing Tool Catalogs | 87
Dependent files contain information referenced by the tools; for example, style information. If you select the option Automatically move (or copy) tool dependent files into the above folder to be referenced by the publish catalog, the feature attempts to copy all of the dependent files referenced in the catalog to the dependent file location you specify. If you do not select this option, you must verify that the files are already present in the dependent location. If you select the option Report invalid catalog references, the feature generates a report of any dependent files it cannot locate.
7 To have the publish catalog feature move (or copy) dependent files, click Automatically move (or copy) tool dependent files into the above folder to be referenced by the publish catalog.
8 Click Report invalid catalog references to generate an HTML file containing any dependent files that were not found, and then click Next.
9 In the Publish Tool Catalog - Step 4 of 4 dialog box, do one of the following:
If users will...
Then...
access the catalog directly from the network location you specify
Click Directly from the location provided.
access the catalog from an alternate or aliased location
Click From an http:// site or mapped drive, and enter the location name.
10 To make the catalog read-only, select Set items in catalog to be read-only.
11 To prevent catalog items from refreshing when they are dropped in the workspace, select Set items in catalog to not be refreshable when drag/dropped into the workspace, and click Finish.
Individual users can specify the location of dependent files, such as styles for tools, on the AEC Content tab in the Options dialog box. The variable %AECCONTENT_DIR% is used for tool-dependent file references. This variable is updated to use the path specified. For example, <Style href="%AECCONTENT_DIR%\<DoorStyles\DoorStyles.dwg"/>. For more information, see "Changing the AEC Content Settings" on page 115.
Adding a Website to Your Catalog Library
Use this procedure to add a website link to your catalog library. Links are useful for websites containing Autodesk® Architectural Desktop tools and content that you can download using i-drop® technology.
You can also add a website link by dragging the URL from the Address bar of Internet Explorer into the Content Browser window.
1 Click to display the catalog library.
2 Click
to create a catalog.
3 In the Add Catalog dialog box, select Add an existing catalog or website.
4 Enter the location of the website to link:
If you want to...
Then...
link to a website on the Internet or on an intranet
enter the URL of the website, including the http:// prefix.
TIP Here is the easiest way to specify a URL: 1. Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer. 2. Open the web page you want to link to. 3. Copy the URL from your browser's address bar. 4. Paste the URL into the Add Catalog dialog box.
link to a web page in an HTML file on your computer or on enter the file name, or click Browse and select the file you
your network
want to link to.
5 Click OK.
88 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
The link to the website is represented in the catalog library by a default graphic image, which you can change. For information about changing this image and other Tool Catalog properties, see "Editing Tool Catalog Properties" on page 89.
Opening Web Pages in the Content Browser Use this procedure to open a web page through a website link in your catalog library.
TIP If you have any problem viewing a web page in the Content Browser window, try opening the page in Internet Explorer.
Move your pointer over the website link you want to open, and do one of the following:
If you want to... view the web page in the Content Browser window view the web page in a new Content Browser window view the web page in a new Internet Explorer window
Then... click the link. right-click the link, and click Open in New Window. right-click the link, and click Open With Internet Explorer.
Editing Tool Catalog Properties
Use this procedure to view and modify the properties of a tool catalog. If you have write access to the tool catalog, you can select a different source file or target, and you can change the cover page.
1 With the catalog library open in the right pane of the Content Browser, right-click the desired tool catalog, and click Properties.
2 Edit the properties:
If you want to...
Then...
change the graphic image that represents the tool catalog in the catalog library
click the image in the Properties dialog box, and then select a graphic file to use. You can use a BMP, JPEG, PNG, or TIFF file for your graphic. The graphic image is displayed at 90 × 120 pixels. If you specify an image of a different size, the image is scaled to fit.
NOTE The graphic file you select is copied into the tool catalog's image folder.
change the title displayed beneath the tool catalog's graphic enter a new title. You can also right-click the catalog and click
image in the catalog library
Rename <catalog_name>.
change the descriptive text that displays when you move the enter a new description. pointer over the tool catalog's graphic image
change the tool catalog file or website
enter the new file in File or Target, or click Browse to select a tool catalog file.
change or specify the HTML file that displays when the tool enter the new HTML file in Cover Page, or click Browse to
catalog is opened
select a cover page.
change the publisher of the tool catalog
enter a new publisher name.
change the type designation for the catalog
select a type from the Type list. For information on assigning types to catalogs, see "Creating Catalog Types" on page 90.
define that tools and palettes from this catalog should be automatically linked to the Content Browser when dropped onto the tool palettes set of Autodesk Architectural Desktop
select Link items when added to workspace. For information on linking tools to the Content Browser, see "Using Tool Catalog Items in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 99 and "Working with Tools from a Central Location" on page 50.
Editing Tool Catalog Properties | 89
If you want to...
Then...
define that tools and palettes from this catalog should not retain a link to the Content Browser when dropped onto the tool palettes set of Autodesk Architectural Desktop
clear Link items when added to workspace. Inserting tools without retaining a link to Content Browser would be the right choice if you want to make changes to a tool in Autodesk Architectural Desktop that should not overwritten by the tool properties in Content Browser; also, unlinked tools create a better general performance in Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
3 Click OK.
Creating Catalog Types
Use this procedure to create catalog types. You can assign a type property to a catalog and then sort and filter your catalogs by type.
1 Click to display the catalog library.
2 Click to display the Content Browser Preferences dialog box. 3 In the Catalog Types area, under New Catalog Type, enter the name of the type you want to create. 4 Click OK. 5 The new type is added to the list of available types. You can now assign this type to catalogs by editing
their properties. Once the type is assigned to a catalog, you can sort or filter the display of catalogs in the Library View by this type.
6 To remove a type, click the type name and click Remove.
NOTE The Type catalog property is cleared for any catalogs associated with this type.
Sorting Catalogs in the Library View
Use this procedure to sort the display of catalogs by last-used date, publisher, title, or type.
1 Click to display the catalog library.
2 With the catalog library open in the right pane of the Content Browser, position the pointer over Sort in the left pane.
3 From the list of available sort options, click the method you want to use to sort catalogs in the library.
If you want to...
Then...
sort chronologically by when you last used each catalog
click By Last Used.
sort alphabetically by the publisher name of each catalog, and then by title
click By Publisher. If the catalog does not have a publisher property, the catalog appears at the bottom of the display.
sort alphabetically by catalog title
click By Title.
sort by catalog type
click By Type. If the catalog does not have a type assigned, the catalog appears at the bottom of the display.
Filtering Catalogs in the Library View
Use this procedure to filter the display of catalogs in the Library View.
1 Click to display the catalog library.
90 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
2 With the catalog library open in the right pane of the Content Browser, position the pointer over Filter in the left pane.
3 From the list of available types, click the type of catalog you want to view. To display all the catalogs in the library, click All Catalogs.
NOTE To filter catalogs by Type, you must assign a type to each catalog in the library. For more information, see "Creating Catalog Types" on page 90.
Removing a Tool Catalog or Website Link
Use this procedure to remove a tool catalog or website link from your catalog library. When you remove a tool catalog or website link, only a pointer to the item is removed; no files or web pages are physically deleted.
1 With the catalog library open in the right pane of the Content Browser, right-click the tool catalog or website link to delete, and click Remove <catalog_name> from Library.
2 When prompted, click Yes to confirm deletion, or click No to cancel deletion.
Opening a Different Catalog Library
Use this procedure to open a catalog library other than your personal catalog library, or to reopen your personal catalog library. A catalog library is stored in a file having the extension .cbl. The default file name for your personal catalog library is ContentBrowserLibrary.cbl; it is stored in the folder My Documents\My AEC Content Browser Library.
1 Click to display the current open catalog library. 2 Right-click the catalog library name, and click Open New Library. 3 In the Open dialog box, select the catalog library that you want to open.
Renaming a Catalog Library
Use this procedure to rename the currently open catalog library. The name change affects the title of the catalog library displayed in the Content Browser, but no files are renamed.
1 Click to display the catalog library.
2 Click to display the Content Browser Preferences dialog box. 3 Under Library Name, enter the new library name. 4 Click OK.
Searching for Items in a Tool Catalog
You can use the Search feature to help you find a particular tool. You can search across multiple catalogs or search a particular tool catalog, tool palette, or tool package. For example, if you are looking for a tool to help you create a 3D desk, you could search on the keywords 3D desk. The search applies to all the catalogs currently displayed (filtered). Narrow the search by filtering the catalog display. The Search feature looks at the text in the following properties of tool catalog items for the keywords you specify:
Name Description
Removing a Tool Catalog or Website Link | 91
Keywords
The Search tool is only as helpful as the tool names and descriptions that you assign. A tool name should indicate the tool's function, and the description should indicate the tool's use.
If you enter a search term containing more than one word, the Search feature looks for items containing both words. You can also join multiple search words with AND, &, or +. To retrieve items containing any of the search words, enter OR or | between search terms. To exclude a word from the search, precede the word with !. Use * as a wild-card string and ? as a wild-card character. Search is not case sensitive by default. To use a particular case in a search, surround the word in quotes.
Search results are displayed in the right pane of the Content Browser window. The following illustration shows the results of a search on the term 3D desk in the Content catalogs group:
The search term and the number of items found are listed on the line below the tool catalog name. If multiple pages are returned, you can specify the page to display by clicking the page number or by clicking Next or Prev.
Performing a Search
Use this procedure to search across multiple catalogs or to search all or part of a tool catalog. 1 Filter the library to display the catalogs you want to search:
If you want to...
Then...
search for tools across multiple catalogs
display the catalog library and then filter the display to include the catalogs you want to search.
search for tools only within a specific catalog
open the tool catalog you want to search.
search for tools only within a specific category and its subcategories
open the category you want to search, and select the box labeled in <category name>.
search for tools only on a specific tool palette
open the tool palette you want to search, and select the box labeled in <palette name>.
search for tools anywhere in the open catalog
leave the box under the search term clear.
2 Enter the terms to search for under Search.
3 Click GO. Items that match your search criteria are displayed in the right pane of the Content Browser. To go to the catalog containing an item, click that item. To view the source catalog of an item, right-click the item.
4 To perform another search, click the button located near the top of the left pane.
Adding Content to a Tool Catalog
Tool catalogs can contain tools, tool palettes, and tool packages, which may be organized into categories.
Categorizing the Items in a Tool Catalog You can define categories and subcategories in a tool catalog to organize a large number of items. For example, the Stock Tool catalog contains dozens of tools. If these tools were not grouped into categories, you would have to scroll
92 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
through page after page to find a particular tool. To make it easier to find tools, the Stock Tool catalog is organized into categories and subcategories, as shown in the following diagram:
Category Name Architectural Object Tools
Contents
Wall, Curtain Wall, and Curtain Wall Unit Opening, Door, Window, and Door/Window Assembly Roof, Roof Slab and Slab Ceiling Grid Stair, Stair Tower, and Railing Space and Space Boundary Structural Members and Column Grid
Drafting Tools
AEC Dimensions Callouts and Title Mark Text, Leaders, Keynotes, Legend Masking Block Hatching and Gradient Chamfer and Fillet Shrink Wrap Tool Welding Symbols
Helper Tools
AEC Entity Reference AEC Polygon Camera Horizontal and Vertical Design Sections Hidden Line Removal Tool and Napkin Sketch
Measurement Tools
Area, Distance, and Point ID
Modeling Tools
Mass Element Tools: Box, Arch, Pyramid, Extrusion, and so on Mass Group Convert to Mass Elements
3D Solids Tools: 3D Solid Box, Cylinder, Convert to 3D Solids
Adding Content to a Tool Catalog | 93
Category Name Parametric Layout and Anchoring Tools
Scheduling and Reporting Tools
Contents Layout Curve Layout Grid (2D and 3D) Object Anchor, Node Anchor, Cell Anchor, Volume Anchor
Space Evaluation Display Theme Tag Tool Schedule Table Property Data Browse and Renumber Tools
About Tool Palettes
A tool palette is a collection of tools used to support a task. For example, a palette might contain tools to create the different types of doors (single-hinged, double-hinged, revolving, and so on) used in a building project. Storing a tool palette in a tool catalog makes the palette available to multiple users.
The date and time at which the tool palette was created and last modified are identified in the Tool Palette Properties dialog box. To view the dialog box, right-click the tool palette, and click Properties. For information about other tool palette properties, see "Adding a Tool Palette to a Tool Catalog" on page 95.
About Tool Packages
A tool package is a group of tools stored together for distribution. For example, a package might contain a set of productivity tools and utilities.
The date and time at which the tool package was created and last modified are identified in the Tool Package Properties dialog box. To view the dialog box, right-click the tool package, and click Properties. For information about other tool package properties, see "Adding a Tool Package to a Tool Catalog" on page 95.
Customizing Tools
You customize a tool by copying it to a palette in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop tool palette set, modifying the tool's properties, and then copying it back to its original location in the tool catalog.
Defining Categories in a Tool Catalog
Use this procedure to define categories and subcategories in a tool catalog. Categories are listed in the left pane of the Content Browser, below the name of the open tool catalog.
1 Open the tool catalog in which to define categories. 2 Select the location for the new category:
If the tool catalog...
Then...
already has one or more categories defined and you want to in the left pane of the Content Browser, navigate to the
add a subcategory
desired category, and click the category name.
is not currently divided into categories and is open to a cover in the left pane of the Content Browser, click the catalog
page
name.
is not currently divided into categories and the content page do nothing; this is where you define your first category. is displayed
3 In the right pane of the Content Browser window, right-click a blank area, and click Add Category. 4 Enter a name for the category, and click OK.
94 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
5 To define additional categories and subcategories, continue from step 2.
Adding a Tool Palette to a Tool Catalog
Use this procedure to add a tool palette to a tool catalog. You must have write access to the tool catalog in order to add a palette. You can also drag a tool palette from the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop workspace into a tool catalog. Click the tab of the tool palette to drag it.
1 In the Content Browser, open the tool catalog in which to add the tool palette. To add the palette to a specific category in the catalog, open that category. If no graphics appear at the bottom of the left pane, the tool catalog is read-only, and you cannot add a tool palette.
2 Click in the left pane of the Content Browser.
3 In the Tool Palette Properties dialog box, enter a name for the tool palette, and enter any other desired properties:
If you want to...
Then...
add a description to be displayed in the tool catalog and queried in catalog search operations
enter a description.
define terms that will be found during a search of the tool catalog
enter the terms for keywords.
identify the publisher of the tool palette
enter a publisher.
Adding a Tool Package to a Tool Catalog
Use this procedure to add a tool package to a tool catalog. You must have write access to the tool catalog in order to add a package.
1 In the Content Browser, open the tool catalog in which to add the tool package. To add the package to a specific category in the catalog, open that category.
2 Click
in the left pane of the Content Browser.
3 In the Package Properties dialog box, enter a name for the tool package, and enter any other desired properties:
If you want to...
Then...
add a description to be displayed in the tool catalog and queried in catalog search operations
enter a description.
define terms that will be found during a search of the tool package
enter the terms for keywords.
identify the publisher of the tool package
enter a publisher.
If the tool catalog is read-only, the Package Properties dialog box is displayed, but you cannot enter anything in it.
Adding Tools to a Tool Catalog
Use this procedure to add a tool to a tool catalog or to a tool palette or tool package stored in a catalog. You must have write access to the tool catalog in order to add a tool to it.
Adding a Tool Palette to a Tool Catalog | 95
You can also drag a tool from a tool palette in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop workspace to a tool catalog in the Content Browser.
1 In the Content Browser, open the tool catalog in which to add a tool. If you are adding the tool to a specific category in the catalog or to a palette or package in a specific category, open that category.
2 Double click the image to open the palette or package if you are adding the tool to a tool palette or tool package.
3 In the Autodesk Architectural Desktop workspace, open the tool palette that contains the tool to add to the tool catalog.
4 Right-click the tool, and click Copy. 5 In the right pane of the Content Browser window, right-click in a blank area, and click Paste.
NOTE If there is no Paste option on the shortcut menu, then the pointer is probably positioned over a tool, even though the space may appear to be blank. Move the pointer and try again.
Copying and Moving Tool Palettes and Tool Packages
Use this procedure to copy or move tool palettes or tool packages between tool catalogs or between categories in the same catalog. To copy an item, you must have write access to the catalog you are copying to. To move an item, you must have write access to both the catalog you are copying from and the catalog you are copying to.
You can also open multiple Content Browser windows and drag tool palettes and tool packages from one window to another. For information about using multiple windows to copy and move items, see "Dragging Catalog Items Between Content Browser Windows" on page 103.
1 Open the tool catalog containing the tool palette or tool package to copy or move. If the item is located in a specific category of the catalog, open that category.
2 Right-click the item, and select an action:
If you want to...
add a copy of the tool palette or tool package in another location
Then... click Copy.
move the tool palette or tool package to another location, click Cut. deleting it from its original location
3 Select the item's destination: If the destination is... a category within the current tool catalog another tool catalog
a category in another tool catalog
Then...
click that category in the left pane of the Content Browser window.
click
to return to the catalog library, and then click the
tool catalog.
click
to return to the catalog library, click the tool
catalog you are copying to, and then select its category in
the left pane of the Content Browser window.
4 In the right pane of the Content Browser window, right-click in a blank area, and click Paste.
NOTE If there is no Paste option on the shortcut menu, then the pointer is probably positioned over a catalog item, even though the space may appear to be blank. Move the pointer and try again.
96 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
Copying and Moving Tools
Use this procedure to copy or move tools between tool palettes, tool packages, or tool catalogs.
You can also open multiple Content Browser windows and drag items from one window to another. For information about using multiple windows to copy and move items, see "Working with Multiple Content Browser Windows" on page 102.
1 Open the tool catalog containing the tool to copy or move.
2 Open the item containing the tool to copy or move:
If the tool is in... a category of the tool catalog
Then... open the category.
a tool palette in the tool catalog
open the category for that tool palette, if necessary, and then click the tool palette.
a tool package in the tool catalog
open the category for that tool package, if necessary, and then click the tool package.
3 Right-click the tool, and select an action:
If you want to... add a copy of the tool in another location
Then... click Copy.
move the tool to another location, deleting it from its original click Cut. location
4 If the destination of the tool is in a different tool catalog, click then click the tool catalog to open it.
5 Open the destination of the tool:
to return to the catalog library, and
If the destination is... a category of the tool catalog
Then... open the category.
a tool palette in the tool catalog
open the category for that tool palette, if necessary, and then click the tool palette.
a tool package in the tool catalog
open the category for that tool package, if necessary, and then click the tool package.
6 In the right pane of the Content Browser window, right-click in a blank area, and click Paste.
NOTE If there is no Paste option on the shortcut menu, then the pointer is probably positioned over a catalog item, even though the space may appear to be blank. Move the pointer and try again.
Tool File Dependencies
A tool definition may refer to drawing files. For example, a slab tool may refer to a style that is defined in a specific drawing file. If the file resides on a remote server, or is referenced through a drive letter that is mapped to a remote server, the file is copied to the destination catalog when you copy or move the tool. If the drawing containing the style is not available at the time the tool is copied (for example, if the server is down, or the drawing file is referenced by a drive letter that the server is not currently mapped to), the message shown in the following illustration is displayed:
Copying and Moving Tools | 97
The error message identifies the file or files that were not available. The tool is still copied to the destination folder, but it may no longer behave the same as the original tool. To correct this, reestablish the connection to the server containing the dependent files, and copy the tool again.
Customizing a Tool
Use this procedure to modify a tool that is stored in a tool catalog. When you begin this procedure, both the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop tool palette set and the Content Browser window should be visible, so that you can drag items between them.
1 In the Content Browser, open the tool catalog that contains the tool to customize. If the tool is located in a specific category of the catalog, open that category.
2 Move the pointer over the i-drop® icon next to the tool you want, so that the pointer image changes to
an eyedropper ( ). 3 Click the eyedropper and drag it to a palette in the tool palette set.
If the tool palette does not accept the tool, it might be because the palette is set to allow updates only from a linked tool palette in a tool catalog. To check this, right-click on the palette, click Properties, and look at the Refresh from setting. If Refresh from is selected, the palette is linked to a palette in a tool catalog. To break the link, clear Refresh from. For more information about linked tool palettes, see "Using the Items in a Tool Catalog" on page 81.
4 Right-click the copy of the tool in the tool palette set, and click Properties. 5 In the Tool Properties worksheet, clear Refresh from.
If Refresh from is selected, the tool is linked to its source in the tool catalog and can be updated only from the source tool.
6 Make any property changes, and then click OK. 7 Drag the tool from the tool palette set back to its original location in the Content Browser.
TIP Right-click the title bar of the Autodesk Content Browser, and select Always on Top before dragging the tool to the Content Browser.
8 When prompted to confirm catalog item replacement, click Yes.
Deleting Tool Catalog Items
Use this procedure to delete a tool palette, tool package, or tool in a tool catalog. You must have write access to the tool catalog in order to delete items.
1 Open the tool catalog containing the item to delete. If the item is located in a specific category of the catalog, open the category.
2 Right-click the item, and click Delete. 3 When prompted, click Yes to delete the item, or click No to cancel deletion.
98 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
Using Tool Catalog Items in Autodesk Architectural Desktop
Tools from catalogs can be used immediately in the drawing area or stored in a palette in the tool palette set. You can add a catalog tool palette or tools in a tool package to the tool palette set.
TIP To keep the Content Browser window in view while other applications are active, right-click the title bar of the Autodesk Content Browser, and select Always on Top.
Linked and Unlinked Tool Catalog Items
When you copy a tool or tool palette from the Content Browser to the tool palette set, you can choose whether the copy retains its association with the original. Linking the copy to the original means that, if you copy the item back to its original location, the Content Browser assumes you are updating the original item. This is the default behavior. If you change the original, you can update a linked copy using a single mouse click. To make working easier for you, you can set a whole tool catalog to be linked or unlinked. When a tool catalog is linked, all tools and palettes contained in it are dropped into the Autodesk Architectural Desktop palettes set as linked items by default. When a tool catalog has been set to unlinked, all items in it are dropped as unlinked.
An unlinked copy of a tool or tool palette is treated as a new item, with no relationship to the original item. If you copy an unlinked item back to its original location in a tool catalog, the Content Browser simply adds it to the catalog; you end up with two copies of that item with the same name.
Any time you copy an item from the Stock Tool catalog to the tool palette set, the item is treated as unlinked.
You can tell whether an item in the tool palette set is linked by right-clicking the item and clicking Properties. If Refresh from is activated and a source is listed, as shown below, the item is linked.
Refresh from property of a linked palette
If you select Enable Auto-Refresh, each time you start the software, any linked tool palettes will be updated to reflect any changes made to the tool palette and its contents in the tool catalog.
Using a Tool in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace
Use this procedure to use a tool from a tool catalog in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop workspace. You can also copy tools stored in a tool package to a tool palette in the tool palette set.
1 Open the tool catalog containing the tool you want to use. If the tool is located in a specific category of the catalog, open that category.
2 Move the pointer over the i-drop® icon next to the tool, so that the pointer image changes to an eyedropper
( ).
To select multiple tools to copy, press and hold CTRL while clicking each tool; then position the eyedropper over any of the selected tools. You can also select all the tools in the current category by right-clicking and clicking Select All.
3 Drag the eyedropper according to the desired action:
If you want to... use the tool immediately
Then... click the eyedropper and drag it into the drawing area.
Using Tool Catalog Items in Autodesk Architectural Desktop | 99
If you want to...
store a linked copy of the tool on a tool palette in the tool palette set
Then...
click the eyedropper and drag it to a tool palette in the tool palette set.
NOTE A linked copy will only be created when the tool catalog has been set to linked. If the catalog has been set to non-linked, any tool from that catalog will be inserted as nonlinked tool onto the Architectural Desktop tool palettes set. For more information about linking tool catalogs see "Editing Tool Catalog Properties" on page 89.
create an unlinked copy of the tool on a tool palette in the press and hold alt. Then click the eyedropper, and drag it to
tool palette set
a tool palette in the tool palette set.
NOTE If the tool catalog containing the tool has been set to unlinked, you do not need to hold down alt while dragging the tool. It will be inserted as unlinked in any case.
NOTE If a tool palette does not accept a tool, it might be because the palette is set to allow updates only from a linked tool palette in a tool catalog. To check this, right-click on the palette, click Properties, and look at the Refresh from setting. If Refresh from is selected, the palette is linked to a palette in a tool catalog. To break the link, clear Refresh from.
Copying a Tool Palette to the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace
Use this procedure to store a copy of a tool palette in the tool palette set.
You can create a linked or unlinked copy of the tool palette. A linked copy remains connected to the original in the tool catalog, so that you can easily update the copy with any changes made to the original. An unlinked copy is treated as a new tool palette, with no relationship to the original. For more information about linked and unlinked tool palettes, see "Using the Items in a Tool Catalog" on page 81.
1 Open the tool catalog containing the tool palette to copy to the tool palette set. If the palette is located in a specific category of the catalog, open that category.
2 Move the pointer over the i-drop® icon next to the tool palette, so that the pointer image changes to an
eyedropper ( ).
To copy multiple tool palettes, press and hold CTRL while clicking each palette; then position the eyedropper over any of the selected palettes.
3 Drag the eyedropper according to the desired action:
If you want to...
Then...
store a linked copy of the tool palette in the tool palette set click the eyedropper and drag it to a tool palette in the tool palette set.
NOTE A linked palette will only be created when the tool catalog has been set to linked. If the catalog has been set to non-linked, any palette from that catalog will be inserted as non-linked tool palette onto the Architectural Desktop tool palettes set. For more information about linking tool catalogs see "Editing Tool Catalog Properties" on page 89.
100 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
If you want to...
Then...
create an unlinked copy of the tool palette in the tool palette press and hold alt. Then click the eyedropper, and drag it to
set
a tool palette in the tool palette set.
NOTE If the tool catalog containing the palette has been set to unlinked, you do not need to hold down alt while dragging the palette. It will be inserted as unlinked in any case.
Copying a Tool Package to the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace
Use this procedure to copy a tool package to a palette in the tool palette set.
You can create linked or unlinked copies of the tools in the package. A linked copy remains connected to the original in the tool catalog, so that you can easily update the copy with any changes made to the original. An unlinked copy is treated as a new tool, with no relationship to the original. For more information about linked and unlinked tools, see "Using the Items in a Tool Catalog" on page 81.
1 Open the tool catalog containing the tool package to copy into the tool palette set. If the package is located in a specific category of the catalog, open that category.
2 Move the pointer over the i-drop® icon next to the tool package, so that the pointer image changes to an
eyedropper ( ).
To copy multiple tool packages, press and hold CTRL while clicking each package; then position the eyedropper over any of the selected packages.
3 Drag the eyedropper according to the desired action:
If you want to...
Then...
store linked copies of the package's tools in the tool palette click the eyedropper and drag it to a tool palette in the tool
set
palette set.
NOTE Linked tools will only be created when the tool catalog has been set to linked. If the catalog has been set to nonlinked, any tool in that package will be inserted as non-linked tool package onto the Architectural Desktop tool palettes set. For more information about linking tool catalogs see "Editing Tool Catalog Properties" on page 89.
create unlinked copies of the package's tools in the tool palette set
press and hold alt. Then click the eyedropper, and drag it to a tool palette in the tool palette set.
NOTE If the tool catalog containing the package has been set to unlinked, you do not need to hold down alt while dragging the tool. It will be inserted as unlinked in any case.
Refreshing Linked Tools
Use this procedure to update a linked tool with the contents of its source copy in a tool catalog.
In the tool palette set, right-click the tool you want to refresh, and click Refresh Tool. If Refresh Tool is not listed on the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, in the Tool Properties worksheet, select Refresh from.
Copying a Tool Package to the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace | 101
Refreshing Linked Tool Palettes
Use this procedure to update a linked tool palette with the contents of its source copy in a tool catalog.
In the tool palette set, right-click the tool palette you want to refresh, and click Refresh Palette. If Refresh Palette is not listed on the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, in the Tool Palette Properties worksheet, select Refresh from.
Specifying Refresh Options for Linked Tool Palettes
Use this procedure to determine whether a linked tool palette and its tools are refreshed from the tool catalog when you start Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
1 In the tool palette set, right-click the desired tool palette, and click Properties.
2 Select an Auto-refresh option:
If you want...
Then...
the tool palette and all its tools to automatically refresh when you start Autodesk Architectural Desktop
select Enable Auto-refresh.
NOTE Refresh from must also be selected in order to enable Auto-refresh.
no automatic refreshing of the tool palette 3 Click OK.
clear Enable Auto-refresh.
Working with Multiple Content Browser Windows
You can open more than one copy of the Content Browser and you can move or copy items by dragging them between the windows. You can copy tool palettes, tool packages, and tools; you cannot copy tool catalogs between Content Browser windows. Only one catalog library can be open at any time. When you drag tool catalog items between Content Browser windows, the following rules apply:
If a different catalog is open in each Content Browser window, dragging an item copies it to the new location and leaves the original item in place.
If the same catalog is open in both Content Browser windows, dragging items from one window to the other moves the item (for example, from one category to another), removing the original item.
If you have the same tool catalog open in multiple windows, and you add an item to the catalog, the tool catalog display is updated in all open Content Browser windows.
Opening Additional Content Browser Windows
You can open a new instance of the Content Browser by pressing CTRL+N in the Content Browser. You can also open a specific tool catalog, tool palette, or tool package in a new Content Browser window.
Closing Content Browser Windows
Closing one Content Browser window has no effect on other Content Browser windows. You can close all open Content Browser windows at once by right-clicking in the title bar of any window and selecting Close All Windows.
Opening a Tool Catalog in a New Content Browser Window
Use one of the following procedures to open a tool catalog in a new Content Browser window or display an open catalog in a new Content Browser window.
With the catalog library displayed in the right pane of the Content Browser window, right-click the catalog to open, and click Open in New Window.
102 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
If a tool catalog is already open in the right pane of the Content Browser window, right-click in a blank area of the catalog, and click New Window.
You can open a specific category of the tool catalog in a new Content Browser window by opening the category.
Opening Catalog Items in a New Content Browser Window
Use this procedure to open a tool palette or tool package in a new Content Browser window. 1 Open the catalog containing the desired tool palette or tool package. If the item is located in a specific category of the catalog, open that category. 2 Right-click the tool palette or tool package, and click Open in New Window.
Dragging Catalog Items Between Content Browser Windows
Use this procedure to send tools, tool palettes, or tool packages from one catalog location to another by dragging them between two Content Browser windows. Moving an item removes it from its original location, while copying an item retains the original.
NOTE You must have write access to the original catalog before you can move it.
1 Open two Content Browser windows. 2 In the first Content Browser window, display the catalog item that you want to move or copy. 3 In the second Content Browser window, open the catalog, category, tool palette, or tool package to send
the item to (only tools can be sent to palettes and packages). 4 In the first Content Browser window, move the pointer over the i-drop icon associated with the item to
be moved, so that the pointer image changes to an eyedropper ( ).
If you want to... move an item to another location in the same catalog
copy an item to another location in the same catalog
Then...
right-click and drag the item to its destination catalog or category in the second Content Browser window, and click Copy Here.
press CTRL; then and drag the item to its destination catalog or category in the second Content Browser window.
move an item to a different catalog
copy an item to a different catalog
move a tool to a tool palette or tool package in the same catalog
press CTRL; then click and drag the item to its destination catalog or category in the second Content Browser window.
click and drag the item to its destination catalog or category in the second Content Browser window.
click and drag the item to its destination palette or package in the second Content Browser window.
copy a tool to a tool palette or tool package in the same catalog
move a tool to a tool palette or tool package in a different catalog
copy a tool to a tool palette or tool package in a different catalog
press CTRL; then click and drag the item to its destination palette or package in the second Content Browser window.
press CTRL; then click and drag the item to its destination palette or package in the second Content Browser window.
click and drag the item to its destination palette or package in the second Content Browser window.
Opening Catalog Items in a New Content Browser Window | 103
Starting the Content Browser from a Windows Command Prompt
Use this procedure to open the Content Browser from a Windows command prompt, even if Autodesk® Architectural Desktop is not currently open.
1 Click Start (Windows) menu Command Prompt. The location of the Command Prompt application varies from one version of Windows to another. It is most likely to be found either in Programs or on the Accessories menu within Programs.
2 At the command prompt, specify the Autodesk Architectural Desktop program folder as the current directory. 3 Enter the command aeccb, followed optionally by the path to the tool catalog you want the Content Browser
to open. For example: aeccb "c:\my documents\my aec content browser library\mystuff\mystuff.atc"
104 | Chapter 3 Content Browser
Creating and Saving Drawings
4
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawings have common properties that you can specify when you create a new drawing:
You can specify the template on which to base the drawing, or create a drawing that is not based on any template.
You can specify units, scale, layer standard and layer key style, and default display properties. You can specify options that control drawing performance and behavior.
You also have a number of options for saving files to use with other applications, including AutoCAD® (without Autodesk Architectural Desktop). These options are useful if you work with vendors and consultants who do not use Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
105
About Templates
The templates included in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop are drawing files with predefined settings that you use to create new drawings. Templates have drawing units, drawing scales, and annotation plot sizes that you would typically use in your drawings. Templates also contain a basic set of display configurations specific to working with architectural objects. You can get started on a drawing immediately by using a template. If you are working with a project, as described in "Drawing Management" on page 145, you assign templates to drawing types within the project. You can also assign display configurations directly to the project as a project standard. For more information, see "Configuring Project Standards" on page 331. Autodesk Architectural Desktop templates are installed in the folder \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template.
NOTE The Template folder is marked as hidden in Windows by default. To display hidden folders, enable that option on the View tab of the Folder Options command in Windows Explorer.
Templates contain several predefined display configurations. You can use the display configurations in the templates, or you can modify the display settings according to your office standards. If you are working with a project, as described in "Drawing Management" on page 145, you can assign display configurations directly to the project as a project standard. for more information, see "Configuring Project Standards" on page 331. By specifying a display configuration and a view direction, you can produce different architectural displays, such as floor plans, reflected plans, elevations, 3D models, or schematic displays. For more information, see "Display System" on page 411. If you are a new user of Autodesk Architectural Desktop, it is recommended that you use a template to create your drawings. When you become more familiar with the program, you can modify or create your own template if desired. A simple way to create your own templates is by importing settings from another template into the current drawing, and then saving the current drawing as a template. For more information about creating your own template, see "Use a Template File to Start a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help. For more information about importing display settings to a custom template, see "Using Display Settings in Multiple Drawings" on page 438 and "Creating and Editing Display Configurations" on page 426.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Creating a Drawing from a Template
Use this procedure to create a drawing from an Autodesk Architectural Desktop® template. The drawing templates provided with the software are located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template. Template files have the extension .dwt.
NOTE To create a drawing that you want to include in a project, see "Process Overview: Working in a Project Environment" on page 154.
1 On the File menu, click New.
NOTE Be sure to choose the New command from the File menu. The "new" icon on the Standard toolbar is actually a shortcut to the "QNew" command which automatically creates a new drawing based upon a default template file. You can configure the default template file used for QNew in the Options dialog. For more information, see "QNEW Command" in AutoCAD Help.
2 Select the template you want to use, or click Tools Find, and navigate to the template you want to use.
106 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
Selecting a template in the Select template dialog box
3 Click Open. To view or change the default drawing settings for units, scale, layers, and display, see "Setting Up a Drawing" on page 108.
Creating a Drawing Without a Template
Use this procedure to create a drawing that is not based on a template. Drawings that are not based on templates contain no customized or predefined settings, such as display configurations or Architectural units. Drawings without a template use the settings specified in the Drawing Setup dialog box. If you are a new user of Autodesk Architectural Desktop, use one of the templates provided to create drawings until you are comfortable working with display configurations and other settings. After you are more familiar with the program, you can create your own templates and customize your drawing settings. For more information, see "Creating a Drawing from a Template" on page 106. NOTE To create a drawing to include in a project, see "Process Overview: Working in a Project Environment" on page 154.
1 On the File menu, click New. 2 Click the arrow next to Open.
3 Select Open with no Template - Imperial to begin a drawing in imperial units, or select Open with no Template - Metric to begin a drawing in metric units. For more information, see "Setting Up a Drawing" on page 108.
Opening Legacy Drawings
Keep the following points in mind when you open legacy drawings (drawings from earlier releases of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop):
To upgrade a drawing from an earlier release to the current release, open the legacy drawing and then save the drawing. If the drawing references other legacy drawings, open and save those externally referenced (xref) drawings to upgrade them to the current release.
Release 2 drawings are always fully opened; the partial open option is not available. If you try to edit an external reference drawing within a legacy drawing, you are prompted to update the external
reference drawing to the current release. It is recommended that you use the same version for your external references and host drawings.
Creating a Drawing Without a Template | 107
If you open a legacy drawing in the Style Manager, the drawing is marked as read-only; you can copy styles from that drawing to other drawings, but if you copy styles to the legacy drawing, you have to save it under a new name and in the current release file format.
Open and save a legacy drawing in the current version if you want to be able to edit it in DesignCenter®.
IMPORTANT Any time you combine a drawing from a previous version with a drawing from the current version, you should first open the previous version drawing and save it. For example, before inserting a drawing as a block or attaching it as an xref, open the drawing and save it to promote all the objects to the current version.
Setting Up a Drawing
When you create a drawing from an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop template, the drawing setup options are typically predefined. You can use the predefined settings or customize them as needed. For example, you may want to use different drawing scales in individual drawings. When you create a drawing without an Autodesk Architectural Desktop template, settings such as layer standards and layer key styles are automatically imported into the drawing. For more information, see "Creating a Drawing Without a Template" on page 107. You can specify the drawing units, drawing scale, and layer options as the default settings for any drawing that you start, including those started from a template if desired. Any of these settings can be saved as defaults that will be used when you create drawings without using a template, or when you use templates that do not have these settings configured. If you are unfamiliar with the display system and layer management in Autodesk Architectural Desktop, review "Display System" on page 411 and "Managing Drawing Layers" on page 383 before specifying the layering and display options.
Specifying the Drawing Units
Use this procedure to specify the drawing units in a new or existing drawing. If you change the drawing units, you can specify whether existing objects in the drawing are scaled to the new units or retain their original size. You can also specify whether objects inserted from a drawing that uses different units are scaled to the units in the current drawing, or retain their original size. You can specify the unit type and precision for linear, angular, area, and volume units. The precision values specify only the number of decimal places displayed in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop interface. They do not determine the number of decimal places used internally to make calculations. When you change the drawing units, the default options under Area and Volume change to reflect the new drawing units. The drawing scale options on the Scale tab also change automatically to reflect the new drawing units.
1 In the Drawing Window status bar, click . 2 Click Drawing Setup.
NOTE Alternatively, you can choose Drawing Setup from the Format menu.
3 Click the Units tab. 4 Under Drawing Units, select the desired units.
Various imperial and metric units are available. The units that you select determine the unit of measurement that each unit in your drawing represents. For example, if you select Inches, each drawing unit equals one inch.
5 To scale objects that you insert into the current drawing from drawings with different drawing units, select Scale Objects Inserted from Other Drawings. Clear this option to insert objects at their original size without scaling. For example, if an item that is one inch long were inserted into a drawing set to Millimeters, this setting would scale the item to 25.4 mm in length when enabled. With this setting disabled, it would remain one unit long, (which would now be only one millimeter rather than one inch).
6 Under Length, select a unit type and desired precision.
108 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
7 Under Angle, select an angle type and desired precision. If you want to measure angles clockwise instead of counterclockwise, select Clockwise.
8 Under Base Angle, enter a value for the default 0 angle direction. The default is 0 degrees (East) and a counter-clockwise direction.
Imported survey drawings may include drafting instructions where changing the base angle might be desirable to properly orient the data.
The following values match these directions:
Value
Direction
0
East
90
North
180
West
270
South
9 Under Area, select an area type and precision.
If you do not want to use the default suffix that is displayed for the drawing units that you specify, enter a new suffix.
10 Under Volume, select a volume type and precision.
If you do not want to use the default suffix that is displayed for the drawing units that you specify, enter a new suffix.
11 Save the units settings:
If you want to...
Then...
save the units settings as default settings for new drawings that you start from scratch or from templates that do not contain drawing setup information
select Save as Default. Settings on the Scale and Layering tabs are also saved as default settings.
save the units settings only for the current drawing
clear Save as Default, and then click Apply.
NOTE You can save one default drawing units set per unit type with the save as Default option. Define a set of imperial drawing units defaults, and click Save as Default. Then, define a set of metric default units, and click Save as Default again. When you start a drawing without a template with imperial units, the imperial default settings will be used. When you start a drawing without a template with metric units, the metric default settings will be used. If you start a new drawing with a template, the settings saved within that template file will be used regardless of the saved default settings.
12 Click OK.
You are prompted to specify whether existing objects in the current drawing should be scaled for the new units.
13 Specify scaling of existing objects for Model Space and Paper Space:
If you want to... scale existing objects in Model Space
Then...
select Scale model-space objects in current drawing to reflect new units.
leave objects in Model Space at their current size
clear Scale model-space objects in current drawing to reflect new units.
scale existing objects in Paper Space
select Scale paper-space objects in current drawing to reflect new units.
Specifying the Drawing Units | 109
If you want to... leave objects in Paper Space at their current scale
Then...
clear Scale paper-space objects in current drawing to reflect new units.
14 Click OK.
Specifying the Drawing Scale
Use this procedure to specify the drawing scale and the plot size of annotations in model space.
The drawing scale determines how many drawing units in the drawing represent one inch (for imperial drawings) or one millimeter (for metric drawings) in the plotted drawing. A drawing scale of 1/8"=1'-0" (or 1:96 - eight eighths per inch times 12 inches per foot) in a drawing that has inches as default drawing units means that 8 feet in the drawing are represented by 1 inch on the plotted out plan. Likewise, if a drawing has a scale of 1:200 and a drawing unit of millimeters, then 200 millimeters in the drawing will be represented by one millimeter on the plotted out plan.
Annotation plot size, multiplied by the drawing scale factor, determines the height of plotted annotation text. Scale-dependent objects in an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing are scaled automatically upon insertion to reflect the units that are specified in a drawing. Any content that you create can be built to take advantage of these settings and is thus scaled appropriately.
1 In the Drawing Window status bar, click . 2 Click Drawing Setup.
NOTE Alternatively, you can choose Drawing Setup from the Format menu.
3 Click the Scale tab. 4 Under Scale, select the drawing scale that you want to use.
NOTE The scale values in the Drawing Scale list reflect the current drawing units. To change the drawing units, see "Specifying the Drawing Units" on page 108.
If the scale you want to use does not exist in the list, you can click Other, and enter a scale value under Custom Scales.
5 To edit an existing scale or add a new scale, click Edit Scale List.
To edit an existing scale, select it, and click Edit. To add a new scale, click Add, and enter a display name and scale values. To rearrange the order of the scale entries, use the Move up and Move down buttons.
6 Click OK.
7 Enter a value for Annotation Plot Size. The annotation plot size is always measured in millimeters for metric drawings and in inches for imperial drawings. Annotation plot size, multiplied by the drawing scale factor, determines the height of plotted annotation text.
8 Save the scale settings:
If you want to...
Then...
save the scale settings as default settings for new drawings that you start from scratch or from templates that do not contain drawing setup information
select Save as Default. Settings on the Units and Layering tabs are also saved as default settings.
save the scale settings only for the current drawing
clear Save as Default, and then click Apply.
110 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
NOTE You can save one default drawing scale set per unit type with the Save as Default option. Define a set of imperial drawing scale defaults, and click Save as Default. Next, define a set of metric scale defaults, and click Save as Default again. When you start a drawing without a template with imperial units, the imperial default scale will be used. When you start a drawing without a template with metric units, the metric default scale will be used. When you start a drawing without a template with metric units, the metric default settings will be used. If you start a new drawing with a template, the settings saved within that template file will be used regardless of the saved default settings.
9 Click OK. If you also changed the drawing units, you are prompted to specify whether existing objects in the current drawing should be scaled for the new units. For more information, see "Specifying the Drawing Units" on page 108.
Specifying a Layer Standard and a Layer Key Style
Use this procedure to specify the layer standard and layer key style to determine the layers on which objects are placed in a drawing. You can specify the layer key style to use in the current drawing. You can also specify a layer standard and a layer key style to be imported when you set up a new drawing. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop includes the a number of layer standards and layer key styles in AecLayerStd.dwg, located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Layers. By default, AecLayerStd.dwg (located in the Layers folder mentioned above) is loaded automatically. This file contains layer standards and layer key styles.
NOTE If you are unfamiliar with layer keying in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, read the overview of layer keying before specifying layering options. For more information, see "Working with Layer Keys" on page 394.
1 On the Drawing Window status bar, click . 2 Click Drawing Setup.
NOTE Alternatively, you can choose Drawing Setup from the Format menu.
3 Click the Layering tab. 4 Under Layer Standards/Key File to Auto-Import, enter the name of the layer standards drawing (DWG or
DWT) you want to use. You can click the Browse button to navigate to a file. 5 Under Default Layer Standard, select the layer key style that you want to use in your drawing. 6 To re-import the layer key style from the layer standard you specified at the start of each drawing session, select Always import Layer Key Style when first used in drawing. Selecting this option has the effect of checking the current drawing to see if the selected layer key style exists. If it does exist, the date and time stored on it are compared with the external file. If the external layer key style drawing is newer, then it re-imports the layer key style and standard. This action occurs each time the drawing file is opened; therefore, to force a re-import of the layer key style, you must close and reopen the drawing.
Specifying a Layer Standard and a Layer Key Style | 111
Specifying layering options for the current drawing and new drawings
7 Define the on/off behavior of secondary entities within an object.
You can place different components of an AEC object on different layers. This is accomplished via the object's display properties. For example, the current layer key style might place a wall on the layer named A-Wall, while the wall's material definitions might place its internal boundaries on the layer named A-Wall-Comp. Turning off the layer A-Wall would typically make the entire wall (including its internal boundaries) invisible, even though those components were assigned to a different layer. Enabling the immediate and independent layer on/off control of display components setting would allow the internal boundary components on A-Wall-Comp to remain visible, even though the primary object's layer (A-Wall in this case) is off. This behavior can be desirable in some plan representations.
NOTE It is important to note that freezing the primary object's layer (A-Wall in this case) would make the entire wall including its internal boundaries invisible regardless of the value of this setting. This setting applies only to the layer state off.
If you want to...
Then...
turn off secondary object components on different layers clear Immediate and independent layer on/off control of display
when the main component layer is turned off
components.
turn on and off secondary object components independently select Immediate and independent layer on/off control of
of the main object component layer settings
display components.
8 IMPORTANT If you select Save as Default, the layer key style you select is the default layer key style for all new drawings created without a template or from templates that do not have different default layer key standards assigned.
Save the layer settings:
If you want to...
Then...
save the layers settings as default settings for all new drawings select Save as Default. Settings on the Units and Scale tabs that you start without a template or from templates that do are also saved as default settings. not contain drawing setup information
save the layer settings only for the current drawing
clear Save as Default and then click Apply.
9 Click OK.
If you also changed the drawing units, you are prompted to specify whether existing objects in the current drawing should be scaled for the new units. For more information, see "Specifying the Drawing Units" on page 108.
112 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
Specifying the Default Display Representations
Use this procedure to specify the default display representations of AEC objects. You can also specify the default display configuration for the Model tab and new viewports. In addition, you can specify whether the drawing uses its own display configurations or those of a host drawing when the drawing is referenced as an overlay xref. You may find it easier to select and modify display representations using the Display Manager. For more information about the display system, see "Display System" on page 411. For more information about using the Display Manager, see "The Display Manager" on page 419. NOTE Changes you make on the Display tab apply only to the current drawing. New drawings are not affected. Save as Default has no effect on this tab.
1 On the Drawing Window status bar, click . 2 Click Drawing Setup.
NOTE Alternatively, you can choose Drawing Setup from the Format menu.
3 Click the Display tab. 4 To make changes to a display representation for an object type, select it, and click Edit.
For general information about display representations, see "Display Representations" on page 413. For information about the display properties of an object type, see the chapter about the relevant object. For example, for information about wall display properties, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on page 699. 5 Select a display configuration for Default Display Configuration. The display configuration is applied to the Model tab and new viewports in paper space layouts. 6 To use the display configurations in the current drawing when the drawing is referenced as an overlay xref in a host drawing, select When used as an Xref Overlay use Display Configurations from this drawing only. Clear this option if you want objects in the current drawing to use the display configurations of the host drawing when the current drawing is an overlay xref. For information about overlaying xrefs in drawings, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD help. Specifying default display options for the current drawing
7 Click OK. If you also changed the drawing units, you are prompted to specify whether existing objects in the current drawing should be scaled for the new units. For more information, see "Specifying the Drawing Units" on page 108.
Specifying the Default Display Representations | 113
Specifying AEC Options
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop adds several tabs to the AutoCAD® Options dialog box. You can use AEC options to specify default values for some architectural objects, to specify the location and type of content files, and to control performance while you are working with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
Changing the AEC Editor Settings
Use this procedure to specify settings to control the following aspects of the software:
the display of diagnostic messages the placement of dialog boxes and viewers on the screen whether objects retain their layer, color, and linetype when you export them to an AutoCAD® or DXF file
To improve drawing performance, you can limit the snap points provided by certain display representations, and decrease the layer loading time of the Layer Manager.
You can also specify settings for grip colors, and specify whether dynamic dimensions appear when you select and move grips to change the geometry of an object.
The AEC Editor settings that you specify are saved in the Windows® registry.
1 On the Format menu, click Options.
You can also display the Options dialog box by right-clicking in the command line area, and clicking Options.
2 Click the AEC Editor tab. 3 Under Diagnostic Messages, select options for displaying diagnostic messages on the command line:
If you want to...
Then...
display data about the relationship between objects in the drawing
select Object Relationship Graph.
display Display System errors
select Display Management System.
display object geometry-specific data
select Geometry.
All diagnostic messages are off by default.
4 Under Similar-Purpose Dialogs, select options for the default position of dialog boxes and viewers:
If you want to...
Then...
use a common position on the screen for similar dialog boxes select Use Common Position. Some dialog boxes, such as those containing style properties, are always displayed in the center of the screen, regardless of this setting.
use a common position for similar-purpose viewers
select Use Common Viewer Position and Sizes. Some viewers are not controlled by this setting.
5 Under Optimize for Speed, select Object Snap to limit certain display representations to respond only to the Node and Insert object snaps.
This setting affects stair, railing, space boundary, multi-view block, masking block, slice, and clip volume result (building section) objects.
6 Under Object Conversions, choose Apply Common Property Sets to New Objects if you wish to have common property sets automatically applied to new objects when applying tool properties.
114 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
When you apply the properties of a tool to an object in the drawing, the result can often be a new object. For instance, when you apply the tool properties of a door to an existing window, a new door object is created in place of the existing window. With this setting enabled, any property sets that were assigned to the existing window will automatically be preserved and applied to the new door provided that the property set definitions in question applies to both types of objects (in this case, both doors and windows are selected on the property set's applies to tab).
7 To specify the units of measure for AutoCAD® drawings when they are opened in Autodesk Architectural Desktop, select Metric or Imperial for Units for Legacy Drawings.
This option enables the software to ignore the value for the AutoCAD MEASUREMENT variable to ensure that Autodesk Architectural Desktop respects the correct units when an AutoCAD drawing is opened in the software. Select Automatic if you want AutoCAD drawings to use the units that are current in Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
8 Choose your preferred Palette Theme: either Architectural Desktop or Windows. You must restart Architectural Desktop for your change to take effect.
9 Under Export to AutoCAD, select Use Insert Method when binding Xrefs if you want all objects from an xref drawing referenced in the file you export to be incorporated into the host drawing.
If you select this option, the names of the xref drawings are discarded when the exported drawing is created. In addition, their layers and styles are incorporated into the host drawing. For example, all exploded walls, regardless of their source (host or xref) are located on the same layer.
Clear Use Insert Method when binding Xrefs if you want to retain the xref identities, such as layer names, when you export a file to AutoCAD or to a DXF file. For example, the blocks that define walls in the host drawing are located on A-Wall in the exploded drawing. Walls in an attached xref drawing are located on a layer whose name is created from the drawing name and the layer name, such as Drawing1$0$A-Wall.
10 Enter a prefix or a suffix to be added to the drawing file name when the drawing is exported to an AutoCAD drawing or to a DXF file.
11 Under Block Properties of Exploded Object, select Maintain Resolved Layer, Color, Linetype to maintain the layer, color, and linetype of AEC objects when you explode them.
When you explode an AEC object, you create several primitive objects grouped in a block definition. If this option is selected, any objects whose component layer, color, and linetype properties are set to ByBlock take the layer, color, and linetype of the parent object. If this option is cleared, when you explode an object, properties that are ByBlock remain ByBlock. Clear this option if you want to explode the block definition even further.
12 Under Unselected Grip Colors, select the colors you want to use for each type of grip.
13 Under Dynamic Dimensions Linetype, select either Continuous or Dot.
The dimensions identify the current value of the dimension being edited, such as the length of a wall, the difference between the current value and the new dimension based on the position of the grip, and the total value. For example, when you select and move a Lengthen grip on a wall, the dimensions shown are the current length, the difference between the current length and the length based on where you moved the grip, and the total new length of the wall.
The dynamic dimensions will display in either continuous or dot linetype based on your selection.
14 Click OK.
Changing the AEC Content Settings
Use this procedure to specify the location of the content files accessed by the Custom View in AutoCAD® DesignCenter, to choose between imperial and metric content, and to specify whether the Edit Property Data dialog box is displayed when you insert schedule tags. You can also specify the location of dependent files, such as styles for tools.
The AEC Content settings that you specify are saved in the Windows® registry.
1 On the Format menu, click Options.
You can also display the Options dialog box by right-clicking in the command line area, and clicking Options.
2 Click the AEC Content tab.
Changing the AEC Content Settings | 115
3 Under AEC DesignCenter Content Path, edit the path and location of your content files, or click Browse to locate content files.
4 To display the Edit Property Data dialog box when you insert a schedule tag in the drawing, select Display Edit Property Data Dialog During Tag Insertion. When this option is chosen, a worksheet will display after each tag is placed, allowing you to edit property set values. If you clear this option, no worksheet will appear during tagging.
5 Under Tool Catalog Content Root Path, edit the path and location of your style drawings, or click Browse to locate files. The variable, %AECCONTENT_DIR%, used for tool-dependent file references, is updated to use the path you specify. For example, <Style href="%AECCONTENT_DIR%\Door Styles\DoorStyles.dwg"/>.
6 Click Add/Remove next to Detail Component Databases to add or remove additional Detail Component Databases.
7 Click Add/Remove next to Keynote Databases to add or remove additional Keynote Databases. 8 Click OK.
Specifying AEC Object Settings
Refer to the following topics to specify AEC options for walls, stairs, spaces, and the display of curved objects:
"Specifying Drawing Defaults for Walls" on page 613 "Specifying AEC Options for Stairs" on page 1090 "Setting Up Adjacency Relations between Space Surfaces" on page 1604 "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116
Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets
Use this procedure to specify the facet deviation and the maximum number of facets that can be used to display a curved object, such as a Cylinder mass element or a curved wall. The values you specify apply to the current drawing. The number you specify for facet deviation defines the maximum distance from the chord to the arc, the chord being an edge that is created from faceting the curve to the true mathematical arc. The facet deviation must be greater than zero (0). It has no upper limit.
1 On the Format menu, click Options. You can also display the Options dialog box by right-clicking in the command line area, and clicking Options.
2 Click the AEC Object Settings tab. 3 Under AEC Display Resolution, enter a value for Facet Deviation.
The default value is 1/2'' for drawings created from imperial templates and 12.7 mm for drawings created from metric templates. The value you enter is stored in the AecFacetDev variable.
4 Enter the maximum number of facets that can be used to draw curved objects. You can enter a value between 100 and 10,000. The value you enter is stored in the AecFacetMax variable. The default value is 128 for new drawings.
5 Click OK.
Changing the AEC Project Defaults
Use this procedure to specify the folders in which Autodesk® Architectural Desktop searches for projects, palettes, templates, and other project files. These settings are used to create new projects without using a template. If a new project is created from a template project, the settings of the template project are used instead.
1 On the Format menu, click Options. You can also display the Options dialog box by right-clicking in the command line area, and clicking Options.
116 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
2 Click the AEC Project Defaults tab. 3 Expand a category, and select a path. 4 Change, add, or remove a path:
If you want to... change the current path
add a path to the list of paths
remove a path
Then...
select the path, and click Browse. Navigate to the new path, and click OK.
select the category, such as Default Project Template Files, and click Add. Specify the new path, and click OK. If Add is unavailable, you can specify only one path for this category.
select the path, and click Remove. If Remove is unavailable, you can edit the path but you cannot delete it.
5 Select Show Project Browser at startup if you want the Project Browser to open when you open Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
6 To launch the Create Sheet Set wizard, click the Create button next to New Sheet Set Template. This will launch a wizard to assist you in creating your own Sheet Set Template to use for your projects.
7 Click OK.
Sharing Drawings with Other Users
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides two methods for making drawings available to users who do not have the software:
Working with Proxy Graphics Exporting drawings to AutoCAD DWG or DXF
The method you choose depends on the software the others are using, on how exactly the drawing must match the original drawing, and on the particular views the other users require.
Turning on Proxy Graphics
When you turn on proxy graphics in a drawing, users who do not have Autodesk Architectural Desktop but do have another AutoCAD-based product (AutoCAD 2000 or newer), can view and plot AEC objects and design data.
Exporting to AutoCAD Drawings and DXF Files
You can export drawings created with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to AutoCAD® drawings for the following versions:
AutoCAD 2007 AutoCAD 2004 (including 2005 and 2006) AutoCAD 2000 (including 2000i and 2002) AutoCAD R14
You can also export a drawing created in Autodesk Architectural Desktop to a drawing interchange format (DXF) file. A DXF file is a text or binary file that contains drawing information that can be read by other CAD systems. For more information about DXF files, see "DXF Files" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Sharing Drawings with Other Users | 117
You can export drawings to the following DXF formats:
AutoCAD 2004 DXF (including 2005 and 2006) AutoCAD 2000 DXF (including 2000i and 2002) AutoCAD Release 12 DXF
Exporting drawings to an AutoCAD drawing or to a DXF file creates a separate drawing in which all AEC objects, such as walls, doors, windows, and roofs, are exploded to AutoCAD primitive objects, such as lines, arcs, and 3D faces. The resulting AutoCAD objects cannot be restored to Autodesk Architectural Desktop objects.
NOTE You can open DXF files generated in earlier versions of Autodesk Architectural Desktop if the files do not contain any AEC objects. DXF files that contain AEC objects cannot be imported into Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007.
Comparing Methods of Sharing Drawings
The following table lists the features of the various methods of sharing Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawings with other users who do not have the software.
Use Case
Proxy Graphics
Object Enabler
Export to AutoCAD (DWG or DXF)
Use of AEC objects in other AutoCAD-based applications
View, plot AEC objects and View, plot, copy, manipulate View, plot, manipulate design data; no manipulation AEC objects and design data exploded AEC objects of objects
Status of AEC objects in other applications
AEC objects are displayed as AEC objects are maintained
proxy graphics with no
as intelligent objects
intelligence
No AEC objects
Multiple representations of objects in different No
Yes
Separate exploded copies are
viewports
generated
AEC objects still exist when reopened in
Yes
Yes
No
Autodesk Architectural Desktop
Drawings used in a previous version
Yes
No
Yes
Generating Proxy Graphics
Use this procedure to create proxy graphics in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing to be made available to users who do not have the software.
Proxy graphics store the last-viewed image of AEC objects, which lets users view your drawing without modifying the original objects. Proxy graphics store only the display representation for the currently active viewport.
NOTE Depending on its complexity and density, a drawing saved with proxy graphics turned on can become extremely large and can slow drawing performance. It is recommended that you make a copy of the drawing before turning proxy graphics on if you want to share the drawing with other users.
1 Arrange the view for which you want to create proxy graphics. 2 At the command line, enter proxygraphics. 3 Enter 1. 4 Save the drawing. 5 To turn off proxy graphics, enter proxygraphics, and then enter 0.
Exporting a Drawing to AutoCAD
Use this procedure to export a drawing created in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to AutoCAD®. This process creates a new AutoCAD drawing with all AEC objects exploded. The original drawing is not affected. Depending on the size and complexity of the original drawing, the resulting AutoCAD drawing may contain a large number of primitive objects, which can affect drawing performance.
118 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
NOTE When you export a drawing to an AutoCAD drawing, all AEC objects are exploded to AutoCAD primitive objects. Reopening the file in Autodesk Architectural Desktop does not restore these primitive objects to AEC objects.
WARNING If you export a drawing that has Mviews to AutoCAD R14, only the layout active at the time of exporting will be preserved in AutoCAD R14. Any non-rectangular (polygonal or object) Mviews are converted to rectangular Mviews.
1 Choose whether to export a single representation of the AEC objects or all visible representations.
If you want to...
Then...
export the currently active representation of the AEC objects activate the Model tab. Only those representations in the
in the drawing
currently active view will be generated.
export all representations of the AEC objects in the drawing activate any layout tab. The representations for all layouts will be generated.
TIP This will usually result in duplicate graphics on the Model tab, which makes the drawing less useful.
For example, when creating a drawing for a consultant to use as an xref-attached background, you should display a top view in the active Model tab viewport. When creating a drawing to be used to produce a rendering, you should display an isometric view in the active Model tab viewport. To create a drawing that includes the exact graphics used in all layout tab viewports, activate any layout tab. These drawings can be sent to a printing service, for example, to make plots without the need for Architectural Desktop or the Object Enabler.
2 Press F2 to display the command window. 3 On the command line, enter -ExportToAutocad.
A list with the currently active export settings from the AEC Editor options page is displayed:
File Format Bind Xrefs Bind Type Filename prefix Filename suffix
4 To change the AutoCAD file format to which the drawing should be exported, enter F (Format) and press ENTER. The following AutoCAD file format versions are available:
AutoCAD 2007 AutoCAD 2004 (including 2005 and 2006) AutoCAD 2000 (including 2000i and 2002) AutoCAD R14
5 To specify whether to bind xrefs when exporting a drawing, enter B (Bind Xrefs), press ENTER, and select Y (Yes) or N (No).
NOTE If you want to retain visual fidelity in the exported drawing, selecting Yes is recommended. Visual fidelity can be affected by exporting individual drawings and binding them later, because when opened individually the xref may appear differently than it does in the host drawing.
Exporting a Drawing to AutoCAD | 119
6 To select the desired bind type for xrefs when exporting the drawing, enter T (bind Type), and choose one of the following:
If you want to...
Then...
discard the names of the xref drawings and incorporate their layers and styles into the host drawing when the exported drawing is created
enter I (Insert).
In this case, for example, all exploded walls, regardless of their source (host or xref) are located on the same layer.
retain the xref identities when binding xrefs, such as layer names, when exporting the drawings
enter B (Bind).
In this case, for example, the blocks that define walls in the host drawing are located on A-Wall in the exploded drawing. Walls in an attached xref drawing are located on a layer whose name is created from the drawing name and the layer name, such as Drawing1$0$A-Wall.
7 To specify whether the object properties in the exported AutoCAD drawing should be maintained, enter M (Maintain) and press ENTER:
If you want the object properties to be resolved and be directly assigned to the exploded objects, enter Y (Yes).
If you want objects to remain in blocks and have their properties set ByLayer and ByBlock, enter N (No).
8 To select a prefix or suffix for the drawing name, enter P (Prefix) or S (Suffix), press ENTER, and type in the desired prefix or suffix.
9 To enter a name for the exported AutoCAD drawing and start the export, press ENTER, and type in a file name.
TIP You can also start an export to AutoCAD by clicking File menu Export to AutoCAD, and then selecting the desired export format. In that case, the export settings defined on the AEC Editor tab of the Options dialog are used for exporting. For more information, see "Changing the AEC Editor Settings" on page 114.
IMPORTANT The -AecExportToAutoCAD command has been added to the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Object Enabler, enabling you to export an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing to an AutoCAD format from within AutoCAD or other AutoCAD based vertical applications.
Exporting a Drawing to a DXF File
Use this procedure to export a drawing created in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to a drawing interchange format (DXF) file. A DXF file is a text file that contains drawing information that can be read by other CAD systems. For more information about DXF files, see "DXF Files" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
You can export drawings to the following DXF formats:
AutoCAD 2007 AutoCAD 2004 DXF (including 2005 and 2006) AutoCAD 2000 DXF (including 2000i and 2002) AutoCAD Release 12 DXF
120 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
This process creates a new DXF file with all AEC objects exploded. The original drawing is not affected. Depending on the size and complexity of the original drawing, the resulting AutoCAD drawing may contain a large number of primitive objects, which can affect drawing performance.
NOTE When you export a drawing to a DXF file, all AEC objects are exploded to AutoCAD primitive objects. Reopening the file in Autodesk Architectural Desktop does not restore these primitive objects to AEC objects.
1 On the File menu, click Export to AutoCAD, and click the DXF format you want to use. 2 Enter a file name, and specify a path, if necessary.
The .dxf extension for the file name is specified by default. The default file name also includes any prefix or suffix that you specified on the AEC Editor tab of the Options dialog box. For more information, see "Changing the AEC Editor Settings" on page 114. 3 Click Save.
Viewport Layer Mapping
AEC objects have the ability to display themselves differently in each viewport. When AEC objects are exploded into AutoCAD primitive entities, each display representation must create a different set of primitives. For each viewport, a new layer and a new block definition are created to hold all exploded entities. A block reference (INSERT) to this definition is also created and placed on the given layer. For the given viewport, all layers created for other viewports are then frozen so that only the graphics for the display representation that was originally visible remain visible. For a given layout tab, the following block definitions are created: $HF2EM([SORGHB/D\RXW1DPHB3VSDFHBQXPEHU! FRQWDLQLQJ $(& REMHFWV LQ SDSHU VSDFH $HF2EM([SORGHB/D\RXW1DPHB9SRUWB9SRUW+DQGOH! FRQWDLQLQJ $(& REMHFWV IURP 09,(: $HF2EM([SORGHB/D\RXW1DPHB9SRUWB9SRUW+DQGOH! FRQWDLQLQJ $(& REMHFWV IURP 09,(: « $HF2EM([SORGHB/D\RXW1DPHB9SRUWB9SRUW+DQGOH1! LayoutName is the name of the specific layout tab, and VportHandle# is the unique AutoCAD entity handle for that specific viewport.
NOTE To determine the handle for a viewport, enter list at the command line and select the viewport boundary. The handle is a hexadecimal number, such as 4D2A.
A layer is also created with the same names so that the blocks that do not apply to that viewport can be on a frozen layer, and thus not visible. The "template" used to generate the block and layer names is stored in the Windows Registry under the key (note that the language code, shown as 409, will vary depending on your locale): +.(<B&855(17B86(5?6RIWZDUH?$XWRGHVN?$XWR&$'?5?$&$'?3URILOHV?$UFKLWHFWXUDO 'HVNWRS ,PSHULDO?'LDORJV?$HF2EM([SORGH2SWLRQV You can change this template to another character string, but it must contain the "%1!s!" and similar format specifiers that are present. The format specifiers are replaced by the layout name and the viewport handle number in the final block and layer names.
NOTE When in the Model tab (TILEMODE=1), all representations are visible at the same time. This is because there is no way to freeze a layer in a tiled viewport without freezing it in all paper space viewports. However, you can freeze all but one of the viewport layers to get the desired representation.
Viewport Layer Mapping | 121
122 | Chapter 4 Creating and Saving Drawings
Interoperability with Other Applications
5
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers a set of interoperability features providing compatibility between Autodesk Architectural Desktop and other Autodesk applications such as Autodesk® Land Desktop, Autodesk MapGuide® and Autodesk® DWFTM Viewer. You can import LandXML data into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, export drawings to the Autodesk MapGuide suite, and publish DWF files with property set data.
123
Importing LandXML
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop can import LandXML data and convert it to Autodesk Architectural Desktop objects. LandXML is the new standard XML data format for civil engineering and survey data used in the land development and transportation industries. LandXML provides a data format suitable for long-term data archiving and offers a standard format for electronic design submission. With LandXML, building professionals can extend the downstream value of their data from design to construction, and for scheduling and maintenance by using a format that can be read by many applications. LandXML files are based on the LandXML schema, an XML schema definition for civil and survey data. Residential area layout from Autodesk® Land Desktop
NOTE For more information about LandXML, visit http://www.landxml.org. With this release of Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can only import data from LandXML files and convert it to AutoCAD and Autodesk Architectural Desktop objects. You cannot convert objects to LandXML data, or export DWG files to the LandXML format.
Schema Version
To import LandXML files into Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, create them with the LandXML schema version 1.0. Note that LandXML files created with earlier versions of LandXML (for example version 0.88) cannot be imported. You can download the latest version of the LandXML schema from http://www.landxml.org.
Supported Data Types
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop can read and convert the following LandXML data types: Parcels COGO points Surfaces
Parcels Parcels are two-dimensional shapes created from closed lines, arcs, and polylines.
Parcels in a street layout from Autodesk® Land Desktop
124 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
When a parcel is imported into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, the parcel name and the lines (segments) and curves (arcs) that make up the parcel boundary are used for the conversion.
NOTE When you import a LandXML file in Autodesk Architectural Desktop and convert a parcel to a space, the parcel name is used as the space name. When the parcel is converted to a polyline, the parcel name is lost.
Parcel data in LandXML
You can import LandXML parcels and convert them to spaces or polylines. When you convert parcels to spaces, you can define a space style that is automatically applied to the spaces generated from the parcels. COGO (Coordinate Geometry) Points You can import LandXML COGO (Coordinate Geometry) points to Autodesk® Architectural Desktop and convert them to AutoCAD points. Civil engineers create COGO points to locate crucial surveying locations. A COGO point can be a project benchmark point - a common datum that the entire civil team works off and from which all critical dimensions are located.
NOTE A LandXML file usually contains a large number of COGO points. In most cases, you need only a small set of those in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing, so you need not import all COGO points, but only those that have a special meaning for the drawing. COGO points are the foundation for any civil engineering or surveying project. In Autodesk® Land Desktop, you can use description keys to place points in the drawing with symbols on specific layers. When importing a LandXML file into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can map selected points to the appropriate Autodesk Architectural Desktop layer. When a COGO point is imported into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, it is defined by its coordinates in the form of "northing easting" or "northing easting elevation." For example, a COGO point could be represented as: <CgPOINT NAME="1" DESC="MYPOINT">248.04605951 359.53997314 1.000000</CgPOINT>. COGO points on a map
NOTE Autodesk Land Desktop uses two coordinate systems for locating points: X,Y and northing/easting. When you start a new project, these values all default to 0 so that the Y coordinate is the same as the northing, and the X coordinate is the same as the easting. Unless you change that in Autodesk Land Desktop before exporting a drawing to LandXML, the exported northing value will be identical to Y and the exported easting value will be identical to X.
Surfaces In most surveying and civil engineering operations, you gather information about elevations to generate surface contours that represent a model of the ground surface. The surfaces in LandXML are made up of many faces which are either TINs (Triangular Irregulated Networks) or quadrilaterals. Points or contours are usually a primary part of the original
Supported Data Types | 125
surface information and are supplemented with breaklines and boundaries. You can create a surface in LandXML, and then import it in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where it is converted to a Free Form mass element. In the following cases, importing surfaces into Autodesk Architectural Desktop can create errors or fail altogether:
Surfaces with vertical faces Surfaces with tiny gaps between the individual faces Surfaces with very narrow faces If the import fails, an error message is displayed on the command line, such as "Failed to create mass element from terrain." Surface model in Autodesk® Land Desktop
A surface model is usually a complex structure with many defining points and faces. When you convert a surface model to a Free Form mass element in Autodesk Architectural Desktop, the points and faces are merged into one composite mass element body. Surface model detail
A Free Form mass element in Autodesk Architectural Desktop contains a large number of grips. Displaying all grips can slow down the performance and be unnecessary for using the mass element. There are two ways for the user to control the display of grips on mass elements:
By default, the grips on a Free Form mass element are only displayed if their number does not exceed 2000 grips per element.
You can turn off the display of grips in the drawing altogether if you click Format Options, then click the Selection tab, and under Grips, clear Enable Grips.
126 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
Surface imported as Free Form mass element (left), contours of the surface (right)
A surface in the LandXML Schema contains information about the surface name, type, 2D and 3D area, and the maximum and minimum elevations. It also contains information about each of the points and faces that comprise the surface. The surface information is merged into one composite mass element body, which can have thousands of faces. Applying a surface hatch or texture map to a complex mass element can be quite time-consuming.
Surface data in LandXML
File Validation
When you import a LandXML file into Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, the file is automatically validated before it is imported and opened. The LandXML file has to conform to the LandXML 1.0 schema definition to be used in Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
Importing LandXML Data
Use this procedure to import LandXML data into Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
When you import a LandXML file, you can select different object types to import. For a complete list, see "Supported Data Types" on page 124. Depending on the object type, you can define additional conversion parameters. For example, if you want to import LandXML parcels into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can choose to convert them to space objects or standard polylines.
NOTE A LandXML file contains information about the drawing units in which it is measured. When you import a LandXML file to an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing with different units, the LandXML data is converted to the units in the current DWG. When a LandXML file based on meter units is imported into a drawing based on millimeters, the resulting coordinates may exceed the range in which accurate calculations can be made.
1 On the Insert menu, click LandXML. 2 Select a LandXML file to import into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, and click Open.
NOTE If you have selected an invalid LandXML file, an XML file not based on the LandXML Schema, or an XML file based on a LandXML Schema version earlier than 1.0, you receive an error message and cannot import the file. Select another file that conforms to the LandXML 1.0 schema, or update the existing file accordingly.
3 Select the import options.
File Validation | 127
If you want to...
Then...
import surfaces from the LandXML file
select Surfaces. This selects all surfaces from the imported file. To import only individual surfaces, expand Surfaces, expand Collection, and then select the surfaces you want to import.
import parcels from the LandXML file
select Parcels. This selects all parcels from the imported file. To import only individual parcels, expand Parcels, expand Collection, and then select the parcels you want to import.
import COGO points from the LandXML select CgPoints. This selects all COGO from the imported file. To import only
file
individual points, expand CgPoints, expand Collection, and then select the points
you want to import.
4 If you are importing parcels into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, indicate the form to which you want them converted by selecting either Space Objects or Polylines.
Parcels converted to spaces (left) and polylines (right)
5 If you want to clip the surface model using the boolean union of all parcels as the model boundary, select Clip Surface Model at Combined Parcel Boundary. If this checkbox is selected, you can also enter an offset from the boundary.
6 Enter a value for Model Base. This creates an extrusion of the surface outer boundary from the value you enter starting at the lowest surface point.
7 If you want to generate contours from the surface data you are importing, select Generate Contours from Surfaces.
128 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
Mass element and contour lines generated from surface data
NOTE If you want to see the actual surfaces of the converted mass element, such as a TIN model, you can display the mass element without Gouraud shading.
8 Indicate how you want the contours to be created by selecting either Polylines or Slice Objects. 9 Enter an interval value for the vertical spacing of the contours.
NOTE Because slice objects shade their entire area, they can interfere with the appearance of the surface itself in shaded or hidden line views.
10 Click Import.
Selecting Layer Keys for LandXML Data
Use this procedure to set a default layer key for the different types of LandXML data imported into Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. You can set layer keys individually for COGO points, parcels, surfaces, and contour lines. If you do not define specific layer keys for your LandXML data, the imported data is placed on the default layer keys specified for LandXML data, TINN (Surfaces), PRCL (Parcels), COGO (COGO Points), and TOPO (Contours). You can also define a specific space style for parcels that are imported as spaces.
1 On the Insert menu, click LandXML. 2 Select a LandXML file to import into Autodesk Architectural Desktop, and click Open. 3 Click Defaults.
4 Select a layer key default for the imported objects.
If you want to... select a layer key default for imported surfaces
Then... click Surfaces.
select a layer key default for imported parcels
click Parcels.
select a layer key default for imported COGO points click COGO points.
select a layer key default for imported contours
click Contours.
Selecting Layer Keys for LandXML Data | 129
5 Select a layer key, and click OK. 6 If you want to import LandXML parcels as spaces, select a space style and a style location if necessary. 7 Click OK. 8 Import your LandXML data in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, as described in "Importing LandXML
Data" on page 127.
Publishing Drawing Files to Autodesk MapGuide and Autodesk Envision
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a mechanism to publish graphic objects and property set data to the Autodesk MapGuide® product suite or to Autodesk EnvisionTM. The Autodesk MapGuide product suite provides the tools to create, publish, and display maps, drawings, designs, schematics, facilities management plans, and associated attribute data over the Internet, an intranet, or an extranet with the services of a web server and a web browser. Autodesk Envision lets you integrate, visualize, analyze, and present design data, including spatial, mapping, and civil engineering formats, in one desktop application. Autodesk Architectural Desktop data in Autodesk Envision
You can find a number of example Autodesk MapGuide projects under http://data.mapguide.com/SampleApps/fm/default.htm.
Prerequisites
To publish graphic objects and property set data to Autodesk MapGuide® or Autodesk EnvisionTM, the Autodesk MapGuide SDF Component Toolkit must be installed on your computer. The MapGuide SDF Component Toolkit is a development library that allows developers to read, write, and modify point, line, and polygon data within SDF files. SDF files are the native Spatial Data File format of Autodesk MapGuide, created from standalone applications or CGI applications. You can download the Autodesk MapGuide SDF Component Toolkit from http://www.autodesk.com.
Published Data Types
You can publish the following data types from an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing to Autodesk MapGuide® or Autodesk EnvisionTM:
Graphic data: All graphic objects from Autodesk Architectural Desktop can be exported to MapGuide or Envision in an SDF (Spatial Data File) file. Areas and spaces are converted to polygons in the appropriate SDF files. All other graphic objects are converted to polylines.
Property set data: Property set data attached to an exported object is exported to an Microsoft® Access Database consisting of a series of tables representing the individual property sets. Each object record within a table is assigned a unique object key matching the corresponding object key in the SDF file in order to associate the record in the database with the appropriate SDF geometry.
130 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
Blocks and MVBlocks: Blocks and MVBlocks are exported as SDF files and point databases. Since the blocks and MVBlocks are exported in SDF format as well, the point databases provide an option for users to use symbols rather than the SDF geometry to represent Blocks and MVBlocks in Autodesk MapGuide. There is a point geometry SDF format, but since Autodesk Architectural Desktop does not work with geospatial coordinate systems, a table in an external database presents a better data source for point-related data. The Publish To MapGuide command does not create bitmap files (BMP) or Windows Metafiles (WMF) representing the geometry of blocks or MVBlocks. If you want to generate WMFs, you need to use either the AutoCAD®WmfOut command or the Autodesk MapGuide SDF Loader. The SDF Loader is a utility used to create Spatial Data Files (SDF) and their accompanying Spatial Index Files (SIF) from a variety of GIS data formats. You can download the SDF Loader utility from http://www.autodesk.com.
External references: objects and property set data from external references are exported as if they actually resided in the host drawing.
NOTE The external reference name prefix of the layer name is removed when exporting data to MapGuide or Envision. This means that objects of the same type that are on the same layer in separate externally referenced files are placed in the same SDF files.
Generating a MWX File
The Publish To MapGuide feature in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop creates, in addition to the data types listed in "Published Data Types" on page 130, a default map file (MWX file) that combines the exported data in a Autodesk MapGuide® or Autodesk EnvisionTM project. The map contains one layer for each generated SDF file. Each layer is visible and selectable. In Autodesk Envision, the layers for polygonal SDFs (spaces and areas) have their transparency set to allow other layers below the filled polygons to be visible. Each layer also has a secondary data source created that references the Microsoft® Access Database (MDB) that contains the exported property data. Although the secondary data sources are automatically configured to reference the proper MDB, the correct table in the MDB corresponding with the appropriate property set will need to be selected for each layer.
An Overview of the Published Data Structure
When you publish Autodesk® Architectural Desktop data to Autodesk MapGuide® or Autodesk EnvisionTM, a data structure is created that facilitates the incorporation of the data into an MWX project. The exported files are placed in a series of folders representing the relevant portions of an MWX project folder hierarchy. If the following folders do not already exist below the folder you select for exporting your data, they are created and the appropriate files placed in each folder. Directory structure of exported data
The following files are contained in the individual folders: Data Sources folder: In the Data Sources folder, you can find the data links to the MDB database and the SDF directory. The Publish To MapGuide options allow you to place the Data Sources in an alternate location.
Generating a MWX File | 131
Data link to exported database
DB: The DB folder contains the Microsoft® Access Database created on export. Exported database file
MWX: the MWX folder contains the MapGuide/Envision project file combining the exported spatial and non-spatial data. To view and edit the exported data in Autodesk MapGuide or Autodesk Envision, you open the MWX file.
SDF: The SDF folder contains the exported SDF (Spatial Data File) and SIF (Spatial Index File) files from the graphic objects.
An Overview of the Database Structure
When you publish Autodesk® Architectural Desktop data to Autodesk MapGuide® or Autodesk EnvisionTM, a Microsoft® Access Database (MDB) is created that contains information about the exported graphic objects and property set data.
132 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
Exported database file
Table Name ADT_Drawings ADT_Object Types
ADT_Objects ADT_Property Set Definitions ADT_Property Definitions <Objects>
<Object>Styles
Content
This table lists information about the drawing from which the data is exported. Information includes file name, path, date of last modification, and the units of the drawing.
This table provides a listing of the object types and object styles contained in the exported data. Each type and style is assigned an ID, which is later used to identify individual objects in the ADT_Objects table.
This table lists all individual objects contained in the exported data.
This table provides a listing of the property set definitions contained in the exported data. Each property set definition is assigned an ID, which is later used to identify individual properties.
This table lists all properties contained in the exported data. To identify individual properties, use the PropertySetId from the ADT_Property Set Definitions table.
For each object type that has property data attached directly to one or more of its objects, a table is created that contains the objects and their associated property data. For example, if an exported drawing contains a number of doors with attached properties for frame depth and frame width, a DoorObjects table is created that lists all of these doors and their frame depths and frame widths.
For each object type that has property data attached via an object style, a table is created that contains the objects and the property data derived from their styles. For example, if an exported drawing contains a number of doors with a style controlling the louver height and louver width, a DoorStyles table is created that lists all doors of that style with their louver heights and louver widths.
NOTE For a detailed view and description of the individual tables, select a table in Microsoft® Access, right-click, and click Design View.
When you export Autodesk Architectural Desktop data to an MDB, make sure that your property set definitions names, property definition names, and layer names meet the following naming criteria.
Names must not exceed 64 characters. Longer names will be truncated after 64 characters. Names must not contain the following special characters: period (.), exclamation mark (!), accent ague (`), and
brackets ([]).
Publishing Data to Autodesk MapGuide or Autodesk Envision
Use this procedure to publish Autodesk® Architectural Desktop data to Autodesk MapGuide® or Autodesk EnvisionTM. 1 On the File menu, click Publish to MapGuide.
Publishing Data to Autodesk MapGuide or Autodesk Envision | 133
If the drawing from which you want to publish objects is part of a building project, the project name and level assignment of the drawing display in the Publish to MapGuide dialog box.
If the drawing is not part of a building project, the name of the drawing and "Level 1" display by default. You can change these entries.
NOTE The project name that you enter here is not used as the name of the source Autodesk MapGuide project folder and project files. The name of the project source folder and project files is created from the name of the drawing.
2 Under Objects, click
.
3 Select the objects you want to publish, and press ENTER.
4 Under Folder, select the location for the project files.
For a detailed description of the files and folders generated on export, see "An Overview of the Published Data Structure" on page 131.
5 Click Options.
6 Specify additional export options:
If you want to...
Then...
preserve the existing Map Window XML file
select Preserve Existing Map Window XML file. This option will prevent an existing MWX file in this location from being overwritten. This will allow users to preserve any changes they made to the MWX file (secondary data source table selections, layer properties, or themes) when updating or re-publishing the underlying data or geometry.
include an URL to a Map Server
select Include a Map Server URL, and enter a server address.
publish your data to a Map Server data location select Publish to Map Server Data Source Location, and browse for a location.
134 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
For more information about Map Server data locations, see the online Autodesk MapGuide® User's Guide. 7 Click OK twice.
Depending on your selection set, the export may take a little while. A progress bar shows you the state of the export.
Exporting Property Set Data to an MDB
Use this procedure to export property set data in a drawing to a Microsoft® Access Database (MDB). 1 On the File menu, click Export Property Data. 2 Select the objects that contain the property data that you want to export. 3 Press ENTER. 4 In the Export Property Data dialog box, enter a path and a name for the exported MDB. 5 Click Save. The property set data of the objects you selected is exported to a Microsoft® Access database.
Publishing Drawings to DWF
The Design Web FormatTM (DWFTM) is the Autodesk method of publishing design data to the Internet or to an intranet. You can view DWF files with a web browser, like Microsoft® Internet Explorer, or with the free downloadable Autodesk® DWFTM Viewer, from where you can also plot the file. You can send a published electronic drawing set as an e-mail attachment, share it using a project collaboration site such as Autodesk® Buzzsaw®, or you can post it to a company website. With Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can publish your DWG files as 2D or 3D model with the included property set data to DWF. When these DWF files are viewed with the Autodesk DWF Viewer or Autodesk® Design Review, users can select components that represent Autodesk Architectural Desktop objects and display the object information in the DWF Viewer Properties window. For more information about property set data, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963. TIP To view published 3D DWF files, you need to install Autodesk DWF Viewer version 5.0 or higher. You can download the latest version of Autodesk DWF Viewer from http://www.autodesk.com. DWG file in Autodesk Architectural Desktop
Exporting Property Set Data to an MDB | 135
3D DWF file published to Autodesk DWF Viewer
You can publish a 2D DWF file or a 3D DWF file. The Publish to 3D DWF capabilities of Autodesk Architectural Desktop allow you to create 3D DWF files of the complete building model. The 3D model can be grouped by external reference, by layer or by object type and style in the DWF file. You can publish property set data with 3D DWF files. NOTE The 3D DWF publishing capabilities are available for users of Autodesk Architectural Desktop and Autodesk Building Systems.
Publishing Property Data to DWF
You can publish property set data from Autodesk Architectural Desktop and Autodesk Building Systems to a 2D or 3D DWF file. DWG file with property set data
136 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
DWF file with property set data
Property set data works across external references, and you can publish data from an external reference to a DWF file. To make sure that data from the external reference is published correctly, make sure that the following conditions are met:
The data structure of property sets coming from an external reference must be identical to the structure of any corresponding property sets in the host drawing. For example, if an external reference has a property set definition called Doors that reports Height, Width, and Door Number, the host drawing cannot have a property set definition called Doors that reports Fire Rating, Leaf Width, and Glass thickness.
The same property data format must be applied to property set definitions from external references and corresponding property set definitions in the host drawing. For example, if an external reference property set definition called Doors specifies architectural units with 1/4 inch precision, the host drawing cannot have a property set definition called Doors that specifies architectural units with 1/16 inch precision. If the property data formats differ, the format of the host drawing is used for the external reference.
Process Overview: Publishing a DWG File with Property Set Data to DWF
To publish a DWG file with property set data to DWFTM, the following basic steps are required: Step 1: Create and apply property set definitions to the objects in the drawing.
For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963. Step 2: Select or create a list of property set definitions to be published to the DWF file. This information is contained
in the Published Property List (PPL) file. For more information, see "Setting the Publishing Options" on page 137. Step 3: Publish 2D or 3D sheets to DWF. For more information, see "Publishing a DWF File" on page 139.
Setting the Publishing Options
Use this procedure to define a list of property set definitions (PPL file) to be included in a published DWFTM file. In many cases, you need extra control over the property set data included in a published DWF file. For example, some property sets in your drawing can contain confidential information, which you do not want to expose to others. In other cases, the recipient of a published file might need only very specific property set information about one aspect of the drawing, and does not want to search for that information among a large amount of unrelated information. You can either use an existing PPL file, or create your own PPL file to specify what property data to include in the published DWF file. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides you with a standard PPL file, based on default property set definitions. In most cases, you use that PPL file and modify it for your needs. You can also create a new blank PPL file, to which you add property set definitions. For more information, see "Creating a New Published Property List (PPL)" on page 139.
Process Overview: Publishing a DWG File with Property Set Data to DWF | 137
It is important to remember that in the publishing options you only define the property set definitions that are eligible for publishing. To actually publish property set data to an DWF file, the objects in the drawing need to have property set data from one of the selected property set definitions attached to them.
For example, you select the DoorObjects property set definition in your PPL file. You attach that property set definition to a number of doors in your drawing. When you publish the drawing to DWF, the property set data from these doors is published. In the same PPL file, you select the WindowObjects property set definition. However, you do not attach the WindowObjects property set definition to any windows in your drawing. When you publish the drawing to DWF, no property set data from the WindowObjects property set definition is published.
1 On the File menu, click AEC DWF Publishing Options.
2 Under Published Properties List, select a PPL file.
If you want to... select an existing PPL file
Then...
enter the path and file name for the PPL file, or click Browse, and search for the PPL file you want to use.
create a new PPL file
click New, and create a new PPL file as described in "Creating a New Published Property List (PPL)" on page 139.
NOTE By default, you are directed to the standard PPL file AEC DWF List.ppl provided with the software, located in \Documents and Settings\<User name>\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Support.
3 Click Add to add more properties to the list of property sets to include in the published DWF file.
138 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
4 To select an external drawing from which to add property set definitions to the list, enter a path and the name of the external drawing.
Alternatively, click Browse and search for an external drawing.
5 Select the property sets to be included in the published DWF file.
If you want to...
Then...
add a property set
select its check box.
remove a property set
clear its check box.
add all property sets from the selected file
click Select All.
not add property sets from the selected file at all
click Clear All.
6 Click OK. 7 To remove properties from the list, select the property set definition, and click Remove. 8 To publish the selected property data to DWF, select Publish Property Data.
By default, the publication of property set data is turned off to prevent users from unintentionally distributing property set data to non-authorized users.
9 Click OK.
Creating a New Published Property List (PPL)
Use this procedure to create a new blank Published Property List (PPL). 1 On the File menu, click AEC DWF Publishing Options. 2 Click New.
3 Browse for the folder in which you want to save the new PPL file, and enter a name for the new PPL file. 4 Click Save.
The new PPL file is now selected in the AEC DWF Publishing Options dialog box. 5 You can add property set definitions to the file, as described in "Setting the Publishing Options" on page
137.
Publishing a DWF File
Use this procedure to publish a 2D or 3D DWFTM file from Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
NOTE If you publish a 3D DWG file, the Autodesk DWF Viewer always opens the file in shaded mode. You can change the display to Wireframe in the Viewer, although the setting does not persist between drawings or sessions.
Creating a New Published Property List (PPL) | 139
The following conditions apply to a 3D DWF file published from Autodesk Architectural Desktop or Autodesk Building Systems:
Most types of hatches (patterns, solid, graphics) are published. The 3D DWF file uses the display configuration that is active in the DWG file during publishing. If Render materials are enabled, the transparency is translated to the DWF file.
For more information, see "Materials" on page 463. Live Section objects are published. Property set data attached to objects or styles is published to DWF.
For more information, see "Setting the Publishing Options" on page 137.
The following limitations apply to published 3D objects: Infinite lines, like xlines and rays, are not published. Text fonts in the DWG file are all converted to Arial. Text formatting like Bold, Italic, and Underline are not currently supported. Clip Planes and Xref Clipping are not supported. OLE objects as well as inserted images are not supported. Linetypes and lineweights are currently not supported. Hyperlinks are not supported.
NOTE When you publish 3D objects to DWF, only the display set used for 3D views of the drawing is published. For 3D views, this is usually a Model display set, for example Model Medium Detail, Model High Detail, or Model Low Detail. You can view the objects in Top view in the DWF viewer; this is however only a Top view of the Model display, and not a Plan view. Objects with no display representation in the Model display set are not displayed in the published DWF. Objects that typically are not displayed in Model views are tags, annotations, dimensions, and 2D Plan symbols. If you want these to display in the DWF, you can either activate them for the Model display set, or generate a 2D DWF file. For more information about the display system, see "Display System" on page 411.
1 On the File menu, click the Publish command.
NOTE If you want to publish sheets from an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, see "Publishing Sheet Sets" on page 282.
2 Under Page Setup, select if you want to publish a 2D or 3D DWF file: To publish a 2D DWF file, select a 2D page setup, or select <Default: None>. To publish a 3D DWF file, select <3D DWF>. If the <3D DWF> option is not available, no valid 3D display configuration has been set for the drawing.
3 Under Publish to, select DWF file. 4 Click Publish Options.
140 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
5 Under Location, specify a folder for the generated DWF files. You can select a local folder or a network location here.
6 Under DWF type, specify if you want to publish the file to a single-sheet DWF or a multi-sheet DWF. 7 To password-protect the DWF file, select Password protect published DWF, and enter a password. 8 If you have chosen to create a multi-sheet DWF, under DWF naming, select to be either prompted for a
name when the file is published, or select to specify a name right away. 9 If you selected to specify a name, under Name, you can click the Browse button to access the Select DWF
File dialog box. Enter a file name, and click Select to provide the name and destination for the DWF file.
NOTE You can also enter an URL so that the DWF file is uploaded to an FTP or HTTP site.
10 To include layer information with the DWF file, select Include under Layer information. 11 To include block property and attribute information in the published DWF files, select Include under Block
information. 12 To create a new block template file, select Create from the drop-down list under Block template file.
Create a new block template file as described in "Publish Options Dialog Box" in the AutoCAD Command Reference.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
13 To edit an existing block template file, select Edit in the drop-down list under Block template file. In the Publish Block Template dialog box, edit the block template as described in "Publish Options Dialog Box" in the AutoCAD Command Reference.
14 To publish property set data with the DWF, select Include under AEC property set data. 15 To select another PPL file, or edit an existing one, click the Browse button under AEC DWF Options.
For more information about PPL files and publishing options, see "Setting the Publishing Options" on page 137. 16 If you are creating a 2D DWF file, select a sorting option under AEC Group Individual objects by. You can sort the AEC objects in the drawing by object type and style, or by layer.
Publishing a DWF File | 141
17 If you are creating a 3D DWF file, define the grouping structure of published AEC objects in DWF Viewer or Design Review, as shown in the examples below:
If you want to...
Then...
group the objects by their external reference, and then by select Object Type and Style for AEC Group Individual Objects
their object type and style
by. Then, select Yes for Group by Xref Hierarchy.
group the objects by their external reference, and then by select Layer for AEC Group Individual Objects by. Then, select
their layer
Yes for Group by Xref Hierarchy.
group the objects by their type and style
select Object Type and Style for AEC Group Individual Objects by. Then, select No for Group by Xref Hierarchy.
group the objects by their layer
select Layer for AEC Group Individual Objects by. Then, select No for Group by Xref Hierarchy.
Grouping objects by their external reference and their type and style
Grouping objects by their external reference and their layer Grouping objects by their type and style
142 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
Grouping objects by their layer
18 Click OK. 19 Click Publish.
If you have chosen to be prompted for a DWF name, enter a name, and click Select. The publishing process is initiated and notifies you when it is finished. TIP As a shortcut to publishing a single-sheet 3D DWF file from Autodesk Architectural Desktop, enter 3DDwf on the command line. Under Export to 3D DWF, select a location and file name, and click Save. This command creates a single-sheet 3D DWF file, using the existing 3D DWF Publishing settings.
Publishing a DWF File | 143
144 | Chapter 5 Interoperability with Other Applications
Drawing Management
6
The Drawing Management feature formalizes and automates the processes relating to building model design and documentation. The feature provides automated tools that aid you in the management, viewing, and construction of your building.
When your project files are managed with this feature, you have consistency throughout all aspects of the project. Everyone on your design team has a centralized project environment for accessing the most current documents, from project templates to sections and elevations.
The Drawing Management feature enables you to create and manage projects, create and manage levels, and automate sheet creation.
145
Concepts of Drawing Management
The Drawing Management feature of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop lets you create large building projects distributed among many drawing files, levels, and divisions (wings). The key concepts of the feature are described here. 3D view of building project
Project At the highest level, building models are organized into projects. A project is composed of two parts: the building model and the reports generated from the model. The building project is composed of constructs and elements, while reports consist of views and plotting sheets. Within a project, elements are referenced into constructs, constructs are referenced into views, and views are referenced into plotting sheets.
Project Standards The Project Standards feature provides a mechanism for users to establish, maintain and synchronize styles and display settings across an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project. Within a project, you can specify standard styles, display settings, and AutoCAD standards that are used across all project drawings. Standard styles and display settings are organized in standards drawings associated with the project. The project is synchronized with these standards throughout the project lifecycle. For more information, see "Project Standards" on page 325. Project Tool Palettes and Content Browser Library In addition to standards drawings, you can also set up project specific tool palettes and a Content Browser library in the project setup. A user-definable tool content root path ensures that the tools always reference the correct content drawing for their definition. Mapped Drives Architectural Desktop supports mapped drives within the Drawing Management feature. You use the same identifying drive on different servers with the same project structure. If you use mapped drives within an Architectural Desktop project, you are not prompted to re-path each time you open the project drawing files. When you share a mapped drive, a file lock prevents more than one person from editing drawings at the same time. For more information, see "Working with Design Teams Located Remotely" on page 157. External Reference Management The basis of the Drawing Management feature is a sophisticated external reference mechanism that has been enhanced from its standard functionality. Powerful linking features ensure that your source files can be distributed over many 146 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
different locations on your computer or on a network. You can assign schedule tables, annotation tags, and dimensions to external references easily. Different people can work simultaneously on the same project. You have the choice of working with full external reference paths, or with relative external reference paths. For more information on external references, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics. For more information on annotating external references in a project, see "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293. XML Structure A project has an underlying XML structure. For each drawing file you create within a project--for example, a floor drawing or a structural drawing--an accompanying XML file is created. The XML file contains project-relevant information, such as level and division information. You can reuse any drawing file created within a project outside the project as well, because the drawing file itself does not contain project-relevant information.
Constructs A construct describes one unique portion of a building project and is assigned to a specific level and division within the project. Spanning constructs, like curtain walls, can be assigned to multiple levels and divisions.
Plan view of curtain wall spanning construct
For example, the first level of your building project may consist of an exterior shell construct, a first-level core construct, and a first-level interior partitions construct. A construct can contain drawing objects, like walls and doors, external references to elements, or a combination of both. For example, a first-level core construct can contain the core walls directly drawn into the construct and an elevator element inserted as an external reference. Constructs are referenced into views. You can create and modify constructs within the current project. You can also import drawings and then convert them and add them to constructs. You can import constructs into the project physically or by creating a link. For more information, see "Constructs" on page 214. Elements Elements are used for pieces of the building that are repeated multiple times within the building. For example, you could use an element to create a repeating design object like a desk/chair combination to be used for a number of cubicles in an office building.
Concepts of Drawing Management | 147
3D view of cubicle element
An element is a generic building block for multiple use. The element knows nothing about which level or division it is placed on; that is determined by the construct it is referenced into. If you create a bathroom layout as an element, you can use it on the second floor of the west wing just as well as on the first floor of the east wing. To place the element on a specific floor and wing, you need to reference it into a construct. A construct has a level and division assignment. For example, you could create an element named "Generic Bathroom Layout" and reference it into constructs named "First Floor--Left Apartment," "First Floor--Middle Apartment," "First Floor--Right Apartment," and so on. Because the enhanced Schedule feature allows you to annotate instances of an external reference individually, you can use the same element and annotate it differently depending on its position. You cannot directly reference an element into a view, but you can reference an element directly into a plotting sheet. This might be done for title blocks or the documentation of a detail on the plotting sheet. For more information, see "Elements" on page 228. Views and View Drawings Once the structure of the building is defined, and constructs are assigned to levels and divisions, you can start to create reports of the data. A view drawing automatically references a number of constructs to present a specific view of the building project. To create a view drawing, you first decide what portion of the building you wish to look at and the type of view to generate. You could, for example, create a first-floor reflected ceiling plan or a second-floor framing plan. You could also create a composite view of all floors in the building. View drawings automatically reference the appropriate constructs according to their location within the building. For example, to create a floor plan of the west wing of the second floor, you would create a view that references all constructs assigned to the second floor and the west wing. This would also include a curtain wall spanning the first through fifth floors. You can reference additional constructs that do not lie on that floor but which you want to see in the view, such as a building outline or grid. 3D view of entire building view
In a view drawing you can also add data like annotation, dimensions, and schedule tables. Whether to create the annotation in a view drawing or in a sheet is a decision you make based on your workflow and individual needs. There are three different types of view drawings in the Drawing Management feature:
General view drawing: A general view drawing contains referenced constructs from the project, representing a specific view on the building model. General view drawings are based on the general view template defined in the project settings.
Detail view drawing: A detail view drawing contains one or more model space views that show a defined portion of the detail drawing in the level of detail you specify. A model space view containing a detail can be associated with a callout. Detail view drawings are based on the detail view template defined in the project settings.
148 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Detail view in callout
Section/Elevation view drawing: A section/elevation view drawing contains one or more model space views that show a defined portion of the section/elevation view drawing. A model space view containing a section or elevation can be associated with a callout. Section/Elevation view drawings are based on the section/elevation view template defined in the project settings. Elevation view drawing with four model space views
A model space view is a portion of the view drawing that may be displayed in its own viewport in a drawing. Model space views are an evolution of the Named Views concept of AutoCAD. As opposed to Named Views, model spaces views have a defined boundary. When a model space view is placed onto a sheet, a sheet view is created. A model space view has its own name, description, and drawing scale. When a model space view is placed on a sheet, the display configuration and view direction of the view drawing are used in the sheet view. You have the possibility to associate a named layer state to a model space view, which will be used when placing the model space view in a sheet view. If no named layer state is associated to a model space view, then the layer settings of the view drawing are used in the sheet view. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 1 in the view drawing, xref-dependent layer changes made in the view drawing will also be used in the sheet view.
Concepts of Drawing Management | 149
Defining a model space view
Displaying a model space view
For more information on the view system in Autodesk Architectural Desktop, see "Views" on page 240. Plotting Sheets Sheets are used to plot plans of your building project. The plotting sheet system in Autodesk Architectural Desktop consists of these components:
Sheet drawing: A sheet drawing is a DWG file containing one or more sheets. Sheet: A sheet is a paper space layout within a sheet drawing that has been registered with the sheet set. When you
create a new sheet in a sheet drawing, you can define an existing sheet layout as a template. A sheet can contain one or more sheet views.
150 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Plotting sheet with building plan view
Sheet view: A sheet view is a model space view referenced from a view drawing into a sheet. Display configuration, view direction, drawing scale and layer settings of the model space view are used in the sheet view. Sheet view created from model space view
Sheet drawings, sheets, sheet views, and model space views are listed on the Sheets and Views tabs of the Project Navigator, from where they can be dragged and dropped into the appropriate locations, either in the Project Navigator or in the drawing area. In a sheet, you can add annotation like tags, dimensions, and schedule tables. Whether to create the annotation in a view or in a plotting sheet is a decision you make based on your workflow and individual needs. For more information, see "Plotting Sheets" on page 258. Sheet Set A sheet set is a named and ordered collection of sheets that shares a number of common properties, such as media size and plot setup. Sheet sets are similar to the physical set of bound sheets that are the primary communication medium on a typical building project. They also represent the published DWF set. Sheet sets are tailored for efficient output of printed or electronic documents through the Publish command.
Concepts of Drawing Management | 151
Sheet set for Architectural Desktop project
Each project in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop has one specific project sheet set assigned. The project sheet set contains all sheets of the project. You cannot assign a different sheet set to a project. Sheet Set Manager The Sheet Set Manager, a tool to manage all aspects of sheet sets within the software. The AutoCAD Sheet Set Manager is integrated within Autodesk Architectural Desktop Project Navigator. It has been adapted to optimally use the new functionalities and at the same time retain the workflows of the Architectural Desktop Drawing Management. Levels and Divisions The building model provides a framework of levels and divisions (also called wings). By default, a new project consists of one level and one division. You can add levels and divisions throughout the lifetime of a project. The matrix of levels and divisions act as labels to help uniquely identify the building components. For example, you could have a construct in your building named "First Floor--West Wing." Levels and divisions schematic
Building objects can span multiple levels and divisions. You can use a spanning construct for curtain walls, elevator shafts, and similar building elements. For more information, see "Levels" on page 200 and "Divisions" on page 205. Categories To help organize the building, the parts of the building project--elements, constructs, views, and sheets--can be categorized. You can use categories like shell, core, and interior partitions. You can also use design-phase categories like conceptual design, building design, and documentation. Categorizing a construct also acts as a label for the construct that can be used when generating views.
152 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Construct categories in the Project Navigator
For more information, see "Categories" on page 207. Cut Planes When working on a complex building, you need optimal control over the cut plane settings. The Drawing Management feature provides the ability to define a global cut plane that is applied to a building level. You can define visible ranges above and below the cut plane offering flexibility when creating plans. In addition, objects such as walls, curtain walls, and slabs can use an individual cut plane set in the object or the object style. 3D view of curtain showing global and manual cut planes at each level
For more information, see "Working with Cut Planes in a Project" on page 304.
Before You Begin: External References Within a Project
The Drawing Management feature uses external references as a means to create a project and maintain it. Elements are referenced into constructs, constructs are referenced into views, and views are referenced into sheets. The mechanism of referencing is identical to the regular AutoCAD External References Management feature. However, the background methods employed have additional features. Whenever you define a project drawing, an accompanying XML file is created. That XML file contains information about level and division assignments and viewport and content information appropriate for the type of drawing. The XML file is vital for the project. Under no circumstances should you delete it (unless you are deleting the entire project). The Project Navigator has a number of commands for referencing project files--like elements, constructs, and views--into other project files.
Before You Begin: External References Within a Project | 153
If you are working in a project environment, use the Project Navigator commands to reference project drawings into other project drawings. Do not use the standard AutoCAD Xref Manager to reference project drawing files into other project drawing files. The AutoCAD Xref Manager cannot differentiate between project drawings (with an accompanying XML file) and non-project drawings (plain DWG files). If you reference a non-project file into a project file by mistake, you cannot use the full Drawing Management functionality on that file. For example, a drawing file referenced into a project file via the AutoCAD Xref Manager is not assigned a project category and does not display in the Project Navigator.
NOTE Drawing Management supports the use of relative paths for external references. In the project setup, you can decide whether external references within the project should be inserted with full paths, or with paths relative to the project folder. Working with relative xref paths makes moving the project and e-transmitting it easier and reduces the need for re-pathing the project. For more information on relative and full paths, see "Set Paths to Referenced Drawings" in AutoCAD Help.
Keep these considerations in mind when working with a project:
Do not delete any XML files generated by the Drawing Management feature. They are vital for the project. Use the commands of the Project Navigator to create, modify and reference project files within the project. If you
want to use existing non-project files in a project, convert them to project files first. For more information, see "Converting a Legacy Drawing to an Element" on page 232 and "Converting a Legacy Drawing to a Construct" on page 218. Determine in the project setup whether to insert full xref paths or relative xref paths.
NOTE Changing full xref paths to relative xref paths or relative paths to full paths in an existing project will change existing paths accordingly, provided the previous path was included in the AEC project location search paths in the AEC project options. An exception to this behavior is if the xref path points to a different hard drive than the one the project APJ file resides on. For information on adding project location search paths, see "Setting the Default Project Options" on page 157.
Before You Begin:Working in a Network Environment
When you are working on a large project, the project may be hosted on a network server and accessed by multiple users simultaneously. Note these points to create a seamless workflow:
Mapped drives: The Drawing Management feature supports working with mapped drives. You can place the project APJ file or project drawings on a mapped drive and mirror the server information for users in multiple locations.
Access restrictions on the network server: You can limit other users' ability to edit and delete project files by using network permissions. You can limit the Delete rights for the entire project, so that users cannot delete files from the project or move files around within the project. You might consider limiting delete rights to the top project folder (containing the APJ file) while allowing deletions in the subfolders.
Keeping the project tree current: When multiple users are working on a project simultaneously, it is possible that one user's view of the project will not reflect changes made by another user. For example, one user might be adding/moving/deleting constructs in a project the same time that another user is annotating plotting sheets. The user working on plotting sheets is not notified that the coworker has removed some constructs from the project. So if he tries to open a removed construct from the Project Navigator on his machine, an error message results. To prevent this situation, frequently refresh the project views so that all items are updated to reflect the current project status. For more information, see "Refreshing the Project View" on page 289.
Process Overview:Working in a Project Environment
In a project environment, drawing files are connected by a project file. You select numerous settings for the project, such as template locations, folder categories, and building data like levels and divisions. A drawing created within a project environment is edited and saved within the project structure. You can create specific views of your building
154 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
constructs, and define tailor-made plot sheets for views. You can define categories such as Architectural, Structural, or HVAC into which your constructs are saved.
The Drawing Management feature has two main components--the Project Browser and the Project Navigator. In the Project Browser, you define the current project, create new projects, and set high-level project information such as mapped drives, default templates, file prefixes, and user-defined information like contact, financial, or legal details. In the Project Navigator, you perform project-specific tasks, like creating project drawings or plotting sheets and setting levels and divisions. The following basic steps lead you from start to finish through your project: Step 1: Create a new project.
New projects can be either based on an existing project, or be built from scratch. For more information, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171. Step 2: Define the project settings. Project settings include general settings, tool palettes and Content Browser library, project standards, project details, and project databases. For more information, see "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174. Step 3: Define levels and divisions in the project. For more information, see "Levels" on page 200 and "Divisions" on page 205. Step 4: Create the elements and constructs of your building project. For more information, see "Elements" on page 228 and "Constructs" on page 214. Step 5: Create views of your building project; for example, a first-floor view or a structural view. For more information, see "Views" on page 240. Step 6: Create plotting sheets for the building project, including property set data, annotation tags, and dimensions. For more information, see "Plotting Sheets" on page 258 and "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293.
Project Support Files
A project can be associated with multiple support files. Normally these files are used to provide standards that ensure consistency across the project, or across multiple projects. Some support files are mandatory, while others are optional.
NOTE You can find all project-related templates under \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template.
The following support files can be used in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project: Project template (optional) Drawing templates (mandatory) Sheet set template (mandatory) Project standards drawings (optional) Project tool palette group (optional) Project Content Browser library (optional) Project structure templates (optional)
Project Support Files | 155
These support files are described below.
Project Template
A project template is an existing project that can be used as a template for a new project. When you create a project based on a template project, all drawing files, settings, and support files of the new project are taken from the template project. Alternatively, you can use only the structure and the support files of the template project for the new project. For more information, see "Creating a New Project Based on a Template (Copying a Project)" on page 171 and "Creating a New Project with the Structure of an Existing Project" on page 173. Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides two predefined template projects:
ADT Template Project (Imperial) ADT Template Project (Metric)
Drawing Templates
When you create a new project, you need to define default templates for new elements, constructs, and model views. The following default project drawing templates are shipped with Autodesk Architectural Desktop:
Aec Model (Imperial - ctb).dwt Aec Model (Imperial - stb).dwt Aec Model (Metric - ctb).dwt Aec Model (Metric - stb).dwt
NOTE Sheet templates are defined in the project sheet set template.
The Project Sheet Set Template
Each project has a unique sheet set that collects and organizes the sheets in a the project. The sheet set is created from a template in which the user defines the sheet set structure, the default sheet template, and page setup overrides. When you create a project based on a template project, the sheet set template of that project is used. When you create a new project without using a template, the default sheet set template defined in "Setting the Default Project Options" on page 157 is used. You cannot change the sheet set template after creating a project, You can, however, change the properties of the sheet set in the project. By default, four sheet set templates are shipped with the software:
Aec Sheet Set (Imperial ctb).dst Aec Sheet Set (Imperial stb).dst Aec Sheet Set (Metric ctb).dst Aec Sheet Set (Metric stb).dst
Project Standards Drawings
You can define drawings containing standard styles and display settings, as well as AutoCAD standards for a project. Standard styles and display settings are associated to the project in the standards configuration, as described in "Configuring Project Standards Files" on page 181. Project standards files can be saved within the project folder or in a different location. For the consequences of storing project standards files outside the project, see "Creating a New Project Standards Drawing" on page 366.
Project Tool Palettes
You can define a tool palette group to be used in the project. By default, the project palette group is empty when you create a new project, unless you create a project based on a template which supplies a project palette group. For more information, see "Setting up Standard Tools in a Project" on page 339.
156 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Project Content Browser Library
For a project, you can define a Content Browser library that is opened by default when you start Content Browser from within Project Navigator. The project library contains standard tools and palettes for the project. For more information, see "Setting up Standard Tools in a Project" on page 339.
Working with Design Teams Located Remotely
The best practice for working with members of an extended team is to set up the structure for a project on a dedicated drive of a central network server. Communicate the structure and location to remote teams so they can assign the project the same drive letter. When all remote locations use the same mapped drive, the extended team can work on the project without needing to re-path the drawing files as they are opened.
If you want to specify mapped drives for an existing project, organize the full project on the specific drive first. Once you designate a mapped drive for a project, the structure, such as constructs and templates, is also mapped to the same drive. For more information, see "Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories" on page 211.
Opening a Project From a Mapped Drive
Use this procedure to open a project located on a mapped drive. You must already have the project structure organized on that drive.
1 Click File menu Project Browser.
2 Click
.
3 In the Project Files dialog box, browse to the drive on which your project is located, and click Open.
4 Click Close on the Project Browser.
Setting the Default Project Options
Use this procedure to set the default options for your Autodesk® Architectural Desktop projects. Setting defaults saves time and helps keep data consistent across projects. The following options can be specified for projects:
Default project location search paths Default construct template Default element template Default general view template Default detail view template Default section/elevation view template Default sheet set template Default project bulletin board Default project image
NOTE When you create a new project based on a template project, the default templates, bulletin board, and project image of the template project are used in the new project. If the new project is not based on a template project, the settings defined in the default project options are used.
1 Click Format menu Options. 2 Click the AEC Project Defaults tab.
Working with Design Teams Located Remotely | 157
3 To add a project location search path or change an existing one, expand AEC Project Location Search Path and do any of the following:
If you want to...
change an existing project location search path
Then...
click the path you want to change, and click Browse. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, select the new search path, and click OK.
add a search path
click Add. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, select the additional search path, and click OK.
4 Expand Default Project Template Files. 5 Select the default templates for the individual project drawing types within a project:
If you want to...
Then...
change the default construct template for new expand Construct Template File and select the existing template. projects
change the default element template for new expand Element Template File and select the existing template. projects
change the default view drawing template for expand View Template File and select the existing template. new projects
change the default section and elevation view expand Section/Elevation Template File and select the existing template. template for new projects
change the default detail view template for expand Detail View Template File and select the existing template. new projects
change the default sheet set template
expand Sheet Set Template File and select the existing template.
NOTE The default sheet set template contains the default sheet template. For information on creating a new sheet set template, see "Creating a Sheet Set Template" on page 159.
6 Click Browse, and in the Select File dialog box, select the new template. Then, click OK.
158 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
7 Select a default project bulletin board and a default project preview image:
If you want to... change the default project bulletin board
Then...
expand Default Project Bulletin Board, and select the existing bulletin board.
change the default project image
expand Default Project Image, and select the existing preview image.
8 Click Browse, and in the Select File dialog box, select the new bulletin board (HTM) or project image (BMP) file. Then, click OK.
9 To specify that the Project Browser is opened every time you open Autodesk Architectural Desktop, select Show Project Browser at Startup.
NOTE To create a new sheet set template, see "Creating a Sheet Set Template" on page 159.
10 Click OK.
Creating a Sheet Set Template
When you create a new project, a project sheet set is automatically created. The project sheet set controls the settings relevant to sheets and the sheet set, like page setups, the sheet template, and sheet layouts. The sheet set is based either on the sheet set template that you define in the project default options, or, if you base a new project on a existing project as its template, on the sheet set of that project. The easiest way to create a new sheet set template is to base it on an existing sheet set. You can also base your new sheet set template on existing drawing files, allowing you to add pre-existing sheet layouts to the template. This is helpful if you want to convert existing sheets into project sheets.
IMPORTANT A number of settings apply only to sheet sets created in the AutoCAD Sheet Set Manager. For a sheet set that will be used in an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project, most settings come from the project, and not from the sheet set template.
The following settings are ignored when you use a sheet set template in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project:
The project sheet set: The sheet set file (DST) is always stored in the root folder of the project.
Model view: In an AutoCAD sheet set, this field displays the paths and names of folders that contain drawings used by the sheet set. Model view drawing locations are not tracked in Autodesk Architectural Desktop sheet sets. They are automatically taken from the project views.
Label block for views: Label blocks for project views are stored in the view templates.
Callout blocks: Callout blocks for a project are located on the Tools palette.
Sheet storage location: The sheets in a project are always stored in the Sheets folder of the project, or in one of its subfolders.
Project Control: When you are working in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, you associate project information to the project file (APJ), instead of the project sheet set. For information on associating information to a project, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171 and "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174.
Creating a Template from an Existing Sheet Set
Use this procedure to create a sheet set template based on an existing sheet set. Settings applied here are overriden if you redirect top-level categories on the Modify Project worksheet in the project in which the sheet set is located. For more information, see "Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories" on page 211.
1 Click Format menu Options.
2 Click the AEC Project Defaults tab.
Creating a Sheet Set Template | 159
3 Under Sheet Set Template, click Create. The Create Sheet Set wizard is displayed. It will help you to create a new sheet set template.
4 Under Create a sheet set using, select An example sheet set. Then, click Next.
5 To select a sample sheet set from the list, click Select a sample sheet set to use as an example, and then select a sheet set from the list.
160 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
6 To select a sheet set not listed here, click Browse to another sheet set to use as an example, and click .
7 In the Browse for Sheet Set dialog box, select a sheet set (DST) file, and click OK. Then, click Next.
8 Enter a name for the new sheet set template. 9 Enter a description for the new sheet set template. 10 Select the folder location in which to save the new sheet set template.
NOTE The location of a sheet set template does not define the location of project sheet sets created from that template. A project sheet set is always stored in the root folder of the associated project. If you are creating a sheet set template for an AutoCAD sheet set, you can select Create and link folders based on subsets. This will create a new subfolder in the sheet set every time you create a new sheet subset in the Sheet Set Manager. if you are creating a sheet set template for an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, this setting will have no impact, as sheet subsets in the Project Navigator will have corresponding folders associated to them automatically. 11 To define the properties of the new sheet set template, click Sheet Set Properties.
The following settings are ignored when you use the sheet set template in an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project:
The project sheet set: The DST file is always stored in the root folder of the project. Model view: In an AutoCAD sheet set, this field displays the paths and names of folders that contain
drawings used by the sheet set. Model view drawing locations are not tracked in Autodesk Architectural Desktop sheet sets. They are automatically taken from the project views. Label block for views: Label blocks for project views are stored in the view templates. Callout blocks: Callout blocks for a project are located on the Tools palette.
Creating a Template from an Existing Sheet Set | 161
Sheet storage location: The sheets in a project are always stored in the Sheets folder of the project, or in one of its subfolders.
Project Control: When you are working in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, you associate project information to the project file (APJ), instead of the project sheet set. For information on associating information to a project, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171 and "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174.
NOTE If you enter a project name and project number under Project Control that differs from the project name and number you enter in "Creating a New Project" on page 171, you will get an error message when editing the project, and be prompted to consolidate the information. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to leave the Project Control fields in the sheet set template empty.
12 Expand Sheet Set. 13 To define page setup overrides in the project, click the setting for Page setup overrides file. 14 In the Select Template dialog box, select a drawing template (DWT) file.
NOTE Select a template that contains named paper space layouts, and make sure that their plot areas have been set to Layout. Otherwise, you cannot use them as page setup overrides.
All other settings in this category are not applied when using the sheet set template for an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project.
15 Expand Sheet Creation. In this category, you define settings for the sheets you create within the sheet set.
16 To define a default layout for new sheets, click the setting for Sheet creation template.
17 Click to browse for a drawing (DWG) or template (DWT) file, and click Open. 18 Select the default layout to use to create new sheets, and click OK. 19 Specify if you want to be prompted for the sheet template each time you create a new sheet:
If you want to...
Then...
be prompted for a sheet template each time you create a new sheet
select Yes.
always use the specified template
select No.
20 To add, edit, or delete custom properties, click Edit Custom properties.
For information about Custom Properties, see "Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets" in AutoCAD Help.
162 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
NOTE When working in an Architectural Desktop project, normally you do not use custom properties. In most cases, you use the project details in the Project Browser. For more information, see "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
21 Click OK to close the Sheet Set Properties dialog box. Then, click Next.
22 Verify that all settings for the new sheet set are correct:
If you want to...
Then...
make changes to one or more settings
click Back.
finish creating the sheet set template
click Finish.
NOTE You can edit a project sheet set in the Sheet Set View tab of the Project Navigator, as described in "Setting the Properties of the Project Sheet Set" on page 261. You can edit a project sheet set template in the Sheet Set Manager of AutoCAD, as described in "Create and Manage a Sheet Set" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Creating a Template from Existing Drawings
Use this procedure to create a sheet set template that contains layouts from one or more existing drawings. Settings applied here are overriden if you redirect top-level categories on the Modify Project worksheet in the project in which the sheet set is located. For more information, see "Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories" on page 211.
1 Click Format menu Options. 2 Click the AEC Project Defaults tab.
Creating a Template from Existing Drawings | 163
3 Under Sheet Set Template, click Create. The sheet set wizard is displayed. It will help you to create a new sheet set template.
4 Under Create a sheet set using, select Existing drawings. Then, click Next.
164 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
5 Enter a name for the new sheet set. 6 Enter a description for the new sheet set. 7 Select the folder location where the new sheet set template should be saved.
NOTE The location of a sheet set template does not define the location of project sheet sets created from that template. A project sheet set is always stored in the root folder of the associated project.
8 To define the properties of the new sheet set template, click Sheet Set Properties.
The following settings are ignored when you use the sheet set template in an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project:
The project sheet set: The DST file is always stored in the root folder of the project. Model view: In an AutoCAD sheet set, this field displays the paths and names of folders that contain
drawings used by the sheet set. Model view drawing locations are not tracked in Autodesk Architectural Desktop sheet sets. They are automatically taken from the project views. Label block for views: Label blocks for project views are stored in the view templates. Callout blocks: Callout blocks for a project are located on the Tools palette. Sheet storage location: The sheets in a project are always stored in the Sheets folder of the project, or in one of its subfolders. Project Control: When you are working in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, you associate project information to the project file (APJ), instead of the project sheet set. For information on associating information to a project, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171 and "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174.
NOTE If you enter a project name and project number under Project Control that differs from the project name and number you enter in "Creating a New Project" on page 171, you will get an error message when editing the project, and be prompted to consolidate the information. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to leave the Project Control fields in the sheet set template empty.
9 Expand Sheet Set. 10 To define page setup overrides in the project, click the setting for Page setup override files. 11 In the Select Template dialog box, select a drawing template (DWT) file.
NOTE Select a template that contains named paper space layouts, and make sure that their plot areas have been set to Layout. Otherwise, you cannot use them as page setup overrides. All other settings in this category are not applied when using the sheet set template for an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project. 12 Expand Sheet Creation.
Creating a Template from Existing Drawings | 165
In this category, you define settings for the sheets you create within the sheet set. 13 To define a default layout for new sheets, click the setting for Sheet creation template.
14 Click to browse for a drawing (DWG) or template (DWT) file, and click Open. 15 Select the default layout you want to use to create new sheets. Then, click OK. 16 Specify if you want to be prompted for the sheet template each time you create a new sheet:
If you want to...
Then...
be prompted for a sheet template each time you create a new sheet
select Yes.
always use the specified template
select No.
17 To add, edit, or delete custom properties, click Edit Custom properties.
For information about Custom Properties, see "Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
NOTE When working in an Architectural Desktop project, normally you do not use custom properties. In most cases, you use the project details in the Project Browser. For more information, see "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
18 Click OK to close the Sheet Set Properties dialog box. Then, click Next.
166 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
In the Choose Layouts tab, you can select layouts from existing drawings and add them to the sheet set template as sheets. You could do this for example to convert legacy sheets to project sheets.
19 To select one or more drawings from which to copy layouts to the sheet set template, click Browse. 20 In the Browse for Folder dialog box, select the folder containing the drawings, and click OK. 21 Expand the folder and drawing name, and select the layouts to be included in the sheet set template. 22 To remove a drawing or folder, select it, right-click, and click Remove. 23 Repeat this step for drawings in other folders, if necessary. 24 Click Next.
25 Verify that all settings for the new sheet set are correct:
If you want to...
Then...
make changes to one or more settings
click Back.
finish creating the sheet set template
click Finish.
NOTE You can edit a project sheet set in the Sheet Set Explorer of the Project Navigator, as described in "Setting the Properties of the Project Sheet Set" on page 261. You can edit a project sheet set in the Sheet Set Manager of AutoCAD, as described in "Create and Manage a Sheet Set " in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
The Project Browser
In the Project Browser, you perform high-level project-related tasks, such as creating a new project, selecting the currently active project, and setting default templates for the project drawing types.
Using the Project Browser
In the Project Browser, you create new projects, configure the project settings and project standards, add detail information, and select the current project. You can browse to a project on a mapped drive. When you set a project current either from the context menu or by double-clicking the file name, your drawings are migrated to a format compatible with the current version of Architectural Desktop. Subsequently, you will be unable to open these drawings in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
The Project Browser | 167
Project Browser
On the left side of the Project Browser, you select the current project, create new projects, browse existing projects, edit project settings, close a project, and refresh the project after making changes. All information you enter here pertains to the project as a whole. On the right side of the Project Browser, an embedded Internet Explorer allows you to browse your project home page.
NOTE The projects you create in the Project Browser appear as files and folders in Windows Explorer. As a general rule, you should not perform any file operations on a project file there, except in those cases where a procedure explicitly states that you should. Changes in Windows Explorer are not always updated correctly in the Project Browser, and you could get an inconsistent view of your project data. Any changes you make to the project within the Project Browser are managed and coordinated by Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. Changes made outside the software might not be correctly updated and processed.
The Project Header
The currently selected project is displayed in the upper-left area of the Project Browser. The header contains the project name, project number, a user-selected bitmap representing the project, and an optional short project description. You enter this information when you create a new project or edit an existing one.
Project header
The Project Navigation Bar Below the project header, toolbar buttons help you to navigate in your folder structure.
Button
Description Returns you to the previously displayed folder.
Displays the folder structure one level above the currently displayed folder.
Takes you to the Project File Navigator, where you can browse for project (APJ) files.
Displays the projects in the folder selected in the list below. For detailed information, see "The Project Selector" on page 168.
Displays a historic list of projects sorted by various criteria. For detailed information, see "The Project Selector" on page 168.
The Project Selector The project selector on the left side of the Project Browser displays the projects you have created in Architectural Desktop.
168 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Project selector
You have two main options for displaying projects:
Displaying Projects by Folder Structure You can display the projects on your computer or network based on the Windows Explorer folder structure. When you navigate to a folder, all projects and subfolders contained in that folder are displayed.
1 Click File menu Project Browser.
2 In the project navigation bar, click
.
The project selector displays the folder structure of your computer. The contents of the currently selected folder
are displayed in the project selector. Project files are displayed with the project icon displayed in bold letters.
. The current project is
3 To switch to another folder, select it in the drop-down list.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
4 To navigate to the parent folder of the current folder, click
.
Displaying Projects by History In the project selector, you can display projects based on their history.
1 Click File menu Project Browser.
2 In the project navigation bar, click
.
3 Select the option by which you want to sort projects.
If you select Most Recently Used, the last eight projects you have made current are displayed in descending order in the project selector.
If you select By Date, a list of project dates is displayed, sorted by current day, current week, and previous weeks.
If you select By Project, a list of project names is displayed, sorted alphabetically.
If you select By Location, a list of folders containing project files is displayed, in alphabetical order. If you double-click a folder, the projects contained in it are displayed.
Project files are displayed with the project icon . The current project is displayed in bold letters.
Using the Project Browser | 169
4 If you want to remove a project from the history, select the project, right-click, and click Remove from History List. Click Yes in the subsequent message box.
NOTE You cannot remove the current project from the history list.
5 If you want to remove the complete history list except for the current project, select a project, right-click, and click Reset History list. Click Yes in the subsequent message box.
The Embedded Internet Explorer View When you create a new project, you can connect it to a bulletin board HTML page. You could do this, for example, to provide a link to your company's home page or a project web site. The HTML page is displayed in the right pane of the Project Browser. At the bottom of the page, there is a standard Internet Explorer navigation bar with buttons for Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh and Project Home.
The Project Structure
When you create a new project, Autodesk® Architectural Desktop automatically creates a project environment to connect the individual files into one project. The Project (APJ) File The project (APJ) file is the highest level of the project. It contains information about the project name, number, level and division information, as well as settings for drawing templates, project details, project standards, project palettes, and the xref linking method. You also configure standards styles, display settings, and AutoCAD standards here. For more information, see "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174. An existing APJ file can serve as the template for a new project. For more information, see "Creating a New Project Based on a Template (Copying a Project)" on page 171.
NOTE The APJ file is a well-formed XML document. You can open and modify it using an XML editor.
The Default Category Structure The categories within a project are represented by file folders. When you create a new project, the following default category structure is created:
<My Project Name>: The top category uses the name you have given your project. Constructs: The default category for constructs in the project. Elements: The default category for elements in the project. Views: The default category for views in the project. Sheets: The default category for plotting sheets in the project.
When you create a new project, these categories are empty. These top categories can be directed to point to unique folders, but they cannot be an ascendant or descendant of each other in the tree structure. You can create subcategories in each of them. For more information, see "Categories" on page 207. The Project Sheet Set In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, plotting sheets are collected in sheet sets. A sheet set allows you to have common publishing setups across a number of plotting sheets. When you create a new project, a unique sheet set is created for this project. The project sheet set is displayed on the Sheets tab of the Project Navigator.
170 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
The project sheet set is either created from the default project sheet set template set in the project options, as described in "Setting the Default Project Options" on page 157, or, if the project is created from a template, from the template's sheet set. For more information about creating a project based on a template, see "Creating a New Project Based on a Template (Copying a Project)" on page 171. Project sheet set in Architectural Desktop Project Navigator
Only one sheet set can be associated with a project. You cannot change the sheet set for an existing project, but you can change its properties.
Setting a Project Current
Use this procedure to set a project to be the current project. To work within the project environment, you must define the current project. Only one project can be current at a time, and all project operations you perform, such as adding elements and constructs or changing levels and divisions, are done within the current project. When you select a project as the current one, its project header and default HTML bulletin board are displayed in the Project Browser. NOTE If your Project Browser does not yet contain any projects, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 In the project selector, select a project.
Projects are displayed with a project icon . 3 Right-click, and click Set Project Current.
NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the project. The selected project is loaded in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, and you can work with it until you close it or select another one.
Creating a New Project
There are 3 options for creating a new project. You can copy an existing project and all its settings; you can create a project with the folder structure and support files of an existing project; or you can create a new project from scratch, with no predefined files and settings. Creating a New Project Based on a Template (Copying a Project) Use this procedure to create a project using an existing project as a template.
Setting a Project Current | 171
This is the quickest and easiest way to create a project with predefined settings and support files. When you use this method, the following files and structures are copied to the new project:
All project DWG files and XML files Project standards files AutoCAD standards files Project standards synchronization settings Sheet set template Project details Drawing templates Keynote and detail component databases Project tool palette group Tool content root path Project Content Browser library
NOTE Project standards files, the project tool palette group, and the project Content Browser library are copied to the new project only if they are located within the original project folder. Standard components located outside the project folder will be referenced by the new project, but not copied to it.
Creating a new project based on a template will copy all files that are in the project folder. If you want only the support files and structure of the project to be copied, but not its drawing files, see "Creating a New Project with the Structure of an Existing Project" on page 173.
If you redirected any categories in the project in which the template is located, this option is not available. For more information, see "Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories" on page 211.
1 Click File menu Project Browser.
2 Right-click on an existing project or folder in the project selector, and click New Project.
Alternatively, you can click
in the toolbar below the project selector.
3 In the Add Project dialog box, enter a number for the new project. Each project needs a unique identification number. You can use numerals, alphabetic characters, or a combination, such as 100A. The project number appears in the project header. The number you assign here can be used as a prefix for all drawings you create in the project. You can also use the number as a property for a title block. For more information, see "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295.
4 Enter a name for the new project. 5 Under Project Description, if desired, enter a description brief enough to be displayed in the project header.
Details about the project can be entered on a separate worksheet. For information, see "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
172 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
6 Select Create from template project.
7 Enter the path and name of an existing APJ file, or click 8 Click OK.
to navigate to an APJ file.
NOTE You cannot specify all support files and paths directly when creating a new project; you can only define name, number, description, and project template. The remaining settings can only be defined after the project has been created. If you create the project based on a template, the settings of the template are used for the initial setting. To define the project settings, see "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174.
Creating a New Project with the Structure of an Existing Project Use this procedure to create a new project that is based on the structure and support files of an existing project, but does not contain its drawing files. If you redirected any categories in the project, this option is not available. For more information, see "Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories" on page 211. When you use this method, the following files and settings are copied to the new project:
Project standards files AutoCAD standards files Project standards synchronization settings Sheet set template Project details Drawing templates Keynote and detail component databases Project tool palette group Tool content root path Project Content Browser library
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 In the project selector, locate the folder in which the project of which you want to copy the structure and
support files is located. 3 Select the project, right-click, and click Copy Project Structure.
4 In the Duplicate Project dialog box, enter a number for the new project. Each project needs a unique identification number. You can use numerals, alphabetic characters, or a combination, such as 100A. The project number appears in the project header. The number you assign here can be used as a prefix for all drawings you create in the project. You can also use the number as a property for a title block. For more information, see "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295.
5 Enter a name for the new project. 6 Under Description, if desired, enter a description brief enough to be displayed in the project header.
Details about the project can be entered on a separate worksheet. For information, see "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
7 Under Copy to, select a folder in which you want to save the copied project.
Creating a New Project | 173
8 Click OK.
Creating a New Project Without Using a Template Use this procedure to create a new project that is not based on a template but uses the drawing templates, sheet set template, and project bulletin board specified in the AEC Project Defaults, as described in "program default options" on page 157. Note that you still need to define project details and project standards.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 Right-click on an existing project or folder in the project selector, and click New Project.
Alternatively, you can click
in the toolbar below the project selector.
3 In the Add Project dialog box, enter a number for the new project.
Each project needs a unique identification number. You can use numerals, alphabetic characters, or a combination, such as 100A. The project number appears in the project header.
The number you assign here can be used as a prefix for all drawings you create in the project. You can also use the number as a property for a title block. For more information, see "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295.
4 Enter a name for the new project.
5 Under Project Description, if desired, enter a description brief enough to be displayed in the project header. Details about the project can be entered on a separate worksheet. For information, see "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
6 Verify that Create from template project is not selected. 7 Click OK.
NOTE You cannot specify all support files and paths directly when creating a new project; you can only define name, number, description, and project template. The remaining properties can only be defined after the project has been created. If you create the project based on a template, the properties of the template are used for the initial setting. If you created a project without using a template, the properties will initially be empty or are defined by the AEC default project options. To define the project properties, see "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174.
Defining the Project Properties
When you have created a new project, the following properties need to be defined, or can be changed:
Project bulletin board Project image Relative or full paths for external references Project tool palette file location Project tool palette storage type Project tool content root path
174 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Project library Drawing templates for elements, constructs and views Project details Project detail component databases and keynote databases Project standards drawings
When you have created a project based on a template project, these settings are initially taken from this project. You can change them, if necessary.
NOTE The project sheet set template is defined during the creation of the project; either it is the same sheet set template used in the template project, or, if you have chosen to create a new project without using a template, it is the default project sheet set template defined in "Setting the Default Project Options" on page 157. It is not displayed here.
Defining General Properties Use this procedure to define or change general properties for the project, such as the name and number of the project and paths for constructs, elements, views, and sheets. For more information about paths for constructs, elements, views, and sheets, see "Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories" on page 211.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 In the project selector, select the project for which to define the settings, right-click, and click Project
Properties.
Project Properties
3 Define or change the following project properties as needed.
Property
Description
Number
The project number is defined when you create the project. You can enter a new number here.
NOTE You can set up the project so that the project number is added as a prefix to each project drawing created in the project. If you change the project number during the project lifecycle, only new drawings will show the changed number in the file prefix; existing drawings will retain the original number prefix.
Defining the Project Properties | 175
Property Name
Description Path for
Project Constructs Elements Views Sheets Bulletin Board
Project Image
Prefix Filenames with Project Number
Description
The project name is defined when you create the project. If you change the name here, only the name displayed in Project Browser and Project Navigator is changed; the APJ file and the project folder in Windows Explorer retain the original name. Therefore, it is not recommended to make name changes here. If you need to rename a project, use the procedure described in "Renaming a Project" on page 184.
You can enter or change the project description by clicking the row, and typing a description.
The location of the project and top level categories is displayed as specified in the Project Browser. Ideally, your categories have the same location as your
project. To redirect constructs, elements, views, and sheets, click
, select
a different location, and click OK. For more information, see "Specifying the
Location of Top-Level Categories" on page 211.
You can connect a project in the Project Browser with an HTML file pointing to your company home page or a project web site. Click the setting for Bulletin
Board, click
, select the HTML page to appear in the Project Browser,
and click Open. The page selected is displayed in the right side of the Project
Browser in an embedded Internet Explorer.
You can select a BMP image for the project header. Click the setting for Project
Image, click click Open.
, select the bitmap file to appear in the project header, and
TIP Due to the relatively small size of the header (64x64 pixels), a simple image with clear contrasts creates the best effect.
When you select Prefix Filenames with Project Number, drawing files created within this project have the project number prefixed to their file names. You could create file names like "100A-First Floor" or "100A-Structural." If you select No, no prefix is added to drawing files created within this project.
NOTE Omitting a prefix has no influence on whether drawing files are assigned to the project. Every drawing file you create and save within a project is connected to that project, regardless of prefix.
TIP When you add or change the prefix setting in an existing project, only new files created within the project reflect the prefix change. Existing files still have the old prefix settings.
176 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Property Use Relative Xref Paths
Description
When you select Yes here, external references within the project are inserted with xref paths relative to the project folder. This makes it easier to move or e-transmit a project.
Changing full xref paths to relative xref paths or relative paths to full paths for existing xref paths will change existing paths accordingly, provided the previous path was included in the project location search paths in the AEC Project Defaults. An exception to this behavior is if the xref path points to a different hard drive than the one the project APJ file resides on. For information on adding project location search paths, see "Setting the Default Project Options" on page 157.
Tool Palette File Location
Tool Palette Storage Type
Tool Content Root Path
Tool Catalog Library Default Template for
Constructs Elements Model Views Sections Elevations Detail View
You can select the location from either a local folder or a network folder. If you do not explicitly set a location here, default behavior is selected depending
on how you created your project. Click
, select a different location, and
click OK. For more information, see "Adding a Project Library and Tool
Palette Group" on page 177.
Select Shared Workspace Catalog or Per User Workspace Catalog. If you select Shared Workspace Catalog, the path selected under Tool Palette File Location is added to the user's project profile (AWS), and the tool catalog is used from the specified location. If you select Per User Workspace Catalog, a folder is created under \\Documents and Settings\<User Name>\ and the tool palettes are copied to that folder.
You can specify a tool content root path to help you keep your tools consistent with standards. For more information, see "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 177.
Select the default Content Browser Library (CBL) to be displayed when opening Content Browser from the Project Navigator.
Each drawing type in a project has an associated template (DWT) file. Different drawing types have different templates; for example, you need different settings for a section view drawing than for a construct drawing. For an overview of the drawing types of the Drawing Management, see "Concepts of Drawing Management" on page 146. Click the setting for the appropriate
type, click
, select a default drawing template, and click OK. The template
you set here is used by default for new files of the selected type within the
project.
Display Only Project Detail Component Display Only Project Keynote Database
You can specify which detail component databases to use in the project to ensure consistent details across the project. For more information, see "Setting the Detail Component and Keynote Databases for a Project" on page 180.
You can specify which keynote databases to use in the project to ensure compliance with a specific keynoting standard. For more information, see "Setting the Detail Component and Keynote Databases for a Project" on page 180.
4 Click OK to finish editing the project properties, and return to the Project Browser.
Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group You can define a project tool palette group. You can also specify a Content Browser library to be associated with the project; each time Content Browser is opened from Project Navigator, the project library is displayed.
Defining the Project Properties | 177
Project Tool Palette Group Each project has a specific tool palette group (ATC) associated with it. Depending on how you created the project, the tool palette group can be created and displayed in different ways. For a new project, the project tool palette group is by default empty, unless the project settings are pointing to an existing palette group.
Selecting the project tool palette group
Tool Content Root Path Setting a tool content root path can help you keep your tools consistent with standards if the project or the standards drawings are moved during the project lifecycle. When tools on the project tool palettes point to the tool content root path specified in the project settings, the content root path is created as a variable (%AECPROJECT_DIR%) in the XML definition of the tool. When the tool content root path in the project settings is changed, the path of the tools is changed accordingly. For example, if all project tools point to content stored under <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content 1\, you can move the content to <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content 2\, adjust the tool content root path in the project setup accordingly, and all tools will now point correctly to <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content 2. Another use case for changing the tool content root path would be if a user wants to work offline, and for that purpose creates an e-transmit package of the project and its tool content files. When the e-transmit package is unpacked on the local computer, the path to the content files will have changes. If it was P:\ <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content, it could now be C:\ <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content. If the tool content root path is redirected to the user's C drive, all content remains valid. Later, when the drawings the user modified offline are copied back to the main project on the P server, the content root path will automatically change back to P:\ <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content, as this is the path in the main APJ file. Project Library A Content Browser library can be set up on a shared network volume to be accessed by all project users. The CAD manager or project owner can associate the library with the project to have quick access to standard tools. This can be especially useful on a large project. When Content Browser is opened from the Project Navigator, it will automatically open the library associated with the project.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 Select the project for which you want to specify the tool palette group and the Content Browser library,
right-click, and click Project Properties.
178 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3 Under Tool Palette File Location, specify the location for the project tool palette group. You can select a local folder or a network folder.
If you do not explicitly set a location, the following default behavior is selected depending on how you created your project:
Project Type
Tool Palette File Location
Project Tool Palette Group
Legacy project from Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2005/2006
pointing to new empty ATC file under \<ProjectName>\Standards\ WorkspaceToolPalettes\ <ProjectName>.atc
Created, but not displayed. To display the tool palette group in the tool palettes set and add tools to it, see "Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group" on page 347 and "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
New project not based on a pointing to new empty ATC file under
template
\<ProjectName>\Standards\ WorkspaceTool-
Palettes\ <ProjectName>.atc
Created, but not displayed. To display the tool palette group in the tool palettes set and add tools to it, see "Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group" on page 347 and "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
New project based on default Architectural Desktop template project
pointing to new ATC file under \<ProjectName>\Standards\ WorkspaceToolPalettes\ <ProjectName>.atc. By default, one empty tool palette is already inserted in ATC.
Created and displayed with empty default tool palette. To add tools and palettes, see "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
New project based on userdefined existing template project
If the tool palette group of the template project is located within the template project folder, it will be copied with all contained palettes to the corresponding folder of the new project. The tool palette file location of the new project will point to the copied tool palette group.
Displayed as either copied tool palette group or referenced tool palette group
If the tool palette group of the template project is located outside the template project folder, the tool palette file location of the new project will point to the same location, sharing the tool palette group with the template project.
4 For Tool Palette Storage Type, select Shared Workspace Catalog or Per User Workspace Catalog.
Defining the Project Properties | 179
If you select Shared Workspace Catalog, the path selected under Tool Palette File Location is added to the user's project profile (AWS), and the tool catalog is used from the specified location. If you select Per User Workspace Catalog, a folder is created under \\Documents and Settings\<User Name>\ and the tool palettes are copied to that folder. 5 Under Tool Content Root Path, you can set a root path for the tools used in the project tool palette group. When tools on project palettes are created with the tool content root path specified in the project setup, the content root path is created as a variable (%AECPROJECT_DIR%). When the tool content root path in the project setup is changed, and the referenced style drawings are moved to the new location, the path of the project tools is changed accordingly.
NOTE When a project is re-pathed, and the content root path is within the project folder, it will be re-pathed accordingly.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
6 Under Tool Catalog Library, select the default Content Browser Library (CBL) to be displayed when opening Content Browser from the Project Navigator.
7 Click OK.
Setting the Detail Component and Keynote Databases for a Project Use this procedure to set the detail component databases and keynote databases for the project. Details are components in a drawing that are used to sketch detailed, large-scale views. Typical detail components are bolts, concrete reinforcing bars, and brick details. You can select details from one or more detail component database (MDB) files. When you set up a project, you can specify which detail component databases to use in the project. That way, you ensure consistent details across the project. Keynotes are components for annotating construction documents. You can select keynotes from one or more keynote database (MDB) files. When you set up a project, you can specify which keynote databases to use in the project. That way, you ensure the compliance with a specific keynoting standard; for example the CSI standard. For more information, see "Detail Components" on page 1815 and "Annotation and Keynoting Tools" on page 1849.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 In the project selector, select the project for which you want to define detail and keynote databases,
right-click, and click Project Properties. 3 Next to Project Details Component Databases, click Add/Remove.
4 Click Add to add a detail component database to the project.
NOTE Only correctly structured detail component databases can be added here; if you try to add a differently structured database, you receive an error message.
5 To remove a database from the list of databases available in the project, select the database and click Remove.
180 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
6 Click OK. 7 Next to Project Keynote Databases, click Add/Remove. 8 Repeat steps 4-6 for the keynote database. 9 To display only the detail component databases selected in the previous steps, select Yes for Display Only
Project Detail Component Databases. 10 To display only the keynote databases selected in the previous steps, select Yes for Display Only Project
Detail Keynote Databases. 11 Click OK.
Configuring Project Standards Files The Project Standards feature lets you establish, maintain and synchronize standards across all drawings in an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project. Project standards include standard styles, display settings, and AutoCAD standards that are used across all project drawings. Standard styles and display settings are specified in one or more standards drawings associated with the project. Project drawings can then be synchronized with these standards throughout the project lifecycle, either automatically, or on demand. In addition, you can designate a tool palette group and a Content Browser library that are associated with project standard styles. AEC standards for a project include all items from Style Manager and Display Manager. AEC standard objects are included in the synchronization and can be updated from a project drawing. They include these items:
object styles (for example, wall styles, door styles, and so on) property set definitions property data formats schedule table styles classification definitions display theme styles layer key styles mask block definitions material definitions multi-view block definitions profile definitions display properties display sets display configurations
The Autodesk Architectural Desktop Project Standards feature integrates the AutoCAD Standards checker, allowing the user to set up one or more DWS files for AutoCAD components. AutoCAD components that can be included in a standards check are:
AutoCAD dimension styles AutoCAD layers Text styles Linetypes
In the project standards configuration, you define which drawings to use as the source for standard styles and display settings, which drawings to use as the source for AutoCAD layers, dimension styles, text styles, and layers, and how to synchronize the standards in the project.
Defining the Project Properties | 181
For detailed information about project standards, see "Project Standards" on page 325.
1 Click File menu Project Browser.
2 In the project selector, select the project for which you want to configure project standards, and click Project Properties.
3 Next to Project Standards, click Configure.
4 Configure the project standards. For detailed information, see "Configuring Project Standards" on page 331.
Adding Project Details Use this procedure to add detail information to a project.
Project details are user-defined information items that can be attached to a project. Details might include contact information about contractors, legal representatives, or others. You can also use project details to track changes and improvements to the project.
You can create detail categories and detail items. A detail category could be "Financial Data." A detail item in it could be "Loan Amount" or "Grant Amount." The details worksheet lets you create an information model that meets your needs.
You can use the project detail categories and items from an existing project, if you create a a project based on a project template. For more information, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171. If you create a new project without a template, no project details exist.
NOTE The details information you enter here is saved in the project APJ file in XML format. You can open the project APJ file in an XML editor in order to edit the detail information.
Project details are not only used in the project APJ file, but are also displayed as manual properties in the schedule data of a project. You can use the details to create schedule tables of your project or build title blocks for plotting sheets. For more information, see "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295.
1 Click File menu Project Browser.
2 Select the project to which you want to add details, right-click, and click Project Properties.
3 Under Project Details, click Edit.
4 Design your project information model:
If you want to... add content to a detail item
Then...
enter the content in the right column of the appropriate detail row.
add a detail category
click
, enter a name for the new detail category, and
click OK.
add a detail item within a detail category
select the category, click detail, and press ENTER.
, enter a name for the new
182 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
If you want to... remove a detail item
remove a detail category
Then...
select the detail item, and click
.
first delete all detail items in the detail category; then select
the category, and click
.
5 Click OK twice to finish editing the detail information of your project and return to the Project Browser.
Consolidating Inconsistent Project and Sheet Set Information If you have entered a project name and project number in the sheet set template ("Creating a Sheet Set Template" on page 159) that differs from the project number and name defined in "Creating a New Project" on page 171, then the project information is inconsistent and needs to be consolidated. When you open the properties of an inconsistent project, a warning message appears and you are prompted to consolidate the project information.
1 Click File menu Project Browser.
2 Select a project, right-click, and click Project Properties. If the project name and number of the project and the sheet set template do not match, the following message is displayed:
Under Project properties, the name and number of the project is listed. Under Project sheet set properties, the differing project name and number from the sheet set is listed.
3 Select Project properties, and click OK. The project name and number in the sheet set are overwritten with the project name and number from the project properties.
If the project sheet set DST file is read-only, an error message is displayed.
To consolidate the inconsistency, contact the project owner or CAD Manager.
Moving a Project
Use this procedure to move a project with all its associated files to a different file location. When you move a project, all internal paths between the project files are automatically updated, so that all relationships between drawings are kept current.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
To move a project to a different file location, it must be closed. For more information, see "Closing a Project" on page 184.
NOTE Do not move a project file to a different file location with Windows Explorer. This might result in inconsistent project data.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 Select the project you want to move, right-click, and click Move Project.
Moving a Project | 183
3 Select the location into which you want to move the project. 4 Click OK.
The project and all its files and folders are moved to the new location.
Renaming a Project
Use this procedure to rename an existing project. Renaming a project performs the following changes on the project files:
Rename the project display name in Project Browser and Project Navigator Rename the APJ file Rename the top project folder
When you rename a project, all internal paths between the project files are automatically updated, so that all relationships between drawings are kept current.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Renaming a project renames both the APJ file and the project folder. To rename a project, it must be closed. For more information, see "Closing a Project" on page 184.
NOTE Do not rename the project file in Windows Explorer. This might result in inconsistent project data.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 In the project selector, select the project you want to rename, right-click, and click Rename Project. 3 Enter the new name, and click OK.
Closing a Project
Use this procedure to close a project. If you do not want to work in a project environment in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you have the option of closing the current project, so that the program does not work in a project environment. You could do this if you are working on non-project drawing files, and do not want to accidentally make changes to a project. To work with a project again, you need to set a project current, as described in "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
1 Open the Project Browser. 2 In the project selector, locate the currently active project.
NOTE The currently active project is listed in the project header and is displayed in bold type in the project selector.
3 Select the project, right-click, and click Close Current Project.
Electronically Transmitting a Project
Use this procedure to create an electronic file set package for a project. The electronic package can include the following:
All project drawing (DWG) files, including external references All project XML files The project (APJ) file
184 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
All project templates The project sheet set (DST) file AutoCAD font map AutoCAD plot style tables
If you want to e-transmit a project, it is recommended that it uses relative xref paths. You can determine whether a project uses full xref paths or relative xref paths in the project setup. For more information, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171 and "Before You Begin: External References Within a Project" on page 153. For more information on creating electronic packages, see "Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 In the project selector, select the project from which you want to create an electronic package. 2 Right-click, and click eTransmit.
3 Select the components to include in the electronic package. The Create Transmittal dialog box has three tabs:
Tab Sheets
Contents The Sheets tab displays the sheet set tree.
Files Tree
The Files Tree tab displays Project drawings: AutoCAD Font Map AutoCAD Plot Style Table File AutoCAD Plotter configuration file XML Documents
AutoCAD Sheet Sets Autodesk Project Information Bitmap Image HTML Document You can select all these components for each project drawing to export.
Electronically Transmitting a Project | 185
Tab Files Table
Contents
The Files Table tab displays the same components as the Files Tree tab, listed in table format.
4 Select the transmittal setup for the package, right-click, and click Modify.
5 Under Transmittal package type, select the package type in which to export your project:
If you want to... export the project as a regular file set
Then... select Folder (set of files).
export the project in a WinZip file
select Zip (*.zip).
export the project as a self-extracting executable file select self-extracting executable (*exe).
6 Under File Format, select the format in which to export the drawing files:
If you want to...
Then...
export the project drawings with their AEC objects (walls, select AutoCAD 2007 Drawing Format. doors and so on) intact in the AutoCAD 2007 drawing format
export the project drawings with their AEC objects exploded into AutoCAD 2007 objects (3D faces, hatches and so on)
select AutoCAD 2007 Drawing Format with Exploded AEC Objects.
export the project drawings with their AEC objects (walls, select AutoCAD 2004 Drawing Format. doors and so on) intact in the AutoCAD 2004 drawing format
export the project drawings with their AEC objects (walls, select AutoCAD 2000 Drawing Format. doors and so on) displayed as proxy graphics
export the project drawings with their AEC objects exploded into AutoCAD 2004 objects (3D faces, hatches and so on)
select AutoCAD 2004 Drawing Format with Exploded AEC Objects.
186 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
If you want to...
export the project drawings with their AEC objects exploded into AutoCAD 2000 objects (lines and arcs)
Then...
select AutoCAD 2000 Drawing Format with Exploded AEC Objects.
7 Under Transmittal File Folder, select the folder into which to place the package.
For example, if you selected ZIP as the transmittal package type and C:\MyTransfer as the transmittal folder, the ZIP file containing your project will be placed under C:\MyTransfer\MyProject.zip.
8 Under Transmittal file name, specify the method for naming the transmittal package:
If you want to...
Then...
display a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the select Prompt for a file name. name of the transmittal package
use a logical default file name and, if the file name already exists, add a number to the end of the file name
select Increment file name if necessary.
use a logical default file name and, if the file name already exists, overwrite the existing file name
select Overwrite if necessary.
9 Select the transmittal options:
If you want to...
duplicate the folder structure for the files being transmitted and make the root folder the top-level folder within the hierarchical folder tree
Then...
select Use organized folder structure. This has the following consequences:
Relative paths remain unchanged.
Absolute paths within the root folder tree are converted to relative paths.
Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are converted to No Path and are moved to the root folder or a folder within the root folder tree.
A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.
A PlotCFG folder is created, if necessary.
A SheetSets folder is created to hold all sheet set support files, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder.
NOTE This option is not available if you are saving a transmittal package to an Internet location.
unpack all files to a single, specified target folder when the transmittal package is installed
select Place all files in one folder.
WARNING Do not select this option when electronically transmitting project information. When you place all files in one folder the project structure will be flattened.
preserve the folder structure of all files in the transmittal package
select Keep files and folders as is.
NOTE This option is not available if you are saving a transmittal package to an Internet location.
Electronically Transmitting a Project | 187
If you are transmitting a project, the following project-related information is always included in the transmittal package:
Project (APJ) file XML files Project template files
10 To include the associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the transmittal package, select Include fonts.
NOTE Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, they are not included with the transmittal package. If any required TrueType fonts are not present on the computer to which the transmittal package is copied, the font specified by the FONTALT system variable is substituted.
11 To launch your email application when the transmittal package is created so that you can send an email notifying others of the new transmittal package, select Send e-mail with transmittal.
12 To change the printer/plotter setting in the transmittal package to None, select Set default plotter to 'none'.
NOTE This is the default setting. Your local printer/plotter settings are usually not relevant to the recipient of the package.
13 To bind external references to the files in which they were attached, select Bind external references. Depending on the binding settings in "Changing the AEC Editor Settings" on page 114, the external files are either bound or inserted when e-transmitting the project.
14 To assign a password to the transmittal package, select Prompt for password. 15 To include the sheet set (DST) file in the transmittal package, select Include sheet set data and files.
When you are creating a project transmittal package, including the DST file is recommended.
16 Click OK twice to start the electronic transmittal.
Deleting a Project
Deleting a project is a system administrator task. Therefore, you do not perform it from within the Project Browser but from Windows Explorer. Deleting the project folder deletes all DWG files, XML files, and the APJ file. Before you do this, make sure that you really do not need any of these files anymore. If you do not work on a project any longer but still want to save the DWG files in it, it is often sufficient to just remove the project context, as described in "Removing the Project Context" on page 189.
NOTE Before you delete a project, make sure that is not the current project in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the folder of the project you want to delete. 2 Delete the project there.
Closing the Project Browser
Closing the Project Browser leads you to the next phase, where you are working on the actual building project, creating and editing elements, constructs, building views, and plotting sheets. In this phase, you work mainly with the Project Navigator. For more information, see "The Project Navigator" on page 189.
Close the Project Browser with one of these buttons:
Button
Description
Click the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop button in the dialog box header, right-click, and click Close.
188 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Button
Description
Click the Close button in the lower-right corner of the Project Browser.
Click the Windows Close button in the upper-right corner of the Project Browser.
Removing the Project Context
Use this procedure to remove all project-related information from the drawing files of a project. You could call this "exploding" a project.
NOTE You remove project-specific information in Windows Explorer.
In some cases, you need to revert project-related files to plain drawing files. You could do this if you want to hand over the files to a contractor who does not work with the latest version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, or if the project does not exist any longer but you do not want to delete the drawing files.
Much of the project-related information of a drawing file does not reside in the drawing file itself, but in the accompanying XML file. This means that you can use all your project files at any time in a non-project-related drawing context. However, if you want to work permanently without the project context, it is recommended that you clean your file set of the unused project files.
Project-related information resides in the following files:
The APJ file contains the general, high-level project data like name, number, project details, and project standards.
The accompanying XML files store the project information of the individual drawing files.
If you delete the APJ file and the XML files, the remaining drawing files no longer have connections to a project. They are regular Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing files and can be copied, edited, and deleted like any other drawing file.
The drawing files can contain standard styles and display settings, if standards have been set up for the project. When the XML and APJ files are deleted, any standard styles and display settings are no longer synchronized in the now standalone drawings.
1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the folder containing the project.
2 In the project folder, delete the APJ file. For example, if you have a project named "Office Building," delete the "Office Building.apj" file.
3 Open the Elements, Constructs, Sheets, and Views folders, and delete the accompanying XML files of your drawing files.
For example, if you have a drawing named "First Floor Construct.dwg" in your Constructs folder, select the accompanying "First Floor Construct.xml" file, and delete it.
4 Repeat step 3 for each drawing file.
5 If necessary, organize the remaining drawing files in a different folder structure.
NOTE If you reorganize files into a different file structure you may have to manually reset broken external reference paths in the drawings.
The Project Navigator
Once you have selected a project in the Project Browser, you open the Project Navigator to create and edit the actual building and documentation data. Here you create elements, constructs, model views, detail views, section views, sheets, and connect them with one another.
Removing the Project Context | 189
NOTE The project files and categories you create in the Project Navigator will appear as files and folders in Windows Explorer. You should not, however, perform any file operations on a project file there. Do not move, copy, delete, or rename project files from Windows Explorer. Such changes are not updated in the Project Navigator, and you could get an inconsistent view of your project data. Any changes you make to the project within the Project Navigator are managed and coordinated by Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. Changes made outside the software might not be correctly updated and processed.
NOTE If you make changes to a project file in the Project Navigator such as renaming, deleting, or changing the file's properties, you cannot undo the changes with the AutoCAD Undo commands.
Opening the Project Navigator
Use this procedure to open the Project Navigator. NOTE You can open the Project Navigator only when a drawing file is open in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the tab you want to display.
The Tabs of the Project Navigator
The Project Navigator has four tabs on which you can enter project data. The tabs correspond to the main phases of project creation: general project information (levels and divisions), creating building data (elements and constructs), and creating building documentation (views and sheets). The Project Tab In the Project tab, you enter information pertaining to the entire project.
In the Project tab, you can perform the following actions: Adding, modifying, and deleting levels. For more information, see "Levels" on page 200. Adding, modifying, and deleting divisions. For more information, see "Divisions" on page 205. Changing project information. Launching the Project Browser. Launch the Content Browser with the project library. For more information, see "Displaying the Project Library" on page 200.
The Constructs Tab In the Constructs tab, you add the basic building data for your project.
190 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
In the Constructs tab, you can perform the following actions: Adding, modifying, and deleting elements and constructs within the project. For more information, see "Elements" on page 228 and "Constructs" on page 214. Opening existing element and construct drawings. For more information, see "Opening and Closing an Element" on page 234 and "Opening and Closing a Construct" on page 221. Creating categories for elements and constructs. For more information, see "Categories" on page 207. Referencing elements into constructs. For more information, see "Attaching an Element as an External Reference to a Construct" on page 222 and "Overlaying an Element as an External Reference to a Construct" on page 223. Launch the Content Browser with the project library. For more information, see "Displaying the Project Library" on page 200.
The Views Tab In the Views tab, you create individual views of your building data. Views are created from constructs within the project. Once you have created a general view drawing, you can use it to create model space views, detail views, and section and elevation views.
In the Views tab, you can perform the following actions: Adding, modifying, and deleting view drawings in the project. For more information, see "Views" on page 240. Adding, modifying, and deleting model space views. For more information, see "Creating a Model Space View" on page 253.
The Tabs of the Project Navigator | 191
Adding, modifying, and deleting detail views, section views, and elevation views. For more information, see "Creating a Specialized View Drawing" on page 250.
Opening existing view drawings. For more information, see "Opening and Closing a View Drawing" on page 249. Changing the contents of view drawings. For more information, see "Changing the Properties of a View Drawing"
on page 251. Creating categories for view drawings. For more information, see "Categories" on page 207. Launch the Content Browser with the project library. For more information, see "Displaying the Project Library"
on page 200. The Sheets Tab In the Sheets tab, you create and organize plotting sheets for your project. Plotting sheets contain referenced sheet views and annotation, and are used exclusively for plotting drawings. In a plotting sheet you typically define plot-related settings like plot style tables and print layouts. In the Sheets tab, you also work with the project sheet set. Here you perform tasks that are relevant to the whole sheet set, like creating a sheet table of contents, managing sheet page setups, or publishing the sheet set to a plotter or to a DWF file. The Sheets tab has been separated into two different views: the Explorer View tab and the Sheet Set View tab. Sheet Set View In the Sheet Set view, you can view the sheet set of the project and perform all actions that relate to sheets, sheet views, and the sheet set.
In the Sheet Set View, you can perform the following actions: Creating sheet subsets that define the logical structure of the sheet set. Adding, modifying, and deleting sheets (layouts) in the project. For more information, see "Creating a New Sheet" on page 264. Opening sheet views. For more information, see "Opening a Sheet View" on page 270. Assigning numbers to sheet views. For more information, see "Numbering Sheet Views" on page 270. Inserting a sheets table of contents. For more information, see "Inserting a Sheet List" on page 271. Electronically transmitting the sheet set or a sheet subset. For more information, see "Electronically Transmitting Sheets and Sheet Sets" on page 275. Archiving the sheet set or a sheet subset. For more information, see "Archiving a Sheet Set" on page 278. Publishing the sheet set or a sheet subset to a plotter or a DWF file. For more information, see "Publishing Sheet Sets" on page 282. Creating sheet selections for specific tasks. For more information, see "Creating a Sheet Selection" on page 274. Managing page setups for the sheet set. For more information, see "Managing Page Setups" on page 284.
192 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Launch the Content Browser with the project library. For more information, see "Displaying the Project Library" on page 200.
Explorer View Tab In the Explorer View tab, you can view sheet drawings in the project and the sheets they contain.
In the Explorer View tab, you can perform the following actions: Opening and deleting sheet drawings. For more information, see "Deleting a Sheet Drawing" on page 269. Opening and deleting sheets. For more information, see "Deleting a Sheet" on page 269. Creating categories for sheet drawings. For more information, see "Categories" on page 207. Launch the Content Browser with the project library. For more information, see "Displaying the Project Library" on page 200.
Using the Project Navigator
The Project Navigator is the main point from which you work with the project. Its five tabs have numerous interface components. The Drawing Explorer The tabs below the Projects tab are where the drawing files are organized.
The Constructs tabs organizes elements and constructs in the project. The View tab organizes view drawings, as well as their associated model space views. The Sheets tab organizes sheet drawings, sheets, sheet views and the sheet set.
Using the Project Navigator | 193
Drawing Explorer
Drawing files belonging to a project are displayed in their respective tabs in the Drawing Explorer tree, which lists the drawings hierarchically based on their category (folder). You can use the Drawing Explorer to drag and drop, or copy and paste drawing files.
Drawing Explorer tree
NOTE When working in the Views tab or the Sheets tab, the model space views, sheets, and sheet views associated with view drawings and sheet drawings are also listed in the Drawing Explorer.
The Preview and Detail Panes
Below the Drawing Explorer is the Preview or Detail pane. You can switch between a preview of the drawing file selected
in the Drawing Explorer and a description of the drawing file. You can switch modes by clicking (Details).
(Preview) or
The Context Menu Each tab of the Project Navigator except the Project tab has a Drawing Explorer tree where the associated project drawing files--elements, constructs, views, and sheets--are displayed. Within the Drawing Explorer you can select a drawing file, and right-click it to display its context menu.
194 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Context menu of element
The commands on the context menu can vary slightly depending on the type of project file selected, but they have a common structure:
Command Open
Show External References
New Category
New Element Construct View Section Elevation Detail Sheet
Description
Opens the selected project drawing file within Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
Displays a worksheet that lists all external references in the selected project drawing file.
Creates a new category for the file type selected: for example, an element category or a construct category. For more information, see "Categories" on page 207.
Creates a new project file of the specified type. For more information, see the sections for the appropriate components.
Save Current DWG as Element Construct View Section Elevation Detail
Converts legacy drawings (created outside the project environment) into project file drawings.
NOTE The legacy file must be open to run this command.
Xref Attach Xref Overlay
Attaches the selected drawing as an external reference to the currently active drawing in Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
NOTE The drawing must be closed when you attach it.
Overlays the selected drawing as an external reference to the currently active drawing in Autodesk Architectural Desktop.
NOTE The drawing must be closed when you overlay it.
Using the Project Navigator | 195
Command Insert as Block Cut Copy Paste
Delete Rename
Re-path File
eTransmit
196 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Description Inserts the selected drawing as a block into the currently active drawing.
NOTE The drawing must be closed when you insert it as a block.
Cuts the selected file from the Drawing Explorer. Use this command together with Paste to relocate drawing files within the Drawing Explorer.
NOTE You cannot cut a file that is currently open.
Copies the selected file. Use this command together with Paste to copy a file to a different location. Pastes a cut or copied file to a new file location. When you have pasted a file in a different location, you should re-path the project to update the file information.
WARNING Selecting Repath or Refresh migrates your drawings to an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 format. This means that you will be unable to open these drawings in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Deletes the selected file.
NOTE You cannot delete a file that is currently open.
Renames the selected file.
NOTE You cannot rename a file that is currently open. When you have renamed a file, you should re-path the project to update the file information.
WARNING Selecting Repath or Refresh migrates your drawings to an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 format. This means that you will be unable to open these drawings in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Updates all path and file information for project files. You should do this every time you have renamed or moved a project file. When you use a mapped drive for your project, re-pathing is not required. For more information, see "Working with Design Teams Located Remotely" on page 157.
WARNING Selecting Repath or Refresh migrates your drawings to an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 format. This means that you will be unable to open these drawings in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Creates an eTransmit package from the selected file, including all external references.
Command Properties
Description
Opens the properties of the selected project drawing file. Depending on the file type, the properties can differ. A construct, for example, has settings for level and division assignment; a view has a list of constructs assigned to it. For detailed information on file properties, see the appropriate sections for the individual file types.
The Project Navigator Toolbar
Each Project Navigator tab has a toolbar at the bottom. The toolbar helps you to perform the tasks on each tab. The buttons on the toolbar may vary depending on the tab selected, but they have a common structure:
Button
Description
Launches the Project Browser from within the Project Navigator. This button is available from every tab on the Project Navigator.
Launches the Content Browser. If a project library has been set for the project, it is displayed in Content Browser.
Refreshes the project information in the Drawing Explorer. The Refresh button guarantees that the tree and preview pane are updated to the current state and synchronized with information added or changed by other users. This button is available from every tab on the Project Navigator.
NOTE Refreshing the project frequently is especially important when you are working with a project on a network server.
WARNING Selecting Repath or Refresh migrates your drawings to an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 format. This means that you will be unable to open these drawings in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Adds a new category for elements, constructs, views, and sheets. You can nest categories and create an organizational tree. Note that the category type is determined by the tab sheet; when you create a new category in the Views tab, a view category is created. This button is available from all tabs except the Project tab.
NOTE Alternatively, you can create a new category from the context menu.
Creates a new element. This button is available only from the Constructs tab.
NOTE Alternatively, you can create a new element from the context menu.
Creates a new construct. This button is available only from the Constructs tab.
NOTE Alternatively, you can create a new construct from the context menu.
Shows the external references attached to the selected project file drawing. This button is available from all tabs except the Project tab.
NOTE Alternatively, you can display the external references from the context menu.
Using the Project Navigator | 197
Button
Description
Use this button to update the file names and paths in the project after moving, copying, or renaming files. To guarantee current project information, you should run this command after each change. This button is available from all tabs except the Project tab.
WARNING Selecting Repath or Refresh migrates your drawings to an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 format. This means that you will be unable to open these drawings in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Use this button to create a new view. This button is available only from the Views tab.
NOTE Alternatively, you can create a new view from the context menu.
Use this button to reload all of the external references needed to generate the selected view after editing external references in the view, or adding new references. This button is available only from the Views tab.
NOTE Alternatively, you can regenerate a view from the context menu.
Use this button to create a new plotting sheet drawing. This button is available only from the Sheets tab.
NOTE Alternatively, you can create a new sheet from the context menu.
Use this button to publish the sheet set. Alternatively, you can use the Publish commands from the context menu.
Drag and Drop in the Project Navigator The Project Navigator allows drag-and-drop operations within the Project Navigator tabs, from the Project Navigator to the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area, and to and from Windows Explorer. The following drag-and-drop operations are supported:
Dragging elements, constructs, views, and sheets from one category in the Drawing Explorer to another.
Dragging elements, constructs, views, and sheets from the Drawing Explorer into the Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing area.
Dragging and dropping objects from an open drawing in the drawing area onto an element or construct in the Project Navigator.
Dragging drawing files from Windows Explorer to the Project Navigator; depending on where you drag them, drawing files are converted to elements, constructs, views, or plotting sheets.
For detailed information on dragging and dropping files, see the appropriate sections for the project files.
The Project Status Bar
When you are working with a drawing in a project, the project status bar of the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area displays the name of the current project, the name of the project file, and the project file type. When you open a drawing that does not belong to a project, no project information is displayed.
198 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Project status bar
Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group
Use this procedure to display the project tool palette group in the tool palettes set. Depending on the setting of the tool palette file location (as described in "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 177), the project tool palette group can be displayed automatically after you set a project current and close Project Browser, or it can be empty and not be displayed on the tool palettes set. The project tool palette group is displayed automatically when it contains at least one palette. Project tool palette groups that are not automatically displayed can appear in the following cases:
A new project that is not based on a template, and does not point to an existing tool palette group A legacy project that is not manually redirected to an existing tool palette group A project that is based on a template project without project tool palettes If an empty tool palette group is created for a project, it is not displayed in the tool palettes set after the project is set current. To display it, you need to add at least one tool palette to it.
1 Click Window menu Tool Palettes. 2 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click .
If the project tool palette group contains at least one palette, it is displayed in the list of available tool palette groups, and can be selected. Selecting the project tool palette group
If the tool palette group of the current project is empty, it is not displayed. 3 To display the project tool palette group, click , and click Customize.
Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group | 199
On the left, all available palettes are listed. On the right, all palette groups are listed. The empty project tool palette group is listed there. 4 Right-click in the palettes list on the left, and click New Palette. 5 Enter a name for the new palette. 6 Select the palette, and drag it on the project palette group on the right. 7 Click Close, and click again. The project tool palette group is listed under the available palette groups and can be selected.
Displaying the Project Library
You can start the Content Browser directly from the Project Navigator, and display a project-specific Content Browser Library. If you are working with project standards, the project library should contain tools referencing project standard styles. If you are not using project standards, the project library should contain the tools you need in this project. For information on building a Content Browser library for a project, see "Setting up Standard Tools in a Project" on page 339.
1 Set the project current, as described in "Setting a Project Current" on page 171, and close the Project Browser. 2 Click Window menu Project Navigator. 3 In the Project Navigator toolbar, click .
The Content Browser is opened with the project library displayed.
Levels
Buildings are segmented into levels in the vertical plane. When you create a project, you determine the number of levels, their floor-to-floor height, and their floor elevation. When you add or remove levels, the project is updated with the new level information.
200 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Plan view of identical building core levels
Level Cut Plane The cut plane is not set directly in the level. To set a cut plane for a level, you typically create a view for the level--for example, "First Floor"--and set the cut plane height in the display configuration of the First Floor view. For more information, see "Working with Cut Planes in a Project" on page 304. Level Defaults By default, the first level is present in each new project. It has a floor elevation of zero and represents the ground floor. The unit in which the level height is displayed is dependent on the drawing defaults of the currently active drawing. You can change the elevation value for the first level, which is then used as the default elevation for each new level you insert. Copying Levels with Constructs You can quickly and easily duplicate floors with identical plans. After creating one level and assigning the floor plan constructs to it--for example, a layout of apartments on the first floor--you can easily create new levels, which have copies of the first level's constructs assigned to them. You can edit and rename these constructs later in the Constructs tab. TIP If you duplicate floor plans in this way, a construct is created for each new level. If you edit the floor plan later, for example, to add an extra door, you need to edit each level and construct individually. If your floor plans are going to be absolutely identical, you can avoid this task. Create an element containing the floor plan, and reference it into the first construct. Then copy the constructs to the levels. Each of the copied constructs have the same reference, and you can change them quickly by changing the referenced element once. For information on creating constructs and assigning them to levels, see "Creating a New Construct" on page 216. For information on creating elements and referencing them into constructs, see "Creating a New Element" on page 231, and "Attaching an Element as an External Reference to a Construct" on page 222. Creating a New Level Use this procedure to add levels to a building.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Project tab. 3 Under Levels, click . 4 If you want each new level to take its floor elevation from the height of the level below, click Auto-Adjust
Elevation.
Creating a New Level | 201
5 Add a level in one of the following ways: If you want to... add a level above the current level
add a level below the current level
Then...
click
. The default floor-to-floor height of the new level
is identical to the level below. If you have selected Auto-Adjust
Elevation, the level's floor elevation starts on top of the
previous level.
NOTE Alternatively, you can select the level above which you want to add a level, right-click, and click Add Level Above.
select the level below which you want to add a level, rightclick, and click Add Level Below.
NOTE If you add a level below the ground floor and you have selected Auto-Adjust Elevation, the elevation of the new level is a negative height.
NOTE If you add a level between existing levels and you have selected Auto-Adjust Elevation, the elevations of all levels above or below the new level are automatically adjusted.
6 If necessary, edit the properties of the new level: If you want to... change the name of the level
change the base elevation of the level
Then...
click the name, and enter a new one. Note that you cannot give the same name to two different levels--the name is the unique identifier of the level when assigning constructs.
enter a new value. If you have selected Auto-Adjust Elevation, the base elevation fits with the elevation and floor height of the level below, and you won't need to make changes here.
NOTE The base elevation of a level determines where the level starts on the horizontal plane. Usually, the base elevation of a level is determined by the floor-to-floor height of the level below.
change the floor-to-floor height of the level change the ID of the level add a description to the level
enter a new value. If you add levels above this level and you have selected Auto-Adjust Elevation, they use the floor height of this level is used as the base elevation.
enter a new ID. The ID can be used in schedule tables. For more information on scheduling a project, see "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293.
enter a description for the level.
7 When you are finished adding levels to the project, click OK. 8 Click Yes in the subsequent dialog box to update the changed level information throughout the project.
Copying a Level with Assigned Constructs
Use this procedure to copy an existing level and all its assigned constructs within the building.
202 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3D view of copied levels with assigned constructs
When you create a new level, it is empty and has no constructs assigned. After you have assigned constructs to the level, as described in "Creating a New Construct" on page 216, you can copy that level and its constructs within the building. For example, perhaps you have created a first-floor level and assigned three apartment constructs to it. To create a second-floor level with exactly the same layout, you can copy and paste the first level with its apartment constructs and rename it "Second Floor."
1 Create a level and assign constructs to it. For more information, see "Creating a New Construct" on page 216.
2 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 3 Click the Project tab.
4 Under Levels, click . 5 Select the name of the level you want to copy, right-click, and click Copy Level and Contents. 6 Click the level above or below the one on which you want to place the copied level, right-click, and click
Paste Level Above or Paste Level Below. 7 Rename the pasted level accordingly: for example, "Second Level." 8 If necessary, edit the description and the ID. 9 Click OK. 10 Click Yes in the subsequent dialog box to update the changed level information throughout the project. 11 Click the Constructs tab. 12 Locate the Constructs category.
The constructs that were created by copying the level and constructs are below the original construct. For example, if you copied the first-floor-level with a construct named "First Floor--Left Apartment," you now have two constructs: "First Floor--Left Apartment" and "First Floor--Left Apartment (2)."
13 If necessary, rename the copied construct with an appropriate name: for example, "Second Floor--Left Apartment."
14 To update the Drawing Explorer in the Project Navigator, click
.
Changing the Properties of a Level
Use this procedure to change the properties of a level. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Project tab.
3 Under Levels, click .
Changing the Properties of a Level | 203
4 Change the level information as needed: If you want to... change the name of the level
change the elevation of a level
Then...
click the name, and enter a new one. Alternatively, you can select the name, right-click, and click Rename Level.
click the floor elevation, and change it.
NOTE If you have selected Auto-Adjust Elevation, the levels above and below the level are changed accordingly. To prevent this, clear Auto-Adjust Elevation before making changes to the elevation.
change the floor-to-floor height of a level
click the floor-to-floor height, and change it.
NOTE If you have selected Auto-Adjust Elevation and there are levels above the changed level, their elevations are changed to accommodate the new height. If you do not want that effect, clear Auto-Adjust Elevation before making changes to the height.
change the ID of a level change the description of a level
click the ID, and change it. click the description, and change it.
5 Click OK. 6 Click Yes in the subsequent dialog box to update the changed level information throughout the project.
Deleting a Level
Use this procedure to delete a level from a building. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Project tab.
3 Under Levels, click . 4 Click the name of the level to delete. 5 Delete the level in one of these ways:
Right-click, and click Delete Level.
Click
.
6 Click OK. 7 Click Yes in the subsequent dialog box to update the changed level information throughout the project.
Changing Levels: Interactions with the Project
Changes made to one part of a project frequently influence other parts of the project. The following information describes the changes you can make to a level and the effects of the changes on other parts of the building project:
Adding new levels: When you add a new level to a project, you must fill it with constructs. You also need views and plotting sheets to represent that level. For more information, see "Constructs" on page 214, "Views" on page 240, and "Plotting Sheets" on page 258.
204 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Changing the level name: When you change the name of a level, the constructs assigned to it are automatically updated with the new name. For example, if you change the name of a level from "1" to "First Floor," the constructs assigned to that level are automatically updated to be assigned to "First Floor."
Changing the level ID: Level IDs can be used in schedule tables. If you change the information here, the information in your schedule table changes.
Changing the floor-to-floor height of a level: When you change the floor-to-floor height of a level and you have selected Auto-Adjust Elevation, all levels above the changed level are adjusted. For example, if you change the height of the first floor from 3 meters to 4 meters, the elevation of the second level changes from 3 meters to 4 meters. If you have chosen not to auto-adjust levels, you need to update all other levels manually to avoid gaps or overlapping levels. In any case, make sure that the objects in the assigned constructs retain the correct height for the level after changing it. That way, you avoid displaying 4 meter walls in a 3 meter level.
Changing the floor elevation of a level: If you are changing the elevation of a level, the elevation above the level is adjusted. The floor-to-floor height of the level below the selected level is also changed. For example, if you change the elevation of the second floor from 2.5 meters to 2.6 meters, the floor-to-floor height of the first floor below it is changed from 2.5 meters to 2.6 meters. Also, the floor elevation of all levels above the second level will be heightened by 0.1 meter.
Deleting a level: When you delete a level, constructs assigned to that level are not deleted with it. They remain in the project, but they are "orphaned," that is, they have lost their level. You can choose what to do with them: Delete them, because the level on which they are placed no longer exists. Assign them to a different level within the project.
When you delete a level that has been used for a view, the view is not deleted from the project. If you update the view, however, it is missing this level. You can choose among these actions: Delete the view, because the level it was displaying no longer exists. Create a new selection set for the view. For more information, see "Views" on page 240.
Divisions
Divisions segment the building in the horizontal plane. A division might be a wing of a building or a center shaft. By default, each new project in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop has one division. You can add divisions, change their properties, and delete them. Building and wing schematic
NOTE A division contains no geometric information. The width and length of a division are determined by the constructs assigned to it. The division itself does not "know" anything about its dimensions.
In smaller projects, like residential homes, you often work with only one horizontal division.
Creating a New Division
Use this procedure to add divisions to a project. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
Divisions | 205
2 Click the Project tab.
3 Under Divisions, click . 4 Add a division in one of these ways:
Right-click in the list, and click Add Division.
Click
.
5 If necessary, edit the division settings:
If you want to... change the name of the division
Then...
click the name, and enter a new one. Alternatively, you can select the name, right-click, and click Rename Division.
NOTE You cannot give the same name to two divisions; the name is the unique identifier of the division when assigning constructs to it.
change the ID of the division add a description to the division
enter a new ID. The ID can be used for schedule tables. For more information on scheduling a project, see "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
enter a description, and press ENTER.
NOTE The division names are displayed in the order of their creation.
6 When you have finished adding new divisions to the project, click OK.
Changing a Division
Use this procedure to change the properties of a division. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Project tab.
3 Under Divisions, click . 4 Change the division information as needed:
If you want to... change the name of the division change the ID of the division
change the description of the division
Then... click the name, and change it. click the ID, and change it. The ID can be used in schedule tables. click the description, and change it.
5 Click OK.
Deleting a Division
Use this procedure to delete a division from the building project. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Project tab.
3 Under Divisions, click .
206 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
4 Click the name of the division to delete. 5 Delete the division in one of these ways:
Right-click, and click Delete Division.
Click
.
6 Click OK. 7 Click Yes in the subsequent dialog box to update the changed division information throughout the project.
Changing Divisions: Interactions with the Project
Changes made to one part of a project frequently influence other parts of the project. The following information describes the changes you can make to a division, and the effects of the changes on other parts of the building project:
Adding new divisions: When you add divisions to a project, you must fill them with constructs. You also need views and plotting sheets to represent that division. For example, you might create a view named "South Wing" and a plotting sheet "Plan--South Wing." For more information, see "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
Changing the division name: When you change the name of a division, the constructs assigned to it are updated with the new name. For example, if you change the name of a division from "SW" to "South Wing," the constructs assigned to that division are updated to be assigned to "South Wing."
Changing the division ID: Division IDs can be used in schedule tables. If you change the information here, the information in your schedule table changes.
Deleting a division: When you delete a division, constructs assigned to that division are not deleted with it. They are "orphaned" and have lost their division. You can choose among the following actions:
Delete the constructs because the division in which they were placed no longer exists. Assign them to a different division within the project.
When you delete a division that has been used for a view, the view is not deleted from the project. If you update the view, however, the deleted division is missing. You can choose among the following actions:
Delete the view because the division it was displaying no longer exists. Create a new selection set for the view.
Categories
Categories are folders within the project structure that help you organize your project files according to disciplines, drawing types, design phases, and workflows.
The Basic Project Categories
For every building project in Autodesk Architectural Desktop, the following basic category structure is displayed in the Project Navigator:
<ProjectName>: This is the top node in the project, represented by a folder with the project name. Constructs: This is the default folder for constructs in the project. When you create a construct, it is saved into
the Constructs category or one of its subcategories. For more information, see "Constructs" on page 214. Elements: This is the default folder for elements in the project. When you create an element, it is saved into the
Elements category or one of its subcategories. For more information, see "Elements" on page 228.
Changing Divisions: Interactions with the Project | 207
Views: This is the default folder for view drawings in the project. When you create a view drawing, it is saved into the Views category or one of its subcategories. For more information, see "Views" on page 240. If you create model space views within a view drawing, they are placed under the view drawing in the same category as the view drawing itself.
Sheets are arranged in two types of categories. In the Explorer view, sheet drawings are placed in folder categories. When you create sheets or sheet views within a sheet drawing, they are placed in the same sheet drawing. Sheet Set View tab on project (left) and Explorer View tab (right)
In the Sheet Set View tab, sheets are organized in sheet subsets. Sheet subsets are a logical structure rather than a physical one. The sheet folder category does not need to be identical to the sheet subset in which the sheet is placed. However, to avoid confusion, it is recommended that you have parallel structures in the sheet set and the sheet categories. You can logically rearrange sheets into a different subset within the Sheet Set View tab, but that will not change their physical location in the category or folder. Likewise, when you remove a sheet from a sheet subset in the Sheet Set View, only the reference of the sheet to the subset is removed; the layout itself and its containing sheet drawing are not deleted from the Sheets folder or subfolder. For more information, see "Plotting Sheets" on page 258. User-Defined Categories Below the fixed main category structure, you can create subcategories and subcategory trees. Subcategories usually represent components of your workflow. You might set up subcategories by discipline, by phase, by view type (working, presentation, section, rendering, and so on), by sheet type (floor plan, ceiling plan, elevation, and so on), or by any other system that you find helpful. NOTE You cannot mix basic category types. For example, you cannot create a Construct subcategory within the Views category or an Element subcategory within the Sheets category.
208 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Your Constructs tab might look like this:
The Benefits of Categories
There are many benefits of using user-defined categories in your project:
Categories reflect your workflow. By creating categories for different phases and stages of the project, your practical day-to-day work is accurately reflected in the project, making it easier to work intuitively and efficiently.
Categories offer optimal organization and transparency. Even small building projects contain a large number of individual drawings that are difficult to track. Putting them into descriptive categories helps you quickly find the correct files.
Categories help to assemble views. When you create views of your building data, you can use categories as selection criteria. For example, for a complete view of framing constructs in your building, you could set up a view that references the "Framing" subcategory, thereby referencing all drawing files from that category. If you add more framing drawings to the Framing category later, the view is updated. For more information, see "Creating a View Drawing: Selecting the Constructs" on page 247.
Methods of Creating Categories You can create categories in several ways:
Creating a category in the tabs of the Project Navigator Creating a category by adding a folder to Windows Explorer Create a category by dragging a folder from Windows Explorer to the Project Navigator
Creating a Category in the Project Navigator
Use this procedure to create a new category within the Project Navigator. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Depending on the category type you want to create, navigate to the appropriate tab:
If you want to... create an element or construct category
Then... click the Constructs tab.
create a view category
click the Views tab.
create a plotting sheet category
click the Sheets tab, and click .
Creating a Category in the Project Navigator | 209
3 To create a category under an existing category, click the existing category in the tree, and create a new subcategory in one of these ways:
Right-click, and click New Category.
Click
in the Project Navigator toolbar at the bottom of the tab.
4 Enter a name for the category, and press ENTER. You can now add project files to the new category.
Creating a Category from Windows Explorer
Use this procedure to create a new category by dragging a folder from Windows Explorer into the Project Navigator. Dragging a folder from Windows Explorer to Project Navigator
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Depending on the category type you want to create, navigate to the appropriate tab:
If you want to...
Then...
create an element or construct category
click the Constructs tab.
create a view category
click the Views tab.
create a plotting sheet category
click the Sheets tab, and click .
3 Start Windows Explorer and position it next to the Project Navigator. 4 Select the folder in Windows Explorer from which you want to create a category. 5 Place the folder in the Drawing Explorer of the selected tab of the Project Navigator:
If you want to...
Then...
move the folder into the selected project folder location, and drag the folder into the desired location in the Drawing
create a new category from it
Explorer of the selected tab in the Project Navigator.
copy the folder into the selected project folder location, and CTRL-drag the folder into the desired location in the Drawing
create a new category from it
Explorer of the selected tab in the Project Navigator.
210 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
NOTE If the folder you are dragging into the Project Navigator contains drawing (DWG) files, you are prompted to convert them to project files. For example, if you drag a folder into the Elements category in the Project Navigator, you are prompted to convert all DWG files within that folder into elements. For detailed information on converting existing drawing files into project files, see the appropriate sections for the individual file types. 6 To update your project with the new file information, select the new category in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Re-Path Files. WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288. 7 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories
When you want to specify a location for the top-level category folders (Constructs, Elements, Views, and Sheets), the best practice is to start with a new project. Organize the project structure in Windows Explorer first with the categories located in the same root folder as the APJ file. For example, you could structure your project with Constructs, Elements, Views, and Sheets under a category called Drawings. For more information, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171.
Top-level categories within project structure These top categories can be directed to point to unique folders, but they cannot be an ascendant or descendant of each other in the tree structure. When you want to change the location of a category in an existing project, move the files from the old category into the new category in Windows Explorer first before you redirect the category. If you locate top-level category folders outside the project folder, the project cannot be used as a template for new projects.
Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories | 211
Top-level category located outside the project folder
Redirecting Top-Level Categories Use this procedure when you want to change the location of the top-level categories in your building after you have created new category folders in Windows Explorer. You can redirect the path of Constructs, Elements, Views, and Sheets. These settings take precedence over settings on the AEC Project Defaults tab in Options.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Project tab.
3 Under Current Project, click .
4 On the Modify Project worksheet, click for the new folder.
for the category you wish to redirect, and browse to the location
5 Select the category, and click OK.
Paths for files within the category are redirected to the new location.
Changing the Subcategory of a Project File
Each drawing file you create within a project belongs to one of the basic, predefined categories of Elements, Constructs, Views, or Sheets. If you make no specific assignment, the file is assigned to the base category folder of that specific project file type--element, construct, view, or sheet. Once you have created a more detailed category system for your project, you can move drawing files into the subcategories.
Creating a File in a Subcategory
Use this procedure to create a project file within a subcategory.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Depending on the file type you want to create, navigate to the appropriate tab:
If you want to...
Then...
create an element or construct
click the Constructs tab.
create a view
click the Views tab.
create a plotting sheet
click the Sheets tab, and click .
3 Locate the subcategory in which you want to create a new project file. 4 Select the subcategory, right-click, and click New Element/Construct/ General View
Dwg/Section/Elevation/Detail/Sheet.
NOTE Alternatively, you can use the Add button at the bottom of the tab.
212 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
5 Specify the properties of the new file.
For more information on specifying new project files, see the appropriate sections for the individual file types.
Changing the Category of an Existing File Use this procedure to change the category of an existing file.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Depending on the file type you want to change, navigate to the appropriate tab:
If you want to...
Then...
change an element or construct
click the Constructs tab.
change a view
click the Views tab.
change a plotting sheet
click the Sheets tab, and click .
3 Locate the project file you want to move to another category. 4 Change the file category in one of these ways:
Select the file, right-click, and click Properties. In the Modify dialog box, change the file category. Select the file, and drag it into another subcategory.
5 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Re-Path File.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
6 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Deleting a Category
Use this procedure to delete unneeded categories from a project. If you delete a category that contains drawings, the drawings are deleted with the category.
NOTE Do not delete a category from Windows Explorer. This might result in inconsistent project data.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Depending on the category type you want to delete, navigate to the appropriate tab:
If you want to... delete an element or construct category
Then... click the Constructs tab.
delete a view category
click the Views tab.
delete a plotting sheet category
click the Sheets tab, and click .
3 Select the category you want to delete, right-click, and click Delete. 4 Click Yes in the subsequent dialog box.
Deleting a Category | 213
Constructs
Constructs are the main building blocks of the building model. A construct describes one unique portion of a building. A construct can be, for example, an elevator shaft, a flight of stairs, an apartment, or an entire floor. The construct needs to be assigned to a level and a division within the project. Spanning constructs, like curtain walls, can be assigned to multiple levels and divisions. 3D view of spanning curtain wall construct
Constructs and Levels and Divisions Constructs are assigned to a level and a division. For example, an architectural construct named "Office--First Floor/South Wing" is assigned to the first level and the south wing division of the building. The structural construct "Framing--First Floor/South Wing" is also assigned to the first level and south wing division, but it has a different purpose. Constructs can span more than one level, a requirement for objects such as curtain walls, elevator shafts, or other core elements. When you remove a level or a division from a project, the constructs assigned to that level or division are "orphaned" and need to be either removed from the project or assigned to a different level or division. Constructs and Views Constructs are used to create views of a project. You could create a view named "First Floor," which displays the constructs "Office--First Floor/South Wing," "Framing--First Floor/South Wing," "Ceiling--First Floor/South Wing," and "Spanning Front Curtain Wall." This view would contain all objects on the first floor as well as objects that are partly on the first floor, like the part of the spanning curtain wall that crosses the first floor. The user selects the constructs to include in the view. Constructs can be added or removed from views.
3D view of building first floor
Converting Legacy Drawings to Constructs You can convert an existing drawing file into a construct within a project. You specify the subcategory into which to move or copy the source drawing. When you copy the source drawing, you do not lose your original drawing, and you can continue to use it outside the project. When you convert a legacy drawing file into a construct, the following process is performed within the software:
The drawing file is either moved, copied, or connected via a link to the project category you specify. You assign a level and a division to the construct (multiple assignments are possible). If necessary, you give the construct a different name, and add a description to it. An accompanying XML file with the necessary project information is automatically generated.
214 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
For detailed information, see "Converting a Legacy Drawing to a Construct" on page 218.
Construct Files A construct is a drawing (DWG) file. As opposed to other non-project related drawing files, an additional XML file with the same name is created. The accompanying XML file contains information to connect the construct to the project.
NOTE The XML file is created and updated automatically. You do not need to edit it, but be careful not to accidentally delete it in Windows Explorer.
Construct Templates When you create a project, you set a default template for new constructs. If you convert an existing drawing file to a construct, it might be based on a different template. If necessary, import styles, layer information, and other settings from the default template into the legacy drawing before or after converting it to a construct. For more information on project templates, see "Project Support Files" on page 155.
Copying Constructs to Levels In multi-story buildings, levels may have identical floor plans. You can create the constructs for one level and copy them to the other levels in one quick step. For detailed information, see "Copying Constructs to Levels" on page 218. When to Start with Constructs You would start creating constructs in the following cases:
when you want to assemble the basic structure of your building project when you have identified the unique portions of the building when you have identified the repeating, non-unique units of the project, and have created elements for them
Typically, you begin a project by creating constructs. Adding details like elements often comes later in the process. For example, perhaps you know how many offices you need on a floor before you know the exact furniture layout of the offices. Therefore, you would first create the construct for the office, "First Floor--Office Space." Later, you could create elements for cubicle/desk combinations or generic printer/copier layouts and reference them into the construct. Plan view of construct with highlighted furniture elements
Keep these considerations in mind when creating constructs: A construct can contain building objects, referenced elements, or a combination of both. A construct represents a unique portion of a building. If you want to reuse a construct within the project, create an element instead. For more information, see "Elements" on page 228.
Processing Constructs in the Building Project
Constructs are the main building blocks of the building model. A construct can contain referenced elements and building objects, such as walls, roofs, and doors. It can also contain more abstract information, like structural grids, building outlines, and footpaths. After creating constructs, you can create different views of your building data. A view might contain the framing constructs for floors 14, the foundation construct, and the column grid construct. Or, a view of the first floor might include the partition walls of the first floor, the framing of the first floor, and the shell components of the building.
When to Start with Constructs | 215
The Content of Constructs
There are three different types of content you can place in a construct: Drawing objects: You can draw an apartment layout, a frame drawing, or a ceiling grid as a construct. Also, spanning objects like curtain walls or elevator shafts are usually created directly as constructs. Element references: You can display repeating components within the construct, such as desk/chair combinations, bathroom layouts, or stairs. For more information, see "Referencing Elements into Constructs" on page 222, and "Referencing an Element into Multiple Constructs" on page 224. A combination of drawing objects and element references: If you have a floor with different office types, but repeating furniture elements, you could draw the office walls directly in the construct but reference the furniture as elements.
You should not, as a general rule, reference constructs into constructs. A construct has a defined level and division assignment. If a construct were to be referenced into another construct, it would have two contradicting level and division assignments. However, there are situations where the necessity to do this can occur. For example, when you are checking the correct vertical alignment of a ceiling in the building, you could view a ceiling construct with an overlaid floor plan construct in it. Or, you might want to display alternating versions of a two car garage and a three car garage within a plan construct. If you encounter a situation where you would need to do this, there are several options of working around it:
Convert the first construct to an element, as described in "Converting a Construct to an Element" on page 227, and then reference it into the other construct.
Overlay the construct onto the other construct. WARNING Do not attach property set data to an overlaid construct from within the host construct. This data is processed incompletely. If you want to attach property data to a construct that will be overlaid into another construct, attach the property data locally in the overlaid construct.
Create a view into which you reference both constructs. For more information, see "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
Which of these options is best for you largely depends on your workflow and the results you want to achieve.
Creating a New Construct
Use this procedure to create a new construct. 3D view of spanning curtain wall construct
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab.
216 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Constructs category or any subcategory of the Constructs category.
4 Add a new construct to the project in one of the following ways: Right-click the category in which to place the new construct, and click New Construct.
In the toolbar at the bottom of the Constructs tab, click
.
5 Define the construct properties:
If you want to... name the new construct
enter a description for the construct change the category of the construct select a different template file assign the construct to a level and a division
Then...
enter a name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the construct, and click OK.
select one from the Category list. By default, the category you chose in step 3 is suggested.
click
, and browse for a new template. By default, the
default template set for constructs in the project is used.
select the correct level and division in the assignments table. Select the desired level row and the division column, and check the appropriate box.
NOTE Unless you are defining a spanning construct, you should check only one level and division. Multiple levels and divisions create spanning constructs.
6 Click OK. 7 Open the construct, as described in "Opening and Closing a Construct" on page 221. 8 Edit the construct as necessary:
Add objects to the construct.
Creating a New Construct | 217
Reference elements into the construct. For information on adding content to constructs, see "The Content of Constructs" on page 216.
9 To update the tree in the Project Navigator, click
.
Copying Constructs to Levels
Use this procedure to copy a construct to multiple levels. Copying constructs to levels offers you an easy way to fill multi-story buildings with content. You draw the construct for the first level, and then create a copy of that construct for each level you select.
Copying constructs to all levels schematic
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 Select the construct to copy to multiple levels, right-click, and click Copy Construct to Levels. 4 Select the levels on which to create a copy of the construct.
NOTE The level on which the original construct is situated is selected by default. You cannot clear the selection here.
5 Click OK. In the Constructs tab, a new construct is created for each level selected. The level number is appended in brackets after the construct name.
NOTE If necessary, rename the constructs. Select a copied construct, right-click, and click Rename.
Converting a Legacy Drawing to a Construct
You may have legacy drawing files in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop that you want to convert into constructs. When you convert a legacy drawing into a construct, the following process is performed by the software:
The drawing file is either moved, copied, or connected via a link to the project category you specify. You assign a level and a division to the construct (multiple assignments are possible). If necessary, you give the construct a different name, and add a description to it. An accompanying XML file with the necessary project information is automatically generated.
218 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
There are two ways to convert a legacy drawing file into a construct: you can open the drawing file in Autodesk Architectural Desktop and save it as a construct, or you can drag a drawing file from Windows Explorer to the Project Navigator.
Converting Drawing Files by Opening and Saving Use this procedure to convert a legacy drawing file to a construct by opening the file in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop and then saving it as a construct.
1 Click File menu Open, and open the desired drawing file.
2 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 3 Click the Constructs tab. 4 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Constructs category or any of its subcategories. 5 Right-click, and click Save Current Dwg as Construct. 6 Define the construct properties:
If you want to... change the name of the drawing file
Then...
enter a new name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
enter a description for the construct
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the construct, and click OK.
change the category of the construct
select one from the Category list. By default, the category you chose in step 4 is suggested.
assign the construct to a level and a division
select the correct level and division in the assignments table. Select the desired level row and the division column, and check the appropriate box.
NOTE Unless you are defining a spanning construct, you should check only one level and division. Multiple levels and divisions create spanning constructs.
7 Click OK. 8 To close the construct, on the File menu, click Close. 9 Click Yes to save the changes in the drawing.
10 To update the tree in the Project Navigator, click
.
Converting Drawing Files from Windows Explorer Use this procedure to convert legacy drawing files to constructs by dragging and dropping them from Windows Explorer. Windows Explorer offers three different modes of conversion:
Converting a file to a construct and moving it into a project folder Copying a file, and converting the copy to a construct in a project folder Converting a file to a construct and creating a link to its original location
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 Start Windows Explorer, and position it next to the Project Navigator.
Converting a Legacy Drawing to a Construct | 219
4 In Windows Explorer, open the folder that contains the legacy document. 5 Place the legacy drawing in the Constructs category or one of its subcategories:
If you want to...
Then...
move the legacy drawing into the selected category, and convert it to a construct
drag the drawing into the desired location in the Project Navigator.
move a copy of the legacy drawing into the selected category, CTRL-drag the drawing into the desired location in the Project
and convert it to a construct
Navigator.
create a link to the legacy drawing in its original location, and convert it to a construct
ALT-drag the drawing into the desired location in the Project Navigator.
NOTE You can also drag an entire legacy folder into the project. The folder is converted into a category, and all drawings within it are converted to constructs. For instructions on converting legacy folders to categories, see "Creating a Category from Windows Explorer " on page 210.
6 Define the construct properties: If you want to... change the name of the drawing file
enter a description for the construct change the category of the construct assign the construct to a level and a division
Then...
enter a new name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the construct, and click OK.
select from the Category list. By default, the category you chose in step 5 is suggested.
select the correct level and division in the assignments table. Select the desired level row and the division column, and check the appropriate box.
NOTE Unless you are defining a spanning construct, you should check only one level and division. Multiple levels and divisions create spanning constructs.
7 Click OK. 8 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator tree, right-click,
and click Re-Path File.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
9 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
10 To update the tree in the Project Navigator, click
.
220 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Opening and Closing a Construct
Use this procedure to open and close a construct.
When you open a construct, the status line in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area displays the name of the associated project.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Constructs category or the subcategory that contains the construct to
open. 4 Open the construct in one of these ways:
Select the construct, right-click, and click Open. Double-click the construct. The construct is opened in the drawing area of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
5 To close the construct, click File Close, and save the changes, if necessary.
6 To update the preview of the construct in the Project Navigator, click
.
Dragging Objects into a Construct
Use this procedure to drag and drop objects into a construct.
When you create a new construct, you have several choices for adding content to it. You can draw objects within the construct, you can reference elements into a construct, or you can drag and drop objects from other drawing files into a construct.
1 Open the drawing that contains the objects you want to drag and drop into the construct.
NOTE The drawing containing the objects is not required to be a part of a project.
2 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
Opening and Closing a Construct | 221
3 Click the Constructs tab. 4 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Constructs category or the subcategory that contains the construct to
which you want to add objects from another drawing file. 5 In the open drawing file, select the objects you want to drag and drop into the construct. 6 Move or copy the objects into the construct.
If you want to... move the objects from the open drawing to the construct
Then...
drag them from the drawing onto the desired construct in the Project Navigator.
copy the objects from the open drawing to the construct
CTRL-drag them from the drawing onto the desired construct in the Project Navigator.
Referencing Elements into Constructs
There are several ways to reference an element into a construct:
If you want to... attach an element as an external reference
overlay an element as an external reference
insert an element as a block reference
Then...
create a link from the element to the construct. Any changes to the referenced element are displayed in the construct when it is opened or refreshed. For more information, see "Attaching an Element as an External Reference to a Construct" on page 222.
create a link from the element to the construct. An overlaid reference is not included when the construct is attached or overlaid as a reference to a view. For more information, see "Overlaying an Element as an External Reference to a Construct" on page 223.
cut off the link between the element and the construct. The inserted element is converted to a block and is not updated when the reference element is changed. You can, however, edit the block in the construct. For more information, see "Inserting an Element as a Block into a Construct" on page 223.
3D view of cubicle element referenced four times into office space construct
Attaching an Element as an External Reference to a Construct Use this procedure to attach an element as an external reference to a construct. For detailed information on attaching external references to drawings, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 Locate the construct into which to reference an element.
222 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
4 Select the construct, right-click, and click Open. 5 In the Project Navigator, locate the element to attach. 6 Reference the element into the construct in one of these ways:
Select the element, and drag it into the open construct drawing. Select the element, right-click, and click Xref Attach. The element is inserted as an external reference into the construct.
NOTE If you cannot see the element, it may be inserted at a very small scale. Use the AutoCAD Zoom Extents command to display it.
Overlaying an Element as an External Reference to a Construct Use this procedure to overlay an element as an external reference to a construct. For detailed information on overlaying external references to drawings, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 Locate the construct into which to reference an element. 4 Select the construct, right-click, and click Open. 5 In the Project Navigator, locate the element to overlay. 6 Select the element, right-click, and click Xref Overlay.
The element is inserted as an external reference into the construct.
NOTE If you cannot see the element, it may be inserted at a very small scale. Use the AutoCAD Zoom Extents command to display it.
Inserting an Element as a Block into a Construct Use this procedure to insert an element as a block into a construct. For detailed information on blocks, see "Create and Use Blocks (Symbols)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 Locate the construct into which to insert an element as a block. 4 Select the construct, right-click, and click Open. 5 In the Project Navigator, locate the element to insert as a block. 6 Select the element, right-click, and click Insert as Block. 7 Specify the Insert options--such as insertion point, scale and rotation angle--and click OK.
Referencing Elements into Constructs | 223
Referencing an Element into Multiple Constructs Use this procedure to reference an element into multiple constructs. This procedure is useful for updating a number of similar floor constructs in a building.
Referencing an element into a construct
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 Locate the element to reference into multiple constructs. 4 Select the element, right-click, and click Attach Elements to Constructs. 5 Check the boxes of the constructs into which to reference the element.
NOTE As a shortcut, you can select an entire category for referencing.
6 Define the referencing method: If you want to... attach the element as an external reference
Then... select the construct, right-click, and click Set to Attach.
NOTE If the Set to Attach command is unavailable, the element is already set to attach.
overlay the element as an external reference
select the construct, right-click, and click Set to Overlay.
NOTE If the Set to Overlay command is unavailable, the element is already set to overlay.
7 Repeat steps 5-6 for each construct the element should be attached to. 8 Click OK.
Displaying External References of a Construct
Use this procedure to display the external references of a construct. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the construct for which to display external references. 4 Select the construct. 5 Display the external references in one of these ways:
Right-click, and click Show External References.
Click
.
224 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
A worksheet with the external references of the construct is displayed. You can expand or collapse the list by clicking individual items.
6 Click OK to close the worksheet.
NOTE You can also display external references by opening the construct in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area, and using the AutoCAD Xref Manager. For more information, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Changing the Properties of a Construct
Use this procedure to change the properties of a construct.
NOTE The construct must be closed in order to change its properties.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Constructs category or the subcategory that contains the construct you
want to change. 4 Select the construct, right-click, and click Properties. 5 Change the construct properties:
If you want to...
Then...
change the name of the drawing file
enter a name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
enter a description for the construct
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the construct, and click OK.
change the category of the construct
select one from the Category list. By default, the category you chose in step 3 is suggested.
assign the construct to a different level and a division
select the correct combination of both in the assignments table. Select the desired level row and division column, and check the appropriate box.
NOTE Unless you are defining a spanning construct, you should check only one level and division. Multiple levels and divisions create spanning constructs.
6 Click OK. 7 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator tree, right-click,
and click Re-Path File.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Changing the Properties of a Construct | 225
8 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Electronically Transmitting a Construct
Use this procedure to electronically transmit a construct drawing. Electronically transmitting a drawing means that you package the drawing for delivery in electronic form. Drawing files in the transmittal package include all related dependent files such as external references and font files. For more information about electronic transmittal, see "Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Constructs category or the subcategory that contains the construct to
transmit. 4 Select the construct, right-click, and click eTransmit.
5 In either the Files tree tab or the File Table tab, select the components to be included into the electronic package. The Files Tree tab displays the included files sorted by type. The Files Table tab displays all files in a list view. You can sort the list by name, path, type, version, size, and date.
6 To include project information, double-click the transmittal setup and select Include Project Information. For detailed information about project information in an electronic transmittal package, see "Electronically Transmitting a Project" on page 184.
7 Click OK to start the electronic transmittal.
Deleting a Construct
Use this procedure to delete a construct. For information on the consequences of deleting constructs, see "Changing Constructs: Interactions with the Project" on page 228. The construct must be closed in order to delete it. NOTE Do not delete a construct from Windows Explorer. This might result in inconsistent project data.
226 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Constructs category or subcategory that contains the construct to
delete. 4 Select the construct, right-click, and click Delete. 5 Click Yes in the subsequent message box.
Converting a Construct to an Element
Use this procedure to convert a construct to an element.
You may create a construct, and then realize that this is actually a repeating element. For example, you might create a column grid and then decide to use it on another floor. You can easily convert the construct to an element and reference it into multiple constructs. NOTE When you convert a construct to an element, the level and division information is lost. Should you later convert the element back to a construct, you must redefine the level and division.
NOTE Do not drag a construct into the Elements folder within Windows Explorer. This will result in inconsistent project data. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the construct to convert to an element. 4 Select the construct, and drag it into the Elements category or one of its subcategories. 5 Specify the element properties, as described in "Creating a New Element" on page 231. 6 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator tree, right-click, and click Re-Path File. WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288. 7 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Converting a Construct to an Element | 227
NOTE If you want to convert the element back to a construct, drag the element to the Constructs category.
Changing Constructs: Interactions with the Project
Changes made to one part of a project frequently influence other parts of the project. The following information describes the changes you can make to a construct and the effects of the changes on other parts of the building project:
Adding a new construct: When you add new constructs to a project, you must fill them with drawing objects or referenced elements. Also, you must create views in which to display them. For more information, see "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Changing the construct name and category (location): Constructs can contain external element references and are referenced into views. Therefore, any name and location changes to a construct need to be updated throughout the project. To update the path, re-path the project, as described in "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Changing the level and division of a construct: If you change the level and division, (for example, if you switch an apartment from the first floor to the second floor), an empty space remains in the original location. You must either fill the space with a different construct or erase the level and division altogether. Also, be careful not to reference double constructs into a location. An apartment layout and a structural grid could have the same level/division assignment, as they exist in the same location; however, two different apartment layouts could not exist in the same location.
Deleting a construct: If you delete a construct that has been referenced into a view and update the view, that view is now incomplete and has missing references. Furthermore, you have an empty space in your building. That could be the desired effect, if, for example you are erasing a level from a building. In any case, check to see if the construct is still used elsewhere. For detailed information on deleting constructs, see "Deleting a Construct" on page 226. For detailed information on views, see "Views" on page 240.
Elements
Elements represent pieces that are used multiple times within a building. For example, you can create an element for a repeating design object like a desk/chair combination to be placed in a number of cubicles. You can also create an element for a typical bathroom layout and reference it multiple times into an apartment construct. Because you can annotate individual instances of an external reference, you can use the same element and annotate it differently depending on its position. Plan view of furniture layout
For information on scheduling repeating elements, see "Attaching Property Sets to Objects from External References" on page 297.
228 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3D view of single cubicle element
Element Files An element is a drawing (DWG) file. As opposed to other non-project related drawing files, an additional XML file with the same name is created. The accompanying XML file contains information to connect the drawing file to the project. NOTE The XML file is created and updated automatically. You do not need to edit it, but be careful not to accidentally delete it in Windows Explorer. Converting Legacy Drawings to Elements You can convert an existing drawing file into an element within a project. You specify the subcategory into which to move or copy the source drawing. When you copy the source drawing, you do not lose your original drawing, and you can continue to use it outside the project. When you convert a legacy drawing file into an element, the following process is performed within the software:
The drawing file is moved, copied, or linked to the project category you specify. You can assign a different name and add a description to the file. An accompanying XML file with the project information is generated. Element Templates When you create a project, you set a default template for new elements. If you convert an existing drawing file to an element, it might be based on a different template. If necessary, import styles, layer information, and other settings from the default template into the legacy drawing before or after converting it to an element. For more information about project templates, see "Project Support Files" on page 155. Elements and Constructs An element is a generic building block for multiple use. The element knows nothing about which level or division it is placed on; this information is set by the construct it is referenced into. If you create a bathroom layout as an element, you can use it on the second floor of the west wing just as well as on the first floor of the east wing. To place the element on a specific floor and wing, you need to reference it into a construct. A construct has a level and division assignment. For example, you could create an element named "Generic Bathroom Layout" and reference it into constructs named "First Floor--Left Apartment," "First Floor--Middle Apartment," First Floor--Right Apartment," and so on.
Elements | 229
Referencing an element into a construct
Referencing Elements to Multiple Constructs
In multi-story buildings, levels may have identical elements. You can create an element once, and then reference it into multiple constructs in one single, convenient step. For detailed information, see "Referencing an Element into Multiple Constructs" on page 224.
When to Start with Elements
You would start a project with creating elements in the following cases:
when you can identify generic building blocks in your project when you start the design process from the inside-out when you have not yet decided on the larger structures of your building
Elements can be small units like a desk/chair combination or large units like an entire apartment layout or a generic furniture layout. You might use an element as a placeholder until you have more specific information, like placing a generic furniture layout on a office floor or placing a building core with bathrooms, elevator shafts, and heating rooms. You can also define an element that uses other elements as external references in its content. A generic building core element, for example, could contain references for bathroom elements or staircase elements. You can nest external references multiple levels deep. Keep these points in mind when creating elements:
An element needs to be referenced into a construct before it can be used for views. An element is re-usable; if you do not need the element more than once in your drawing, create a construct instead.
Processing Elements in the Building Project
Once you have created and modified a number of elements in your project, you need to decide how to use them further downstream in the project. The following list describes typical uses for elements and where to find additional information:
Plan view of furniture layout with highlighted element
Use reference an element into a construct
230 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Further Information
This is the most frequent use case for an element. A generic element, like a bathroom layout, is referenced into a specific construct, like a floor plan. For more information, see "Referencing Elements into Constructs" on page 222 and "Referencing an Element into Multiple Constructs" on page 224.
Use reference an element into another element
Further Information
For example, if you want to have different elements for single cubicles--a 4-cubicle group, and an 8-cubicle group--you could create an element for one cubicle, and reference that four times into the 4-cubicle group element. For more information, see "Referencing an Element into Another Element" on page 237.
NOTE When you reference an element into another element, the host element still needs to be referenced into a construct before it can be used for views.
reference an element into a plotting sheet convert an element to a construct
You can directly reference an element into a plotting sheet. This can be useful for title block elements or the documentation of a detail.
If you have created an element, and realize that it shows a unique portion of the building, for example a staircase, you have the option of converting the element into a construct. For more information, see "Converting an Element to a Construct" on page 238.
Creating a New Element
Use this procedure to create an element. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Elements category or any subcategory of the Elements category.
4 Add the new element to the project in one of the following ways: Right-click the category in which to place the new element, and click New Element.
In the toolbar at the bottom of the Constructs tab, click
.
5 Define the element properties:
If you want to... name the new element
Then...
enter a name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
add a description for the element
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the element, and click OK.
Creating a New Element | 231
If you want to... change the category of the element
select a different template file
Then...
select from the Category list. By default, the category you chose in step 3 is suggested.
click
, and browse for a new template. By default, the
default template for elements set in the project is used.
6 Click OK. 7 Open the element, as described in "Opening and Closing an Element" on page 234. 8 Edit the element as necessary:
Add objects to the element. Reference other elements into the element.
For more information, see "Referencing an Element into Another Element" on page 237.
9 To update the tree in the Project Navigator, click
.
Converting a Legacy Drawing to an Element
You may have legacy drawing files in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop that you want to convert into elements. When you convert a legacy drawing file into an element, the following process is performed by the software:
The drawing file is either moved, copied, or connected via a link to the element category you specify. If necessary, a different name is given to the file and a description is added to it. An accompanying XML file with the necessary project information is automatically generated.
There are two ways to convert a legacy drawing file into an element: you can open the drawing file in Autodesk Architectural Desktop and save it as an element, or you can drag a drawing file from Windows Explorer to the Project Navigator.
Converting Drawing Files by Opening and Saving Use this procedure to convert a legacy drawing file to an element by opening it in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop and then saving it as an element.
1 On the File menu, click Open, and open the desired drawing file.
2 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 3 Click the Constructs tab. 4 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Elements category or any of its subcategories. 5 Right-click, and click Save Current Dwg as Element. 6 Define the element properties:
If you want to...
Then...
change the name of the drawing file
enter a new name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
enter a description for the element
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the element, and click OK.
change the category of the element
select one from the Category list. By default, the category you chose in step 4 is suggested.
232 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
7 Click OK. 8 To close the element, click Close on the File menu.
9 To update the tree in the Project Navigator, click
.
Converting Drawing Files from Windows Explorer Use this procedure to convert legacy drawing files to elements by dragging and dropping them from Windows Explorer. Windows Explorer offers three different modes of conversion:
Converting a file to an element and moving it into a project folder Copying a file, and converting the copy to the element in a project folder Converting a file to an element and creating a link to its original location
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 Start Windows Explorer, and position it next to the Project Navigator. 4 In Windows Explorer, open the folder that contains the legacy document. 5 Place the legacy drawing in the Elements category or one of its subcategories:
If you want to...
Then...
move the legacy drawing into the selected category, and convert it to an element
drag the drawing into the desired location in the Project Navigator.
move a copy of the legacy drawing into the selected category, CTRL-drag the drawing into the desired location in the Project
and convert it to an element
Navigator.
create a link to the legacy drawing in its original location, and convert it to an element
ALT-drag the drawing into the desired location in the Project Navigator.
NOTE You can also drag an entire legacy folder into the project. The folder is converted into a category, and all drawings within are converted to elements. For instructions on converting legacy folders to categories, see "Creating a Category from Windows Explorer " on page 210.
6 Define the element properties: If you want to... change the name of the drawing file
enter a description for the element change the category of the element
Then...
enter a new name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the element, and click OK.
select one from the Category list. By default, the category you chose in step 5 is suggested.
7 Click OK.
8 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator tree, right-click, and click Re-Path File.
Converting a Legacy Drawing to an Element | 233
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
9 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
10 To update the tree in the Project Navigator, click
.
Opening and Closing an Element
Use this procedure to open and close an element.
When you open an element, the status line in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area displays the name of the associated project.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Elements category or the subcategory that contains the element you
want to open. 4 Open the element in one of these ways:
Select the element, right-click, and click Open. Double-click the element. The element is opened in the drawing area of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. You can now edit it.
5 To close the element, click Close on the File menu, and save the changes if necessary.
6 To update the preview of the element in the Project Navigator, click
.
234 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Dragging Objects into an Element
Use this procedure to drag and drop objects into an element. When you create a new element, you may choose to add content to it in several ways. You can draw objects within the element, you can reference external drawings into an element, or you can drag and drop objects from other drawing files into an element.
1 Open the drawing that contains the objects you want to drag and drop into an element.
NOTE The drawing containing the objects is not required to be a part of a project.
2 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 3 Click the Constructs tab. 4 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Elements category or the subcategory that contains the element to
which you want to add objects from another drawing file. 5 In the open drawing file, select the objects you want to drag and drop into the element. 6 Move or copy the objects into the element:
If you want to...
Then...
move the objects from the open drawing to the element
drag the objects from the drawing onto the desired element in the Project Navigator.
copy the objects from the open drawing to the element
CTRL-drag the objects from the drawing onto the desired element in the Project Navigator.
Changing the Properties of an Element
Use this procedure to change the properties of an element.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Elements category or the subcategory that contains the element you
want to change. 4 Select the element, right-click, and click Properties. 5 Change the element properties:
If you want to... change the name of the element
Then...
enter a new name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
change the description of the element
click the setting for Description, change the description of the element, and click OK.
change the category of the element
select one from the Category list. Changing the category of an element means changing its location in the project.
6 Click OK.
7 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator tree, right-click, and click Re-Path File.
Dragging Objects into an Element | 235
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
8 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Electronically Transmitting an Element
Use this procedure to electronically transmit an element drawing. Electronically transmitting a drawing means that you package the drawing for delivery in electronic form. Drawing files in the transmittal package include all related dependent files such as external references and font files. For more information about electronic transmittal, see "Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Elements category or subcategory that contains the element to transmit. 4 Select the element, right-click, and click eTransmit.
5 In either the Files tree tab or the File Table tab, select the components to be included into the electronic package. The Files Tree tab displays the included files sorted by type. The Files Table tab displays all files in a list view. You can sort the list by name, path, type, version, size, and date.
6 To include project information, double-click the transmittal setup and select Include Project Information. For detailed information about project information in an electronic transmittal package, see "Electronically Transmitting a Project" on page 184.
7 Click OK to start the electronic transmittal.
Deleting an Element
Use this procedure to delete an element. The element must be closed in order to delete it.
236 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
NOTE Do not delete an element from Windows Explorer. This might result in inconsistent project data.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the Elements category or the subcategory that contains the element to
delete. 4 Select the element, right-click, and click Delete. 5 Click Yes in the subsequent message box.
Referencing an Element into Another Element
Use this procedure to reference an element into another element.
NOTE When you are working in a project environment, make sure that all files you are using belong to this project or another project. Drawing files that do not belong to a project have no accompanying XML file and, therefore, do not give access to the full functionality of Drawing Management. For example, a non-project drawing file referenced into a project file via the AutoCAD Xref Manager is not assigned a project category and does not turn up in the Drawing Explorer of the Project Navigator. So, while you could technically reference a non-project drawing file into an element with standard AutoCAD commands, it is not advisable. To reference a non-project drawing file into the project, convert the file into an element, and then reference it.
3D view of cubicle element referenced four times into cubicle group
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate and open the element into which you want to reference another element. 4 In the Project Navigator, locate the element to reference into the open element. 5 Reference the element into the open element in one of these ways:
If you want to...
attach the element as an external reference to the open element
Then...
select the element in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Xref Attach, or select the element in the Project Navigator, and drag it into the open element in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area. When you attach an element as an external reference, you create a link from the referenced element to the current element; any changes to the referenced element are displayed in the current element when it is opened or refreshed.
overlay the element as an external reference on the open element
select the element in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Xref Overlay. When you overlay an external reference, you also create a link from the referenced element to the current element. Unlike an attached reference, an overlaid reference is not included when the element is itself attached or overlaid as a reference to another element or construct.
Referencing an Element into Another Element | 237
If you want to... insert the element as a block into the open element
Then...
select the element in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Insert as Block. When you insert an element as a block reference into another element, the link between the referenced element and the current element is cut off. The inserted element is converted to a block and does not update when the reference element is changed. You can, however, edit the block in the current element.
6 If necessary, edit the external reference in the open element. For more information on external references, see "Attach External References" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
For more information on blocks, see "Create and Insert Symbols (Blocks)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Displaying External References of an Element
Use this procedure to display the external references contained in an element. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the element for which to display external references. 4 Select the element. 5 Display the external references in one of these ways:
Right-click, and click Show External References.
Click
.
A worksheet with the external references contained in the element is displayed. You can expand or collapse the list by clicking individual items.
6 Click OK to close the worksheet.
NOTE You can also display external references by opening the element in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area and using the AutoCAD Xref Manager. For more information, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Converting an Element to a Construct
Use this procedure to convert an element to a construct. If you create an element and realize later that you do not need this drawing as a repeating element, you can convert it into a construct.
238 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
NOTE Do not drag an element to the Constructs folder within Windows Explorer. This will result in inconsistent project data.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Constructs tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the element to convert into a construct. 4 Select the element, and drag it into the Constructs category or one of its subcategories. 5 Specify the construct properties, as described in "Creating a New Construct" on page 216. 6 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator tree, right-click,
and click Re-Path File. WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288. 7 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
NOTE If you want to convert the construct back to an element, drag it back to the Elements category.
Changing Elements: Interactions with the Project
Changes made to one part of a project frequently influence other parts of the project. The following information describes the changes you can make to an element, and the effects of the changes on other parts of the building project.
Adding new elements: When you add new elements to a project, you must reference them into other elements, constructs, or plotting sheets.
Changing the element name and category (location): Elements are used as external references in other files. When you change the name and the location of an element, its external reference path is no longer correct. To update the project, re-path it, as described in "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288. WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Changing Elements: Interactions with the Project | 239
Deleting an element: When you delete an element that has been referenced into another element or into a construct or a plotting sheet, that drawing is now incomplete and has missing references. If a construct with deleted elements has been referenced into a view, and the view is updated, it also is incomplete. Therefore, before deleting an element, check to see if it is still used elsewhere. For detailed information on deleting elements, see "Deleting an Element" on page 236.
Views
Once the structure of the building project is defined, and constructs are assigned to levels and divisions, you can start to create reports of the data. A view drawing automatically references a number of constructs to present a specific view of the building project. To create a view drawing, you first decide what portion of the building you wish to look at and the type of view to generate. You could, for example, create a first-floor reflected ceiling plan or a second-floor framing plan. You could also create a composite view of all floors in the building. View drawings automatically reference the appropriate constructs according to their location within the building. For example, to create a floor plan of the west wing of the second floor, you would create a view that references all constructs assigned to the second floor and the west wing. This would also include a curtain wall spanning the first through fifth floors. You can reference additional constructs that do not lie on that floor but which you want to see in the view, such as a building outline or grid. 3D view of entire building view
In a view drawing you can also add data like annotation, dimensions, and schedule tables. Whether to create the annotation in a view drawing or in a sheet is a decision you make based on your workflow and individual needs. There are three different types of view drawings in the Drawing Management feature:
General view drawing: A general view drawing contains referenced constructs from the project, representing a specific view on the building model. General view drawings are based on the general view template defined in the project settings.
Detail view drawing: A detail view drawing contains one or more model space views that show a defined portion of the detail drawing in the level of detail you specify. A model space view containing a detail can be associated with a callout. Detail view drawings are based on the detail view template defined in the project settings. Detail view in callout
240 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Section/Elevation view drawing: A section/elevation view drawing contains one or more model space views that show a defined portion of the section/elevation view drawing. A model space view containing a section or elevation can be associated with a callout. Section/Elevation view drawings are based on the section/elevation view template defined in the project settings. Elevation view drawing with four model space views
A model space view is a portion of the view drawing that may be displayed in its own viewport in a drawing. Model space views are an evolution of the Named Views concept of AutoCAD. As opposed to Named Views, model spaces views have a defined boundary. When a model space view is placed onto a sheet, a sheet view is created. A model space view has its own name, description, and drawing scale. When a model space view is placed on a sheet, the display configuration and view direction of the view drawing are used in the sheet view. You have the possibility to associate a named layer state to a model space view, which will be used when placing the model space view on a sheet. If no named layer state is associated to a model space view, then the layer settings of the view drawing are used in the sheet view. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 1 in the view drawing, xref-dependent layer changes made in the view drawing will also be used in the sheet view. Views and Constructs You create a view drawing by selecting constructs from your project and referencing them into the view drawing. When creating multi-level views, each construct is referenced at its level height. 3D view of copied building core constructs at each building level
View Drawings and Model Space Views A view drawing can contain any number of model space views. Model space views are created interactively on screen. The view drawing must be open to create model space views in it.
Views | 241
Defining a model space view
Displaying a model space view
Viewport Settings of Model Space Views and Sheet Views Model space views can be referenced into sheets in sheet drawings. When a model space view is placed onto a sheet, a sheet view is created. The display of the sheet view--display configuration, drawing scale, and layer settings--is defined by the model space view. Each model space view can be associated to a named layer state which then is used in the sheet view. If no named layer state is associated with the model space view, the layer settings of the view drawing are used. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 1 in the view drawing, xref-dependent layer changes made in the view drawing will also be used in the sheet view.
242 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Model space view of plan detail
Sheet view placed onto model space view
Views and Annotation You can generate annotation, dimensions, and schedule tables in a view drawing or a plotting sheet, depending on your specific workflow and needs. The Autodesk® Architectural Desktop scheduling feature makes it easy to generate annotation in both view drawings and sheets. For more information on annotating a project, see "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293.
View drawing with annotation tags
Updating View Drawings A view drawing can include either individual constructs or entire construct categories. For example, if you select the Architectural--First Floor construct category, all constructs within this category are included in the view drawing. If
Views | 243
you add constructs to that category later, the view drawing is regenerated to automatically include the new constructs. It is recommended that you use categories in order to keep your view drawings current throughout the project. Plan view of view drawing with and without furniture layout
View Drawings A view drawing is a DWG file. As opposed to other non-project-related drawing files, when you create a view drawing an additional XML file with the same name is created. The accompanying XML file contains information to connect the drawing file into the project. NOTE The XML file is created and updated automatically. You do not need to edit it, but be careful not to accidentally delete it in Windows Explorer. NOTE Do not convert an existing drawing file into a view drawing. Because view drawings consist of referenced constructs, it is better to create a new view drawing within the project and then fill it with constructs automatically. View Templates When you create a project, you set a default template for new view drawings. There are separate templates for general view drawings, detail view drawings, and section/elevation view drawings. The default view template should be saved so that it will create a drawing that opens to the Model tab, or the model space of a layout tab. When you create a new view drawing, all constructs assigned to it will be referenced into the view drawing. If the template does not open into model space, the building will be referenced into paper space. This will not produce the desired results when the view is opened on a sheet. For more information about project templates, see "Project Support Files" on page 155. When to Start with Views Typically, you create view drawings and model space views after you have defined the basic constructs. For example, you could create a series of views for individual floors: "First Floor," "Second Floor," "Basement," "Roof." You could also create a series of views based on plan type: "Plan View," "Model View," "Reflected View." Another schema could be by function: "Walls," "Framing," "Furniture."
244 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3D view of first floor plan and framing plan
Working in a view, you can add tags, dimension the building objects, and create a schedule table. Tags and schedule tables contain a number of project properties, such as level and division assignments. For detailed information on annotating a project, see "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293. Once you have assembled a view drawing, you can generate model space views in it, for example to create detail views, section views, or elevation views. These model space views are later placed in plotting sheets. Keep these points in mind when creating views:
You can reference only constructs into a view drawing. To see elements in a view, they must be referenced by a construct.
You can add tags, dimensions, and schedule tables to a view. You can create additional general views, detail views, and section/elevation views, from a view drawing. Model space views are referenced into sheets.
Process Overview: Creating a General View Drawing
Creating a general view drawing involves the following main steps: Step 1: Select levels and divisions to include in the view drawing.
For more information, see "Creating a View Drawing: Assigning Levels and Divisions" on page 247. Step 2: Select the constructs to be contained in the view drawing.
For more information, see "Creating a View Drawing: Selecting the Constructs" on page 247. Step 3: If necessary, annotate and dimension the new view drawing.
For more information, see "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293. Step 4: Create model space views in the view drawing. For more information, see "Creating a Model Space View" on
page 253.
Creating a New General View Drawing
A wizard leads you through the steps for creating a general view drawing. NOTE View drawings are containers for constructs. Typically, you create a view drawing after you add the necessary constructs to the drawing. However, you can also create an empty view drawing first and add constructs to it later. Creating a View Drawing: Defining General Properties Use this procedure to set the name, description, category, and template file of a new view drawing.
Process Overview: Creating a General View Drawing | 245
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Views tab.
3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the category in which to place the new view drawing. If you have not defined any categories, the new view is placed in the basic Views category.
4 Add a new view drawing to the project in one of these ways: Right-click the category in which to place the new view drawing, and click New View Dwg General.
In the toolbar at the bottom of the Views tab, click
.
5 If you have clicked
, select General View in the subsequent dialog box.
6 Define the general view drawing properties: If you want to... name the new view drawing
enter a description for the view drawing
Then...
enter a name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the view, and click OK.
246 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
If you want to... change the category of the view drawing
select a different template file
Then...
select one from the Category list. The category you chose in step 3 is suggested.
click
, and browse for a new template. The default
template for view drawings set in the project is suggested.
7 Click Next, and proceed to "Creating a View Drawing: Assigning Levels and Divisions" on page 247.
Creating a View Drawing:Assigning Levels and Divisions Use this procedure to assign the levels and divisions to include in the view drawing.
You can choose multiple levels and divisions for a view drawing; for example, to create a view of the entire building.
When you select one or more levels as view context, all constructs that belong to the selected levels are referenced into the view drawing at the elevation you set for the level in "Creating a New Level" on page 201. For example, the first-floor constructs might be referenced at zero elevation and second-floor constructs at 2.75 meters. A spanning element would be referenced at the elevation of the lowest level to which it is assigned.
The level and divisions you choose serve as a preselection for the next step. For example, if you choose the first level and the south wing as view context, all constructs belonging to that level and wing are checked in the content selector. You can exclude constructs if you wish, but preselection saves time and effort.
1 Define the general properties of the view drawing, as described in "Creating a View Drawing: Defining General Properties" on page 245.
2 Click Next.
3 Select the levels and divisions to include in the view drawing. 4 When you finish setting the levels and divisions, click Next, and proceed to defining the view content as
described in "Creating a View Drawing: Selecting the Constructs" on page 247.
Creating a View Drawing: Selecting the Constructs Use this procedure to select constructs to be referenced in the view drawing. You can attach or overlay constructs into the view drawing. By default, each construct is attached as an external reference. For detailed information on attaching and overlaying external references, see "Reference Other Drawing Files" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
If more than one level is selected, the constructs are inserted at the elevation of the level to which they are assigned. For example, if you assign an apartment construct to the second level, which has an elevation of 2.75 meters, the apartment construct is referenced into the view at 2.75 meters.
Creating a New General View Drawing | 247
Selecting constructs is the key to creating a view drawing. The view drawing consists mainly of referenced constructs. There are several ways to make the selection of constructs easier:
Preselect levels and divisions: Depending on the level and division you selected in the Context tab, all constructs at that level and division are already checked.
Work with categories: When you select a category, all constructs within that category are selected. When you add constructs to the category later, they are included in the view drawing.
1 Define the context of the view drawing, as described in "Creating a View Drawing: Assigning Levels and Divisions" on page 247.
2 Click Next.
Note that the selected constructs and categories are based on the context you chose in the previous tab. You can use this preselected set, or make changes to it.
3 Create the selection set of constructs for the view drawing:
If you want to...
Then...
select an entire category to include in the view drawing
select the category. All constructs in the category are selected automatically. When you add constructs to the category later, they are included in the view drawing.
select a construct to include in the view drawing
select the construct.
exclude a category from the view drawing
clear the category's box. All constructs in the category are cleared automatically.
exclude a construct from the view drawing
clear the construct's box.
4 Determine the referencing mode of the constructs in the view drawing:
If you want to...
Then...
attach the construct to the view drawing
select the construct, right-click, and click Set to Attach.
NOTE Attaching an external reference is the default insertion method for views. When the Set to Attach command is unavailable, the construct has already been attached.
overlay the construct to the view drawing
select the construct, right-click, and click Set to Overlay.
NOTE When the Set to Overlay command is unavailable, the construct has already been overlaid.
248 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
5 Click Finish.
Displaying External References of a View Drawing
Use this procedure to display the external references of a view drawing. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the view drawing for which to display external references. 4 Select the view drawing. 5 Display the external references in one of these ways:
Right-click, and click Show External References.
Click
.
A worksheet with the external references of the view drawing is displayed. You can expand or collapse the list by clicking individual items.
6 Click OK to close the worksheet.
NOTE You can also display external references by opening the view drawing and using the AutoCAD Xref Manager. For more information, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Opening and Closing a View Drawing
Use this procedure to open and close a view drawing.
NOTE A view drawing needs to be open if you want to create a model space view in it.
When you open a view drawing, the status line in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing area displays the name of the associated project.
Displaying External References of a View Drawing | 249
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the view drawing you want to open. 4 Open the view drawing in one of these ways:
Select the view drawing, right-click, and click Open. Double-click the view drawing. The view drawing is opened in the drawing area of Autodesk Architectural Desktop. 5 To close the view drawing, click Close on the File menu, and save the changes, if necessary.
6 To update the preview of the view drawing in the Project Navigator, click
.
Creating a Specialized View Drawing
Use this procedure to create a specialized view drawing. You can create specialized view drawings for details, sections and elevations. A specialized view drawing normally contains one or more model space views with corresponding content: for example, a detail view drawing is usually used as a container for model space views displaying drawing details; a section view drawing will contain a model space view displaying a section.
In most cases, you will create a model space view containing a detail or a section/elevation from a callout tool. When you create specialized views from a callout tool, you can choose whether the resulting model space view should be placed in the view drawing you have created it from, in a different drawing, or in a new view drawing. For more information, see "Callouts" on page 1883.
To create a specialized view drawing that is not connected to a callout tool you use the Views tab of the Project Navigator.
NOTE You can later associate a callout symbol with the drawing. For more information, see "Callouts" on page 1883.
Specialized view drawings are marked with different symbols in the Project Navigator:
View Drawing Type General view drawing
Symbol
Detail view drawing
Section/Elevation view drawing
Specialized view drawings are nearly identical to general view drawings, except that a specialized view is based on the template set in the project properties; for example, the detail view template or the section/elevation view template.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the category in which you want to place the new detail drawing. 4 Select the view type to create:
if you want to...
Then...
create a detail drawing
Select the category, right-click, and click New View Dwg Detail View.
create a section or elevation view
Select the category, right-click, and click New View Dwg Section/Elevation View.
250 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
5 Define the general view drawing properties: If you want to... name the new view drawing
enter a description for the view drawing change the category of the view drawing select a different template file
Then...
enter a name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
click the setting for Description, enter a description of the view, and click OK.
select one from the Category list. The category you chose in step 3 is suggested.
click
, and browse for a new template. The template for
the appropriate view type set in the project is suggested.
6 Click Next. 7 Select the levels and divisions to include in the view.
For example, to create a detail drawing for a stair detail in the entrance hall, select Level 1 and the entrance hall division. To create an exterior building elevation, select all levels and divisions.
8 Click Next. 9 Select the constructs to include in the view.
NOTE You can also include constructs that you want to display as background graphics, and change their display to a background color, as described in "Using the External Display Configuration" on page 290.
10 Click Finish. A new detail or section/elevation drawing with the content you have specified is created in the Drawing Explorer.
Changing the Properties of a View Drawing
Use this procedure to change the properties of a view drawing. If you change the name or the location of constructs included in the view drawing, you need to re-path the drawing. If you change the level or division assignment of constructs included in the view drawing, you need to reload the external references in the drawing. For information, see "Regenerating a View Drawing" on page 252.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, select the view drawing, right-click, and click Properties. 4 Click the General category on the left, and change the general view properties:
If you want to... change the name of the view drawing
Then...
enter a new name. If the project number is used as a prefix for project file names, you do not need to enter the prefix here. The complete name with prefix is displayed under File Name. For more information on prefixes, see "Defining General Properties" on page 175.
change the description of the view drawing
click the setting for Description, change the description of the view drawing, and click OK.
change the category of the view drawing
select one from the Category list.
5 Click the Context category on the left, and change the levels and divisions to include in the view drawing.
Changing the Properties of a View Drawing | 251
6 Select the Content category on the left, and change the selected constructs for the view drawing:
If you want to... add a construct or category to the view drawing
Then... check the box for the construct or category.
remove a construct or category from the view drawing
clear the box for the construct or category.
change the referencing mode of a construct
select the construct, right-click, and select one of the following commands:
To attach a previously overlaid construct to a view, click Set to Attach.
To overlay a previously attached construct to a view, click Set to Overlay.
NOTE If one of these commands is unavailable, its mode is already selected.
7 Click OK.
8 To update your project with the new file information, select the file in the Project Navigator tree, right-click, and click Re-Path File.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
9 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path. For more information on updating files, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Regenerating a View Drawing
Use this procedure to regenerate all view drawings in the project. You need to regenerate a view drawing if its content has changed--for example, if you have changed the constructs assigned to it. When you regenerate a view drawing, you reload the external references used to generate it.
1 In the Project Navigator, click the Views tab.
2 Click the
button.
All view drawings in the project are updated with the changed constructs.
Electronically Transmitting a View Drawing
Use this procedure to electronically transmit a view drawing.
Electronically transmitting a drawing means that you package the drawing for delivery in electronic form. Drawing files in the transmittal package automatically include all related dependent files, such as external references and font files.
For more information about electronic transmittal, see "Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab.
252 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3 Select the view drawing you want to transmit, right-click, and click eTransmit.
4 In either the Files tree tab or the File Table tab, select the components to be included into the electronic package. The Files Tree tab displays the included files sorted by type. The Files Table tab displays all files in a list view. You can sort the list by name, path, type, version, size, and date.
5 To include project information, double-click the transmittal setup and select Include Project Information. For detailed information about project information in an electronic transmittal package, see "Electronically Transmitting a Project" on page 184.
6 Click OK to start the electronic transmittal.
Deleting a View Drawing
Use this procedure to delete a view drawing. For information on the consequences of deleting view drawings, see "Changing Views: Interactions with the Project" on page 257. The view drawing must be closed in order to delete it. NOTE Do not delete a view drawing from Windows Explorer. This might result in inconsistent project data.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 In the Drawing Explorer, select the view drawing, right-click, and click Delete. 4 Click Yes in the subsequent message box.
Creating a Model Space View
Use this procedure to create a new model space view within a view drawing. A model space view has its own name, description, and drawing scale. When a model space view is placed on a sheet, the display configuration and view direction of the view drawing are used in the generated sheet view. You have the possibility to associate a named layer state to a model space view, which will be used when placing the model space view on a sheet. If no named layer state is associated to a model space view, then the layer settings of the view drawing are used in the sheet view. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 1 in the view drawing, xref-dependent layer changes made in the view drawing will also be used in the sheet view.
Deleting a View Drawing | 253
Defining a model space view
Displaying a model space view
You can create multiple model space views in a view drawing. A model space view is a named view that represents a view definition in model space. You can place model space views onto plotting sheets, creating sheet views in the process.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to create a model space view, right-click, and click Open. 4 Select the view drawing in the Drawing Explorer, right-click, and click New Model Space View.
254 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
5 Enter a name for the new model space view. 6 Define the settings for the new model space view:
If you want to...
Then...
enter a description for the model space view
click the setting for Description and add a description to the model space view.
change the scale of the model space view select a scale from the list. The list of scales comes from the default view template.
7 Click
to define the boundaries of the new model space view.
8 Select the first boundary point of the desired view area.
9 Select the second boundary point of the desired view area.
10 Click OK.
The new model space view is listed under the view drawing from which it was created.
11 To associate a named layer state with the new model space view, select the model space view in Project Navigator, right-click, and click Save Layer State.
The layer state associated with the model space view will be used when placing the model space view on a sheet. If no layer state is saved with the model space view the layer settings of the view drawing are used. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 1 in the view drawing, xref-dependent layer changes made in the view drawing will also be used in the sheet view.
12 To open the new model space view, double-click the model space view in the Project Navigator. Alternatively, you can select the model space view in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Open.
Placing a Model Space View onto a Sheet
Use this procedure to place a model space view onto a sheet, creating a sheet view. When a model space view is placed onto a sheet, a sheet view is created. A sheet can contain any number of sheet views.
Model space view of plan detail
Placing a Model Space View onto a Sheet | 255
Model space view placed on sheet
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 In the Sheet Set View, locate the sheet into which you want to reference the model space view. 4 Open the sheet in one of these ways:
Select the sheet, right-click, and click Open. Double-click the sheet. The drawing containing the sheet is opened in the drawing area of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The sheet you selected is the active layout. 5 In the Project Navigator, click the Views tab. 6 Select the model space view you want to place on the sheet, and place it in one of these ways: Select the model space view, right-click, and click Place on Sheet. Then, select an insertion point on
the sheet. Select the model space view, and drag it from the Project Navigator to the drawing area of the sheet. NOTE Sheet views are inserted with their own layer key. By default, the sheet view layer is G-Anno-Nplt.
Changing the Properties of a Model Space View
Use this procedure to change the properties of a model space view. NOTE If you change the properties of a model space view, instances of that view that have been placed as sheet views on a sheet are not updated. Only new instances of the model space view will have the new settings. For example, if a model space view named West Stairs is defined with a scale of 1/8" = 1'-0", it is placed with that scale on a sheet. If the scale is later changed to 1/4" = 1'-0", the new scale is not updated on existing sheet views, but will be used for new sheet views.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing that contains the model space view you want to change, and expand it.
NOTE To change the name, description, or scale of a model space view, the associated view drawing does not need to be open. To change the model space boundaries, the associated view drawing must be open.
256 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
4 Change the properties of the model space view:
If you want to...
Then...
change the name of the model space view enter a new name.
change the description for the model space view
click the setting for Description and change it.
change the scale of the model space view select a new scale from the list.
5 To change the model space boundary, click 6 Click OK.
, and redefine the boundaries on screen.
Deleting Model Space Views
Use this procedure to delete a model space view. When you delete a model space view, only the named view in the view drawing is deleted; existing sheet views based on a deleted model space view remain in their respective sheets.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing that contains the model space view you want to delete, and expand it. 4 Select the model space view to delete, right-click, and click Delete.
NOTE You can also delete model space views by selecting View Named Views, and deleting the model space view from the AutoCAD Named Views dialog box.
Changing Views: Interactions with the Project
Changes made to one part of a project frequently influence other parts of the project. The following information describes the changes you can make to a view and the effects of the changes on other parts of the building project.
Adding a new view drawing: When you create a new view drawing, all or most of the referenced constructs should be present. For quick and comfortable selection of the constructs, place them in categories.
Changing the view name and category (location): A view drawing has a number of constructs referenced into it, and the view drawing itself can be referenced into a plotting sheet. Therefore, any name and location changes to a view drawing need to be updated throughout the project. To update the path, re-path the project as described in "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
Deleting Model Space Views | 257
Changing the content of a view drawing: Any changes made to the content of a view are also made to the plotting sheets that reference that view. If you have created model space views and sheet views from the view drawings, they will be updated to reflect the changed content of the view drawing.
Deleting a view drawing: If you delete a view drawing that has been referenced into a plotting sheet, that plotting sheet is now incomplete and has missing references. Check to see if the view is still used in a sheet before deleting it. If you delete a view drawing, all model space views associated to that view are deleted also. Any sheet views that reference these views will be incomplete and have missing references.
Changing a model space view: Changes made to an existing model space view's view boundaries or scale are not updated in existing sheet views derived from this view. To change the sheet view, delete it and re-create it from the updated model space view. If the content of a model space view changes due to changes in the view drawing, these changes will be updated in the sheet view.
Deleting a model space view: When you delete a model space view, all sheet views created from it remain intact. For definition, sheet views need only the building model in the view drawing.
Plotting Sheets
Plotting sheets are used to plot plans of your building project. The plotting sheet system in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop consists of these components:
Sheet drawing: A sheet drawing is a drawing file containing one or more sheets. Sheet: A sheet is a paper space layout within a sheet drawing. When you create a new sheet, you can either define
an existing sheet layout as a template, or use the sheet layout defined in the project sheet set or sheet subset. A sheet can contain one or more sheet views. Sheet view: A sheet view is a model space view that has been placed onto a sheet in a sheet drawing. Model space view of plan detail
258 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Sheet view created from model space view
Sheet drawings, sheets, and sheet views are listed on the Sheets tabs of the Project Navigator, from where they can be dragged and dropped into the appropriate locations in the Project Navigator. Plotting sheet with building plan view
Sheets and Sheet Drawings The National CAD Standard (NCS) mandates that sheets should be stored in individual drawings, each with one sheet layout. The drawing name should be the sheet number in its sheet set. The Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Project Navigator follows this scheme, so that each new sheet is placed in a new sheet drawing. You can, however, place multiple sheets into one sheet drawing, if necessary. For more information, see "Registering the Current Sheet in the Sheet Set" on page 267. Plotting Sheets and Annotation You can generate annotation, dimensions, and schedule tables in a view or a plotting sheet, depending on your specific workflow and needs. The Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Scheduling feature makes it easy to generate annotation in both views and plotting sheets. For more information on annotating a project, see "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293. Plotting Sheet Files A sheet drawing is a DWG file. As opposed to other non-project-related drawing files, an XML file with the same name is created when you create a sheet drawing. The accompanying XML file contains information to connect the drawing file into the project. NOTE The XML file is created and updated automatically. You do not need to edit it but be careful not to accidentally delete it in Windows Explorer.
Plotting Sheets | 259
Sheets and sheet views are contained within sheet drawings. They have no corresponding XML files. Sheet Categories and Subsets Sheets are arranged in two types of categories. In the Explorer View tab, sheet drawings are placed in folder categories. When you create sheets or sheet views within a sheet drawing, they are physically placed in the same sheet drawing. Sheet Set View tab on project (left) and Explorer View tab (right)
In the Sheet Set View tab, sheets are organized in sheet subsets. Sheet subsets are a logical structure rather than a physical one. The sheet folder category does not need to be identical to the sheet subset in which the sheet is placed. However, to avoid confusion, it is recommended to have parallel structures in the sheet set and the sheet categories. You can logically rearrange sheets into a different subset within the Sheet Set View, but that will not change their physical location in the category or folder. Likewise, when you remove a sheet from a sheet subset in the Sheet Set View, only the reference of the sheet to the subset is removed; the layout itself and its containing sheet drawing are not deleted from the Sheets folder or subfolder. For more information, see "Plotting Sheets" on page 258. Sheet Table of Contents You may want to place a table of contents on the cover sheet of a sheet set. A table of contents is also called a sheet list or a sheet index. With Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can create sheet lists that contain information such as sheet numbers, sheet titles, sheet plot, author, keywords, and comments. For more information, see "Inserting a Sheet List" on page 271. Sheet list on cover sheet
When to Start with Plotting Sheets
Plotting sheets are the final output of a building plan. You create plotting sheets after you have created elements and constructs for all parts of the building model, along with the necessary model views, detail views, and section/elevation views.
260 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Designing a building is an iterative process. You will revisit planning stages and make changes to elements and constructs. These changes are reflected in the views and plotting sheets. Plotting sheet with building plan
Keep these points in mind when creating plotting sheets: The content of a plotting sheet depends on the views that are referenced into it and the constructs and elements referenced into the views. The viewport settings of a sheet view are defined in the model space view placed on the sheet. For more information, see "Creating a Model Space View" on page 253. A plotting sheet contains all plotting-specific settings like title blocks and print annotation.
Setting the Properties of the Project Sheet Set
Use this procedure to set the properties of the project sheet set. The properties of the project sheet set are defined by the sheet set template you assigned in "Creating a New Project" on page 171. However, you can change the settings for an individual project.
IMPORTANT A number of settings apply only to sheet sets created in the AutoCAD Sheet Set Manager. For a sheet set that will be used in an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project, most settings come from the project, and not from the sheet set template.
The following settings are ignored when you use a sheet set template in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project: The project sheet set: The DST file is always stored in the root folder of the project. Model view: In an AutoCAD sheet set, this field displays the paths and names of folders that contain drawings used by the sheet set. Model view drawing locations are not tracked in Autodesk Architectural Desktop sheet sets. They are automatically taken from the project views. Label block for views: Label blocks for project views are stored in the view templates. Callout blocks: Callout blocks for a project are located on the Tools palette. Sheet storage location: The sheets in a project are always stored in the Sheets folder of the project, or in one of its subfolders. Project Control: When you are working in an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project, you associate project information to the project file (APJ), instead of the project sheet set. For information on associating information to a project, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171 and "Defining the Project Properties" on page 174.
NOTE If you enter a project name and project number under Project Control that differs from the project name and number you have entered in "Creating a New Project" on page 171, you will get an error message when editing the sheet set properties, and be prompted to consolidate the information. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to leave the Project Control fields in the sheet set properties empty.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
Setting the Properties of the Project Sheet Set | 261
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the root node of the sheet set, right-click, and click Properties.
4 Expand Sheet Set. 5 To define page setup overrides in the project, click the setting for Page setup override files. 6 In the Select Template dialog box, select a drawing template (DWT) file.
NOTE Select a template that contains named paper space layouts, and make sure that their plot areas have been set to Layout. Otherwise, you cannot use them as page setup overrides.
7 Expand Sheet Creation. In this category, you define settings for the sheets you create within the sheet set.
8 To define a default layout for new sheets, click the setting for Sheet creation template.
9 Click to browse for a drawing (DWG) or template (DWT) file, and click Open. 10 Select the default layout you want to use to create new sheets. Then, click OK. 11 Specify if you want to be prompted for the sheet template each time you create a new sheet:
If you want to...
be prompted for a sheet template each time you create a new sheet
Then... select Yes.
always use the default sheet template
select No.
12 To add, edit, or delete custom properties, click Edit Custom properties. For information about Custom Properties, see "Include Information with Sheets and Sheet Sets" in AutoCAD Help.
262 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
NOTE When working in an Architectural Desktop project, normally you do not use custom properties. In most cases, you use the project details in the Project Browser. For more information, see "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
13 Click OK. If you have entered a project name and project number in the sheet set properties that differs from the project number and name defined in "Creating a New Project" on page 171, an error message appears informing you of the mismatch. For information about consolidating the inconsistent name and number, see "Consolidating Inconsistent Project and Sheet Set Information" on page 183.
Setting the Properties of a Sheet Subset
Use this procedure to set the properties of a sheet subset. A sheet subset is a logical organization unit within the project sheet set. You can create sheet subsets for plan sheets, detail sheets, or elevation sheets. The sheet subset structure is not automatically identical to the folder structure in the Explorer View tab. It is recommended that you use parallel structures for sheet subsets and sheet categories. You can set the following parameters for a sheet subset:
The default folder location for new sheets created in this subset The default template for new sheets created in this subset Whether to be prompted for a sheet template each time you create a new sheet
These parameters are set in sheet set properties., but you can override them here for individual subsets. This would be useful if you want to use different sheet templates for plan sheets and detail sheets. If you have no sheet subsets in your sheet set yet, see "Creating a Sheet Subset" on page 264.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet subset for which to change properties, right-click, and click Properties.
4 Change the properties of the sheet subset:
If you want to... change the name of the sheet subset
Then... enter a new name.
set a different default directory for new sheets
created in this subset
under Store new sheet DWG files in, click
. Then, select a folder into
which new sheets should be placed, and click Open.
Setting the Properties of a Sheet Subset | 263
If you want to...
Then...
set a different default template for new sheets created in this subset
under Sheet creation template for subset, click
. Then, select a DWG or
DWT file, and select a layout of the file as the default sheet template.
be prompted for a template each time you select Prompt for template. create a new sheet in this subset
5 Click OK.
Creating a Sheet Subset
Use this procedure to create a new sheet subset.
You create sheet subsets in the Sheet Set View tab of the Sheets tab. The Explorer View tab displays only folder categories and sheet drawings, and its structure can differ from that of the Sheet Set View tab. It is recommended that you have parallel structures in the Sheet Explorer View tab and the Sheet Set View tab. For information on creating categories in the Explorer View tab, see "Creating a Category in the Project Navigator" on page 209.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet subset under which you want to create a new subset, right-click, and click New Subset. 4 Define the properties of the new subset:
If you want to...
Then...
change the name of the sheet subset
enter a new name.
set a different default directory for new sheets
created in this subset
under Store new sheet DWG files in, click
. Then, select a folder into
which new sheets should be placed, and click Open.
set a different default template for new sheets created in this subset
under Sheet creation template for subset, click
. Then, select a DWG or
DWT file, and select a layout of the file as the default sheet template.
be prompted for a template each time you select Prompt for template. create a new sheet in this subset
5 Click OK.
Removing a Sheet Subset
Use this procedure to remove a sheet subset from the project sheet set. When you delete a sheet subset, only the logical categorization represented by the subset is deleted. No sheets or sheet drawings are deleted. You can re-import sheets from the deleted category into other sheet subsets later. For information about importing sheets, see "Importing Sheets into the Sheet Set" on page 266. You can remove a sheet subset only if it contains no sheets.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet subset you want to delete, right-click, and click Delete.
Creating a New Sheet
Use this procedure to create a new sheet. Each new sheet is created in a new sheet drawing. Sheets can contain multiple sheet views.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click .
264 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3 Add a new sheet to the project in one of these ways: Right-click the subset in which to place the new sheet, and click New Sheet.
In the toolbar at the bottom of the Sheets tab, click
.
4 If you selected to be prompted for a template each time you create a new sheet, you are prompted now for a sheet template. Select a layout from a DWT, DWG or DWS file as a sheet template, and click OK.
If you have selected not to be prompted for a sheet template when creating new sheets, the default template defined in the project sheet set or the sheet subset is used.
5 Define the sheet properties: If you want to... number the new sheet enter a title for the plotting sheet
enter a file name for the plotting sheet
Then...
enter a number. If you selected a project prefix in the project settings, the prefix is placed in front of the sheet number in the file name. You can change that numbering, if you want to.
enter one under Sheet title. The sheet title is used in these locations: As the display name of the sheet in the Project Navigator. As the display name of the sheet in a sheet list. As the sheet layout name in the sheet drawing.
enter one under File name. The file name is used as the display name of the sheet drawing in the Project Navigator.
NOTE The suggested file name consists of the project prefix, sheet number, and sheet title. You can change that, if necessary.
change the folder in which the sheet is saved enter a new folder path. The folder path defined in the sheet subset is suggested.
6 Click OK. You can access the new sheet from two locations:
In the Sheet Set View tab, the new sheet is displayed under the sheet subset in which you created it.
Creating a New Sheet | 265
In the Explorer View tab, the sheet drawing and the sheet are displayed under the folder category in which you saved the sheet.
Depending on your project setup, these two locations can have different names and structures.
Importing Sheets into the Sheet Set
Use this procedure to import a sheet into the project sheet set or one of its subsets. When you import a sheet, the sheet and its associated sheet drawing are physically not moved from their original location. For example, if you import a sheet from the drawing C:\Additional Drawings\Example.dwg into the project sheet subset Architectural, the selected sheet is displayed under the Architectural subset; the Example.dwg file, however, is not moved into the Sheets folder of the project; it remains in its original location under C:\Additional Drawings\Example.dwg. If you switch to the Explorer View tab, the imported sheet drawing is listed, and is marked with a special icon . A sheet can belong to only one sheet set. You cannot import a sheet that is already part of another sheet set; in that case an error message is displayed.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet subset into which to import the sheet, right-click, and click Import Layout as Sheet.
266 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
4 Click . 5 Browse for the drawing file containing the sheet you want to import, and click Open. 6 Under Select layouts to import as sheets, select the sheet layout to import.
NOTE You can select multiple layouts here.
7 If you want the sheet name to be prefixed with the sheet drawing's file name, select Prefix sheet titles with file name.
8 Click OK.
NOTE To import a sheet that is currently open, select the subset in which it should be displayed, right-click, and click Import Current Layout as Sheet.
Registering the Current Sheet in the Sheet Set
Use this procedure to register sheets in the sheet set. In some cases, you might have legacy sheet drawings that do not conform to the NCS standard, and contain more than one sheet layout. When you open these drawings into the Project Navigator of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, only the first sheet in the sheet drawing is registered on the Sheets tab. To register other sheets as well, you need to import them while they are open.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click 3 Locate the sheet drawing that has additional sheets you want to register in the sheet set. 4 Double-click the sheet drawing. 5 In the drawing area, click the sheet you want to import to make it current. 6 In the Project Navigator, click . 7 Navigate to the sheet subset in which the additional sheet should be placed, right-click, and click Import
Current Layout as Sheet. The sheet is added to the sheet subset. When you change to the Sheet Explorer view, and expand the sheet drawing containing the sheet, you can see that the additional sheet is now listed under the sheet drawing.
Opening and Closing a Sheet
Use this procedure to open and close a plotting sheet.
Registering the Current Sheet in the Sheet Set | 267
When you open a sheet, the sheet drawing containing the sheet is opened on the correct sheet layout.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click .
NOTE You can also open a sheet from the Explorer View of the Sheets tab.
3 Locate the sheet you want to open. 4 Open the sheet in one of these ways:
Select the sheet, right-click, and click Open. Double-click the sheet.
The drawing containing the sheet is opened in the drawing area of Autodesk Architectural Desktop. You can now edit it.
5 To close the sheet, you must close the sheet drawing. Click File menu Close, and save the changes, if necessary.
6 To update the preview of the sheet in the Project Navigator, click
.
Changing the Properties of a Sheet
Use this procedure to change the properties of a sheet. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet for which you want to change properties, right-click, and click Properties. 4 Change the sheet properties:
If you want to... change the sheet title
Then... enter a new title.
change the sheet number
enter a new number.
add a description for the sheet
enter a description.
change the publishing settings
select Yes to include the sheet in the set of sheets that are published.
select No to exclude the sheet from the set of sheets that are published.
5 Click OK.
Removing a Sheet from the Sheet Set
Use this procedure to remove a sheet from the sheet set. When you remove a sheet from the sheet set, only the reference to the sheet is removed. The sheet is still physically present in the sheets folder where it has been saved. You can re-import the sheet into the sheet set, as described in "Importing Sheets into the Sheet Set" on page 266.
268 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Removing a sheet from the sheet set has the following consequences:
The sheet cannot be selected for a sheet selection. The sheet will not be included in new sheet lists. The sheet will not be included in electronic packages of the sheet set. The sheet will not be included in archive packages of the sheet set. The sheet will not be included when you publish the sheet set to a plotter or to a DWF file.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet you want to remove from the sheet set, right-click, and click Delete. 4 Click OK in the subsequent dialog box.
Deleting a Sheet from the Project
Use this procedure to delete a plotting sheet from the project. You can delete a sheet physically from the project in two ways:
Delete the sheet layout from the sheet drawing Delete the sheet drawing containing the sheet
NOTE You can physically delete sheets or sheet drawings only from the Explorer View tab of the Sheets tab.
Deleting a Sheet Use this procedure to delete a sheet layout from a sheet drawing. When you delete a sheet, all sheet views you have placed on that sheet are deleted too.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet drawing containing the sheet you want to delete, and expand it. 4 Select the sheet to delete, right-click, and click Delete Layout.
Deleting a Sheet Drawing Use this procedure to delete a sheet drawing from the project. When you delete a sheet drawing, all sheets and sheet views contained in it are deleted too.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet drawing you want to delete, right-click, and click Delete. 4 Click OK in the subsequent dialog box.
Creating a New Sheet View
Use this procedure to create a new sheet view on a sheet. A sheet view is created whenever you place a model space view onto a plotting sheet. For information on model space views, see "Creating a Model Space View" on page 253. A sheet view uses the display configuration, scale, and layer state of the model space view from which it is created. If no layer state is saved with the model space view the layer settings of the view drawing are used. If the VISRETAIN system variable is set to 1 in the view drawing, xref-dependent layer changes made in the view drawing will also be used in the sheet view.
Deleting a Sheet from the Project | 269
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 In the Sheet Set View tab, locate the sheet on which you want to place a new sheet view. 4 Open the sheet in one of these ways:
Select the sheet, right-click, and click Open. Double-click the sheet. The drawing containing the sheet is opened in the drawing area of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The sheet you have selected is the active layout. 5 In the Project Navigator, click the Views tab. 6 Select the model space view, right-click, and click Place on Sheet. Then, select an insertion point on the sheet.
NOTE Sheet views are inserted with their own layer key. By default, the sheet view layer is G-Anno-Nplt.
Opening a Sheet View
Use this procedure to open a sheet view. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet containing the sheet view you want to open, and expand it. 4 Select the sheet view, right-click, and click Open.
Numbering Sheet Views
Use this procedure to number sheet views in a sheet set. A number assigned to a sheet view is displayed as a prefix to the sheet view name in the Project Navigator.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet that contains the sheet view you want to number, and expand it. 4 Select the sheet view, right-click, and click Rename and Renumber.
5 Enter a number for the sheet view. 6 If necessary, rename the sheet view. 7 Click Next to display the information for the next sheet view in the sheet. 8 When you finish changing the numbering of sheet views, click OK.
Deleting a Sheet View
Use this procedure to delete a sheet view from a sheet. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click .
270 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3 Select the sheet containing the sheet view you want to delete, and expand it. 4 Select the sheet view, right-click, and click Open.
The sheet view is opened in the drawing area. 5 Select the sheet view, and press DEL.
Selecting a sheet view to delete
Displaying External References of a Sheet Drawing
Use this procedure to display the external references of a sheet drawing. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 In the Drawing Explorer, locate the sheet drawing for which to display external references. 4 Select the sheet drawing. 5 Display the external references in one of these ways:
Right-click, and click Show External References.
Click
.
A worksheet with the external references of the sheet drawing is displayed. You can expand or collapse the list by clicking individual items.
6 Click OK to close the worksheet.
NOTE You can also display external references by opening the sheet drawing and using the AutoCAD Xref Manager. For more information, see "Reference Other Drawing Files (Xrefs)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Inserting a Sheet List
Use this procedure to insert a sheet list in a sheet. A sheet list is a table of contents for the sheets in a project. Normally, you place it on the cover sheet of your sheet set; however, you can place it on any sheet.
Displaying External References of a Sheet Drawing | 271
Sheet list on cover sheet
The sheet list is inserted as a table. You can assign AutoCAD table styles to it. For information on creating table styles, see "Work with Table Styles" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Open the sheet on which you want to place the sheet list. 4 Select the sheet set root node, right-click, and click Insert Sheet List.
5 Select the table style for the sheet list under Table Style name.
To create a new table style, click .
6 Enter the title of the sheet set under Title Text. 7 Under Column Settings, define the information to include in the sheet list.
Columns for sheet number and sheet title have already been defined; however, you can delete them.
If you want to...
Then...
add a column to the sheet list
click Add. Then, click the Data Type entry, and select the data you want to display in the list. You can choose subject, author, keywords, and more. To change the heading text for the entry, click the heading text and enter new text.
remove a column from the sheet list select the column in the list, and click Remove.
272 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
If you want to...
Then...
rearrange a column in the sheet list select the column in the list, and click Move Up or Move Down. The top entry in the list will be placed as the far left column in the sheet list. The next-lower entry will be placed next to the left column, and so on.
NOTE You can see a preview of the sheet list in the viewer on the left.
8 Click OK twice.
NOTE The sheet list is generated from the sheets contained in the sheet set. If you make manual changes to the sheet list after placing it on a sheet, these changes will be overwritten when you update the sheet list, as described in "Updating the Sheet List" on page 273.
9 Specify an insertion point for the sheet list on the current sheet. The sheet list is placed on the sheet. The sheet title and sheet number entries are linked to the files containing these sheets. If you CTRL-click the sheet title or sheet number, it will open the associated drawing file.
Changing a Sheet List
Use this procedure to change the properties of a sheet list.
NOTE Changing the properties of a sheet list includes changing the table style, the number and arrangement of columns displayed, and the sheet list title. If you change the actual sheets in your list (for example if you rename sheets, add, or remove sheets), you need to update the sheet list, as described in "Updating the Sheet List" on page 273.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Open the sheet that contains the sheet list. 4 Select the sheet list in the drawing, right-click, and click Edit Sheet List Table Settings. 5 Change the properties of the sheet list, as described in "Inserting a Sheet List" on page 271.
Updating the Sheet List
Use this procedure to update a sheet list. You need to update the sheet list when you change the sheet set; for example, if you add, remove, or rename sheets.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Open the sheet that contains the sheet list. 4 Select the sheet list in the drawing, right-click, and click Update Sheet List Table.
Refreshing the Sheet Set
Use this procedure to refresh the sheet set. Refreshing a sheet set includes opening all sheets in the set, updating them with any changes that have occurred (for example, changed external references), saving them, and closing them. You cannot refresh sheets, if any of the following conditions are true:
The associated sheet drawing is already open. The sheet drawing or its folder are set to read-only.
Changing a Sheet List | 273
The associated sheet drawing has been deleted. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet set root node, right-click, and click Refresh Sheet Set. Refreshing the sheet set can take a moment or two. A progress bar shows how long the refresh will take. When the Refresh is complete, you are notified by a message. If there were been problems refreshing one or more sheets, they are listed. You can also view details of the refresh in a log file located in the root directory of the project folder.
Creating a Sheet Selection
Use this procedure to create a sheet selection. If you repeatedly work with a specific group of sheets in the project sheet set, you can create a named selection of those sheets. You apply the sheet selection by choosing its name in the Sheet Set View tab of the Project Navigator. Ceiling plan sheet selection
You could use a sheet selection as a selection set for electronic transmissions or publishing. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 SHIFT-click or CTRL-click to select the sheets to include in the sheet selection. 4 When you finish selecting sheets, right-click, and click Save Sheet Selection. 5 Enter a name for the sheet selection, and click OK.
Activating a Sheet Selection
Use this procedure to activate a sheet selection. 1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the project sheet set root node, right-click, and click Sheet Selections. 4 Make your selection from the Sheet Selections submenu.
274 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Deleting a Sheet Selection
Use this procedure to delete a sheet selection.
NOTE Deleting a sheet selection does not delete any sheets included in that selection.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the project sheet set root node, right-click, and click Sheet Selections Manage.
4 Select the sheet selection you want to delete, and click Delete. 5 Click OK.
Electronically Transmitting Sheets and Sheet Sets
Use this procedure to electronically transmit a sheet, a sheet subset or the project sheet set. Electronically transmitting a file set means that you package the file set for delivering in electronic form. Drawing files in the transmittal package include all related dependent files, such as external references and font files. You can select different components of the project sheet set for electronic transmittal:
The complete project sheet set: This includes all sheet drawings, sheets, sheet views, and sheet subsets in the project sheet set.
A sheet subset: This includes all sheet drawings, sheets, and sheet views from a specified sheet subset. A sheet: This includes the sheet drawing and all sheets and sheet views contained in it.
For more information about electronic transmittal, see "Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the component you want to transmit electronically:
If you want to...
Then...
transmit the complete project sheet set
select the project sheet set.
transmit a sheet subset
select the desired subset.
transmit a sheet
select the desired sheet.
4 Right-click, and click eTransmit.
Deleting a Sheet Selection | 275
5 Select the components to include in the electronic package. The Create Transmittal dialog box tabs offer three different views:
Tab
Contents
Sheets
The Sheets tab displays the sheets and the sheet subsets in the project.
Files Tree
The Files Tree tab displays Project drawings: AutoCAD font maps AutoCAD Plotter configuration files External references AutoCAD Plot Style Tables
Files Table
Associated XML files of sheets drawing files Project Bulletin Board (HTML) Sheet Set (DST) file You can select all these components for each project drawing to export.
The Files Table tab displays the same components as the Files Tree tab, listed in table format.
6 Select the transmittal setup for the package, right-click, and click Modify.
276 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
7 Under Transmittal package type, select the package type in which to export your sheet set:
If you want to... export the project as a regular file set
Then... select Folder (set of files).
export the project in a WinZip file
select Zip (*.zip).
export the project as a self-extracting executable file select self-extracting executable (*exe).
8 Under File Format, select the format in which to export the drawing files:
If you want to...
Then...
export the project drawings with their AEC objects (walls, select AutoCAD 2004 Drawing Format. doors and so on) intact
export the project drawings with their AEC objects (walls, select AutoCAD 2000 Drawing Format. doors and so on) displayed as proxy graphics
export the project drawings with their AEC objects exploded into AutoCAD 2004 objects (3D faces, hatches and so on)
select AutoCAD 2004 Drawing Format with Exploded AEC Objects.
export the project drawings with their AEC objects exploded into AutoCAD 2000 objects (lines and arcs)
select AutoCAD 2000 Drawing Format with Exploded AEC Objects.
9 Under Transmittal File Folder, select the folder into which to place the package.
For example, if you selected ZIP as the transmittal package type and C:\MyTransfer as the transmittal folder, the ZIP file containing your project will be placed under C:\MyTransfer\MyProject.zip.
10 Under Transmittal file name, specify the method for naming the transmittal package:
If you want to...
Then...
display a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the select Prompt for a file name. name of the transmittal package
use a logical default file name and, if the file name already exists, add a number to the end of the file name
select Increment file name if necessary.
use a logical default file name and, if the file name already exists, overwrite the existing file name
select Overwrite if necessary.
11 Select the transmittal options:
If you want to ...
duplicate the folder structure for the files being transmitted and make the root folder the top-level folder within the hierarchical folder tree
Then ...
select Use organized folder structure. This has the following consequences:
Relative paths remain unchanged.
Absolute paths within the root folder tree are converted to relative paths.
Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are converted to No Path and are moved to the root folder or a folder within the root folder tree.
A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.
A PlotCFG folder is created, if necessary.
Electronically Transmitting Sheets and Sheet Sets | 277
If you want to ...
Then ...
A SheetSets folder is created to hold all sheet set support files, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder.
NOTE This option is not available if you are saving a transmittal package to an Internet location.
unpack all files to a single, specified target folder when the transmittal package is installed
select Place all files in one folder.
WARNING Do not select this option when electronically transmitting project information. When you place all files in one folder the project structure will be flattened.
preserve the folder structure of all files in the transmittal package
select Keep files and folders as is.
NOTE This option is not available if you are saving a transmittal package to an Internet location.
12 If desired, select Include project information and, if necessary, select Include project default templates. Project information includes the following:
Project (APJ) file XML files Project template files 13 To include the associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the transmittal package, select Include Fonts.
NOTE Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, they are not included with the transmittal package. If any required TrueType fonts are not present on the computer to which the transmittal package is copied, the font specified by the FONTALT system variable is substituted.
14 To launch your email application when the transmittal package is created, select Send e-mail with transmittal. 15 To change the printer/plotter setting in the transmittal package to None, select Set default plotter to 'none'.
NOTE This is the default setting. Your local printer/plotter settings are usually not relevant to the recipient of the package.
16 To bind all external references to the files in which they were attached, select Bind external references. Depending on the binding settings in "Changing the AEC Editor Settings" on page 114, the external files are either bound or inserted when e-transmitting the sheet or sheet set.
17 To assign a password to the transmittal package, select Prompt for password. 18 To include the sheet set (DST) file in the transmittal package, select Include sheet set data and files.
When you are creating a project transmittal package, it is recommended that you include the DST file. 19 Click OK twice to start the electronic transmittal.
Archiving a Sheet Set
Use this procedure to archive a sheet set. The archiving features packages the files associated with the current sheet set so that they can be archived.
278 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the project sheet set, right-click, and click Archive Sheet Set.
4 Select the components to include in the archiving package. The Archive a Sheet Set dialog box tabs offer three different views:
Tab
Contents
Sheets
The Sheets tab displays the sheets and the sheet subsets in the project.
Files Tree
The Files Tree tab displays Project drawings: AutoCAD font maps AutoCAD Plotter configuration files External references AutoCAD Plot Style Tables
Files Table
Associated XML files of sheets drawing files Project Bulletin Board (HTML) Sheet Set (DST) file You can select all these components for each project drawing to export.
The Files Table tab displays the same components as the Files Tree tab, listed in table format.
5 Click Modify Archive Setup.
Archiving a Sheet Set | 279
6 Under Archive package type, select the package type in which to export your sheet set:
If you want to... export the project as a regular file set
Then... select Folder (set of files).
export the project in a WinZip file
select Zip (*.zip).
export the project as a self-extracting executable file select self-extracting executable (*exe).
7 Under File Format, select the format in which to export the drawing files:
If you want to...
Then...
export the project drawings with their AEC objects (walls, select AutoCAD 2004 Drawing Format. doors and so on) intact
export the project drawings with their AEC objects (walls, select AutoCAD 2000 Drawing Format. doors and so on) displayed as proxy graphics
export the project drawings with their AEC objects exploded into AutoCAD 2004 objects (3D faces, hatches and so on)
select AutoCAD 2004 Drawing Format with Exploded AEC Objects.
export the project drawings with their AEC objects exploded into AutoCAD 2000 objects (lines and arcs)
select AutoCAD 2000 Drawing Format with Exploded AEC Objects.
8 Under Archive File Folder, select the folder into which to place the package.
For example, if you selected ZIP as the archiving package type and C:\MyTransfer as the transmittal folder, the ZIP file containing your project will be placed under C:\MyTransfer\MyProject.zip.
9 Under Archive file name, specify the method for naming the archive package:
If you want to...
Then...
display a standard file selection dialog box where you can enter the select Prompt for a file name. name of the archive package
use a logical default file name and, if the file name already exists, add a number to the end of the file name
select Increment file name if necessary.
use a logical default file name and, if the file name already exists, overwrite the existing file name
select Overwrite if necessary.
280 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
10 Select the archiving options:
If you want to ...
Then...
duplicate the folder structure for the files being
select Use organized folder structure. This has the following
archived and make the root folder the top-level folder consequences:
within the hierarchical folder tree
Relative paths remain unchanged.
Absolute paths within the root folder tree are converted to relative paths.
Absolute paths outside the root folder tree are converted to No Path and are moved to the root folder or a folder within the root folder tree.
A Fonts folder is created, if necessary.
A PlotCFG folder is created, if necessary.
A SheetSets folder is created to hold all sheet set support files, if necessary. The sheet set data (DST) file, however, is placed in the root folder.
unpack all files to a single, specified target folder when the archive package is installed
select Place all files in one folder.
WARNING Do not select this option when archiving project information. When you place all files in one folder the project structure will be flattened.
preserve the folder structure of all files in the archive select Keep files and folders as is. package
11 If desired, select Include project information and, if necessary, select Include project default templates. Project information includes the following:
Project (APJ) file XML files Project drawing template (DWT) files 12 To include the associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the archiving package, select Include Fonts.
NOTE Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, they are not included with the archive package. If any required TrueType fonts are not present on the computer to which the transmittal package is copied, the font specified by the FONTALT system variable is substituted.
13 To launch your email application when the archiving package is created, select Send e-mail with transmittal. 14 To change the printer/plotter setting in the archiving package to None, select Set default plotter to 'none'.
NOTE This is the default setting. Your local printer/plotter settings are usually not relevant to the recipient of the package.
15 To bind all external references to the files in which they were attached, select Bind external references. Depending on the binding settings in "Changing the AEC Editor Settings" on page 114, the external files are either bound or inserted when archiving the sheet set.
16 To assign a password to the archiving package, select Prompt for password. 17 To include the sheet set (DST) file in the archiving package, select Include sheet set data and files.
When you are creating a project archiving package, it is recommended that you include the DST file.
Archiving a Sheet Set | 281
18 Click OK twice to start archiving.
Publishing Sheet Sets
In the Sheet Set View tab, you can publish sheets to a plotter or to a DWF file. You can assign plot stamps to the sheet set, publish sheets to an alternate page setup, and specify DWF publishing settings. You can create publication sets from the following components:
An individual sheet. A sheet subset. For information about creating sheet subsets, see "Creating a Sheet Subset" on page 264. A sheet selection. For information about creating sheet subsets, see "Creating a Sheet Selection" on page 274. The project sheet set.
Defining the Plot Stamp Settings Use this procedure to define the settings of the plot stamp. A plot stamp is a line of text added to plotting sheets. Information in a plot stamp can include the drawing name, layout name, date, and time. You specify where this text will be located on the plotting sheet. You can record the plot stamp information in a log file instead of plotting it, or in addition to plotting it.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the project sheet set root node, right-click, and click Publish Plot Stamp Settings.
4 Under Plot stamp fields, select the information to include in the plot stamp. You can choose from the following items:
Item Drawing name
Description Places the drawing name and path in the plot stamp.
Layout name
Places the name of the layout in the plot stamp.
Date and Time
Places the date and time in the plot stamp.
NOTE The date and time format is determined by the Regional Settings dialog box in the Windows Control Panel. Plot stamping uses the short date style for dates.
Login name
Places the Windows login name in the plot stamp. NOTE This name is contained in the LOGINNAME system variable.
Device name
282 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Places the current plotting device name in the plot stamp.
Item Paper size Plot scale
Description Places the paper size for the currently configured plotting device in the plot stamp. Places the plot scale in the plot stamp.
5 If necessary, select user-defined fields to include in the plot stamp.
6 If necessary, select a new plot stamp parameter file.
Plot stamp parameter files have the extension PSS. Multiple users can access the same file and stamp their plots based on company standard settings. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides two PSS files--Mm.pss and Inches.pss--that are located in the Support folder. The initial default plot stamp parameter file name is determined by the regional settings of the operating system when Architectural Desktop is installed.
7 Click Advanced.
8 Select the location of the plot stamp on the plotting sheet. The location is relative to the image orientation of the drawing on the page.
9 Select the orientation of the plot stamp.
The orientation works in combination with the location setting. For example, if you select Top Left for location, and Horizontal for orientation, the plot stamp is placed in a horizontal row in the upper left corner of the plot sheet.
10 To rotate the plot stamp upside-down, select Stamp upside-down. 11 Define the offsets of the plot stamp:
If you want to...
Then...
calculate the offset values that you specify from the select Offset relative to printable area. corner of the printable area of the paper
calculate the offset values that you specify from the select Offset relative to paper border. corner of the paper
define a horizontal offset for the plot stamp
enter the offset value under X offset.
define a vertical offset for the plot stamp
enter the offset value under Y offset.
12 Define the text properties of the plot stamp.
If you want to...
Then...
change the font of the plot stamp
select a new font.
NOTE You can select only TrueType fonts here.
change the text height
enter a new text height.
Publishing Sheet Sets | 283
If you want to...
Then...
place the plot stamp information into a single text line
select Single line plot stamp.
NOTE Plot stamp information can consist of up to two lines of text, but the placement and offset values must accommodate text wrapping and text height. If the plot stamp contains text that is longer than the printable area, the text will be cut off. If you have cleared Single line plot stamp, the text is wrapped after the third field.
13 To define the unit in which the text height and X and Y offsets are measured, select a value for Plot stamp units.
NOTE By default, the drawing units are used here.
14 To write the plot stamp information in a log file, select Create a log file. The default log file is plot.log, and it is located under: \Documents and Settings\<Username>\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Support. You can specify a different file name and path. After the initial plot.log file is created, the plot stamp information in each succeeding plotted drawing is added to this file. Each drawing's plot stamp information is a single line of text. The plot stamp log file can be placed on a network drive and shared by multiple users. Plot stamp information from each user is appended to the plot.log file.
15 Click OK twice.
Assigning a Plot Stamp to a Publication Set Use this procedure to assign a plot stamp to a publication set.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the project sheet set root node, right-click, and click Publish Include Plot Stamp.
The plot stamp stays active until you re-select the sheet set and clear Include Plot Stamp.
Managing Page Setups Use this procedure to manage page setups in a publication set. The Page Setup Manager is an AutoCAD® feature that has been integrated into the Project Navigator. With the Page Setup Manager, you change the current page setup, create a new page setup, modify existing page setups, and import page setups from other drawing files, templates, or DXF files.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet subset or the sheet selection you want to publish, right-click, and click Publish Manage
Page Setups.
284 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
4 Define the page setup for the publication set:
If you want to... select a page setup for plotting
Then... select the page setup from the list, and click Set Current.
create a new page setup
click New.
modify an existing page setup
select the page setup from the list, and click Modify.
import a page setup from a DWG, DWT, or DXF file
click Import.
NOTE For detailed information about working with page setups, see "Overview of Page Setup Settings" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Publishing Sheets and Sheet Sets Use this procedure to publish a sheet or a sheet set to a plotter or to a DWF file. In the publishing settings, you can assemble, reorder, rename, copy, and save sheets for publishing as a multi-sheet drawing set. You can save the list of drawing sheets as a Drawing Set Descriptions (DSD) file. Saved drawing sets can replace or be appended to the current list for republishing. If you are publishing a sheet or sheet set to DWF, you can select a number of DWF functionalities, like including layer, sheet, property set, and object information in the published DWF file, and sorting objects in the DWF. For detailed information about publishing, see "Publish a Sheet Set" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 Select the sheet or sheet set you want to publish, and click Publish Publish Dialog Box.
Publishing Sheet Sets | 285
4 Under Page Setup / 3D DWF, select the page setup for each sheet. 5 Add or remove sheets from the publication set, if necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
add a sheet to the publication set
click
.
remove a sheet from the publication set
click
.
6 Change the order of the sheets, if necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
move a sheet up in the list
click
.
move a sheet down in the list
click
.
7 Select the number of copies you want to create of the publication set. 8 Verify that Model tab under Include when adding sheets is cleared. 9 Under Publish to, select the publishing output format for the sheet set:
If you want to... publish the sheet set to a plotter
Then... select Plotter named in page setup.
publish the sheet set to a DWF file
select DWF file.
10 If you have selected to publish the sheet or sheet set to a DWF file, click Sheet Set Publish Options.
286 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
11 Under Location, specify a folder for the generated DWF files. You can select a local folder or a network location here.
12 Under DWF type, specify if you want to publish the file to a single-sheet DWF or a multi-sheet DWF. 13 To password-protect the DWF file, select Password protect published DWF, and enter a password. 14 If you have chosen to create a multi-sheet DWF, under DWF naming, select to be either prompted for a
name when the file is published, or select to specify a name right away. 15 If you selected to specify a name, under Name, you can click the Browse button to access the Select DWF
File dialog box. Enter a file name, and click Select to provide the name and destination for the DWF file.
NOTE You can also enter an URL so that the DWF file is uploaded to an FTP or HTTP site.
16 To include layer information with the DWF file, select Include under Layer information. 17 To include sheet information and sheet set information in the published DWF files, select Include under
Sheet information and Sheet set information. 18 To include block property and attribute information in the published DWF files, select Include under Block
information. 19 To create a new block template file, select Create from the drop-down list under Block template file.
Create a new block template file as described in "Publish Options Dialog Box" in the AutoCAD Command Reference.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
20 To edit an existing block template file, select Edit in the drop-down list under Block template file. In the Publish Block Template dialog box, edit the block template as described in "Publish Options Dialog Box" in the AutoCAD Command Reference.
21 To publish property set data with the DWF, select Include under AEC property set data. 22 To select another PPL file, or edit an existing one, click the Browse button under AEC DWF Options.
For more information about PPL files and publishing options, see "Setting the Publishing Options" on page 137.
23 To sort the AEC objects in the resulting DWF file, select a sorting option under AEC Group Individual objects by.
Publishing Sheet Sets | 287
You can sort the AEC objects in the drawing by object type and style, or by layer. For an example of the sorting, see Publishing a 3D DWF File.
24 Click OK. 25 Click Publish.
TIP If your publishing setup does not need to be changed, you can bypass the Publish dialog box. Select the sheet or sheet set you want to publish, right-click, and click Publish Publish to DWF or Publish Publish to Plotter. This command starts the publishing process with the existing publishing and page setup settings.
Changing Plotting Sheets: Interactions with the Project
Changes made to one part of a project frequently influence other parts of the project. The following information describes the changes you can make to a plotting sheet and the effects of the changes on other parts of the building project:
NOTE Because the sheet is the last stage of the project, it has fewer interactions with the project than the other components do. For example, deleting a plotting sheet has no influence on other drawings, like views or constructs.
Adding a new plotting sheet: Normally, a plotting sheet is created to reference a specific view. For example, if you create a view called "First Floor Plan," you need to create a plotting sheet that contains this view.
Changing the plotting sheet name and category (location): A plotting sheet has one or more views referenced into it. Therefore, any name and location changes to a plotting sheet need to be updated throughout the project. To update the path, re-path the project as described in "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
For detailed information on deleting views, see "Deleting a View Drawing" on page 253.
Updating (Re-path) the Project
Use this procedure to update the paths within the project after making changes to the names or locations of elements, constructs, views, or plotting sheets. For example, if you move a project file into another category, or rename it, you must update the file to reflect that change in the Project Navigator. However, be sure that you do not need to work in your project drawings in any version other than Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007. When you re-path a project that was saved in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007, it saves to the new Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will no longer be able to open drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007. Clicking Refresh or Synchronize icons on Project Navigator is a type of re-pathing. Consider using Archive or eTransmit from the Project Browser before you start working in your project. For more information, see "Electronically Transmitting a Project" on page 184 and "Frequently Asked Questions about Drawing Management" on page 314. An update is necessary, when you have made one of the following changes in the project:
When you move the project to a different location When you move a project file to a different category When you rename a project file When you move a subcategory from one category to another
In addition to updating the project files, re-pathing will also update the paths of the following files:
Paths to support files, folders, and templates stored within the project setup, such as drawing templates, tool content root path, or project standards drawings.
288 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Paths to images referenced in project drawings
Paths for schedules referencing external drawings within project drawings
When you ZIP a project and send it to another user who unpacks the project to a different location on another computer, the project will be updated in its new location when it is set current for the first time on the new computer. For example, if your project resides in C:\Project1\, and the user you are sending it to unpacks it to D:\Project1, the path information is updated when the new user sets the project current in his version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. This, however, will only work, if all project paths were correct and current when you zipped them. If, for example, you have moved the project to another location on your computer before zipping it, and not re-pathed it before zipping, the re-pathing on the new user's machine will not work correctly. Before you zip and send a project, you must make sure that all external reference paths in the project are valid at the time of zipping.
WARNING If you close Autodesk® Architectural Desktop without updating the file paths in your project, all changed path information is lost. The next time you open your project, it will not have current and correct file path information. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that you update your project frequently during the work session. For more information about mapped drives, see "Opening a Project From a Mapped Drive" on page 157.
You have the choice between these updating options:
Updating a single project file Updating all files in a category Updating all files in the project
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Change the name or the location of a project file or project folder in the Project Navigator. 3 Update your files:
If you want to... update a single project file
Then... select the project file, right-click, and click Re-path File.
update all files in a category
select the category folder, right-click, and click Re-Path Files.
update all files in the project
Click
.
4 In the Reference File Re-Path Queue worksheet, click Re-path.
WARNING If you re-path projects that were saved in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, they are saved to an Architectural Desktop 2007 format. You will not be able to reopen the project drawings in any version prior to Architectural Desktop 2007.
Refreshing the Project View
Use this procedure to refresh the project view in the Project Navigator. When multiple users are working on the same project simultaneously, the situation can occur that one user's Drawing Explorer view in the Project Navigator gets out of sync with the changes of another user. For example, you might have one user who is adding/moving/deleting constructs of a project. At the same time, another user is annotating some plotting sheets. The user that is working on the plotting sheets is not automatically notified that his coworker has removed some constructs from the project; so if he tries to open a removed construct from his Project Navigator, he will get an error message. To prevent this situation, it is necessary to frequently refresh the project tree in the Drawing Explorer. When you refresh the project tree, all tree items are updated to reflect the current file status.
Refreshing the Project View | 289
WARNING Selecting Repath or Refresh migrates your drawings to an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 format. This means that you will be unable to open these drawings in any version of Architectural Desktop prior to 2007. For more information, see "Updating (Re-path) the Project" on page 288.
1 Click Window menu Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the tab for which you want to refresh the file tree.
3 Click
.
NOTE It is recommended that you do this frequently during the project session.
Object Display in External References
When you reference a project drawing into another project drawing--an element into a construct, a construct into a view, or a view into a plotting sheet --the referenced drawing has the display settings of the host drawing.
NOTE An exception to this is a situation where you insert the external reference as an overlay and have activated the setting for using the overlay's display settings. Typically, you would do this when using a file in the Object Enabler. For more information, see "Using the External Display Configuration with the Object Enabler" on page 291.
Viewing new and existing walls in Xref detail
In some cases, you need to change the display of an external reference for a specific view. For example, you may want to display new walls with their regular settings, and existing walls as a light gray background image. Because the definition of "new walls" and "existing walls" changes from one project phase to the next, this information is not usually present in the referenced construct drawing. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers the possibility to use the display configurations of the referenced drawing within the drawing that holds the external reference.
You could, for example, define in a construct a display configuration called "Existing Walls" and assign a light gray color to it. Because you do not know into which views or during which project phase the construct will be referenced, you do not assign this display configuration to the walls. When you reference the construct into a view during the first phase of the project, you use the regular display configuration for new walls. When you reference that construct into a view in a later phase, you can assign the "Existing Walls" display configuration. This change of display in the view has no influence on the source construct, which retains its original settings. In this way, you can reference a construct into a number of views with different displays, without changing the original construct.
Using the External Display Configuration
Use this procedure to use the display configurations of an external reference within the host drawing.
1 Create a project drawing that contains the display configurations you need for all phases of the project. For example, you could create display configurations named "New Walls," "Existing Walls," and "Demolition Walls." Because you do not yet know in which phase of the project you will use the drawing, you do not assign any of these display configurations but rather assign a standard Plan or Model configuration.
2 Reference the drawing into another project drawing.
290 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3 Select the reference in the host drawing, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
4 Click the Xref Display tab. The display configurations from the referenced drawing are listed.
5 Select Override the display configuration set in the host drawing. 6 Select a display configuration, for example "Existing Walls." 7 Click OK.
The external reference is displayed with the selected display configuration.
Using the External Display Configuration with the Object Enabler
Use this procedure to apply the display configuration of an external reference when overlaying it in the Object Enabler. Viewing drawing entities in Architectural Desktop and AutoCAD
During the life cycle of a large project, drawings might be transferred to a contractor who uses standard AutoCAD. Opening a drawing containing external references can then cause visual fidelity problems. To ensure that your external references are displayed with their original display configuration, perform the following steps:
1 Open the external reference source drawing in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop.
Using the External Display Configuration with the Object Enabler | 291
2 Assign to the Model tab the display configuration to appear when the drawing is opened in AutoCAD using the Object Enabler.
3 Click Format menu Drawing Setup. 4 Click the Display tab. 5 Select When Used as an Xref Overlay use Display Configurations from this Drawing only. 6 Click OK. 7 Save and close the drawing. 8 Open AutoCAD with the Object Enabler. 9 Overlay the source drawing into the current drawing.
The display configuration you have assigned to the referenced drawing is used.
Example: Displaying Part of the Model as Background
You might want to include in a view one or more constructs for informational purposes that may be outside the selected categories. These constructs would be displayed differently than the other constructs in the view. For example, you could display the geometry of an adjacent floor as a "background" for reference when working on a floor. The part of the building displayed as "background" and as "foreground" depends on the view. For example, in a view of the west wing, the adjacent east wing would be the background. In a view of the east wing, the west wing would be the background. Because this information is context-dependent, you cannot apply the background and foreground display configurations to the constructs. You must be able to change the display configuration for each view the constructs are referenced in. Plan view of existing and new construction detail
1 Create constructs for the foreground and background parts of the model. For example, create a construct for the first floor of the north wing and one for the first floor of the south wing. For more information, see "Creating a New Construct" on page 216.
2 Within the constructs, create a display configuration for background display. This configuration could display in light gray and with a thin lineweight. TIP If you are using the templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can use the Screened display configuration to achieve this effect.
TIP For optimal reuse, create the display configurations in the construct template before creating the constructs.
3 Create a view. For more information, see "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
4 Select the constructs created in step 1, and reference them into the views. 5 Open the view.
292 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
6 Select the external reference that you want to display as background, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
7 Click the Xref Display tab. All display configurations from the construct drawing are listed.
8 Select Override the Display Configuration set in the Host Drawing. 9 Select a display configuration, for example "Background" or "Screened." 10 Click OK.
The external reference is displayed with the selected display configuration.
Annotating a Building Project
A building model can contain annotation for the objects contained in it. A number of annotation features of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop have been enhanced to work optimally with the Drawing Management feature. The following sections summarize the enhancements of the Scheduling feature for annotating a building project.
Generating Spaces and Space Schedules
You typically annotate a project when you have finished the design phase. Before you start creating annotation for the building objects, you might need to create spaces and space property information from your project. Spaces and space schedule properties help you report information on the rooms of a building, such as room numbers, room finishes, or physical information like net and gross areas, perimeters, and calculation modifiers. You can easily create spaces from walls and other building objects. For more information, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544, "Converting Objects, Profiles, and Polylines to Non-Associative Spaces" on page 1559, and "Basic Schedules" on page 1920.
Tagging a Project
Use this procedure to tag objects in a project drawing. One of the most frequent uses of annotation in a project is tagging the individual objects. Tags can be attached to objects in a drawing or to objects in an external reference. You can tag objects in source drawings like elements or constructs, or you can tag them in higher-level drawings like views or plotting sheets. Property set definitions have property definitions for project information. You can use these to create project-specific tags that display, for example, level and division information. For more information, see "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295, "Creating a Property Set Definition with Project Property Definitions" on page 296, and "Creating a Title Block for a Project" on page 301.
1 Open the project drawing in which to add your tags. This may not be the drawing in which the object to be tagged is located. It can also be a drawing that references the drawing with the object.
2 Click Format menu DesignCenterTM. 3 In DesignCenter, click the Custom view. 4 Expand Architectural Desktop, and expand Imperial or Metric.
Annotating a Building Project | 293
5 Locate the tag to insert in the drawing. 6 Drag it into the drawing. 7 Select the object to which to attach the tag.
NOTE You can select an object within an external reference.
8 Specify the location of the tag in the drawing. 9 If necessary, edit the information in the property set of the tag, and click OK.
NOTE It is not necessary to tag objects in order to include those objects in a schedule table. Tags are a convenient mechanism for attaching property set data to objects.
Property Set Data and Schedule Tables in Projects
Schedules are tables that list specific information about selected components in your building model. You can create different types of schedules by attaching property set data to objects and object styles, and then extracting and displaying the data in a schedule table. For detailed information on property sets and schedule tables, see "Schedules and Display Themes" on page 1915. The existing scheduling features have been enhanced to work optimally in a Drawing Management environment. You can schedule each instance of each external reference individually. For example, if you have an element that contains a typical door, you can reference that door element five times into a construct. When you create a door schedule in the construct, all five instances of the door element are scheduled independently. When you work in a non-project environment, you attach property data to objects in the drawing. When you use the Drawing Management feature, you work extensively with external references and are able to perform the following tasks:
Attach property set data to objects in external references: You can, for example, reference a construct into a view, and attach property sets in the view to the objects from the referenced construct. Attaching property sets to external references works for any nested levels--you can reference an element into a construct; a construct into a view; a view into a plotting sheet; and, in the plotting sheet, attach property sets to objects from all other project files.
Attach different property sets to individual instances of an external reference within a host drawing: You can reference the same door multiple times into the same host drawing and attach different property sets to each instance of the door. That way, you can reference the same floor plan construct multiple times in a building and schedule each floor differently.
Combine property sets from the source element or construct drawing with property sets from higher-level views or plotting sheets: You can create a property set with physical object properties in the element drawing and a finish and cost-estimating property set in the plotting sheet and schedule both in the plotting sheet.
Process Overview: Creating Property Sets and Schedule Tables in a Project The main steps necessary to work with property set data and schedules in a project are as follows:
Step 1: Create property set definitions and schedule table styles that contain the necessary project information. For more information, see "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295 and "Creating a Property Set Definition with Project Property Definitions" on page 296. You can create property set definitions and schedule table styles at different locations in the project environment:
In the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Schedule Tables.dwg file In your own, user-defined property set definitions drawing In the drawing template In the drawing
294 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
NOTE To attach a property set definition to an external reference, import it into the object drawing. This is done automatically when you drag a tag from DesignCenter into the drawing.
NOTE The drawing that contains your property set definitions does not need to be a part of your project. You can import and use property set definitions from any drawing file accessible to you.
There are a number of guidelines that can help you decide in which property set definition to put property definitions:
Non-manual property definitions--that is, Automatic, Formula, Classification, Material, and Project Property Definitions--can in many cases be defined in property set definitions that are applied to styles. If a property set definition is to be applied to objects that do not have styles, it does not matter where the property definition is defined.
Manual property definitions containing data that does not change for each instance of a style should be defined in property set definitions that are applied to styles.
Manual property definitions containing data that does change for each instance of a style should be defined in property set definitions that are applied to objects.
Step 2: Attach the property set definition to an object or style in a project drawing. You can attach a property set to an object at various stages of the project. You can attach property set data to an external reference and also override existing property sets from the external reference in the host drawing. For example, you can attach a property set definition to a door in an element and then override that property set with an extended one when referencing that door into a construct. You could also create an element without property sets, reference it into a construct and a view, and attach a property set there.
NOTE Overriding property set definitions works only for those property sets attached to objects. Property sets attached to styles cannot be overridden when referenced into another drawing.
For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956 and "Attaching Property Sets to Objects from External References" on page 297. The following guidelines help you to select the correct location for attaching property sets to objects within a project:
Property set definitions that are applied to styles must be attached to styles in the drawing containing the style.
Property set definitions that are applied to objects and that contain data that does not change for each instance of the object that is externally referenced should be attached to the object itself in the externally referenced drawing.
Property Set Definitions that are applied to objects and that contain data that does change for each instance of the object that is externally referenced should be overridden at the external reference, typically at the project construct level.
These guidelines are recommendations. The location of property data also depends on the processes and workflow you have established in your work environment.
Step 3: Open the project drawing in which to place the schedule table. Step 4: If necessary, attach property sets to objects to be scheduled from external references, or override property sets
for those objects on the external references that contain them. For more information, see "Attaching Property Sets to Objects from External References" on page 297.
Step 5: Create schedule tables in the drawing. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Table for a Project" on page 298.
Project Schedule Properties A project property definition can be defined in a property set definition so that an object has access to information about the project in which it is currently located.
Property Set Data and Schedule Tables in Projects | 295
These project properties are available: Property Name Description Number Location Number of Levels Level ID Level Elevation Level Height Number of Divisions Division ID Sheet Name Sheet Description Details
Description Name of the project Description of the project Number of the project File location of the project on the hard disk or network drive Total number of levels in your project ID of the level the object is on Elevation of the level the object is on Height of the level the object is on Total number of divisions in your project ID of the division the object is in Name of the sheet drawing that contains the object Description of the sheet drawing that contains the object Properties for all project details created in "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
In addition to project properties, these properties might also be useful for annotating a project:
Field properties: Fields are updatable information units that can be embedded in property set definitions. There are different field categories to choose from, among them project fields, sheet set fields, and keynote fields. For more information, see "Fields" on page 1793.
Location properties: Can be used to retrieve property data from spaces and AEC polygons associated with an object. A data location grip on the object is used to define the space or AEC polygon associated with it. For example, this can be used to get the room number for the space in which a door opens.
For detailed information, see "Adding a Location Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1978.
Formula properties: Allow you to create formulas from other property definitions you have defined. For example, to subtract a finish quantity from a wall volume, you could set up a formula in which a defined finish amount is deducted from a wall volume.
For detailed information, see "Adding a Formula Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1967.
Classification properties: Can be used to get the current classification of an object's style, or to get other property data defined for that classification. For more information, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
Material property definition: Can be used to get the current material of an object, or to get other property data defined for that material.
For detailed information, see "Materials" on page 463.
Creating a Property Set Definition with Project Property Definitions Use this procedure to create a property set definition containing project property definitions. For a list of available project properties, see "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295. For general information on creating property set definitions, see "Creating a Property Set Definition" on page 1973.
NOTE A property set definition can contain different types of property definitions such as automatic properties, project properties, formulas, and classifications.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and click Property Set Definitions.
296 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
3 Right-click, and click New. 4 Enter a name for the new property set definition press ENTER. 5 Click the Applies to tab, and define if the property set definition should be applied to objects or to object
styles. 6 Select the entities or styles to which the property set definition should apply.
Typically, you would attach project information to objects such as spaces, walls, doors, windows, and curtain walls.
7 Click the Definition tab.
8 Click
.
The general project properties are listed. If you have created project details, as described in "Project Schedule Properties" on page 295, they are listed too and can be selected for the property set definition.
9 Select a project property. 10 Enter a name, and click OK. 11 Repeat steps 8-10 for each project property you want to add to the property set definition. 12 If necessary, add other properties to the definition. 13 Click OK twice.
Attaching Property Sets to Objects from External References Use this procedure to attach property sets to objects in external references. This topic explains the following procedures:
Attaching property sets to objects from external references.
Attaching different property sets to different instances of the same external reference. For example, you can reference the same floor plans onto multiple levels and schedule each level differently.
1 Reference a project drawing, such as an element or a construct, into another project drawing, such as a view or a plotting sheet.
2 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Browse Property Data tool.
3 Under Property Set Definitions, select the property set definition from the host drawing with which you want to work.
4 Expand the desired external reference in the tree, until you can see the desired object.
Property Set Data and Schedule Tables in Projects | 297
5 Attach property set data to objects:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a property set from the host drawing to an object in an external reference
If no property set definition with the same name has been attached to the object, the row of boxes immediately next to it is empty. Select the box to check it. A property set is attached directly to the object. It is displayed on the right side, and can be edited.
override a property set from an external reference with a property set from the host drawing
If a property set with the same name has been attached at a lower level to the external reference, a read-only box is displayed at the appropriate level. Select the box at that level next to the object. The property set is attached to the external reference at the selected level as an override for the object. If a property set definition with the same name as that selected above exists in the external reference, it uses it, otherwise the property set definition in the host drawing is copied to the external reference. The property set is displayed on the right and is editable.
attach different property sets to different instances of an external reference
Expand the desired instance of the external reference in the tree. Select the box next to the object instance. To attach a different property set to another instance, select a different property set definition, expand a different instance of the external reference, and attach the property set to it.
remove a property set from the host drawing for an external clear the box at the appropriate level next to the desired
reference
object.
6 If necessary, decrease the number of objects displayed in the tree:
If you want to...
Then...
show only one type of object in the tree
select the appropriate object under Object Filter.
show only those objects that already have the selected property set attached on some level
clear Hide Objects without Property Set Definitions.
7 If you are not sure whether you selected the correct object from the external reference, click Highlight to mark the object in the drawing area.
8 To display the correct object in the drawing area, click Zoom to.
9 If necessary, edit the property set data on the right.
10 To display properties with the correct data format style from the property set definition, select Format Data.
11 Click OK.
Creating a Schedule Table for a Project Use this procedure to create a schedule table that contains property data from an external drawing such as a project drawing.
Schedule tables can contain information from external references and block references, which typically must exist in the same drawing as the schedule table. Schedule tables now optionally specify an external drawing, which is scheduled as if it were an external reference in the same drawing as the table. The advantage to this is that the graphics of the external drawing do not need to be generated in order to fill out the data in the table.
For general information on adding schedule tables, see "Overview of Schedules" on page 1916.
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Open the plotting sheet that will contain the schedule table.
298 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
2 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Schedule Table tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 4 Select a style. 5 Instead of selecting objects in the drawing, press ENTER. 6 Specify the insertion point of the schedule table. 7 Specify the size of the schedule table.
An empty schedule table is inserted into the drawing.
8 Select the empty table, right-click, and click Properties. 9 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand External Source. 10 For Schedule External Drawing, select Yes.
The External Drawing settings are displayed, with a list containing all drawings in the Views directory of the current project. Each drawing should correspond to a view defined in the project. If no project is active, the list contains all drawings in the last directory browsed.
11 Select the view you want to schedule.
NOTE The setting for External Drawing Name is displayed only if you have selected Yes for Schedule External Drawing.
If the desired external view drawing is not displayed in the list, select Browse and find it.
Example: Numbering a Door in a Project
The following example shows how you can define property data that combines object properties with project properties. The example uses door numbers and room information to show how you could use project, location, formula, and manual property definitions. Typically a door is numbered based on the room in which it opens, with an alphabetic suffix for rooms with multiple doors. The following diagram shows how a door number can be built up from other information in the drawing and the project.
Value 2 01 201 201
___A 201A
Property Set Definition Property Definition
Space
LevelNumber
Space Space
BaseNumber RoomNumber
Door
RoomNumber
Door Door
DoorNumber Suffix DoorNumber
Description
A project property definition, getting the Level ID for the object for the current project
A manual auto-incrementing property definition
A formula property definition, with the formula [LevelNumber][BaseNumber]
A location property definition, getting the Space: RoomNumber property value for the space under the door's data location grip
A manual text property definition
A formula property definition, with the formula [RoomNumber][Suffix]
1 Create a drawing in a project that contains a number of spaces and a number of doors. 2 Create a property set definition for spaces. 3 Define the following properties in the definition:
Property
Instruction
LevelNumber
Click
, enter LevelNumber for Name, and select Level
ID in the list. Then, click OK.
Property Set Data and Schedule Tables in Projects | 299
Property SpaceNumber
RoomNumber
Instruction
Click
, enter SpaceNumber for Name, and click OK.
Then, select Auto Increment - Integer for Type.
Click
, enter RoomNumber for Name, and enter the
formula [LevelNumber][SpaceNumber]. The easiest way to
create the formula is by clicking the properties in the list.
4 Create a property set definition for doors. 5 Define the following properties in the definition:
Property
Instruction
RoomNumber
Click
, enter RoomNumber for Name, and select the
RoomNumber formula property from the Space property set
definition created above. Then, click OK.
DoorNumberSuffix
Click
, enter DoorNumberSuffix for Name, and click
OK. Then, select Text for Type.
DoorNumber
Click
, enter DoorNumber for Name, and enter the
formula [RoomNumber] [DoorNumberSuffix] by clicking the
properties in the list.
6 Attach these property set definitions to the doors and spaces in the drawing, and fill in the manual properties.
TIP The quickest way to attach property sets to multiple objects is to use the Browse Property Data tool on the Documentation tool palette.
7 Select a door in the drawing. Notice a new star-shaped grip near the hinge jamb. Viewing the Property Data Location grip of a door
This data location grip is displayed on an object when it has any property set attached to it that contains a location property definition. An object with a data location grip can retrieve property data from a space or AEC polygon under the position of the grip.
8 Select the Data Location grip, and move it over a space in the drawing. A curved dashed line will be drawn between the grip and the object.
9 In the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. If your rooms are on the second floor, the resulting value reads "201A." If you attach these property sets to the same space and door on the third floor, it reads "301A."
This is just one of many examples of how to use the new Scheduling features within a project. For a complete description, see "Schedules and Display Themes" on page 1915.
300 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Creating a Title Block for a Project
You can create title blocks that display information specific to the sheet set or the project. When the information changes, it is updated in the title block. A title block is a multi-view block that includes project information from fields and other attributes. A title block would typically appear in a sheet template or a sheet drawing. If it is in a sheet template, you can use it for all sheet drawings based on that template.
Process Overview: Creating a Title Block for a Project Creating a project title block consists of these basic steps:
Step 1: Open the project drawing in which to add a title block. Typically, this is a plotting sheet. Step 2: Add project attributes to the drawing. Step 3: Create a block from the attributes. Step 4: Create a multi-view block from the block. Step 5: Create a multi-view block tool. Step 6: Insert the multi-view block as a title block in the plotting sheet.
Adding Project Attributes Use this procedure to create project attributes for a title block in the drawing.
1 Click Format menu Blocks Define Attributes. 2 Enter a name in the Tag field.
3 Under Value, click
.
4 In the Field dialog box, select the field you want to appear in the title block. For example, if you want to display the project title, select AEC Project for Field category, and then Project Name for Field Name.
5 Proceed to adding the attribute as described in "Attribute Definition Dialog Box" in the AutoCAD Command Reference.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
NOTE An attribute can contain only one sheet set field. If you want to create a title block line that reads, for example, View Number - View Title, you must define two separate attributes.
6 Repeat steps 15 for each attribute to add to the project title block. 7 Complete the attribute block with lines, borders, and other desired components. The result is a number of attributes and graphic elements in your drawing. Your attribute block might look like this:
Creating a Title Block for a Project | 301
Viewing title block attributes and data
Creating a Project Block Use this procedure to create a block that contains the project attributes you want to display in a project title block. For information about adding attributes, see "Adding Project Attributes" on page 301.
1 Click Format menu Blocks Block Definition. 2 Enter a name for the block. 3 Click Select Objects, and select the attributes and additional graphics to include in the title block. 4 From the Drag-and-drop units list, select Unitless. 5 Create the block as described in "Block Definition Dialog Box" in the AutoCAD Command Reference.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Creating a Multi-View Block Use this procedure to create a multi-view block that contains the blocks you want to display in the project title block. For information about creating blocks, see "Creating a Project Block" on page 302. For detailed information about multi-view blocks, see "Multi-View Blocks" on page 1513.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects. 3 Right-click Multi-View Block Definitions, and click New. 4 Enter a name for the new multi-view block definition, and press ENTER. 5 Select the new multi-view block definition, right-click, and select Edit. 6 Click the View Blocks tab. 7 Select a display representation for the title block.
Typically, you would display a title block in Plan views and Reflected views. 8 Click Add. 9 Select the block you defined in "Creating a Project Block" on page 302, and click OK.
302 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
10 Select the view directions for the block. 11 Repeat steps 610 for each display representation in which you want the title block to appear. 12 Click OK twice. Creating a Tool for the Title Block Use this procedure to create a tool for inserting the title block in a drawing.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Multi-View Block Definitions. 3 Locate the multi-view block definition you created in the previous procedure, and drag it to the tool palette. 4 Click OK to close the Style Manager. Inserting the Title Block into a Drawing Use this procedure to insert the tool you created in "Creating a Title Block for a Project" on page 301 into the drawing. Viewing title block attributes and data
1 In the project drawing, click the layout tab on which you want to place the title block. 2 Open the tool palette that contains the title block tool you want to use, and select the tool you created in
"Creating a Tool for the Title Block" on page 303. 3 Specify the insertion point for the title block.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 4 If necessary, specify the scale and rotation of the title block. 5 Press ENTER.
Dimensioning a Project
Use this procedure to dimension objects in a project drawing. In the documentation phase of a project, you create detailed dimensions of objects. AEC dimensions can be attached to objects in a drawing or to objects in an external reference. You can dimension objects in source drawings like elements or constructs, or you can dimension them in higher-level drawings like views or plotting sheets. For detailed information, see "AEC Dimensions" on page 1739.
1 Open the project drawing in which to add a dimension.
Dimensioning a Project | 303
This may not be the drawing in which the object to be dimensioned is located. It may be a drawing that references the object. 2 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select an AEC dimension tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 4 Select a style. 5 In the drawing area, select the objects to dimension.
NOTE You can select objects from the drawing, objects from external references, or a combination of both.
6 Press ENTER. 7 Specify the position of the new dimension:
If you want to... insert the dimension group parallel to or perpendicular to the dimensioned object
Then...
drag the cursor in the desired direction, and click in the drawing at the desired insertion point.
NOTE If your selection set contains objects with different directions, the direction of the first selected object defines the parallel and perpendicular directions.
insert the dimension group at a specified rotation
enter r (Rotation) on the command line, and press ENTER. Then, enter a rotation angle either by clicking in the drawing or by entering one on the command line. Press ENTER, and click in the drawing at the desired insertion point.
NOTE If your selection set contains objects with different directions, the rotation is calculated with reference to the first selected object.
insert the dimension group aligned parallel to an object other enter a (Align) on the command line, and press ENTER. Then,
than the dimensioned object
select the object to which to align the dimension group. Press
ENTER, and click in the drawing at the desired insertion point.
NOTE The direction of the dimension group is dependent on the rotation of the chosen object. The drawing direction of the object has no influence on the dimension group direction.
Working with Cut Planes in a Project
You can set a global cut plane for each display configuration in a drawing, and individual cut planes for objects like walls, curtain walls, and wall openings.
The Global Cut Plane You can set a global cut plane for a display configuration in a drawing. All objects included in that display configuration are cut at the height defined in the display configuration, unless they have an object-specific cut plane override. Each display configuration can have a different cut plane. For more information, see "Object-Specific Cut Planes" on page 311 and "Global Cut Planes" on page 306.
304 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
The Object-Specific Cut Plane A number of objects can override the global cut plane settings and use their own cut planes: for example, walls, curtain walls, and stairs. For more information, see "Object-Specific Cut Planes" on page 311. Cut Plane Display Range A cut plane is set to a specific height, for example, 1.4 meters. Objects above or below that level are by default not displayed in a Plan view. You can, however, define a display range above and below the cut plane. Object components inside that range are displayed too. This would be useful if you want to display a window that lies above or below the cut plane but that should be included in the display.
Viewing plan view window cut plane options
You also use a display range to define clipped views, such as the model view of a second floor. In that case, the display range defines which levels to display and which levels to hide. Clipped 3D view of second floor
For more information, see "Using the Global Cut Plane: Creating a Clipped Model View" on page 309. Cut Planes and Levels Levels are represented separately by one or more files and are assembled in a view or plotting sheet to represent the entire building. You set the cut plane individually for each level of a building. You create a drawing file--a construct or a view--that represents the level, and assign a cut plane to a display configuration within the drawing. The following images illustrate a curtain wall that spans three levels. The images on the left indicate the cut plane for the associated level drawing. The plans to the right show how the curtain wall would be displayed in Plan view at each level. Notice the different appearance of the doors and mullions on the various floor plans.
Working with Cut Planes in a Project | 305
Specifying three cut plane levels
Global Cut Planes
The global cut plane is set for a display configuration in a drawing. It cuts all objects in the display configuration at the same height. You can have different cut planes for different display configurations within a drawing: for example, one cut plane height for a regular Plan view, and another cut plane height for a Reflected view. The global cut plane is used on all objects that do not have an object-specific cut plane override. For more information, see "Object-Specific Cut Planes" on page 311. Global Cut Plane Display Range When you set a global cut plane for a display configuration, you also set a display range above and below the cut plane. This is the range in which objects, even when they do not intersect the cut plane, are displayed. For example, if you set the cut plane to 1.4 meters and define the visible range above the cut plane at 2 meters and the visible range below the cut plane at 1 meter, then your objects are cut at 1.4 meters. Objects that lie between 1.4 meters and 2 meters as well as objects that lie between 1.4 meters and 1 meter are also displayed, but with different display for above and below the cut plane. Objects that lie outside the range--for example, a window that is inserted at 0.8 meter--are not displayed at all. NOTE The values for the display range are calculated relative to the WCS, not relative to the global cut plane height. Plan view of window cut planes
You also use a display range to define clipped views, such as the model view of a second floor. In that case, the display range defines which levels to display and which levels to hide.
306 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Clipped 3D view of second level
For more information, see "Using the Global Cut Plane: Creating a Clipped Model View" on page 309.
Display Properties for the Cut Plane Display Range
Many objects have display components that you can set for display above and below the cut plane. For example, an object below the cut plane can be inserted with dashed lines and a different line color. If you want to work with the display range, you need to set the appropriate display components accordingly.
NOTE The Above and Below Cut Plane display components appear in all Plan-type display representations, such as Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Plan Screened, Reflected, and Reflected Screened, as well as in user-defined display representations that are based on any of these display representations.
The following objects have display components for above and below the cut plane:
Object Curtain Walls/Curtain Wall Units Doors Door/Window Assemblies Mass Elements Railings Slabs/Roof Slabs Stairs Structural Members Walls Windows
Components that can be set for above and below cut plane Curtain Wall/Curtain Wall Unit body Frame/Panel/Stop/Swing/Threshold Door/Window Assembly body Mass Element body Guard Rail/Hand Rail/Bottom Rail/Post Slab Body/Slab Outline Stringer/Stringer Facets/Riser/Riser Numbers/ Nosing/Path Outline Beam/Brace/Column body Wall Body Glass/Frame/Sash/Sill
For more information on setting display properties for individual objects, see the appropriate procedures for the objects. Setting the Global Cut Plane and the Display Range Use this procedure to set the global cut plane and the visible display range for a display configuration. For information on the display system, see "Display Configurations" on page 417.
NOTE The values you enter for the Above and Below ranges are the absolute height values calculated from the WCS origin. They are not relative to the cut plane. For example, if you have set the global cut plane to 1.4 meters, you need to set the visible range above the cut plane to a value higher than 1.4 meters; otherwise, you get an invalid display range.
1 Click Format menu Display Manager. 2 Expand Configurations. 3 Select the display configuration for which to set the global cut plane. 4 Click the Cut Plane tab.
Global Cut Planes | 307
5 Define the cut plane and the visible ranges above and below the cut plane:
If you want to...
define the global cut plane height for the display configuration
Then... enter the appropriate value for Cut Height.
define the visible range above the cut plane
enter the appropriate value for Display Above Range.
NOTE The value you enter here is calculated from the WCS origin and is not relative to the cut height.
define the visible range below the cut plane
enter the appropriate value for Display Below Range.
NOTE The value you enter here is calculated from the WCS origin, and is not relative to the cut height.
NOTE For information about displaying the cut plane of a different level, see "Using the Global Cut Plane: Displaying the Cut Plane of a Different Level" on page 308.
6 Click OK.
Using the Global Cut Plane: Displaying the Cut Plane of a Different Level Use this procedure to display the cut plane of a different level. Usually, you want to display the cut plane of the current level. However, in some cases, you might want to display a different level. Specifying different cut planes results
1 Create a view containing the desired level. For more information, see "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
2 If necessary, switch to a Plan view. 3 Click Format menu Display Manager. 4 Expand Display Configurations. 5 Select the current display configuration, which is displayed in bold text. 6 Click the Cut Plane tab. 7 Click Calculate.
This button is only available when the drawing is part of a project. It uses the level information you entered in "Creating a New Level" on page 201.
308 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
8 In the Cut Plane Worksheet, select the level whose Plan view you want to display in the current drawing.
For example, if you have created a view of the first floor but want to display the Plan view of the second floor, select 2.
9 Select the cut plane height of the selected level. For example, to display the second level at a cut height of 1.4 meters, enter 1.4 here.
10 Click OK.
The display range is adapted to display the height of the selected level.
For example, perhaps you have a three-story building with a floor height of 2.75 meters for each floor. You have created a view of the first floor but want to display the second floor in it at a cut height of 1.4 meters. In the Cut Plane dialog, you enter 2 for level, and 1.4 for Cut Plane Height Above Level. When you click OK, the display range of the view now spans the second level. The following values are entered into the Cut Plane Tab of the display configuration:
Field Name Display Below Range
Value 2.75 meters
Comment This is where the second level starts.
Cut Height
4.15 meters (2.75 meters + 1.4 meters) To display a cut height of 1.4 meters, you need to add 1.4 meters to the start of the second level at 2.75 meters.
Display Above Range
5.5 meters
The second level starts at 2.75 meters, and has a base height of 2.75 meters. This results in an overall height of 5.5 meters.
11 Click OK.
Using the Global Cut Plane: Creating a Clipped Model View Use this procedure to create a clipped Model view of a building level. If a level is crossed by a spanning element like a curtain wall or an elevator shaft, you want to display only those parts of the spanning element that actually lie on that level. You can create a clipped Model view that displays only those objects and object ranges within the user-defined display range.
Clipped Model view
Some display settings for a clipped Model view are influenced by the materials assigned to the clipped objects:
Display of object ranges outside the display range: You can display the parts of a spanning element that are outside the display range of the level. In some cases, you might want to display those parts of the object in a lighter color and thinner lineweight to imply the complete shape of the object.
Global Cut Planes | 309
3D view of spanning element in and out of display range
How those parts are displayed is set in the Sectioned Body component of the object's materials. For information on setting the display of the Sectioned Body component, see "Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary" on page 477 and "Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition" on page 487. Display of a section hatch and a section boundary where the display range cuts the spanning object: You might choose such a display to highlight the cut line. Section hatch and cut line displayed where display range cuts object
How the section hatch and boundary are displayed is defined in the Section Hatch component of the materials for the object. For information on setting the display of these components, see "Section Hatch Material Component" on page 476, "Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary" on page 477, and "Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition" on page 487.
1 Create a view containing the desired level. For more information, see "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
2 If necessary, switch to a Model view: for example, SW Isometric. 3 Click Format menu Display Manager. 4 Expand Configurations. 5 Select the current display configuration.
It is displayed in bold text. 6 Click the Cut Plane tab.
310 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
7 Set the Above and Below display ranges to be identical to the level height. For example, if your level is 2.75 meters high, set Display Below Range to 0.0 meters and Display Above Range to 2.75 meters.
NOTE For a clipped model view, it is not important how you set the cut plane, as the cut plane is displayed only in Plan views. Either keep the original value, or enter any value within the display range: for example, 1.4 meters.
8 Expand Sets. 9 Select the current display set (displayed in bold text). 10 Click the Display Options tab. 11 Define the display of the clipped model view:
If you want to...
Then...
display the objects in the display range defined in step 7 with select Section AEC Objects by Display Range defined in their regular display settings, and the objects outside of the Display Configuration. display range as Sectioned Body
show a section hatch and a section boundary where spanning select Show Materials where Display Range Intersects AEC
objects are cut by the display range
Objects.
hide all parts of spanning objects outside of the display range select Hide Sectioned Body Component.
suppress the surface hatch of objects within the display range select Hide Surface Hatching.
12 Click OK.
Object-Specific Cut Planes
Many objects in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop have individual settings for cut planes that can override the global cut plane setting. Object-specific cut planes are useful when you have objects of different heights in your Plan view. This happens frequently when you are working with a split-level floor plan or a sunken room. An object-specific cut plane takes precedence over the global cut plane in the display configuration. For more information on the global cut plane, see "Global Cut Planes" on page 306.
Object-Specific Cut Plane Overrides The following objects can have an object-specific cut plane:
Curtain Walls Curtain Wall Units Door/Window Assembly Mass Elements Roof Slabs Slabs Stairs Walls
Example: Overriding the Cut Plane for a Wall The object-specific cut plane is a part of the display properties of an object. You can set it for an individual object, an object style, or as the system default. For detailed information on display properties, see "Display Representations" on page 413 and "Creating a Display Representation for an Object" on page 428.
Object-Specific Cut Planes | 311
TIP If you want to create a clipped model view, as described in "Using the Global Cut Plane: Creating a Clipped Model View" on page 309, or want to display the cut plane of a different level, as described in "Using the Global Cut Plane: Displaying the Cut Plane of a Different Level" on page 308, make sure to turn off the object specific-cut plane of the included objects. The object-specific cut plane overrides the global cut plane, and so you might get unexpected display results.
The following example demonstrates how to set an object-specific cut plane for a wall style. The detailed steps for other objects may vary slightly. For more information, see the individual object chapters.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and then expand Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style for which you want to set an individual cut plane, and click the Display Properties tab. 4 Select a Plan or Reflected display representation. 5 Click the Edit button. 6 Click the Cut Plane tab. 7 Select Override Display Configuration Cut Plane. 8 For Cut Plane Height, enter the desired cut plane. 9 Click OK three times.
Cut Planes from the Anchoring Object Objects like windows or doors usually are anchored into walls, curtain walls, and window assemblies. Normally, you want those anchored objects to have the same cut plane height as the object into which they are anchored. However, because the cut plane of the anchoring object can be set by either the display configuration or by the object itself, you need to determine in the anchored object whether it should use the cut plane of the display configuration or of the object to which it is anchored. The following objects can derive their own cut plane from the cut plane of the object to which they are anchored:
Curtain Wall Units Doors Door/Window Assemblies Windows
Example: Using the Cut Plane of the Anchoring Object Whether an anchored object uses the cut plane of its anchoring object or the cut plane of the display configuration is set in the display properties of the object. You can define this for an individual object, an object style, or as the system default. For detailed information about display properties, see "Display Representations" on page 413 and "Creating a Display Representation for an Object" on page 428. The following example demonstrates how to set an anchored window to use the cut plane of the wall to which it is anchored. The detailed steps for other objects may vary slightly. For more information, see the individual object chapters.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and then expand Window Styles. 3 Select the window style for which you want to set the cut plane when anchored, and click the Display
Properties tab. 4 Select a Plan or Reflected display representation. 5 Click the Edit button. 6 Click the Other tab. 7 Select Respect Cut Plane of Container Object When Anchored.
312 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
NOTE You should use this setting as the default. Even when the cut plane of the anchoring object does not differ from the global cut plane, this setting ensures a correct display of the anchored object in Plan views.
8 Click OK three times.
Manual Cut Planes You can define any number of manual cut planes for a wall or a curtain wall. The following illustration shows where manual cut planes might be defined in order to display a curtain wall sill at each level. Manual cut planes are only displayed when they are inside the display range. For information on setting the manual cut plane, see "Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Wall" on page 650 and "Creating Cut Planes for a Curtain Wall" on page 765.
3D view of curtain wall showing global and manual cut planes at each level
Running Drawing Management from the Command Line
You can run certain Drawing Management commands from the command line. These commands are also available as toolbar buttons or context menu commands. In some cases, for example when creating LISP routines, you might want to initiate them via the command line.
Command Line: Opening the Project Browser
Use this procedure to open the Project Browser from the command line.
On the command line, enter AecProjectBrowser. The Project Browser is displayed.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click the
button on each of the Project Navigator tabs.
Command Line: Opening the Project Navigator
Use this procedure to open the Project Navigator palette from the command line.
On the command line, enter AecProjectNavigator. The Project Navigator palette is displayed.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click Project Navigator Palette on the Window menu.
Running Drawing Management from the Command Line | 313
Command Line: Refreshing the Project
Use this procedure to refresh the project in the Project Navigator from the command line.
On the command line, enter AecRefreshProject. The Project Navigator Palette is displayed, and all tabs are refreshed to display the current project state.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click the
button on each of the Project Navigator tabs.
Command Line: Regenerating Views
Use this procedure to regenerate all views in the current project from the command line. When you regenerate a view, you reload all of the external references used to generate the view.
On the command line, enter AecRegenerateProjectViews. All views in the current project are regenerated.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click the
button on the Views tab of the Project Navigator.
Command Line: Selecting a New Project Environment
Use this procedure to select a new project environment from the command line.
NOTE You can select only existing projects from the command line. To create a new project environment, go to the Project Browser and create a new project as described in "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
1 On the command line, enter AecSetCurrentProject, and press ENTER. 2 Enter the project you want to set current on the command line.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click the Browser.
button on each tab of the Project Navigator and set the new project in the Project
Command Line: Closing the Project Navigator
Use this procedure to close the Project Navigator from the command line.
On the command line, enter AecCloseProjectNavigator. The Project Navigator Palette is closed.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click the button of the Project Navigator Palette.
Frequently Asked Questions about Drawing Management
This topic contains questions and answers that can help you to achieve the results you need when working with Drawing Management. What do I have to consider when working with the XML files in the project? The project data of a building model is contained in the APJ file, which contains information about the overall project, and in the XML files accompanying each DWG file. Both file types are well-formed XML. In most cases, you should
314 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
not try to edit these files manually in an XML editor, as you might inadvertently corrupt the file. To make changes to your project, use the Project Browser and Project Navigator commands instead.
I have added a lot of project details in the Project Browser. Can I export these to another application?
Yes. The project details you enter in the Project Browser are stored in the project's APJ file, which is a well-formed XML file. If you want to export these details, create a copy of the APJ file, and export it to any XML application or database. If you want to use the project detail categories and items in another project, use the existing APJ file as the template for the new project.
What should I do if my APJ file has been accidentally deleted or corrupted?
Deleting or corrupting the project's APJ files has no influence on the DWG files and XML files contained in the project. In the Project Browser, the project will not display anymore. To recreate the project with a new APJ file, go to the Project Browser, and create a new project of the same name in the same folder location as the previous APJ file. For instructions, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171. Then, go to the Project Navigator, and drag-and-drop the Elements, Constructs, Views, and Sheets folders of the project from Windows Explorer into the corresponding tabs of the Project Navigator. This re-inserts the files into the project.
What should I do if an XML file has been accidentally deleted or corrupted?
Each DWG file within a project has an accompanying XML file that contains the project specific information. If the accompanying XML file is accidentally deleted or corrupted, the DWG file is no longer recognized as part of the project and will not display in the Project Navigator. To insert it into the project again, you need to reconvert the DWG file into a project file. For instructions, see "Converting a Legacy Drawing to a Construct" on page 218 and "Converting a Legacy Drawing to an Element" on page 232.
Can I limit other users access to the project files?
You can limit other users ability to edit and delete project files by using the network permissions. You can limit the Delete rights for the entire project, so that users are not able to delete files from the project or move files around within the project. You might also consider just limiting the delete rights to the top project folder (containing the APJ file) and allow deleting in the subfolders.
How much additional file space will the project files need?
Working with a project does not require large additional amounts of file space on your computer or network folder. The XML files are less than 10K, most of them around 1-3K. The APJ file is slightly bigger, but in most cases will not exceed 10K either.
How can I best archive a project?
With the latest release of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can electronically transmit and archive a project. For more information, see "Electronically Transmitting a Project" on page 184. Alternatively, you can copy and paste a project in Windows Explorer. All of the project files are contained in a folder structure within the top project folder, which also contains the APJ file. Just take the top project folder and move or copy it to the desired archive location on a folder, a CD, or streamer tape.
How would I best place Addenda,Alternates, or As-Builts within the project?
How you organize these items would largely depend on your internal processes and workflow. One solution would be to draw the alternates as regular constructs and then create special views for them. If you want to present completely different plans/elevations to represent Alternates, you could use divisions to represent them; when generating the view, you just need to include the appropriate division into the view. In some cases you might also consider copying the project and putting the Alternates into the copied project. For instructions, see "Creating a New Project Based on a Template (Copying a Project)" on page 171. If you copy a project, however, you have two different file sets to maintain; the copied project does not retain any links to the original one.
How do I define the physical locations of elements and constructs in the building?
The location of a project file when referenced into another project file depends on the location in the original file. If you have drawn an element at 0,0,0, then it is referenced at 0,0,0. When placing a construct into a view, the horizontal
Frequently Asked Questions about Drawing Management | 315
location is determined by the level the construct is on; when you have assigned a construct to the second level, it is inserted at the base elevation of the second level, for example 2.75 meters.
When referencing a project file into another project file, are basepoints other than 0,0,0 respected?
Yes. When referencing elements into constructs, and constructs into views, they are inserted at 0,0,0. A base point (INSBASE) other than 0,0,0 within the elements and constructs is respected.
Can I override the basepoints of project files when referencing them in other project files?
No. This is standard AutoCAD behavior.
Can I lock elements and constructs in their position to avoid accidentally moving them?
Yes. If you want to lock an element or construct within the building model, lock the layer the element or construct has been inserted on.
Is there an easy way to copy an element to multiple constructs at once?
Yes. Select the element in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Attach Elements to Constructs. For detailed instructions, see "Referencing an Element into Multiple Constructs" on page 224.
Is there an easy way to copy a construct to multiple levels at once?
Yes. There are two methods of achieving this, which are described in "Copying a Level with Assigned Constructs" on page 202 and "Copying Constructs to Levels" on page 218.
How do I move constructs from one level to another?
To move a construct to a different level, you need to change its level assignment. Select the construct, right-click, and click Properties in the context menu. Then, choose a different level in the Assignments matrix. For detailed instructions, see "Changing the Properties of a Construct" on page 225.
Will wall cleanups work across walls from different divisions?
Yes. Walls do cleanup across external references, such as divisions. You just need to make sure that the wall baselines are at the same elevation.
Will AEC dimensions work with objects from external references?
Yes. AEC dimensions are capable of dimensioning objects from external references, even when they are nested. For detailed information, see "Dimensioning a Project" on page 303.
Will schedule tags and property sets work with objects from external references?
Yes. Schedule tags and property set definitions are capable of annotating objects from external references, even when they are nested. For detailed information, see "Tagging a Project" on page 293 and "Property Set Data and Schedule Tables in Projects" on page 294.
Is the Project Navigator MDI compliant? No. During a session of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, only one project can be opened at a time. You can open files from different projects with the regular File Open command. You do not, however, see the associated project in the Project Navigator.
Appendix 1:Template Projects
A Template Project is an Architectural Desktop project that is used as the starting point for a new project. You can access Template Projects via a browse button in Project Browser. Use this to point to the desired Template Project when starting a new project.
316 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Once chosen, the Template Project is copied to the new location (indicated in the Project Browser window before clicking the New Project icon) and then automatically re-pathed. A Template Project provides the equivalent benefits that DWT files provide for individual drawing files. Template Projects help to speed project setup and ensure office standards and consistency.
Understanding Project Navigator
The Drawing Management system in Architectural Desktop includes four different types of AutoCAD drawing files (DWG). Each is designed to serve a particular purpose in the project. These file types are Elements, Constructs, Views and Sheets. All files are organized into a collection of files within a series of folders that collectively represent a building design project in Architectural Desktop. The four types of files are briefly defined as follows:
Element A discreet piece of a design without explicit physical location within the building.
Construct A unique piece of the building occurring within a particular zone (Division) on a specific floor (Level) of the building.
View A "working" report of the building model. A View gathers all of the Constructs (and their nested Elements) required to correctly represent a specific "view" of the building (such a plan, section or 3D model).
Sheet A "ready for printing" report of some portion of the project.
Drawing Management is designed around the philosophy that each drawing type and scale requiring unique annotations should be configured within its own separate View file. One or more of these Views can be dragged to the same Sheet, so there will not necessarily be a one-to-one correspondence between the Views and Sheets.
Working in Project Navigator makes project management very easy. All files associated with the project are listed in Project Navigator in one of the four folders (Constructs, Elements, Views and Sheets), or a sub-folder within these. Open files by simply double clicking their name on the palette. To xref one file to another using Project Navigator, double click the host file to open it and then simply drag from the Project Navigator into the drawing window in Architectural Desktop. Xrefs will use Attach and write either a complete path or a relative path depending on your desired setting. (The Commercial Template Project is configured to use relative xref paths.) The exception is Constructs dragged to other Constructs. When this occurs, Overlay xrefs will be created instead of Attach. New files can be created via the right click menu on the palette or by dragging drawing data from the current drawing to the folder in Project Navigator where you wish to create the new file.
Levels and Divisions
The Commercial Template Project includes some basic levels to get you started. Before you begin working in the files, click on the Project tab of Project Navigator and then click the Edit Levels icon. Here you can change the Level names, Heights and Descriptions. You should set up one level per floor in the building. Additional levels for grade, foundations, mezzanines and the roof are also common.
Understanding Project Navigator | 317
If you are using Divisions to divide the project laterally, set those up right away as well. Each Construct you create will relate to a Level/Division combination.
Adding a Level to a Project Created from the Commercial Template Project
To add a new Level in a Project created from the Commercial Template Project, open the Edit Levels worksheet (from the Project tab of Project Navigator), and then right-click one of the existing Levels in the list. From the context menu, choose Copy Level and Contents. This will create a new Level in the project and duplicate all of the Constructs associated to that Level as well. Make any adjustments to the Level heights as required, then select an existing Level, right-click, and choose either Paste Level Above or Paste Level Below as desired. When closing the worksheet, allow Architectural Desktop to re-path the project by clicking Yes in the message that appears, or manually clicking the icon for this on the Project Navigator palette. Click the Constructs tab next, and then rename each of the duplicated files to match your desired naming scheme. For example, if you duplicated Level 1 to create Level 3, rename 01 Shell(2) to 03 Shell. On the Views and Sheets tabs, using the existing files as a guide, create additional Views and Sheets (and edit existing ones) as required for your new Level.
Deleting a Level from a Project Created from the Commercial Template Project
To delete a Level from a Project created from the Commercial Template Project, open the Edit Levels worksheet, (from the Project tab of Project Navigator) and then right-click one of the existing Levels in the list. From the context menu, choose Delete. This will remove the Level from the project and automatically adjust the heights of the remaining Levels. Make any additional height adjustments required. When closing the worksheet, allow Architectural Desktop to re-path the project by clicking the Repath button in the message that appears or manually clicking the icon for this on the Project Navigator palette. Manually delete all files associated with the old Level from the Constructs, Views, and Sheets tabs.
Project File Naming
There are almost as many ways to name files as there are firms using Architectural Desktop. However, as different as the naming scheme in one firm might be from that of another down the block, there are many similarities from firm to firm. In most cases, you will be able to easily adapt your existing scheme into the use of Project Navigator. While Architectural Desktop imposes no "required" method for naming files, there are certain guidelines that can assist users in the naming of their files. The most important consideration when developing a file naming scheme for Architectural Desktop Projects is to be careful not to choose names that contradict the intended use of a particular type of file. In other words, Constructs are not Plans or Elevations, therefore they should not have names like "Plan01," "01 Floor Plan" or "A-FP01." Constructs are actually models and are used to generate Plans, Sections, Elevations, Details and 3D Views files. It is View files that are specific types of drawings like Plans, Elevations and Sections. Therefore, it is recommended that your file naming for Constructs not include any reference to a particular type of drawing and rather be descriptive of the Construct's contents. Use "drawing type" naming for View files. In most cases, your firm already has a model file and sheet file naming convention well established.
Typically, the existing model file naming convention will work well for View files, the sheet file naming will not require a change (although the default behavior of Sheet Sets may make you consider a change) and only Construct naming will need consideration. Below is a summary of potential file names based on the recommendations of the US National CAD Standard as adapted to the Project Navigator and suggestions made here. For complete information and to purchase a copy of NCS visit: http://www.nationalcadstandard.org/.
An NCS Model file name is composed of a Discipline, plus a drawing type Code, followed by an enumeration (which typically corresponds to the floor number), though not always. (Elevations, for instance, would just be numbered sequentially in any logical order.)
For example:
A-FP01 = Architectural First Floor Plan
A-EL01 = Architectural Elevations (first group of elevations; there could be others named 02, 03, etc.)
The hyphen is used between discipline and code, but not between code and number.
NCS Recommends the following codes for "Model" files. Use these designations for View file names:
FP = Floor Plan
SP = Site Plan
DP = Demolition Plan
QP = eQuipment Plan
XP = eXisting Plan
318 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
EL = ELevation SC = SeCtion DT = DeTail SH = ScHedules 3D = isometrics/3D DG = DiaGrams
Technically, "FP" would be used for any type of Plan and each would simply be enumerated. So, the first floor plan might be: A-FP01, while the first floor ceiling plan might be: A-FP02. However, A-FP02 for a ceiling plan on the first floor is confusing to most people and it is highly likely you would run out of codes with only two digits. Therefore, the following abbreviations are used almost universally by most firms:
CP = reflected Ceiling Plan RP = fuRniture Plan EP = Enlarged Plan
While "A-3D01" would technically be correct for the name of a composite model, the following is recommended:
CM = Composite Model
So the file would be named A-CM01. (You could also use A-CM00 for the first composite model in a set. It is not that critical with which number you start.) NCS knows nothing about Constructs. Since their names indicate drawing type and function, they are best suited to use as View file names. Consider descriptive names for Constructs such as:
01 Walls 01 Shell and Core 01 Floor 01 Floor Plate (not "Plan") Stair (for spanning Stairs) 00 Stair (alternative for stairs) Roof 01 Slab
For Sheets, the NCS system is fine. They recommend the number of the Sheet, which typically includes the discipline code as well. The number is in two parts: the first digit is a code indicating drawing type, and the remaining two are an enumeration.
1 = Plans (Horizontal Views) 2 = Elevations (Vertical Views) 3 = Sections (Sectional Views) 4 = Large Scale Views (Plans, Sections & Elevations that are not Details) 5 = Details 6 = Schedules and Diagrams 7 = User Defined 8 = User Defined 9 = 3D Representations (Isometrics, Perspectives and Photographs)
Project File Naming | 319
Examples:
A-101 - (Architectural First Floor Plan)
A-102 - (Architectural Second Floor Plan)
A-103 - (Architectural First Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan)
A-201 - (Architectural Building Elevations)
A-301 - (Architectural Building Sections)
Here again, the codes are very broad, so it is certainly possible on a big job to run out of numbers. Many firms develop similar systems of naming, but conceptually they are usually very consistent with these. One factor to consider, while there is neither a functional nor philosophical reason why existing sheet file naming in your firm cannot simply be adopted, the integration of the Sheet Set Manager within Project Navigator introduces some hard-coded assumptions about Sheet file naming that may be different than your current system. When you name a new Sheet on Project Navigator's Sheets tab, you input both the Sheet number and the Sheet Title. These two values, which will ultimately feed two different fields on the title block, are by default concatenated together to form the Sheet File name. It is likely that this is in variance to how you name sheets today. Whether or not it will prove problematic is another matter. In most cases it is arguable that this change in naming will have little to no impact on your work flow or process. Considering the level of automation that Sheet Set manager provides, give this new approach some serious consideration before adopting a contrary policy that may actually prove harder to manage.
Understanding Constructs Included in the Commercial Template Project
All Constructs included in the Commercial Template Project are suggestions of typical Commercial Project organization. Feel free to modify the arrangement to suite your specific project needs and add or delete files as needed. Some files may contain geometry; these are "Placeholders" that are meant to be erased by project team members prior to beginning work. Simply erase the geometry, and draw actual project geometry in its place. For example, the Typical Toilet Room Element file contains a rectangle, and many files include a Live Area Guide block insertion.
General Considerations for all Constructs
Typically there will be at least one Construct for each Level and/or Division (if used). However, there will often be many more than that. Project and team member requirements will be a determining factor in shaping the exact quantity and makeup of the Constructs on a per-project basis. Some projects will have many Constructs per floor, while others might have only one per floor. Below is a brief description of each Construct included in this Commercial Template Project. Feel free to add or delete them as required to meet your specific project and team needs. You can also make modifications to the Commercial Template Project and resave it as a custom Template Project for use in later projects.
Terrain Construct
This Construct is intended for a simple terrain model of the project's site conditions. Use the Mass Element Drape tool (on the Massing palette - Design Tool Palette Group) to create such a terrain model from Polyline contours. Polylines can be imported from a Civil Engineer's file or simply drawn. Place each Polyline at the height of the contour (you can do this easily on the Properties palette using the Elevation property). Use a Mass Element Boolean (right-click menu) to carve away the footprint of the building from the terrain. This will help sections display better later on.
The Terrain Construct appears in the Site Plan, Composite Model, Section and Elevation View files.
Shell Construct
Several of these have been included: one for each floor of the building. These constructs are intended for the exterior enclosure of the building on each floor. Include Walls, Doors, Windows, Assemblies and Curtain Walls in this file. All items in these Constructs ought to span only one floor. If you have a Curtain Wall that spans multiple floors, you should create a separate "spanning" Facade Construct that includes a multi-level Curtain Wall object. To make a Construct spanning, check more than one Level or Division. Although it might be desirable to have a multi-story Wall on the exterior, this is not recommended since Wall Cleanup can only occur at the Level in which the Walls are inserted. Therefore, upper levels would not cleanup.
The various Shell Constructs appear in the Floor Plans, Composite Model, Section and Elevation View files.
Core Construct
This Construct is intended for items that are part of the building core (like Walls, Doors, etc.), excluding the stairs and possibly the toilet rooms. The stairs should be drawn in the separate Stairs Construct. Toilet Rooms, if the layout is the same on all levels, can be drawn here and copied to each level. Otherwise, they can be created as an Element file like the Typical Toilet Room Element file (included in this Commercial Template Project), and then dragged into the Core Construct file. This action will create an xref Attach of the Typical Toilet Room Element file. You can also right-click an Element and choose Attach Element to Constructs to attach it to several Constructs at once.
320 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
If you do not wish to have a separate Core Construct, core geometry can be drawn in either the Shell or Interior Construct files instead. If you do this, delete the Core Construct(s) from the project. The various Core Constructs appear in the Floor Plans, Composite Model and Section View files. Slab Construct This construct is intended for slab objects and other items that should appear in sections and models but should not appear in plans. An xref overlay of the Shell, Core or Interior Constructs can be created by simply dragging and dropping. Open the Slab Construct and then drag and drop the desired file from Project Navigator into the drawing window of the Slab Construct. Draw items relative to this geometry can then detach or unload the xrefs when finished. The various Slab Constructs appear in the Composite Model and Section View files. Interior Construct This Construct is intended for all geometry that occurs within the exterior shell of the building. This includes all partitions, doors, etc. on the interior of each floor. You can include space objects, ceiling grids, furniture and equipment in this construct as well. Or, if you wish, you can separate these other items into their own Spaces and Grids and Furniture Constructs. This would add files to the project, but would also enable more than one team member to work on different aspects of a particular floor at the same time. The various Interior Constructs appear in the Floor Plans, Composite Model and Section View files. Stairs Construct This "spanning" construct is intended to contain the complete flight of Stairs from the lowest level to the roof (if applicable). You can create separate Constructs for each Stair tower, or a single Stairs Construct that contains ALL Stairs for the entire project. If you view the Properties of the Construct, you will note that all Levels are checked. This makes it spanning. To work with this Construct, draw a single run of Stairs at the lowest level, and add Railings and any Slabs needed for Landings. Then use the Stair Tower Generate tool (on the Design Palette - Design Tool Palette Group) to copy the Stairs, Railings and Slabs (if desired) to the upper levels. To make the multi-story Stair display correctly in View files, use the "Medium Detail" Display Configuration for the lowest level. Use the "Medium Detail Intermediate Level" Display Configuration as an XREF Display Override (right-click the XREF, choose Edit Object Display, and check the override box) for the intermediate levels. Use the "Medium Detail Top Level" Display Configuration as an XREF Display Override for the top level. The Stairs Construct appears in the Floor Plans, Composite Model and Section View files. Roof Construct This Construct is intended for the Roof of the building. You can create a Separate Roof Construct for each discrete portion of the Roof (lower Roofs, Wings, Towers, etc.) or you can create ALL Roofs in this file at their appropriate Z Heights relative to the Roof Level elevation. Parapets and other Roof features can be included here or in other Constructs as appropriate. The Roof Construct appears in the Roof Plan, Composite Model, Elevation and Section View files. Column Grid Construct This Construct is intended for structural Column Grids and their Columns. Include Column Grids, Columns, Column Grid Bubbles and Dimensions in this file. This file has been included in a Structural folder. Additional disciplines can be added to the project if required. A folder with such sub-folders is included at the root of this project. Browse to this folder in Windows Explorer, and copy and paste the desired discipline folders to the Constructs, Elements, Views and/or Sheets folders of your project to quickly add these categories. You can also right-click in Project Navigator and choose New Category to add such sub-folders manually.
The various Column Grid Constructs appear in the Floor Plans, Composite Model and Section View files.
Understanding Constructs Included in the Commercial Template Project | 321
Understanding the Element File Included in the Commercial Template Project
Elements are meant for "typical" conditions in the project and also are useful for miscellaneous project resources whose XREF behavior you wish to control manually (not appearing automatically in Views or Sheets).
Typical Toilet Room Element
This Element is intended for creating toilet room layouts that will occur more than once in the project. Rather than draw the same layout several times, or copy and paste it, only to have to redraw when changes occur, use an Element to centralize edits to a single source file. Draw the toilet stalls, counters, lavatories and other restroom items in this Element file. In most cases, it is best to not include the surrounding Walls in the Element and rather draw them in the Constructs directly. This makes it easier to control cleanup conditions. 0,0 in this file will be the insertion point for the Element. Place the men's room on one side of 0,0 and the women's room on the other. To place the Element in the model, drag it and drop it into one of the Constructs, such as Core or Interior. Move, Rotate, Mirror and/or Copy it into the required location(s) in the plan. If the layout needs to change, open the Element file, make the change and it will refresh throughout the project via the various XREFs.
The Typical Toilet Room Element is attached to the various Core Constructs. Since it is an Attachment rather than an Overlay, it appears automatically in all files that reference the Core Constructs. This Element file contains a simple rectangle on a non-plotting layer as a way to alert you to its presence in the preconfigured files. Open this Element and delete this rectangle and replace it with your actual toilet room geomoetry at the start of a project.
Understanding Views Included in the Template Project
While Constructs are the building blocks of a building model, Views are like the traditional drawings created in projects. You will have Floor Plan, Section, Elevation, Detail and Model View files. Each will automatically XREF required Constructs upon which you will overlay notes, tags, dimensions and other annotations and embellishments appropriate to the drawing type and scale in question. A collection of starter Views is included in this Template Project.
Consultant Backgrounds
This folder contains floor plan Views that have been saved with the "Screened" Display Configuration active. For consultants that use Autodesk Architectural Desktop or Autodesk Building Systems, simply save and send these files. For consultants using AutoCAD, change the Display Configuration to "Plan Only" and then use the Export to AutoCAD command on the File menu to save a non-Architectural Desktop version of the file.
Detail Views
The only View in this folder simply provides a layout grid divided into a detail grid module. Draw details in this file on the detail grid. Create a new View for details at a different scale.
Enlarged Views
This folder is for Interior Elevations and Enlarged Plan Views. Use the Callout tools on the Callouts tab of the Tool Palettes to create such Views.
Floor Plan Views
Floor Plan Views are included here. Basic titlemarks and elevation and section markers are included in these files. You can use these items, modify them or erase and re-add them as required. A "Live Area Guide" has been provided that matches the size of the Sheet area. Floor Plans not fitting within this space will require a match line or a smaller scale.
3D Model Views
Composite Model Views gather all the Constructs together for visualization and /or coordination. Two are provided here, one of the entire model and another of just the exterior Constructs.
Reflected Ceiling Plan Views
Reflected Ceiling Plan Views are included here. Basic titlemarks and elevation and section markers are included in these files. You can use these items, modify them or erase and re-add them as required. A "Live Area Guide" has been provided matching the size of the Sheet area. Floor Plans not fitting within this space will require a match line or a smaller scale.
Schedule Views
A Composite Model is included in the Commercial Template Project for use in generating Schedule Tables. This View file is referenced directly by the Schedule objects in the Schedule Sheet file included in the project (Sheet A601Schedules). Reload XREFs and then Update the Schedule Table periodically throughout the project to see the latest data.
Elevation and Section Views
These files are generated using the Callout routines and include 2D Section/Elevation objects of the overall building. Four Elevations and two Sections are included. As you add geometry to your Constructs, you can move and resize the
322 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Bldg Section and Bldg Elevation Line objects as appropriate to capture the complete design and then Refresh the Sections and Elevations. The Constructs listed in this document are already included in the Section and Elevation objects' selection set. If you add new files, you will need to right-click each 2D Section/Elevation object, and choose Regenerate. In the dialog that appears, use the icons provided to add to, or replace, the selection set.
Understanding Sheets Included in the Template Project
Sheet files provide a consistent means for printing documents for a project. Each sheet in a document set is contained in a corresponding Sheet file in the Project Navigator complete with title block. Several basic Sheets have been included in this Template Project.
Some of the Sheets already include Viewports, such as the floor plans. Others are empty Sheets ready to receive Views. To create a new Viewport, simply drag a View file or Named Model Space View within a View file from Project Navigator and drop it on the Sheet.
Sheets are organized in a Sheet Set and Subsets. The list of Sheets includes the following:
General Architectural: General Architectural: Plans
Architectural: Elevations Architectural: Sections Architectural: Large Scale Views Architectural: Details Architectural: Schedules and Diagrams Architectural: 3D Representations
G-100,Cover Sheet A-100,Site Plan A-101,Floor PlansA-102,Floor PlansA-103,Floor PlansA-104,Floor Plans A-201,Building ElevationsA-202,Building Elevations A-301,Building Sections A-401,Enlarged PlansA-402,Interior Elevations A-501,Details A-601,Schedules A-901,3D Diagrams
Project Standards
Project Standards is a tool that allows Project Files to have their object Styles and Display settings synchronized to one or more "Standards" drawing files. The Template Project has been preconfigured to use Project Standards set to the "Manual" configuration.
In the Project's Standards\Content folder, a file named Project Styles.dwg is included. Some sample Styles have been included in this file. Tools in the Project's Tool Palette reference the Styles in this file. The Project is set to synchronize all types of Styles to this drawing except Layer Key Styles. The default AECLayerStd.dwg file has been set as a second Standards drawing to synchronize Layer Key Styles.
In the Standards\Template folder, two additional drawing template files (DWT) have also been provided: one for Constructs, Elements and Views and the other for Sheets. The Project is configured to synchronize Display Settings from the "Model" DWT file in this folder. All Styles in the project have been versioned and synchronized to these files.
Understanding Sheets Included in the Template Project | 323
324 | Chapter 6 Drawing Management
Project Standards
7
The Project Standards feature lets you establish, maintain and synchronize standards across all drawings in an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project. Project standards include standard styles, display settings, and AutoCAD standards that are used across all project drawings. Standard styles and display settings are specified in one or more standards drawings associated with the project. Project drawings can then be synchronized with these standards throughout the project lifecycle, either automatically, or on demand. In addition, you can designate tool palettes and a Content Browser library that are associated with the project.
325
Project Standards Terminology
project drawing A drawing file belonging to an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop project. A drawing must be part of a project to access and be synchronized with project standards.
standards drawing A file (DWG, DWT, DWS) that contains standard styles and display settings associated with the project. Standards drawings can be placed in a folder within the project folder, if they contain project-specific standards, or outside the project folder if they contain department-specific or company-wide standards. Standards drawings can be included in e-transmit and archiving packages.
standard style or display setting A style or display setting that has been defined as a standard for a certain project. To be defined as a standard style or display setting, it needs to be contained in a standards drawing. Standard style types and display settings include the following:
object styles (for example, wall styles, door styles, and so on)
property set definitions
property data formats
schedule table styles
classification definitions
display theme styles
layer key styles
mask block definitions
material definitions
multi-view block definitions
profile definitions
display properties
display sets
display configurations
Not standardized style or display setting A style or display setting in a project drawing for which no corresponding object can be found in the project standards drawings.
version The process of recording changes to project standard styles and display settings. Standard styles and display settings should be versioned when they are changed in a standards drawing. When a new version is created, the next synchronization recognizes the style or display setting as changed and lets you update the project drawing accordingly.
Nonstandard version of a standard style or display setting Standard styles and display settings in a project are versioned when they are changed either in a project drawing or a project standards drawing. A version of a standard style could for example have the date of July 14, 2004. The previous version could be a week earlier from July 7, 2004. When the synchronization detects a version of the style or display setting in a project drawing that has a version date not found in the project standards drawing (for example, a version dated July 12, 2004), this version is labeled a "nonstandard version" of a project standard style or display setting.
older version of a standard style or display setting When the synchronization in the above example detects a version of the style or display setting dated July 7, 2004 in the project drawing, this is labeled as an "older version", because the version exists in the project standards drawing, but has been updated by a newer one from July 14, 2004.
synchronization The process of checking a drawing or project against its associated standards to identify and remove version discrepancies between the standards and the project. Synchronization can be set up to run invisibly in the background, run automatically with user prompting, or can be manually initiated by the user.
project tool palette group A project tool palette group is associated automatically with the project. It can be referenced from a shared location or be copied to each user's computer.
326 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
project tools Project tools are tools in the project tool palettes set for the project. In order to ensure that the current style definition is always used, project-specific tools should point directly to the styles within a standards drawing. standards drawing location When standards drawings, catalogs, and libraries are located within the project folder, they are treated as project-specific. For example, if the project is used as a template for a new project, all files from the standards folder are copied to the new project, to enable changing and overwriting them in the new project. Standards files that are located outside the project folder are not copied when creating a new project; they are only referenced from their original location in both the existing and the new project. This would be appropriate for files containing company standards that should not be changed from project to project.
Project Standards Overview
Standard styles and display settings for a project are specified and stored in one or more standards drawings that are associated with the project. This allows you to organize your standards drawings in various ways. For example, you could have one standards drawing for styles, another for display settings, and a third for AutoCAD components such as layers, dimension styles, text styles, and linetypes. Or you could place all your wall styles in one standards drawing and all of your property set definitions and data format styles into another. Project standards can be accessed from a variety of AutoCAD file formats. They can be saved in one or more drawing files (DWG), drawing templates (DWT), or AutoCAD standards drawings (DWS). Each of these file types can be associated with a project as standards drawings. The project can be compared to the project standards at any time during the project lifecycle, and if version discrepancies between the standards and the project drawings are detected, be synchronized with the standards. In addition, the standards can be updated from the project drawings if necessary.
AEC Standards
AEC standards for a project include all items from Style Manager and Display Manager. AEC standard objects are included in the synchronization and can be updated from a project drawing. They include these items:
object styles (for example, wall styles, door styles, and so on) property set definitions property data formats schedule table styles classification definitions display theme styles layer key styles mask block definitions material definitions multi-view block definitions profile definitions display properties display sets
Project Standards Overview | 327
display configurations
Standard Scheduling Information
Project standards enable you to define and distribute a set of property set definitions, property data formats, schedule table styles, and object tags across a project. Property set definitions, property data formats, and schedule table styles are created and accessed through Style Manager. Schedule tags are accessed through the project tool palettes.
Standard Material Definitions
Material definitions can be defined and distributed across the project. This includes the rendering materials used in VIZ Render, ensuring a consistent display of rendered models in the project. Materials are an integral part of object styles, and should be contained in the same standards drawing as the object styles that reference them.
Layer Key Styles
Layer key styles can be defined in a project standards drawing, and distributed across the project. Layer standards, however, are not set in the project standards. If you want to associate a layer standard with a project, you need to associate it with the drawing templates used for elements, constructs, views, and sheets.
Profiles
Profile definitions for a project are specified in one or more project standards drawings. Profiles can be used by many objects, for example mass element shapes or window styles.
Classification Definitions
A project may have a set of classification definitions in one or more standards drawings. Classifications are used as a reporting and display tool for building objects. Classifications are attached to object styles. If you want to use a classification in a project standard style, the classification needs to be stored in the same standards drawing as the object style to which it is referenced.
Display Settings
You can define standard display representations, display sets, and display configurations for a project. This will ensure consistent display of drawing objects in the project. Only one display standards drawing can be set for a project.
AutoCAD Standards
The Autodesk Architectural Desktop Project Standards feature integrates the AutoCAD Standards checker, allowing the user to set up one or more DWS files for AutoCAD components. AutoCAD components that can be included in a standards check are:
AutoCAD dimension styles AutoCAD layers Text styles Linetypes
When you set up AutoCAD standards, a CHX batch checker file is created for the project. The CHX file contains all project drawings as drawings to be checked, and all specified DWS files as drawings to check against. You can run this batch file for checking the whole project, or check individual project drawings manually. For more information, see "Synchronizing a Project with AutoCAD Standards" on page 363 and "Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AutoCAD Standards" on page 364.
Standard Tools
Standard styles can be organized and accessed through tools. You can define project tool palettes and a project library in Content Browser for quick and easy access. For detailed information, see "Setting up Standard Tools in a Project" on page 339.
328 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Project Tool Palette Group
You can define a project tool palette group containing standard project styles. You can choose between defining a shared tool palette group on a network location, or a copy of the project tool palette group on the local users' machines.
Standard Content Browser Library
An icon now appears on the Project Navigator Palette to launch the Content Browser. You can set a custom Content Browser library that is opened by default when Content Browser is started from the Project Navigator. With the possibility of creating tool catalogs from existing drawings, as described in "Creating a Project Standards Tool Catalog" on page 341, it is now easy to create standard tools and catalogs for a project.
Synchronizing the Project
During the lifecycle of a project, project standards can change. For example, the hatching associated with a wall component can change its pattern, or a property set definition can have added properties. In cases such as these, the project must be synchronized with the modified standards. You can configure the project standards so that project drawings are automatically checked against the standards when opened, and automatically updated with the new edits. You can also manually start a synchronization for a project drawing or on the complete project at any time or you can configure standards for manual synchronization regardless of the overall project synchronization settings.
Process Overview: Using Standards in a Project
Setting up and using standards in a project entails the following actions: Step 1: Create standard styles, display settings, and AutoCAD components in one or more standards drawings. Standards drawings can be drawing files (DWG), drawing templates (DWT), or AutoCAD standard files (DWS). Optionally, you can create different project standards files for different styles, display settings, and AutoCAD components.
Step 2: If desired, create a tool catalog that uses the styles from the standards drawings for their tool definitions. Step 3: Optionally, you can create a Content Browser library that should be used throughout the project. Step 4: Associate the standards drawings with the project. Step 5: If there are multiple standards drawings for styles, define which style type should be controlled by which
standards drawing. Step 6: Set up the desired synchronization behavior of the project.
You can choose between different synchronization modes, depending on your project workflows. For example, you can specify that a project drawing is synchronized with the standards when it is opened, or you can specify that synchronization happens only manually.
Step 7: Add standard styles and display settings to your project drawings by one of these methods:
Use tools from the standard palettes. Use tools from the standard Content Browser library. Copy styles and display settings from the standards drawings through Style Manager and Display
Manager.
Step 8: Synchronize project drawings with the project standards. Project drawings can be synchronized automatically on opening, or manually by the user.
Step 9: Update any inconsistent objects.
Using Project Standards
Project standards help ensure consistency across a project. The following workflows demonstrate how to use standards in a project:
The user opens a project drawing, and the styles and display settings are synchronized with the associated project standards. Depending on the standard settings, the user can either be prompted to update out-of-synch objects, or they can be automatically updated by the software.
Synchronizing the Project | 329
The CAD manager makes changes to a style in a standards drawing, applies a version to the change, and saves and closes the standards drawing. The next time a project drawing is opened it can be synchronized with the changed style, making it match the version in the standards file.
A user receives a project drawing from another user or a subcontractor, and performs a standards audit on it to determine if there are any not standardized styles or display settings, or if any of them are out-of-date. The user can decide whether to update out-of-date styles and display settings, or ignore them.
The CAD manager sets up a default Content Browser library for the project. When a user starts Content Browser from the current project in Project Navigator, the project library is displayed. The user can then drag standard tools into a project drawing.
To create a standard tool catalog based on an existing project, the CAD manager opens the AEC Tool Catalog Generator, browses to the project, and creates a tool catalog from the project drawings. He adds the new catalog to a Content Browser library and connects that library to a project. From there, the tools can be used either directly in the project or be used to build up a project-specific tool palette group.
To transmit the project to an external subcontractor, the CAD manager creates an e-transmit package containing all project drawing files, standards drawings, and standard catalogs, as well as the standard Content Browser library. The subcontractor unzips the package to access these standard objects for use on the subcontracted design work.
The CAD manager wants to create a hierarchical structure for standards. Some standards are specific to the project, whereas others are specific to a customer or general company standards. By placing different standards drawings in different locations, some can be copied and overwritten for a specific project, whereas others are referenced from a central location and are read-only.
Prerequisites for Working with Project Standards
The following points need to be taken into consideration to work efficiently with the project standards feature:
Project standards can be used only with projects. A drawing must be part of a project to be synchronized with project standards. Project standards cannot be applied to standalone drawings. You can copy standard styles and display settings into standalone drawings, but they will not be synchronized when the standards change.
Project standards can be distributed among multiple standards drawings, if desired. However, there can be only one drawing that is designated for the display settings in a project.
Project standards can be stored in DWG, DWT, and DWS files.
AutoCAD standards for layers, text styles, linetypes, and AutoCAD dimension styles must be placed in DWS files.
Demand loading needs to be enabled for working with project standards. The XLOADCTL system variable must be set to 2 (default value).
Setting up Standards in a Project
You can define one or more files to use as the source for standard styles and display settings. You can also specify options for synchronizing the styles and display settings with the standards. Additionally, you can set up DWS files for AutoCAD layers, dimension styles, text styles, and linetypes.
Creating a New Project with Predefined Standards
The quickest and easiest way to create a new project that already has standards associated with it, is to use an existing project with standards as a template. When you use an existing project as a template, the following files and structures are copied to the new project:
All project DWG files and XML files
AEC standards files
AutoCAD standards files
Project standards synchronization settings
Sheet set template
Project details
Drawing template paths
330 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Keynote and detail component database paths Project tool palette group Tool content root path Project Content Browser library
NOTE Project standards files, tool palettes, and the project Content Browser library are copied to the new project only if they are located within the original project folder. Standard components located outside the project folder will be referenced by the new project, but not copied to it.
For information about creating a project with predefined standards, see "Creating a New Project Based on a Template (Copying a Project)" on page 171.
When you create a new project based on a template, all files that are in the project folder, will be copied, including the project drawings (DWG) and their associated XML files. If you want to copy only the standards files and support files, as well as the structure of the project, you need to create a project with a copied structure, as described in "Creating a New Project with the Structure of an Existing Project" on page 173.
Configuring Project Standards
After setting up a project, you can configure the project standards. If you have created a project based on a template, the initial project standard settings come from the template. If you have not used a template, the settings are undefined or default settings.
Project standard settings include the following:
Standard styles
Standard display settings
Synchronization settings
AutoCAD standards (layers, dimension styles, text styles and linetypes)
NOTE To set up project standards, you must have one or more project standards drawings available. If you have created a new project based on a project with standards, the standards drawings of the original project are copied to the new project and are automatically associated with the new project. If you have created a new project not based on a template, or based on a project without standards, you first need to define one or more standards drawings. For more information, see "Creating a New Project Standards Drawing" on page 366.
Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings Use this procedure to set up standard styles and display settings for a project.
NOTE Standard styles include object styles, definitions, profiles, materials, property set definitions, and classifications.
To set up standard styles and display settings, you define one or more project standards drawings that contain the standards for styles and display settings. These drawings can be DWG, DWT, or DWS files and are added in the configuration dialog.
Standard files are marked by icons next to their name in the configuration setup.
Icon
Description Standards drawing (DWG)
Standards template (DWT)
AutoCAD Standards file (DWS)
Missing standards file
Configuring Project Standards | 331
Synchronization Order If you have multiple standards drawings associated with a specific style type, then during synchronization the occurrence of the style in the first standards drawing is used as the style with which the style in the project drawing is synchronized. Further drawings containing the same standard style are ignored.
Order of standards drawings
1 Click File menu Project Browser. NOTE To access the standards configuration of the current project only, you can click AEC Project Standards Configure on the CAD Manager menu. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
2 Select the project for which you want to configure standards, right-click, and click Project Properties. 3 Next to Project Standards, click Configure.
4 To add a new standards drawing for styles, click
.
5 In the Select Standards Drawing dialog box, select a DWG, DWT, or DWS file that contains standard styles, and click Open.
If you do not yet have standards drawings, see "Creating a New Project Standards Drawing" on page 366.
The new styles drawing is appended to the Standards Drawings list. The order of the columns, from left to right, defines the search order and precedence during synchronization. To change the order of the drawings,
select the drawing name in the column header, and click
to move the drawing up in the drawing
order, and click
to move the drawing down in the drawing order.
332 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
After you have added styles drawings to the project standards setup, you need to define for which style types each drawing should be the standard. To do this, you associate each style type with a standards drawing. The style types are listed under Objects in the Standard Styles tab. You can find all style types from Style Manager here.
6 To display only style types of one style category, select the category under Select which objects to display in the list below. If you want to see all style categories, select All Objects.
7 To define that a specific style type should be controlled by a specific standards drawing, click the style type's check box in the appropriate drawing column.
TIP If you want to select one drawing for all style types, right-click in the header, and click Select Column.
If a style type has not been associated with a standards drawing, these styles are not controlled by the standards. For example, if the standards drawing "Standard Styles 1.dwg" has not been associated with the Wall Styles type, then even if wall styles from this standards drawing exist in a project drawing, they will be interpreted as "not standardized" by the synchronization.
If you select multiple standards drawings for one style type, then during synchronization, each drawing is searched for that style type in the order of the drawings. This means that you can distribute standard styles for a style type among different drawings. For example, you could store your concrete wall styles in the standards drawing "Wall Styles - Concrete (Imperial)", and your brick wall styles in the drawing "Wall Styles - Brick (Imperial)".
NOTE If two standards drawings contain a style of the same name and type, the style in the first standards drawing will be used for synchronization. Further instances of that style will be ignored. The order of standards drawings is determined by their position from left to right in the table. To re-order the drawings, use the Up
and Down
buttons.
8 To remove a standard styles drawing from the project, click on its name in the Standards Drawings list,
and click
.
Removing a standards drawing from the list only removes the reference of this drawing to the project. The drawing is not deleted from the file system.
Next, you need to define a standards drawings for the display settings in the project. You can assign only one standards drawing for display settings. The standard display settings drawing can be one already assigned as a styles standards drawing.
9 Under Select drawing to use for standard display settings, select a file. If necessary, select Browse to browse for a file.
NOTE If you are using a display standards drawing that is different from the styles standards drawing, or if you have multiple styles standards drawings, you need to make sure that the styles standard drawings are in synch with the display standards drawing. For more information, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377.
10 Click the Synchronization tab.
Configuring Project Standards | 333
If you have added a standards drawing to the project, and the drawing is located in the project folder, the drawing will automatically have initial version information added to all styles and display settings. If the new standards drawing is located outside the project folder, and has not yet been versioned, you need to version it as described in "Versioning a Project Standards Drawing" on page 375. For more information about versioning, see "Versioning Standards" on page 368. 11 If necessary, enter a universal comment to all versioned styles and display settings. For instance, you might want to add a comment to indicate what has changed in the style as of this version.
12 Click OK.
NOTE If some of the standards drawings have been set to read-only, they cannot be automatically versioned. In this case, they need to be versioned manually by a user with read-write access.
Synchronization Options When a project uses standards, it needs to be synchronized with the standards in regular intervals to make sure the standards are observed. During synchronization with its standards, the styles and display settings in the project or project drawing are compared with the project standards, to find version discrepancies between them, and fix them. You can set different synchronization options. Before deciding on settings, you should review your desired workflow to find the optimal choice. Keep in mind that the option you select will be in effect for all users of the project.
Automatic Synchronization If you select automatic synchronization, the following behavior is defined for the synchronization:
Project drawings are compared with the project standards when they are opened. In case of version discrepancies between a project drawing and the project standards, the styles and display settings
in the project drawing are overwritten by the styles and display settings from the project standards without prompting. The user cannot prevent the update. No notification of not standardized styles and display settings in the project drawing is displayed during the automatic synchronization. If not standardized styles and display settings exist, they are ignored.
TIP To display not standardized styles and display settings, you can audit the drawing, as described in "Auditing a Project or a Drawing" on page 365.
When users make changes to a standard style or display setting in a project drawing, they will not be prompted to upload the styles or display settings to the projects standards drawings accordingly. Unless a user uploads the changed objects to the standards drawing manually, they will not be copied into the standards drawing.
Semi-Automatic Synchronization If you select semi-automatic synchronization, the following behavior is defined for the synchronization:
Project drawings are compared with the project standards when they are opened. In case of version discrepancies between a project drawing and the project standards, a notification dialog is
displayed where the user can decide whether the styles and display settings in the project drawings should be overwritten with the standards. The user has the option to ignore inconsistent styles and display settings. Not standardized styles and display settings in the project drawing are displayed in a list.
334 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
When users make changes to a standard style or display setting in a project drawing, they will be prompted to upload the styles or display settings to the projects standards drawings.
Manual Synchronization
If you select manual synchronization, the following behavior is defined for the synchronization:
Project drawings are not compared and synchronized with the project standards when opening the project drawing. To perform a synchronization, the user needs to manually initiate it. For more information, see "Synchronizing a Project with the Standards" on page 353.
In case of version discrepancies between a project drawing and the project standards, a notification dialog is displayed where the user can decide whether the styles and display settings in the project drawings should be overwritten with the project standards. The user has the option to ignore inconsistent standard styles or display settings.
Not standardized styles and display settings in the project drawing are displayed in a list. When users make changes to a standard style or display setting in a project drawing, they will not be prompted to
upload the changes to the projects standards. Unless a user uploads the changed standards in the standards drawing manually, they will not be copied into the standards drawing.
The synchronization settings are valid for all users of the project. So the synchronization method selected should reflect the workflow needs of the majority of users. For example, if you want all users to be in synch with all project standards at all times, you should choose automatic synchronization. If you want greater transparency and user control, you could choose semi-automatic or manual synchronization. If you have selected automatic synchronization, the synchronization of project drawings will run "invisible" in the background. On opening, each drawing will automatically be synchronized with the standards without notification to the user. If you have selected semi-automatic or manual synchronization, you have more control and information about the synchronization process; you can display lists of not standardized styles and display settings, nonstandard versions, or older versions, and individually decide if you want to update or ignore them. Setting up Synchronization of AEC Standards Use this procedure to set up the synchronization options for the AEC standards in a project.
NOTE The synchronization settings you define are relevant only for the synchronization of the AEC standard styles and display settings in a project, as specified in "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331. They do not affect the synchronization of AutoCAD standards in a project, as defined in "Setting up AutoCAD Standards" on page 336. For more information about synchronization, see "Synchronizing a Project with the Standards" on page 353.
NOTE The settings in this dialog box control only how project drawings are synchronized with project standards drawings. They do not specify how project standards drawings are synchronized with each other. For information on synchronizing project standards drawings, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 Select the project for which you want to set the AEC standards synchronization, right-click, and click
Project Properties. 3 Next to Project Standards, click Configure. 4 Click the Synchronization tab.
Configuring Project Standards | 335
5 Select the synchronization method for your project. For information about the available methods, see "Synchronization Options" on page 334.
6 To create a log file of the synchronization, select Create log file. When the log file is created, you can choose between a report in XML or HTML format. The log file contains information about the drawings synchronized, the standards drawings used, and the changes made to standard styles and display settings in the course of synchronization.
7 Click OK or click the AutoCAD Standards tab. Setting up AutoCAD Standards Use this procedure to set up AutoCAD standards for the project. AutoCAD standards include AutoCAD layers, AutoCAD dimension styles, text styles, and linetypes, and are contained in DWS files. You cannot define different DWS files for different components; for example, you cannot define one DWS file for dimension styles, and another one for linetypes. Each setting from each DWS file is processed. If there is conflicting information in different DWS files, then the first one in the list is used. If necessary, you can change the order of the DWS files to change the precedence. For more information, see "Define Standards" in AutoCAD Help. When you set up AutoCAD standards, a CHX batch checker file with the same name as the project file is created in the project folder. The CHX file contains all project drawings as drawings to be checked, and all specified DWS files as drawings to check against. You can run this batch file for checking the whole project, or check individual project drawings manually. For more information, see "Synchronizing a Project with AutoCAD Standards" on page 363 and "Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AutoCAD Standards" on page 364.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 Select the project for which you want to set up AutoCAD standards, right-click, and click Project Properties. 3 Next to Project Standards, click Configure. 4 Click the AutoCAD Standards tab.
336 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
5 To add a new DWS file, click
.
By default, the new DWS file is appended to the end of the list. That means that will be processed last, and settings from higher listed DWS files will take precedence.
6 To change the order of the DWS files in the list, use the Up
and Down
buttons.
7 To remove a DWS file from the list, click on its name in the list, and click
.
Removing a DWS file from the list only removes the reference of this file to the project. The file is not deleted from the file system.
8 If you have set up DWS files as AEC standards drawings in "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331, you can re-use them for the AutoCAD standards by clicking Add .dws files from Standard Styles. This will copy the AEC standards files to the AutoCAD Standards tab, and use them as AutoCAD standard files in the project.
Copying Project Standards from Another Project Use this procedure to copy the project standard settings from an existing project. Copying the project standards copies the following standards settings:
Copy or reference the style and display standards drawings to the new project Copy or reference AutoCAD standards drawings to the new project Duplicate the association of standards drawings to style types in the new project Duplicate the synchronization settings in the new project
When you copy the standards of an existing project to a new project, standards drawings can be either referenced from their original location in the new project, or be copied to the new project.
If the project standards drawings of the copied project are located within the original project folder, then the drawings are copied to the new project. You would do this if you wanted to have a separate set of project standards drawings for each project you create. That way, you can make project-specific changes for each set of project standards.
If the standards drawings of the copied project are outside the original project folder, they will not be copied to the new project, but will be referenced from their original location. You could do this if your project standards are not specific to one project, but are rather department-specific or company-wide standards. If you make changes to a project standards drawing referenced by several projects, all projects will be able to be synchronized with the changes.
Configuring Project Standards | 337
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 Select the project into which you want to copy standards, right-click, and click Project Properties. 3 In the Modify Project dialog box, click Configure next to Project Standards. 4 Click the Standard Styles tab.
5 Click
.
6 In the Select Project dialog box, select the project file (APJ) from which you want to copy project standards, and then click Open.
7 Select the copy settings.
If you want to...
overwrite the existing project standards with the copied project standards
Then... click Remove existing settings.
add the project standards from the selected project to any existing project standards
click Append copied settings to existing settings.
Existing settings that are inconsistent with the copied settings will be replaced with the copied settings.
8 Click OK twice.
Enabling Project Standards for a Project After defining the standards for a project, you need to enable them to make them active within the project. While you are still working on setting up the standards for a project, you might not want the standards to be activated in the project right away, as standards styles might still be added, removed, or changed. Once the setup is complete, however, you must enable the standards for the project.
1 Select the project for which you want to enable project standards, right-click, and click Project Properties. 2 In the Modify Project dialog box, click Configure next to Project Standards.
3 Select Enable project standards for project <Project Name>. 4 Click OK twice.
The selected synchronization behavior (automatic, semi-automatic, or manual) is now activated.
338 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
NOTE Enabling the standards in a project does not mean that standard styles and display settings are copied to project drawings. To add standard styles and display settings to project drawings, see "Adding Standards to a Project Drawing" on page 350.
Generating a Project Standards Setup Report Use this procedure to create an HTML or XML report that lists the project's standard drawings, and standard styles and display settings, along with their version history.
1 Verify that the project for which you want to create a standards setup report is set as the current project. For information on setting a project current, see "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
2 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Project Standards Setup Report.
If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
3 In the Save Setup Report dialog box, select a file name, location, and format for the generated report.
4 Click Save. The report is saved in the specified location and can be displayed with a Web Browser or XML editor.
Setting up Standard Tools in a Project
Every project has a project tool palette group associated with it. If you are using project standards, the tools should point to standard styles from a project standards drawing. To make working with project tools easier, a project-specific library can be created in Content Browser.
Setting up standard tool palettes is usually a task for a CAD manager or project owner. Depending on the requirements of the project, different steps can be taken to achieve the desired results. The main considerations for creating the project tool palettes are the following:
Per User Workspace Catalog and Shared Workspace Catalog
The CAD manager can decide whether to create a group of tools and palettes that are shared by all users of a project and accessed from a single location, or to define a project catalog and Content Browser library, and maybe create a starter set of palettes for copying to individual users' computers. For more information, see "Before You Begin: Working in a Network Environment" on page 154. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop loads the tool palettes found in the paths specified in the Files tab of the Options dialog box. Architectural Desktop projects allow you to specify an additional location path for a tool palettes file that contains project-specific tool palettes. This path is appended to the current profile when the project is made current, and removed when the project is closed or when another project is set current.
Projects support two workflows for working with project palettes:
Per user workspace catalog: This the recommended option. Use the Per user workspace catalog option in conjunction with project tool catalogs in Content Browser. In this mode, users can access the tools and tool palettes they need for the job from tool catalogs in Content Browser on a per-user basis. By utilizing the refresh/linking behavior of Content Browser, you can make changes to the original tools and tool palettes in project catalogs, and your team can refresh their tools and palettes to get the latest versions. Thus, each user's workspace is maintained by the application uniquely, but linked palettes allow for global updates.
You can optionally provide your project team with a starter set of tool palettes, including the initial layout and tool ordering. To do this, you would create the project palettes in your own workspace, and then use Windows Explorer to copy the files to the location specified for the tool palette file location in the project properties. For detailed instructions, see the workflow examples below.
Shared workspace catalog: This option is recommended if you wish to mandate a set collection of project tool palettes for everyone on the project. In this case you do not want users going to Content Browser to customize project tools or tool palettes. To create a shared workspace, you specify a shared network location and assign it to the tool palette file location of the project. As this path will be appended to every project team member's profile when the project is set current, the path should be read-only. Otherwise changes made by one user would affect every user, and the last change would be the final form of the tool.
Setting up Standard Tools in a Project | 339
NOTE If you make changes to the shared tool palettes, they are not copied to disk until you close the project to close Architectural Desktop. Similarly, other users will not see your updates until the next time the project is set current or Architectural Desktop is closed and re-opened with the project still current.
Using Content Browser or Style Manager
You can create standard catalogs in Content Browser and define a standard Content Browser library for a project. You can use the catalog and library to drag tools and palettes to the workspace or to the project tool palettes. This would likely be the case if you set up the project using the Per user workspace catalog option. If you do not want to give users access to a Content Browser library with standard tools, do not set a library for the project. In that case, you need to build the project tool palettes from standard styles in Style Manager. You would typically do this if you are using the Shared workspace catalog option.
Using Linked or Unlinked Tools
When you build your project palettes from a project catalog in Content Browser, you can either link the palettes and tools from Content Browser, or create an unlinked copy in the project palettes. If you want to be able to make frequent updates in Content Browser, linking tools and palettes is recommended. Following are two suggested workflows for setting up standard tools. The first one is based on a per user workspace catalog, giving more freedom to the individual users of the project. The second one is based on a shared workspace catalog, and puts greater emphasis on adhering to a given structure.
Workflow 1: Using a Per User Workspace Catalog
1 Create standard styles in standards drawings and associate them with the project. For more information, see "Creating a New Project Standards Drawing" on page 366 and "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331.
2 Create one or more tool catalogs from the standards drawings. For more information, see "Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project" on page 341.
3 Create a project library in Content Browser, and add the standard catalogs. For more information, see "Adding a Project Catalog to a Content Browser Library" on page 344.
TIP By default, tool catalogs are set to be linking. This makes it easier to update them once they have been copied to the workspace tool palettes.
4 Define the tool palette file location for the project. For more information, see "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345.
TIP If you are using one of the project templates provide with the software, the tool palette file location is by default set to \<Project Folder>\WorkspaceToolPalettes.
5 For Tool palette storage type, select Per user workspace catalog. 6 Associate the Content Browser library you have created with the project. For more information, see "Adding a
Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345. 7 Build up the project tool palette group. For more information, see "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348. 8 If you want your project users to start out with the same tools you have in your workspace, copy the palettes to
the location specified in the tool palette file location path. For more information, see "Copying the Project Tool Palettes to the Tool Palette File Location" on page 349. 9 If you want your project users to have the same palette groupings, icon size, and ordering as you have, copy the project profile (AWS) to the location specified in the tool palette file location path. That way, new project users will have the profile installed in their Documents and Settings folder. For more information, see "Adding the Project Profile to the Tool Palette File Location" on page 349.
340 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Workflow 2: Using a Shared Workspace Catalog 1 Create standard styles in standards drawings and associate them with the project. For more information, see "Creating a New Project Standards Drawing" on page 366 and "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331. 2 Define the tool palette file location for the project. For more information, see "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345. TIP If you are working with a shared workspace catalog, it is highly recommended that you point the tool palette file location to a read-only folder.
3 For Tool palette storage type, select Shared workspace catalog. 4 Build up the project tool palette group. For more information, see "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348. 5 If you want your project users to have the same palette groupings, icon size, and ordering as you have, copy the
project profile (AWS) to the location specified in the tool palette file location path. That way, new project users will have the profile installed in their Documents and Settings folder. For more information, see "Adding the Project Profile to the Tool Palette File Location" on page 349.
Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project
A tool catalog for a project should contain tools from project standards drawings. The easiest way to generate a tool catalog from standards drawings is to either create a new tool catalog based on one or more project standards drawings, or to add tools from a project standards drawing to an existing tool catalog. The tool catalog can then be added to the Content Browser library that is associated with the project. This makes it easy to use the tools either in the drawing or add them to the project tool palettes. Creating a Project Standards Tool Catalog Use this procedure to create a new tool catalog based on existing standards drawings. You specify the styles from which tools will be created and whether the new tools are organized in categories or palettes.
1 Click CAD Manager menu Tool Catalog Generator.
NOTE If the CAD Manager menu is not visible on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
2 Under Catalog, select Create a new catalog. 3 Enter a name for the new catalog. 4 Click Browse to define the location of the catalog. 5 Under Content Source, specify whether you want the new catalog to be created from multiple drawings
in a folder or from a single drawing. Then, enter the path for the folder or drawing.
Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project | 341
NOTE When you specify a folder as the catalog source, any nested folders are included in the new tool catalog.
6 Specify how you want the tools organized in the new catalog: To organize the new tools by their source drawing, select Group tools by source drawing. This option is well suited for a tool catalog that is generated from a number of styles drawings. The resulting tools could be placed in categories or palettes named "Wall Styles - Concrete (Imperial)", "Wall Styles - Brick (Imperial)," and so on. To organize the new tools by their object type, select Group tools by object type. This option is well suited if you want to merge styles from various drawings into palettes or categories. The resulting tools will be placed in categories or palettes named "Walls", "Doors," and so on.
NOTE If both options are enabled, the catalog is first grouped by the drawings and then by the object type, generating categories from the drawings, and palettes from the object types. This is implemented because palettes cannot be nested. In this case the radio buttons for categories and palettes are disabled, and the Create tools in palettes option is selected for the catalog.
NOTE If neither of the two options is enabled, all new tools will be generated in the top category of the catalog.
To organize the new tools in categories, select Create Tools in Categories. If you selected Group tools by source drawing, a category will be created for each source drawing. If you selected Group tools by object type, a category will be created for each object type.
To organize the new tools in palettes, select Create Tools in Palettes. If you selected Group tools by source drawing, a palette will be created for each source drawing. If you selected Group tools by object type, a palette will be created for each object type.
7 Under Create tools for the following objects, select the object styles you want to appear as tools in the new catalog. By default, all available style types are selected. Use the Select All and Clear All buttons as necessary.
8 Click OK. A progress bar in the application status bar informs you of the progress of the catalog generation. This can take a few moments for a large catalog.
NOTE Each category and each palette is created in its own ATC file. The category and palette ATC files are stored in the Palettes or Categories subfolders within the folder where the new catalog is created.
For information about associating a tool catalog to a project library, see "Adding a Project Catalog to a Content Browser Library" on page 344.
Adding Standard Tools to a Tool Catalog Use this procedure to add project standard tools to an existing tool catalog.
1 Click CAD Manager menu Tool Catalog Generator.
NOTE If the CAD Manager menu is not visible on your menu bar, click Window menu Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
342 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
2 Under Catalog, select Add to an existing catalog.
3 Enter the name and the path of the catalog.
4 Click Append to Catalog and select Ignore Duplicate Styles if you want to prevent existing styles from being overwritten by styles with the same name and file path from the appended drawing. If you clear Ignore Duplicate Styles, existing styles are overwritten with styles from the appended drawing if they have the same name and file path.
5 If you want to overwrite the existing catalog, click Overwrite Catalog. This deletes the whole catalog and replaces it with the palettes, categories, and tools from the source drawing(s).
WARNING You should use that option with great caution, as it will delete the complete existing catalog. If you just want to overwrite tools with their up-to-date versions from a content drawing, select Append to Catalog instead, and verify that Ignore Duplicate Styles is cleared.
6 Under Content Source, select a project standards drawing or standards folder to use as source for the new tools.
If you want to...
Then...
add tools from multiple drawings in a folder select Create from drawings in folder, and then enter the path and folder name under Type the source folder location.
add tools from a single drawing
select Create from drawing, and then enter the path and drawing name under Type the source drawing.
7 Specify how the tools should be ordered in the catalog.
To order the resulting tools by their source drawing, select Group tools by source drawing. This option is well suited for a tool catalog that is generated from a number of styles drawings. The resulting tools could be placed in categories or palettes named "Wall Styles - Concrete (Imperial)", "Wall Styles - CMU (Imperial)" and so on.
To order the resulting tools by their object type, select Group tools by object type. This option is well suited if you want to merge styles from various drawings into the catalog. The resulting tools will be placed in categories or palettes named after the style type, for example "Walls", "Doors," and so on.
Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project | 343
NOTE If both options are enabled, then the tools are first grouped by the drawings and then by the object type, generating categories from the drawings, and palettes from the object types. This is implemented because palettes cannot be nested. In this case the radio buttons below are disabled and the Create tools in palettes option is selected for the tools.
NOTE If neither of the two options are enabled, all new tools will be generated in the top category of the catalog.
To place the new tools in categories, select Create Tools in Categories. If you selected to group tools by their source drawing, then for each source drawing a category will be created. If you selected to group tools by their object type, then for each object type a category will be created.
To place the new tools in palettes, select Create Tools in Palettes. If you selected to group tools by their source drawing, then for each source drawing a palette will be created. If you selected to group tools by their object type, then for each object type a palette will be created.
8 Under Create tools for the following objects, select which object styles should appear as tools in the catalog. By default, all available style types are selected. Use the Select All and Clear All buttons as needed to make your selections.
9 Click OK. A progress bar in the application status bar indicates the progress of the tool generation. When a large number of tools are being added, the process can take a few moments.
NOTE Each category and each palette is created in its own ATC file. The category and palette ATC files are stored in the Palettes or Categories subfolders in the folder in which the new catalog is created.
For information about associating a tool catalog to a project library, see "Adding a Project Catalog to a Content Browser Library" on page 344.
Adding a Project Catalog to a Content Browser Library
Tool catalogs are placed in catalog libraries. If you have created a tool catalog with standard tools, you need to add it to a catalog library. A Content Browser library can be set up on a shared network volume to be accessed by all project users. The CAD manager or project owner can point the project to that Content Browser library to have quick access to standard tools. For more information, see "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345.
1 Click Window menu Content Browser.
2 Click to display the catalog library.
3 Click
to create a catalog.
4 In the Add Catalog dialog box, select Add an existing catalog or website.
5 Enter the location of the standards tool catalog created in "Creating a Project Standards Tool Catalog" on page 341, or click Browse a to navigate to the catalog.
6 7 Click OK.
NOTE Alternatively, you can drag and drop an ATC file from Windows Explorer to the Content Browser library pane.
344 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group
If you have created a project library in Content Browser, you can associate it to a project. When you open the Content Browser from Project Navigator, the project library is automatically displayed. The project library can be used to drag tools in project drawings, or to fill the project tool palettes with standard tools.
Project Tool Palette Group Each project has a specific tool palette group (ATC) associated with it. Depending on how you created the project, the tool palette group can be created and displayed in different ways. For a new project, the project tool palette group is by default empty, unless the project settings are pointing to an existing palette group.
Selecting the project tool palette group
Tool Content Root Path Setting a tool content root path can help you keep your tools consistent with standards if the project or the standards drawings are moved during the project lifecycle. When tools on the project tool palettes point to the tool content root path specified in the project settings, the content root path is created as a variable (%AECPROJECT_DIR%) in the XML definition of the tool. When the tool content root path in the project settings is changed, the path of the tools is changed accordingly. For example, if all project tools point to content stored under <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content 1\, you can move the content to <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content 2\, adjust the tool content root path in the project setup accordingly, and all tools will now point correctly to <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content 2. Another use case for changing the tool content root path would be if a user wants to work offline, and for that purpose creates an e-transmit package of the project and its tool content files. When the e-transmit package is unpacked on the local computer, the path to the content files will have changes. If it was P:\ <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content, it could now be C:\ <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content. If the tool content root path is redirected to the user's C drive, and all content will remain valid. Later, when the drawings the user modified offline are copied back to the main project on the P server, the content root path will automatically change back to P:\ <Project Root Folder>\Standards\Content\Content, as this is the path in the main APJ file.
Project Library A Content Browser library can be set up on a shared network volume to be accessed by all project users. The CAD manager or project owner can associate the library with the project to have quick access to standard tools. This can be especially useful on a large project. For more information, see "Before You Begin: Working in a Network Environment" on page 154. When Content Browser is opened from the Project Navigator, it will automatically open the library associated with the project.
1 Click File menu Project Browser. 2 Select the project for which you want to specify the tool palette group and the Content Browser library,
right-click, and click Project Properties.
Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group | 345
3 Under Tool Palette File Location, specify the location of the project tool palette group. You can select a local folder or a network folder here.
If you do not explicitly set a location here, the following default behavior is selected depending on how you created your project:
Project Type
Tool Palette File Location
Project Tool Palette Group
Legacy project from Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2005
pointing to new empty ATC file under \<ProjectName>\Standards\ WorkspaceToolPalettes\ <ProjectName>.atc
Created, but not displayed. To display the tool palette group in the tool palettes set and add tools to it, see "Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group" on page 347 and "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
New project not based on pointing to new empty ATC file under
a template
\<ProjectName>\Standards\ WorkspaceTool-
Palettes\ <ProjectName>.atc
Created, but not displayed. To display the tool palette group in the tool palettes set and add tools to it, see "Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group" on page 347 and "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
New project based on default Architectural Desktop template project
pointing to new ATC file under \<ProjectName>\Standards\ WorkspaceToolPalettes\ <ProjectName>.atc.
By default, one empty tool palette is already inserted in ATC.
Created and displayed with empty default tool palette. To add tools and palettes, see "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
New project based on user-defined existing template project
If the tool palette group of the template project is located within the template project folder, it will be copied with all contained palettes to the corresponding folder of the new project. The tool palette file location of the new project will point to the copied tool palette group.
Displayed as either copied tool palette group or referenced tool palette group
If the tool palette group of the template project is located outside the template project folder, the tool palette file location of the new project will point to the same location, sharing the tool palette group with the template project.
4 For Tool Palette Storage Type, select Shared Workspace Catalog or Per User Workspace Catalog.
346 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
If you select Shared Workspace Catalog, the path selected under Tool Palette File Location is added to the user's project profile (AWS), and the tool catalog is used from the specified location. If you select Per User Workspace Catalog, a folder is created under \\Documents and Settings\<User Name>\ and the tool palettes are copied to that folder. 5 Under Tool Content Root Path, you can set a root path for the tools used in the project tool palette group. When tools on project palettes are created with the tool content root path specified in the project setup, the content root path is created as a variable (%AECPROJECT_DIR%). When the tool content root path in the project setup is changed, and the referenced style drawings are moved to the new location, the path of the project tools is changed accordingly.
NOTE When a project is re-pathed, and the content root path is within the project folder, then it will be re-pathed accordingly.
6 Under Tool Catalog Library, select the default Content Browser library (CBL) to be displayed when opening Content Browser from the Project Navigator.
7 Click OK.
Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group
Use this procedure to display the project tool palette group in the tool palettes set. Depending on the setting of the tool palette file location in "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 177, the project tool palette group can be displayed automatically after setting a project current and closing Project Browser, or it can be empty and not be displayed on the tool palettes set. The project tool palette group is displayed automatically when it contains at least one palette. Tool palette groups that are not automatically displayed can appear in the following cases:
A new project that is not based on a template, and does not point to an existing tool palette group A legacy project from Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2005 that is not manually re-pointed to an existing tool
palette group A project that is based on a template project without project tool palettes If an empty tool palette group is created for a project, it is not displayed in the tool palettes set after the project is set current. To display it, you need to add at least one tool palette to it.
1 Click Window menu Tool Palettes.
2 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click . If the project tool palette group contains at least one palette, it is displayed in the list of available tool palette groups, and can be selected. Selecting the project tool palette group
If the tool palette group of the current project is empty, it is not displayed.
Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group | 347
3 To display the project tool palette group, click , and click Customize. On the left, all available palettes are listed. On the right, all palette groups are listed. The empty project tool palette group is listed there.
4 Right-click in the palettes list on the left, and click New Palette. 5 Enter a name for the new palette. 6 Select the palette, and drag it on the project palette group on the right.
7 Click Close, and click again. The project tool palette group is listed under the available palette groups and can be selected.
Building the Tool Palette Group
When a new project is created, its associated tool palette group is empty, unless the new project is explicitly pointing to an existing tool palette group. You can add and remove palettes, add, remove, and rearrange tools to suit the needs of the current project.
TIP To make sure that the changes you make here are distributed to all project collaborators, you should define the tool palette storage type as a shared workspace catalog.
IMPORTANT All new palettes you add to the tool palettes set while a project is current are added to the current project's tool palette group. This happens regardless of whether the project tool palette group is active or not. In order to add new palettes to the global tool palettes associated with your user profile, you must first close any project that is current.
You can add standard tools to the project palette group in these ways: Add standard tools from the project library Add standard tools from the from standards drawings in Style Manager
1 Set the desired project current. 2 Click Window menu Tool Palettes.
3 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click Selecting the project palette group
, and then select the project tool palette group.
348 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Empty project palette group
4 Add and rename palettes as necessary. For detailed information, see "Creating a New Tool Palette" on page 38.
5 To add standard tools from the project library, click in the Project Navigator toolbar. The Content Browser is opened with the project library displayed.
6 Drag tools or palettes from the project library to the project palette group. 7 To add standard tools from the standards drawings, open a project drawing. Click Format menu Style
Manager. The project standards drawings are displayed under the project node. You can drag-and-drop styles from the Style Manager to the project palettes. The next time you open the project, the new palettes and tools will be present in the project tool palettes.
Copying the Project Tool Palettes to the Tool Palette File Location
If you are working with a per user workspace catalog, you can create a starter set of palettes and tools for the project users by copying your palettes to the project tool palette file location. The first time a user opens the project, the tool palettes from the tool palette file location will be copied to the local users' machines.
1 Set up project standards tools as described in "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345 and "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
2 Close Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. 3 In Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT
2007\enu\Support\Profiles\ProjectCatalogs\. 4 Select the project catalog folder.
If you have just closed Architectural Desktop, the current project folder is the one with the latest date. In addition, the folder is named with the project GUID, which you can also find in the project APJ file. 5 Copy the project catalog folder and paste it to the folder specified as the tool palette file location for the project.
Adding the Project Profile to the Tool Palette File Location
After setting up the project tool palette group, the CAD manager or project owner needs to ensure that new users of the project will all have an identical set of tools and palettes when they are working with the project. To do this, the project profile needs to be copied to the folder specified as the tool palette file location.
1 Set up project standards tools as described in "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345 and "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348.
2 Close Autodesk Architectural Desktop. 3 In Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT
2007\enu\Support\Profiles\ProjectProfiles\. 4 Select the project AWS file.
If you have just closed Autodesk Architectural Desktop, the current project profile is the one with the latest date. In addition, the AWS contains the project GUID which you can also find in the project APJ file.
Copying the Project Tool Palettes to the Tool Palette File Location | 349
5 Copy the project AWS file and paste it to the folder specified as the tool palette file location of the project.
Adding Standards to a Project Drawing
If you set up standards for a new project, or add new drawings to an existing project, standard styles and display settings do not yet exist in these drawings and need to copied there. If you have configured project standard tools as described in "Setting up Standard Tools in a Project" on page 339, you can drag-and-drop them from the project library or the project standards palettes to project drawings. If you want to use standard styles and display settings in a project drawing without using tools, you need to copy them through Style Manager and Display Manager. WARNING Project standard styles and display settings can be used only in project drawings. You can copy standard styles and display settings into standalone drawings as well; however, they will not be synchronized or versioned and maintain no link to the project standards. There are different methods of copying standard styles and display settings to a drawing:
Project tool palettes can be defined, as described in "Building the Tool Palette Group" on page 348. If the tools reference styles from standards drawings, the associated standard style is copied to the project drawing when the tool is executed.
A Content Browser library for the project can be defined, as described in "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345. You can drag-and-drop tools from Content Browser to a project drawing.
Standards drawings are displayed in the Style Manager and Display Manager under the project node. You can drag-and-drop styles and display settings into a project drawing from a project standards drawing.
Project Tool Palette Group
When you create a project, a project palette group is associated with it. The project palette group is displayed in the tool palettes set when the project is set current. For information about creating a project tool palette group, see "Setting up Standard Tools in a Project" on page 339. Adding Standard Styles from the Project Tool Palettes If you want to copy a standard style from a project palette into the current drawing, you can either insert the tool into the drawing, or import the associated style from the tool palette into the drawing.
1 Right-click the tool, and click Properties. Verifying the style location
Under Style location, the associated style drawing is listed. 2 Verify that the tool points to a project standards drawing. 3 Click OK.
350 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
4 To add the standard style into the drawing, do one of the following: Select the tool, right-click, and click Import <Style Name> <Object> Style. For example, if you want to add the wall style CMU-190 into the drawing, click Import CMU-190 Wall Style. Click the tool to execute its function which will automatically use the referenced style.
Both of these options add the style to the drawing.
Adding Standard Styles from Content Browser
The CAD manager can set up a library in Content Browser that contains standard tools. Standard tools can be dragged from Content Browser directly to a drawing or to a tool palette. For information about associating a library for a project, see "Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group" on page 345.
1 Set the project current, as described in "Setting a Project Current" on page 171, and close the Project Browser. 2 Click Window menu Project Navigator. 3 In the Project Navigator toolbar, click .
The Content Browser is opened with the project library displayed. 4 Select a standard tool by its eyedropper tool, and drag it either to the drawing area of Architectural Desktop,
or to one of the tool palettes. NOTE Be sure to hold down the mouse button until the eyedropper appears to "fill up" before dragging it to the drawing or tool palette.
Adding Standard Styles from Style Manager
You can add standard styles to project drawings in Style Manager. When standards drawings are specified in the project standards configuration, they are displayed in Style Manager when you open a project drawing. Styles can be dragged from the project node to the project drawing node here. Standard styles in Style Manager
1 Open the project drawing to which you want to add standard styles. 2 Click Format menu Style Manager.
The standards drawings specified in the standards configuration are listed under the project node.
Adding Standard Styles from Content Browser | 351
3 Expand the node for the project standards drawing containing the style you want to add, and expand subnodes as necessary to locate the style.
4 Drag the style from the project standards drawing node to the project drawing node in the tree view. The standard style is copied to the project drawing node. NOTE For the synchronization of the standard style to work, the style needs to come from a standards drawing that has been selected as a standards drawing for this style type in the configuration setup. For example, if the standards drawing "Wall Styles.dwg" has been configured as the standard for wall styles, and the standards drawing "Door Styles.dwg" has been configured as the standards drawing for door styles, you should not copy any wall styles from the "Door Styles.dwg" to the project drawing. Because that drawing has not been defined as the standards drawing for wall styles, the copied styles will display as not standardized in the synchronization. For information on configuring standards drawings, see "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331.
5 Click OK. You can also drag styles from a project standards drawing into a drawing that is not part of the current project. If the drawing is not part of any project, no synchronization will happen to that style in the future. If the drawing is part of a different project, the style will display as not standardized in future synchronizations of that project, unless that project references the same standards drawing from which the style was dragged.
Adding Standard Display Settings from Display Manager
You can add standard display settings to project drawings in the Display Manager. When a standard display drawing is specified in the project standards configuration, it is displayed in Display Manager under the project node. From there, display configurations, display sets, and display representations can be dragged to the project drawing nodes. Adding standard display settings from Display Manager
1 Open the project drawing to which you want to add standard display settings. 2 Click Format menu Display Manager.
The drawing that has been defined as display standards drawings in the project standards configuration is listed under the project node. 3 Expand the standards drawing node and navigate to the desired type nodes for Configurations, Sets, and Representations by object. 4 Drag the component to the project drawing node in the tree view. 5 Click OK.
352 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Synchronizing a Project with the Standards
When a project or project drawing is synchronized with its standards, the styles and display settings in it are compared with the project standards to find version discrepancies between them, and fix them. Synchronization can become necessary in these cases:
A style or display setting in a project drawing has changed and needs to be updated with the correct version from the project standards.
A style or display setting in the project standards has changed and needs to be updated in the project drawings. Not standardized styles and display settings have been introduced in a project drawing.
Depending on the synchronization settings specified in "Setting up Synchronization of AEC Standards" on page 335, outdated standards in the project drawings are either automatically updated with the latest version from the project standards drawings, or you are presented with a list of objects that need to be updated. You can select individual objects to update, while ignoring others. If you select to update a style with the associated standard, the selected style is copied from the project standards drawing into the project drawing, overwriting the existing style definition.
NOTE Automatic synchronization of standard styles and display settings does not happen during background plot/publish.
WARNING You should always synchronize the display settings in your project. Version discrepancies between the display settings in the project drawings can result in objects in project drawings not being displayed consistently. You also need to make sure to synchronize all project standards drawings with the current standard display settings, as described in "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377, to ensure consistent display in the standards drawings.
Synchronizing a project with standards
Versioning Styles and Display Settings To determine whether a standard style or display setting in a project drawing is identical to the corresponding object in the project standards drawing, styles and display settings in a project are versioned. The version information includes a unique GUID (Global Unique Identifier), the date and time of the last modification, the windows login name of who last modified the object, and an optional comment. A new version of a standard style or display setting in a project drawing is created each time the style or display setting is changed in Style Manager or Display Manager, and saved. In a project standards drawing, a new version of a standard style or display setting must be manually created after the style or display setting has been changed in Style Manager or Display Manager. For information about versioning standard styles and display settings, see "Versioning Standards" on page 368. In project standards drawings, a version history is also stored. The version history will be used to determine if styles or display settings in project drawings are identical to the version in the project standards drawing, or newer or older versions. An older version of a style or display setting in a project drawing is a version that exists in the project standards drawing, but is not the latest version. A newer version of a style or display setting in a project drawing is a style or display setting that exists in the project standards drawing, but has no corresponding version in its version history. A special case occurs if a standard style or display setting in a standards drawing has no version information. This can happen if the version information has been purged, as described in "Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing" on page 376. In this case, the standard style or display setting still participates in the synchronization
Synchronizing a Project with the Standards | 353
and is considered the "latest version" when comparing with versions of the object in project drawings. No attempt is made during synchronization to automatically create a version GUID or history list. If you want to add version information to the standard style or display setting, you need to manually version the object as described in "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 371. Synchronization Conditions Two styles or display settings are considered identical if the following are identical:
Object type (e.g. wall style, display set) Name Version GUID If the synchronization process finds a style or display setting in a project drawing that has the same type, name, and version GUID as the corresponding style or display setting in the project standards, it concludes that the style or display setting is up-to-date with the project standards. In that case, no change is necessary. NOTE A synchronization does not perform a property-by-property comparison between the versions. The reason for this is that such a comparison would slow down the software considerably, and that the GUID, date and time stamp in the version information provides sufficient information to identify changes.
Synchronization Order If you have multiple standards drawings containing the same standard styles associated with a specific style type, then the instance of the style in the first standards drawing is used as the style to which the style in the project drawing is synchronized. The first standards drawing is the one listed on the left in the standards configuration table. Further drawings containing the same standard style are ignored.
Order of standards drawings
NOTE The order of the synchronization is observed in all cases, even if a later project standards drawing contains a newer version of a standard style than the one contained in the preceding standards drawing.
Dependent Styles Some styles have dependent styles or definitions used to create them. This could be, for example, door and window styles that are used within window assembly or curtain wall styles. In a case like that, it is recommended that all dependent styles and definitions are placed in the same standards drawing. Synchronization Granularity You can synchronize different parts of a project. You can synchronize a complete project, an individual project drawing, or an individual style or display setting. Synchronizing only one drawing or style will take considerably less time, and may often be sufficient.
354 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Synchronizing AutoCAD Standards
Synchronizing the AutoCAD standards (DWS) of a project is a separate process from synchronizing the AEC standards of a project. While you can set the AEC standards in a project to be automatically synchronized every time a drawing is opened, synchronization of the AutoCAD standards has to be initiated manually by the user. When AutoCAD standards are set up in a project, a CHX file is automatically created containing the project drawings and the associated AutoCAD project standards drawings. The batch standards checker can be used to open the project's CHX file and batch check the entire project.
Synchronization Status
When you synchronize a project or a drawing with its AEC project standards, the styles and display settings in the project drawings are compared with the versions in the standards drawings. If the version of the style or display setting in the project drawing is not identical to the version in the standards drawing, you can choose from several possible actions regarding the style or display setting.
Synchronization dialog
Status
Description
Action
Current standard version
The style or display setting in the project No action required. The object is in synch with the drawing is identical to the version in the standard. project standards drawing.
Older version of standard style or display setting
The style or display setting in a project drawing is an older version than the style in the project standards drawing.
NOTE The version GUID is used to determine which version is more current.
You can choose from these actions: Update from Standard: this copies the version from the project standards drawing to the project drawing. The object in the project drawing is overwritten.
Do not Update: The style or display setting is skipped for this synchronization. The next time the drawing is synchronized, it will display as inconsistent with the standards again.
Ignore: The style or display settings is skipped now and for future synchronizations.
NOTE If you choose this option, you may choose to display ignored objects during each synchronization.
Nonstandard (Newer) Version of standard style or display setting
The style or display setting in the project drawing is a version not found in the project standards drawing's version history.
Synchronization Status | 355
Status
Description
Action
Not standardized style or display setting
The style or display setting in the project drawing is not present in the project standards drawings.
Skip: The not standardized object is skipped for this synchronization. The next time the project is synchronized, it will display as not standardized again.
Ignore: The not standardized object is skipped now and for future synchronizations.
NOTE If you choose this option, you may choose to display ignored objects during each synchronization.
Synchronizing a Project with AEC Standards
When you have set up AEC project standards and enabled them, you can synchronize the project with the standards. For information about setting up AEC standards, see "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331. Synchronizing a project will synchronize all drawings contained within. Depending on your system setup and project size, this might take some time. Also, project drawings that are open during the synchronization might not be correctly synchronized because they will not be able to be saved after the synchronization. In that case, the drawings need to be closed, and the synchronization repeated.
NOTE Synchronizing a project will not synchronize the project standards drawings with each other, even if they are located within the project folder. To synchronize project standards drawings with each other, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377.
1 Verify that the project you want to synchronize is the current project. For information about setting a project current, see "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
2 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Synchronize Project with Standards. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
Synchronizing a project with AEC standards
The synchronization dialog is displayed with two lists. The top list shows styles and display settings that are either older versions of standard styles or display settings, or nonstandard (newer) versions. The bottom list shows a list of not standardized styles and display settings. For a definition of terms, see "Project Standards Terminology" on page 326.
3 To synchronize a style or display setting that is either an older version or a nonstandard (newer) version, select Update from Standards from the Action drop-down list.
4 To skip over a style or display setting that is either an older version or a nonstandard (newer) version, select Do not Update from the Action drop-down list.
356 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
In this case, the nonstandard version remains in the project drawing for now, and is not updated with the standard. The next time the drawing is synchronized, the style or display setting will be listed again as inconsistent with the standard. 5 To ignore a style or display setting that is inconsistent with the standard, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the inconsistent object will not be listed again in future synchronizations, except if you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization, or remove the Ignore flag from the style or display setting in Style Manager or Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 362.
WARNING You should use the Ignore option only in clearly defined exception cases where you are sure that a style or display setting does not need to conform to the project standards.
6 To skip over a not standardized style or display setting, select Skip from the Action drop-down list. The next time the drawing is synchronized, the style or display setting will be listed again as not standardized.
NOTE You cannot promote not standardized styles and display settings to standard ones here. To do this, you need to add the not standardized style to the project standards, as described in "Adding Standard Objects from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing" on page 374.
7 To ignore a not standardized style or display setting, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the not standardized object will not be listed again in future synchronizations, except if you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization, or remove the Ignore flag from the style or display setting in Style Manager or Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 362.
8 Click OK.
Synchronization Exceptions
When you synchronize a complete project, drawings that are currently opened by another user or are read-only will be excluded from the synchronization. Before the synchronization of the project is started, the program runs an internal check to see if there are drawings that cannot be synchronized at the time. If such drawings are found, the Synchronization Warning worksheet is displayed.
NOTE If a project drawing is opened by the same user who is trying to synchronize the project, no error warning is displayed. The program will detect that the drawing is open and will be able to make the synchronization changes to the open drawing.
If you get a warning message like this, you can either wait until all project drawings are available to you, or you can synchronize the project now, accepting that there are drawings that cannot be included.
1 Verify that the project you want to synchronize is the current project. For information on setting a project current, see "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
2 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Synchronize Project with Standards. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. If there are project drawings that are currently unavailable for synchronization, you will receive the following warning message:
Synchronization Exceptions | 357
3 Click Synchronize to synchronize all project drawings not listed in the warning worksheet. 4 When the Synchronization dialog is opened, follow the instructions in "Synchronizing a Project with AEC
Standards" on page 356.
Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AEC Standards
Use this procedure to synchronize a project drawing with the AEC project standards. NOTE If you have selected automatic or semi-automatic synchronization in your standards configuration, the synchronization is automatically started every time you open the project drawing. For information on setting the synchronization mode, see "Synchronization Options" on page 334.
1 Open the project drawing you want to synchronize. 2 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Synchronize Drawing with Standards
If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. Synchronizing a project drawing with AEC standards
Two lists are displayed. The top list shows styles and display settings that have corresponding styles or display settings in the project standards, but are either an older version of a standard style or display setting, or a nonstandard (newer) version. The bottom list shows a list of styles and display settings that do not have corresponding styles or display settings in the standards (not standardized styles and display settings). For a definition of the terms, see "Project Standards Terminology" on page 326. 3 To synchronize a style or display setting that is either an older version or a nonstandard (newer) version, select Update from Standards from the Action drop-down list. 4 To skip over a style or display setting that is either an older version or a nonstandard (newer) version, select Do not Update from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the nonstandard version remains in the project drawing for now, and is not updated with the standard version. The next time the drawing is synchronized, the style or display settings will be listed again as older version or nonstandard version.
358 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
5 To ignore a style or display setting that is either an older version or a nonstandard version, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the nonstandard version will not be listed again in future synchronizations, except if you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization, or remove the Ignore flag from the style or display setting in Style Manager or Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 362. You should use the Ignore option only in clearly defined exception cases where you are sure that a style or display setting does not need to conform to the project standards.
6 To skip over a not standardized style or display setting, select Skip from the Action drop-down list. The next time the drawing is synchronized, the style or display setting will be listed again as not standardized. NOTE You cannot promote not standardized styles and display settings to standard ones here. To do this, you need to add the not standardized style to the project standards, as described in "Adding Standard Objects from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing" on page 374.
7 To ignore a not standardized style or display setting, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the not standardized object will not be listed again in future synchronizations, except if you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization, or remove the Ignore flag from the style or display setting in Style Manager or Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 362.
8 Click OK.
Synchronizing Selected Styles and Display Settings with AEC Standards
You can synchronize individual styles and display settings in Style Manager and Display Manager. You could do this if you have accidentally changed a style in the project drawing, and want to restore the correct version from the project standards. Synchronizing an individual style or display setting will take less time than synchronizing a drawing or the project. Standard styles in Style Manager
This process only synchronizes styles and display settings in a project drawing with the standards. It does not synchronize styles and display settings in different standards drawings with each other. For information on synchronizing standards drawings among themselves, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377.
Synchronizing Selected Styles and Display Settings with AEC Standards | 359
Standard Icons
Standard styles and display settings are displayed in Style Manager and Display Manager. Depending on their status with regards to the project standards, there are a number of different icons to differentiate them.
Icon
Description
Standard style or display setting When a blue icon appears on a style or display setting in a project drawing or project standards drawing, the style or display setting is a standard one and is in synch with the standard. No update or synchronization is necessary.
Standard style or display setting that is outdated When this icon appears on a style or display setting in a project drawing, the style or display setting is a standard one, but is out of date. This means that the corresponding style or display setting in the project standards drawing has a newer GUID than the one in the project drawing. To update the style or display setting in the project drawing, see "Synchronizing Individual Styles with AEC Standards" on page 361 and "Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards" on page 362.
Standard style or display setting that has a non-standard (newer) version When this icon appears on a style or display setting in a project drawing, the object is a standard object, but has a version GUID that cannot be found in the project standards. If you encounter this icon, you can either overwrite the non-standard version with the current version from the standards drawing, as described in "Synchronizing Individual Styles with AEC Standards" on page 361 and "Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards" on page 362, or you can update the standards with the version from the project drawing, as described in "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing" on page 373.
Standard style or display setting that is excluded from synchronization When this icon appears on a style or display setting, the object is excluded from synchronization. For more information, see "Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 362.
Standard style or display setting that has no version information When this icon appears on a style or display setting in a project standards drawing, the style or display setting has no version information. Version information can be deleted, as described in "Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing" on page 376.
To add version information to a style or display setting, see "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 371.
Standard style or display setting that has been changed, but not versioned When this icon appears on a style or display setting in a project standards drawing, the object has been modified, but not versioned yet. In order for the changes to be included in the synchronization, the object must be versioned, as described in "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 371.
This icon appears only in project standards drawings. Changes in project drawings are versioned automatically when you click Apply or OK in Style Manager or Display Manager.
Not standardized style or display setting When a gray icon appears on a style or display setting in a project drawing, this object has no equivalent in the project standards, or (in the case of styles) the equivalent style in the project standards has not been associated with that style type in the project standards configuration.
When this icon appears on a style in a project standards drawing, the style type it belongs to has not been associated with the corresponding standard style type in the project configuration setup. For example, if the Wall style type in the standards configuration has been associated with the Standards Drawing "Wall Styles 1.dwg" then the wall styles in "Wall Styles 1.dwg" will be displayed as standard styles in the Style Manager. The wall styles in "Wall Styles 2.dwg" will be displayed as not standardized styles.
Overview: Styles in Project Drawings You can synchronize individual styles in a project drawing.
All styles in a project drawing
360 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Style Categories: You can synchronize all styles contained in a style category. For example, you can synchronize all styles contained in Documentation Objects, if you have made changes to property set definitions, table styles, and data formats.
Style types: You can synchronize all styles belonging to a style type. For example, you can synchronize all wall styles or all door styles.
Styles: You can synchronize individual styles. You could do this if you have made a single change to a standard style, and do not want to start a complete synchronization of the drawing.
Overview: Display Settings in Project Drawings You can synchronize individual components of the display system in a project drawing.
Display Manager tree
All display settings in a project drawing: You can synchronize all display settings in a project drawing. This includes display configurations, display sets, and display representations.
Display configurations: You can synchronize either an individual display configuration or all display configurations in the drawing. NOTE A change to the cut plane is not a versionable change. If you change the cut plane, and synchronize the display configuration with the project standards, the changed cut plane will not be overwritten with the project standard.
Display Sets: You can either synchronize an individual display set or all display sets in the drawing, NOTE Changes to the Live Section settings are not a versionable change. If you change the Live Section settings, and synchronize the display set with the project standards, the changed Live Section settings will not be overwritten with the project standard.
Display representations: You can either synchronize an individual display representation, all display representations of an object type, or all display representations in the drawing.
Synchronizing Individual Styles with AEC Standards Use this procedure to synchronize styles in a project drawing.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 In the Style Manager tree, navigate to the style, style type, or style category you want to synchronize. 3 Select the object in the tree, right-click, and click Synchronize with Project Standards.
Synchronizing Selected Styles and Display Settings with AEC Standards | 361
4 In the Synchronize Drawing with Project Standards dialog box, select Update from Standard from the Action drop-down list for each object that should be synchronized.
5 Click OK.
Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards Use this procedure to synchronize display settings in a project drawing.
NOTE Display settings should always be synchronized with the latest standard settings. Out-of-synch display settings in a project can cause objects to be displayed inconsistently.
1 Click Format menu Display Manager. 2 In the Display Manager tree, navigate to the object you want to synchronize.
You can synchronize the following objects:
All display settings in a drawing all display configurations single display configuration all display sets single display set all display representations all display representations of an object type a single display representation on an object type
3 Select the object in the tree, right-click, and click Synchronize with Project Standards. 4 In the Synchronize Drawing with Project Standards dialog box, select Update from Standard from the
Action drop-down list for each object that should be synchronized. 5 Click OK.
Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization Use this procedure to specify individual styles and display settings that you want to be ignored during synchronization. Specified styles and display settings will not be overwritten with standards during automatic synchronization and will not be displayed as version mismatches during semi-automatic or manual synchronization, unless you select the Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization check box in the Synchronization dialog box.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager or Display Manager. 2 Navigate to the style or display setting to be excluded, right-click, and click Ignore During Synchronization.
Note that the Ignore During Synchronization option now has a check mark next to it. If you click the option again, the check mark disappears and the selected style or display setting is removed from the list of components to be ignored.
Generating a Synchronization Report
When you synchronize a project or a project drawing, you can save a synchronization report in HTML or XML format. You can define in the project setup whether a synchronization report should be generated when synchronizing a project.
1 Verify that the creation of synchronization log files has been activated in the project configuration, as described in "Setting up Synchronization of AEC Standards" on page 335.
2 Synchronize a project or a drawing with its standards, as described in "Synchronizing a Project with AEC Standards" on page 356 or "Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AEC Standards" on page 358. When the synchronization is finished, the Save Project Standards Report dialog box is displayed.
362 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
3 Select a file location and enter a name for the synchronization report. 4 Click Save. The report is saved as an HTML or XML document in the specified location. You can open it with a Web Browser or an XML editor. The report offers you various ways to display synchronization results; for example, you can view the synchronization results by drawing, by standard objects, or by problems encountered.
Synchronizing a Project with AutoCAD Standards
Use this procedure to synchronize a project with its AutoCAD standards. For information on defining AutoCAD standards for a project, see "Setting up AutoCAD Standards" on page 336. When you set up AutoCAD standards for a project, a CHX batch checker file with the project name is created in the project folder. The CHX file contains a list of all project drawings as drawings to be checked, and a list of all specified AutoCAD standards files (DWS) as files to check against. If you want to synchronize a whole project against the AutoCAD standards, you need to run this batch file using the AutoCAD Batch Standards Checker. The AutoCAD Batch Standards Checker runs independently from Autodesk Architectural Desktop. Before you start the AutoCAD Batch Standards Checker, you should update the project CHX file to make sure the CHX contains the current list of AutoCAD standard files and project files.
1 Verify that the project you want to check is the current project. For information on setting a project current, see "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
2 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Update Project AutoCAD CAD Standards. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. A progress bar indicates the progress of the CHX update.
3 Click Start (Windows) menu All Programs (or Programs) Autodesk Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Batch Standards Checker.
4 Click File menu Open Check File. 5 In the File Open dialog box, select the project CHX file.
Synchronizing a Project with AutoCAD Standards | 363
Batch Standards Checker
6 Click Check menu Start Check. For more information about AutoCAD standards, see "Maintain Standards in Drawings" in AutoCAD help.
Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AutoCAD Standards
Use this procedure to synchronize a project drawing with its associated AutoCAD standards. AutoCAD standards include AutoCAD layer settings, AutoCAD dimension styles, linetypes, and text styles.
1 Open the drawing you want to synchronize with AutoCAD standards. 2 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Update Project AutoCAD CAD Standards.
A progress bar indicates the progress of the CHX update. 3 Click CAD Manager menu CAD Standard Check.
If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
Under Problem, the first AutoCAD dimension style, text style, layer, or linetype style that is inconsistent with the AutoCAD standards of the project is listed. 4 To synchronize the component with the project standards, select one of the styles listed under Replace with, and click Fix. 5 To retain the not standardized component in the drawing, click Mark this Problem as ignored. 6 Click Next to display the next not standardized component. When all problem components have been processed, a message displays with a summary of the problems. 7 Click OK, and then click Close.
364 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Auditing a Project or a Drawing
When a project or a drawing is audited, the styles and display settings in the project drawing are compared with those of the project standards, and any out-of-synch standards will be reported. Out-of-synch standards can appear in these cases:
A style or display setting in a project drawing has changed and needs to be updated with the correct version from the project standards.
A style or display setting in the project standards has changed and needs to be updated in the project drawings. Not standardized styles and display settings have been introduced in a project drawing.
You could for example run an audit on drawings that come from contractors, or from other outside sources. Before you synchronize the drawings with the project standards, you first want to look at what actually is different between the drawings and the standards. For information on synchronizing standards, see "Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AEC Standards" on page 358.
NOTE A drawing needs to be part of a project to be audited against project standards. You cannot audit standalone drawings. If a drawing had been outsourced, it needs to be copied back into the project before it can be audited. For more information, see "Converting a Legacy Drawing to a Construct" on page 218.
The result of the audit is placed in an HTML or XML audit report. 1 If you want to run an audit of the complete project, click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Audit Project. If you want to create an audit report of the current project drawing, click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Audit Drawing. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. When the audit is finished, the Save Project Standards Report dialog box is displayed.
2 Select a file location and enter a name for the synchronization report. 3 Click Save. The report is saved as an HTML or XML document in the specified location. You can open it with a Web Browser or an XML editor. The report offers you various ways to display audit results; for example, you can view the audit results by drawing, by standard objects, or by problems encountered.
Showing Display Overrides in Project Drawings
To keep project drawings synchronized, it is important to control the properties and display properties of building objects by style, to be able to update the objects when the project standards change. Introducing object-level overrides makes it impossible for the overridden objects to be updated through the synchronization process when project standards change.
Auditing a Project or a Drawing | 365
Use this procedure to detect object-level overrides on style-based objects in the current drawing.
1 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Show Display Overrides. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
2 On the command line, enter a display option:
If you want to...
Then...
highlight the overridden objects in the drawing enter O (byObject). area.
display a list of overridden objects in the AutoCAD command window
enter S (byStyle)
highlight the objects and display a list in the AutoCAD command window
enter B (Both).
3 Remove any object-level overrides.
Editing Project Drawings Outside the Project
You need to work on a project drawing outside of a project in any of the following cases:
A drawing is edited by an outside contractor.
A user wants to work on a drawing offline without access to the project.
A drawing has been created outside the project and is integrated into the project later.
When you are working with a project drawing outside of a project, you can use the drawing's standard styles and display settings, but they cannot be updated with changes that are made to the project standards during that time. So it is important to synchronize the drawing after it has been re-integrated into the project.
If you have made changes to standard styles and display settings in the project drawing during working outside the project, a new version of the styles and display settings is created automatically to track the changes when synchronizing the drawing with the project standards. You can select to either overwrite the new version with the current version from the project standards, or you can update the project standards with the version from the project drawing. For more information, see "Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AEC Standards" on page 358 and "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing" on page 373.
Creating a New Project Standards Drawing
Project standards drawings are assigned to a project, but are not project drawings like elements, constructs, views, and sheets. The styles and display settings in project drawings are compared with the standards and updated as necessary during the synchronization process.
To create a project standards drawing, you need to create a drawing file or a drawing template containing styles and display settings that should be used in the project.
For example, you can create one drawing that contains the standard wall styles, and another one that contains the standard door styles, or mask block definitions.
Project standard files can be of the file format DWG, DWT, or DWS. If you select the DWS format for your standards drawings, you can simultaneously use them as your AutoCAD standards drawings.
A project standards drawing is a regular drawing file. The definition of the drawing as a project standards drawing is created when the drawing is added as a project standards drawing to the standards configuration of a project, as described in "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331.
366 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Styles vs. Display Settings
You can assign multiple standards drawings for project styles. During synchronization, project drawings are compared against the project standards drawings in the order you establish in the project standards configuration. If a style is located in multiple standards drawings, the first instance in the search order is used as the standard. For display settings, you can assign only a single standards drawing. It must contain all standard display settings for the project. Note, however, that the same standards drawing can be used for both styles and display settings.
File Location of Project Standards Drawings
You can choose two different options for storing project standards drawings:
Project Folder
If the project standards drawings are located within the project, they are treated as project specific. Typically, drawings containing project-specific standards are stored inside the project folder. For example, if you create styles for only one building project, you would place them in a project-specific standards drawing within the project folder. Placing standards drawings under the project folder has the following implications:
When you use the project as a template for a new project, the project standards drawings are copied to the new project, and repathed to their new location.
If you copy the standards of the project to another project, the project standards drawings are copied to that project. If you synchronize project standards drawings with each other, only standards drawings within the project will be
included in the synchronization. For more information, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377. The standards drawings are included in e-transmit and archiving packages created of the project.
You would place your standards drawings within the project if you want to keep the standards drawings specific to that project. You can copy the standards drawings to a new project, but any changes you make to one set of the standards drawings will not be propagated to the other one.
A Folder Outside the Project
If project standards drawings are located outside the project, they are referenced from that location. You would do this typically for standards that are not specific to a project, but rather to the department or the company. In that case, copying the standards to individual projects would create a risk of version discrepancies being introduced in the multiple copies. Also, a change made to a company-wide standards file would not be automatically propagated to all projects using that standards file. Placing a standards drawing outside the project has the following implications:
When you use the project as a template for a new project, the project standards drawings are not copied to the new project. They are referenced from their original location.
If you copy the standards of the project to another project, the project standards drawings are referenced from their original location in the other project.
If you synchronize project standards drawings with each other, standards drawings outside the project will not be included in the synchronization. For more information, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377.
The standards drawings outside the project folder are not included in e-transmit and archiving packages created of the project. For more information, see "Electronically Transmitting a Project" on page 184.
1 Open a new drawing file. 2 Add the standard styles and display settings you need in this project.
For more information, see "Style Manager" on page 451, "Display System" on page 411, and the relevant object chapters.
Creating a New Project Standards Drawing | 367
3 Save the drawing as DWG, DWT, or DWS format.
If you want to... make the standards drawing specific to a project
Then... save it within the project folder.
NOTE You can create subfolders for standards drawings.
make the standards drawing available for general use save it outside the project folder. within the company or team
4 Associate the standards drawing with a project, as described in "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331.
Updating Project Standards Drawings
When a standard style or display setting changes during the lifecycle of a project, it needs to be versioned, saved, and then updated in the project drawings and the other project standards drawings.
A standard component can be either changed directly in the standards drawing, or be updated from a project drawing. For more information, see "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 371 and "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing" on page 373.
Updating AEC project standards drawings
Process Overview: Updating AEC Standards in a Project
When a change is made to an AEC project standard, the following high-level steps need to be performed throughout the project:
Step 1: Make a change to a standard style or display setting in a project standards drawing. Step 2: Version the changed style or display setting in Style Manager or Display Manager, and save or close the
standards drawing. For more information, see "Versioning Standards" on page 368. Step 3: Synchronize the project, individual project drawings, or individual styles or display settings with the
changed standard. For more information, see "Synchronizing a Project with the Standards" on page 353. Step 4: It is recommended that you synchronize all other project standards drawings with the change. For more
information, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377.
Versioning Standards
Styles and display settings in project standards drawings and project drawings have a version. The version is used to determine whether a style or display setting needs to be synchronized. The version information includes a unique GUID (Global Unique Identifier), the date and time of the last modification, the Windows login name of the user who last modified the object, and an optional comment.
368 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Version Comparison
When a project is audited or synchronized with its standards, the comparison of the versions determines whether styles and display settings in the project are identical, older, or newer than the project standard. Styles or display settings are considered identical to the project standards if the following are identical:
Object type (such as Wall style or display set) Name Version GUID
For determining whether a style in a project drawing is identical to a project standard style, the GUIDs of both are compared. The GUID is a unique string that is newly created for each version of a standard object. In the project standards drawing, a list of previous GUIDs is kept as a version history to enable comparison with objects in a project drawing. If the synchronization process finds a style or display setting in a project drawing that has the same type, name, and version GUID as the corresponding style or display setting in the project standards drawing, it concludes that the style or display setting is a standard one, and in synch with the object in the project standards drawing. In that case, no change is necessary. If the comparison finds that the GUID in the project drawing does not match the GUID of the style in the project standards drawing, but matches a previous GUID from the standard style version list, it labels the style in the project drawing an "older version of a standard style." If the comparison finds a style or display setting that matches a standard object in name and object type, but has a GUID not appearing in the version history of the standard style or display setting, the style or display setting in the project drawing is labeled "nonstandard (newer) version of standard object."
NOTE Synchronization does not perform a property-by-property comparison between the versions. The reason for this is that such a comparison would slow down the software considerably, and that the GUID, date and time stamp in the version information provides sufficient information to identify changes.
Creating Versions
A new version of a standard style or display setting in a project drawing is created automatically each time the style or display setting is changed in Style Manager or Display Manager. A new version of a standard style or display setting in a project standards drawing must be created manually when the style or display setting is changed in Style Manager or Display Manager. In project standards drawings, a version history for each standard style and display setting is also stored. The version history is used during synchronization to determine if styles or display settings in project drawings match the versions in the project standards drawing, or are newer or older versions.
Versioning Exceptions for Display Settings in Project Standards Drawings
There are a few cases where modifications to the display settings will not be automatically versioned, as this will in most use cases not be a desirable effect. Some settings will routinely vary from the standards drawing, so these settings will not be included in the automatic versioning process.
Display Configuration: Cut Plane Display Set: Surface Hatch on/off Display Set: Live Section on/off Wall display: wall graph toggle on/off
Version History
Standard styles and display settings in project standards drawings contain a version history for changes made to them during the project. You cannot roll back to a previous version of a standard object. The version history is only used to determine the current state of standard styles and display settings.
Versioning Standards | 369
Change Types in Project Standards Drawings
Different types of changes you can make to project standards require different actions to be applied throughout the project.
Change Type Modifying a standard style or display setting
Actions required Version style or display setting Save project standards drawing Synchronize project drawings Synchronize other project standards drawings (optional)
Renaming a standard style or display setting Adding a new standard style or display setting
Rename style or display setting Save project standards drawing Copy style or display setting to project drawings Assign style or display settings in project drawing Remove older name version from project drawings
NOTE Renaming a style is not considered a modification to the style and cannot be synchronized.
Create new style or display setting Save project standards drawing Copy style or display setting to project drawings Copy style or display setting to other project standards drawings (optional)
Deleting a standard style or display setting
Verify that the style or display setting is not needed anymore in the project Delete style or display setting Save project standards drawing Remove style or display setting from project drawings
Modifying a standard style or display setting: When you make a modification to a standard style or display setting (except for renaming), you need to synchronize the project drawings that use the style or display setting. If the standard style or display setting is used in other project standards drawings, they need to be synchronized, too.
Renaming a standard style or display setting: Renaming a style or display setting is similar to creating a new style. The previous version history of the renamed style remains. If you want to use the renamed object in a project drawing or in another project standards drawing, you need to copy it there. Any instances of the older name in a project drawing or a project standards drawing should be deleted.
Adding a new standard style or display setting: If you have added a new standard style or display setting to a standards drawing and want to use the style in a project drawing or in another project standards drawing, you need to copy it through Style Manager and Display Manager or through tool palettes to these drawings. For information on copying styles and display settings to project drawings, see "Adding Standards to a Project Drawing" on page 350. Once it has been copied, the new style or display setting will be included in future synchronizations.
Deleting a standard style or display setting: When you remove a standard style or display setting from a standards drawing, instances of that style in project drawings will be identified as not standardized in subsequent synchronizations. The not standardized instances should be removed from these drawings, as well.
NOTE Standard styles and display settings can only be deleted in their standards drawings. The synchronization does not delete unused standard styles or display settings.
370 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing
You can change a standard style or display setting in a project standards drawing. When a change has been made, you must version it and then synchronize the project with the change.
When you change a standard style or display setting directly in the standards drawing, you do not need to version every single change. Many changes may be necessary to create a standard style or display setting in its final form; to create a version for every intermediate stage would slow down the process. unnecessarily.
You can make multiple changes, save and close the drawing, reopen it, and then version the style or display setting when it is ready for propagating in the project. As long as the changes are saved to the project standards drawing, no edits will be lost, even without versioning in between.
WARNING As long as your changes are saved, but not versioned, any synchronizations taking place during that time will not recognize the styles and display settings as changed, since the object comparison is performed on the version GUID, and not the actual object properties. As a consequence, changed but unversioned styles and display settings in the project standards will not be updated in the project drawings. To have the changes synchronized with the project, you need to version the styles or display settings first.
To make changes to a project standards drawing, you must have write access to the drawing. If a standards drawing is
read-only, it is marked with a Lock icon (
) in Style Manager or Display Manager. You can make changes to that
drawing, but you cannot save them. If you need to make changes to a locked drawing, contact the drawing owner or
CAD manager.
Standards drawings and standard styles under the project node
Changing a standard style or display setting 1 Open a project standards drawing. 2 Click Format menu Style Manager or Display Manager. TIP All standards drawings are listed under the project node in Style Manager and Display Manager. 3 Select the style or display setting you want to edit, and make your changes.
Versioning changed styles and display settings 4 Click the Version History tab of the changed style or display setting.
Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing | 371
5 Click Version.
6 If necessary, enter a comment for the new version. 7 Click OK.
The new version is appended to the Version History tab. 8 To version multiple styles or display settings in a project standards drawing, select a group of objects and
version them:
9 Select the styles or display settings that should be versioned. 10 If desired, enter a comment.
The comment will be applied to all objects selected for versioning. 11 Click OK.
NOTE To version all styles and display settings in a drawing, click AEC Project Standards Version Modified Objects on the CAD Manager menu. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
372 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing
You can change a standard style or display setting in a project standards drawing by overwriting it with the corresponding style or display setting from a project drawing. When you have updated the project standard from a project drawing, the project needs to be synchronized to use the updated styles and display settings. For information, see "Synchronizing a Project with the Standards" on page 353.
NOTE Before you change a project standard from a project drawing, you should verify that this is the correct procedure. Once the project standard has been changed, the style or display setting will be updated in all project drawings during the next project synchronization, if automatic synchronization is selected.
To make changes to a standards drawing, you must have write access to the drawing. If a standards drawing is read-only,
it is marked with a Lock icon (
) in Style Manager or Display Manager. You can make changes to that drawing,
but you cannot save them. If you need to make changes to a locked drawing, contact the drawing owner or CAD
manager.
1 Open a project drawing from Project Navigator.
2 Click Format menu Style Manager or Display Manager.
3 Expand the node of the project drawing, and select the standard style or display setting with which you want to update the project standards.
NOTE A standard style or display setting in a project drawing is marked with a blue icon. If a style or display setting is displayed with a gray icon, it is not a standard style or display setting. In that case, you can add it to the project standards, as described in "Adding Standard Objects from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing" on page 374.
4 Right-click, and click Update Standards from Drawing. NOTE You can select multiple objects here.
The selected style or display setting is listed in the top panel.
5 To update the project standards from a style or display setting in the project drawing, select Update Project Standards from the Action drop-down list of the style or display setting.
6 To not update the project standards from a style or display setting in the project drawing, select Do not Update Project Standards from the Action drop-down list of the style or display setting. In this case, the version in the project standards is not overwritten with the version in the project drawing. During the next synchronization of the project drawing, the style or display setting will be displayed as out of synch with the project standards.
7 To ignore the out of synch version of the style or display setting, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list.
Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing | 373
In this case, the style or display setting will not be displayed in future updates, except when you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization or remove the Ignore flag from the style or display setting in Style Manager or Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 362. 8 Click OK. 9 In Style Manager or Display Manager, click OK or Apply. 10 Click Yes to save the updated project standards drawing.
Adding Standard Objects from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing
You can add not standardized styles or display settings from the current project drawing to the project standards. You can do this, for example, if you have created a complex style in a project drawing and want to include that in your standards. If you want to add a style to the project standards in this way, in addition to copying the style to the standards drawing you need to verify that the style type in question has been selected for that standards drawing in the project configuration. Otherwise, it will not be used as a standard. For example, if you copy a wall style from a project drawing to the standards drawing "Standards 1.dwg," you need to make sure that in the project configuration the Wall Style type has been checked for "Standards 1.dwg." For more information, see "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331. After copying a style or display setting to the project standards, you need to synchronize the project to use the new standard object.
1 Open a project drawing from Project Navigator. 2 Click Format menu Style Manager or Display Manager. 3 Add a new style or display setting to the current project drawing. 4 Select the new style or display setting, right-click, and click Update Standards from Drawing.
NOTE You can select multiple items here.
The new style or display setting is listed in the lower panel, which displays styles and display settings in the project drawing that do not exist in the project standards. 5 To add the style or display setting to a project standards drawing, and thereby make it a standard style or display setting, select Add to Project Standards in the Action drop-down list.
NOTE If you are adding a display setting to the project standards, it is added to the display standards drawing. If you are adding a style to the project standards, it is added to the first project standards drawing in the search order that has been associated with that style type in the project standards configuration, as described in "Setting up Standard Styles and Display Settings" on page 331.
6 To skip over the not standardized style or display setting select Skip from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the not standardized object remains in the project drawing, and is not entered in the standards.
374 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
7 To ignore the style or display setting, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the not standardized object will not be listed again in future updates, except if you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization or remove the Ignore flag from the style or display setting in Style Manager or Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Styles and Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 362.
8 Click OK. 9 In Style Manager or Display Manager, click OK or Apply. 10 Click Yes to save the updated project standards drawing.
Editing the Version History of a Standard Object
Each style and display setting in a project standards drawing has a version history. The version history displays the unique version identifier (GUID), date and time of the modification, user name and any additional comments entered by the user. You can edit the history by selectively removing individual versions, or removing all versions.
1 Open a project standards drawing. 2 Click Format menu Style Manager or Display Manager. 3 Select the standard style from the project standards node of the tree. 4 Click the Version History tab.
5 To add a new version, click Version, and enter the versioning information. 6 To remove an existing version, select the version from the Version History list, and click Remove.
To remove all versions in one step, click Remove All. 7 If you want the style or display setting to be ignored during synchronization of standards, select Ignore
during project standards synchronization. 8 Click OK.
Versioning a Project Standards Drawing
You can version all styles and display settings in a project standards drawing in a one step. 1 Open a project standards drawing. 2 Click CAD Manager menu AEC Project Standards Version Modified Objects.
Editing the Version History of a Standard Object | 375
NOTE If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
3 Select the styles or display settings that should be versioned. 4 If desired, enter a comment.
The comment will be applied to all objects selected for versioning. 5 Click OK.
Purging the Version History from a Project Standards Drawing
You can remove the version history from all standard styles and display settings in a project standards drawing with one command. Purging the version history will remove all versions except the current one from the standard styles and display settings. You can do that to avoid cluttering your styles and display settings. When you purge the version history, no version GUID except for the current one remains. That means that the synchronization can no longer distinguish between an older version of a standard style and a non standard version of a style. Each style in a project drawing that does not have the current GUID of the corresponding standard style, will be labeled a "non-standard," or newer version.
1 Verify that the project with which the project standards drawing is associated is the current project. 2 Open the Project Standards drawing from which you want to purge the version history.
NOTE Project standards drawings do not appear on the Project Navigator. You need to open them with the standard File Open command.
3 On the command line, enter AecClearVersionHistory. The version history is removed from all standard styles and display settings in the drawing.
Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing
You can remove the version information from all standard styles and display settings in a project standards drawing. When you remove the version information, the version history and the current version information is deleted. When you run a synchronization, the standard style or display setting still participates in the synchronization and is considered the latest version when comparing with versions of the object in project drawings. No attempt is made during synchronization to automatically create a version GUID or history list. If you want to add version information to the standard style or display setting, you need to manually version the object as described in "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 371.
1 Verify that the project with which the project standards drawing is associated is set current. 2 Open the project standards drawing from which you want to remove the version information.
376 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
NOTE Project standards drawings do not appear on the Project Navigator. You need to open them with the standard File Open command.
3 On the command line, enter AecPurgeVersion. The version information is removed from all standard styles and display settings in the drawing.
NOTE To re-add a version to all styles or display settings in the drawing, open Style Manager or Display Manager, select the drawing in the tree, right-click, and click Version Drawing.
Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other
Project standard styles and display settings can be distributed among multiple standards drawings, and depend on each other. For example, the styles in a styles drawing should use the display settings from the standard display drawing. If display changes are introduced in a standard styles drawing, and not synchronized with the standard display drawing, styles can display inconsistently across the project. Therefore, you should synchronize project standards drawings with each other when changes have been made to individual standards drawings. You can synchronize project standards drawings among themselves either from the project standards node in Style Manager and Display Manager, or from the CAD Manager menu. When project standards drawings are synchronized among themselves, the following criteria are used to determine how the objects are updated:
Standards drawing type: The display settings in the Standards display drawing update the display settings in all standard styles drawings.
Assigned style types: When a drawing has been associated with a style type in the standards configuration setup, the styles in this drawing will update all other standards drawings that may contain standard styles of that type. For example, if the standards drawing "Door Styles.dwg" has been associated with the Door style type, the styles in that drawing will overwrite any existing door standard styles in all of the other standards drawings. Note that in most cases, you will not place standard styles anywhere but in the designated standards drawing for that style type.
Search order: When more than one standards drawings in the standards configuration setup have been associated with a style type, the first standards drawing in the search order will update all other drawings associated with that style type.
Synchronizing project standards drawings among themselves is an automatic synchronization process, where no user interaction is possible. That means that no styles or display settings can be excluded from the synchronization process.
1 Verify that the project of which you want to synchronize the standards is the current project. 2 Click Format menu Style Manager or Display Manager. 3 Select the project node in the tree view, right-click, and click Synchronize Project Standards Drawings. 4 When the synchronization is finished, click OK to exit Style Manager or Display Manager.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click AEC Project Standards Synchronize Project Standards on the CAD Manager menu. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear on your menu bar, click Window Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
Editing Project Standards Drawings Outside the Project
You can edit project standards drawings outside the current project. This could happen, if you need to work offline, without access to the project, or if you want to work on a project standards drawing that is not part of the current project. The following high-level steps are necessary to edit a project standards drawing outside of a project:
Step 1: If necessary, copy the project standards drawing to an offline location outside the project.
Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other | 377
Step 2: Open the project standards drawing, and open Style Manager or Display Manager. Step 3: Edit the styles or display settings as necessary.
NOTE If the style or display setting you are editing already has a version history within the project, the version history is displayed in Style Manager or Display Manager.
Step 4: Upon closing Style Manager or Display Manager, you are prompted to version changed styles or display settings. Version them just like you would within the project.
Step 5: Save and close the project standards drawing. Step 6: If necessary, copy the project standards drawing back to the project. Step 7: Set the project current, and start a synchronization to propagate the changed styles and display settings
to the project.
Scripting Project Standards Commands
Commands can help you automate the standards in your project by scripting your workflows and processes. The following commands are available for the project standards feature:
Command AecProjectStandards
AecSynchronizeProjectDrawing
Description
Launches the Configure AEC Project Standards dialog box for the current project. For more information, see "Configuring Project Standards" on page 331.
Synchronizes the current drawing with the project standards.
TIP To run this command without user interaction, make sure the automatic synchronization option is selected, as described in "Setting up Synchronization of AEC Standards" on page 335.
AecSynchronizeProject
Synchronizes the current project with the project standards.
TIP To run this command without user interaction, make sure the automatic synchronization option is selected, as described in "Setting up Synchronization of AEC Standards" on page 335.
AecAuditProjectDrawing AecAuditProject AecShowObjectDisplayOverrides
AecVersionModifiedObjects
Audits the current drawing against the project standards. For more information, see "Auditing a Project or a Drawing" on page 365
Audits the current project against the project standards. For more information, see "Auditing a Project or a Drawing" on page 365
Identifies objects in the current drawing that have their display properties overridden at the object level. For more information, see "Showing Display Overrides in Project Drawings" on page 365.
Versions all modified styles and display settings in the current drawing. For more information, see "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 371.
NOTE This command works only with project standards drawings.
AecProjectStandardsSetupReport AecUpdateStandards
Generates a tracking report for the project standards setup. For more information, see "Generating a Project Standards Setup Report" on page 339.
Updates the project standards with the styles and display settings from the current drawing. For more information, see "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing" on page 373.
378 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Command AecPurgeVersion
Description
Purges the version information from all styles and display settings in the current drawing. For more information, see "Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing" on page 376.
NOTE This command works only with project standards drawings.
AecClearVersionHistory
Purges the version history from all styles and display settings in the current drawing, except for the current version. For more information, see "Purging the Version History from a Project Standards Drawing" on page 376.
NOTE This command works only with project standards drawings.
AecSynchronizeStandards AecUpdateProjectCADStandards
Synchronizes the project standards drawings of the current project among themselves. For more information, see "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 377.
Updates the project's CAD Standards Batch Standards Checker CHX file. It also updates the CAD Standards file associations with each drawing in the current project.
NOTE The commands for the Drawing Management feature can also be useful for creating scripts for project standards. For more information, see "Running Drawing Management from the Command Line" on page 313.
Scripting Project Standards Commands | 379
380 | Chapter 7 Project Standards
Layer Management
8
Enhanced layer management is necessary to create, view, and modify the numerous and diverse elements of architectural plans. Use the Layer Manager in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to effectively organize and manage conceptual groupings in a drawing.
381
Layer Management
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop adds layer standards, layer keying, layer filtering, and a layer management interface--the Layer Manager--to the layering capabilities included in AutoCAD®. These additional features help you standardize, automate, and manage the use of layers in your office, in your projects, and in your drawings. Layer Standards Layer standards establish naming conventions for layers in your drawings. A layer standard contains a set of rules that determines the structure of the layer names in a drawing. When you install the software, you can select from a number of layer standards that you can use. You can change or edit each of the layer standards later, if needed. Layer Keys and Layer Key Styles Each layer standard has a corresponding layer key style. A layer key style contains a set of layer keys. The layer keys in the layer key style assign objects to predefined layers with names that conform to the layer standard. When you add an object, the object is automatically drawn on the layer assigned to it in the current layer key style. This process is called layer keying. Viewing the layer keys and layers in a layer key style
You can change any part of the layer name structure using layer key overrides within the layer key style. You can override the layer names for all the layer keys in a layer key style, or you can override individual layer key styles. Layer Manager You can access layer standards, layer key styles, layer filters, and layer overrides, as well as other layering features, in the Layer Manager. The Layer Manager helps you organize, sort, and group layers, as well as save and coordinate layering schemes. In the Layer Manager you can:
Change layer properties by clicking AutoCAD® layer property icons Make a layer the current layer Create, rename, and delete layers Work with layer standards and layer key styles Create layer groups and layer snapshots
When you display the Layer Manager, all the layers in the current drawing are displayed in the All layer group. If there are any external reference files linked to the drawing, the layers are listed in an XRef layer group. Viewing layers in the Layer Manager Layer Filters You can create layer filters to manage large sets of layers. You can specify the visibility of all the layers in the filter by changing the layer filter properties. The Layer Manager allows you to create three types of layer filters: group filters, property filters, and layer standards filters. Group filters can contain any layers that you put in them, while property groups contain only layers that meet criteria that you specify. Standards filters contain layers associated with a specified standards category.
382 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Layer Snapshots
In addition to layer filter, the Layer Manager allows you to save layers and their settings as layer snapshots, similar to taking a picture of a layer set that you can restore and view later. By saving layer and view information in a snapshot, you can quickly recall specific layer and view configurations from complex data sets. For example, a facilities manager might create snapshots of individual floor plans and furniture, cable, and HVAC layouts to separate this information from a complete building layout.
Managing Drawing Layers
The Layer Manager helps you organize, sort, and group layers, as well as save and coordinate layering schemes. You can also use layer standards with the Layer Manager to better organize the layers in multiple drawings. When you open the Layer Manager, all the layers in the current drawing are displayed in the right pane. You can work with individual layers to:
Change layer properties Make a layer the current layer Create, rename, and delete layers
Opening the Layer Manager
Use this procedure to open the Layer Manager. When you open the Layer Manager, all the layers in the current drawing are displayed in the right pane of the Layer Manager and the layer groups are displayed in the left pane.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 To close the Layer Manager, click .
Making a Layer Current
Use this procedure to make a specific layer the current layer in the drawing. You must select an individual layer to make current. You cannot make multiple layers or layer groups current.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 In the right pane, double-click the layer that you want to make current.
You can also select the layer that you want to make current and click The selected layer is now the current layer and is marked with a green check in the Layer Manager. The layer name is displayed next to the Current Layer button near the top of the Layer Manager.
3 Click OK.
Creating a Layer with a Layer Standard
Use this procedure to create a layer that conforms to the layer standard. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop creates layers as needed according to the current layer standard. For example, when you add a wall to a drawing, the software creates the necessary wall layers if they do not yet exist. If you need to create layers for a specific purpose, use the fields and values of the layer standard.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the layer standard that you want to use for Layer Standard. 4 Specify the layer standard information.
Depending on the layer standard you are using, different fields are available here. For example, if you are using the AIA 2nd Edition standard, you have fields for Discipline Designator, Major, Minor 1, Minor 2, and Status. To select a value for one of the available fields, click the [...] button, and select one of the values.
Managing Drawing Layers | 383
You can also enter a new value, provided you follow the parameters specified for the layer standard components. When you are finished, the Layer Name and Description fields display the combination of values you have selected. If you have, for example, created a new layer for wall dimensions according to the AIA 2nd Edition layer standard, it is named A-Anno-Dims.
NOTE If the name of the new layer is the same as an existing layer in the current layer key style, the properties of the new layer are automatically updated with the properties of the existing layer.
5 Select Make Current if you want to make the layer the current layer. 6 Select a color for the layer from the list.
If the desired color is not available on the list, select Select Color, and select a color from the Color Picker.
7 Select a linetype. If the desired linetype is not available on the list, select Other, and select a linetype from the Select Linetype dialog box.
8 Select a lineweight. 9 Select a Plot Style.
Clear Plot if you do not want the new layer to be plotted.
10 Click OK twice.
Creating a Nonstandard Layer
Use this procedure to create a nonstandard layer. A nonstandard layer is a layer that does not need to conform to the naming and content standard of any layer standard. You might want to use nonstandard layers for elements like architect's comments or construction lines, blocks you do not want to insert on their original layer, or walls that you want to display partially.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select Non Standard for Layer Standard. 4 Enter a name for the new layer. 5 Select Make Current if you want to make the layer the current layer. 6 Enter a description for the new layer. 7 Select a color for the layer from the list.
If the desired color is not available on the list, select Select Color, and select a color from the Color Picker.
8 Select a linetype. If the desired linetype is not available on the list, select Other, and select a linetype from the Select Linetype dialog box.
9 Select a lineweight. 10 Select a Plot Style.
Clear Plot if you do not want the new layer to be plotted.
11 When you finish specifying the properties of the layer, click OK twice.
Renaming a Layer
Use this procedure to specify a new name for a layer. 1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 Select the layer that you want to rename, and click the layer name.
384 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
3 Enter a new name for the layer, and press ENTER. 4 Click OK.
Deleting a Layer
Use this procedure to delete a layer from a drawing. Keep the following points in mind when you delete layers:
If you try to delete a layer that still has objects on it, you receive an error message. To delete this layer, you must first erase all objects on it in the drawing.
If the layer you try to delete is the current layer, you receive an error message. To delete this layer, make another layer current and then delete the layer.
Some layers may be assigned to the components of another object, or even to other object styles. These layers cannot be deleted.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 Right-click the layer that you want to delete, and click Delete Layer.
The layer you have deleted is marked with a red "X." It is permanently deleted when you click Apply or OK.
NOTE If Apply Changes Immediately is selected, the layer is automatically deleted.
3 Click OK.
Changing the Layer Standard of a Layer
Use this procedure to assign a specific layer to a different layer standard. 1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 Right-click the layer that you want to change, and point to Change Layer Standard. 3 Select the layer standard that you want to use for Layer Standard. The layer you selected is now assigned to the specified layer standard.
NOTE If a layer standard is unavailable on the shortcut menu, the layer that you selected is not valid for that standard.
4 Click OK.
Editing the Description of a Layer
Use this procedure to change the description of a layer. 1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 Right-click the layer that you want to change, and click Change Description. 3 Enter a new description for the layer, and press ENTER. 4 Click OK.
Changing AEC Object Displays for a Layer
In previous versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, all AEC object displays on a layer would be turned off you when you turned off the layer. If you are using drawings from previous versions of the software, and you would like to maintain this functionality, specify the layering control setting for the drawing.
1 On the Format menu, select Drawing Setup. 2 Select the Layering tab.
Deleting a Layer | 385
3 Select Immediate and independent layer on/off control of display components. 4 Click OK.
Working with Layer Groups
With the Layer Manager, you can create different layer groups to produce working views and backgrounds from large building data sets. Layer groups help you work more efficiently in drawings that have many layers. You can change the settings of a layer group to apply the changes to all layers in the group at one time. For example, you can lock a layer group to lock all the layers in the filter.
Types of Layer Groups There are five types of layer groups:
Type All Xref
group filters property filters layer standards filters
Description
Is always present and lists all the layers and other layer groups in the drawing.
Lists any layers in external reference files linked with the current drawing. This group is automatically created when you xref a drawing into the current drawing.
Contain layers that you have assigned to them.
Contain layers based on a filter that you specify for the group. You can base filters on layer names and other layer properties.
Contain layers associated with a specified standards category.
Rules for Layer Groups
The following group rules apply when you are creating and working with layer groups:
You can list a layer in more than one layer group. Multiple listings of the same layer must always have identical property settings. For example, a layer that is a
member of two groups cannot be a different color in each group. You cannot list a layer twice in a group. You can delete layer groups without affecting the layers in the group. Changing one of the properties of a layer group changes that property for all the layers in that group, except where
the change would be invalid. For example, it is not possible to freeze the current layer. Layer group names need not be unique. There is no naming convention for layer groups. Group names can include spaces, nonalphanumeric characters,
and both uppercase and lowercase letters. Xref layer groups cannot contain other filter groups.
Managing Layer Groups
You can add and subtract layers from layer groups. You can change the standard AutoCAD® properties for the layers in groups, rename layer groups, delete layer groups, and change the filters in filter groups.
Types of Layer Filters
With the Layer Manager, you can create three types of layer filters: group filters, property filters, and layer standards filters.
Group filters can contain any layers in the current drawing. You can manually add layers to, and remove layers from, group filters by dragging layers within the Layer Manager into the group filter or by selecting an object in the drawing on the layer that you want to add to the group filter.
386 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Group filters are considered static because they are not automatically updated. They include only the layers that were assigned when the group was created. You can manually add layers to, and remove layers from, group filters.
Property filters contain layers that meet filter criteria that you specify for the group. Filter criteria can select layers according to layer states (on/off, frozen/thawed, locked/unlocked), properties, or names. For example, you can create a property filter that includes all of the red layers in the current drawing.
Property groups are considered dynamic because they are automatically updated when you change the properties of layers that are part of the group. Property filters are also updated when you add or modify layers that meet the criteria specified in the filter. You cannot manually add layers to, or remove layers from property filters.
The layer groups named Xrefs and All are created automatically.
Creating a Group Filter
Use this procedure to create a group filter. Group filters can contain any layers in the current drawing. You can manually add layers to, and remove layers from, group filters by dragging layers within the Layer Manager into the group filter or by selecting an object in the drawing on the layer that you want to add to the group filter.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, select a layer group that you want to create the new group under,
right-click, and select New Group Filter, or click in the Layer Manager.
3 Enter a name for the new group filter, and press ENTER.
4 Edit the new group filter:
If you want to... add layers to the group filter
Then... see "Adding Layers to Layer Groups" on page 390.
specify properties for the group filter
see "Changing the Properties of a Layer Group" on page 391.
5 Click OK.
Creating a Property Filter
A property filter contains layers that meet filter criteria that you specify for the group. Filter criteria can include layers according to layer states (on/off, frozen/thawed, locked/unlocked), properties, or names. For example, you can create a property filter that includes all of the red layers in the current drawing.
Creating Property Filters
Use this procedure to create property filters. You can specify more than one filter for a group. For example, you can filter by both layer name and status in order to group all frozen walls layers.
You can also specify more than one set of criteria for a property filter. For example, you can create a filter that will include all frozen red layers and all frozen blue layers. Boolean AND/OR logic is applied to the filter definitions to determine which layers to include. A layer must meet all the criteria in a single row in order to be included in the filter. Continuing with the example, a layer must be frozen and red to be in the filter. Multiple rows offer alternative criteria. In the example, a layer must be frozen and red, or it must be frozen and blue.
Example of a property filter with multiple criteria
Creating a Group Filter | 387
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, select a layer group that you want to create the new group under,
right-click, and select New Property Filter, or click 3 Enter a name for Filter Name. 4 Specify the filter criteria:
in the Layer Manager.
If you want to... filter layers by visibility state
Then... see "Specifying a Filter for Layer State" on page 388.
filter layers by layer color
see "Specifying a Filter for Layer Color" on page 389.
filter layers by layer linetype
see "Specifying a Filter for Layer Linetype or Lineweight" on page 389.
filter layers by wildcard characters
see "Specifying a Filter for Layer Name" on page 389.
5 Once a row of criteria is configured, you can copy or delete the row:
If you want to... copy a row of criteria
Then... right-click in the row you want to copy, and select Duplicate Row.
delete a row
right-click in the row, and select Delete Row.
6 Click OK twice.
Specifying a Filter for Layer State Use this procedure to specify a filter that includes layers based on the following layer states:
In use/not in use On/off Frozen/thawed Locked/unlocked
A layer must meet all the specified filter criteria to be included. For example, if you select Off and Frozen for the filter, a layer that is turned off but is not frozen will not be included.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, select a layer group that you want to create the new group under, right-click, and select New Property Filter.
3 Enter a name for Filter Name.
4 Specify the In use/not in use layer criteria for the filter:
If you want to... include all the layers in the drawing that are in use
Then... click in the Status field, and select .
include all the layers in the drawing that are not in use
click in the Status field, and select .
5 Specify the On/Off layer state criteria for the filter:
If you want to...
Then...
include all the layers in the drawing that are turned on
click in the On field, and select .
include all the layers in the drawing that are turned off
click in the On field, and select .
388 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
6 Specify the Freeze/Thaw layer state criteria for the filter:
If you want to... include all the layers in the drawing that are thawed
Then... click in the Freeze field, and select .
include all the layers in the drawing that are frozen
click in the Freeze field, and select .
7 Specify the Locked/Unlocked layer state criteria for the filter:
If you want to...
Then...
include all the layers in the drawing that are unlocked
click in the Lock field, and select .
include all the layers in the drawing that are locked
select Locked. .
8 Click OK.
Specifying a Filter for Layer Color Use this procedure to specify a filter that includes layers based on layer colors.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, select a layer group that you want to create the new group under,
right-click, and click New Property Filter. 3 Enter a name for Filter Name. 4 Under Filter definition, click the Color field. 5 Click the [...] button. 6 Select a color from the Select Color dialog box. 7 Click OK.
Specifying a Filter for Layer Linetype or Lineweight Use this procedure to specify a filter that includes layers based on linetype or lineweight.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, select a layer group that you want to create the new group under,
right-click, and click New Property Filter. 3 Enter a name for Filter Name. 4 Specify the filter criteria for linetypes or lineweights:
If you want to... specify a linetype to include in the filter
then...
click in the Linetype field, and click the [...] button. Select a linetype from the Select Linetype dialog box.
specify a lineweight to include in the filter
click in the Lineweight field, and click the [...] button. Select a lineweight from the Lineweight dialog box.
5 Click OK.
Specifying a Filter for Layer Name Use this procedure to specify a filter that includes layers based on wildcard strings in a layer name. The wildcard string is not case sensitive.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, select a layer group, right-click, and click New Property Filter. 3 Enter a name for Filter Name.
Creating a Property Filter | 389
4 Under Filter definitions, click the Name field. 5 Specify the wildcard filter criteria:
If you want to...
Then...
include all layers that start with a particular string
enter a wildcard string and an asterisk (*) for Name. Example: wall*
include all layers that end with a particular string
enter an asterisk (*) and the wildcard string for Name. Example: *view
include all layers where a particular string can occur anywhere enter an asterisk (*), the wildcard string, then another (*) for
within the layer name
Name. Example: *anno*
For more information about working with wildcards, see "Filter Selection Sets" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
6 Click OK.
Creating a Layer Standards Filter
A layer standards filter contains layers that are associated with a particular category of a standard. For example, if you create a layer standards filter for the AIA 2nd Edition standard, and you specify the Major category as the one to include in the filter, you create a filter that contains all of the drawing annotation layers.
Creating Layer Standards Filters Use this procedure to create standards filters. You can specify more than one standard category for a filter.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, select a layer group that you want to create the new group under,
right-click, and select New Standards Filter, or click in the Layer Manager. 3 Enter a name for Filter Names. 4 Select a standard for Layering Standard. 5 The categories in the Available Category(s) column will differ depending on the standard being used. Select
a category to include in the filter, and click the Add >> button to move it to the Selected Category(s) column. You can include multiple categories in one standards filter. All layers associated with the Selected Category(s) will be included in the filter.
6 Click OK twice.
Adding Layers to Layer Groups
Use this procedure to add layers to a layer group. You can manually add layers to a group filter. You can either drag them from the list of layers in the right pane of the Layer Manager to the group in the left pane or add the layer to the group by selecting an object in the current drawing that is on the layer that you want to add.
You can also replace all layers in an existing group by selecting objects in the current drawing that are on the layers that you want to use as replacements for the existing layers.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 Add layers to a layer group:
If you want to...
Then...
add layers to a layer group by dragging
in the left pane of the Layer Manager, select the All layer group. In the right pane of the Layer Manager, drag a layer to the user layer group or static filter group in the left pane.
390 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
If you want to... add layers to a layer group by selecting drawing objects
replace layers from groups by selecting drawing objects
Then...
select the layer group, right-click, and click Select Layers Add. In the current drawing, select an object on each layer that you want to add to the group. Press ENTER to return to the Layer Manager.
select the layer group whose layers you want to replace, rightclick, and click Select Layers Replace. Select an object on each layer that you want to replace the layers in the group. Press ENTER to return to the Layer Manager.
3 Click OK.
Changing the Properties of a Layer Group
Use this procedure to change the properties of all layers in a layer group. If a layer is in more than one group, the changes apply to that layer in all groups in which it is included. For example, if you freeze a group that includes the layer A-Wall, that layer is frozen in any other group in which A-Wall appears.
NOTE Because you cannot freeze the current layer, you do not have the option to freeze a group in the active viewport if the current layer is included in the group. You also cannot freeze the active viewport on the Model layout tab.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 Click the layer group whose properties you want to change, and specify properties:
If you want to...
Then...
specify whether the group is locked
right-click, select Lock, and select Lock or Unlock Off.
specify whether the group is frozen
right-click, select Visibility, and select Thawed or Frozen.
specify the visibility of the group
right-click, select Visibility, and select On or Off.
freeze all layers in the drawing except those in the selected right-click, select Isolate Group, and select All Viewports or
layer group
Active Viewport Only.
3 Click OK.
Renaming and Deleting Layer Groups
Use this procedure to rename or delete layer groups. The layer group is deleted from the Layer Manager, but the layers listed in the group are not deleted.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 Rename or delete a layer group:
If you want to...
Then...
rename the layer group
right-click the layer group, and click Rename. Enter a new name, and press ENTER.
delete the layer group
right-click the layer group, and click Delete.
3 Click OK.
Converting a Property Filter to a Group Filter
Use this procedure to convert property filters to group filters. Note that dynamic property filters are converted to static group filters. You manually add, replace, and delete layers from group filters.
1 On the Format menu, select Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 On the left pane, select the property filter you want to convert.
Changing the Properties of a Layer Group | 391
3 Right-click, and select Convert to Group Filter. 4 Click OK.
Working with Layer Snapshots
A layer snapshot is a specific set of layers and view information that you can save, edit, and restore in your drawing. By saving layer and view information in a snapshot, you can quickly recall specific layer and view configurations from complex data sets. For example, a facilities manager might create snapshots of individual floor plans and furniture, cable, and HVAC layouts to separate this information from a complete building layout.
You can create and name any number of layer snapshots. You can add and delete individual layers in a snapshot. You can edit, delete, and import and export the snapshot. Import snapshots into new drawings to automatically specify a layering scheme in your drawing.
NOTE If you are sharing drawing files with other non-Architectural Desktop products that are using object enablers and want to create layer snapshots, create layer snapshots using the AutoCAD® Layer States Manager to create LAS files by entering -layer. For more information, see "Layer States Manager" in AutoCAD help. The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Creating a Layer Snapshot
Use this procedure to create snapshots of all the layers in the current drawing or the layers in a particular layer group:
Create a snapshot of all the layers in a drawing when you want to restore or export an entire layering scheme. Create a snapshot of a particular layer group to store specific layering information.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager. 2 In the left pane of the Layer Manager, expand All. 3 Create a snapshot:
If you want to... create a snapshot of all drawing layers
Then...
click
, and click New. Enter a name for the snapshot,
and click OK twice.
create a snapshot of a layer group
right-click the layer group, and click Save as Snapshot. Enter a name for the snapshot, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
Editing a Layer Snapshot
Use this procedure to edit a layer snapshot. You can edit a snapshot in several ways: adding layers removing layers modifying layer properties
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the snapshot that you want to edit, and click Edit.
392 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
4 Edit the selected snapshot:
If you want to... add layers from the drawing to the snapshot
Then...
click
, select the layer that you want to add, and click
OK.
delete a layer from a snapshot
select the layer that you want to delete, and click
.
edit the standard AutoCAD® layer properties of the individual click the property icons or descriptions. This affects only the
layers in the snapshot
snapshot. The layers in the drawing are not affected until you
restore the snapshot.
5 When you finish editing the layer snapshot, click OK twice.
Restoring a Layer Snapshot
Use this procedure to restore a layer snapshot. When you restore a snapshot, the layers in the drawing display with the settings as they are defined in the snapshot.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the layer snapshot that you want to restore, and click Restore. 4 Click OK twice.
Deleting a Layer Snapshot
Use this procedure to delete a layer snapshot. When you delete a snapshot, you do not delete the layers from the drawing. You delete only the snapshot of the layers.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the snapshot that you want to delete, and click Delete. 4 Click OK twice.
Exporting a Layer Snapshot
Use this procedure to export a layer snapshot so that the snapshot is available to import in other drawings. You can export snapshots with the following file extensions:
SSL: Layer Manager Snapshot Format. Saves a layer properties, description, and linetype file. LAY: Bonus Layer Format. Compatible with the AutoCAD® Express Tools utility for saving layer snapshots. The
layer description and linetype file are not saved with the snapshot. CSV: Comma-Delimited Format. An ASCII file that you can read or edit in a standard word processor.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the snapshot that you want to export, and click Export. 4 Enter a name for the new snapshot file. 5 Navigate to the folder where you want to save the layer snapshot. 6 Select a file format for Save as type. 7 Click Save, and click OK twice.
Restoring a Layer Snapshot | 393
Importing a Layer Snapshot
Use this procedure to import a layer snapshot into a drawing. A snapshot must first be exported from one drawing before it can be imported into another. For more information, see "Exporting a Layer Snapshot" on page 393. You must be in the destination drawing when you open the Layer Manager to import from the source drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Click Import. 4 Select the snapshot that you want to import, and click Open. 5 Click Yes to restore the settings.
This makes the snapshot settings active in the drawing.
6 Click OK twice.
Working with Layer Keys
A layer key maps an object that you draw to a defined layer. Layer keys also specify the default properties of each layer.
Layer Keys and Layer Keying
When you create an object, the layer key that is associated with the object automatically places that object on the layer to which it is mapped. Using layer keys to automatically place objects on predefined layers is called layer keying. Usually, you key objects to layers that conform to a layer standard. Each layer standard names layers according to a set of rules that you can modify. For more information, see "Creating and Editing Layer Standards" on page 402.
Layer Key Styles
You can create different sets of layer keys, called layer key styles, that you can use to place objects on defined layers in your drawings. Each layer key style contains a set of layer keys. Both the AIA and BS1192 layer key styles contain layer keys and layer properties, including layer name, description, color, linetype, lineweight, plot style, and plot settings for all of the AEC objects. You can import the AIA and BS1192 layer standards and layer key styles that are provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop from the AecLayerStd.dwg in the \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Layers folder. You can modify these styles, if needed, or create new layer key styles. You can also create layer key styles from LY files.
Properties of Layer Key Styles
You can add and remove layer keys from layer key styles. Default layer keys cannot be removed. The properties of any layer in an existing layer key style can also be edited. You can change the layer name, description, color, linetype, lineweight, plot style, and plot settings for the layer that each layer key maps to. If the layer key style is based on a layer standard, you can use overrides on all or some of the layer keys within the layer key style. For more information about overrides, see "Layer Key Overrides" on page 400.
NOTE The default Standard layer key style is not based on a layer standard. It contains the default set of layer keys.
LY Files and Layer Key Styles
If you have LY files from S8 or Release 1 of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop that you want to use, you can create a new layer key style from an LY file. For more information see "Creating a Layer Key Style from an LY File" on page 398.
Overrides to Layer Key Styles
Whether you create an original layer key style or one from an existing LY file, if you want to use overrides, you must base the layer key style on a layer standard in the current drawing. If you create a nonstandard layer key style, the Overrides On/Off command is unavailable. If you copy a layer key style, you can use layer key overrides only if the layer key style that you copied is based on a layer standard. For more information about using layer key overrides, see "Layer Key Overrides" on page 400.
394 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Managing Layer Key Styles
To create, edit, copy, or purge layer key styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 451.
Default Layer Keys
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop uses the following default layer keys when you create AEC objects.
Default layer keys for creating AEC objects Layer Key ANNDTOBJ ANNELKEY ANNELOBJ ANNMASK ANNMATCH ANNOBJ ANNREV ANNSXKEY ANNSXOBJ ANNSYMOBJ APPL CAMERA CASE CASENO CEILGRID CEILOBJ CHASE COGO COLUMN COMMUN CONTROL CWLAYOUT CWUNIT DIMLINE DIMMAN DOOR DOORNO DRAINAGE ELEC ELECNO ELEV ELEVAT
Description Detail marks Elevation marks Elevation objects Architectural Desktop masking objects Match lines Notes, leaders, etc. Revisions Section marks Section lines Annotation marks Appliances Cameras Casework Casework tags Ceiling grids Ceiling objects Chases Control points Columns Communication Control systems Curtain walls Curtain wall units Dimensions Dimensions (AutoCAD points) Doors Door tags Drainage Electric Electrical tags Elevations Elevators
Default Layer Keys | 395
Default layer keys for creating AEC objects ELEVHIDE EQUIP EQUIPNO FINCEIL FINE FINFLOOR FIRE FURN FURNNO GRIDBUB GRIDLINE HATCH HIDDEN LAYGRID LIGHTCLG LIGHTW MASSELEM MASSGRPS MASSSLCE MED OPENING PEOPLE PFIXT PLANTS PLANTSI POLYGON POWER PRCL PRK-SYM ROOF ROOFSLAB ROOMNO SCHEDOBJ SEATNO SECT SECTHIDE SITE SLAB
396 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Elevations (2D) Equipment Equipment tags Ceiling tags Details - fine lines Finish tags Fire system equipment Furniture Furniture tags Plan grid bubbles Column grids Details - hatching Hidden lines Layout grids Ceiling lighting Wall lighting Massing elements Massing groups Massing slices Details - medium lines Wall openings People Plumbing fixtures Plants - outdoor Plants - indoor AEC Polygons Electrical power Property Parking symbols Rooflines Roof slabs Room tags Schedule tables Seating tags Miscellaneous sections Sections (2D) Site Slabs
Default layer keys for creating AEC objects SPACENO SPACEOBJ STAIR STAIRH STRUCTBEAM STRUCTBEAMIDEN STRUCTBRACE STRUCTBRACEIDEN STRUCTCOLS STRUCTCOLSIDEN SWITCH THIN TINN TITSCALE TITTEXT TITTEXT-DWG TOILACC TOILNO TOPO UTIL VEHICLES VIEWPORT WALL WALLFIRE WALLNO WIDE WIND WINDASSEM WINDNO XLINE ZONE ZONENO
Space tags Space objects Stairs Stair handrails Structural beams Structural beam tags Structural braces Structural brace tags Structural columns Structural column tags Electrical switches Details - thin lines Triangulated irregular network Graphical Scales Border and title block Drawing title text Architectural specialties Toilet tags Topography Site utilities Vehicles Sheet View viewports Walls Fire wall patterning Wall tags Details - wide lines Windows Window assemblies Window tags Construction line Zones Zone tags
Default Layer Key Values
The following default values are assigned to new layer keys.
Default values for layer keys Layer name Description Color
Same as layer key name. Assigned to appropriate layer root name. Blank 7 (white/black)
Default Layer Key Values | 397
Default values for layer keys Linetype Lineweight Plot style Plot
Continuous Default Normal Yes
Creating a Layer Key Style
Use this procedure to create a layer key style. You can create a layer key style by using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
If you want to use layer key overrides, you must base the layer key style you create on a layer standard in the current drawing. If you create a nonstandard layer key style, you cannot attach layer key overrides to that layer key style.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Key Styles, or in the Layer Manager, click . The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Create a new layer key style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Layer Key Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the layer key style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click Layer Key Styles, and click Paste.
3 Right-click the new layer key style and click Rename. 4 Enter a name for the new layer key style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new layer key style:
If you want to... specify properties for layer keys
Then... see "Editing Layer Key Styles" on page 399.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Layer Key Style" on page 400.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the layer key style, click OK twice.
Creating a Layer Key Style from an LY File
Use this procedure to create a new layer key style from an existing LY file from S8 or Release 1 of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. If the LY file that you are using does not contain the default layer keys required by the software, they are added to the new layer key style by default and mapped to default layers based on the key name. For example, the layer key ANNOBJ maps to the layer ANNOBJ.
If you want to use layer key overrides, you must base the new layer key style on a layer standard. If you create a nonstandard layer key style, you cannot attach layer key overrides to that layer key style. When you create an original layer key style from an existing LY file, you can choose which sections of the LY file you want to include in your layer key style.
You must first import an existing LY file.
1 On the command line, enter -AECLYImport.
2 Enter the file name to import, or enter ? and browse for a file.
3 Select a file, and click Open.
4 Enter the name for the new layer key style.
5 Select the sections of the LY file you want to include in the new layer key style.
398 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
6 Click OK. A new layer key style is created. It is not associated with a layer standard until you assign the new layer key style to a layer standard. For more information about changing style properties, see "Editing Layer Key Styles" on page 399.
Editing Layer Key Styles
Use this procedure to edit a layer key style.
You can change the layer standard that a layer key style is based on, or you can specify a layer standard for a nonstandard layer key style.
You can add layer keys to the layer key style. You can remove any layer keys except the default layer keys. You can edit the layer properties of the layers to which the layer keys map. You can specify whether layer key overrides can be used with the layer key style.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Key Styles, or in the Layer Manager, click . The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Select the layer key style that you want to change. 3 Click the Keys tab. 4 Specify the layer standard:
If you want to...
Then...
specify a different layer standard on which to base the layer select a new layer standard for Standard. key style
specify that the layer key style is not based on a layer standard select Non Standard for Standard.
NOTE You can base more than one layer key style on the same layer standard so that each layer key style can be used with different color, linetype, and override settings.
5 To add a new layer key, click Add. New keys are added with default values.
6 To delete a layer key, select a layer key, and click Remove. You cannot delete the default layer keys.
TIP To change the properties of more than one layer key at a time, hold down CTRL and select the additional layer keys.
7 Select a layer key, and specify the layer key properties:
If you want to... modify the description for a layer key
Then...
double-click the text that you want to change for Description, and enter new text.
modify the layer name
under Layer, click the [...] button. Specify the appropriate values for layer fields, and click OK.
modify the color for a layer key
under Color, click the current value. Select a new color, and click OK.
modify the linetype for a layer key
under Linetype, click the current value. Select a new linetype, and click OK.
Editing Layer Key Styles | 399
If you want to... modify the lineweight for a layer key
specify whether a layer key will plot specify whether to allow layer field overrides
Then...
under Lineweight, click the current value. Select a new lineweight, and click OK.
under Plot, click the printer icon to turn plotting on or off.
under Allow Overrides, clear the options for which overrides are not allowed.
8 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Layer Key Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a layer key style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a layer key style.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Key Styles, or in the Layer Manager, click . The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Select the layer key style that you want to change. 3 Click the General tab. 4 To add a description to the layer key style, enter it for Description. 5 Click Notes. 6 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 7 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK three times.
Layer Key Overrides
A layer key override enables you to change the default layer names specified by one or more layer keys. The structure of layer names is determined by the descriptive fields in the layer standard definition. You can allow overrides on all the layer keys within a layer key style, or you can select individual layer keys that you want to override. You can override all descriptive fields that make up the layer name, or you can specify which descriptive fields to override. You can apply overrides to any layer keys in a layer key style that is based on a layer standard.
For example, in the AIA 2nd Edition layer standard definition, the Discipline Designator field assigns a description and the Major field assigns a name by default. By using layer key overrides, you can change the values specified in these fields and add values in the unused fields, Minor Code and Status.
The information that you enter to create layer key overrides must conform to the field width and value types specified by the layer standard definition. For example, you cannot specify a four-letter override in the Discipline Designator field in the AIA 2nd Edition Layer Standard, because the maximum width for the Discipline Designator field as specified in the AIA layer standard definition is 1. To modify the descriptive fields, you must edit the layer standard definition. For more information, see "Creating and Editing Layer Standards" on page 402.
After you add overrides to a layer key style, you can turn the overrides on and off in your current drawing. When the layer key overrides are on, objects that you create are placed on layers defined by the layer standard definitions and overridden with the values that you specify. When the layer key overrides are off, objects that you create are placed on the layers defined only by the layer keys. You can start using the layer key overrides immediately after you specify them, or you can use the Overrides On/Off command to switch them on later.
400 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Layer key overrides do not change the layer assignments of existing objects. Only objects added after an override is enabled are affected by the override.
Specifying Layer Key Overrides
Use this procedure to specify layer key overrides. The layer key overrides that you specify apply only to the layer keys that have any or all descriptive field overrides selected in the Layer Key Properties dialog box. For more information, see "Editing Layer Key Styles" on page 399.
To specify layer key overrides, you must have a layer key style that is based on a layer standard. If you base your layer key standard on a nonstandard style, you cannot specify layer key overrides.
If you do not have all overrides enabled in the Layer Key Overrides dialog box, objects that you draw after you exit the dialog box are placed on the layer defined by the layer standard. You can use the Overrides On/Off command to turn on the layer overrides later.
NOTE Individual layer keys that do not allow overrides as specified in the Layer Key Properties dialog box are not overridden when you select Enable All Overrides.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Key Overrides.
2 Under Current Layer Key Style, select the layer key style that you want to override.
The layer standard that the layer key style is based on is displayed under Based on Standard and is not editable.
3 Enter values for Override or click the [...] button to specify values to override the information in the descriptive fields.
The fields in this dialog box depend on the layer standard your layer key style is based on. For example, if you are using the AIA 2nd Edition layer standard, you can enter override values for the Discipline Designator, Major, Minor 1, Minor 2, and Status descriptive fields.
4 To begin using the layer overrides immediately, select Enable All Overrides.
5 Click OK.
If you turned on the layer key overrides, any objects that you create now use the layer key overrides according to the override values that you have specified and whether you allowed overrides for the layer keys in the layer key style. If you did not turn on the layer key overrides, objects that you create are placed on layers defined by the layer standard.
Turning Layer Key Overrides On and Off
You can use the Overrides On/Off command to turn layer key overrides on and off for the current layer key style in your drawing. This command is available only if your current layer key style is based on a layer standard and if you have specified layer key overrides. If the layer key overrides are on in the current drawing, a check mark is displayed next to the command name on the menu.
On the Format menu, click Layer Management Overrides On/Off.
If you turned the layer key overrides on, objects that you create are placed on layers defined by the layer standard definitions and are overridden with the values that you specified. If you turned the layer key overrides off, objects that you create are placed on layers defined by the layer standard.
Remapping Objects to Different Layers
Use this procedure to change the layer an object is drawn on by remapping it from the current layer key to a different layer key.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Remap Object Layers, or in the Layer Manager toolbar,
click
.
2 Select the object or objects that you want to change, and press ENTER.
3 To view the list of available layer keys, enter ?.
4 Press F2 to view the list of layer keys.
Layer Key Overrides | 401
5 Select the layer key that you want to map the object to, right-click, and click Paste To CmdLine. 6 Press F2 to close the text window, and press ENTER. The object is mapped to a different layer in your drawing, respecting any current layer key overrides. Restoring Objects to Default Layer Key Layers Use this procedure to restore the default layer key assignment to an object after you remap the object to a different layer by assigning it to a different layer key. 1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Remap Object Layers. 2 Select the object or objects that you want to change, and press ENTER. 3 Enter o (byObject).
This applies the layer assigned to the default layer key of each object in the selection set, respecting any current layer key overrides. 4 Press ENTER.
Creating and Editing Layer Standards
A layer standard contains predefined layer names and a set of rules that determines the names of new layers that you create using that layer standard. You can use layer standards to establish individual, project, or office layering conventions that provide consistent and informative layer names. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a number of layer standards that you can use in drawings. You can also create your own layer standards by customizing an existing layer standard.
How Layer Standards Determine Layer Name
When you create a new layer using a layer standard, the layer name has a number of parts separated by delimiters (for example, hyphens). Each part of the layer name is determined by rules specified in a corresponding field of the layer standard. For example, the AIA 2nd Edition layer standard includes four fields that form each new layer name: Discipline Designator, Major, Minor 1, Minor 2, and Status. Each field is separated by a hyphen (-) delimiter, as in the following example: (Discipline Designator) - (Major) - (Minor 1) - (Minor 2) - (Status) A layer in your drawing with a Discipline value of "A," a Major value of "Wall," a Minor 1 value of "Full," a Minor 2 value of "Abov" and a Status value of "D," to denote a demolition layer, would be named A-WALL-FULL-ABOV-D. You can edit the layer standard definition to change these rules. For more information, see "Editing Component Fields" on page 406. You can override the information in each field to change the way a layer standard creates a layer name by specifying layer key overrides. For more information, see "Layer Key Overrides" on page 400.
Layer Standards Included with the Layer Manager Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides industry-standard layering conventions including: AIA 2nd Edition, BS1192 Descriptive, and BS1192 - AUG Version 2. Additional international layer conventions are also provided including: DIN 276, ISYBAU Long Format, ISYBAU Short Format, and STLB. Each layer standard contains specific information organized in fields. You can specify how the information appears in each field by changing the values in the layer standard fields. For more information, see "Editing Component Fields" on page 406.
402 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Component Fields in Layer Standards
Each layer standard defines the number of component fields that make up a layer name and specifies the rules for the content allowed in each field. If you create or edit a layer standard, you access the layer standard properties to edit the component fields.
Component Field Descriptions Each layer standard contains the following component fields.
Value Field Name Optional
Max Width Fixed Width Wildcard Match Description
Description
Identifies the field. Field names should be as consistent as possible across layering systems to aid in translation.
When Yes, allows the field to be omitted from the end of the layer name. Optional layer fields cannot precede a required layer field unless the match option is Yes so that the fields can be identified according to a match against specific descriptions.
Represents the maximum width in characters that can be used.
When Yes, prevents a field from being shortened from the max width setting.
An AutoCAD® wildcard pattern that the field must match.
When Yes, recognizes the field only if it exactly matches a description. You can omit fields from the middle of layer names. For example, an AIA layer may be made up of <discipline> <major> <minor>, or <discipline> <major> <status>, or <discipline> <major> <minor> <status>, as the <minor> field may not precede the <status> field and can be determined only by matching the field value against valid <minor> field descriptions.
NOTE When omitting fields from layer names, verify that the omitted field Match Description property is No. This ensures that the layer name specified can be created.
Delimiter Default
Specifies the character used to separate fields with no fixed width. Delimiters are often also used in fixed-width fields for clarity.
A predefined value for those field names that are not optional within the layer.
For more information about the content of specific layer standards, see "AIA Long Format Layer Standard" on page 404 and "Editing Component Fields" on page 406.
Component Fields in Layer Standards | 403
AIA Long Format Layer Standard The AIA Long Format Standard contains the following fields:
Field Name Discipline Designator Major Minor 1
Minor 2 Status
Description
Shows divisions of manageable sections. For example, A for architectural, M for mechanical. This field is required.
Designates assemblies or construction systems such as walls and doors. This field is required.
Further differentiates major groups into minor groups such as fullheight walls and partial-height walls. This field is optional and userdefined.
Additional information, like title or unit information.
Differentiates phases of work. For example, New indicates new, Demo indicates to be demolished. This field is optional.
The following table lists the rules for the AIA Long Format Layer Standard:
AIA Long Format
Field
Discipline Designator
Major
Minor
Status
Optional No
No Yes Yes
Width 1
4 4 4
Fixed Yes
Yes No No
Wildcard "@"
"@@@@" "*" "*"
Match No
No No No
Delimiter None
"-" "-" "-"
Default A
Wall
BS1192 - AUG Version 2 Layer Standard The BS1192 - AUG Version 2 layer standard contains the following fields:
Field Discipline Category Graphics Grade
Level
Status Scale
Description
Identifies the author of the layer by using a single character. For example, A for architect, S for structural engineer. This field is required.
Identifies the building element by using three digits and uses CISfB as a common referencing system. For example, 210 for wall, 315 for door. This field is required.
Indicates information that is associated with the category by using a single character. For example, D for dimension, G for graphics, T for text. This field is required.
Expresses as a single digit the recommended line thickness, where 1 is the thinnest and 9 is the thickest. This field applies mostly when using text where ISO standard pen thicknesses correlate with ISO standard text heights. For example, text that is 2.5mm high that is drawn with a 0.25mm pen is given a pen grade of 2. This field is required.
Differentiates viewing planes in plan, section, or elevation view by using a two-digit alphanumeric character. For example, 01 would be Level/Floor 1, EA the elevation, and SA Section A. This field is optional.
Indicates the state of work by using a single character. For example, N indicates new, R indicates to be removed. This field is optional.
Indicates the level of detail to be shown by using a single character. For example, P indicates a planning level, D indicates a detail. This field is optional.
404 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Field Phase/Time User
Description
Indicates phasing or alternatives by using a single character.
Specifies the user. It is not a fixed width field but is separated from the rest of the layer name with an underscore. For example, A210G701_WALL_L1. This field is optional.
The following table lists the rules for the BS1192 - AUG Version 2 Layer Standard:
BS1192 AUG Version 2
Field
Discipline
CSIfB
CISfB-A
CISfB-B
CISfB-C
Graphics
Grade
Level
Status Scale Phase
Optional No No No No No No Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Width 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1
Fixed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Wildcard
Match
[0A-Z]
No
#
No
#
No
#
No
[0ACDGHTZ] No
#
No
[0-9A-Z][0-9A- No Z]
[0NXR]
No
[0ASPD]
No
[0-9A-Z]
No
Delimiter None None None None None None None
None None None
Default A 1 0 0 G 7 00
0 0 0
BS1192 - Descriptive Layer Standard The BS1192 - Descriptive layer standard contains the following fields:
Field Name Discipline Element Graphics Level
Status Scale Phase User
Description
Identifies the author of the layer by using a single character. For example, A for architect, S for structural engineer. This field is required.
Identifies the building element by using a descriptive name for it. For example, possible choices for this field are "Equipment" or "Room." This field is required.
Indicates information that is associated with the category by using a single character. For example, D for dimension, G for graphics, T for text. This field is required.
Differentiates viewing planes in plan, section, or elevation view by using a two-digit alphanumeric character. For example, 01 would be Level/Floor 1, EA the elevation, and SA Section A. This field is optional.
Indicates the state of work by using a single character. For example, N indicates new, R indicates to be removed. This field is optional.
Indicates the level of detail to be shown by using a single character. For example, P indicates a planning level, D indicates a detail. This field is optional.
Indicates phasing or alternatives by using a single character.
Specifies the user. It is not a fixed width field but is separated from the rest of the layer name with an underscore. For example, A210G701_WALL_L1. This field is optional.
Component Fields in Layer Standards | 405
The following table lists the rules for the BS1192 - Descriptive Layer Standard:
BS1192 Descriptive Field Discipline Element Graphics Level Status Scale Phase
Optional No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Width 1 15 1 2 1 1 1
Fixed Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Wildcard
Match
[0A-Z]
No
*
No
[0ACDGHTZ]
No
[0-9A-Z][0-9A-Z] No
[0NXR]
No
[0ASPD]
No
[0-9A-Z]
No
Delimiter None None None None None
Default A Wall G 00 0 0 0
Creating a Layer Standard
Use this procedure to create a layer standard, with default settings or based on an existing standard, that specifies naming conventions for layers in drawings. If your drawing does not contain a layer standard, you can import a layer standard from another drawing or an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop template. For more information, see "Importing Layer Standards" on page 409.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Click New. 4 To base the new layer standard on an existing standard, select Based On, and select a standard. 5 Enter a name for the new layer standard, and click OK. 6 Edit the new layer standard:
If you want to... specify component fields of the layer standard
Then... see "Editing Component Fields" on page 406.
specify descriptive fields of the layer standard
see "Editing Descriptive Fields" on page 407.
specify the descriptions for the layer standard
see "Editing Descriptions" on page 407.
specify the descriptive specifications of the layer standard see "Editing Description Specifications" on page 408.
7 Click OK twice.
Editing Component Fields
Use this procedure to specify how you want to set up the fields within the layer standard that determine the different parts of the layer names created with that standard. You can add and delete fields here.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the layer standard that you want to edit, and click Edit. 4 Click the Component Fields tab.
406 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
5 Modify the component fields: If you want to... delete a component field add a component field above an existing field
add a component field below an existing field
edit a field name change the values of individual components of the fields
Then...
select the field, and click
.
select the field, click component field.
, and enter a name for the new
select the field, click component field.
, and enter a name for the new
double-click the name of the field, and enter a new name over the existing name.
select the values that you want to change, and select a new value. For more information, see "Component Field Descriptions" on page 403.
6 Click OK three times.
Editing Descriptive Fields
Use this procedure to add a description that is applied to each component field in the layer name. You can add a single description to a group of layer name component fields.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the layer standard that you want to edit, and click Edit. 4 Click the Edit Descriptive Fields tab. 5 Modify the descriptive fields:
If you want to...
Then...
delete a descriptive field
select the field, and click
.
add a descriptive field above an existing field
select the field, click descriptive field.
, and enter a name for the new
add a descriptive field below an existing field
select the field, click descriptive field.
, and enter a name for the new
edit a field name
double-click the name of the field, and enter a new name over the existing name.
delete a component from a descriptive field
select the component, and click Delete.
6 Click OK three times.
Editing Descriptions
Use this procedure to map longer or different descriptions to the component fields of the layer name. 1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click .
Editing Descriptive Fields | 407
3 Select the layer standard that you want to edit, and click Edit. 4 Click the Edit Descriptions tab. 5 Modify the descriptions:
If you want to... delete a description
Then...
select the field description, and click
.
edit a description
select the field description, click description, and click OK.
. Make changes to the
add a field with a value and a description
click
. Enter a value and a description for the field, and
click OK. To add multiple fields, click Apply after each
individual field, and click OK to finish.
6 Click OK three times.
Editing Description Specifications
Use this procedure to specify how all the fields in the layer standard determine the layer description that is displayed in the Layer Manager. You can change the field that is used in the description and the order of the fields, and you can add text to the beginning of the layer description.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the layer standard that you want to edit, and click Edit. 4 Click the Description Specification tab. 5 Specify how the fields determine the layer description:
If you want to... delete a layer standard field
Then...
select the field, and click
.
add a field above an existing field
select the field, click field.
, and enter a name for the new
add a field below an existing field
select the field, click field.
, and enter a name for the new
edit text
double-click the text for Prior Text, and enter a new name.
change a field value
select the current value for Field, and click a new value.
6 Click OK three times.
Purging Layer Standards
Use this procedure to remove standards that are not in use. 1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Select the layer standards that you want to purge, and click Purge.
408 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
4 Click OK.
NOTE To purge all layer standards and layer key styles in a drawing, enter AecPurgeLayerStyles. This is beneficial to use when creating custom templates or when importing new layer standards and layer key styles.
Importing Layer Standards
Use this procedure to import layer standards from other drawings or from the AecLayerStd.dwg drawing in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Layers folder.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Click Import/Export. 4 Click Open. 5 Select the drawing with the layer standards that you want to import, and click Open.
All the layer standards in the drawing are displayed in the External File list.
6 Under External File, select the layer standard that you want to import, and click Import. You can select more than one layer standard in a list by holding down CTRL while you select the additional layer standards. If you import a layer standard that already exists in the target drawing, a message is displayed asking if you wish to overwrite the existing layer standard. Click Yes to overwrite the existing layer standard, or click No to cancel.
7 Click OK.
The layer standards that you imported are displayed in the Layer Standards dialog box.
Exporting Layer Standards
Use this procedure to export layer standards from the current drawing to a new drawing or to an existing drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Layer Management Layer Properties Manager.
2 Click . 3 Click Import/Export. 4 Export the layer standards:
If you want to... export layer standards to a new drawing export layer standards to an existing drawing
Then... click New, enter a name for the new drawing, and click Save. click Open, select a drawing, and click Open.
5 Select the layer standards that you want to export, and click Export.
You can select more than one item in a list by holding down CTRL while you select the additional items. If you export a layer standard that already exists in the target drawing, a message is displayed asking if you wish to overwrite the existing layer standard. Click Yes to overwrite the existing layer standard, or click No to cancel.
6 Click OK three times.
Importing Layer Standards | 409
410 | Chapter 8 Layer Management
Display System
9
The display system in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop controls how AEC objects are presented in a designated viewport. By specifying the display configuration in a viewport and the direction from which to view the objects, you can produce different architectural representations. The display system lets you produce floor plans, reflected plans, elevations, 3D models, or schematic displays without redrawing objects.
411
Display System Structure
You use the display system to manage display properties and view assignments for objects in your project. You can also create new groupings for display purposes. Elements of the Display System The display system has three major elements:
A display representation, which controls how an individual object, such as a door or a wall, is displayed A display set, which is a group of display representations of objects A display configuration, which is a collection of display sets assigned to particular view directions These three elements are hierarchical: each display configuration contains a number of display sets, and each display set contains a number of display representations. To use a display configuration, you assign it to a viewport. The objects in the viewport then use the display properties specified in the display configuration. Predefined Display Configurations in Templates You use different display configurations for different tasks, such as sketching and plotting. You also use different display configurations for different types of drawings, such as floor plans, 3D models, and elevations. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop includes templates with predefined display configurations applied to viewports. These configurations are created for typical architectural tasks and drawing types. You can use the configurations and viewports supplied by the templates, or you can modify the display system settings to suit your office standards. If you want to create your own display configurations, you can start a drawing from scratch or from a template that does not contain predefined display configurations. Materials and the Display System A material definition is a group of settings for the display properties of a real-world material, such as glass, brick, or wood. The settings define how the components assigned to the material appear in every view. The materials feature works with the display system to simplify the process of customizing the display of drawings. Rather than specifying individual properties, you can control the display of objects according to the materials assigned to the physical components of the objects. For example, you can assign brick as the material for all walls whose components consist of this material. The display properties of the bricks are customized to look like a typical brick wall. By assigning the material to walls, you avoid the need to customize the display properties for each wall that uses brick material. In addition, if the materials change during the project, you can reassign components to the new material. Wall components assigned brick and concrete materials
412 | Chapter 9 Display System
Sample styles in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop catalogs contain predefined materials assigned to their components. Use these materials in your drawings, customize them, or create your own materials. For more information, see "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487. Display Settings in External References You cannot change a display setting in an external reference while refediting it from its host drawing. You can open Display Manager and make changes, but they will not be saved when the external reference is saved and closed in the host drawing. To make changes to display settings in external references, you need to open the external reference drawing directly, make the changes there, and save it. The external reference should then be reloaded to update the changes
Display Representations
A display representation defines how the components that make up an object are drawn. In traditional CAD and manual drafting, a single object, such as a door, is typically drawn multiple times in different drawings. In these drawings, each instance of a door is a separate collection of linework. In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can create an object that changes the way it draws itself depending on the display representation used to represent that object. Display Components of AEC Objects Most AEC objects are made up of individual components. For example, a door has the following components: door panel, frame, stop, swing, glass, and threshold. A door may also have muntins. Each component of an object has both physical and graphical properties that help to determine the display representation of that object.
The physical properties of an object control width, height, shape, and location of the object in the drawing. The graphical properties control visibility (on/off), layer, color, and linetype. You typically decide the physical properties of an object when you create it. For example, you specify the size of a door and its location in a wall. You control the graphical properties of an object in its display representation. You can define multiple display representations for the same object. Display Representations and View Directions A display representation is not dependent on view direction, although it usually is designed with a specific view in mind.
Display Representations | 413
Objects displayed from different view directions that use different display representations
Why Most Objects Have Multiple Display Representations All objects have predefined display representations. Most objects have Plan, Model, and Reflected display representations, because these are the most common design situations. Some objects, such as cameras and reference AEC objects, have only a General representation, because the display of these objects does not change in different views. A single object can be drawn in various ways, depending on the needs of different drawing types. For example, the Plan display representation draws the door panel, frame, stop, and swing components. The Nominal display representation draws the door panel, frame, and swing components. Although both representations draw the door panel, each draws it differently. The Plan representation draws a door panel as a rectangle, while the Nominal representation draws it as a single line.
Door shown in the Plan and Nominal display representations
The Plan display representation is appropriate for two-dimensional (2D) views when components are to be displayed from a plan (Top) view. The Nominal display representation is appropriate for 2D views when a limited amount of
414 | Chapter 9 Display System
detail is needed in plan view. For example, display configurations intended for plotting at small scales, where details of objects might be obscured, often use the Nominal display representation. Default Display Representations The display representations available for an object and the names of those representations are based on the ways that you might need to view the object. Display representations can include different components of an object or additional display options. For example, the display properties of stairs in the Plan display representation include settings for break marks and other stair symbols. Break marks appear only in 2D Top view drawings, so other display representations, such as Model and Elevation, do not contain settings for break marks. Similarly, objects that never display break marks do not have settings for them in their Plan display representations. Plan display representation for stairs includes options for break marks
Customizing the Display of an Object If you do not use materials to control display, you customize the appearance of an object by changing its display properties for the display representation. For example, you can turn off the door swing in the Plan display representation; specify whether the swing is straight or an arc; specify the percent open; or change the layer, color, and linetype of the swing. To change the display of an object, you specify how changes are applied to the instances of the object in the drawing. You do this by specifying the source of the display properties for the selected display representation.
To apply the changes to the default display properties of the object, you customize the drawing default settings. The changes affect all instances of the object in the drawing. Drawing default display properties affect all instances of an object
To apply the changes to all instances of the object that have the same style, you override the drawing default settings with the display properties of the object style.
Display Representations | 415
Changes to the display properties of a style affect all objects of that style
To apply the changes only to the selected object, you override the drawing default settings or style display properties with the display properties of the object. Display properties of an object apply only to that object
Objects use the default display properties unless the properties are overridden by the display properties of an object style or an individual object. Generally, you customize the display properties of object styles so that the appearance of different types of the same object is consistent throughout a drawing. You may need to override the display properties of the style for an individual object in order to achieve certain results.
Display Sets
Display sets are collections of object display representations. A display set determines which objects are visible, and how the objects, such as wall assemblies that include doors and windows, are displayed in different views. Display Representations Included in a Display Set A display set usually contains display representations that are appropriate for specific tasks or drawing types. For example, the Reflected display set contains display representations for objects typically included in a reflected ceiling plan. This display set uses the Reflected display representation for most of these objects, but uses the Plan display representation for other objects, such as structural members, that appear the same in plan and reflected views.
416 | Chapter 9 Display System
A display set can contain more than one display representation for an object. For example, a display set for plotting a floor plan might include the Plan and Threshold Plan display representations for doors.
The Plan display representation contains components for the door panel, frame, stop, and swing. The Threshold Plan display representation contains components for the inner and outer thresholds of the door. Plan and Threshold Plan display representations used alone and together to display a door
If a display set contains no display representations for an object, the object is not displayed when that display set is used. For example, a display set for a reflected ceiling plan does not need representations for railings, which typically are not shown in these drawings. Display Sets and View Direction A display set is not dependent on view direction, although it usually is designed with a specific view in mind. For example, a Reflected display set is intended to be used to display objects from the Top view direction in a reflected ceiling plan. Similarly, a Plan display set might contain Plan display representations for a number of objects intended for two-dimensional (2D) top views. A three-dimensional (3D) model display set might contain the Model display representation for a number of objects. The display representations included in a display set depend on what representations are available for each object, and whether objects need to be drawn differently from different view directions. Default Display Sets Drawings based on templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop contain display sets for many purposes. All drawings, even those that are not created from templates, contain the following default display sets: Elevation, Model, Model High Detail, Model Low Detail, Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, and Reflected. These display sets contain display representations for each object based on the most common design situations.
Display Configurations
A display configuration is a collection of display sets assigned to view directions. Display Configurations,Viewports, and Templates A display configuration typically is created for a specific design task or drawing type. To use a display configuration, you assign it to a viewport. Drawings based on templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop contain layout tabs with viewports to which appropriate display configurations are assigned. You can use the configuration assigned to a viewport, assign a different one, or customize the configuration.
Display Configurations | 417
Display Sets Assigned to View Directions You can identify the display set assigned to each view direction using the Display Manager. The Display Manager is a utility for managing elements of the display system. The following illustration shows a drawing with two display configurations, Medium Detail and Standard.
Sample display configurations in the Display Manager
In the Display Manager, the active viewport in the drawing (in bold type) is assigned the Medium Detail display configuration. In the left pane, the display sets used are listed below the configuration name. An icon next to each display set indicates the view direction to which the display set is applied. The Configuration tab in the right pane shows the view direction to which each display set is mapped. In this example, the current view direction in the drawing is Top, which uses the Plan display set. Objects in the active viewport are shown using the display representations in the Plan display set. If the view direction in the active viewport is changed to Front, the objects are shown using the display representations in the Section_Elev display set. This is also true when the view direction in the active viewport is changed to Right, Left, or Back. The display set assigned to the Default view direction is used when any view direction other than the six orthogonal views is selected, or when a view direction is not assigned a display set. If the view direction of the active viewport is changed to Bottom, objects are shown using the display set assigned to the Default view direction--the Model display set. For more information about the Display Manager, see "The Display Manager" on page 419.
Displaying Objects in a Viewport The display configuration, the current viewport, and the object interact in the following manner to determine what is shown in a viewport:
The active viewport has a current view direction and a current display configuration. For example, the view direction is Top, and the display configuration is Medium Detail.
The display configuration has one or more display sets and uses the display set that is assigned to the current view direction. For example, in the Medium Detail display configuration, the Plan display set is assigned to the Top view.
The display set has associated display representations and it selects the representation(s) associated with the object that needs to be shown. For example, in the Plan display set, doors, windows, and walls use their Plan display representations.
The object is shown in the active viewport using the appropriate display representation(s) and display properties.
Examples of View Directions That Use Different Display Sets A display configuration assigns display sets to specific view directions. When a view direction is selected, the display representations in the display set determine how each object is displayed in the viewport. For example, the following illustration shows a viewport assigned the Plot display configuration and the Top view direction. In this illustration, the objects are shown with a Plan display representation.
418 | Chapter 9 Display System
Objects from Top view using a display set for plan views
If the Front view direction is selected in this viewport, the same objects are displayed with an Elevation display representation. Objects from Front view using a display set for elevation views
If the SW Isometric view direction is selected, the same objects are displayed with a three-dimensional (3D) representation. Objects from SW isometric view using a display set for model views
Default Display Configuration The display configurations in a drawing depend on the template used to create the drawing. A drawing that is not created from a template contains the Standard display configuration, which includes the Plan and Model display sets.
The Display Manager
The Display Manager is the central location of display system information for your drawing in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. You use the Display Manager to create and modify display configurations, display sets, and display representations. You can also assign a display configuration to a viewport and view how objects are displayed in different representations. You can resize the Display Manager window and the left and right panes as needed to view display information.
The Display Manager | 419
Left Pane of the Display Manager The left pane of the Display Manager organizes the display information for your drawings in a hierarchical tree view. You can add, purge, rename, copy, and send display system components in the tree view. As you select items in the left pane, the right pane is updated appropriately.
Left pane showing a tree view of display configurations and their components
Right Pane of the Display Manager The information displayed in the right pane of the Display Manager depends on what you select in the left pane. You can view the display sets and mapped view directions associated with each display configuration. You can view the display representations of different objects and access the default graphical display properties of objects in your drawings. You can also preview how an object is displayed.
Right pane showing details of a selected display configuration
View Direction Icons in the Display Manager The icons used with display sets and view directions identify how a display set is used in a configuration. When you expand a display configuration, the display sets used in it are shown. The icon next to each display set indicates the view direction to which it is applied in the display configuration. In the following example, the Model display set is applied to the default view direction. The right pane shows that the Section_Elev display set is applied to the front, back, left, and right view directions. The Plan display set is applied to the top view direction. In the right pane, icons correspond to the six orthogonal view directions and the default view direction.
420 | Chapter 9 Display System
Using icons to identify view directions to which display sets are applied
Opening the Display Manager
Use this procedure to open the Display Manager. 1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Move and resize the Display Manager or resize the left and right panes as needed to view display information.
Viewing Display Configurations
Use this procedure to view the display configurations available in the current drawing. The display configurations depend on the template used to create the drawing. A drawing not created from a template contains the Standard display configuration, which includes the Model and Plan display sets.
The following icons can be assigned to a display configuration:
Icon
Description Multiple view display configuration
Fixed view display configuration Multiple view display configuration (drawing default)
Fixed view display configuration (drawing default)
Default display set used in the display configuration. This set is used for all views that are not otherwise connected to a display set. Display set used for the top view of the display configuration.
Display set used for the bottom view of the display configuration.
Display set used for the left side view of the display configuration.
Display set used for the right side view of the display configuration.
Display set used for the front view of the display configuration.
Display set used for the back view of the display configuration.
Display set used for the multiple views of the display configuration, but not as the default display set.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Configurations, and select a configuration.
Opening the Display Manager | 421
3 Click the Configuration tab. The left pane lists the display sets included in the configuration. The right pane lists the display sets assigned to each view direction. If a display set is not listed next to a view direction, the display set for the Default view direction is used when that view direction is selected. The Default view direction is also used for any view directions other than the six orthogonal views.
4 Click the Cut Plane tab. The Cut Plane tab contains settings for the height of the cut plane and the height above and below the cut plane that are included in views when you assign this display configuration.
If you are working with a project, you can also calculate the cut plane based on the level heights from the project. For more information, see "Global Cut Planes" on page 306.
5 If you are working with a project and use project standards, you can use the Version History tab to modify the version history of the display configuration. For more information, see "Project Standards" on page 325.
6 Click OK.
Viewing Display Sets
Use this procedure to view the display sets in the current drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
2 Expand Sets, and select a display set. The icons next to the display set names in the left pane indicate whether a display set is used in a display configuration within the current drawing. The icon with a red check mark indicates that a display set is assigned. The icon with a green dot indicates that a display set is a standard set. Although standard sets can be renamed, they cannot be deleted.
3 Click the Display Representation Control tab. The right pane contains a matrix that lists each object and display representation. A check mark under a display representation indicates that the display set uses this representation to show the corresponding object. For example, in the Model display set, most objects use the Model display representations.
Display representations selected for each object in the Model display set
Display sets can have different icons depending on their function in the drawing:
Icon
Description The display set is a standard display set and cannot be deleted.
The display set is currently used in a display configuration in the drawing.
422 | Chapter 9 Display System
Icon
Description
The display set is a standard display set and is currently used in a display configuration in the drawing.
The display set is neither a standard display set nor is it used in a display configuration in the drawing.
4 Click the Display Options tab. Settings on this tab enable you to filter objects by their classification. In addition, you can specify settings that affect how materials are displayed when you generate a live section view of a building model.
Display options specified for a selected display set
5 If you are working with a project and use project standards, you can use the Version History tab to modify the version history of the display set. For more information, see "Project Standards" on page 325.
6 Click OK.
Viewing Display Representations
Use this procedure to view the display representations in the current drawing. 1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Representations by Object, and select an object. Display representations can have different icons depending on their function in the drawing:
Icon
Description
Standard display representation with properties that the user can set.
User-defined display representation with properties the user can set.
Display representation without user-definable properties.
In the right pane, rows list the display representations that exist for that object, and columns list display sets. A check mark under a display set indicates that the display representation is used in that display set. A display representation can be used in multiple display sets.
Viewing Display Representations | 423
Curtain wall display representations used in display sets
The icon next to the display representation name indicates whether it is a predefined display representation ( ) or custom display representation ( ). 3 Click OK.
Viewing an Object in a Display Representation
Use this procedure to see how an object appears in different display representations and view directions. 1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
2 Click
.
3 Reposition the Floating Viewer and the Display Manager so that both are visible.
4 Expand Representations by Object, and select an object.
5 In the right pane, select a display representation.
NOTE Overrides to the default display representation, made in the display properties of an object style or an individual object, do not show in the Display Manager.
The Floating Viewer displays the object in the display representation. Floating Viewer displaying a curtain wall
424 | Chapter 9 Display System
6 Use the controls in the Floating Viewer to view the object from different view directions and with hidden lines removed or with shading.
7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to view objects in various display representations.
8 Click
to close the viewer.
9 Click OK.
Viewing the Display Representation of an Object in a Display Set
Use this procedure to see how an object appears in the display representation used object in a selected display set. 1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
2 Click
.
3 Reposition the Floating Viewer and the Display Manager so that both are visible.
4 Expand Sets, and select a display set.
5 Click the Display Representation Control tab.
6 Select an object.
NOTE Overrides to the default display representation, made in the display properties of an object style or an individual object, do not show in the Display Manager.
The Floating Viewer displays the object in the display representation selected for it in the display set.
7 Use the controls in the Floating Viewer to view the object from different view directions and with hidden lines and shading.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to view other objects in the display representation used in the display set. 9 Select another display set, and repeat steps 6 and 7 to view objects as they appear in that display set.
10 Click
to close the viewer.
11 Click OK.
Accessing the Default Display Properties of an Object
Use this procedure to access and view the default display properties of a display representation of an object. Default display properties apply to all instances of the object in the drawing unless the properties are overridden by the object style or an individual object.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
2 Expand Representations by Object.
3 Expand an object, and select a display representation. The right pane of the Display Manager shows the default display properties of the object for the selected display representation.
NOTE Overrides to the default display representation, made in the display properties of an object style or an individual object, do not appear in the default display properties in the Display Manager.
4 Click OK.
Viewing the Display Representation of an Object in a Display Set | 425
Creating and Editing Display Configurations
A display configuration is a collection of display sets that controls the representation of objects viewed from different directions in a drawing. You apply a display configuration to the viewport in which you want the objects to appear. You can also select a display configuration to use as the default for model space and new viewports. Drawings based on templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop contain display configurations for common tasks and drawing types. You can modify them and their display sets and display representations to meet your needs. You can also copy these elements of the display system to use as the basis for custom display configurations.
Process Overview: Creating a Display Configuration
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop templates provide display configurations for common design, drafting, and production tasks. You can also create custom display configurations.
The process of creating a display configuration has the following steps:
Step 1: Create a display configuration with default properties. Step 2: Create display sets to associate with different view directions.
Although you can assign display sets to any view direction, you usually create them with specific view directions in mind. For example, you may want to create display sets for plan, elevation, and model views of a building model. You can add more display representations to the display sets later.
Step 3: Create or modify display representations for each object you want to display. You create a new display representation by duplicating an existing display representation for an object. Use a display representation that is similar to the one you want to create so that you have fewer settings to modify. Although you can use display representations in any view direction, you usually create them with specific view directions in mind.
Step 4: Assign new, modified, or existing display representations to display sets. A display set can include any display representation that you specify. Objects can use more than one representation in a display set. Remember that you need to include at least one display representation for every object that is to appear in a viewport.
Step 5: Assign display sets to view directions in the display configuration. You add display sets to a display configuration by assigning them to any of the six orthogonal view directions or to the Default view direction. The display set assigned to the Default view direction is used if no display set is assigned to a view direction.
Step 6: Assign the display configuration to a viewport. The display configuration becomes active when you assign it to a viewport. You can assign a display configuration to multiple viewports. You can also export display configurations to other drawings.
Tips for Working with Display Configurations, Sets, and Representations
This topic provides suggestions for working effectively with display configurations and their elements.
Templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop and the drawings based on those templates contain display configurations for common design, drafting, and production tasks and various drawing types. If your drawing does not contain these display configurations, you can import them. For more information, see "Display Configurations" on page 417. Templates and the drawings based on them contain layout tabs with display configurations assigned to viewports for specific tasks. Examine your building model in these different layouts to see if objects are displayed as you want them to appear.
Before creating or modifying display configurations, review the predefined configurations to see if they meet your needs or if you can readily adapt them for your project.
When possible, use a predefined display configuration as the basis for configurations you create. Starting with a display configuration that is similar to what you need helps you to work efficiently. You can modify only the settings that need to change, rather than creating everything from scratch.
426 | Chapter 9 Display System
When you modify a display representation, the changes affect every display set and display configuration that use that representation. To apply changes more selectively, create a new display representation for the object and assign it to the display sets in which the changes are to appear.
Similarly, when you modify a display set, the changes appear in every display configuration that uses the display set. And if you modify a display configuration, the changes appear in every viewport to which the configuration is assigned. To apply the changes more selectively, create custom display sets and configurations.
Remember that changes made to display representations through the Display Manager apply only to the default display properties of objects. Changes to the display properties of object styles and individual objects override the default display properties. In addition, if the default display properties assign a material to object components, the display properties of the material determine the appearance of the object.
Creating a Display Configuration
Use this procedure to create a display configuration. You can create a display configuration using standard default properties or by creating a duplicate of an existing configuration.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Configurations. 3 Create a display configuration:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create a display configuration with default properties (containing no display sets)
right-click Configurations, and click New.
create a display configuration from an existing right-click the display configuration you want to copy, and click New. display configuration
4 Enter a name for the new display configuration, and press ENTER. 5 Specify the display sets and display representations to use in this display configuration:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create a display set for this configuration
see "Creating a Display Set" on page 427.
create display representations to use in this display configuration
see "Creating a Display Representation for an Object" on page 428 and "Assigning a Display Representation to a Display Set" on page 429.
assign display sets to view directions
see "Assigning a Display Set to a View Direction" on page 431.
6 Click OK.
Creating a Display Set
Use this procedure to create a display set. You can create a display set using standard default properties or by creating a duplicate of an existing display set.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Sets. 3 Create a display set:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create a display set with default properties (containing no display representations)
right-click Sets, and click New.
create a display set from an existing display right-click the display set you want to copy, and click New. set
4 Enter the name for the new display set, and press ENTER.
Creating a Display Configuration | 427
5 Specify the display representations to use in this display set:
If you want to ...
create display representations to use in this display set
Then ... see "Creating a Display Representation for an Object" on page 428.
assign display representations to this display see "Assigning a Display Representation to a Display Set" on page 429. set
add this display set to a display configuration see "Assigning a Display Set to a View Direction" on page 431.
use this display set as one of the default display sets
see "Specifying a Display Set as a Default Display Set" on page 432.
6 Click OK.
Creating a Display Representation for an Object
Use this procedure to create a display representation for a selected object. You create a display representation by duplicating an existing one for the object. Each object has one or more display representations, depending on whether the object needs to change in different views. Select an existing representation that is similar to the one you want to create. That way, the display properties are available for you to customize in the new representation. For example, to create a display representation for stairs and use a custom break mark, duplicate a plan display representation for stairs that contains settings for the break mark.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Representations by Object. 3 Select the object for which to create the new display representation. 4 In the right pane of the Display Manager, right-click the display representation to duplicate, and click
Duplicate. 5 Enter a name for the new display representation, and press ENTER.
The new display representation has the display properties of the representation you duplicated. The display representation created in the right pane is not listed in the Representations by Object directory in the left pane until you close and reopen the Display Manager.
6 Double-click the new display representation to edit its properties. For more information about editing display properties, see "Editing a Display Representation" on page 428.
7 Assign the display representation to the display sets in which they will be used. For more information, see "Assigning a Display Representation to a Display Set" on page 429.
8 Click OK. You can click Apply instead of OK to save the changes and continue working in the Display Manager.
Editing a Display Representation
Use this procedure to change the following default display properties of a display representation:
Visibility (on or off), and whether the display of a component is controlled by its material assignment Layer, color, linetype, and lineweight Display properties that are specific to the object and the display representation, such as the stair line and break
mark in plan display representations of stairs
By default, the layer of object components is layer 0. The default color and linetype are ByBlock. With these defaults, the object components inherit the color and linetype properties of the "parent" object. For example, when the color
428 | Chapter 9 Display System
and linetype of the door frame component are ByBlock, the door frame has the color and linetype of the door object. Object components cannot exist outside their parent object as can typical AutoCAD® block objects. Changes made to a display representation apply to every display set and display configuration that use the display representation. To apply changes more selectively, create a display representation based on the representation you want to modify. You can then change the display properties of the new representation and assign it to specific display sets. For more information about creating display representations, see "Creating a Display Representation for an Object" on page 428.
NOTE Changes you made to a display representation using this procedure apply only to the default display properties for the object. Changes to the display properties of object styles or of individual objects override the default display properties.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Representations by Object. 3 Expand the object that contains the display representation you want to edit. 4 Select the display representation to edit.
The display properties you can edit depend on the object and the display representation that you select. For example, a wall in a model representation displays only the Layer/Color/Linetype tab; a wall in a plan representation displays two additional tabs to specify display properties for hatching and cut plane components.
5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab to change the AutoCAD properties, including visibility of the object components and whether their display is controlled by the material assignment.
6 If applicable, click tabs such as Hatching or Other to change object-specific display properties. For more information about object-specific display properties, see the procedures for specifying display properties of an object style in the Help topic for each object. For example, to specify the display properties of wall styles, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on page 699.
7 When you finish editing display properties, click OK.
Assigning a Display Representation to a Display Set
Use this procedure to add or remove display representations in a display set. Changes made to a display set affect every display configuration that uses the display set. Keep the following points in mind when you add or remove display representations in a display set:
A display set can use more than one display representation for an object. For example, some display sets for plan views include both Plan and Threshold Plan display representations for doors.
To use a display representation for an object other than the current one, be sure to clear the current display representation after selecting the new one. Otherwise, the display set uses the display properties of both display representations.
If no display representation is selected for an object, the object does not appear when the display set is active in a viewport.
If no check box appears under a display representation for an object, the object does not have the display representation. For example, objects such as layout curves and layout grids have only one display representation.
You can compare two display sets to view the differences in display representation assignments. For more information, see "Comparing Display Representations Between Display Sets" on page 430.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Sets. 3 Select the display set you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Representation Control tab.
Assigning a Display Representation to a Display Set | 429
Editing a display set
5 In the right pane, add or remove display representations:
If you want to ...
Then ...
add a display representation for an object to the display set
scroll through the list to find the object. Select a display representation to use. If no check box appears under a display representation, the object does not have the display representation.
remove a display representation for an object scroll through the list to find the object. Clear the display representation you
in the display set
want to remove.
use the same display representation for all objects in the display set
right-click the name of the display representation, and click Select All. Be sure to clear any other display representations for the objects in this display set.
remove an object from a display set
scroll through the list to find the object. Right-click the object name, and click Clear All.
add all display representations to all objects right-click in the Objects heading area, and click Select All Display
in the display set
Representations.
clear all display representations from all objects right-click in the Objects heading area, and click Clear All Display Represen-
in the display set
tations.
6 NOTE You can use these steps to assign display representations from the Representation by Objects directory. Expand Representations by Object in the left pane, select an object, and add or remove display representation assignments.
Click OK.
Comparing Display Representations Between Display Sets
Use this procedure to view the differences in display representation assignments between two display sets. The Compare Sets dialog box displays two lists. Each list contains display representations that are assigned to that particular display set, but are not assigned to the display set in the adjacent column.
430 | Chapter 9 Display System
Comparing display sets to view different display representation assignments
You can use the Compare Sets dialog box to assign one or more display representations to either display set. 1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Click Sets. 3 In the right pane, hold down the CTRL key and select the two display sets you want to compare. 4 Right-click one of the selected display set names, and click Compare Sets.
NOTE The Compare Sets command is available only when two display set names are selected. You cannot compare more than two display sets at a time.
5 Each list shows the display representation assignments that are different from the other display set. 6 To assign display representations:
If you want to ...
Then ...
assign a display representation on the left side select the display representation name under the display set on the left side, to the display set on the right side
and click .
assign a display representation on the right side to the display set on the left side
select the display representation name under the display set on the right
side, and click
.
assign all display representations to the other
display set so both sets have identical
Click
.
assignments
7 Click OK twice.
Assigning a Display Set to a View Direction
Use this procedure to specify the display set assigned to each view direction in a display configuration.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Configurations. 3 Select the display configuration you want to edit. 4 Click the Configuration tab. 5 Under Display Representation Set, select the appropriate display set for each view direction.
The display set becomes active when the view direction is selected in the viewport in which the display configuration is assigned. The display set assigned to Default is used for view directions to which you do not assign a display set and for the four isometric views.
6 Click OK. To see the results of your changes, you must assign the display configuration to a viewport. For more information, see "Assigning a Display Configuration to a Viewport" on page 432.
Assigning a Display Set to a View Direction | 431
Assigning a Display Configuration to a Viewport
Use this procedure to assign a display configuration to a viewport. You can specify a display configuration for a viewport, model space, or tiled viewport at any time during the design process. NOTE You can also assign a display configuration to the current viewport in the Display Manager. Right-click the display configuration, and click Set To Current Viewport.
1 Select the viewport for which you want to assign a display configuration. 2 In the drawing status area, select the setting for Display Configuration.
Displaying the configurations you can assign to the current viewport
3 Select the display configuration that you want to use. 4 If necessary, enter rea (Regenerate All) to update the display to show the new display configuration.
Specifying a Display Set as a Default Display Set
Use this procedure to change the display sets defined as default display sets. For more information about default display sets, also known as standard sets, see "Display Sets" on page 416.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Right-click Sets, and click Standard Sets Adjustment.
The Standard Sets Types column lists the default display sets for the drawing. The Sets column lists the display set specified for each default display set. 3 Locate the standard set you want to change, and click its display set name in the Sets column. 4 Select the display set name to use for the standard set type. Specifying a display set for the Model standard set type
5 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Default Display Configuration
Use this procedure to specify the default display configuration applied to new viewports, model space, or tiled viewports in the current drawing. Existing viewports with assigned display configurations are not affected. NOTE You can also assign the default display configuration in the Display Manager. Right-click the display configuration, and click Set as Drawing Default.
1 In the drawing status area, click .
432 | Chapter 9 Display System
2 Click Drawing Setup. 3 Click the Display tab. 4 Under Drawing Default Display Configuration, select the display configuration to apply to new viewports,
or when the TILEMODE system variable is set to 1. 5 Click OK. 6 If necessary, enter rea (Regenerate All) to update the display in model space to show the new display
configuration.
Specifying the Display Configurations Used in Xref Overlays
Use this procedure to specify whether the objects in an xref drawing are to use the display configurations in the xref when the drawing is referenced as an overlay by the host drawing. By default, objects in both overlay and attached xref drawings use the display configurations assigned in the host drawing. This procedure describes how to specify that an xref overlay use only its own display configurations and not those in the host drawing. If you do not turn on this option, objects in the xref drawing can use their own display configurations or those of the host drawing. Xref drawings that are referenced as attachments can use either group of display configurations. For more information, see "Changing the Display Configuration Used in Xref Drawings" on page 433. In the following example, the objects in the xref drawing inserted as an overlay use the Screened display configuration (north and east walls, doors, and windows). The host drawing uses the Medium Detail display configuration (south and west walls, doors, and windows). An xref overlay that does not use the active display configuration in the host drawing
1 Open the drawing that you want to reference in another drawing. 2 In the drawing status area, click . 3 Click Drawing Setup. 4 Click the Display tab. 5 Under Drawing Default Display Configuration, select When used as an Xref Overlay use Display
Configurations from this drawing only. Clear this option if you want the xref drawing to use either its own display configurations or the display configurations in the host drawing. Specifying that objects use display configurations only from the current drawing
6 Click OK.
Changing the Display Configuration Used in Xref Drawings
Use this procedure to change the display configuration of an xref drawing that is referenced as either an attachment or an overlay in a host drawing.
Specifying the Display Configurations Used in Xref Overlays | 433
NOTE If you specified that the drawing should always use its own display configurations when inserted as an xref overlay, you cannot change the display configuration used to display the xref objects in the host drawing. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Configurations Used in Xref Overlays" on page 433.
1 Open the host drawing that contains the xref drawing for which to specify a different display configuration. 2 Select the xref drawing you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 3 Click the Xref Display tab.
If the settings on the tab are unavailable, you cannot change the display configuration used for this xref overlay. 4 Select Override the display configuration set in the host drawing. 5 Select the display configuration that you want to use. Selecting a display configuration from those in the xref drawing
The list of display configurations are those available in the xref drawing. Select Drawing Default if you want to use the default display configuration specified in the host drawing. 6 Click OK. 7 Enter rea (Regenerate All) to see the changes to the display of objects in the xref drawing.
Displaying Objects by Classification
Use this procedure to hide or show objects in a display set based on the classification of the objects. For example, if you classify objects by construction status (new, existing, or demo), you can exclude objects with the demo classification from the display. When the display is used in the drawing, those objects do not appear. Objects filtered from the display are not removed from the drawing. Their display is turned off only in viewports using the display set in which they are filtered. You can change the filter to display them again. Because the objects still exist in the drawing, the display of other objects does not change. For example, if you filter doors from a floor plan, the walls in which they are placed are still cut in the space occupied by the doors. For more information about defining classifications and assigning them to object styles, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Sets. 3 Select the display set you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Options tab.
The classification filter lists all classifications in the current drawing. All classifications are selected by default. 5 To hide objects of a specified classification, clear the check box under Classification Filter. For example, to hide all doors and walls classified as A1010 and A1020, clear the check boxes for A1010 and A1020 under Uniformat II.
434 | Chapter 9 Display System
Hiding objects based on their classification
To redisplay objects in a classification that were hidden, select the classification.
6 Click OK.
Specifying Settings for Live Sections and Materials
Use this procedure to specify how live sections and materials are displayed when the selected display set is active in a viewport and a live section view of the building model is enabled. These settings let you refine the appearance of a section. For example, you can remove surface hatching that may obscure details in the section. For more information about materials, see "Materials" on page 464. For more information about live sections, see "Creating and Editing a Live Section View" on page 1675.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Sets. 3 Select the display set you want to change, and click the Display Options tab.
Specifying display options for live sections and materials
4 Under Live Sections and Materials, specify display settings:
If you want to ...
Then ...
use the display range of the display configuration to determine the vertical extents of a live section view
select Section AEC Objects by Display Range defined in Display Configuration. If you want to graphically indicate where objects in the model extend below the display range, select Show Materials where Display Range Intersects AEC Objects.
WARNING You should clear this setting for Plan display sets. If this setting is selected, any 2D sections inserted in Plan view will not be displayed.
remove the display of the portion of
select Hide Sectioned Body Component.
sectioned objects beyond the bounding box
of the live section
remove surface hatching on sectioned objects
select Hide Surface Hatching.
5 Click OK.
Specifying Settings for Live Sections and Materials | 435
Managing Display Configurations
The Display Manager is a utility for managing display configurations, display sets, and display representations: renaming them or deleting them, copying them between drawings, emailing them to other users, and purging unused elements from drawings.
Renaming a Display Configuration or a Display Set
Use this procedure to rename a display configuration or a display set. You cannot rename the Standard display configuration.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
2 Select a display configuration or a display set:
If you want to ... rename a display configuration
Then ...
expand Configurations, right-click the display configuration, and click Rename.
rename a display set
expand Sets, right-click the display set, and click Rename.
3 Enter the new name, and press ENTER. 4 Click OK.
Renaming a Display Representation
Use this procedure to rename a display representation. You can rename any display representation that you create as well as some that are provided in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop templates. You cannot rename predefined display representations.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Representations by Object. 3 Select the object for which to rename a display representation. 4 Right-click the display representation to rename, and click Rename.
If Rename is unavailable on the shortcut menu, the display representation is predefined. Predefined display representations have this icon next to their names.
5 Enter the new name, and press ENTER. 6 Click OK.
Deleting a Display Configuration or a Display Set
Use this procedure to delete a display configuration or a display set. Keep the following points in mind when you delete display configurations or display sets:
You cannot delete the display configuration assigned to the current viewport. You cannot delete predefined display configurations, indicated by a red check mark to the left of the configuration
name. You cannot delete a display set used in a display configuration, nor can you delete the Standard display configuration.
NOTE Deleting a display configuration does not delete the display sets and display representations used in it. Deleting a display set does not delete the display representations used in it. For more information, see "Deleting a Display Representation" on page 437.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
436 | Chapter 9 Display System
2 Select a display configuration or a display set:
If you want to ... delete a display configuration
Then ... expand Configurations, right-click the display configuration, and click Delete.
delete a display set
expand Sets, right-click the display set, and click Delete.
3 Click OK.
Deleting a Display Representation
Use this procedure to delete a display representation that is not assigned to a display set. You can delete display representations that you create as well as some that are provided in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop templates. User-defined display representations have this icon next to their names. You cannot delete predefined display representations. Predefined display representations have this icon next to their names.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
2 Expand Representations by Object.
3 Select the object for which to delete a display representation.
4 To remove the display representation from all display sets, right-click the display representation, and click Clear All.
5 Right-click the display representation to delete, and click Delete. You will receive an error message if you try to delete a predefined display representation or one that is assigned to a display set.
The name of the display representation deleted in the right pane is listed in the Representations by Object directory in the left pane until you close and reopen the Display Manager.
6 Click OK.
Adding Notes and Reference Files to a Display Configuration or a Display Set
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a display configuration or a display set. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Select a display configuration or a display set:
If you want to ...
Then ...
add notes or files to a display configuration expand Configurations, and select the display configuration.
add notes or files to a display set
expand Sets, and select the display set.
3 Click the General tab. 4 To add a description to the display configuration, enter it for Description. 5 Click Notes. 6 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 7 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
Deleting a Display Representation | 437
8 Click OK twice.
Using Display Settings in Multiple Drawings
You can use your display configurations, display sets, and display representations in multiple drawings.
You can copy display configurations, display sets, and display representations between drawings. When you copy a display configuration, the display system also copies any display sets and display representations included in the selected configuration that do not exist in the destination drawing. Similarly, if you copy a display set, the display system copies any display representations that do not exist in the destination drawing.
If a display set or a display representation with the same name exists in the destination drawing, it is not overwritten with the new display information. To transfer the new information, rename the existing display set or representation in the destination drawing before copying display configurations or display sets.
For example, you might want to copy a display set named New Reflected, which contains a display representation for doors named Reflected Screened. The current drawing also contains a display representation for doors named Reflected Screened. You must rename the Reflected Screened display representation in the current drawing before copying the new display set and its display representations.
Emailing Display Configurations
If your system has email, you can email display configurations to other users from the Display Manager. You can send the entire display system in your drawing to another user of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The Display Manager copies the display system information to a new drawing, and attaches the drawing to a new email message created using your email program. Users of Autodesk Architectural Desktop who receive your display system by email can import it into their drawings, open the attached drawing file, and export your display system to their drawings; or they can use the attached drawing file as a template for new drawings. For further information about importing and exporting display systems, see "Sending Display Configurations to Other Users" on page 439.
Copying Display Settings Between Drawings
Use this procedure to copy display configurations, display sets, and display representations from the current drawing to another drawing. You can copy display settings between existing drawings. You can also copy them from an existing drawing to a new drawing.
NOTE You can also drag and drop display configurations, display sets, and display representations between drawings.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
The Display Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view. Any drawings open in the current session are also shown in the tree view.
2 In the Display Manager, open the drawing into which you want to copy the display representation, display set, or display configuration, if necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
copy the display configuration, display set, or display representation to a drawing that is not open in the Display Manager
in the Display Manager, click File Open, select the drawing you want, and click Open.
copy the display configuration, display set, or display representation to a new drawing
in the Display Manager, click File New drawing, enter a name for the drawing, and click Save.
3 Expand the Configurations, Sets, or Representations by Object folder. 4 Select the display configurations, display sets, or display representations that you want to copy:
If you want to...
Then...
copy an individual display configuration, display set, or display right-click the display configuration, display set, or display
representation
representation, and click Copy.
copy all display configurations, display sets, or display representations
right-click the Configurations, Sets, or Display Representations folder, and click Copy.
438 | Chapter 9 Display System
5 Right-click the drawing into which you want to paste the display settings, and click Paste.
The display configurations, display sets, or display representations are pasted into the selected drawing. If the drawing already contains a setting with the same name, the duplicate name is displayed in the Import/Export - Duplicate Names Found dialog box.
6 Resolve duplicate names, if prompted:
If you want to...
Then...
prevent the Display Manager from overwriting the existing display configuration, display set, or display representation with the new item of the same name
select Leave Existing, and click OK.
replace the existing display configuration, display set, or display representation with the new item
select Overwrite Existing, and click OK.
keep the existing display configuration, display set, or display select Rename to Unique, and click OK. The Display Manager representation and add the new item with a different name appends a number to the name of the new setting. Right-
click a setting, and click Rename to change the name.
7 Click OK.
Sending Display Configurations to Other Users Use this procedure to email all the display configurations and their elements in a drawing to other users of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The software creates a new drawing that contains only the display information from the current drawing and attaches the drawing to an email message. Objects, layers, and other drawing content and settings are not included in the new drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Right-click the drawing name, and click Send.
An email message with the subject "ADT Display System," is created using your email program. A drawing file containing the display information is attached to the message. If email is not available on your system, the Send option is not available.
3 Complete and send the message in your email program. 4 Click OK.
Purging a Display Configuration
Use this procedure to purge unused display configurations from a drawing. You cannot purge a display configuration assigned to a viewport or model space, or predefined display configurations such as Standard.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Right-click Configurations, and click Purge.
All display configurations that you can purge are selected in the Purge Display Configurations dialog box.
3 Clear any display configurations that you do not want to purge, and click OK twice.
Purging a Display Set
Use this procedure to purge unused display sets from a drawing. You cannot purge a display set assigned to a display configuration, or predefined display sets such as Standard, Model, or Plan.
TIP To find out if a display set is assigned to any display configurations, select Configurations in the left pane. The right pane lists each display configuration and the display sets it uses.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
Purging a Display Configuration | 439
2 Right-click Sets, and click Purge. All display sets that you can purge are selected in the Purge Display Sets dialog box.
3 Clear any display sets that you do not want to purge, and click OK twice.
Purging a Display Representation
Use this procedure to purge unused display representations from a drawing. You cannot purge a display representation assigned to a display set, or predefined display representations such as Model or General.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Representations by Object. 3 Select the display representations to purge:
If you want to ...
purge unused display representations for a specific object
Then ... right-click the object name, and click Purge.
purge all unused display representations in the drawing
right-click Representations by Object, and click Purge.
All display representations that you can purge are selected in the Purge Display Representations dialog box. 4 Clear any display representations that you do not want to purge, and click OK twice.
Working with Standard Display Settings
The Project Standards feature provides a mechanism for users to establish, maintain and synchronize display settings across an Autodesk Architectural Desktop project. Within a project, you can define standard display settings that are used across all project drawings.
For more information about projects and project standards, see "Drawing Management" on page 145 and "Project Standards" on page 325.
Standard display settings are organized in a standards drawing that is assigned to the project. Once a group of display settings have been defined as project standard settings, and introduced in the project drawings, they have a link to the standards and can be synchronized with them. With the same link, display settings from a project drawing can update the standard display settings, too.
Standard display settings can be accessed, edited, synchronized, copied, and updated in Display Manager.
Standard settings in Display Manager
440 | Chapter 9 Display System
Standard Icons
Standard display settings are displayed in Display Manager. Depending on their status with regards to the project standards, there are a number of different icons to differentiate them.
Icon
Description
Standard display setting When a light blue icon appears on a display setting in a project drawing or project standards drawing, the display setting is a standard setting and is in synch with the standard. No update or synchronization is necessary.
Standard display setting that is outdated When this icon appears on a display setting in a project drawing, the display setting is a standard setting, but is out of date. This means that the corresponding display setting in the project standards drawing has a newer GUID than the one in the project drawing. To update the display setting in the project drawing, see "Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards" on page 362.
Standard display setting that has a non-standard (newer) version When this icon appears on a display setting in a project drawing, the setting is a standard setting, but has a version GUID that cannot be found in the project standards. If you encounter this icon, you can either overwrite the non-standard version with the current version from the standards drawing, as described in "Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards" on page 362, or you can update the standards with the version from the project drawing, as described in "Updating Standard Display Settings in the Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing" on page 444.
Standard display setting that is excluded from synchronization When this icon appears on a display setting, the setting is excluded from synchronization. For more information, see "Excluding Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 442.
Standard display setting that has no version information When this icon appears on a display setting in a project standards drawing, the display setting has no version information. Version information can be deleted, as described in "Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing" on page 376.
To add version information to a display setting, see "Updating Standard Display Settings in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 442.
Standard display setting that has been changed, but not versioned When this icon appears on a display setting in a project standards drawing, the setting has been modified, but not versioned yet. In order for the changes to be included in the synchronization, the setting must be versioned, as described in "Updating Standard Display Settings in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 442.
This icon appears only in project standards drawings. Changes in project drawings are versioned automatically when you click Apply or OK in Display Manager.
Not standardized display setting When a dark blue icon appears on a display setting in a project drawing, this setting has no equivalent in the project standards.
Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards
Use this procedure to synchronize display settings in a project drawing with the project standards. 1 Open a project drawing. For more information about projects and project standards, see "Drawing Management" on page 145 and "Project Standards" on page 325.
2 On the Format Menu, select Display Manager. 3 In the Display Manager tree, navigate to the display setting you want to synchronize.
You can synchronize the following items:
display configurations display sets
Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards | 441
display representations 4 Select the item in the tree, right-click, and select Synchronize with Project Standards. 5 In the Synchronize Drawing with Project Standards dialog box, select the items to synchronize, as described
in "Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AEC Standards" on page 358. 6 Click OK to start the synchronization process.
Excluding Display Settings from Synchronization
Use this procedure to specify individual display settings that you want to be ignored during synchronization. Specified display settings will not be overwritten with standards during automatic synchronization and will not be displayed as version mismatches during semi-automatic or manual synchronization, unless you select the Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization check box in the Synchronization dialog box.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Navigate to the display configuration, display set, or display representation to be excluded, right-click, and
click Ignore During Synchronization. Note that the Ignore During Synchronization option now has a check mark next to it. If you click the option again, the check mark disappears and the selected display setting is removed from the list of components to be ignored.
Updating Standard Display Settings in a Project Standards Drawing
Use this procedure to change and version a standard display setting in the project standards display drawing. Display settings in the project standards display drawing and in the project drawings are versioned. The version is used to determine whether a display setting needs to be updated during synchronization. The version information includes the GUID (Global Unique Identifier), the date and time of the last modification, the windows login name of who last modified the item, and an optional comment. When you change a standard display setting in the open standards drawing, you are not automatically prompted to version the change.You can make multiple changes, save and close the drawing, reopen it, and then version the display setting when its is ready for propagating in the project. As long as the changes are saved to the project standards drawing, no edits will be lost, even without versioning in between.
NOTE When you make changes to the display standards drawing, you need to update the standard styles drawings with the new setting as described in "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 447. Otherwise, inconsistent display of objects might occur.
As long as your changes are saved, but not versioned, any synchronizations taking place during that time will not recognize the display settings as changed, since the object comparison is performed on the version GUID, and not the actual object properties. As a consequence, changed but unversioned display settings in the project standards will not be updated in the project drawings. To have the changes synchronized with the project, you need to version the display settings first.
442 | Chapter 9 Display System
Project standards in Display Manager
Updating a standard display setting 1 Open the standards display drawing of the current project. 2 On the Format menu, click Display Manager.
TIP The standard display drawing in Display Manager are listed under the project node ( node is displayed, the current drawing is not part of a project.
3 Select the display setting you want to edit, and make your changes. 4 Click the Version History tab of the changed display setting.
). If no project
5 Click Version.
6 If necessary, enter a comment for the new version. 7 Click OK.
The new version is appended to the Version History tab. 8 To version multiple display settings in a project standards drawing, select a group of settings and version
them:
Updating Standard Display Settings in a Project Standards Drawing | 443
9 Select the display settings that should be versioned. 10 If desired, enter a comment.
The comment will be applied to all objects selected for versioning. 11 Click OK.
Updating Standard Display Settings in the Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing
You can change a standard display setting in the project standards display drawing by overwriting it with the corresponding display setting from a project drawing. When you have updated a project standard display setting from a project drawing, the project needs to be synchronized to use the updated display setting. For information, see "Synchronizing a Project with the Standards" on page 353. NOTE When you make changes to the display standards drawing, you need to update the standard style drawings with the new setting as described in "Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other" on page 447. Otherwise, inconsistent display of objects might occur.
1 Open a project drawing. 2 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 3 Expand the node of the project drawing, and select the standard display setting with which you want to
update the project standards. NOTE A standard display setting in a project drawing can be recognized by a blue icon. 4 Right-click, and click Update Standards from Drawing. NOTE You can also select to update multiple display settings here.
444 | Chapter 9 Display System
The selected display setting is listed in the top panel. 5 To update the project standards from the project drawing, select Update Project Standards from the Action
drop-down list of the display settings. 6 To not update the project standards from the display setting in the project drawing, select Do not Update
Project Standards from the Action drop-down list of the display settings. In this case, the version in the project standards drawing is not overwritten with the version in the project drawing. During the next synchronization of the project drawing, the display setting will be displayed as out of synch with the project standards. 7 To ignore the out of synch version of the display setting, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the item will not be displayed in future updates, except when you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization or remove the Ignore flag from the display setting in Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 442. 8 Click OK. 9 In Display Manager, click OK or Apply. 10 Click Yes to save the updated project standards drawing.
Adding Standard Display Settings from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing
You can add not standardized display settings from the current project drawing to the project standards. You can do this, for example, if you have created a complex display configuration in a project drawing and want to include that into your standards. After copying a display setting to the project standards, you need to synchronize the project to use the new standard setting.
1 Open a project drawing from Project Navigator. 2 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 3 Add a new display setting to the current project drawing. 4 Select the new setting, right-click, and click Update Standards from Drawing.
NOTE You can select multiple display settings here.
The new setting is listed in the lower panel, which displays styles and display settings in the project drawing that do not exist in the project standards. 5 To add the display setting to a project standards drawing, and thereby make it a standard setting, select Add to Project Standards in the Action drop-down list. 6 To skip over the not standardized display setting, select Skip from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the not standardized display setting remains in the project drawing, and is not entered in the standards.
Adding Standard Display Settings from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing | 445
7 To ignore the display setting, select Ignore from the Action drop-down list. In this case, the not standardized display setting will not be listed again in future updates, except if you select Show objects set to ignore during project standards synchronization or remove the Ignore flag from the display setting in Display Manager, as described in "Excluding Display Settings from Synchronization" on page 442.
8 Click OK. 9 In Display Manager, click OK or Apply. 10 Click Yes to save the updated project standards drawing.
Editing the Version History of a Standard Display Setting
Each display setting in a project standards drawing has a version history. The version history displays the unique version identifier, date and time of the modification, user name and any additional comments entered by the user. You can edit the history by selectively removing individual versions, or removing all versions. You cannot remove the current version.
1 Open a project standards drawing. 2 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 3 Select a standard display setting from the project node. 4 Click the Version History tab.
5 To add a new version, click Version, and enter the versioning information. 6 To remove an existing version, select the version from the Version History list, and click Remove.
To remove all versions in one step, click Remove All. 7 If you want the display setting to be ignored during synchronization of standards, select Ignore during
project standards synchronization. 8 Click OK.
Purging the Version History from a Project Standards Drawing
You can remove the version history from all standard styles and display settings in a project standards drawing with one command. Purging the version history will remove all versions except the current one from the standard styles and display settings. You can do that to avoid cluttering your styles and display settings. When you purge the version history, no version GUID except for the current one remains. That means that the synchronization can no longer separate between an older version of a standard display setting and a non standard version of a standard display setting. Each display setting in a project drawing that does not have the current GUID of the corresponding standard display setting, will be labeled a "non-standard", or newer version.
1 Open the project standards drawing. 2 On the command line, enter AecClearVersionHistory.
446 | Chapter 9 Display System
The version history is removed from all standard styles and display settings in the drawing.
Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing
You can remove the version information from all standard styles and display settings in a project standards drawing. When you remove the version information, the version history and the current version information is deleted. When you run a synchronization, the standard style or display setting still participates in the synchronization and is considered the "latest version" when comparing with versions of the object in project drawings. No attempt is made during synchronization to automatically create a version GUID or history list. If you want to add version information to the standard style or display setting, you need to manually version the object as described in "Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing" on page 371.
1 Open the project standards drawing from which you want to remove the version information. 2 On the command line, enter AecPurgeVersion.
The version information is removed from all standard styles and display settings in the drawing.
Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other
Project standard styles and display settings can be distributed among multiple standards drawings, and depend on each other. For example, the styles in a styles drawing should use the display settings from the standard display drawing. If display changes are introduced in a standard styles drawing, and not synchronized with the standard display drawing, styles can display inconsistently across the project. Therefore, you should synchronize project standards drawings with each other when changes have been made to individual standards drawings. You can synchronize project standards drawings with each other either from the project node in Display Manager or from the CAD Manager menu. When project standards drawings are synchronized with each other, the following criteria are used to determine how the components are updated:
Standards drawing type: The display settings in the standard display drawing update the display settings in all standard styles drawings.
Assigned style types: When a drawing has in the standards configuration setup been associated to a style type, the styles in this drawing will update all other standards drawings that may contain standard styles of that type. For example, if the standards drawing "Door Styles.dwg" has been associated with the Door style type, the styles in that drawing will overwrite any existing door standard styles in all of the other standards drawings. Note that in most cases, you will not place standard styles anywhere but in the designated standards drawing for that style type.
Search order: When more than one standards drawings in the standards configuration setup have been associated to a style type, the first standards drawing in the search order will update all other drawings associated to that style type.
Synchronizing project standards drawings with each other is an automatic synchronization process, where no user interaction is possible. That means that no styles or display settings can be excluded from the synchronization process.
1 Verify that the project of which you want to synchronize the standards is the current project. 2 On the Format Menu, click Display Manager. 3 Select the Project Standards node in the tree view, right-click, and click Synchronize Project Standards
Drawings. 4 When the synchronization is finished, click OK to exit Display Manager.
NOTE Alternatively, you can click AEC Project Standards Synchronize Project Standards on the CAD Manager menu. If the CAD Manager menu does not appear in your menu bar, click Windows Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
Troubleshooting the Display System
If you have problems displaying objects in your drawing, use the following troubleshooting suggestions.
Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing | 447
Object Not Displayed in a Viewport Why isn't my object displayed?
When AEC objects in your model do not display correctly in a viewport, the following actions might help to solve the problem.
In the drawing status area, verify the name of the selected display configuration. Select a different display configuration, and see if the problem is resolved.
In the Display Manager, find out what display set is being used in the display configuration assigned to the viewport in question. The name of the current display configuration is highlighted. The name of the current display set is also highlighted.
n the detailed view of the display sets in the Display Manager, make sure that a display representation for the object is selected in that display set.
Is the object hidden because objects of its classification are filtered in the current display set? On the Display Options tab, verify that objects are not hidden.
If a display representation is selected in the current display set, look at the display properties of the display representation. Are the display components turned off? Are components on layers turned off?
Is the display of components controlled by the material assigned (is ByMaterial selected in the display properties)? If so, look at the display properties of the material assigned to object components to determine the settings.
Is the object drawn on a layer that is turned off?
Viewport Not Updating Properly Why isn't my viewport updating?
Under certain circumstances, such as when you switch view directions in shade modes other than 2D wireframe, the display is not restored correctly. In such cases, enter objrelupdatedate on the command line, and either select the problem AEC object or press ENTER to select all the AEC objects. This forces the display system to regenerate all the current display representations.
Objects Copied from Another Drawing Display Differently I dragged objects to another drawing.Why do they look different now?
Objects dragged or copied from one drawing to another use the display properties of the display configuration assigned to the viewport in the destination drawing. The display configuration in the original drawing is not copied with the objects.
Verifying the Existence of Objects Not Displayed in a Drawing Is there a quick way to verify that an object exists in a drawing but is not displayed?
Enter DisplayDxfName on the command line to label each object in the drawing with its name. Labels appear even for objects that are not displayed. For example, if you created a display set that did not include a display representation for doors, and you then assigned the display set to a display configuration used in the current viewport, doors would not be displayed in that viewport. An object can also exist in a drawing and not be displayed if the object was filtered by its classification in the current display set. DisplayDxfName can help you determine whether the objects are simply not displayed or if they are not present.
1 At the command line, enter displaydxfname. 2 Enter y (Yes). 3 Enter rea (Regenerate All).
448 | Chapter 9 Display System
Displaying the names of objects, including those that are not shown
4 To turn off object names, enter displaydxfname. 5 Enter n (No).
Object Linetype Displayed Incorrectly Why doesn't the linetype for my object display the way I expect?
The linetype scale for components of AEC objects works with the AutoCAD® linetype scale specified in the LTSCALE variable to control the linetype of AEC objects. The default value for linetype scale of all components of AEC objects is 1.0. This value is multiplied by the current value for LTSCALE to produce the linetype scale of object components. For example, if the LTSCALE value is 48.0, and the linetype scale in the display properties of an object is 1.0 for an object component, then the linetype scale of the component is 48.0. If you change the linetype scale in the display properties to 2.0, the linetype scale of the component is effectively 96, or 2.0 x 48.
Object Linetype Displayed Incorrectly | 449
450 | Chapter 9 Display System
Style Manager
10
The Style Manager is a utility that provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can view and work with styles in drawings or from intranet sites.
451
Style Manager
The Style Manager is a utility that provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can view and work with styles in drawings or from intranet sites.
Styles
Styles are sets of parameters that determine the appearance or function of objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop. For example, a door style determines the type of door represented in a drawing, such as single or double, bi-fold or hinged. The door style also determines the shape of the door, such as rectangular or arched, as well as default frame dimensions, standard sizes, and display properties. You assign a style to all instances of an object that are to have the same characteristics. For example, you could assign one door style to all office doors in a building and another door style to all fire doors in the building. Objects in the software that use styles include two-dimensional (2D) sections and elevations, AEC polygons, curtain walls, curtain wall units, doors, endcaps, mass elements, openings, railings, roof slab edges, roof slabs, schedule tables, slab edges, slabs, spaces, stairs, structural members, wall modifiers, walls, window assemblies, and windows. Using the Style Manager, you can also manage layer key styles, schedule data formats, and definitions for cleanup groups, mask blocks, multi-view blocks, profiles, and property sets.
NOTE To view layer key styles in the Style Manager, run a Layer Management command (Layer Manager, Layer Key Styles, or Layer Key Overrides) before you display the Style Manager.
Using the Style Manager
The Style Manager allows you to readily create, customize, and share styles with other users. In the Style Manager, you can perform the following tasks:
Access styles from open drawings and intranet sites Drag styles onto a palette to create tools Set up new drawings and templates by copying styles from other drawings or templates Sort and view the styles in your drawings and templates by drawing or by style type Preview an object with a selected style Create and edit styles Delete unused styles from drawings and templates Send styles to other Autodesk Architectural Desktop users by email
Standard and Predefined Styles
Most of the objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop have a default standard style. Catalogs provided with the software contain additional predefined styles that you can copy to tool palettes to use in your drawings. You can also access the styles for bar joists, curtain walls, doors, members, railings, roof slabs, slabs, spaces, stairs, walls, and windows, as well as property set definitions and schedule tables from drawings located in the \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric folder. For more information about specifying the location of files at installation, see "Install Architectural Desktop 2007" in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007 Installation Guide.
Creating Tools from Styles
You can create object tools by dragging a style from the Style Manager to a tool palette. When you drag a style onto a tool palette, a reference is created that associates the tool to the style. The reference location can be the current drawing, another drawing, or a remote location. If you edit the style in the Style Manager, the tool automatically uses the updated style. If an existing tool references a style from another drawing, the style is not added to the current drawing until you add an object of that style to the drawing. The reference location is used only if the current drawing has been saved.
452 | Chapter 10 Style Manager
Upgrading from a Previous Release If you are upgrading from Release 1 or Release 2 of Autodesk Architectural Desktop, the Style Manager replaces the Style dialog box used for creating, copying, editing, purging, importing, and exporting styles. Styles in External References You cannot change an object style in an external reference while refediting it from its host drawing. You can open Style Manager and make changes, but they will not be saved when the external reference is saved and closed in the host drawing. To make changes to styles in external references, you need to open the external reference drawing directly, make the changes there, and save it. The external reference should then be reloaded to update the changes. Getting Started with the Style Manager When you open the Style Manager, style information from all open drawings and templates is displayed. The Style Manager is split into two resizable panes and has a menu bar, a toolbar, and a status bar.
The Style Manager
Left Pane of the Style Manager The left pane of the Style Manager displays the styles in all open drawings and templates in a hierarchical tree view that you can navigate by expanding and collapsing the different levels in the tree. You can sort styles in the tree view by the drawing that contains them or by style type. The tree view is always displayed in the left pane, regardless of how you sort the styles. Styles are organized into three categories: Architectural Objects, such as Door Styles; Documentation Objects, such as Schedule Table Styles; and Multi-Purpose Objects, such as Layer Key Styles. Within each category, styles are listed alphabetically. Right Pane of the Style Manager The style information displayed in the right pane depends on what you select in the tree view in the left pane. You can preview how an object is displayed with a style, view style descriptions, view drawing information, and view the distribution of styles of a selected type across multiple drawings and templates. Style Manager Menu Bar and Toolbar The top of the Style Manager includes a menu bar and a toolbar that enable you to quickly access the menu commands. If you position your mouse over a toolbar icon, a tooltip identifies the icon. Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Style Manager indicates how styles are sorted in the tree view. The status bar also lists the drawing and style type or style currently selected.
Getting Started with the Style Manager | 453
Opening the Style Manager Use this procedure to open the Style Manager. You also access the Style Manager when you right-click object tools on the tool palettes. When you open the Style Manager, all drawings and templates that are open in the current session are displayed in the tree view.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. Opening the Style Manager
NOTE If drawings or templates are read-only, their read-only status is indicated by a lock on the folder next to the drawing in the tree view and also by a lock icon on the status bar. 2 Move and resize the Style Manager, or resize the left and right panes as needed to view style information.
Sorting Styles in the Style Manager
Use this procedure to sort information in the Style Manager by drawing and by style. When you open the Style Manager, the names of open drawings and templates are displayed in the tree view in the left pane. When you expand a drawing in the tree view, the individual styles within the drawing are grouped into three categories: Architectural Objects, Documentation Objects, and Multi-Purpose Objects. If you expand a category, the individual styles are listed alphabetically by style type. Sorting styles by drawing in the Style Manager
To see the styles available in each drawing for a particular style type, such as door styles, you can sort the styles by style type. In sorted view, styles are grouped by category, and organized by type and then by drawing.
454 | Chapter 10 Style Manager
Sorting styles by style type
The status bar at the bottom of the Style Manager indicates whether the styles are sorted by drawing or by style type. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. By default, styles are sorted by drawing. 2 On the View menu, click Explore By Style. 3 Expand a category, a style type, and then a drawing to view the styles available in each drawing. 4 On the toolbar, click to restore the by-drawing sort order. 5 Click again to sort the styles by style type.
Viewing Styles in the Style Manager
Use this procedure to preview how objects appear in selected styles and to view style descriptions. You can also filter styles to view only a selected type, such as wall styles. NOTE Certain structural member styles do not display properly in the Style Manager Viewer or the Floating Viewer. This is because the "sample" member that displays in the viewer is a single segment that is relatively short. If a structural member style uses large start and end offsets (such as some of the Bar Joist sample styles) or requires multiple segments (such as a bent member), the viewer displays a defect marker. If properly defined, the member displays correctly when added to the drawing.
1 In the Style Manager, expand the category and the style type that you want to view. 2 Select a style. 3 In the right pane, click the Viewer tab.
The object is displayed in the viewer with the characteristics of the selected style. Use the viewer control to see the object from different view directions and in wireframe, hidden, and shaded views. 4 Click the List tab to view information about the style. The style description is generated by the AutoCAD® LIST command. 5 To view the styles of only one style type, select a style type, and in the toolbar, click . Only the styles of the selected type, such as wall styles, are displayed in the Style Manager. 6 Click again to display all styles.
Viewing Styles in the Style Manager | 455
Viewing Styles Across Multiple Drawings
Use this procedure to display a chart view of the styles of a single style type distributed across the drawings open in the Style Manager. In the chart, you can see the styles used in more than one drawing and the styles used only in a single drawing.
1 In the Style Manager, sort the styles by style type. 2 In the tree view, click the style type with the styles that you want to view the drawings.
In the right pane, a matrix lists the styles of the selected type that are available in each drawing.
3 In the left pane, select a style. 4 In the right pane, click the Viewer tab.
The object is displayed in the viewer with the characteristics of the selected style. Use the viewer control to see the object from different view directions, and in wireframe, hidden, and shaded views.
5 Click the List tab to view information about the style. The style description is generated by the AutoCAD® LIST command.
6 To view only the styles of one style type, select a style type, and in the toolbar, click . Only the styles of the selected type--such as wall styles--are displayed in the Style Manager.
7 Click again to display all styles.
Working with Drawings and Templates in the Style Manager
When you first open the Style Manager, any drawings or templates that are open in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop are displayed in the tree view. You can open other drawings or templates and create new drawings or templates within the Style Manager.
Opening Drawings in the Style Manager
When you create a new drawing or template, or open an existing drawing or template within the Style Manager, that drawing or template is open for use within the Style Manager only, and not in your drawing session. You can open the drawing in the software after you exit the Style Manager.
Determining the Status of a Drawing
You can identify whether a drawing or template is open in the software or open only within the Style Manager. The icon next to the drawing or template in the tree view indicates its status in the Style Manager:
Drawing icon
Drawing status Drawing is open in the software and in the Style Manager.
Drawing is open only in the Style Manager.
Drawing is locked.
A drawing may be locked in the Style Manager for the following reasons: The drawing is read-only. The drawing was created in a previous version of the software. The drawing is referenced into a drawing that is currently open. The drawing is open in another application (for example, Volo View). The drawing file is locked on a network.
Hold the cursor over Lock in the status bar to view a tooltip that states the reason for the lock.
456 | Chapter 10 Style Manager
TIP You can save your styles in a read-only source drawing and copy them to other drawings as necessary.
Closing Drawings in the Style Manager
Any drawings and templates that you create or open in the Style Manager are displayed every time you open the Style Manager until you close them from within the Style Manager. Starting a New Drawing or Template in the Style Manager Use this procedure to start a new drawing or template in the Style Manager. The new drawing or template does not contain any styles and is open for use in the Style Manager only. It is not open in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop session. You can open the drawing in the software after you exit the Style Manager.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 In the Style Manager, click File New Drawing, or on the Style Manager toolbar, click . 3 Under File Name, enter the new drawing name. 4 Under Save as Type, select Drawing (.dwg) to create a drawing, or select Drawing Template File (.dwt) to
create a template. 5 Click Save. 6 Click OK.
Opening a Drawing or Template in the Style Manager Use this procedure to open a drawing or template in the Style Manager. The drawing or template is open within the Style Manager only. It is not open in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop session. You can open the drawing in the software after you exit the Style Manager. If you open an Autodesk Architectural Desktop Release 1 or 2 drawing in the Style Manager, the drawing is opened as a read-only drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 In the Style Manager, click File Open Drawing, or in the Style Manager toolbar, click . 3 Select one or more files, and click Open. 4 Click OK.
Dragging a Drawing into the Style Manager Use this procedure to open a drawing or template in the Style Manager by dragging it from Microsoft® Windows® Explorer. The drawing or template is open within the Style Manager only. It is not open in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop session. You can open the drawing in the software after you exit the Style Manager.
1 In the Style Manager, sort the styles by drawing. 2 Start Microsoft Windows Explorer. 3 In Windows Explorer, select the drawing or template that you want to open in the Style Manager. 4 Drag the drawing into the tree view in the Style Manager. 5 Click OK.
Closing Drawings and Templates in the Style Manager Use this procedure to close the drawings and templates open only in the Style Manager. You cannot close drawings in the Style Manager that are open in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop session.
1 In the Style Manager, sort the styles by drawing. 2 Select the drawing or template that you want to close. 3 In the Style Manager, click File Close. 4 Click OK.
Working with Drawings and Templates in the Style Manager | 457
Creating a Style
Use this procedure to create a style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying a style. After you create the style, you can edit its properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
A style is not stored in the drawing until you exit the Style Manager. A style is saved in a drawing when you save the drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand a category and then expand the style type for which you want to create a style. 3 Create a style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click the style type, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the style you want to copy, and click Copy. Rightclick, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new style.
For more information about creating a specific objects style or definition, see the style or definition topics associated with the object.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the style, click OK twice.
After you have created a style, you can drag the style onto a tool palette to create a tool. For more information, see "Creating a Tool from a Style" on page 458.
Copying and Assigning a Style to an Object
Use this procedure to create a style based on an existing style, and assign it to an object. You can, in one intuitive process, copy an existing object style, rename it, change the style properties as needed, and assign the new style to an object. This functionality will help you if you need to create many styles, or if you need to create templates and styles drawings.
1 In the drawing area, select an object with the style you want to copy. 2 Right-click, and click Copy <Object> Style and Assign.
For example, if you selected a wall, click Copy Wall Style and Assign.
3 Rename the object style. By default, the original style name is incremented with a (2).
4 Change the properties of the new style as necessary. For more information about changing the properties of an object style, refer to the appropriate section in the Help. For example, for information about wall styles, see "Wall Styles" on page 688.
5 Click OK. The new style has been assigned to the object. You can access the new style in the Style Manager under the appropriate object style type.
Creating a Tool from a Style
Use this procedure to create a tool from a style. You can create tools from the following styles and definitions: AEC polygon, curtain wall, curtain wall unit, door, door/window assembly, mask block, mass elements, multi-view block, railing, roof slab, schedule table, slab, space, stair, structural member, wall, window, zone template, and zone.
For detailed information about creating and customizing tools, see the appropriate topic in the online Help.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to create a tool.
458 | Chapter 10 Style Manager
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette.
The default tool name is the name of the referenced style. The image that identifies the new tool uses the view direction last used in the Properties palette for the selected object type.
4 Click OK.
Renaming a Style
Use this procedure to rename a style. 1 In the Style Manager, right-click the style you want to rename, and click Rename. 2 Enter a new name for the style, and press ENTER. 3 Click OK.
Copying Styles Between Drawings
Use this procedure to copy styles or definitions from the current drawing to another drawing. You can copy styles and definitions between existing drawings. You can also copy them from an existing drawing to a new drawing. If a style references other styles, those styles are also copied to the other drawing. For example, if you copy a wall style into a new drawing, the wall endcap style used in the wall style is also copied to the new drawing.
NOTE You can also drag and drop styles and style types between drawings.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view. Any drawings open in the current session are also shown in the tree view.
2 In the Style Manager, open the drawing into which you want to copy the style, if necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
copy the style to a drawing that is not open in the Style Manager
in the Style Manager, click File Open, select the drawing you want, and click Open.
copy the style to a new drawing
in the Style Manager, click File New drawing, enter a name for the drawing, and click Save.
3 Expand a category, and expand a style type. 4 Select the styles or definitions that you want to copy:
If you want to...
Then...
copy an individual style or definition
right-click the style or definition, and click Copy.
copy all styles or definitions of a selected type, such as all wall right-click the style or definition type, and click Copy. If your
styles
styles are sorted by style type, right-click the drawing name
under the selected style or definition type, and click Copy.
5 Right-click the drawing into which you want to paste the style(s), and click Paste. The styles or definitions are pasted into the selected drawing. If the drawing already contains a style with the same name, the duplicate name is displayed in the Import/Export - Duplicate Names Found dialog box.
6 Resolve duplicate style names, if prompted:
If you want to...
Then...
prevent the Style Manager from overwriting the existing style select Leave Existing, and click OK. with the new style of the same name
Renaming a Style | 459
If you want to...
Then...
replace the existing style with the new style
select Overwrite Existing, and click OK.
keep the existing style and add the new style with a different select Rename to Unique, and click OK. The Style Manager
name
appends a number to the name of the new style. Right-click
a style, and click Rename to change a style name.
7 Click OK.
Sending Styles to Other Users
Use this procedure to email styles or definitions to other users of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The software creates a new drawing that contains only the style information from the current drawing and attaches the drawing to an email message. If email is not available on your system, the Send option is not available.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand a category.
3 Select the styles or definitions you want to send:
If you want to... send an individual style or definition
Then... right-click the style or definition, and click Send.
send all styles or definitions of a selected type, such as all wall right-click the style or definition type, and click Send. If your
styles
styles are sorted by style type, right-click the drawing name
under the selected style or definition type, and click Send.
send all styles or definitions in the drawing (styles must be right-click the drawing name, and click Send. sorted by drawing)
A new email message with the subject "ADT Styles" is created using your email program. A drawing file containing the styles and definitions you selected is added to the message as a file attachment.
4 Complete and send the message in your email program. 5 Click OK.
Purging Styles
Use this procedure to remove unused styles and definitions from a drawing. You can purge any styles that are not applied to an object in the drawing and that are not used in another style. You can purge a single unused style or definition. You can also purge all unused styles or definitions of a selected type. For example, you can purge all unused wall styles.
If a style references other styles or definitions, these are not purged when you purge the style that uses them. For example, if you purge a wall style, the wall endcap style and cleanup group definition used in the wall style are not purged.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
NOTE You can also purge a selected style or style type by pressing DELETE.
2 Expand a category, and expand a style type. 3 Purge styles or definitions:
If you want to... purge one unused style or definition
Then...
right-click the style or definition you want to remove, and click Purge.
460 | Chapter 10 Style Manager
If you want to... purge all unused styles or definitions of a selected type
Then...
right-click the style or definition type, and click Purge. When prompted, verify that the styles you want to purge are selected, and click OK.
If a style or definition you selected to purge remains in the list after purging, the style or definition is currently applied to an object or is used in another style. For example, you cannot purge a wall endcap style that is used in a wall style or that is applied to an individual wall.
4 Click OK.
Purging Styles | 461
462 | Chapter 10 Style Manager
Materials
11
In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, a "material" corresponds to a specific finish material in a building model, such as brick, concrete, or glass. Materials are useful for illustrating plans, sections, elevations, and renderings in the design process. Materials also provide a way to manage the display properties of object styles.
463
Materials
In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, a "material" corresponds to a specific finish material in a building model, such as brick, concrete, or glass. Materials are useful for illustrating plans, sections, elevations, and renderings in the design process. Materials also provide a way to manage the display properties of object styles. Viewing a building model corner showing materials
NOTE For more information regarding materials see AutoCAD help.
Simplifying the Design Process Using materials makes displaying objects more realistic. You define the display of a material, such as brick or glass, only once in the drawing or the drawing template, and then assign it to the component of an object where you want the material to display. For example, you can define a material "Glass" and then assign it to any number of windows, glass door insets or cubicle walls. You typically assign materials to components in the style of an object, such as the brick in a wall style. Then, whenever you add a wall of that style to your drawing, the brick of that wall displays consistently. Defining materials in an object style can provide control for the display of objects across the whole project. When the characteristics of a material change, you change them just once in the material definition and all objects that use that material are updated. With the material tool you can apply a material to a single instance of the object.
Material Definitions and VIZ Render Materials Materials in Autodesk Architectural Desktop are defined as material definitions in Style Manager. Material definitions contain information about layer, color, and linetype of material components, hatch patterns, surface assignments, and the display of materials in sections. Furthermore, each material definition has a render material assigned that is used when the drawing is rendered in Autodesk Architectural Desktop or exported to VIZ Render. Render materials can be prepared in VIZ Render and imported into Architectural Desktop drawings and assigned to material definitions. You can also drag materials from the Render Material Catalog in Content Browser.
Predefined Materials Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a number of predefined material definitions for common design purposes, making it easy for you to start with new drawings. You can use these predefined material definitions "as is" or modify them to fit your designs. You can also create your own material definitions. Object styles provided with the software already have material definitions assigned to them. You can also drag and drop render materials between Architectural Desktop and Autodesk® VIZ Render by opening the Render Material Catalog in the Content Browser.
NOTE If you open VIZ Render from the flyout, Architectural Desktop links the geometry from that Architectural Desktop document into VIZ Render. However, if you open VIZ Render from the desktop icon or from the Start menu, VIZ Render opens to a blank drawing; you would need to reopen and link any existing geometry.
Surface Hatching Materials provide the ability to assign surface hatches to objects. Surface hatches can be displayed in model, section and elevation views. You can control the placement and orientation of the hatch for each object face.
464 | Chapter 11 Materials
Section Hatching
Materials are helpful to clearly illustrate sections and elevations. The section hatch is specified independently of the surface hatch. Special material components allow a realistic or schematic display of rendered live section views, section cuts, and section bodies. For more information about live section views, see "Creating and Editing a Live Section View" on page 1675.
Rendered live section view with transparent outside material
Material Tool
You create a material tool from a material definition. You can then use this tool in the same way that you would use any other tool in your project. For more information about working with tools, see "Tools" on page 43. This is the most efficient method of applying a material definition to an object or the component of an object. For more information, see "Creating a Material Tool from a Material Definition in Style Manager" on page 468.
Objects That Support Materials
Objects to which you assign materials are typically three-dimensional (3D) objects. Two-dimensional (2D) objects, such as areas, grids, or AEC polygons, are more like symbolic representations and drawing aids than actual building objects.
Not all components of an object can take on a material definition. For example, a door swing is a symbolic graphic, therefore, it does not support a material assignment. The appearance of a door swing is specified in the display properties of a door style. The door frame, however, is a physical part of the door, and a material definition can be assigned to it.
Object Curtain Walls/Curtain Wall Units Doors Door/Window Assemblies Mass Elements Mass Groups Railings Roof Slabs/Roof Slabs Space Boundaries Spaces Stairs Structural Members
Components that support materials infills, frames, mullions frames, panels, stops, insets, muntins infills, frames, mullions mass element body mass group body guardrails, handrails, bottom rails, posts, balusters roof body slab body, slab edge, fascias slab, edge soffits interior boundary, exterior boundary floor, ceiling tread, riser, landing beam, brace, column body
Objects That Support Materials | 465
Object Walls Windows
Components that support materials wall body, wall shrinkwrap, wall components glass, frames, sashes, muntins
Assigning Materials to Objects and Object Styles
The most efficient way to use materials is to apply them to a style. Any object of that style inherits those definitions or the relevant properties. As you add new objects of a style to your project, each will have the same materials assigned to them. You can also assign materials directly to an object. You may want to do so in these cases:
You want to override the existing material for a specific object. The object in question does not support styles, but does support materials. (This is the case for AEC polygons.)
Examples of Material Assignments
Assigning a material to components of an object will change how the object displays in plan, isometric, section, and elevation views. For example, if you want to draw a brick exterior wall, you can assign a material that displays a brick surface hatch in model view and a realistic brick display for a rendered view.
Brick wall in hidden line and rendered views
If there are special insulation components in a wall, you can assign a light, half-transparent material to them. For sectioning the wall, you can assign a specific section hatch pattern or fill that differs from the regular brick surface hatch.
466 | Chapter 11 Materials
Section fill material in a rendering
In another example, you can assign materials to the floor and ceiling components of a space such as a carpet material to the floor and tile to the ceiling.
Working with the Material Tool
Materials can be added to objects in two different ways: Assign a material definition to an object via its display properties or its style. For more information, see "Process Overview: Creating and Assigning Materials" on page 486. Apply a material tool to an object in the drawing. For more information, see "Using the Material Tool to Add Materials to Objects" on page 467.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop is supplied with a standard material tool that is linked to the Material Definitions (Imperial).dwg or Material Definitions (Metric).dwg. Use this tool to apply materials from the Material Definitions (Imperial).dwg or Material Definitions (Metric).dwg to the components of an object. You can also create custom material tools pointing to different styles drawings, or convert VIZ Render materials to material tools. For more information, see the following sections.
Using the Material Tool to Add Materials to Objects
Autodesk Architectural Desktop is supplied with a standard material tool that is linked to the Material Definitions (Imperial).dwg or Material Definitions (Metric).dwg. Use this tool to apply materials from the Material Definitions (Imperial).dwg or Material Definitions (Metric).dwg to the components of an object.
1 On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes. 2 Click the Tool Palettes title bar, and click Design. 3 On the Design palette, select the material tool.
Working with the Material Tool | 467
4 Select an object in the drawing.
NOTE For information about which objects can have materials assigned, see "Objects That Support Materials" on page 465.
5 In the Apply Material to Components dialog box, select an object component.
Under Current Material, the material that is currently assigned to the object is listed. This is a read-only column. 6 Under Select component(s) to apply the material, select the new material for the selected component. The list of materials here is the list of available material definitions in the style drawing assigned to the material tool. If you are using the standard material tool from the Design palette, you will have access to all materials from Material Definitions (Imperial). dwg or Material Definitions (Metric).dwg. 7 Under Apply to, select whether the material should be applied only to the selected object or to all objects of the selected style.
If you want to apply the new material to the selected object only, select Object Override. If you want to apply the new material to all objects of that style, select Style. If you want to keep the style and object override settings of the material, select Leave as is.
If you select Leave as is, the new material will be assigned to all objects of that style, if the previous material assignment was as an assignment from the style. If the previous material assignment was an object override, the new material will be assigned as an object override as well. 8 Repeat steps 5-7 for each component you want to assign a different material to. 9 Click OK.
Creating a Material Tool from a Material Definition in Style Manager
You can create a new material tool from a material definition in Style Manager. For information about creating a material definition in Style Manager, see "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487.
NOTE You can create a material tool from Style Manager only if the drawing containing the material definition has been previously saved.
1 Open the drawing containing the material definition you want to create a material tool from.
468 | Chapter 11 Materials
2 On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes. 3 Make the palette active on which you want to place the new material tool. 4 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 5 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 6 Select a material definition, and drag it from Style Manager to the active tool palette. 7 Close Style Manager.
The material definition has been added as a material tool to the tool palette. You can use it to apply the material to objects, as described in "Using the Material Tool to Add Materials to Objects" on page 467.
NOTE The material tool uses the material definition you selected in Style Manager. The style location of the material tool is the drawing containing the definition. This means that when using this material tool you have access to all material definitions contained in the drawing.
Copying a Material Tool on a Tool Palette
You can create a new material tool by copying and pasting an existing tool on a tool palette. 1 On the Window menu, click Tool Palettes. 2 Select the palette that contains the material tool you want to copy. 3 Select the material tool, right-click, and click Copy. 4 If you want to paste it onto a different palette, make the palette active. 5 On the palette, right-click, and click Paste. 6 Select the tool, right-click, and click Properties. 7 To change the associated material definition, select a different definition under Definition Name. 8 To select a different source drawing, click Browse under Style Location. 9 In the Select a location File dialog box, select a source drawing, and click Open.
10 Select a material definition from the selected source file. 11 To update the material tool icon with the new material, select the icon under Image in the top left corner,
right-click, and click Refresh Image. 12 Click OK.
Creating an AEC Material Tool from a VIZ Render Material
You can create a material tool by dragging a render material from VIZ Render to Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. Creating a new material tool in a drawing entails the creation of a new material definition in Style Manager. The material definition is used to create the material tool, but can also be used for different purposes in the drawing, like using the material definition to create object styles.
1 With an Architectural Desktop drawing open, open VIZ Render from your desktop or the Start menu. 2 Open the scene in VIZ Render that contains the material you require. 3 Use one of the following options to copy the render material to Autodesk Architectural Desktop:
Drag the material from the VIZ Render Scene palette into an Architectural Desktop drawing. If you drag a VIZ Render material directly into an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing, an Autodesk Architectural Desktop material definition is created from it. You cannot directly create an Autodesk Architectural material tool this way. The new material definition is listed in Style Manager, where you can create a material tool from it, as described in "Creating a Material Tool from a Material Definition in Style Manager" on page 468.
Drag the material from the VIZ Render Scene palette onto an Architectural Desktop palette.
Copying a Material Tool on a Tool Palette | 469
If you drag a VIZ Render Material to an Autodesk Architectural Desktop palette, a "temporary" material tool is created. To finish the creation of the material tool, see the next steps. 4 If you have dragged the VIZ Render material directly into an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing, the Create AEC Material worksheet is displayed.
For AEC Material to use as a Template, select an existing material definition that contains the parameters you want to use. NOTE The material definition you select as template will define all initial material settings except for the rendering material. These include the layer, color, and linetype settings, hatching, surface hatch assignments, and the behavior of the material when used in a section.
Enter a name for the new material definition. Click OK. The option to automatically create a material tool from the new material definition is deactivated. To create a material tool,see "Creating a Material Tool from a Material Definition in Style Manager" on page 468. 5 If you have dragged the VIZ Render material onto an Autodesk Architectural Desktop palette, finish the creation of the AEC Material tool. Select the temporary icon on the tool palette.
In the create AEC material woksheet, select an existing material definition for AEC Material to use as a Template. NOTE The material definition you select as template will define all initial material settings except for the rendering material. These include the layer, color, and linetype settings, hatching, surface hatch assignments, and the behavior of the material when used in a section.
470 | Chapter 11 Materials
Enter a name for the new material definition. Verify that Convert to AEC Material tool is selected. Click OK.
A notification message appears, reminding you to save the drawing after dismissing the notification so that the material tool is saved with the current drawing. 6 If you have created a material tool by dragging a render material to a tool palette, update the tool image to display the Autodesk Architectural Desktop material tool icon. 7 Select the material tool on the palette, right-click, and click Properties. You can see that the icon preview is different from the Viewer preview.
8 Select the icon preview under Image, right-click, and click Refresh Image. Then, click OK. The material tool is now represented on the palette by the Autodesk Architectural Desktop cube icon with correct material display.
Creating a Material Tool from a Render Material in the Content Browser
You can create a material tool by dragging a render material from Content Browser to Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. Creating a new material tool in a drawing entails the creation of a new material definition in Style Manager. The material definition is used to create the material tool, but can also be used for different purposes in the drawing, like using the material definition to create object styles.
1 On the Window menu, click Content Browser. Alternatively, you can click on the Navigation toolbar.
2 Open the Render Material Catalog and navigate to the material you require. 3 Move the pointer over the i-drop® icon next to the tool so that the pointer image changes to an eyedropper
( ). 4 Click and hold the i-drop® icon until it is full. 5 Use one of the following options to copy the render material to Autodesk Architectural Desktop:
Drag the material from Content Browser into an Architectural Desktop drawing. If you drag a render material from Content Browser directly into an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing, an Autodesk Architectural Desktop material definition is created from it. You cannot directly create an Autodesk Architectural material tool this way. The new material definition is listed in Style Manager, where you can create a material tool from it, as described in "Creating a Material Tool from a Material Definition in Style Manager" on page 468.
Drag the material from Content Browser onto an Architectural Desktop palette.
Creating a Material Tool from a Render Material in the Content Browser | 471
If you drag a render material to an Autodesk Architectural Desktop palette, a "temporary" material tool is created. 6 If you have dragged the render material directly into an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing, the Create AEC Material worksheet is displayed.
For AEC Material to use as a Template, select an existing material definition that contains the parameters you want to use. NOTE The material definition you select as template will define all initial material settings except for the rendering material. These include the layer, color, and linetype settings, hatching, surface hatch assignments, and the behavior of the material when used in a section.
Enter a name for the new material definition. Click OK. The option to automatically create a material tool from the new material definition is grayed out. To create a material tool, see "Creating a Material Tool from a Material Definition in Style Manager" on page 468. 7 If you have dragged the render material onto an Autodesk Architectural Desktop palette, finish the creation of the AEC Material tool. Select the temporary icon on the tool palette.
In the Create AEC Material Worksheet, select an existing material definition for AEC Material to use as a Template. NOTE The material definition you select as template will define all initial material settings except for the rending material. These include the layer, color, and linetype settings, hatching, surface hatch assignments, and the behavior of the material when used in a section.
472 | Chapter 11 Materials
Enter a name for the new material definition. Verify that Convert to AEC Material tool is selected. Click OK.
A notification message appears, reminding you to save the drawing after dismissing the notification so that the material tool is saved with the current drawing. 8 If you have created a material tool by dragging a render material to a tool palette, update the tool image to display the Autodesk Architectural Desktop material tool icon. 9 Select the material tool on the palette, right-click, and click Properties. You can see that the icon preview is different from the Viewer preview.
10 Select the icon preview under Image, right-click, and click Refresh Image. Then, click OK. The material tool is now represented on the palette by the Autodesk Architectural Desktop cube icon with correct material display.
Applying Material Tool Properties
Use this procedure to apply the style properties of a material tool to an existing object or component. You can apply the material at the object or style level. You can select one object before starting the command. If more objects are preselected, the command will revert to a selection mode. You can quickly select different material definitions and apply them as overrides to an object or to all objects of the same style without creating multiple material tools. If you want see the results more clearly, shade the object, select an isometric view, and use Object Viewer from the context menu or 3D Orbit.
1 Locate the material tool that you want to use and select it. 2 Select the object you wish to change.
Applying Material Tool Properties | 473
The Apply Material to Components worksheet displays.
3 Select the material to apply. 4 Select the component to change. 5 Select whether the material should be applied to the style, at the object level or left as is for each component. 6 Click OK.
Material Components and Display Properties
Each material definition has the following display components that determine the appearance of object components to which a material has been assigned:
Linework Plan Hatch 3D Body Surface Hatch Section Hatch Sectioned Body and Boundary After you have specified display components of an object to be By Material, then you can no longer change the display component properties of that object. The material components correspond to groups of object display properties or to display property types. For example, the material Linework component determines the appearance of linework components in 2D plan views, such as wall shrinkwraps, mass element boundaries or door frames. Surface Hatch determines the appearance of all surface hatching on objects in model and elevation views. When you specify that the component of an object is displayed by material, the component uses the display properties of the associated material, instead of the display properties of the object. Only object components that correspond to a physical component of the object can be assigned material definitions. For more information, see "Objects That Support Materials" on page 465. Material definitions cannot be assigned to a custom display block, but objects that are within custom display blocks may have material definitions assigned. For a detailed list of object components mapped to material components, see the Help topics for the objects.
Linework Material Component
The Linework component is used for object components representing linework in 2D plan and elevation views, such as wall boundaries, door frames, or mass element boundaries.
474 | Chapter 11 Materials
Viewing wall plan view linework material components
Plan Hatch Material Component
The Plan Hatch component is used for hatching display components in plan views, such as wall component hatches, mass element hatches, and slab hatches. Viewing wall plan view hatching material components
3D Body Material Component
The Body component is used for object components representing linework in 3D model views, such as wall bodies, mass element boundaries, door frames, and window frames. Viewing 3D body material components
Surface Hatch Material Component
The Surface Hatch component is used for hatching display components in 3D model views, sections, and elevations. Section hatching is used on the cut face of a sectioned object or component.
Plan Hatch Material Component | 475
Viewing surface hatching material on a wall elevation
You can specify the faces of an object that display the surface hatch within the material definition. For example, you can specify that the hatch be on only the front and left side of the object. Specifying wall face surface hatching assignments
For more information about surface hatch faces, see "Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition" on page 489.
2D Section/Elevation Linework
The 2D Section/Elevation Linework component is used specifically for 2D building sections or building elevations. All linework in a 2D section/elevation can be controlled by this component. For more information about using material definitions in elevations, see "Surface Hatch Linework in Elevations" on page 1731. Viewing 2D elevation linework on a wall
Section Hatch Material Component
The Section Hatch component is used specifically for building sections. It is used for hatches on object faces cut by a section line. Section hatches can be applied to 2D sections, 3D sections, and live section views. For more information about using material definitions with sections, see "Section Hatch Linework" on page 1694.
476 | Chapter 11 Materials
Viewing a 2D wall section with section hatch
Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary
The Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary components display only in live section views. Live section views are special section views of a 3D building model. The building objects are not converted into a section object but are retained as individual objects in the section. They keep their properties and display components and may be edited in the section. The display of the views exterior to the live section is changed to be Sectioned Body. This display can be semi-transparent or hidden.
Material Component Sectioned Body Sectioned Boundary
Description the objects or object parts outside the section the outline of the cut line created by the section
For detailed information about live section views, see "Creating and Editing a Live Section View" on page 1675. Live section view with sectioned body (gray) and sectioned boundary (red)
Displaying Materials in a Drawing
Use this procedure to turn on material definitions in a display representation if they are assigned to objects but are not displayed in the drawing. For more information, see "Display System Structure" on page 412.
1 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 2 Expand Configurations.
The current display configuration is marked in bold. 3 Expand the current display configuration. 4 Select a display set in the current display configuration. 5 Click the Display Representation Control tab. 6 Scroll to Material Definition and select a display representation.
Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary | 477
By default, material definitions have only a General display representation. If this is the only available display representation listed, select it. If you created another display representation for material definitions, you can select that representation instead. NOTE Make sure that you select only one display representation for material definitions in each display set. You should also verify that the component's object layer is turned on.
7 Repeat steps 46 to select a display representation for material definitions in the other display sets in the current configuration.
8 Click OK. The material assignments you made now display in the drawing.
Working with Surface Hatches
Surface hatches are hatch patterns on three-dimensional (3D) objects that display in 3D model views and elevation views. Each 3D object has a number of faces: Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, and Back. You can decide whether an object should carry a surface hatch. For example, if you view a wall in 3D view, you might want to hatch only the side facing you to avoid cluttering the drawing. The faces of an object that carry the surface hatch are specified in the material definition. All objects with that material definition assigned show the same surface hatch assignment, unless you create an individual surface hatch override. Defining the faces on a regular object, such as a wall, slab, or box-shaped mass element, is intuitive. Front, Back, Left, Right, Top and Bottom are clearly defined faces that can easily be assigned material definitions. However, defining the direction in which each face lies can be more complex for different, irregularly shaped objects, such as curved objects, extrusion objects, or Free Form objects resulting from Boolean operations. For information about changing the surface hatch assignments of a material definition, see "Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition" on page 489. For information about surface hatch overrides, see "Overriding the Surface Hatch on Individual Objects" on page 481. Specifying object face material assignments
Surface Hatches on Curved Surfaces
Curved surfaces do not have all the view directions you can specify in the material definition. It is important to know that the faces are designated on curved surfaces to understand how surface hatching is applied when these objects are assigned material definitions. An object with a vertically curved surface, such as a Barrel Vault mass element, has no front and back faces, as nothing could delineate them. The curved surface of the Barrel Vault mass element is considered to be the top face of the object.
478 | Chapter 11 Materials
Barrel vault mass element with material assigned to top face
An object with a horizontally curved surface, such as a Cylinder mass element, has no left and right sides, as nothing can delineate them. The curved surface is considered to be the front face. Cylinder mass element with material assigned to front face
An object that has only one curved surface, such as a Sphere mass element, has only a front face. Sphere mass element with material assigned to front face
Surface Hatches on Multiple Faces
Irregular and complex objects can have multiple faces in one view direction. If necessary, you can override the surface hatch on all faces with the same view direction, or on individual faces. For information about overriding individual faces, see "Overriding the Surface Hatch on Individual Objects" on page 481. Stair with material assigned to treads
Surface Hatches on Extrusions
The surface hatch placement on objects created from an extruded profile depends on two factors: the view directions assigned to the individual edges of the profile the direction of the extrusion The desired extrusion direction depends on the object you want to extrude from the profile. A rail, for example, is extruded in the X direction. A railing post is extruded in the Z direction. Custom door and window shapes are extruded in the Y direction.
Surface Hatches on Multiple Faces | 479
Face assignments from edges extruded in the X direction
Face assignments from edges extruded in the Y direction
Face assignments from edges extruded in the Z direction
Specifying Faces on Extrusions Use this procedure to specify the faces on object components created from extruding a profile. These objects and components include extruded mass elements, wall body modifiers, custom railing components, and other components extruded from a profile. When you create a profile, all the edges are marked for extrusion in the Z direction. These edge positions are calculated based upon the quadrant in which the midpoint of the edge lies. You can change the view direction of edges and the extrusion direction in the profile definition. Determine the direction of the profile edges before creating objects from the profile. For example, if you created a profile for a custom railing baluster and specified the direction of the individual edges, any baluster added to the railing based on that profile has those assignments. If you later change the edge view direction in the profile, existing balusters do not change accordingly.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Profiles. 3 Select the profile for the extrusion.
480 | Chapter 11 Materials
4 Click the Profile Edges tab.
5 Select an extrusion direction. 6 For each edge, select a position that corresponds to the view direction you want to assign to the face created
from that edge. The edge positions that are available depend on the extrusion direction you selected. 7 Click OK.
Surface Hatches on Free Form Mass Elements
Free Form mass elements are created when you perform a Boolean operation on a standard mass element by adding, subtracting or intersecting another mass element. The resulting mass element can be irregularly shaped. For more information, see "Mass Elements and Mass Groups" on page 540. When a mass element is converted into a Free Form mass element, all previous material assignments of the source mass elements are lost. The new mass element reverts to the Standard material definition. You can assign another definition to the new mass element.
Overriding the Surface Hatch on Individual Objects
The surface hatch specified for a material determines the display of objects that are assigned the material in elevation and model views, as well as the appearance in rendered views. The material definition specifies which faces of objects--Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, Back--display a surface hatch. However, in some instances, you may want to override the surface hatch for a selected face of an object. For example, you may want to turn off the surface hatch where it could obscure small details of an object when the drawing is plotted. Override Operations You can change the surface hatches for faces of individual objects in the following ways:
hide the surface hatch change the rotation of the surface hatch change the vertical and horizontal offsets of the surface hatch You can also specify whether the changes are applied only to the selected face or to all faces of the object with the same direction--for example, to all front faces. Multiple Surface Hatch Overrides You don't need to create separate overrides for individual changes; you can create one surface hatch override that is both rotated and offset. In most cases, this is the preferred method of working. However, in some cases, you need to assign more than one override. For example, suppose you want to rotate the surface hatch of all front faces of a column,
Surface Hatches on Free Form Mass Elements | 481
and you want to offset one individual front face. You first add an override for the rotation and select All Front Faces. Then you add an override for the offset in which you select Only Selected Front Face.
Hiding a Surface Hatch
Use this procedure to hide the surface hatch on an object face. To add an override to a surface hatch, an object needs to have a surface hatch material assigned to it. A surface hatch on an object can come from an assigned material or from the display properties of the object or object style. If a surface hatch comes from the display properties of the object instead of from the material assignment, you cannot override it on individual faces. You receive an error message upon selecting the object face.
1 Select the object for which you want to hide an individual surface hatch, right-click, and click Materials Add Surface Hatch Override.
2 Select the object face where you want to hide the surface hatch. A profile surrounds the selected face.
Profile defining a face of a wall
3 Specify where the override applies: If you want to... override only the selected face of the object
override all faces of the object in the same view direction
Then...
select Only Selected <Direction> Face for Faces. For example, to apply a surface hatch override only to the selected Front face of a wall, select Only Selected Front Face.
select All <Direction> Faces for Faces. For example, to apply a surface hatch override to all Top faces of a selected column, select All Top Faces.
4 Select Hide Surface Hatching. Surface hatch hidden on the front face of a wall
5 Click OK.
482 | Chapter 11 Materials
Displaying a Hidden Surface Hatch
Use this procedure to display a previously hidden surface hatch. An object must have a surface hatch material assigned to it in order to add an override to a surface hatch. A surface hatch on an object can come from an assigned material or from the display properties of the object or object style. If a surface hatch comes from the display properties of the object instead of from the material assignment, you cannot override it on individual faces. You receive an error message upon selecting the object face.
1 Select the object for which you want to redisplay a hidden individual surface hatch, right-click, and click Materials Edit Surface Hatch Override.
2 Select the profile around the hidden surface hatch. 3 Right-click, and click Edit Hatch Override. 4 Clear Hide Surface Hatching. 5 Click OK.
6 Click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar to save the changes.
Specifying the Rotation of a Surface Hatch
Use this procedure to specify the rotation of a surface hatch.
1 Select the object for which you want to rotate an individual surface hatch, right-click, and click Materials Add Surface Hatch Override.
2 Select the object face where you want to change the rotation. A profile surrounds the selected face.
3 Specify where the override applies:
If you want to...
Then...
override only the selected face of the object
select Only Selected <Direction> Face for Faces. For example, to apply a surface hatch override only to the selected Front face of a wall, select Only Selected Front Face.
override all faces of the object in the same view direction
select All <Direction> Faces for Faces. For example, to apply a surface hatch override to all Top faces of a selected column, select All Top Faces.
4 Specify the rotation of the surface hatch.
Displaying a Hidden Surface Hatch | 483
Specifying surface hatch rotation angles
5 Click OK.
Specifying the Horizontal and Vertical Offset of a Surface Hatch
Use this procedure to specify the horizontal and vertical offset of a surface hatch. An object must have a surface hatch material assigned to it in order to add an override to a surface hatch. A surface hatch on an object can come from an assigned material or from the display properties of the object or object style. If a surface hatch comes from the display properties of the object instead of from the material assignment, you cannot override it on individual faces. You receive an error message upon selecting the object face. Changing the offsets of a surface hatch lets you adjust the hatch pattern on individual faces to align with the face edges or to improve the appearance of the hatch. Specifying surface hatching offset and alignment
1 Select the object for which you want to change the hatch pattern offset, right-click, and click Materials Add Surface Hatch Override.
2 Select the object face where you want to change the hatch pattern offset. A profile surrounds the selected face.
484 | Chapter 11 Materials
3 Specify where the overrides applies: If you want to... override only the selected face of the object
override all faces of the object in the same view direction
Then...
select Only Selected <Direction> Face for Faces. For example, to apply a surface hatch override only to the selected Front face of a wall, select Only Selected Front Face.
select All <Direction> Faces for Faces. For example, to apply a surface hatch override to all Top faces of a selected column, select All Top Faces.
4 Specify the horizontal and vertical offsets of the surface hatch. 5 Click OK.
Editing Surface Hatch Overrides
Use this procedure to edit a surface hatch override that you applied to an object.
1 Select the object that has a surface override you want to change, right-click, and click Materials Edit Surface Hatch Overrides.
2 Select the profile of the face you want to edit.
If you have multiple surface hatch overrides on one object face, be sure to select the override you want to change.
3 Right-click, and click Edit Hatch Override. 4 Edit the surface hatch override:
If you want to...
Then...
hide a surface hatch
select Hide Surface Hatching.
re-display a hidden surface hatch
clear Hide Surface Hatching.
change the rotation of the surface hatch
enter a value for Rotation, or click rotation on screen.
and specify the
change the offset of the surface hatch
enter a value for X Offset or Y Offset, or click the offset on screen.
and specify
5 Click OK.
6 Click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar to save the changes.
Displaying a List of Materials
Use this procedure to create a list of material definitions and corresponding volumes for the objects that you select. The list includes all material definitions used in the selected objects as well as the total volume of each material definition. You can use the information for preliminary cost estimates.
1 On the command line, enter materiallist. 2 Select the objects you want to include in the list, and press ENTER. 3 Press F2.
The material definitions list is displayed in the AutoCAD® text window.
Editing Surface Hatch Overrides | 485
NOTE You can also select the list of material definitions, and then press CTRL+C to copy it, and CTRL+V to paste it into Microsoft® Word.
Displaying a Material Query
Use this procedure to obtain volume information for a selected material definition. The results of the query include the total volume for all objects with a selected material definition. For example, if you have two brick walls within your selection set, and each has a volume of 8.85 m3, the overall volume of brick objects is listed as 17.7 m3. You can use that information for preliminary cost estimates.
1 On the command line, enter materialquery. 2 Select the objects you want to include in the query, and press ENTER. 3 Select the material definition you want to query.
For example, if you want to query for bricks, select Brick from the list.
4 Click OK. All objects assigned the selected material definition are highlighted in the drawing.
5 Press F2. The volume for the selected material definition is displayed in the AutoCAD® text window.
Process Overview: Creating and Assigning Materials
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers a number of predefined building material definitions in the drawing templates. You can also create your own custom material definitions. All material definitions used in a project are listed under Material Definitions in the Style Manager. The material definitions are listed in alphabetical order. Devising a naming convention for your material definitions allows you to locate them quickly. For example, you might create glazing definitions named "glass.interior.clear," "glass.exterior.tinted," and "glass.exterior.clear." These would appear in the following order under Material Definitions:
glass.exterior.clear glass.exterior.tinted glass.interior.clear
The following steps describe the process of creating a material definition and assigning it to an object or object style:
Step 1: Create a material definition for each material needed and specify the display properties of these definitions. For example, create a brick material definition that shows a dark red surface hatch, matching dark red linework components, an appropriate section hatch, and a brick rendering material. Or, create a glass material definition that has light blue linework, a transparent surface, and a light blue rendering material. For more information, see "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487.
Step 2: In object styles, assign a material definition to represent each component. For example, in a window style, assign a wood material definition to the frame and the muntins and a glass material definition to the window glass. Or, if you are working with a wall style, assign a brick material definition to the wall body and an insulation material to insulation components.
Step 3: Make sure that the corresponding display properties of the object or object style are in all display representations specified as By Material.
Step 4: For object components that do not use material definitions, specify the display properties in each display representation. For example, if you want the graphic representation of a door swing to match the dark brown door frame, open the display properties of the door style, and change the color of the door swing to a dark brown. Perform this step for each display representation in which the door swing appears.
486 | Chapter 11 Materials
When you create objects from these styles, their components are displayed as follows:
If you have selected By Material in the Display Properties, then the object components that have material definitions assigned show the display properties you specified in the material definition.
Object components that have no material definitions assigned show the display properties you specified in the object style.
Creating and Editing Material Definitions
Material definitions are created, edited, copied, or purged in Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. Material definitions contain settings for the hatching, scale, and color of materials, plus rendering materials. You can find predefined material definitions in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric.For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Material Definition
Use this procedure to create a definition for the material you wish to use.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Create a material definition:
If you want to... create a new definition with default properties
Then... right-click Material Definitions, and click New.
create a new definition from an existing definition
right-click the material definition you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new material definition, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the properties of your new definition:
If you want to...
Then...
enter a description of the material definition
click General. Enter a description of the material definition.
change the layer/color/linetype properties
see "Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition" on page 487.
change the hatching patterns
see "Specifying the Plan and Section Hatch Patterns of a Material Definition" on page 488.
assign surface hatching to individual object faces
see "Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition" on page 489.
assign surface and live section rendering materials
see "Assigning Render Materials" on page 491.
exclude components from 2D shrinkwrap
see "Excluding a Material Definition from 2D Section Shrinkwrap" on page 492.
add notes, files, or documents to the definition
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Material Definition" on page 494.
6 When you finish changing the material definition properties, click OK.
Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition
Use this procedure to define the layer, color, and linetype of the material components. For detailed descriptions of the individual material components, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
Creating and Editing Material Definitions | 487
NOTE If you turn off a display component in the material definition, object components assigned that material definition do not display in the drawing. For example, if you turn off the Linework component in a material definition, and assign that definition to a door frame component, the door frame does not display in plan views.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK.
Specifying the Plan and Section Hatch Patterns of a Material Definition
Use this procedure to change the patterns for the Plan, Hatch, and Section Hatch components of a material definition. For detailed descriptions of individual hatch components, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474. For more information about specifying surface hatch patterns, see "Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition" on page 489.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Select Plan Hatch or Section Hatch, and click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching for the component:
If you want to... select a hatching pattern that is available in the software
Then... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
488 | Chapter 11 Materials
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
Then...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
Specifying surface hatching orientation
14 Click OK.
Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition
Use this procedure to specify the pattern used for the surface hatch. Specifying material assignment by object face
NOTE After you assign a material definition to an object, you can edit the surface hatches for the individual faces of the object. For more information about editing surface hatches, see "Overriding the Surface Hatch on Individual Objects" on page 481.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition | 489
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Select Surface Hatch, and click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching for the component:
If you want to...
Then...
select a hatching pattern that is available in the software
select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
Then...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
Specifying surface hatch orientation
14 Click the Other tab.
490 | Chapter 11 Materials
15 For Surface Hatch Placement, select the object faces on which the surface hatching is displayed. 16 Click OK.
Assigning Render Materials
Use this procedure to assign materials for rendering object surfaces.
In shaded view, rendered views, and when linking a drawing file to VIZ Render, objects may display rendering materials instead of the hatch patterns that are displayed in 2D wireframe and hidden line views. The following types of rendering materials are available:
Render Material Type Surface Rendering Material Live Section Rendering Material Live Section Sectioned Boundary Rendering Material
Description
Any object face that has surface hatching applied displays the hatching in the AutoCAD® renderer or in VIZ Render
All faces cut by a live section line display the live section rendering material when rendered with the AutoCAD® renderer or in VIZ Render
All objects and object parts outside the live section line display the sectioned boundary material when rendered with the AutoCAD® renderer or in VIZ Render
You can assign rendering materials to two different types of component:
Object surfaces: All object surfaces that have a surface hatch applied to them can also have a rendering material assigned. If you want to assign a rendering material to an object surface, make sure that the Surface Hatch component in the material definition is turned on.
Live section views: The Sectioned Body component of a live section view as well as the live section cut plane can have special rendering materials assigned. If you want to assign rendering materials to a live section view, make sure that the Sectioned Body component in the material definition is turned on.
Rendered live section view with transparent outside component
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 If necessary, click .
Assigning Render Materials | 491
7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select rendering materials for the individual material components:
If you want to... assign a rendering material to object surfaces
Then...
select a material for Render Material. Then select a mapping type for Mapping:
If you select Same as Surface Hatch, only those surfaces selected under Surface Hatch Placement are rendered.
If you select Face Mapping, all surfaces are rendered and any hatch alignment overrides are ignored.
assign a rendering material to the cut plane of a live section select a material for Cut Surface Render Material. view
assign a rendering material to the body component outside select a material for Sectioned Body Render Material. the live section line
If you don't find the correct rendering material or if you want to see a preview of the material, click the Browse button and browse for the desired material.
9 Select a new rendering material, if necessary. 10 Click OK.
Excluding a Material Definition from 2D Section Shrinkwrap
Use this procedure to exclude components with a specific material definition assigned to them from the shrinkwrap of a 2D section. When you create a 2D section, you can display a section component named Shrinkwrap. The shrinkwrap is the union of all object faces cut by the section line, merged into one component with one hatch pattern. This is a view frequently used for a 2D section. By default, all components that are assigned material definitions are included in the shrinkwrap. However, you may want to exclude certain material definitions, such as glass, from the shrinkwrap.
2D section shrinkwrap with glass excluded (left)
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 If necessary, click .
492 | Chapter 11 Materials
7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Exclude from 2D Section Shrinkwrap. 9 Click OK.
Controlling the Display of Hidden Lines by Material
Use this procedure to control whether hidden lines of a material should be displayed in a section or elevation. You could do this, for example, if you want to display concrete walls and footings that are hidden by the ground and by other walls. Another frequent use could be to display structural members that are located behind walls. Displaying hidden foundation walls
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation. 6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Under 2D Section/Elevation Rules, select Display Hidden Edges for this Material. 9 Click OK.
Merging Material Definitions in a 2D Section/Elevation
Use this procedure to merge material definitions when creating a 2D section/elevation. Sometimes a single object in real-life is modeled with different objects in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. An example is concrete foundations, which are modeled from slabs and walls. These objects should appear as one foundation object in sections and elevations. The new option to merge common material definitions facilitates this result. When a 2D section/elevation is created, all objects of that material definition are combined into a single object. Edges between coplanar faces are removed.
Controlling the Display of Hidden Lines by Material | 493
Walls and slabs merged (right)
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Under 2D Section/Elevation Rules, select Merge Common Materials. 9 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Material Definition
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a material definition. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a material definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions. 3 Select the material definition you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the material definition, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Text Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
494 | Chapter 11 Materials
Content Creation Guidelines
12
The term "Content" is a generic one and refers to a variety of types of elements that you can create to customize your installation of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. These elements can be style-based or symbol-based. "Content" also refers to items such as plot style tables, layers and layer key styles, layer standards and drawing template files, to name just a few. While there are quite a number of ways in which you can create and structure your custom content, there are several standards and conventions that are either documented or "de-facto" which, if followed, can make your custom tools work more efficiently and be more portable between different environments and organizations. This chapter is not a "how to" guide for creating custom content; instead it will focus on these standards, conventions and "best practices".
495
General Content Standards and Conventions
It is important to understand the various types of content, where they are stored and how they are made accessible to users. Additionally, Architectural Desktop includes support for the National CAD Standard version 3.1. Understanding how this is applied will assist you in creating your own customized content that works with the existing standards and conventions.
Content Types
Architectural Desktop content can come in several forms and be stored in a variety of locations.
Drawing templates: The drawing template file is perhaps the most critical of content items in Architectural Desktop. In addition to standard AutoCAD items such as layers, dimension styles, etc., templates contain critical drawing and display settings. All Architectural Desktop model and sheet drawings should start with a template. Drawing templates are usually stored in the folder established in the AutoCAD "Options" dialog box for template file storage. Additionally a default template can be specified to be used whenever the QNEW command is invoked. Finally, a default plot sheet template is usually specified as one of the sheet set properties for an Architectural Desktop project.
Styles: Most Architectural Desktop objects, whether they are geometric objects or annotation and documentation objects, are based on styles. Any successful Architectural Desktop implementation will most likely consist of several custom styles and definitions. Most styles should be stored in one or more style library drawings, in a location that is accessible by all users. Usually, styles can be easily accessed by users from a tool on a palette or in a tool catalog.
NOTE Some styles may be stored in the drawing template, however this should be kept to a minimum and limited to those styles and definitions that are required for other content in the template.
Design and General Documentation Symbols: Best stored as AEC Content, which is created using the AEC Content Wizard. The symbol can also be accessed by a palette-based tool.
NOTE Some symbol-based content, such as multi-view blocks used for column grid bubbles, can be stored in the template, but as with styles this should be kept to a minimum. Once a symbol is stored as AEC Content access can be gained through the AutoCAD Design Center.
Callout Symbols: These are special symbols that use attributes with field values to automate drawing coordination when placing keys for elevations, sections and details. The blocks that define callouts are stored in a library drawing. Access is gained through a palette based tool that "points to" the callout symbol.
Schedule Tags: Based on multi-view block definitions, schedule tags are created with the "Define Schedule Tag" command found on the "Format" pull-down menu. Like callout symbols, schedule tags are stored in a library drawing and accessed from a palette-based tool.
Layer Key Styles: While they can be stored in the drawing template, it is better to keep Layer Key Styles in a central library drawing. The "Drawing Setup" command on the "Format" tool bar can be used to make sure that a specific layer key style automatically loads each time a drawing is opened. This way if a layer key style is updated, a drawing that is already in progress will always be using the latest version.
Layer Standards: Defined in the Layer Manager and typically associated with a Layer Key Style, Layer Standards are stored in the same library drawing as the Layer Key Style that they are associated with. When the Layer Key Style is imported into a drawing, the Layer Standard on which it is based will import also.
Display Configurations: Display configurations are stored in the drawing template.
TIP Most content types have associated naming conventions which are documented in this chapter. As a global convention, it is acceptable to prefix any name with a company or organization name to differentiate your custom content from that which is supplied with Architectural Desktop by default.
National CAD Standard Compliance
The National CAD Standard version 3.1 is a consensus standard compiled from three existing standards and guidelines by NIBS (The National Institute of Building Sciences). These consist of the AIA Layer Guidelines version 3.0, the CSI Uniform Drawing System (UDS) and the Tri-Services Plotting Guidelines. The National CAD Standard v. 3.1 is supported where possible in Architectural Desktop 2007 through the use of pre-configured Layer Standards, Layer Key Styles, plot
496 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
style tables and annotation tools. While it is not required that custom content be compliant, when creating new content for use in the United States you should take this support into account.
The Imperial templates provided with Architectural Desktop are pre-configured to load the "AIA Version 3" Layer Key Style by default. This is based on the "AIA Version 3" Layer Standard, which is in turn compliant with the AIA Layer Guidelines version 3.0.
The "ADT AIA v3" Layer Key Style includes line weights and linetypes that are in accordance with the Uniform Drawing System, and the colors that it specifies are compliant with the Tri-Services plotting guidelines. Additionally, the drawing default display representations for all objects in the template files have been configured to adhere to the Tri-Services Guidelines and Uniform Drawing System recommendations by assigning appropriate colors, linetypes, line weights and plot styles to all display components.
There are twelve templates that are provided with the Architectural Desktop sold in the United States, and each one is pre-configured to use a specific plot style table:
Template File Name AEC Model (Imperial Ctb).dwt AEC Model (Imperial Stb).dwt AEC Sheet (Imperial Ctb).dwt AEC Sheet (Imperial Stb).dwt AEC Model (Metric Ctb).dwt AEC Model (Metric Stb).dwt AEC Sheet (Metric Ctb).dwt AEC Sheet (Metric Stb).dwt Structural (Imperial Ctb).dwt Structural (Imperial Stb).dwt Structural (Metric Ctb).dwt Structural (Metric Stb).dwt
Description
Default Plot Style Table
Used for model drawings with imperial (architectural) units and set up for colorbased plottting.
AIA Standard.ctb
Used for model drawings with imperial (architectural) units and set up for named plot styles.
AEC Standard.stb
Used for plot sheet drawings with imperial (architectural) units and set up for colorbased plotting.
AIA Standard.ctb
Used for plot sheet drawings with imperial (architectural) units and set up for named plot styles.
AEC Standard.stb
Used for model drawings with metric (decimal) units and set up for color-based plotting.
AIA Standard.ctb
Used for model drawings with metric (decimal) units and set up for named plot styles
AEC Standard.stb
Used for plot sheet drawings with metric (decimal) units and set up for color-based plotting.
AIA Standard.ctb
Used for plot sheet drawings with metric (decimal) units and set up for named plot styles.
AEC Standard.stb
Used for structural model drawings with imperial (architectural) units and set up for color-based plotting.
AIA Standard.ctb
Used for structural model drawings with imperial (architectural) units and set up for color-based plotting.
AEC Standard.stb
Used for structural model drawings with metric (decimal) units and set up for colorbased plotting.
AIA Standard.ctb
Used for structural model drawings with
AEC Standard.stb
metric (decimal) units and set up for named
plot styles.
NOTE By default Architectural Desktop is configured to use the AEC Model (Imperial Stb).dwt for model drawings and the AEC Sheet (Imperial Stb).dwt for plot sheet drawings.
National CAD Standard Compliance | 497
In addition to the default plot style tables assigned to the imperial and metric templates, there are several additional optional tables provided. Many of these are for use with older legacy templates and drawing files:
Plot Style Table AEC Standard.stb AIA Standard.ctb AIA Standard Color.ctb AEC Standard Color.stb AIA Standard.stb AIA LWT by Object.ctb AIA LWT by Object.stb AIA Standard Color.stb AIA Color LWT by Object.ctb AIA Color LWT by Object.stb
Description
Default plot style for templates using named plot styles. This table uses generic names for plot styles and passes line weight control to the layer and object properties. All objects plot black.
Default plot style for templates set up for color-based plotting. This table maps each color to an explicit line weight according to the TriServices guidelines.
Optional plot style for templates using color-based plotting. All colors are mapped to explicit line weights according to the Tri-Services guidelines. Colors are controlled by the objects and layers.
Optional plot style for templates using named plot styles. This table uses the same names for plot styles as the AEC Standard.stb plot style table, but objects will plot according to their AutoCAD color.
Legacy plot style for older templates using named plot styles. This table includes plot styles named according to line weight definitions specified in the Uniform Drawing System.
Legacy plot style for older templates using color-based plotting. All colors are mapped to black and line weight control is by layer and object properties.
Legacy plot style for older templates using named plot styles. All line weight control is by layer and object properties.
Legacy plot style for older templates using named plot styles. Plot styles assign line weight explicitly. Colors are controlled by objects and layers.
Legacy plot style for older templates using color-based plotting. Color and line weight control is by layer and object properties.
Legacy plot style for older templates using named plot styles. All plot styles assign color and line weight according to object and layer assignments.
Legacy named plot style tables have seemingly redundant plot style names that correspond to UDS line weight names. Many of these tables use the same plot settings for multiple plot styles. This was done to allow for consistency in naming when switching between plot styles. With the newer AEC Standard.stb plot style tables, this complex plot style naming has been abandoned in favor of a much more simplified system. Both the AEC Standard.stb and the AEC Standard Color.stb plot style tables use the same plot style names, however the former will plot all objects black while the latter will plot all objects according to their AutoCAD color. Aside from color vs. monochrome, the plot styles determine saturation:
Normal: Default plot style. Because this plot style is not editable, it is typically not used in the Architectural Desktop layer key styles or display settings.
Full Saturation: Objects assigned this plot style will plot either 100 percent black or 100 percent color, depending upon which plot style table is used.
50 Percent: Objects assigned this plot style will plot with a 50 percent screen.
25 Percent: Objects assigned this plot style will plot with a 25 percent screen.
Invisible Ink: This is a unique plot style. Regardless of whether the AEC Standard.stb or AEC Standard Color.stb plot style table is being used, objects on this plot style will plot cyan, to simulate the effect of a blue lead pencil from manual drafting days, which will not typically come through when reproduced on a monochrome copy machine or standard blueline machine.
The Uniform Drawing System also specifies formatting for symbology and annotation. This is supported in Architectural Desktop through the content provided in the Documentation Tool Catalogs and in the drawing templates themselves.
498 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
NOTE For more information on NIBS or to purchase a copy of the National CAD Standard documentation you can visit their web site at http://www.nibs.org/
Content Resources
To create and distribute content effectively, it is important to have an understanding of where different types of content are best stored, and the possibilities each one of them provide towards a cohesive, well-managed system of templates, styles, symbols and tools. Careful attention should be paid to ease of user access, centralized storage and automation.
Template Drawings
There are a variety of things that should be kept in the template, however care should be taken to keeping it as "lean" as possible. Before storing content in a template you should consider other options, choosing to store it in the template only after confirming that it is the best possible location. Normally, the template itself should be stored in the location that is specified in the "OPTIONS" dialogue box under "Template Settings". Setting the template file location in the "Options" dialog box.
Items that should be included in the template file: Layer definitions: Pre-defined layers should be kept to a minimum. Most layers are created when needed by the layer key style that is loaded into a drawing. Only include pre-defined layers for those other objects and settings that must be in the template before a Layer Key Style is loaded or any objects created. Text styles: Include text style definitions to be used for standard notes and dimensions. Title Blocks, Layouts and Page Setups: These should be created in templates intended for use as plot sheet templates. Templates that are intended to be used for sheet sets, especially, should have page setups saved within them to serve as page setup overrides when publishing a sheet set. Multi-View Blocks: Normally these should be stored as AEC Content or tags, however if you want to use a custom column grid bubble block instead of the default grid bubble, you should store it in the template. NOTE Custom blocks do not scale correctly if you copy objects to which they are attached (such as doors with door hardware) and paste them in a drawing that has drawing units specified differently. Classification Definitions: Those classification definitions that you use frequently are best stored in your drawing template, so that they are readily available when you need to classify either a style or an individual object.
Content Resources | 499
Items that should not be included in the template file: Most styles: These should be kept in a style library drawing, with an associated palette-based tool that allows users to import the styles into the current quickly and easily on demand. Storing the styles in a style library and providing tool access to them keeps your drawings from becoming unnecessarily bloated due to unused styles in the drawing database. Symbol-based content: These items are typically more effectively stored as AEC Content or in the case of callouts and schedule tags, a library drawing. Again, palette-based tools provide quick and easy access to them on an as-needed basis. Dimension styles: AEC Dimensions and the standard AutoCAD dimension styles upon which they depend for their display do not need to be stored in the template. Instead, you can store these in the same way as other style-based content; in a style library drawing, and provide access to them through palette-based tools. Layer Key Styles and Layer Standards: While these can be stored in the template, it is better to keep them in a library drawing and use the "Drawing Setup" command to make sure that the most current Layer Key Style is automatically imported into a new drawing and any drawings that are already in progress upon opening. This ensures that you are always working with the most up-to-date version.
The layer settings in the Drawing Setup Dialog. Note that a layer key style is set to auto-import from a "Standards/Key File" and that "Save as Default" is checked on.This will ensure that even if you start a drawing without a template, the correct Layer Key Style will be loaded. Note also that "Always Import Layer Key Style when used in drawing" is also checked on.This is a drawing-based setting and should be set in the template.This will ensure that the most current Layer Key Style will also be used in drawings that are already in progress.
Style Library Drawings
Most style-based content should be kept in a centrally located library drawing, accessible to all users. In most cases, the styles contained in this file can be imported by selecting a tool on a palette. If you anticipate a large quantity of custom styles, you may wish to break your library drawings up by type to keep them more manageable. General Guidelines for Style Library Drawings:
Start with a valid template drawing that includes all of your display configurations and correct units. This will allow you to edit or review styles in the library in the context in which they will be used.
500 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
If you are storing your style library on a mapped drive make sure that the drive is mapped identically on every user's computer. Architectural Desktop supports UNC (Universal Naming Convention) pathing. If you are confident that your server names will not be changing you may want to consider using this method of pathing to your style libraries to avoid drive mapping problems.
If you need to restrict users' ability to make changes to the style library, you can store it in a read-only folder. They will still be able to use the styles that it contains without any problems.
Template Projects
A well-planned template project can help you automate office standards and simplify the process of beginning and setting up a new project. Depending upon the type of work you do, your template project may be very complete or it may just form the basic framework for a project. If your work consists of unique designs and your building types vary, you may find that the most efficient template project is minimal in structure. On the other hand, if you work with a typical building type, or if you work with prototypical buildings you might find that a more complete template project that includes more information concerning specific project structure is more effective. Creating a template project is not the same as simply copying and renaming an existing project. In order to properly call for a template, you must specify it at the time that you create your new project. Specifying the template project from the "Add Project" dialog box.This is the only time this can be done.When the new project is created, settings and files from the specified template project will be copied to the new project.
Template Drawings Architectural Desktop Projects have, as one of their Project Properties, template file specifications that determine the drawing templates to use for Constructs, Elements and Views. These template settings are independent from the template settings established in the "OPTIONS" dialog box. These templates should be in a location accessible to all users. Project Details Accessible from the project properties dialog box, the project details contain information that can be linked to title blocks via fields, either embedded in MTEXT or block attributes. This data is completely user-defined. You should include data that is common to all of your projects in your template project's Project Details. Sheet Sets All Architectural Desktop projects include an AutoCAD Sheet Set (.dst) file. When you use a project as a template, it's sheet set file gets copied over to your new project along with all of the other project files and folders, and is renamed to match your new project. The sheet set file contains a variety of critical information that can be pre-configured as part of your overall project template.
Template Projects | 501
Items that can be modified in the sheet set file as part of the template project:
Default sheet template file: This is the one template that is not specified in the project properties, as it is part of the sheet set properties instead. This should be a sheet that has layouts defined in it that represent all of your standard plot configurations. It should also contain each layout saved as a page setup for use as page setup overrides when publishing.
Subset Structure: You can add and delete subsets to conform to your office's standard sheet set layout and structure.
Sheets: You can create sheets in advance to further automate sheet set structure. Sheet Set Custom Properties: You can define standard properties (data fields) that can be linked to your title
block MTEXT or attribute fields.
NOTE If you define custom properties that are to be linked to a title block, you may want to consider providing a default value of "----" so that it will be obvious later on if you have fields whose values have not been set, and it will be easy to edit them.
Items that you should NOT include in a sheet set file for Architectural Desktop
Resource Drawing Locations: In Architectural Desktop your View drawings automatically become your resource drawings. This setting should remain blank in the sheet set properties for an Architectural Desktop project.
Label Block for Views: This is taken care of by the "Title Mark" tool on the Architectural Desktop tool palettes. These can also be customized to suit office standards. Leave this setting blank.
Callout Blocks: As with title marks, these are taken care of by the various callout tools on the Architectural Desktop tool palettes and can be customized to suit office standards. This setting should remain blank.
Project Standards
All settings established in the "Configure AEC Project Standards" dialog box will copy with the template project to become part of the new project. Standards files that are unique to the project, in other words, standards files that reflect project standards that may be supplemental to or override office standards, should be placed in the "Standards" folder of the template project. These files will be copied and their paths updated in the new project. As with style library drawings, if you are including a non-project based file in your standards files, you need to decide whether to use mapped drives or UNC file pathing. If you're using mapped drive letters, they must be mapped identically on all users' workstations. If you choose UNC, you need to be sure that the server path will be remaining the same for the foreseeable future.
Project Tool Catalogs and Palettes
In addition to office standard custom tool catalogs, each project has it's own content browser library, with it's own associated project tool catalogs. These, like other project elements, can be configured in the template project as well. There are a few simple guidelines that you should follow when creating project tool catalogs.
Create your new catalog from the Project Library view in the Content Browser. The project library can be accessed from the content browser button at the bottom of project navigator:
If you create new catalogs in the project library, you should place them in the Standards/Tool Catalogs folder of your template project.
IMPORTANT In order for project catalogs to properly copy when the template project is selected, you must start your template project from one of the templates provided with Architectural Desktop. Remember also that even though the project catalog is copied from the template project, the tools within the catalog are unchanged; their paths remain the same as they are in the template.
502 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Project Structure
If you work with a building type that is fairly consistent from one project to another, or a protypical building type, you may find it advantageous to pre-define some aspects of the project structure itself. None of this is absolutely necessary and the level to which you choose to pre-define these items is completely optional.
Project Structure Items That Can be Established in the Template Project:
Levels and Divisions
Constructs and Elements: In addition to defining categories and sub-categories, any actual construct or element drawings will be copied to the new project from the template project.
Views: If you've created constructs and elements as part of your template project structure, you can also create view drawings that reference the constructs.
NOTE Architectural Desktop provides you with the choice to use Relative XREF Paths, which are turned on by default in the project properties. If you choose not to use relative paths and you create constructs, elements and views as part of your template project, when a new project is created, the these items will be repathed automatically according to the new project's path.
Tool Catalogs
The tool catalog is one of the most critical components of any office's custom content collection. It is the "central repository" for all tool-based content, which can and should include tools that provide access to styles, AEC Content, callouts, schedule tags and other miscellaneous annotation items. Because it is so central to an effective content distribution and management system, you should spend time planning its location, organization and structure. You should also take steps to protect the contents of the tool catalog from unauthorized or inadvertent modifications.
If users are going to manually load the catalog into their content browser library, pathing is not critical; it simply needs to be placed in a location that all users can browse to. If you choose to automate the loading of the palette by creating a catalog install file, you need to ensure that the network location of the catalog file is accessed in the same way by all users. As with other types of network-based content, carefully consider the advantages and disadvantages of both mapped network drives and UNC pathing.
If you need to control the ability of users to make modifications to the tool catalog, you can store it in a read-only folder. Users will still be able to access the catalog to use the tools, however only those people with permission to write to that location will actually be able to make changes to it.
Display Control
The Architectural Desktop display control system is very flexible and powerful, and is drawing-based. Therefore your default display settings should be established in your template drawing. The templates that come with Architectural Desktop already have much of the work involved in setting up a display system done for you. While they may require some adjustments to conform to your office or project standards, you should, in most cases, start with the default templates and make modifications to the existing settings rather than try to create a display system from scratch.
Display Hierarchy and "By Material" Display Control
Display control of individual objects can occur at three levels: drawing default, style overrides and object overrides. When you define an object style you should only apply style overrides when absolutely necessary. Frequently you can use material assignments to control the display of linework and hatching components of objects. For this reason, many objects have "By Material" set as a drawing default for many of their display representations.
Display Control Customization
Like most aspects of Architectural Desktop, the display system can be customized. There are a few things that you should keep in mind before doing so, however.
Best Practices for Customizing the Display System:
Start with one of the default templates. Creating a display system from scratch can be very laborious and time-consuming. It's better to start with a template that is relatively close to what you need and making modifications to it.
Tool Catalogs | 503
Modify existing display configurations and display sets before creating new ones.
Don't create new display representations for objects unless you absolutely have to. Many times you can find an existing display representation that you aren't using that you can modify to suite your needs. Remember that every display representation that you create is one that you have to manage.
NOTE Remember that display control is drawing-specific. Changes that you make that you intend to be part of your office standard should be made in your drawing template. You can use the Display Manager to copy display configurations, display sets and display representations between drawings.
IMPORTANT If you create a new display configuration that uses an existing display representation that has been modified, you must remember to copy both the display configuration and the modified display representation to your template. When you copy the display configuration to the template the associated display representations and display sets will only be copied with it if they do not already exist in the template. When you manually copy a display set or a display representation into a template that already contains display sets and representations with the same name, you will be prompted to overwrite the existing definitions.
Level of Detail
Level of detail should always be a consideration when creating new content objects and new display representations. By default there are three display configurations that address level of detail provided in the Architectural Desktop template drawings:
Display Configuration High Detail Medium Detail Low Detail
Design Scale [Metric Units in Brackets] 1/4"=1'-0" [1:50]or greater 1/8"=1'-0" [1:100] 1/16"=1'-0" [1:200] or smaller
NOTE You may decide that the default display configurations are not appropriate for your preferred graphic standards. You can create additional display configurations and modify the existing ones to accommodate your own standards.
Architectural objects frequently include hatch patterns parameters as part of their display control. You should make sure that the hatch pattern scale and type is appropriate for the level of detail a given display representation is meant to address. Also remember to address hatch pattern scale and type in your material definitions, as it is a best practice to assign material definitions to style-based components. Hatch patterns that represent annotation standards (diagonal lines that represent brick in plan, for example), should be scaled appropriately for your level of detail. Hatch patterns that represent geometry (bricks in elevation, for example), should be given a scale of 1 unit.
Style-Based Content
Style-based content in Architectural Desktop is classified under one of three general groups:
Architectural Objects: Traditional architectural object geometry. Documentation Objects: Any style-based object that is specifically and uniquely used for annotation and
documentation purposes. Multi-Purpose Objects: Any style-based object that could be used to help define either a documentation object
style or an architectural object style.
Many styles can be used to create style-based tools on a palette. Others are used as nested styles or "substyles". All styles and definitions can be edited from the Style Manager and stored in a central style library drawing.
TIP You can assign a pre-defined keynote from your keynote database to any style that you create in the "General" tab of the style definition.
504 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Architectural Objects
When referring to styles, the term "Architectural Objects" refers to any object style that will result in the creation of a specific type of architectural geometry, such as a wall, door, stair, roof slab, etc. It also refers to "sub-styles" that are related to those object types, such as wall endcaps and slab edge styles.
Walls
Walls are among the more complex of Architectural Desktop objects and are affected by a variety of styles and substyles. When a wall style that references a specific substyle is imported into a drawing it will import all necessary substyles with it.
Wall Styles
Naming Conventions:
You should provide as much information about the wall structure in the name itself as practical. This makes it easier to discriminate between wall styles in a long list without having to refer to the wall style description. The first component listed is the major structural component. The last component listed is usually a finish component:
<Component name>-<Size in decimal units> <Component name>-<Size in decimal units>...
Example Wall Style Names:
Wall Style Description
Example Name
Wall structure: 5/8" gypboard interior finish, 3 1/2" wood stud, 1/2" Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 sheathing, 1" air gap and 3 5/8" brick veneer.
Wall structure: 5/8" Gypboard interior finish on both sides of a 3 1/2" wood stud.
Stud-3.5 GWB-0.625 Both Sides
Wall structure: 5/8" Gypboard interior finish on both sides of a variable width wood stud.
Stud-X GWB-0.625 Both Sides
Best Practices for Wall Styles:
Walls are directional, and should be considered as having an exterior and interior side. The exterior, or positive side of the wall is at the top of a wall running left to right. Wall components should be defined so that the index order is from exterior to interior. The component furthest to the exterior side of the wall should have an index assignment of 1, while the most interior component will have the highest index assignment.
When specifying the edge offset of a component, the value should always be to the most interior edge of the component.
The width of components is always a positive value. Wall Priorities should be standardized and based on the existing Architectural Desktop convention, which is
documented in the Architectural Desktop User Guide. Materials should be assigned to all wall components. Plan display of wall components should normally be set to observe the drawing default settings. Best practice is to
assign materials to wall components and set their linework and hatch pattern parameters to "By Material" in the plan display settings.
Architectural Objects | 505
NOTE Prior to the introduction of material definitions in Architectural Desktop 2004 it was common and recommended practice to assign wall style components to nested layers and set their color, line type, line weight and plot style settings to "BYLAYER". While this is still technically valid in Architectural Desktop 2007, it is not recommended except for a very few exceptions (such as the "Plan Screened" display representation, which is frequently used to export plan displays to consultants using AutoCAD, who desire the items to be on a prescribed layer and assigned colors appropriate for background drawings).
Model display of wall components should be set to the drawing defaults, to allow for material assignments to control the color and hatching of walls when viewed in non-orthogonal views.
Wall styles should be classified. This allows for more flexible scheduling and tagging in the future, as well as more display control options.
NOTE The Uniformat II classification definition is supplied in the Uniformat II Classifications (1997 ed).dwg file located in the AEC Content\Styles path. This classification definition is fairly comprehensive and in many cases serves well in classifying all types of Architectural Desktop object styles according to a uniform standard.
Walls that have one or more obvious internal dimension points (such as the outside of a structural component) should have those specified in the wall style "Components" tab under the "Dimensions" column. This allows for more accurate application of AEC Dimensions.
Wall components should be assigned a "Structural" or "Non-Structural" designation under the "Type" column in the "Components" tab, again to allow for more effective use of AEC Dimensions.
Walls should have an interior and exterior side specified as part of the wall style definition to ensure more accurate AEC Dimensioning.
To ensure accurate dimensioning with AEC Dimensions, the wall in the following image has had it's components assigned to either "Structural" or "Non-Structural" types. Dimension points and the exterior/interior sides of the wall are also specified.
Wall Endcap Styles
Wall endcap styles are intended to be used with specific wall styles. They can be used to define actual end conditions as well as opening conditions as part of a Wall Opening Endcap Style.
Naming Conventions:
Wall endcap styles should be named according to the wall style to which they apply, with an indication of the condition they are meant to address:
<Associated wall styles> (<End condition><Index>)
Example Wall Endcap Style Names:
Wall Endcap Style Description
Example Name
For wall style Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 to Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 (End1) define the first end condition.
506 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Wall Endcap Style Description
Example Name
For wall style Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 to Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 (End2) define a possible second end condition.
or wall style Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 to Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 (Jamb1) define a jamb condition.
Best Practices for Wall Endcaps:
Endcaps are drawn for each component. Components for which there is no endcap defined will terminate as soon as another component's endcap is encountered. For that reason, you need to draw a complete endcap for each component except for those that are intended to terminate at the location on the wall where the endcap is applied.
Endcaps are applied perpendicular to the direction of the wall. The endpoints of each endcap are normally drawn so that an imaginary line connecting them would be perpendicular to the wall edges, except in the case where an endcap is intentionally skewed.
It is typically not recommended to define endcaps for walls with variable width components. As a component's width is changed, it's associated endcap will adjust to accommodate the change in width, however the endcap will maintain its proportions, causing distortions to occur to the end effect.
Wall Opening Endcap Styles
Wall Opening Endcap Styles apply to door, window, opening and door/window assemblies that are inserted into a wall. They consist of a collection of wall endcap styles that are applied to the head, jamb and sill conditions of the opening. Wall Opening Endcap Style Naming Conventions: The naming convention for a wall opening endcap style is similar to that for a wall endcap style: <Associated wall style> (Opening<Index>) Example Wall Opening Endcap Style Names:
Wall Opening Endcap Style Description
Example Name
Wall opening endcap style for a wall style named Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Stud-3.5 Brick-3.625 Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625
Sheathing-0.5 Air-1 GWB-0.625 .
(Opening1)
Wall Cleanup Group Definitions
Wall Cleanup Group definitions should allow objects anchored to walls in other cleanup groups to be moved or copied to walls of the current cleanup group unless there is a compelling reason to not allow it. Cleanup between host and xref drawings should be turned on by default unless performance issues arise. There are no naming conventions for wall cleanup group definitions.
Wall Modifier Styles
Wall modifiers are typically best created "on the fly" by first creating a 2D polyline and converting it to a wall modifier. During the process you are prompted for a name to assign to a new modifier style, which is created from your geometry. Modifier styles define minimal information about the shape of the modifier itself. There are no current conventions for naming or application of wall modifier styles.
NOTE Wall modifiers can vary widely in shape and size from one instance to the next, even if they belong to the same style. To ensure that the modifier you wish to apply to a wall represents the shape that you want, first draw a 2D polyline and then use the right-click menu to convert the polyline to a wall modifier. You will be prompted for a new wall modifier style name during the process; each converted polyline must define a different modifier style. For these reasons, you may find it more effective in many cases to use body modifiers instead, which are not style-based.
Palette-Based Wall Tools
The only wall-based style that can be assigned to a palette-based tool is the wall style itself. However when the wall style is used, any substyles that it uses, such as wall endcap styles and wall opening endcap styles, will be imported
Architectural Objects | 507
with it automatically. Additionally there are some tool properties that you may want to consider setting as defaults before saving the tool to a catalog:
Justification: In the case of exterior walls, the baseline is usually defined at a critical dimensional location within the wall structure. In these cases it is a good idea to pre-set the justification property of the tool to "Baseline".
Cleanup Group Definition: If you have defined a wall that should not clean up with other walls that are not of the same type, you can pre-set the cleanup group definition that it is inserted with. IMPORTANT To pre-set the wall cleanup group definition, you must first specify the library drawing in which the cleanup group definition exists, then define the cleanup group to use. Even if the cleanup group already exists in the current drawing, it will not be used unless you specify the definition location.
Wall tool pre-sets to establish the default cleanup group definition and the justification.
Doors and Windows Doors and windows comprise three primary Architectural Desktop object styles: doors, windows and door/window assemblies. Door Styles Naming Conventions: As with wall styles, the name for a door style should provide as much information about the door as possible. The format is: <Door Operation> - <Door Type> - <Optional Door Shape> <Optional Case Type>... NOTE Doors with no shape specified are assumed to be rectangular.
508 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Example Door Style Names:
Door Style Description
Example Name
A single hinge, flush rectangular door.
Hinged - Single
A single hinge, flush rectangular door, explicitly for exterior use. Hinged - Single - Exterior
A double hinge, paneled arched door.
Hinged - Double -Arched - Paneled
A single overhead door, paneled, for exterior use.
Overhead - Single - Paneled - Exterior
A single hinge, full glazed door, for use in a door/window assembly. Hinged - Single - Full Glazed - Assy
IMPORTANT It is important to indicate those doors that are intended explicitly for assemblies. They will frequently have conditions defined that will not look correct when inserted into a wall independently from the assembly for which they were defined.
Best Practices for Door Styles:
All door components should have materials assigned to them.
Door styles should be classified for more control with scheduling and display control. As with walls, the Uniformat II Classification definition contains a ready-made list of classifications, including basic door classifications.
In the "Model" display representations of doors components should follow "By Material" settings.
In the "Elevation" display representations components should be assigned colors with the display rules of your 2D Section/Elevation styles in mind. Using colors that are coordinated with those styles can be used to automate linework properties in section and elevation objects.
Window Styles
Naming Conventions: The naming convention for window styles is similar to that for doors, however is a bit more relaxed with more items becoming optional: <Optional Window Operation> - <Window Type> - <Optional Window Shape> <Optional Case Type>...
NOTE Windows with no window shape specified are assumed to be rectangular. Windows with no operation specified are assumed to be fixed.
Example Window Style Names:
Window Style Description
Example Name
A rectangular Picture Window.
Picture
An arched double casement window.
Casement - Double - Archtop
An awning window, to be used explicitly in a door/window assembly. Awning - Assy
IMPORTANT It is important to indicate those windows that are intended explicitly for assemblies. They will frequently have conditions defined that will not look correct when inserted into a wall independently from the assembly for which they were defined.
Best Practices for Window Styles:
All window components should have materials assigned to them. Window styles should be classified for more control with scheduling and display control. As with walls, the
Uniformat II Classification definition contains a ready-made list of classifications, including basic window classifications. In the "Model" display representations of window components should follow "By Material" settings.
Architectural Objects | 509
In the "Elevation" display representations components should be assigned colors with the display rules of your 2D Section/Elevation styles in mind. Using colors that are coordinated with those styles can be used to automate linework properties in section and elevation objects.
Door/Window Assembly Styles
Naming Conventions:
The naming convention for door/window assemblies should reflect as much as possible the infill elements that they include, any cell adjustment parameters and where appropriate, the general position of infills in the assembly. In addition, if certain infills have a fixed size, it is helpful to indicate these as well. Different infill types are separated with a "+" symbol. These are loose guidelines at best; the very flexibility of door/window assembly styles and virtually unlimited combination of infills and grids makes it impossible to develop a fixed naming convention that will apply to all conditions:
<Infill Type> <Optional Infill Size> <Optional Infill Position> <Optional Cell Adjustment Parameter> + <Next Infill Type>....<Optional Door/Window Assembly Shape>
NOTE Door/Window Assemblies with no shape specified are assumed to be rectangular. In the case of a very complex door/window assembly, you may choose to omit some of the less prominent infill types and parameters, choosing instead to include them in a more complete style description.
Example Door/Window Assembly Style Names:
Door/Window Assembly Style Description
Example Name
An arched assembly with 4' windows and a two foot tall arched transoms, centered, with both side cells configured to grow as the assembly width is changed until the 4' size can be accommodated
Windows4-0 Ctr Grow + Transom 2-0 Ctr Arched
Hinged double door with variable width sidelights on each side and Hinged Double 6-0x6-8 + Sidelights + Transom a transom.
A hinged single door on the right side with a single sidelight and a Hinged Single 3-9x6-8 Right + Sidelight + Transom transom.
Best Practices for Door/Window Assembly Styles:
All assembly components should have materials assigned to them.
Door/Window Assembly styles should be classified for more control with scheduling and display control. This is especially important with assemblies that are explicitly intended to be included in a window or door schedule as a mulled unit.
NOTE In cases where an assembly includes a door or window infill and the assembly is to be included in a door or window schedule, you can choose not to classify the door or window infill. This will help you to make sure that the infill is not included in the schedule as a separate item from the assembly of which is a part.
The "Model" display representations of assembly components should follow "By Material" settings.
The "Elevation" display representations components should be assigned colors with the display rules of your 2D Section/Elevation styles in mind. Using colors that are coordinated with those styles can be used to automate linework properties in section and elevation objects.
Naming of assembly components: In order to minimize confusion when editing door/window assembly styles, you should be descriptive and consistent when naming the components of the style. In general, each name should end with the type of assembly element it refers to. For example, an infill name might be "Entry Door Infill". In particular, care should be taken to name grids and the divisions they are based on. A grid using a division named "Sidelight Vertical Division" should be named "Sidelight Vertical Grid"
Curtain Walls
Curtain walls comprise two primary Architectural Desktop objects: Curtain wall styles and curtain wall unit styles. Curtain walls can also use door, window and door/window assembly styles as infills.
510 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Curtain Wall Styles
Naming Conventions:
As with other style types, the naming for curtainwalls should be as descriptive as possible, but because curtainwalls can be even more varied and complex in their structure than door/window assemblies, you should not expect to fully describe the details of the style in the name:
<Major Element (Descriptive) + <Major Element (Descriptive)>...
Example Curtain Wall Style Names:
Curtain Wall Style Definition
Example Name
A curtain wall whose first floor cell assignment consists of wide mullions meant to simulate wall panels, with a 4' x 4' pattern of standard window mullions and glazing panels above.
Mass Base + 4x4 Grid Above
First floor with stone panels, revolving doors and glazing above in Stone Base + Revolving Doors + Variable Grid Above variable pattern (perhaps with nested assemblies or curtain wall unit styles as infills).
Best Practices for Curtain Wall Styles:
All curtain wall components should have materials assigned to them.
The "Model" display representations of curtain wall components should follow "By Material" settings.
The "Elevation" display representations components should be assigned colors with the display rules of your 2D Section/Elevation styles in mind. Using colors that are coordinated with those styles can be used to automate linework properties in section and elevation objects.
Naming of curtain wall components: In order to minimize confusion when editing curtain wall styles, you should be descriptive and consistent when naming the components of the style. In general, each name should end with the type of curtain wall element it refers to. For example, an infill name might be "Stone Panel Infill". In particular, care should be taken to name grids and the divisions they are based on. A grid using a division named "First Floor Vertical Division" should be named "First Floor Vertical Grid"
Curtain Wall Unit Styles
Naming Conventions:
Curtain wall units, while similar in many respects to door/window assemblies and curtain walls, are limited to simple panel infill definitions. The naming conventions are similar to those for curtain walls, but you can also include indicators of cell adjustment parameters as well:
<Major Element (Descriptive) + <Major Element (Descriptive)>...<Optional Cell Adjustment Parameter)
Example Curtain Wall Unit Style Names:
Curtain Wall Unit Style Definition
Example Name
A curtain wall unit with 2 x 2 glazing panels:
2 x 2 Glazing
A curtain wall unit with 4' wide glazing panels, mullions coming to Glazing 4-0 Grow + Pointed Mullions a point at the top, with the side cells set to grow until a new 4' panel can be added:
Best Practices for Curtain Wall Unit Styles:
All curtain wall Unit components should have materials assigned to them.
Unless a curtain wall unit is to be scheduled as a separate item, you should not classify curtain wall unit styles.
The "Model" display representations of curtain wall unit components should follow "By Material" settings.
The "Elevation" display representations components should be assigned colors with the display rules of your 2D Section/Elevation styles in mind. Using colors that are coordinated with those styles can be used to automate linework properties in section and elevation objects.
Architectural Objects | 511
Naming of curtain wall unit components: In order to minimize confusion when editing curtain wall styles, you should be descriptive and consistent when naming the components of the style. In general, each name should end with the type of curtain wall element it refers to. For example, an infill name might be "Stone Panel Infill". In particular, care should be taken to name grids and the divisions they are based on. A grid using a division named "First Floor Vertical Division" should be named "First Floor Vertical Grid"
Roofs and Slabs
Roof slab styles can contain more than one component, similar to wall styles; many of the conventions are therefore the same or similar. Roof slabs can also use roof slab edge styles.
Roof Slab Styles
Naming Convention:
Roof slab styles, like wall styles, include multiple components. The name should indicate the structure of the roof and the dimensions of the major components (minor components such as roofing felt can have the dimension omitted). The first component listed should be the major structural component. The last component should be the finish component (if any):
<Component name>-<Size in decimal units> + <Component name>-<Size in decimal units>...
Example Roof Slab Style Names:
Roof Slab Style Definition Roof Structure: 2x8 Rafter, roofing felt, asphalt shingles.
Example Name Rafter-7.25 + Shingles
Best Practices for Roof Slab Styles:
Materials should be assigned to all roof slab components.
Roof slabs should be defined with the baseline at the bottom of the major structural component.
The index order of roof slab components should be indexed from top to bottom, with the top component having index 1.
Thicknesses of components should always be positive. The thickness offset from the baseline should always be to the bottom edge of the component.
You should consider classifying all roof slab styles to allow for more display control options.
Roof Slab Edge Styles
Roof slab edge styles are fairly simple and can contain a maximum of only two components: the fascia and the soffit. Unlike wall endcaps, roof slab edge styles are not applied to individual roof slab components, but to the roof slab as a whole.
Naming Conventions:
Roof slab edge styles should be named according to the fascia and/or soffit condition they define:
<Optional nominal fascia size> <Optional fascia> + <Optional nominal soffit size> <Optional soffit> - <Optional default edge cut condition> - <Optional edge overhang>
Example Roof Slab Edge Style Names:
Roof Slab Edge Style Description 1x4 Fascia, no soffit, plumb cut, no overhang. 1x8 Fascia, 5/8" soffit, plumb cut, 1' overhang. 4x4 Cant strip edge style (for built-up roof).
Example Name 1x4 Fascia - Plumb 1x8 Fascia + 5-8 Soffit - Plumb - Overhang 12 4x4 Cant
Best Practices for Roof Slab Edge Styles:
When creating the profiles for the edge, draw them for the right side of the roof when drawn in section.
512 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Exercise discretion when turning on "Auto-Adjust to Edge Height". While this will cause the fascia to adjust to a variable width component in a roof slab as it changes thickness, the adjustment is proporional. The fascia will adjust both vertically and horizontally. The same consideration should be taken into account when turning on the option to adjust the soffit to the overhang depth.
NOTE Roof slab edge styles can not be applied as a part of the roof slab style definition; instead you can apply them as a palette-based tool property. Many of the roof slab styles included in the sample content files that ship with Architectural Desktop indicate in their names a specific roof slab edge style and when a tool is created from those styles, the slab style is already assigned to the tool properties. These styles originated in an earlier version of Architectural Desktop in which default roof slab edge styles could be assigned to a roof slab style. This capability was removed from the User Interface of the roof slab style editor, however the style properties were left in those sample styles.
Slab Styles
Naming Convention:
Slab styles, like wall styles, include multiple components. The name should indicate the structure of the slab and the dimensions of the major components (minor components such as vapor barriers, linoleum floor finishes, etc., can have the dimension omitted). The first component listed should be the major structural component. The last component should be the finish component (if any):
<Component name>-<Size in decimal units> + <Component name>-<Size in decimal units>...
Example Slab Style Names:
Slab Style Description Slab Structure: 6" Concrete, ceramic tile flooring.
Example Name Concrete-6 + Tile-Ceramic
Best Practices for Slab Styles:
Materials should be assigned to all slab components.
Slabs should be defined with the baseline at the bottom of the major structural component.
The index order of slab components should be indexed from top to bottom, with the top component having index 1.
Thicknesses of components should always be positive. The thickness offset from the baseline should always be to the bottom edge of the component.
You should consider classifying all slab styles to allow for more display control options.
Slab Edge Styles
Slab edge styles are fairly simple and can contain a maximum of only two components: termed "fascia" and "soffit". As with roof slab edge styles, slab edge styles are not applied to individual slab components, but to the slab as a whole.
Naming Conventions:
Slab edge styles should be named according to the fascia and/or soffit condition they define:
<Optional fascia size> <Optional fascia> + <Optional nominal soffit size> <Optional soffit> - <Optional default edge cut condition> - <Optional edge overhang>
Example Slab Edge Style Names:
Slab Edge Style Description 6" Curb. 36" x 18" grade beam with brick lug.
Example Name Curb 36x18 Grade Beam + Brick Lug
Best Practices for Slab Edge Styles:
When creating the profiles for the edge, draw them for the right side of the slab when drawn in section.
Architectural Objects | 513
Exercise discretion when turning on "Auto-Adjust to Edge Height". While this will cause the fascia to adjust to a variable width component in a slab as it changes thickness, the adjustment is proportional. The fascia will adjust both vertically and horizontally. The same consideration should be taken into account when turning on the option to adjust the soffit to the overhang depth.
NOTE Slab edge styles can not be applied as a part of the slab style definition; instead you can apply them as a palette-based tool property. Many of the slab styles included in the sample content files that ship with Architectural Desktop indicate in their names a specific slab edge style and when a tool is created from those styles, the slab style is already assigned to the tool properties. These styles originated in an earlier version of Architectural Desktop in which default slab edge styles could be assigned to a slab style. This capability was removed from the User Interface of the slab style editor, however the style properties were left in those sample styles. Palette-Based Roof Slab and Slab Tools To apply a slab edge or roof slab edge style at the time of creation, you can specify them as default properties of a palette-based tool along with other properties:
You may want to consider "Top", "Bottom" or "Baseline" justification, depending upon the type of slab and its intended purpose.
The Vertical Offset can be set to pre-determine an elevation for the slab. You can establish an edge style as a default.
IMPORTANT To pre-set the edge style, you must first specify the library drawing in which the edge style exists, then define the edge style to use. Even if the edge style already exists in the current drawing, it will not be used unless you specify the style location.
514 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Slab tool properties, with a slab edge style set as the default.
Stairs and Railings
Stairs can be created using a parametric object or from a 2D sketch. In both cases, the resulting object will be based on a stair style definition.
Stair Styles
There are no naming conventions for stair styles. In general the name should simply indicate the overall purpose or stair type and possibly include the primary structure, material or construction of the stair.
Example Stair Style Names:
Stair Style Description
Steel stairs with a housed stringer.
Stair style configured to act as a concrete ramp with stringers configured to act as curbs.
Example Name Steel - Housed Ramp - Concrete + Curb
Best Practices for Stair Styles:
Consider carefully the ramifications, pro and con, of allowing the landing extension settings and stair component settings to vary amongst stairs of the same style. Turning these options off makes them "hard coded" to the style. Turning them on makes them merely defaults to be applied during the creation of a stair, but able to be overridden.
Architectural Objects | 515
When a style is assigned to a custom stair created from linework, the stringer offsets specified in the style definition will be calculated from the lines that you select for the stringer locations.
Landing extensions that are defined in the stair style will be ignored when creating a custom stair from linework.
Stair Winder Styles
Winder styles can be applied to stairs with the "Turn type" set to either "1/4 Turn" or 1/2 Turn. Stair Winder Styles Naming Conventions: The stair style name should indicate the Winder type, followed by specifics as to any tread or riser controls: <Winder type> - <Optional control parameter>... Example Stair Winder Style Names:
Stair Winder Style Description
Example Name
Manual winder type, "Use Riser Line" toggled on under "Settings". Manual - Riser
Single Point winder type, "Adjust Winder Turn" checked on under Single Point - 2 Tread "Tread Settings in Turn Area", with 2 treads per turn.
Best Practices for Stair Winder Styles:
Before defining a new stair winder style, check the existing style content library files. Most of the typical winder conditions have already been defined.
When using the single point type, it is important to clear "Use Riser Line" if the turn point will be on the edge or corner of the stair. Otherwise, the treads will overlap and the stair will be defective.
Palette-Based Stair Tools
When creating a tool for a stair style you may want to consider the following optional pre-sets:
Stair shape: although many properties of a stair can be changed after the stair has been placed, the stair shape can only be set at the time of creation. You may want to consider having the stair shape (multi-landing, U-shaped, spiral or straight) be a default setting for your stair tools.
Turn type: you can specify either landings or turns. This is also a setting that cannot be changed after the stair has been placed.
Winder style and winder style location: If you specify a turn as the turn type, you can set the winder style to use on the turn. If you specify the winder style, you can also specify a different drawing from which to import the winder style.
Stair termination: You can pre-determine whether the stair should end with a riser, tread or landing. This setting can be changed after the stair has been placed as well.
516 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
The stair tool properties
Railing Styles
Railing style names should be as descriptive as possible, listing the major components of the railing. Railing Styles Naming Conventions: <Rail type> - <Rail Shape> + <Additional component> + <Additional component>... Example Railing Style Names:
Railing Style Description Guardrail, circular with a handrail and rod balusters. Guardrail, circular with a handrail and returns:
Example Name Guardrail - Pipe + Handrail + Rod Balusters Guardrail - Pipe _+ Handrail + Return
NOTE If a custom display block applied as a style-level display override defines a component, such as a return, it should be listed as an additional component in the railing style name.
Spaces
Spaces have a multitude of uses, spanning the conceptual design through construction documents phases of a project. Among other things, spaces can begin to define the layout of a building's internal rooms and areas. They can also define rooms and areas for scheduling purposes and for area calculations and evaluations. They can also contain information valuable to users of Autodesk® Building Systems software who need to process the geometry for analysis.
Architectural Objects | 517
Space Styles
Space style names should be indicative of the type of room or area that the space style is meant to address. Space Style Naming Conventions: <Room/Area use> - <Optional relative size> - <Optional building type> Example Space Style Names:
Space Style Description Large commercial kitchen. Dining room for a restaurant. Residential Bedroom. Bedroom for a hotel suite.
Example Name Kitchen - Large - Commercial Dining_Room - Restaurant Bedroom Bedroom - Hotel
Best Practices for Space Styles:
Spaces can have a "Name" property assigned. These are derived from a List Definition. The List Definition should be assigned to the style so that you have a valid list of names to select from when establishing the space object's properties.
Space styles should have materials assigned to their "Floor" and "Ceiling" components.
Because space styles can work in conjunction with Zone Definitions you may want to store them in the same library file to make it easier to make changes later.
Structural Members
Structural Member Shape Definitions
Structural Member Shape Definitions should be named according to the structural member style(s) for which they are intended to be a part of. For example, if you are defining a steel bar joist member style and you've defined a structural member shape definition on which you plan to base the bottom chord component of the joist, you would name it simply "Steel Joist Bottom Chord".
Structural Member Styles
Structural members should be named according to the specific structural object type that they are to represent, including dimensional information. Structural Member Style Naming Conventions: <Structural member type> <Size>
NOTE Frequently standard structural shape designations include the size of the member. In these cases, the structural name can simply be the structural designation.
Example Structural Member Style Names: Structural Member Style Description Wide flange steel shape (W8x40). 10" K Series Bar Joist. Decorative square tapered square column (specific use). 10" Plywood Web Wood Joist.
Example Name W8x40 Bar Joist 10K1 Decorative Square Column - Tapered 12"-8" Plywood Web Joist - 10
518 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
NOTE Naming conventions for structural member styles are not fixed. In the case of structural member styles defined as a result of the Structural Member Catalog, it is acceptable and more efficient in many cases to use the default name that is provided by the catalog. As an example the "Plywood Web Joist - 10" style name listed above would be "10in Plywood Web Wood Joist".
Best Practices for Structural Member Styles:
When naming a structural member style, consider whether it can be used for more than one purpose. For example, wide flange shapes can be used for either columns, bracing or beams. In the case of such an element, you should not indicate a specific use in the member style name.
When defining custom display blocks for the Model display of structural member styles, you should use other structural members to define the blocks where possible, in lieu of mass elements. An example of this is seen in the example Bar Joist styles that are provided with Architectural Desktop. The custom display blocks that define the webbing are made from a structural member style called "Steel Joist Webbing".
Materials should be assigned to structural member style components.
Documentation Objects
Architectural Desktop documentation objects are object types that are explicitly for use as annotation tools. Rather than define 3D geometry, they define data structures and 2D annotation graphics.
NOTE Since documentation objects do not define geometry, it is not necessary to classify their styles for scheduling purposes, however you may want to consider it if you need more display control than that provided by the normal display set controls.
Sections and Elevations 2D sections and elevations define the 2D representation of orthogonal views of a 3D building model. They are not geometric objects in and of themselves, but are more of a "report" of the model.
2D Section/Elevation Styles
The purpose of a 2D Section/Elevation style is to automate the display characteristics of linework in the section/elevation object.
IMPORTANT It is important to have a standardized display system established before creating custom 2D Section/Elevation styles. The Design Rules of a Section/Elevation style are wholly dependent upon the colors assigned to objects in the display representation used by the section/elevation object. By default, this is usually an object's "Model" or "Elevation" display representation. To find out which specific display representation is used by section/elevations for each object type, you can refer to Display Manager and review the Display Representation Control for the "Section_Elev" display set, or whatever other display set is specified as part of the section/elevation's properties.
2D Section/Elevation Style Naming Conventions: <2D Section purpose or use> - <Optional scale> Example 2D Section/Elevation Style Names:
2D Section/Elevation Style Description
Example Name
A section/elevation style to be used for elevations and sections plotted Bldg Section-Elevation - 48 at 1/4"=1'-0".
A section/elevation style for use as a background for a detail view. Detail Background
Best Practices for 2D Section/Elevation Styles
If you define custom components and design rules in your section/elevation style, you should always include a description. The description for the design rules should explain what action each rule takes in the display properties of the style. For example, you might have a display component named "Swing Lines". The component description would be simply "Door and Window swing lines". The design rule accompanying the component might have a description of "Make window and door swings a fine line weight and dashed".
Documentation Objects | 519
For a section/elevation style intended to be used as a detail background, you should place all display components on a no-plot layer.
Section/elevation styles cannot, by themselves, be made into a palette-based tool. Instead you refer to them in a callout tool's properties. You can specify the library file containing the section/elevation style, and the specific section/elevation style to be used with the callout. Callout tool properties including the 2D Section/Elevation Style to use, the style library from which to import the style, the default scale and display set to use.
Dimensions In addition to traditional AutoCAD dimensioning, Architectural Desktop provides more intelligent and automated AEC Dimension objects. Thoughtful creation of AEC Dimension Styles can greatly improve productivity during the construction documents phase of a project. Another benefit of AEC Dimension styles is that as AEC objects, they can be controlled with the Architectural Desktop Display System, and can be scale-dependent; the same AEC Dimension can be used for any number of scales in the drawing. Changing the display configuration to one set up for a different scale can also cause the AEC Dimensions to modify their appearance to be more appropriate for the new scale. AEC Dimension Styles AEC Dimension Style Naming Conventions: <Maximum number of chains> - <Optional unique purpose>
520 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Example AEC Dimension Style Names:
AEC Dimension Style Description
Example Name
Dimension style with maximum 3 chains, for use in normal construction documents dimensioning.
3 Chain
Dimension style with maximum 2 chains, to display metric units in 2 Chain - Alternate Metric a drawing configured for imperial units.
Best Practices for AEC Dimension Styles:
Make your dimension styles scale dependent where possible, by using different AutoCAD dimension styles with different settings for "Overall Scale". By changing display configurations, you can use a different display representation for dimension styles that adjusts to different scales and detail levels.
It is not necessary to store AEC Dimension styles, or the AutoCAD dimension styles on which they are dependent upon for display in the template drawing. Instead you can use the tool properties to import them as needed from a style library. Necessary AutoCAD dimension styles will also be imported.
If you have configured the "Dimension" and "Type" parameters of your wall style components, you can and should take advantage of this in the AEC Dimension's "Content" settings for the "Wall Width" dimension parameters by specifying "From Style" or "Structural from Style".
Schedules and Property Sets Schedules, property set definitions, data format styles and display themes are all tightly interrelated. Because of that, you should take the time to plan out carefully your system of property data usage.
Property Set Definitions
In addition to defining data fields for schedules, property set definitions can also be used to create "smart" object tags and can be used to override display settings for objects. Because of their myriad uses, you should plan them carefully. Of utmost importance, you need to carefully consider what specific object type(s) your property set definition will apply to and whether or not it will be style-based or object-based.
NOTE Because Property Set Definitions, Property Data Format Styles, Schedule Table Styles and Display Theme Styles are so inter-dependent you may want to consider storing them in the same style library to make it easier to make modifications later on.
Property Set Definition Naming Conventions: <Object type><Optional additional description><Attachment (style or object> Example Property Set Definition Names:
Property Set Definition Description
Property set definition for doors, object-based.
Property set definition for window frame information, attached to window styles.
Example Name DoorObjects WindowFrameStyles
Best Practices for Property Set Definitions:
Do not include spaces in property set definition names or property names. In the event that you want to have a property displayed in an object tag, it will need to be referenced by an AutoCAD attribute definition by name when the "Define Schedule Tag" tool is used. Attribute definition tags cannot include spaces.
When a property is selected for use in a schedule table column, the property's description is the default column header. While this can easily be overridden at any time, if you keep it in mind when you are defining your properties you can streamline the task of creating schedule tables somewhat.
If you have legacy property set definitions for anchored objects that include formula-based properties that extract information based on the host object's properties, you should consider replacing them with the new "Anchor Property" in Architectural Desktop 2007. An example of this would be a door's fire-rating property where you want to make sure it is set to match the fire-rating of the wall it is anchored to.
Documentation Objects | 521
Take advantage of Architectural Desktop's new ability to hide properties. This is useful if you have a property that is not actually directly edited by a user. By disabling its visibility you can minimize confusion when viewing and editing properties in the "Extended Data" tab of the object properties palette.
If you have classified your object styles, consider strongly using classifications to further filter the object and style types that your property sets apply to. This is much more reliable than using layer filters.
Property Data Formats
Property Data Formats control the appearance and character/numeric formatting of property set values when they appear in a schedule table. Property Data Format Naming Conventions: Naming conventions for property data formats is fairly relaxed and descriptive: <Data type/purpose> - <Optional description> Example Property Data Format Names:
Property Data Format Description
Property data format to display the area of an object.
Property data format to display a numerical value as a length to 1/16" precision.
Example Name Area Length - Short 1-16
NOTE In cases of numerical values formatted for a specific precision, you can choose to leave the actual precision value out of the data format style name, however you should indicate it in the description.
Best Practices for Data Format Styles:
Before creating a new data format style, check to make sure there isn't already an existing one that you can re-use. There are a large number of pre-configured data format styles in the existing "Schedule Tables (Imperial).dwg" or "Schedule Tables (Metric).dwg" files in your Architectural Desktop content folder.
Schedule Table Styles
Schedule Table Style Naming Conventions: <Object type> Schedule <Optional additional qualifier> Example Schedule Table Style Names:
Schedule Table Style Description
Example Name
Door schedule, using standard door number property (not project- Door Schedule based).
Door schedule, using project-based door number.
Door Schedule Project Based
Best Practices for Schedule Table Styles:
If you have classified your object styles, consider strongly using classifications to further filter the object and style types that your schedule applies to. This is much more reliable than using layer filters.
Pay special attention to the "Applies to" property of your schedule table style. It must match exactly the "Applies to" property of any property set definitions whose properties you intend to use for schedule table columns.
Display Theme Styles
Aside from making sure that your style names are descriptive, there are no conventions or standards for Display Theme Styles.
522 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Zones Zones allow you to group your spaces together for use in area calculation schemas, as and presentations (showing spaces color-coded by department, for example). Additionally, engineers who are using Autodesk Building Systems can use zones to perform complex analysis calculations and reporting.
Zone Styles
Beyond being as descriptive as possible there are no naming conventions for Zone Styles. Best Practices for Zone Styles:
If you are using Zone Templates to automate the organization of your zones, then you must store the zone styles in the same drawing as the zone template styles.
You may want to use a style-level display override for your zone styles for presentation displays to control hatching and color.
NOTE In addition to using style display overrides to control the display of zones, you might also consider using a Display Theme Style configured to display Spaces based on a property value.
Calculation Modifier Styles
Calculation Modifier Style Naming Conventions: <Calculation description> <Purpose> Example Calculation Modifier Style Names:
Calculation Modifier Style Description
Modifier to add ten percent to a calculated area to account for a commons factor add on in a commercial office building.
Example Name 10 Percent Commons Factor
Zone Template Styles
Zone Templates allow you to automate the organization of your zones into a tree structure. Aside from being as descriptive as reasonably possible there are no naming conventions.
Best Practices for Zone Template Styles:
When it is appropriate to do so, don't forget to attach a calculation modifier style to the styles that you include in your zone template. This can further automate the process of zone organization.
Zone template styles must be stored in the same drawing as the zone styles that they include. They also must be stored in the same drawing as any calculation modifiers that they use.
List Definitions
There are no naming or "Best Practices" tips for List Definitions.
IMPORTANT Related zone styles, zone template styles and calculation modifier styles must exist in the same drawing. For this reason, you should consider storing all zone styles, zone template styles and calculation modifier styles in the same library drawing. In addition, you should store list definitions in the library drawings containing the zone styles, space styles and property set definitions that they are intended to be used with.
Multi-Purpose Objects
Object styles found under the "Multi-Purpose Objects" category are usually "helper" objects that are used to help define or enhance other object styles, or symbol objects, such as masking blocks or multi-view blocks.
Multi-Purpose Objects | 523
AEC Polygons
AEC Polygons are useful in defining infills for curtain walls and curtain wall units, defining 2-dimensional areas and other annotation tasks. For example, they are also used on the "Cut Line" tool found on the "Annotation" tool palette.
AEC Polygon Naming Conventions:
AEC Polygon naming format will depend upon what their purpose is. An AEC Polygon style meant to define a curtain wall infill, for example, will have a much more rigid naming convention than one meant to merely define an area:
<AEC Polygon purpose> - <Optional description>
Example AEC Polygon Style Names:
AEC Polygon Style Description
Example Name
AEC Polygon style to serve as banding in a stone infill with a revolving Stone Infill + Revolving Doors - Stone Infill Dark Band door in a curtain wall.
Classification Definitions
Classifications are a way of further defining a more generic object type. For example, wall styles can be used to define objects that aren't walls, such as cabinetry, countertops, soffits, etc. By classifying objects, you can control whether or not they are scheduled or displayed with other similar object types.
Classification Definition Naming Conventions:
Classification definitions are merely a list. Frequently this list is based on some other documented list or data structure. In other cases they may pertain to a specific object type and qualities about that object type. The naming format can vary depending upon these conditions.
Classification Definition Purpose
Naming Convention
Classification definitions based on an existing list or data structure. <Data structure name or description>
Classification definitions for a specific object type and purpose.
<Object type> <Purpose>
Example Classification Definition Names:
Classification Definition Description
Example Name
Classification definition, applying to all object types, based on the Uniformat II Uniformat II structure.
Classification definition for doors, windows and assemblies, to classify Doors-Windows Phase based on construction phase.
NOTE The second example above is exactly that, an example. In reality, a classification definition to classify objects based on phasing might better be defined to apply to all object types.
Best Practices for Classification Definitions:
While it is possible to classify objects on a "per instance" basis, it is better in most cases to classify object styles. All object styles that define geometry (anything that would be considered an "Architectural Object" rather than a "Documentation Object") should be classified.
Be careful not to be too restrictive when specifying the "Applies to:" parameter for a classification definition. In many cases you may find that your classification definition, depending upon what is actually included in its list of classifications, might apply best for several different object types, if not all of them.
If you have a long classification definition you may want to consider arranging the classifications in a hierarchical manner. For example, if you were developing a classification definition to encompass the MasterSpec II format, you might have at the top level the major division numbers, then have the sections within those divisions defined within each one at a lower level.
Store commonly used classifications in your template drawings, especially those that might be used to classify individual objects.
524 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Layer Key Styles
Layer Key Styles are the heart of an automated layer standard. There are several pre-defined Layer Key Styles provided with Architectural Desktop that are based on existing widely accepted industry standards. You can also define your own Layer Key Style.
Layer Key Style Naming Conventions:
<Optional company name or other unique identifier> <Optional standard name> <Optional descriptive element>
Example Layer Key Style Names:
Layer Key Style Description
Example Name
Layer Key Style based on the British BS1192 standard.
BS1192
Layer Key Style based on the AIA Layer Guidelines version 3, with ADT AIA v3 provisions for deviation from Tri-Services plotting guidelines (using named plot styles).
Layer Key Style created by "Company X" for use with their internal Company X Health Care layer standard, which is specifically used on medical projects.
Best Practices for Layer Key Styles:
Base your Layer Key Style on a structured Architectural Desktop Layer Standard, which defines the actual layer naming format for your layers. Layer keys that are not based on a Layer Standard cannot take advantage of layer key overrides.
Since Layer Key Styles define the color, line weight, line type and plot style for each layer they define, they should work in conjunction with your display system. Before defining your own Layer Key Style, you should have a display system in effect that has been tested and you should be very familiar with it.
Remember that several existing Layer Key Styles are already provided with Architectural Desktop. You may want to start with these instead of creating a new one from scratch, modifying and adding layer keys as necessary to suit your needs.
Don't forget to specify, as part of your drawing settings the Layer Standard and Layer Key Style to automatically load in any new drawing. Additionally you should specify that the Layer Key Style be reloaded in any existing drawings if the "master" Layer Key Style in the library drawing has been edited recently. (Refer to "Template Drawings" under the "Content Resources" section of this chapter).
Mask Block Definitions Mask blocks are symbol-based style definitions that consist of a shape definition to serve as a masking object along with optional additional graphics.
NOTE Mask blocks only affect AEC Objects and cannot mask generic AutoCAD objects such as lines, arcs, circles, etc.
Mask Block Definition Naming Conventions:
Because Mask Block Definitions are symbolic objects, naming conventions are similar to those used for standard block definitions. Since mask block definitions are best stored as AEC Content, you may also want the name to indicate the category of AEC Content in which the mask block definition belongs:
Descriptive field>_<Optional descriptive field>_...<Optional size indication>
Example Mask Block Definition Names:
Mask Block Definition Description
Example Name
2'x2' fluorescent lighting fixture for use in an imperial Architectural I_Elec_Lighting_Fluor_2x2 project.
Custom conference table created by/for "Company X" for use in imperial projects.
Company X_I_Furn_Table_Conf
Multi-Purpose Objects | 525
Best Practices for Mask Block Definitions:
When creating geometry to serve as additional graphics for the mask block definition, create it on the layer "0" with color, line weight, line type and plot style set to "BYBLOCK", unless you have a specific reason to override any of these values with an explicit value.
NOTE Only the objects selected as "Additional Graphics" can be assigned a unique property for color, line weight, line type and plot style prior to being defined as a mask block. The objects that make up the masking shape will ignore any of those overrides once made part of a mask block definition, following the assignments given to their display representations instead.
Store mask blocks as AEC Content. This way they can be easily accessed through the Design Center. Additionally, a palette-based tool can be used to allow users to find them without navigating the AEC Content folder structure.
Mass Element Styles
Unlike many other types of Architectural Desktop object types, mass elements do not have to exist on a specific mass element style to be effectively used. Many mass elements can be created on the style "Standard" with no adverse effects whatsoever. However you can define mass element styles to predefine material assignments, classification assignments and display representation overrides.
Mass Element Style Naming Conventions:
Mass - <Optional classification assignment> - <Material assignment>
NOTE Classification and material assignments can be abbreviated in the mass element style name.
Example Mass Element Style Names:
Mass Element Style Description
Example Name
Mass element for use as a decorative column and classified as "B2010 - Exterior Walls" from the "Uniformat II" classification definition and assigned a material of "Finishes.Plaster and Gypsum Board.Plaster.Stucco.Fine.Brown".
Mass - Exterior Wall - Brown Stucco
Unclassified mass element for non-specific use assigned a material Mass - Deep Green Marble Tile of "Finishes.Flooring.Tile.Marble.Deep Green".
Best Practices for Mass Element Styles:
Use tools and tool palettes to provide access to your mass element styles. You can accomplish several things with a tool referencing a mass element style:
1 You can create a tool that pre-assigns a specific mass shape as well as a mass style to a mass element.
2 You can create a tool that pre-assigns a mass style but leaves the shape undefined. This is useful for assigning a mass style to an existing object with the "Assign Tool Properties To..." right-click tool menu option without changing it's shape.
3 Mass elements by default are created on a generic "MASSELEM" layer key, since they do not, by definition, define a specific type of architectural object. By using a tool, you can override this and place them on a key that is more appropriate for the object type that they are to represent.
526 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Tool properties for a mass element style tool. Note that the name of the tool has been changed to be more descriptive.Additionally, since the mass element that this tool creates is meant to define a decorative column classified as an exterior wall, the tool's creator has decided to put the mass element on the layer defined by the "WALL" key in the current layer key style. In the example the mass element shape has also been pre-defined to be a cylinder, again, since it is meant to define a specific object type, not just a particular material assignment.
Material Definitions
Material Definitions are integral to the display system in Architectural Desktop and are a powerful tool to use with style and object definitions to automate displays in plan, section and elevation. They also allow you to pre-assign rendering materials for use in VIZ Render and Autodesk VIZ, eliminating hours of tedious work establishing material and mapping properties in those applications. Additionally, you can use a "Material" automatic property definition to tie material assignments (and the properties of those materials) into a schedule table of objects that have the materials assigned to them.
Material Definition Naming Conventions:
<General material category>.<Additional descriptive field>.<Optional additional descriptive field>...<Optional color>
Example Material Definition Names:
Material Definition Description Cast in place concrete, exposed aggregate, medium texture. Dark green marble flooring tile.
Example Name Concrete.Cast-in-Place.Exposed Aggregate.Medium Finishes.Flooring.Tile.Marble.Deep Green
Best Practices for Material Definitions:
Take every step to standardize your materials. You may want to consider storing your main material library drawing as a read-only file, accessible to only a few authorized people in your office to ensure that standard material definitions do not get inadvertently modified.
Take advantage of Project Standards to make sure your project drawings are consistent with your office and project standard materials.
Multi-Purpose Objects | 527
Avoid using the "Edit Material" or "New Material" buttons on the "Materials" tab of your style editor. While these may seem like efficient ways of editing and creating new materials "on the fly", they can be dangerous, as they make it easy to accidentally edit a material that has been applied to a multitude of different object styles, having an unintended and potentially drastic effect on the graphic quality of your drawing, as well as creating a material that deviates from your standard material definitions.
The "Edit Material" and "New Material" buttons available in the style editor.These may seem like efficient and handy ways of creating materials on the fly, but their use should be discouraged as they make it easy to accidentally create non-standard materials.
Assign commonly used standard materials to palette-based tools so that users can access them quickly and easily without having to browse for your material library file in Style Manager.
Material Definitions are essentially nothing more than a collection of display representations. Therefore, every material definition you create should have style overrides placed on every display representation.
When defining and editing materials, keep level of detail in mind, especially when you are defining hatch patterns and hatch pattern scale. In the default template drawings there are three display representations for material definitions that are meant to address scale dependency. You can, of course, create additional display configurations and associated display representations for additional scale dependency. The existing display representations for scale dependency are:
Display Configuration
Material Display Representation
General HIgh Detail
High Detail
General Medium Detail
Medium Detail
General Low Detail
Low Detail
When editing a material definition's "General Screened" or "General Reflected Screened" you should assign the components to a layer that has a color or plot style assigned to it that will plot screened with color and line type set to "BYLAYER". These display representations are meant for use with consultants who need a screened background drawing. You can set one of the screened display configurations current and export your Architectural Desktop drawing to an AutoCAD format. By assigning the components to screened layers you provide your consultants and collaborators the ability to control their display via traditional AutoCAD layer control.
NOTE By default, the screened display representations in the Imperial and Metric templates for use in the United States assign material display components to the layer "A-Anno-Scrn" in accordance with the AIA layering guidelines.
IMPORTANT If you want to use material definitions to control the display of object components in a 2D Section/Elevation object on the cut line you must first set the "Defining Line" component in the 2D Section/Elevation's "General" display representation to "By Material". Next, edit the material definitions being used in the section and set the "2D Section/Elevation Linework" component to the color, line type, line weight and plot style you would like to see in the Section/Elevation. You will also need to make sure the setting "Maintain layer, color, linetype properties form the Display Set used during generation" is toggled off.
Multi-View Block Definitions
Multi-View Block Definitions can be used for both geometric symbols and annotation symbols (primarily chases and column grid bubbles).
528 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Multi-View Block Naming Conventions Geometry-defining Multi-View Blocks. Annotation-defining Multi-View Blocks.
<Optional system of measure>_<General object category>_<Specific object type>_<Optional descriptive field>_<Optional descriptive field>
<Optional system of measure>_<Annotation purpose/type>_<Optional descriptive field>
Example Multi-View Block Definition Names:
Multi-View Block Definition Description
Example Name
Multi-View Block Definition for a queen size bed for use in an imperial I_Furn_Bed_Queen project.
Multi-View Block Definition for a wall-mounted flush WC for use in M_Plumb_WC_Flush - Wall a metric project.
Multi-View Block Definition for a Chase.
Chase
Multi-View Block Definition for a column grid bubble, with a square I_ColGrid_Bubble_Square bubble.
Block definitions for view block components of Multi-View blocks should also be named consistently and appropriately. View Block Naming Conventions:
View Blocks for Geometry-defining Multi-View Blocks. View Blocks for Annotation-defining Multi-View Blocks.
<Optional system of measure>_<General object category>_<Specific object type>_<Optional descriptive field>_<View direction indicator>
<Optional system of measure>_<Annotation purpose/type>_<Qualifier ("2D", "Scale-Dependent", etc.)>
Example View Block Names:
View Block Description
Example Names
2D plan view for a queen size bed multi-view block.
I_Furn_Bed_Queen_P
2D front view for a queen size bed multi-view block.
I_Furn_Bed_Queen_F
3D model for a queen size bed multi-view block.
I_Furn_Bed_Queen_M
2D grid bubble block with attribute for grid bubble multi-view block. I_GridBubble_2D
Best Practices for Multi-View Block Definitions:
Limit the use of multi-view blocks for annotation purposes to grid bubbles, chases and schedule tags. When defining a multi-view block for use as a schedule tag, use the "Define Schedule Tag" tool from the Format pull-down menu.
There are two possible display representations by default for multi-view blocks. Typically, "General" is used for most plan views. If you need to define a scale-dependent multi-view block, you can use "Plan" instead, along with "Plan High Detail" and "Plan Low Detail", and any other display representations you might create for different scale plan views. In these cases do not use the "General" display representation.
Multi-Purpose Objects | 529
Use the Create AEC Content Wizard to store your multi-view block definitions, rather than store them in the template. The only exception to this is a custom column grid bubble multi-view block definition.
Profiles
Profiles are general purpose 2D definitions that assist in defining geometry that is included in other styles. For example, a 2D shape can be converted to a profile to define a handrail shape. The profile is then extruded the length of the railing whose style the profile is used in to define the handrail.
Profile Definition Naming Conventions:
<Profile purpose>_<Descriptive field>_<Optional additional descriptive field>_<Optional size indication>
Example Profile Definition Names:
Profile Definition Description Profile to define a handrail grip for a railing style Profile to define a glazed door panel. Profile to define a 1x4 base for a wall sweep definition. Profile to define a 2x10 fascia for a roof slab edge style.
Example Name HR_Grip Door (SingleHinge)_Glazed WallBase_1x4 Fascia_2x10
Symbol & Tool-Based Content
The terms "Symbols" and "Tools" in the context of this chapter refer mainly to delivery mechanisms for the various types of content that is external to the drawing template: styles, multi-view blocks, masking blocks, and command-based content.
AEC Content
Any symbol-based content with the exception of leaders, callouts and title marks should be created using the AEC Content Wizard and stored as AEC Content so that it can be made accessible either through the "AEC Content" tab in Design Center or through a palette-based tool.
NOTE Custom blocks do not scale correctly if you copy objects to which they are attached (such as doors with door hardware) and paste them in a drawing that has drawing units specified differently.
Best Practices for AEC Content:
Store your custom AEC Content files in a folder that is separate from the default "Imperial" and "Metric" folders. The path to your AEC Content can be accessed in the OPTIONS dialog box in the "AEC Content" tab. You can create as many subfolders as you like in the location indicated as the "AEC Design Center Content Path". They will be accessible from the "AEC Content" tab in the AutoCAD Design Center, and will act like any other type of AEC Content.
530 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
If you have existing 2D and 3D AutoCAD blocks, you can convert them directly to AEC Content using the AEC Content Wizard and choosing "Block" as the content type.
When creating AEC Content, remember that the resulting file is a new drawing that takes it's content and other settings from the drawing in which you are running the AEC Content Wizard. With this in mind, there are some critical steps you should take before launching the Wizard: 1 Start in a clean drawing. Instead of using the QNEW command, which loads a template, use the NEW command and choose "Open with No Template - Imperial" from the "Open" drop down list.
AEC Content | 531
IMPORTANT Make sure you have set your drawing setup parameters to automatically load your layer key style into any new drawing. This is critical in order to assign you content to a layer key.
2 Make sure your drawing window background color is set to white. The resulting content file will have an associated icon with it. The icon background color will be the same color as your AutoCAD drawing window background.
3 Make sure you have all of the items necessary for your content in the current drawing. In the case of a multi-view block that you may have defined in another drawing, if you simply copy that block into the current drawing, all necessary view blocks will import with it.
4 Create the graphics for your content file's Design Center icon.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Design Center icon is nothing more than a thumbnail. Keep the graphics simple. The default Design Center icon will be created from all geometry that exists in the drawing window at the time you save the content file.
Always assign a layer key to your AEC Content file. Always provide a description for the AEC Content file. When saving the AEC Content file, make sure you save it to a folder underneath the AEC Content path setting in
your OPTIONS dialog box. This is not done by default. You should select the "Browse" button next to the file name field in the AEC Content Wizard to make sure your file is being saved in the right location. Most design content files, since they define actual architectural geometry, should be made up of blocks, multi-view blocks and mask blocks. Documentation content files, regardless of whether they are based on blocks or multi-view blocks have the additional requirement that they be inserted at a scale relative to your anticipated plot scale, and taking into account the "Annotation Plot Size" setting in the drawing setup dialog box. As a baseline, you can use one AutoCAD unit (either an inch or a millimeter, depending upon whether your working in imperial or metric units). Anything in the content file that is one unit in size will be the annotation plot size when plotted at the drawing scale specified at the time it was inserted. Items that are not meant to be plotted at the annotation plot size can be sized proportionally.
532 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Palette-Based and Miscellaneous Annotation Tool Content
Palette-based tools, combined with tool catalogs, offer an effective means of distributing and standardizing content, as well as automating insertion and creation parameters. General Best Practices for Palette-Based Tools:
All annotation content should be created to take advantage of the Annotation Plot Size. Tools should normally be saved in a catalog. That way, if the palette on which they exist in the user's workspace
gets inadvertently deleted, the tool can be restored from the original palette. When creating palette based tools, make it a habit to look for automation oppotunities. With the exception of
tools for AEC Content, there are a variety of properties that can be pre-configured to further automate and standardized object creation. If you have a need for callouts that use different graphic qualities, you can limit the number of actual tools that you create by taking advantage of dynamic blocks. The disadvantage to doing this, however, is that you may lose some standardization, as the same callout tool could have multiple bubbles in the same drawing by simply changing the view state parameter of the callouts after they've been inserted. Store Schedule Tags in the same file as your schedules and property set definitions. While this is not technically necessary in order for them to work properly, it makes editing them easier. Text and labels in schedule tags should be MTEXT objects. MTEXT that links to a property definition will automatically be converted to a properly formatted attribute definition. Carefully consider the tool properties for leaders. There are several pre-sets that can make creating a simple leader much less time consuming and more standardized.
Palette-Based and Miscellaneous Annotation Tool Content | 533
The tool properties for leaders allow you to control almost every aspect of the leader in advance.
If you create tools for standard AutoCAD dimensions, use the AEC Content Wizard to do so. That way you can use the "Custom Command" option and use layer keys to make sure that the dimensions go to the correct layer.
534 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Break line tools should have supporting elements stored in the same drawing as the break line symbol. As with other multi-component tools, such as schedule tags, it makes them easier to modify in the future. All of the properties for break marks are set in the tool properties, including whether or not the break mark masks or trims objects.
Title blocks should be stored in a sheet template drawing rather than as a separate drawing. Use MTEXT objects instead of attribute definitions in your title blocks. When you include fields in an MTEXT
object, it will word-wrap where necessary. TIP The title blocks that are provided in the Architectural Desktop sheet templates are NCS compliant. You may want to consider beginning with them and making modifications to suit if you are planning to comply with that standard.
Palette-Based and Miscellaneous Annotation Tool Content | 535
536 | Chapter 12 Content Creation Guidelines
Conceptual Design
2
537
538 | Chapter 13 Conceptual Design
Creating Conceptual Models
13
A conceptual model, which represents the idea for a building design, comprises a variety of building blocks. In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, the building blocks include mass elements, mass groups, spaces, and slices. Combined, they produce a three-dimensional (3D) model.
539
Mass Elements and Mass Groups
Mass elements are primitive parametric objects that have specific shapes, such as arch, box, cylinder, and gable. They function as the building blocks of conceptual design (also schematic design) in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. You can create preliminary studies, or mass models, by grouping mass elements together in mass groups.
Mass Groups and Mass Models When you create a mass group, you can combine the shapes of mass elements in the mass group by adding, subtracting, and intersecting them in a specific order. The resulting complex shape of the mass group forms your conceptual building design, or mass model. The mass model defines the basic structure and proportion of a building model.
Developing Mass Models As you continue developing your mass model, you can combine mass elements into mass groups and create complex building shapes by adding, subtracting, and intersecting the mass elements. You can change mass elements in the mass group as necessary to reflect the building design. You can edit individual mass elements that are attached to a mass group to further refine the building model. You can also nest mass groups within other mass groups. For more information, see "Creating a Mass Group" on page 576.
Using the Model Explorer You can use the Model Explorer to create your entire mass model, or you can create your mass model in the current drawing. You can also modify your mass model or change the relationships of mass elements in the Model Explorer. In addition to a graphics area that displays the mass model, the Model Explorer has a tree view in which you can drag and drop mass elements and mass groups to arrange and view the building blocks of your model in a hierarchical structure. For more information, see "Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models" on page 587. When creating massing studies, you can create mass groups with any AutoCAD® three-dimensional (3D) object, including AutoCAD ACIS solids. These can be combined with mass elements in the Model Explorer to allow more complex studies of potential designs. However, only objects that have volume affect the appearance of the mass group. For example, a polyline, even with thickness, does not contribute to the mass group.
Continuing Building Design from a Mass Model The mass model that you create is a refinement of your original idea that you carry into the next phase of the project, where you can slice floorplates from the mass model. You can convert the floorplates to space boundaries to start space planning, or you can convert them to polylines and then to walls to begin your building design.
Display Configurations and Layouts for Mass Modeling Drawings created from templates provided with Autodesk Architectural Desktop contain display configurations and layouts that enable you to work effectively with mass elements and mass groups. For example, a layout has two viewports: one is assigned a display configuration that displays only mass groups and the other is assigned a display configuration that displays only mass elements.
Materials in Mass Elements In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to a mass element. These materials are displayed in wireframe and working shade views, or when linked into VIZ Render. Materials have specific settings for individual components of a mass element, such as linework or surface hatches.
540 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Mass elements with assigned materials in rendered view
Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for all common design purposes. These materials contain settings for roof slabs. You can use these predefined materials, or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials from scratch. For more information, see "Using Materials for Mass Elements and Mass Groups" on page 585. Other Uses of Mass Elements and Mass Groups You can use mass elements and mass groups to create 3D body pieces of the building model. For example, you can apply them to walls as 3D body modifiers.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place mass elements by selecting a massing tool with a specific style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use massing tools to create new mass elements by applying tool properties to existing 3D solids. Tool palette containing massing tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain massing tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain massing tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Sample Palette catalog My Tool catalog For more information on accessing tools in these catalogs, see "Content Browser" on page 77. Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain massing tools with mass element styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements | 541
Creating a Mass Element Use this procedure to add a new mass element that has the properties specified in a selected massing tool. To specify settings when you add a mass element, see "Creating a Mass Element with User-Specified Settings" on page 542.
Shapes of Mass Elements
To create mass elements, you start with basic shapes and manipulate them for the desired result. The twelve basic mass element shapes are Arch, Barrel Vault, Box, Pyramid, Isosceles Triangle, Right Triangle, Cone, Cylinder, Dome, Sphere, Gable, and Drape. You can also create custom mass elements by extruding and revolving profiles and by creating free form mass elements. You can modify a mass element based on its shape. For example, you can specify the width, depth, and height of a Box mass element, and the radius and height of a Cylinder mass element. For more information, see "Editing Mass Elements" on page 552.
Specifying the Size of Mass Elements
You can graphically specify size parameters of mass elements.
A rectangular mass element is any element that has four lines at its base, such as an Arch, Barrel Vault, Box, Gable, Pyramid, Isosceles Triangle, or Right Triangle. You can graphically specify the width, depth, and height of rectangular mass elements.
When you create a circular mass element, you graphically specify all the valid size parameters. Circular mass elements are Cone, Cylinder, Dome, and Sphere.
Some parameters are fixed during input; for example, the radius of an arch is one quarter of the width, and the rise of a gable is half the height. These parameters can be edited after the mass elements are placed in the drawing.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a massing tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Specify the insertion point of the mass element. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 Specify the next point. This point can be the second corner (for a rectangular mass element), or the radius (for a circular mass element).
4 Specify the height, if prompted. 5 Specify the rotation of the mass element. 6 Continue adding mass elements, and press ENTER.
Creating a Mass Element with User-Specified Settings Use this procedure to add a mass element with settings that you specify.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a massing tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Under Bound Spaces, define if this mass element can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this mass element can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this mass element cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this mass element will use the bounding settings from the mass element style.
542 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 Select a shape. 6 Specify the mass group to which to attach the mass element. 7 Expand Dimensions.
The options that display under Dimensions depend on the shape you selected for the mass element.
8 Specify the dimensions of the mass element:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the width of the mass element in its relative X direction enter a value for Width.
specify the depth of the mass element in its relative Y direction enter a value for Depth.
specify the height of the mass element in its relative Z direction
enter a value for Height.
specify the radius of the mass element
enter a value for Radius.
specify the rise of the mass element
enter a value for Rise.
9 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the mass element. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
10 Continue adding mass elements, and press ENTER.
Creating an Arch Mass Element Use this procedure to dynamically create an Arch mass element. The insertion point of an Arch mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Arch mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Arch tool. 2 Specify the first corner of the Arch. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the second corner of the Arch. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Arch. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Arch mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Barrel Vault Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Barrel Vault mass element. The insertion point of the Barrel Vault mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Barrel Vault mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Barrel Vault tool.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements | 543
2 Specify the first corner of the Barrel Vault. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the second corner of the Barrel Vault. 4 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 5 Continue adding Barrel Vault mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Box Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Box mass element. The insertion point of the Box mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Box mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Box tool. 2 Specify the first corner of the Box. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the second corner of the Box. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Box. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Box mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Pyramid Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Pyramid mass element. The insertion point of a Pyramid mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Pyramid mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Pyramid tool. 2 Specify the first corner of the Pyramid. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the second corner of the Pyramid. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Pyramid. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Pyramid mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating an Isosceles Triangle Mass Element Use this procedure to create an Isosceles Triangle mass element. The insertion point of an Isosceles Triangle mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face.
544 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Isosceles Triangle mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Isosceles Triangle tool. 2 Specify the first corner of the Isosceles Triangle. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the second corner of the Isosceles Triangle. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Isosceles Triangle. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Isosceles Triangle mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Right Triangle Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Right Triangle mass element. The insertion point of a Right Triangle mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Right Triangle mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Right Triangle tool. 2 Specify the first corner of the Right Triangle. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the second corner of the Right Triangle. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Right Triangle. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Right Triangle mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Cone Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Cone mass element. The insertion point of the Cone mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Cone mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Cone tool. 2 Specify the insertion point of the Cone. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the radius of the Cone. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Cone. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Cone mass elements, and press ENTER.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements | 545
Creating a Cylinder Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Cylinder mass element. The insertion point of the Cylinder mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Cylinder mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Cylinder tool. 2 Specify the insertion point of the Cylinder. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the radius of the Cylinder. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Cylinder. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Cylinder mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Dome Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Dome mass element. The insertion point of the Dome mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Dome mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Dome tool. 2 Specify the insertion point of the Dome. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the radius of the Dome. 4 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 5 Continue adding Dome mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Sphere Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Sphere mass element. The insertion point of a Sphere mass element is at its centroid. Sphere mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Sphere tool. 2 Specify the insertion point of the Sphere. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the radius of the Sphere. 4 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 5 Continue adding Sphere mass elements, and press ENTER.
546 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Creating a Gable Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Gable mass element. The insertion point of a Gable mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face. Gable mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Gable tool. 2 Specify the first corner of the Gable. 3 Drag the cursor and specify the second corner of the Gable. 4 Drag the cursor and specify the height of the Gable. 5 Enter a rotation angle, or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 6 Continue adding Gable mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating a Drape Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Drape mass element. A drape is useful when you are working with a conceptual model of a building site. You can create polylines and AEC Polygons at different elevations to represent topographic lines, and then drape a mass element over the polylines to show the contours of the site. For the generated terrain surface, you can choose between a regular mesh with user-defined mesh density and mass element size, and a non-regular mesh defined by the input contour curves and points (Delaunay triangulation). For a non-regular mesh, you can select either a rectangular mesh of user-specified size (the topography will be extrapolated from your input if the selected rectangular region is larger than the area covered by the contour curves and points), or a non-rectangular mesh whose surface size and shape are determined by the area of the input contour curves and points. NOTE Autodesk® Architectural Desktop uses the Autodesk® Civil 3D technology to define the terrain surface; however, the extrapolation of the terrain is used in Architectural Desktop only. Creating a Drape mass element
1 On the Massing tool palette, select the Drape tool. 2 Select the polylines or AEC Polygons to represent contours, and press ENTER. 3 Specify whether the source contours should be deleted after creating the drape mass element, and press
ENTER.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements | 547
4 Specify which mesh type you want to generate.
If you want...
Then...
a surface with user-defined mesh density and mass enter y (Yes) for Generate Regular Mesh [Yes/No]. element size (non-triangulated surface)
a surface defined from the input contours and points enter n (No) for Generate Regular Mesh [Yes/No]. (Delaunay triangulation)
5 If you are generating a regular mesh, complete the following steps:
Specify the first corner point of the mesh. Specify the opposite corner point of the mesh. Specify the mesh subdivisions in the X-direction. Specify the mesh subdivisions in the Y-direction. Enter the base thickness of the resulting mass element.
6 If you are generating a non-regular mesh, specify whether you want it to be rectangular or non-rectangular:
If you want... a rectangular mesh a non-rectangular mesh
Then... enter y (Yes) for Generate Rectangular Mesh [Yes/No]. enter n (No) for Generate Rectangular Mesh [Yes/No].
7 If you are generating a non-regular, rectangular mesh, complete the following steps:
Specify the first corner point of the mesh. Specify the opposite corner point of the mesh. Enter the base thickness of the resulting mass element.
NOTE If the selected mesh area extends beyond the selected contours, the topography of the resulting mass element is extrapolated from the input values.
8 If you are generating a non-regular, non-rectangular mesh, enter the base thickness for the resulting mass element, and press ENTER.
Creating a Doric Column Mass Element Use this procedure to create a Doric Column mass element. The insertion point of a Doric Column mass element is at the centroid of its bottom face.
Doric Column mass element in 3D and plan views
1 On the Massing tool palette, select a massing tool. 2 On the Properties palette, select Doric for Shape. 3 Specify the insertion point. 4 Drag the cursor; or specify the radius of the Doric Column and press ENTER.
548 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
5 Drag the cursor; or specify the height and press ENTER. 6 Enter a rotation angle and press ENTER; or press ENTER to accept the default angle of 0. 7 Continue adding Doric Column mass elements, and press ENTER. Creating Profiles for Extrusion and Revolution Mass Elements Use this procedure to define a profile from a polyline to create either of the following mass elements: Extrusion, in which the shape of the two-dimensional (2D) profile is projected to create a 3D mass element Revolution, in which the 2D profile is revolved around its X axis to create a 3D mass element
You can draw more than one polyline within the outermost polyline to create voids in the resulting mass element. Polylines cannot intersect or overlap.
1 Draw one or more closed polylines in the shape you want to extrude or revolve. 2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert To Profile Definition. 3 Enter c (Centroid) for the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mass element. 4 Press ENTER to specify a new profile definition. 5 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
You can now use the profile as an Extrusion or Revolution mass element. For more information, see "Creating a Mass Element by Extruding a Profile" on page 549 or "Creating a Mass Element by Revolving a Profile" on page 550.
Creating a Mass Element by Extruding a Profile Use this procedure to create a custom-shaped mass element by using a profile as the basis of its shape. The extrusion projects the shape of the profile to create the mass element. The width and depth of the Extrusion mass element are based on the original width and depth of the profile. You can specify different width and depth values, if necessary. The insertion point is at the centroid of the bottom face of the Extrusion mass element. Creating an Extrusion mass element from a profile
1 Create the profile to use as the basis of the mass element. For more information, see "Creating Profiles for Extrusion and Revolution Mass Elements" on page 549.
2 On the Massing tool palette, select the Extrusion tool. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic and expand General. 4 Select the profile you created in step 1 for Profile. 5 Specify the insertion point in the drawing. 6 Specify the height of the Extrusion mass element. 7 Specify a rotation angle, or press ENTER for a rotation angle of zero degrees. 8 Press ENTER.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements | 549
Creating a Mass Element by Revolving a Profile Use this procedure to create a mass element by defining a profile as the basis of its shape, and then revolving the profile about an axis. The axis of revolution is along the X axis of the profile as it is drawn. The insertion point is at the centroid of the bottom face of the Revolution mass element. Creating a Revolution mass element from a profile
1 Create a profile to use as the basis of the mass element. For more information, see "Creating Profiles for Extrusion and Revolution Mass Elements" on page 549.
2 On the Massing tool palette, select the Revolution tool. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic and expand General. 4 Select the profile you created in step 1 for Profile. 5 Specify the insertion point in the drawing. 6 Specify a rotation angle, or press ENTER for a rotation angle of zero degrees. 7 Press ENTER.
Creating a Mass Element by Extruding Profiles along a 3D Path Use this procedure to create a loft mass element by defining different start and end profiles as the basis of its shape, and then extruding the profiles along a 3D path. A single profile can also be used. Create loft mass elements to model ceiling, door, and window moldings, and curved slab endcaps. The 3D path used for routing the loft mass element can be a line, arc, circle, polyline, 3D polyline, or Spline. This 3D path can also be open or closed. Start and end profiles don't need to be perpendicular to the 3D path, but they cannot be parallel. The start profile shape is gradually morphed into the end profile shape as the loft mass element progresses along the 3D path. The insertion point of the resulting loft mass element is at the centroid of the bottom face of the start profile. Creating a Loft mass element from profiles
1 Create a profile to use as the basis of the mass element. For more information, see "Creating Profiles for Extrusion and Revolution Mass Elements" on page 549.
2 On the Massing tool palette, select the Revolution tool. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic and expand General. 4 Select the profile you created in step 1 for Profile. 5 Specify the insertion point in the drawing. 6 Specify a rotation angle, or press ENTER for a rotation angle of zero degrees. 7 Press ENTER.
Creating a Mass Element from a 3D Solid Use this procedure to create a Free Form mass element from an AutoCAD® ACIS solid that has the properties of the mass element tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the mass element. The resulting Free Form mass element is a faceted approximation of the 3D solid. The smoothness of curved edges is controlled by the FACETDEV variable. This variable specifies the number of facets to display on curved AEC objects. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
550 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
2 Right-click a mass element tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to 3D Solid. 3 Select the 3D solids to convert. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the 3D solid, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Enter n (Name) to give a description to the mass element, and press ENTER. 6 Enter a name, and press ENTER twice. 7 Edit the properties of the mass element in the Properties palette, if needed.
NOTE Due to the topological structure of the free form mass element, its facet deviation cannot be changed. The FACETDEV command will have no effect on an existing free form mass element.
Creating a Mass Element Tool Use this procedure to create a mass element tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own tools if you frequently place multiple mass elements of specific styles that have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a mass element in the drawing
select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a mass element style in the Style Manager on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Open the other palette, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the mass element created from this tool, and click
OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified in the
layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select a mass element style. 10 Select the drawing file containing the style used for this mass element. 11 Under Bound Spaces, define if this mass element tool can be used as a bounding object for associative
spaces. You can select three options here:
Yes: this mass element tool can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this mass element tool cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this mass element tool will use the bounding settings from the mass element style.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements | 551
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
12 Select a shape.
13 Expand Dimensions. The options that display under Dimensions depend on the mass element tool you copied to create the new tool.
14 Specify the dimensions of the mass element:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the width of the mass element in its relative X direction enter a value for Width.
specify the depth of the mass element in its relative Y direction enter a value for Depth.
specify the height of the mass element in its relative Z direction
enter a value for Height.
specify the radius of the mass element
enter a value for Radius.
specify the rise of the mass element
enter a value for Rise.
15 Click OK.
Editing Mass Elements
After you create mass elements, you can edit and reposition them to generate the form of your building mass model.
You can use grips to manipulate mass elements. The grip editing features available depend upon the shape of the selected mass element. Because mass elements are parametric, each shape has a specific behavior when you modify it. For example, if you select and drag the corner grip point of a Box mass element, the width and depth of the mass element are modified. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing mass elements:
You can directly edit mass elements using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics.
You can change mass element settings on the Properties palette.
You can select editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected mass element.
For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help.
Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements Use the following procedures to edit mass elements using grips. Editing Mass Element Dimensions
1 Select the mass element. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
552 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Viewing mass element grips and dimensions
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. Changing the Location or Position of a Mass Element
1 Select the mass element. 2 Select the Location grip.
In model view, the Location grip has three edit modes: Edit Along Object's XY Plane, Edit Along Object's YZ Plane, and Edit Along Object's XZ Plane. Press CTRL to cycle among modes until you are in the desired mode. The default edit mode is along the XY plane. In plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane. 3 Move the mass element to the desired location, and click; or enter a value, and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the mass element along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the mass element is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the mass element is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Area of a Rectangular Mass Element Use this procedure to change the area of a rectangular mass element using grips. A rectangular mass element is any element that has four lines at its base, such as an Arch, Barrel Vault, Box, Gable, Pyramid, Isosceles Triangle, or Right Triangle. For more information about mass element grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements" on page 552. You can also change mass element area dimensions on the Properties palette.
Editing Mass Elements | 553
Editing a Box mass element with its corner grip
Using Corner grips to change area 1 Select the rectangular mass element to display its grips. 2 Click a corner (Width and Depth) grip, and move it to the new location, or enter a value and press ENTER. The location of the opposite corner remains fixed while you move the mass element corner. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in the Width and Depth edit mode, press TAB to cycle to the second direction value.
Changing the Edge of an Extrusion Mass Element Use this procedure to change the area of an extrusion mass element using the Edge grip. The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the mass element and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added as necessary. Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well. Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc. For more information about mass element grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements" on page 552. You can also change the mass element area dimensions on the Properties palette.
1 Select the extrusion mass element. 2 Select an Edge grip.
554 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
3 Specify the new edge location: If you want to... offset the edge
add a vertex and create an edge
change the selected edge to an arc
Then...
move the edge to the desired location and click; or enter a value and press ENTER.
press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click; or enter a value and press ENTER.
press CTRL twice to switch to the Convert to Arc edit mode. Stretch the midpoint to the desired location and click; or enter a value and press ENTER.
You can press CTRL to toggle among the edit modes. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the Height of a Mass Element Use this procedure to change the height of a mass element using grips. For more information about mass element grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements" on page 552. You can also change the mass element height on the Properties palette.
Editing a Pyramid mass element with its Height grip
1 Switch to a 3D view. 2 Select the mass element to display its grips. 3 Click the Height grip at the top of the mass element, and move it to the new location.
The height of the mass element changes as you move the grip. Changing the Arch Radius of an Arch Mass Element Use this procedure to change the radius of the arch within an Arch mass element using grips. For more information about mass element grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements" on page 552. You can also change the arch radius on the Properties palette.
Editing Mass Elements | 555
Editing an Arch mass element with its Arch Radius grip
1 Select the Arch mass element to display its grips. 2 Click the Arch Radius grip, and move it to the new location.
The radius of the arch changes as you move the grip. Changing the Roof Height of a Gable Mass Element Use this procedure to change the roof height of a Gable mass element using grips. For more information about mass element grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements" on page 552. You can also change the Gable roof height on the Properties palette. Editing a Gable mass element with its Height grip
1 Switch to a 3D view. 2 Select the Gable mass element to display its grips.
556 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
3 Click the Height grip at the midpoint of the roof ridgeline. 4 Move the grip to change the height of the roof.
The height of the roof ridgeline and the walls change as you move the grip, leaving the roof slope and gable configuration unchanged. Changing the Rise of a Gable Mass Element Use this procedure to change the wall height of a Gable mass element using grips. For more information about mass element grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements" on page 552. You can also change the gable rise on the Properties palette. Editing a Gable mass element with its Rise grip
1 Switch to a 3D view. 2 Select the Gable mass element to display its grips. 3 Click the Rise grip at the top of the wall. 4 Move the grip to change the height of the wall.
The height of the wall changes as you move the grip, while the roof ridgeline position remains fixed. This changes the roof slope and gable configuration. Changing the Radius of a Circular Mass Element Use this procedure to change the radius of a circular mass element using grips. Circular mass elements include Cones, Cylinders, Domes, Doric Columns, Spheres, and Revolutions. For more information about mass element grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Mass Elements" on page 552. You can also change the mass element radius on the Properties palette.
Editing Mass Elements | 557
Editing a Dome mass element with its Radius grip
1 Select the circular mass element to display its grips. 2 Click the Radius grip on the mass element.
You can select any one of the radius grips on the same circle to change the size. 3 Move the grip in or out.
The mass element becomes larger or smaller depending on the direction you move the grip.
Changing the Shape, Size, and Mass Group of a Mass Element Use this procedure to change one mass element into another, add it to a mass group, and change its size.
1 Double-click a mass element. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a new basic shape for Shape. 4 To attach the mass element to a mass group, select a mass group for Attached to. 5 Expand Dimensions. 6 Enter new dimension values for the mass element.
NOTE When you change the size of a mass element, the center point remains constant and the change is applied to both sides of the element.
Combining Mass Elements Using Boolean Operations Use this procedure to combine mass elements using Boolean operations.
1 Select the mass element to which you want to join another mass element. 2 Selected the desired Boolean operation:
If you want to...
Then...
combine the total volume of two or more mass elements into right-click, and click Boolean Union. a composite object
remove the common area of one mass element from another right-click, and click Boolean Subtract.
remove non-overlapping portions and create a composite solid from the common volume
right-click, and click Boolean Intersect.
3 Select the objects you want to combine, and press ENTER.
558 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the original geometry, or enter n (No) to keep the original geometry in the drawing. NOTE A boolean operation creates a free form mass element. Due to the topological structure of the free form mass element, its facet deviation cannot be changed. The FACETDEV command will have no effect on an existing free form mass element.
Dividing a Mass Element Use this procedure to divide a mass element. The divide plane you specify splits the original mass element into two separate mass elements.
1 Select the mass element you want to divide, right-click, and click Split. 2 Specify the divide plane start point. 3 Specify the divide plane endpoint.
Dividing a mass element
The original mass element is split along the divide plane, creating two mass elements. NOTE Dividing a mass element creates free form mass elements. Due to the topological structure of the free form mass element, its facet deviation cannot be changed. The FACETDEV command will have no effect on an existing free form mass element. Trimming a Mass Element Use this procedure to trim a mass element. The divide plane you specify acts as the trim line, and you specify which side of the mass element to remove. 1 Select the mass element you want to divide, right-click, and click Trim. 2 Specify the divide plane start point. 3 Specify the divide plane endpoint. 4 Select the side of the mass element to remove.
Editing Mass Elements | 559
Trimming a mass element
NOTE Trimming a mass element creates a free form mass element. Due to the topological structure of the free form mass element, its facet deviation cannot be changed. The FACETDEV command will have no effect on an existing free form mass element.
Converting a Mass Element to a Free Form Mass Element Use this procedure to convert mass elements to Free Form mass elements.
1 Select the mass element to convert, right-click, and click Convert To Free Form Mass Element. 2 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the mass element, or enter y (Yes) to
erase it. 3 If you want to display the parameters of the mass element, enter s (Show bounding box), and press ENTER. 4 If you want to describe the mass element, enter n (Name), and press ENTER. 5 Enter a name, and press ENTER twice.
NOTE Due to the topological structure of the free form mass element, its facet deviation cannot be changed. The FACETDEV command will have no effect on an existing free form mass element.
Converting a Mass Element to a 3D Solid Use this procedure to convert mass elements to 3D solids. Most objects create 2D geometry in plan view; therefore, select a 3D view first for best results.
1 Select the mass element to convert, right-click, and click Convert To 3D Solid. 2 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the mass element, or enter y (Yes) to
erase it. Converting a Mass Element to a Wall Use this procedure to convert mass elements to walls.
1 Select the mass element to convert, right-click, and click Convert To Wall. 2 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the mass element, or enter y (Yes) to
erase it. 3 Specify a point to start the baseline.
560 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
4 Specify a point to end the baseline. The Wall Styles worksheet displays the wall styles that exist in your current drawing.
5 Select a wall style and click OK.
Converting a Mass Element to a Slab or Roof Slab Use this procedure to convert mass elements to slabs or roof slabs.
1 Select the mass element to convert, right-click, and click Convert To Slab or Convert to Roof Slab. 2 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the mass element, or enter y (Yes) to
erase it. The Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles worksheet displays the slab or roof slab styles that exist in your current drawing. 3 Select a style and click OK.
Converting a Mass Element to a Space Use this procedure to convert mass elements to spaces. Depending on whether the converted mass element shape is an extrusion- type shape (box, cylinder, extrusion) or a non-extrusion-type shape (pyramid, gable, freeform, etc.), either an extruded 3D space or a 3D freeform space is generated by the conversion.
1 Select the mass element to convert, right-click, and click Convert To Space. 2 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the mass element, or enter y (Yes) to
erase it.
Converting an Object to a Mass Element Use this procedure to convert objects to Free Form mass elements. The resulting Free Form mass element is a faceted approximation of the object. The smoothness of curved edges is controlled by the FACETDEV variable. This variable specifies the number of facets to display on curved AEC objects. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116.
1 Open a tool palette that has the Convert to Mass Element tool and select the tool. 2 Select the object(s) that you want to convert to a Free Form mass element, and press ENTER.
The Convert to Mass Element worksheet opens.
3 Enter text for Description. 4 To convert all of the selected objects into one mass element, select Convert to single boolean mass element. 5 Alternatively, to convert the objects within your selection to separate mass elements, select Convert to
individual mass elements. 6 To erase the original geometry of the objects, select Erase layout geometry. 7 Click OK.
Dividing the Face of a Mass Element Use this procedure to divide the face of a mass element. In order for the face to split, the mass element is converted to a Free Form mass element.
Editing Mass Elements | 561
1 Select the mass element whose face you want to divide, right-click, and click Split Face. 2 Select the first point on the face. 3 Select the second point on the same face, and press ENTER.
The original mass element is converted to a Free Form mass element, and the selected face is divided along the line you specified.
Joining the Faces of a Mass Element Use this procedure to join previously split faces of a mass element. After the faces are joined, the mass element is converted to its original shape.
1 Select the mass element whose faces you want to join, right-click, and click Join Faces. 2 Select the edge of the coplanar faces, and press ENTER.
The mass element is converted to its original shape, and the selected faces are joined into a single face.
Editing the Faces of a Free Form Mass Element Use this procedure to edit individual faces of a Free Form mass element. You must convert the mass element to a Free Form mass element in order to edit its faces. The following illustration shows how Initial and Free Form mass element grips are displayed.
Initial and Free Form mass element grips
When you select a Free Form mass element Face grip, the following tooltip is displayed. Free Form mass element Face grip tool tip
You have six choices while editing a face of a Free Form mass element. A tooltip displays to indicate which option is current.
If you want to...
Then...
Tooltip Displayed
move the face orthogonally while stretching click and drag the Face grip to the new Face
adjacent faces
location.
Move face orthogonally, stretch adjacent faces
move the face freely while stretching adjacent faces
click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL once, and Move face freely, stretch adjacent faces specify the new Face location.
move the face orthogonally while maintaining the planes of adjacent faces
click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL twice, and specify the new Face location.
Move face plane, maintain plane of adjacent faces
562 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
If you want to...
pull the face orthogonally while adding adjacent faces
pull the face freely while adding adjacent faces
pull or push the face orthogonally while either adding adjacent faces or creating a hole
Then...
Tooltip Displayed
click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL three times, and specify the new Face location.
Pull face orthogonally, add adjacent faces
click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL four times, and specify the new Face location.
Pull face freely, add adjacent faces
click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL five times, Push face orthogonally, add adjacent
and specify the new Face location.
faces, possibly create a hole
As you cycle through the options by pressing CTRL, the tooltip advances sequentially to indicate the current option. Pressing CTRL more than five times returns you to the first option, allowing you to continue cycling through the edit choices. The cursor is constrained when you choose an orthogonal option and unconstrained when you choose a free option.
Moving a Mass Element Face Orthogonally While Stretching Adjacent Faces
1 Select the mass element you want to edit. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Free Form for Shape.
The mass element is in in-place edit mode. Each face of the Free Form mass element is available to edit in this mode.
4 Select the Face grip for the face of the mass element to edit. Depending on the original shape of the mass element, Edge and Vertex grips are displayed.
5 Click and drag the Face grip to specify the new location. 6 Press ESC, or right-click and click Deselect All to exit the editing session.
NOTE You cannot pull the mass element face at such an angle, either horizontally or vertically, that the adjacent faces become non-planar. If this distorted condition occurs, the mass element face automatically returns to its original position and an error message is displayed on the command line.
Moving a mass element orthogonally while stretching adjacent faces
The face of the Free Form mass element is moved orthogonally and its geometry remains unchanged, while its adjacent faces are stretched and tilted.
Editing Mass Elements | 563
Moving a Mass Element Face Freely While Stretching Adjacent Faces 1 Select the mass element you want to edit. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Free Form for Shape. The mass element is in in-place edit mode. Each face of the Free Form mass element is available to edit in this mode. 4 Select the Face grip for the face of the mass element to edit. Depending on the original shape of the mass element, Edge and Vertex grips are displayed. 5 Click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL once, and specify the new location. 6 Press ESC; or right-click, and click Deselect All to exit the editing session. NOTE You cannot pull the mass element face at such an angle, either horizontally or vertically, that the adjacent faces become non-planar. If this distorted condition occurs, the mass element face automatically returns to its original position and an error message is displayed on the command line.
Moving a mass element freely while stretching adjacent faces
The face of the Free Form mass element is moved freely and its geometry remains unchanged, while its adjacent faces are stretched and tilted. NOTE The location of the current UCS is temporarily moved to coincide with the original position of the Face grip that you select when you are working with this option. Only the UCS origin is changed, not its orientation.
Moving a Mass Element Face Orthogonally While Maintaining the Planes of Adjacent Faces 1 Select the mass element you want to edit. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Free Form for Shape. The mass element is in in-place edit mode. Each face of the Free Form mass element is available to edit in this mode. 4 Select the Face grip for the face of the mass element to edit.
564 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Depending on the original shape of the mass element, Edge and Vertex grips are displayed. 5 Click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL twice, and specify the new location. 6 Press ESC, or right-click and click Deselect All to exit the editing session.
NOTE You cannot pull the mass element face at such an angle, either horizontally or vertically, that the adjacent faces become non-planar. If this distorted condition occurs, the mass element face automatically returns to its original position and an error message is displayed on the command line. Moving a mass element face orthogonally while maintaining the planes of adjacent faces
The face of the Free Form mass element is moved orthogonally and its geometry is changed, while the planes of its adjacent faces are maintained. Pulling a Mass Element Face Orthogonally While Adding Adjacent Faces 1 Select the mass element you want to edit. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Free Form for Shape. The mass element is in in-place edit mode. Each face of the Free Form mass element is available to edit in this mode. 4 Select the Face grip for the face of the mass element to edit. Depending on the original shape of the mass element, Edge and Vertex grips are displayed. 5 Click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL three times, and specify the new location. 6 Press ESC, or right-click and click Deselect All to exit the editing session.
Editing Mass Elements | 565
Pulling a mass element face orthogonally while adding adjacent faces
The face of the Free Form mass element is moved orthogonally and its geometry remains unchanged, while adjacent faces between the original geometry and the moved face are added. Pulling a Mass Element Face Freely While Adding Adjacent Faces 1 Select the mass element you want to edit. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Free Form for Shape. The mass element is in in-place edit mode. Each face of the Free Form mass element is available to edit in this mode. 4 Select the Face grip for the face of the mass element to edit. Depending on the original shape of the mass element, Edge and Vertex grips are displayed. 5 Click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL four times, and specify the new location. 6 Press ESC, or right-click and click Deselect All to exit the editing session. NOTE You cannot pull the mass element face at such an angle, either horizontally or vertically, that the adjacent faces become non-planar. If this distorted condition occurs, the mass element face automatically returns to its original position and an error message is displayed on the command line.
566 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Pulling a mass element face freely while adding adjacent faces
The face of the Free Form mass element is moved freely and its geometry remains unchanged, while adjacent faces between the original geometry and the moved face are added. NOTE The location of the current UCS is temporarily moved to coincide with the original position of the Face grip that you select when you are working with this option. Only the UCS origin is changed, not its orientation. Pushing or Pulling a Mass Element Face Orthogonally While either Adding Adjacent Faces or Creating a Hole 1 Select the mass element you want to edit. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Free Form for Shape. The mass element is in in-place edit mode. Each face of the Free Form mass element is available to edit in this mode. 4 Select the Face grip for the face of the mass element to edit. Depending on the original shape of the mass element, Edge and Vertex grips are displayed. 5 Click and hold the Face grip, press CTRL five times, and specify the new location. Push into the mass element to create a hole, or pull out of the mass element to add adjacent faces. 6 Press ESC, or right-click and click Deselect All to exit the editing session.
Editing Mass Elements | 567
Pulling a mass element face orthogonally while adding adjacent faces
The face of the Free Form mass element is pulled orthogonally and its geometry remains unchanged, while adding adjacent faces between the original geometry and the moved face. Pushing a mass element face orthogonally to create a hole
The face of the Free Form mass element is pushed orthogonally and its geometry remains unchanged, while creating a hole in the mass element. Assigning Materials to a Mass Element Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a mass element. 1 Select the mass element to which you want to assign materials, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 To verify that the material assignment determines the display properties of the component, click the Display Properties tab, select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click . 3 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab, verify that By Material is selected for the component, and click OK. 4 Click the Materials tab. The Component column displays all components of the mass element that can be assigned a material. Components that are only symbolical graphics, like the bounding box, are not listed because they cannot have a material assignment.
568 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
The Material Definition column displays the currently assigned materials. If no previous material assignments were made, the default material is Standard.
5 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
6 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Mass Element Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of a mass element:
Visibility (component is on or off) By Material (material assigned to the component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE If a material assignment determines the properties of a mass element display component, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Mass Element" on page 568.
1 Select the mass element you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current one.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching of a Mass Element Use this procedure to specify the hatching of components of an individual mass element. Hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the hatching properties of a mass element display component, you can change the hatching by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Mass Element" on page 568.
1 Select the mass element you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
Editing Mass Elements | 569
The display representation in bold is the current one.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Hatching tab. 6 Select a display component, and click the setting for Pattern. 7 Select the hatching for the display component:
If you want to select...
Then...
a hatching pattern that is available in the software
select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
8 Click OK. 9 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 10 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 11 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to orient...
Then...
the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation select Object.
the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
12 Click OK twice.
Changing the Location of a Mass Element
Use this procedure to relocate a mass element by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The mass element also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the mass element are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the mass element by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the mass element on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For more information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the mass element you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the mass element:
If you want to... relocate the mass element
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
570 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
If you want to... locate the mass element on the XY plane locate the mass element on the YZ plane locate the mass element on the XZ plane change the rotation of the mass element
Then...
make the normal of the mass element parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
make the normal of the mass element parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the mass element parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK twice.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Mass Element Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a mass element. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a mass element.
1 Select the mass element to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. 4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK. 7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, and select a file. Click open, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK twice.
Mass Element Styles
A mass element style is a collection of settings for variables associated with a mass element. Depending on the scope of the drawing, you could create different mass element styles to represent different types of mass elements.
Properties Controlled by Mass Element Styles
The mass element style determines the properties of mass elements you create. When you edit the display properties of a mass element style, those changes are applied to existing mass elements of that style throughout the current drawing.
Creating Mass Element Styles
Typically, you create mass element styles that represent the basic building blocks of the drawing. When you name a mass element style, mass elements are grouped and can generate reports based on the first part of the mass element style name.
Mass Element Styles | 571
Editing Mass Element Styles
The changes you make to a mass element style take effect the next time you use that style. Mass elements already created with that style are not updated unless you change the display properties of the mass element style.
Managing Mass Element Styles
When you create, import, export, or edit styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Getting Started with the Style Manager" on page 453.
Creating a Mass Element Style
Use this procedure to create a mass element style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mass Element Styles. 3 Create a mass element style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Mass Element Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the mass element style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new mass element style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new mass element style:
If you want to...
Then...
specify materials for mass element components
see "Assigning Materials to a Mass Element Style" on page 573.
specify the display properties of the style
see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Mass Element Style" on page 574.
specify hatching for components of the style
see "Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Mass Element Style" on page 574.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Mass Element Style" on page 575.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the mass element style, click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Mass Element Style
A mass element consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component.
You assign one material to each physical component of the mass element. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
If you want to use the display properties of the mass element style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in three-dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
572 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Mass Element Materials and Display Components The following table lists mass element components and the material components that determine them in specific views.
Mass Element Component Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Plan Presentation, Plan Screened Above Cut Plane Below Cut Plane Hatch Cut Plane Model Entity Bounding Box Reflected, Reflected Screened Entity Bounding Box Hatch
Material Component
Plan Linework Plan Linework Plan Hatch No Material
3D Body No Material
3D Body No Material Plan Hatch
Assigning Materials to a Mass Element Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a mass element style. The component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the mass element. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, the hatch is a physical component. The cut plane is a symbolic component.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a mass element component, you can change the display properties of the mass element style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Mass Element Style" on page 574.
1 Open a tool palette that has a mass element tool. 2 Right-click a mass element tool, and click Mass Element Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
Mass Element Styles | 573
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Mass Element Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the display components of a mass element style:
Visibility (component is on or off) By Material (material assigned to the component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
To change these display properties for an individual mass element, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Mass Element" on page 569.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the display properties of components in the mass element style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material. You can also override the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Mass Element Style" on page 573.
1 Open a tool palette that has a mass element tool. 2 Right-click a mass element tool, and click Mass Element Styles. 3 Select the mass element style you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override. 6 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 7 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 8 Click OK.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Mass Element Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of components of a mass element style. Mass element hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
1 Open a tool palette that has a mass element tool. 2 Right-click a mass element tool, and click Mass Element Styles. 3 Select the mass element style to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current one. 6 Click the Hatching tab. 7 Select a display component, and click the setting for Pattern.
574 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
8 Select the hatching for the display component: If you want to... select a hatching pattern that is available in the software select a custom pattern
select single hatching select double hatching select solid fill
Then... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select Solid Fill for Type.
9 Click OK. 10 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 11 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 12 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
Then... select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
13 Click OK.
Defining a Mass Element Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces Use this procedure to define a mass element style that can bound associative spaces. When a mass element style is set as bounding, by default all mass element that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the mass element style in an individual mass element, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mass Element Styles. 3 Select a mass element style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the check mark for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Mass Element Style Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a mass element style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a mass element style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a mass element tool. 2 Right-click a mass element tool, and click Mass Element Styles. 3 Select the mass element style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the mass element style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note.
Mass Element Styles | 575
8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK twice.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Groups
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place mass groups by selecting a tool from the Massing tool palette. The mass group tool has predefined properties. You can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change settings for the mass group properties.
Tool palettes containing mass group tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample mass group tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain mass group tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Sample Palette catalog
For more information on accessing tools in these catalogs, see "Content Browser" on page 77. Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain mass group tools with mass group properties that are customized for your projects or office standards. Creating a Mass Group Use this procedure to add a new mass group that has the properties specified in a selected mass group tool. A mass group is a display object that allows you to visualize and manipulate combinations of mass elements. After you create mass elements, you can combine their shapes through Boolean operations (addition, subtraction, and intersection) in a mass group. The resulting complex shape of the mass group represents your mass model.
576 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Mass Groups and Mass Group Markers You use a mass group tool to attach mass elements, other AEC objects, or AutoCAD® objects to a mass group, which you place in a convenient area of your drawing. The mass elements and other objects that you attach form the body of the mass group. The mass group is created on a different layer than the mass elements that form it. A mass group marker is displayed in the drawing if you create a mass group and then detach all mass elements from it, or if you release the anchor of objects attached to the group. If you attach elements to the group, or if you anchor attached objects to the group, the mass group marker is no longer displayed. Using Boolean Operations to Create a Mass Group You can combine the shapes of mass elements in the mass group--adding, subtracting, and intersecting them in a specific order.
An additive operation combines the total volume of two or more solids or two or more regions into a composite object.
A subtractive operation removes the common area of one set of solids from another. An intersection removes non-overlapping portions and creates a composite solid from the common volume. You can attach any closed, solid shape to a mass group. For example, a line has no solid properties and cannot be added to the shape of the mass group. However, an AutoCAD 3D solid does contribute to the final shape. You can also create and work with mass groups in the Model Explorer. For more information, see "Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models" on page 587. To further refine the building model, you can edit individual mass elements that are attached to a mass group. Materials in Mass Groups In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to a mass group. These materials are displayed in wireframe or rendered views. Materials have specific settings for individual components of a mass group. Mass groups with assigned materials in rendered view
Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for common design purposes, which contain settings for mass groups. You can use these predefined materials, or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials. For more information, see "Using Materials for Mass Elements and Mass Groups" on page 585.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a mass group tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Select the elements to attach to the group, and press ENTER. 3 Specify the insertion point of the mass group.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Groups | 577
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
Assigning Materials to a Mass Group Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a mass group.
1 Select the mass group to which you want to assign materials, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 To verify that the material assignment determines the display properties of the component, click the Display
Properties tab, select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click . 3 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab, verify that By Material is selected for the component, and click OK. 4 Click the Materials tab.
The Component column displays all components of the mass group that can be assigned a material. Components that are only symbolical graphics, like the bounding box, are not listed because they cannot have a material assignment. The Material Definition column displays the currently assigned materials. If no previous material assignments have been made, the default material is Standard.
5 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
6 Click OK twice.
Changing the Size of the Mass Group Marker Use this procedure to change the size of the mass group marker by editing its display properties.
1 Select the mass group marker, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Object Override. 4 Click the Other tab, and change the size of the mass group marker. 5 Click OK twice.
Adding a New Mass Element to a Mass Group Use this procedure to add a new mass element to a mass group after you have placed a mass group in the drawing.
1 Select an existing mass group or mass group marker, right-click, and click Add New Element. 2 On the Properties palette, select a shape for the mass element. 3 Select Add, Subtract, or Intersect for Operation. 4 Specify an insertion point in the drawing. 5 Specify additional parameters for the mass element.
Depending on the shape of the mass element, you need to specify a second corner, the radius, or the height.
6 Specify a rotation angle, and press ENTER. The newly created mass element is now part of the selected mass group. Attaching an Existing Mass Element to a Group Using Grips Use this procedure to add existing mass elements to a mass group. When an element is attached to a mass group, the element display is turned off and the group display is turned on.
578 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
While it is possible to attach any number of objects to a single mass group, performance improves if this group is subdivided into a series of nested groups. Your design is also more manageable if a group is broken into logical divisions. In addition, if one of the subgroups fails to display as expected, it is easier to track down the problem. In most cases, you can adjust the order of the objects in the group to get the correct appearance.
1 Select the mass group. 2 Select the Attach Elements grip.
3 Select one or more mass elements to attach to the mass group, and press ENTER. Detaching a Mass Element from a Group Using Grips Use this procedure to detach a mass element from a mass group. After you have defined a mass group and added mass elements to it, you may decide that one or more elements do not fit your model. You can detach these from the mass group and use them elsewhere or delete them. When an element is detached from a mass group, the element display is turned on because it is an individual entity and is no longer part of the group.
1 Select the mass group. 2 Select the Detach Elements grip.
3 Select one or more mass elements to detach from the mass group. If there is only one element attached to the mass group, you are not prompted to select elements. The single element is detached without further input.
4 Press ENTER. Making a Mass Element Additive Use this procedure to change the operation of a mass element. All objects are additive when they are created. When two mass elements are grouped together, they form one mass containing both objects.
1 Select the mass group that contains the mass element you want to change. 2 Select the Edit In Place grip.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Groups | 579
3 Select the mass element you want to make additive, right-click, and click Mass Group Operation Additive. 4 Select Save All Changes on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
This saves the changes to the mass element and ends the in-place edit session. Making a Mass Element Subtractive Use this procedure to change the operation of a mass element. When a mass element in a group operates by subtraction, the mass element subtracts its mass where it overlaps another object.
1 Select the mass group that contains the mass element you want to change. 2 Select the Edit In Place grip.
3 Select the mass element you want to make subtractive. 4 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 5 Select Subtract for Operation. 6 Select Save All Changes on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
This saves the changes to the mass element and ends the edit-in-place session. Creating an Intersection from Mass Elements Use this procedure to create a new mass shape using the intersection of two mass elements.
1 Select the mass group that contains the mass element you want to change. 2 Select the Edit In Place grip.
580 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
3 Select the mass element you want to make intersecting. 4 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 5 Select Intersect for Operation. 6 Select Save All Changes on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
This saves the changes to the mass element and ends the edit-in-place session.
Creating a Nested Mass Group Use this procedure to attach a mass group to another mass group. This action nests the current mass group within the mass group that you select. You may find it easier to nest mass groups using the Model Explorer. For more information, see "Moving a Mass Element or Group from One Mass Group to Another" on page 593.
1 Select the mass group that you want to nest within another mass group. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Click the mass group where you want to nest the current mass group for Attached to. 4 Specify Add, Subtract, or Intersect for Operation.
This option determines how the mass group is nested within the mass group you selected.
Removing a Nested Mass Group from a Mass Group Use this procedure to remove a mass group from a mass group in which the first mass group is nested. The mass group you remove remains in the drawing.
1 Select the mass group you want to remove. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select None for Group. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the Location of a Mass Group Using Grips Use this procedure to relocate a mass group using the Location grip. In Model view, the Location grip has three edit modes: Edit Along XY Plane, Edit Along YZ Plane, and Edit Along ZX Plane. The default edit mode is along the XY plane. In Plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane. If the mass elements that are attached to the mass group are anchored, they move when you move the Location grip. If the anchor of objects has been released, only the mass group marker moves when you move the Location grip. For more information, see "Working with Mass Group Anchors" on page 582. You can also change the location of a mass group using the Properties palette.
1 Select the mass group you want to change.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Groups | 581
2 Select the Location grip.
3 Move the mass group to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the mass group along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the mass group is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the mass group is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Working with Mass Group Anchors Use these procedures to release anchors of objects attached to a mass group, or anchor elements to a mass group. Releasing object anchors from a mass group
1 Select the mass group with objects anchored to it. 2 Right-click, and click Release Anchor of Attached Objects.
All anchors are released, and the mass group marker is displayed. The display of attached elements is turned on.
582 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Anchoring objects to a mass group 1 Select the mass group or the mass group marker that has no objects anchored to it. The mass group must have mass elements attached to it in order to anchor them to the group. 2 Right-click, and click Anchor Attached Objects. All objects are anchored to the mass group, and the mass group marker is no longer displayed. The display of attached elements is turned off.
Working with Mass Groups Use these procedures to place an entity reference of a mass group in a drawing, or to reposition the insertion point of a mass group. You can place a mass group in the drawing multiple times for modeling. Using an entity reference helps to simplify the modeling process. You can adjust the insertion point of a mass group by selecting a new location and a new rotation. Placing an entity reference of a mass group
1 Select a mass group. 2 Right-click, and click Place Reference. 3 Move the cursor to the desired location for the entity reference, and click once to place the reference in
the drawing. 4 Specify the rotation angle, and press ENTER.
An entity reference of the selected mass group is placed in the drawing, as specified. The entity reference is distinguished from the mass group by its location marker. Repositioning the insertion point of a mass group 1 Select a mass group.
2 Right-click, and click Reposition Insertion Point. 3 Specify the new insertion point.
Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Groups | 583
4 Enter a rotation angle, and press ENTER; or move the cursor, and click to specify the rotation.
If the mass group has an entity reference connected to it, repositioning the insertion point of the mass group affects the rotation of the entity reference.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Mass Group Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a mass group. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a mass group.
1 Double-click the mass group to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
4 To add a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference file, click following: If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
next to Reference documents, and then do any of the
Then... click , select a file, and click Open. enter text under Description. double-click the reference file name to start its application. select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK twice.
Creating a Mass Group Tool Use this procedure to create a mass group tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own mass group tools if you are placing multiple mass groups with the same mass group properties.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Open the other palette, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
584 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 To add keywords to the tool, click More Info. 7 Enter the keywords, and click OK twice.
Using Materials for Mass Elements and Mass Groups
Using materials simplifies defining the display of objects. You define the display of a material, such as brick or glass, only once in the drawing or the drawing template, and then assign it to any object component or object style. For example, you can define a material "Glass" and assign it to any number of windows, glass door insets, or cubicle walls. Using a common set of materials provides centralized control across the display of objects in a drawing or throughout the whole project. When the particulars of a material change, you change them just once in the material definition, and all objects are updated. For more information, see "Materials" on page 464. Rendered building with different materials
Predefined Materials Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for common design purposes. You can use these predefined materials, or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials. Surface Hatching Surface hatches can display in both model views and section/elevation views. Placement and orientation of the hatch can be precisely controlled and specified for each object face individually. For detailed information about surface hatches, see "Working with Surface Hatches" on page 478. Mass Element and Mass Group Display Components and Materials A mass element or a mass group consists of a number of display components that can be determined by materials. Workflow You assign one material to each display component of the mass element or mass group. For example, you assign a dark wood material to the mass element body and a light brown material to the mass element hatch. When you assign a material to a mass group, the display properties of the attached mass elements are overridden with the mass group settings. If you want to use the display properties of the mass element instead of the material display properties, you can deactivate the material assignments in the display properties of the mass element. Display Representations The display properties of an object are specified for each display representation individually. Mass elements and mass groups have display representations for plan, model, reflected, and sketch views. You can create new display representations for mass elements and mass groups by copying an existing representation. For example, you can create
Using Materials for Mass Elements and Mass Groups | 585
a new display representation "Plan 1:25" to create a plan view optimized for display in a view scaled to 1:25. This new display representation has the same display components as the one from which it was copied. The copied components will be influenced by the same material components as the original components.
Material Component Assignments
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in Plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in 3D model views and elevations.
For a complete list of material components and their descriptions, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
The following table lists mass element components and the material components that determine them.
Mass Element Component
Material Component
Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Plan Presentation, Plan Screened
Hatch
Plan Hatch
Cut Plane
No Material
Model
Entity
3D Body
Bounding Box
No Material
Reflected, Reflected Screened, Sketch
Entity
Plan Linework
Bounding Box
No Material
Hatch
Plan Hatch
The following table lists mass group components and the material components that determine them.
Mass Group Component Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail Marker Cut Plane Hatch Plan, Plan Presentation, Plan Screened Entity Marker Model Entity Marker Reflected, Reflected Screened Entity Marker
Material Component
No Material No Material No Material
Plan Linework No Material
3D Body No Material
Plan Linework No Material
Process Overview: Creating and Applying a Material for a Mass Element or Mass Group
If you create a material, you can apply it to all types of objects that support materials. For example, a concrete material could be used for a wall and for a structural element. Mass elements and mass groups are often used for columns, elevator shafts, or chimneys. If you want to create a material to use only for mass elements or mass groups, you should
586 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
name it accordingly. For example, if the materials have specific names, such as "Mass Element - Concrete Column" or "Mass Group - Cable Shaft," you can simplify the organization of your material definitions.
Step 1: Create a new material definition or edit an existing material definition. For more information, see "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487.
Step 2: In the material definition, define the settings that affect the display of materials in mass elements and mass groups:
If you want to...
Then...
display a surface hatch for a mass element or a mass group in 3D model views
turn on the Surface Hatch component, and specify its display properties. For more information, see "Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition" on page 487 and "Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition" on page 489.
display a section hatch for a mass element or mass group in a 2D section, 3D section, or live section
turn on the Section Hatch component, and specify its display properties. For more information, see "Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition" on page 487 and "Specifying the Plan and Section Hatch Patterns of a Material Definition" on page 488.
display the sectioned boundary and sectioned body of a mass element or mass group in a live section
turn on the Sectioned Boundary and Sectioned Body components, and specify their display properties. For more information, see "Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition" on page 487.
add special rendering materials for mass elements or mass groups in live sections
select rendering materials. For more information, see "Assigning Render Materials" on page 491.
exclude mass element or mass group components from a 2D section shrinkwrap hatch
specify this setting in the material definition. For more information, see "Excluding a Material Definition from 2D Section Shrinkwrap" on page 492.
Step 3: Turn on the assigned materials in the individual display representations, and then assign materials to the mass elements and mass groups in your building model.
For more information about assigning materials to mass elements, see "Assigning Materials to a Mass Element" on page 568.
For information about assigning materials to mass groups, see "Assigning Materials to a Mass Group" on page 578.
Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models
The Model Explorer is a window in which you create, view, and manipulate mass elements and mass groups. You can create your entire conceptual model by using the Model Explorer. The main window is similar to the 3D orbit view. You can attach objects and mass elements to mass groups and view them in the Model Explorer. You can simultaneously view the conceptual and the hierarchical structure of mass groups and mass elements that make up the model.
The Model Explorer is divided into three areas: the tree view in the left pane, the graphics area in the right pane, and the menu bar and toolbar across the top.
Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models | 587
Viewing a mass group in the Model Explorer
Left Pane of the Model Explorer
The tree view lists all open drawings as Projects. Any mass groups are displayed under their associated drawing in the tree view. If you expand a mass group, the mass elements attached to it are displayed. One of the following icons is displayed next to each mass element in the mass group, indicating which Boolean operation is used to combine mass elements:
Icon
Boolean Operation Used If both squares are yellow, the operation is additive.
If the top portion of the two squares is yellow, the operation is subtractive.
If the middle of squares is yellow, the operation is intersection.
An additive operation in the Model Explorer combines the total volume of two or more solids or two or more regions into a composite object. A subtractive operation removes the common area of one set of solids from another. An intersection removes non-overlapping portions and creates a composite solid from the common volume.
The order of objects and mass elements in the tree view dictates the outcome of the group when mass elements are combined. You can drag and drop the mass elements within the mass group to change the order in which they are combined.
You can also drag and drop mass groups to nest them within other mass groups. For example, if you are modeling a building with multiple wings, each wing can be a mass group containing multiple mass elements. You can then add these groups to a mass group of the entire building.
Right Pane of the Model Explorer
The right pane of the Model Explorer displays a graphical view of the mass elements or mass groups that you select in the left pane.
Model Explorer Menu Bar and Toolbar
The top of the Model Explorer includes a menu bar and toolbar that allow you to access menu commands. If you position your pointing device over a toolbar icon, a tooltip displays an explanation of the icon. For more information, see "Using Toolbar Commands in the Model Explorer" on page 590.
If you turn off the Model Explorer toolbars using commands on the View menu, the tree view and viewer are blank the next time you display the Model Explorer. Click any pull-down menu heading to restore the proper display.
Displaying the Model Explorer
Use this procedure to open the Model Explorer. Any mass groups in the current drawing are displayed in the right pane. The tree view in the left pane lists the mass groups in open drawings.
588 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Viewing a mass group in the Model Explorer
1 Select a mass group, right-click, and click Show Model Explorer. 2 You can move, resize, or close the Model Explorer:
If you want to... move the Model Explorer
Then... drag the Model Explorer title bar to the desired location.
resize the Model Explorer
click the edge of the Model Explorer and drag to the desired size.
close the Model Explorer
click the "X" in the upper right corner of the Model Explorer.
Using Display Commands in the Model Explorer
You can select the following visual styles from the Visual Styles list:
3D Hidden: Displays objects in the current view in a 3D wireframe representation with all visible lines displayed as continuous and all hidden lines displayed as dashed.
3D Wireframe: Displays objects in the current view in a 3D wireframe representation with all lines displayed. Conceptual: Displays objects in a transparently shaded 3D view with all lines displayed. Realistic: Displays objects in a shaded 3D view.
The following toolbar commands change the display of objects in the Model Explorer:
Icon
Description Pan: Pans the view in the graphics area of the Model Explorer.
Zoom: Zooms the Model Explorer display in real-time as you move your pointing device.
Orbit: Sets the display in the graphics area to 3D orbit view. Adjust Distance: Moves the view in the graphics area.
You can select the following views from the list:
Six orthogonal views (Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, Back): Set the current view to the selected view. Four isometric views (SW Isometric, SE Isometric, NE Isometric, NW Isometric): Set the current view to the selected
isometric view. Any named views.
Using Display Commands in the Model Explorer | 589
You can also use these keyboard shortcuts to change the view in the graphics area:
Hold down SHIFT and click to pan the graphics area of the Model Explorer. Hold down CTRL and click to zoom the graphics area of the Model Explorer.
Viewing Objects on a Nonvisible Layer
Use this procedure to change the settings in the Model Explorer to view all objects, regardless of the visibility of the layer on which they reside. Any object on a layer that is frozen or turned off is not displayed initially.
1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 On the Model Explorer View menu, click Show All Layers. The check mark on the menu next to Show All Layers indicates that all objects are displayed in the Model Explorer.
Maintaining Zoom Percentage and Position of an Object
Use this procedure to select an object in the Model Explorer tree view. The zoom percentage and location of the object are maintained. This is useful when you want to examine how the object relates to the rest of the drawing. In the Model Explorer, you can specify to display the selected object only, and display it at maximum size.
1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 On the Model Explorer View menu, click Auto Zoom Extents. 3 Select the object to view from the tree view.
The Model Explorer graphics window displays only the selected object, zoomed to fit the window.
Using Toolbar Commands in the Model Explorer
The following toolbar commands allow you to work with mass elements and mass groups in the Model Explorer:
Icon
New Grouping: Creates a new mass group in the drawing.
New Element: Creates a new mass element in the drawing.
Cut: Cuts the selected item in the tree view to the Clipboard.
Copy: Copies the selected item from the tree view to the Clipboard.
Paste: Pastes the item on the Clipboard into the tree view at the selected location.
Delete Item: Deletes an item from the tree view and from the drawing.
Attach Items: Attaches existing mass elements or objects to the selected mass group. Select one or more elements or objects in the drawing. This option is available only when a mass group is selected in the tree view.
Detach Items: Detaches the selected mass elements or objects from the mass group. This option is available only when a mass group is selected in the tree view.
Properties: Opens the properties dialog box for the selected mass element, object, or mass group.
Display Configuration: Changes the display configuration of the objects in the Model Explorer. You select a display configuration from the list.
Creating a Mass Element with the Model Explorer
Use this procedure to create a mass element in the Model Explorer. For detailed information about specifying the shape and dimensions of a mass element, see "Creating a Mass Element" on page 542.
590 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 In the left pane, select the level at which to create the mass element.
If you select the drawing name, the new mass element is created at the next hierarchical level. If you select a mass group name with a drawing, the new mass element is attached to the selected mass group.
3 On the Model Explorer File menu, click Create Element, or click . 4 On the command line, specify a shape. 5 Specify the insertion point for the mass element.
Depending on the shape you specified, you need to specify a second corner, the radius, or the height. 6 Specify the rotation angle. 7 Press ENTER.
Creating a Mass Group Use this procedure to create a mass group in the Model Explorer.
1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 In the left pane, select the level at which you want to create the mass group.
If you select the drawing name, the new mass group is created at the next hierarchical level. If you select a mass group name with a drawing, the new mass group is nested within the existing mass group.
3 On the Model Explorer File menu, click Create Group, or click . 4 Specify a location for the mass marker.
The location does not represent the location of mass elements added to the marker. Therefore, you can locate the mass marker in any convenient area. 5 Specify the rotation angle. The new mass group is added to the project tree in the Model Explorer. Attaching a Mass Element to a Mass Group Use this procedure to attach existing mass elements to the group after a mass group is created. 1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 In the left pane, select a mass group, right-click, and click Attach Elements. 3 Select the mass elements to add to the group, and press ENTER.
Attaching Objects to a Mass Group Use this procedure to attach objects such as doors, walls, and curtain walls to the group after a mass group is created.
1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 In the left pane, select a mass group, right-click, and click Attach Elements. 3 Select the objects to add to the group, and press ENTER.
Changing a Mass Element Operation to Additive Use this procedure to change a mass element operation to additive. Mass elements are additive when you create them. After a mass element is added to a mass group, its operation can be changed to produce different results.
Using Toolbar Commands in the Model Explorer | 591
Adding a mass element to a mass group
1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 In the left pane, select a mass element, right-click, and click Operation Additive. 3 In the left pane, click Project to update the display. The display changes to indicate the new operation property of the mass element. Changing a Mass Element Operation to Subtractive Use this procedure to change a mass element operation to subtractive. Mass elements are additive when you create them. After a mass element is added to a mass group, its operation can be changed to produce different results. If the mass element is subtractive, its shape is removed from the mass group. Subtracting a mass element from a mass group
1 Open the Model Explorer.
592 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
2 In the left pane, select a mass element, right-click, and select Operation Subtractive. 3 In the left pane, click Project to update the display. The display changes to indicate the new subtractive operation of the mass element. Changing a Mass Element Operation to Intersection Use this procedure to change a mass element operation to intersection. Mass elements are additive when you create them. After a mass element is added to a mass group, its operation can be changed to produce different results. The intersect operation creates a shape that is defined by the overlap where the mass element intersects with another mass element. Creating an intersection mass group from mass elements
1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 In the left pane, select a mass element, right-click, and select Operation Intersect. 3 In the left pane, click Project to update the display. The display changes to indicate the new intersection operation of the mass element. Specifying the Order of Mass Elements Use this procedure to specify the order of mass elements. The operation (additive, subtractive, intersection) of each mass element in a mass group is based on the hierarchy of mass elements in the project tree. You can drag and drop mass elements within mass groups in the project tree. By default, mass elements are listed in the left pane of the Model Explorer in the order they are created in the Model Explorer or selected for the mass group. 1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 Select the mass element you want to move, and drag it to the target location in the project tree. Moving a Mass Element or Group from One Mass Group to Another Use this procedure to move a mass element or a mass group from one mass group to another in the Model Explorer project tree. 1 Open the Model Explorer. 2 In the left pane, select the mass element or mass group you want to move, and drag it to another mass
group. When you move a mass group within another mass group, it is known as a nested mass group.
Using Toolbar Commands in the Model Explorer | 593
Creating Slice Floorplates from a Conceptual Model
A slice can be thought of as a representation of a theoretical floor level. Slice floorplates provide a way to translate the 3D geometry of a mass group into something that can be used to generate the individual floors of a building. Slices can be converted to space boundaries or polylines, and then to walls. Slices and Mass Models Like mass groups, slices are chosen and manipulated by an associated marker, the slice marker. When you attach mass groups to the slice marker, the slice marker creates the perimeter geometry of the building, known as a floorplate. Anytime you change the mass groups attached to the slice marker, the floorplate is updated. If you attach mass elements instead of mass groups to the slice, the operational aspects (additive, subtractive, and intersection) of the mass elements are not recognized by the slice. To have these aspects recorded by the slice, attach the mass group. For more information about additive, subtractive, and intersection operations, see "Creating a Mass Group" on page 591. From Slice Floorplate to Walls After you create floorplates, you can convert slices to space boundaries or polylines, and then generate walls. You cannot create walls directly from a slice. The slice is simply a way to mark each floor level of the mass group.
Generating a Slice
Use this procedure to generate a slice. The slice object is defined by a small crossed box. Like the mass group marker, the slice marker can be located in a convenient place in your drawing. For more information about the mass group marker, see "Creating a Mass Group" on page 591. You can create multiple slices at regular height intervals. A slice marker is created for each slice. Generating slice objects
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a slice tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Specify the number of slices you want to create. 3 Specify the lower-left and upper-right corners for the slice marker.
TIP Keep the slice marker small so as not to clutter your drawing.
4 Specify a rotation for the slice marker. 5 Enter the starting height of the slice. 6 Enter the distance between slices, and press ENTER. 7 Press ENTER.
Specifying the Slice Elevation
Use this procedure to change the elevation of a slice. 1 Select the slice marker, right-click, and click Set Elevation. 2 Enter a new slice elevation.
594 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
If multiple slices were created together, only the elevation of the selected slice changes. The distance between slices remains constant.
Attaching Objects to a Slice
Use this procedure to attach mass elements or mass groups to a slice to create the building floorplate. You can freeze the layer(s) containing the mass elements and mass groups to display only the slices. Attaching a mass group to slice objects
1 Select the slice marker, right-click, and click Attach Objects. 2 Select the mass elements or mass groups you want to include in the slice. 3 Press ENTER.
Detaching Objects from a Slice
Use this procedure to detach mass elements or mass groups from a slice to change a floorplate. 1 Select the slice marker, right-click, and click Detach Objects. 2 Select the mass elements or mass groups you want to remove from the slice. 3 Press ENTER.
Converting a Slice to a Polyline
Use this procedure to convert a slice to a polyline after objects have been attached to a slice marker. You can then convert polylines to spaces, walls, or profiles.
Select the slice marker, right-click, and click Convert to Polyline. The outlines of the objects attached to the slice marker are converted to polylines.
Changing the Location of a Slice
Use this procedure to relocate a slice by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The slice also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the slice are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the slice by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the slice on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For more information about the WCS and the UCS, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the slice you want to modify. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional information.
Attaching Objects to a Slice | 595
4 Specify the location of the slice: If you want to... relocate the slice locate the slice on the XY plane
locate the slice on the YZ plane
locate the slice on the XZ plane
change the rotation of the slice
Then...
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
make the normal of the slice parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
make the normal of the slice parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the slice parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Slice
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a slice. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a slice.
1 Double-click the slice to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. 4 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 5 Click OK. 6 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
7 Click OK.
596 | Chapter 13 Creating Conceptual Models
Quick Slice
14
The Quick Slice tool lets you "slice" through one or more objects in a drawing and extract a polyline outline that you can use to create profile shapes.
597
Quick Slice
The Quick Slice tool lets you "slice" through one or more three-dimensional (3D) objects in a drawing (including mass groups, AutoCAD® blocks, and xrefs) and extract a polyline outline that can be used to produce a profile shape, such as a roof truss. If you have a 3D model of stairs in your drawing, you can use the Quick Slice tool to create a polyline outline of the stair object in a section view, instead of using a section tool (for more information about section views, see "Sections" on page 1660. Unlike the Horizontal Section, Vertical Section, and Slice tools, which produce multiple polyline segments, the Quick Slice tool produces a single polyline. When you slice through the selected object(s), any overlapping parts of the outline are combined in a Boolean operation and converted into a polyline that is inserted on the current layer. The Quick Slice tool also differs from the Slice tool in that it does not create a slice marker. For more information about the Slice tool, see "Generating a Slice" on page 594.
Creating a Quick Slice
Use this procedure to extract a polyline outline of a "slice" through one or more 3D objects. 1 Select the Quick Slice tool, which is located with the Helper Tools in the Stock Tool Catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78. 2 Select the object(s) that you want to slice through, and press ENTER. 3 Specify a starting point for the slice plane. 4 Specify a second point to complete a slice plane through the object(s) and generate the polyline outline. You can now select the polyline outline and view it using the Object Viewer.
598 | Chapter 14 Quick Slice
Object Viewer
15
The Object Viewer displays objects you select in your drawing, based on the current display configuration in the drawing.
599
Object Viewer
The Object Viewer displays selected objects based on the current display configuration in the drawing.
Using the Object Viewer
The Object Viewer displays objects you select in your drawing, based on the current display configuration in your drawing. You can manipulate the viewing angle and set the drawing view to be the same as the view in the Object Viewer.
Viewing a mass group in Object Viewer
To display objects from your drawing in the Object Viewer, select the objects, right-click, and click Object Viewer. The view in the Object Viewer is the same as the drawing view. If the drawing is in plan view, the objects in the Object Viewer are in 2D plan view. If you are viewing your drawing in 3D, then the objects are displayed in 3D. You can select the following visual styles from the Visual Styles list:
3D Hidden: Displays objects in the current view in a 3D wireframe representation with all visible lines displayed as continuous and all hidden lines displayed as dashed.
3D Wireframe: Displays objects in the current view in a 3D wireframe representation with all lines displayed. Conceptual: Displays objects in a transparently shaded 3D view with all lines displayed. Realistic: Displays objects in a shaded 3D view.
The following toolbar commands change the display of objects in the Model Explorer:
Icon
Description Pan Realtime: Pans the view in the graphics area of the Object Viewer.
Zoom Realtime: Zooms the Object Viewer display in real time as you move your pointing device.
3D Orbit: Sets the display window to 3D orbit view. Move: Displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
From the list at the right side of the Object Viewer, you can select the following:
Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back: Sets the current view to the selected view. SW Isometric, SE Isometric, NE Isometric, or NW Isometric: Sets the current view to the selected isometric
view.
600 | Chapter 15 Object Viewer
Named views are also available from this list.
Icon
Description Save Image: Saves the current view as a separate file. The supported file formats are PNG, JPG, BMP, TIF.
Parallel: Sets the view to a parallel plane.
Perspective: Sets a perspective view.
Set View: Sets the view in the drawing eqto be the same as the view in the Object Viewer.
The following options let you increase or decrease the apparent size of objects in the current viewport: Zoom Window, Zoom Center, Zoom Extents, Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Zoom Factor. You select the display configuration from the drop-down list directly above the image area.
NOTE Hold down SHIFT and click to pan in the Object Viewer. Hold down CTRL and click to zoom in the Object Viewer.
Using the Object Viewer | 601
602 | Chapter 15 Object Viewer
Napkin Sketch
16
Use Napkin Sketch to create freehand sketch geometry from objects in a drawing. You can create a napkin sketch to reflect ambiguity in a work-in-progress design or to present a more artistically pleasing version of a drawing. You can also generate a napkin sketch of a portion of a drawing and designate it as still in the design stage.
603
Napkin Sketch
Use Napkin Sketch to create freehand sketch geometry from objects in a drawing. You can create a napkin sketch to reflect ambiguity in a work-in-progress design or to present a more artistically pleasing version of a drawing. You can also generate a napkin sketch of a portion of a drawing and designate it as still in the design stage. You can create a napkin sketch from an entire drawing or from a portion of a drawing. You can select both AutoCAD® and AEC objects to include in your napkin sketch. How Objects Appear in a Napkin Sketch When you generate a napkin sketch, random bumpy line segments are created along objects that you select to include in your sketch. The bumpy lines are short segments that emulate the freehand strokes of a traditional sketch. Lines where segments cross each other are extended in the napkin sketch. Generating a napkin sketch
Line Formats for Napkin Sketches When you generate the napkin sketch, you choose from three line formats that control the appearance of the sketch:
Tight line format: Traces the selected geometry once to create the appearance of a more accurate sketch. Loose line format: Traces the selected geometry twice. (This is the default setting.) Messy line format: Traces the selected geometry three times. Line format options
Each pass at tracing the geometry adds more artistic flare to the sketch. Managing Napkin Sketches When you create a napkin sketch, the geometry is packaged in a named block and placed on top of the original objects in model space. This means that you can move the original drawing and the sketch drawing independently of each other. You can also edit the napkin sketch as you do with other referenced blocks. Each sketch segment retains the layer and color of the geometry from which it is generated. Depending on the line format you select for the napkin sketch, up to three complex polylines are generated for each selected object in your drawing. This can significantly increase the drawing size. To keep your drawing size as small as possible, cut and paste your napkin sketches into new drawings.
604 | Chapter 16 Napkin Sketch
When you are working with three-dimensional (3D) drawings or complex models, first create a hidden line projection, two-dimensional (2D) section, or 2D elevation object. Unless your drawing is very simple, generating the napkin sketch from these 2D objects saves linework and time. When you are working with external references, double-click on the napkin sketch and edit it like any other block. For more information about editing external references, see Managing Xrefs.
Napkin Sketch and Intended Plot Scale
You can specify the intended plot scale to control the size of the sketch segments and extensions. Select a larger scale to increase the size of the sketch segments and extensions in the final sketch.
Specifying a plot scale
Creating a Napkin Sketch
Use this procedure to produce a napkin sketch in a plan, isometric, or elevation view. When you are working with three-dimensional (3D) drawings, unless your drawing is very simple, generate the napkin sketch from a two-dimensional (2D) hidden line projection, section, or elevation. For more information, see "Creating a Hidden Line Projection" on page 1738, "Sections" on page 1660, and "Working With Elevations" on page 1702.
1 Open a tool palette that contains a napkin sketch tool.
A napkin sketch tool is located with the Helper Tools in the Stock Tool catalog. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 Select a napkin sketch tool. 3 Select the objects to include in the napkin sketch, and press ENTER. 4 Enter a name for the block created of the napkin sketch. 5 Specify a line format for generating the napkin sketch geometry:
If you want to...
Then...
trace over objects once to create the appearance of a more select Tight. accurate sketch
trace over objects twice to create a looser sketch
select Loose.
trace over objects three times to create a very loose sketch select Messy.
6 Clear Extend Sketch Lines At Corners if you do not want the extended lines to appear on the napkin sketch. Extending sketch lines at corners
7 Under Intended Plot Scale, select the scale at which you intend to plot the sketch, or select Other and enter a custom scale.
Creating a Napkin Sketch | 605
8 Click OK.
The napkin sketch geometry is generated and placed as a block reference over the drawing objects that you selected. Use the Move command to relocate the sketch block reference in the drawing, or cut and paste it into a new drawing.
Editing a Napkin Sketch
Use this procedure to edit the block reference generated when you create a napkin sketch. For more information about editing external references, see "Overview of Blocks" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the napkin sketch that you want to edit, right-click, and click Edit Block in-place.
The Reference Edit dialog box opens. For more information, see "Reference Edit Dialog Box" in AutoCAD help.
2 Select the reference to edit, if necessary. 3 Specify how nested objects in the napkin sketch are selected:
If you want to...
Then...
make changes to the sketch lines or any component of the select Automatically select all nested objects. object from which the sketch was drawn
work with specific nested objects within a napkin sketch, such select Prompt to select nested objects. as a hatch pattern
4 Specify lock settings for the napkin sketch:
If you want to...
Then...
allow changes to be made to objects other than those selected select the Settings tab, and clear Lock objects not in working
as your working set
set.
prevent changes from being made to objects other than those select the Settings tab, and select Lock objects not in working
selected as your working set
set.
For information about the Settings tab, see "Reference Edit Dialog Box" in AutoCAD help.
5 Click OK.
The block reference that represents the napkin sketch is highlighted in your drawing, and the Refedit toolbar opens.
6 Make changes to the block reference as you would to any drawing object. 7 Use the Refedit toolbar to save or discard changes made to the napkin sketch:
If you want to... discard any of the changes you made to the napkin sketch
Then...
select
.
save edits made to the named napkin sketch
select
.
8 Click OK.
606 | Chapter 16 Napkin Sketch
Designing with Architectural Objects
3
607
608 | Chapter 17 Designing with Architectural Objects
Walls
17
A wall is an AEC object that represents the real-world features of an interior or exterior wall. The wall object contains all the geometry needed to represent a wall in two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) views.
609
Walls
A wall is an AEC object that represents the real-world features of an interior or exterior wall. The wall object contains all the geometry needed to represent a wall in two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) views. Understanding Wall Components and Wall Styles A wall has one or more components, which are the materials used to construct the wall. Components include brick, CMU, concrete, studs, air gaps, and insulation. The components of walls can also have modifiers, which change the shape of the component or its surface. Wall styles control the appearance of wall objects. Using wall styles, you can specify components, endcaps, materials, and other characteristics to create new types of walls, such as concrete walls, masonry walls, and brick cavity walls. Catalogs provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop include sample wall styles for common wall types, such as concrete walls with footings or furring, CMU and brick cavity walls, and various stud partition walls. Wall styles that use various components
Placing Walls When you add a wall to a drawing, you select a wall tool and then specify the points that define each wall segment. A wall can have both straight and curved segments.
Straight and curved wall segments
Determining Wall Direction Wall direction is significant for some modifications to walls. Sample wall styles provided with Autodesk Architectural Desktop were created with the intent that you place perimeter walls in clockwise fashion. After placing a wall, you can determine the wall direction by selecting the wall. The wall direction grip indicates the wall direction. You can also reverse the direction of a wall.
Determining wall direction
610 | Chapter 17 Walls
Cleaning up Wall Intersections You can specify that specific walls intersect and clean up only with certain other walls by assigning the walls to a cleanup group. Walls that belong to the same group clean up where they intersect. Walls that belong to different cleanup groups do not clean up where they intersect. You can also specify how walls in xref drawings clean up with walls in the host drawing.
Wall segments that do and do not clean up
Adding Doors,Windows, and Other Objects to Walls When you add doors, windows, door/window assemblies, and openings to a wall, the wall automatically adjusts to accommodate the object and adds endcaps where needed. By default, these objects are anchored to the wall. The objects remain with the wall if you move it. If you remove an object from a wall, the wall repairs itself in the space where the object was located.
Workflow Overview: Adding Walls to a Drawing
Walls are the basic components of any building plan. In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, powerful modelling capabilities allow you to create your walls tailored to your specific use. You can create very simple wall types that rely on standard settings, and can be added on the fly. You can also create complex wall types, consisting of different components, having materials and 2D and 3D endcaps assigned, have detailed cleanup information and contain interferences with other objects like mass elements. Depending on your needs the creation of a wall and its associated styles can be consist of very few steps, or of an number of steps controlling many aspects of the wall. following lists the components and actions you might need to create a wall in your plan.
Workflow Overview: Adding Walls to a Drawing | 611
Wall Styles Many characteristics of a wall are determined by the wall style used. You can create simple wall styles that have a more symbolic display, or you can create detailed walls styles with a representational display, containing many elements the real wall will have. These settings are defined in the wall style:
Property Set data: If you want to tag a wall in a drawing, or include it in a schedule table, you need to attach property set data to the wall or the wall style. Property data attached to a wall style typically contains automatic properties, like the wall height or the wall width, or manual properties that are identical for all walls of that style, like for example the fire rating. For more information, see "Adding Property Set Data to a Wall Style" on page 689.
Wall Components: In a wall style, you can define wall components. Wall styles that use various components
For more information, see "Specifying the Components of a Wall Style" on page 690 Materials: In a wall style, you can define materials for the 2D and 3D display of walls, as well as for the rendering
display of the wall.
612 | Chapter 17 Walls
Wall with red brick hatch material
To use a material in a wall style, it needs to be defined first in Style Manager. For information about assigning a material to a wall style, see "Specifying the Materials of a Wall Style" on page 698. For information about defining Materials, see "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487. Wall endcaps: In the wall style, you can define endcaps for the wall start and end. The standard endcap style is a straight line. If you need different endcaps, you need to create a wall endcap style, and then assign it to the wall style. For more information, see "Specifying the Endcap Styles Used in a Wall Style" on page 690 and "Wall Endcap Styles" on page 704. Walls with different endcaps
NOTE You can override the wall endcap style on individual walls in the drawing. Opening endcaps: In the wall style, you define the endcaps for any doors, windows, and openings inserted in
the wall. By default the opening endcaps are four straight lines for the jamb start and end, and the sill and head of the opening. Opening endcaps around a window
For more information, see "Opening Endcap Styles" on page 708. Wall display: the visual appearance of a wall is defined in the wall style. Here, you define the layer, color, linetype
settings of the individual wall components, hatching, and the cut plane display of the wall in plan views. The display settings defined in the wall style can be overridden for an individual wall. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on page 699
Specifying Drawing Defaults for Walls
Use this procedure to specify the default settings in the current drawing for dimensioning walls and for wall cleanup. The cleanup settings apply only to new walls that you add to the drawing and do not affect existing walls.
1 On the Format menu, click Options. 2 Click the AEC Object Settings tab. 3 Under Wall Settings, select an option for wall dimensions: Dimension to Center of Opening or Dimension
to Outer Frame of Opening. 4 To force the endpoint of a new wall that is drawn within the Autosnap Radius of the baseline of an existing
wall to snap to that baseline, select Autosnap New Wall Baselines.
Specifying Drawing Defaults for Walls | 613
5 To force the endpoint of a wall that you grip edit within the Autosnap Radius of the baseline of an existing wall to snap to that baseline, select Autosnap Grip Edited Wall Baselines.
6 Enter a value for Autosnap Radius.
7 Select Do Not Display Opening Endcap Styles if you want to suppress the display of endcaps applied to openings in walls. Selecting this option speeds drawing performance when the drawing contains many complex endcaps.
8 Click OK.
Using Wall Tools To Create Walls
Tools provided with Autodesk Architectural Desktop let you quickly place walls by selecting a wall tool with a specific wall style and other predefined properties. You can also use wall tools to convert linework to walls and to apply the settings of a wall tool to existing walls. The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample wall tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain wall tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog My Tool catalog
Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain wall tools with wall styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards. When you place walls using wall tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change settings for any wall properties that are not controlled by the style.
Creating a Wall
Use this procedure to add a new wall that has the properties specified in the wall tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a wall, see "Creating a Wall with User-Specified Settings" on page 615.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a wall tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Specify the insertion point of the wall. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
NOTE If you have Dynamic Input activated on the application window status bar (DYN), you can use dynamic dimensions to specify the wall length and angle. After clicking the start point of the wall, dynamic input fields for wall length and wall angle appear around the wall preview. Enter values as desired, and use the TAB key to switch between input fields.
3 Specify the endpoint of the wall segment. 4 Continue adding wall segments. 5 Specify the endpoint of the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
close the wall by drawing two wall segments that meet the start point at a right angle
enter or (Ortho Close), and then specify a point in the direction you want the wall to close. The wall segment is extended until it meets a wall segment perpendicular to the first wall segment.
close the wall by adding a wall segment from the previous enter c (Close). point to the start point of the wall
614 | Chapter 17 Walls
If you want to ... complete the wall segment at a point that you specify
Then ... specify the endpoint of the wall, and press ENTER.
For more information about Ortho Close and Close, see "Using Ortho Close and Close with Walls" on page 710.
Creating a Wall with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create a wall with straight segments, curved segments, or both with settings that you specify. Straight segments have a start point and an endpoint. For more information about straight wall segments, see "About Wall Lengths" on page 711.
Drawing a straight wall segment
Curved segments have a start point, a midpoint, and an endpoint. For more information about curved wall segments, see "About Curved Walls" on page 711.
Drawing a curved wall segment
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a wall tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Under Bound Spaces, define if this wall can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
Creating a Wall with User-Specified Settings | 615
You can select three options here:
Yes: this wall can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this wall cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this wall will use the bounding settings from the wall style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 Select Yes for Cleanup Automatically if you want the wall to clean up with other walls, and select a cleanup group.
6 Expand Dimensions.
7 Specify wall dimensions:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify the thickness of the wall
enter a value for Width. If Width is not available, the wall style you selected determines the width of the wall.
specify the height of the wall from the floor to the ceiling enter a value for Base height.
specify the length of the wall from the start and endpoints enter a value for Length.
8 Specify the wall justification, which places the wall in relation to the points you specify and the direction in which you draw the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify points that define the left side of the wall
select Left for Justify.
specify points that define the right side of the wall
select Right for Justify.
specify points that define the center line of the wall
select Center for Justify.
select points that define the baseline of the wall
select Baseline for Justify.
9 Specify offsets: If you want to ... offset the location of the wall from the points you specify offset the roof line from the specified base height offset the floor line from the baseline
Then ... enter a value for Baseline offset. enter a value for Roof line offset from base height. enter a value for Floor line offset from baseline.
10 Draw a wall segment: If you want to ... draw a straight segment
draw a curved segment
Then ...
select Line. In the drawing area, specify the start point and the endpoint of the straight segment.
select Arc. In the drawing area, specify the start point, the midpoint, and the endpoint of the curved segment.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
NOTE If you have Dynamic Input activated on the application window status bar (DYN), you can use dynamic dimensions to specify the wall length and angle. After clicking the start point of the wall, dynamic input fields for wall length and wall angle appear around the wall preview. Enter values as desired, and use the TAB key to switch between input fields.
616 | Chapter 17 Walls
11 Continue adding wall segments. You can enter u (Undo) to undo any point except the start point.
12 Specify the endpoint of the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
close the wall by drawing two wall segments that meet the start point at a right angle
enter or (Ortho Close), and then specify a point in the direction you want the wall to close. The wall segment is extended until it meets a wall segment perpendicular to the first wall segment.
close the wall by adding a wall segment from the previous enter c (Close). point to the start point of the wall
complete the wall segment at a point that you specify
specify the endpoint of the wall, and press ENTER.
For more information about Ortho Close and Close, see "Using Ortho Close and Close with Walls" on page 710.
Creating a Wall from Linework
Use this procedure to convert any of the following objects to walls:
Polylines Lines Arcs Circles
For example, you can create line diagrams or sketches of walls using lines, arcs, circles, and polylines to create the building exterior and rooms, and convert these objects to walls. You can edit the wall properties after creating the wall. Creating a wall from a polyline
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework. 3 Select the linework to convert, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Edit the properties of the new walls in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Wall from Linework | 617
Creating a Wall from a 3D Object
Use this procedure to convert a three-dimensional (3D) object, such as a mass element or an AutoCAD® ACIS solid, into a single-component wall.
Converting a 3D object to a wall
1 Select the object you want to convert to a wall, right-click, and click Convert To Wall. 2 Enter y (Yes) to erase the original object, or enter n (No) to retain the object. 3 Specify the baseline of the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify the baseline of the wall by specifying the start point specify the start point, and then specify the endpoint when
and the endpoint of the wall
prompted.
specify the baseline of the wall from an existing line or arc in enter p (Pick), and select the line or the arc you want to define
the drawing
for the baseline.
NOTE Specifying a baseline away from the object you are converting to a wall affects the insertion of anchored objects, such as doors, windows, and openings. Anchored objects are inserted in a wall relative to the baseline of the wall.
4 Select a wall style. The wall style you select must be a single-component style.
5 Click OK.
Creating a Wall Tool
Use this procedure to create a wall tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own wall tools if you are placing multiple walls of specific styles with additional properties that you want to be the same each time you add a wall of each type.
For example, you are creating an office floor plan with partition walls for cubicles. Although all partition walls use the same wall style in your floor plan, the walls in administrative areas are lower than the walls in office areas. To work efficiently, you can quickly create a wall tool for each wall height. You can then select the appropriate tool to place the walls with the correct height in each area of the floor plan.
618 | Chapter 17 Walls
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create a tool from a wall in the drawing
select the wall, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a wall style in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the tool catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the walls that you can create using this wall tool. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides, if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select a wall style, and select a style location, if not the current drawing. 10 Under Bound Spaces, define if this wall tool can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this wall tool can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this wall tool cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this wall tool will use the bounding settings from the wall style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
11 Select Yes for Cleanup Automatically if you want the wall to clean up with other walls, and select a cleanup group.
12 Expand Dimensions.
13 Specify wall dimensions:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify the thickness of the wall
enter a value for Width. If Width is not available, the wall style you selected determines the width of the wall.
specify the height of the wall from the floor to the ceiling enter a value for Base height.
14 Specify the wall justification, which places the wall in relation to the points you specify and the direction in which you draw the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify points that define the left side of the wall
select Left for Justify.
Creating a Wall Tool | 619
If you want to ... specify points that define the right side of the wall specify points that define the center line of the wall specify points that define the baseline of the wall
Then ... select Right for Justify. select Center for Justify. select Baseline for Justify.
15 Specify offsets: If you want to ... offset the location of the wall from the points you specify offset the roof line from the specified base height offset the floor line from the baseline
Then ... enter a value for Baseline offset. enter a value for Roof line offset from base height. enter a value for Floor line offset from baseline.
16 Expand Advanced. 17 Expand Cleanups, and specify cleanup options:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify the line that the Graph display representation uses for the wall graphline
select Wall Justification Line, or select Wall Center Line.
specify a cleanup radius
enter a value for Cleanup radius.
override the default cleanup radius at the start or the end of expand Cleanup Radius Overrides, and a value for Override
the wall
start cleanup radius or Override end cleanup radius.
18 Expand Style Overrides, and select a wall endcap style to override the style currently assigned to the start or the end of the wall.
NOTE Each wall endcap style is generally created for use with a specific wall style. Overriding the wall endcap style for an individual wall may cause a defect marker to display on the wall.
19 Click OK.
Editing Walls
After placing walls, you can edit any characteristics of the wall that you specified when you drew the wall and make additional modifications. You can change the shape of a wall, the basic geometry of a wall, apply a different wall style, and override the component priorities and the endcap styles of the wall. You can also move a wall, merge or join walls, and reverse the direction of a wall. In addition, you can change the shape of the roof line and the floor line of a wall. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing walls:
You can directly edit walls using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics.
You can change wall settings on the Properties palette.
You can select editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected wall.
For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help.
Using Grips to Edit Walls
Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use wall grips to edit walls.
620 | Chapter 17 Walls
Editing Wall Dimensions 1 Select the wall. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
Wall grips for length, width, and base height of a straight wall
Wall grips for start and end angles, radius, width, and base height of a curved wall
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed and click once, or enter a value. If no Width grip is displayed, the width is controlled by the wall style, and you cannot change it for individual walls.
Changing the Location of a Wall 1 Select the wall you want to relocate. 2 Select the Location grip. Using Grips to Edit Walls | 621
The Location grip has two edit modes: Stretch and Move. The default mode is Stretch, and the direction of the stretch depends on the orientation of walls connected to the selected wall. For example, if the walls at both ends of the selected wall are parallel to each other, the grip edit mode is Stretch (Parallel) and the stretch direction is limited to the direction of the parallel walls. If the connected walls are not parallel, or if the selected wall is stand-alone, the grip edit mode is Stretch (Offset), and the stretch direction is perpendicular to the direction of the selected wall. The Move edit mode allows an unconstrained move of the selected wall. 3 Move the wall to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press ENTER.
When you use the Stretch edit mode, wall connections are maintained if connecting walls use a zero cleanup radius. Using the Move edit mode results in disconnected walls. Result of Stretch (Parallel): extending connected walls
When you use the Stretch edit mode, connected walls are trimmed, extended, and reversed as necessary to maintain connections and the cleanup radius. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Position of a Wall 1 Select the wall. 2 Move the appropriate grip to change the start point of the wall, its endpoint, or its direction.
622 | Chapter 17 Walls
Wall direction grips for a straight wall
Wall direction grips for a curved wall
3 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Height of the Roof Line Start and Endpoints
1 Select the wall. 2 Move the Roof Line Start grip or the Roof Line End grip until the dimension value you want is displayed
and click once, or enter a value.
Using Grips to Edit Walls | 623
Grips for the start and end of a roof line and floor line for a straight wall
Grips for the start and end of a roof line for a curved wall
Changing the Shape of a Wall
Use this procedure to change a straight wall to a curved wall, or to change a curved wall to a straight wall: When you change a straight wall to a curved wall, the software adds a curve second point at the midpoint of the of the wall segment. You can use grips to change the shape of the arc. For more information about curved walls, see "About Curved Walls" on page 711. When you change a curved wall to a straight wall, the software creates a straight segment between the start and endpoints of the curve. You can use grips to adjust the length and location of the wall.
624 | Chapter 17 Walls
Changing the shape of a wall segment from straight to arc
1 Select the walls you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Arc or Line for Segment type.
Changing the Wall Width while Maintaining the Wall Baseline
Use this procedure to change the thickness of a wall while maintaining the wall baseline. You can also change the wall width on the Properties palette. If the wall width is defined in the wall style applied to the wall, you cannot change the thickness of an individual wall. For more information about wall grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Walls" on page 620.
Changing the Wall Width while Maintaining the Wall Baseline | 625
Changing wall width while maintaining wall baseline
1 Select the wall. 2 Select a Width grip, move the grip until the width value you want is displayed, and click once.
After selecting a grip, you can also enter a precise value to increase or decrease the width of the wall.
Changing the Wall Width while Maintaining the Opposite Face of the Wall
Use this procedure to change the thickness of a wall while maintaining the position of the opposite face of the wall. You can also change the wall width on the Properties palette. If the wall width is defined in the wall style applied to the wall, you cannot change the thickness of an individual wall. For more information about wall grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Walls" on page 620.
626 | Chapter 17 Walls
Changing wall width while maintaining wall opposite face
1 Select the wall. 2 Select a Width grip and press CTRL to maintain the position of the opposite face of the wall when you
change the wall width. 3 Move the grip until the width value you want is displayed, and click once.
After selecting a grip, you can also enter a precise value to increase or decrease the width of the wall.
Changing the Wall Base Height
Use this procedure to change the base height of one or more walls. The base height is the height of the wall from floor to ceiling. You can also change the base height on the Properties palette. For more information about wall grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Walls" on page 620.
Changing the Wall Base Height | 627
Using grips to change the base height of a wall segment
1 Select the wall. 2 Select the Base Height grip, move the grip until the height value you want is displayed, and click once.
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a precise value to increase or decrease the base height of the wall.
Changing the Wall Length
Use this procedure to change the length of one or more walls. You can also change the length on the Properties palette. For more information about wall grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Walls" on page 620.
628 | Chapter 17 Walls
Using grips the change the length of a wall segment
1 Select the wall. 2 Select a Lengthen grip, move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once.
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a precise value to increase or decrease the length of the wall.
Changing the Wall Justification
Use this procedure to change the justification of a wall. You can also change the justification on the Properties palette. Justification options
Justification determines the location of the wall in relation to the direction in which the wall was drawn and the points used to draw the wall. Changing the justification of an existing wall moves the wall and can affect how the wall cleans up with other walls. For more information about wall grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Walls" on page 620.
1 Select the wall, right-click, and click Edit Justification. Four grips appear, indicating the justification options: Left Right, Center, and Baseline. The gray grip identifies the current justification.
Changing the Wall Justification | 629
Wall justification grips 2 Select the grip that corresponds to the justification you want.
Moving a Wall
Use this procedure to move a wall. You can also move a wall by changing its coordinates. For more information, see "Changing the Location of a Wall" on page 633. For more information about wall grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Walls" on page 620.
1 Select the wall you want to move. 2 Select the Location grip, and move the wall to a new location.
Offsetting New Walls from Existing Walls
Use this procedure to add copies of an existing wall that are offset from a component of the wall at a distance that you specify. This offset command enables you to copy walls by offsetting them a clear distance from the face or center of a specific wall component, such as the stud or the wall finish.
1 Select the wall you want to copy or move, right-click, and click Offset Copy.
2 TIP A tooltip is displayed to help you identify the position of the cursor on each wall component.
Specify the location of the offset point: If you want to ... offset the wall from the face of a wall component
offset the wall from the center of a wall component
Then ...
move the cursor over the wall until the face of the component you want is highlighted with a red line, and click once.
press CTRL, and move the cursor over the wall until the center of the component you want is highlighted. Click once.
Specifying the center of a wall component to offset new walls
3 Specify the offset distance. 4 Continue adding walls, each new wall offset from the face or center of the wall you added before it.
You can specify a different offset distance each time you add another wall.
New walls placed by offsetting from the center of the stud component
5 Press ENTER.
Repositioning a Wall
Use this procedure to move a wall by offsetting the wall from the center or face of a wall component to a point or distance that you specify.
1 Select the wall you want to move, right-click, and click Offset Move.
2 TIP A tooltip is displayed to help you identify the position of the cursor on each wall component.
630 | Chapter 17 Walls
Specify the location of the offset point: If you want to ... offset the wall from the face of a wall component
offset the wall from the center of a wall component
Then ...
move the cursor over the wall until the face of the component you want is highlighted with a red line, and click once.
press CTRL, and move the cursor over the wall until the center of the component you want is highlighted. Click once.
Specifying the center of a wall component to move the wall
3 Specify the distance from the component face or center to its new position. Wall moved a specified distance from the center of the stud
Adjusting the Position of Wall
Use this procedure to adjust the position of a wall by aligning or offsetting the center or face of a wall component from a reference point that you specify. For example, you can adjust the placement of a stud partition wall by defining the distance from stud to stud on center.
1 Select the wall you want to move, right-click, and click Offset Set From.
2 TIP A tooltip is displayed to help you identify the position of the cursor on each wall component.
Specify the location of the offset point: If you want to ... offset the wall from the face of a wall component
offset the wall from the center of a wall component
Then ...
move the cursor over the wall until the face of the component you want is highlighted with a red line, and click once.
press CTRL, and move the cursor over the wall until the center of the component you want is highlighted. Click once.
Specifying the face of wall finish component for the offset point
3 Specify the reference point you want to measure to.
For example, if you want to move a wall so that its exterior face is aligned with the exterior face of another wall, specify a point on the face of the other wall.
Adjusting the Position of Wall | 631
Specifying the reference point
4 Specify the new distance from the wall component face or center to the reference point. Enter 0 (zero) to align the selected wall with the reference point. Component face aligned with the face of another wall
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Wall
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a wall tool to one or more existing walls. The properties include the wall style and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Wall. 3 Select the walls, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the walls in the Properties palette, if needed.
Changing the Style of a Wall
Use this procedure to select a different wall style for one or more walls. Changing the style of a wall segment
1 Select the walls to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a different style.
632 | Chapter 17 Walls
Overriding Individual Wall Endcaps
Use this procedure to select a different wall endcap style for each end of an individual wall. By default, a wall uses the endcap styles specified in the wall style. You can also override wall endcaps on the Properties palette. To modify the current endcap style or to create a new endcap style from the current style, see "Wall Endcap Styles" on page 704.
NOTE Each wall endcap style is generally created for use with a specific wall style. Overriding the endcap style for an individual wall may create defect markers in the wall.
1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Endcaps Override Endcap Style.
2 Select a point close to the wall end where you want assign a different endcap.
3 Select an endcap style, and click OK.
Changing the Location of a Wall
Use this procedure to relocate a wall by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The wall also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the wall are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the wall by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the wall on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the wall you want to change. 2 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
relocate the wall
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the wall on the XY plane
make the normal of the wall parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the wall on the YZ plane
make the normal of the wall parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the wall on the XZ plane
make the normal of the wall parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the wall
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Merging Walls
Use this procedure to merge the profile of selected walls. This does not provide automatic wall cleanup, but merging walls is useful in tight situations that involve short wall segments.
Overriding Individual Wall Endcaps | 633
Merging wall segments
1 Select a wall to merge, right-click, and click Cleanups Add Wall Merge Condition. 2 Select other walls to merge with the first wall, and press ENTER.
TIP To identify merged walls, turn on the Graph display representation. Select a wall, right-click, and click Cleanups Toggle Wall Graph Display. Select the wall to which you added merge conditions. An arc connects the original wall to each wall it is merged with.
Removing Individual Merge Conditions
Use this procedure to selectively remove merge conditions from a wall. 1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Cleanups Toggle Wall Graph Display. 2 Select the wall that was selected first when the walls were merged. An arc connects the wall to each wall merged with it. Wall with two merge conditions applied to it
3 Select the Remove Wall Merge Condition grip for the wall you want to remove from the original wall. The arc and grip are removed to indicate that a merge condition with the wall no longer exists. One of two merge conditions removed from a wall
634 | Chapter 17 Walls
Removing All Merged Walls
Use this procedure to remove all merged wall conditions from a group of merged walls. TIP To identify merged walls, turn on the Graph display representation. Select a wall, right-click, and click Cleanups Toggle Wall Graph Display. Select the wall to which you added merge conditions. An arc connects the original wall to each wall it is merged with. Select the wall that was selected first when the walls were merged, right-click, and click Cleanups Remove All Wall Merge Conditions. If a message at the command line indicates that no merge conditions were removed, the wall you selected was not the first wall when the merge condition was created. You can press ENTER to repeat the command, and then select a different wall.
Joining Walls
Use this procedure to combine the baselines of two walls to create one wall segment. Walls that you join must meet the following requirements:
Linear walls must have colinear baselines and be touching at one endpoint. Arc walls must have the same center, radius, and be touching at one end. Walls must have the same style and width. Walls must belong the same cleanup group. Joining walls also transfers all sub-objects and anchored objects from one wall to the other. Sub-objects include roofline, floorline, anchors, wall modifiers, wall style overrides, and interference conditions. Anchored objects include doors, windows, and openings anchored to the walls. Joining two colinear straight wall segments
1 Select the first wall, right-click, and click Join. 2 Select the second wall.
Filleting Walls
Use this procedure to fillet two walls. Filleting walls creates a curved wall segment with a specified radius that is tangent to the baselines of the selected walls.
Removing All Merged Walls | 635
If you specify zero for the fillet radius, the walls are trimmed or extended until they intersect, but no curved wall segment is created. Using a radius of zero enables you to force odd-angled walls to meet. If you select parallel wall segments, the fillet radius is ignored, and a curved wall segment is created that is tangent to the baselines of the selected walls.
Filleting wall segments using zero radius
Trim mode options enable you to specify whether the walls are trimmed or extended to the new segment (trim option) or whether their endpoints remain unchanged (no trim option). If you select no trim, the fillet radius must be greater than zero.
Filleting wall segments using a radius greater than zero
Before filleting walls, ensure that the following conditions exist: The walls have the same style and baseline justification. The fillet radius is not a negative value.
Defect symbols can appear when you fillet the walls if these conditions are not met.
1 Open a tool palette that contains the Fillet tool. The Fillet tool is located with the Basic Drafting Tools in the Stock Tool Catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette, and then use the tool to fillet walls and other objects.
2 Select the Fillet tool. 3 Verify trim mode and radius settings:
If you want to ...
Then ...
trim or extend wall segments to meet each other or to meet enter t (Trim), and then enter t (Trim). the endpoints of the resulting curved wall segment
keep the endpoints of the wall segments in their original locations and fit the curved wall segment between them
enter t (Trim), and then enter n (No trim).
specify a new fillet radius
enter r (Radius), and then enter a value for the radius. Enter 0 for the radius if you want the wall segments to meet each other without creating a curved wall segment.
fillet multiple walls
enter u (Multiple).
636 | Chapter 17 Walls
4 Select the first wall. 5 Select the second wall.
Chamfering Walls
Use this procedure to chamfer two walls. Chamfering walls creates a new wall segment between two walls that are not parallel. Chamfering is useful when you are working with unique wall angles or architectural details. You can chamfer walls by specifying distance or angle:
Using the distance option, you specify the length that each wall should be trimmed or extended until it meets the new wall segment or the other wall. If both chamfer distances are zero, the walls are extended until they intersect, but a new wall segment is not created. Chamfering walls using the distance option
Using the angle option, you specify the length of the chamfer and the angle it forms with the first wall. Chamfering walls using the angle option
Trim mode options enable you to specify whether the walls are trimmed or extended to the new wall segment (trim option) or whether their endpoints remain unchanged (no trim option). If you select no trim, chamfer distances must be greater than zero. Before chamfering walls, ensure that the walls have the same style and baseline justification. Defect symbols can appear when you chamfer the walls if these settings are not the same for each wall.
1 Open a tool palette that contains the Chamfer tool. The Chamfer tool is located with the Basic Drafting Tools in the Stock Tool Catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette, and then use the tool to chamfer walls and other objects.
2 Select the Chamfer tool.
Chamfering Walls | 637
3 Specify default settings for chamfering walls:
If you want to ...
Then ...
trim or extend wall segments to meet each other or to meet enter t (Trim), and then enter t (Trim). the endpoints of the new wall segment
keep the endpoints of the wall segments in their original locations and fit the new wall segment between them
enter t (Trim), and then enter n (No trim).
specify the default length and angle values for the angle option
enter a (Angle). Enter the distance from the endpoint to the point on the wall where you want the chamfer to begin. Enter the angle of the chamfer.
specify the default distances for the distance option
enter d (Distance). Enter values for Distance 1 and Distance 2. Enter 0 for both distances if you want the walls to meet without creating a new wall segment.
specify the distance option as the default option for chamfering walls
enter m (Method), and then enter d (Distance).
specify the angle option as the default option for chamfering enter m (Method), and then enter a (Angle). walls
chamfer multiple walls
enter u (Multiple).
4 Select the first wall. 5 Select the second wall.
Trimming Walls at L and T Intersections
Use this procedure to trim or extend walls so that they meet and clean up at T-shaped or L-shaped intersections. If walls do not belong to the same cleanup group, they are trimmed but do not clean up with each other. When you create an L-shaped intersection, the wall endpoints that are closest to each other extend or trim so that their wall graphlines meet exactly.
L-shaped cleanup, before and after
When you create a T-shaped intersection, the walls you select are extended or trimmed to a boundary wall that you specify.
T-shaped cleanup, before and after
1 Select the cleanup method you want to use: If you want to ... create an L-shaped intersection between two walls
638 | Chapter 17 Walls
Then ...
select the walls, right-click, and click Cleanups Apply L Cleanup.
If you want to ... create a T-shaped intersection between two walls
Then ...
select the walls to be extended or trimmed to a boundary wall, right-click, and click Cleanups Apply T Cleanup. Select the boundary wall.
Reversing the Direction of a Wall
Use this procedure to change the direction in which a wall is drawn by reversing the start point and the endpoint of the wall. Walls are drawn from the first specified point to the last point. Some commands and properties are affected by that order. For example, you can add wall modifiers to the left or right side of a wall. Left and right sides are west and east, respectively, when a wall is drawn from south to north, regardless of how the wall is displayed in the current view. There are two different ways to reverse the wall direction. When you reverse a wall in-place, the wall position in the drawing does not change; only the wall direction changes, and the wall baseline is switched in the drawing but not in relation to the wall components. This method of reversing walls is common when you create walls from scratch and do not want to change their physical position in the drawing. When you reverse the wall baseline, the wall position in the drawing changes, but the baseline position in the drawing remains the same. You would use this method when creating walls from polylines or spaces; in this case the baseline position can be important geometry that you do not want to change. To determine the direction in which a wall was drawn, select the wall. The Reverse Direction grip shows the orientation of the wall. For more information about wall grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Walls" on page 620.
To reverse the wall direction in place:
1 Select the wall, right-click, and click Reverse In Place. The outside faces of the wall remain in place, and the baseline shifts, if necessary.
To reverse the wall baseline:
1 Select the wall, right-click, and click Reverse Baseline. The position of the baseline in the drawing remains in place, and the wall shifts, if necessary.
Using AutoCAD Commands to Edit Walls
You can use the following standard AutoCAD® commands to edit walls:
BREAK EXTEND TRIM
For more information about these commands, see AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Wall
You can modify the roof and floor lines of a wall to create a non-rectangular wall.
You edit vertex locations on the roof line to create steps, gables, and other roof conditions.
Reversing the Direction of a Wall | 639
Modifying the roof line of a wall
You edit vertex locations on the floor lines to create steps and other floor conditions. Modifying the floor line of a wall
You can also create non-rectangular roof and floor conditions by projecting to polylines. Autodesk Architectural Desktop offers multiple methods of editing roof lines and floor lines. You may want to begin by graphically creating a custom roof line or floor line condition. You can then fine-tune that condition by specifying precise values in the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette. Offsetting or Projecting the Roof Line of a Wall Use this procedure to change the height or the shape of the roof line of a wall:
Offset the roof line from the current height of the wall. Project the roof line of the wall to a polyline. Project the roof line of the wall to another object, such as a roof or stairs.
You can also create a polyline that represents the current roof line of the selected walls. You can then use this polyline to change the roof line of other walls.
NOTE To project the roof line to a polyline, draw the polyline first in elevation view. For best results, the polyline should be parallel to the wall. The polyline does not need to be in the same plane as the wall.
1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Modify Roof Line. 2 Change the roof line of the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
offset the roof line from the current height of the wall
enter o (Offset), and enter an offset distance. Enter a negative value to project the roof line below the current wall height.
project the roof line to a polyline
enter p (Project), and select the polyline.
640 | Chapter 17 Walls
If you want to ...
Then ...
project the roof line to another object, such as a roof or stairs enter a (Auto-project), and select the object to project to. When projecting to stairs, make sure that the bottom riser or the stringer does not create a zero-height segment of wall.
generate a polyline of the current roof line
enter g (Generate), and select the walls for the polyline to be created from.
remove any changes to the roof line
enter r (Reset), and select the walls to change.
3 Press ENTER.
Offsetting or Projecting the Floor Line of the Wall Use this procedure to change the height or the shape of the floor line of a wall:
Offset the floor line from the current baseline of the wall. Project the floor line of the wall to a polyline. Project the floor line of the wall to another object, such as a floor slab or stairs.
You can also create a polyline that represents the current floor line of the selected walls. You can then use this polyline to change the floor line of other walls.
NOTE To project the floor line to a polyline, draw the polyline first in elevation view. For best results, the polyline should be parallel to the wall. The polyline does not need to be in the same plane as the wall.
1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Modify Floor Line. 2 Change the floor line of the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
offset the roof line from the current height of the wall
enter o (Offset), and enter an offset distance. Enter a negative value to project the roof line below the current wall height.
project the roof line to a polyline
enter p (Project), and select the polyline.
project the roof line to another object, such as a roof or stairs enter a (Auto-project), and select the object to project to. When projecting to stairs, make sure that the bottom riser or the stringer does not create a zero-height segment of wall.
generate a polyline of the current roof line
enter g (Generate), and select the walls for the polyline to be created from.
remove any changes to the roof line
enter r (Reset), and select the walls to change.
3 Press ENTER.
Adding a Gable to the Roof Line of a Wall Use this procedure to add a gable to the roof line of a wall. You can also add a gable on the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette.
NOTE This option is available only if the roof line has not been edited. After the roof line changes, you cannot add a gable using this option. To add a gable to a roof line that has been edited, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Wall" on page 647.
1 Select the wall, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Edit in Place. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the Roof line.
2 Right-click, and click Add Gable.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Wall | 641
If Add Gable is not listed on the menu, the roof line was previously edited. 3 Select the roof line.
Modifying a wall roof line by adding a gable
A third vertex is added to the roof line halfway between the two ends of the roof line and eight feet up from the roof line.
4 Continue editing the roof line or the floor line, if needed. For more information, see "Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Wall" on page 643.
5 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ... restore the roof line to its previous shape
Then ...
save the changes to the roof line
click
.
click
.
Adding a Step to the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Wall Use this procedure to add a step to the roof line or the floor line of a wall. You can also add a step on the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette.
NOTE This option is available only when the roof line or the floor line has not been edited. After the line has been changed, you cannot automatically add a step using this option. To add a step to a roof line or a floor line that has been edited, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Wall" on page 647.
1 Select the wall, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Edit in Place. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the roof line or the floor line.
2 Right-click, and click Add Step. If Add Step is not listed on the menu, the roof line or the floor line was previously edited.
3 Select the roof line or the floor line.
642 | Chapter 17 Walls
Modifying a wall floor line by adding a step
A third vertex is added to the line halfway between the two ends of the line and four feet from the line. A step is created from the selected vertex to the second vertex.
4 Continue editing the roof line or the floor line, if needed. For more information, see "Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Wall" on page 643.
5 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ...
Then ...
restore the roof line or the floor line to its previous shape
save the changes to the roof line or the floor line
click
.
click
.
Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Wall Use this procedure to edit the geometry of the roof line or the floor line of a wall:
Add, modify, or remove gables. Add, modify, or remove steps. Project the roof line or the floor line to a polyline or to other objects, such as roofs, roof slabs, slabs, and stairs. Create custom roof line or floor line conditions by adding and adjusting vertices and edges. Reverse the roof line or the floor line of the wall without reversing the wall itself. Remove all changes to the roof line or the floor line of a wall.
You can also edit the roof line and the floor line on the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette. For more information, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Wall" on page 647.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Wall | 643
Viewing Edit In Place Wall Elevation Grips
NOTE If you want to project the roof line or the floor line to a polyline, draw the polyline before you start this procedure. 1 Select the wall that has the roof line or floor line you want to change, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Edit in Place. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the roof line and floor line.
644 | Chapter 17 Walls
Wall Elevation Edit In Place Grips
2 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
Edit the profile:
If you want to ... add a gable to the roof line or the floor line
Then ...
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Gable. Select the roof line or the floor line.
add a step to the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Step. Select the roof line or the floor line.
change the shape of the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, and use Move Roof Line, Move Floor Line, Vertex, and Edge grips to adjust the shape.
add vertices to the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Vertex. Select a point for each new vertex, and press ENTER.
remove vertices from the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. Select each vertex to remove, and press ENTER.
project the roof line or the floor line to a polyline
select the profile, right-click, and click Project to Polyline. Select the roof line or the floor line, and select the polyline. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
project the roof line or the floor line to another object, such select the profile, right-click, and click Auto Project. Select
as a stair or a roof
the roof line or the floor line, and select the object.
reverse the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Reverse. Select the roof line or the floor line.
restore the roof line to the base height of the wall, or restore select the profile, right-click, and click Remove. Select the
the floor line to the baseline of the wall
roof line or the floor line.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Wall | 645
NOTE To add a gable or a step to a roof line or a floor line that has been edited, first use the Remove option on the shortcut menu to remove an existing roof line or floor line condition.
3 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ...
Then ...
restore the roof line and the floor line to their shape before
editing
click .
save the changes
click
. The wall uses the edited profile to define its
geometry.
Reversing the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Wall Use this procedure to reverse the conditions applied to the roof line or the floor line of a wall. Reversing the roof line or the floor line does not reverse the start point and endpoint of the wall.
Reversing the roof line of a wall
Reversing the floor line of a wall
1 Select the wall that has the roof line or floor line you want to change, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Edit in Place.
A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the roof line or the floor line.
2 Select the profile, right-click, and click Reverse. 3 Select the roof line or the floor line.
The selected line is reversed; the condition is applied to the opposite end of the line.
4 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ...
Then ...
restore the roof line and the floor line to their shape before editing
click
.
646 | Chapter 17 Walls
If you want to ... save the changes
Then ...
click
. The wall uses the edited profile to define its
geometry.
Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Wall Use this procedure to perform the following tasks on the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette:
Add, move, or remove vertices in the roof line or the floor line of a wall. Add gables or steps to a roof line or steps to a floor line that was previously edited by adding vertices that define
these conditions.
You can also edit the roof line and the floor line graphically. For more information, see "Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Wall" on page 643.
1 Double-click the wall you want to change. 2 Expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets. 3 Select Roof/Floor Line. 4 Select Edit Roof Line, or select Edit Floor Line.
Changing the vertices of a roof line
The active vertex in the illustration changes when you select a different line to edit. Any changes you make to the wall are reflected in the illustration.
5 To add a vertex, click Insert Vertex. Specify the horizontal offset and vertical offset for the new vertex and each offset distance, and click OK. For more information about specifying the location of a vertex, see "Specifying Offsets for Roof Line and Floor Line Vertices" on page 711.
Modifying a roof line of a wall by adding a vertex
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Wall | 647
Modifying a floor line of a wall by adding a vertex
6 To move a vertex, select the vertex from the table or the illustration, and click Edit Vertex. Specify the horizontal offset and vertical offset for the new vertex and each offset distance, and click OK. For more information about specifying the location of a vertex, see "Specifying Offsets for Roof Line and Floor Line Vertices" on page 711.
7 To delete a vertex, select a vertex, and click Delete Vertex. The selected vertex is deleted, and the line automatically connects the two adjacent vertices.
8 To reverse the roof line or the floor line, click Reverse. 9 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of Individual Walls
Use this procedure to select a different material for components of an individual wall. To change the materials assigned to all walls of the same wall style, see "Specifying the Materials of a Wall Style" on page 698.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a wall component, you can change the properties of the display component as described in "Changing the Display Properties of Individual Walls" on page 648.
1 Select the wall you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 To verify that the material assignment determines the display properties of the component, click the Display
Properties tab, select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click . 3 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab, verify that By Material is selected for the component, and click OK. 4 Click the Materials tab. 5 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
6 Click OK.
Changing the Display Properties of Individual Walls
In most cases, you want the appearance of walls that belong to the same style to be consistent throughout a drawing. To achieve this, you specify the material assigned to each wall component or you specify the display properties of the walls in each wall style. However, in certain instances, you may need to override a display property for an individual
648 | Chapter 17 Walls
wall to achieve a specific result. All the display properties that you can specify in wall styles are available for individual walls:
Whether the display properties of wall components are determined by material assignments The layer, color, and linetype of the display components of the wall The hatching used with each component The cut plane height and the display of components relative to the cut plane Other specific wall display information, such as whether complex endcaps are displayed and whether the wall is
cut around door and window frames
When you change the display properties of an individual wall, the changes apply only to that wall. Other walls of the same style are not affected. To change the display properties of all walls of a specific wall style, see "Wall Styles" on page 688. Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Wall Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of an individual wall:
Visibility (component is on or off) By material (a material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
To change these display properties for all walls of the same wall style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on page 699.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the properties of a wall display component, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of Individual Walls" on page 648.
1 Select the wall you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Wall Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of an individual wall. Wall hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing. To change the hatching for all walls of the same wall style, see "Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Wall Style" on page 700.
Changing the Display Properties of Individual Walls | 649
NOTE If a material assignment determines the hatching properties of a wall component, you can change the hatching of the component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of Individual Walls" on page 648.
1 Select the wall you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Hatching tab. 6 Select a component, and click the setting for Pattern. 7 Select the hatching for the component:
If you want to ...
Then ...
select a hatching pattern that is available in the software
select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
8 Click OK. 9 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 10 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 11 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to ...
Then ...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
12 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Wall Use this procedure to specify the properties of one or more cut planes for an individual wall. Cut plane display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing. To better visualize the elements of a wall in plan view, you can create cut planes. The main cut plane is where the shrinkwrap and hatching are applied. The plan display shows the components and objects in the wall as they are displayed at the height of each cut plane. To change the cut plane display properties for all walls of the same wall style, see "Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Wall Style" on page 700.
1 Select the wall you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
650 | Chapter 17 Walls
4 If necessary, click .
5 Click the Cut Plane tab.
6 To specify the cut plane where shrinkwrap, component boundaries, and hatching take effect, enter a value for Cut Plane Height.
7 To show the components above and below the cut plane height, select Automatically Choose Above and Below Cut Plane Heights.
8 To specifically define a cut plane, select Manual Above and Below Cut Plane Heights, click Add, and enter the height of the new cut plane.
If you add a cut plane ...
Then ...
at a height that is lower than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Below Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
at a height that is higher than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Above Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
You can click Remove to delete a cut plane that you added. 9 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Wall Use this procedure to specify other display properties for an individual wall, such as whether to display complex endcaps, to show door and window frames, or whether to show the miter of specific wall components. These display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
To change these display properties for all walls of the same wall style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on page 699.
1 Select the wall you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override. The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Other tab. 6 Select the display properties for the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
display the component lines within the wall above the cut select Display Inner Lines Above. Clear this option if you do plane (for example, through a window or door in the wall) not want to display these lines.
display the component lines within the wall below the cut select Display Inner Lines Below. Clear this option if you do plane (for example, through a window or door in the wall) not want to display these lines.
turn off lines above a window, door, or opening at the cut select Hide Lines Below Openings Above Cut Plane. Clear this
plane
option if you want to display the lines.
turn off lines beneath a window or an opening at the cut plane
select Hide Lines Below Openings at Cut Plane. Clear this option if you want to display the lines.
display complex endcaps
select Display Endcaps. Clear this option to display complex endcaps as a single line.
display door openings cutting the wall at the outer edge of select Cut Door Frames. Clear this option if you want door
the door frame
openings to cut the wall at the inside of the door frame.
Changing the Display Properties of Individual Walls | 651
If you want to ...
Then ...
display window openings cutting the wall at the outer edge select Cut Window Frames. Clear this option if you want
of the window frame
window openings to cut the wall at the inside of the window
frame.
draw wall components by their priority number to control the display of a component over another component
select Component Draw Order by Priority. Clear this option if you want to draw the components in the order that they were created.
perform a slice of the actual three-dimensional (3D) model select Do True Cut. Clear this option if the wall does not have
at each cut plane to obtain more accurate views of walls with sweeps or body modifiers, or if they do not change along the
sweeps or body modifiers
height of the wall.
display miter lines at wall corners for selected wall components
select Draw Miter for Components, and select each component whose miter lines you want to display.
7 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a wall. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a wall.
1 Double-click the wall. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 Click the setting for Notes. 4 Enter the note, and click OK. 5 Click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click , select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click the description. Edit the description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Cleanup of Walls
You can control how walls join and clean up with other walls by using cleanup groups. Walls must be in the same cleanup group to clean up properly. By default, walls belong to the Standard cleanup group. You can create new wall cleanup groups for specific sets of walls. You can assign walls to a cleanup group when you create the walls or after you create the walls.
Within the same cleanup group, the priority of each wall component determines how the wall cleans up with the components of the intersecting wall. You can control wall cleanup with several features designed for this purpose:
Specifying a cleanup group and cleanup radius in wall tools for adding new walls to a drawing
Specifying a cleanup group and the cleanup radius for individual walls
Specifying the priority of each wall component in wall styles or for individual walls
Specifying cleanup settings that apply to the entire drawing to specify how close together walls must be to join and clean up (Autosnap radius and Cleanup radius)
652 | Chapter 17 Walls
Cleanup Circles and Wall Graphlines
Cleanup circles and wall graphlines are features of wall objects that are the basis for how Autodesk® Architectural Desktop calculates wall cleanup. These features appear for walls only in the Graph display representation. Displaying Cleanup Circles and Wall Graphlines The Graph display representation shows the cleanup radius and the graphline of walls to help you troubleshoot wall cleanup. Select a wall, right-click, and click Cleanups Toggle Wall Graph Display. Cleanup circles and graphlines appear on all walls in the drawing. In addition, when you select the wall, Cleanup Radius grips are displayed at each cleanup circle. You can move the grip to increase or decrease the cleanup radius. Cleanup circles do not appear if the cleanup radius for the wall is zero. Graph display representation adds cleanup circles and the wall graphline to the display of walls
Cleanup Circles and Wall Graphline A cleanup circle is located at the start point and the endpoint of each wall segment. The center point of each cleanup circle is the start or endpoint of the wall graphline.
Cleanup circles and wall graphline
The cleanup radius determines the size of the cleanup circle. You can specify a cleanup radius in the wall tools you use to add walls to a drawing. If needed, you can override the default cleanup radius at each end of a wall segment. This enables you to adjust the cleanup radius for particular wall styles and for individual situations. If the cleanup radius is zero, the cleanup circle is not displayed, and walls must touch to cleanup. A wall graphline is coincident with the center line of the wall or the wall justification, depending on the cleanup settings specified for the wall. Wall Cleanup Conditions Walls in the same cleanup group cleanup when one of the following conditions applies:
The cleanup circle of one wall overlaps the center point of the cleanup circle of another wall. The cleanup circle of one wall overlaps the wall graphline of another wall. The wall graphline of one wall intersects the wall graphline of another wall.
Cleanup Circles and Wall Graphlines | 653
Wall cleanup conditions
When walls intersect and clean up properly, a new wall joint is created at the intersection of the wall graphlines. The exact location of the wall joint depends on the location of the new wall segment endpoint. In many cases, the wall joint location does not coincide with the existing wall segment center line. The location of the wall joint is based on a weighted average distance between wall segment endpoints, as well as the thickness of the wall segments. Wall joints and wall graphlines at wall intersections
Wall Cleanups and Priorities
Walls with multiple components clean up based on the priority assigned to each component and the location of each component within the wall. Matching component edges with the same priority are extended or trimmed to their intersection points. Components with a higher priority (a low priority number) cut through components with a lower priority (a high priority number).
654 | Chapter 17 Walls
Wall cleanup priorities
To identify the default cleanup priorities for the components used in the sample wall styles provided with Autodesk Architectural Desktop, see "Default Cleanup Priorities of Wall Components" on page 692. The software calculates and performs wall cleanups in the following sequence:
1 Component information is gathered from the wall graph: Endcaps are calculated. Endcaps that do not fit in the section may also produce a defect marker. Sides of components are combined with endcaps to produce a component profile (like a two-dimensional region). When this profile is self-intersecting, the red defect marker is displayed.
2 Adjacent higher priority components are gathered from the wall graph from neighboring wall segments. 3 Higher-priority component profiles are subtracted from the lower-priority component profiles. 4 Doors, windows, openings, and interferences are cut and/or applied. 5 Shrinkwrap may be calculated and hatching applied.
A failed shrinkwrap calculation may also result in the defect marker. 6 Graphics are drawn to an output device (for example, the AutoCAD® screen, Object Viewer, Osnap stream,
explode stream, and a plotter). 7 Solutions are cached for subsequent draw requests until the wall is modified again.
Guidelines for Successful Wall Cleanup
Red circles that appear in a drawing when using wall cleanups are defect symbols that indicate that cleanup settings or placement of a wall segment are preventing correct cleanup. Here are some recommendations for actions you can take to achieve successful wall cleanup:
Review the wall cleanup radius settings for each wall segment. A good starting point is to set the wall cleanup radius equal to half of the wall width. However, this may not apply to every situation and you may need to adjust the value to achieve the desired effect.
NOTE A wall segment must be longer than its cleanup radius.
Use a smaller cleanup radius. A small cleanup radius also makes the graph display more readable. The length of the cleanup circle radius should be a value that is between one-half the wall width and the wall width.
Look for very short wall segments. You can find these short segments by turning on the Graph display representation. You can fix them by adjusting the baselines or by increasing the cleanup radius.
Draw walls with center justification on and use an offset to simulate right or left justification. Using this method, you can draw very short segments and tight wall jogs, provided the appropriate cleanup radius is used.
Be precise with baselines. Use the following procedure to verify that the wall segments are inserted at a common Z elevation:
Guidelines for Successful Wall Cleanup | 655
1 Freeze all layers except for the designated wall layer.
2 Select all the walls, and double-click one of them.
3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location.
4 Click Additional information.
5 Under Insertion Point, verify that the Z value is consistent. If *VARIES* is displayed, at least one of the walls is inserted at a different Z elevation than the other walls. Change this value to the desired elevation, and click OK.
6 Under Normal, verify that the Z value is consistent. If walls do not clean up properly, even though the Z value for the insertion point is the same for all walls on the Location tab, a wall may be at an angle. This can occur when the normal Z value varies. You can use the Properties window to see both the start and endpoint Z values of the selected walls. In the Properties window, an entry is left blank when the values vary.
Assigning a Different Wall Cleanup Group Definition to Existing Walls
Use this procedure to change the wall cleanup group assigned to existing walls. Assigning different cleanup groups is useful when you want to prevent two walls from cleaning up with each other. To create a new cleanup group, see "Cleanup Group Definitions" on page 661.
1 Select the walls to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a cleanup group for Cleanup group definition.
Specifying Cleanup for Individual Walls
Use this procedure to specify the following cleanup settings for one or more walls:
Whether the wall cleans up with other walls The cleanup group for the wall Whether the graphline position corresponds to the center line of the wall or to the wall justification The cleanup radius for both ends of the wall, or separate values for the start and endpoints of the wall
1 Select the walls you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Turn wall cleanup on or off:
If you want to ...
Then ...
turn off wall cleanup so that the walls do not clean up with select No for Cleanup automatically. If you select this option,
any other walls
you do not need to specify other settings.
turn on wall cleanup and specify cleanup settings
select Yes for Cleanup automatically, and proceed to step 4.
4 Select a cleanup group definition. The walls will clean up with other walls that also belong to the cleanup group definition that you select.
5 Expand Advanced, expand Cleanups, and expand Cleanup Radius Overrides. 6 For Graphline position, select the line that the Graph display representation uses to represent the graphline
of the walls: the center line of the wall or the wall justification.
656 | Chapter 17 Walls
7 Specify the cleanup radius for the walls:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify the same cleanup radius for the start and endpoints of the walls
enter a value for Cleanup radius, and verify that No is selected for Override start cleanup radius and Override end cleanup radius.
specify a cleanup radius for the start point of the walls
select Yes for Override start cleanup radius, and enter a value for Start cleanup radius.
specify a cleanup radius for the endpoint of the walls
select Yes for Override end cleanup radius, and enter a value for End cleanup radius.
Start and End are based on the direction the wall was drawn. If you enter zero for any cleanup radius, the wall graphlines need to touch for the walls to clean up with other walls.
Changing the Position of the Wall Graphline
Use this procedure to specify the line used to represent the wall graphline for wall cleanups: the center line of the wall or the wall justification. The wall graphline appears only when the Graph display representation is turned on. The graphline you select does not affect the justification of the wall. However, it does affect how the wall cleans up with other walls.
1 If the wall graphline is not displayed, select a wall, right-click, and click Cleanups Toggle Wall Graph Display.
2 Select the wall you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Graphline Position.
Displaying the Graphline Position grip
3 Select the grip that corresponds to the graphline you want. Changing the wall graphline to the center line
Overriding the Wall Cleanup Radius
Use this procedure to override the default wall cleanup radius at one end of a wall. You can also override the cleanup radius on the Properties palette and using the shortcut menu for the selected wall.
1 If the wall graphline is not displayed, select a wall, right-click, and click Cleanups Toggle Wall Graph Display. Cleanup radius grip
2 Select a cleanup radius grip, and move the grip until the dimension you want is displayed.
Changing the Position of the Wall Graphline | 657
Changing the cleanup radius at one end of a wall
Overriding Component Priorities
Use this procedure to change the priority of a wall component so that when it intersects with another wall, it has higher or lower priority than its counterpart on the other wall. The lower the priority number you enter, the higher the priority of the component when the wall intersects with another wall. For the list of default priorities of the wall components used in sample wall styles provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, see "Default Cleanup Priorities of Wall Components" on page 692.
1 Double-click the wall you want to change.
2 Expand Advanced, and expand Style Overrides.
3 Click the setting for Priority overrides.
4 Add or edit a priority override for a wall component:
If you want to ... add a new priority override
Then ... click , and proceed to step 5.
edit a priority override
proceed to step 5.
delete a priority override
select the priority override you want to delete, and click .
5 Specify the override settings:
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the component to which you assigned the override select a different component.
specify a priority override at the start of the wall
select the component, select At start of wall, and enter a value for Priority.
specify a priority override at the end of the wall
select the component, select At end of wall, and enter a value for Priority.
change the priority of an existing override
select the value for Priority, and enter a new value.
6 Click OK.
Troubleshooting Wall Cleanups
This topic answers common questions associated with wall cleanups.
Defect Marker and Short Walls Why do some short walls display the defect marker? The cleanup radius is too large. Reduce the cleanup radius of all walls at the wall graph joint, or adjust the baselines so that the ends of all graphlines fall within the wall graph joint radii.
NOTE This situation can also occur if a door, window, opening, or door/window assembly is placed too close to the end of the wall and the wall or the objects in it use elaborate endcaps. In such cases, there may not be enough room for these conditions to be drawn correctly.
658 | Chapter 17 Walls
Varying wall circle cleanup radii
Defect Marker and Close Walls Why do some walls that are close together display the defect marker? The cleanup radius is too large. Reduce the cleanup radius of all walls at the wall graph joint, or adjust the baselines so that the ends of all graphlines fall within the wall graph joint radii. Adjusting wall segment lengths for correct clean up
Small Cleanup Radii and Wall Joins While using small cleanup radii, wall joints clean up incorrectly or not at all. How can I fix this?
Troubleshooting Wall Cleanups | 659
Turn on the Graph display representation and adjust the baselines or increase the cleanup radii until the problem is fixed. Also, make sure that there are no short wall segments in the wall. These can occur where center lines intersect, or when a segment is too short to produce a full profile. Delete the short wall segment to fix the cleanup problem. Adjusting wall cleanup circle radii for correct clean up
Copy or Move Doors,Windows, and Openings When I try to copy or move doors, windows, and openings from one wall to another, the command doesn't always work.Why? This situation can occur if the cleanup group for the destination wall does not allow objects from walls assigned to other cleanup groups to be copied to this wall. This design rule is intended to prevent placing objects in walls, such as cubicle partitions, that should not have objects added to them. You can address this situation in two ways:
Turn off this design rule in the cleanup group definition. For more information, see "Creating a Wall Cleanup Group Definition" on page 662.
Temporarily assign the walls to the same cleanup group, copy or move the objects, and then reassign the walls to their correct cleanup groups.
Opening a Drawing Displays New Defect Markers When I closed my drawing, all the wall cleanups looked fine. Now when I open the drawing, there are defect markers in the drawing.What causes this, and how can I fix it? Under some circumstances, the order in which walls are cleaned up affects the display. When troubleshooting this condition, select the walls in question, and double-click one of them. In the Properties palette, select No for Cleanup automatically, and then select Yes. Try this on different walls to see whether you can locate the unstable wall. Usually, adjusting the baseline of the unstable wall fixes this problem. For more information about verifying baselines, see "Guidelines for Successful Wall Cleanup" on page 655. Clean Ups in Previous Version Files When I work with drawings that were created Release 1 or Release 2 of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, some walls no longer clean up correctly.Why? This situation can occur because walls in earlier releases of the software always used the center line as the wall graphline while in the current release, you can use the center line or the wall justification for the wall graphline. If the cleanup radius for walls is zero, walls that are not center-justified may not clean up correctly. You can correct this situation by changing the wall graphline so that all walls use the same graphline. For more information, see "Changing the Position of the Wall Graphline" on page 657. Clean Ups with Xref Drawings How can I get walls to clean up with walls in xref drawings? There are several actions you can take to improve wall cleanup when you work with xref drawings that contain walls:
Verify the design rules of the cleanup groups used in the xref drawings. If the cleanup group in the xref drawing does not allow cleanup with the walls in the host drawing, walls in the two drawings do not clean up, even when their cleanup groups have the same name. For more information about the design rules of cleanup groups, see "Creating a Wall Cleanup Group Definition" on page 662.
660 | Chapter 17 Walls
When adding new walls during a RefEdit session, add the existing walls to the current working set. Select the Xref cleanup group of the existing walls for the walls you are adding. Otherwise, the new walls do not clean up with the existing walls until you save changes to the drawings.
Use the Regenall (Regenerate All) and ObjRelUpdate (Object Relationship Update) commands to update the relationships among walls in the drawing, especially if you move or transform walls involving xref drawings, or if you undo edits to walls in an xref drawing.
For more information about xref drawings and wall cleanup, see additional troubleshooting topics in "Troubleshooting Wall Cleanups" on page 658.
Xref Drawing with Walls from Host Drawing My xref drawing contains copies of walls that are in my host drawing. How did this happen? If you added objects, such as doors or windows, to a wall in the host drawing while you had a Refedit session open for an xref drawing, a copy of the selected wall is added to the xref drawing. This occurs because any objects added during a Refedit session are always added to the xref drawing and not to the host drawing. Because the object you added was anchored to a wall, the wall is also added to the xref drawing. To correct the drawings, review both the host drawing and the xref drawing for duplicate objects. Remove the duplicates from the incorrect drawing files. Allowing the duplicates to remain can create problems with the cutting of walls around doors, windows, door/window assemblies, and openings. Hidden line and shaded views are also affected. To avoid creating duplicate objects in xref drawings, do not add or edit objects in the host drawing when a Refedit session is open for an xref drawing. Also, instead of opening a Refedit session, you can open the xref itself, and make edits directly. You can then save the xref drawing, and reload the updated drawing in the host drawing.
Adding a Door in an Xref Drawing I added a wall in an xref drawing and then added a door to the wall.The door does not center correctly. What causes this, and how I can correct it? Some changes that you make during Refedit sessions of xref drawings do not take effect until you save the changes to the xref drawing. When you add doors, windows, door/window assemblies, and openings to a new wall in an xref drawing, their placement is affected by whether the new wall cleans up with other walls in the drawing. Clean up does not occur between walls in xref and host drawings until you save the changes in the Refedit session. For best results, if you add walls during a Refedit session, save and close the session before adding objects to those walls. Open a new Refedit session (or open the xref drawing directly, outside of the host drawing), verify that the walls clean up as you intend them to, and then add objects to the walls.
Cleanup Group Definitions
A wall cleanup group definition is a designation that you can assign to wall styles and individual walls to control how intersecting walls clean up. Walls that belong to the same cleanup group clean up where they intersect according to the priority assigned to each component in each wall. Walls that belong to different cleanup groups do not clean up when they meet at corners or intersections.
Walls that do and do not clean up
Controlling Wall Cleanup through Design Rules
You use the design rules of a cleanup group definition to determine how walls assigned that cleanup group cleanup when you Xref them in other drawings. The setting for this design rule in the cleanup group definition in the xref drawing controls whether those walls clean up with walls in the host drawing. Design rules also determine whether you can move or copy objects from walls assigned to other groups to walls assigned to the current cleanup group. Preventing copying or moving objects to walls in a certain cleanup group helps you avoid inadvertently placing objects in walls that should not contain them.
Cleanup Group Definitions | 661
Managing Cleanup Group Definitions
To create, edit, copy, or purge cleanup group definitions, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can work with definitions and styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Wall Cleanup Group Definition
Use this procedure to create a wall cleanup group definition. A cleanup group definition must exist in the drawing before you can assign walls and wall styles to the cleanup group.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Wall Cleanup Group Definitions. 3 Create a cleanup group definition:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create a cleanup group definition with default properties right-click Wall Cleanup Group Definitions, and click New.
create a cleanup group definition from an existing definition right-click the cleanup group definition you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new cleanup group definition, and press ENTER. 5 Select the new cleanup group definition. 6 Click the General tab, and enter a description of the cleanup group. 7 Click the Design Rules tab. 8 Specify the design rules:
If you want to ...
Then ...
allow walls assigned to this cleanup group to clean up with Select Allow wall cleanup between host and xref drawings.
walls in a host drawing when the current drawing is inserted Clear this option if you do not want the walls to cleanup with
as an Xref
walls in the host drawing.
NOTE The cleanup group definition in the xref drawing controls cleanup with walls in the host drawing.
allow objects anchored to walls assigned to other cleanup groups to be moved or copied to walls assigned to this cleanup group
Select Allow objects anchored to walls in other cleanup groups to be moved or copied to walls in this cleanup group. Clear this option if you do not want objects anchored to walls in other cleanup groups to be moved or copied to walls assigned to this cleanup group.
9 Click OK.
If you want to add notes, files, or documents to a cleanup group definition, see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Cleanup Group Definition" on page 662.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Cleanup Group Definition Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a cleanup group definition. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files attached to the definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Wall Cleanup Group Definitions. 3 Select the cleanup group definition that you want to change. 4 Click the General tab.
662 | Chapter 17 Walls
5 To add a description to the cleanup group definition, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Adding Objects to Walls
When you add doors, windows, window assemblies, and openings to a wall, the wall automatically adjusts to accommodate the object and adds endcaps where needed. By default, these objects are anchored to the wall. The objects remain with the wall if you move it. If you remove an object from a wall, the wall repairs itself in the space where the object was located. You can control how the objects are anchored to the start or the end of a wall, within the wall width, and vertically.
Adding a Window to a Wall
Use this procedure to place one or more windows in a wall.
Inserting a window in a wall
1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Insert Window. 2 Specify the settings for the window.
For more information about adding windows, see "Creating a Window with User-Specified Settings" on page 1016. 3 Specify an insertion point along the wall. 4 Continue to place windows in the wall, and press ENTER.
Adding an Opening to a Wall
Use this procedure to place one or more openings in a wall.
Adding Objects to Walls | 663
Inserting an opening in a wall
1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Insert Opening. 2 Specify the settings for the opening.
For more information about adding openings, see "Creating an Opening with User-Specified Settings" on page 1068. 3 Specify an insertion point along the wall. 4 Continue to place openings in the wall, and press ENTER.
Adding a Door to a Wall
Use this procedure to place one or more doors in a wall. Inserting a door in a wall
1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Insert Door. 2 Specify the settings for the door.
For more information about adding doors, see "Creating a Door" on page 962. 3 Specify an insertion point along the wall. 4 Continue to place doors in the wall, and press ENTER.
Adding a Door/Window Assembly to a Wall
Use this procedure to place one or more door/window assemblies in a wall. Inserting a door/window assembly in a wall
1 Select a wall, right-click, and click Insert Door/Window Assembly. 2 Specify the settings for the door/window assembly.
664 | Chapter 17 Walls
3 Specify an insertion point along the wall. 4 Continue to place door/window assemblies in the wall, and press ENTER.
Removing Windows, Openings, Doors, or Door/Window Assemblies from a Wall
Select the objects you want remove from the wall, and press DELETE. The wall repairs itself where the objects were located.
Anchoring an Object to a Wall
Use this procedure to move objects to a different wall by anchoring the objects. An anchored object is constrained by the wall. You can move the object along the wall, but the object does not move from the wall unless you detach the object. Objects anchored to walls follow connected wall segments. The center of the bottom face of the object is anchored to the insertion point on the bottom face of the wall, which is midway in the wall width. NOTE By default, doors, openings, windows, and window assemblies are anchored to the walls these objects are added to.
1 Select the object to attach to the wall, right-click, and click Wall Anchor Set Wall. 2 Select the wall to attach the object to.
Detaching Objects from a Wall
Use this procedure to detach an object that is anchored to a wall. When you detach an object, the object is no longer constrained by the wall and can be moved off the wall.
Select the object to release from the wall, right-click, and click Wall Anchor Release. The object remains in place but is no longer constrained to the wall. The wall no longer cleans up around the object.
Creating Special Conditions and Customized Wall Surfaces
Wall sweeps, wall (plan) modifiers, body modifiers, and interference conditions are features that you can use to create special conditions, such as chases, and to customize wall surfaces. Wall Sweeps Created from Profiles A wall sweep is a wall or a wall component whose shape is extruded horizontally from a profile that was created from a closed polyline. The profile "sweeps" along the length of the wall to define the shape of the wall or the wall component. Profile and resulting wall sweep
Wall (Plan) Modifiers Created from Polylines Wall modifiers use the two-dimensional (2D) geometry of an open polyline to customize the shape of a wall or a wall component. To use wall modifiers, you draw a polyline in the shape you need and create a wall modifier style from the polyline. You can then add wall modifiers of that style to any wall.
Removing Windows, Openings, Doors, or Door/Window Assemblies from a Wall | 665
Polyline and resulting wall modifier
Body Modifiers Created from 3D Objects Body modifiers use the three-dimensional (3D) geometry of an object, such as a mass element or a mass group, to add to, subtract from, or completely replace one component in a wall. If the wall has only one component, the body modifier applies to the entire wall. If the wall has multiple components, the modifier applies only to the component that you specify.
Barrel Vault mass element and resulting body modifier subtracted from a wall
Interference Conditions Created from 3D Objects Interference conditions use the geometry of 3D objects to create custom openings or cutouts in walls. You can specify how the interference condition is applied to the wall: added to the wall, subtracted to the wall, or ignored. Interference conditions apply to all wall components that the interfering object touches. The wall stops at the interference condition. The way in which you apply the interference condition to the wall determines how the shrinkwrapping of the wall is affected by the condition in plan view. In model views, the interference condition is always subtractive, regardless of the shrinkwrapping option you selected. When you edit the object that acts as the interference condition, the wall changes to accommodate the changes to the geometry of the object. For example, you can move the interfering object to change its location on the wall.
A Cylinder mass element added as an additive interference condition
Working with Wall Sweeps
A wall sweep is a wall or a wall component whose shape is extruded horizontally from a profile that was created from a closed polyline. The profile "sweeps" along the length of the wall to define the shape of the wall. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the height and the width of the wall component.The profile is not scaled when swept on the wall. The insertion point of the profile becomes the lower-left corner of the wall component. After you create wall sweeps, you can miter wall sweeps that meet at a corner. You can also change how the sweep is applied to the wall:
You can edit the geometry that defines a sweep. You can assign a sweep profile to a different wall component. You can adjust the miter angles at each end of a wall that has a sweep profile. You can remove a sweep profile from a wall or a wall component.
666 | Chapter 17 Walls
Creating a Profile for a Wall Sweep Use this procedure to create a profile from a closed polyline. You can then sweep the profile along the length of a wall or a wall component to create a wall with a custom shape. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the height and the width of the wall component. The profile is not scaled when swept on the wall. The insertion point of the profile becomes the lower-left corner of the wall component. You can also define the shape of a wall sweep as you add it to a wall, using the Start from Scratch option. You may find that option easier to use because you can define the shape in place on the wall. You may want to separately create a profile as described in this procedure if the shape is highly complex or contains many arcs.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the shape needed for the resulting wall component. 2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Specify the insertion point of the profile.
The point you specify becomes the lower-left corner of the wall component. 4 Press ENTER. 5 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
You can now use the profile as a wall sweep to replace a wall component. For more information, see "Adding a Sweep to a Wall" on page 667. Adding a Sweep to a Wall Use this procedure to create a custom wall or a wall component by defining its shape from a profile. You can create the profile as you add it to a wall. However, if the shape you need is elaborate and has curved segments, you may find it easier to create the profile from a polyline first. You can then add the profile to the wall. For more information, see "Creating a Profile for a Wall Sweep" on page 667. Adding a sweep profile to a wall
1 Select the walls to sweep, right-click, and click Sweeps Add. 2 Select the component to which to apply the sweep. 3 Select the profile to use for the sweep.
If you want to define the sweep after you apply it to the component, select Start from scratch, and enter a name for the profile.
Working with Wall Sweeps | 667
Specifying settings for a wall sweep
4 Specify how the sweep is applied to the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
apply existing roof line or floor line conditions to the sweep select Apply Roof/Floor Lines to Sweeps.
use the geometry of the sweep to define the roof line and the floor line
clear Apply Roof/Floor Lines to Sweeps.
miter the intersection of the wall containing the sweep and select Miter Selected Walls. other walls
prevent mitering the intersection of the wall containing the clear Miter Selected Walls. You can miter the walls later, if
sweep and other walls
needed. You can also adjust the miter angles.
change the geometry of the sweep when it is applied to the select Continue Editing. For more information about editing
wall
the profile, see "Editing the Geometry of a Wall Sweep" on
page 668.
use the existing geometry of the profile to define the sweep clear Continue Editing.
5 Click OK.
TIP To create additional walls with the same sweep condition, select the wall with the sweep, right-click, and click Add Selected. Add walls with the sweep condition where you need them in the drawing.
Editing the Geometry of a Wall Sweep Use this procedure to change the shape of a wall component that was defined with a wall sweep. You can select a different profile to change the appearance of the sweep, or you can edit the current profile. If you want to remove a wall sweep, apply the sweep to a different wall component, or change how the sweep cleans up with intersecting walls, see "Managing Wall Sweeps" on page 673.
Use this procedure to display wall sweep edit in-place grips
1 Select the wall that has the sweep you want to change, right-click, and click Sweeps Edit Profile in Place. 2 Select a location on the wall where the shape of the sweep will be convenient to edit.
A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the sweep.
668 | Chapter 17 Walls
Viewing Wall Sweep Edit In Place Grips
Offsetting an edit in-place wall sweep profile edge
Use this procedure to offset an edit in-place wall sweep profile edge 1 Select the wall that has the sweep you want to change, right-click, and click Sweeps Edit Profile in Place. 2 Select a location on the wall where the shape of the sweep will be convenient to edit. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the sweep. 3 Select the Edge grip and specify a new grip location. The wall sweep profile now has a offset edge. Working with Wall Sweeps | 669
Adding a vertex to an edit in-place wall sweep profile edge
Use this procedure to add a vertex to an edit in-place wall sweep profile edge 1 Select the wall that has the sweep you want to change, right-click, and click Sweeps Edit Profile in Place. 2 Select a location on the wall where the shape of the sweep will be convenient to edit. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the sweep. 3 Select the Edge grip, press CTRL and specify a new grip location. The wall sweep profile now has a new edge vertex.
Converting an edit in-place wall sweep profile edge to an arc
Use this procedure to convert an edit in-place wall sweep profile edge to an arc 1 Select the wall that has the sweep you want to change, right-click, and click Sweeps Edit Profile in Place. 2 Select a location on the wall where the shape of the sweep will be convenient to edit.
670 | Chapter 17 Walls
A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the sweep. 3 Select the Edge grip, press CTRL twice, and specify a new grip location.
The wall sweep profile edge is now an arc.
1 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
Moving an edit in-place wall sweep vertex
Edit the profile: If you want to ... change the location of the sweep
Then ... select the Insertion Point grip, and move it to the desired position.
Working with Wall Sweeps | 671
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the shape of the perimeter of the profile or its rings select the profile, and use grips to adjust the shape.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
add vertices to the profile
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
remove vertices from the profile
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
replace an existing ring of the profile with new geometry
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Select the ring to replace, and select the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
add a ring to the profile to subtract an area from the profile
draw the linework in place on the temporary profile. Select the profile, right-click, and click Add Ring. Select the geometry to define the ring. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
remove a ring from the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Ring. Select the ring to remove, and press ENTER. This option does not appear if the profile has only one ring.
2 Save or discard the changes: If you want to ... restore the sweep to its original shape save the changes to the current profile
save the changes to a new profile
Then ...
click
.
click
.The sweep uses the edited profile to define its
geometry. Any other objects or styles that use this profile are
also updated with the edited geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Profile. Enter a name for the new profile, and click OK. The sweep uses the new profile to define its geometry. Other styles or objects that use the original profile are not affected.
672 | Chapter 17 Walls
Mitering Walls with Sweeps Use this procedure to miter intersecting walls whose shape is defined by a wall sweep.
NOTE If you miter the end of walls, no endcaps are drawn.
1 Select a wall with a sweep that you want to miter, right-click, and click Sweeps Miter. 2 Select the second wall.
To adjust the angles of the mitered walls, see "Managing Wall Sweeps" on page 673.
Managing Wall Sweeps Use this procedure to edit or remove a wall sweep from an individual wall. You can change the component the sweep is applied to. You can also change the miter angles at each end of the sweep and the offsets in the wall.
1 Double-click the wall you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets. 3 Select the setting for Sweeps. 4 Select a wall sweep, and change its settings:
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the profile used to define the geometry of the sweep select a different profile for Profile.
apply the sweep to a different wall component
select a different component for Component.
change the miter angles at each end of the wall
enter different values for Start Miter and End Miter.
offset the sweep within the wall
enter a value for Offset Within.
vertically offset the sweep
enter a value for Offset Vertical.
delete the sweep from the wall component
click .
5 Click OK.
Working with Wall Modifiers
Wall modifiers (also called plan modifiers) use the two-dimensional (2D) geometry of an open polyline to customize the shape of a wall or a wall component. To use wall modifiers, you draw a polyline in the shape you need and create a wall modifier style from the polyline. You can then add wall modifiers of that style to any wall. A wall can have more than one wall modifier attached to it.
Placing a Wall Modifier on a Wall
You specify the placement of a wall modifier, including its vertical and horizontal position and its depth. The wall modifier can be added at the drawn size of the polyline or scaled to a specific size. The wall modifier is then extruded vertically along the wall surface.
You can add the wall modifier to one or both sides of the wall. When you select the face, you can also offset the wall modifier from the opposite face to create a bump-out, such as for pipe chases or interior columns.
Working with Wall Modifiers | 673
Applying wall modifiers to a wall
Editing a Wall Modifier After placing a wall modifier, you can adjust its placement, or assign the modifier to a different wall component. You can also edit the geometry of the wall modifier, and save the changes to the current wall modifier style or to a new style. Display Properties and Materials for Wall Modifiers Wall modifiers take on the material assignment and the display properties of the wall component they are assigned to. This enables you to use the same wall modifier on different types of walls. Wall Modifier Styles You save the geometry of a wall modifier as a wall modifier style. You can create the style when you add the wall modifier to a wall. You can also create a wall modifier first and then apply it to walls as needed. To create, edit, copy, or purge wall modifier styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452. Converting a Polyline to a Wall Modifier Use this procedure to create a wall modifier from an open polyline. You can draw the polyline in the location for the wall modifier, or you can project the modifier you create to the wall. The polyline cannot be closed. The wall modifier you create is added to the selected wall and is also saved as a wall modifier style that you can apply to other walls.
674 | Chapter 17 Walls
Converting a polyline to a wall modifier
1 Draw the polyline in the shape of the wall modifier.
2 Select a wall to which you want to apply a wall modifier, right-click, and click Plan Modifiers Convert Polyline to Wall Modifier.
3 Select the polyline. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the selected polyline, or enter n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 5 Enter a name for the wall modifier style created from the polyline, and click OK. 6 Select the wall component to which the wall modifier applies. 7 To offset the opposite face of the selected component in the shape of the wall modifier, select Offset
Opposite Face. 8 Specify the vertical position of the modifier on the wall component:
If you want to ... specify the beginning height of the wall modifier
Then ...
enter a value for Start Elevation Offset, and specify whether the offset occurs from the wall top, the wall base height, the wall baseline, or the wall bottom.
specifying the ending height of the wall modifier
enter a value for End Elevation Offset, and specify whether the offset occurs from the wall top, the wall base height, the wall baseline, or the wall bottom.
Enter a negative offset value to specify a location toward the ground.
Working with Wall Modifiers | 675
Placing a wall modifier offset from the wall start point, the wall bottom, and the wall top
9 Click OK. Adding an Existing Wall Modifier to a Wall Use this procedure to add a wall modifier of an existing wall modifier style to a wall. You can apply the modifier to one or both sides of the wall or the component. The left and right sides of the wall are determined from the start and endpoints of the wall. Placing a wall modifier offset from the wall start point, the wall bottom, and the wall top
1 Select the wall to which you want to apply a wall modifier, right-click, and click Plan Modifiers Add. 2 Select the start point for the wall modifier.
After you select the first point, a temporary line is displayed to show you the length of the modifier. 3 Select the endpoint for the modifier. 4 Select the side of the wall to draw the modifier. 5 Enter the depth for the wall modifier. 6 Select the wall modifier style. 7 Select the name of the component to apply the modifier to. 8 To offset the opposite face of the selected component in the shape of the wall modifier, select Offset
Opposite Face.
676 | Chapter 17 Walls
Offsetting a wall modifier from the opposite face of a wall component
9 Specify the vertical position of the modifier on the wall component:
If you want to ... specify the beginning height of the wall modifier
Then ...
enter a value for Start Elevation Offset, and specify whether the offset occurs from the wall top, the wall base height, the wall baseline, or the wall bottom.
specifying the ending height of the wall modifier
enter a value for End Elevation Offset, and specify whether the offset occurs from the wall top, the wall base height, the wall baseline, or the wall bottom.
Enter a negative offset value to specify a location toward the ground. 10 Click OK.
After you add a wall modifier, you can edit its geometry or adjust its placement.
Editing the Geometry of a Wall Modifier
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of a wall modifier that is applied to a wall. You can edit the vertices and edges of the wall modifier or replace the geometry with that of another polyline. You can save the changes to the current wall modifier style or to a new style.
To move a wall modifier horizontally or change the vertical offsets of a wall modifier, see "Changing the Horizontal and Vertical Offsets of a Wall Modifier" on page 678.
1 Select the wall that has the wall modifier you want to change, right-click, and click Plan Modifiers Edit in Place.
2 If prompted that the modifier is not drawn to size, click Yes.
A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the wall modifier. If the wall contains multiple wall modifiers, a profile is created for each wall modifier.
3 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select a profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select a profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
Edit the profile: If you want to ... change the shape of the perimeter of the profile hide one or more edges of the profile (plan view only)
Then ...
select the profile, and use grips to adjust the shape.
select the profile, right-click, and click Hide Edge. Select the edges you want to hide, and press ENTER.
Working with Wall Modifiers | 677
If you want to ... display an edge that you hid add vertices to the profile remove vertices from the profile replace a profile with new geometry
remove a wall modifier
4 Save or discard the changes: If you want to ... restore the wall modifier to its original shape save the changes to the current wall modifier style
save the changes to a new wall modifier style
Then ...
select the profile, right-click, and click Show Edges. Select the edges you want to show, and press ENTER.
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Vertex. Select a point for each new vertex, and press ENTER.
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. Select each vertex to remove, and press ENTER.
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Modifier. Select the modifier to replace, and select a polyline to define the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the polyline in the drawing, or enter y (Yes) to erase it. The start and endpoints of the new polyline must be the same as those for the original wall modifier.
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Modifier. If the wall has multiple wall modifiers, select the wall modifier to remove, and press ENTER.
Then ...
select the profile, and click
.
select the profile, and click
.The wall modifier and the
wall modifier style use the edited profile to define its
geometry. Any other walls that use this wall modifier style
are also updated with the edited geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Wall Modifier Style. Enter a name for the new wall modifier, and click OK. The wall modifier uses the new style to define its geometry. Other walls that use the original style are not affected.
Changing the Horizontal and Vertical Offsets of a Wall Modifier Use this procedure to change the horizontal position of a wall modifier applied to a wall, or to change its vertical position on a wall.
1 Select the wall that has the wall modifier you want to change, right-click, and click Plan Modifiers Edit in Place.
2 If prompted that the modifier is not drawn to size, click Yes. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the wall modifier. If the wall contains multiple wall modifiers, a profile is created for each wall modifier.
NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select a profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select a profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
678 | Chapter 17 Walls
3 Change the placement of the wall modifier:
If you want to ... move the wall modifier horizontally along the wall
Then ...
select the Move grip, and move the grip to reposition the wall modifier. After you select the grip, you can also enter a value to move the wall modifier a specified distance.
position the wall modifier relative to the top of the wall
select an isometric view. Select the Offset from top of wall grip, and move the grip to reposition the wall modifier. After you select the grip, you can also enter a value to move the wall modifier a specified distance from the top of the wall.
position the wall modifier relative to the bottom of the wall
select an isometric view. Select the Offset from bottom of wall grip, and move the grip to reposition the wall modifier. After you select the grip, you can also enter a value to move the wall modifier a specified distance from the bottom of the wall.
4 If necessary, continue editing the wall modifier as described in "Editing the Geometry of a Wall Modifier" on page 677.
5 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ... restore the wall modifier to its original position
Then ...
save the changes to the current wall modifier style
select the profile, and click
.
save the changes to a new wall modifier style
select the profile, and click
The wall modifier and the
wall modifier style use the edited profile to define its
geometry. Any other walls that use this wall modifier style
are also updated with the edited geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Wall Modifier Style. Enter a name for the new wall modifier, and click OK. The wall modifier uses the new style to define its geometry. Other walls that use the original style are not affected.
Adjusting the Placement of a Wall Modifier
Use this procedure to adjust the placement of a wall modifier that you added to a wall. You can also add or remove wall modifiers using this procedure. You can also graphically adjust the placement of a wall modifier. For more information, see "Changing the Horizontal and Vertical Offsets of a Wall Modifier" on page 678.
To edit the shape of a wall modifier, see "Editing the Geometry of a Wall Modifier" on page 677.
Working with Wall Modifiers | 679
Placing a wall modifier offset from the wall start point, the wall bottom, and the wall top
1 Double-click the wall that has the modifier you want to change.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets.
3 Select the setting for Plan Modifiers.
4 Under Style, select the wall modifier you want to change.
5 If needed, select a different modifier style or component name, and specify which sides to apply the modifier to.
6 Enter a value for Start Position Offset and specify whether the offset occurs from the wall start point, the wall endpoint, or the midpoint of the wall. These settings specify the start point of the modifier along the length of the wall. You can enter a negative value to specify an offset in the reverse wall direction.
7 Edit the vertical position of the modifier on the wall component:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify the beginning height of the wall modifier
enter a value for Start Elevation Offset, and specify whether the offset occurs from the wall top, the wall base height, the wall baseline, or the wall bottom.
specifying the ending height of the wall modifier
enter a value for End Elevation Offset, and specify whether the offset occurs from the wall top, the wall base height, the wall baseline, or the wall bottom.
Enter a negative offset value to specify a location toward the ground.
8 Edit settings to control the size and placement of the modifier:
If you want to ...
Then ...
place the modifier at the size it was defined in the modifier select Use Drawn Size. style
specify the length and the depth of the modifier on the wall clear Use Drawn Size, and enter values for Length and Depth.
mirror the modifier in the X direction
select Mirror X.
mirror the modifier in the Y direction
select Mirror Y.
measure the modifier to the center of the wall
select Measure to Center.
9 To remove a modifier, select the modifier, and click .
680 | Chapter 17 Walls
10 Click OK.
Removing Wall Modifiers Use this procedure to remove a wall modifier from an individual wall or a wall component.
NOTE If you offset the modifier to the opposite face of the wall or the wall component when you applied the modifier, you must remove the wall modifier from each face.
1 Select the wall that has the wall modifier you want to remove, right-click, and click Plan Modifiers Remove.
2 Select the modifier.
3 Enter y (Yes) to create a polyline in the shape of the modifier, or enter n if you do not want to create a polyline.
Creating a Wall Modifier Style Use this procedure to create a wall modifier style from a polyline. The shape of the polyline defines the shape of the wall modifier. After you create the style, you can add it to a wall or a component of a wall. To create a wall modifier style and apply it to a wall at the same time, see "Converting a Polyline to a Wall Modifier" on page 674. To edit a wall modifier style, add the wall modifier to a wall, and then edit the geometry of the wall modifier. For more information, see "Adding an Existing Wall Modifier to a Wall" on page 676 and "Editing the Geometry of a Wall Modifier" on page 677.
1 Draw an open polyline in the shape you want to use for the wall modifier.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
3 Expand Architectural Objects.
4 Right-click Wall Modifier Styles, and click New.
5 Enter a name for the new style.
6 Right-click the new style, and click Set From.
7 Select the polyline.
8 Click OK.
Attaching Notes or Files to a Wall Modifier Style Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a wall modifier style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files attached to the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Wall Modifier Styles. 3 Select the wall modifier style that you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
Working with Wall Modifiers | 681
9 Click OK twice.
Working with Body Modifiers
Body modifiers use the three-dimensional (3D) geometry of an object, such as a mass element or a mass group, to add to, subtract from, or completely replace one component in a wall. If the wall has only one component, the body modifier applies to the entire wall. If the wall has multiple components, the modifier applies only to the component that you specify. If you add the body modifier to a wall component, or use a body modifier to replace the component, the body modifier uses the material assignment and display properties of the wall component. After you create a body modifier from an object, you can delete the original object. However, if you have created a complex object, such as a mass group comprising many mass elements, you may want to retain the object in the drawing until you are sure you have the results you want for the wall. Adding a Body Modifier to a Wall Use this procedure to create a body modifier and add it to a wall. You can apply the modifier to a single-component wall, or to a component in a multi-component wall. You can create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. Adding a body modifier to a wall component
1 Place the object in the location where you want to add the body modifier to the wall. 2 Select the wall to which you want to add the body modifier, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to add to the wall. 4 Select the wall component to add the object to. 5 Select Additive or Additive Cut Openings for Operation. 6 Enter a description for the body modifier. 7 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep
the object in the drawing. 8 Click OK. Subtracting a Body Modifier from a Wall Use this procedure to create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier and subtract it from a wall. You can apply the modifier to a single-component wall, or to a component in a multi-component wall. You can create a body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier.
682 | Chapter 17 Walls
Subtracting a body modifier from a wall component
1 Place the object in the location where you want to subtract the body modifier from the wall. 2 Select the wall to which you want to add the body modifier, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to subtract from the wall. 4 Select the wall component to subtract the object from. 5 Select Subtractive for Operation. 6 Enter a description for the body modifier. 7 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep
the object in the drawing. 8 Click OK. Replacing a Wall with a Body Modifier Use this procedure to create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier and replace a wall or a wall component with the modifier. You can apply the modifier to a single-component wall, or to a selected component in a multi-component wall. You can create a 3D body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. Replacing a wall component with a body modifier
1 Place the object in the location where you want to replace the wall with the body modifier.
Working with Body Modifiers | 683
2 Select the wall to which you want to replace with the body modifier, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Add.
3 Select the object to replace the wall or wall component.
4 Select the wall component you want the object to replace.
5 Select Replace for Operation.
6 Enter a description for the body modifier.
7 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep the object in the drawing.
8 Click OK.
Editing the Geometry of a Body Modifier Use this procedure to edit the shape of a body modifier that is attached to a wall. You can edit the body using grips to edit faces, using Boolean commands to add or remove other objects from the body modifier, and other editing commands to change its shape.
1 Select the wall that has the body modifier you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Edit in Place. A temporary mass element is created for you to edit the geometry of the body modifier. If the wall contains multiple body modifiers, a mass element is created for each body modifier. If object was not originally a mass element (for example, if you used a slab as a body modifier), the object becomes a temporary Free Form mass element with faces that you can edit.
NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select a profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select a profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2 Edit the body modifier:
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the shape of a body modifier that is a Free Form mass select the body modifier. Select a Face grip to activate edge
element
grips for the face. Move the grips to the desired locations.
Continue editing other faces in the same manner.
change the shape of a body modifier that is a conventional mass element
select the body modifier. Select grips and move them to change the shape of the body modifier. The grips that are available depend on the type of mass element used as a body modifier and the current view direction.
add an object to a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Union. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
subtract an object from a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Subtract. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
create a body modifier that is the intersection of the original body modifier with another object
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Intersect. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
trim a body modifier
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Trim. Specify the points that define the trim plane, and select the side of the body modifier to be trimmed. The trimmed body modifier is converted to a Free Form mass element.
684 | Chapter 17 Walls
If you want to ...
Then ...
divide the face of a body modifier into two faces
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Split Face. Specify the points that define the edge created by splitting the faces.
join two faces that are on the same plane into a single face select the body modifier, right-click, and click Join Faces. Select the edge that separates the coplanar faces.
remove a body modifier
select the object that forms the body modifier, and press DELETE.
3 Save or discard the changes: If you want to ... restore the body modifier to its original shape
save the changes to the body modifier
Then ...
select the body modifier, and click
.
select the body modifier, and click
. The body modifier
uses the edited mass element to define its geometry.
Managing Body Modifiers Use this procedure to edit or remove three-dimensional (3D) body modifiers from an individual wall. You can change the component the body modifier is added to and select a different operation. You can also enter or edit the descriptions of body modifiers.
NOTE To remove a body modifier from a wall component and restore the modifier as a mass element that you can edit or apply to other walls, see "Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element" on page 686.
1 Double-click the wall you want to change. 2 Expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets. 3 Click the setting for Body modifiers. 4 Select a body modifier, and change its settings:
If you want to ... apply the body modifier to a different wall component
Then ... select a different component for Component.
change the operation used to apply the body modifier to the wall
select a different operation for Operation: Select Additive or Additive Cut Openings to add the body modifier to the wall component.
Select Subtract to subtract the shape of the body modifier from the wall component.
Select Replace to replace the wall component with the body modifier.
delete the body modifier from the wall component enter a description of the body modifier
select the body modifier, and click . click Description, enter text, and press ENTER.
5 Click OK.
Working with Body Modifiers | 685
Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element
Use this procedure to remove a body modifier from a wall and add it to the drawing as a mass element. Restoring a body modifier to a mass element enables you to modify the shape as a mass element and then add it to the wall again as a body modifier. You can also restore the body modifier to a mass element while leaving the body modifier still applied to the wall. This is useful if you want to create other walls with the same shape.
If the object used to create the body modifier was a conventional mass element, it is restored to that mass element. For example, a Gable mass element is restored as a Gable mass element. However, if the body modifier was created from another object, such as a slab, or was edited using Boolean operations or face editing commands, the body modifier is restored as a Free Form mass element.
1 Select the walls you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Restore.
2 NOTE This procedure restores all body modifiers attached to a wall.
Create mass elements from the body modifiers:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create mass elements from the body modifiers while keeping press ENTER. the body modifiers attached to the wall
remove all body modifiers from the wall, and create mass elements from their shapes
enter y (Yes), and press ENTER.
Working with Interference Conditions
Interference conditions use the geometry of three-dimensional (3D) objects to create custom openings or cutouts in walls. You can specify how the interference condition is applied to the shrinkwrapping of a wall: added to the wall, subtracted to the wall, or ignored.
How Interference Conditions Affect the Display of Walls
Unlike wall modifiers and body modifiers, which apply to a selected wall component, interference conditions apply to all wall components that the interfering object touches. The wall stops at the interference condition. The way in which you apply the interference condition to the wall determines how the shrinkwrapping of the wall is affected by the condition in plan view:
Add the interference condition to include the condition in the shrinkwrapping.
Subtract the interference condition to exclude the object from the shrinkwrapping.
Ignore the interference condition to draw the shrinkwrapping as if the object were not there. You also use the ignore option to add interference conditions applied to one wall to subsequent walls.
In model views, the interference condition is always subtractive, regardless of the shrinkwrapping option you selected.
686 | Chapter 17 Walls
Editing Interference Conditions
When you edit the object that acts as the interference condition, the wall changes to accommodate the changes to the geometry of the object. For example, you can move the interfering object to change its location on the wall. Moving the object off the wall does not remove the interference condition for the object.
You can also change how interference conditions are applied to a wall, and you can delete interference conditions.
Adding an Interference Condition
Use this procedure to place objects, such as mass elements, in walls to create custom openings or cutouts in the wall. An example is a column grid structure where columns are connected by walls.
When you define the interference condition, you specify how the wall shrinkwrapping in plan views is affected by the interfering object. You can specify that the object be added to the wall, subtracted from it, or ignored. The option you select affects the wall only in plan views. In model display representations, interference is always subtracted from a wall, regardless of the option you select in this procedure.
NOTE If you want to apply the same object as the interference condition for multiple walls, such as walls that meet at a corner, use the ignore option for subsequent walls after the first wall. In plan views, the effect is additive for all the walls to which you apply the interference condition.
The shrinkwrap display component must be turned on in the display properties of the wall or the wall style for interference to be visible. In most sample wall styles provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, shrinkwrap is turned on in plan display representations. For more information about specifying shrinkwrapping for a wall style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on page 699.
1 Place the object in the location where you want to specify the interference condition.
2 Select the wall you want to add an interference to, right-click, and click Interference Condition Add.
3 Select the object intersecting the wall, and press ENTER.
4 Specify how shrinkwrapping in plan view is applied to the interference condition:
If you want to ... add the interference condition to the shrinkwrapping
Then ... enter a (Additive).
take the object shape out of the shrinkwrapping
enter s (Subtractive).
ignore the object when shrinkwrapping is applied
enter i (Ignore).
Removing an Interference Condition Use this procedure to remove an object that was added to a wall as an interference condition.
1 Select the walls you want to change, right-click, and click Interference Condition Remove. 2 Select one or more objects to remove, and press ENTER. 3 Enter r (Remove) to continue removing interference conditions from other walls, or press ENTER to end the
command.
Managing Wall Interference Conditions Use this procedure to change the shrinkwrap effect for an interference condition, or to remove an interference condition from a wall.
1 Double-click a wall with interference conditions. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets. 3 Click the setting for Interference conditions. 4 Select an interference condition.
Working with Interference Conditions | 687
5 In the Shrinkwrap Effect column, specify the way shrinkwrap is applied to the interference object:
If you want to ... add the interference condition to the shrinkwrapping
Then ... select Add.
take the object shape out of the shrinkwrapping
select Subtract.
ignore the object when shrinkwrapping is applied
select Ignore.
6 To delete the interference condition, select the condition, and click . 7 Click OK.
Wall Styles
Wall styles control the appearance of wall objects. Using wall styles, you can specify dimensions, components, endcaps, materials, and other characteristics to create new types of walls, such as concrete walls, masonry walls, and brick cavity walls. Catalogs provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop include sample wall styles for common wall types, such as concrete walls with footings or furring, CMU and brick cavity walls, and various stud partition walls.
Wall styles that use various components
Using Materials in Wall Styles
You can use materials to control how walls of each style are displayed in a drawing. You assign materials to the wall components in the style. The components are then displayed using the display properties of the assigned materials. Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a large number of predefined materials for common design purposes. You can use these materials, modify them for your project requirements, and define new materials. For more information about materials and how to define them, see "Materials" on page 464.
Creating Tools from Wall Styles
You can create a wall tool from any wall style. You can drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify default settings for any walls created from the tool. For more information, see "Creating a Wall Tool" on page 618.
Managing Wall Styles
To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Wall Style
Use this procedure to create a wall style. By copying an existing style, you can create a style using default style properties. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Wall Styles.
688 | Chapter 17 Walls
3 Create a wall style: If you want to ... create a style with default properties create a style from an existing style
Then ...
right-click Wall Styles, and click New.
right-click the wall style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new wall style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new wall style:
If you want to ...
Then ...
enter a description of the style
click the General tab, and enter a description.
specify the endcap styles used for wall openings and the ends see "Specifying the Endcap Styles Used in a Wall Style"
of walls of the style
on page 690.
specify the structural components of the style
see "Specifying the Components of a Wall Style" on page 690.
specify materials for the components of the style
see "Specifying the Materials of a Wall Style" on page 698.
specify wall hatching, cut plane properties, and other display see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on
properties of the style
page 699.
add classifications to a wall style
see "Adding Classifications to a Wall Style" on page 703.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Style" on page 703.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the wall style, click OK. 7 If you want to assign the style to a wall tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette.
You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Wall Tool" on page 618.
8 Click OK.
Adding Property Set Data to a Wall Style
You can add property set data to a wall style. Property set data is necessary if you want to tag a wall in a drawing later or include it in a schedule table. Property set data typically attached to a wall style are automatic properties, like wall height and wall width, or manual properties that are identical for all walls of that style, like the fire rating. For detailed information about property set data, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Click Property Sets.
6 Click
.
If the Add Property Set button is deactivated, no property sets for wall styles have been defined.
7 Select the property set you want to add to the style, and click OK. The properties in the set are listed in the Edit Property Set Data worksheet.
8 To remove a property set from a style, click
, clear the property set from the list, and click OK.
Adding Property Set Data to a Wall Style | 689
9 Click OK.
Specifying the Endcap Styles Used in a Wall Style
Use this procedure to specify the endcap styles used in a wall style. You can select one wall endcap style that is applied to the start and end of walls of this wall style. You can specify opening endcap styles that are applied separately to doors, openings, windows, and door/window assemblies that are added to walls of this wall style. For more information about creating wall endcap styles and opening endcap styles, see "Wall Endcap Styles" on page 704 and "Opening Endcap Styles" on page 708.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style you want to change. 4 Click the Endcaps/Opening Endcaps tab. 5 Select an endcap style to apply to the ends of the walls for Wall Endcap Style. 6 Select opening endcap styles to apply to each of the following objects: doors, openings, windows, and
door/window assemblies. 7 Click OK.
Specifying the Components of a Wall Style
Wall components are the physical structures of the components of a wall, such as concrete, CMU, studs, GWB, insulation, and air gaps.
Wall Components and Their Properties
Each component in a wall style corresponds to a structural component of a wall or a wall material, including air gaps in cavity walls. When you create a wall component, you specify the following characteristics of the component:
The component name, which usually identifies the material used, such as brick, concrete, CMU, or insulation The component cleanup priority, which determines how the component cleans up with the components of
intersecting walls The width (thickness) of the component The vertical offset of the component at the bottom and the top of the wall The position of the component within the wall, relative to the baseline of the wall and adjacent wall components The function of the component within the wall. Possible functions are structural and non-structural components. The position of dimension points on the component. Wall components can be dimensioned to the left and right
edges and to the component center.
Using Components from Other Wall Styles
In addition to creating a wall component by specifying its individual properties, you can also copy components from other wall styles into a wall style. The Wall Component Browser is a utility that lets you view the components of other wall styles and copy components into the wall style you are editing.
Dimensioning Wall Components
Each wall component can be dimensioned separately. In the wall style, you define the settings for the dimensioning of the components. A wall component can be dimensioned to its left and right edges, or to its center. Wall components can be assigned a structural or non-structural function. When the wall is dimensioned, you can choose to dimension all components, or only structural components.
NOTE Additional settings for dimensioning wall components can be set in the AEC dimension style. Here, you can dimension a multi-component wall to its entire width and to the overall wall center. For more information, see "Dimension Points for Walls" on page 1743 and "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777.
690 | Chapter 17 Walls
Components Tab The Components tab of the Wall Styles dialog box lets you view wall components as you specify them.
Specifying the properties of wall components
Use the features of the Components tab for the following tasks:
Add, remove, and edit the properties of wall components for wall style. View the components as you specify them. Change the order of components relative to other components in the wall style. Access the Wall Style Components Browser, which lets you view and copy components from other wall styles in
the current drawing and in other drawings.
Wall Style Components Browser
The Wall Style Components Browser is a utility that lets you view and copy wall components from wall styles in the current drawing and in other drawings. You can copy components from these styles to the current wall style. After you add them to the wall style, you can change their properties as needed for the style you are editing.
Viewing wall components from multiple styles and drawings
The Wall Style Components Browser has the following features:
Use this feature ... icons
To ...
open other drawings, copy wall components, and change the view options for the right pane of the browser.
Specifying the Components of a Wall Style | 691
Use this feature ... tree structure in the left pane of the browser
right pane of the browser
To ...
expand wall styles to view the list of components in the style. Select a wall style in the left pane to view the properties of its components and see the wall style in the right pane. You can use the shortcut menu to copy an individual component or all components of a selected style. You can then paste the component(s) in the style you are editing.
view the component properties of a selected style, and preview the style in the viewer area of the pane.
Default Cleanup Priorities of Wall Components The component priority determines how each wall component cleans up with the components of an intersecting wall. The lower the component index number, the higher the priority of the component when it intersects other walls.
Wall cleanup priorities
The following table lists the default cleanup priority for each component used in sample wall styles provided in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop catalogs. You can assign different priorities to wall components in wall styles and
individual walls to control cleanup with other walls.
Component Air Gap Air Gap (Brick/Brick) Air Gap (CMU/CMU) Air Gap (Stud/Stud) Brick Brick Veneer Bulkhead Casework - Backsplash Casework - Base Casework - Counter Casework - Upper CMU CMU Veneer Concrete Concrete (Footing) Glass GWB GWB (X)
Index 700 805 305 505 800 810 1800 2030 2010 2020 2000 300 350 200 200 1200 1200 1200,1210,1220,1230
692 | Chapter 17 Walls
Component Insulation (CMU/Brick, Stud/Brick) Metal Panel Precast Panel Rigid Insulation (Brick) Siding Stucco Stud Toilet Partition
Index 600 1000 400 404 900 1100 500 3000
Creating or Editing a Component in a Wall Style Use this procedure to create a wall component, or to edit existing wall components in a wall style.
You can also add components to a wall style by copying them from other wall styles. For more information, see "Adding a Component from Another Wall Style" on page 694.
NOTE Only the first 20 components of a wall style are controlled by the display system. Although you can specify more than 20 components in a wall style, it is suggested that you limit the number of components to 20. Components 21 and higher are controlled by material assignment only.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Components tab.
5 Click
.
6 Enter a name for the new component.
7 Enter the cleanup priority for the component when walls intersect.
The lower the priority number, the higher the priority of the component when it intersects with the components of other walls. For more information, see "Default Cleanup Priorities of Wall Components" on page 692.
8 Specify the width of the component:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify a fixed width that cannot be edited when you add or enter a value for Width. edit walls of this style
specify a variable width that can be edited when you add or edit walls of this style
select the setting for Width. Enter a formula that defines how the component width is calculated. For more information, see "Specifying the Width and Edge Offset of a Wall Component" on page 712.
Adding the first wall component
Specifying the Components of a Wall Style | 693
9 Specify the edge offset, which is the offset of the exterior edge of the component from the baseline:
If you want to ... graphically specify the offset
Then ...
select the component, select
or
to offset the
component by an increment that you specify. The viewer
shows the position of the wall component as you click the
icons. The selected component is highlighted in green.
let the software calculate the offset
select Auto Calculate Edge Offset.
specify a fixed offset
enter a value for Edge Offset.
specify a variable offset that is calculated from values that you specify
select the setting for Edge Offset. Enter a formula that defines how the edge offset is calculated for this component. For more information, see "Specifying the Width and Edge Offset of a Wall Component" on page 712.
10 To specify the top elevation offset or bottom elevation offset, enter a new value, and select from where the distance is to be measured: Wall Top, Base Height, Baseline, or Wall Bottom.
NOTE Do not define wall components with elevation offsets that are above Wall Top or below Wall Bottom. Walls that have components that are defined this way do not clean up correctly and may not be displayed correctly if you edit their roof line or floor line. To avoid cleanup and display problems, you can define wall components with elevation offsets that are above Base Height or below Baseline.
11 Repeat steps 5 through 10 to add more components to the wall style. Adding the second wall component
12 To change the order of components in the wall style, select a wall component, and click or to move the component to the desired position relative to the other wall components.
13 Click OK.
Adding a Component from Another Wall Style Use this procedure to copy one or more wall components from another wall style into the wall style you are editing.
NOTE Only the first 20 components of a wall style are controlled by the display system. Although you can specify more than 20 components in a wall style, it is suggested that you limit the number of components to 20. Components 21 and higher are controlled by material assignment only.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Components tab.
694 | Chapter 17 Walls
5 Click
.
The Wall Style Components Browser lists the wall styles and their components in the current drawing.
6 Locate the wall components you want to copy:
If you want to ...
view the wall components for wall styles in the current drawing
Then ...
in the left pane, select a wall style. The right pane lists the components and their properties and displays the style in the viewer.
view the wall components in wall styles in other drawings
click
. Navigate to the drawing you want, and click
Open. In the left pane, select a wall style.
close a drawing that you opened in the browser
select the drawing name, right-click, and click Close. You cannot close the current drawing.
For more information about the information shown in the Wall Styles Component Browser, see "Specifying the Components of a Wall Style" on page 690.
7 Copy wall components, and add them to the wall style you are editing:
If you want to ...
Then ...
copy all components in a wall style
select the wall style, and drag the style to the list of components in the Wall Styles Properties dialog box. All the components are added to the wall style.
copy an individual wall component
select the wall component, and drag the component to the list of components in the Wall Styles Properties dialog box. The component you selected is added to the wall style.
8 Click
to close the Wall Style Components Browser.
9 After you copy wall components to the current wall style, you can edit or delete the new components as needed.
For more information, see "Creating or Editing a Component in a Wall Style" on page 693.
10 Click OK.
Defining the Dimension Settings for Wall Components
You have various options for dimensioning individual wall components. In the wall style, you can define the dimension settings for each individual wall component. Each component can be dimensioned to one or both of its edges, as well as to the component center. You also can select to not dimension a specific component at all.
Component side to dimension: In the wall style, you can define for each wall component whether it should be dimensioned to its positive or negative side, or to the center of the component. The positive and negative sides of a wall are determined by the direction in which the wall is drawn: if you draw a wall from left to right, the positive side is the left (top). If you draw a wall from the right side to the left, then the positive side is the right (bottom). If you determine that a wall component is only dimensioned to one side, you can select either the positive or negative side of the wall
Specifying the Components of a Wall Style | 695
. Structural Function: You can define a wall component as structural or non-structural. When you set up the AEC
dimension style you can define that only structural wall components, or all wall components should be dimensioned.
Alternatively, you can select to dimension a multi-component wall not to each individual component, but to the overall wall width or the overall wall center. You set these points in the AEC dimension style, as described in "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777. In the AEC dimension style you can define the following additional or overriding settings for dimensioning wall components:
By Style: the dimension points selected in the wall style are used to dimension the wall components width. Structural by Style: the dimension points specified for the structural components of the wall style are used. Overall: the overall width of the wall is dimensioned. Center: the center of the wall is dimensioned.
NOTE The ability to define a wall component as structural or non-structural is new to this release of Autodesk Architectural Desktop. In legacy multi-component wall styles, all wall components will by default be marked as unspecified.
696 | Chapter 17 Walls
Defining the dimensioning of components
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Components tab. 5 Define if the positive and negative sides of the wall should be an interior or exterior wall side by selecting
Interior or Exterior for (+) and (-). 6 To define an offset for a wall component, select the component in the list view, and enter a value for Offset
Increment. Alternatively, you can use the arrow keys.
7 Under Function, select if the component is a structural component or a non-structural one. This distinction is important when creating a dimension style for a multi-component wall, as you can define in the dimension style that it only dimensions structural components. You can also leave the component function as unspecified. Legacy wall styles from previous versions of Autodesk Architectural Desktop will by default have an unspecified component function. You can change that as necessary.
8 To specify the dimension settings for a wall component, verify that the component is selected in the list view.
NOTE The component selected is highlighted in the graphic on the left.
9 Under Dimension, select if the component should be dimensioned to one side, to both sides, or to the center of the component.
To dimension the component only to one side check the mark under
or
whether you want to dimension the component to the left or right side.
depending on
If you want to dimension the component to both sides, check both marks for
and
.
If you want to dimension the component to its center, check the mark for
.
10 Click OK to finish setting up component dimensioning in the wall style.
For information on creating a dimension style for wall components, see "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777.
Specifying the Components of a Wall Style | 697
Removing a Component from a Wall Style Use this procedure to delete a component from a wall style. When you remove a component from a wall style, the component is also removed from all existing walls that use this style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Components tab.
5 Select the wall component you want to remove, and click
.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Wall Style
A wall consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component. When you assign materials to a wall style, you assign one material to each physical component of the wall. For example, you assign a wood or metal material to studs, concrete to a concrete component, and so on. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
If you want to use the display properties of the wall style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the wall style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in three dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
Wall Materials and Display Components
The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each wall component.
Wall Component Plan, Plan Low Detail, Plan High Detail, Plan Presentation, Plan Screened Below Cut Plane Above Cut Plane Shrink Wrap Shrink Wrap Hatch Defect Warning Boundary 1 - 20 Hatch 1 - 20 Reflected, Reflected Screened Below Cut Plane Above Cut Plane Shrink Wrap Shrink Wrap Hatch Defect Warning Boundary 1 - 20 Hatch 1 - 20 Model, Model High Detail, Model Low Detail Defect Warning Shrinkwrap Body
Material Component
No Material No Material 2D Linework Plan Hatch No Material Plan Linework Plan Hatch
No Material No Material 2D Linework Plan Hatch No Material Plan Linework Plan Hatch
No Material 3D Body
698 | Chapter 17 Walls
Wall Component Boundary 1 - 20 Sketch Baseline Marker Center Line Graph Radius Edge
Material Component 3D Body
No Material No Material No Material
No Material No Material
Assigning Materials to a Wall Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a wall style. When you assign a material to a wall component, the component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the wall. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, all structural components, such as brick and other masonry, studs, insulation, and air gaps, are physical components that you can assign materials. The defect marker is a symbol, and you cannot assign a material to it.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a wall component, you can change the display properties of the wall style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style" on page 699.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style
In most cases, you can assign materials to wall components so that the appearance of walls that belong to the same style is consistent throughout a drawing and with other walls and objects that use the same materials.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style | 699
If a component cannot be assigned a material, or if you do not want to use materials but still want consistency among walls of the same style, you can specify the display properties of the wall components in the wall style:
The layer, color, and linetype of wall components The hatching used with each component The cut plane height and the display of components relative to the cut plane Other specific wall display information, such as whether complex endcaps are displayed and whether the wall is
cut around door and window frames
Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Wall Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of a wall style:
Visibility (component is on or off) By material (material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
To change these display properties for an individual wall, see "Changing the Display Properties of Individual Walls" on page 648.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the display properties of components in the wall style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material. You can also override the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Wall Style" on page 699.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Wall Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of a wall style. Wall hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click .
700 | Chapter 17 Walls
7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Select a component, and click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching for the component:
If you want to ... select a hatching pattern that is available in the software
Then ... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to ...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
Then ... select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
14 Click OK.
Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Wall Style Use this procedure to specify the properties of one or more cut planes for a wall style. Cut plane display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
To better visualize the elements of a wall in plan view, you can create cut planes. The main cut plane is where the shrinkwrap and hatching are applied. The plan display shows the components and objects in the wall as they are displayed at the height of each cut plane.
The cut plane settings you specify in the wall style override the cut plane settings in any display configuration applied to a viewport. When you add doors, windows, openings, or door/window assemblies to a wall, you can specify in the display properties of those objects or their styles whether they respect the cut plane of the wall or of the display configuration.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool.
2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles.
3 Select the wall style that you want to change.
4 Click the Display Properties tab.
5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Cut Plane tab. 8 Select Override Display Configuration Cut Plane. 9 To specify the cut plane where shrinkwrap, component boundaries, and hatching take effect, enter a value
for Cut Plane Height. 10 Select Automatically Choose Above and Below Cut Plane Heights to show the components above and
below the cut plane height.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style | 701
11 To specifically define a cut plane, select Manual Above and Below Cut Plane Heights, click Add, and enter the height of the new cut plane.
If you add a cut plane ...
Then ...
at a height that is lower than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Below Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
at a height that is higher than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Above Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
You can click Remove to delete a cut plane that you added. 12 Click OK.
Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Wall Style Use this procedure to specify other display properties for the wall style, such as whether to display complex endcaps, to show door and window frames, or whether to show the miter of specific wall components. These display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select the display properties for the wall style:
If you want to ...
Then ...
display the component lines within the wall above the cut select Display Inner Lines Above. Clear this option if you do plane (for example, through a window or door in the wall) not want to display these lines.
display the component lines within the wall below the cut select Display Inner Lines Below. Clear this option if you do plane (for example, through a window or door in the wall) not want to display these lines.
turn off lines below a window, door or opening at the cut plane
select Hide Lines Below Openings at Cut Plane. Clear this option if you want to display the lines.
turn off lines below a window, door or opening above the cut plane
select Hide Lines Below Openings Above Cut Plane. Clear this option if you want to display the lines.
display complex wall and opening endcaps
select Display Endcaps. Clear this option to display complex endcaps as a single line.
display door openings cutting the wall at the outer edge of select Cut Door Frames. Clear this option if you want door
the door frame
openings to cut the wall at the inside of the door frame.
display window openings cutting the wall at the outer edge select Cut Window Frames. Clear this option if you want
of the window frame
window openings to cut the wall at the inside of the window
frame.
draw wall components by their priority number to control the display of a component over another component
select Component Draw Order by Priority. Clear this option if you want to draw the components in the order that they were created.
702 | Chapter 17 Walls
If you want to ...
Then ...
perform a slice of the actual three-dimensional (3D) model select Do True Cut. Clear this option if the wall does not have
at each cut plane to obtain more accurate views of walls with sweeps or body modifiers, or if they do not change along the
sweeps or body modifiers
height of the wall.
display miter lines at wall corners for selected wall components
under Draw Miter for Components, select each component whose miter lines you want to display.
9 Click OK.
Adding Classifications to a Wall Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a wall style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to wall styles.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current wall style. 6 Click OK.
Defining a Wall Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a wall style that can bound associative spaces. When a wall style is set as bounding, by default all walls that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the wall style in an individual wall, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Wall Styles. 3 Select a wall style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the checkbox for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a wall style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a wall style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the wall style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note.
Adding Classifications to a Wall Style | 703
8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ... attach a reference file
Then ... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Wall Endcap Styles
You can define different wall endcap styles to control the shape, the width and the depth of starting and ending wall segments. Generally, you create a wall endcap style to use with a specific wall style. You create a wall endcap style from one or more open polylines that each correspond to the end condition of a component in the wall style. When necessary, you can override the wall endcap style assigned in a wall style. When you override the assigned endcap style, you can select a different endcap style for one or both ends of a wall segment.
Wall Endcap Styles and Opening Endcap Styles
Wall endcap styles are also used as a basis to define wall opening endcap styles. When a wall has an opening, such as a window or a door, the shape of the wall endcap at each edge of the opening needs to be defined. You use opening endcap styles to specify the wall endcap style applied to each edge. For more information about opening endcap styles, see "Opening Endcap Styles" on page 708.
NOTE When you change a wall endcap style, all opening endcap styles based on the wall endcap style are modified, too.
Managing Wall Endcap Styles
To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
About Polylines Used in Wall Endcap Styles
When you draw polylines to use in wall endcap styles, each polyline corresponds to the shape of the endcap for one wall component. Each polyline is scaled to fit its assigned component. You can assign the same polyline to wall components that you want to have the same endcap condition. Here are some guidelines for drawing polylines to use in endcap styles:
Use only two-dimensional (2D) open polylines. Draw the polylines in plan view. You may want to draw the polylines on top of a wall of the wall style you are
creating the endcaps for. This helps you visualize how the endcap should appear for each component of the wall. Draw each polyline counterclockwise. Ensure that the X value of the start point and the X value of the endpoint of a polyline are the same. If the X values
are different, the endcap will be skewed.
Creating and Applying a Wall Endcap Style
Use this procedure to convert one or more polylines into an endcap, and simultaneously create or modify an endcap style. You place these endcaps on walls by modifying the wall style or applying a wall style override. When you create and apply endcaps as described in this procedure, the wall segment is trimmed or extended to the shape of the endcap and defines a new wall start point. When openings, such as doors and windows, exist in a wall to which you apply an endcap, the end of the wall is trimmed or extended to the endcap without moving the openings.
704 | Chapter 17 Walls
Creating an endcap for a single-component wall
You can use a crossing window to select multiple polylines to create an endcap for a multi-component wall. Creating an endcap for a multi-component wall
NOTE When creating an endcap for multiple component walls that contain components at different elevations, this method of creating and applying endcaps may produce undesirable results. It is based on the cut plane height of the wall and does not respond to manual above or below cut plane heights.
1 In plan view, draw open polylines on top of or near the end of a wall segment to define the shape of the end condition for each wall component.
The location of the polyline determines how the wall is extended or trimmed when the endcap is added or modified. For more information about drawing polylines for endcaps, see "About Polylines Used in Wall Endcap Styles" on page 704.
2 Select the wall, right-click, and click Endcaps Calculate Automatically. 3 Select the polyline(s) to define the shape of the endcap, and press ENTER. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline(s), or enter n (No) to keep the polyline(s).
If the current wall endcap style is not the Standard style, you are prompted to modify the current style.
5 Specify the wall endcap style to modify and apply to the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
modify the wall endcap style that is currently assigned to the press ENTER. The selected wall and any other walls in the
wall
drawing that use the wall endcap style are updated with the
new geometry.
create a different endcap style
enter n (No).
6 If you created a style from the polylines, specify how to apply the new endcap style to the selected wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
apply the new wall endcap style as an override to the current enter o (Override). The new wall endcap style is applied only
wall style
to the selected end of the wall.
apply the new wall endcap style as the default wall endcap style for the current wall style
press ENTER. The same wall style is updated with the new wall endcap style. Any walls in the drawing of the same wall style are also updated with the new wall endcap style.
7 Enter a name for the new wall endcap style, and click OK.
Creating and Applying a Wall Endcap Style | 705
Creating a Wall Endcap Style
Use this procedure to create a wall endcap style from one or more polylines. For more information about drawing polylines for wall endcap styles for single- and multi-component walls, see "About Polylines Used in Wall Endcap Styles" on page 704.
1 Draw polyline(s) in the shape of the wall endcap you want to create. 2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects. 4 Right-click Wall Endcap Styles, and click New. 5 Enter a name for the new wall endcap style, and press ENTER. 6 Right-click the new style, and click Set From. 7 Select a polyline, and enter the index number for the wall component to which the polyline applies.
Wall components are numbered from exterior to interior. Component index 1 corresponds to the outermost exterior component. 8 When prompted, enter y (Yes) to specify the endcap condition of the next component, or enter n (No) if there are no more components. 9 When you finish specifying endcap conditions for wall components, enter the return offset for the endcap. A positive value offsets the endcap from the wall start point in the positive X direction. Specifying the return offset for an endcap
10 Click OK. After you create a wall endcap style, you can apply it to a wall style, an opening endcap style, or to individual walls.
About Editing Wall Endcap Styles
After you assign a wall endcap style to a wall, you can edit the endcap directly. You can save the changes to the current wall endcap style, or to a new wall endcap style. You can also discard changes. Editing the Standard Wall Endcap Style The Standard wall endcap style is a special case. While you can use the Standard style as a starting point for creating a new wall endcap style, the Standard style itself cannot be changed. The Standard style is used when no other endcap style is specified for a wall. It is also used when you remove all components from a wall endcap style. The Wall Endcap Profile When you edit a wall endcap, a temporary profile with grips for vertices and edges is created for each component of the endcap. You can edit this profile in both plan and model views. In model views, the profile is inserted at the mid-height of the wall. If the wall has components that do not extend to that height, such as a footing, additional profiles are created at the vertical midpoint of these components. Use model views to edit wall endcaps that lie in different planes.
706 | Chapter 17 Walls
Editing endcaps for wall components in different planes
Use the location grip on the temporary profile to move the profile away from the wall, if needed. You may want to do this if the profile is very complex or is obscured by the linework of other objects. Changes to the profile are saved at its original location.
Editing the Geometry of a Wall Endcap Style
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of a wall endcap style that is applied to a wall. You can edit the vertices and edges of the wall endcap or replace the geometry with that of other polylines. You can save the changes to the current wall endcap style or to a new style.
1 Select the wall that has the wall endcap style you want to change, right-click, and click Endcaps Edit in Place.
2 Select a point near the endcap.
A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the wall endcap. If the wall contains multiple components, a profile is created for each wall component.
NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select a profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select a profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
3 Edit the profile:
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the shape of the perimeter of the profile
select the profile, and use grips to adjust the shape. If the profile has no grips, the Standard style, which you cannot edit, is the current endcap style.
hide one or more edges of the profile (plan view only)
select the profile, right-click, and click Hide Edge. Select the edges you want to hide, and press ENTER.
display an edge that you hid
select the profile, right-click, and click Show Edge. Select the edges you want to show, and press ENTER.
add vertices to the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Vertex. Select a point for each new vertex, and press ENTER.
remove vertices from the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. Select each vertex to remove, and press ENTER.
replace the geometry of an endcap component with new polyline that lies on the end of the wall exclusive of existing endcaps
select the profile for the component you want to replace, right-click, and click Replace Endcap. Select the endcap component to replace, and select a polyline to define the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the polyline in the drawing, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
remove an endcap component
select the profile for the component you want to remove, right-click, and click Remove Endcap.
Editing the Geometry of a Wall Endcap Style | 707
4 Save or discard the changes: If you want to ... restore the wall endcap to its original shape save the changes to the current wall endcap style
save the changes to a new wall endcap style
Then ...
click
.
click
.The wall endcap and the wall endcap style use
the edited profile(s) to define its geometry. Any other walls
or opening endcap styles that use this wall endcap style are
also updated with the edited geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Endcap Style. Enter a name for the new wall endcap style, and click OK. The wall endcap uses the new style to define its geometry. Other walls, wall styles, or opening endcap styles that use the original style are not affected.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Endcap Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a wall endcap style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a wall endcap style.
1 Open a tool palette that contains a wall tool. 2 Right-click a wall tool, and click Wall Styles. 3 Select the wall style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the endcap style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Opening Endcap Styles
Opening endcaps styles define the end conditions of walls into which doors, windows, openings, or door/window assemblies have been added. Opening endcap styles let you specify which wall endcap style is applied to each edge of an opening.
Opening Endcap Styles and Wall Endcap Styles
Wall endcap styles are typically created for specific wall styles. When you create an opening endcap style, you can select the wall endcap style that is appropriate for each edge of the opening. You can therefore create an opening endcap style for each type of object that you can add to a wall of a specific wall style.
708 | Chapter 17 Walls
NOTE When you change a wall endcap style, all opening endcap styles based on the wall endcap style are modified, too.
Applying Opening Endcap Styles After you create the opening endcap styles you want to use with a particular wall style, you edit the wall style to specify which opening endcap style is used with the following objects: doors, windows, openings, and door/window assemblies. For more information, see "Specifying the Endcap Styles Used in a Wall Style" on page 690. When necessary, you can override the opening endcap style assigned in a wall style. When you override the assigned opening endcap style, you can select a different endcap style for the start and the end of the object, such as a door, on the Properties palette. Managing Opening Endcap Styles To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452. Creating and Applying Opening Endcap Styles Use this procedure to create an opening endcap style and immediately apply it to an opening in a selected wall.
1 Draw the polylines for the new endcap. 2 Select the wall where you want to create the new endcap, right-click, and click Endcaps Calculate
Automatically. 3 Select the linework to define the new endcap, and press ENTER. 4 Press ENTER to keep the polyline(s) in the drawing, or enter y (Yes) to erase them. 5 When prompted, specify whether you want to modify the current opening endcap style, or to create a new
style. 6 If you create a new style, specify the edges where the endcap you created is applied.
Specifying the edges where new endcaps are applied
7 Click OK. The new endcaps are applied to the edges of the current opening as you specified.
Creating and Editing an Opening Endcap Style
Use this procedure to create an opening endcap style. You can create a style using default style properties, by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style. The wall endcap styles you use in the opening endcap style must exist in the drawing before you can add them to the style. For more information, see "Opening Endcap Styles" on page 708.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Wall Opening Endcap Styles.
Creating and Applying Opening Endcap Styles | 709
3 Create an opening endcap style: If you want to ... create a style with default properties create a style from an existing style
Then ...
right-click Wall Opening Endcap Styles, and click New.
right-click the opening endcap style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new opening endcap style, and press ENTER. 5 To edit the new wall style, right-click the style, and click Edit. 6 Click the Design Rules tab. 7 Select a wall endcap style for each edge of the opening: jamb start, jamb end, head, and sill.
Select the Standard wall endcap style for an edge that does not require an endcap, such as the sill for a door.
8 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to an Opening Endcap Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to an opening endcap style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from an opening endcap style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Wall Opening Endcap Styles. 3 Select the opening endcap style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the endcap style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Using Ortho Close and Close with Walls
Ortho Close and Close are command-line options that let you efficiently create a closed space when you add walls.
Ortho Close
This option closes the space by drawing two walls based on the direction you specify. The direction is extended until it meets a line perpendicular to the initial edge of either the wall. You enter or (Ortho) at the command line to use this option when placing walls.
710 | Chapter 17 Walls
Closing walls with Ortho Close
Close
This option closes the wall by creating a wall segment from the last point specified for the walls to the first point specified in this group of walls. You enter c (Close) at the command line to use this option when placing walls.
About Wall Lengths
When you draw a wall, the "true" length of the wall is the distance between the two end grips. The wall can appear to have a different length when it cleans up with other walls; the difference can be twice the cleanup radius longer or shorter than the "true" length. The "true" length is the length reported by properties and schedules. To get the most accurate information about wall length in schedules, always make sure that walls that clean up with each other have end grips that coincide.
About Curved Walls
The smoothness (tesselation) of curved edges is controlled by the FACETDEV variable. This variable sets the number of facets to display on curved AEC objects. The default value is 1/2" for drawings created from imperial templates and is 12.7 mm for drawings created from metric templates.
The number you specify for facet deviation defines the maximum distance from the chord to the arc, the chord being an edge that is created from faceting the curve, to the true mathematical arc. The facet deviation has a range of greater than zero (0) and no upper limit.
The minimum number of facets is 8. For example, if you create a cylinder mass element to have a 1' radius, and specify 1' for facetdev, the cylinder has 8 faces.
To specify the facet deviation values for the current drawing, see "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116. The settings apply to all curved objects in the drawing, including curved walls.
Specifying Offsets for Roof Line and Floor Line Vertices
When you add or move a vertex on the roof line or the floor line of a wall, you specify the horizontal and vertical offset of the vertex. You can specify the offset relative to other vertices or to the base height or the baseline of the wall. The following table identifies the locations you can specify for the horizontal offset of a vertex. The offset distance is measured in the direction the wall was drawn.
This setting ... From Wall Start From Wall End
Defines the horizontal offset from ... the wall start point. the wall endpoint.
About Wall Lengths | 711
This setting ... From Wall Midpoint From Previous Point
From Next Point
From Midpoint of Neighbors
Defines the horizontal offset from ...
the midpoint of the wall.
the vertex that is one position closer to the wall start point than the vertex you are adding or moving.
the vertex that is one position closer to the wall endpoint than the vertex you are adding or moving.
the midpoint of the distance between the current vertex and the vertex that is one position closer to the wall endpoint.
The following table identifies the locations you can specify for the vertical offset of a vertex. You can enter a negative distance for the vertical offset to position a vertex toward the ground.
This setting ... From Wall Base Height From Next Point.
From Previous Point
From Baseline
Defines the vertical offset from ...
the base height of the wall.
the vertex that is one position closer to the wall endpoint than the vertex you are adding or moving.
the vertex that is one position closer to the wall start point than the vertex you are adding or moving.
the baseline of the wall.
Specifying the Width and Edge Offset of a Wall Component
You can specify the width and edge offset of a wall component by entering values, creating a component with a fixed width and offset. You can also specify a formula for determining these values. The formula can include a value for Base Width. By including the Base Width variable in the formula, you can specify the width of the wall when you add or edit walls of this style to a drawing.
Specifying a formula to determine component width or edge offset
To calculate the edge offset or the width based on the base width, select Base Width and select an operator and an operand:
If you select Base Width for any component, you can enter a width for walls of this style when you add or modify them in a drawing.
If all components in the wall style use absolute values, you cannot change the width of individual walls of this style when you add or modify them.
Wall component baseline offset parameters
712 | Chapter 17 Walls
Curtain Walls
18
Curtain walls provide a grid or framework for inserting objects such as windows and doors. Curtain walls have many similarities to standard walls, such as baseline, roof line, and floor line, and they allow for interferences. You can insert doors, windows, and door/window assemblies into a curtain wall, just like standard walls, but the insertion process is different.
713
Curtain Walls
Curtain walls provide a grid or framework for inserting objects such as windows and doors. Curtain walls have many similarities to standard walls, such as baseline, roof line, and floor line, and they allow for interferences. You can insert doors, windows, and door/window assemblies into a curtain wall, just like standard walls, but the insertion process is different. Curtain walls are also different from standard walls in that they are made up of one or more grids. Curtain Wall Grids Curtain walls are made up of one or more grids. Each grid in a curtain wall has either a horizontal division or a vertical division, but you can nest the grids to create a variety of patterns from simple to complex. Curtain wall nested grid example
Each cell in a grid can contain either a panel infill, to represent basic cladding materials such as a stone wall panel or glazing, or an object such as a window or a door. Assigned curtain wall infill types
Curtain Wall Units and Door/Window Assemblies Other objects you can insert in a grid include curtain wall units and door/window assemblies. Curtain wall units are designed to represent complex elements that are repeated within your main curtain wall.
Assigned curtain wall unit infill
Window assemblies serve a similar function as curtain wall units but can contain panel infills or objects such as doors or windows. Door/window assemblies can be inserted into curtain walls and standard walls.
714 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Assigned door/window assembly infill
Both curtain wall units and door/window assemblies can reduce the need for nested grids, making edits to the curtain wall easier.
Elements of Grids
Grids are the foundation of curtain walls, curtain wall units, and door/window assemblies. Every grid has four element types:
Divisions: Define the direction of the grid (horizontal or vertical) and the number of cells Cell Infills: Contain another grid, a panel infill, or an object such as a window or a door Frames: Define the edge around the outside of the primary grid and nested grids Mullions: Define the edges between the cells
NOTE Division is an abstract element, in contrast to the other three element types that represent physical elements of the curtain wall.
Each element type is assigned a default definition that describes what elements of that type look like.
Element type Divisions
Cell Infills Frames Mullions
Default definitions Primary horizontal grid with a fixed cell dimension of 13' and secondary vertical grid with a fixed cell dimension of 3' Cells containing simple panels 2" thick Left, right, top, and bottom outer edges of grid 3" wide and 3" deep Edges between cells 1" wide and 3" deep
Specifying grid element types
You can create new element definitions and assign those definitions within the curtain wall. For example, you can create multiple infill definitions, and then assign different infills to specific cells in the grid.
Curtain Walls | 715
Assigning different infills to curtain wall cells
Likewise, you can create multiple frame definitions and then assign a different definition to each frame edge (top, bottom, left, or right). You can also create multiple mullion definitions. Specifying different frame definitions for each edge of a frame
Experimenting with Curtain Wall Designs The templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offer curtain wall styles as well as curtain wall unit styles and door/window assembly styles. To familiarize yourself with the curtain wall feature, you can look at those existing styles and experiment with them. That will make it easier to understand curtain wall behavior and create your own curtain wall designs.
Using Curtain Wall Tools To Create Curtain Walls
Curtain walls are created in much the same way as standard walls. You can specify a style, a height, and start and endpoints. Curtain walls can be straight, curved, or a combination of the two. Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place curtain walls by selecting a curtain wall tool with a specific curtain wall style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with all of its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use curtain wall tools to create new curtain walls by applying tool properties to existing walls, elevation sketches, 2D layout grids, or custom grids from two dimensional (2D) lines, arcs, and circles.
716 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Tool palette containing a curtain wall tool
The following palettes contain one or more curtain wall tools:
Tool Palette General Building Object palette in the Design Tools palette set
custom tool palettes created by your CAD manager
Curtain Wall Tools
a tool for the Standard curtain wall style and default settings for other curtain wall properties
tools with curtain wall styles and properties that your CAD manager customized for your projects or office standards
When you place curtain walls using curtain wall tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change settings for any curtain wall properties that are not controlled by the style.
Creating a Straight Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to create a straight curtain wall that has the properties specified in the curtain wall tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a curtain wall, see "Creating a Curtain Wall with User-Specified Settings" on page 718.
Drawing a straight curtain wall segment
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a curtain wall tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Specify a start point for the curtain wall.
Creating a Straight Curtain Wall | 717
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
NOTE If you have Dynamic Input activated on the application window status bar (DYN), you can use dynamic dimensions to specify the curtain wall length and angle. After clicking the start point of the curtain wall, dynamic input fields for length and angle appear around the curtain wall preview. Enter values as desired, and use the TAB key to switch between input fields.
3 Specify an end point. 4 Press ENTER.
Creating a Curtain Wall with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a curtain wall with settings that you specify.
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a curtain wall tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Under Bound Spaces, define if this curtain wall can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this curtain wall can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this curtain wall cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this curtain wall will use the bounding settings from the curtain wall style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 Expand Dimensions. 6 Modify the dimensions of the curtain wall:
If you want to specify ... the base height of the curtain wall the length of the curtain wall start and end miters
Then ... enter a value for Base Height. enter a value for Length. enter miter values for Start Miter and End Miter.
7 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the curtain wall. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
NOTE If you have Dynamic Input activated on the application window status bar (DYN), you can use dynamic dimensions to specify the curtain wall length and angle. After clicking the start point of the curtain wall, dynamic input fields for length and angle appear around the curtain wall preview. Enter values as desired, and use the TAB key to switch between input fields.
718 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
8 Specify the endpoint of the curtain wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
close the curtain wall by drawing two curtain wall segments that meet at a right angle
right-click, click Ortho, and then specify a point in the direction you want the curtain wall to close. The curtain wall segment is extended until it meets a wall segment perpendicular to the first wall segment.
close the curtain wall by adding a curtain wall segment from right-click, and click Close. the previous point to the start point of the curtain wall
complete the curtain wall segment at a point that you specify specify the endpoint of the curtain wall, and press ENTER.
Creating a Curved Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to create a curved curtain wall in a drawing. The display of curved objects is dependent on the facet deviation set in the application. For information see "Facet Deviation" on page 863.
Drawing a curved curtain wall segment
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a curtain wall tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Select Arc for Segment type. 5 Expand Dimensions. 6 Specify curtain wall settings:
If you want to specify ...
Then ...
the base height of the curtain wall,
enter a value for Base Height.
the length of the curtain wall
enter a value for Length.
start and end miters
enter miter values for Start Miter and End Miter.
7 Specify a start point for the curved curtain wall segment. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
Creating a Curved Curtain Wall | 719
NOTE If you have Dynamic Input activated on the application window status bar (DYN), you can use dynamic dimensions to specify the curtain wall length and angle. After clicking the start point of the curtain wall, dynamic input fields for length and angle appear around the curtain wall preview. Enter values as desired, and use the TAB key to switch between input fields.
8 Specify the midpoint of the curved curtain wall segment. 9 Specify the endpoint of the curved curtain wall segment.
A marker on top of the curtain wall indicates the direction the curtain wall is being drawn. 10 Continue placing curtain walls to create, for example, a building exterior or a room. 11 Press ENTER.
Creating a Curtain Wall that References a Curve
Use this procedure to create a curtain wall from linework such as lines, polylines, arcs, and circles. If you want to create a curtain wall with a mixture of straight and curved segments, you can use the Add Curtain Wall command. However, for complicated designs, you might find it easier to draw the segments using lines, arcs, and circles, and then reference that curve as the baseline for the curtain wall. This method has an added advantage in that the curve remains in control of the length and baseline of the curtain wall. Any changes you make to the curve are reflected in changes to the curtain wall. Creating a curtain wall that references a curve
Use any of the following objects to create the reference curve: Line Arc Circle Polyline Spline AEC objects (excluding stairs and multi-view blocks)
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a curtain wall tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Referenced Base Curve. 3 Select the geometry to reference.
If the geometry you want to reference consists of multiple segments, you must repeat this procedure for each segment. 4 Edit the properties of the curtain walls in the Properties palette, if needed.
720 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to create a curtain wall that is based on a 2D layout grid. If you already have 2D layout grids in a drawing, you can easily convert them to curtain walls. Or if you are already familiar with layout grids, it is an efficient way to create a curtain wall, and then experiment with the curtain wall commands to learn more about them. Converting a 2D layout grid to a curtain wall
When you create a curtain wall from a 2D layout grid, you also create a new curtain wall style. The divisions in the new curtain wall style are taken from the divisions in the layout grid. Curtain wall grids are one dimensional--divided either horizontally or vertically. To create the horizontal and vertical patterns in the 2D layout grid, the curtain wall uses a primary grid with a secondary grid nested inside it. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749. When you create a curtain wall grid from a 2D layout grid, you need to decide the direction of the primary grid in the curtain wall. If you select horizontal, the primary grid has horizontal divisions that cross over the vertical divisions of the secondary grid. If you select vertical, the primary grid has vertical divisions that cross over the horizontal divisions of the secondary grid. Specifying primary division directions
The horizontal and vertical lines of the 2D layout grid define the divisions for the curtain wall grids. The grid cells, frame, and mullions are assigned default definitions. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements" on page 748.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a curtain wall tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Layout Grid. 3 Select the layout grid to convert. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the layout grid, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Press ENTER to specify horizontal as the orientation for the primary division, or enter v to specify vertical. 6 Enter a name for the curtain wall, and click OK. 7 Edit the properties of the curtain wall in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Curtain Wall from an Elevation Sketch
You can create a sketch of a custom grid with lines, arcs, and circles, and then convert that linework into a curtain wall.
NOTE Curtain wall grids are either horizontal or vertical. To create a grid pattern with horizontal and vertical cells, nested grids are used. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall | 721
The resulting curtain wall is assigned a custom grid division definition, which you cannot modify. You can, however, assign a different division definition to it. For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
1 Use lines, arcs, and circles to create an elevation sketch in the current world coordinate system (WCS). 2 Right-click a curtain wall tool, and click Apply Properties to Elevation Sketch. 3 Select the linework of the sketch. 4 Press ENTER. 5 Select one of the grid lines as the baseline for the curtain wall or press ENTER to use the line along the X
axis as the default baseline. Converting linework to curtain walls using the default baseline option
TIP If you draw your linework in the XY plane (in Plan view) and accept the default baseline, the resulting curtain wall is displayed as it is projected in the Z direction. Converting linework to curtain walls using the specified baseline option
6 To erase the lines, enter y (Yes). To have the lines remain after the curtain wall is created, enter n (No). If there is a style applied to the curtain wall tool, the new custom style is based on the existing style. The infill, mullion, and frame definitions are those of the existing style. You can modify the style without having to create one from scratch. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements" on page 748.
7 Select the resulting custom curtain wall, right-click, and click Design Rules Save to Style. 8 Click New to create a new curtain wall style. 9 Enter a name for the new curtain wall style. 10 Click OK twice.
Converting a Wall to a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to create curtain walls based on existing standard walls. For each wall segment, a separate curtain wall is created. During the conversion process, you are prompted to select a curtain wall style that determines the number and size of cells in the curtain wall grid as well as the appearance of the cells, frame, and mullions. For more information, see "Curtain Wall Styles" on page 725.
722 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Converting a wall to a curtain wall
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a curtain wall tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Walls. 3 Select the wall, and press ENTER. 4 Specify the alignment.
You can align the curtain wall baseline with the baseline, left, right, or center of the standard wall. Specifying justification for converting walls to curtain walls
5 To erase the wall, enter y (Yes). To have the lines remain after the curtain wall is created, enter n (No). 6 Press ENTER.
Converting a 3D Face to a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to create curtain walls based on faces of existing mass elements, mass element groups, or AutoCAD® entities, such as a mesh, ruled surface, or solid. This might be helpful after you have developed a building model. For more information, see "Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models" on page 587. For each face, a separate curtain wall is created. During the conversion process, you are prompted to select a curtain wall style that determines the number and size of cells in the curtain wall grid as well as the appearance of the cells, frame, and mullions. For more information, see "Tips for Working Efficiently with Curtain Wall Styles" on page 726.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a curtain wall tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Faces. 3 Select a face to convert, or press CTRL and select multiple faces.
You can press TAB to cycle through the faces.
Converting a 3D Face to a Curtain Wall | 723
The Convert to Curtain Walls worksheet opens.
4 Select the curtain wall style. 5 To erase the face, select Erase Layout Geometry. 6 Click OK.
Creating a Curtain Wall Tool
Use this procedure to create a curtain wall tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own curtain wall tools if you are placing multiple curtain walls of specific styles with additional properties that you want to be the same each time you add a curtain wall of each type. You can use any of the following methods to create a curtain wall tool:
Drag a curtain wall that has the properties you want to a tool palette. Drag a curtain wall style from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new
tool. Drag a copy of a tool from another palette to the current palette, and then customize the properties of the new
tool. Copy an existing tool in the current palette and then customize the properties of the new tool. Drag a tool from the Content Browser to a tool palette and then customize the properties of the new tool.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create a tool from a curtain wall in the drawing
select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a curtain wall style in the Style Manager on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from the Content Browser
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
4 Enter a name for the tool.
5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General.
7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the curtain wall created from this tool, and click OK.
8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified in the layer key style used in the drawing.
724 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
9 Select a style. When you add a curtain wall using this tool, it is the style you specify on the Tool Properties worksheet.
10 Specify a style location. Click Browse to navigate to an external file source for the style.
11 Under Bound Spaces, define if this curtain wall tool can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces. You can select three options here:
Yes: this curtain wall tool can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this curtain wall tool cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this curtain wall tool will use the bounding settings from the curtain wall style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
12 Modify the dimensions of the curtain wall:
If you want to specify ... the base height of the curtain wall
Then ... enter a value for Base Height.
start and end miter angles
enter miter values for Start Miter and End Miter.
the roof line offset from the base height of the curtain wall enter a value for Roof line offset.
the floor line offset from the baseline of the curtain wall
enter a value for Floor line offset.
13 Click OK.
Curtain Wall Styles
Curtain walls are style-based, which means there are preset characteristics assigned to each curtain wall that determine its appearance and function. By changing from one style of curtain wall to another, you can quickly study several different design options. Any changes you make to the style updates all curtain walls of that particular style. You can also apply overrides to a single curtain wall, without changing other curtain walls of the same style. A curtain wall style controls the following properties of a curtain wall:
Element definitions Definition assignments for each element Materials for each element Display properties for each element Notes about the style and any associated reference files
Using Materials in Curtain Wall Styles
You can use materials to control how curtain walls of each style are displayed in a drawing. You assign materials to the curtain wall components in the style. The components are then displayed using the display properties of the assigned materials. Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a large number of predefined materials for common design purposes. You can use these materials, modify them for your project requirements, and define new materials. For more information about materials and how to define them, see "Materials" on page 464.
Curtain Wall Styles | 725
Creating Tools from Curtain Wall Styles
You can create a curtain wall tool from any curtain wall style. You can drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify settings for any curtain wall properties for the tool. For more information, see "Creating a Curtain Wall Tool" on page 724.
To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop to work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Getting Started with the Style Manager" on page 453.
Process Overview: Creating a Curtain Wall Style
When you create a curtain wall style, you assign characteristics to any or all elements of a curtain wall and save them as a named style. In this way, you standardize the appearance of all curtain walls that use the style. When you modify a style, all curtain walls in your drawing that use the style are updated to reflect the changes.
Step 1: Define divisions for the curtain wall grid.
For information on defining curtain wall grid definitions, see "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids" on page 728.
Step 2: Define the infill for the cells of the curtain wall. For information on creating infills, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells" on page 736.
Step 3: Define the curtain wall frame, including using profiles and specifying offsets. For information on defining a frame for a curtain wall, see "Defining Curtain Wall Frames" on page 740.
Step 4: Define the mullions for the curtain wall, including using profiles and specifying offsets. For information on ways to define mullions, see "Defining Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 744.
Step 5: Assign the element definitions you created:
If you want to assign ... a division to a curtain wall grid
infills to curtain wall cells definitions to curtain wall frames
definitions to curtain wall mullions
Then ...
see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749.
see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames" on page 756.
see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 758.
Step 6: Specify the materials of the curtain wall style. For information on specifying materials, see "Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Style" on page 760.
Step 7: Specify the display properties of the curtain wall, including layer, color, linetype, and hatching. For information on specifying the display properties of a curtain wall, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762.
Step 8: Attach notes and reference documents to the curtain wall style. For information on attaching notes and files, see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Style" on page 766.
Tips for Working Efficiently with Curtain Wall Styles
Use these suggestions to work efficiently and productively with curtain wall styles:
Name grids and elements very clearly to identify where they are used and what they are. For example, use the name L3-FL1-H to represent a third-level grid used on the first floor and that is horizontally divided. Incorporating this suggestion makes it easier to ensure that you are using elements correctly.
726 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Use the element definition that is applied most often as the default element definition. For example, if most cells are stone panels, define the default infill as the stone panel. This panel is then used in every cell that is not specifically assigned to another infill. Apply this rule to the default frame, mullion, and division.
Use curtain wall units and door/window assemblies to simplify the complexity of a curtain wall style.
Name the styles for doors, windows, curtain wall units, AEC polygons, and curtain walls to indicate where they are used and what they are.
Remember that you can use cell and edge overrides to define special conditions not accounted for in the curtain wall style.
Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Style
Element definitions determine the appearance of the four basic curtain wall elements. There is a different definition type for each element.
Element type Divisions
Cell Infills Frames Mullions
Default definitions Primary horizontal grid with a fixed cell dimension of 13' and secondary vertical grid with a fixed cell dimension of 5' Cells containing simple panels Left, right, top, and bottom outer edges of grid 3" wide and 3" deep Edges between cells 1" wide and 3" deep
Curtain wall grid element types
Each type of element can have multiple definitions. For example, you can define a division to create a horizontal grid or a vertical grid, and you can define the cells to contain a nested grid or a door/window assembly. To make reuse easier, you can save the element definitions, and then assign them to grids, cells, frames, or mullions as needed. Element definitions are style-specific. When you create element definitions for a specific curtain wall style, those definitions are available only for curtain walls of that style. For example, if you define a door/window assembly infill for one curtain wall style, that infill is not available as an option when you edit a curtain wall of a different style. For information about defining the color, linetype, or layer of curtain wall elements, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762.
Creating a Curtain Wall Style
Use this procedure to create a curtain wall style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style. You can also create a curtain wall tool based on the newly created curtain wall style. When you use the tool to add curtain walls, each curtain wall has the style specific to the tool.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles.
Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Style | 727
3 Create a new curtain wall style: If you want to create a style ... with default properties from an existing style
from a curtain wall, curtain wall unit, or door/window assembly in the drawing
Then ...
right-click Curtain Wall Styles, and click New.
right-click the curtain wall style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
right-click Curtain Wall Styles, and click New. Right-click the new style, click Set From, and then select a curtain wall, a curtain wall unit, or a door/window assembly.
4 Enter a name for the new curtain wall style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new curtain wall style:
If you want to ...
Then ...
define the elements of a curtain wall style
see "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids" on page 728, "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells" on page 736, "Defining Curtain Wall Frames" on page 740, and "Defining Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 744.
assign element definitions to the curtain wall style
see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements" on page 748, "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748, "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749, "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames" on page 756, and "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 758.
add curtain wall element definitions as display components see "Adding Curtain Wall Element Definitions as Display Components" on page 762.
specify layer, color and linetype settings for the display components of a curtain wall
see "Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Curtain Wall Style" on page 763.
specify curtain wall hatching
see "Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Curtain Wall Style" on page 763.
add custom graphics as display components of a curtain wall see "Adding Custom Graphics as a Display Component of
style
a Curtain Wall" on page 764.
create individual cut planes for curtain wall styles
see "Creating Cut Planes for a Curtain Wall" on page 765.
specify the materials of the curtain wall style
see "Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Style" on page 760.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Style" on page 766.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the curtain wall style, click OK. 7 If you want to assign the style to a curtain wall tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette.
You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Curtain Wall Tool" on page 724.
8 Click OK.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids
The divisions of a grid define the orientation that determines the direction of the grid cells and mullions, and they define a division type that determines the number and size of cells.
NOTE Creating a nested grid is not a division rule. To create a nested grid, add a cell assignment. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall" on page 751 and "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
728 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
You can create a variety of division definitions under different names, and then assign different divisions to each grid in your curtain wall. Although you can create multiple definitions, there can be only one division assignment per grid. You create division definitions for a specific curtain wall style and those definitions can be assigned only to grids in curtain walls of that style.
For more information about assigning divisions to a particular grid, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
Division of Curtain Wall Grids A curtain wall consists of one or more grids, which are the framework for placing design elements in the curtain wall. The highest-level grid is the primary grid, which is also the outside edge of the curtain wall.
Each grid in a curtain wall has one division assignment that determines whether the grid is divided horizontally or vertically. The division also determines the number of cells, their size, and their placement.
Within the primary grid, you can define multiple levels of grids. These grids within the primary grid are called nested grids. Each subdivision of a grid is called a cell.
Creating a Division Definition for a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to create divisions for a curtain wall grid.
Because curtain walls can contain multiple nested grids, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grids that indicates the level of each grid and the grid location or the purpose within the curtain wall. For example, L3-FL1-Stone Panels can identify a third level grid that provides a row of stone panels on Floor 1.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles.
3 Select a curtain wall style.
4 Click the Design Rules tab.
5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions.
6 Click New Division.
7 Enter a name for this division definition.
8 Click either Vertical Orientation or Horizontal Orientation.
9 Select one of the following division types and specify offsets if needed.
Division Type Fixed Cell Dimension
Description
Creates a grid where the size of the individual cells is predetermined. For more information, see "Specifying a Fixed Size for Cells in a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 730.
Fixed Number of Cells
Creates a grid where the number of grid cells is predetermined. For more information, see "Specifying a Fixed Number of Cells for a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 731.
Manual
Creates a grid where the size and number of individual cells is manually determined by the user. For more information, see "Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 732.
Baseline/ Base Height (horizontal grids only)
Creates a horizontal grid that does not extend to gables or steps in a curtain wall. For more information, see "Excluding Gables and Steps from a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 733.
Polyline (vertical grids only)
Creates a vertical grid from a polyline that adds a grid line for each vertex of the polyline. For more information, see "Dividing a Vertical Curtain Wall Grid at Each Vertex Along a Polyline" on page 734.
After you create a division definition, you can assign the definition to a specific grid in a curtain wall. For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids | 729
10 When you are finished creating division definitions, click OK. Specifying a Fixed Size for Cells in a Curtain Wall Grid Use this procedure to define a specific size for the cells in a grid. In this case, the number of cells is determined by the length or height of the grid, depending on how the grid is divided. When you specify a fixed cell size in a grid, you can control how the cells of the grid adjust to accommodate any leftover space. This space occurs if the length (or the height) of the curtain wall cannot be evenly divided by the fixed size of the cell. For more information, see "Using the Auto-Adjust Cells Option" on page 731. Specifying a fixed size for cells
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Divisions definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Cell Dimension as the division type.
8 Specify a size for the cells in Cell Dimension. If you are defining a vertical division, the cell dimension is the length of the cell from mullion to mullion. If you are defining a horizontal division, the cell dimension is the height of the cell.
9 To specify an offset for the grid, enter an offset distance in Start Offset or End Offset. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 735. TIP The frame width is calculated as part of the cell size. Therefore, cells adjacent to the frame can appear to be a different size than the other cells. If you do not want the frame width included in the cell size, specify an offset for the grid that is equal to the frame width. When you draw a curtain wall using a fixed cell dimension, there is often extra space between the last full-size cell and the end of the curtain wall.
730 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
10 Adjust the cells to accommodate this extra space:
If you want to ... add the space to grid cells
Then ...
select Auto-Adjust Cells, select Grow for Cell Adjustment, and select the specific cells where the space is to be added. You can select any combination of Specific Cells.
remove the space from grid cells
select Auto-Adjust Cells, select Shrink for Cell Adjustment, and select the specific cells where the space is to be removed. You can select any combination of Specific Cells.
For information about offsets, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 735.
11 Click OK.
For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
Using the Auto-Adjust Cells Option Use this procedure to automatically resize cells in a grid when the result of dividing the grid by the specified cell dimension is not a whole number. For example, if a vertical primary grid in a curtain wall style is 17 feet in length and you specify a fixed cell dimension of 3 feet, the grid has five cells of 3 feet each with 2 feet remaining. Using the Auto-Adjust Cells option, you can specify how the grid distributes the remaining quantity.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Divisions definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Cell Dimension as the division type. 8 Select Auto-Adjust Cells, and specify the cell adjustment:
If you want to ...
Then ...
add the remaining space to grid cells
select Grow, and select the specific cells to which you want the space added.
remove the remaining space from grid cells
select Shrink, and select the specific cells from which you want the space removed. You can then select Maintain at least half of cell dimension in order to control the cell shrinkage.
The cells that you do not select maintain the fixed value you specified for Cell Dimension.
Specifying a Fixed Number of Cells for a Curtain Wall Grid
Use this procedure to define a specific number of cells in a grid. In this case, the size of the cells is determined by the length or height of the grid, depending on how the grid is divided.
In some cases, when you create a complex curtain wall grid, you might want to start with a standard grid with a fixed number of cells, and then later fine-tune that manually. You can first create a grid with fixed cell numbers and then convert that to a manual grid. For information on manual grids, see "Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 732.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids | 731
Specifying a fixed number of cells
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Number of Cells for Division Type. 8 Specify the number of cells. 9 To specify an offset for the grid, enter an offset distance for Start Offset or End Offset.
For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 735. NOTE If you want to fine-tune the initial layout with a fixed number of cells, click Convert To Manual Division and edit the grid as described in "Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 732.
10 Click OK. For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748. Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Grid Use this procedure to manually add gridlines and specify an offset for each one when you need to create a unique grid that does not fit into any of the other division types. You can also start with a fixed cell dimension grid or a fixed number of cells grid, and then manually adjust the grid lines to suit your needs.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Manual for Division Type. 8 Click Add Gridline to insert a grid line. Insert as many grid lines as you need. If you need to remove a grid
line, select it from the table and click Remove Gridline. 9 Under Offset in the gridline table, specify an offset distance for each grid line.
732 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Gridline offset
10 Under From in the grid line table, select the grid location from which the grid line is offset. Offset grid line from option
11 To specify an offset for the grid, enter an offset distance for Start Offset or End Offset. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 735.
12 Click OK. For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
Excluding Gables and Steps from a Curtain Wall Grid If you are designing a curtain wall that has gables in the roof line or steps in the floor line, there may be occasions when you do not want the grid to extend into those areas. To define your curtain wall in this case, you can define a single-cell horizontal grid that excludes those areas, and then use that grid as a starting point for nested grids. For information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749. NOTE For information about adding steps or gables to your curtain wall, see "Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall" on page 791.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Horizontal for Orientation. 8 Select Baseline/Base Height for Division Type. 9 Select Divide at Baseline or Divide at Base Height.
Divide at Baseline: Forces a division at the baseline to exclude steps from the grid.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids | 733
Divide at Base Height: Forces a division at the base height to exclude gables from the grid.
10 To offset the division from the baseline, enter a positive number for Baseline Offset. 11 To offset the division from the base height, enter a positive number for Base Height Offset. 12 Click OK. The resulting grid contains a single, horizontal cell. To add additional divisions, use nested grids. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall" on page 751. For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748. Dividing a Vertical Curtain Wall Grid at Each Vertex Along a Polyline If you create a curtain wall by referencing a polyline, you can define a vertical grid for your curtain wall by placing grid lines at each vertex along the polyline.
1 Draw a polyline and use it as a reference curve to create a curtain wall. For more information, see "Creating a Curtain Wall that References a Curve" on page 720.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 4 Select a curtain wall style. 5 Click the Design Rules tab. 6 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 7 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 8 Select Vertical for Orientation. 9 Select Polyline for Division Type.
10 Click OK. For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
734 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Grid
By default, grids cells are measured from the start and end points of the curtain wall baseline (for horizontal divisions) or from the floor line to the roof line (for vertical divisions). The width of the grid frame is not considered in calculating the size of the cell. For example, if you draw a curtain wall with a 14' baseline and a 1' frame on the left and right, and you specify a fixed number of vertical cells, the cells do not appear equal in size. The first and last cells appear smaller because they include the frame. To make the cells equal in size, offset the start and end of the grid by the width of the frame.
Specifying grid offset directions
NOTE You can offset the grid only when the division type is Fixed Cell Dimension, Fixed Number of Cells, or Manual.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Cell Dimension, Fixed Number of Cells, or Manual for Division Type. 8 Specify an offset for the grid.
If you want to specify the distance between ...
the start point of the curtain wall baseline and the start of the first cell in a horizontal grid
Then ... enter a value for Start Offset.
the end point of the curtain wall baseline and the end of the enter a value for End Offset. last cell in a horizontal grid
the floor line of the curtain wall and the start of the bottom enter a value for Bottom Offset. cell in a vertical grid
the roof line of the curtain wall and the end of the top cell in enter a value for Top Offset. a vertical grid
9 Click OK.
Removing a Division Definition from a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to remove a division definition that you no longer need. You cannot remove a division definition when it is currently assigned to a grid. In addition, you cannot remove the default division definition, but you can modify it.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids | 735
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition that you want to remove. 7 Click Remove Division.
8 Click OK.
Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells
An infill defines the contents of a curtain wall cell. A curtain wall cell can have the default simple panel or contain a nested grid, an AEC Polygon, curtain wall unit, door, window, or door/window assembly style. The object styles you use in infills must exist in the current drawing to be added to an infill definition. Panels typically represent glazing or other plain cladding, such as stone or concrete. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749. Specifying different infills
NOTE Nested grids and no infill are options you select when assigning an infill to a cell. These options do not require infill definitions. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall" on page 751 and "Removing an Infill from a Curtain Wall Cell" on page 754. You can define as many infills as you need, and then use cell assignments to specify the cells that use each infill. You can modify, as needed, a default infill that is used for all unassigned cells. For more information about cell assignments, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements" on page 748. NOTE Create infill definitions for a specific curtain wall style. Those definitions can be assigned only to grid cells in curtain walls of that style. Materials Styles use the materials of the object style assigned to each panel. For example, if you specify an infill to use the Standard door style, the materials of that infill are those designated in the door style. Simple Panels need material assigned in the curtain wall style.
736 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you do not use materials to control the display properties of infills, you can specify their display properties in the curtain wall style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default infill are applied to all infills unless you create a custom display component for each infill definition. You can then control the display of each infill definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762. Creating a Panel Infill for a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to create a simple panel infill to represent basic cladding materials in the curtain wall, such as a stone wall panel, concrete panel, metal panel, or glazing infill. Because curtain walls can contain multiple infills, it is helpful to use a naming convention for panel infills that indicates the infill location or purpose within the curtain wall. For example, L3-FL1- Stone Panel can identify a stone panel in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Infill. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the infill. 8 Select Simple Panel as the infill type. 9 Specify an alignment for the infill.
For more information, see "Specifying an Alignment for a Curtain Wall Infill" on page 738. 10 Specify an offset for the infill.
For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Infill" on page 738. 11 Specify a thickness for the panel.
Specifying infill panel thickness
12 Click OK. After you create an infill definition, you can assign it to any cell in a curtain wall grid. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749. Creating a Style Infill for a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to create a style infill to insert objects into a curtain wall. You can insert doors, windows, door/window assemblies, curtain wall units, and AEC Polygons by defining a specific style of that object as an infill.
TIP After you insert an object in a cell, you can select that object independent of the grid and access editing options for the object.
Because curtain walls can contain multiple object styles, it is helpful to use a naming convention for style infills that indicates the infill location or purpose within the curtain wall. For example, L3-FL1-Octagonal Window can identify an octagonal window in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles.
Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells | 737
3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Infill. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the infill. 8 Select Style as the infill type.
The bottom right pane changes to display a tree view of the object styles available for insertion into a curtain wall. 9 Select an object style.
There is a unique icon for each type of style. For example, the door style icon and the curtain wall unit icon . These icons are also displayed next to the infill name at the top of the dialog box to help you identify the type of infill. 10 Specify an alignment for the infill. For more information, see the next section "Specifying an Alignment for a Curtain Wall Infill" on page 738. 11 Specify an offset for the infill. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Infill" on page 738. 12 Click OK. After you create an infill definition, you can assign it to any cell in a curtain wall grid. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749. Specifying an Alignment for a Curtain Wall Infill Use this procedure to align an infill so that it is centered with the baseline of the curtain wall, in front of the baseline, or behind the baseline. In Plan view, the front of a curtain wall (drawn from left to right) is below the baseline and the back is above the baseline.
NOTE To move the infill away from the baseline, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Infill" on page 738.
Specifying infill alignments
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select an infill, or create a new one. 7 Select an alignment: front, center, or back. 8 Click OK.
Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Infill Use this procedure to specify an offset for a curtain wall infill. By default, infills are centered on the curtain wall baseline. If your design requires that the infill be aligned with frame edges or some other part of the curtain wall, you can specify an offset for the infill.
738 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
You can also edit individual style-based infills directly in the drawing. The selected infill has Flip grips in both the X and Y directions so that you can change the orientation of the infill. Specifying panel infill offsets
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select an infill, or create a new one. 7 Enter an offset distance.
In Plan view, positive numbers offset the infill above the baseline and negative numbers offset the infill below the baseline. The offset is also affected by the selected alignment for the infill. 8 Click OK. Removing an Infill Definition from a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to delete an infill definition that you no longer need from the Infills definitions list. You cannot remove an infill definition when it is currently assigned to a cell. In addition, you cannot remove the default infill definition, but you can modify it as needed. NOTE For information about removing an infill from a cell, see "Removing an Infill from a Curtain Wall Cell" on page 754. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions.
Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells | 739
6 Select the unneeded infill definition, and click Remove Infill.
7 Click OK.
Defining Curtain Wall Frames
All curtain wall grids, including the primary grid, can have frame definitions. The frame of the primary grid defines the outer edges of the curtain wall. The overall frame size is determined by the length and height of the primary curtain wall grid or a nested curtain wall grid. You can define a frame by specifying a width and depth or by selecting a profile. Specifying default and profile-based frames
You create frame definitions for a specific curtain wall style. Those definitions can be assigned only to frames in curtain walls of that style. You can create as many frame definitions as you want, and then assign the definitions to the frames as needed. If you have nested grids, each grid has its own frame. There is a default frame definition that you can modify and assign as needed. Unassigned frames are not displayed. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames" on page 756. TIP Using Style Manager, you can copy a mullion definition and use it as a frame definition. Select the mullion definition and drag it to Frames in the left pane of the Design Rules tab. Materials and Display Properties for Frames If you do not use materials to control the display properties of frames, you can specify their display properties in the curtain wall style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default frame are applied to all frames unless you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each frame definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762. Defining a Curtain Wall Frame by Width and Depth You can define a frame by specifying its width and depth. The overall frame size is determined by the length and height of the curtain wall grid.
740 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying frame width and depth
Because curtain walls can contain multiple object styles with different frames, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid frames that indicates the grid location or purpose within the curtain wall. For example, L3-FL1- Metal Frame can identify a metal frame for a third-level grid on Floor 1.
TIP To remove the frame edge and have the infill adjust to fill the space occupied by the frame, create a frame definition with both width and depth set to zero. Then, assign that definition to the frame edge that you want to remove. This is necessary for the infill to be mitered as it would be for a butt-glazed condition. For more information, see "Removing a Frame Edge from a Curtain Wall" on page 757.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions.
6 Click
to create a new frame definition.
7 Enter a descriptive name for the frame.
8 Specify a width and depth for the frame.
9 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for a Curtain Wall Frame" on page 742.
10 Click OK.
After you create a frame definition, you can assign it to any frame in a curtain wall. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames" on page 756.
Creating a Profile for a Curtain Wall Frame Use this procedure to create a profile that you can use to define the shape of a curtain wall frame. You can then extrude the profile to create a curtain wall frame. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the default height and width of the curtain wall frame. The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the height and the depth needed for the resulting curtain wall frame.
2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Enter c (Centroid) for the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame.
4 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
You can now use the profile as a curtain wall frame. For more information, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Frame Using a Profile" on page 742.
Defining Curtain Wall Frames | 741
Defining a Curtain Wall Frame Using a Profile Use this procedure to create a frame element definition from a profile. If you do not want a straight edge to your frame, you can use a profile to define edges with curves, jags, or any other shape you require. You can also use an edit in-place routine to create a frame from a profile. For more information, see "Creating a Frame or Mullion Edge from a Polyline or Profile Using In-Place Editing" on page 774. Two profile-based frame examples
NOTE The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame.
1 Create the profile for the frame. For information on creating profiles for curtain wall frames, see "Creating a Profile for a Curtain Wall Frame" on page 741.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 4 Select a curtain wall style. 5 Click the Design Rules tab. 6 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 7 Click New Frame. 8 Enter a descriptive name for the frame. 9 Specify a width and depth for the frame edge.
These dimensions are used to calculate the center point of the edge for aligning the profile and also to specify a boundary for the adjacent infill. 10 Select Use Profile.
NOTE The Profile options are available only if you have profiles in the current drawing.
11 Select a profile from the list. By default, the profile is inserted using the same width and depth with which it was created.
12 To adjust the size of the profile to fit within the width or depth dimension of the frame edge, select Auto-Adjust Profile Width or Depth.
13 To mirror the profile, select to mirror along the X or Y axis. 14 To rotate the profile, specify an angle for Rotation. 15 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for a Curtain Wall Frame" on page 742. 16 Click OK. After you create a frame definition, you can assign it to any frame in a curtain wall. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames" on page 756. Specifying Offsets for a Curtain Wall Frame Use this procedure to define the distance that a curtain wall frame is from the floor line, roof line, or baseline. By default, the outside edges of the frame align with the start and end of the floor line and the start and end of the roof
742 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
line. When you adjust the width of the frame, the frame expands inward. However, you can use offsets to expand or contract the frame away from these default limits or to shift the frame away from the baseline in either the X or Y direction.
Offset X Y Start
End
Description
Positive X offset moves the frame edge outward beyond the end of the curtain wall, while a negative X offset moves the frame edge inward toward the center of the curtain wall.
In Plan view, a positive Y offset moves the frame edge above the baseline, while a negative Y offset moves the frame below the baseline.
Negative Start offset lengthens the frame beyond the start point, while a positive Start offset shortens the frame. The start point for vertical edges is the baseline, and the start point for horizontal edges (drawn left to right) is the left side.
Negative End offset lengthens the frame beyond the end point, while a positive End offset shortens the frame. The end point for vertical edges is the base height, and the end point for horizontal edges (drawn left to right) is the right side.
Specifying frame offsets in the x and y directions
TIP To quickly identify the start and end of a curtain wall, select the curtain wall. The Reverse Direction grip is displayed near the center of the curtain wall and points toward the end of the curtain wall.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 6 Select a frame definition from the list. 7 Specify an offset distance for the frame edge. 8 Click OK.
Removing a Frame Definition from a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to remove a frame definition from the Frame definitions list. You cannot remove a frame definition if it is currently assigned to a frame edge, but you can remove it if it is assigned as an override to a frame edge. In addition, you cannot remove the default frame definition, but you can modify it as needed.
Defining Curtain Wall Frames | 743
NOTE For information about removing a frame edge, see "Removing a Frame Edge from a Curtain Wall" on page 757.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded frame definition. 7 Click Remove Frame. 8 Click OK.
Defining Curtain Wall Mullions
All curtain wall grids, including the primary grid, can have mullion definitions. The mullion of the primary grid defines the outer edges of the curtain wall. You can define the mullions by specifying a width and depth or by selecting a profile from which the mullion is extruded. Because curtain walls can contain multiple nested grids with different mullions, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid mullions that indicates the level of each grid and the grid location or purpose within the curtain wall. For example, L3-FL1-Window Mullion can identify a mullion for a window in a third-level grid on Floor 1. Specifying default and profile-based mullions
You create mullion definitions for a specific curtain wall style and those definitions can be assigned only to mullions in curtain walls of that style. You can create as many mullion definitions as you want, and then assign the definitions to mullions as needed. If you have nested grids, each grid has its own mullions. There is a default mullion definition that you can modify as needed that is used for any unassigned mullions. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 758. TIP Using Style Manager, you can copy a frame definition and use it as a mullion definition. Select the frame definition and drag it to Mullions in the left pane of the Design Rules tab.
Materials and Display Properties for Mullions If you do not use materials to control the display properties of mullions, you can specify their display properties in the curtain wall style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default mullion are applied to all mullions unless you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each mullion definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762. Defining Curtain Wall Mullions by Width and Depth You can define mullions by specifying a width and a depth. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying mullion width and depth
TIP To remove mullions for butt glazing, create a definition with both width and depth set to zero. Then, assign that definition to the mullions that you want to remove. For more information, see "Removing Mullions from a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 760.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Mullion. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the mullion. 8 Specify a width and depth for the mullion. 9 Specify the offsets you want.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Curtain Wall" on page 747. 10 Click OK. After you create a mullion definition, you can assign it to any mullion in a curtain wall. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 758. Creating a Profile for Curtain Wall Mullions Use this procedure to create a profile that you can use to define the shape of a curtain wall mullion definition. You can then extrude the profile to create mullions from it. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the default height and width of the curtain wall mullion. The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the height and the depth needed for the resulting curtain wall mullion. 2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Enter c (Centroid) for the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion. 4 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
You can now use the profile as a curtain wall mullion. For more information, see "Defining the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Using a Profile" on page 745.
Defining the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Using a Profile Use this procedure to create a mullion element definition from a profile. If you do not want a straight edge to your mullions, you can use a profile to define mullions with curves, jags, or any other shape. You can also use an edit in-place routine to create a mullion from a profile. For more information, see "Creating a Frame or Mullion Edge from a Polyline or Profile Using In-Place Editing" on page 774.
Defining Curtain Wall Mullions | 745
NOTE The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion. Infill alignments with default and profile-based mullions
1 Create the profile to use for the mullion. For information, see "Creating a Profile for Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 745.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 4 Select a curtain wall style. 5 Click the Design Rules tab. 6 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 7 Click New Mullion. 8 Enter a descriptive name for the mullion. 9 Specify a width and depth for the mullion.
These dimensions are used to calculate the center point of the mullion for aligning the profile, and also to specify a boundary for the adjacent infill. 10 Select Use Profile. NOTE The Profile options are available only if you have profiles in the current drawing. 11 Select a profile from the list. By default, the profile is inserted using the same width and depth with which it was created. 12 To adjust the size of the profile to fit within the width or depth dimension of the mullion, select Auto-Adjust Profile Width or Depth. 13 To mirror the profile, select X or Y for Mirror In. 14 To rotate the profile, specify a rotation angle for Rotation. 15 Specify any offsets. For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Curtain Wall" on page 747. 16 Click OK. After you create a mullion definition, you can assign it to any mullion in a curtain wall. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 758.
746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to define mullions that are offset from the start or end of the curtain wall to lengthen or shorten the edge or offset in the X or Y direction to shift the edge. For example, you might want to represent butt glazing by offsetting the mullions to be behind glass panel infills.
Offset X
Y Start End
Description
For vertical mullions, a positive X offset moves the mullions toward the end of the curtain wall, while a negative X offset moves the mullions toward the start of the curtain wall. For horizontal mullions, a positive X offset moves the mullions toward the top of the curtain wall, while a negative X offset moves the mullions toward the bottom of the curtain wall.
In Plan view, a positive Y offset moves the mullions above the baseline, while a negative Y offset moves the mullions below the baseline.
Negative Start offset lengthens the mullions beyond the start point, while a positive Start offset shortens the mullions.
Negative End offset lengthens the mullions beyond the end point, while a positive End offset shortens the mullions.
Specifying mullion offsets in x and y directions
TIP To quickly identify the start and end of a curtain wall, select the curtain wall. The Reverse Direction grip is displayed near the center of the curtain wall and points toward the end of the curtain wall.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a mullion definition from the list. 7 Specify an offset distance for the X, Y, Start, or End. 8 Click OK.
Removing a Mullion Definition from a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to remove a mullion definition from the Mullions definitions list. You cannot remove a mullion definition if it is assigned to a mullion, but you can remove it if it is assigned as an override to a mullion. In addition, you cannot remove the default mullion definition, but you can modify it as needed.
Defining Curtain Wall Mullions | 747
NOTE For information about removing mullions from between cells, see "Removing Mullions from a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 760.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded mullion definition from the list. 7 Click Remove Mullion. 8 Click OK.
Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements
After you've created element definitions for a curtain wall style, you can assign those definitions to each of the curtain wall element types: divisions, cell infills, frames, and mullions. By default, one definition is assigned to all elements of a particular type. However, you can assign definitions to individual elements as well. For example, all cells in the grid are assigned the default infill. You can, however, create a new cell assignment, select a different infill, and then specify the cells to use that infill. Assignment list
For more information about element definitions, see "Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Style" on page 727.
Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid
Use this procedure to assign a division to a curtain wall grid. A division defines the grid orientation (whether the direction of the grid cells and mullions is horizontal or vertical) and the division type (number and size of cells). After you define a division, you can assign it to the primary grid or to nested grids. Nested grids are created by selecting Nested Grid as the cell assignment. For more information, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid you want to assign a division to.
The name of the grid you select is displayed in the table under the Division Assignment row.
748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
TIP To rename a grid, select it, and click Rename and enter a new name. 6 Click the Element column for that grid and select a division definition from the list. 7 Click OK.
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells
An infill defines the contents of a curtain wall cell. A curtain wall cell can have the default simple panel or contain a nested grid, an AEC Polygon, curtain wall unit, door, window, or door/window assembly style. The object styles you use in infills must exist in the current drawing to be added to an infill definition. Panels typically represent glazing or other plain cladding, such as stone or concrete. For more information, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells" on page 736. Cell Assignments A cell assignment defines the infill definition used for the cells. You can use one cell assignment to assign the same infill to all cells, or you can create multiple cell assignments to assign different infills to different cells. Cell assignments
Do not assign multiple definitions to the same cell because only the last assigned definition to the cell is used. Default Cell Assignment The default cell assignment is used by all unassigned cells. You can modify the default assignment to be any type of infill, but you cannot delete the default cell assignment. You may want to modify the default cell assignment to use the infill definition that occurs most frequently in your design. Any cells not assigned to other infills then use this infill definition. Materials and Display Properties of Infills The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default infill are applied to all infills unless you assign materials to the infills you created or you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each infill definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762. Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls Each curtain wall grid is one-dimensional with either a horizontal or vertical division. By nesting grids in the curtain wall style, you can create a variety of patterns from simple to complex. Example of nested grids
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells | 749
Simple Primary Grids When you nest grids, you start with one primary grid. Each cell in the primary grid can then be filled with another grid. For example, if your primary grid is horizontal and has three cells, you can nest a vertical grid in each horizontal cell to create a simple two-dimensional (2D) grid. This is the nesting configuration for the Standard curtain wall style.
Specifying cell division definitions 1
The previous illustration shows all cells in the grid with the same cell assignment--a vertical division. However, each cell in a grid is independent and can have a separate assignment. For example, the following illustration shows a three cell horizontal grid with different assignments in each cell. The bottom cell contains another horizontal division, the middle cell contains vertical divisions of varying width, and the top cell contains a vertical divisions of a fixed width. Specifying cell division definitions 2
Multiple Nested Grids You can continue to nest grids to create multiple levels. For example, the following illustrations show the Standard curtain wall style, which is a simple two-dimensional (2D) grid, with one horizontal cell and three vertical cells. Another grid is nested in the first cell of the secondary grid. This creates a tertiary grid. The final illustration shows the nested grids assigned to all cells.
Specifying a sequence of nested grids
Defining Nested Grids You can define nested grids by using the Design Rules tab of the Curtain Wall Style Properties dialog box. The tree in the left pane lists the grids. There is always one primary grid. The primary grid can have one or more secondary grids. Each secondary grid can have one or more tertiary grids, and so on. TIP To quickly create nested grids in all cells, change the default cell assignment to Nested Grid. If you want multiple levels of nesting, be sure to change the default cell assignment for each grid. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall" on page 751. Each grid has its own cell assignments. You assign cells to contain another grid, a panel infill, or an object such as a door or window. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749.
750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Primary grid and cell assignments
Secondary grid and cell assignments
Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to create a nested grid in a curtain wall. A nested grid is a grid within a grid. Each nested grid has its own division, cell assignments, frame, and mullions. By default, the frame is turned off for nested grids. For more information, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a nested grid. 6 Click New Cell Assignment.
A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments. 7 Select the cell assignment in the top right frame, right-click and click Rename, and then enter a descriptive
name. 8 Select Nested Grid in the Element column.
A new grid is added to the list of grids in the left pane. If you are editing the primary grid, the new grid is added at the secondary level. If you are editing a grid at the secondary level, the additional grid is placed at the tertiary level, and so on. Creating a nested grid
New nested grid in tree
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells | 751
NOTE To rename a grid, select it in the right pane, right-click and click Rename, and enter a new name.
9 Specify the cells to contain this nested grid. For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 755.
10 Click OK.
Inserting a Door,Window or Door/Window Assembly into a Curtain Wall Cell Use this procedure to add doors, windows and door/window assemblies to a curtain wall. For more information, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells" on page 736.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a door, window or door/window assembly. 2 Select the curtain wall in which to insert the door, window or door/window assembly.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 3 Select the curtain wall cell marker for the cell in which to insert the door, window or door/window assembly.
The Add Infill worksheet opens.
4 Select the insertion method for the door, window or door/window assembly:
If you want to...
Then...
add the door, window or door/window assembly as a cell assignment and have all curtain walls using the same style display the same object added in a corresponding cell
select Add as Cell Assignment.
add the door, window or door/window assembly exclusively to the selected curtain wall
select Add as Cell Override.
If a door, window or door/window assembly of the style you selected already exists in your drawing, Existing Infill is selected by default.
5 Select the type of infill for the door, window or door/window assembly:
If you selected...
Then...
Add as Cell Assignment and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of the existing style, Existing Infill is selected by default.
Click OK.
Add as Cell Assignment and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of a different style than exists in your drawing
select New Infill, enter a name for the object and click OK.
752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you selected...
Then...
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of the existing style and not modify the edge of the frame surrounding the object
Click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of a different style than exists in your drawing and not remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select New Infill, enter a name for the object and click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of the existing style and remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select Top, Bottom, Left, or Right for Override Frame Removal and click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of a different style than exists in your drawing and remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select New Infill and enter a name for the object. Then select Top, Bottom, Left, or Right for Override Frame Removal and click OK.
6 Press ENTER.
Filling a Curtain Wall Cell with a Simple Panel Use this procedure to fill a curtain wall cell with a simple panel. Simple panels are generally used to represent basic cladding materials in the curtain wall, such as a stone wall panel or a concrete panel.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to put a simple panel infill. 6 Click New Cell Assignment.
A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments. 7 Select the cell assignment in the top right pane, right-click and click Rename, and then enter a descriptive
name. 8 Under Element, select an infill that defines a simple panel.
If you do not have a simple panel infill defined, then select New Infill and define one. For more information, see "Creating a Panel Infill for a Curtain Wall" on page 737. 9 Specify the cells to contain this simple panel. For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 755. 10 Click OK.
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells | 753
Inserting an Object into a Curtain Wall Cell Use this procedure to insert objects, such as curtain wall units and AEC Polygons, into a curtain wall cell. Curtain wall cells can contain these objects when you create infill definitions that use them. For more information, see "Creating a Style Infill for a Curtain Wall" on page 737.
TIP After you insert an object in a cell, you can select that object independent of the grid, right-click, and access editing options for the object.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to insert objects. 6 Click New Cell Assignment.
A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments. 7 Select the cell assignment in the top right frame, right-click and click Rename, and then enter a descriptive
name. 8 Select an infill that uses an object style. 9 Specify the cells to contain this object.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 755. 10 Click OK. Removing an Infill from a Curtain Wall Cell Use this procedure to remove the infill of a cell and leave the cell empty. To do this, use None as the element definition. Using None also removes any frame edges that border the cell, but it does not affect the mullions. Removing an infill assignment from a cell
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid that contains the cells you want to assign to None. 6 Create a new cell assignment or select an existing cell assignment. 7 Select NONE under the Element column. 8 Specify the cells to contain the None infill.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 755. 9 Click OK.
754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying Which Curtain Wall Cells Use a Cell Assignment When you create a cell assignment you need to specify the cells in the grid to use that assignment. There are two options for selecting cells:
Use Location to insert the infill into the start, middle, or end cells of a vertical grid or into the bottom, middle, or top cells of a horizontal grid. If there is an even number of cells (four or more), Middle refers to the two cells in the middle of the grid. If there is an odd number of cells (three or more), Middle refers to one cell in the middle of the grid. Specifying cell assignments by location
Use Index to insert the infill into specific cells based on cell numbers. Cells are numbered from start to end or bottom to top. For example, typing 1, 3, 5 would place the infill in the first, third, and fifth cells. Specifying cell assignment by index
Any cells that are not assigned a specific cell assignment use the default infill. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 In the right pane, select Location or Index for Type. 7 Select a cell assignment:
If you select ...
Then ...
Location
click the Used In column, and click the button at the far right of the row. Select the cells you want to use this assignment, and click OK.
Index
enter the cell numbers separated by commas in the Used In column. For vertical grids, cells are numbered from start to end and for horizontal grids, cells are numbered from bottom to top.
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells | 755
NOTE Do not assign multiple definitions to a cell because the last definition assigned to the cell is used.
8 Click OK.
Removing an Assignment from a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to remove cell assignments, frame assignments, and mullion assignments from a curtain wall style. You cannot remove default assignments, but you can modify them to suit your needs.
NOTE Each grid requires one division assignment. Therefore, you cannot remove the division assignment, although you can change the division element used for the division assignment.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid from which you want to remove an assignment. 6 Select a cell assignment, frame assignment, or a mullion assignment. 7 Click Remove Assignment. 8 Click OK.
Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames
The curtain wall frame is represented by the outer edges of the primary grid. Each nested grid has its own frame that is defined separately from the primary grid frame. By default, the frames of nested grids are turned off. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
Frame Assignments
A frame assignment defines the frame definition that is used by each frame edge. You can use one frame assignment to assign the same definition to all four edges of the frame, or you can create multiple frame assignments to assign different definitions to different edges of the frame. Unassigned edges are not displayed. Do not assign multiple definitions to the frame edge because only the last definition assigned to the edge is used.
Default Frame Assignment
There is a default frame assignment and you can select the frame edges it applies to. You can modify the default assignment to use any frame definition, but you cannot delete the default frame assignment.
Materials and Display Properties of Frames
The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default frame are applied to all frame edges unless you assign materials to the frame definition or you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each frame definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762. Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to add a frame assignment to a curtain wall. To assign different definitions to different frame edges, you need multiple frame assignments.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a new frame assignment.
756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
6 Click New Frame Assignment. A new frame assignment is displayed in the list of frame assignments. New frame assignment
7 Select the frame assignment in the right pane, right-click and click Rename, and then enter a descriptive name.
8 Select a frame definition from the Element column. 9 Specify the sides of the frame to use this frame assignment.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Edges Use a Frame Assignment" on page 758. 10 Click OK. Removing a Frame Edge from a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to remove a frame edge from a curtain wall. There are three ways to remove a frame edge: Set the width and depth of the edge to zero Leave the edge unassigned Specify None as an override to the edge assignment The first two methods remove the frame edge and expand the adjacent infills into the space occupied by the edge. Specifying a frame width and depth of zero
By specifying None as an override, the frame edge is not displayed, but the adjacent infill is not expanded into the space the edge occupied. Overriding a frame edge definition
For information about setting the width and depth to zero, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Frame by Width and Depth" on page 740. For information about leaving the edge unassigned, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Edges Use a Frame Assignment" on page 758. For information about overriding the edge, see "Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions" on page 772.
Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames | 757
Specifying Which Curtain Wall Edges Use a Frame Assignment Use this procedure to specify edges that use a frame assignment. When you create a frame assignment, you need to specify the edges of the frame to use that assignment. Frame edges that are not assigned a frame definition are not displayed.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 Select a frame assignment.
Location is the only way to specify the frame edges. 7 Click the Used In column, and then click the [...] button at the far right of the row.
Specifying frame location
8 Select the edges that you want to use this assignment - Left, Right, Top, or Bottom - and click OK. Assigning frames to nested grids
Do not assign multiple definitions to the same frame edge because only the last definition assigned to the edge is used. 9 Click OK.
Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions
The mullions of a curtain wall are the edges between the grid cells. The primary grid and each nested grid have mullions that are defined separately from the other grids. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749. Assign mullions to a nested grid
758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Mullion Assignments A mullion assignment defines the definition used by each mullion. You can use one assignment to define all mullions, or you can create multiple assignments and assign different definitions to different mullions in any grid. Do not assign multiple definitions to the same mullion because only the last definition assigned to the mullion is used.
Default Mullion Assignment There is a default mullion assignment used by all unassigned mullions. You can modify the default assignment to be any mullion definition, but you cannot delete the default mullion assignment. Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to add a new mullion assignment to a curtain wall style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a new mullion assignment. 6 Click New Mullion Assignment.
A new mullion assignment is displayed in the list of mullion assignments. New mullion assignment
7 Select the mullion assignment, right-click and click Rename, and then enter a descriptive name. 8 Select a mullion definition from the Element column. 9 Specify the mullions to use this assignment.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Mullions Use an Assignment" on page 759. 10 Click OK.
Specifying Which Curtain Wall Mullions Use an Assignment When you create a mullion assignment you need to specify the mullions in the grid to use that assignment. There are two options for selecting mullions:
Use Location to assign a definition to the start, middle, or end mullions of a vertical grid or the bottom, middle, or top mullions of a horizontal grid. If there is an even number of mullions (four or more), Middle refers to the two mullions in the middle of the grid. If there is an odd number of mullions (three or more), Middle refers to the one mullion in the middle of the grid.
Use Index to assign a definition to specific mullions based on mullion numbers. Mullions are numbered from start to end or bottom to top. For example, typing 1, 2, 3 would assign the definition to the first, second, and third mullions.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid.
Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions | 759
6 Create a new mullion assignment or select an existing assignment. 7 Select Location or Index for Type. 8 Select a cell assignment.
If you selected ... Location
Then ...
click the Used In column, and click the button at the far right of the row. Select the cells you want to use this cell assignment, and click OK.
Index
enter the mullion numbers separated by commas in the Used In column. For vertical grids, mullions are numbered from start to end and, for horizontal grids, mullions are numbered from bottom to top.
NOTE Do not assign multiple definitions to the same mullion because only the last definition assigned to the mullion is used.
9 Click OK. Any mullions that are not assigned a specific mullion assignment use the default mullion definition.
Removing Mullions from a Curtain Wall Grid Use this procedure to remove a mullion from the curtain wall. You can create a mullion definition whose edge width and depth are zero. Adjacent infills expand to fill in the space that was occupied by the mullion. This is an effective way to represent butt glazing.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to remove a mullion. 6 Create a new mullion assignment and enter 0 (zero) for the width and depth.
For more information, see "Defining Curtain Wall Mullions by Width and Depth" on page 744.
7 Under Mullion Assignments, select the mullion definition you created for any cell edges of any mullion assignment, where you want to remove the mullions. For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Mullions Use an Assignment" on page 759.
8 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Style
A curtain wall consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component. When you assign materials to a curtain wall style, you assign one material to each display component of the curtain wall. For example, you assign a wood material to the frame and a glass material to the glass inset. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to use the display properties of the curtain wall style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the curtain wall style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in three dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
Curtain Wall Materials and Display Components
The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each curtain wall component in the specified views.
Curtain Wall Component Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Screened, Reflected Plan Frame Definitions Mullion Definitions Infill Definitions Frame Definitions Hatch Mullion Definitions Hatch Infill Definitions Hatch Model Frame Mullion Infill
Material Component
Linework Linework Linework Linework Linework Linework
3D Body 3D Body 3D Body
Assigning Materials to a Curtain Wall Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a curtain wall style. When you assign a material to a curtain wall component, the component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the curtain wall. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, the frame, mullion, and infill are physical components of a curtain wall. The cell marker is a symbolic component.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a curtain wall component, you can change the display properties of the curtain wall style as described in "Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls" on page 762.
1 Open a tool palette that has a curtain wall tool. 2 Right-click a curtain wall tool, and click Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, select the value for Material Definition, and select a different
material definition.
Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Style | 761
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click definition and assign it to a component.
to create a new material
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls
The display of a curtain wall depends on the direction from which you view the curtain wall. In Plan view, the curtain wall object is displayed as parallel lines with vertices marking the grid lines, as an architect would typically draw a curtain wall. In 3D isometric views, the curtain wall object is displayed as it would appear in the real world, with surfaces showing length, thickness, and height. You control what you want to display in each particular view.
Element Definitions and Custom Display Components
By default, the display of all infills, frames, and mullions is controlled by the display properties of the default infill, default frame, and default mullions. However, you can add individual element definitions as components with separate display properties. For example, if you define two infills called stone panel and glass panel, by default they are both controlled by the default infill display properties. However, you can add each definition as a new display component, and then control the display properties separately.
NOTE The component name in the Custom Display Component dialog box must match the name of element definition in the Design Rules tab. Otherwise the element definition does not display properly.
For more information about the display system, see "Display System" on page 411.
Materials and Display Properties
You can use materials to control the display of both default and custom infills, frames, and mullions. When you assign materials to the element definitions you create, you do not need to define these definitions as custom display components. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Style" on page 760.
Adding Curtain Wall Element Definitions as Display Components Use this procedure to add curtain wall element definitions. Before you can control the display properties of curtain wall elements according to the definition assigned to the element, you must create display components for each element definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select Model as the display representation.
6 Click . The default list of components includes only the three basic elements and cell markers.
Default Model display components for curtain walls
7 Click the Other tab, and then click Add.
762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
8 Select Infill, Frame, or Mullion for Component Type. 9 Enter a name for Component Name, or click Select Element and select an element from the list. 10 Click OK. 11 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
The element definition that you added is displayed in the list of components. 12 Click the Other tab to continue adding element definitions, or click OK twice.
Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of a curtain wall style:
Visibility (component is on or off) By Material Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear. 6 Click Style Override. 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Curtain Wall Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of a curtain wall style. Curtain wall hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in Top view (Plan view) of a drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Style Override. 6 Click the Hatching tab. 7 Select a component, and click the setting for Pattern. 8 Specify the hatching for the component:
If you want to specify ... a hatching pattern that is available in the software
Then ... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls | 763
If you want to specify ... single hatching double hatching solid fill
Then ... select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch. select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch. select Solid Fill for Type.
9 Click OK. 10 Click the setting for Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 11 Click the setting for Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 12 Click the setting for Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to orient the hatching ... to the object, regardless of the object rotation
Then ... select Object.
to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
13 Click OK twice.
Adding Custom Graphics as a Display Component of a Curtain Wall There may be instances where an infill, frame, or mullion requires a custom two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D) graphic. For example, you might need a highly detailed 3D truss as the mullions or a decorative light fixture applied to an infill. In cases like these, you can create a custom block, add a display component with the block attached, and associate that component with an element definition. When you assign that definition to an element, the block is also displayed.
1 Draw your custom component, and save it as a block.
2 Select a curtain wall, right-click and click Edit Curtain Wall Style.
3 Click the Display Properties tab.
4 Click . 5 Click the Other tab. 6 Click Add. 7 Select Infill, Frame, or Mullion as the element type. 8 Select the specific element from the list. 9 Select Draw Custom Graphics. 10 Specify the display of the element:
If you want to ...
Then ...
display the block instead of the associated curtain wall element
select Replace Graphics.
superimpose the block over the curtain wall element so that clear Replace Graphics. both are displayed
11 Click Select Block, and select the custom block that you created. 12 Click OK. 13 Specify further settings for the custom display block:
If you want to ...
Then ...
scale the block to fit a particular dimension
select Width, Height, or Depth. To prevent the block from losing its proportions, select Lock XY Ratio.
764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify how the block is inserted into the grid in the X, Y, and specify an insertion point on the X, Y, and Z planes. Z directions
mirror the block
determine if it should mirror in the X, Y, or Z direction.
offset the block from the grid
specify the offset in the X, Y, or Z direction.
14 Click OK three times.
Creating Cut Planes for a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to specify the properties of one or more cut planes for a curtain wall style. Cut plane display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in Top view (Plan view) of a drawing. To better visualize the elements of a curtain wall in Plan view, you can create cut planes. The main cut plane is where the shrinkwrap and hatching are applied. The plan display shows the components and objects in the wall as they are displayed at the height of each cut plane.
1 Select a curtain wall, right-click, and click Edit Curtain Wall Style. 2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select Plan, and click .
NOTE The Cut Plane tab is displayed only in some display representations, such as Plan.
4 Click the Cut Plane tab to set the cut plane to be displayed in each display representation for the curtain wall style.
5 Enter a value for Cut Plane Height to specify the cut plane at which hatching takes effect.
6 To specifically define a cut plane, click Add, and enter the height of the new cut plane.
If you add a cut plane ...
Then ...
at a height that is lower than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Below Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
at a height that is higher than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Above Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
Below and Above components
You can click Remove to delete a cut plane that you added.
7 Click OK twice.
Defining a Curtain Wall Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a curtain wall style that can bound associative spaces. When a curtain wall style is set as bounding, by default all curtain walls that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
Defining a Curtain Wall Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces | 765
You can override the bounding settings from the curtain wall style in an individual curtain wall, if necessary. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the checkbox for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a curtain wall style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a curtain wall style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the curtain wall style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Text Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ... attach a reference file
Then ... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Using Overrides in Curtain Walls
Curtain walls are geometrically complex objects that often have a large number of different elements, such as frames, panels, and window infills. The settings for these elements are defined in the curtain wall style and can be modified using Style Manager. However, there are cases when modifying a curtain wall directly on screen is more suitable:
You want to add custom frame or mullion edges to a curtain wall and need direct visual feedback. You want to create an override, like a merged infill or an irregular panel shape in only one specific place in the
curtain wall. You want to experiment with different visuals without having to change the curtain wall style for each idea
immediately.
When you have finished your onscreen edits, you have three choices:
apply the overrides to the curtain wall you have edited. save the overrides to the current curtain wall style. create a new style for the overrides.
766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Overrides you can set include assigning a different definition to a selected cell, frame, or mullion, and assigning a profile to a frame or mullion edge. Note that the definition or profile must already exist in the current drawing before you can use it as an override. For example, if you want to override a cell that has a simple panel infill with an octagonal window infill, you must first define the window (octagonal) style as a valid infill in the curtain wall style. Similarly, if you want to override a frame or mullion edge assignment in the curtain wall, the curtain wall style must contain the edge profile as a frame or mullion definition.
NOTE You cannot modify a definition using the Override method. For information about modifying definitions, see "Modifying Element Definitions for Curtain Wall Styles" on page 782.
Overrides do not affect the Design Rules for the curtain wall style. However, you can transfer overrides to a curtain wall style if you want all curtain walls of that style to have the same overrides. You can view a list of overrides that are currently assigned to a curtain wall from the Overrides tab of the Curtain Wall Properties dialog box. For more information, see "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781.
NOTE Overrides are also listed on the Overrides tab in the Curtain Wall Style Properties dialog box.
Overriding Curtain Wall Infills
The cell infills of a curtain wall are set in the curtain wall style. You can, however, create overrides for these infills in cells. For example, you might want a row of glider windows for a first floor facade. In one specific position, however, you want a frosted glass window. In this case, you would set the row of glider windows in the curtain wall style, and then override the infill style in one specific cell with a frosted glass window. Curtain wall infills can consist of simple panels, objects like windows or doors, or nested grids. You can change one infill for another, merge cells, or remove the frame from an infill altogether. This would be useful if you add a door into a grid cell and want to remove the bottom frame from that cell. Turning on Cell Markers Use this procedure to turn on the cell markers for each grid cell in a curtain wall. The cell markers must be on in order to select individual cells and make changes to them. Viewing Cell Markers
1 Select the curtain wall for which you want to create an infill override. 2 Right-click, and click Infill Show Markers.
Merging Curtain Wall Cells Use this procedure to merge two curtain wall cells.
NOTE To merge curtain wall cells, the cell markers need to be visible. For information on turning on cell markers, see "Turning on Cell Markers" on page 767.
You can only merge cells which are adjacent to each other. In most cases you merge cells with the same infill type. The merged cell is then the same type as the original cells. For example, if you merge two solid panel infills, the resulting merged cell also has a solid panel infill. In some cases however, you might want to merge two cells that have different infill types. In that case, the infill type of the first selected cell is used for the merged cell. For example, if you want to merge a cell with a simple panel infill and a cell with a window infill, and you select the cell with the simple panel first during the merge command, the merged cell
Overriding Curtain Wall Infills | 767
contains a simple panel infill, not a window. If you select the two cells in the opposite order, the merged cell contains a window and no simple panel infill.
Merging two cells
1 Select the curtain wall on which you want to merge two cells. 2 Right-click, and click Infill Merge. 3 Select the first cell to be merged. 4 Select the second cell to be merged.
The cells are merged into one.
5 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall override:
If you want to save the override ... only on this specific curtain wall
Then ...
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall, see "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781.
to a curtain wall style
select the curtain wall, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
6 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall style, select the curtain wall again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
to the current curtain wall style
select Transfer Merge Operations to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a cell merge, only the Transfer Merge Operations to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a new cell assignment or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to save the override ... to a new curtain wall style
Then ...
select Transfer Merge Operations to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new curtain wall style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a cell merge, only the Transfer Merge Operations to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a new cell assignment or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides still remain on the curtain wall, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall style.
In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Cells Use this procedure to edit curtain wall cells using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit individual cells, bays, columns, or nested grids of the curtain wall directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the curtain wall or curtain wall style.
1 Select a curtain wall on which you want to edit cells with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the curtain wall:
If you want to edit ... this instance of the curtain wall
Then ... right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the curtain wall style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the curtain wall.
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter c (Cell) and press ENTER.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
5 Select the individual cells, bay, column, or nested grid to modify the cell assignment by hovering over a cell or pressing TAB, and press ENTER.
Press CTRL to select multiple cells, bays, columns or nested grids.
Overriding Curtain Wall Infills | 769
The Edit Cells worksheet displays.
6 Edit the cell for the selected grid:
If you want to... assign an infill to selected cells
Then...
select Assign Infill and select an infill definition. Clear Replace Cell and click OK.
replace the selected cells with a new infill
select Assign Infill and select an infill definition. Select Replace Cell and click OK.
create and assign a new infill to the selected
cells
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749.
divide the selected cells with divisions, infills select Subdivision. or frames
select a division for the subdivided cells
select a division definition.
create and assign a new division to the selected cells
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid" on page 748.
select an infill for the subdivided cells
create and assign a new infill to the subdivided cells
select an infill definition.
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells" on page 749.
select a frame definition for the grid created select the frame definition and click OK. after the cell is subdivided
specify the location of frames on the grid created after the cell is subdivided
select Top, Bottom, Left, Right for Frame Location and click OK.
770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to...
Then...
create and assign a new frame definition for the new grid created after the cell is subdivided
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Curtain Wall" on page 756.
select a mullion definition for the grid created select the mullion definition. after the cell is subdivided
create and assign a new mullion definition to the selected grid
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Curtain Wall Style" on page 759.
replace the existing cell infill with the options select Replace Cell. selected on this worksheet
continue in-place editing the grid after the select Continue Grid Editing. cell is subdivided
7 Click OK. 8 Press ENTER.
Creating a Curtain Wall Infill Override Use this procedure to override the infill of a curtain wall cell. For example, you might have a row of simple concrete panels in your curtain wall, but want in one location a round window instead of the concrete panel. In that case, it might be simpler to use an infill override, instead of creating complex curtain wall unit definitions.
NOTE To override an infill assignment, the cell markers must be visible. For information on turning on cell markers, see "Turning on Cell Markers" on page 767.
To exchange an infill definition, the new infill definition must already be defined in the curtain wall style. For information on creating infill definitions, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells" on page 736.
1 Select the curtain wall on which you want to override an infill. 2 Right-click, and click Infill Override Assignment. 3 Select the marker of the cell where you want to create an override, and press ENTER.
4 Create the override. If you want to ... exchange the existing infill for another
Then ... select a new infill definition from the list.
Overriding Curtain Wall Infills | 771
If you want to ... remove one or more of the frames around the infill
remove the complete infill and its frame
Then ...
select the frame component to be removed. You could, for example, override a cell to contain a door infill instead of a panel infill; in this case, you would want to remove the bottom frame of the cell.
select Remove Infill and Frames.
NOTE This works only for infills that border the exterior of the curtain wall.
5 Click OK. 6 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall override.
If you want to save the override ... only on this specific curtain wall
Then ...
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall, see "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781.
to a curtain wall style
select the curtain wall, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
7 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall style, select the curtain wall again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
to the current curtain wall style
select Transfer Cell Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only an infill override, only the Transfer Cell Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
to a new curtain wall style
select Transfer Cell Overrides to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new curtain wall style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only an infill override, only the Transfer Cell Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides remain on the curtain wall, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall style.
Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions
You can change a selected frame edge or mullion edge by using an edge assignment override.
772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
NOTE To exchange a frame edge or mullion edge, the new edge definition must already be defined in the curtain wall style.
Removing the edge does not affect the width of the cell. To remove the edge and have the adjacent cell resize, create an edge definition with a width and depth of zero. For more information, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Frame by Width and Depth" on page 740 or "Defining Curtain Wall Mullions by Width and Depth" on page 744.
You can also create a new edge profile by drawing a polyline or using an existing profile in the drawing. This edge profile can be interactively edited onscreen by in-place editing.
Creating a Frame or Mullion Override Use this procedure to override an individual frame or mullion.
To exchange a frame or mullion, the new definition must already be defined in the curtain wall style. For information on creating frames and mullions, see "Defining Curtain Wall Frames" on page 740 and "Defining Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 744.
1 Select the curtain wall on which you want to override an edge.
2 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Override Assignment.
3 Select the frame or mullion edge you want to override. If you selected a frame edge, the Frame Assignment Override dialog box is displayed.
If you selected a mullion, the Mullion Assignment Override dialog box is displayed.
4 Create the override.
If you want to ...
Then ...
exchange the existing edge for another
select a new edge definition from the list.
remove the frame or mullion edge
select Remove Edge.
5 Click OK. 6 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
only on this specific curtain wall
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall, see "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781.
to a curtain wall style
select the curtain wall, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
7 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall style, select the curtain wall again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
to the current curtain wall style
select Transfer Edge Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a frame or mullion edge override, only the Transfer Edge Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions | 773
If you want to save the override ... to a new curtain wall style
Then ...
select Transfer Edge Overrides to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new curtain wall style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a frame or mullion edge override, only the Transfer Edge Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides remain on the curtain wall, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall style.
Creating a Frame or Mullion Edge from a Polyline or Profile Using In-Place Editing Use this procedure to assign a profile to a vertical edge of a frame or mullion. The curtain wall edge profile can be any profile or any closed polyline that you specify. You can use a profile edge to create a unique corner in situations where a simple miter is not sufficient.
NOTE Adjacent infills are not trimmed or expanded to accommodate the new edge. To adjust the infill, change the width of the frame edge. For more information, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Frame by Width and Depth" on page 740.
Overriding edge profile
1 Draw a closed polyline in the location where you want it to display in the curtain wall. NOTE For best results, it is recommended to draw the polyline in Plan view.
2 Select the curtain wall for which you want to create a frame or mullion edge profile override. 3 Specify the mode in which to edit the curtain wall:
If you want to edit ... this instance of the curtain wall
Then ... right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the curtain wall style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the curtain wall.
4 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Add Profile.
774 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
5 Select a vertical frame or mullion edge.
6 Select a profile for the override. If you want to create the edge profile ... from the polyline drawn in step 1
from an existing profile in the drawing
Then ...
select Start from scratch for Profile Definition, and enter a name for New Profile Name.
select the existing profile for Profile Definition, and click Continue Editing.
7 Select whether to apply the profile to the shared edge element definition or as an edge profile override. 8 Click OK.
You are now in in-place edit mode, and can edit the profile.
9 On the In-Place Edit toolbar, click
to zoom to the profile.
10 Select the profile and edit it using Edge and Vertex grips, or by using the right-click context menu.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
11 Save or discard changes to the curtain wall grid:
If you want to exit the in-place editing session ... Then ...
without saving your changes
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions | 775
If you want to exit the in-place editing session ... after saving your changes
Then ...
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
In-Place Editing of Edge Profiles for Curtain Walls Use this procedure to edit profile edges using in-place editing. With in-place editing, you can edit the curtain wall directly and interactively in the drawing area and later save the changes to the profile definition.
1 Select a curtain wall that has the edge profile you want to edit with in-place editing. 2 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Edit Profile In Place.
This command is only available if you have profile-based edges in the curtain wall.
NOTE If the profile is not drawn to size, it must be converted in order for you to begin the in-place editing session. Click Yes if prompted to convert the profile to its actual size.
3 Select the edge you want to edit.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the magenta-colored grips and light blue hatch of the temporary in-place editing profile, as well as the faded color of all other objects in the drawing. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
4 Edit the profile: If you want to ... use grips to edit the profile
add a vertex to the profile remove a vertex from the profile
Then ...
move the grips as needed.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
776 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to ... add a ring to the profile
remove a ring from a profile
Then ...
select the profile, right-click and click Add Ring. Then, select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for an additional ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press Enter.
select the profile, right-click and click Remove Ring. Then select the ring you want to remove.
NOTE You cannot remove the last ring from a profile.
replace a ring on a profile
select the profile, right-click and click Replace Ring. Then, select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for the replaced ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press Enter.
5 Save the changes to the profile.
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the existing profile definition to reflect the new shape
create a new profile definition with the shape you have created
discard all changes on the profile and revert back to the previous shape
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save As New Profile. Then, enter a name for the new profile and click OK. The inplace edit session is exited and the new profile definition is available in the Style Manager.
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions Use this procedure to edit frames and mullions using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit bays, columns or nested grids of the curtain wall directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the curtain wall or curtain wall style.
1 Select a curtain wall on which you want to edit frames or mullions with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the curtain wall:
If you want to edit ...
Then ...
this instance of the curtain wall
right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the curtain wall style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the curtain wall.
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter f (Frame and mullion assignment) and press ENTER.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
5 Select the bay, column or nested grid to modify the frame and mullion assignment and press ENTER. Press CTRL to select multiple bays, columns or nested grids.
Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions | 777
The Modify Frame/Mullion Assignment worksheet displays.
6 Select a frame definition for the selected grid:
If you want to...
Then...
modify the frame of the selected grid
select a frame definition and click OK.
specify the location of the frame on the selected grid
select Top, Bottom, Left, Right for Frame Location and click OK.
create and assign a new frame definition to
the selected grid
click
.
For more information, see "Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Curtain Wall" on page 756.
7 Select the mullion definition for the selected grid:
If you want to...
Then...
modify the mullion of the selected grid
select the mullion definition and click OK.
create and assign a new mullion definition to the selected grid
click
and complete the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Curtain Wall Style" on page 759.
8 Press ENTER.
Overriding Curtain Wall Divisions
The grid of a curtain wall is made up of one or more divisions that define how the curtain wall is partitioned. Divisions can be horizontal or vertical, and can be nested in each other. For detailed information on curtain wall divisions, see "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids" on page 728. You can override a division in a curtain wall, thereby changing the grid of the curtain wall.
Creating a Division Override Use this procedure to create a division override on a curtain wall.
778 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
NOTE To exchange a curtain wall division, the new division definition must already be defined in the curtain wall style. For information on curtain wall divisions, see "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids" on page 728.
1 Select the curtain wall for which you want to create a division override.
2 Right-click, and click Division Override Assignment. 3 Select an edge of the curtain wall to determine if a horizontal or vertical division is overridden.
For example, if you want to override the primary horizontal division, you could select the bottom horizontal frame of the curtain wall.
TIP The Division Assignment Override dialog box shows you which grid type and which grid division you have selected, e.g. Selected Nested Grid: Secondary Grid, Division Element Definition: Vertical 3 Cells. If you have accidentally selected the wrong division, click Cancel and reselect the correct grid.
4 Select the appropriate division override, and click OK. 5 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall override:
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
only on this specific curtain wall
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall, see "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781.
to a curtain wall style
select the curtain wall, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
6 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall style, select the curtain wall again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
to the current curtain wall style
select Transfer Division Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Division Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
to a new curtain wall style
select Transfer Division Overrides to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new curtain wall style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Division Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes, too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides remain on the curtain wall, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Overrides" on page 781, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall style.
Overriding Curtain Wall Divisions | 779
In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Divisions Use this procedure to edit divisions using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit the curtain wall directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the curtain wall or curtain wall style. For more information, see "Division of Curtain Wall Grids" on page 729.
1 Select a curtain wall on which you want to edit divisions with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the curtain wall:
If you want to edit ... this instance of the curtain wall
Then ... right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the curtain wall style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the curtain wall.
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter d (Division in place) and press ENTER.
Viewing edit in-place grips for a primary division
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
Viewing edit in-place grips for adding and removing bays
5 Edit the division: If you want to ... add a bay to the grid remove a bay from the grid change the start offset of the grid
780 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Then ... click the Add Bay grip. click the Remove Bay grip. select the Start Offset grip and move it to the appropriate position.
If you want to ... change the end offset of the grid change the spacing of bays manually edit the grid
use a worksheet to edit the cell dimensions
Then ...
select the End Offset grip and move it to the appropriate position.
click the Auto Grid Bay Spacing grip and move it to the appropriate position.
right-click and click Convert To Manual. You can manually add and remove gridlines, change the offsets, and change the position of individual gridlines.
click the Fixed Cell Dimension Rules grip, and edit the values in the worksheet.
6 Save or discard changes to the curtain wall grid:
If you want to exit the in-place editing session ... without saving your changes
after saving your changes
Then ...
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar. If you edited the
grid by instance, the changes are saved to the design rules
for the individual grid. If you edited the curtain wall style, the
Save Changes dialog box is displayed.
7 In the Save Changes dialog box, specify to which division to save the changes:
If you want to ...
Then ...
save the changes to the style in the current curtain wall division
verify the current division is selected for Save Changes to Existing Division, and click Save. The changes are made in the style and affect all curtain walls of that style in the drawing.
create an override to the style by saving the changes in a new curtain wall division
click New, enter a name for the new division override, and click OK. Click Save. The changes are saved as an override to the style, and affect only the curtain walls to which the override is applied.
Removing Curtain Wall Overrides
Use this procedure to remove curtain wall overrides either from the curtain wall or the curtain wall style. 1 Select the curtain wall.
If you want to remove an override ...
Then ...
from a curtain wall
select the curtain wall, expand Advanced in the Properties palette, and click Overrides.
from the curtain wall style
select the curtain wall, right-click and click Edit Curtain Wall Style, and then click the Overrides tab.
2 Select an override from the list and click Remove. 3 Click OK.
Removing Curtain Wall Overrides | 781
Modifying Element Definitions for Curtain Wall Styles
Use this procedure to modify existing elements in a curtain wall style. A curtain wall consists of division, infill, frame and mullion elements, all of which are defined in the design rules of the curtain wall style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall style that you want to change. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, click Element Definitions.
The list of element types is displayed.
Element definitions list
6 Decide the type of elements you want to edit: If you want to modify ... a division definition
an infill definition a frame definition a mullion definition
7 Click OK twice.
Then ...
click Divisions under Element Definitions. In the right pane, select the division definition you want to modify and edit it as described in "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids" on page 728.
click Infills under Element Definitions. In the right pane, select the infill definition you want to modify and edit it as described in "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells" on page 736.
click Frames under Element Definitions. In the right pane, select the frame definition you want to modify and edit it as described in "Defining Curtain Wall Frames" on page 740.
click Mullions under Element Definitions. In the right pane, select the mullion definition you want to modify and edit it as described in "Defining Curtain Wall Mullions" on page 744.
Editing Curtain Walls
Most relevant settings for a curtain wall are defined in the curtain wall style. These include divisions, infills, frames, and mullions. For information on modifying a curtain wall style, see "Curtain Wall Styles" on page 725.
782 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
You can make other changes directly to individual curtain walls. These changes affect only the curtain wall you select: Dimensions of a curtain wall Roof and floor line settings Interference conditions Cleanup settings
Methods of Editing Curtain Walls Autodesk Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing curtain walls:
You can directly edit curtain walls using grips for dimensions, base height, location, and other physical characteristics. You can directly edit curtain walls using the Edit Grid grip for grid divisions, cells, frames, and mullions. For more
information, see "In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Divisions " on page 780, "In-Place Editing of Edge Profiles for Curtain Walls " on page 776 and "Overriding Curtain Wall Infills" on page 767. You can change curtain wall settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the context menu for a selected curtain wall. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help.
Using Grips to Edit Curtain Walls
There are many different curtain wall grips. The grips that appear in your drawing when you select a curtain wall are dependent upon the design rules of the curtain wall. For more information, see "Curtain Wall Styles" on page 725. Editing Curtain Wall Dimensions Use this procedure to change the dimensions of a curtain wall.
1 Select the curtain wall. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
You can modify the dimensions of the length, roof line, floor line, and base height for a curtain wall. Viewing Curtain Wall Lengthen and Base Height grips
Using Grips to Edit Curtain Walls | 783
3 Enter a value for the dimension and press ENTER, or drag the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed.
Changing the Location or Position of a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to change the location or the position of a curtain wall with grips.
1 Select the curtain wall. 2 Select the appropriate grip to change the location of the curtain wall, its start point, or its endpoint.
Viewing Curtain Wall Start, End, Location, and Reverse Direction Grips
In Model view, the Location grip has three possible edit modes: Edit Along Object's XY Plane, Edit Along Object's YZ Plane, and Edit Along Object's XZ Plane. Press CTRL to cycle between modes until you are in the desired mode. The default edit mode is along the XY plane. In Plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane. 3 Move the curtain wall to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the curtain wall along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either of the dimension directions in the current edit mode and then press TAB, the movement of the curtain wall is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the curtain wall is constrained to the Y dimension direction. Viewing Curtain Wall Location Grip
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
784 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Changing the Base Height of a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to change the base height of a curtain wall with grips.
1 Select the curtain wall. 2 Select the Base Height grip, move the grip until the height value you want is displayed, and click once.
NOTE As you move the grip, the original base height value is displayed in addition to the new base height and the difference between the two values.
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a new value for the base height of the curtain wall. Changing the Length of a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to change the length of a curtain wall with grips.
1 Select the curtain wall. 2 Select the Lengthen grip, move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once.
Using Grips to Edit Curtain Walls | 785
NOTE As you move the grip, the original length value is displayed in addition to the new length and the difference between the two values.
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a new value for the length of the curtain wall. Changing the Radius of a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to change the radius of a curved curtain wall with grips.
1 Select the curtain wall. 2 Select the Curve Radius grip, move the grip until the radius value you want is displayed, and click once.
786 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
NOTE As you move the grip, the original radius value is displayed in addition to the new radius and the difference between the two values.
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a new value for the radius of the curtain wall. Reversing the Direction of a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to change the direction in which a curtain wall is drawn by reversing the start point and the end point of the curtain wall with grips. Curtain walls are drawn from the first specified point to the last point. Some commands and properties are affected by that order. To determine the direction in which a curtain wall was drawn, select the curtain wall. The Reverse Direction grip is shaped like an arrow and points in the direction in which the curtain wall has been drawn.
1 Select the curtain wall for which you want to reverse the direction. 2 Click on the Reverse Direction grip.
The direction of the wall is reversed, which switches the Start and End grips.
Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Style
Use this procedure to select a different style for the curtain wall on the Properties palette. 1 Double-click the curtain wall for which you want to change the style. You can select multiple curtain walls and change the style for all at the same time. 2 On the Properties palette, scroll to the General subcategory. 3 Select a different style.
Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Style | 787
Applying the Properties of an Existing Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a curtain wall tool to one or more existing curtain walls. The properties include the curtain wall style and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a curtain wall tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Curtain Wall. 3 Select the curtain wall(s), and press ENTER.
The properties of the selected curtain wall(s) match the properties of the curtain wall tool.
Changing the Dimensions of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to change the dimensions of a curtain wall on the Properties palette. 1 Double-click a curtain wall. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Dimensions. 3 Change the dimension:
Dimension
Description
Base Height
Height of the curtain wall from the baseline
Length
Length of a straight curtain wall from the start grip on the baseline to the end grip
Radius (curved curtain walls only)
Radius of a curved curtain wall from the start grip on the baseline to the end grip
Start Miter
Angle of all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) at the start of the curtain wall: for more information about miter angles, see "Mitering Curtain Walls" on page 789.
End Miter
Angle of all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) at the end of the curtain wall
Changing the Curtain Wall Location Properties
Use this procedure to relocate a curtain wall by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The curtain wall also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the curtain wall are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the curtain wall by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the curtain wall on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the curtain wall you want to change. 2 Expand Location. 3 Click Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the curtain wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
relocate the curtain wall
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
788 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to ... locate the curtain wall on the XY plane locate the curtain wall on the YZ plane locate the curtain wall on the XZ plane change the rotation of the curtain wall
Then ...
make the normal of the wall parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
make the normal of the curtain wall parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the curtain wall parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Adding an Interference Condition to a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to add an interference condition to a curtain wall. Interference conditions use the geometry of 3D objects to create custom openings or cutouts in curtain walls. You can specify how the interference condition is applied to the curtain wall: added to the curtain wall, subtracted from the curtain wall, or ignored.
You can specify whether the interference condition applies to an infill, frame, or mullions of a curtain wall.
1 Place the object in the location where you want to specify the interference condition.
2 Select the curtain wall to which you want to add an interference condition, right-click, and click Interference Add.
3 Select the object intersecting the curtain wall, and press ENTER.
4 Specify to which curtain wall component the interference should be added:
If you want to add the interference condition ...
Then ...
to the infill
enter y (Yes) when prompted for the infill component.
to the frame
enter y (Yes) when prompted for the frame component.
to the mullion
enter y (Yes) when prompted for the mullion component.
5 Press ENTER.
Removing an Interference Condition from a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to remove an object, such as a mass element, from a curtain wall that the object was added to as an interference condition.
1 Select the curtain wall from which you want to remove an interference object, right-click, and click Interference Remove.
2 Select the object intersecting the curtain wall, and press ENTER.
Mitering Curtain Walls
Use this procedure to miter the corners where curtain walls meet. The corner where adjacent curtain walls meet is not mitered by default. However, you can determine the necessary angles automatically. The miter angle applies to all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) that are adjacent to the corner. Vertical edges are not affected.
TIP If you want to create a custom corner condition between two curtain walls, you can replace the edge of one curtain wall with an AEC profile and remove the edge of the other curtain wall by using the frame override Remove Edge option. For more information, see "Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions" on page 772 and "Defining Curtain Wall Frames" on page 740.
1 Select one of the curtain walls, right-click, and click Set Miter Angles.
Adding an Interference Condition to a Curtain Wall | 789
2 Select the other curtain wall. If you change the angle of either curtain wall, use Set Miter Angles again to recalculate the angles.
Specifying a Miter Angle for a Curtain Wall Adjacent to Another Object
Use this procedure to manually create a mitered corner between a curtain wall and another object, such as a standard wall or a mass element. For example, if your curtain wall connects with a standard wall that is at a 60-degree angle from the curtain wall, you would set the miter angle to 30. The miter angle applies to all infills and horizontal edges that are adjacent to the corner. Vertical edges are not affected.
TIP To quickly identify the start and end of a curtain wall, select the curtain wall. The Reverse Direction grip points toward the end of the curtain wall.
Frame miter angles for a curtain wall
1 Double-click the curtain wall. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Miter the curtain wall on the start or the end point:
If you want to miter the curtain wall ...
Then ...
at its start point
enter an angle for Start Miter, and press ENTER.
at its end point
enter an angle for End Miter, and press ENTER.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a curtain wall. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a curtain wall.
1 Double-click the curtain wall. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. 4 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the text. 5 Click OK. 6 To attach a reference file, click under Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click the description. Enter the new text, and press ENTER.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
790 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to ... detach a reference file 7 Click OK twice.
Then ... select the file name, and click Delete.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall
You can modify the roof and floor lines of a curtain wall to create a non-rectangular curtain wall: You edit vertex locations on the roof line to create steps, gables, and other roof conditions. Modifying the roof line of a curtain wall
You edit vertex locations on the floor lines to create steps and other floor conditions. Modifying the floor line of a curtain wall
You can also create non-rectangular roof and floor conditions by projecting to polylines. Autodesk Architectural Desktop offers multiple methods of editing roof lines and floor lines. You may want to begin by graphically creating a custom roof line or floor line condition. You can then fine-tune that condition by specifying precise values in the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette.
Offsetting or Projecting the Roof Line of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to change the height or the shape of the roof line of a curtain wall: Offset the roof line from the current height of the curtain wall. Project the roof line of the curtain wall to a polyline. Project the roof line of the curtain wall to another object, such as a roof or stairs.
You can also create a polyline that represents the current roof line of the selected curtain wall. You can then use this polyline to change the roof line of other curtain walls. NOTE To project the roof line to a polyline, draw the polyline first in Elevation view. For best results, the polyline should be parallel to the curtain wall. The polyline does not need to be in the same plane as the curtain wall.
1 Select a curtain wall, right-click, and click Roof Line / Floor Line Modify Roof Line. The current roof line is the default value in the curtain wall style.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall | 791
2 Change the roof line of the wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
offset the roof line from the current height of the curtain wall enter o (Offset), select the curtain walls to change, and enter an offset distance. Enter a negative value to project the roof line below the current curtain wall height.
project the roof line to a polyline
enter p (Project), select the curtain walls to change, and select the polyline.
generate a polyline of the current roof line
enter g (Generate), and select the curtain walls for the polyline to be created from.
project the roof line to another object, such as a roof or stairs
enter a (Auto-project), select the curtain walls to change, and select the object to project to. When projecting to stairs, make sure that the bottom riser or the stringer does not create a zero-height segment of curtain wall.
remove any changes to the roof line
enter r (Reset), and select the curtain walls to change.
3 Press ENTER. The new roof line value is used only on the selected curtain walls. The curtain wall style is unchanged.
Offsetting or Projecting the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to change the height or the shape of the floor line of a curtain wall:
Offset the floor line from the current baseline of the curtain wall. Project the floor line of the curtain wall to a polyline. Project the floor line of the curtain wall to another object, such as a floor slab or stairs.
You can also create a polyline that represents the current floor line of the selected curtain walls. You can then use this polyline to change the floor line of other curtain walls.
NOTE To project the floor line to a polyline, draw the polyline first in Elevation view. For best results, the polyline should be parallel to the curtain wall. The polyline does not need to be in the same plane as the curtain wall.
1 Select a curtain wall, right-click, and click Roof Line / Floor Line Modify Floor Line. The current floor line is the default value in the curtain wall style.
2 Change the floor line of the curtain wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
offset the floor line from the current baseline of the curtain wall
enter o (Offset), select the curtain walls to change, and enter an offset distance. Enter a negative value to offset the floor line below the current baseline.
project the floor line to a polyline
enter p (Project), select the curtain walls to change, and select the polyline.
generate a polyline of the current floor line
enter g (Generate), and select the curtain walls for the polyline to be created from.
project the floor line to another object, such as a floor slab enter a (Auto-project), select the curtain walls to change, and
or stairs
select the object to project to.
remove any changes to the floor line
enter r (Reset), and select the curtain walls to change.
3 Press ENTER. The new floor line value is used only in the selected curtain wall. The curtain wall style is unchanged.
792 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of the roof line or the floor line of a curtain wall:
Add, modify, or remove gables. Add, modify, or remove steps. Project the roof line or the floor line to a polyline or to other objects, such as roofs, roof slabs, slabs, and stairs. Create custom roof line or floor line conditions by adding and adjusting vertices and edges. Reverse the roof line or the floor line of the curtain wall without reversing the curtain wall itself. Remove all changes to the roof line or the floor line of a curtain wall.
You can also edit the roof line and the floor line on the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette. For more information, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall" on page 798.
NOTE If you want to project the roof line or the floor line to a polyline, draw the polyline before you start this procedure.
1 Select the curtain wall that has the roof line or floor line you want to change, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Edit in Place.
A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the roof line or the floor line.
2 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
Edit the profile:
If you want to ... add a gable to the roof line or the floor line
Then ...
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Gable. Select the roof line or the floor line.
add a step to the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Step. Select the roof line or the floor line.
change the shape of the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, and use Vertex and Edge grips to adjust the shape.
add vertices to the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Vertex. Select a point for each new vertex, and press ENTER.
remove vertices from the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. Select each vertex to remove, and press ENTER.
project the roof line or the floor line to a polyline
select the profile, right-click, and click Project. Select the roof line or the floor line, and select the polyline. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
project the roof line or the floor line to another object, such select the profile, right-click, and click Auto Project. Select
as a stair or a roof
the roof line or the floor line, and select the object.
reverse the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, right-click, and click Reverse. Select the roof line or the floor line.
restore the roof line to the base height of the curtain wall, or select the profile, right-click, and click Remove. Select the
restore the floor line to the baseline of the curtain wall
roof line or the floor line.
NOTE To add a gable or a step to a roof line or a floor line that has been edited, first use the Remove option on the shortcut menu to remove an existing roof line or floor line condition.
Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall | 793
3 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ...
Then ...
restore the roof line and the floor line to their shape before editing
select the profile, and click
.
save the changes
select the profile, and click
. The curtain wall uses the
edited profile to define its geometry.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line
Use this procedure to change the height or the shape of the roof line and the floor line using grips. 1 Select a curtain wall.
794 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
2 Select a Roof Line End or Floor Line End grip, move the grip to the appropriate position, and click once.
Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line | 795
Adding a Gable to the Roof Line of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to add a gable to the roof line of a curtain wall. You can also add a gable on the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette. For more information, see "Specifying Gable Settings for a Roof Line" on page 799. NOTE This option is available only if the roof line has not been edited. After the roof line changes, you cannot add a gable using this option. To add a gable to a roof line that has been edited, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall" on page 798.
1 Select the curtain wall, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Edit in Place. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the Roof line.
2 Right-click, and click Add Gable. If Add Gable is not listed on the menu, the roof line was previously edited.
3 Select the roof line.
796 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Modifying a curtain wall roof line by adding a gable
A third vertex is added to the roof line halfway between the two ends of the roof line.
4 Continue editing the roof line or the floor line, if needed. For more information, see "Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line" on page 794.
5 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ... restore the roof line to its previous shape
Then ...
save the changes to the roof line
select the profile, and click
.
select the profile, and click
.
Adding a Step to the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to add a step to the roof line or the floor line of a curtain wall. You can also add a step on the Roof/Floor Line worksheet on the Properties palette. For more information, see "Specifying Step Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line" on page 800.
NOTE This option is available only when the roof line or the floor line has not been edited. After the line has been changed, you cannot automatically add a step using this option. To add a step to a roof line or a floor line that has been edited, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall" on page 798.
1 Select the curtain wall, right-click, and click Roof/Floor Line Edit in Place. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the roof line or the floor line.
2 Right-click, and click Add Step. If Add Step is not listed on the menu, the roof line or the floor line was previously edited.
3 Select the roof line or the floor line.
Adding a Step to the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall | 797
Modifying a curtain wall floor line by adding a step
A third vertex is added to the line halfway between the two ends of the line and four feet from the line. A step is created from the selected vertex to the second vertex.
4 Continue editing the roof line or the floor line, if needed. For more information, see "Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line" on page 794.
5 Save or discard the changes:
If you want to ...
Then ...
restore the roof line or the floor line to its previous shape
save the changes to the roof line or the floor line
select the profile, and click
.
select the profile, and click
.
Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to perform the following tasks:
Add, move, or remove vertices and edges in the roof line or the floor line of a curtain wall. Add gables or steps to a roof line or steps to a floor line that was previously edited by adding vertices that define
these conditions. Remove all changes to the roof line or the floor line, restoring the original base height or baseline of a curtain wall.
NOTE You can also edit vertices in a curtain wall with the curtain wall worksheets. For information, see "Specifying Vertex Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line" on page 801.
1 Select the curtain wall in which you want to edit vertices, right-click, and click Roof Line/Floor Line Edit in Place.
A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the roof line or the floor line.
2 Edit the vertices:
If you want to ... change the position of a vertex or an edge
Then ... select its grip and move it to the appropriate position.
add a vertex
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Vertex. Specify new vertices in the drawing. When you are finished adding vertices, press Enter.
798 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to ... remove a vertex
restore the original roof line or floor line
Then ...
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. Select the vertices you want to remove. Press Enter.
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove. Select the roof line or the floor line.
3 Save the changes to the curtain wall:
If you want to ...
Then ...
save the changes to the current curtain wall
select the profile, right-click, and click Save All Changes.
discard all changes on the curtain wall and revert back to the select the profile, right-click, and click Discard all Changes.
previous shape
Changes you made to the roof line or floor line of the curtain
wall are discarded.
Specifying Gable Settings for a Roof Line
Use this procedure to add a gable to the roof line of a curtain wall by adding a vertex to the roofline. Modifying a curtain wall roof line by adding a gable
NOTE This option is available only if the roof line has not been edited. After the roof line changes, you cannot add a gable using this option. To add a gable to a roof line that has been edited, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall" on page 798.
1 Double-click the curtain wall. 2 Expand Advanced. 3 Click Roof/floor line. 4 Select Edit Roof Line or Edit Floor Line. 5 Click Add Gable.
A third vertex is added to the roof line halfway between the two ends of the roof line.
Specifying Gable Settings for a Roof Line | 799
The table at the top of the dialog box displays information about each vertex in the curtain wall. You can also select the vertex to edit from the list.
6 Click OK.
Specifying Step Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line
Use this procedure to add a step to the roof line or the floor line of a curtain wall. Modifying a curtain wall roof line by adding a gable
NOTE This option is available only when the roof line or the floor line has not been edited. After the line has been changed, you cannot automatically add a step using this option. To add a step to a roof line or a floor line that has been edited, see "Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall" on page 798.
1 Double-click the curtain wall. 2 Expand Advanced. 3 Click Roof/floor line. 4 Select Edit Roof Line or Edit Floor Line. 5 Click Add Step.
A third vertex is added to the line halfway between the two ends of the line. A step is created from the selected vertex to the second vertex.
800 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
The table at the top displays information about each vertex in the curtain wall. You can select a vertex to edit from the list.
6 Click OK.
Specifying Vertex Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line
Use this procedure to perform the following tasks:
Add, move, or remove vertices in the roof line or the floor line of a curtain wall. Add gables or steps to a roof line or steps to a floor line that was previously edited by adding vertices that define
these conditions.
1 Double-click the curtain wall. 2 Expand Advanced. 3 Click Roof/floor line. 4 Select Edit Roof Line or Edit Floor Line.
The active vertex in the illustration changes when you select a different line to edit. Any changes you make to the wall are reflected in the illustration.
5 Specify vertex settings:
If you want to ... add a vertex
Then ...
click Insert Vertex. In the Wall Roof/Floor Line Vertex dialog box, specify the horizontal offset and vertical offset for the new vertex, specify a distance, and click OK.
move a vertex
select a vertex from the list, and then click Edit Vertex.
delete a vertex
select a vertex from the list, and then click Delete Vertex. The selected vertex is deleted, and the line automatically connects the two adjacent vertices.
6 Specify the horizontal offset.
The horizontal offset specifies the existing vertex from which to measure the placement of the next vertex and how far away from the existing vertex to place the new one. Distance is measured in the direction the curtain wall is drawn. You can enter a negative number to offset the vertex in the reverse direction.
7 Specify the vertical offset.
The vertical offset specifies the location from which to measure the height of the next vertex and how far away from the existing location to place the new vertex. You can enter a negative number to offset the vertex toward the ground.
8 Click OK twice.
Specifying Vertex Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line | 801
Editing Objects Anchored in Curtain Walls
When you fill a curtain wall cell with an infill that contains an object, such as a door or window, you can edit that object independently from the curtain wall. For example, you can select a door from a curtain wall and edit its properties. You can edit the anchor settings for the door to change the orientation of the door and the alignment or offset of the door in relation to the curtain wall. You can also move objects from one cell to another or release the object anchor so that the object moves independently of the curtain wall. When you move or release an object or edit its properties, you are creating a variation from the infill cell assignment for the curtain wall style. By default, these variations (except release) are allowed to persist in the drawing when you reapply the style to a curtain wall. However, if you want these variations to be overridden when you reapply a curtain wall style, turn off the Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition option on the Anchor worksheet of the Properties palette of the object. This option is set on a per object basis.
Changing the Orientation of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to change the orientation of an object anchored in a curtain wall using grips. 1 Click the object in the curtain wall for which you want to change the orientation. 2 Click the appropriate Flip grip to change the X or Y direction of the object. You can also change the orientation of an object, including the Z direction, using the Anchor worksheet found on the object's Properties palette.
Changing the Alignment of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to modify the alignment of an object that is anchored in a curtain wall. 1 Double-click the object in the curtain wall. 2 Expand Location, and click Anchor. 3 Click Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition. 4 Select a new alignment for the object. For more information, see "Specifying an Alignment for a Curtain Wall Infill" on page 738.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Offset of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall
Use this procedure to change the offset of an object anchored in a curtain wall. 1 Double-click the object in the curtain wall. 2 Expand Location, and click Anchor. 3 Click Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition. 4 Specify a new offset for the object. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Infill" on page 738.
5 Click OK.
Swapping Two Objects Anchored in a Curtain Wall
When you fill a curtain wall cell with an object, such as a door or window, you can swap that object with another object in the curtain wall.
1 Select one of the objects from the curtain wall and click Infill Anchor Swap Objects. 2 Select the object you want to swap with.
Releasing an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall
When you fill a curtain wall cell with an object, such as a door or window, that object is anchored to the curtain wall. While the anchor is in place, the object moves when you move the curtain wall and is removed when you erase the
802 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
curtain wall. If you want to move or erase an object independently from the curtain wall, you can release the anchor of the object.
NOTE You can also move or erase the object by changing the element definition for the cell that contains the object. For more information, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells" on page 736.
Select one of the objects from the curtain wall, and click Infill Anchor Release.
Curtain Wall Units
Curtain wall units are an important building block of curtain walls.
The Concept of Curtain Wall Units Curtain wall units can significantly reduce the complexity of the curtain wall design and, thereby, the necessary design time. You can think of a curtain wall unit as a "mini" curtain wall itself, which can have frames, mullions and divisions, but is normally not a standalone building object. A curtain wall unit is used in the larger context of a curtain wall. You usually assign curtain wall units to specific cells within a curtain wall grid. For more information, see "Inserting an Object into a Curtain Wall Cell" on page 754.
Curtain Wall Unit Styles Curtain wall units are style-based, permitting maximum efficiency and flexibility. Curtain wall unit styles are created and edited independently from the curtain wall style. You can use a curtain wall unit style in different curtain wall styles. For example, you can create a decorative three-tiled panel as a curtain wall unit and use that for several curtain wall styles.
Curtain Wall Units and Door/Window Assemblies Curtain wall units and door/window assemblies are very similar in their functionality. Both can contain nested grids and be anchored as building blocks in curtain walls. A curtain wall unit usually is not used as a standalone object, whereas a door/window assembly could be.
Curtain Wall Unit Grids Like curtain walls, curtain wall units are made up of one or more grids. Each grid has either a horizontal division or a vertical division, but you can nest the grids to create a variety of patterns. Using curtain wall units in a curtain wall can Help you limit the complexity in the curtain wall design.
Elements of Grids Grids are the foundation of curtain walls and curtain wall units. Every grid has four element types:
Divisions: Define the direction of the grid (horizontal or vertical) and the number of cells Cell Infills: Contain another grid, a panel infill, or an object such as a window or a door Frames: Define the edge around the outside of the primary grid and nested grids Mullions: Define the edges between the cells
NOTE Division is an abstract element, in contrast to the other three element types that represent physical elements of the curtain wall unit.
Curtain Wall Units | 803
Each element type is assigned a default definition that describes what elements of that type look like.
Element type Divisions
Cell Infills Frames Mullions
Default definitions Horizontal grid with two manual divisions offset from the top and bottom of the grid Cells containing simple panels Outer edges of grid 3" wide and 3" deep Edges between cells 1" wide and 3" deep
Curtain wall units default element definitions
Getting Started with Curtain Wall Units To get started with curtain wall units, draw a curtain wall unit using one of the methods described in "Creating Curtain Wall Units" on page 804. Try a variety of the existing curtain wall unit styles, find a style you like and make a copy of it. Then, modify the element definitions and assignments to suit your own needs. For more information, see "Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 808. For more information about element definitions and assignments, see "Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 808 and "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 826.
Creating Curtain Wall Units
Creating curtain wall units is similar to creating curtain walls. You specify a style, a height, and start and end points. You can also create curtain wall units by converting a 2D layout grid to a curtain wall or converting two-dimensional (2D) lines, arcs, and circles. Unlike curtain walls, you cannot create a curtain wall unit based on a curve. Curtain wall units can only be planar.
Creating a Curtain Wall Unit
Use this procedure to create a curtain wall unit.
804 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Drawing a curtain wall unit
1 At the command line, enter cwunit. 2 Enter a (Add). 3 Select a start point and an end point. 4 Specify a height for the curtain wall unit. 5 Select a style, and click OK. For information about curtain wall unit styles, see "Curtain Wall Unit Styles" on page 807.
Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall Unit
You can create a curtain wall unit grid that is based on a 2D layout grid. If you already have 2D layout grids in a drawing, you can easily convert them to curtain wall units. Or if you are already familiar with layout grids, it is an efficient way to create a curtain wall unit, and then experiment with the curtain wall commands to learn more about them. Converting a 2D layout grid to a curtain wall unit
When you create a curtain wall unit from a 2D layout grid, you also create a new curtain wall unit style. The divisions in the new curtain wall unit style are taken from the divisions in the layout grid. Curtain wall unit grids are one-dimensional, divided either horizontally or vertically. To create the horizontal and vertical patterns in the 2D layout grid, the curtain wall unit uses a primary grid with a secondary grid nested inside it. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749. When you create a curtain wall unit grid from a 2D layout grid, you need to decide the direction of the primary grid in the curtain wall unit. If you select horizontal, the primary grid has horizontal divisions that cross over the vertical divisions of the secondary grid. If you select vertical, the primary grid has vertical divisions that cross over the horizontal divisions of the secondary grid.
Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall Unit | 805
Specifying primary division directions
The horizontal and vertical lines of the 2D layout grid define the divisions for the curtain wall unit grids. The grid cells, frame, and mullions are assigned default definitions.
1 Create a layout grid. For more information, see "Using Layout Grids" on page 1438.
2 At the command line, enter cwunit. 3 Enter c (Convert). 4 Enter LA (LayoutGrid). 5 Select the layout grid. 6 To erase the layout grid, enter y (Yes). To have the layout grid remain after the curtain wall unit is created,
enter n (No). 7 When prompted for the primary division, enter v (Vertical) or h (Horizontal) as the orientation. 8 Enter a name for this new curtain wall unit style. 9 Click OK, and press ENTER to end the command.
Creating a Curtain Wall Unit with a Custom Grid
Curtain wall units contain one or more grids. You can define a custom grid with lines, arcs, and circles, and then convert that linework into a curtain wall unit. NOTE Curtain wall unit grids are either horizontal or vertical. To create a grid pattern with horizontal and vertical cells, nested grids are used. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749. You cannot modify the division definition of a custom grid created from lines, arcs, and circles. You can, however, assign a different division definition to it. For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825.
1 Use lines, arcs, and circles to draw a grid in the current world coordinate system (WCS). 2 At the command line, enter cwunit. 3 Enter c (Convert). 4 Enter LI (LInework). 5 Select the lines, arcs, or circles that define your grid. 6 Press ENTER. 7 Select one of the grid lines as the baseline for the curtain wall or press ENTER to use the line along the X
axis as the baseline.
806 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Converting linework to curtain walls units using the default baseline option
TIP If you draw your linework in the XY plane (in Plan view) and accept the default baseline, the resulting curtain wall unit is displayed as it is projected in the Z direction. Converting linework to curtain walls using the specified baseline option
8 To erase the lines, enter y (Yes). To have the lines remain after the curtain wall unit is created, enter n (No). Each enclosed area is assigned the default cell infill. The lines between the cells are assigned the default mullion definition, and the boundary around the grid is assigned the default frame definition. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements" on page 748.
9 Select the resulting custom curtain wall unit, right-click, and click Design Rules Save to Style. 10 Click New to create a new curtain wall unit style. 11 Enter a name for the new curtain wall unit style. 12 Click OK twice.
Curtain Wall Unit Styles
Curtain wall units are style-based, meaning there are preset characteristics assigned to each curtain wall unit that determine its appearance and function. By changing from one style of curtain wall unit to another, you can quickly study several different design options. Any changes you make to the style are reflected throughout your building, updating all curtain walls that use that particular curtain wall unit style. You can also apply overrides to a single curtain wall unit, without changing other curtain walls of the same style. A curtain wall unit style controls the following properties of a curtain wall:
Element definitions Definition assignments for each element Materials for each element Display properties for each element Notes about the style and any associated reference files
Curtain Wall Unit Styles | 807
To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Getting Started with the Style Manager" on page 453.
Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Unit Style
Element definitions determine the appearance of the four basic curtain wall unit elements. There is a different definition type for each element.
Element type Divisions
Cell Infills Frames Mullions
Default definitions Horizontal grid with two manual divisions offset from the top and the bottom of the grid Cells containing simple panels Left, right, top, and bottom outer edges of grid 3" wide and 3" deep Edges between cells 1" wide and 3" deep
Each type of element can have multiple definitions. For example, you can define a division to create a horizontal grid or a vertical grid, and you can define the cells to contain a nested grid or a panel infill. To make reuse easier, you can save the element definitions, and then assign them to grids, cells, frames, or mullions as needed.
Element definitions are style-specific. When you create element definitions for a specific curtain wall unit style, those definitions are available only for curtain wall units of that style. For example, if you define a panel infill for one curtain wall unit style, that infill is not available as an option when you edit a curtain wall unit of a different style.
For information about defining the color, linetype, or layer of curtain wall elements, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units" on page 837.
Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Style
Use this procedure to create a curtain wall unit style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles.
3 Create a new curtain wall style:
If you want to create a style ... with default properties from an existing style
from a curtain wall, curtain wall unit, or door/window assembly in the drawing
Then ...
right-click Curtain Wall Unit Styles, and click New.
right-click the curtain wall unit style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
right-click Curtain Wall Unit Styles, and click New. Right-click the new style, click Set From, and then pick a curtain wall, a curtain wall unit, or a door/window assembly.
4 Enter a name for the new curtain wall unit style, and press Enter. 5 Edit the new curtain wall unit style:
If you want to ... define the elements of a curtain wall unit style
Then ...
see "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids" on page 809, "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 815, "Defining Curtain Wall Unit Frames" on page 818, and "Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions" on page 821.
assign element definitions to the curtain wall unit style
see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825, "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 826, "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames" on page 831, and "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit " on page 833.
808 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to ...
Then ...
add curtain wall element definitions as display components see "Adding Curtain Wall Unit Element Definitions as Display Components" on page 837.
specify layer, color and linetype settings for the display components of a curtain wall
see "Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 838.
specify curtain wall unit hatching
see "Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 838.
add custom graphics as display components of a curtain wall see "Adding Custom Graphics as a Display Component of
unit style
a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 839.
create individual cut planes for curtain wall unit styles
see "Creating Cut Planes for a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 840.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 841.
6 Click OK.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids
The divisions of a grid define the orientation that determines the direction of the grid cells and mullions, and they define a division type that determines the number and size of cells.
NOTE Creating a nested grid is not a division rule. To create a nested grid, add a cell assignment. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall Unit " on page 826 and "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
You can create a variety of division definitions under different names, and then assign different divisions to each grid in your curtain wall unit. Although you can create multiple definitions, there can be only one division assignment per grid. You create division definitions for a specific curtain wall unit style and those definitions can be assigned only to grids in curtain wall units of that style.
For more information about assigning divisions to a particular grid, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825.
Division of Curtain Wall Unit Grids A curtain wall unit consists of one or more grids, which are the framework for placing design elements in the curtain wall unit. The highest-level grid is the primary grid, which is also the outside edge of the curtain wall unit.
Each grid in a curtain wall unit has one division assignment that determines whether the grid is divided horizontally or vertically. The division also determines the number of cells, their size and their placement.
Within the primary grid, you can define multiple levels of grids. These grids within are called nested grids. Each subdivision of a grid is called a cell.
Creating a Division Definition for a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to create divisions for a curtain wall unit grid.
Because curtain wall units can contain multiple nested grids, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grids that indicates the level of each grid and the grid location or the purpose within the curtain wall unit. For example, L3-FL1-Stone Panels can identify a third level grid that provides a row of stone panels on Floor 1.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles.
3 Select a curtain wall unit style.
4 Click the Design Rules tab.
5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions.
6 Click New Division.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids | 809
7 Enter a name for this division definition. 8 Click either Horizontal or Vertical for Orientation. 9 Select one of the following division types and specify offsets if needed.
Division Type Fixed Cell Dimension
Description
Creates a grid where the size of the individual cells is predetermined. For more information, see "Specifying a Fixed Size for Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 810.
Fixed Number of Cells
Creates a grid where the number of grid cells is predetermined. For more information, see "Specifying a Fixed Number of Cells for a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 812.
Manual
Creates a grid where the size and number of individual cells is manually determined by the user. For more information, see "Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 813.
After you create a division definition, you can assign the definition to a specific grid in a curtain wall unit. For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825.
10 When you are finished creating division definitions, click OK.
Specifying a Fixed Size for Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid
Use this procedure to define a specific size for the cells in a grid. In this case, the number of cells is determined by the length or height of the grid, depending on how the grid is divided.
When you specify a fixed cell size in a grid, you can control how the cells of the grid adjust to accommodate any leftover space. This space occurs if the length (or the height) of the curtain wall unit cannot be evenly divided by the fixed size of the cell. For more information, see "Using the Auto-Adjust Cells Option to Resize Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 811.
Specifying a fixed size for cells
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one.
810 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
7 Select Fixed Cell Dimension for Division Type.
8 Specify a size for the cells in Cell Dimension.
If you are defining a vertical division, the cell dimension is the length of the cell from mullion to mullion. If you are defining a horizontal division, the cell dimension is the height of the cell.
9 To specify an offset for the grid, enter an offset distance in Start Offset or End Offset. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 813.
TIP The frame width is calculated as part of the cell size. Therefore, cells adjacent to the frame can appear to be a different size than the other cells. If you do not want the frame width included in the cell size, specify an offset for the grid that is equal to the frame width.
When you draw a curtain wall unit using a fixed cell dimension, there is often extra space between the last full-size cell and the end of the curtain wall unit.
10 To adjust the cells and accommodate this extra space automatically as you draw curtain wall units, select the Auto-Adjust Cells option.
11 Adjust the cells to accommodate this extra space:
If you want to ...
Then ...
add the space to grid cells
select Auto-Adjust Cells, select Grow for Cell Adjustment, and select the specific cells where the space is added. You can select any combination of specific cells.
remove the space from grid cells
select Auto-Adjust Cells, select Shrink for Cell Adjustment, and select the specific cells where the space is removed. You can select any combination of specific cells.
For information about offsets, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 813.
12 Click OK.
For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall unit, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825.
Using the Auto-Adjust Cells Option to Resize Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid Use this procedure to automatically resize cells in a grid when the result of dividing the grid by the specified cell dimension is not a whole number. For example, if a vertical primary grid in a curtain wall unit style is 17 feet in length and you specify a fixed cell dimension of 3 feet, the grid has five cells of 3 feet each with 2 feet remaining. Using the Auto-Adjust Cells option, you can specify how the grid distributes the remaining quantity.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style, right-click. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Divisions definition or create a new one.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids | 811
7 Select Fixed Cell Dimension as the division type. 8 Select Auto-Adjust Cells, and specify the cell adjustment:
If you want to ...
Then ...
add the remaining space to grid cells
select Grow, and select the specific cells to which you want the space added.
remove the remaining space from grid cells
select Shrink, and select the specific cells from which you want the space removed. You can then select Maintain at least half of cell dimension in order to control the cell shrinkage.
The cells that you do not select maintain the fixed value you specified for Cell Dimension.
Specifying a Fixed Number of Cells for a Curtain Wall Unit Grid
Use this procedure to define a specific number of cells in a grid. In this case, the size of the cells is determined by the length or height of the grid, depending on how the grid is divided.
In some cases, when you create a complex curtain wall unit grid, you might want to start with a standard grid with a fixed number of cells, and then later fine-tune that manually. You can first create a grid with fixed cell numbers and then convert that to a manual grid. For information on manual grids, see "Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 813.
Specifying a fixed number of cells
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Number of Cells for Division Type. 8 Specify the number of cells. 9 To specify an offset for the grid, enter an offset distance for Start Offset or End Offset. For more information,
see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 813.
NOTE If you want to fine-tune the initial layout with a fixed number of cells, click Convert To Manual Division and edit the grid as described in "Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 813.
10 Click OK. For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall unit, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825.
812 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Curtain Wall Unit Grid Use this procedure to manually add gridlines and specify an offset for each one when you need to create a unique grid that does not fit into any of the other division types. You can also start with a fixed cell dimension grid or a fixed number of cells grid, and then manually adjust the grid lines to suit your needs.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Manual for Division Type. 8 Click the Add Gridline icon to insert a grid line. Insert as many grid lines as you need. If you need to remove
a grid line, select it from the table and click the Remove Gridline icon. 9 Under Offset in the gridline table, specify an offset distance for each grid line.
Gridline offset
10 Under From in the grid line table, select the grid location from which the grid line is offset. Offset grid line from option
11 To specify an offset for the grid, enter an offset distance for Start Offset or End Offset. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 813.
12 Click OK. For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your curtain wall, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825.
Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Grid By default, grids cells are measured from the start and end points of the curtain wall unit baseline. The width of the grid frame is not considered in calculating the size of the cell. For example, if you draw a curtain wall unit with a 14' baseline and a 1' frame on the left and right, and you specify a fixed number of vertical cells, the cells do not appear equal in size. The first and last cells appear smaller because they include the frame. To make the cells equal in size, offset the start and end of the grid by the width of the frame.
Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids | 813
Specifying grid offset directions
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Specify an offset for the grid:
If you want to specify the distance between ...
the start point of the curtain wall baseline and the start of the first cell in a horizontal grid
Then ... enter a value for Start Offset.
the end point of the curtain wall baseline and the end of the enter a value for End Offset. last cell in a horizontal grid
the floor line of the curtain wall and the start of the first cell enter a value for Bottom Offset. in a vertical grid
the roof line of the curtain wall and the end of the top cell in enter a value for Top Offset. a vertical grid
8 Click OK.
Removing a Division Definition from a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to remove a division definition that you no longer need. You cannot remove a division definition when it is currently assigned to a grid. In addition, you cannot remove the default division definition, but you can modify it.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition that you want to remove. 7 Click Remove Division. 8 Click OK.
814 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells
An infill defines the contents of a curtain wall unit cell. A curtain wall unit cell can have the default simple panel or contain a nested grid, an AEC Polygon, door, window, or door/window assembly style. The object styles you use in infills must exist in the current drawing to be added to an infill definition. Panels typically represent glazing or other plain cladding, such as stone or concrete. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 826.
NOTE Nested grids and no infill are options you select when assigning an infill to cell. These options do not require infill definitions. For information, see "Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall Unit " on page 826 and "Removing an Infill Definition from a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 817.
You can define as many infills as you need, and then use cell assignments to specify the cells that use each infill. You can modify, a default infill that is used for all unassigned cells.
NOTE Create infill definitions for a specific curtain wall unit style. Those definitions can be assigned only to grid cells in curtain wall units of that style.
Materials
Styles use the materials of the object style assigned to each panel. For example, if you specify an infill to use the Standard door/window assembly style, the materials of that infill are those designated in the door/window assembly style. Simple panels need material assigned in the curtain wall style. If you do not use materials to control the display properties of infills, you can specify their display properties in the curtain wall unit style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default infill are applied to all infills unless you create a custom display component for each infill definition. You can then control the display of each infill definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units" on page 837. Creating a Panel Infill for a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to create a simple panel infill to represent basic cladding materials in the curtain wall, such as a stone wall panel, concrete panel, metal panel, or glazing infill. Because curtain wall units can contain multiple infills, it is helpful to use a naming convention for panel infills that indicates the infill location or purpose within the curtain wall unit. For example, L3-FL1- Stone Panel can identify a stone panel in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Infill. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the infill. 8 Specify an alignment for the infill.
For more information, see "Specifying an Alignment for a Curtain Wall Unit Infill" on page 816.
9 Specify an offset for the infill. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Infill" on page 816.
10 Specify a thickness for the panel.
Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells | 815
Specifying infill panel thickness
11 Click OK. After you create an infill definition, you can assign it to any cell in a curtain wall unit grid. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 826. Specifying an Alignment for a Curtain Wall Unit Infill Use this procedure to align an infill so that it is centered with the baseline of the curtain wall unit, in front of the baseline, or behind the baseline. In Plan view, the front of a curtain wall unit (drawn from left to right) is below the baseline and the back is above the baseline. NOTE To move the infill away from the baseline, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Infill" on page 816. Specifying infill alignments
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select an infill, or create a new one. 7 Select an alignment: front, center, or back. 8 Click OK. Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Infill Use this procedure to specify an offset for a curtain wall unit infill. By default, infills are centered on the curtain wall unit baseline. If your design requires that the infill be aligned with frame edges or some other part of the curtain wall unit, you can specify an offset for the infill.
816 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying panel infill offsets
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select an infill, or create a new one. 7 Enter an offset distance.
In Plan view, positive numbers offset the infill above the baseline and negative numbers offset the infill below the baseline. The offset is also affected by the selected alignment for the infill. 8 Click OK. Removing an Infill Definition from a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to delete an infill definition that you no longer need from the Infills definitions list. You cannot remove an infill definition when it is currently assigned to a cell. In addition, you cannot remove the default infill definition, but you can modify it. NOTE For information about removing an infill from a cell, see "Removing an Infill from a Curtain Wall Unit Cell" on page 829. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded infill definition from the list. 7 Click Remove Infill. 8 Click OK.
Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells | 817
Defining Curtain Wall Unit Frames
All curtain wall unit grids, including the primary grid, can have frame definitions. The frame of the primary grid defines the outer edges of the curtain wall unit. The overall frame size is determined by the length and height of the primary curtain wall unit grid or a nested curtain wall unit grid. You can define a frame by specifying a width and depth or by selecting a profile. Specifying default and profile-based frames
You create frame definitions for a specific curtain wall unit style. Those definitions can be assigned only to frames in curtain wall units of that style. You can create as many frame definitions as you want, and then assign the definitions to the frames. If you have nested grids, each grid has its own frame. There is a default frame definition that you can modify and assign as needed. Unassigned frames are not displayed. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames" on page 831. TIP You can copy a mullion definition and use it as a frame definition. Select the mullion definition and drag it to Frames in the tree on the left side of the dialog box. Materials and Display Properties for Frames If you do not use materials to control the display properties of frames, you can specify their display properties in the curtain wall style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default frame are applied to all frames unless you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each frame definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units" on page 837. Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Frame by Width and Depth You can define a frame by specifying its width and depth. The overall frame size is determined by the length and height of the curtain wall unit grid. Specifying frame width and depth
Because curtain wall units can contain multiple nested grids with different frames, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid frames that indicates the grid location or purpose within the curtain wall unit. For example, L3-FL1Metal Frame can identify a metal frame for a third-level grid on Floor 1.
818 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
TIP To remove the frame edge and have the infill adjust to fill the space occupied by the frame, create a frame definition with both width and depth set to zero. Then, assign that definition to the frame edge that you want to remove. This is necessary for the infill to be mitered as it would be for a butt-glazed condition. For more information, see "Removing a Frame Edge from a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 832.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 6 Click the New Frame icon to create a new frame definition. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the frame. 8 Specify a width and depth for the frame. 9 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for a Curtain Wall Unit Frame" on page 820. 10 Click OK. After you create a frame definition, you can assign it to any frame in a curtain wall unit. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames" on page 831. Creating a Profile for a Curtain Wall Unit Frame Use this procedure to create a profile that you can use to define the shape of a curtain wall unit frame. You can then extrude the profile to create a curtain wall unit frame. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the default height and width of the curtain wall unit frame. The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the height and the depth needed for the resulting curtain wall unit frame. 2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Enter c (Centroid) for the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame. 4 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
You can now use the profile as a curtain wall frame. For more information, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Frame Using a Profile" on page 819.
Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Frame Using a Profile Use this procedure to create a frame element definition from a profile. If you do not want a straight edge to your frame, you can use a profile to define edges with curves, jags, or any other shape. Two profile-based frame examples
NOTE The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame.
Defining Curtain Wall Unit Frames | 819
1 Create the profile for the frame. For information on creating profiles for curtain wall unit frames, see "Creating a Profile for a Curtain Wall Unit Frame" on page 819.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 4 Select a curtain wall unit style. 5 Click the Design Rules tab. 6 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 7 Click New Frame. 8 Enter a descriptive name for the frame. 9 Specify a width and depth for the frame edge.
These dimensions are used to calculate the center point of the edge for aligning the profile and also to specify a boundary for the adjacent infill.
10 Select Use Profile.
NOTE The Profile options are available only if you have profiles in the current drawing.
11 Select a profile from the list. By default, the profile is inserted using the same width and depth with which it was created.
12 To adjust the size of the profile to fit within the width or depth dimension of the frame edge, select Auto-Adjust Profile Width or Depth.
13 To mirror the profile, select X or Y for Mirror In. 14 To rotate the profile, specify an angle for Rotation. 15 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for a Curtain Wall Unit Frame" on page 820.
16 Click OK.
After you create a frame definition, you can assign it to any frame in a curtain wall unit. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames" on page 831.
Specifying Offsets for a Curtain Wall Unit Frame
Use this procedure to define the distance that a curtain wall unit frame is from the floor line, roof line, or baseline. By default, the outside edges of the frame align with start and end of the floor line and the start and end of the roof line. When you adjust the width of the frame, the frame expands inward. However, you can use offsets to expand or contract the frame away from these default limits or to shift the frame away from the baseline in either the X or Y direction.
Offset X Y Start
End
Description
Positive X offset moves the frame edge outward beyond the end of the curtain wall unit, while a negative X offset moves the frame edge inward toward the center of the curtain wall unit.
In Plan view, a positive Y offset moves the frame edge above the baseline, while a negative Y offset moves the frame below the baseline.
Negative Start offset lengthens the frame beyond the start point, while a positive Start offset shortens the frame. The start point for vertical edges is the baseline and, for horizontal edges (drawn left to right), it is the left side.
Negative End offset lengthens the frame beyond the end point, while a positive End offset shortens the frame. The end point for vertical edges is the base height and, for horizontal edges (drawn left to right), it is the right side.
820 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying frame offsets
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 6 Select a frame definition from the list. 7 Specify an offset distance for the frame edge X, Y, Start, or End. 8 Click OK. Removing a Frame Definition from a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to remove a frame definition from the Frame definitions list. You cannot remove a frame definition if it is currently assigned to a frame edge, but you can remove it if it is assigned as an override to a frame edge. In addition, you cannot remove the default frame definition, but you can modify it. NOTE For information about removing a frame edge, see "Removing a Frame Edge from a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 832. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded frame definition from the list. 7 Click the Remove Frame icon. 8 Click OK.
Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions
The mullions of a curtain wall unit are the edges between the grid cells. You can define the mullions by specifying a width and depth or by selecting a profile from which the mullion is extruded. Because curtain wall units can contain multiple nested grids with different mullions, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid mullions that indicates the grid location or purpose within the curtain wall unit. For example, L3-FL1- Panel Decorative Mullion can identify a mullion for a panel in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions | 821
Specifying default and profile-based mullions
You create mullion definitions for a specific curtain wall unit style and those definitions can be assigned only to mullions in curtain wall units of that style. You can create as many mullion definitions as you want, and then assign the definitions to mullions as needed. If you have nested grids, each grid has its own mullions. There is a default mullion definition that you can modify as needed that is used for any unassigned mullions. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit " on page 833. TIP You can copy a frame definition and use it as a mullion definition. Select the frame definition and drag it to Mullions in the left pane of the dialog box. Materials and Display Properties for Mullions If you do not use materials to control the display properties of mullions, you can specify their display properties in the curtain wall unit style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default mullion are applied to all mullions unless you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each mullion definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units" on page 837. Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions by Width and Depth You can define mullions by specifying a width and a depth. Specifying mullion width and depth
TIP To remove mullions for butt glazing, create a definition with both width and depth set to zero. Then, assign that definition to the mullions that you want to remove. For more information, see "Removing Mullions from a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 835.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab.
822 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Mullion. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the mullion. 8 Specify a width and depth for the mullion. 9 Specify the offsets you want.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 824. 10 Click OK. After you create a mullion definition, you can assign it to any mullion in a curtain wall unit. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit " on page 833. Creating a Profile for Curtain Wall Unit Mullions Use this procedure to create a profile that you can use to define the shape of a curtain wall unit mullion definition. You can then extrude the profile to create mullions from it. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the default height and width of the curtain wall unit mullion. The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the height and the depth needed for the resulting curtain wall unit mullion. 2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Enter c (Centroid) for the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion. 4 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
You can now use the profile as a curtain wall unit mullion. For more information, see "Defining the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit Using a Profile" on page 823.
Defining the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit Using a Profile Use this procedure to create a mullion element definition from a profile. If you do not want a straight edge to your mullions, you can use a profile to define mullions with curves, jags, or any other shape.
NOTE The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion.
Infill alignments with default and profile-based mullions
1 Create the profile to use for the mullion. For information, see "Creating a Profile for Curtain Wall Unit Mullions" on page 823.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 4 Select a curtain wall unit style. 5 Click the Design Rules tab. 6 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 7 Click the New Mullion icon to create a new mullion definition.
Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions | 823
8 Enter a descriptive name for the mullion. 9 Specify a width and depth for the mullion.
These dimensions are used to calculate the center point of the mullion for aligning the profile and also to specify a boundary for the adjacent infill. 10 Select Use Profile.
NOTE The Profile options are available only if you have profiles in the current drawing.
11 Select a profile from the list. By default, the profile is inserted using the same width and depth with which it was created.
12 To adjust the size of the profile to fit within the width or depth dimension of the mullion, select Auto-Adjust Profile Width or Depth.
13 To mirror the profile, select X or Y for Mirror In. 14 To rotate the profile, specify a rotation angle for Rotation. 15 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 824.
16 Click OK.
After you create a mullion definition, you can assign it to any mullion in a curtain wall unit. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit " on page 833.
Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit
Use this procedure to define mullions that are offset from the start or end of the curtain wall unit to lengthen or shorten the edge or offset in the X or Y direction to shift the edge. For example, you might want to represent butt glazing by offsetting the mullions to be behind glass panel infills.
Offset X
Y Start End
Description
For vertical mullions, a positive X offset moves the mullions toward the end of the curtain wall unit, while a negative X offset moves the mullions toward the start of the curtain wall unit. For horizontal mullions, a positive X offset moves the mullions toward the top of the curtain wall unit, while a negative X offset moves the mullions toward the bottom of the curtain wall unit.
In Plan view, a positive Y offset moves the mullions above the baseline, while a negative Y offset moves the mullions below the baseline.
Negative Start offset lengthens the mullions beyond the start point, while a positive Start offset shortens the mullions.
Negative End offset lengthens the mullions beyond the end point, while a positive End offset shortens the mullions.
824 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Specifying mullion offsets
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a mullion definition from the list. 7 Specify an offset distance for the X, Y, Start, or End. 8 Click OK. Removing a Mullion Definition from a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to remove a mullion definition from the Mullions definitions list. You cannot remove a mullion definition if it is assigned to a mullion. In addition, you cannot remove the default mullion definition, but you can modify it as needed. NOTE For information about removing mullions from between cells, see "Removing Mullions from a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 835. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded mullion definition from the list. 7 Click the Remove Mullion icon to remove the mullion definition. 8 Click OK.
Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid
Use this procedure to assign a division to a curtain wall unit grid. A division defines the grid orientation (whether the direction of the grid cells and mullions is horizontal or vertical) and the division type (number and size of cells).
Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid | 825
After you define a division, you can assign it to the primary grid or to nested grids. Nested grids are created by selecting Nested Grid as the cell assignment. For more information, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid you want to assign a division to. The name of the grid you select is displayed
in the table under the Division Assignment row.
TIP To rename a grid, select it, and click Rename, and enter a new name.
6 Click the Element column for that grid and select a division definition from the list. 7 Click OK.
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells
An infill defines the contents of a curtain wall unit cell. A curtain wall unit cell can have the default simple panel or contain a nested grid, an AEC Polygon, door, window, or door/window assembly style. The object styles you use in infills must exist in the current drawing to be added to an infill definition. Panels typically represent glazing or other plain cladding, such as stone or concrete. For more information, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 815.
Cell Assignments A cell assignment defines the infill definition used for the cells. You can use one cell assignment to assign the same infill to all cells, or you can create multiple cell assignments to assign different infills to different cells.
Cell assignments
Do not assign multiple definitions to the same cell because only the last definition assigned to the cell is used.
Default Cell Assignment The default cell assignment is used by all unassigned cells. You can modify the default assignment to be any type of infill, but you cannot delete the default cell assignment. You may want to modify the default cell assignment to use the infill definition that occurs most frequently in your design. Any cells not assigned to other infills then use this infill definition.
Materials and Display Properties of Infills The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default infill are applied to all infills unless you assign materials to the infills you created or you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each infill definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units" on page 837. Creating a Nested Grid in a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to create a nested grid in a curtain wall unit. A nested grid is a grid within a grid. Each nested grid has its own division, cell assignments, frame, and mullions. By default, the frame is turned off for nested grids.
826 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
For more information, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a nested grid. 6 Click the New Cell Assignment icon. A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments. 7 Click New Cell Assignment, and enter a descriptive name for the assignment. 8 Select Nested Grid in the Element column. A new grid is added to the list of grids in the tree view to the left of the dialog box. If you are editing the primary grid, the new grid is added at the secondary level. If you are editing a grid at the secondary level, the additional grid is placed at the tertiary level, and so on. Creating a nested grid
New nested grid in tree
NOTE To rename a grid, select it in the right pane, right-click and click Rename, and enter a new name. 9 Specify the cells to contain this nested grid.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 830. 10 Click OK. Inserting a Door,Window or Door/Window Assembly into a Curtain Wall Unit Cell Use this procedure to add doors, windows and door/window assemblies to a curtain wall unit. For more information, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 815.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a door, window or door/window assembly. 2 Select the curtain wall unit in which to insert the door, window or door/window assembly.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 3 Select the curtain wall unit cell marker for the cell in which to insert the door, window or door/window
assembly.
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells | 827
The Add Infill worksheet displays.
4 Select the insertion method for the door, window or door/window assembly:
If you want to...
Then...
add the door, window or door/window assembly as a cell assignment and have all curtain wall units using the same style display the same object added in a corresponding cell
select Add as Cell Assignment.
add the door, window or door/window assembly exclusively to the selected curtain wall unit
select Add as Cell Override.
If a door, window or door/window assembly of the style you selected already exists in your drawing, Existing Infill is selected by default.
5 Select the type of infill for the door, window or door/window assembly:
If you selected...
Then...
Add as Cell Assignment and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of the existing style, Existing Infill is selected by default.
Click OK.
Add as Cell Assignment and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of a different style than exists in your drawing
select New Infill, enter a name for the object and click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of the existing style and not modify the edge of the frame surrounding the object
Click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of a different style than exists in your drawing and not remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select New Infill, enter a name for the object and click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of the existing style and remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select Top, Bottom, Left, or Right for Override Frame Removal and click OK.
828 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you selected...
Then...
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door, window or door/window assembly of a different style than exists in your drawing and remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select New Infill and enter a name for the object. Then select Top, Bottom, Left, or Right for Override Frame Removal and click OK.
6 Press ENTER.
Filling a Curtain Wall Unit Cell with a Simple Panel Use this procedure to fill a curtain wall unit cell with a simple panel. Simple panels are generally used to represent basic cladding materials in the curtain wall, such as a stone wall panel or a concrete panel.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to put a simple panel infill. 6 Click the New Cell Assignment icon.
A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments.
7 Click New Cell Assignment, and enter a descriptive name for the assignment. 8 Under Element, select an infill that defines a simple panel.
If you do not have a simple panel infill defined, select New Infill and define one. For more information, see "Creating a Panel Infill for a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 815.
9 Specify the cells to contain this simple panel. For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 830.
10 Click OK.
Removing an Infill from a Curtain Wall Unit Cell Use this procedure to remove the infill of a cell and leave the cell empty. To do this, use None as the element definition. Using None also removes any frame edges that border the cell, but it does not affect the mullions.
Removing an infill assignment from a cell
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid that contains the cells you want to assign to None. 6 Create a new cell assignment or select an existing cell assignment. 7 Select None under the Element column. 8 Specify the cells to contain the None infill.
Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells | 829
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 830. 9 Click OK. Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Cells Use a Cell Assignment When you create a cell assignment you need to specify the cells in the grid to use that assignment. There are two options for selecting cells: Use Location to insert the infill into the start, middle, or end cells of a vertical grid or into the bottom, middle, or top cells of a horizontal grid. If there is an even number of cells (four or more), Middle refers to the two cells in the middle of the grid. If there is an odd number of cells (three or more), Middle refers to one cell in the middle of the grid. Specifying cell assignments by location
Use Index to insert the infill into specific cells based on cell numbers. Cells are numbered from start to end or bottom to top. For example, typing 1, 3, 5 would place the infill in the first, third, and fifth cells. Specifying cell assignment by index
Any cells that are not assigned a specific cell assignment use the default infill. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 Under the Type column, select Location or Index. 7 Select a cell assignment:
If you selected ...
Then ...
Location
click the Used In column, and click the button at the far right of the row. Select the cells you want to use this assignment, and click OK.
830 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you selected ... Index
Then ...
enter the cell numbers separated by commas in the Used In column. For vertical grids, cells are numbered from start to end and for horizontal grids, cells are numbered from bottom to top.
NOTE Do not assign multiple definitions to a cell because the last definition assigned to the cell is used.
8 Click OK
Removing an Assignment from a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to remove cell assignments, frame assignments, and mullion assignments from a curtain wall unit style. You cannot remove default assignments, but you can modify them to suit your needs.
NOTE Each grid requires one division assignment. Therefore, you cannot remove the division assignment, although you can change the division element used for the division assignment.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style, right-click, and click Edit. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid from which you want to remove an assignment. 6 Select a cell assignment, frame assignment, or a mullion assignment. 7 Click the Remove Assignment icon. 8 Click OK twice.
Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames
The curtain wall unit frame is represented by the outer edges of the primary grid. Each nested grid has its own frame that is defined separately from the primary grid frame. By default, the frames of nested grids are turned off. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
Frame Assignments
A frame assignment defines the frame definition that is used by each frame edge. You can use one frame assignment to assign the same definition to all four edges of the frame, or you can create multiple frame assignments to assign different definitions to different edges of the frame. Unassigned edges are not displayed. Do not assign multiple definitions to the frame edge because the last definition assigned to the edge is used.
Default Frame Assignment
There is a default frame assignment, and you can select the frame edges it applies to. You can modify the default assignment to use any frame definition, but you cannot delete the default frame assignment.
Materials and Display Properties of Frames
The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default frame are applied to all frame edges unless you assign materials to the frame definition or you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each frame definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units" on page 837. Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to add a frame assignment to a curtain wall unit. To assign different definitions to different frame edges, you need multiple frame assignments.
Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames | 831
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a new frame assignment. 6 Click the New Frame Assignment icon.
A new frame assignment is displayed in the list of frame assignments. New frame definition
7 Click New Frame Assignment and enter a descriptive name for the assignment. 8 Select a frame definition from the Element column. 9 Specify the sides of the frame to use this frame assignment.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Edges Use a Frame Assignment" on page 833. 10 Click OK. Removing a Frame Edge from a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to remove a frame edge from a curtain wall unit. There are three ways to remove a frame edge: Set the width and depth of the edge to zero Leave the edge unassigned Specify None as an override to the edge assignment The first two methods remove the frame edge and expand the adjacent infills into the space occupied by the edge. Specifying a frame width and depth of zero
By specifying None as an override, the frame edge is not displayed, but the adjacent infill is not expanded into the space the edge occupied. Overriding a frame edge definition
For information about setting the width and depth to zero, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Frame by Width and Depth" on page 818.
832 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
For information about leaving the edge unassigned, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Edges Use a Frame Assignment" on page 833. Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Edges Use a Frame Assignment Use this procedure to specify edges that use a frame assignment. When you create a frame assignment, you need to specify the edges of the frame to use that assignment. Frame edges that are not assigned a frame definition are not displayed.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 Select a frame assignment.
Location is the only way to specify the frame edges. 7 Click the Used In column, and then click the [...] button at the far right of the row.
Specifying frame location
8 Select the edges that you want to use this assignment - Left, Right, Top, or -Bottom - and click OK. Assigning frames to nested grids
Do not assign multiple definitions to the same frame edge because only the last definition assigned to the edge is used. 9 Click OK.
Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit
The mullions of a curtain wall unit are the edges between the grid cells. The primary grid and each nested grid have mullions that are defined separately from the other grids. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Curtain Walls" on page 749.
Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit | 833
Assign mullions to a nested grid
Mullion Assignments A mullion assignment defines the definition used by each mullion. You can use one assignment to define all mullions, or you can create multiple assignments and assign different definitions to different mullions in any grid. Do not assign multiple definitions to the same mullion because only the last definition assigned to the mullion is used. Default Mullion Assignment There is a default mullion assignment used by all unassigned mullions. You can modify the default assignment to be any mullion definition, but you cannot delete the default mullion assignment. Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to add a new mullion assignment to a curtain wall unit style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a new mullion assignment. 6 Click New Mullion Assignment.
A new mullion assignment is displayed in the list of mullion assignments. New mullion assignment
7 Select the mullion assignment, right-click and click Rename, and then enter a descriptive name. 8 Select a mullion definition from the Element column. 9 Specify the mullions to use this assignment.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Mullions Use an Assignment" on page 834. 10 Click OK. Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Mullions Use an Assignment When you create a mullion assignment you need to specify the mullions in the grid to use that assignment. There are two options for selecting mullions: Use Location to assign a definition to the start, middle, or end mullions of a vertical grid or the bottom, middle, or top mullions of a horizontal grid. If there is an even number of mullions (four or more), Middle refers to the two mullions in the middle of the grid. If there is an odd number of mullions (three or more), Middle refers to the one mullion in the middle of the grid.
834 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Use Index to assign a definition to specific mullions based on mullion numbers. Mullions are numbered from start to end or bottom to top. For example, entering 1, 2, 3 would assign the definition to the first, second, and third mullions.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 Create a new mullion assignment or select an existing assignment. 7 Select Location or Index for Type. 8 Select a cell assignment.
If you selected ... Location
Then ...
click the Used In column, and click the button at the far right of the row. Select the cells you want to use this assignment, and click OK.
Index
enter the mullion numbers separated by commas in the Used In column. For vertical grids, mullions are numbered start to end and for horizontal grids, mullions are numbered from bottom to top.
NOTE Do not assign multiple definitions to the same mullion because only the last definition assigned to the mullion is used.
9 Click OK. Any mullions that are not assigned a specific mullion assignment use the default mullion definition.
Removing Mullions from a Curtain Wall Unit Grid Use this procedure to remove a mullion from the curtain wall unit. You can create a mullion definition whose edge width and depth are zero. Adjacent infills expand to fill in the space that was occupied by the mullion. This is an effective way to represent butt glazing.
Removing mullions from a curtain wall unit grid
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to remove a mullion. 6 Create a new mullion assignment and enter 0 (zero) for the width and depth.
For more information, see "Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions by Width and Depth" on page 822.
Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit | 835
7 Under Mullion Assignments, select the mullion definition you created for any cell edges of any mullion assignment where you want to remove the mullions.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Curtain Wall Unit Mullions Use an Assignment" on page 834.
8 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Unit Style
A curtain wall unit consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component.
When you assign materials to a curtain wall unit style, you assign one material to each display component of the curtain wall unit. For example, you assign a wood material to the frame and a glass material to the glass inset. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
If you want to use the display properties of the curtain wall unit style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the curtain wall unit style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in three dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
Curtain Wall Unit Materials and Display Components
The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each curtain wall unit component in the specified views.
Curtain Wall Unit Component Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Screened, Reflected Plan Frame Definitions Mullion Definitions Infill Definitions Frame Definitions Hatch Mullion Definitions Hatch Infill Definitions Hatch Model Frame Mullion Infill
Material Component
Linework Linework Linework Linework Linework Linework
3D Body 3D Body 3D Body
Assigning Materials to a Curtain Wall Unit Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a curtain wall unit style. When you assign a material to a curtain wall unit component, the component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the curtain wall unit. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, the frame, mullion, and infill are physical components of a curtain wall unit. The cell marker is a symbolic component.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a curtain wall unit component, you can change the display properties of the curtain wall unit style as described in "Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units" on page 837.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
836 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, select the value for Material Definition, and select a different
material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click definition and assign it to a component.
to create a new material
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units
The display of a curtain wall unit depends on the direction from which you view the curtain wall unit. In Plan view, the curtain wall unit is displayed as parallel lines with vertices marking the grid lines, as an architect would typically draw a curtain wall unit. In 3D isometric views, the curtain wall unit is displayed as it would appear in the real world, with surfaces showing length, thickness, and height. You control what you want to display in each particular view.
Element Definitions and Custom Display Components
By default, the display of all infills, frames, and mullions are controlled by the display properties of the default infill, default frame, and default mullions. However, you can add individual element definitions as components with separate display properties. For example, if you define two infills called stone panel and acetylene panel, by default they are both controlled by the same default infill display properties. However, you can add each definition as a new display component and control the display properties separately.
NOTE The component name in the Custom Display Component dialog box must match the name of element definition in the Design Rules tab. Otherwise the element definition does not display properly.
For more information about the display system, see "Display System" on page 411.
Materials and Display Properties
You can use materials to control the display of both default and custom infills, frames, and mullions. When you assign materials to the element definitions you create, you do not need to define these definitions as custom display components. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 836.
Adding Curtain Wall Unit Element Definitions as Display Components Use this procedure to add curtain wall unit element definitions. Before you can control the display properties of curtain wall unit elements according to the definition assigned to the element, you must create display components for each element definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall unit style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units | 837
5 Select Model as the display representation.
6 Click . The default list of components includes only the three basic elements and cell markers. Default Model display components for curtain wall units
7 Click the Other tab, and then click Add. 8 Select Infill, Frame, or Mullion for Component Type. 9 Enter a name for Component Name, or click Select Element and select an element from the list. 10 Click OK. 11 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
The element definition that you added is displayed in the list of components. 12 Click the Other tab to continue adding element definitions, or click OK twice.
Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of a curtain wall unit style:
Visibility (component is on or off) By Material Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall unit style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear. 6 Click Style Override. 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Curtain Wall Unit Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of a curtain wall unit style. Curtain wall hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in Top view (Plan view) of a drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall unit style that you want to change.
838 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Style Override. 6 Click the Hatching tab. 7 Select a component, and click the setting for Pattern. 8 Specify the hatching for the component:
If you want to select ... a hatching pattern that is available in the software
Then ... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
9 Click OK. 10 Click the setting for Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 11 Click the setting for Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 12 Click the setting for Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to orient the hatching ... to the object, regardless of the object rotation
Then ... select Object.
to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
13 Click OK twice.
Adding Custom Graphics as a Display Component of a Curtain Wall Unit There may be instances where an infill, frame, or mullion requires a custom two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D) graphic. For example, you might need a highly detailed three-dimensional truss as the mullions or a decorative light fixture applied to an infill. In cases like these, you can create a custom block, add a display component with the block attached, and associate that component with an element definition. When you assign that definition to an element, the block is also displayed.
1 Draw your custom component and save it as a block.
2 Select a curtain wall unit, right-click, and click Edit Curtain Wall Unit Style.
3 Click the Display Properties tab.
4 Click . 5 Click the Custom Plan Components tab.
If Model is the current display representation, the tab is called Other.
6 Click Add. 7 Select Infill, Frame, or Mullion for Component Type. 8 Select the specific element from the list. 9 Select Draw Custom Graphics.
Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units | 839
10 Specify the display of the component:
If you want to ...
Then ...
display the block instead of the associated curtain wall unit select Replace Graphics. element
superimpose the block over the curtain wall unit element so clear Replace Graphics. that both are displayed
11 Click Select Block, and select the custom block that you created. 12 Click OK. 13 Specify further settings for the custom display block:
If you want to ... scale the block to fit a particular dimension
Then ...
select Width, Height, or Depth. To prevent the block from losing its proportions, select Lock XY Ratio.
specify how the block is inserted into the grid in the X, Y, and specify an insertion point on the X, Y, and Z planes. Z directions
mirror the block
determine if it should mirror in the X, Y, or Z direction.
offset the block from the grid
specify the offset in the X, Y, or Z direction.
14 Click OK three times.
Creating Cut Planes for a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to specify the properties of one or more cut planes for a curtain wall unit style. Cut plane display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in Top view (Plan view) of a drawing. To better visualize the elements of a curtain wall unit in Plan view, you can create cut planes. The main cut plane is where the shrinkwrap and hatching are applied. The plan display shows the components and objects in the wall as they are displayed at the height of each cut plane.
1 Select a curtain wall unit, right-click, and click Edit Curtain Wall Unit Style. 2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select Plan, and click .
NOTE The Cut Plane tab is displayed only in some display representations, such as Plan.
4 Click the Cut Plane tab to set the cut plane to be displayed in each display representation for the curtain wall unit style.
5 Enter a value for Cut Plane Height to specify the cut plane at which hatching takes effect.
6 To specifically define a cut plane, click Add, and enter the height of the new cut plane:
If you add a cut plane ...
Then ...
at a height that is lower than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Below Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
at a height that is higher than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Above Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
840 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Below and Above components
You can click Remove to delete a cut plane that you added. 7 Click OK to exit all dialog boxes.
Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a curtain wall unit style that can bound associative spaces. When a curtain wall unit style is set as bounding, by default all curtain wall units that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the curtain wall unit style in an individual curtain wall unit, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select a curtain wall unit style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the check mark for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Unit Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a curtain wall unit style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a curtain wall unit style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Curtain Wall Unit Styles. 3 Select the curtain wall unit style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the curtain wall unit style, enter the description for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ...
Then ...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK twice.
Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces | 841
Using Overrides in Curtain Wall Units
Curtain wall units are subunits of geometrically complex curtain walls, which often have a large number of different elements, like frames, panels, and infills. Most of these settings are defined in the style. However, there are cases when modifying a curtain wall unit directly on screen is more suitable:
You want to add custom frame or mullion edges to a curtain wall unit and need direct visual feedback. You want to create an override, like a merged infill or nested grid, in only one specific place in the curtain wall
unit. You want to experiment with different visuals without having to change the curtain wall unit style for each idea
immediately.
When you have finished your onscreen edits, you can decide if you want to Apply the overrides to the curtain wall unit you have edited. Save the overrides to the current curtain wall unit style. Create a new style for the overrides.
Overrides you can set include assigning a different definition to a selected cell, frame, or mullion, and assigning a profile to a frame or mullion edge. Note that the definition or profile must already exist in the current drawing before you can use it as an override. Overrides do not affect the Design Rules for the curtain wall unit style. However, you can transfer overrides to a curtain wall unit style if you want all curtain wall units of that style to have the same overrides. You can view a list of overrides that are currently assigned to a curtain wall unit from the Overrides tab of the Curtain Wall Unit Properties dialog box. For more information, see "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857.
NOTE Overrides are also listed on the Overrides tab in the Curtain Wall Unit Style Properties dialog box.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Infills
The cell infills of a curtain wall unit are set in the curtain wall unit style. You can however, create overrides for these infill overrides in cells. For example, you might want a row of normal rectangular panel infills for a first floor facade. In one specific position, however, you want a decorative nested grid. In this case, you would set the row of concrete panels in the curtain wall unit style, and then override the panel at one specific place with the nested grid. Curtain wall unit infills can consist of simple panels or nested grids. You can change one infill for another, merge cells, or remove frames from an infill altogether. Turning on Cell Markers for Curtain Wall Units Use this procedure to turn on the cell markers for each grid cell in a curtain wall unit. The cell markers must be on in order to select individual cells and make changes to them. Viewing Cell Markers
1 Select the curtain wall unit for which you want to create an infill override. 2 Right-click, and click Infill Show Markers.
Merging Curtain Wall Unit Cells Use this procedure to merge two curtain wall unit cells.
842 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
NOTE To merge curtain wall unit cells, the cell markers need to be visible. For information on turning on cell markers, see "Turning on Cell Markers for Curtain Wall Units" on page 842.
You can only merge cells that are adjacent to each other.
In most cases, you merge cells with the same infill type. The merged cell is then of the same type as the original cells. For example, if you merge two solid panel infills, the resulting merged cell also has a solid panel infill. In some cases, however, you might want to merge two cells that have different infill types. In that case, the infill type of the first selected cell is used for the merged cell. For example, if you want to merge a cell with a simple panel infill and a cell with a nested grid, and you select the cell with the simple panel first during the merge command, the merged cell contains a simple panel infill, and not a nested grid. If you select the two cells in the opposite order, the merged cell contains a nested grid and no simple panel infill.
Merging two cells
1 Select the curtain wall unit on which you want to merge two cells. 2 Right-click, and click Infill Merge. 3 Select the first cell to be merged. 4 Select the second cell to be merged.
The cells are merged into one.
5 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall unit override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
only on this specific curtain wall unit
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall unit. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall unit, see "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857.
to a curtain wall unit style
select the curtain wall unit, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Infills | 843
6 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall unit style, select the curtain wall unit again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall unit style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
to the current curtain wall unit style
select Transfer Merge Operations to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a cell merge, only the Transfer Merge Operations to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a new cell assignment or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
to a new curtain wall unit style
select Transfer Merge Operations to Style, and click New. Enter a name for the new curtain wall unit style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a cell merge, only the Transfer Merge Operations to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a new cell assignment or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides still remain on the curtain wall unit, where they can be removed as described in "Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Infill Override" on page 844, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall unit style.
Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Infill Override Use this procedure to override the infill of a curtain wall unit cell. For example, you might have a row of simple concrete panels in your curtain wall unit, but want in one location a nested grid instead of the concrete panel. In that case, it might be simpler to use an infill override, instead of creating a complex curtain wall unit style setting.
NOTE To override an infill assignment, the cell markers need to be visible. For information on turning on cell markers, see "Turning on Cell Markers for Curtain Wall Units" on page 842.
To exchange an infill definition, the new infill definition must already be defined in the curtain wall unit style. For information on creating infill definitions, see "Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 815.
Overriding a curtain wall unit cell definition
1 Select the curtain wall unit on which you want to override an infill.
844 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
2 Right-click, and click Infill Override Assignments. 3 Select the marker of the cell where you want to create an override.
4 Create the override: If you want to ... exchange the existing infill for another
remove one or more of the frames around the infill remove the complete infill and its frame
Then ... select a new infill definition from the list. NOTE To exchange an infill definition, the new infill definition must already be defined in the curtain wall unit style.
select the frame component to be removed. select Remove Infill and Frames. NOTE This works only for infills that are bordering the exterior of the curtain wall unit.
5 Click OK. 6 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall unit override.
If you want to save the override ... only on this specific curtain wall unit
Then ...
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall unit. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall unit, see "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857.
to a curtain wall unit style
select the curtain wall unit, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
7 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall unit style, select the curtain wall unit again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall unit style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ... to the current curtain wall unit style
Then ... select Transfer Cell Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only an infill override, only the Transfer Cell Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Infills | 845
If you want to save the override ... to a new curtain wall unit style
Then ...
select Transfer Cell Overrides to Style, and click New. Enter a name for the new curtain wall unit style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only an infill override, only the Transfer Cell Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a frame or mullion edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides still remain on the curtain wall unit, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall unit style.
In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Unit Cells Use this procedure to edit curtain wall unit cells using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit individual cells, bays, columns, or nested grids of the curtain wall unit directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the curtain wall unit or curtain wall unit style.
1 Select a curtain wall unit on which you want to edit cells with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the curtain wall unit:
If you want to edit ...
Then ...
this instance of the curtain wall unit
right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the curtain wall unit style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the curtain wall unit.
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter c (Cell) and press ENTER.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
5 Select the individual cells, bay, column, or nested grid to modify the cell assignment by hovering over a cell or pressing TAB, and press ENTER.
Press CTRL to select multiple cells, bays, columns or nested grids.
846 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
The Edit Cells worksheet displays.
6 Edit the cell for the selected grid:
If you want to... assign an infill to selected cells
Then...
select Assign Infill and select an infill definition. Clear Replace Cell and click OK.
replace the selected cells with a new infill
select Assign Infill and select an infill definition. Select Replace Cell and click OK.
create and assign a new infill to the selected
cells
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 826.
divide the selected cells with divisions, infills select Subdivision. or frames
select a division for the subdivided cells
select a division definition.
create and assign a new division to the selected cells
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid" on page 825.
select an infill for the subdivided cells
create and assign a new infill to the subdivided cells
select an infill definition.
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells" on page 826.
select a frame definition for the grid created select the frame definition and click OK. after the cell is subdivided
specify the location of frames on the grid created after the cell is subdivided
select Top, Bottom, Left, Right for Frame Location and click OK.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Infills | 847
If you want to...
Then...
create and assign a new frame definition for the new grid created after the cell is subdivided
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Curtain Wall Unit" on page 831.
select a mullion definition for the grid created select the mullion definition. after the cell is subdivided
create and assign a new mullion definition to the selected grid
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Curtain Wall Unit Style" on page 834.
replace the existing cell infill with the options select Replace Cell. selected on this worksheet
continue in-place editing the grid after the select Continue Grid Editing. cell is subdivided
7 Click OK. 8 Press ENTER.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Frames and Mullions
You can change a selected frame edge or mullion edge by using an edge assignment override.
NOTE To exchange a frame edge or mullion edge, the new edge definition must already be defined in the curtain wall unit style.
Removing the edge does not affect the width of the cell. To remove the edge and have the adjacent cell resize, create an edge definition with a width and depth of zero. For more information, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Frame by Width and Depth" on page 818 or "Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions by Width and Depth" on page 822.
You can also create a new edge profile by drawing a polyline or using an existing profile in the drawing. This edge profile can be interactively edited onscreen using in-place editing.
Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Frame or Mullion Override Use this procedure to override an individual frame or mullion in a curtain wall unit.
To exchange a frame or mullion, the new definition must already be defined in the curtain wall unit style. For information on creating frames and mullions, see "Defining Curtain Wall Unit Frames" on page 818 and "Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions" on page 821.
1 Select the curtain wall unit on which you want to override an edge.
2 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Override Assignment.
3 Select the frame or mullion edge you want to override.
848 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
4 Create the override: If you want to ... exchange the existing edge for another
Then ...
select a new edge definition from the list.
NOTE To exchange an edge definition, the new edge definition must already be defined in the curtain wall unit style.
remove the frame or mullion edge
select Remove Edge.
5 Click OK. 6 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall unit override.
If you want to save the override ... only on this specific curtain wall unit
Then ...
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall unit. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall unit, see "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857.
to a curtain wall unit style
select the curtain wall unit, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
7 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall unit style, select the curtain wall unit again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall unit style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ... to the current curtain wall unit style
Then ... select Transfer Edge Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a frame or mullion edge override, only the Transfer Edge Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
to a new curtain wall unit style
select Transfer Edge Overrides to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new curtain wall unit style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a frame or mullion edge override, only the Transfer Edge Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides still remain on the curtain wall unit, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall unit style.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Frames and Mullions | 849
Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Frame or Mullion Edge from a Polyline or Profile You can assign a profile to any vertical edge of a frame or mullion. The profile can be any profile or any closed polyline that you specify. You can use a profile edge to create a unique corner in situations where a simple miter is not sufficient.
NOTE Adjacent infills are not trimmed or expanded to accommodate the new edge. To adjust the infill, change the width of the frame edge. For more information, see "Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Frame by Width and Depth" on page 818.
Overriding edge profile
1 Draw a closed polyline in the location where you want it to display in the curtain wall unit. NOTE For best results, it is recommended that you draw the polyline in Plan view.
2 Select the curtain wall unit for which you want to create a frame or mullion edge profile override. 3 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Add Profile. 4 Select a vertical frame or mullion edge. 5 Select a profile for the override:
If you want to create the edge profile ... from the polyline drawn in step 1
Then ... select it in the drawing, and enter a name for it. Click OK.
from an existing profile in the drawing
press Enter, select the profile, and click OK.
6 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall unit override.
If you want to save the override ... only on this specific curtain wall unit
Then ...
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall unit. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall unit, see "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857.
to a curtain wall unit style
select the curtain wall unit, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
7 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall unit style, select the curtain wall unit again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall unit style you want to save the override.
If you want to ... to the current curtain wall unit style
Then ... select Transfer Edge Profile Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Edge Profile Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
850 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to ... to a new curtain wall unit style
Then ...
select Transfer Edge Overrides to Style, and click New. Enter a name for the new curtain wall unit style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Edge Profile Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides still remain on the curtain wall unit, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall unit style.
In-Place Editing of Edge Profiles for Curtain Wall Units Use this procedure to edit profile edges with in-place editing. With in-place editing, you can use edge grips to edit the profile directly and interactively on screen, and later save the changes to the profile definition.
1 Select a curtain wall unit that has the edge profile you want to edit onscreen with in-place editing. 2 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Edit Profile In Place.
This command is only available if you have profile-based edges in the curtain wall unit.
NOTE If the profile is not drawn to size, it must be converted in order for you to begin the in-place editing session. Click Yes if prompted to convert the profile to its actual size.
3 Select the edge you want to edit.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the magenta colored grips and light blue hatch of the temporary in-place editing profile, as well as the faded color of all other objects in the drawing. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
4 Edit the profile: If you want to ... use grips to edit the profile
Then ...
move the grips as needed.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Frames and Mullions | 851
If you want to ...
add a vertex to the profile remove a vertex from the profile add a ring to the profile remove a ring from a profile
Then ...
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
select the profile, right-click and click Add Ring. Select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for an additional ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press Enter.
select the profile, right-click and click Remove Ring. Select the ring you want to remove.
NOTE You cannot remove the last ring from a profile.
replace a ring on a profile
select the profile, right-click and click Replace Ring. Select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for the replaced ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press Enter.
5 Save the changes to the profile.
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the existing profile definition to reflect the new shape
create a new profile definition with the shape you have created
discard all changes on the profile and revert back to the previous shape
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save As New Profile. Enter a name for the new profile and click OK. The in-place edit session is exited and the new profile definition is available in the Style Manager.
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Unit Frames and Mullions Use this procedure to edit frames and mullions using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit bays, columns or nested grids of the curtain wall unit directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the curtain wall unit or curtain wall unit style.
1 Select a curtain wall unit on which you want to edit frames or mullions with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the curtain wall unit:
If you want to edit ...
Then ...
this instance of the curtain wall unit
right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the curtain wall unit style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the curtain wall unit.
852 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter f (Frame and mullion assignment) and press ENTER.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
5 Select the bay, column or nested grid to modify the frame and mullion assignment and press ENTER. Press CTRL to select multiple bays, columns or nested grids. The Modify Frame/Mullion Assignment worksheet displays.
6 Select a frame definition for the selected grid:
If you want to...
Then...
modify the frame of the selected grid
select a frame definition and click OK.
specify the location of the frame on the selected grid
select Top, Bottom, Left, Right for Frame Location and click OK.
create and assign a new frame definition to
the selected grid
click
.
For more information, see "Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Curtain Wall" on page 756.
7 Select the mullion definition for the selected grid:
If you want to...
Then...
modify the mullion of the selected grid
select the mullion definition and click OK.
create and assign a new mullion definition to the selected grid
click
and complete the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Curtain Wall Style" on page 759.
8 Press ENTER.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Divisions
The grid of a curtain wall unit is made up of one or more divisions that define how the curtain wall unit is partitioned. Divisions can be horizontal or vertical and can be nested in each other. For detailed information on curtain wall unit divisions, see "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids" on page 809. You can override a division in a curtain wall unit, thereby changing the grid of the curtain wall unit.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Divisions | 853
Overriding number of Curtain Wall Unit cells
Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Division Override Use this procedure to create a division override on a curtain wall unit.
NOTE To exchange a curtain wall unit division, the new division definition must already be defined in the curtain wall unit style. For information on curtain wall unit divisions, see "Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids" on page 809.
1 Select the curtain wall unit for which you want to create a division override.
2 Right-click, and click Division Override Assignment. 3 Select an edge of the curtain wall unit to determine if a horizontal or vertical division is overridden.
For example, if you want to override the primary horizontal division, you could select the bottom horizontal frame of the curtain wall unit.
TIP The Division Assignment Override dialog box shows you which grid type and which grid division you have selected, e.g., Selected Nested Grid: Secondary Grid, Division Element Definitions: Vertical 3 Cells. If you accidentally selected the wrong division, click Cancel and reselect the correct grid.
4 Select the appropriate division override, and click OK. 5 Specify where you want to save the curtain wall unit override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
only on this specific curtain wall unit
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the curtain wall unit. For information about how to remove an override from a curtain wall unit, see "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857.
to a curtain wall unit style
select the curtain wall unit, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
6 If you have chosen to save the override to a curtain wall unit style, select the curtain wall unit again, right-click and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which curtain wall unit style you want to save the override.
If you want to save the override ...
Then ...
to the current curtain wall unit style
select Transfer Division Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Division Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
854 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to save the override ... to a new curtain wall unit style
Then ...
select Transfer Division Overrides to Style, and click New. Enter a name for the new curtain wall unit style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Division Overrides to Style checkbox is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a edge override, these checkboxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their checkboxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides still remain on the curtain wall unit, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides" on page 857, but they are not saved back to a curtain wall unit style.
In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Unit Divisions Use this procedure to edit divisions using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit the curtain wall unit directly and interactively in the drawing area and later save the changes to the curtain wall unit or curtain wall unit style.
For more information, see "Division of Curtain Wall Unit Grids" on page 809.
1 Select a curtain wall unit on which you want to edit divisions with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the curtain wall unit:
If you want to edit ... this instance of the curtain wall unit
Then ... right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the curtain wall unit style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the curtain wall unit.
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter d (Division in place).
Viewing edit in-place grips for a primary division
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Divisions | 855
Viewing edit in-place grips for adding and removing bays
5 Edit the division: If you want to ... add a bay to the grid remove a bay from the grid change the start offset of the grid change the end offset of the grid change the spacing of bays
manually edit the grid
use a worksheet to edit the cell dimensions
Then ...
click the Add Bay grip.
click the Remove Bay grip.
select the Start Offset grip and move it to the position.
select the End Offset grip and move it to the position.
click the Auto Grid Bay Spacing grip and move it to the position.
right-click and click Convert To Manual. You can manually add and remove gridlines, change the offsets, and change the position of individual gridlines.
click the Set Fixed Cell Dimension Rules command grip, and edit the values in the worksheet.
6 Save or discard changes to the curtain wall unit grid:
If you want to exit the in-place editing session ... without saving your changes
after saving your changes
Then ...
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar. If you edited the
grid by instance, the changes are saved to the design rules
for the individual grid. If you edited the curtain wall unit style,
the Save Changes dialog box is displayed.
7 In the Save Changes dialog box, specify to which division to save the changes:
If you want to ...
Then ...
save the changes to the style in the current curtain wall unit division
verify the current division is selected for Save Changes to Existing Division, and click Save. The changes are made in the style and affect all curtain wall units of that style in the drawing.
create an override to the style by saving the changes in a new curtain wall unit division
click New, enter a name for the new division override, and click OK. Click Save. The changes are saved as an override to the style, and affect only the curtain wall units to which the override is applied.
856 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides
Use this procedure to remove curtain wall unit overrides either from the curtain wall unit or the curtain wall unit style. 1 Select the curtain wall unit:
If you want to remove an override ...
Then ...
from a curtain wall unit
select the curtain wall unit, right-click and click Curtain Wall Unit Properties. Click the Overrides tab.
from the curtain wall unit style
select the curtain wall unit, right-click, and click Edit Curtain Wall Unit Style. Click the Overrides tab.
2 Select an override from the list and click Remove. 3 Click OK.
Editing Curtain Wall Units
Most relevant settings for a curtain wall unit are defined in the curtain wall unit style. These include divisions, infills, frames, and mullions. For information on modifying a curtain wall unit style, see "Curtain Wall Unit Styles" on page 807. You can make other changes directly to individual curtain wall units. These changes affect only the curtain wall unit you select:
Dimensions of a curtain wall unit Roof and floor line settings Interference conditions Cleanup settings
Methods of Editing Curtain Wall Units
Autodesk Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing curtain wall units:
You can directly edit curtain wall units using grips for dimensions, base height, location, and other physical characteristics.
You can directly edit curtain wall units using the Edit Grid grip for grid divisions, cells, frames, and mullions. For more information, see "In-Place Editing of Curtain Wall Unit Divisions " on page 855, "In-Place Editing of Edge Profiles for Curtain Wall Units" on page 851 and "Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Infills" on page 842.
You can change curtain wall unit settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the context menu for a selected curtain wall unit.
Using Grips to Edit Curtain Wall Units
There are many different curtain wall unit grips. The grips that appear in your drawing when you select a curtain wall unit are dependent upon the design rules of the curtain wall unit. For more information, see "Curtain Wall Unit Styles" on page 807.
Editing Curtain Wall Unit Dimensions
Use this procedure to change the dimensions of a curtain wall unit. 1 Select the curtain wall unit. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change. You can modify the dimensions of the height and length for a curtain wall unit.
Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides | 857
Viewing Curtain Wall Unit Lengthen and Base Height grips
3 Enter a value for the dimension and press ENTER, or drag the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed.
Changing the Location or Position of a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to change the location or the position of a curtain wall unit with grips.
1 Select the curtain wall unit. 2 Select the appropriate grip to change the location of the curtain wall unit, its start point, or its end point.
Viewing Curtain Wall Unit Start, End, Location, and Reverse Direction Grips
In Model view, the Location grip has three possible edit modes: Edit Along XY Plane, Edit Along YZ Plane, and Edit Along ZX Plane. Press CTRL to cycle between modes until you are in the desired mode. The default edit mode is along the XY plane. In Plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane. 3 Move the curtain wall unit to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press ENTER.
858 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the curtain wall unit along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either of the dimension directions in the current edit mode and then press TAB, the movement of the curtain wall unit is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the curtain wall unit is constrained to the Y dimension direction. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Base Height of a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to change the base height of a curtain wall unit. You can also change the base height on the Properties palette. 1 Select the curtain wall unit. 2 Select the Base Height grip, move the grip until the height value you want is displayed, and click once. As you move the grip, the original base height value is displayed in addition to the new base height and the difference between the two values.
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a new value for the base height of the curtain wall unit. Changing the Length of a Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to change the length of a curtain wall unit. You can also change the length on the Properties palette. For more information, see "Changing the Dimensions of a Curtain Wall Unit " on page 860.
1 Select the curtain wall unit. 2 Select the Lengthen grip, move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once.
As you move the grip, the original length value is displayed in addition to the new length and the difference between the two values.
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a new value for the length of the curtain wall unit.
Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Unit Style
Use this procedure to select a different style for the curtain wall unit. 1 Select the curtain wall unit for which you want to change the style. You can select multiple curtain wall units and change the style for all at the same time.
Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Unit Style | 859
2 On the Properties palette, scroll to the General subcategory. 3 Select a different style.
Matching the Properties of an Existing Curtain Wall Unit
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a curtain wall unit tool to one or more existing curtain wall units. The properties include the curtain wall unit style and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a curtain wall unit tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Curtain Wall Unit. 3 Select the curtain wall units, and press ENTER.
The properties of the selected curtain wall units match the properties of the curtain wall unit tool.
Changing the Dimensions of a Curtain Wall Unit
Use this procedure to change the dimensions of a curtain wall unit.
Dimension Height Length Start Miter
End Miter
Description
Height of the curtain wall unit from the baseline
Length of a straight curtain wall unit from the start grip on the baseline to the end grip
Angle of all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) at the start of the curtain wall unit. For more information about miter angles, see "Mitering Curtain Walls" on page 789.
Angle of all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) at the end of the curtain wall unit. For more information about miter angles, see "Mitering Curtain Walls" on page 789.
1 Select a curtain wall unit. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Change the dimension.
Specifying a Miter Angle for a Curtain Wall Unit Adjacent to Another Object
Use this procedure to manually create a mitered corner between a curtain wall unit and another object, such as a standard wall or a mass element. For example, if your curtain wall unit connects with a standard wall that is at 60-degree angle from the curtain wall unit, you would specify the miter angle as 30.
The miter angle applies to all infills and horizontal edges that are adjacent to the corner. Vertical edges are not affected.
TIP To quickly identify the start and end of a curtain wall unit, select the curtain wall unit. The Reverse Direction grip points toward the end of the curtain wall unit.
860 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
1 Select a curtain wall unit. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Miter the curtain wall unit on the start or the end point:
If you want to miter the curtain wall unit ... at its start point
Then ... enter an angle for Start Miter Angle, and press ENTER.
at its end point
enter an angle for End Miter Angle, and press ENTER.
Changing the Location of a Freestanding Curtain Wall Unit
Use this procedure to relocate a freestanding curtain wall unit by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The curtain wall unit also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the curtain wall unit are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the curtain wall unit by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the curtain wall unit on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the curtain wall unit you want to change. 2 Expand Location. 3 Click Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the curtain wall unit:
If you want to ...
Then ...
relocate the curtain wall unit
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the curtain wall unit on the XY plane
make the normal of the wall parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the curtain wall unit on the YZ plane
make the normal of the curtain wall unit parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the curtain wall unit on the XZ plane
make the normal of the curtain wall unit parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the curtain wall unit
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Modifying the Position of Anchored Curtain Wall Units
When you use a curtain wall unit as an infill for a curtain wall or a door/window assembly, the curtain wall unit is anchored to the other object. While anchored, the curtain wall unit moves when you move the curtain wall and is erased when you erase the curtain wall. You can change the orientation, alignment, or offset of the curtain wall unit without affecting the anchor.
NOTE For information about releasing the curtain wall unit anchor so that it moves and erases independently from the curtain wall, see "Releasing an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall" on page 802.
Changing the Orientation of an Anchored Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to change the orientation of an anchored curtain wall unit using grips.
Changing the Location of a Freestanding Curtain Wall Unit | 861
1 Click the anchored curtain wall unit for which you want to change the orientation.
2 Click the appropriate Flip grip to change the X or Y direction of the object. You can also change the orientation of an object, including the Z direction, using the Anchor worksheet found on the object's Properties palette.
Changing the Alignment of an Anchored Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to change the alignment of a curtain wall unit anchored into a curtain wall.
1 Double-click the anchored curtain wall unit. 2 Expand Location, and click Anchor. 3 Click Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition. 4 Select a new alignment for the curtain wall unit.
For more information, see "Specifying an Alignment for a Curtain Wall Unit Infill" on page 816.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Offset of an Anchored Curtain Wall Unit Use this procedure to change the offset of an anchored curtain wall unit.
1 Double-click the anchored curtain wall unit. 2 Expand Location, and click Anchor. 3 Click Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition. 4 Specify a new offset for the curtain wall unit.
For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Curtain Wall Unit Infill" on page 816.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Curtain Wall Unit
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a curtain wall unit. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a curtain wall unit.
1 Double-click the curtain wall unit. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. 4 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the text. 5 Click OK. 6 Click under Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to ... attach a reference file
Then ... click Add, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click the description. Enter the new text, and press ENTER.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
7 Click OK twice.
862 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Facet Deviation
The smoothness (tesselation) of curved curtain wall edges is controlled by the FACETDEV variable. Specify the facet deviation to set the number of facets to display on curved objects. This must be set before converting a polyline to a curtain wall. The facet deviation is available only on the command line by typing -AecFacetDev. The number you set as the facet deviation defines the maximum distance from the chord to the arc, the chord being an edge that is created from faceting the curve, to the true mathematical arc. The facet deviation has a range of greater than zero (0) and no upper limit. The minimum number of facets is 8. For example, when you create a cylinder mass element with a 1' radius, and specify a FACETDEV value of 1', the cylinder has 8 faces.
Facet Deviation | 863
864 | Chapter 18 Curtain Walls
Door and Window Assemblies
19
Door and window assemblies provide a mechanism for creating door and window compounds for inserting in walls and curtain walls.
865
Door and Window Assemblies
Door/window assemblies provide a grid or framework for inserting objects such as windows and doors. With this framework, you can create complex window and door assemblies, which can then be inserted in standard walls or used as repeated elements in curtain walls. Adding Door/Window Assemblies to walls and curtain walls
Door/Window Assembly Grids Door/window assemblies are made up of one or more grids. Each grid has either a horizontal division or a vertical division, but you can nest the grids to create a variety of patterns from simple to complex.
Door/Window Assembly grid division examples
TIP Using a door/window assembly in a curtain wall can help you avoid the complexities of too many nested grids in the curtain wall. Elements of Grids Grids are the foundation of curtain walls, curtain wall units, and door/window assemblies. Every grid has four element types:
Divisions: Define the direction of the grid (horizontal or vertical) and the number of cells Cell Infills: Contain another grid, a panel infill, or an object such as a window or a door Frames: Define the edge around the outside of the primary grid and nested grids Mullions: Define the edges between the cells NOTE Division is an abstract element, in contrast to the other three element types that represent physical elements of the door/window assembly.
866 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Each element type is assigned a default definition that describes what elements of that type look like.
Element type Divisions Cell Infills Frames Mullions
Default definitions Vertical divisions with a fixed cell dimension of 3' Cells containing simple panels with a 2" thickness Outer edges of grid 3" wide and 3" deep Edges between cells 1" wide and 3" deep
Door/Window Assembly components
You can create new element definitions and assign those definitions within the door/window assembly. For example, you can create multiple infill definitions and then assign different infills to specific cells in the grid. Likewise, you can create multiple frame definitions and then assign a different definition to each frame edge (top, bottom, left, right). This is also true for mullion definitions. Assigning different infills and frames to door/window assembly cells
Experimenting with Door/Window Assembly Designs The templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offer door/window assembly styles. Looking at these styles and experimenting with them makes it easier to understand door/window assembly behavior and create your own door/window assembly designs. For more information about element definitions and assignments, see "Creating Element Definitions for a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 875 and "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Elements" on page 894. Using Door and Window Assembly Tools to Create Door and Window Assemblies Door/window assemblies are planar and defined by an insertion point, as opposed to curtain walls, which have a baseline that can be curved or straight. You can create a door/window assembly based on a 2D layout grid or on a combination of lines, arcs, and circles. To create a door/window assembly for use in a standard wall, you draw the wall first. You can then insert the door/window assembly and modify the door/window assembly elements as needed. To create a door/window assembly for use in a curtain wall, insert the door/window assembly in space. Modify the element definitions and assignments as needed. Save your changes as a new door/window assembly style, and then assign that style to cells in your curtain wall grid. For more information, see "Inserting an Object into a Curtain Wall Cell" on page 754. Tool palettes provided with Autodesk Architectural Desktop let you quickly place door/window assemblies by selecting a door/window assembly tool with a specific door/window assembly style and other predefined properties. When you place door/window assemblies using door/window assembly tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you
Using Door and Window Assembly Tools to Create Door and Window Assemblies | 867
can change settings for the door/window assembly properties. You can also use door/window assembly tools to convert linework to door/window assemblies and to apply the settings of a door/window assembly tool to existing door/window assemblies.
Tool palettes containing window assembly tools
The following palettes contain one or more door/window assembly tools:
Tool Palette
Door/Window Assembly Tools
Design palette in the Sample Palette catalog
Standard door/window assembly style and default settings for other door/window assembly properties
Design Tool Catalog Doors and Windows Door and Window a large number of door and window assembly styles for many design
Assemblies
uses
custom tool palettes created by your CAD manager
door/window assembly styles and properties that your CAD manager customized for your projects or office standards
When you place door/window assemblies using door/window assembly tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change settings for any door/window assembly properties that are not controlled by the style.
Creating a Door and Window Assembly
Use this procedure to add a new door/window assembly that has the properties specified in the door/window assembly tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a door/window assembly, see "Creating a Door and Window Assembly with User-Specified Settings" on page 868.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the door/window assembly tool you want to use, and select the tool.
TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After you select it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. 2 Select a wall, or press ENTER and then specify the insertion point of the door/window assembly. 3 Continue adding door/window assemblies, and then press ENTER.
Creating a Door and Window Assembly with User-Specified Settings Use this procedure to add a door/window assembly with settings that you specify.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the door/window assembly tool you want to use, and select it. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style.
868 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
4 Under Bound Spaces, define if this door and window assembly can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces. You can select three options here:
Yes: this door and window assembly can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this door and window assembly cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this door and window assembly will use the bounding settings from the door and window
assembly style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 Expand Dimensions. 6 Modify the dimensions of the door/window assembly:
If you want to specify...
Then...
the length of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Length.
the height of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Height.
the rise of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Rise.
start and end miters
enter miter values for Start miter angle and End miter angle.
7 Expand Location. 8 Modify the location properties of the door/window assembly:
If you want to specify...
Then...
the position of the door/window assembly
select Unconstrained or Offset/Centered for Position along the wall.
NOTE If you selected Offset/Centered, enter a value for the Automatic offset.
the vertical alignment of the door/window assembly
select Head or Sill for Vertical Alignment.
the head height of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Head height.
the sill height of the door/window assembly
enter a values for Sill height.
the rotation reference angle of the door/window assembly enter a value for Rotation.
Vertical alignment controls how you place the door/window assembly in the wall and how the door/window assembly responds to modifications in height. The Sill height and Head height options allow you to determine the working point on the door/window assembly. You can place the working point at the sill or at the head. The vertical alignment value determines the location of the working point vertically in the wall.
Modifications to the door/window assembly height respect the working point. For example, if you specify the working point of the window as sill, the vertical alignment as 0'', and the door/window assembly height as 7'0'', the height in the wall where the top of the door/window assembly is placed is 70''. If you modify the height of the window to 6'8'', the window sill remains at 0'', and the top of the door/window assembly becomes 68''. The sill working point is maintained.
If you specify the working point as the door/window assembly head, the Vertical Alignment value as 7'0'', and the door/window assembly height as 7'0'', the height in the wall where the top of the door/window assembly is placed is 70''. If you modify the height of this door/window assembly to 6'8'', the door/window assembly head remains at 7'0'' and the window sill becomes 4''. The head working point is maintained.
Using Door and Window Assembly Tools to Create Door and Window Assemblies | 869
Specifying door/window assembly head and sill heights
TIP You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
9 In the drawing area, select a wall, or press ENTER and then specify the insertion point of the door/window assembly.
10 Continue adding door/window assemblies, and press ENTER. Creating a Door and Window Assembly from a Layout Grid Use this procedure to create a door/window assembly based on a 2D layout grid. If you already have 2D layout grids in a drawing, you can easily convert them to door/window assemblies. Or, if you are already familiar with layout grids, it is an efficient way to create a door/window assembly and then experiment with the door/window assembly commands to learn more about them. For more information, see "Using Layout Grids" on page 1438.
NOTE Only rectangular layout grids can be converted to a door/window assemblies.
When you create a door/window assembly from a 2D layout grid, you also create a new door/window assembly style. The divisions in the new door/window assembly style are taken from the divisions in the layout grid.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the door/window assembly tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click a door/window assembly tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Layout Grid. 3 Select the layout grid to convert. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the layout grid, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Press ENTER to specify horizontal as the orientation for the primary division, or enter v to specify vertical. 6 Enter a name for the door/window assembly style, and click OK. 7 If necessary, edit the properties of the door/window assembly in the Properties palette. Creating a Door and Window Assembly from Doors,Windows and Openings Use this procedure to convert doors, windows, and openings to a door/window assembly that has the properties of the door/window assembly tool you select. You can edit the properties of the door/window assembly after you create it.
NOTE When you create a door/window assembly from a collection of doors, windows and openings, you create a single assembly from each object selected. For more information about how to create an assembly from a specific configuration, see "Creating a Door and Window Assembly from an Elevation Sketch" on page 871.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the door/window assembly tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click a door/window assembly tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Door, Opening, Window. 3 Select the door, window or opening to convert.
870 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the door, window or opening, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
5 Edit the properties of the door/window assembly in the Properties palette, if necessary. Creating a Door and Window Assembly from an Elevation Sketch Use this procedure to create a sketch of a custom grid with lines, arcs, and circles, and then convert that linework into a door/window assembly. NOTE You cannot modify the division definition of a custom grid created from lines, arcs, and circles. You can, however, assign a different division definition to it. For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894.
NOTE Door/window assembly grids are either horizontal or vertical. To create a grid pattern with horizontal and vertical cells, nested grids are used. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 895.
1 Use lines, arcs, and circles to draw a grid in the world coordinate system (WCS). 2 Right-click a door/window assembly tool, and click Apply Properties to Elevation Sketch. 3 Select the linework of your sketch, and press ENTER. 4 Select one of the grid lines as the baseline for the door/window assembly, or press ENTER to use the line
along the X axis as the default baseline. Converting linework to a Door/Window Assembly using the default baseline option
TIP If you draw your linework in the XY plane (in Plan view) and accept the default baseline, the resulting door/window assembly is displayed from the Z direction. 5 To erase the lines, enter y (Yes). To have the lines remain after the door/window assembly is created, enter n (No). If there is a style applied to the door/window assembly tool, the new custom style is based on the existing style. The infill, mullion, and frame definitions are those of the existing style. You can modify the style without having to create a new one from scratch. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Elements" on page 894.
Using Door and Window Assembly Tools to Create Door and Window Assemblies | 871
Converting linework to a door/window assembly using the specified baseline option
6 Select the resulting custom door/window assembly, right-click, and click Design Rules Save to Style. 7 Click New to create a new door/window assembly style. 8 Enter a name for the new door/window assembly style. 9 Click OK twice.
Creating a Door and Window Assembly Tool
Use this procedure to create a door/window assembly tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own door/window assembly tools if you are placing multiple door/window assemblies of specific styles that have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool.
2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a door/window assembly in the drawing select the door/window assembly, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a door/window assembly style in the Style on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style
Manager
you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK
to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the door/window assembly created from this tool,
and click OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select a style. 10 Select the drawing file containing the style used for this door/window assembly.
872 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
11 Under Bound Spaces, define if this door and window assembly tool can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces. You can select three options here:
Yes: this door and window assembly tool can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this door and window assembly tool cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this door and window assembly tool will use the bounding settings from the door and window
assembly style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
12 Expand Dimensions. 13 Modify the dimensions of the door/window assembly
If you want to specify...
Then...
the length of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Length.
the height of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Height.
the rise of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Rise.
start and end miters
enter miter values for Start miter angle and End miter angle.
14 Expand Location. 15 Modify the location properties of the door/window assembly:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the position of the door/window assembly
select Unconstrained or Offset/Center for Position along the wall.
NOTE If you selected Offset/Centered, enter a value for the Automatic offset.
specify the head height of the door/window assembly specify the sill height of the door/window assembly
enter a value for Head height. enter a value for Sill height.
16 Click OK.
Door and Window Assembly Styles
Door/window assemblies are style-based, meaning there are preset characteristics assigned to each door/window assembly that determine its appearance and function. By changing from one style of door/window assembly to another, you can quickly study several different design options. Any changes you make to the style are reflected throughout your building, updating all door/window assemblies of that particular style. You can also apply overrides to a single door/window assembly, without changing other door/window assemblies of the same style. A door/window assembly style controls the following properties of a door/window assembly:
Element definitions Definition assignments for each element Materials for each element Display properties for each element Default dimensions Notes about the style and any associated reference files
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 873
To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Getting Started with the Style Manager" on page 453.
Process Overview: Creating a Door and Window Assembly Style
When you create a door/window assembly style, you assign characteristics to any or all elements of a door/window assembly and save them as a named style. In this way, you standardize the appearance of all door/window assemblies that use the style. When you modify a style, all door/window assemblies in your drawing that use the style are updated to reflect the changes. There are eight general steps for creating a door/window assembly style:
Step 1: Define divisions for the door/window assembly grid.
For information on defining door/window assembly grid definitions, see "Defining Divisions for Door and Window Assembly Grids" on page 876.
Step 2: Define the infill for the cells of the door/window assembly. For information on creating infills, see "Defining Infills for Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 881.
Step 3: Define the door/window assembly frame, including using profiles and specifying offsets.
For information on defining a frame for a door/window assembly, see "Defining Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 886.
Step 4: Define the mullions for the door/window assembly, including using profiles and specifying offsets.
For information on ways to define mullions, see "Defining Door and Window Assembly Mullions" on page 890.
Step 5: Assign the element definitions you created:
If you want to assign... a division to a door/window assembly grid infills to door/window assembly cells definitions to door/window assembly frames definitions to door/window assembly mullions
Then see...
"Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894.
"Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 895.
"Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 902.
"Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 904.
Step 6: Specify the materials of the door/window assembly style. For information on specifying materials, see "Specifying the Materials of a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 906.
Step 7: Specify the display properties of the door/window assembly, including layer, color, linetype, and hatching. For information on specifying the display properties of a door/window assembly, see "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908.
Step 8: Attach notes and reference documents to the door/window assembly style. For information on attaching notes and files, see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 911.
Tips for Working Efficiently with Door and Window Assembly Styles
Use these suggestions to work with door/window assembly styles efficiently and productively.
Name grids and elements very clearly to identify where they are used and what they are. For example, use the name L3-FL1-H to represent a third-level grid used on the first floor and that is horizontally divided. Incorporating this suggestion makes it easier to ensure that you are using elements correctly.
Use the element definition that is applied most often as the default element definition. For example, if most cells are stone panels, define the default infill as the stone panel. This panel is then used in every cell that is not specifically assigned to another infill. Apply this rule to the default frame, mullion, and division.
874 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Name the styles for doors, windows, curtain wall units, AEC Polygons, and curtain walls to indicate where they are used and what they are.
Remember that you can use cell and edge overrides to define special conditions not accounted for in the door/window assembly style.
Creating Element Definitions for a Door and Window Assembly Style
Element definitions determine the appearance of the four basic door/window assembly elements. There is a different definition type for each element.
Definition Divisions Cell Infills Frames Mullions
Sample definitions Horizontal grid with six cells Cells contain windows Outer edge of grid is 6" wide Edges between cells are 4" wide
Identifying Door/Window Assembly components
Each type of element can have multiple definitions. For example, you can define the divisions to create a horizontal grid or a vertical grid and you can define the cells to contain a nested grid or a door/window assembly. To make reuse easier, you can save the element definitions and then assign them to grids, cells, frames, or mullions as needed.
Element definitions are style-specific. When you create element definitions for a specific door/window assembly style, those definitions are available only for door/window assemblies of that style. For example, if you define a door/window assembly infill for one door/window assembly style, that infill is not available as an option when you edit a door/window assembly of a different style.
Creating a Door and Window Assembly Style
Use this procedure to create a door/window assembly style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style. You can also create a door/window assembly tool based on the newly created door/window assembly style. When you use the tool to add door/window assemblies, each door/window assembly has the style specific to the tool.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles.
3 Create a new door/window assembly style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Door/Window Assembly Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the door/window assembly style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
create a style from a curtain wall, curtain wall unit, or door/window assembly in the drawing
right-click Door/Window Assembly Styles, and click New. Right-click the new style, click Set From, and then pick a curtain wall, a curtain wall unit, or a door/window assembly.
4 Enter a name for the new door/window assembly style, and press ENTER.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 875
5 Edit the new door/window assembly style:
If you want to... define the elements of a door/window assembly style
Then...
see "Defining Divisions for Door and Window Assembly Grids" on page 876, "Defining Infills for Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 881, "Defining Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 886, and "Defining Door and Window Assembly Mullions" on page 890.
assign element definitions to the door/window assembly style
see "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Elements" on page 894, "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894, "Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 895, "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 902, and "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 904.
add door/window assembly element definitions as display components
see "Adding Door and Window Assembly Element Definitions as Display Components" on page 908.
specify layer, color and linetype settings for the display components of a door/window assembly
see "Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 909.
specify door/window assembly hatching
see "Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 909.
add custom graphics as display components of a door/window assembly style
see "Adding Custom Graphics as a Display Component of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 910.
create individual cut planes for door/window assembly styles see "Creating Cut Planes for a Door and Window Assembly" on page 911.
specify the materials of the door/window assembly style
see "Specifying the Materials of a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 906.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 911.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the door/window assembly style, click OK. 7 If you want to assign the style to a door/window assembly tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to
a tool palette. You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Door and Window Assembly Tool" on page 872.
8 Click OK.
Defining Divisions for Door and Window Assembly Grids The divisions of a grid define the orientation that determines the direction of the grid cells and mullions and they define a division type that determines the number and size of cells.
NOTE Creating a nested grid is not a division rule. To create a nested grid, add a cell assignment. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid for a Door and Window Assembly" on page 897 and "Working with Nested Grids in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 895.
You can create a variety of division definitions under different names and then assign different divisions to each grid in your door/window assembly. Although you can create multiple definitions, there can be only one division assignment per grid. You create division definitions for a specific door/window assembly style and those definitions can be assigned only to grids in door/window assemblies of that style. For more information about assigning divisions to a particular grid, see "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894.
876 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Division of Door and Window Assembly Grids A door/window assembly consists of one or more grids, which are the framework for placing design elements in the door/window assembly. The highest-level grid is the primary grid, which is also the outside edge of the door/window assembly.
Each grid in a door/window assembly has one division assignment that determines whether the grid is divided horizontally or vertically. The division also determines the number of cells, their size, and their placement.
Within the primary grid, you can define multiple levels of grids. These grids within the primary grid are called nested grids. Each subdivision of a grid is called a cell.
Creating a Division Definition for a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to create divisions for a door/window assembly grid.
Because door/window assemblies can contain multiple nested grids, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grids that indicates the level of each grid and the grid location or the purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1-Stone Panels identifies a third level grid that provides a row of stone panels on Floor 1.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles.
3 Select a door/window assembly style.
4 Click the Design Rules tab.
5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions.
6 Click New Division.
7 Enter a name for this division definition.
8 Select either Vertical orientation
or Horizontal orientation
.
9 Select one of the following division types and specify offsets if needed:
Division Type
Description
Fixed Cell Dimension
Creates a grid where the size of the individual cells is predetermined. For more information, see "Specifying a Fixed Size for Cells in a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 877.
Fixed Number of Cells
Creates a grid where the number of grid cells is predetermined. For more information, see "Specifying a Fixed Number of Cells for a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 879.
Manual
Creates a grid where the size and number of individual cells is manually determined by the user. For more information, see "Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 880.
After you create a division definition, you can assign the definition to a specific grid in a door/window assembly. For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894.
10 When you are finished creating division definitions, click OK.
Specifying a Fixed Size for Cells in a Door and Window Assembly Grid
Use this procedure to define a specific size for the cells in a grid. In this case, the number of cells is determined by the length or height of the grid, depending on how the grid is divided.
When you specify a fixed cell size in a grid, you can control how the cells of the grid adjust to accommodate any leftover space. This space occurs if the length (or the height) of the door/window assembly cannot be evenly divided by the fixed size of the cell. For more information, see "Using the Auto-Adjust Cells Option" on page 731.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 877
Specifying a fixed cell size for Door/Window Assembly grids
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Cell Dimension for Division Type.
8 Specify a size for the cells in Cell Dimension. If you are defining a vertical grid, the cell dimension is the length of the cell from mullion to mullion. If you are defining a horizontal grid, the cell dimension is the height of the cell.
9 To specify an offset for the grid, specify an offset distance in Bottom Offset or Top Offset.
TIP The frame width is calculated as part of the cell size. Therefore, cells adjacent to the frame can appear to be a different size than the other cells. If you do not want the frame width included in the cell size, specify an offset for the grid that is equal to the frame width.
When you draw a door/window assembly using a fixed cell dimension, there is often extra space between the last full-size cell and the end of the door/window assembly.
For more information about grid offsets, see "Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 880.
10 Adjust the cells to accommodate this extra space:
If you want to...
Then...
add the space to grid cells
select Auto-Adjust Cells, select Grow for Cell Adjustment, and select the specific cells where the space is to be added. You can select any combination of Specific Cells.
remove the space from grid cells
select Auto-Adjust Cells, select Shrink for Cell Adjustment, and select the specific cells where the space is to be removed. You can select any combination of Specific Cells.
11 Click OK.
For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your door/window assembly, see "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894.
878 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Using the Auto-Adjust Cells Option Use this procedure to automatically resize cells in a grid when the result of dividing the grid by the specified cell dimension is not a whole number. For example, if a vertical primary grid in a door/window assembly style is 17 feet in length and you specify a fixed cell dimension of 3 feet, the grid has five cells of 3 feet each with 2 feet remaining. Using the Auto-Adjust Cells option, you can specify how the grid distributes the remaining quantity.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Divisions definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Cell Dimension as the division type. 8 Select Auto-Adjust Cells, and specify the cell adjustment:
If you want to... add the remaining space to grid cells
Then...
select Grow, and select the specific cells to which you want the space added.
remove the remaining space from grid cells
select Shrink, and select the specific cells from which you want the space removed. You can then select Maintain at least half of cell dimension in order to control the cell shrinkage.
The cells that you do not select maintain the fixed value you specified for Cell Dimension.
Specifying a Fixed Number of Cells for a Door and Window Assembly Grid Use this procedure to define a specific number of cells in a grid. In this case, the size of the cells is determined by the length or height of the grid, depending on how the grid is divided.
Specifying a fixed number of cells for Door/Window Assembly grids
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Fixed Number of Cells for Division Type. 8 Enter the desired number of cells in Number of Cells. 9 Specify an offset distance for Start Offset or End Offset.
For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 880.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 879
TIP The frame width is calculated as part of the cell size. Therefore, cells adjacent to the frame can appear to be a different size than the other cells. If you do not want the frame width included in the cell size, specify an offset for the grid that is equal to the frame width.
For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your door/window assembly, see "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894. Manually Defining the Number and Size of Cells in a Door and Window Assembly Grid Use this procedure to manually add gridlines and specify an offset for each one when you need to create a unique grid that does not fit into any of the other division types. You can also start with a fixed cell dimension grid or a fixed number of cells grid and then manually adjust the gridlines to suit your needs.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Select Manual for Division Type. 8 Click Add Gridline to insert a gridline.
Insert as many grid lines as you need. If you need to remove a grid line, select it from the table, and then click Remove Gridline. 9 Under Offset in the grid line table, specify an offset distance for each grid line.
10 Under From in the grid line table, select the grid location from which the grid line is offset.
11 Specify an offset distance in Bottom Offset or Top Offset. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 880.
12 Click OK. For information about assigning the division definition to a specific grid in your door/window assembly, see "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894.
Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Grid By default, grids cells are measured from the start and end points of the door/window assembly baseline (for horizontal divisions) or in the baseline to the base height (for vertical divisions). The width of the grid frame is not considered in calculating the size of the cell. For example, if you draw a door/window assembly with a 14 ft. baseline and a 1 ft. frame on the left and right, and you specify a fixed number of vertical cells, the cells do not appear equal in size. The first and last cells appear smaller because they include the frame. To make the cells equal in size, offset the start and end of the grid by the width of the frame.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style.
880 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a Division definition or create a new one. 7 Specify an offset for the grid.
If you want to specify the distance between...
Then...
the start point of the door/window assembly baseline and the start of the first cell in a horizontal grid
enter a value for Start Offset.
the end point of the door/window assembly baseline and the enter a value for End Offset. end of the last cell in a horizontal grid
the baseline of the door/window assembly and the start of enter a value for Bottom Offset. the bottom cell in a vertical grid
the base height of the door/window assembly and the end enter a value for Top Offset. of the top cell in a vertical grid
8 Click OK.
Removing a Division Definition from a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to remove a division definition that you no longer need. You cannot remove a division definition that is currently assigned to a grid. In addition, you cannot remove the default division definition, but you can modify it.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Divisions under Element Definitions. 6 Select the division definition that you want to remove.
7 Right-click and click Remove, or click
.
8 Click OK.
Defining Infills for Door and Window Assembly Cells
An infill defines the contents of a door/window assembly cell. A door/window assembly cell can have the default simple panel or contain a nested grid, an AEC Polygon, curtain wall unit, door or window style. The object styles you use in
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 881
infills must exist in the current drawing to be added to an infill definition. Panels typically represent glazing or other plain cladding, such as stone or concrete. Specifying Door/Window Assembly Infill definitions
NOTE Nested grids and no infill are options you select when assigning an infill to a cell. They do not require infill definitions. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid for a Door and Window Assembly" on page 897 and "Removing an Infill from a Door and Window Assembly" on page 900. You can define as many infills as you need and then use cell assignments to specify the cells that use each infill. A default infill, which you can modify, is used for all unassigned cells. For more information about cell assignments, see "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Elements" on page 894. NOTE Create infill definitions for a specific door/window assembly style. Those definitions can be assigned only to grid cells in door/window assemblies of that style. Materials Styles use the materials of the object style assigned to each panel. For example, if you specify an infill to use the Standard door style, the materials of that infill are those designated in the door style. Simple panels need materials assigned in the door/window assembly style. Door/Window Assembly with assigned materials example detail
If you do not use materials to control the display properties of infills, you can specify their display properties in the door/window assembly style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the Default Infill are applied to all infills unless you create a custom display component for each infill definition. Then you can control the display of each infill definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908. Creating a Panel Infill for a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to create a simple panel infill to represent basic cladding materials in the door/window assembly, such as a stone wall panel, concrete panel, metal panel, or glazing infill.
882 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Because door/window assemblies can contain multiple infills, it is helpful to use a naming convention for panel infills that indicates the infill location or purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1- Stone Panel identifies a stone panel in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Infill. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the infill. 8 Select Simple Panel for Infill Type. 9 Select an alignment for the infill.
For more information, see "Specifying an Alignment for a Door and Window Assembly Infill" on page 884. 10 Specify an offset for the infill.
For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Infill" on page 884. 11 Specify a thickness for the panel. 12 Click OK. After you create an infill definition, you can assign it to any cell in a door/window assembly grid. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 895. Creating an Infill for Inserting an Object into a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to create a style infill to insert objects into a door/window assembly. You can insert doors, windows, curtain wall units, and AEC Polygons by defining a specific style of that object as an infill.
TIP After you insert an object in a cell, you can select that object independent of the grid and access editing options for the object.
Because door/window assemblies can contain multiple infills, it is helpful to use a naming convention for panel infills that indicates the infill location or purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1-Stone Panel identifies a stone panel in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
NOTE The object styles you use in infills must exist in the current drawing to be added to an infill definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Infill. 7 Enter a descriptive name for the infill. 8 Select Style for Infill Type.
The right side of the dialog box changes to display a tree view of the object styles available for insertion into a door/window assembly. 9 Select an object style.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 883
There is a unique icon for each type of style. For example, the door style icon and the curtain wall unit icon . These icons also are displayed next to the infill name at the top of the dialog box to help you identify the type of infill. 10 Select an alignment for the infill. For more information, see "Specifying an Alignment for a Door and Window Assembly Infill" on page 884. 11 Specify an offset for the infill. For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Infill" on page 884. 12 Click OK. After you create an infill definition, you can assign it to any cell in a door/window assembly grid. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 895. Specifying an Alignment for a Door and Window Assembly Infill Use this procedure to align an infill so that it is centered with the baseline of the door/window assembly, in front of the baseline, or behind the baseline. In Plan view, the front of a door/window assembly (drawn from left to right) is below the baseline and the back is above the baseline. Specifying Door/Window Assembly panel infill alignments
NOTE To move the infill away from the baseline, see "Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Infill" on page 884.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select an infill or create a new one. 7 Select an alignment: front, center, or back. 8 Click OK. Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Infill Use this procedure to specify an offset for a door/window assembly infill. By default, infills are centered on the door/window assembly baseline. If your design requires that the infill be aligned with frame edges or some other part of the door/window assembly, you can specify an offset for the infill. You can also edit individual style-based infills directly in the drawing. The selected infill has Flip grips in both the X and Y directions so that you can change the orientation of the infill.
884 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Specify Door/Window Assembly infill panel offsets
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select an infill or create a new one. 7 Enter an offset distance.
In plan view, positive numbers offset the infill above the baseline and negative numbers offset the infill below the baseline. The offset is also affected by the selected alignment for the infill.
8 Click OK.
Removing an Infill Definition from a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to delete an infill definition that you no longer need. However, you cannot remove an infill definition that is currently assigned to a cell in the primary grid or any nested grid. Also, you cannot remove the default infill definition, but you can modify it as needed.
NOTE For information about removing an infill from a cell, see "Removing an Infill from a Door and Window Assembly" on page 900.
Removing panel infill from a Door/Window Assembly
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 885
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Infills under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded infill definition, and click Remove Infill.
7 Click OK. Defining Door and Window Assembly Frames All door/window assembly grids, including the primary grid, can have frame definitions. The door/window assembly frame is represented by the outer edges of a grid. The overall frame size is determined by the length and height of the door/window assembly grid. You can define a frame by specifying a width and depth or by selecting a profile. Specifying Door/Window Assembly frame width and depth
You create frame definitions for a specific door/window assembly style. Those definitions can be assigned only to frames in door/window assemblies of that style. You can create as many frame definitions as you want and then assign the definitions to the frame edges as needed. If you have nested grids, each grid has its own frame. There is a default frame definition that you can modify and assign as needed. Unassigned frame edges are not displayed. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 902. TIP Using Style Manager, you can copy a mullion definition and use it as a frame definition. Select the mullion definition and drag it to Frames in the left pane.
Materials and Display Properties for Frames If you do not use materials to control the display properties of frames, you can specify their display properties in the door/window assembly style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default frame are applied to all frames unless you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each frame definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908. NOTE You create frame definitions for a specific door/window assembly style and those definitions can be assigned only to frames in door/window assemblies of that style. Defining a Door and Window Assembly Frame by Width and Depth Use this procedure to define a frame by specifying its width and depth. The overall frame size is determined by the length and height of the door/window assembly grid. 886 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Because door/window assemblies can contain multiple styles with different frames, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid frames that indicates the grid location or purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1- Metal Frame identifies a metal frame in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
TIP To remove the frame edge and have the infill adjust to fill the space occupied by the frame, create a frame definition with both width and depth set to zero. Then assign that definition to the frame edge that you want to remove. This is necessary for the infill to be mitered as it would be for a butt-glazed condition. For more information, see "Removing a Frame Edge from a Door and Window Assembly " on page 904.
Specifying a Door/Window Assembly frame width and depth of zero
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions.
6 Click
to create a new frame definition.
7 Enter a descriptive name for the frame.
8 Specify a width and depth for the frame.
9 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for a Door and Window Assembly Frame" on page 889.
10 Click OK.
After you create a frame definition, you can assign it to any frame in a door/window assembly. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 902.
Creating a Profile for a Door and Window Assembly Frame Use this procedure to create a profile that you can use to define the shape of a door/window assembly frame. You can then extrude the profile to create a door/window assembly frame. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the default height and width of the door/window assembly frame. The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the height and the depth needed for the resulting door/window assembly frame.
2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Enter c (Centroid) for the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame.
4 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
You can now use the profile as a door/window assembly frame. For more information, see "Defining a Door and Window Assembly Frame Using a Profile" on page 887.
Defining a Door and Window Assembly Frame Using a Profile Use this procedure to create a frame element definition from a profile. If you do not want a straight edge to your frame, you can use a profile to define edges with curves, jags, or any other shape you require.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 887
You can also use an edit in-place routine to create a frame from a profile. For more information, see "Creating a Frame or Mullion Edge from a Polyline or Profile Using In-Place Editing" on page 920. It is helpful to use a naming convention for profiles that indicates the grid location or purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1- Metal Frame identifies a metal frame in a third-level grid on Floor 1. Specifying default and profile-based Door/Window Assembly frames
NOTE The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the frame. 1 Create the profile to use for the frame. For more information, see "Creating a Profile for a Door and Window Assembly Frame" on page 887. 2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 4 Select a door/window assembly style. 5 Click the Design Rules tab. 6 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 7 Create a new frame definition. 8 Enter a descriptive name for the frame. 9 Specify a width and depth for the frame edge. These dimensions are used to calculate the center point of the edge for aligning the profile and also to specify a boundary for the adjacent infill.
10 Select Use Profile. NOTE The Profile options are available only when you have profiles in the current drawing.
11 Select a profile from the list. By default, the profile is inserted using the same width and depth with which it was created.
12 To adjust the size of the profile to fit within the width or depth dimension of the frame edge, select Auto-Adjust Profile Width or Depth.
13 To mirror the profile along the X or Y axis, select X or Y for Mirror In. 14 To rotate the profile, specify a rotation angle. 15 Specify any offsets.
888 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
For more information, see the next section "Specifying Offsets for a Door and Window Assembly Frame" on page 889.
16 Click OK.
After you create a frame definition, you can assign it to any frame in a door/window assembly. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 902.
Specifying Offsets for a Door and Window Assembly Frame
Use this procedure to define the distance that a door/window assembly frame is from the floor line, roof line, or baseline. By default, the outside edges of the frame align with start and end of the baseline and the start and end of the base height. When you adjust the width of the frame, the frame expands inward. However, you can use offsets to expand or contract the frame away from these default limits or to shift the frame away from the baseline in either the X or Y direction.
Offset X Y Start
End
Description
Positive X offset moves the frame edge outward beyond the end of the door/window assembly, while a negative X offset moves the frame edge inward toward the center of the door/window assembly.
In Plan view, a positive Y offset moves the frame edge above the baseline, while a negative Y offset moves the frame below the baseline.
Negative Start offset lengthens the frame beyond the start point, while a positive Start offset shortens the frame. The start point for vertical edges is the baseline, and the start point for horizontal edges (drawn left to right) is the left side.
Negative End offset lengthens the frame beyond the end point, while a positive End offset shortens the frame. The end point for vertical edges is the base height, and the end point for horizontal edges (drawn left to right) is the right side.
TIP To quickly identify the start and end of a door/window assembly, select the door/window assembly. The Reverse Direction grip is displayed near the center of the door/window assembly and points toward the end of the door/window assembly.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 6 Select a frame definition from the list. 7 Specify an offset distance for the frame edge: X, Y, Start, or End. 8 Click OK.
Removing a Frame Definition from a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to remove a frame definition that you no longer need. You cannot remove a frame definition if it is currently assigned to a frame edge, but you can remove it if it is assigned as an override to a frame edge. Also, you cannot remove the default frame definition, but you can modify it as needed.
NOTE For information about removing a frame edge, see "Removing a Frame Edge from a Door and Window Assembly " on page 904.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 889
4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Frames under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded frame definition from the list. 7 Click Remove Frame. 8 Click OK. Defining Door and Window Assembly Mullions All door/window assembly grids, including the primary grid, can have mullion definitions. The mullions of a door/window assembly are the edges between the grid cells. You can define the mullions by specifying a width and depth or by selecting a profile from which the mullion is extruded. Because door/window assemblies can contain multiple nested grids with different mullions, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid mullions that indicates the grid location or purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1- Window Mullion identifies a mullion for a window in a third-level grid on Floor 1. Specifying default and profile-based Door/Window Assembly mullions
You create mullion definitions for a specific door/window assembly style and those definitions can be assigned only to mullions in door/window assemblies of that style. You can create as many mullion definitions as you want and then assign the definitions to mullions as needed. If you have nested grids, each grid has its own mullions. A default mullion definition, which you can modify and assign as needed, is used for any unassigned mullions. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 904. TIP Using Style Manager, you can copy a frame definition and use it as a mullion definition. Select the frame definition and drag it to Mullions in the left pane.
Materials and Display Properties for Mullions If you do not use materials to control the display properties of mullions, you can specify their display properties in the door/window assembly style. The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default mullion are applied to all mullions unless you create a custom display component for each definition. You can then control the display of each mullion definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908. Defining Door and Window Assembly Mullions by Width and Depth Use this procedure to define mullions by specifying a width and a depth. Because door/window assemblies can contain multiple nested grids with different mullions, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid mullions that indicates the grid location or purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1- Window Mullion identifies a mullion for a window in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
890 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Specifying Door/Window Assembly mullion width and depth
TIP To remove mullions for butt glazing, create a definition with both width and depth set to zero. Then assign that definition to the mullions that you want to remove. For more information, see "Removing Mullions from a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 906.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Click New Mullion.
7 Enter a descriptive name for the mullion definition. 8 Specify a width and depth for the mullion definition. 9 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 893. 10 Click OK. After you create a mullion definition, you can assign it to any mullion in a door/window assembly. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 904. Creating a Profile for Door and Window Assembly Mullions Use this procedure to create a profile that you can use to define the shape of a door/window assembly mullion definition. You can then extrude the profile to create mullions from it. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the default height and width of the door/window assembly mullion. The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion. 1 Draw a closed polyline of the height and the depth needed for the resulting door/window assembly mullion. 2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Enter c (Centroid) for the insertion point of the profile. The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion. 4 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 891
You can now use the profile as a door/window assembly mullion. For more information, see "Defining the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly Using a Profile" on page 892.
Defining the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly Using a Profile Use this procedure to create a mullion element definition from a profile. If you do not want a straight edge to your mullions, you can use a profile to define mullions with curves, jags, or any other shape. You can also use an edit in-place routine to create a mullion from a profile. For more information, see "Creating a Frame or Mullion Edge from a Polyline or Profile Using In-Place Editing" on page 920. Because door/window assemblies can contain multiple nested grids with different mullions, it is helpful to use a naming convention for grid mullions that indicates the grid location or purpose within the door/window assembly. For example, L3-FL1- Window Mullion identifies a mullion for a window in a third-level grid on Floor 1.
NOTE The insertion point of the profile is aligned with the centroid of the mullion.
1 Create the profile to use for the mullion. For more information, see "Creating a Profile for Door and Window Assembly Mullions" on page 891.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 4 Select a door/window assembly style. 5 Click the Design Rules tab. 6 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 7 Click New Mullion. 8 Enter a descriptive name for the mullion definition. 9 Specify a width and depth for the mullion definition.
These dimensions are used to calculate the center point of the mullion for aligning the profile, and also to specify a boundary for the adjacent infill. 10 Select Use Profile.
NOTE The Profile options are available only when you have profiles in the current drawing.
11 Select a profile from the list. By default, the profile is inserted using the same width and depth with which it was created.
12 To adjust the size of the profile to fit within the width or depth dimension of the mullion, select Auto-Adjust Profile Width or Depth.
13 To mirror the profile along the X or Y axis, select X or Y for Mirror In. 14 To rotate the profile, specify a rotation angle. 15 Specify any offsets.
For more information, see "Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 893. 16 Click OK. After you create a mullion definition, you can assign it to any mullion in a door/window assembly. For more information, see "Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly" on page 904.
892 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Specifying Offsets for the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly
Use this procedure to define mullions that are offset from the start or end of the door/window assembly to lengthen or shorten the edge or offset in the X or Y direction to shift the edge. For example, you might want to represent butt glazing by offsetting the mullions to be behind glass panel infills.
Offset X
Y Start End
Description
For vertical mullions, a positive X offset moves the mullions toward the end of the door/window assembly, while a negative X offset moves the mullions toward the start of the door/window assembly. For horizontal mullions, a positive X offset moves the mullions toward the top of the door/window assembly, while a negative X offset moves the mullions toward the bottom of the door/window assembly.
In Plan view, a positive Y offset moves the mullions above the baseline, while a negative Y offset moves the mullions below the baseline.
Negative Start offset lengthens the mullions beyond the start point, while a positive Start offset shortens the mullions.
Negative End offset lengthens the mullions beyond the end point, while a positive End offset shortens the mullions.
TIP To quickly identify the start and end of a door/window assembly, select the door/window assembly. The Reverse Direction grip is displayed near the center of the door/window assembly and points toward the end of the door/window assembly.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Select a mullion definition from the list. 7 Specify an offset distance for the X, Y, Start, or End. 8 Click OK.
Removing a Mullion Definition from a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to remove a mullion definition that you no longer need. You cannot remove a mullion definition if it is assigned to a mullion, but you can remove it if it is assigned as an override to a mullion. Also, you cannot remove the Default Mullion definition, but you can modify it as needed.
NOTE For information about removing mullions from between cells, see "Removing Mullions from a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 906.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select Mullions under Element Definitions. 6 Select the unneeded mullion definition from the list.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 893
7 Click Remove Mullion.
8 Click OK. Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Elements After you've created element definitions for a door/window assembly style, you can assign those definitions to each of the door/window assembly element types: divisions, cell infills, frames, and mullions. By default, one definition is assigned to all elements of a particular type. However, you can assign definitions to individual elements as well. For example, all cells in the grid are assigned the default infill. But you can create a new cell assignment, select a different infill, and then specify the cells to use that infill. Assignment list
For more information about element definitions, see "Creating Element Definitions for a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 875. Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid Divisions define the grid orientation (whether the direction of the grid cells and mullions is horizontal or vertical) and the division type (number and size of cells). After you define a division, you can assign it to the primary grid or to nested grids. Nested grids are created by selecting Nested Grid as the cell assignment. For more information, see "Working with Nested Grids in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 895.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid you want to assign rules to.
The name of the grid you select is displayed in the table under the Division Assignment row. TIP To rename a grid, select it, click Rename, and enter a new name. 6 Click the Element column for that grid and select a division definition from the list.
894 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
7 Click OK. Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells An infill defines the contents of a door/window assembly cell. A door/window assembly cell can have the default simple panel or contain a nested grid, an AEC Polygon, curtain wall unit, door or window style. The object styles you use in infills must exist in the current drawing to be added to an infill definition. Panels typically represent glazing or other plain cladding, such as stone or concrete. Specifying Door/Window Assembly infill definitions
Cell Assignments A cell assignment defines the infill definition used for cells. You can use one cell assignment to assign the same infill to all cells, or you can create multiple cell assignments to assign different infills to different cells.
Do not assign multiple definitions to the same cell. If you do, the last definition assigned to the cell is used. Default Cell Assignment The default cell assignment used by all unassigned cells. You can modify the default assignment to be any type of infill, but you cannot delete the default cell assignment. You may want to modify the default cell assignment to use the infill definition that occurs most frequently in your design. Any cells not assigned to other infills then use this infill definition. Materials and Display Properties of Infills The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default infill are applied to all infills unless you assign materials to the infills you created or you create a custom display component for each definition. Then you can control the display of each infill definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908. Working with Nested Grids in Door and Window Assemblies Each door/window assembly grid is one dimensional with either a horizontal or vertical division. By nesting grids in the door/window assembly style, you can create a variety of patterns from simple to complex.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 895
Specifying Door/Window Assembly nested grid locations
Simple Primary Grids When you nest grids, you start with one primary grid. Then each cell in the primary grid can be filled with another grid. For example, the following illustration has a horizontal primary grid with four cells. You can nest a vertical grid in each horizontal cell to create a simple 2D grid.
Specifying Door/Window Assembly cell divisions 1
The previous illustration shows all cells in the grid with the same cell assignment--a vertical division. But each cell in a grid is independent and can have a separate assignment. For example, the following illustration shows one cell in the primary grid that contains another horizontal grid, the next cell contains a vertical grid with three divisions, and the next cell contains a vertical grid with six divisions. Specifying Door/Window Assembly cell divisions 2
Multiple Nested Grids You can continue to nest grids to create multiple levels. For example, the following illustrations show the Standard door/window assembly style grid, the same grid with a nested grid in one cell of the secondary grid, and the same grid again with nested grids in all cells of the secondary grid.
896 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Specifying a nested grid in a door/window assembly
Defining Nested Grids You can define nested grids on the Design Rules tab of the Door/Window Assembly Style Properties dialog box. The tree on the left side of the tab lists the grids. There is always one primary grid. The primary grid can have one or more secondary grids. Each secondary grid can have one or more tertiary grids and so on. TIP To quickly create nested grids in all cells, change the default cell assignment to Nested Grid. If you want multiple levels of nesting, be sure to change the default cell assignment for each grid. For more information, see "Creating a Nested Grid for a Door and Window Assembly" on page 897. Each grid has its own cell assignments. You assign cells to contain another grid, a panel infill, or an object such as a door or window. For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 895.
Creating a Nested Grid for a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to create a nested grid, which is a grid within a grid. Each nested grid has its own division rules, cell assignments, frame, and mullions. By default, the frame is off for nested grids. For more information, see "Working with Nested Grids in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 895.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 897
4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a nested grid. 6 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a new cell assignment. 7 Click New Cell Assignment.
A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments. 8 Right-click the default name, click Rename, and enter a descriptive name for the assignment. 9 Select Nested Grid in the Element column.
A new grid is added to the list of grids in the left pane of the dialog box. If you are editing the primary grid, the new grid is added at the secondary level. If you are editing a grid at the secondary level, the additional grid is placed at the tertiary level, and so on. Creating a nested grid
New nested grid in tree
NOTE To rename a grid, select it in the right pane, right-click, and click Rename, and enter a new name.
10 Specify the cells to contain this nested grid. For more information, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 901.
11 Click OK. Filling a Door and Window Assembly Cell with a Simple Panel Use this procedure to fill a door/window assembly cell with a simple panel. Simple panels are generally used to represent basic cladding materials in the door/window assembly, such as a stone wall panel or a concrete panel.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to assign a simple panel. 6 Click New Cell Assignment.
A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments. 7 Right-click the default name, click Rename, and enter a descriptive name for the assignment. 8 Select an infill that defines a simple panel.
898 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
9 Specify the cells to contain this simple panel. For more information, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 901.
10 Click OK.
Inserting a Door or Window into a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to add doors and windows to door/window assemblies. For more information, see "Defining Infills for Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 881.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a door, window or door/window assembly. 2 Select the door/window assembly in which to insert the door or window.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 Select the door/window assembly cell marker for the cell in which to insert the door or window. The Add Infill worksheet displays.
4 Select the insertion method for the door or window:
If you want to...
Then...
add the door or window as a cell assignment and have all door/window assemblies using the same style display the same object added to a corresponding cell
select Add as Cell Assignment.
add the door or window exclusively to the select Add as Cell Override. selected door/window assembly
If a door or window of the style you selected already exists in your drawing, Existing Infill is selected by default.
5 Select the type of infill for the door or window:
If you selected...
Then...
Add as Cell Assignment and you want to Click OK. insert a door or window of the existing style, Existing Infill is selected by default.
Add as Cell Assignment and you want to insert a door or window of a different style than exists in your drawing
select New Infill, enter a name for the object and click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door or window of the existing style and not modify the edge of the frame surrounding the object
Click OK.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 899
If you selected...
Then...
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door or window of a different style than exists in your drawing and not remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select New Infill, enter a name for the object and click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door or window of the existing style and remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select Top, Bottom, Left, or Right for Override Frame Removal and click OK.
Add as Cell Override and you want to insert a door or window of a different style than exists in your drawing and remove an edge of the frame surrounding the object
select New Infill and enter a name for the object. Then select Top, Bottom, Left, or Right for Override Frame Removal and click OK.
6 Press ENTER.
Inserting an Object into a Door and Window Assembly Cell Use this procedure to insert objects, such as doors, windows, curtain wall units, and AEC Polygons, into a door/window assembly cell. Door/window assembly cells can contain these objects when you create infill definitions that use them. For more information, see "Creating an Infill for Inserting an Object into a Door and Window Assembly" on page 883.
TIP After you insert an object in a cell, you can select that object independent of the grid, and access editing options for the object. For more information, see "Editing Objects Anchored in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 933.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to insert objects. 6 Click New Cell Assignment.
A new cell assignment is displayed in the list of cell assignments.
7 Right-click the default name, click Rename, and then enter a descriptive name for the assignment. 8 Select an infill that uses an object style. 9 Specify the cells to contain this object.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 901.
10 Click OK.
Removing an Infill from a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to remove the infill of a cell and leave the cell empty. To do this, use None as the element definition. Using None also removes any frame edges that border the cell, but it does not affect the mullions.
Removing infill from a Door/Window Assembly cell
900 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
To remove the infill of a cell 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid that contains the cells you want to assign to None. 6 Select an existing cell assignment or create a new one. 7 Select None under the Element column. 8 Specify the cells to contain the None infill. For more information, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Cells Use a Cell Assignment" on page 901. 9 Click OK.
Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Cells Use a Cell Assignment When you create a cell assignment you need to specify the cells in the grid to use that assignment. There are two options for selecting cells:
Use Location to insert the infill into the start, middle, or end cells of a vertical grid or into the bottom, middle, or top cells of a horizontal grid. If there is an even number of cells (four or more), Middle refers to the two cells in the middle of the grid. If there is an odd number of cells (three or more), Middle refers to one cell in the middle of the grid. Specifying Door/Window Assembly infill by location
Use Index to insert the infill into specific cells based on cell numbers. Cells are numbered from start to end or bottom to top. For example, typing 1, 2, 3 would place the infill in the first, second and third cells. Specifying Door/Window Assembly infill by index
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 901
5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 Select a cell assignment:
If you selected... Location
Index
Then...
click the Used In column, and click the button at the far right of the row. Select the cells you want to use this assignment, and click OK.
enter the cell numbers separated by commas in the Used In column. For vertical grids, cells are numbered from start to end and for horizontal grids, cells are numbered from bottom to top.
NOTE Do not assign multiple definitions to a cell. If you do, the last definition assigned to the cell is used.
7 Click OK. Any cells that are not assigned a specific cell assignment use the default infill.
Removing an Assignment from a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to remove cell assignments, frame assignments, and mullion assignments from a door/window assembly style. You cannot remove default assignments, but you can modify them to suit your needs.
NOTE Each grid requires one division assignment, therefore you cannot remove the division assignment. You can change the division element used for the division assignment.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid from which you want to remove an assignment. 6 Select a cell assignment, frame assignment, or a mullion assignment. 7 Click Remove Assignment. 8 Click OK.
Assigning Definitions to Door and Window Assembly Frames The door/window assembly frame is represented by the outer edges of the primary grid. Each nested grid has its own frame that is defined separately from the primary grid frame. By default, the frames of nested grid are turned off. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 895.
Frame Assignments
A frame assignment defines the frame definition used by each frame edge. You can use one frame assignment to assign the same definition to all four edges of the frame, or you can create multiple frame assignments to assign different definitions to different edges of the frame. Unassigned edges are not displayed.
Default Frame Assignment
Do not assign multiple definitions to the frame edge. If you do, the last definition assigned to the edge is used. There is a default frame assignment and you can select the frame edges it applies to. You can modify the default assignment to use any frame definition, but you cannot delete the default frame assignment.
902 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Materials and Display Properties of Frames The layer, color, linetype, and other display properties of the default frame are applied to all frame edges unless you assign materials to the frame definition or create a custom display component for each definition. Then you can control the display of each frame definition independently. For more information, see "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908. Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Door and Window Assembly Grid Use this procedure to add a frame assignment to a door/window assembly. To assign different definitions to different frame edges, you need multiple frame assignments.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a new frame assignment. 6 Click New Frame Assignment.
A new frame assignment is displayed in the list of frame assignments.
7 Right-click the default name, click Rename, and then enter a descriptive name. 8 Under Element, select a frame definition. 9 Specify the sides of the frame to use this frame assignment.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Edges Use a Frame Assignment" on page 903. 10 Click OK. Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Edges Use a Frame Assignment When you create a frame assignment, you need to specify the edges of the frame to use that assignment. Frame edges that are not assigned a frame definition are not displayed. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 Select a frame assignment. Location is the only way to specify the frame edges. 7 Click the Used In column, and then click the [...] button at the far right of the row.
8 Select the edges that you want to use this assignment - Left, Right, Top, or Bottom - and click OK.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 903
Specifying different Door/Window Assemblies frame definitions
NOTE Do not assign multiple definitions to the same frame edge because only the last definition assigned to the edge is used. 9 Click OK. Removing a Frame Edge from a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to remove a frame edge from a door/window assembly. There are three ways to remove a frame edge: Set the width and depth of the edge to zero. Leave the edge unassigned. Specify None as an override to the edge assignment. The first two methods remove the frame edge and expand the adjacent infills into the space occupied by the edge. By specifying None as an override, the frame edge is not displayed, but the adjacent infill is not expanded into the space the edge occupied. For information about setting the width and depth to zero, see "Defining a Door and Window Assembly Frame by Width and Depth" on page 886. For information about leaving the edge unassigned, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Edges Use a Frame Assignment" on page 903. For information about overriding the edge, see "Creating a Frame or Mullion Override" on page 918. Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Door and Window Assembly The mullions of a door/window assembly are the edges between the grid cells. The primary grid and each nested grid have mullions that are defined separately from the other grids. For more information about nested grids, see "Working with Nested Grids in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 895. Specifying mullions for Door/Window Assembly nested grids
Mullion Assignments A mullion assignment defines the definition used by each mullion. You can use one assignment to define all mullions, or you can create multiple assignments and assign different definitions to different mullions in any grid. Do not assign multiple definitions to the same mullion because only the last definition assigned to the mullion is used.
904 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Default Mullion Assignment There is a default mullion assignment used by all unassigned mullions. You can modify the default assignment to be any mullion definition, but you cannot delete the default mullion assignment. Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to add a new mullion assignment to a door/window assembly style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to create a new mullion assignment. 6 Click New Mullion Assignment.
A new mullion assignment is displayed in the list of mullion assignments.
7 Right-click the default name, click Rename, and then enter a descriptive name. 8 Under Element, select a mullion definition. 9 Specify the mullions to use this assignment.
For more information, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Mullions Use an Assignment" on page 905. 10 Click OK. Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Mullions Use an Assignment When you create a mullion assignment you need to specify the mullions in the grid to use that assignment. There are two options for selecting mullions: Use Location to assign a definition to the start, middle, or end mullions of a vertical grid or the bottom, middle, or top mullions of a horizontal grid. If there is an even number of mullions (four or more), Middle refers to the two mullions in the middle of the grid. If there is an odd number of mullions (three or more), Middle refers to the one mullion in the middle of the grid. Use Index to assign a definition to specific mullions based on mullion numbers. Mullions are numbered from left to right or bottom to top. For example, typing 1, 2, 3 would assign the definition to the first, second, and third mullions.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select a grid. 6 Select an existing mullion assignment or create a new one.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 905
7 Select a mullion assignment: If you selected... Location
Index
Then...
click the Used In column, and click the button at the far right of the row. Select the mullions you want to use this assignment, and click OK.
enter the mullion numbers separated by commas in the Used In column. For vertical grids, mullions are numbered from start to end and, for horizontal grids, mullions are numbered from bottom to top.
NOTE Do not assign multiple definitions to the same mullion because only the last definition assigned to the mullion is used.
8 Click OK. Any mullions that are not assigned a specific mullion assignment use the default mullion definition.
Removing Mullions from a Door and Window Assembly Grid Use this procedure to remove a mullion from the door/window assembly. You can create a mullion definition whose edge width and depth are zero. Adjacent infills expand to fill in the space that was occupied by the mullion. This is an effective way to represent butt glazing.
Removing a mullion from Door/Window Assembly grid
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 In the left pane, select the grid in which you want to remove a mullion. 6 Create a new mullion assignment, and enter 0 (zero) for the width and depth.
For more information, see "Defining Door and Window Assembly Mullions by Width and Depth" on page 890.
7 Under Mullion Assignments, select the mullion definition you created for mullion edges of any mullion assignment where you want to remove the mullions. For more information, see "Specifying Which Door and Window Assembly Mullions Use an Assignment" on page 905.
8 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Door and Window Assembly Style A door/window assembly consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component. When you assign materials to a door/window assembly style, you assign one material to each display component of the door/window assembly. For example, you assign a wood material to the frame and a glass material to the glass inset. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
906 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
If you want to use the display properties of the door/window assembly style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the door/window assembly style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in three dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
Door and Window Assembly Materials and Display Components
The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each door/window assembly component in the specified views.
Door/Window Assembly Component Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Screened, Reflected Plan Default Infill Default Frame Default Mullion Default Infill Hatch Default Frame Hatch Default Mullion Hatch Model Default Infill Default Frame Default Mullion
Material Component
Linework Linework Linework Linework Linework Linework
3D Body 3D Body 3D Body
Assigning Materials to a Door and Window Assembly Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a door/window assembly style. When you assign a material to a door/window assembly component, the component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the door/window assembly. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, the frame, mullion, and infill are physical components of a door/window assembly. The cell marker is a symbolic component.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a door/window assembly component, you can change the display properties of the door/window assembly style as described in "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door/window assembly tool. 2 Right-click a door/window assembly tool, and click Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, select the value for Material Definition, and select a different
material definition.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 907
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click definition and assign it to a component.
to create a new material
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies The display of a door/window assembly depends on the direction from which you view the door/window assembly. In plan view, the door/window assembly object is displayed as parallel lines with vertices marking the grid lines, as an architect would typically draw a door/window assembly. In 3D view, the door/window assembly object is displayed as it would appear in the real world, with surfaces showing length, thickness, and height. You control what you want to display in each particular view.
Element Definitions and Custom Display Components
By default, the display of all infills, frames, and mullions is controlled by the display properties of the default infill, default frame, and default mullion. However, you can add individual element definitions as components with separate display properties. For example, if you define two infills called stone panel and glass panel, by default they are both controlled by the default infill display properties. But you can add each definition as a new display component and then control the display properties separately.
NOTE The component name in the Custom Display Component dialog box must match the name of element definition in the Design Rules tab. Otherwise, the element definition does not display properly.
For more information about the display system, see "Display System" on page 411.
Materials and Display Properties
You can use materials to control the display of both default and custom infills, frames, and mullions. When you assign materials to the element definitions you create, you do not need to define these definitions as custom display components. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 906.
Adding Door and Window Assembly Element Definitions as Display Components Use this procedure to add door/window assembly element definitions. Before you can control the display properties of door/window assembly elements according to the definition assigned to the element, you must create display components for each element definition.
1 Select a door/window assembly, and click Edit Door/Window Assembly Style. 2 In the Door/Window Assembly Style Properties dialog box, click the Display Properties tab. 3 Click Edit Display Properties. 4 Click the Other tab, and then click Add.
NOTE If you click the Custom Plan Components tab, the Custom Display Component dialog box is similar, except that you do not specify the Z insertion point and Z offset for the custom graphic.
5 Select Infill, Frame, or Mullion for Component Type. 6 Enter a name for Component Name, or click Select Element and select an element from the list. 7 Click OK. 8 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
The element definition that you added is displayed in the list of components.
9 Click the Other tab to continue adding element definitions, or click OK twice.
908 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of an individual door/window assembly:
Visibility (component is on or off) By Material Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
1 Select the door/window assembly you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Door/Window Assembly Style.
2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Style Override. 4 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 5 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 6 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of an individual door/window assembly. Door/window assembly hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (Plan view) of a drawing.
1 Select the door/window assembly you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Door/Window Assembly Style.
2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Style Override.
4 Click the Hatching tab.
5 Select a component, and click the setting for Pattern.
6 Select the hatching for the component:
If you want to select...
Then...
a hatching pattern that is available in the software
select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
7 Click OK. 8 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 9 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 909
10 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to orient the hatching... to the object, regardless of the object rotation
Then... select Object.
to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
11 Click OK twice.
Adding Custom Graphics as a Display Component of a Door and Window Assembly There may be instances where an infill, frame, or mullion requires a custom 2D or 3D graphic. For example, you might need a highly detailed three-dimensional truss as the mullions or a decorative light fixture applied to an infill. In cases like these, you can create a custom block, add a display component with the block attached, and associate that component with an element definition. When you assign that definition to an element, the block is also displayed.
1 Draw your custom component, and save it as a block. 2 Select a door/window assembly, right-click, and click Edit Door/Window Assembly Style. 3 Click the Display Properties tab.
4 Click . 5 Click the Custom Plan Components tab.
If Model, Sill Plan, or Sill Plan Screened is the current display representation, the tab is called Other.
6 Click Add. 7 Select Infill, Frame, or Mullion as the element type. 8 Select the specific element from the list. 9 Select Draw Custom Graphics. 10 Specify the display of the element:
If you want to...
Then...
display the block instead of the associated door/window assembly element
select Replace Graphics.
superimpose the block over the door/window assembly element so that both are displayed
clear Replace Graphics.
11 Click Select Block and select the custom block that you created. 12 Click OK. 13 Specify further settings for the custom display block:
If you want to... scale the block to fit a particular dimension
Then...
select Width, Height, or Depth. To prevent the block from losing its proportions, select Lock XY Ratio.
mirror the block
determine if it should mirror in the X, Y, or Z direction.
specify how the block is inserted into the grid in the X, Y, and specify an insertion point on the X, Y, and Z planes. Z directions
offset the block from the grid
specify the offset in the X, Y, or Z direction.
14 Click OK three times.
910 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Creating Cut Planes for a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to specify the properties of one or more cut planes for a door/window assembly style. Cut plane display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in Top view (Plan view) of a drawing. To better visualize the elements of a door/window assembly in plan view, you can create cut planes. The main cut plane is where the shrinkwrap and hatching are applied. The plan display shows the components of the door/window assembly as they are displayed at the height of each cut plane.
1 Select a door/window assembly, right-click, and click Edit Door/Window Assembly Style. 2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select Plan, and click .
NOTE The Cut Plane tab is displayed only in some display representations, such as Plan.
4 Click the Cut Plane tab to set the cut plane to be displayed in each display representation for the door/window assembly style.
5 Enter a value for Cut Plane Height to specify the cut plane at which hatching takes effect.
6 To specifically define a cut plane, click Add, and enter the height of the new cut plane:
If you add a cut plane...
Then...
at a height that is lower than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Below Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
at a height that is higher than the value for Cut Plane Height objects are displayed using the properties specified for the Above Cut Plane component on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
7 Click OK twice.
Defining a Door and Window Assembly Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces Use this procedure to define a door and window assembly style that can bound associative spaces. When a door and window assembly style is set as bounding, by default all door and window assemblies that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the object style in the object settings, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the checkbox for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a door/window assembly. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a door/window assembly.
Door and Window Assembly Styles | 911
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door/Window Assembly Styles. 3 Select a door/window assembly style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the door/window assembly, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Text Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies
Door/window assemblies are geometrically complex objects that often have a large number of different elements, such as frames, panels, and window infills. The settings for these elements are defined in the door/window assembly style and can be modified using Style Manager. However, there are cases when modifying a door/window assembly directly on screen is more suitable:
You want to add custom frame or mullion edges to a door/window assembly and need direct visual feedback.
You want to create an override, like a merged infill or an irregular panel shape in only one specific place in the door/window assembly.
You want to experiment with different visuals without having to change the door/window assembly style for each idea immediately.
When you have finished your onscreen edits, you can decide if you want to
apply the overrides to the door/window assembly you have edited. save the overrides to the current door/window assembly style. create a new style for the overrides.
NOTE You cannot modify a definition using the Override method. For information about modifying definitions, see "Modifying Element Definitions for Door and Window Assembly Styles" on page 927.
Overrides do not affect the door/window assembly design rules. However, you can transfer overrides to a door/window assembly style when you want all door/window assemblies of that style to have the same overrides. You can view a list of overrides that are currently assigned to a door/window assembly from the Overrides tab of the Door/Window Assembly Properties dialog box. For more information, see "Creating a Division Override" on page 924.
NOTE Overrides are also listed on the Overrides tab in the Door/Window Assembly Style Properties dialog box.
Overriding Door and Window Assembly Infills The cell infills of a door/window assembly are set in the door/window assembly style. You can, however, create overrides for these infills in cells. For example, you might want a row of glider windows for a first floor facade. In one specific
912 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
position, however, you want a frosted glass window. In this case, you would set the row of glider windows in the door/window assembly style, and then override the infill style in one specific cell with a frosted glass window. Door/window assembly infills can consist of simple panels, objects like windows or doors, or nested grids. You can change one infill for another, merge cells, or remove the frame from an infill altogether. This would be useful if you add a door into a grid cell and want to remove the bottom frame from that cell. Turning on Cell Markers Use this procedure to turn on the cell markers for each grid cell in a door/window assembly. The cell markers must be on in order to select individual cells and make changes to them. Viewing Door/Window Assembly cell markers
1 Select the door/window assembly for which you want to create an infill override. 2 Right-click, and click Infill Show Markers. Merging Door and Window Assembly Cells Use this procedure to merge two door/window assembly cells. NOTE To merge door/window assembly cells, the cell markers need to be visible. For information on turning on cell markers, see "Turning on Cell Markers" on page 913. You can only merge cells that are adjacent to each other. In most cases, you merge cells with the same infill type. The merged cell is then of the same type as the original cells. For example, if you merge two solid panel infills, the resulting merged cell also has a solid panel infill. In some cases however, you might want to merge two cells that have different infill types. In that case, the infill type of the first selected cell is used for the merged cell. For example, if you want to merge a cell with a simple panel infill and a cell with a window infill, and you select the cell with the simple panel first during the merge command, the merged cell contains a simple panel infill, not a window. If you select the two cells in the opposite order, the merged cell contains a window and no simple panel infill. Merging two Door/Window Assembly cells
1 Select the door/window assembly on which you want to merge two cells.
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies | 913
2 Right-click, and click Infill Merge. 3 Select the first cell to be merged. 4 Select the second cell to be merged.
The cells are merged into one.
5 Specify where you want to save the door/window assembly override:
If you want to save the override...
Then...
only on this specific door/window assembly
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the door/window assembly. For information about how to remove an override from a door/window assembly, see "Creating a Division Override" on page 924.
save the override to a door/window assembly style
select the door/window assembly, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
6 If you chose to save the override to a door/window assembly style, select the door/window assembly again, right-click, and click Design Rules Save to Style. Then choose the door/window assembly style in which to save the override.
If you want to...
Then...
save the override to the current door/window assembly style select Transfer Merge Operations to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a cell merge, only the Transfer Merge Operations to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a new cell assignment or a frame or mullion edge override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
save the override to a new door/window assembly style
select Transfer Merge Operations to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new door/window assembly style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a cell merge, only the Transfer Merge Operations to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a new cell assignment or a frame or mullion edge override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides still remain on the door/window assembly, where they can be removed as described in "Creating a Division Override" on page 924, but they are not saved back to a door/window assembly style.
Creating a Door and Window Assembly Infill Override Use this procedure to override the infill of a door/window assembly cell. For example, you might have a row of simple concrete panels in your door/window assembly, but want in one location a round window instead of the concrete panel. In that case, it might be simpler to use an infill override, instead of creating complex door/window assembly definitions.
914 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
NOTE To override an infill assignment, the cell markers must be visible. For information on turning on cell markers, see "Turning on Cell Markers" on page 913.
To exchange an infill definition, the new infill definition must already be defined in the curtain wall style. For information on creating infill definitions, see "Defining Infills for Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 881.
1 Select the door/window assembly on which you want to override an infill. 2 Right-click, and click Infill Override Assignment. 3 Select the marker of the cell(s) where you want to create an override, and press ENTER.
4 Create the override: If you want to... exchange the existing infill for another remove one or more of the frames around the infill
remove the complete infill and its frame
Then...
select a new infill definition from the list.
select the frame component to be removed. You could, for example, override a cell to contain a door infill instead of a panel infill; in this case, you would want to remove the bottom frame of the cell.
select Remove Infill and Frames.
NOTE This works only for infills that border the exterior of the door/window assembly.
5 Click OK. 6 Specify where you want to save the door/window assembly override:
If you want to...
Then...
save the override only on this specific door/window assembly
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the door/window assembly. For information about how to remove an override from a door/window assembly, see "Creating a Division Override" on page 924.
save the override to a door/window assembly style
select the door/window assembly, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies | 915
7 If you have chosen to save the override to a door/window assembly style, select the door/window assembly again, right-click, and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which door/window assembly style you want to save the override.
If you want to...
Then...
save the override to the current door/window assembly style select Transfer Cell Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only an infill override, only the Transfer Cell Overrides to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a frame or mullion edge override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
save the override to a new door/window assembly style
select Transfer Cell Overrides to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new door/window assembly style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only an infill override, only the Transfer Cell Overrides to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a frame or mullion edge override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides remain on the door/window assembly, where they can be removed as described in "Creating a Division Override" on page 924, but they are not saved back to a door/window assembly style.
In-Place Editing of Door and Window Assembly Cells
Use this procedure to edit door/window assembly cells using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit individual cells, bays, columns, or nested grids of the door/window assembly directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the door/window assembly or door/window assembly style.
1 Select a door/window assembly on which you want to edit cells with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the door/window assembly:
If you want to edit ... this instance of the door/window assembly
Then ... right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the door/window assembly style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the door/window assembly.
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter c (Cell) and press ENTER.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
916 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
5 Select the individual cells, bay, column, or nested grid to modify the cell assignment by hovering over a cell or pressing TAB, and press ENTER. Press CTRL to select multiple cells, bays, columns or nested grids.
The Edit Cells worksheet displays.
6 Edit the cell for the selected grid:
If you want to...
Then...
assign an infill to selected cells
select Assign Infill and select an infill definition. Clear Replace Cell and click OK.
replace the selected cells with a new infill
select Assign Infill and select an infill definition. Select Replace Cell and click OK.
create and assign a new infill to the selected
cells
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 895.
divide the selected cells with divisions, infills select Subdivision. or frames
add a division to the subdivided cells
select a division definition.
create and assign a new division to the selected cells
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning a Division to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 894.
select an infill for the subdivided cells
create and assign a new infill to the subdivided cells
select an infill definition.
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Assigning Infills to Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 895.
select a frame definition for the grid created select the frame definition and click OK. after the cell is subdivided
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies | 917
If you want to...
Then...
specify the location of frames on the grid created after the cell is subdivided
select Top, Bottom, Left, Right for Frame Location and click OK.
create and assign a new frame definition for the new grid created after the cell is subdivided
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 903.
select a mullion definition for the grid created select the mullion definition. after the cell is subdivided
create and assign a new mullion definition to the selected grid
click
and specify values on the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 905.
replace the existing cell infill with the options select Replace Cell. selected on this worksheet
continue in-place editing the grid after the select Continue Grid Editing. cell is subdivided
7 Click OK. 8 Press ENTER.
Overriding Door and Window Assembly Frames and Mullions You can change a selected frame edge or mullion edge by using an edge assignment override.
NOTE To exchange a frame edge or mullion edge, the new edge definition must already be defined in the door/window assembly style.
Removing the edge does not affect the width of the cell. To remove the edge and have the adjacent cell resize, create an edge definition with a width and depth of zero. For more information, see "Defining a Door and Window Assembly Frame by Width and Depth" on page 886 or "Defining Door and Window Assembly Mullions by Width and Depth" on page 890.
You can also create a new edge profile by drawing a polyline or using an existing profile in the drawing. This edge profile can be interactively edited onscreen by in-place editing.
Creating a Frame or Mullion Override
Use this procedure to select a different element definition for a selected frame edge or mullion by using an edge assignment override.
To exchange a frame or mullion, the new definition must already be defined in the door/window assembly style. For information on creating frames and mullions, see "Defining Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 886 and "Defining Door and Window Assembly Mullions" on page 890.
Overriding a Door/Window Assembly frame definition
918 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
1 Select the door/window assembly on which you want to override an edge. 2 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Override Assignment. 3 Select the frame or mullion edge you want to override. 4 Create the override:
If you want to...
Then...
exchange the existing edge for another
select a new edge definition from the list.
remove the frame or mullion edge
select Remove.
5 Click OK. 6 Specify where you want to save the door/window assembly override:
If you want to...
Then...
save the override only on this specific door/window assembly
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the door/window assembly. For information about how to remove an override from a door/window assembly, see "Creating a Division Override" on page 924.
save the override to a door/window assembly style
select the door/window assembly, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
7 If you have chosen to save the override to a door/window assembly style, select the door/window assembly again, right-click, and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which door/window assembly style you want to save the override.
If you want to...
Then...
save the override to the current door/window assembly style select Transfer Edge Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a frame or mullion edge override, only the Transfer Edge Overrides to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
save the override to a new door/window assembly style
select Transfer Edge Overrides to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new door/window assembly style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a frame or mullion edge override, only the Transfer Edge Overrides to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a division override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides remain on the door/window assembly, where they can be removed as described in "Creating a Division Override" on page 924, but they are not saved back to a door/window assembly style.
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies | 919
Creating a Frame or Mullion Edge from a Polyline or Profile Using In-Place Editing Use this procedure to assign a profile to a vertical edge of a frame or mullion. The profile can be any profile or any closed polyline that you specify. You can use a profile edge to create a unique corner in situations where a simple miter is not sufficient.
NOTE Adjacent infills are not trimmed or expanded to accommodate the new edge. To adjust the infill, change the width of the frame edge. For more information, see "Defining a Door and Window Assembly Frame by Width and Depth" on page 886.
1 Draw a closed polyline in the location where you want it to display in the door/window assembly.
NOTE For best results, it is recommended to draw the polyline in Plan view.
2 Select the door/window assembly for which you want to create a frame or mullion edge profile override. 3 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Add Profile. 4 Specify the mode in which to edit the door/window assembly:
If you want to edit...
Then...
this instance of the door/window assembly
right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the door/window assembly style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the door/window assembly.
5 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Add Profile. 6 Select a vertical frame or a mullion edge. 7 Select a profile for the override:
If you want to create the edge profile from...
Then...
the polyline drawn in step 1
select Start from scratch for Profile Definition, and enter a name for New Profile Name.
an existing profile in the drawing
select the existing profile for Profile Definition.
8 Select whether to apply the profile to the shared edge element definition or as an edge profile override.
9 Click OK. You are now in in-place edit mode, and can edit the profile. For more information, see "In-Place Editing of Edge Profiles for Door/Window Assemblies" on page 921.
10 On the In-Place Edit toolbar, click
to zoom to the profile.
11 Select the profile and edit it using Edge and Vertex grips, or by using the right-click shortcut menu.
12 Save or discard changes to the door/window assembly grid:
If you want to exit the in-place editing session...
Then...
without saving your changes
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
after saving your changes
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
920 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
In-Place Editing of Edge Profiles for Door/Window Assemblies Use this procedure to edit profile edges using in-place editing. With in-place editing, you can edit the door/window assembly directly and interactively in the drawing area and later save the changes to the profile definition.
1 Select the door/window assembly that has the edge profile you want to edit onscreen with in-place editing. 2 Right-click, and click Frame/Mullion Edit Profile in Place.
This command is only available if you have profile-based edges in the door/window assembly.
NOTE If the profile is not drawn to size, it must be converted in order for you to begin the in-place editing session. Click Yes if prompted to convert the profile to its actual size.
3 Select the edge you want to edit.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the magenta-colored grips and light blue hatch of the temporary in-place editing profile, as well as the faded color of all other objects in the drawing. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
4 Edit the profile: If you want to... use grips to edit the profile
add a vertex to the profile remove a vertex from the profile add a ring to the profile remove a ring from a profile
Then...
move the grips as needed.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Ring. Then, select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for an additional ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press Enter.
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Ring. Then select the ring you want to remove.
NOTE You cannot remove the last ring from a profile.
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies | 921
If you want to... replace a ring on a profile
Then...
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Then, select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for the replaced ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press Enter.
5 Save the changes to the profile:
If you want to...
Then...
change the existing profile definition to reflect the new shape
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
create a new profile definition with the shape you have created
select the profile, right-click, and click Save As New Profile. Then, enter a name for the new profile and click OK. The inplace edit session is exited and the new profile definition is available in the Style Manager.
discard all changes on the profile and revert back to the
previous shape click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
In-Place Editing of Door and Window Assembly Frames and Mullions Use this procedure to edit frames and mullions using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit bays, columns or nested grids of the door/window assembly directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the door/window assembly or door/window assembly style.
1 Select a door/window assembly on which you want to edit frames or mullions with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the door/window assembly:
3 Specify the mode in which to edit the door/window assembly:
If you want to edit ... this instance of the door/window assembly
Then ... right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
the door/window assembly style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the door/window assembly.
4 Click the Edit Grid grip. 5 Enter f (Frame and mullion assignment) and press ENTER.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
6 Select the bay, column or nested grid to modify the frame and mullion assignment and press ENTER. Press CTRL to select multiple bays, columns or nested grids.
922 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
The Modify Frame/Mullion Assignment worksheet displays.
7 Select a frame definition for the selected grid:
If you want to...
Then...
modify the frame of the selected grid
select a frame definition and click OK.
specify the location of the frame on the selected grid
select Top, Bottom, Left, Right for Frame Location and click OK.
create and assign a new frame definition to
the selected grid
click
.
For more information, see "Adding a New Frame Assignment to a Door and Window Assembly Grid" on page 903.
8 Select the mullion definition for the selected grid:
If you want to...
Then...
modify the mullion of the selected grid
select the mullion definition and click OK.
create and assign a new mullion definition to the selected grid
click
and complete the Design Rules worksheet.
For more information, see "Adding a New Mullion Assignment to a Door and Window Assembly Style" on page 905.
9 Press ENTER.
Overriding Door and Window Assembly Divisions The grid of a door/window assembly is made up of one or more divisions that define how the door/window assembly is partitioned. Divisions can be horizontal or vertical, and can be nested in each other. For detailed information on door/window assembly divisions, see "Defining Divisions for Door and Window Assembly Grids" on page 876. You can override a division in a door/window assembly, thereby changing the grid of the door/window assembly.
Overriding a Door/Window Assembly cell division definition
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies | 923
Creating a Division Override Use this procedure to create a division override on a door/window assembly.
NOTE To exchange a door/window assembly division, the new division definition must already be defined in the door/window assembly style. For information on door/window assembly divisions, see "Defining Divisions for Door and Window Assembly Grids" on page 876.
1 Select the door/window assembly for which you want to create a division override. 2 Right-click, and click Division Override Assignment. 3 Select an edge of the door/window assembly to determine if a horizontal or vertical division is overridden.
For example, if you want to override the primary horizontal division, you could select the bottom horizontal frame of the door/window assembly.
TIP The Division Assignment Override dialog box shows you which grid type and which grid division you have selected, e.g. Selected Nested Grid: Secondary Grid, Division Element Definition: Vertical 3 Cells. If you have accidentally selected the wrong division, click Cancel and reselect the correct grid.
4 Select the division to override, and click OK. 5 Specify where you want to save the door/window assembly override:
If you want to save the override...
Then...
only on this specific door/window assembly
no further steps are necessary. The override is saved to the door/window assembly. For information about how to remove an override from a door/window assembly, see "Removing Door and Window Assembly Overrides" on page 926.
to a door/window assembly style
select the door/window assembly, right-click, and select Design Rules Transfer to Object.
6 If you have chosen to save the override to a door/window assembly style, select the door/window assembly again, right-click, and click Design Rules Save to Style and decide to which door/window assembly style you want to save the override.
If you want to...
Then...
save the override to the current door/window assembly style select Transfer Division Overrides to Style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Division Overrides to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a edge override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
save the override to a new door/window assembly style
select Transfer Division Overrides to Style, and click New. Then, enter a name for the new door/window assembly style, and click OK.
NOTE If you have created only a profile edge override, only the Transfer Division Overrides to Style check box is active. If you have also created other overrides, such as a cell merge or a edge override, these check boxes are available as well. If you also want to save these overrides to the style, select their check boxes too.
924 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
NOTE If you do not want to save the override back to a style at all, right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. The overrides remain on the door/window assembly, where they can be removed as described in "Removing Door and Window Assembly Overrides" on page 926, but they are not saved back to a door/window assembly style.
In-Place Editing of Door and Window Assembly Divisions
Use this procedure to edit divisions using in-place editing with the Edit Grid grip. With in-place editing, you can edit the door/window assembly directly and interactively in the drawing area, and later save the changes to the door/window assembly or door/window assembly style. For more information, see "Division of Door and Window Assembly Grids" on page 877.
1 Select a door/window assembly on which you want to edit divisions onscreen with in-place editing.
2 Specify the mode in which to edit the door/window assembly:
If you want to...
Then...
edit this instance of the door/window assembly
right-click, and click Design Rules Transfer to Object.
edit the door/window assembly style
right-click, and click Design Rules Revert to Style Design Rules. If this option is not available, the design rules are already style-based for the door/window assembly.
3 Click the Edit Grid grip. 4 Enter d (Division in place) and press ENTER.
For example, if you want to edit the primary grid, select an edge on the outer door/window assembly frame.
NOTE You have entered the in-place editing session now. You can see this from the faded color of all objects in the drawing, as well as from the different grips at your disposal. Note that while you are in the in-place editing session, you have only limited editing access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
Viewing Edit In Place grips
5 Edit the division: If you want to... add a bay to the grid remove a bay from the grid change the start offset of the grid
change the end offset of the grid
change the spacing of bays
Then... click the Add Bay grip. click the Remove Bay grip. select the Start Offset grip and move it to the appropriate position. select the End Offset grip and move it to the appropriate position. click the Auto Grid Bay Spacing grip and move it to the appropriate position.
Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies | 925
If you want to... manually edit the grid
use a worksheet to edit the cell dimensions
Then...
right-click, and click Convert To Manual. You can manually add and remove gridlines, change the offsets, and change the position of individual gridlines.
click the Set Fixed Cell Dimension Rules command grip, and edit the values in the worksheet.
6 Save or discard changes to the door/window assembly grid:
If you want to...
Then...
exit the in-place editing session without saving your changes
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
exit the in-place editing session after saving your changes
click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar. If you edited the
grid by instance, the changes are saved to the design rules
for the individual grid. If you edited the door/window
assembly style, the Save Changes dialog box is displayed.
7 In the Save Changes dialog box, specify to which division to save the changes:
If you want to...
Then...
save the changes to the style in the current door/window assembly division
verify the current division is selected for Save Changes to Existing Division, and click Save. The changes are made in the style and affect all door/window assemblies of that style in the drawing.
create an override to the style by saving the changes in a new door/window assembly division
click New, enter a name for the new division override, and click OK. Click Save. The changes are saved as an override to the style, and affect only the door/window assemblies to which the override is applied.
Removing Door and Window Assembly Overrides Use this procedure to remove door/window assembly overrides either from the door/window assembly or the door/window assembly style.
1 Select the door/window assembly:
If you want to... remove an override from a door/window assembly
Then...
select the door/window assembly, expand Advanced in the Properties palette, and click Overrides.
remove an override from the door/window assembly style
select the door/window assembly, right-click, and click Edit Door/Window Assembly Style. Then click the Overrides tab.
2 Select an override from the list and click Remove. 3 Click OK.
926 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Modifying Element Definitions for Door and Window Assembly Styles
You can modify element definitions using the Design Rules tab of the Door/Window Assembly Style Properties dialog box. You can access these definitions from the assignments list and from the definitions list:
From the assignments list: Select a grid from the tree view to display the assignments list. Then select an assignment that uses that definition. Make your changes below the assignment list.
From the definitions list: Select an element type from the tree view to display all definitions for that element type. Select a definition and make your changes below the definitions list.
Any changes you make, including changes to the definition name, overwrite the existing definition. To create a new definition from the assignments list, select New from the Element list. To create a new definition from the definitions list, click the New Division icon, the New Infill icon, the New Frame icon, or the New Mullion icon.
Editing Door and Window Assemblies
Most relevant settings for a door/window assembly are defined in the door/window assembly style. These settings include divisions, infills, frames, and mullions. For information on modifying a door/window assembly style, see "Door and Window Assembly Styles" on page 873. You can make other changes directly to individual door/window assemblies, which affect only the door/window assembly you select:
The dimensions of a door/window assembly Interference conditions Cleanup settings Methods of Editing Door and Window Assemblies Autodesk Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing door/window assemblies: You can directly edit door/window assemblies using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. You can directly edit door/window assemblies using the Edit Grid grip for grid divisions, cells, frames, and mullions.
For more information, see "In-Place Editing of Door and Window Assembly Divisions " on page 925, "In-Place Editing of Edge Profiles for Door/Window Assemblies" on page 921, and "Overriding Door and Window Assembly Infills" on page 912. You can change door/window assembly settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected door/window assembly.
Modifying Element Definitions for Door and Window Assembly Styles | 927
For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help.
NOTE For information about changing the elements within a door/window assembly, see "Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies" on page 912. For information about changing the display of the door/window assemblies, see "Specifying the Display of Door and Window Assemblies" on page 908.
Using Grips to Edit Door and Window Assemblies There are many different door/window assembly grips. The grips that appear in your drawing when you select a door/window assembly are dependent upon the design rules of the door/window assembly.
Editing Door/Window Assembly Dimensions Use this procedure to change the dimensions of a door/window assembly.
1 Select the door/window assembly. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
You can modify the dimensions of the base height and width for a door/window assembly.
Viewing Door/Window Assembly Grips
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once, or enter a value.
Changing the Location of a Door/Window Assembly Use this procedure to change the location or the position of a door/window assembly with grips.
1 Select the door/window assembly. 2 Select and hold the Location grip:
If you want to move the door/window assembly... Then...
along the length of the wall
drag the cursor to the new location.
within the width of the wall
press CTRL, and drag the cursor to the new location.
vertically
press CTRL twice, and drag the cursor to the new location.
Changing the Width of a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to change the width of a door/window assembly with grips.
1 Select the door/window assembly. 2 Select the Width grip, move the grip until the width value you want is displayed, and click once.
NOTE As you move the grip, the original width value is displayed in addition to the new width and the difference between the two values.
928 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
Using grips the change the width of a Door/Window Assembly
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a value to be added to or subtracted from the width of the door/window assembly, depending on the direction in which you move the grip. Changing the Height of a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to change the height of a door/window assembly with grips. 1 Select the door/window assembly. 2 Select the Height grip, move the grip until the height value you want is displayed, and click once. NOTE As you move the grip, the original height value is displayed in addition to the new height and the difference between the two values. Using grips to change the height of a Door/Window Assembly
After selecting the grip, you can also enter a value to be added to or subtracted from the height of the door/window assembly, depending on the direction in which you move the grip.
Editing Door and Window Assemblies | 929
Changing the Location Properties of a Door and Window Assembly
Use this procedure to change the location properties of a door/window assembly. Location properties include vertical alignment, head height, sill height, and rotation.
Location Property Vertical alignment
Head height Sill height Rotation
Description Specifies whether to measure the vertical height of the window to the sill or head The head height of the window The sill height of the window Reference angle for the object
1 Double-click the door/window assembly. 2 Expand Location. 3 Change the location properties. 4 Select Additional information to display the Location worksheet, where you can change additional location
properties, such as coordinate system, insertion point, and normal.
Selecting a Different Door and Window Assembly Style Use this procedure to select a different style for a door/window assembly.
1 Double-click the door/window assembly for which you want to change the styles. You can select multiple door/window assemblies and change the style for all at the same time.
2 Expand General. 3 Select a different style.
Matching the Properties of an Existing Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to apply the properties of a door/window assembly tool to one or more existing door/window assemblies. The properties include the door/window assembly style and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a door/window assembly tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Door/Window Assembly. 3 Select the door/window assemblies, and press ENTER.
The properties of the selected door/window assemblies match the properties of the door/window assembly tool.
Changing the Door and Window Assembly Dimensions Use this procedure to change the dimensions of a door/window assembly.
930 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
1 Double-click a door/window assembly. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Change the dimensions:
Dimension Length Height Rise Start Miter
End Miter
Description
The distance from the start point to the end point of the door/window assembly baseline.
The distance from the baseline to the top of the door/window assembly, including any rise.
The distance from the base height to the top of the door/window assembly.
Angle of all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) at the start of the door/window assembly. For more information about miter angles, see "Mitering Door and Window Assemblies" on page 932.
Angle of all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) at the end of the door/window assembly.
Changing the Shape of a Door and Window Assembly
Use this procedure to change the shape of a door/window assembly. There are several predefined shapes for door/window assemblies. You can use any of these shapes or use an AEC profile as the shape. For more information about profiles, see "Creating a Profile for a Door and Window Assembly Frame" on page 887.
1 Select a door/window assembly, right-click, and click Edit Door/Window Assembly Style.
2 Click the Shape tab.
3 Select a shape from the Predefined list or select Use Profile, and select an existing AEC Profile as the shape.
4 Click OK.
Changing the Location of a Freestanding Door and Window Assembly
You can relocate an existing door/window assembly by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The door/window assembly also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the door/window assembly are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the door/window assembly by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the door/window assembly on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For more information about the world coordinate system, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the door/window assembly. 2 Expand Location. 3 Click Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the door/window assembly:
If you want to... relocate the door/window assembly locate the door/window assembly on the XY plane
Then...
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
make the normal of the door/window assembly parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
Editing Door and Window Assemblies | 931
If you want to... locate the door/window assembly on the YZ plane
locate the door/window assembly on the XZ plane
change the rotation of the door/window assembly
Then...
make the normal of the door/window assembly parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the door/window assembly parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Adding an Interference Condition to a Door and Window Assembly
Use this procedure to add an interference condition to a door/window assembly. Interference conditions use the geometry of 3D objects to create custom openings or cutouts in door/window assemblies. You can specify how the interference condition is applied to the door/window assembly: added to the door/window assembly, subtracted from the door/window assembly, or ignored.
1 Place the object in the location where you want to specify the interference condition.
2 Select the door/window assembly to which you want to add an interference condition, right-click, and click Interference Add.
3 Select the object intersecting the door/window assembly, and press ENTER.
4 Specify to which door/window assembly component the interference should be added:
If you want to add the interference condition... to the infill
Then... enter y (Yes) when prompted for the infill component.
to the frame
enter y (Yes) when prompted for the frame component.
to the mullion
enter y (Yes) when prompted for the mullion component.
5 Press ENTER.
Removing an Interference Condition from a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to remove an object, such as a mass element, from a door/window assembly that the object was added to as an interference condition.
1 Select the door/window assembly from which you want to remove an interference object, right-click, and click Interference Remove.
2 Select the object intersecting the door/window assembly, and press ENTER.
Mitering Door and Window Assemblies Use this procedure to miter the corners where door/window assemblies meet. The corner where adjacent door/window assemblies meet is not mitered by default. However, you can automatically determine the necessary angles. The miter angle applies to all infills and horizontal edges (frame or mullion) that are adjacent to the corner. Vertical edges are not affected.
TIP If you want to create a custom corner condition between two door/window assemblies, you can replace the edge of one door/window assembly with an AEC profile and remove the edge of the other door/window assembly by using the frame override Remove Edge option. For more information, see "Overriding Door and Window Assembly Frames and Mullions" on page 918 and "Defining Door and Window Assembly Frames" on page 886.
1 Select one of the door/window assemblies, right-click, and click Set Miter Angles. 2 Select the other door/window assembly.
932 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
If you change the angle of either door/window assembly, use Set Miter Angles again to recalculate the angles.
Specifying a Miter Angle for a Door and Window Assembly Adjacent to Another Object Use this procedure to manually create a mitered corner between a door/window assembly and another object, such as a standard wall or a mass element. For example, if your door/window assembly connects with a standard wall that is at a 60-degree angle from the door/window assembly, you would set the miter angle to 30.
The miter angle is applied to all infills and horizontal edges that are adjacent to the corner. Vertical edges are not affected.
1 Double-click the door/window assembly.
2 Expand Dimensions.
3 Miter the door/window assembly on the start or the end point:
If you want to miter the door/window assembly... Then...
at its start point
enter an angle for Start Miter, and press ENTER.
at its end point
enter an angle for End Miter, and press ENTER.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a door/window assembly. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a door/window assembly.
1 Double-click the door/window assembly. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information about adding hyperlinks, "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the text. 5 Click OK. 6 To attach a reference file, click under Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click the description. Enter the new text, and press ENTER.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
7 Click OK twice.
Editing Objects Anchored in Door and Window Assemblies
When you fill a door/window assembly cell with an infill that contains an object, such as a door or window, you can edit that object independently from the door/window assembly. For example, you can select a door from a door/window assembly and edit its properties. You can edit the anchor settings for the door to change the orientation of the door and the alignment or offset of the door in relation to the door/window assembly.
You can also move objects from one cell to another or release the object anchor so that the object moves independently of the door/window assembly.
Editing Objects Anchored in Door and Window Assemblies | 933
When you move or release an object or edit its properties, you are creating a variation from the infill cell assignment for the door/window assembly style. By default, these variations (except release) are allowed to persist in the drawing when you reapply the style to a door/window assembly. However, if you want these variations to be overridden when you reapply a door/window assembly style, turn off the Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition option on the Anchor worksheet of the object's Properties palette. This option is set on a per object basis. Changing the Orientation of an Object Anchored in a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to change the orientation of an object anchored in a door/window assembly using grips.
1 Click the object in the door/window assembly for which you want to change the orientation. 2 Click the appropriate Flip grip to change the X or Y direction of the object.
You can also change the orientation of an object, including the Z direction, using the Anchor worksheet found on the object's Properties palette.
Changing the Alignment of an Object Anchored in a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to modify the alignment of an object that is anchored in a door/window assembly.
1 Double-click the object in the door/window assembly. 2 Expand Location, and click Anchor. 3 Click Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition. 4 Select a new alignment for the object.
For more information, see "Specifying an Alignment for a Door and Window Assembly Infill" on page 884.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Offset of an Object Anchored in a Door and Window Assembly Use this procedure to change the offset of an object anchored in a door/window assembly.
1 Double-click the object in the door/window assembly. 2 Expand Location, and click Anchor. 3 Click Allow Variation from Infill Element Definition. 4 Specify a new offset for the object.
For more information, see "Specifying an Offset for a Door and Window Assembly Infill" on page 884.
5 Click OK.
Swapping Two Objects Anchored in a Door and Window Assembly When you fill a door/window assembly cell with an object, such as a door or window, you can swap that object with another object in the door/window assembly.
1 Select one of the objects from the door/window assembly and click Infill Anchor Swap Objects. 2 Select the object you want to swap with.
Releasing an Object Anchored in a Door and Window Assembly When you fill a door/window assembly cell with an object, such as a door or window, that object is anchored to the door/window assembly. While the anchor is in place, the object moves when you move the door/window assembly and is removed when you erase the door/window assembly. If you want to move or erase an object independently from the door/window assembly, you can release the anchor.
NOTE You can also move or erase the object by changing the element definition for the cell that contains the object. For more information, see "Defining Infills for Door and Window Assembly Cells" on page 881.
Select one of the objects from the door/window assembly and click Infill Anchor Release.
934 | Chapter 19 Door and Window Assemblies
AEC Polygons
20
An AEC Polygon is a two-dimensional (2D) area object that can be used as infill for structures such as curtain walls and layout grids. You can use a True Color display representation to assign a solid fill to the edges and interiors of AEC Polygons, making these objects useful for conceptual rendering.
935
AEC Polygons
An AEC Polygon is a two-dimensional (2D) area object that can be used as infill for structures such as curtain walls and layout grids. You can use a True Color display representation to assign a solid fill to the edges and interiors of AEC Polygons, making these objects useful for conceptual rendering. AEC Polygons and Curtain Walls Curtain walls provide a framework for inserting objects such as panels, windows, and doors. You can use curtain walls to model structures such as the following:
Large scale curtain walls Storefronts with components Assemblies of custom-shaped doors and windows In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, a curtain wall object consists of one or more grids. Each grid contains cells that can be filled by a panel, or by an object such as a window or door. AEC Polygons are ideally suited to create panel infills for curtain walls. Curtain wall with AEC Polygon infill assignment
A curtain wall can include curtain wall units. Curtain wall units are similar to curtain walls except that their grid cells can contain only panel infills, and not objects. Curtain wall units are designed to represent complex elements that are repeated within the main curtain wall. You can use AEC Polygons to fill the grids in a curtain wall unit. Paving and Tiling Patterns You can use AEC Polygons to create intricate paving and tiling patterns in a drawing. Using the join, subtract, trim, and split functions of AEC Polygons, and by creating AEC Polygons from profiles and polylines, you can create complex and irregular polygon outlines. By adding edges and hatch patterns to the AEC Polygons, you can display a realistic tiling and paving look. AEC Polygon Style Components You can use AEC Polygon styles to define the look and edge widths of a polygon. You can use the edges to display framing components of infill panels, or to represent a shadow. Framing components can have different dimensions, casting shadows with different widths along the edges. When you render the curtain wall, you can depict different sun angles with different edge widths. AEC Polygon components
936 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Polylines and Profiles Using straight line segments, you can create a freehand AEC Polygon by drawing a closed contour of the object.
Creating an AEC Polygon
To define complex and curved shapes, either convert an existing polyline into an AEC Polygon or use a profile definition as the source of the AEC Polygon. Converting a polyline to an AEC Polygon
Converting a complex polyline to an AEC Polygon
True Color Display AEC Polygons have a True Color display representation. When you attach AEC Polygons as infill panels to curtain walls, you can use the True Color display representation to create a conceptual rendering of the curtain wall.
Using AEC Polygon Tools to Create AEC Polygons
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place AEC Polygons by selecting an AEC Polygon tool with a specific AEC Polygon style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with all of its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use AEC Polygon tools to create new AEC Polygons by applying tool properties to existing closed polylines. An AEC Polygon tool is included in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog supplied with the Content Browser. For information about using the Content Browser, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78. Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain AEC Polygon tools with styles and properties customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to create a new AEC Polygon.
Using AEC Polygon Tools to Create AEC Polygons | 937
You create an AEC Polygon from straight line segments. The AEC Polygon must have a minimum of three sides and must not intersect itself. The style that you select controls the width and the justification of the AEC Polygon edges. The justification determines whether the edges are displayed inside, outside, or centered on the AEC Polygon vertices.
1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool, and select the tool. To use the AEC Polygon tool supplied in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog, open the Content Browser and navigate to Helper Tools in the Stock Tool catalog; then drag the AEC Polygon to the drawing area. For more information on using a catalog tool, see "Using a Tool in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace" on page 99.
2 Specify the start point of the AEC Polygon. 3 Specify further points to define the AEC Polygon.
NOTE You must specify enough points to create at least three sides for the AEC Polygon.
4 Enter c (Close) to close the AEC Polygon. Creating an AEC Polygon
Creating an AEC Polygon with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create an AEC Polygon with settings that you specify. 1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool, and select the tool. To use the AEC Polygon tool supplied in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog, open the Content Browser and navigate to Helper Tools in the Stock Tool catalog; then drag the AEC Polygon to the drawing area. For more information on using a catalog tool, see "Using a Tool in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Workspace" on page 99. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Specify the start point of the AEC Polygon. 4 Specify further points to define the AEC Polygon.
NOTE You must specify enough points to create at least three sides for the AEC Polygon.
5 Enter c (Close) to close the AEC Polygon.
Creating an AEC Polygon from a Polyline
Use this procedure to create an AEC Polygon from a closed polyline in a drawing. When you create an AEC Polygon by converting a closed polyline in your drawing, the object that you convert can be created from a combination of line and arc segments. The polyline must have a minimum of three sides and must not intersect itself. After you convert the polyline to an AEC Polygon, the width and justification of the AEC Polygon edges are set by the style that you select for the AEC Polygon.
1 Draw a polyline in your drawing. 2 Open a palette containing an AEC Polygon tool, right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties
to Closed Polyline.
938 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
3 Select the polyline that you created in step 1, and press ENTER. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline after creating the AEC Polygon, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the
drawing. 5 Press ENTER.
Converting a polyline to an AEC Polygon
Creating an AEC Polygon from a Profile
Use this procedure to create an AEC Polygon from a profile definition in a drawing. The profile definition that you convert can be created from a combination of line and arc segments. The profile definition must have a minimum of three sides and must not intersect itself. After you create an AEC Polygon from the profile definition, the width and justification of the AEC Polygon edges are set by the style that you select for the AEC Polygon. For additional information, see "In-Place Editing of Profile-Based Objects and Components" on page 65.
1 At the Command prompt, enter aecpolygon. 2 Enter c (Convert) and press ENTER. 3 Enter pr (Profile) and press ENTER. 4 Select the desired profile definition and click OK. 5 Select the insertion point for the new AEC Polygon. 6 Press ENTER.
Converting a profile to an AEC Polygon
Creating an AEC Polygon Tool
Use this procedure to create an AEC Polygon tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own AEC Polygon tools if you are placing multiple AEC Polygons of specific styles that have the same properties. You can use any of the following methods to create an AEC Polygon tool:
Drag an AEC Polygon with the desired properties to a tool palette. Drag an AEC Polygon style from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new
tool. Copy an existing AEC Polygon tool, and then customize the properties of the new tool. Drag an AEC Polygon tool from a tool catalog in the Content Browser to a tool palette, and then customize the
properties of the tool.
Creating an AEC Polygon from a Profile | 939
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from an AEC Polygon in the drawing
select the AEC Polygon and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from an AEC Polygon style in the Style Manager on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy under Multi-Purpose Objects, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current palette
right-click the tool, click Copy, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the tool catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
This description is used as the tool's tooltip on the tool palette, and to describe the tool if it is stored in a tool catalog.
6 Expand Basic and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the AEC Polygon that you can create using this AEC Polygon tool. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides, if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select an AEC Polygon style. 10 For Style location, select the drawing file containing the style used for this AEC Polygon, or select Browse
and use a standard file selection dialog box to select the file. 11 Click OK.
Editing AEC Polygons
You can change the location of an AEC Polygon, adjust the width and justification of its edges, and change how it is displayed in your drawing. You can also redefine the geometry of an AEC Polygon or define how AEC Polygons interact with each other. You can join two AEC Polygons, create a hole in an AEC Polygon by subtracting the area of another one, create an AEC Polygon from the intersection of two others, divide or trim an AEC Polygon, and add or remove its vertices. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing AEC Polygons:
You can directly edit AEC Polygons using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter
a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. You can change AEC Polygon settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected AEC Polygon.
Using Grips to Edit AEC Polygons
Use this procedure to change the shape and size of an AEC Polygon in your current drawing by using grips.
940 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Changing the edge of an AEC Polygon 1 Select the AEC Polygon you want to change. 2 Select an Edge grip.
Viewing the AEC Polygon Edge grip tooltip
The Edge grip has four edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, Convert to Arc, and Offset All. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the AEC Polygon and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary. Offsetting the edge of an AEC Polygon using its Edge grip
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Using Grips to Edit AEC Polygons | 941
Adding a vertex to the edge of an AEC Polygon using its Edge grip
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc. Converting the edge of an AEC Polygon to an arc using its Edge grip
Offset All moves all edges of an AEC Polygon at an identical distance. When you drag one edge, all other edges are repositioned accordingly. This option is very useful for regular resizing operations, like scaling an AEC Polygon.
942 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Offsetting all the edges of an AEC Polygon using its Edge grip
3 Specify the new edge location: If you want to... offset the edge add a vertex and create an edge
change the selected edge to an arc
offset all edges at an identical distance
Then...
move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
press CTRL twice to switch to the Convert to Arc edit mode. Stretch the midpoint to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
press CTRL three times to switch to the Offset All edit mode. Move the selected edge to the desired location for all edges and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
You can press CTRL to toggle among the edit modes. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the vertex of an AEC Polygon 1 Select an existing AEC Polygon. 2 Select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to change.
Using Grips to Edit AEC Polygons | 943
Viewing the AEC Polygon Vertex grip tooltip The Vertex grip has three edit modes:
Move: This is the default mode. Use this mode to move the selected vertex in any direction. The neighboring segments are stretched, as necessary. Moving the vertex of an AEC Polygon using its Vertex grip
Remove: Use this mode to remove a vertex. The neighboring segments are replaced with a line.
944 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Removing the vertex of an AEC Polygon using its Vertex grip
Offset Edges: Use this edit mode to move a vertex and the adjacent edges of the AEC Polygon with it. Offsetting the edges of an AEC Polygon using its Vertex grip
3 Edit the vertex as necessary: If you want to... move the vertex
remove the vertex
Then... move the vertex to the desired location and click; or enter a value, and press ENTER. press CTRL to switch to the Remove Vertex edit mode, and click to confirm the removal.
Using Grips to Edit AEC Polygons | 945
If you want to... move the vertex and the adjacent edges
Then...
press CTRL twice to switch to the Offset Edges edit mode. Move the vertex to the desired location, and click; or enter a value, and press ENTER.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the AEC Polygon Style
Use this procedure to change the style of one or more AEC Polygons. The style controls the width and justification of the AEC Polygon edges. The justification determines whether the edges are displayed inside, outside, or centered on the vertices of the AEC Polygon. The style can also control the display properties of the AEC Polygon.
1 Double-click the AEC Polygon you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select an AEC Polygon style.
Merging Two AEC Polygons
Use this procedure to merge two or more AEC Polygons in a drawing. When you merge two AEC Polygons that overlap each other, their common boundary is combined to form the boundary of the merged AEC Polygon.
NOTE When you merge one AEC Polygon with another, the properties of the merged AEC Polygon are identical to the properties of the first selected AEC Polygon.
1 Create two overlapping AEC Polygons. For more information, see "Creating an AEC Polygon" on page 937. 2 Select one of the AEC Polygons to be merged, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Merge. 3 Select the AEC Polygon to merge with the first AEC Polygon.
NOTE You can merge only those AEC Polygons that lie on the same Z-plane. Two AEC Polygons with different Z-positions in the same coordinate system cannot be merged.
4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the second AEC Polygon, or n (No) to leave the AEC Polygon in the drawing. Merging two overlapping AEC Polygons
Creating a Hole in an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to subtract AEC Polygons from one another in order to create a hole in an AEC Polygon. This would be useful, for example, for creating a complex pattern for a curtain wall infill.
946 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Subtracting an AEC Polygon from an AEC Polygon
To perform a subtraction operation, you need to select AEC Polygons that intersect one another. You can choose whether to keep the subtracted AEC Polygon in the drawing as a separate unit. For example, you may want to keep the AEC Polygon if you need to subtract the same shape from other AEC Polygons.
1 Create an AEC Polygon from which to subtract a hole. For more information, see "Creating an AEC Polygon" on page 937.
2 Create a second, smaller AEC Polygon to represent the area to be subtracted from the larger AEC Polygon. You can draw the second AEC Polygon within or overlapping the area of the first AEC Polygon, or you can draw it in another location and then move it onto the larger AEC Polygon.
3 Select the larger AEC Polygon, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Subtract. 4 Select the smaller AEC Polygon to subtract from the larger AEC Polygon. 5 Enter y (Yes) to erase the subtracted AEC Polygon, or n (No) to leave the AEC Polygon in the drawing.
Creating AEC Polygons from the Intersection of Other AEC Polygons
Use this procedure to create a new AEC Polygon from the overlapping portion of two intersecting AEC Polygons. You can choose whether to retain the original geometry after creating the new intersection AEC Polygon. Intersecting AEC Polygons with original geometry erased
Intersecting AEC Polygons with original geometry retained
1 Create two overlapping AEC Polygons. For more information, see "Creating an AEC Polygon" on page 937.
Creating AEC Polygons from the Intersection of Other AEC Polygons | 947
2 Select the first overlapping AEC Polygon, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Crop. 3 Select the second overlapping AEC Polygon. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the original AEC Polygons, or n (No) to leave the AEC Polygons in the drawing.
Trimming an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to trim a side from an AEC Polygon by defining a trim line through an existing AEC Polygon. Trimming an AEC Polygon
1 Select the AEC Polygon to be trimmed, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Trim. 2 Specify a start point for the trim line. This line cuts through the AEC Polygon, creating the area to trim
and the area to retain. 3 Specify an endpoint for the trim line. 4 Select the side of the AEC Polygon to be trimmed.
Dividing an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to divide an AEC Polygon into two separate AEC Polygons by defining a division line through it. Dividing an AEC Polygon
1 Select the AEC Polygon to be divided, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Divide. 2 Specify a start point for the division line.
NOTE You can specify only a start point and endpoint for your division line. You cannot specify additional points. 3 Specify an endpoint for the division line. The AEC Polygon is divided by the line that you defined.
948 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Adding a Vertex to an AEC Polygon
You can add a vertex to an existing AEC Polygon to change its shape. A vertex is the location where the edges of the AEC Polygon meet. Adding a vertex to an AEC Polygon
1 Select the AEC Polygon for which to add a vertex, right-click, and click Vertex Add. 2 Select the point in your drawing to add the new vertex.
Line segments are drawn from the two existing vertices of the AEC Polygon closest to the point that you selected to form the new vertex. 3 Press ENTER.
Removing a Vertex from an AEC Polygon
You can remove a vertex from an existing AEC Polygon to change its shape. Removing a vertex from an AEC Polygon
1 Select the AEC Polygon from which to remove a vertex, right-click, and click Vertex Remove. 2 Select the vertex you want to remove. 3 Press ENTER.
Converting an AEC Polygon to a Polyline
Use this procedure to convert an existing AEC Polygon to a polyline. When you create a polyline from an AEC Polygon that contains a hole, each ring of the AEC Polygon is converted into an individual polyline.
1 Select the AEC Polygon from which to create a polyline, right click and click Convert To Polyline. 2 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it.
Converting an AEC Polygon to a Profile
Use this procedure to convert an existing AEC Polygon to a profile definition. You can create a new profile definition or overwrite an existing profile definition. Then, use the profile definition you create with objects that are profile based or have profile-based components, such as the soffit of a roof slab. For detailed information, see the sections for the individual objects.
Adding a Vertex to an AEC Polygon | 949
1 Select the AEC Polygon from which to create a profile definition, right click and click Convert To Profile. 2 Specify the insertion point of the resulting profile, or press ENTER to use the centroid as the insertion point. 3 Enter n (New) to create a new profile definition, or e (Existing) to replace an existing profile. 4 Enter a name for the new profile definition, or select from the existing profile definitions on the Profile
Definitions worksheet and click OK. Profile Definitions worksheet
The existing profile definition you select is replaced by the one you are creating from an AEC Polygon.
Changing the Rotation of an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to change the rotation of an AEC Polygon. 1 Double-click the AEC Polygon whose rotation you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Enter a value for Rotation.
Changing the Elevation of an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to change the elevation of an AEC Polygon. 1 Double-click the AEC Polygon for which to change the elevation. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Enter a value for Elevation.
Changing the Location of an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to relocate an AEC Polygon by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. You can also move an AEC Polygon by cutting and pasting it. AEC Polygons are oriented with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of an AEC Polygon are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the AEC Polygon by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the AEC Polygon on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the AEC Polygon you want to move. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Location. 3 Click Additional information.
950 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
4 Specify the location of the AEC Polygon: If you want to... relocate the AEC Polygon locate the AEC Polygon on the XY plane
locate the AEC Polygon on the YZ plane
locate the AEC Polygon on the XZ plane
change the rotation of the AEC Polygon
Then...
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
make the normal of the AEC Polygon parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
make the normal of the AEC Polygon parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the AEC Polygon parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to an AEC Polygon
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, enter notes, or attach reference files to an AEC Polygon. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from an AEC Polygon.
1 Double-click the AEC Polygon to which to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 To add a hyperlink, click next to Hyperlink, and specify the link. For more information about adding hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks in a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add or edit a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference file, click following: If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
to Reference documents, and then do any of the Then...
click
, select a file, and click Open.
enter text under Description.
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
select the file name, and click
.
6 Click OK.
AEC Polygon Styles
An AEC Polygon style is a group of properties that determines the appearance and other characteristics of AEC Polygons. AEC Polygon styles control the following parameters:
default dimensions, including edge width and justification default display properties for the interior and edges of the AEC Polygon
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to an AEC Polygon | 951
The display properties of an AEC Polygon allow you to hatch its interior and edges, or fill its edges and interior with a solid color fill.
masking capability
Creating Tools from AEC Polygon Styles
You can create an AEC Polygon tool from any AEC Polygon style. You can drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify default settings for any AEC Polygon created with that tool. For more information, see "Using AEC Polygon Tools to Create AEC Polygons" on page 937.
Managing AEC Polygon Styles
To create, copy, or edit styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating an AEC Polygon Style
Use this procedure to create an AEC Polygon style. You can create a new style using default style properties, or by copying an existing style. After you create a style, you edit its properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand AEC Polygon Styles.
3 Create an AEC Polygon style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a style with default properties
right-click AEC Polygon Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the AEC Polygon style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 To rename the new AEC Polygon style, right-click the style, and click Rename. 5 Enter a name for the new AEC Polygon style, and press ENTER. 6 Edit the style properties of the new AEC Polygon style:
If you want to... change the edge width and edge alignment
Then...
see "Changing the Width and Justification of the AEC Polygon Edges" on page 953.
add an AEC Polygon as a background mask
see "Masking Underlying Objects with AEC Polygons" on page 953.
change the Layer/Color/Linetype properties
see "Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of an AEC Polygon Style" on page 955.
change the AEC Polygon interior and exterior hatching
see "Specifying the Hatching of an AEC Polygon Style" on page 955.
change the colors of the True Color display representation
see "Setting the Colors of the True Color Display Representation" on page 956.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Polygon Style" on page 956.
add classifications to an AEC Polygon style
see "Adding Classifications to an AEC Polygon Style" on page 957.
7 If you want to create an AEC Polygon tool from the new style, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette.
952 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating an AEC Polygon Tool" on page 939.
8 Click OK.
Changing the Width and Justification of the AEC Polygon Edges
Use this procedure to change the width and justification of the edges of an AEC Polygon in the AEC Polygon style. The justification determines whether the edges are displayed inside, outside, or centered on the vertices of the AEC Polygon.
Justifying AEC Polygon edges
1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool. 2 Right-click an AEC Polygon tool, and click AEC Polygon Styles. 3 Select the AEC Polygon style. 4 Click the Dimensions tab. 5 To change the width of the AEC Polygon edges, enter a new value for Edge Width. 6 Change the justification of the AEC Polygon edges as desired:
If you want to...
Then ...
display the edges inside the AEC Polygon vertices
select In for Justify.
display the edges centered within the vertices of the AEC Polygon
select Center for Justify.
display the edges outside the AEC Polygon vertices
select Out for Justify.
7 Click OK.
Masking Underlying Objects with AEC Polygons
Use this procedure to change an AEC Polygon style to mask a background. This style property also determines if masking break marks display correctly in your drawings. For more information about working with break marks, see "The Basic Annotation Tool" on page 1850.
1 Select an AEC Polygon, right-click and click Edit AEC Polygon Style. 2 Click the Other tab. 3 Select Use Background Mask. 4 Click OK.
All AEC Polygons of this style use a background mask in the current drawing.
Specifying the Display Properties of an AEC Polygon Style
In most cases, you want the appearance of AEC Polygons that belong to the same style to be consistent throughout a drawing. To achieve this, you specify the display properties of the AEC Polygons in each AEC Polygon style:
The layer, color, and linetype of AEC Polygon components
Changing the Width and Justification of the AEC Polygon Edges | 953
The hatching used for the components of the AEC Polygon AEC Polygon components
Display components in Model view Component Interior Edge Exterior Edge Interior Hatch Edge Hatch Interior Fill
Edge fill
954 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Description
Inner edge of the AEC Polygon.
NOTE When the edge dimensions are set to 0, the interior edge is the only edge of the AEC Polygon.
Outer edge of the AEC Polygon.
NOTE When the edge dimensions are set to 0, the exterior edge is not displayed in the AEC Polygon.
Hatch component of the inner part of the AEC Polygon.
NOTE When the edge dimensions are set to 0, the interior hatch is the only hatch of the AEC Polygon.
Hatch component of the outer part of the AEC Polygon.
NOTE When the edge dimensions are set to 0, the edge hatch is not displayed in the AEC Polygon.
The fill component of the inner part of the AEC Polygon. This component is displayed only in rendered views. Make sure that for each rendered view you use either the Interior Fill and Edge Fill components of the Model display representation or the Interior Fill and Edge Fill components of the True Color display representation. If you use both display representations simultaneously, the fills are drawn on top of each other. For detailed information, see "Setting the Colors of the True Color Display Representation" on page 956.
The fill component of the outer part of the AEC Polygon. This component is displayed only in rendered views. Make sure that for each rendered view you use either the Interior Fill and Edge Fill components of the Model display representation or the Interior Fill and Edge Fill components of the True Color display representation. If you use both display representations simultaneously, the fills are drawn on top of each other. For detailed information, see "Setting the Colors of the True Color Display Representation" on page 956.
NOTE When the edge dimensions have been set to 0, the edge fill is not displayed in a rendered AEC Polygon.
Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of an AEC Polygon Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties of an AEC Polygon style:
Visibility (component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype Scale Plot Style
Materials cannot be assigned to AEC Polygons. 1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool. 2 Right-click an AEC Polygon tool, and click AEC Polygon Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the Model display representation, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching of an AEC Polygon Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of an AEC Polygon style.
1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool. 2 Right-click an AEC Polygon tool, and click AEC Polygon Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which changes should appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching pattern:
If you want to... select a hatching pattern that is available in the software select a custom pattern
select single hatching select double hatching select solid fill
Then... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select Solid Fill for Type.
Specifying the Display Properties of an AEC Polygon Style | 955
TIP Mask blocks do not hide the True Color representation of AEC Polygons, but you can use hatching to work around this. Use the Model representation of the AEC Polygon, set the hatch to Solid, and select the appropriate True Color for the hatch.
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
Then...
orient the hatching to the AEC Polygon, regardless of the object's rotation
select object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select global.
14 Click OK twice.
Setting the Colors of the True Color Display Representation
Use this procedure to set the colors of the AEC Polygon with True Color display representations. Use True Color display representation for high-resolution renderings.
NOTE Make sure that you do not use the True Color display representation and the Model display representation of an AEC Polygon simultaneously in one view. The Interior Fill and Edge Fill components of the Model display representation would be drawn on top of the Interior Fill and Edge Fill components of the True Color display representation. It is recommended that you create separate views for regular viewing and True Color renderings.
1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool. 2 Right-click an AEC Polygon tool, and click AEC Polygon Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the True Color display representation, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Specify the fill properties:
If you want... a True Color fill for the outer part of the AEC Polygon
a True Color fill for the inner part of the AEC Polygon
Then...
select Edge Fill, and select a color for Edge Color, or click Other to choose a different color.
select Interior Fill, and select a color for Interior Color, or click Other to choose a different color.
NOTE If the edge dimensions of the AEC Polygon are set to 0, the edge fill is not displayed.
8 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Polygon Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to an AEC Polygon style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from an AEC Polygon style.
1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool. 2 Right-click an AEC Polygon tool, and click AEC Polygon Styles.
956 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the AEC Polygon, enter it under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add or edit a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 To attach, edit, or detach a reference file, click the Reference Docs tab:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click open. Click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
change the reference file
double-click the reference file to start its application. Close the application when you are finished editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK twice.
Adding Classifications to an AEC Polygon Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to an AEC Polygon style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette containing an AEC Polygon tool. 2 Right-click an AEC Polygon tool, and click AEC Polygon Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to AEC Polygon styles.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want applied to the current AEC Polygon style.
6 Click OK.
Rendering the Exact Colors of an AEC Polygon by Defeating Lighting and Shading Effects
The procedures in this topic allow you to display the exact colors of an AEC Polygon on screen after you render it, without lighting or shading effects.
Changing the 3D Graphics System Display Properties
Use this procedure to change the 3D graphics system display properties of the drawing. 1 On the Format menu, click Options. 2 Click the System tab. 3 Under Current 3D Graphics Display, click Properties. 4 Select Render Options. 5 Select Enable Lights. 6 Click Apply & Close. 7 Click OK.
Adding Classifications to an AEC Polygon Style | 957
Changing the Ambient Light Intensity
Use this procedure to change the ambient light intensity and create a new distant light. 1 At the Command prompt, enter light. 2 In the Lights dialog box, under Ambient Light, enter 1.0 for Intensity. 3 Select Distant Light from the list of lights (next to the New button). 4 Click New. 5 Enter a name for the new light. 6 Enter 0.0 for Intensity. 7 Under Color, set Red, Green, and Blue to 0.0. 8 Click OK. 9 Delete any lights other than the new distant light. To delete a light, select it from the Lights list, and click Delete.
10 Click OK.
Modifying the Global Rendering Material
Use this procedure to modify the global rendering material. 1 At the Command prompt, enter rmat. 2 In the Materials dialog box, under Materials, select *Global*, and click Modify. 3 In the Modify Standard Material dialog box, select Color/Pattern, and enter 1.0 for Value. 4 Select Ambient, and enter 1.0 for Value. 5 Select Reflection, and enter 1.0 for Value. 6 Click OK twice.
Now the RENDER and SHADEMODE settings match. When you render an AEC Polygon (or any other object), the AEC Polygon renders in the original object colors, without shading or lighting effects.
958 | Chapter 20 AEC Polygons
Doors
21
A door is an AEC object that interacts with walls and door and window assemblies. You can also create freestanding doors for door-type drawings.
959
Doors
A door is an AEC object that interacts with walls and door and window assemblies. You can also create freestanding doors for door-type drawings.
Creating Doors
You can create doors using the typical design parameters for style, standard size, width and height, threshold height, and head height. You can choose styles with glass shapes that receive standard muntins patterns, and create your own custom glass shapes from profiles.
Door Styles
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides ready-to-use door styles. The design rules of a door style determine the default dimensions of doors and the door shape and type
The door shape determines the geometry of the door panel, such as rectangular, half-round, and arch. You can also create custom door shapes from profiles.
The door type determines the number of panels and the method of opening the door, such as single, double, bifold, pocket, revolving, and overhead.
You can define standard sizes in a door style and then select the size you want to use when you place the door in a drawing.
Anchoring Doors
After a door is placed in a wall or door and window assembly, the door is constrained to the object and cannot move outside it. Doors can also be anchored to specific locations in walls or door and window assemblies, so that when the wall or door and window assembly moves or changes size, the location of the door in that object remains constant.
Door Dimensions
Some door dimensions depend on the shape and type specified in the door style. Rise is the height from the top of the rectangular portion of a door to the peak of the door opening for Gothic, Arch, and Peak Pentagon door shapes. Leaf specifies the door size for pairs of Uneven, Uneven-Dhung, and Uneven Opposing door types. For more information about leaf, see "Changing the Door Leaf" on page 972.
Vertical Alignment of Doors
You use vertical alignment settings to control the placement of the door in the wall, the location of the working point vertically in the wall, and how the door responds to modifications in height. To determine the working point on the door, use the threshold and head height settings. You can place the working point at the sill or at the head. For example, if you specify the vertical alignment as 0'' and the door height as 7'0'', the door opening height is 7'0''. If you next specify the height of the door as 6'8'', the door threshold remains at 0'' and the door opening height becomes 6'8''. For the door head working point, if you specify the vertical alignment as 7'0'' and the door height as 7'0'', the door opening height is 70''. If you specify the door height as 6'8'', the door head remains at 7'0'' and the door threshold becomes 4''.
Materials in Doors
You can assign materials to a door. Materials are displayed in wireframe and working shade views, or when linked in VIZ® Render. Materials have specific settings for individual components of a door, such as the panel, the stop, the frame, or a glass inset.
960 | Chapter 21 Doors
Doors in 2D wireframe and rendered views
Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for common design purposes, which contain settings for doors. You can use the predefined materials "as is," or modify them for your special designs. You can also create your own materials. Styles provided with the software have appropriate materials already assigned to them. For more information, see "About Door Display Components and Materials" on page 987.
Using Door Tools to Create Doors
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place doors by selecting a door tool with a specific door style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with all of its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use door tools to create new doors by applying tool properties to existing door/window assemblies, openings, and windows. Tool palette containing door tools
The following palettes contain one or more door tools:
Palette Design Doors Custom tool palettes created by your CAD manager
Tools
Contains a door tool for the Standard door style and default settings for other door properties
Contains door tools for sample door styles, with default properties appropriate for each door style
Contain door tools with styles and properties customized for your projects or office standards
Door tools are also included in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog supplied with the Content Browser. For information about using the Content Browser, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
You can use the default settings of a door tool, or you can change settings for any door properties that are not controlled by the style.
Using Door Tools to Create Doors | 961
Creating a Door
Use this procedure to add a door that has the properties specified in the door tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a door, see "Creating a Door with User-Specified Settings" on page 962.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the door tool you want to use, and select the tool. TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Select a wall or door and window assembly in which to insert the door, or press ENTER to add a freestanding door.
3 Specify the insertion point for the door. 4 Continue adding doors, and press ENTER.
Creating a Door with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create any of the following, with settings that you specify: Freestanding doors Doors in walls
Adding a door to a wall
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Door tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a door style. 4 Under Bound Spaces, define if this door can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here: Yes: this door can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this door cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces.
962 | Chapter 21 Doors
By style: this door will use the bounding settings from the door style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 Expand Dimensions. 6 Specify a door size:
If you want to... use a standard door size use a custom door size
Then... click Standard Sizes, and then select a door size. enter values for Width and Height.
7 Enter values for Rise and Leaf (if applicable to selected style and door type). 8 Enter a value for Swing angle or Opening percent. (Zero indicates a closed door.) 9 Expand Location. 10 If you are placing the door in a wall, specify the door position:
If you want to...
Then...
position the door at a specific distance between the edge of select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter a value
the opening and the end of a wall segment
for Automatic offset.
center the door on a wall segment
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and specify a point near the center of the wall segment.
position the door anywhere along the wall
click Position along wall, and select Unconstrained.
11 Specify whether you want the door to be aligned vertically by threshold height or by head height:
If you want to...
Then...
align the door by threshold height
select Threshold for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Threshold height.
align the door by head height
select Head for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Head height.
12 Specify the insertion point for a door in a wall or for a freestanding door:
If you want to...
Then...
insert a door in a wall
select the wall, and specify an insertion point along the wall.
insert a freestanding door
press ENTER, and specify an insertion point and a rotation angle for the door.
13 Continue to place doors, and press ENTER when you are finished.
Creating a Door in a Door and Window Assembly
Use this procedure to insert a door into a door and window assembly. 1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Door tool. If necessary, scroll the tool palette to display the tool you want to use. 2 Select a door and window assembly to insert the door into. 3 Select the grid cell on the door and window assembly into which you want to insert the door.
Creating a Door in a Door and Window Assembly | 963
4 Commence adding the door to the door and window assembly, as described in "Inserting a Door or Window into a Door and Window Assembly" on page 899.
Creating a Door from Door/Window Assemblies, Openings, and Windows
Use this procedure to convert a door/window assembly, opening, or window to a door that has the properties of the door tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the door.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the door tool that you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click a door tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Door/Window Assembly, Opening, Window. 3 Select the door/window assembly, window, or opening to convert, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the door in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Door Tool
Use this procedure to create a door tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own door tools if you are placing multiple doors of specific styles that have the same properties. For example, you are creating an office floor plan that contains two custom door styles: single solid doors for offices, and solid double doors for conference rooms. To work efficiently, you can create a door tool for each style. You can then select the appropriate tool to place doors in each type of room. You can use any of the following methods to create a door tool:
Drag a door that has the properties you want to a tool palette.
Drag a door style from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy an existing tool, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Drag a tool from a tool catalog in the Content Browser, and then customize the properties of the tool. For information about using the Content Browser to create a tool, see "Using Tool Catalog Items in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 99.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a door in the drawing
select the door and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a door style in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current palette
right-click the tool, click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
This description is used as the tooltip on the tool palette, and to describe the tool if it is stored in a tool catalog.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General.
964 | Chapter 21 Doors
7 Enter a description of the tool. 8 If you do not want to use the default layer key for doors, select a layer key. 9 If you want to override the default layer name for doors, select a layer override. 10 Select a door style. 11 For Style location, select the drawing file containing the style used for this door, or select Browse and use
a standard file selection dialog box to select the file. 12 Under Bound Spaces, define if this door tool can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this door tool can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this door tool cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this door tool will use the bounding settings from the door style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
13 Expand Dimensions. 14 Specify a door size:
If you want to... use a standard door size use a custom door size
Then... click Standard Sizes, and then select a door size. enter values for Width and Height.
15 Specify how the door width and height are measured:
If you want to...
Then...
measure to the outside of the door frame
select Outside of frame for Measure to.
measure to the inside of the door frame
select Inside of frame for Measure to.
16 Enter a value for Swing angle or Opening percent. (Zero indicates a closed door.) 17 Expand Location. 18 Specify the door's position in a wall:
If you want to...
Then...
position the door at a specific distance between the edge of select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter a value
the opening and the end of a wall segment
other than zero for Automatic offset.
center the door in a wall segment
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter zero for Automatic offset.
freely position the door anywhere in the wall
click Position along wall, and select Unconstrained.
19 Enter a value for head height. 20 Enter a value for threshold height. 21 Click OK.
Editing Doors
After you create a door, you can change the size, height, width, rise, leaf, and opening. You can also move the door within the wall, flip the hinge or swing, and change the swing opening.
Editing Doors | 965
You can change the properties of a door by changing its style or its dimensions, moving its anchor location, or specifying the endcap conditions. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing doors:
You can edit doors directly using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter
a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. You can change door settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the context menu for a selected door.
Using Grips to Edit Doors
You can use grips to modify the following door properties: Dimensions (width and height) For overhead doors, the width determines the opening cut in the wall. The width dimensions extend beyond the frame opening because the door rides behind the opening. Location in a wall Hinge side (left or right) Swing direction Rise Rise applies to Peak Pentagon, Arch, and Gothic door shapes. For more information, see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Door Style" on page 983.
Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use door grips to edit doors. Editing the Dimensions of a Door with Standard Sizes
1 Select the door. Door dimension grips
2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change. Initially the grip is set to constrain the sizing to one of the standard values defined for the door's style. For example, if you select the width grip, the grip is set to constrain the width to one of the standard values defined for the door's style.
966 | Chapter 21 Doors
Standard height door with width grip selected
The CTRL key acts as a toggle between standard and custom sizing.
A series of tick marks indicates the standard sizes for the selected dimension. As you move the grip, it snaps to each tick mark and displays the measurement at that mark.
The size and color of the grip tick marks indicate whether setting a standard value for the dimension will result in a standard door size. For example, if the height of the door is set to a non-standard value, then even if you set the door width to a standard value for that door's style, the door is still not a standard size. Long grey tick marks indicate that a standard size is possible; short red marks indicate that another dimension is already set to a non-standard value.
3 Resize the dimension as necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
change the dimension using a standard size
move the grip until the value you want is displayed, and then click.
change the dimension using a non-standard size
press CTRL, and either move the grip until the value you want is displayed, and then click, or enter a value.
Using Grips to Edit Doors | 967
Changing a door width
968 | Chapter 21 Doors
Changing a door height
Editing the Dimensions of a Door with Nonstandard Sizes 1 Select the door. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change. 3 Either move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and then click, or enter a value.
Moving a Door Anchored to a Wall 1 Select the door. 2 Select the Location grip. Using Grips to Edit Doors | 969
Door location and flip grips
Moving a Freestanding Door 1 Select the door. 2 Select the Location grip. 3 Move the door to the desired location, and click once.
Changing the Hinge Side of a Door 1 Select the door. 2 Select the Flip grip to reverse the side of the door where hinges are located.
Flipping a door hinge
Changing the Swing Direction of a Door 1 Select the door. 2 Select the Flip grip to reverse the swing direction of the door.
970 | Chapter 21 Doors
Flipping a door swing
Changing the Rise of a Door 1 Select the door. 2 Select the Rise grip.
Changing a door rise
3 Either move the grip until the rise value you want is displayed, and then click, or enter a value.
Using Grips to Edit Doors | 971
Changing the Door Style
Use this procedure to change the style for a door or group of doors. 1 Select one or more doors, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, click Style, and select a door style from the drop-down list.
Changing the Door Leaf
Use this procedure to change the leaf value for a door or group of doors. Leaf applies to Uneven, Uneven-Dhung, and Uneven Opposing door types. For more information, see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Door Style" on page 983.
1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions.
3 Enter a value for Leaf Width, or click Leaf Width and then click the width.
Changing a door leaf
to pick points on the screen to specify
Changing How Door Width Is Measured
Use this procedure to change how the width of doors is measured. Changing how a door width is measured also affects the dimensions of the opening.
1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them.
972 | Chapter 21 Doors
Specifying door frame measurements
2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Specify the location to which door width is measured:
If you want to... size the doors to the inside frame
Then... select Inside of frame for Measure to.
size the doors to the outside frame
select Outside of frame for Measure to.
Changing the Door Swing Angle or Opening Percent
Use this procedure to change the swing angle or opening percent of a door or group of doors. A door with a swing angle of zero is closed. The swing angle for overhead doors moves the door panel vertically, with graphics above the door head disappearing. The swing display moves with the panel.
NOTE Defining the opening percent in display properties overrides this setting.
1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Enter a value for Swing angle or Opening percent.
Changing a door swing angle
Changing the Door Swing Angle or Opening Percent | 973
Changing the Vertical Alignment of a Door
Use this procedure to change the vertical alignment of a door or group of doors. 1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Specify whether you want the door to be aligned vertically by threshold height or by head height:
If you want to...
Then...
align the doors by threshold height
select Threshold for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Threshold height.
align the doors by head height
select Head for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Head height.
Moving a Door Along a Wall
Use this procedure to change the location of one or more doors along a wall by offsetting the doors from a reference location.
This feature is useful when you want to position a door at a specified distance from another object. For example, you may want to specify an exact distance between a series of doors along a wall.
1 Select the doors you want to move, right-click, and click Reposition Along Wall. A marker indicates the current location within the opening: left jamb, center of door, or right jamb.
974 | Chapter 21 Doors
Repositioning a door along a wall
2 Specify how to measure the offset: If you want to... measure the offset from the center of the door measure the offset from the left or right jamb
Then...
select a point near the center of the door.
select a point on the jamb of the door you want to measure from.
3 Select a point to measure to (the reference point). You can select a point along the wall.
Moving a Door Along a Wall | 975
4 Specify the distance between the points you selected:
If you want to... move the door to the reference point
Then... enter 0.
move the door a specified distance from the reference point enter a value for the offset distance.
specify the distance as a measurement between two points, such as the distance between the centers of two doors that are correctly positioned
select the two points measuring the distance.
Moving a Door Within a Wall
Use this procedure to move one or more doors within a wall by offsetting the doors from a reference location.
This feature allows you to align doors within the thickness of a wall. You can set an offset distance from any point within a wall, or center the doors between the faces of a wall. You can select doors, windows, or openings, and reposition them at the same time. If you select more than one object, you can select only one side to offset.
1 Select the doors you want to move, right-click, and click Reposition Within Wall. A marker indicates the current location within the opening. This may be the center of the frame, the interior face of the frame, or the exterior face of the frame.
Repositioning a door within a wall
2 Specify how to measure the offset: If you want to... center the doors between the faces of the wall offset the doors from the interior or exterior face
3 Select a point to measure to.
976 | Chapter 21 Doors
Then...
select a point near the center of the door jamb.
select a point on the side of the face you want to measure from.
4 Specify the offset distance from the selected point:
If you want to... center the doors between the faces of the wall
Then...
use the Midpoint osnap to select the midpoint of the end of the wall.
move the doors to the reference point
enter 0.
move the doors a specified distance
enter a value for the offset distance.
specify the distance as a measurement between two points select the two points measuring the distance.
Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of a Door
Use this procedure to change the horizontal position of doors along a wall to which the doors are anchored. Door position along the X axis parameters
1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the X axis:
If you want to...
Then...
use the start of the wall as your reference point
under Position Along (X), select Start of wall (curve) for From.
use the midpoint of the wall as your reference point
under Position Along (X), select Midpoint of wall (curve) for From.
use the end of the wall as your reference point
under Position Along (X), select End of Wall (curve) for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the doors. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the doors to measure to:
If you want to... measure to the start edge of the doors measure to the center of the doors
Then... select Start Edge of object for To. select Center of object for To.
Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of a Door | 977
If you want to... measure to the end edge of the doors
Then... select End Edge of object for To.
7 Click OK.
Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of a Door
Use this procedure to change the vertical position of doors in a wall to which the doors are anchored. Door position along the Z axis parameters
1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the Z axis:
If you want to...
Then...
use the bottom of the wall height as your reference point select Bottom of wall (curve) height for From.
use the center of the wall height as your reference point
select Center of wall (curve) height for From.
use the top of the wall height as your reference point
select Top of wall (curve) height for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the doors. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the doors to measure to:
If you want to...
Then...
measure to the bottom of the doors
select Threshold (Bottom) of object for To.
measure to the center of the doors
select Center of object for To.
measure to the top of the doors
select Head (Top) of object for To.
7 Click OK.
978 | Chapter 21 Doors
Using Anchors to Change the Position of a Door Within a Wall
Use this procedure to change the position of doors horizontally within a wall to which the doors are anchored. Door position along the Y axis parameters
1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the Y axis:
If you want to... use the left edge of the wall as your reference point
Then... select Left edge of wall (curve) width for From.
use the center of the wall as your reference point
select Center of wall (curve) width for From.
use the right edge of the wall as your reference point
select Right edge of wall (curve) width for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the doors. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the doors to measure to:
If you want to...
Then...
measure to the front of the doors
select Front for To.
measure to the center of the doors
select Center for To.
measure to the back of the doors
select Back for To.
7 Click OK.
Changing the Orientation of a Door to a Wall
Use this procedure to change the vertical orientation of doors in a wall to which the doors are anchored. 1 Select the doors you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Enter the X and Z rotation angles of the doors. 5 Indicate if you want to reverse the flip direction of the doors in the X, Y, and Z axes:
If you want to...
Then...
reverse the direction the doors open to
select Flip X.
Using Anchors to Change the Position of a Door Within a Wall | 979
If you want to... reverse the side of the wall the doors open to reverse the top and bottom of the doors
Then... select Flip Y. select Flip Z.
6 Click OK.
Moving a Door to a Different Wall
Use this procedure to move a door from one wall to another. 1 Select the door you want to move, right-click, and click Wall Anchor Set Wall. 2 Select the wall to move the door to.
Releasing a Door from a Wall
Use this procedure to release doors from the wall to which they are anchored. Select the doors you want to release, right-click, and click Wall Anchor Release.
Changing the Opening Endcap Assigned to a Door
Use this procedure to change the opening endcap style assigned to doors.
NOTE Each opening endcap style generally is created for use with a specific wall style. Changing the opening endcap style used for individual doors may cause the wall to display a defect marker.
For more information, see "Opening Endcap Styles" on page 708.
1 Select the doors whose endcaps you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Expand Endcaps. 4 Select the opening endcap style.
Changing the Location of a Freestanding Door
Use this procedure to relocate a freestanding door by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The door also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the door are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the door by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the door on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the door you want to move. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, then expand Location and click Additional Information. 3 In the Location dialog box, specify the door's location:
If you want to... relocate the door
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the door on the XY plane
make the normal of the door parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
980 | Chapter 21 Doors
If you want to... locate the door on the YZ plane locate the door on the XZ plane change the rotation of the door
Then...
make the normal of the door parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the door parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
4 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Door
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a door. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a door.
1 Double-click the door to which to attach notes or files. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference file, click following: If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
next to Reference documents, and then do any of the
Then... click , select a file, and click Open. enter text under Description. double-click the reference file name to start its application. select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK.
Door Styles
A door style is a group of properties assigned to a door that determines the appearance and characteristics of the door. You can use door styles to represent standard door types for specific jobs and drawings or for your office standards. When you create or modify a door style, the doors using the style have the settings and characteristics of the style. Templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop contain door styles for many typical doors. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
Creating Tools from Door Styles
To create a door tool from any door style, you drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify default settings for doors created with that tool. For more information, see "Using Door Tools to Create Doors" on page 961.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Door | 981
Managing Door Styles
To create, edit, copy, or purge door styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop in which to work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Door Style
Use this procedure to create a door style. You can create a style with default style properties, or you can create a style by copying an existing one. After you create the style, you edit its properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door Styles.
3 Create a door style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Door Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the door style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new door style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the properties of your new door style:
If you want to...
Then...
enter a description of the style
click the General tab, and enter a description.
change dimension properties of the style
see "Specifying the Dimensions of a Door Style" on page 983.
change design rules of the style
see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Door Style" on page 983.
change the standard door sizes of the style
see "Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Door Style" on page 984.
assign materials to the components of the door style
see "Assigning Materials to a Door Style" on page 988 and "Turning on Materials for a Door Style" on page 989.
add classifications to a door style
see "Adding Classifications to a Door Style" on page 988.
specify the display properties of the style
see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style" on page 989.
change the appearance of the display components of the style
see "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Door Components" on page 989.
add components to the style
see "Adding Components to a Door Style" on page 990.
remove components from the style
see "Removing Custom Components from a Door Style" on page 992.
turn off components in the style
see "Turning Off Custom Components in a Door Style" on page 991.
display a straight door swing from the style
see "Displaying a Straight Door Swing" on page 992.
override the opening percentage in the style
see "Specifying the Opening Percentage for Display Representations in a Door" on page 992.
change the threshold in the style
see "Changing the Door Threshold in a Door Style" on page 993.
982 | Chapter 21 Doors
If you want to... add muntins to the style add notes, files, or documents to the style
Then...
see "Creating Muntins in a Door Style" on page 994.
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Door Style" on page 994.
6 If you want to assign the style to a door tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette. You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Door Tool" on page 964.
7 Click OK.
Specifying the Dimensions of a Door Style
Use this procedure to change the default dimensions of a door style. 1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Dimensions tab.
Changing door style dimensions
5 Change dimension values: If you want to... change the frame width and depth set the frame width to the wall thickness change the stop dimensions change the door thickness change the glass thickness
Then... under Frame, enter values for Width and Depth. under Frame, select Auto-Adjust to Width of Wall. under Stop, enter values for Width and Depth. enter a value for Door Thickness. enter a value for Glass Thickness.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Design Rules of a Door Style
Use this procedure to specify the shape and the type of door for a door style. Door shapes are named geometrical descriptions of a door. You can select predefined and custom door shapes, or create your own shape from profiles. For more information, see "Creating a Custom Door Shape" on page 984. The door type describes the type of opening for the door, such as bifold or pocket.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
Specifying the Dimensions of a Door Style | 983
4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 Select a door shape:
If you want to... use a predefined door shape use a custom door shape
Then... under Shape, click Predefined, and select a shape. under Shape, click Use Profile, and select a profile.
6 Select a door type. 7 Click OK.
Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Door Style
Use this procedure to create standard door sizes in a door style. 1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Standard Sizes tab, and add, change, or remove door-size values:
If you want to...
Then...
create standard sizes
click Add. Under Standard Sizes, enter values for Description, Width, Height, Rise, and Leaf.
change a size
select the size, and click Edit. Enter new values for Width, Height, Rise, and Leaf.
delete a size
select a size, and click Remove.
The description can be used to identify standard door sizes in door schedules. For example, you can specify a manufacturer's size or model code for Description.
Rise is available for Arch, Gothic, and Peak Pentagon door shapes. Leaf controls the width of Uneven, Uneven-Dhung, and Uneven-Opposing door types. For more information on door types and shapes, see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Door Style" on page 983.
5 Click OK.
Creating a Custom Door Shape
Use this procedure to create a profile that you can use to define a custom door shape in a door style. To create a custom door shape that includes glazing, see "Creating a Void for Door Muntins" on page 996.
1 Draw a closed polyline in the shape you want. 2 Select the polyline, right-click, and click Convert To Profile Definition. 3 Specify the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point is not used for doors.
4 Enter n (New). 5 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
984 | Chapter 21 Doors
Replacing the Door Shape in a Door Style
Use this procedure to replace a predefined shape in a door style with a custom shape created from a profile.
1 Select a door that uses the style you want to modify, right-click, and click Add Profile. 2 Specify the profile to use for the custom shape:
If you want to...
Then...
use a predefined door shape
select a profile for Profile Definition, and click OK. For information about creating a profile, see "Creating a Custom Door Shape" on page 984.
use a predefined door shape, but modify it
select a profile for Profile Definition, select Continue Editing, and click OK. For information about modifying the shape, see "Editing the Geometry of a Door Style" on page 985.
create a custom shape
select Start from scratch for Profile Definition, enter a name for the new profile, and click OK. For information about modifying the default shape, see "Editing the Geometry of a Door Style" on page 985.
Editing the Geometry of a Door Style
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of the profile used to define a door style. You can also add a profile to a door style that does not currently use a profile to define its shape.
1 Add a door that has the style you want to change. 2 Add or edit a profile:
If you want to...
Then...
add an existing profile to the style
select the door, right-click, and click Add Profile. Select the name of the profile, and click OK.
Replacing the Door Shape in a Door Style | 985
If you want to... create a profile and add it to the style
edit the existing profile for the style
Then...
select the door, right-click, and click Add Profile. Select Start from scratch for Profile Definition, enter a name for the new profile, and click OK. A rectangular profile is created for you to edit to define the required geometry.
select the door, right-click, and click Edit Profile in Place.
3 If you receive a message that the profile is not drawn to size, click Yes. The area of the door defined by the profile is selected and hatched in the drawing.
4 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the context menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the context menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the context menu.
Edit the profile as necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
change the shape of the perimeter of the profile or its rings select the profile, and use edge or vertex grips to adjust the shape.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
add vertices to the profile remove vertices from the profile replace an existing ring of the profile with new geometry add a ring to the profile remove a ring from the profile
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Select the ring to replace, and select the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Ring. Select the geometry to define the ring. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Ring. Select the ring to remove, and press ENTER.
986 | Chapter 21 Doors
5 Save or discard the changes: If you want to... restore the profile to its original shape save the changes to the current profile
save the changes to a new profile definition
Then...
select the profile and click
.
select the profile, and click
. The door style uses the
edited profile to define its geometry. Any other objects or
styles that use this profile are also updated with the edited
geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Profile. Enter a name for the new profile definition, and click OK. The door uses the new profile to define its geometry. Any doors of this style are updated with the new geometry. Other styles or objects that use the original profile are not affected.
About Door Display Components and Materials
A door object consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component.
You assign one material to each display component of the door. For example, you assign a wood material to the frame and a glass material to the glass inset. You assign materials to door components in each display representation in which the materials are to be used.
To use the display properties of the door object or the door style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the door or the door style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in 3D model views and elevations.
For a complete list of material components and their descriptions, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
The following table lists door components that can be displayed using materials assigned to them, and identifies the material component of each.
Door Component Plan, Plan High Detail, Reflected Door Panel Frame Stop Plan Low Detail Panel Model Door Panel Frame Stop Glass Elevation Door Panel
Material Component
Linework Linework Linework
Linework
3D Body 3D Body 3D Body 3D Body
2D Section/Elevation Linework
About Door Display Components and Materials | 987
Door Component Frame Stop Glass
Material Component 2D Section/Elevation Linework 2D Section/Elevation Linework 2D Section/Elevation Linework
Assigning Materials to a Door Style Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a door style. Components use the display properties of the material. For more information, see "About Door Display Components and Materials" on page 987.
You can specify the materials used to display the following components of a door style:
Frame Stop Panel Glass Muntin
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a door component, you can change the display properties of the door style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style" on page 989.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Click the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Adding Classifications to a Door Style Use this procedure to specify classifications for definitions applied to a door style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles.
988 | Chapter 21 Doors
3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
The default setting for classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to door styles. 5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current door style. 6 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style
In most cases, you want the appearance of doors that belong to the same style to be consistent throughout a drawing. To achieve this, you specify the following display properties of the doors in each door style:
The layer, color, and linetype of door components The hatching used with each component The cut plane height and the display of components relative to the cut plane Other specific door display information, such as the shape of the door swing
You can also use materials to control the display properties of the physical components of a door. Symbolic components, such as the door swing, are not controlled by materials. For more information about using materials in doors, see "About Door Display Components and Materials" on page 987. Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Door Components Use this procedure to change the properties of the display components of a door style:
Visibility (display component is on or off) By material (material assigned to the display component determines its layer properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE If a material assignment determines the properties of components in the door style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Door Style" on page 988.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK.
Turning on Materials for a Door Style Use this procedure to turn on material assignments for individual display representations in a door style.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style | 989
For more information about using materials to control the display of door components, see "About Door Display Components and Materials" on page 987.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for each component to be controlled by the material. The By Material check box is
unavailable for components that cannot be assigned a material. When you select By Material for a display component, all other settings in the dialog are unavailable. Since the display properties are now taken from the material definition, you can no longer set them directly in the display properties of the door style.
9 Click OK.
Using Custom Blocks to Create Door Components You can add custom blocks for components, such as door hardware, to the display components, or to replace the default display components. For example, you can replace a simple door leaf with a custom six-panel door leaf in which the custom component is to appear. You can have a different custom block for each display representation. When you add a custom block, you can specify rules for positioning and scaling the new component. Each custom block also appears in the display properties component list so that you can control its layer, color, and linetype. For more information on adding custom blocks, see "Adding Components to a Door Style" on page 990. If you create a custom block from mass elements, you can use the material assignments of the mass elements to determine the display properties of the custom block. Be sure to set the properties of objects used to create your custom blocks to ByBlock. Otherwise, you cannot control these objects through the display properties. For more information about ByBlock, see "Use Layers to Manage Complexity" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Adding Components to a Door Style Use this procedure to add or edit custom block components in the display representation of door styles.
1 Create a block for the component to add to the door style. Create the block in the same plane as the door that you use to represent the style. For more information about custom blocks, see "Using Custom Blocks to Create Door Components" on page 990.
2 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 3 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 4 Select the style you want to edit. 5 Click the Display Properties tab. 6 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
7 If necessary, click . 8 Click the Other tab.
990 | Chapter 21 Doors
9 Specify whether to add or edit a block component:
If you want to... add a new block component
Then... click Add.
edit an existing block component
select the component to edit, and click Edit. Proceed to step 11.
10 Click Select Block.
11 Select the block to use, and click OK.
12 Specify whether to scale to fit the block component to the object by width, depth, or height, or to lock the XY ratio:
If you want to...
Then...
set the block scale to the width of the object
select Width.
set the block scale to the depth of the object
select Depth.
set the block scale to the height of the object
select Height.
scale the whole block equally, so that one direction is scaled select Lock to XY Ratio. to fit another of the scale criteria
scale the block to its original size
clear all options under Scale to Fit.
13 Specify whether to mirror the block in the X,Y, or Z direction:
If you want to... create a mirror of the block in the X direction
Then... select Mirror X.
create a mirror of the block in the Y direction
select Mirror Y.
create a mirror of the block in the Z direction
select Mirror Z.
14 Specify the X, Y, and Z location of the insertion point. 15 Specify an insertion offset of the block in the X, Y, and Z directions. 16 Specify whether the component is for the door frame, leaf or glass:
If you want to...
Then...
add the block to the inside or outside of the frame
click Frame Component, and click either Outside or Inside.
add the block to all leaf components or to a single leaf component
click Leaf Component, and click either All or Single. If you select Single, enter the component number.
add the block to all glass components or to a single glass component
click Glass Component, and click either All or Single. If you select Single, enter the component number.
NOTE If you specified Depth for Scale to Fit, the depth will be scaled to the glass thickness. You can scale to the door panel thickness instead by selecting Scale Depth to Panel Thickness.
17 Leaf and glass components are not available in some display representations. Click OK three times.
Turning Off Custom Components in a Door Style Use this procedure to turn off custom blocks in a door style.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style | 991
You can turn off the display of component blocks without removing them from the style. 1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to turn off the display of the door component, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Disable Custom Blocks. 9 Click OK.
Removing Custom Components from a Door Style Use this procedure to remove components from a door style. Removing component blocks from a door style deletes them from the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation from which to remove the door component, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select the component to remove, and click Remove. 9 Click OK.
Displaying a Straight Door Swing Use this procedure to display the door swing as a straight line in a door style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display a straight door swing, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Straight Swing. 9 Click OK.
Specifying the Opening Percentage for Display Representations in a Door Use this procedure to override the opening percentage in the display representation of a door style. For example, you can specify that a door is displayed closed in model and elevation representations, but open in plan representations.
992 | Chapter 21 Doors
NOTE This setting overrides other door opening percent settings. If the opening percent is specified here, the opening percent entered on the Properties palette when you add or modify doors is ignored.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to override the opening percent, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Override Open Percent. 9 Enter a value for the opening percent. 10 Click OK.
Changing the Door Threshold in a Door Style Use this procedure to display a door threshold and change its dimensions in threshold display representations. You can turn on threshold display representations in addition to door display representations.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select Threshold Plan, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Under Threshold Dimensions, enter the threshold extension and depth dimensions.
Component A is the swing side of the door. Component B is the other side. 9 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 10 Under Visible, click the icons to turn on visibility. 11 Click OK.
Changing the Door Threshold Symbol in a Door Style Use this procedure to specify the symbol indicating a threshold that appears in a door opening for the door style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select Threshold Symbol Plan, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select the type of symbol you want to display in the door opening. 9 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style | 993
10 Under Visible, click the icon to turn on visibility. 11 Click OK.
Defining a Door Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a door style that can bound associative spaces. When a door style is set as bounding, by default all doors that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the door style in an individual door, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door Styles. 3 Select a door style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the checkbox for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Door Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a door style. You can also edit reference files attached to the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the door, enter the description under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add or edit a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 To attach, edit, or detach a reference file, click the Reference Docs tab:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you finish editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK.
Creating Muntins in a Door Style
Door muntins are secondary framing members that hold multiple lights in door glass. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides an easy way to create muntins with different layout patterns. Door muntins are available in the following patterns that you can customize into different styles:
Rectangular Diamond Prairie 9 Lights
994 | Chapter 21 Doors
Prairie 12 Lights Starburst Sunburst Starburst and Sunburst patterns are a combined-rectangular pattern with a half-round or quarter-round spoked top. They can be used for half- and quarter-round door glass as well as rectangular door glass. The other patterns are primarily rectangular but fit into half-round glass. You can make up custom glass shapes by creating profiles from polylines and adding them to a new door style. Door muntin components
Process Overview: Creating Door Muntins You must have a void for the glass in the door in order to add muntins. Sample content provided with the software includes several door styles that already have glass and can receive muntins. The door style description indicates whether the style has glass. You can create door styles with a glazing void to receive muntins. The process of creating a door style with door glass and muntins has three steps: Step 1: Create a void for door glass and muntins.
You create a profile from two concentric polylines that define the door shape and the door glass. Concentric closed polylines for a door profile
Step 2: Add glass to a door style. You apply the profile with a void to a door style so that the style has glass for doors to receive muntins. Door style created from a profile
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 995
Step 3: Add muntins to the door style. Door glass with muntins
Creating a Void for Door Muntins Use this procedure to create a profile of a door with a void for glass to receive muntins. This is the first step for adding muntins to door styles that do not have glass. The profile is made up of concentric, closed polylines. The outer polyline, or ring, becomes the door shape, and the inner polyline becomes the void for the glass. You can create multiple voids by adding more inner polylines. Voids for glazing must be entirely within the polyline representing the door shape. The polylines are proportional in size and shape to each other and also to the individual doors created from the door style. You can draw these polylines anywhere in the drawing and use any convenient scale relative to your final door and glass size. One method for sizing the polylines relative to the door is to draw them by snapping to an existing door, and then move them to the side. Concentric closed polylines for a door profile
1 Draw concentric, closed polylines representing the door and the glass that receives the muntin pattern. 2 Select the polylines, right-click, and click Convert To Profile Definition. 3 Select the outermost polyline. 4 Enter a (Add ring). 5 Select an inner polyline. 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed to add more voids to the profile. 7 Specify the insertion point of the profile. 8 Enter n (New), enter a name for the profile, and click OK. To add the profile to a door style, see "Adding Glass to a Door Style" on page 996. Adding Glass to a Door Style Use this procedure to create a door style with glass for doors to accept muntin patterns. The drawing must contain a profile that defines the door style and the void for the door glass. For more information about creating such a profile, see "Creating a Void for Door Muntins" on page 996.
996 | Chapter 21 Doors
Door profile with a void for glass
Door style created from the profile
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Door Styles. 3 Create a door style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a style with default properties
right-click Door Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the Door style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Select the new door style, right-click, and click Rename. 5 Enter a name for the new door style, and press ENTER. 6 Select the new door style. 7 Click the Design Rules tab. 8 Under Shape, select Use Profile, and select a profile that defines a door style containing a void for door
glass. 9 Click the Standard Sizes tab. 10 Add new sizes to the style.
For more information about adding standard sizes to a door style, see "Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Door Style" on page 984.
11 Click OK.
The door style now contains glass. You can now add muntins to a door style.
Adding Rectangular or Diamond Muntins to a Door Style Use this procedure to add rectangular or diamond muntins to a door style that contains glass. You add muntins by editing the display properties of the door style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and apply them to all display representations of that door style.
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 997
You add the muntins block to glass components of the door style in display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the door style.
Rectangular door glass with rectangular muntins
Gothic door glass with diamond muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
NOTE A door style must contain glass to receive muntins. For more information about adding glass to a door style, see "Adding Glass to a Door Style" on page 996.
4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the door style contains multiple glass components, specify whether you want to apply muntins to all
glass components or to one glass component in the door:
If you want to...
Then...
attach muntins to all glass components
under Glass Component, select All.
apply muntins to an individual glass component
under Glass Component, select Single, and specify the index number. Lights are indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower-left corner.
998 | Chapter 21 Doors
Muntins applied to all or one glass component
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins.
Specifying muntin width and depth
13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to...
Then...
convert the muntin intersections to corners
under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying muntin cleanup joints
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 999
Converting muntins to a body
14 Under Lights, select a pattern: If you want to... use a rectangular pattern use a diamond pattern
Then... select Rectangular for pattern. select Diamond for pattern.
15 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in the vertical direction. 16 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of light columns in the horizontal direction.
Values for lights high and lights wide
17 Click OK. 18 Add other muntins:
If you want to... add muntins to another glass component in the door style
Then... repeat this procedure from step 8.
add muntins to another display representation
click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5.
add muntins to all display representations of the selected door style
select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
19 When you finish adding muntins to the door style, click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a door style, you can assign a material, such as wood sash, and specify the display properties, such as color and linetype. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Door Style" on page 988 and "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Door Components" on page 989.
1000 | Chapter 21 Doors
Adding Prairie-Lights Muntins to a Door Style
Use this procedure to add prairie-9-lights or prairie-12-lights muntins to a door style that contains glass.
You add muntins by editing the display properties of the door style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and apply them to all display representations of that door style. You add the muntins block to glass components of the door style in display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the door style.
Rectangular door glass with prairie-9-lights muntins
Rectangular door glass with prairie-12-lights muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
NOTE A door style must contain glass to receive muntins. For more information about adding glass to a door style, see "Adding Glass to a Door Style" on page 996.
4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the door style contains multiple glass components, specify whether you want to apply muntins to all
glass components or to one glass component in the door:
If you want to...
Then...
attach muntins to all glass components
under Glass Component, select All.
apply muntins to an individual glass component
under Glass Component, select Single, and specify the index number. Lights are indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower-left corner.
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 1001
Muntins applied to all or one glass component
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins.
Specifying muntin width and depth
13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to... convert the muntin intersections to corners
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying muntin cleanup joints
1002 | Chapter 21 Doors
Converting muntins to a body
14 Under Lights, select a pattern: If you want to... use a nine-light prairie pattern use a twelve-light prairie pattern
Then... select Prairie-9-Lights for Pattern. select Prairie-12-Lights for Pattern.
15 Enter a value for Edge X Offset to specify the horizontal distance of the muntins from the edges of the glass.
16 Enter a value for Edge Y Offset to specify the vertical distance of the muntins from the edges of the glass.
Specifying edge X and Y offsets
17 Click OK. 18 Add other muntins:
If you want to... add muntins to another glass component in the door style
Then... repeat this procedure from step 8.
add muntins to another display representation
click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5.
add muntins to all display representations of the selected door style
select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
19 When you finish adding muntins to the door style, click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a door style, you can assign a material, such as wood sash, and specify the display properties, such as color and linetype. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Door Style" on page 988 and "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Door Components" on page 989.
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 1003
Adding Starburst Muntins to a Door Style
Use this procedure to add starburst muntins to a door style that contains glass.
You add muntins by editing the display properties of the door style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and apply them to all display representations of that door style. You add the muntins block to glass components of the door style in display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the door style.
Half-round door glass with starburst muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
NOTE A door style must contain glass to receive muntins. For more information about adding glass to a door style, see "Adding Glass to a Door Style" on page 996.
4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the door style contains multiple glass components, specify whether you want to apply muntins to all
glass components or to one glass component in the door:
If you want to...
Then...
attach muntins to all glass components
under Glass Component, select All.
apply muntins to an individual glass component
under Glass Component, select Single, and specify the index number. Lights are indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower-left corner.
1004 | Chapter 21 Doors
Muntins applied to all or one glass component
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins.
Specifying muntin width and depth
13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to... convert the muntin intersections to corners
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying muntin cleanup joints
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 1005
Converting muntins to a body
14 Under Lights, select Starburst for pattern. 15 Under Shape, select Half Round or Quarter Round. 16 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in the vertical direction, exclusive of the
spoked lights. 17 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of light columns in the horizontal direction.
Count the columns as though they continue around the hub. For a half-round starburst, five apparent columns are counted as three. For a quarter-round starburst, three apparent columns are also counted as three.
18 Enter a value for Spokes to specify the number of radial muntin spokes.
Specifying the number of radial muntin spokes
19 Specify where to place the hub:
If you want to...
Then...
place the hub at the bottom of a half-round shape
under Hub Center, select Bottom Center.
place the hub at the top of a half-round shape
under Hub Center, select Top Center.
place the hub at the bottom left of a quarter-round shape under Hub Center, select Bottom Left.
place the hub at the bottom right of a quarter-round shape under Hub Center, select Bottom Right.
place the hub at the top left of a quarter-round shape
under Hub Center, select Top Left.
place the hub at the top right of a quarter-round shape
under Hub Center, select Top Right.
1006 | Chapter 21 Doors
Specifying hub placement of half-round shape Specifying hub placement of quarter-round shape
20 Click OK. 21 Add other muntins:
If you want to...
Then...
add muntins to another glass component in the door style repeat this procedure from step 8.
add muntins to another display representation
click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5.
add muntins to all display representations of the selected door style
select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
22 When you finish adding muntins to the door style, click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a door style, you can assign a material, such as wood sash, and specify the display properties, such as color and linetype. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Door Style" on page 988 and "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Door Components" on page 989.
Adding Sunburst Muntins to a Door Style
Use this procedure to add sunburst muntins to a door style that contains glass.
You add muntins by editing the display properties of the door style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and apply them to all display representations of that door style.
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 1007
You add the muntins block to glass components of the door style in display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the door style.
Quarter-round door glass with sunburst muntins and closed hub
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
NOTE A door style must contain glass to receive muntins. For more information about adding glass to a door style, see "Adding Glass to a Door Style" on page 996.
4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the door style contains multiple glass components, specify whether you want to apply muntins to all
glass components or to one glass component in the door:
If you want to...
Then...
attach muntins to all glass components
under Glass Component, select All.
apply muntins to an individual glass component
under Glass Component, select Single, and specify the index number. Lights are indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower-left corner.
Muntins applied to all or one glass component
11 Under Shape, select Half Round or Quarter Round. 12 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 13 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins.
1008 | Chapter 21 Doors
Specifying muntin width and depth
14 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to... convert the muntin intersections to corners
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying muntin cleanup joints
Converting muntins to a body
15 Under Lights, select Sunburst for pattern.
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 1009
16 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in the vertical direction, exclusive of the spoked lights.
17 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of light columns in the horizontal direction. Count the columns as though they continue around the hub. For a half-round sunburst, five apparent columns are counted as two. For a quarter-round sunburst, three apparent columns are also counted as two.
18 Enter a value for Spokes to specify the number of radial muntin spokes.
Specifying the number of radial muntin spokes
19 Under Hub Style, select Closed for no hub light, or select Open for a hub light. Specifying closed and open hubs
20 Enter a value for Radius to specify the radius for the hub. Specifying hub radius
21 Specify where to place the hub:
If you want to...
Then...
place the hub at the bottom of a half-round shape
under Hub Center, select Bottom Center.
place the hub at the top of a half-round shape
under Hub Center, select Top Center.
place the hub at the bottom left of a quarter-round shape under Hub Center, select Bottom Left.
place the hub at the bottom right of a quarter-round shape under Hub Center, select Bottom Right.
place the hub at the top left of a quarter-round shape
under Hub Center, select Top Left.
place the hub at the top right of a quarter-round shape
under Hub Center, select Top Right.
1010 | Chapter 21 Doors
Specifying hub placement of quarter-round shape
22 Click OK. 23 Add other muntins:
If you want to...
Then...
add muntins to another glass component in the door style repeat this procedure from step 8.
add muntins to another display representation
click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5.
add muntins to all display representations of the selected door style
select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
24 When you finish adding muntins to the door style, click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a door style, you can assign a material, such as wood sash, and specify the display properties, such as color and linetype. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Door Style" on page 988 and "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Door Components" on page 989.
Editing a Door Muntins Block in a Door Style Use this procedure to edit the muntins settings for a door style.
After you create a muntins block, you can change its settings by editing the display properties of the door style for each display representation, such as Model or Elevation. You can edit the muntins for display representations individually. You can also edit the muntins for a single display representation and apply the changes to all display representations of that door style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool.
2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles.
3 Select the style you want to edit.
4 Click the Display Properties tab.
5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and click . 6 Click the Muntins tab. 7 Select the muntins block to edit. 8 Click Edit.
Creating Muntins in a Door Style | 1011
9 Edit any of the settings. For more information on settings, refer to the door muntins type in "Creating Muntins in a Door Style" on page 994.
10 Select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides to apply edits to all display representations of the selected door style. Clear this setting to apply edits to only the selected display representation.
11 When you finish editing the door muntins block in the door style, click OK three times. You can edit the display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins block. For more information, see "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Door Components" on page 989. You can also edit the material applied to the muntins. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Door Style" on page 988. Turning Off the Display of Muntins in a Door Style Use this procedure to turn off the display of muntins in a door style. You can turn off the display of door muntins without removing them from the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
5 Select the display representation in which to turn off the display of door muntins, and click . 6 Click the Muntins tab. 7 Select Disable Muntins Blocks. 8 Select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides to turn off muntins
block(s) for all display representations of the selected door style. Clear this setting to turn off muntins block(s) for only the selected display representation.
9 Click OK two times.
Removing a Door Muntins Block from a Door Style Use this procedure to remove muntins from a door style. When you remove muntins blocks from a door style, they are deleted. To turn off muntins without deleting them, see "Turning Off the Display of Muntins in a Door Style" on page 1012.
1 Open a tool palette that has a door tool. 2 Right-click a door tool, and click Door Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
5 Select the display representation for which to remove door muntins, and click . 6 Click the Muntins tab. 7 Select the muntins block to remove. 8 Click Remove. 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to remove multiple muntins blocks. 10 Select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides to remove muntins
block(s) from all display representations of the selected door style. Clear this setting to remove muntins block(s) from only the selected display representation.
11 When you finish removing muntins blocks from the door style, click OK two times.
1012 | Chapter 21 Doors
Windows
22
A window is an AEC object that interacts with walls and door and window assemblies. After a window is placed in a wall or door and window assembly, the window is constrained to the object and cannot move outside it. Windows can be anchored to specific locations in walls or door and window assemblies; when the wall or door and window assembly moves or changes size, the location of the window in that object stays constant. Windows can also be freestanding objects.
1013
Windows
A window is an AEC object that interacts with walls and door and window assemblies. After a window is placed in a wall or door and window assembly, the window is constrained to the object and cannot move outside it. Windows can be anchored to specific locations in walls or door and window assemblies; when the wall or door and window assembly moves or changes size, the location of the window in that object stays constant. Windows can also be freestanding objects.
Creating Windows
You can create windows using all of the typical design parameters for style, standard size, width and height, threshold height, head height, and vertical alignment. You can choose styles with glass shapes that receive standard muntins patterns, and create your own custom glass shapes from profiles.
Working with Window Styles
Templates provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop contain ready-to-use window styles. The design rules of a window style determine the default dimensions of windows created from the style. The window style also determines the window shape and the window type:
The window shape determines the geometry of the window frame, such as rectangular, half round, and arch. You can also create custom window shapes from profiles.
The window type determines the number of panels and the method of opening the window, such as glider, pass-through, hopper, or picture.
You can also define standard sizes in a window style and then select the size you want to use when you place the window in a drawing.
Anchoring Windows
After a window is placed in a wall or door and window assembly, the window is constrained to the object and cannot move outside it. Windows can also be anchored to specific locations in walls or door and window assemblies that when the wall or door and window assembly moves or changes size, the location of the window in that object stays constant.
Window Dimensions
Some window dimensions depend on the window shape and type specified in the window style. Rise is the height from the top of the rectangular portion of a window to the peak of the window opening for Gothic, Arch, and Peak Pentagon window shapes.
Vertical Alignment of Windows
To control how you place the window in the wall, the location of the working point vertically in the wall, and how the window responds to modifications in height, use the vertical alignment settings. To determine the working point on the window, use the threshold and head height settings. You can place the working point at the sill or at the head. The threshold height is maintained. For example, if you specify the vertical alignment as 0'' and the window height as 7'0'', the window opening height is 7'0''. If you next specify the height of the window as 6'8'', the window threshold remains at 0'' and the window opening height becomes 6'8''. The window head work point is maintained. For example, if you specify the vertical alignment as 7'0'' and the window height as 7'0'', the window opening height is 70''. If you specify the window height as 6'8'', the window head remains at 7'0'' and the window threshold becomes 4''.
Materials in Windows
In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to a window. These materials then are displayed in wireframe or rendered views. Materials have specific settings for individual components of a window, such as the frame, the sash, or the muntins. For more information, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
1014 | Chapter 22 Windows
Window in 2D wireframe and rendered views
Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a large number of predefined materials for all common design purposes, which contain settings for windows. You can use these predefined materials, or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials. If you create a material that should specifically be used only for windows, it is recommended that you name it accordingly; for example, Window - Wood Frame or Window Sill - Marble. For more information, see "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487.
Using Window Tools to Create Windows
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place windows by selecting a window tool with a specific window style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with all of its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use window tools to create new windows by applying tool properties to existing door/window assemblies, openings and doors. Tool palette containing window tools
The following palettes contain one or more window tools:
Tool palette... Design Windows Custom tool palettes created by your CAD manager
Contains...
a window tool for the Standard window style and default settings for other window properties
a window tool for sample window styles, with default properties appropriate for each window style
window tools with window styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards
When you place windows using windows tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change settings for any windows properties that are not controlled by the style.
Creating a Window
Use this procedure to add a new window that has the properties specified in the window tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a window, see "Creating a Window with User-Specified Settings" on page 1016.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a window tool.
Using Window Tools to Create Windows | 1015
If necessary, scroll the palette to display the tool that you want to use. 2 Select a wall or door and window assembly in which to insert the window, or press ENTER to add a
freestanding window. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 3 Specify the insertion point of the window. 4 Continue adding windows, and press ENTER.
Creating a Window with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create any of the following, with settings that you specify: Freestanding windows Windows in walls
Adding a window to a wall
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Window tool. If necessary, scroll the tool palette to display the tool you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a window style. 4 Under Bound Spaces, define if this window can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here: Yes: this window can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this window cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this window will use the bounding settings from the window style.
1016 | Chapter 22 Windows
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 Expand Dimensions. 6 Specify a window size:
If you want to... use a standard window size use a custom window size
Then... click Standard Sizes, and then select a window size. enter values for Width and Height.
7 Enter a value for Rise, if applicable to the selected style and window type. 8 Specify where the window width and height are measured to:
If you want to measure to... the outside of the window frame
Then... Select Outside of frame for Measure to.
the inside of the window frame
Select Inside of frame for Measure to.
9 Enter a value for Opening percent or Swing angle. Zero indicates a closed window.
10 Expand Location. 11 If you are placing the window in a wall, specify the position of the window:
If you want to...
Then...
position the window at a specific distance between the edge select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter a value
of the opening and the end of a wall segment
for Automatic offset.
center the window on a wall segment
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and specify a point near the center of the wall segment.
position the window anywhere along the wall
click Position along wall, and select Unconstrained.
12 Specify whether you want the window aligned vertically by sill height or by head height:
If you want to align the window...
Then...
by sill height
select Sill for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Sill height.
by head height
select Head for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Head height.
13 Specify the insertion point for a freestanding window or a window in a wall:
If you want to insert...
Then...
a freestanding window
press ENTER, and specify an insertion point and a rotation angle for the window.
the window in a wall
select the wall and specify an insertion point along the wall.
14 Continue to place windows by selecting window styles and specifying insertion points, or press ENTER to end the command.
Creating a Window in a Door and Window Assembly
Use this procedure to insert a window into a door and window assembly.
Creating a Window in a Door and Window Assembly | 1017
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Window tool. If necessary, scroll the tool palette to display the tool you want to use.
2 Select a door and window assembly to insert the window into. 3 Select the grid cell on the door and window assembly into which you want to insert the window. 4 Commence adding the window to the door and window assembly, as described in "Inserting a Door or
Window into a Door and Window Assembly" on page 899.
Creating a Window from Doors, Door/Window Assemblies and Openings
Use this procedure to convert a door, door/window assembly, or opening to a window that has the properties of the window tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the window.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a window tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Door, Door/Window Assembly, Opening. 3 Select the door or window assembly, opening, or door to convert, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the window in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Window Tool
Use this procedure to create a window tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own window tools if you are placing multiple windows of specific styles with additional properties that you want to be the same each time you add a window of each type.
For example, you are creating an office floor plan that contains two custom window styles: fixed casement for conference rooms and operable casement for offices. To work efficiently, you can create a window tool for each style. You can then select the appropriate tool to place windows in offices and conference rooms.
You can use any of the following methods to create a window tool:
Drag a window that has the properties you want to a tool palette.
Drag a window style from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy an existing tool, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Drag a tool from a tool catalog in the Content Browser, and then customize the properties of the tool. For information about using the Content Browser to create a tool, see "Using Tool Catalog Items in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 99.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a window in the drawing
select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a window style in the Style Manager.
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK.
copy a tool in the current palette
right-click the tool, click Copy, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
1018 | Chapter 22 Windows
4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
This description is used as the tool's tooltip on the tool palette, and to describe the tool if it is stored in a tool catalog.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the tool. 8 If you do not want to use the default layer key for windows, select a layer key. 9 If you want to override the default layer name for windows, select a layer override. 10 Select a window style. 11 For Style location, select the drawing file containing the style used for this window, or select Browse and
use a standard file selection dialog box to select the file. 12 Under Bound Spaces, define if this window tool can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this window tool can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this window tool cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this window tool will use the bounding settings from the window style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
13 Expand Dimensions. 14 Specify a window size:
If you want to... use a standard window size use a custom window size
Then... click Standard Sizes, and then select a window size. enter values for Width and Height.
15 Specify where the window width and height are measured to:
If you want to measure to... the outside of the window frame
Then... Select Outside of frame for Measure to.
the inside of the window frame
Select Inside of frame for Measure to.
16 Enter a value for Rise, if applicable to the selected style and window type. 17 Enter a value for the Opening percent or Swing angle.
Zero indicates a closed window.
NOTE Defining the opening percent in display properties overrides this setting on the Tool Properties palette. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042.
18 Expand Location. 19 Specify the position of the window when it is placed in a wall:
If you want to...
Then...
position the window at a specific distance between the edge select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter a value
of the opening and the end of a wall segment
for Automatic offset.
Creating a Window Tool | 1019
If you want to... center the window on a wall segment
position the window anywhere along the wall
20 Enter a value for the head height. 21 Enter a value for the sill height. 22 Click OK.
Then...
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and specify a point near the center of the wall segment
click Position along wall, and select Unconstrained.
Editing Windows
After you create a window, you can change the size, height, width, rise, and opening. You can also move the window within the wall, flip the hinge or swing, and change the swing opening. You can change the properties of existing windows in your drawing by changing the window style, changing the dimensions of the window, moving the anchor location of the window, and specifying the endcap conditions of the window. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing windows:
You can directly edit windows using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter
a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. You can change window settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected window.
Using Grips to Edit Windows
You can use grips to modify the following window properties:
Dimensions (width and height) Location in a wall Hinge side (left- or right-hand) Swing direction Rise
Rise applies to Peak Pentagon, Arch, and Gothic window shapes. For more information, see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Window Style" on page 1038.
Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use window grips to edit windows. Editing the Dimensions of a Window That Has Standard Sizes
1 Select the window.
1020 | Chapter 22 Windows
Window Dimension Grips
2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change. The grip is initially set to constrain the sizing to one of the standard values defined for the style of window. For example, if you select the width grip, the grip is set to constrain the width to one of the standard values defined for that style of window.
Standard height window with width grip selected
The CTRL key acts as a toggle between standard and custom sizing.
A series of tick marks indicates the standard sizes for the selected dimension. As you move the grip, it snaps to each tick mark and displays the measurement at that mark.
The size and color of the grip tick marks indicate whether setting a standard value for the dimension results in a standard window size. For example, if the height of the window is set to a non-standard value, the window is still not a standard size even if you set the window width to one of the standard width values for that window style. Long grey tick marks indicate that a standard size is possible; short red marks indicate that another dimension is already set to a non-standard value.
3 Resize the dimension:
If you want to change the dimension...
Then...
using a standard size
move the grip until the value you want is displayed, and click once.
using a non-standard size
press CTRL, and either move the grip until the value you want is displayed and then click once, or else enter a value.
Using Grips to Edit Windows | 1021
Changing a window width
1022 | Chapter 22 Windows
Changing a window height
Editing the Dimensions of a Window That Does Not Have Standard Sizes 1 Select the window. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change. 3 Either move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed and then click once, or else enter a value.
Moving a Window Anchored to a Wall 1 Select the window. 2 Select the Location grip. Using Grips to Edit Windows | 1023
Window Location and Flip Grips
3 With the grip selected, press the CTRL key to switch the direction of movement. You can move along the wall, within the wall, and vertically.
4 Move the grip until the window is in the desired location, and click once. Moving a Freestanding Window
1 Select the window. 2 Select the Location grip. 3 Move the window to the appropriate location, and click once. Changing the Hinge Side of a Window 1 Select the window. 2 Select the Flip grip to reverse the side of the window that hinges are located on.
Flipping a window hinge
Changing the Swing Direction of a Window 1 Select the window. 2 Select the Flip grip to reverse the swing direction of the window.
1024 | Chapter 22 Windows
Flipping a window swing
Changing the Rise of a Window 1 Select the window. 2 Select the Rise grip.
Changing a window rise
3 Move the grip until the rise value you want is displayed and click once, or enter a value.
Using Grips to Edit Windows | 1025
Changing the Window Style
Use this procedure to change the style for a window or group of windows. 1 Select one or more windows, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a window style.
Changing How Window Width is Measured
Use this procedure to change how the width of a window or windows is measured. 1 Select the windows you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. Specifying window frame measurement
3 Specify the location to which window width is measured:
If you want to size the windows...
Then...
to the inside frame
select Inside of frame for Measure to.
to the outside frame
select Outside of frame for Measure to.
Changing the Window Swing Angle or Opening Percent
Use this procedure to change the swing angle or opening percent of a window or group of windows. A window with an opening percent of zero is closed.
NOTE Defining the opening percent in display properties overrides this setting on the Properties palette. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042.
1 Select the windows you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Enter a value for Swing angle or Opening percent.
1026 | Chapter 22 Windows
Changing a window swing angle
Changing the Vertical Alignment of a Window
Use this procedure to change the vertical alignment of a window or group of windows. 1 Select the windows you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Specify whether you want the window aligned vertically by sill height or by head height:
If you want to align the windows...
Then...
by sill height
select Sill for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Sill height.
by head height
select Head for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Head height.
Moving a Window Along a Wall
Use this procedure to change the location of one or more windows along a wall by offsetting the windows from a reference location.
This feature is useful when you want to position a window at a specified distance from another object. For example, you may want to specify an exact distance between a series of windows along a wall.
NOTE If the defect marker appears in the wall after you move a window, the window is too close to other objects in the wall or to the end of the wall for the endcaps to fit. Adjust the position of the window until the defect marker disappears.
1 Select the window you want to move, right-click, and click Reposition Along Wall. A marker indicates the current location within the opening.
2 Specify where to measure the offset from:
If you want to measure the offset...
Then...
from the center of the window
select a point near the center of the window.
from an end of the window
select a point on the end of the window you want to measure from.
3 Select a point to measure to (the reference point).
Changing the Vertical Alignment of a Window | 1027
You can select a point along the wall.
4 Specify the distance between the points you selected:
If you want to... move the window to the reference point
Then... enter 0.
move the window a specified distance from the reference point
enter a value for the offset distance.
specify the distance as a measurement between two points, such as the distance between the centers of two windows that are correctly positioned
select the two points measuring the distance.
1028 | Chapter 22 Windows
Repositioning a window along a wall
Moving a Window Within a Wall
Use this procedure to move one or more windows within a wall by offsetting the windows from a reference location. This feature allows you to align windows within the thickness of a wall. You can set an offset distance from any point within a wall, or center the windows between the faces of a wall. You can select doors, windows, and openings and reposition them at the same time. If you select more than one object, you can select only one side to offset.
1 Select the windows you want to move, right-click, and click Reposition Within Wall. A marker indicates the current location within the opening. This may be the center of the frame, the interior face of the frame, or the exterior face of the frame.
Moving a Window Within a Wall | 1029
2 Specify where to measure the offset from: If you want to... center the windows between the faces of the wall offset the windows from the interior or exterior face
Then...
select a point near the center of the window.
select a point on the side of the face you want to measure from.
3 Select a point to measure to. 4 Specify the offset distance from the selected point:
If you want to... center the windows between the faces of the wall
Then...
use the Midpoint osnap to select the midpoint of the end of the wall.
move the windows to the reference point
enter 0.
move the windows a specified distance
enter a value for the offset distance.
specify the distance as a measurement between two points select the two points measuring the distance.
Repositioning a window within a wall
Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of a Window
Use this procedure to change the horizontal position of windows along a wall to which the windows are anchored.
1030 | Chapter 22 Windows
Window position along the X axis parameters
1 Select the windows you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the X axis:
If you want to...
Then...
use the start of the wall as the reference point
under Position Along (X), select Start of wall for From.
use the midpoint of the wall as the reference point
under Position Along (X), select Midpoint of wall for From.
use the end of the wall as the reference point
under Position Along (X), select End of wall for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the windows. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the windows to measure to:
If you want to measure to...
Then...
the start edge of the windows
select Start Edge of object for To.
the center of the windows
select Center of object for To.
the end edge of the windows
select End Edge of object for To.
7 Click OK.
Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of a Window
Use this procedure to change the vertical position of windows in a wall to which the windows are anchored.
Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of a Window | 1031
Window position along the Z axis parameters
1 Select the windows you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the Z axis:
If you want to... use the bottom of the wall height as the reference point
Then...
under Position Along (Z), select Bottom of wall height for From.
use the center of the wall height as the reference point
under Position Along (Z), select Center of wall height for From.
use the top of the wall height as the reference point
under Position Along (Z), select Top of wall height for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the windows. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the windows to measure to:
If you want to measure to...
Then...
the bottom of the windows
select Sill (Bottom) of object for To.
the center of the windows
select Center of object for To.
the top of the windows
select Head (Top) of object for To.
7 Click OK.
Using Anchors to Change the Position of a Window Within a Wall
Use this procedure to change the position of windows horizontally within a wall to which the windows are anchored.
1032 | Chapter 22 Windows
Window position along the Y axis parameters
1 Select the windows you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the Y axis:
If you want to... use the left edge of the wall as your reference point
Then... select Left edge of wall width for From.
use the center of the wall as your reference point
select Center of wall width for From.
use the right edge of the wall as your reference point
select Right edge of wall width for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the windows. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the windows to measure to:
If you want to measure to...
Then...
the front of the windows
select Front of object for To.
the center of the windows
select Center of object for To.
the back of the windows
select Back of object for To.
7 Click OK.
Changing the Orientation of a Window to a Wall
Use this procedure to change the vertical orientation of windows in a wall to which the windows are anchored. 1 Select the windows you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Enter the X and Z rotation angles of the windows. 5 Indicate if you want to reverse the flip direction of the windows in the X, Y, and Z axes:
If you want to reverse...
Then...
the direction the windows open to
select Flip X.
the side of the wall the windows open to
select Flip Y.
the top and bottom of the windows
select Flip Z.
6 Click OK.
Changing the Orientation of a Window to a Wall | 1033
Changing the Opening Endcap Assigned to a Window
Use this procedure to change the opening endcap style assigned to windows.
NOTE Each opening endcap style is generally created for use with a specific wall style. Changing the opening endcap style used for individual windows may cause the wall to display a defect marker.
For more information, see "Opening Endcap Styles" on page 708.
1 Select the windows whose endcaps you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Expand Endcaps. 4 Select the opening endcap style.
Changing the Location of a Freestanding Window
Use this procedure to relocate a freestanding window by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The window also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the window are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the window by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the window on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the window you want to move. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand Location, and click Additional Information. 3 In the Location dialog box, specify the window location:
If you want to... relocate the window
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the window on the XY plane
make the normal of the window parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the window on the YZ plane
make the normal of the window parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the window on the XZ plane
make the normal of the window parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the window
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
4 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Window
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a window. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a window.
1 Double-click the window you want to attach notes or files to. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
4 To add a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
1034 | Chapter 22 Windows
5 Click next to Reference documents, and then attach, detach, or edit a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click , select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
enter text under Description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK.
Window Styles
A window style is a group of properties assigned to a window that determines the appearance and other characteristics of the window.
You can use window styles to represent standard window types for specific jobs and drawings or for office standards. When you create or modify a window style, the windows using the style have the settings and characteristics of the style. Templates provided with Autodesk Architectural Desktop contain window styles for many standard windows. You can create your own window styles and window types for custom windows.
Each window you create has a window style associated with it. The window style controls window properties such as dimensions, design rules, and standard sizes for windows. Style control means that when you change a window style, the windows in the current drawing that use that style change globally.
The design rules are window-style properties that determine the predefined or custom shape and window type. Window shapes such as Arch, Gothic, Rectangular, and Round are the geometric configurations of the window. Custom shapes, such as Hinged-Single-Full Lite, are available for particular window types, for example a Single Casement window type. Window types, such as Awning, Pass Through, or Casement, describe window opening characteristics of closure, swing, and hinging.
You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
Creating Tools from Window Styles
You can create a window tool from any window style. You can drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify default settings for any window created with that tool. For more information, see "Using Window Tools to Create Windows" on page 1015.
Creating a Window Style
Use this procedure to create a window style. You can create a new style with default style properties, or you can create a new style by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Window Styles.
3 Create a window style:
If you want to create a new style... with default properties from an existing style
Then...
right-click Window Styles, and click New.
right-click the window style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new window style, and press ENTER.
Window Styles | 1035
5 Edit the style properties of your new window style:
If you want to... enter a description of the style
Then... click the General tab, and enter a description.
change dimension properties of the style
see "Specifying the Dimensions of a Window Style" on page 1036.
change the design rules of the style
see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Window Style" on page 1038.
change the standard window sizes of the style
see "Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Window Style" on page 1037.
assign materials to the components of the window style,
see "Assigning Materials to a Window Style" on page 1041 and "Turning on Materials for a Window Style" on page 1043.
add classifications to a window style
see "Adding Classifications to a Window Style" on page 1042.
specify the display properties of the style
see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042.
change the appearance of the display components in the style
see "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Window Components" on page 1042.
add custom block components to the style
see "Adding Components to a Window Style" on page 1043.
turn off components in the style
see "Turning Off Components in a Window Style" on page 1045.
remove components from the style
see "Removing Components from a Window Style" on page 1045.
override the opening percentage from the style
see "Specifying the Opening Percentage for a Window Style" on page 1045.
change the sill from the style
see "Specifying the Display of Window Sills in a Window Style" on page 1046.
add muntins to the style
see "Creating Muntins in a Window Style" on page 1047.
add notes, files, or documents to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Window Style" on page 1047.
6 If you want to assign the style to a window tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette. You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Window Tool" on page 1018.
7 Click OK.
Specifying the Dimensions of a Window Style
Use this procedure to change the default dimensions of a window style. 1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
1036 | Chapter 22 Windows
4 Click the Dimensions tab.
5 Change dimension values: If you want to... change the frame width and depth set the frame width to the wall thickness change the sash dimensions change the window thickness
Then... under Frame, enter values for Width and Depth. under Frame, select Auto-Adjust to Width of Wall. under Sash, enter values for Width and Depth. enter a value for Glass Thickness.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Window Style
Use this procedure to create the standard window sizes in a window style. Standard sizes ensure consistency by allowing designers to select sizes from a predefined list specific to the window style. You can also enter custom sizes when you add or modify individual windows.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the window style you want to edit. 4 Click the Standard Sizes tab, and add, change, or remove window-size values:
If you want to...
Then...
create standard sizes
click Add. Under Standard Sizes, enter values for Description, Width and Height; if applicable, enter values for Rise and Bottom Sash.
change a size
select the size, and click Edit. Enter new values as needed.
delete a size
select a size, and click Remove.
Description can be used to identify standard window sizes in window schedules. For example, you can specify a manufacturer's size or model code for Description.
Rise applies to Arch, Gothic, and Peak Pentagon window shapes. Bottom Sash applies to Uneven Single Hung and Uneven Double Hung windows. For more information on window types and shapes, see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Window Style" on page 1038.
5 Click OK.
Creating a Custom Window Shape
Use this procedure to create a profile for a custom window shape. You can make custom shapes for windows and apply them to window styles.
The profile is made up of two concentric, closed polylines. The outer polyline, or ring, becomes the window shape, and the inner polyline creates a void for the inside shape of the window frame. You can create multiple voids by adding more inner polylines. The inner polyline must be entirely within the polyline representing the outer shape of the window frame. The polylines are proportional in size and shape to each other and also to the windows created from the window style.
Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Window Style | 1037
You can draw these polylines anywhere in the drawing and use any convenient scale relative to your final window frame size. One method for sizing the polylines relative to the window is to draw them by snapping to an existing window, and then moving the completed polylines to the side. Adding a profile-based window to a wall
1 Draw concentric, closed polylines representing the outer and inner lines of the window frame. 2 Select the outer polyline, right-click, and click Convert To Profile Definition. 3 Enter a (Add ring). 4 Select the inner polyline. 5 Specify the insertion point of the profile.
The insertion point is typically the lower-left corner. 6 Enter a name for the profile, and click OK. To add the profile to a window style, see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Window Style" on page 1038.
Specifying the Design Rules of a Window Style
Use this procedure to specify the shape and the type of window for a window style. Window shapes are named geometrical descriptions of a window. You can select predefined and custom window shapes, or create your own shape from profiles. For more information, see "Creating a Custom Window Shape" on page 1037. The window type describes the method for opening the window. For example, you can use the Rectangular or Half Round predefined shapes for the Double Casement or Single Hopper window types. Or, you can use a custom Hinged-Single-Full Lite shape for a Single Casement with Muntins.
1038 | Chapter 22 Windows
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the window style you want to edit. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 Select a window shape:
If you want to... use a predefined window shape
Then... under Shape, click Predefined, and select a shape.
use a custom window shape
under Shape, click Use Profile, and select a profile.
6 Select a window type. 7 Click OK.
Editing the Geometry of a Window Style
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of the profile used to define a window style. You can also add a profile to a window style that does not currently use a profile to define its shape.
1 Add a window that has the style you want to change. 2 Add or edit a profile:
If you want to... add an existing profile to the style
Then...
select the window, right-click, and click Add Profile. Select the name of the profile, and click OK.
create a profile and add it to the style
select the window, right-click, and click Add Profile. Select Start from scratch for Profile Definition, enter a name for new profile, and click OK. A rectangular profile is created for you to edit to define the required geometry.
edit the existing profile for the style
select the window, right-click, and click Edit Profile in Place.
3 If prompted that the profile is not drawn to size, click Yes. The area of the window defined by the profile is selected and hatched in the drawing.
NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
4 Edit the profile:
If you want to...
Then...
change the shape of the perimeter of the profile or its ring
select the profile, and use edge and vertex grips to adjust the shape.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Editing the Geometry of a Window Style | 1039
If you want to...
Then...
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
add vertices to the profile remove vertices from the profile replace an existing ring of the profile with new geometry
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Select the ring to replace, and select the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
5 Save or discard the changes: If you want to... restore the profile to its original shape save the changes to the current profile
save the changes to a new profile definition
Then...
select the profile and click .
select the profile, and click . The window style uses the edited profile to define its geometry. Any other objects or styles that use this profile are also updated with the edited geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Profile. Enter a name for the new profile definition, and click OK. The window uses the new profile to define its geometry. Any windows of this style are updated with the new geometry. Other styles or objects that use the original profile are not affected.
About Window Display Components and Materials
A window object consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by a material assigned to each component.
When you assign materials to a window, you assign one material to each display component of the window. For example, you assign a wood material to the frame and a glass material to the window glass.
If you want to use the display properties of the window object or window style instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the window or the window style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in Plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in 3D model views and elevations.
For a complete list of material components and their description, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
The following table lists all window components that can be displayed using materials assigned to them, and identifies the material component of each window component.
Window Component Plan, Plan High Detail, Reflected Frame
Material Component LInework
1040 | Chapter 22 Windows
Window Component Sash Glass Plan Low Detail Window Model Frame Sash Glass Elevation Frame Sash Glass
Material Component LInework Linework
Linework
3D Body 3D Body 3D Body
2D Section/Elevation Linework 2D Section/Elevation Linework 2D Section/Elevation Linework
Assigning Materials to a Window Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a window style. When you assign materials to window components, the components use the display properties of the material. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040.
You can specify the materials used to display the following components of a window style:
Frame Sash Glass Muntin
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a window component, you can change the display properties of the window style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which you want changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Click the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
Assigning Materials to a Window Style | 1041
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Adding Classifications to a Window Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a window style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to window styles. 5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current window style. 6 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style
In most cases, you want the appearance of windows that belong to the same style to be consistent throughout a drawing. To achieve this, you specify the display properties of the windows in each window style:
The layer, color, and linetype of window components The hatching used with each component The cut plane height and the display of components relative to the cut plane Other specific window display information, such as window rise
Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of Window Components Use this procedure to change the display properties of the window style:
Visibility (display component is on or off) By material (material assigned to the display component determines its layer properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE If a material assignment determines the properties of components in the window style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Window Style" on page 1041.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
1042 | Chapter 22 Windows
5 Select the display representation in which you want changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK.
Turning on Materials for a Window Style Use this procedure to turn on material assignments for individual display representations in a window style. For information on creating and assigning materials, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which you want changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for each component you want to be controlled by the material. The ByMaterial checkbox
is unavailable for components that cannot be assigned a material. When you select By Material for a display component, all other settings in the dialog are greyed out. The display properties are now taken from the material definition, so you can no longer set them directly in the display properties of the window style.
9 Click OK.
Using Custom Blocks to Create Window Components You can add custom blocks for components, such as window hardware, to the display components or to replace the default display components. For example, you can replace a simple window frame with a custom window frame containing shutters in which you want the custom component to appear. You can have a different custom block for each display representation. When you add a custom block, you can specify several rules for positioning and scaling the new component. Each custom block also appears in the display properties component list so that you can control its layer, color, and linetype. For more information on adding custom blocks, see "Adding Components to a Window Style" on page 1043. If you create a custom block from mass elements, you can use the material assignments of the mass elements to determine the display properties of the custom block. Be sure to set the properties of the objects used to create your custom blocks to ByBlock. Otherwise, you cannot control these objects through the display properties. For more information about ByBlock, see "Work with Layers" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Adding Components to a Window Style Use this procedure to add or edit custom block components in the display representation of window styles.
1 Create a block for the component to add to the window style. Create the block in the same plane as the window that you use to represent the style. For more information about custom blocks, see "Using Custom Blocks to Create Window Components" on page 1043.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style | 1043
2 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 3 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 4 Select the style you want to edit. 5 Click the Display Properties tab. 6 Select the display representation in which you want changes to appear, and select Style Override.
7 If necessary, click . 8 Click the Other tab. 9 Specify whether to add or edit a block component:
If you want to...
Then...
add a new block component
click Add, and then click Select Block.
edit an existing block component
select the component to edit, and click Edit.
10 Select the block to use, and click OK.
11 Specify whether you want to scale to fit the block component to the object by width, depth, and height, or to lock the XY ratio:
If you want to...
Then...
set the block scale to the width of the object
select Width.
set the block scale to the depth of the object
select Depth.
set the block scale to the height of the object
select Height.
scale the whole block equally, so that one direction is scaled select Lock to XY Ratio. to fit another of the scale criteria
scale the block to its original size
clear all options under Scale to Fit.
12 Specify whether to mirror the block in the X,Y, or Z direction:
If you want to create a mirror of the block... in the X direction
Then... select Mirror X.
in the Y direction
select Mirror Y.
in the Z direction
select Mirror Z.
13 Specify the X, Y, and Z location of the insertion point. 14 Specify an insertion offset of the block in the X, Y, and Z directions. 15 Specify whether the component is for the window frame or window glass component:
If you want to add the block... to the inside or outside of the frame
Then... click Frame Component, and click either Outside or Inside.
to all window glass components or a single window glass component
click Window Component, and click either All or Single. If you select Single, enter the component number.
NOTE If you specified Depth for Scale to Fit, the depth is scaled to the glass thickness. You can scale to the window panel thickness instead by selecting Scale Depth to Panel Thickness.
1044 | Chapter 22 Windows
16 Frame and Glass components are not available in some display representations. Click OK three times.
Turning Off Components in a Window Style Use this procedure to turn off custom blocks in a window style. You can turn off the display of component blocks without removing them from the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which you want to turn off the display of the window component, and
select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Disable Custom Blocks. 9 Click OK.
Removing Components from a Window Style Use this procedure to remove components from a window style. Removing component blocks from a window style deletes them from the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which you want to remove the window component, and select Style
Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select the component to remove, and click Remove. 9 Click OK.
Specifying the Opening Percentage for a Window Style Use this procedure to override the opening percentage in the display representation of a window style. For example, you can specify that a window is displayed closed in model and elevation representations, but open in plan representations.
NOTE This setting overrides other window opening percent settings. If the opening percent is specified here, the opening percent entered on the Properties palette when you add or modify windows is ignored.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which you want to override the opening percent, and select Style
Override.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style | 1045
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Override Open Percent. 9 Enter a value for the opening percent. 10 Click OK.
Specifying the Display of Window Sills in a Window Style Use this procedure to change the window sill dimensions in the Sill Plan display representation. You must use a display representation for a window that has a sill. You can turn on the Sill Plan display representation in addition to the Plan display representation.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select Sill Plan for Display Representations, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab.
Window Sill Dimensions
8 Under Sill Dimensions, enter the sill extension and depth dimensions. Sill components A and B are for the swing or outside of the window. Sill components C and D are for the interior side.
9 If you want to use the cut plane of the wall for anchored windows, instead of using the cut plane of the window, select Respect Cut Plane of Container Object when Anchored.
10 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 11 Under Visible, click the icons to turn on visibility. 12 Click OK twice.
Defining a Window Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a window style that can bound associative spaces. When a window style is set as bounding, by default all windows that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the window style in an individual window, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Window Styles. 3 Select a window style.
1046 | Chapter 22 Windows
4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the checkbox for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Window Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a window style. You can also edit reference files attached to the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the window, enter the description under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add or edit a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 To attach, edit, or detach a reference file, click the Reference Docs tab:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK.
Creating Muntins in a Window Style
Window muntins are secondary framing members that hold multiple panes of glass in a window sash. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides an easy way to create muntins with different layout patterns. Window muntins are available in several patterns that you can customize into many different styles:
Rectangular Diamond Prairie 9 Lights Prairie 12 Lights Starburst Sunburst Gothic
Starburst and Sunburst patterns are a combined-rectangular pattern with a half-round or quarter-round spoked top and can be used for half- and quarter-round as well as rectangular muntins. Gothic is similar but has a gothic muntin pattern. The other patterns are primarily rectangular but fit into half-round window sash.
You can make custom shapes for window muntins by creating profiles from polylines and adding them to a new window style. For information about creating profiles and adding them to a window style, see "Creating a Custom Window Shape" on page 1037.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Window Style | 1047
Window muntin components
Adding Rectangular Muntins to a Window Style
Use this procedure to add rectangular muntins to a window style.
You add the muntins by editing the display properties of the window style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and automatically apply the muntins to all display representations of that window style. You add the muntins block to the window style in the display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the window style.
You can apply the rectangular pattern to all window shapes and window types except Pass Through.
Specifying rectangular pattern muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the window style contains multiple sash, specify whether you want muntins applied to the Top, All, or
a Single sash component in the window:
If you want to attach muntins to...
Then...
the top sash only
under Window Pane, select Top. Top also applies to single sash.
all sash
under Window Pane, select Other, and select All.
an individual sash component
under Window Pane, select Other. Select Single, and specify the index number for window sash. Sash is indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower left corner.
1048 | Chapter 22 Windows
Specifying rectangular muntins for top sash
Specifying rectangular muntins for an individual sash component
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins. 13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to convert... the muntin intersections to corners all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned up
Specifying rectangular muntin cleanup joints
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints. under Muntin, select Convert to Body.
14 Under Lights, select Rectangular for Pattern. 15 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in the vertical direction.
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1049
16 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of light columns in the horizontal direction. 17 Click OK. 18 Add additional muntins:
If you want to add muntins to... another window sash in the window style
Then... repeat this procedure from step 8.
another display representation
click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5.
all display representations of the selected window style
select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
19 Click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 respectively.
Adding Diamond Muntins to a Window Style
Use this procedure to add diamond muntins to a window style.
You add the muntins by editing the display properties of the window style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and automatically apply the muntins to all display representations of that window style. You add the muntins block to the window style in the display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the window style.
You can apply the diamond pattern to all window shapes and window types except Pass Through.
Specifying diamond pattern muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the window style contains multiple sash, specify whether you want muntins applied to the Top, All, or
a Single sash component in the window:
If you want to attach muntins to...
Then...
the top sash only
under Window Pane, select Top. Top also applies to single sash.
1050 | Chapter 22 Windows
If you want to attach muntins to... all sash an individual sash component
Specifying diamond muntins for top sash
Then...
under Window Pane, select Other, and select All.
under Window Pane, select Other. Select Single, and specify the index number for window sash. Sash is indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower left corner.
Specifying diamond muntins to an individual sash component
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins. 13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to... convert the muntin intersections to corners
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1051
Specifying diamond muntin cleanup joints
14 Under Lights, select Diamond for Pattern. 15 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in the vertical direction. 16 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of light columns in the horizontal direction. 17 Click OK. 18 Add additional muntins:
If you want to add muntins to ...
Then...
another window sash in the window style
repeat this procedure from step 8.
another display representation
click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5.
all display representations of the selected window style
select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
19 Click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 respectively.
Adding Prairie-9 Lights Muntins to a Window Style
Use this procedure to add prairie-9 lights muntins to a window style.
You add the muntins by editing the display properties of the window style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and automatically apply the muntins to all display representations of that window style. You add the muntins block to the window style in the display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the window style.
You can apply the prairie-9 lights pattern to all window shapes and window types except Pass Through.
Specifying prairie-9 lights pattern muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles.
1052 | Chapter 22 Windows
3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the window style contains multiple sash, specify whether you want muntins applied to the Top, All, or
a Single sash component in the window:
If you want to attach muntins to...
Then...
the top sash only
under Window Pane, select Top. Top also applies to single sash.
all sash
under Window Pane, select Other, and select All.
an individual sash component
under Window Pane, select Other. Select Single, and specify the index number for window sash. Sash is indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower left corner.
Specifying prairie-9 lights muntins for top sash
Specifying prairie-9 lights muntins to an individual sash component
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins.
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1053
13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to... convert the muntin intersections to corners
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying prairie-9 lights muntin cleanup joints
14 Under Lights, select Prairie-9 Lights for Pattern. 15 Enter a value for Edge X Offset to specify the horizontal distance of the muntins from the edges of the
pane. 16 Enter a value for Edge Y Offset to specify the vertical distance of the muntins from the edges of the pane.
Specifying prairie-9 lights pattern muntin edge X and Y offsets
17 Click OK. 18 Add additional muntins:
If you want to add muntins to... another window sash in the window style another display representation all display representations of the selected window style
Then... repeat this procedure from step 8. click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5. select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
19 Click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 respectively.
Adding Prairie-12 Lights Muntins to a Window Style
Use this procedure to add prairie-12 lights muntins to a window style.
You add the muntins by editing the display properties of the window style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually.
1054 | Chapter 22 Windows
You can also add muntins to a single display representation and automatically apply the muntins to all display representations of that window style. You add the muntins block to the window style in the display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the window style.
You can apply the prairie-12 lights pattern to all window shapes and window types except Pass Through.
Specifying prairie-12 lights pattern muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 If the window style contains multiple sash, specify whether you want muntins applied to the Top, All, or
a Single sash component in the window:
If you want to attach muntins to...
Then...
the top sash only
under Window Pane, select Top. Top also applies to single sash.
all sash
under Window Pane, select Other, and select All.
an individual sash component
under Window Pane, select Other. Select Single, and specify the index number for window sash. Sash is indexed counterclockwise, starting from the lower left corner.
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1055
Specifying prairie-12 lights muntins for top sash
Specifying muntins to an individual sash component
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins. 13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to...
Then...
convert the muntin intersections to corners
under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying muntin cleanup joints
14 Under Lights, select Prairie-12 Lights for Pattern.
1056 | Chapter 22 Windows
15 Enter a value for Edge X Offset to specify the horizontal distance of the muntins from the edges of the pane.
16 Enter a value for Edge Y Offset to specify the vertical distance of the muntins from the edges of the pane.
Specifying prairie-12 lights pattern muntin edge X and Y offsets
17 Click OK. 18 Add additional muntins:
If you want to add muntins to... another window sash in the window style another display representation all display representations of the selected window style
Then... repeat this procedure from step 8. click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5. select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
19 Click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 respectively.
Adding Starburst Muntins to a Window Style
Use this procedure to add starburst muntins to a window style.
You add the muntins by editing the display properties of the window style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and automatically apply the muntins to all display representations of that window style. You add the muntins block to the window style in the display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the window style.
You can add the starburst pattern only to the top window sash. You can apply the starburst pattern to window shapes with a round, half round, or quarter round top.
You can apply the starburst pattern to the following window types: awning, single hopper, single transom, vertical pivot, horizontal pivot, double hung, glider, single hung, single casement, and picture.
Specifying starburst pattern muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1057
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 Under Window Pane, select Top.
NOTE The Starburst pattern is available only when Top is selected for Window Pane.
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins. 13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to...
Then...
convert the muntin intersections to corners
under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying starburst muntin cleanup joints
14 Under Lights, select Starburst for pattern. 15 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in a vertical direction. 16 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of panes in the radial direction. 17 Enter a value for Spokes to specify the number of radial muntin spokes.
Specifying number of spokes for starburst muntins
18 Click OK.
1058 | Chapter 22 Windows
19 Add additional muntins: If you want to add muntins to... another window sash in the window style another display representation all display representations of the selected window style
Then... repeat this procedure from step 8. click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5. select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
20 Click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 respectively.
Adding Sunburst Pattern Muntins to a Window Style
Use this procedure to add sunburst muntins to a window style.
You add the muntins by editing the display properties of the window style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and automatically apply the muntins to all display representations of that window style. You add the muntins block to the window style in the display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the window style.
You can add the sunburst pattern only to the top window sash. You can apply the sunburst pattern to window shapes with a round, half round, or quarter round top.
You can apply the sunburst pattern to the following window types: awning, single hopper, single transom, vertical pivot, horizontal pivot, double hung, glider, single hung, single casement, and picture.
Specifying sunburst pattern muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 Under Window Pane, select Top.
NOTE The Sunburst pattern is available only when Top is selected for Window Pane.
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins.
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1059
13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to... convert the muntin intersections to corners
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying sunburst muntin cleanup joints
14 Under Lights, select Sunburst for Pattern. 15 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in a vertical direction. 16 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of panes in the radial direction. 17 Enter a value for Spokes to specify the number of radial muntin spokes.
Specifying number of spokes for sunburst muntins
18 Under Hub Style, select Closed for no hub pane, or select Open for a hub pane. Specifying sunburst muntin open and closed hubs
19 Enter a value for Radius to specify the radius for the hub.
1060 | Chapter 22 Windows
Specifying sunburst muntin hub radius
20 Click OK. 21 Add additional muntins:
If you want to add muntins to... another window sash in the window style another display representation all display representations of the selected window style
Then... repeat this procedure from step 8. click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5. select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
22 Click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 respectively.
Adding Gothic Muntins to a Window Style
Use this procedure to add gothic muntins to a window style.
You add the muntins by editing the display properties of the window style for a display representation, such as Model or Elevation, where you want the muntins to appear. You can add muntins to display representations individually. You can also add muntins to a single display representation and automatically apply the muntins to all display representations of that window style. You add the muntins block to the window style in the display properties. Each muntins block becomes a display component of the window style.
You can add the gothic pattern only to the top window sash. You can apply the gothic pattern to the following window shapes: round, half round, gothic, peak pentagon, or arch.
You can apply the gothic pattern to the following window types: awning, single hopper, single transom, vertical pivot, horizontal pivot, double hung, glider, single hung, single casement, and picture.
Specifying gothic pattern muntins
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click .
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1061
7 Click the Muntins tab. 8 Click Add. 9 Enter a name for the muntins block. 10 Under Window Pane, select Top.
NOTE The Gothic pattern is available only when Top is selected for Window Pane.
11 Enter a value for the width of all muntins. 12 Enter a value for the depth of all muntins. 13 Clean up the muntin intersections:
If you want to... convert the muntin intersections to corners
Then... under Muntin, select Clean Up Joints.
convert all the muntins to one body with the joints cleaned under Muntin, select Convert to Body. up
Specifying gothic muntin cleanup joints
14 Under Lights, select Gothic for Pattern. 15 Enter a value for Lights High to specify the number of light rows in the vertical direction. 16 Enter a value for Lights Wide to specify the number of panes in the horizontal direction.
Count the panes across the bottom row.
17 Click OK. 18 Add additional muntins:
If you want to add muntins to...
Then...
another window sash in the window style
repeat this procedure from step 8.
another display representation
click OK, and repeat this procedure from step 5.
all display representations of the selected window style
select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides.
19 Click OK three times.
After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and
1062 | Chapter 22 Windows
Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 Editing a Window Muntins Block in a Window Style Use this procedure to edit the muntins settings for a window style. After you create a muntins block, you can change any of its settings by editing the display properties of the window style for each display representation, such as Model or Elevation. You can edit the muntins for display representations individually. You can also edit the muntins for a single display representation and automatically apply the changes to all display representations of that window style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click . 6 Click the Muntins tab. 7 Select the muntins block to edit. 8 Click Edit. 9 Edit any of the settings.
For more information on the settings, see the window muntins type in "Creating Muntins in a Window Style" on page 1047.
10 Select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides to apply the changes to all display representations of the selected window style. Clear this setting to apply the changes to only the selected display representation.
11 When you finish editing the window muntins block in the window style, click OK three times. After you add a muntins block to a window style, you can assign a material, such as wood, and specify display properties, such as color and linetype, for the muntins. For more information, see "About Window Display Components and Materials" on page 1040, "Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style" on page 1042, and "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 respectively. Turning Off the Display of Muntins in a Window Style Use this procedure to turn off the display of muntins in a window style. You can turn off the display of window muntins without removing them from the window.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
5 Select the display representation where you want to turn off the display of window muntins, and click .
6 Click the Muntins tab. 7 Select Disable Muntins Blocks. 8 Select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides to apply the changes
to all display representations of the selected window style. Clear this setting to apply the changes to only the selected display representation.
9 Click OK twice.
Creating Muntins in a Window Style | 1063
Removing a Window Muntins Block from a Window Style Use this procedure to remove muntins from a window style. When you remove existing muntins blocks from the window style, they are deleted. To turn off muntins without deleting them, see "Turning Off the Display of Muntins in a Window Style" on page 1063.
1 Open a tool palette that has a window tool. 2 Right-click a window tool, and click Window Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Props tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want to remove window muntins, and click . 6 Click the Muntins tab. 7 Select the muntins block to remove. 8 Click Remove. 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to remove multiple muntins blocks. 10 Select Automatically Apply to Other Display Representations and Object Overrides to apply the changes
to all display representations of the selected window style. Clear this setting to apply the changes to only the selected display representation. 11 When you finish removing muntins blocks from the window style, click OK twice.
1064 | Chapter 22 Windows
Openings
23
An opening is an AEC object that interacts with walls to represent an opening of any size at any elevation. You can also add openings as freestanding objects.
1065
Openings
An opening is an AEC object that interacts with walls to represent an opening of any size at any elevation. You can also add openings as freestanding objects. Opening Shapes When you add an opening to a drawing, you can select from a number of predefined shapes, such as rectangular, half-round, oval, or arch. You can also create openings with custom shapes using profiles to define the geometry of the opening. Examples of predefined shapes for openings
Anchoring Openings After you place an opening in a wall, the opening is constrained to the object and cannot move outside it. Openings can also be anchored to specific locations in walls, so that when the wall moves or changes size, the location of the opening in that object remains constant. Opening Dimensions All openings have height and width. The rise dimension depends on the opening shape. Rise is the height from the top of the rectangular portion of an opening to the peak of the opening for gothic, arch, peak pentagon, and trapezoid shapes. Vertical Alignment of Openings Use the vertical alignment settings to control how to place an opening in the wall, the location of the working point vertically in the wall, and how the opening responds to modifications in height. Use the sill and head height settings to determine the working point on the opening. You can place the working point at the sill or at the head. For example, if you specify the vertical alignment as 0'' and the opening height as 7'0'', the opening height is 7'0''. If you next specify the height of the opening as 6'8'', the sill remains at 0'' and the opening height becomes 6'8''. For the opening head working point, if you specify the vertical alignment as 7'0'' and the opening height as 7'0'', the opening height is 70''. If you specify the opening height as 6'8'', the head remains at 7'0'' and the sill becomes 4''.
Using Opening Tools to Create Openings
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place openings by selecting an opening tool with a specific opening style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with all of its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use opening tools to create new openings by applying tool properties to existing door/window assemblies, doors and windows.
1066 | Chapter 23 Openings
Tool palette containing opening tool
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain a sample opening tool that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain opening tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Sample Palette catalog Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain opening tools with properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating an Opening
Use this procedure to add an opening that has the properties specified in the opening tool that you select. To specify settings when you add an opening, see "Creating an Opening with User-Specified Settings" on page 1068. Adding an opening to a wall
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select an opening tool. If necessary, scroll to display the desired tool.
2 Select a wall in which to insert the opening, or press ENTER to add a freestanding opening. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 Specify the insertion point of the opening.
Creating an Opening | 1067
If you are adding a freestanding opening, specify the rotation of the opening after you specify the insertion point. 4 Continue adding openings, and press ENTER.
Creating an Opening with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create an opening with settings that you specify. Adding an opening to a wall
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select an opening tool. If necessary, scroll to display the desired tool.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General.
3 Select a shape for the opening. To specify a custom shape, select Custom for Shape, and select the profile that provides the geometry of the shape for Profile.
4 Expand Dimensions. 5 Enter values for Width, Height, and Rise.
Rise is available only for arch, gothic, peak pentagon, and trapezoid shapes.
6 Expand Location. 7 If you are placing the opening in a wall, specify the opening position:
If you want to...
Then...
position the edge of the opening at a specific distance from select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter a value
the end of a wall segment
for Automatic offset.
center the opening on a wall segment
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and specify a point near the center of the wall segment.
position the opening anywhere along the wall
select Unconstrained for Position along wall.
8 Specify whether you want the opening to be aligned vertically by sill height or by head height:
If you want to...
Then...
align the opening by sill height
select Sill for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Sill height.
1068 | Chapter 23 Openings
If you want to... align the opening by head height
Then...
select Head for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Head height.
9 Specify the insertion point for an opening in a wall or for a freestanding opening:
If you want to...
Then...
place an opening in a wall
select the wall, and specify an insertion point along the wall.
place a freestanding opening
press ENTER, and specify an insertion point and rotation angle for the opening.
10 Continue to place openings, and press ENTER.
Creating an Opening from Doors, Door/Window Assemblies and Windows
Use this procedure to convert a door, door/window assembly, or window to an opening that has the properties of the opening tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the opening.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click an opening tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Door, Door/Window Assembly, Window. 3 Select the door, door/window assembly or window to convert, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the opening in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating and Editing Custom Openings
In addition to using predefined shapes for openings, you can create openings with custom shapes. You create a profile from a closed polyline to define the two-dimensional (2D) geometry of the shape. The profile is then extruded when it is applied to an opening. You can edit the profile to change the shape of the opening. You can then save the changes to the current profile or to a new profile. You can apply the profiles you create to any openings.
Creating a Profile for a Custom Opening
Use this procedure to create a profile that provides the geometry for an opening with a custom shape. You can create the profile as you add it to an opening. However, if the shape you need is elaborate and has curved segments, you may find it easier to create the profile from a polyline first. You can then add the profile to the opening.
1 Draw concentric, closed polylines representing the opening and any insets. 2 Select the polylines, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Select the outermost polyline. 4 Enter a (Add ring). 5 Select an inner polyline. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to add more rings to the profile. 7 Specify the insertion point of the profile. 8 Enter n (New), enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
Creating an Opening with a Custom Shape
Use this procedure to create an opening with a custom shape and other settings that you specify.
Creating an Opening from Doors, Door/Window Assemblies and Windows | 1069
Adding an opening with a custom shape
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select an opening tool. If necessary, scroll to display the desired tool.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Custom for Shape. 4 Select the profile that provides the geometry of the shape for Profile. 5 Expand Dimensions. 6 Enter values for Width and Height. 7 Expand Location. 8 If you are placing the opening in a wall, specify the opening position:
If you want to...
Then...
position the edge of the opening at a specific distance from select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter a value
the end of a wall segment
for Automatic offset.
center the opening on a wall segment
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and specify a point near the center of the wall segment.
position the opening anywhere along the wall
select Unconstrained for Position along wall.
1070 | Chapter 23 Openings
9 Specify whether you want the opening to be aligned vertically by sill height or by head height:
If you want to... align the opening by sill height
Then...
select Sill for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Sill height.
align the opening by head height
select Head for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Head height.
10 Specify the insertion point for an opening in a wall or for a freestanding opening:
If you want to... place an opening in a wall
Then... select the wall, and specify an insertion point along the wall.
place a freestanding opening
press ENTER, and specify an insertion point and a rotation angle for the opening.
11 Continue to place openings, and press ENTER.
Editing the Geometry of a Custom Opening
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of a profile that determines the shape of a custom opening. You can save the changes to the existing profile or to a new profile.
1 Select the opening that has the shape you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Profile In Place. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the custom opening.
A temporary profile for editing a custom opening
2 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
Edit the profile:
If you want to...
Then...
change the shape of the perimeter of the profile or its rings
select the profile, and use edge and vertex grips to adjust the shape.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added, as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc, as well.
Editing the Geometry of a Custom Opening | 1071
If you want to...
Then...
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
add vertices to the profile
remove vertices from the profile
replace an existing ring of the profile with new geometry add a ring to the profile
remove a ring from the profile
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Select the ring to replace, and select the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
draw the linework in place on the temporary profile. Select the profile, right-click, and click Add Ring. Select the geometry to define the ring. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Ring. Select the ring to remove, and press ENTER. This option does not appear if the profile has only one ring.
Profile for custom opening after editing
3 Save or discard the changes: If you want to... restore the opening to its original shape save the changes to the current profile
save the changes to a new profile
Then...
click
.
click
.The opening uses the edited profile to define
its geometry. Any other objects or styles that use this profile
are also updated with the edited geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Profile. Enter a name for the new profile, and click OK. The opening uses the new profile to define its geometry. Other styles or objects that use the original profile are not affected.
Creating an Opening Tool
Use this procedure to create an opening tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own opening tools if you are placing multiple openings that have the same properties.
1072 | Chapter 23 Openings
For example, you are creating a restaurant floor plan that contains openings of various sizes. To work efficiently, you can create an opening tool for each size. You can then select the appropriate tool to place openings in the floor plan.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from an opening in the drawing
select the opening, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the tool catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
4 Enter a name for the tool.
5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. This description is used as the tooltip on the tool palette, and to describe the tool if it is stored in a tool catalog.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the opening that you can create using this opening tool. 8 If you do not want to use the default layer key for openings, select a layer key. 9 If you want to override the default layer name for openings, select a layer override. 10 Select a shape for the opening.
To specify a custom shape, select Custom for Shape, and select the profile that provides the geometry of the shape for Profile.
11 Expand Dimensions. 12 Enter values for Width, Height, and Rise.
Rise is available only for arch, gothic, peak pentagon, and trapezoid shapes.
13 Expand Location. 14 If you are placing the opening in a wall, specify the opening position:
If you want to...
Then...
position the edge of the opening at a specific distance from the end of a wall segment
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and enter a value for Automatic offset.
center the opening on a wall segment
select Offset/Center for Position along wall, and specify a point near the center of the wall segment.
position the opening anywhere along the wall
select Unconstrained for Position along wall.
15 Specify whether you want the opening to be aligned vertically by sill height or by head height:
If you want to... align the opening by sill height
Then... select Sill for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Sill height.
align the opening by head height
select Head for Vertical alignment, and enter a value for Head height.
Creating an Opening Tool | 1073
16 Click OK.
Editing Openings
After you create an opening, you can change the height, width, and rise. You can also change the endcap conditions applied to the opening. You can move the opening within the wall. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing openings:
Edit openings directly using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter
a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. Change settings on the Properties palette. Select editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected opening.
Using Grips to Edit Openings
Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use opening grips to edit an opening. Editing Opening Dimensions
1 Select the opening. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
Opening dimension grips
3 Move the grip until the desired dimension value is displayed and click once, or enter a value. Changing the Location of an Opening
1 Select the opening. 2 Move the Location grip to change the location of the opening.
Press CTRL to select the direction of movement: along the wall, within the wall, or vertically within the wall.
1074 | Chapter 23 Openings
Opening location grip
Changing the Shape and Dimensions of an Opening
Use this procedure to change the shape and size of an opening. 1 Double-click the opening you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a shape. To specify a custom shape, select Custom for Shape, and select the profile that provides the geometry of the shape for Profile. 4 Expand Dimensions. 5 Change the width, height, or rise for the opening.
Flipping an Opening along the X or Y Axis
Use this procedure to reorient an opening along its X or Y axis. TIP You can also flip an opening along its X axis using the Flip grip that is displayed when you select an opening.
1 To flip an opening along the X axis, select the openings you want to change, right-click, and click Wall Anchor Flip X. Opening in original position, and flipped along its X axis
2 To flip an opening along the Y axis, select the openings, right-click, and click Wall Anchor Flip Y.
Changing the Shape and Dimensions of an Opening | 1075
Opening in original position, and flipped along its Y axis
Changing Endcap Style for an Opening
Use this procedure to change the opening endcap style used at each side of an opening. An endcap is a user-definable condition for the edges of an opening. For more information about opening endcap styles, see "Opening Endcap Styles" on page 708.
1 Double-click the opening you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand Location, and expand Endcaps. 3 Select an opening endcap style.
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Opening
Use this procedure to apply the properties of an opening tool to one or more openings. 1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the desired tool. 2 Right-click an opening tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Opening. 3 Select the openings, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the openings in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Repositioning an Opening
Use this procedure to change the location of an opening along the wall by offsetting the opening from a reference location. This feature is useful when you want to position an opening at a specified distance from another object. For example, you may want to specify an exact distance between a series of openings along a wall.
1076 | Chapter 23 Openings
Repositioning an opening by offsetting points
1 Select the opening you want to move, right-click, and click Reposition Along Wall. A marker indicates the current location within the opening: left jamb, center of opening, or right jamb.
2 Specify how to measure the offset:
If you want to... measure the offset from the center of the opening
Then... select a point near the center of the opening.
measure the offset from the left or right jamb
select a point on the jamb of the opening from which you want to measure.
Repositioning an Opening | 1077
Selecting the center of the opening for measuring the offset
3 Select a point to measure to (the reference point). You can select a point along the wall. Specifying a reference point
4 Specify the distance between the points you selected:
If you want to...
Then...
move the opening to the reference point
enter 0 (zero).
move the opening a specified distance from the reference point
enter a value for the offset distance.
specify the distance as a measurement between two points, such as the distance between the centers of two openings that are correctly positioned
specify the two points measuring the distance.
Opening repositioned along the wall
Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of an Opening
Use this procedure to change the horizontal position of openings along a wall to which the openings are anchored.
You can also change the horizontal position of the opening using the Location grip. For more information, see "Using Grips to Edit Openings" on page 1074.
1078 | Chapter 23 Openings
Positioning an opening horizontally
1 Select the openings you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the X axis:
If you want to...
Then...
use the start of the wall as the reference point
under Position Along (X), select Start of wall for From.
use the midpoint of the wall as the reference point
under Position Along (X), select Midpoint of wall for From.
use the end of the wall as the reference point
under Position Along (X), select End of wall for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the openings. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the openings to measure to:
If you want to measure... to the start edge of the opening
Then... select Start edge of object for To.
to the center of the opening
select Center of object for To.
to the end edge of the opening
select End edge of object for To.
7 Click OK.
Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of an Opening
Use this procedure to change the vertical position of openings in a wall to which the openings are anchored. You can also change the vertical position of the opening using the Location grip. For more information, see "Using Grips to Edit Openings" on page 1074.
Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of an Opening | 1079
Changing the vertical position of an opening
1 Select the openings you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the Z axis:
If you want to... use the bottom of the wall height as the reference point
Then...
under Position Along (Z), select Bottom of wall height for From.
use the center of the wall height as the reference point
under Position Along (Z), select Center of wall height for From.
use the top of the wall height as the reference point
under Position Along (Z), select Top of wall height for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the openings. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the openings to measure to:
If you want to...
Then...
measure to the bottom of the openings in wall
select Sill of object for To.
measure to the center of the openings in walls
select Center of object for To.
measure to the top of the openings in walls
select Head of object for To.
7 Click OK.
Changing the Position of an Opening Within a Wall
Use this procedure to change the horizontal position of openings within a wall to which the openings are anchored. You can also change the position of the opening within a wall using the Location grip. For more information, see "Using Grips to Edit Openings" on page 1074.
1080 | Chapter 23 Openings
Changing the position of an opening within a wall
1 Select the openings you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Select the reference point for the anchor along the Y axis:
If you want to...
Then...
use the left edge of the wall as your reference point
select Left edge of wall width for From.
use the center of the wall as your reference point
select Center of wall width for From.
use the right edge of the wall as your reference point
select Right edge of wall width for From.
5 Enter the distance from the reference point at which to place the openings. Use a negative value to measure from endpoint to start point.
6 Select the position of the openings to measure to:
If you want to... measure to the front of the opening
Then... select Front of object for To.
measure to the center of the opening
select Center of object for To.
measure to the back of the opening
select Back of object for To.
7 Click OK.
Changing the Orientation of an Opening to a Wall
Use this procedure to change the vertical orientation of an opening in a wall to which the openings are anchored. 1 Select the openings you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Enter the X and Z rotation angles of the openings. 5 Indicate if you want to reverse the flip direction of the opening in the X and Z axes:
If you want to...
Then...
reverse the direction of the opening
select Flip X.
reverse the top and bottom of the opening
select Flip Z.
reverse the position of the opening in the side of the wall select Flip Y.
6 Click OK.
Changing the Orientation of an Opening to a Wall | 1081
Specifying the Display of Sills for an Opening
Use this procedure to change the sill dimensions for an opening in the Sill Plan display representation. You must use a display representation for an opening that has a sill. You can turn on the Sill Plan display representation in addition to the Plan display representation.
1 Right-click an existing opening, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select Sill Plan for Display Representations, and select Style Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Other tab.
Opening sill dimensions
6 Under Sill Dimensions, enter the sill extension and depth dimensions. Sill components A and B are for the outside of the opening. Sill components C and D are for the interior side.
7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Under Visible, click the icons to turn on visibility. 9 Click OK three times.
Changing the Location of an Opening
Use this procedure to relocate a freestanding opening by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The opening also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the opening are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the opening by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the opening on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
1 Double-click the opening.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location.
3 Click Additional information.
4 Specify a new location, orientation, or rotation angle:
If you want to... relocate the opening
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the opening on the XY plane
make the normal of the opening parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the opening on the YZ plane
make the normal of the opening parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the opening on the XZ plane
make the normal of the opening parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the opening
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
1082 | Chapter 23 Openings
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an Opening
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach hyperlinks or reference files to an opening. You can also edit reference files attached to the style.
1 Double-click the opening to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, enter the note, and click OK. 5 Click the setting for Reference Docs. 6 Attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click , select a file, and click OPEN.
edit the description of a reference file
select the description of the file, and edit the description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click .
7 Click OK.
Changing the Display Properties of Openings
You use the display properties of openings to control their appearance in a drawing. In addition, you can create custom components for openings by adding custom blocks to any display representation where you want the components to appear.
Specifying the Display Properties of an Opening
Use this procedure to change the properties of the following display components of an individual opening:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE Openings do not have material assignments.
1 Select the opening you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation in which to display changes, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current one.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an Opening | 1083
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching of an Opening
Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of an opening. Hatching is displayed only in display representations used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
1 Select the opening you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation in which to display the changes. 4 Specify whether changes apply to all openings, or only to the selected opening:
If you want to...
Then...
apply the hatching to all openings in the drawing
verify that Object Override is cleared, and click .
apply the hatching only to the selected opening
select Object Override. If necessary, click .
The display representation in bold is the current one.
5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Verify that the Hatch display component is turned on. 7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching:
If you want to... select a hatching pattern that is available in the software
Then... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select single hatching
select User-Defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select double hatching
select User-Defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
orient the hatching to the object regardless of the object rotation
Then... select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
14 Click the Fill type tab.
1084 | Chapter 23 Openings
15 Select a graphic representation to use for hatching the opening. Specifying hatching graphics for openings
16 Click OK twice.
Using Custom Blocks to Create Opening Components
You can add custom blocks for components, such as hardware, to the display components or to replace the default display components. You can have a different custom block for each display representation. You can specify several rules for positioning and scaling the new component. Each custom block also appears in the display properties component list so that you can control its layer, color, and linetype. If you create a custom block from mass elements, you can use the material assignments of the mass elements to determine the display properties of the custom block. Be sure to set the properties of the objects used to create your custom blocks to ByBlock. Otherwise, you cannot control these objects through the display properties. For more information, see "Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks" in AutoCAD help
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Adding Components to an Opening
Use this procedure to add or edit custom block components in the display representation of openings.
1 Create a block for the component to add to the opening. Create the block in the same plane as the opening.
2 Select the opening you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 3 Click the Display Properties tab. 4 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Object Override.
5 If necessary, click . 6 Click the Other tab. 7 Specify whether to add or edit a block component:
If you want to... add a new block component
Then... click Add.
edit an existing block component
select the component to edit, and click Edit. Proceed to step 10.
8 Click Select Block. 9 Select the block to use, and click OK.
Using Custom Blocks to Create Opening Components | 1085
10 Specify whether you want to scale to fit the block component to the object by width, depth, and height, or to lock the XY ratio:
If you want to...
Then...
set the block scale to the width of the object
select Width.
set the block scale to the depth of the object
select Depth.
set the block scale to the height of the object
select Height.
scale the whole block equally, so that one direction is scaled select Lock XY Ratio. to fit another of the scale criteria
scale the block to its original size
clear all options under Scale to Fit.
11 Specify whether to mirror the block in the X,Y, or Z direction:
If you want to...
Then...
create a mirror of the block in the X direction
select Mirror X.
create a mirror of the block in the Y direction
select Mirror Y.
create a mirror of the block in the Z direction
select Mirror Z.
12 Specify the X, Y, and Z location of the insertion point. 13 Specify an insertion offset of the block in the X, Y, and Z directions. 14 Click OK three times.
Turning Off Custom Components in an Opening
Use this procedure to turn off custom blocks in an opening. You can turn off the display of component blocks without removing them from the opening.
1 Select the opening you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation in which to turn off the display of the custom component, and select
Object Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Other tab. 6 Select Disable Custom Blocks. 7 Click OK twice.
Removing Custom Components from an Opening
Use this procedure to remove components from an opening. Removing custom blocks deletes them from the opening.
1 Select the opening you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation in which to remove the component, and select Object Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Other tab. 6 Select the component to remove, and click Remove.
1086 | Chapter 23 Openings
7 Click OK twice.
Removing Custom Components from an Opening | 1087
1088 | Chapter 23 Openings
Stairs
24
Stairs are AEC objects that use flights of treads and risers to accommodate vertical circulation. Stairs also interact with railing objects. You can control the style of the stair, the shape of the landing, the type of treads, and the height and width of the stair run.
1089
Stairs
Stairs are AEC objects that use flights of treads and risers to accommodate vertical circulation. Stairs also interact with railing objects. You can control the style of the stair, the shape of the landing, the type of treads, and the height and width of the stair run.
Stair Shapes
While strictly rectangular stairs are predominant in modern buildings, in some cases the edges of a flight are not parallel, or they might be curved. Landings can also be non rectangular. Stairs allow the use of nearly arbitrary profiles for the edges of flights and landings. In addition, railings and stringers can be anchored to stairs and can follow the edges of flights and landings. You can create custom stairs from linework or profiles to model different conditions as well.
Landings and Turns
Stairs are created at a specified overall height that requires a total length based on the tread length. Within that length, you can place landings or turns. When you begin to create a stairway, a rectangular box is displayed that represents the width and length of the stair as if it were a straight stairway. As you select consecutive points, depending upon the shape of the stair, landings and turns are created.
Materials in Stairs
In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to a stair. These materials are displayed in wireframe and working shade views, or when linked into VIZ Render. Materials have specific settings for the physical components of a stair, such as risers, nosing, and treads.
Stair in wireframe and rendered views
Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a number of predefined materials for common design purposes, which contain settings for stair components. You can use predefined materials, or modify them for your designs. You can also create your own materials. Object styles provided with the software have appropriate materials already assigned to them. For more information, see "Stair Materials and Display Components" on page 1198.
Specifying AEC Options for Stairs
Use this procedure to specify parameters and options for stairs that are not specified in the stair styles or display properties. These options are on the AEC Object Settings tab of the Options dialog box:
Presentation format Node Osnaps Flight height measurement Calculator limits
1 On the Format menu, click Options. 2 Click the AEC Object Settings tab. 3 Specify the stair defaults:
If you want to... display the stair with no cut lines or path
Then... select Presentation Format (No Cut Lines or Path).
1090 | Chapter 24 Stairs
If you want to...
Then...
use Node Osnap to select the corners of the stairs and landings
select Flight and Landing Corners for Node Osnap.
specify the stair height distance above the start of the stair and below the end of the stair as the position for the Node Osnap
select Vertical Alignment for Node Osnap.
include top and bottom offsets in the stair height measurement
select Finished Floor to Floor for Measure Stair Height.
ignore top and bottom offsets in the stair height measurement select Rough Floor to Floor for Measure Stair Height.
display the stair with a defect marker when an edit causes it to violate the calculation limits set in the Calculation Rules tab of the Stair Style dialog box
select Strict for Calculator Limits.
display the stair normally when an edit causes it to violate the calculation limits set in the Calculation Rules tab of the Stair Style dialog box
select Relaxed for Calculator Limits.
NOTE The Calculator Limits setting is stored with the drawing. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Release 3.3 or earlier version drawings have the Calculator limits set to Relaxed by default. Any new drawing has it set to Strict by default.
4 Click OK.
Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place stairs using a stair tool with a specific stair style and other predefined properties. You can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change the properties that are not controlled by the style. The following catalogs provided with the software contain stair tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog
Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain stair tools with stair styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating a Stair
Use this procedure to add a new stair that has the properties specified in the stair tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a stair, see "Creating a Straight Stair with User-Specified Settings" on page 1092.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Specify the insertion point of the stair. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 Specify the direction point of the stair. The stair is created at the length necessary to accommodate the values specified.
4 Continue adding stairs, and press ENTER.
Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs | 1091
Creating a Straight Stair with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a straight stair with settings that you specify. Creating a straight stair
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 In Shape, select Straight. 5 Specify the vertical orientation of the stair:
If you want to...
Then...
draw the stair from this floor to the floor above
select Up for Vertical Orientation.
draw the stair from this floor to the floor below
select Down for Vertical Orientation.
6 Expand Dimensions. 7 Specify stair dimensions:
If you want to... specify the width of the stair specify the height of the stair specify the justification of the stair
Then...
enter a value for Width.
enter a value for Height.
enter a value for Justify. The Justify value controls the insertion point when you place the stair (left, center, or right) at the beginning of the stair run.
1092 | Chapter 24 Stairs
If you want to... end the stair run with a riser
Then... select Riser for Terminate with.
end the stair run with a tread
NOTE Stairs that end with a riser will have an overall height that is one tread thickness less than the floor-to-floor height specified.
select Tread for Terminate with.
end the stair run with a landing
select Landing for Terminate with.
specify the overall linear length of the stair specify the total number of stair risers
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Straight Length.
When Straight Length is set to (automatic), the value is calculated based on the tread size and riser count.
When Straight Length is (user-defined), the stair length is equal to the dimension entered, and the other three values are adjusted within the code limits.
When Riser Count is user-defined, the tread depth is increased or decreased to accommodate the stair.
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Riser Count.
When Riser Count is set to (automatic), the number of risers is based on the overall length and overall height of the stair and the code limits specified on the Design Rules tab. The Straight Length value of the stair is adjusted automatically.
Creating a Straight Stair with User-Specified Settings | 1093
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height of each riser in the stair flight
When Riser Count is (user-defined), you can specify a value that is used to calculate the tread depth and riser height. If these values fall outside the stair limits, an error message is displayed.
select Calculation rules, set all fields to (automatic), click
the icon to Riser to change it to Riser.
and enter a value for
NOTE If a value is set to user-defined on the Calculation rules worksheet, it can be modified directly in the Properties palette.
NOTE If is displayed next to a field in the Calculation Rules dialog box, that field can't be changed until
another field is changed from (user-defined) to (automatic).
8 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the stair. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
9 Specify the endpoint of the stair. 10 Continue adding stairs, and press ENTER.
Creating a Multi-Landing Stair with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create a multi-landing stair. You can use multi-landing stair shapes to define both straight and angled stair runs. You can insert quarter-landings, half-landings, and turns. This type of stair is constrained by the design rules on the stair and the floor-to-floor height. For more information about stair design rules, see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Stair Style" on page 1192. If you are drawing the risers or flights of a stair, lines for each tread are shown. If you are drawing a flat landing, no tread lines are shown. If you are drawing a turn-type landing, angled tread lines are shown through the turn. These temporary lines do not necessarily represent the actual locations of tread lines in the final stair. In addition, the number of risers currently added to the stair is displayed (to the left of the stair), as a fraction of the total number of risers required for the stair; for example, "10/18."
NOTE To create a straight stair with user-specified landings, use the multi-landing shape with half-landings. Select all the points in a straight line to define the flight start points and flight endpoints.
1094 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Creating a multi-landing stair with 1/4 landings
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 In Shape, select Multi-landing. 5 Specify the turn type:
If you want to...
Then...
create a flat landing with a user-defined length where the stair run turns
select 1/2 landing for Turn type.
create stairs with a user-defined length where the stair run turns with treads through the turn
select 1/2 turn for Turn type.
NOTE These stairs must have at least three segments and each corner must turn in the same direction.
create a flat landing where the stair turns, with the length of the landing equal to the width of the stair
select 1/4 landing for Turn type.
NOTE These stairs typically have two or more flights joined by square landings.
Creating a Multi-Landing Stair with User-Specified Settings | 1095
If you want to...
Then...
create stairs having treads along the entire length, with one or more turns in any direction
select 1/4 turn for Turn type.
NOTE These stairs may have two or more segments, and corners may turn in either direction.
6 Specify the vertical orientation of the stair: If you want to... draw the stair from this floor to the floor above draw the stair from this floor to the floor below
7 Expand Dimensions. 8 Specify stair dimensions:
If you want to... specify the width of the stair specify the height of the stair specify the justification of the stair
end the stair run with a riser
Then... select Up for Vertical Orientation. select Down for Vertical Orientation.
Then... enter a value for Width. enter a value for Height. enter a value for Justify. The Justify value controls the insertion point when you place the stair (left, center, or right) at the beginning of the stair run. select Riser for Terminate with.
end the stair run with a tread end the stair run with a landing
NOTE Stairs that end with a riser will have an overall height that is one tread thickness less than the floor-to-floor height specified. select Tread for Terminate with.
select Landing for Terminate with.
1096 | Chapter 24 Stairs
If you want to... specify the overall linear length of the stair
Then...
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Straight Length.
When Straight Length is set to (automatic), the value is calculated based on the tread size and riser count.
specify the total number of stair risers
specify the height of each riser in the stair flight specify the tread depth for each tread in the stair flight
When Straight Length is (user-defined), the stair length is equal to the dimension entered, and the other three values are adjusted within the code limits.
When Riser Count is user-defined, the tread depth is increased or decreased to accommodate the stair.
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Riser Count.
When Riser Count is set to (automatic), the number of risers is based on the overall length and overall height of the stair and the code limits specified on the Design Rules tab. The Straight Length value of the stair is adjusted automatically.
When Riser Count is (user-defined), you can specify a value that is used to calculate the tread depth and riser height. If these values fall outside the stair limits, an error message is displayed.
select Calculation rules, set all fields to (automatic), click
the icon to Riser to change it to Riser.
, and enter a value for
select Calculation rules, set all fields to (automatic), click
the icon next to Tread to change it to , and enter a value for Tread. You can also specify the Riser count when you set the tread depth.
NOTE If a value is set to user-defined on the Calculation rules worksheet, it can be modified directly in the Properties palette.
NOTE If is displayed next to a field in the Calculation Rules dialog box, that field can't be changed until another field is changed from (user-defined) to (automatic).
9 Expand Advanced. 10 Specify the Floor Settings:
If you want to...
Then...
change the thickness of the floor finish material at the top of enter a value for Top offset. the stair
change the depth of the structure at the top of the stair
enter a value for Top depth.
Creating a Multi-Landing Stair with User-Specified Settings | 1097
If you want to...
Then...
change the thickness of the floor finish material at the bottom enter a value for Bottom offset. of the stair
change the depth of the structure at the bottom of the stair enter a value for Bottom depth.
11 Set the minimum or maximum height or number of risers in a stair flight. 12 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the stair.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
13 Specify the point of the first turn or landing for the stair. 14 Continue specifying points for the stair.
NOTE If you specified Landing for Terminate with, the last point for the stair beyond the final riser defines the end of the landing.
Specifying terminal landing length for multi-landing stair
15 Continue adding stairs, and press ENTER.
Creating an L-Shaped Stair with 45-Degree Tread
Use this procedure to add an L-shaped stair with a 45-degree turn in the winder. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Stair Winder Styles. 3 Right-click, select New, and enter Single Point 2 Tread as the style name. 4 On the Settings tab, confirm that Use Riser Line is not selected. 5 Specify Single Point for Winder Type. 6 Select Adjust Winder Turn and enter 2 for Number of Treads in Turn. 7 Click OK. 8 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. 9 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General.
10 In Shape, select Multi-landing. 11 In Turn type, select 1/4 turn.
1098 | Chapter 24 Stairs
12 Right-click, click Flight length, and enter t for Tread length. Creating an L-shaped stair with a 45 degree tread
NOTE If the stair style has Extend Landings to Prevent Risers and Treads Sitting under Landings turned on, the flight will not be pivoted exactly around the end of the stair. 13 In Winder Style, select Single Point 2 Tread. 14 Draw a stair with one 90-degree turn, and press ENTER. 15 Select the stair, enter winderturnadjust at the command line, and press ENTER. NOTE The winderturnadjust command changes the number of treads in a turn zone for a stair using a Single Point winder style. The default number of treads is specified in the Settings tab of the Stair Winder Styles. You can change the amount of treads on the command line while running the winderturnadjust command. When you change the number of treads in the turn zone, the construction line changes location across the stair because the tread length must remain constant along the stair. Changing the winder treads changes the width, so the line moves. The construction line can be edited with grips. If you move the construction line, the winder treads are affected.
Creating an L-Shaped Stair with 45-Degree Tread | 1099
Creating a U-Shaped Stair with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a U-shaped stair with settings that you specify. U-shaped stairs have two equal-length runs joined by a half-landing. The justification setting controls where the points that define the stair fall within its width.
When drawing the stair, the flights are shown with lines for each tread. Flat landings have no tread lines, while turn-type landings show tread lines through the entire turn. For turn-type stairs, these temporary lines do not necessarily represent the actual locations of tread lines in the final stair.
Creating a U-shaped stair
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 In Shape, select U-shaped. 5 Specify the turn type:
If you want to...
Then...
create a flat landing where the stair run turns back in the opposite direction
select 1/2 landing for Turn type.
create stairs where the stair run turns back in the opposite direction with treads throughout the run
select 1/2 turn for Turn type.
6 Specify the horizontal orientation of the stair:
If you want to...
Then...
draw the U-shaped stair so that the right is the outer edge of select Counterclockwise for Horizontal Orientation. the stair and left is the inner edge
draw the U-shaped stair so that the left is the outer edge of select Clockwise for Horizontal Orientation. the stair and right is the inner edge
1100 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Specifying the horizontal direction for U-shaped stairs
7 Specify the vertical orientation of the stair: If you want to... draw the stair from this floor to the floor above draw the stair from this floor to the floor below
8 Expand Dimensions. 9 Specify stair dimensions:
If you want to... specify the width of the stair specify the floor-to-floor height of the stair specify the justification of the stair
end the stair run with a riser
Then... select Up for Vertical Orientation. select Down for Vertical Orientation.
Then... enter a value for Width. enter a value for Height. enter a value for Justify. The Justify value you select controls the insertion point when you place the stair (left, center, or right) at the beginning of the stair run. select Riser for Terminate with.
NOTE Stairs that end with a riser will have an overall height that is one tread thickness less than the floor-to-floor height specified.
Creating a U-Shaped Stair with User-Specified Settings | 1101
If you want to... end the stair run with a tread
end the stair run with a landing
Then... select Tread for Terminate with.
select Landing for Terminate with.
specify the overall linear length of the stair
specify the total number of stair risers specify the height of each riser in the stair flight specify the tread depth for each tread in the stair flight
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Straight Length.
When Straight Length is set to (automatic), the value is calculated based on the tread size and riser count.
When Straight Length is (user-defined), the stair length is equal to the dimension entered, and the other three values are adjusted within the code limits.
When Riser Count is user-defined, the tread depth is increased or decreased to accommodate the stair.
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Riser Count.
When Riser Count is set to (automatic), the number of risers is based on the overall length and overall height of the stair and the code limits specified on the Design Rules tab. The Straight Length value of the stair is adjusted automatically.
When Riser Count is (user-defined), you can specify a value that is used to calculate the tread depth and riser height. If these values fall outside the stair limits, an error message is displayed.
select Calculation rules, set all fields to (automatic), click
the icon to Riser to change it to Riser.
, and enter a value for
select Calculation rules, set all fields to (automatic), click
the icon next to Tread to change it to , and enter a value for Tread. You can also specify the Riser count when you set the tread depth.
1102 | Chapter 24 Stairs
NOTE If a value is set to user-defined on the Calculation rules worksheet, it can be modified directly in the Properties palette.
NOTE If is displayed next to a field in the Calculation Rules dialog box, that field can't be changed until another field is changed from (user-defined) to (automatic).
10 Expand Advanced. 11 Specify the Constraints:
If you want to...
Then...
place the treads and risers with the minimum landing extension
select Free for Alignment.
align the tread of the up flight to the tread of the down flight select Tread to tread for Alignment.
align the tread of the up flight to the riser of the down flight select Tread to riser for Alignment.
align the riser of the up flight to the riser of the down flight select Riser to riser for Alignment.
12 Specify a value for Alignment offset. When you select Tread to tread, Tread to riser, or Riser to riser, you can specify an offset value. A positive offset value means that the down-flight tread location is closer to landing than the up-flight tread location.
Specifying tread to riser alignment offsets
13 Specify a value for the Extend alignment.
14 Specify a value for Uneven tread to determine which flight will be longer if the total number of treads is uneven. Select Upper flight to place the Uneven tread on the upper flight. Select Lower flight to place the uneven tread on the lower flight.
15 Specify floor settings:
If you want to...
Then...
change the thickness of the floor finish material at the top of enter a value for Top offset. the stair
change the depth of the structure at the top of the stair
enter a value for Top depth.
change the thickness of the floor finish material at the bottom enter a value for Bottom offset. of the stair
change the depth of the structure at the bottom of the stair enter a value for Bottom depth.
16 Set the minimum or maximum height or number of risers in a stair flight. 17 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the stair.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 18 Specify the endpoint of the stair.
Creating a U-Shaped Stair with User-Specified Settings | 1103
19 Continue adding stairs, and press ENTER.
Creating a Spiral Stair with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create a circular sweeping and spiral stair. A spiral stair revolves about a common center point from bottom to top. You can specify a radius directly or on the screen only when the arc constraint is free. Otherwise, the radius is determined from the specified tread length and arc constraint. In that case, you need to adjust the tread length to achieve the desired radius. Creating a spiral stair
To create a spiral stair with the specified tread depth (T) that occurs at a specified distance from the inner edge, first construct the stair with a width equal to twice the required distance (A). Next, use Customized Edges to offset the outer edge to the desired total width B. The offset distance is equal to B - 2A. Creating a spiral stair with a specified tread depth at a specified distance
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 In Shape, select Spiral.
1104 | Chapter 24 Stairs
5 Specify the horizontal orientation of the stair: If you want to... draw the spiral stair in a counterclockwise direction draw the spiral stair in a clockwise direction
Specifying the horizontal orientation for a spiral stair
Then... select Counterclockwise for Horizontal Orientation. select Clockwise for Horizontal Orientation.
6 Specify the vertical orientation of the stair: If you want to... draw the stair from this floor to the floor above draw the stair from this floor to the floor below
Then... select Up for Vertical Orientation. select Down for Vertical Orientation.
NOTE If Terminate with is set to Landing, the vertical orientation is up and cannot be changed.
7 Expand Dimensions. 8 Specify stair dimensions:
If you want to... specify the width of the stair specify the floor-to-floor height of the stair specify the justification of the stair
Then...
enter a value for Width.
enter a value for Height.
enter a value for Justify. The Justify value you select controls the insertion point when you place the stair (left, center, or right) at the beginning of the stair run.
Creating a Spiral Stair with User-Specified Settings | 1105
If you want to... end the stair run with a riser
Then... select Riser for Terminate with.
end the stair run with a tread
NOTE Stairs that end with a riser will have an overall height that is one tread thickness less than the floor-to-floor height specified.
NOTE If the vertical orientation is set to Down, Terminate with is set to Riser and cannot be changed.
select Tread for Terminate with.
end the stair run with a landing
select Landing for Terminate with.
specify the exact radius for the spiral stair define the radius for the stair dynamically specify the overall linear length of the stair
select No for Specify On Screen and enter a value for Radius.
select Yes for Specify On Screen.
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Straight Length.
When Straight Length is set to (automatic), the value is calculated based on the tread size and riser count.
When Straight Length is (user-defined), the stair length is equal to the dimension entered, and the other three values are adjusted within the code limits.
When Riser Count is user-defined, the tread depth is increased or decreased to accommodate the stair.
1106 | Chapter 24 Stairs
If you want to... specify the total number of stair risers
specify the height of each riser in the stair flight specify the tread depth for each tread in the stair flight
Then...
select Calculation rules, and then enter a value for Riser Count.
When Riser Count is set to (automatic), the number of risers is based on the overall length and overall height of the stair and the code limits specified on the Design Rules tab. The Straight Length value of the stair is adjusted automatically.
When Riser Count is (user-defined), you can specify a value that is used to calculate the tread depth and riser height. If these values fall outside the stair limits, an error message is displayed.
select Calculation rules, set all fields to (automatic), click
the icon to Riser to change it to Riser.
, and enter a value for
select Calculation rules, set all fields to (automatic), click
the icon next to Tread to change it to , and enter a value for Tread. You can also specify the Riser count when you set the tread depth.
NOTE If a value is set to user-defined on the Calculation rules worksheet, it can be modified directly in the Properties palette.
NOTE If is displayed next to a field in the Calculation Rules dialog box, that field can't be changed until another field is changed from (user-defined) to (automatic).
9 Select the type of arc constraint to use when creating the spiral stair:
If you want to...
Then...
create a spiral stair run with no constraints
select Free for Arc constraint.
create a spiral stair with a specific number of degrees for the select Total Degrees for Arc constraint, and enter a value for
stair flight
Arc angle. This includes the terminal landing or tread.
create a spiral stair with a specific degree for each tread in the stair
select Degrees per Tread for Arc constraint, and enter a value for Arc angle.
10 Expand Advanced. 11 Specify the Floor Settings:
If you want to...
Then...
change the thickness of the floor finish material at the top of enter a value for Top offset. the stair
change the depth of the structure at the top of the stair
enter a value for Top depth.
change the thickness of the floor finish material at the bottom enter a value for Bottom offset. of the stair
Creating a Spiral Stair with User-Specified Settings | 1107
12 Set the minimum or maximum height or amount of risers in a stair flight. 13 Specify the center point for the spiral stair. 14 Specify the location of the stair. 15 Continue adding stairs, and press ENTER.
Creating a Custom Stair from Linework
Use this procedure to create a custom stair from linework. You can model irregularly shaped stairs and treads, and specify multiple flights at varying angles with a custom stair. You can select or create linework defining stair edges and tread edges. Create a custom stair to model complex existing stair conditions for analysis and explore non-code compliant conditions, or generate stair types that are not possible to create using regular Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 stair commands. The stairs outline component of a custom stair is delineated by the left and right stair sides, the nosing of the first tread, and the front of the last tread or landing. Stair stringers can be selected as linework, or they can be automatically generated by Architectural Desktop. After you create a custom stair, you can replace stringer paths. You can add or modify stringers by editing the stair style. The current stair properties govern the appearance of stair components in various representations. Create the linework for your custom stair using lines, light-weight polylines, or arc segments. All tread lines must intersect with the sides of the stair.
Linework for custom stairs can represent the following components: left and right stair sides (required) stair path (optional) left, right, and center stair stringers (optional) first tread at current level (required) remaining treads (required)
Creating a Custom Stair from Linework 1 Open the tool palette that contains the stair tool that you want to use, and select the tool. You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
2 Right-click the stair tool and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework. 3 Select the linework that represents the left and right sides of the custom stair.
Only lines, light-weight polylines, or arc segments that intersect all treads can be selected for the stair sides.
1108 | Chapter 24 Stairs
4 Select the linework that represents the stair path, or press ENTER to have it generated automatically.
Only single or multi-segment light-weight polylines or arc segments that intersect all treads can be selected for the stair path. 5 Select the linework that represents the left, right, and center stair stringers, or press ENTER to have the left, right, and center stair stringers generated automatically.
6 Select the linework that represents the first tread at the current level. Only lines, light-weight polylines, or arc segments that intersect the stair sides can be selected for the stair treads.
7 Select the remaining treads.
8 In the Convert to Stair dialog, verify or change the parameter values for Style, Height, Vertical Orientation, and Terminate with. Specify whether to erase the layout geometry, then click OK.
IMPORTANT You cannot convert a custom stair to a ramp stair style.
Creating a Custom Stair from Linework | 1109
The custom stair from linework is generated.
Creating a Custom Stair from Tread Profiles
Use this procedure to create a custom stair from tread profiles. Use defined profiles generated from closed polylines for custom stair treads. All tread profiles in each stair run must either intersect or overlap. The stairs outline component of a custom stair is delineated by the left and right stair sides, the nosing of the first tread, and the front of the last tread or landing. Stair stringers can be selected as linework or they can be automatically generated by Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007. After you create a custom stair, you can replace stringer paths. You can add or modify stringers by editing the stair style. The current stair properties govern the appearance of stair components in various representations.
Linework and profiles for custom stairs can represent the following components: stair path (required) left and right stair stringers (optional) first tread profile at current level (required) remaining treads (required)
Creating a Custom Stair from Tread Profiles 1 Open the tool palette that contains the stair tool that you want to use, and select the tool. You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. 2 Right-click the stair tool and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework. 3 Enter T for Treadprofile. 4 Select the linework that represents the stair path. Only single or multi-segment light-weight polylines or arc segments that intersect all treads can be selected for the stair path.
1110 | Chapter 24 Stairs
5 Select the linework that represents the left, right, and center stair stringers, or press ENTER to have the left, right, and center stair stringers generated automatically.
6 Select the linework that represents the first tread profile at the current level. Only defined profiles can be selected for stair treads.
7 Select the remaining treads.
IMPORTANT You cannot covert a custom stair to a ramp stair style. 8 In the Convert to Stair dialog, verify or change the parameter values for Style, Height, Vertical Orientation,
and Terminate with. Specify whether to erase the layout geometry, then click OK.
IMPORTANT You cannot convert a custom stair to a ramp stair style. The custom stair from tread profiles is generated.
Modifying Custom Stairs
Use these procedures to perform the following modifications for custom stairs: Edit the faces of treads and risers
Modifying Custom Stairs | 1111
Match treads and risers to source components Convert a tread to a riser and back again Replace an existing stringer path with a new stringer path by selecting linework Edit a Custom Stair Tread
1 Use this procedure to convert the edge of a custom stair tread to an arc. Select the custom stair that you want to change, right-click and click Modify Custom Stair Edit Tread/Riser.
2 A grip appears at the midpoint of each tread and riser.
3 Select the bottom Edit Tread grip. You can select either edge or vertex grips to modify the face of the tread. The following grips are displayed for editing the face of a custom stair tread:
4 Move the cursor over the front Edge grip. A tooltip with the following options is displayed: Offset Add Vertex Convert to Arc Offset All
5 Select the Edge grip, and press CTRL twice to cycle to the Convert to Arc option. 6 Specify a new location for the Edge grip.
1112 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Match Tread/Riser 1 Use this procedure to modify a custom stair tread by matching an existing tread on another custom stair. Create 2 custom stairs: one with a source tread to match, and one as the destination custom stair. 2 Select the custom stair that you want to change, right-click, and click Modify Custom Stair Match Tread/Riser. 3 Specify tread to match. You have the option of matching a tread, a riser, or both. 4 Select the tread to match on the source custom stair. 5 Select the tread on the destination custom stair to replace.
Toggle Tread/Landing 1 Use this procedure to convert a custom stair tread to a landing, or convert a custom stair landing to a tread. Select the custom stair that you want to change, right-click, and click Modify Custom Stair Toggle Tread/Riser. 2 Select the tread to convert to a landing.
Replace Stringer Path 1 Use this procedure to replace an existing custom stair stringer path with a new stringer path by selecting linework. The linework must occur within the stair to be valid for selection as a replacement stringer path. Select the custom stair that you want to change, right-click, and click Modify Custom Stair Replace Stringer Path. 2 Specify the left, right, or center stringer path (depending on the custom stair configuration) to replace. 3 Select the linework to represent the new stringer path.
Creating a Ramp
Use this procedure to create a ramp using stairs. The Ramp-Concrete style (in the Stair Styles drawing) includes the correct settings for creating a ramp.
Creating a Ramp | 1113
The ramp stringer type should be used for creating ramps. The stringer facets display component provides the landing lines for ramps, and an End with tread setting makes the connection to the next level work correctly, instead of having one riser height between the ramp and the surface it should meet.
TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.
1 Import the ramp style from the Stair Styles drawing. For information about copying styles into your drawing, see "Copying Styles Between Drawings" on page 459.
2 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 4 Select the Ramp-Concrete style. 5 Specify the location of the stair. 6 Continue adding stairs, and press ENTER.
Creating a U-shaped concrete ramp
Creating a Stair Tool
Use this procedure to create a stair tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own stair tools if you are placing multiple stairs of a specific style and they all have the same property.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a stair in the drawing
Then... select the stair, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a stair style in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
1114 | Chapter 24 Stairs
If you want to... copy a tool in the current tool palette copy a tool from another tool palette
copy a tool from a tool catalog
Then...
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the stair created from this tool, and click OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select a stair style.
NOTE If a multi-landing or u-shaped stair is selected, the turn type can be set. If the turn type is 1/2 or 1/4 turn, the winder style can be set.
10 Select the drawing file containing the style used for this stair. 11 Click OK.
Editing Stairs
You can edit stairs by changing the style of the stair, the width and height of the stair, the size of the tread, and the justification. You can also change constraints, components, landing extensions, and location, in addition to the style and dimensions. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing stairs:
You can directly edit stairs using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics.
For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help.
You can change stair settings on the Properties palette.
You can use editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected stair.
Using Grips to Edit Stairs
When you use grips to edit stairs, the stairway continues to be constrained by the design limits and length specified when the stair was created, if Automatic Length is set to No. This is the case for all stairs in earlier- version drawings. If you move beyond those limits, a warning symbol is displayed.
Viewing the stairs warning symbol
Editing Stairs | 1115
You can use grips to create multi-landing stairs that have skewed landings and angled stair runs. Changing the configuration of a landing may result in changes to the stair run. You can increase or decrease the overall width of the stair run for U-shaped stairs. The radius and start point can be changed for spiral stairs. You can use grips to increase or decrease the overall width of the stair run for spiral stairs. If you change the width of the stair after grip-editing a side, the changes are lost. NOTE You cannot use any of the plan representation grips to alter the floor-to-floor height. Select the stair in a view direction other than TOP to use a grip to change the floor-to-floor height. Each stair shape has different grips associated with it. Using Grips to Edit Straight Stairs Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use straight stair grips to edit stairs. Editing Stair Dimensions
1 Select the straight stair. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
In order to edit the flight width and flight taper, click the Edit Edges grip to access the edges edit mode. When you have finished editing the stair edges, click the Exit Edit Edges grip to return to the default stair edit mode. Straight stair Flight Taper, Flight Width, and Exit Edit Edges grips
1116 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Straight stair Flight Start and End, Location, and Lengthen Stair grips
NOTE The Lengthen Stair grips move a straight stair unless it ends with a landing. 3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. Changing the Location or Position of a Straight Stair 1 Select the straight stair. 2 Select the appropriate grip to change the location of the stair, its start point, construction line, graphics
path, or endpoint. Straight stair Flight Start and End, Lengthen Stair, and Location grips
Using Grips to Edit Stairs | 1117
Straight stair Construction Line Location, Graphics Path Location, and Edit Edges grips
3 Move the stair to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value, and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the stair along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the stair is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the stair is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Height of a Straight Stair
1 Select the straight stair. 2 Move the Height grip to change the height of the stair.
NOTE This grip displays only in 3D views of the stair. Height cannot be edited in Plan view.
1118 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Straight stair Height grip
Using Grips to Edit Multi-Landing Stairs Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use multi-landing stair grips to edit stairs. Editing Multi-Landing Stair Dimensions
1 Select the multi-landing stair. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
In order to edit the flight width and flight taper, click the Edit Edges grip to access the edges edit mode. When you have finished editing the stair edges, click the Exit Edit Edges grip to return to the default stair edit mode. Multi-landing stair Flight Taper and Flight Width, and Landing Width grips
Using Grips to Edit Stairs | 1119
Multi-landing stair landing Edge and Vertex, and Exit Edit Edges grips
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. Changing the Location or Position of a Multi-Landing Stair
1 Select the multi-landing stair. 2 Select the appropriate grip to change the location of the stair, its start point, construction line, graphics
path, or endpoint. Multi-landing stair Flight Start and End, Move Flight, Move Multi-Landing, and Lengthen Stair grips
1120 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Multi-landing stair Landing Turn Point, Construction Line Location, Graphics Path Location, and Edit Edges grips
3 Move the stair to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value, and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the stair along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the stair is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the stair is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Shape of Landings for Multi-Landing Stair
1 Select the multi-landing stair. 2 Select the Edit Edges grip.
In order to edit the landing width, landing edges, and landing vertices, click the Edit Edges grip to access the edges edit mode. When you have finished editing the landing edges, click the Exit Edit Edges grip to return to the default stair edit mode.
Using Grips to Edit Stairs | 1121
Multi-landing stair Flight Taper and Flight Width, and Landing Width grips
Multi-landing stair Landing Edge and Vertex, and Exit Edit Edges grips
3 Move the appropriate grip to change the shape of the landing of the stair. NOTE Once a landing edge has been customized by moving any of the vertex or edge grips, the landing width grips are no longer displayed.
Changing the Location of a Landing for a Multi-Landing Stair 1 Select the multi-landing stair. 2 Move the appropriate grip to change the location of the landing by changing the location of the turn point for each side of the landing, or by moving the entire landing.
Changing the Construction Line or Graphics Path of a Multi-Landing Stair 1 Select the multi-landing stair. 2 Move the Construction Line or Graphics Path grip.
1122 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Multi-landing stair landing Turn Point, Construction Line Location, Graphics Path Location, and Edit Edges grips
NOTE Only one of the Construction Line or Graphics Path can be displayed at a time. This is controlled on the Other tab of the current plan display representation. For information about this setting, see "Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Stair" on page 1187. Changing the Height of a Multi-Landing Stair 1 Select the multi-landing stair. 2 Move the Height grip to change the height of the stair. NOTE This grip displays only in 3D views of the stair. Multi-landing stair Height grip
Using Grips to Edit U-Shaped Stairs Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use U-shaped stair grips to edit stairs. Editing U-Shaped Stair Dimensions
1 Select the U-shaped stair.
Using Grips to Edit Stairs | 1123
2 Select the Edit Edges grip. In order to edit the flight width and flight taper, click the Edit Edges grip to access the edges edit mode. When you have finished editing the stair edges, click the Exit Edit Edges grip to return to the default stair edit mode. U-shaped stair Flight Taper, Flight Width, and Landing Width grips
U-shaped stair Landing Vertex and Edge, and Exit Edit Edges grips
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. Changing the Location or Position of a U-Shaped Stair
1 Select the U-shaped stair. 2 Select the appropriate grip to change the location of the stair, its start point, construction line, graphics
path, or endpoint. U-shaped stair Flight Start and End, Flip, and Location grips
1124 | Chapter 24 Stairs
U-shaped stair Graphics Path Location, Construction Line Location, and Edit Edges grips
3 Move the stair to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value, and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the stair along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the stair is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the stair is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Shape of Landings for a U-Shaped Stair
1 Select the U-shaped stair. 2 Select the Edit Edges grip.
In order to edit the landing width, landing edges, and landing vertices, click the Edit Edges grip to access the edges edit mode. When you have finished editing the landing edges, click the Exit Edit Edges grip to return to the default stair edit mode. U-shaped stair Flight Taper, Flight Width, and Landing Width grips
Using Grips to Edit Stairs | 1125
U-shaped stair Landing Vertex and Edge, and Exit Edit Edges grips
3 Move the appropriate grip to change the shape of the landing of the stair. Changing the Construction Line or Graphics Path of a U-Shaped Stair
1 Select the U-shaped stair. 2 Move the Construction Line or Graphics Path grip.
U-shaped stair Graphics Path Location, Construction Line Location, and Edit Edges grips
NOTE Only one of the Construction Line or Graphics Path can be displayed at a time. 3 Move the appropriate Flip grip to flip the stair landing from one side of the flight start grip to the other,
or to switch the two flights. Changing the Height of a U-Shaped Stair
1 Select the U-shaped stair. 2 Move the Height grip to change the height of the stair.
NOTE This grip displays only in 3D views of the stair.
1126 | Chapter 24 Stairs
U-shaped stair Height grip
Using Grips to Edit Spiral Stairs Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use spiral stair grips to edit stairs. Editing Spiral Stair Dimensions
1 Select the spiral stair. 2 Select the Edit Edges grip.
In order to edit the flight width and flight taper, click the Edit Edges grip to access the edges edit mode. When you have finished editing the stair edges, click the Exit Edit Edges grip to return to the default stair edit mode. 3 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change. Spiral stair Flight Taper and Width, and Exit Edges Edit grips
4 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. Changing the Location or Position of a Spiral Stair
1 Select the spiral stair. 2 Select the appropriate grip to change the location of the stair, its start point, construction line, graphics
path, or endpoint. You can also flip the stair around the start point.
Using Grips to Edit Stairs | 1127
Spiral stair Radius, Flip, Rotate Flight, and Location grips
Spiral stair Graphics Path Location and Edit Edges grips
3 Move the stair to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value, and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the stair along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the stair is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the stair is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. Changing the Height of a Spiral Stair
1 Select the spiral stair. 2 Move the Height grip to change the height of the stair.
NOTE This grip displays only in 3D views of the stair.
1128 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Spiral stair Height grip
Changing the Width of a Flight
Use this procedure to change width of a stair flight. You can also change the stair width on the Properties palette. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115. NOTE If you change the width of the stair after grip-editing a side, the grip changes are lost.
1 Select the stair. 2 Select a Flight Width grip, move the grip until the width value you want is displayed, and click once.
After selecting a grip, you can also enter a precise value to increase or decrease the width of the stair. The entire edge of the flight moves to the selected location. The flight entry width also changes to fit the new stair width.
Changing the Width of a Flight | 1129
Using grips to change stair flight width
Changing the Shape of a Flight
Use this procedure to change the top and bottom width of a single flight on U-shaped, multi-landing, or spiral-shape stairs. Each side of a flight can be tapered independently using grip points. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115. NOTE If you change the width of the stair after grip editing a side, the grip changes are lost.
1 Select the stair to modify. 2 Select the Flight Taper grip on the stair flight, and move the grip away from stair path to new location.
The flight changes to the new shape.
1130 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Using grips to change stair flight taper
Changing the Shape of a Landing
Use this procedure to change the angles and positions of landing edges on U-shaped and multi-landing stairs. Each edge of a landing can be tapered or moved independently using grip points. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115. NOTE If you change the width of the stair after grip-editing a side, the grip changes are lost.
1 Select the stair to modify. 2 Select a Vertex grip on the landing, and move the grip away from the stair path to a new location.
The landing changes to the new shape. If the vertex grip is shared between a landing and flight, the flight moves with the landing. 3 Select an Edge grip on the landing, and move the grip perpendicular to the stair path to the new location. The entire edge of the landing moves to the selected location.
Changing the Shape of a Landing | 1131
Using grips to change a stair landing width by adding an edge
4 Select an Edge grip on the side of a landing, press CTRL, then move the grip away from the stair path. An adjacent edge of the landing is created.
Changing the Side of a Stair
You can determine the shape of one edge of a stair run that includes flights and landings for straight, U-shaped, multi-landing, or spiral stairs. The size of the landing must be adjusted to prevent overlapping treads when the inner edge of a stair is projected to a profile that lies outside the original stair. The initial size of the landing is determined by projecting the diagonal of the original landing to the profile.
1132 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Using grips to change a stair landing width
Pushing one tread into the landing with its grip forces the landing to lengthen in the other direction. Pulling one tread away from the landing does not affect the other end of the landing. The stair is lengthened at its top to accommodate the larger landing. You can modify the length with the top and bottom grips, at the end of the stair walking path. About Projecting the Side of a Stair You can project the edge of a stair to most AEC objects, such as walls or mass elements, but excluding multi-view blocks.
Changing the Side of a Stair | 1133
Projecting a stair edge to an object
NOTE When projecting an edge of a stair that has an inner corner, it is clear how to project the outer edge of the stair to the selected object, but projection of the inner corner is ambiguous. Rather than attempting to guess the correct solution, these cases are not projected, and a dialog box is displayed with an explanation that edges of stairs with interior corners can be projected only to objects that extend beyond both ends of the stair. The stair length is extended at its original width when the object (or polyline) does not extend far enough for the stair to project completely. Projecting the Side of a Stair Use this procedure to project the side of a stair to an existing polyline, wall, other AEC object, or solid. Objects to project to must extend the full length of the stair for an interior corner to project properly. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115.
1134 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Projecting stair edges to curved polyline segments
Projecting stair edges to straight polyline segments
NOTE If you change the width of the stair after projecting a side, the changes to the projected edge are lost. 1 Select a stair, right-click, and click Customize Edge Project. 2 Select the edge of a stair to change. 3 Select a polyline, object or profile to project to, and press ENTER.
Changing the Side of a Stair | 1135
Projecting stair edges to a profile
Treads are extended using the line of the current front and back edge. NOTE If edges intersect, which can happen with only spiral and winding shapes, a defect marker is displayed. Offsetting the Side of a Stair Use this procedure to offset the side of a stair flight by a specified value. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115. NOTE If you change the width of the stair after offsetting a side, the offset changes are lost.
1 Select a stair, right-click, and click Customize Edge Offset. 2 Select the edge of a stair to be offset. 3 Enter the distance to offset, where positive is out and negative is in, and press ENTER.
Treads are extended using the line of the current front and back edge.
1136 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Offsetting the edge of a stair
NOTE If edges intersect, which can happen with only spiral and winding shapes, a defect marker is displayed. Generating a Polyline from the Edge of a Stair Use this procedure to generate a polyline from the edge of a stair. The polyline is generated at the stair bottom elevation. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115. You can keep some sample polylines in the drawing, and use the final choice to project to. That way, you can project the stair edge, edit the stair, and then generate the polyline, change the stair again, generate another polyline, change the stair again, and, finally, project to the best version you created.
Changing the Side of a Stair | 1137
Generating a polyline from a stair edge
1 Select a stair, right-click, and click Customize Edge Generate Polyline. 2 Select the edge of a stair. 3 Press ENTER. A polyline is created at the stair bottom elevation along the length of the stair run. Removing Changes from the Side of a Stair Use this procedure to return the selected edge of the stair to its default profile. If the stair is back to its original condition, the width is restored to the original value, rather than *VARIES*. This change affects the treads, risers, and stringers. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115. Removing changes made to the side of a stair
1 Select a stair, right-click, and click Customize Edge Remove Customization. 2 Select the edge of a stair. 3 Press ENTER.
1138 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Changing the Height of a Stair
Use this procedure to change the height of a stair. You can also change the stair height on the Properties palette. For more information about stair grips, see "Using Grips to Edit Stairs" on page 1115. Changing the height of a stair using grips
1 Select the stair in an isometric view. 2 Select the Height grip, move the grip until the value you want is displayed, and click once.
After selecting a grip, you can also enter a precise value to increase or decrease the height of the stair. NOTE If you edit the height of a stair with landings, so that a landing would be below the new height, the landing is not displayed. If you edit the height again, and move it to a location above the previous landing, the landing is no longer there. To retain the stair path, which includes the landing, use the AecStairFit command to set Automatic Landings to No.
Changing the Justification of a Stair
Use this procedure to change the justification of an individual stair. The stair remains in the same location, but changes in the width keep the new justification point constant. For example, a stair with right justification changes the left edge when the width is changed.
1 Select the stair you want to change, and double-click it. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Left, Center, or Right for Justify.
This does not change the location of the stair, but changing this value specifies the point from which changes to the width are calculated from now on.
Changing the Style of a Stair
Use this procedure to select a different stair style for one or more stairs. 1 Select the stairs to change, and double-click one of them.
Changing the Height of a Stair | 1139
2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a different style.
Changing the Horizontal Direction of a Spiral or U-Shaped Stair
Use this procedure to change the orientation of a spiral stair. 1 Select a spiral or U-shaped stair. 2 Specify the horizontal orientation of the stair:
If you want to...
draw the spiral or U-shaped stair in a counterclockwise direction
Then... select Counterclockwise for Horizontal Orientation.
draw the spiral or U-shaped stair in a clockwise direction
select Clockwise for Horizontal Orientation.
NOTE This is equivalent to selecting the Flip grip that mirrors the stair around its start point.
Changing the Constraints of a Spiral Stair
Use this procedure to control what constrains the spiral stair by specifying the total degrees or the number of degrees per tread to use. These fields are available only when you select a spiral-shaped stair to modify.
1 Select a spiral stair. 2 Specify the arc constraint:
If you want to... display the spiral stair with no constraint
Then... select Free for Arc Constraint.
specify the total degrees for the stair flight
select Total Degrees for Arc Constraint, and enter a value for Arc Angle.
specify the specific degree for each tread in the stair
select Degrees per Tread for Arc Constraint, and enter a value for Arc Angle.
3 Specify the Radius of the stair.
1140 | Chapter 24 Stairs
The radius is measured from the center point of the spiral stair to the selected justification point.
4 Click OK.
Changing the Outside Edge of a Spiral Stair
Use this procedure to change the outside edge of a spiral stair. You can change the edge in two ways:
When you use the Flight Width grip point, you uniformly change the width of the stair along the entire arc. The endpoints of the outer edges of the stair move. This changes the size of the stair.
When you click the Flight Width grip point and press CTRL, you maintain the center of the stair and the outside grip points. This changes the shape of the stair.
1 Select a spiral stair. 2 Change a spiral stair:
If you want to...
Then...
uniformly change the width of a spiral stair along the entire click the Flight Width grip of the spiral stair. arc
maintain the center and outside grip points while changing click the Flight Width grip of the spiral stair and press CTRL. the shape of a spiral stair
3 Move the grip to change the size or shape of the stair.
Changing the Outside Edge of a Spiral Stair | 1141
Using grips to change the flight width of a spiral stair run
1142 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Using grips to change the shape of a spiral stair run by adding an edge
Changing the Dimensions of a Stair
Use this procedure to control the various dimensions associated with calculating the stair.
Some of the interacting dimensions can be user-defined and some are automatic, depending upon the combination of fields that are selected. Only logical combinations are available when the rule-based calculator is in effect. When the rule-based calculator is not in effect, either tread or straight length can be user-defined and either riser count or riser height can be user-defined.
1 Select the stair.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions.
3 Change any of the dimensions of the stair:
If you want to... specify the width of the stair run
Then... enter a value for Width.
NOTE If you change the width of the stair after grip-editing or otherwise customizing an edge, the changes are lost.
specify the floor-to-floor height for the stair specify the justification of the stair
enter a value for Height.
select Left, Center, or Right for Justify. This does not change the location of the stair, but changing this value determines the point from which the width is calculated if it is subsequently changed.
Changing the Dimensions of a Stair | 1143
4 Select Calculation rules:
If you want to... specify the overall linear length of the stair
specify the total number of stair risers
specify the height of each riser in the stair flight specify the tread depth for each tread in the stair flight
Then... enter a value for Straight Length.
When Straight Length is set to (automatic), the value is calculated based on the tread size and riser count.
When Straight Length is (user-defined), the stair length is equal to the dimension entered, and the other three values are adjusted within the code limits. If these values fall outside the stair limits, an error message is displayed.
When Riser Count is user-defined, the tread depth is increased or decreased to accommodate the stair.
enter a value for Riser Count.
When Riser Count is set to (automatic), the number of risers is based on the overall length and overall height of the stair and the code limits specified on the Design Rules tab. The Straight Length value of the stair is adjusted automatically.
When Riser Count is (user-defined), you can specify a value that is used to calculate the tread depth and riser height. If these values fall outside the stair limits, an error message is displayed.
set all fields to (automatic), click the icon to Riser to
change it to , and enter a value for Riser height.
set all fields to (automatic), click the icon next to Tread
to change it to , and enter a value for Tread depth. You can also specify the Riser count when you set the tread depth.
NOTE If is displayed next to a field in the Calculation Rules dialog box, that field can't be changed until another field is changed from (user-defined) to (automatic).
Changing the Floor Settings of a Stair
Use this procedure to control how the stair interacts with the floor at the beginning and end of the stair run.
1144 | Chapter 24 Stairs
1 Select a stair. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Floor Settings.
3 Change settings for how the stair meets the top and bottom floors:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the thickness of the floor finish material at the top floor of the stair
enter a value for Top Offset.
specify the depth of the structure at the top floor
enter a value for Top Depth.
specify the thickness of the floor finish material at the bottom enter a value for Bottom Offset. floor of the stair
specify the depth of the structure at the bottom floor
enter a value for Bottom Depth.
NOTE The Top and Bottom Depth settings currently have no effect on the stair or stringers. In addition, the Top offset has no visible effect on the stair. Bottom offset extends or truncates any attached stringers. Both offset values affect the rough floor-to-floor height, if it is displayed.
Adjusting Stair Length Automatically
Use this procedure to adjust stair length automatically with the StairFit setting. With the StairFit setting enabled, a stair adjusts its length to accommodate a height change. With the StairFit setting disabled, a stair does not adjust its length to accommodate a height change. Also, a stair warning symbol displays if the stair path is not long enough to accommodate the new height. All newly created stairs have the StairFit setting enabled. All stairs created in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Release 3.3 or earlier have the StairFit setting disabled.
1 Draw a stair run. 2 On the Command Line, enter StairFit. 3 Select the stair run. 4 Enter Y to enable the StairFit setting or N to disable the StairFit setting.
NOTE The StairFit setting is also accessible from the Design menu. Select Design Stairs Automatic Length.
5 Select the stair run again, right-click, and click Properties. 6 Specify a new stair height.
The following illustration shows an example of a straight stair run with the StairFit option enabled before and after height changes.
Adjusting Stair Length Automatically | 1145
Stair run height change with StairFit option enabled
The following illustration shows an example of a straight stair run with the StairFit option disabled before and after height changes. Stair run height change with StairFit option disabled
Changing the Length Limits of a Flight
Use this procedure to change the limits for the flight of a stair. A flight can have no limits, or limits that are constrained by a minimum number of risers, minimum height, maximum number of risers, or maximum height.
1146 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Use these settings to create automatic landings in a stair flight. For example, if a stair flight has 18 treads and you set the maximum treads to 15, the stair will have two flights with one landing in the middle, keeping under the 15 maximum risers on either side of the landing.
Specifying flight height limits for a stair run
1 Select a stair. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Flight Height.
Flight Height with Risers Limit type
3 Specify the constraints for flight length: If you want to... specify no limits on the flight specify a minimum number of risers per flight specify a minimum height for the flight specify a maximum number of risers per flight specify a maximum height for the flight
Then...
select None for Minimum Limit type and None for Maximum Limit type.
select Risers for Minimum Limit type, and enter a value for Minimum risers.
select Height for Minimum Limit type, and enter a value for Minimum height.
select Risers for Maximum Limit type, and enter a value for Maximum risers.
select Height for Maximum Limit type, and enter a value for Maximum height.
Anchoring a Stair to a Landing
Use this procedure to anchor a stair or other AEC object to an existing landing. 1 Draw a stair with a landing and draw a second stair to attach to the landing. For more information about creating stairs, see "Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs" on page 1091. 2 Select the stair with a landing, right-click, and click Stair Landing Anchor Anchor to landing. 3 Select the stair or other AEC object to anchor to the landing. 4 Select a location on the landing to anchor the center of the start of the stair run. The flight will be perpendicular to the landing edge. Select the insertion point of the AEC object that you are attaching to the landing. The object will be oriented parallel to the edge of the landing.
Anchoring a Stair to a Landing | 1147
Anchoring a stair run to a landing
NOTE Stairs created with a vertical orientation of Up go up from the landing, while stairs created with a vertical orientation of Down go down from the landing. The renumber riser numbering feature is helpful in this situation. See "Specifying the Riser Numbering Display for Individual Stairs" on page 1188.
Releasing Anchored Stairs
Use this procedure to release stairs anchored to landings. Select the stair to anchor to the landing, right-click, and click Stair Landing Anchor Release. NOTE The stair remains in the same location, but is no longer anchored to the landing.
Editing Winders
Three different winder types give you different levels of control for 1/2 turn and 1/4 turn stairs: Balanced, Single Point, and Manual. The Balanced winder style has the total turn distributed evenly throughout the stair run. The Single Point winder styles allow you to align tread edges or riser faces with the winder turn center, and add or remove individual treads from the winder turn. You can also assign a default number of treads to a winder turn, resulting in the specified number of treads appearing in the stair turn zone. Manual winder styles can be based on any winder style, by assigning either a Manual - Tread or Manual - Riser condition to a stair run. Both manual styles allow you to straighten individual treads or risers in the stair run and to move the tread endpoints on either side of individual treads so you can angle tread edges or riser faces to suit your stair design.
1148 | Chapter 24 Stairs
For information about creating new winder styles, see "Creating a Stair Winder Style" on page 1203. Winder style examples
Lengthening a Flight to Align a Tread Edge with a Winder Turn Center Use this procedure to lengthen a flight to align a Single Point winder style tread edge with a winder turn center. The winders within the turn zone are set to an angle converging on the Turn Center grip.
1 Select a 1/2 turn or 1/4 turn stair. 2 If the Winder Style is balanced, select the circular Edit Turns trigger grip. The Select Winder styles dialog
box is displayed. NOTE Only the winder styles present in the drawing are displayed.
Editing Winders | 1149
Select Stair Winder Style dialog box
3 Select a Single Point style from the list, and click OK. NOTE To select the style from the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand General, and select Single Point for Winder Style.
4 Select the Edit Turns trigger grip. Note the initial flight length of the existing stairs.
5 Select the Lengthen Flight to Align Tread grip. The flight is lengthened as the tread edge is now aligned with the turn center.
1150 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Lengthening a Flight to Align a Tread Edge with Turn Center
NOTE To have the converging point on the edge of the stair, you must clear the Use Riser Lines setting. See "Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings" on page 1203 for more information about this setting. Aligning a Tread Edge with a Winder Turn Center Use this procedure to align a Single Point winder style tread edge with a winder turn center. The winders within the turn zone are set to an angle converging on the Turn Center grip. 1 Select a 1/2 turn or 1/4 turn stair. 2 If the Winder Style is balanced, select the circular Edit Turns trigger grip. The Select Winder styles dialog box is displayed. NOTE Only the winder styles present in the drawing are displayed.
Editing Winders | 1151
Select Stair Winder Style dialog box
3 Select a Single Point style from the list, and click OK. NOTE To select the style from the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand General, and select Single Point for Winder Style.
4 Select the Edit Turns trigger grip. 5 Select the Align with Turn Center grip.
The tread edge is now aligned with the turn center, and the grip is no longer displayed.
1152 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Aligning a tread edge with turn center
NOTE To have the converging point on the edge of the stair, you must clear the Use Riser Lines setting. For more information about this setting, see "Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings" on page 1203. Removing a Tread from a Winder Turn Use this procedure to remove a tread from a winder turn. The winders within the turn zone are set to an angle converging on the Turn Center grip. 1 Select a 1/2 turn or 1/4 turn stair. 2 If the Winder Style is balanced, select the circular Edit Turns trigger grip. The Select Winder styles dialog box is displayed. NOTE Only the winder styles present in the drawing are displayed.
Editing Winders | 1153
Select Stair Winder Style dialog box
3 Select a Single Point style from the list, and click OK. NOTE To select the style from the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand General, and select Single Point for Winder Style.
4 Select the Edit Turns trigger grip. 5 Select the Remove Tread from Turn grip.
The selected tread is removed from the winder turn. If you continue to remove treads, the stair will eventually display a warning symbol. Use the Undo command to restore the previous tread configuration.
1154 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Removing a Tread from a Winder Turn
NOTE To have the converging point on the edge of the stair, you must clear the Use Riser Lines setting. For more information about this setting, see "Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings" on page 1203. Adding a Tread to a Winder Turn Use this procedure to add a tread to a winder turn. The winders within the turn zone are set to an angle converging on the Turn Center grip. 1 Select a 1/2 turn or 1/4 turn stair. 2 If the Winder Style is balanced, select the circular Edit Turns trigger grip. The Select Winder styles dialog box is displayed. NOTE Only the winder styles present in the drawing are displayed.
Editing Winders | 1155
Select Stair Winder Style dialog box
3 Select a Single Point style from the list, and click OK. NOTE To select the style from the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand General, and select Single Point for Winder Style.
4 Select the Edit Turns trigger grip. 5 Select the Add Tread to Turn grip.
A tread is added to the winder turn. If you continue to add treads, the stair will eventually display a warning symbol. Use the Undo command to restore the previous tread configuration.
1156 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Adding a tread to a winder turn
NOTE To have the converging point on the edge of the stair, you must clear the Use Riser Lines setting. For more information about this setting, see "Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings" on page 1203. Straightening Treads with the Manual Winder Style Use this procedure to straighten individual treads on stairs assigned either the Manual - Tread or Manual - Riser Balanced winder style. The Straighten Tread grip is located at the intersection of the tread edge or riser face and the stair construction line, based on the Use Riser Line setting in the Stair Winder Style dialog box. For more information, see "Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings" on page 1203. 1 Select a 1/2 turn or 1/4 turn stair. 2 If the Winder Style is balanced, select the circular Edit Turns trigger grip. The Select Winder styles dialog box is displayed.
Editing Winders | 1157
Select Winder Style dialog box
3 Select either Manual - Tread or Manual - Riser from the list, and click OK. NOTE To select the style from the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand General, and select Manual for Winder Style.
4 Select the Edit Turns trigger grip. 5 Select the Straighten Tread grip on the tread edge or riser face that you want to straighten.
The selected tread is straightened.
1158 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Straightening a tread with a manual riser style
NOTE Because the tread depth must be the same for each tread, the tread edge line will pivot around the construction line. Moving Tread Ends with the Manual Winder Style Use this procedure to move the ends of individual treads on stairs assigned either the Manual - Tread or Manual - Riser Balanced winder style. Each tread edge or riser face pivots on a point established by the intersection of the tread edge and the stair's construction line. Drag the Tread Edge grip to a new location to specify a new angle for the tread edge. The Tread End grips are located at each end of the tread edge or riser face, based on the Use Riser Line setting in the Stair Winder Style dialog box. For more information, see "Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings" on page 1203. 1 Select a 1/2 turn or 1/4 turn stair. 2 If the Winder Style is balanced, select the circular Edit Turns trigger grip. The Select Winder styles dialog box is displayed.
Editing Winders | 1159
Select Winder Style dialog box
3 Select either Manual - Tread or Manual - Riser from the list, and click OK. NOTE To select the style from the Properties palette, expand Basic, expand General, and select Manual for Winder Style.
4 Select the Edit Turns trigger grip. 5 Select the Tread End grip on the tread edge or riser face that you want to move. 6 Specify a new location for the Tread End grip.
The selected tread is angled as specified.
1160 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Moving a tread edge with a manual riser style
NOTE Because the tread depth must be the same for each tread, the tread edge line will pivot around the construction line.
Working with Stair Body Modifiers
Body modifiers use the three-dimensional (3D) geometry of an object, such as a mass element or a mass group, to add to or subtract from a stair component (tread, riser, or stringer depending on the stair style). Body Modifiers only work on a single instance of a tread, riser, or stringer at a time.
Working with Stair Body Modifiers | 1161
After you create a body modifier from an object, you can delete the original object. However, if you have created a complex object, such as a mass group comprising many mass elements, you may want to retain the object in the drawing until you are sure you have the results you want for the stair. Adding a Body Modifier to a Stair Component Use this procedure to create a body modifier and add it to a stair. You can create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. The following illustration shows you how to use a mass element as a body modifier to add to a stair stringer component. Adding a body modifier to a stair component
1 Place the object in the location where you want to add the body modifier to the stair. 2 Select the stair you want to change with the body modifier, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to add to the stair component. 4 In the Add Body Modifier dialog box, select Stringer for Stair Component and Additive for Operation.
5 Enter a description for the body modifier. 6 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep
the object in the drawing. 7 Click OK. Subtracting a Body Modifier from a Stair Component Use this procedure to create a body modifier and subtract it from a stair component. You can create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. The following illustration shows you how to use a mass element as a body modifier to subtract from a stair tread component.
1162 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Subtracting a body modifier from a stair component
1 Place the object in the location where you want to subtract the body modifier from the stair. 2 Select the stair you want to change with the body modifier, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to subtract from the stair. 4 In the Add Body Modifier dialog box, select Tread for Stair Component and Subtractive for Operation.
5 Enter a description for the body modifier. 6 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep
the object in the drawing. 7 Click OK. Replacing a Stair Component with a Body Modifier Use this procedure to create a body modifier to replace a stair component. You can create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. The following illustration shows you how to use a channel as a body modifier to replace a stair stringer component. Replacing a stair component with a body modifier
1 Place the object in the location where you want to replace the stair component with the body modifier. 2 Select the stair you want to change with the body modifier, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to replace the stair component.
Working with Stair Body Modifiers | 1163
4 In the Add Body Modifier dialog box, select Stringer for Stair Component and Replace for Operation.
5 Enter a description for the body modifier.
6 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep the object in the drawing.
7 Click OK.
Editing the Geometry of a Body Modifier
Use this procedure to edit the shape of a body modifier that is attached to a stair. You can edit the body using grips to edit faces, using Boolean commands to add or remove other objects from the body modifier, and other editing commands to change its shape.
1 Select the stair that has the body modifier you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Edit in Place.
A temporary mass element is created for you to edit the geometry of the body modifier. If the stair contains multiple body modifiers, a mass element is created for each body modifier. If object was not originally a mass element (for example, if you used a slab as a body modifier), the object becomes a temporary Free Form mass element with faces that you can edit.
2 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select a profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select a profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
Edit the body modifier:
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the shape of a body modifier that is a Free Form mass select the body modifier. Select a Face grip to activate edge
element
grips for the face. Move the grips to the desired locations.
Continue editing other faces in the same manner.
change the shape of a body modifier that is a conventional mass element
select the body modifier. Select grips and move them to change the shape of the body modifier. The grips that are available depend on the type of mass element used as a body modifier and the current view direction.
add an object to a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Union. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
subtract an object from a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Subtract. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
create a body modifier that is the intersection of the original body modifier with another object
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Intersect. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
1164 | Chapter 24 Stairs
If you want to ...
Then ...
trim a body modifier
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Trim. Specify the points that define the trim plane, and select the side of the body modifier to be trimmed. The trimmed body modifier is converted to a Free Form mass element.
divide the face of a body modifier into two faces
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Split Face. Specify the points that define the edge created by splitting the faces.
join two faces that are on the same plane into a single face select the body modifier, right-click, and click Join Faces. Select the edge that separates the coplanar faces.
remove a body modifier
select the object that forms the body modifier, and press DELETE.
3 Save or discard the changes: If you want to ... restore the body modifier to its original shape
save the changes to the body modifier
Then ...
select the body modifier, and click
.
select the body modifier, and click
. The body modifier
uses the edited mass element to define its geometry.
Managing Body Modifiers Use this procedure to edit or remove three-dimensional (3D) body modifiers from a stair. You can change the component the body modifier is added to and select a different operation. You can also enter or edit the descriptions of body modifiers.
NOTE To remove a body modifier from a stair and restore the modifier as a mass element that you can edit or apply to other stairs, see "Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element" on page 1166.
1 Double-click the stair you want to change. 2 Expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets. 3 Click the setting for Body modifiers. 4 Select a body modifier, and change its settings:
If you want to ... apply the body modifier to a different stair component
Then ... select a different component for Component.
change the operation used to apply the body modifier to the stair
select a different operation for Operation: Select Additive to add the body modifier to the stair component.
Select Subtract to subtract the shape of the body modifier from the stair component.
Select Replace to replace the stair component with the body modifier.
delete the body modifier from the stair component enter a description of the body modifier
select the body modifier, and click . click Description, enter text, and press ENTER.
Working with Stair Body Modifiers | 1165
5 Click OK.
Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element Use this procedure to remove a body modifier from a stair and add it to the drawing as a mass element. Restoring a body modifier to a mass element enables you to modify the shape as a mass element and then add it to the stair again as a body modifier. You can also restore the body modifier to a mass element while leaving the body modifier still applied to the stair. This is useful if you want to create other stairs with the same shape.
If the object used to create the body modifier was a conventional mass element, it is restored to that mass element. For example, a Gable mass element is restored as a Gable mass element. However, if the body modifier was created from another object, such as a slab, or was edited using Boolean operations or face editing commands, the body modifier is restored as a Free Form mass element.
1 Select the stair you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Restore.
2 NOTE This procedure restores all body modifiers attached to a stair.
Create mass elements from the body modifiers:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create mass elements from the body modifiers while keeping press ENTER. the body modifiers attached to the stair
remove all body modifiers from the stair, and create mass elements from their shapes
enter y (Yes), and press ENTER.
Stair Interference Conditions
You can control the height and width of a stair's interference condition with walls, slabs, spaces, curtain walls, and door and window assemblies. When you add an interference condition between a stair and one of the valid objects, a box is cut out around the stair, based on the specified headroom height and side clearance.
Creating an Interference Condition in a Wall
Use this procedure to create a stair interference area in a wall. When you add an interference condition between a stair and a wall, an opening is created in the wall around the stair, based on the stair's specified headroom height and left and right side clearances for straight and multi-landing stairs or inside and outside clearances for spiral and U-shaped stairs.
1166 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Specifying the left and right side clearances for a wall interference condition
Specifying the inside and outside clearances for a wall interference condition
1 Create a stair that intersects with a wall. For information about creating stairs, see "Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs" on page 1091.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Interference.
3 Set the size of the interference condition:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height above the treads for the interference condition
enter a value for Headroom height.
specify the left and right side clearances for the interference enter values for Left and Right Clearance. condition for straight and multi-landing stairs
specify the inside and outside clearances for the interference enter values for Inside and Outside Clearance. condition for spiral and U-shaped stairs
4 Click in the drawing, not on the stair, to remove the selection.
5 Select the wall to intersect, right-click, and click Interference Condition Add. 6 Select the stair. 7 Select the shrinkwrap effect, and press ENTER. For more information about shrinkwrapping, see "Working
with Interference Conditions" on page 686.
NOTE Changing the Interference values of the stair changes the size of the intersection with the wall.
Stair Interference Conditions | 1167
Creating a wall and stair interference condition
Removing a Stair Interference Condition from a Wall Use this procedure to remove a stair interference from a wall.
1 Click in the drawing. 2 Select the wall from which to remove the interference, right-click, and click Interference
Condition Remove. 3 Select the stair, and press ENTER. Creating an Interference Condition in a Slab Use this procedure to create a stair interference area in a slab. When you add an interference condition between a stair and a slab, a box is cut out around the stair based on the specified headroom height and left and right side clearances for straight and multi-landing stairs or inside and outside clearances for spiral and U-shaped stairs.
1168 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Specifying the left and right side clearances for a slab interference condition
Specifying the inside and outside clearances for a slab interference condition
1 Create a stair that intersects with a slab. For information about creating stairs, see "Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs" on page 1091.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Interference.
Stair Interference Conditions | 1169
3 Set the size of the interference condition:
If you want to...
specify the height above the treads for the interference condition
Then... enter a value for Headroom height.
specify the left and right side clearances for the interference enter values for Left and Right Clearance. condition for straight and multi-landing stairs
specify the inside and outside clearances for the interference enter values for Inside and Outside Clearance. condition for spiral and U-shaped stairs
4 Click in the drawing, not on the stair, to remove the selection. 5 Select the slab to intersect, right-click, and click Interference Add. 6 Select the stair, and press ENTER.
Creating a slab and stair interference condition
NOTE Changing the Interference values of the stair changes the size of the intersection with the slab.
Removing a Stair Interference Condition from a Slab Use this procedure to remove a stair interference from a slab.
1 Select the slab from which to remove the interference, right-click, and click Interference Remove. 2 Select the stair, and press ENTER.
Creating an Interference Condition in a Space Use this procedure to create a stair interference area in a space. When you add an interference condition between a stair and a space, a box is cut out around the stair based on the specified headroom height and side clearance.
1 Create a stair that intersects with a space. For information about creating stairs, see "Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs" on page 1091.
1170 | Chapter 24 Stairs
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Interference.
3 Set the size of the interference condition:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height above the treads for the interference condition
enter a value for Headroom height.
specify the left and right side clearances for the interference enter values for Left and Right Clearance. condition for straight and multi-landing stairs
specify the inside and outside clearances for the interference enter values for Inside and Outside Clearance. condition for spiral and U-shaped stairs
4 Click in the drawing, not on the stair, to remove the selection. 5 Select the space to intersect, right-click, and click Interference Condition. 6 Enter a (Add), select the space, and press ENTER. 7 Select the stair, and press ENTER twice.
NOTE Changing the Interference values of the stair changes the size of the intersection with the space.
Removing a Stair Interference Condition from a Space Use this procedure to remove a stair interference from a space.
1 Select the space from which to remove the interference, right-click, and click Interference Condition. 2 Enter r (Remove), select the space, and press ENTER. 3 Select the stair, and press ENTER twice.
Creating an Interference Condition in a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to create a stair interference area in a curtain wall. When you add an interference condition between a stair and a curtain wall, a box is cut out around the stair based on the specified headroom height and left and right side clearances for straight and multi-landing stairs or inside and outside clearances for spiral and U-shaped stairs. You have the option of cutting the infills, frames and mullions of the curtain wall.
Stair Interference Conditions | 1171
Specifying the left and right side clearances for a curtain wall interference condition
Specifying the inside and outside clearances for a curtain wall interference condition
1 Create a stair that intersects with a curtain wall. For information about creating stairs, see "Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs" on page 1091.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Interference.
1172 | Chapter 24 Stairs
3 Set the size of the interference condition:
If you want to...
specify the height above the treads for the interference condition
Then... enter a value for Headroom height.
specify the left and right side clearances for the interference enter values for Left and Right Clearance. condition for straight and multi-landing stairs
specify the inside and outside clearances for the interference enter values for Inside and Outside Clearance. condition for spiral and U-shaped stairs
4 Click in the drawing, not on the stair, to remove the selection. 5 Select the curtain wall to intersect, right-click, and click Interference Condition Add. 6 Select the stair. 7 Specify whether to apply the interference condition to the infill, frames or mullions of the curtain wall.
Removing a Stair Interference Condition from a Curtain Wall Use this procedure to remove a stair interference from a curtain wall.
1 Click in the drawing, not on the stair, to remove the selection. 2 Select the curtain wall from which to remove the interference, right-click, and click Interference
Condition Remove. 3 Select the stair, and press ENTER.
Creating an Interference Condition in a Door/Window Assembly Use this procedure to create a stair interference area in a door/window assembly. When you add an interference condition between a stair and a door/window assembly, a box is cut out around the stair based on the specified headroom height and side clearance. You have the option of cutting the infills, frames, and mullions of the door/window assembly.
1 Create a stair that intersects with a door/window assembly. For information about creating stairs, see "Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs" on page 1091.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Interference.
3 Set the size of the interference condition:
If you want to...
specify the height above the treads for the interference condition
Then... enter a value for Headroom height.
specify the left and right side clearances for the interference enter values for Left and Right Clearance. condition for straight and multi-landing stairs
specify the inside and outside clearances for the interference enter values for Inside and Outside Clearance. condition for spiral and U-shaped stairs
4 Click in the drawing, not on the stair, to remove the selection.
5 Select the door/window assembly to intersect, right-click, and click Interference Condition Add. 6 Select the stair. 7 Specify whether to apply the interference condition to the infill, frames, or mullions of the door/window
assembly.
Stair Interference Conditions | 1173
Removing a Stair Interference Condition from a Door/Window Assembly Use this procedure to remove a stair interference from a door/window assembly.
1 Click in the drawing, not on the stair, to remove the selection. 2 Select the door/window assembly from which to remove the interference, right-click, and click Interference
Condition Remove. 3 Select the stair, and press ENTER.
Changing the Interference Size of a Stair Use this procedure to control the size of the stair interference area.
Specifying headroom height and side clearance for a stair and a space object
1 Select the stair. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Interference.
3 Set the size of the interference condition:
If you want to...
specify the height above the treads for the interference condition
Then... enter a value for Headroom height.
specify the left and right side clearances for the interference enter values for Left and Right Clearance. condition for straight and multi-landing stairs
specify the inside and outside clearances for the interference enter values for Inside and Outside Clearance. condition for spiral and U-shaped stairs
Managing Interference Conditions Use this procedure to edit or remove three-dimensional (3D) body modifiers from a stair. You can change the component the body modifier is added to and select a different operation. You can also enter or edit the descriptions of body modifiers.
NOTE To remove a body modifier from a stair and restore the modifier as a mass element that you can edit or apply to other stairs, see "Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element" on page 1166.
1 Double-click the stair you want to change.
1174 | Chapter 24 Stairs
2 Expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets. 3 Click the setting for Body modifiers. 4 Select a body modifier, and change its settings:
If you want to ... apply the body modifier to a different stair component
Then ... select a different component for Component.
change the operation used to apply the body modifier to the stair
select a different operation for Operation: Select Additive to add the body modifier to the stair component.
Select Subtract to subtract the shape of the body modifier from the stair component.
Select Replace to replace the stair component with the body modifier.
delete the body modifier from the stair component enter a description of the body modifier
select the body modifier, and click . click Description, enter text, and press ENTER.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Alignment of a U-Shaped Stair
Use this procedure to change the alignment and the alignment offset of a U-shaped stair. These fields are available only when you select a U-shaped stair.
1 Select a U-shaped stair. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Constraints. 3 Specify the alignment of a U-shaped stair:
If you want to...
Then...
place the treads and risers where necessary to complete the select Free for Alignment. stair
align the tread of the up flight to the tread of the down flight select Tread to Tread for Alignment.
align the tread of the up flight to the riser of the down flight select Tread to Riser for Alignment.
align the riser of the up flight to the riser of the down flight select Riser to Riser for Alignment.
4 Specify a value for Alignment offset. When you select Tread to Tread, Tread to Riser, or Riser to Riser, you can specify an offset value. A positive offset value means that the down flight tread location is closer to the landing than the up flight tread location.
Specifying tread to riser alignment offsets
5 Specify a value for Extend alignment.
Changing the Alignment of a U-Shaped Stair | 1175
6 Specify a value for Uneven tread. This value specifies which flight will be longer if the total number of treads is uneven. Select Upper flight to place the Uneven tread on the upper flight. Select Lower flight to place the uneven tread on the lower flight.
Changing the Components of a Flight
Use this procedure to change the tread, riser thickness, and nosing length for each stair. You can also turn on or off the display of the tread and riser.
NOTE If component settings are unavailable, they are controlled by the stair style, and you cannot change them for individual stairs.
1 Select the stair. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, expand Worksheets, and click Components.
3 Under Flight Dimensions, select or clear the display of treads and risers. When the tread or riser display is off, the corresponding thickness becomes unavailable.
4 Specify the flight dimensions:
If you want to... specify the thickness of each tread
Then... select Tread, and enter a value for Tread Thickness.
specify the thickness of the riser
select Riser, and enter a value for Riser Thickness.
specify the length of the edge of a stair tread that projects enter a value for Nosing Length. over the riser
specify sloping risers
select Sloping Riser.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Components of a Landing
Use this procedure to change the landing thickness and specify additional width for stair landings.
NOTE If component settings are unavailable, they are controlled by the stair style, and you cannot change them for individual stairs.
1 Select the stair.
1176 | Chapter 24 Stairs
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, expand Worksheets, and click Components.
3 Enter a value for Landing Thickness. 4 Enter a value for Additional Width.
NOTE The setting for additional landing width affects only true landings of Multi-landing and U-shaped stairs. The automatic landings introduced by flight height limits and terminating landings are not affected by this setting. The type of landing and the justification of the stair determine where the additional width is added to the landing. Adding width to a quarter landing based on stair justification
Changing the Components of a Landing | 1177
Adding width to a half landing based on stair justification
5 Click OK.
About the Dimensions of Landing Components
Landing components are specified as part of the style, but apply only to multi-landing and U-shaped stairs. Stringer dimensions are specified for the flight and landing in a single table. The flight stringer type (slab, housed, or saddled) controls what is available for the landing (total depth only for housed and ramp, waist depth for all types). If the flight has no stringers, the landing has none. All landings of a single stair initially use the same dimensions. You can then customize each one separately by grip-stretching or projection. Horizontal positions and the widths of stringers are identical between flights and landings. Landing extension values apply only to U-shaped and multi-landing stairs with flat landings. Landing-specific dimensions are ignored for turn landings. The default values for styles in the Stair Styles drawing are specified in accordance with the most common situation for stairs. If the option to resolve the meeting of flight and landing stringers is off, the flight stringer terminates at the landing.
Changing the Extension of a Landing
Use this procedure to change the distances between landings and treads and the stringer resolution for stairs. You can differentiate the size of landing components from those used for the stair flights. NOTE If settings for landing extensions are unavailable, they are controlled by the stair style, and you cannot change them for individual stairs.
1 Select the stair.
1178 | Chapter 24 Stairs
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, expand Worksheets, and click Landing extensions.
3 Specify the extension distances:
If you want to...
Then...
add to the distance to the first tread on the down side of the enter a value for Distance to First Tread DOWN. To extend
landing
the landing down by a single tread, select Add Tread Depth.
add to the distance to the first tread on the up side of the landing
enter a value for Distance to First Tread UP. To extend the landing up by a single tread, select Add Tread Depth.
For more information about landing extensions and stringer resolution, see "About the Dimensions of Landing Components" on page 1178.
4 Under Stringer Resolution, select Extend Landings to Merge Flight Stringers with Landing Stringers to automatically merge the flight stringers with the landing stringers.
This provides additional landing extension, if necessary, to make the flight stringers meet the landing stringers without any discontinuity.
NOTE Automatic landing settings are always controlled by the stair style.
5 Click OK.
Stairs created in earlier versions of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop have the setting for Extend Landings to Prevent Risers and Treads Sitting Under Landings turned on. This setting should be turned off to achieve flush or rectangular landings, but it will change the position of the top or bottom of the stair, which may require adjusting other building objects.
Specifying Stair Component Display by Cut Plane Elevation
Use this procedure to specify the display of stair components in plan view depending on their occurrence above or below the cut plane elevation. You can specify the above cut plane, up, and down component properties for each type of stair component.
Cut Plane Elevation Display Properties
1 Take a look at the display properties for these kinds of stair components.
Select the stair.
2 Right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
3 In the Object Display dialog, click the Display Properties tab.
4 Verify that Plan is the default Display Representation, and then click Edit Display Properties.
Specifying Stair Component Display by Cut Plane Elevation | 1179
5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
Beginning with Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, new components have been added to support the representation of stair components above the cut plane elevation so that the down stair components are only used to display the stair components that occur below the current level. 6 Click the Other tab.
For stairs created in versions of Architectural Desktop earlier than 2004, the Override Display Configuration Cut Plane option is selected by default. Beginning with Architectural Desktop 2007, this option is cleared by default, and the display of stair components is handled automatically by specific display configurations for each level. When the Override Display Configuration Cut Plane option is selected, the cut height elevation is measured from the bottom of each stair run. The up display components and the above cut plane display components above the current level are displayed, and the down display components are not. Specifying cut plane elevation with display configuration override
When the Override Display Configuration Cut Plane option is cleared, the cut height elevation is measured from the current level. The up display components above the current level are displayed, as are the down display components below the current level.
1180 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Specifying cut plane elevation without display configuration override
Specifying Stair Display at Different Levels 1 The following procedure provides an example of how to specify the display of stair components at different levels in a stair tower. Create a U-shaped stair, 5'-0" (1520 mm) wide and 12'-0" (3650 mm) high to represent the lobby stairs. 2 Create a second U-shaped stair, 3'-8" (1120 mm) wide and 10'-0" (3050 mm) high, and locate it 12'-0" (1520 mm) above the lobby stairs. 3 Create a third U-shaped stair, 3'-8" (1120 mm) wide and 10'-0" (3050 mm) high, and locate it 10'-0" (3050 mm) above the second set of stairs. The following illustration shows how the stair tower should appear with added floor slabs in a 3D view:
3D view of stair tower
4 Save this stair tower configuration as the base stair drawing file. 5 Create 4 new host drawing files as follows:
First Floor Second Floor Third Floor Roof Level The following illustration shows how the levels should appear in an elevation view:
Specifying Stair Component Display by Cut Plane Elevation | 1181
Elevation view of stair tower
6 Open the First Floor drawing, and attach the base stair as an Xref at an elevation of 0'-0" (0 mm). 7 Verify that the Medium Detail display configuration is current. 8 View the first floor lobby stairs in plan.
Stair display components at first floor
9 The up display components above the first floor are displayed, as are the above cut plane display components, in outline with a dashed linetype.
10 Open the Second Floor drawing, and attach the base stair as an Xref at an elevation of -12'-0" (-3650 mm). 11 Verify that the Medium Detail Intermediate Level display configuration is current. 12 View the second floor stairs in plan.
Stair display components at second floor
13 The up display components above the second floor are displayed, as are the down display components below the second floor.
14 Open the Third Floor drawing, and attach the base stair as an Xref at an elevation of -22'-0" (-6700 mm). 15 Verify that the Medium Detail Intermediate Level display configuration is current. 16 View the third floor stairs in plan.
1182 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Stair display components at third floor
17 The up display components above the third floor are displayed, as are the down display components below the third floor.
18 Open the Roof Level drawing, and attach the base stair as an Xref at an elevation of -32'-0" (-9750 mm). 19 Verify that the Medium Detail Top Level display configuration is current. 20 View the roof level stairs in plan.
Stair display components at roof level
21 Only the down display components below the roof level are displayed.
Changing the Display of an Overlapping Stair
Use this procedure to create an overlapping stair and set the display properties to view the overlapped section correctly.
To set the stair display, the Plan Overlapping display representation needs to be turned on and specific components need to be set. For the overlapping stairs, in addition to the usual up and down groups, four other groups of display components available in Plan Overlapping.
Display representation group "components" up (above overlap) "components" down (above overlap) "components" up (below overlap) "components" down (below overlap)
Definition
Stair components below the cut height that are above the overlap section
Stair components above the cut height that are above the overlap section
Stair components below the cut height that are below the overlap section
Stair components above the cut height that are below the overlap section
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a stair tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 In Shape, select Multi-landing. 5 Specify the 1/2 landing for Turn Type. 6 Draw a multi-landing stair that overlaps itself.
Changing the Display of an Overlapping Stair | 1183
Viewing an overlapping stair condition
7 On the Format menu, click Display Manager. 8 Expand Sets, select the current (bold) display set. 9 Click the Display Representation Control tab. Scroll to the Stair object. 10 Turn on Plan Overlapping in addition to the current display representation, and click OK. 11 For this example, we will display all components of the stair above the overlap section outlined in red.
Select the stair, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 12 Click the Display Properties tab. 13 Click Object Override for Plan, Plan Low Detail, or Plan High Detail (whichever is displayed in the current
display set). Select all the components, turn off visibility, and click OK. 14 Click Object Override for Plan Overlapping. Select the desired components and turn on visibility. For this
example, turn on visibility for Riser up, Nosing up, Path up, Outline up, Riser down, Nosing down, Path down, Outline down, Riser down (above overlap), Nosing down (above overlap), Path down (above overlap), Outline down (above overlap), Riser down (below overlap), Nosing down (below overlap), Path down (below overlap), and Outline down (below overlap). 15 Select Riser down (above overlap), Nosing down (above overlap), Path down (above overlap), and Outline down (above overlap). Select any of the colors from the selected components; then select red in the Select Color dialog box, and click OK twice.
NOTE If the stair style includes stringers, they should be added to the set of components.
16 Click OK twice.
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Stair
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a stair tool to one or more existing stairs. The properties include the stair style and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Stair. 3 Select the stairs, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the stairs in the Properties palette, if necessary.
NOTE Some tool properties cannot be applied to existing stairs. For example, stair shape and turn type do not change. In addition, some properties may be incompatible with existing stairs. For example, a stair that has a vertical orientation of Down cannot terminate with a landing.
Changing the Location of a Stair
Use this procedure to relocate a stair by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The stair also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the stair are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the stair by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the stair on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
1184 | Chapter 24 Stairs
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the stair you want to change. 2 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the stair:
If you want to... relocate the stair
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the stair on the XY plane
make the normal of the stair parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the stair on the YZ plane
make the normal of the stair parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the stair on the XZ plane
make the normal of the stair parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the stair
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Stair
Use this procedure to select a different material for components of an individual stair. To change the materials assigned to all stairs of the same stair style, see "Assigning Materials to a Stair Style" on page 1198.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a stair component, you can change the properties of the display component as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style" on page 1199.
1 Select the stair you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 To verify that the material assignment determines the display properties of the component, click the Display
Properties tab, select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click .
NOTE Only the Model display representation supports properties By Material.
3 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab, verify that By Material is selected for the component, and click OK. 4 Click the Materials tab. 5 Select the component you want to change, select Object Override, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Stair | 1185
Changing the Display Properties of Individual Stairs
In most cases, you want the appearance of stairs that belong to the same style to be consistent throughout a drawing. However, in certain instances, you may need to override a display property for an individual stair to achieve a specific result. All the display properties that you can specify in stair styles are available for individual stairs. You can override the following specifications:
Whether the display properties of stair components are determined by material assignments The layer, color, and linetype of the display components of the stair The cut plane height and the display of components relative to the cut plane Other specific stair display information, such as riser numbering
When you change the display properties of an individual stair, the changes apply only to that stair. Other stairs of the same style are not affected. To change the display properties of all stairs of a specific stair style, see "Stair Styles" on page 1190. Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Stair Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of an individual stair:
Visibility (component is on or off) By Material (a material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
To change these display properties for all stairs of the same stair style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style" on page 1199.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the properties of a stair display component, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Stair" on page 1185.
1 Select the stair you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Stair Use this procedure to specify the properties of one or more cut planes for an individual stair. Cut plane display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing. To change the cut plane display properties for all stairs of the same stair style, see "Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Stair Style" on page 1200.
1 Select the stair you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab.
1186 | Chapter 24 Stairs
3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override. The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Other tab.
6 Click Override Display Configuration Cut Plane to change the elevation of the Display Configuration cut plane for the stair. NOTE When Display Configuration Cut Plane is selected, stairs display only from the current floor elevation up to the cut height, and from the current floor elevation down to the appropriate cut height of the level below.
7 Enter a value for Elevation. 8 Enter a value for Distance to change the space between the two cut plane lines. 9 Enter a value for Angle to change the angle of the stair cut lines. 10 Click OK twice. Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Stair Use this procedure to specify other display properties for an individual stair, such as how to display the arrow in the path, which Display Path to show, and what type of break mark to use in the stair display. These display properties apply only to display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing. To change these display properties for all stairs of the same stair style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style" on page 1199. 1 Select the stair you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation. 4 If necessary, click .
Changing the Display Properties of Individual Stairs | 1187
5 Click the Other tab.
6 Select the display properties for the stair: If you want to... change the display size of the arrow and break mark change the offset location of the arrow display change the dimension style used for the arrow display
Then...
enter a value for Size.
enter a value for Offset.
select a style for Dim Style.
NOTE If a dimension style other than Standard is used for the arrow, and you want the arrow size to be controlled by the dimension style, select Arrow Size from Dimension Style Only. This is the default for all previous version drawings. If you do not select this option, the size of the arrow is multiplied by the arrow size setting.
change the shape of the stair line
select a shape for Shape. Curved adds an arc when the stair line changes. Straight displays an angle when the stair line changes.
display the arrow at the end of each cut plane pointing in the same direction throughout the length of the stair
select Cut Plane - Parallel for Apply to and make sure that Draw for Each Flight is not selected.
display the arrow at the end of each cut plane and at the end select Cut Plane - Parallel for Apply to and make sure that
of each flight pointing in the same direction
Draw for Each Flight is selected.
display the arrow at the end of the entire stair
select Entire Stair for Apply to and make sure that Draw for Each Flight is not selected.
display the arrow at the end of each flight pointing in the same direction
select Entire Stair for Apply to and make sure that Draw for Each Flight is selected.
display the arrow on each side of the cut plane
select Cut Plane - Opposite for Apply to.
change which stair line is displayed
select a path for Display Path.
change the type of break mark that is displayed at the cut plane
under Break Mark, select a mark for Type.
specify a custom break mark to display at the cut plane
select Custom Shape for Type, and then select a block for Block.
7 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Riser Numbering Display for Individual Stairs Use this procedure to define and display riser numbers for individual stairs.
1188 | Chapter 24 Stairs
To change these display properties for all stairs of the same stair style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style" on page 1199.
1 Select the stair you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Riser Numbering tab.
6 Select the riser numbering display properties for the stair:
If you want to... change the text style of the riser numbers
Then... select a style for Text Style, or click to edit the text style.
change the alignment of the riser numbers
select an alignment for Text Alignment.
change the orientation of the riser numbers
select an orientation for Text Orientation.
change the text height of the riser numbers
enter a value for Text Height.
change the location to which the numbers are justified
select Left, Center or Right for Justify to.
change the location of the numbers along the length of the enter a value for X Offset. This is relative to the selected
stair flight
position of the riser.
change the location of the numbers to the left or right
enter a value for Y Offset. This is relative to the selected position of the riser.
set the first number for the riser numbering
enter a value for First Riser Number.
number the last riser in the stair
select Number Final Riser.
7 Click OK twice.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Stair
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a stair. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a stair.
1 Select the stair to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information about adding hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Stair | 1189
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK. 7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click, select a file, click Open and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
click the document's Description field. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
NOTE If the referenced file is an AutoCAD drawing, you must click OK in the Reference Docs dialog before the drawing is displayed.
detach a reference file 8 Click OK.
select the file name, and click
.
Stair Styles
A stair style is a group of properties assigned to a stair that determines the appearance and other characteristics of the stair. You can use a stair style to control properties for all stairs that use that style, rather than changing properties for each stair in the drawing. Various styles exist in the templates for common stair configurations, such as steel-pan, ramp concrete, and wood-housed. Within the stair style, you can specify the dimensions, landing extensions, components, and display properties of the stair.
Stair Components and Design Rules
In a stair style, you specify these properties of stair components:
risers and treads stringers landings landing extensions
Design rules determine the code limits for maximum, optimum, and minimum slopes for the stair style.
Display Components of Stairs
Display components determine the graphical characteristics, such as color and linetype, of stair components. Other display properties you can change for a stair style include cut plane, stair line, arrow properties, and the break mark.
1190 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Using Materials in Stair Styles
You can use materials to control how stairs of each style are displayed in a drawing. You assign materials to the stair components in the style. The components are then displayed using the display properties of the assigned materials.
Creating Tools from Stair Styles
You can create a stair tool from any stair style. You can drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify default settings for any stair created from the tool. For more information, see "Creating a Stair Tool" on page 1114.
Managing Stair Styles
To create, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop for working with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Getting Started with the Style Manager" on page 453.
Creating a Stair Style
Use this procedure to create a stair style. You can create a style that uses default style properties by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Stair Styles. 3 Create a stair style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Stair Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the stair style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new stair style. 5 Edit the new stair style:
If you want to...
Then...
specify design rules for the style
see "Specifying the Design Rules of a Stair Style" on page 1192.
specify the stringer properties for the style
see "Specifying the Stringers of a Stair Style" on page 1192.
specify the thicknesses and widths of treads, risers, and landings for the style
see "Specifying the Components of a Stair Style" on page 1195.
specify the landing extension properties of the style
see "Specifying the Landing Extension of a Stair Style" on page 1196.
specify display properties, such as layer, color, and linetype, see "Specifying the Layer/Color/Linetype of a Stair Style"
for the components of the style
on page 1199.
specify cut plane properties, arrow properties, and other display properties of the style
see "Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Stair Style" on page 1200.
add notes and files to the style
see "Adding Notes and Files to a Stair Style" on page 1202.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the stair style, click OK. 7 If you want to assign the style to a stair tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette.
You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Stair Tool" on page 1114.
8 Click OK.
Managing Stair Styles | 1191
Specifying the Design Rules of a Stair Style
Use this procedure to specify the minimum, maximum, and optimal code limits for the riser height and tread depth, and to specify the stair calculator rules. Specifying stair design rules
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style you want to change. 4 Click the Design Rules tab.
5 Specify the default Riser Height and Tread Depth for Minimum Slope, Optimum Slope, and Maximum Slope. NOTE Use values that represent the actual dimensions of the tread and riser components you want to create, and not just the ratios of these dimensions. Subject to the constraints of the calculator rules and the fact that the tread heights must be an even divisor of the floor-to-floor height, the software gets as close as possible to the selected optimal tread length and riser height.
6 To change the default stair calculator, select Use Rule Based Calculator. The fields in the Calculator Rule section become available for editing.
7 When you finish changing the properties of the stair style, click OK.
Specifying the Stringers of a Stair Style
Use this procedure to include stringers with the stair style. A stair style can have one or more stringers. You can specify the properties of each stringer. If the style uses stringers, you can specify the depth of the waist at flights and landings, as well as have center stringers with mitered or curved corners at landing turns. For Ramp or Housed stringers, you can also specify the total depth at flights and landings.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool.
1192 | Chapter 24 Stairs
2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style you want to change. 4 Click the Stringers tab.
If the style does not use stringers, proceed to step 6.
5 Add or remove stringers:
If you want to...
Then...
add a stringer to the stair style
click Add.
add an identical stringer to the list
select the stringer you want to duplicate, and click Copy.
delete a stringer from the list
select the stringer, and click Remove.
6 Specify the properties of each stringer: If you want to... specify the name of a stringer specify the type of stringer specify the alignment of a stringer
specify the width of a stringer specify the offset of a stringer specify the flight waist specify the flight total specify the landing waist specify the landing total stop the stringer at a landing allow the stringer to continue under a landing specify mitered corners for a center stringer at a turn or landing
Then... select the current name, and enter a new name. click the current Type, and select Saddled or Housed. click the current alignment, and select Align Left, Align Right, Center, or Full Width. enter a value for Width. enter a value for Offset. under Flight, enter a value for Waist. under Flight, enter a value for Total. under Landing, enter a value for Waist. under Landing, enter a value for Total. select Truncate for Cleanup. select Cleanup for Cleanup. clear Curve center stringer at turns
Specifying the Stringers of a Stair Style | 1193
7 Click Slab for Type to edit the slab settings: If you want to... specify the thickness of the slab at flights specify the thickness of the slab at landings
Then... under Flight, enter a value for Waist. under Landings, enter a value for Waist.
8 When you finish changing the properties of the stair style, click OK.
Specifying Mitered Corners for Center Stringers
Use this procedure to specify mitered corners for center stringers at landings and turns. You can specify this option when working with multi-landing, u-shaped, and custom stairs. You cannot specify this option when working with straight or spiral stairs.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style you want to change. 4 Click the Stringers tab. 5 Clear Curve center stringers at turns.
6 Click OK.
1194 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Curved and mitered center stringers at landing turns
With the Curve center stringers at turns option cleared, the center stringer is mitered to match the angle of the landing turn. In most cases, this will be a right angle, but any other angle is also possible. Mitered center stringers at angled landing turns
Specifying the Components of a Stair Style
Use this procedure to specify the display of treads and risers and edit the thicknesses and widths of treads, risers, and landings. Also, you can specify whether these properties of the style are allowed to vary with individual stairs.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style you want to change.
Specifying the Components of a Stair Style | 1195
4 Click the Components tab.
5 Specify whether stairs of this style can vary:
If you want to...
Then...
specify flight dimensions, such as tread thickness, riser
select Allow Each Stair to Vary.
thickness, and nosing length, when you add or modify stairs
require that all stairs of this style use the flight dimension settings of the style
clear Allow Each Stair to Vary.
NOTE If Allow Each Stair to Vary is checked, changes on this tab do not affect existing stairs. To make these stairs match the style settings, select the stair, display its properties, display the Components worksheet, and click Reset to Style Values.
6 Turn the display of treads and risers on or off. If tread is off, the tread thickness and landing thickness become unavailable.
7 Specify the flight dimensions:
If you want to... specify the thickness of treads
Then... enter a value for Tread Thickness.
specify the thickness of risers
enter a value for Riser Thickness.
specify the length of the edge of a stair tread that projects enter a value for Nosing Length. over the riser
specify sloping risers
select Sloping Riser.
8 Specify the landing dimensions: If you want to... specify the thickness of landings specify additional width for landings
Then... enter a value for Landing Thickness. enter a value for Additional Width.
9 When you finish changing the properties of the stair style, click OK.
Specifying the Landing Extension of a Stair Style
Use this procedure to change the distances between landings and treads and the stringer resolution of stairs. You can differentiate the size of landing components from those used for the stair flights.
1196 | Chapter 24 Stairs
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style you want to change. 4 Click the Landing Extensions tab.
5 Specify whether stairs of this style can vary:
If you want to...
Then...
specify stringer resolution and extension dimensions, such as select Allow Each Stair to Vary. distance to first tread up and distance to first tread down, when you add or modify stairs
require that all stairs of this style use the extension dimension clear Allow Each Stair to Vary. settings of the style
6 Specify extension distances:
If you want to...
Then...
increase the distance to the first tread on the down side of enter a value for Distance to First Tread DOWN. To extend
the landing
the landing down by a single tread, select Add Tread Depth.
increase the distance to the first tread on the up side of the enter a value for Distance to First Tread UP. To extend the
landing
landing up by a single tread, select Add Tread Depth.
7 Select Extend Landings to Merge Flight Stringers with Landing Stringers. This option extends the landing to merge the flight stringers with the landing stringers.
8 Select Extend Landings to Prevent Risers and Treads Sitting Under Landings.
This option is on by default for all stairs from earlier-release drawings. Clear it to allow the creation of flush rectangular landings.
9 When landings are placed automatically, their length and location are specified in Landing Length and Landing Location.
If you want to...
Then...
set the size of automatic landings
enter a value for Landing Length.
set the placement of automatic landings
select Top, Middle, or Bottom for Landing Location.
10 When you finish changing the properties of the stair style, click OK.
Specifying the Landing Extension of a Stair Style | 1197
Assigning Materials to Components in a Stair Style
A stair consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component. You assign one material to each physical component of the stair; for example, you assign a wood or metal material to treads, concrete to a concrete component, and so on. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
If you want to use the display properties of the stair style instead of material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the stair style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the 3D body component of a material is used for all linework in model views.
Stair Materials and Display Components
The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each stair component.
Stair Component Model Stringer Tread Landing Riser
Material Component
3D Body 3D Body 3D Body 3D Body
Assigning Materials to a Stair Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a stair style. When By Material is selected for a component, the component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the stair. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, a riser is a physical component that can be assigned a material while the graphics path is a symbol that cannot be assigned a material.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a stair component, you can change the display properties of the stair style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style" on page 1199.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
NOTE Only the Model display representation uses materials.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click definition and assign it to a component.
to create a new material
1198 | Chapter 24 Stairs
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style
In most cases, you can assign materials to stair components so that the appearance of stairs that belong to the same style is consistent throughout a drawing and with other stairs and objects that use the same materials. If a component cannot be assigned a material, or if you do not want to use materials but still want consistency among stairs of the same style, you can specify the following display properties of the stair components in the stair style:
The layer, color, and linetype of stair components The cut plane height and the display of components relative to the cut plane Other specific stair display information, such as riser numbering
Specifying the Layer/Color/Linetype of a Stair Style Use this procedure to specify how the various components of the stair are displayed in a particular view. You can change the following display properties of the components of a stair style:
Visibility (on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale Plot style (if the drawing uses style-based rather than color-based plotting)
Plan views of stairs include stringers, risers, nosing, path symbols, and stair outlines. You can specify the visibility of these components for above and below the cut plane of the stair. Isometric (model) views of stairs include stringers, treads, and risers. To change these display properties for an individual stair, see "Changing the Display Properties of Individual Stairs" on page 1186.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the display properties of components in the stair style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material. You can also override the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Stair Style" on page 1198.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style | 1199
Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Stair Style Use this procedure to specify settings for the cut plane and related symbols. Plan views of stairs includes stringers, risers, nosing, path symbols, and stair outlines. You can specify the visibility of these components for above and below the cut plane of the stair.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Click Override Display Configuration Cut Plane to change the elevation of the Display Configuration cut
plane for the stair.
NOTE When the Display Configuration Cut Plane is used, stairs display only from the current floor elevation up to the cut height, and from the current floor elevation down to the appropriate cut height of the level below.
9 Enter a value for Elevation. 10 Enter a value for Distance to change the space between the two cut plane lines. 11 Enter a value for Angle to change the angle of the stair cut lines. 12 Specify the display of the cut plane:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height of the cut plane measured from the beginning of the stair
enter a value for Elevation. The space for the cut plane is centered on the closest tread.
specify the width of the cut plane
enter a value for Distance.
specify the angle of the cut plane
enter a value for Angle.
13 Specify the display of the arrow and the stair line:
If you want to... change the display size of the arrow
Then... enter a value for Size.
change the offset location of the arrow display
enter a value for Offset.
change the dimension style used for the arrow display
select a style for Dim Style.
NOTE If a dimension style other than Standard is used for the arrow, and you want the arrow size to be controlled by the dimension style, select Arrow Size from Dimension Style Only. This is the default for all previous version drawings. If you do not select this option, the size of the arrow is multiplied by the arrow size setting.
change the shape of the stair line
display the arrow at the end of each cut plane pointing in the same direction throughout the length of the stair
select a shape for Shape. Curved adds an arc when the stair line changes. Straight displays an angle when the stair line changes.
select Cut Plane - Parallel for Apply to and make sure that Draw for Each Flight is not selected.
1200 | Chapter 24 Stairs
If you want to...
Then...
display the arrow at the end of each cut plane and at the end select Cut Plane - Parallel for Apply to and make sure that
of each flight pointing in the same direction
Draw for Each Flight is selected.
display the arrow at the end of the entire stair
select Entire Stair for Apply to and make sure that Draw for Each Flight is not selected.
display the arrow at the end of each flight pointing in the same direction
select Entire Stair for Apply to and make sure that Draw for Each Flight is selected.
display the arrow on each side of the cut plane
select Cut Plane - Opposite for Apply to.
change which stair line is displayed
select a path for Display Path.
change the type of break mark that is displayed at the cut plane
under Break Mark, select a mark for Type.
specify a custom break mark to display at the cut plane
select Custom Shape for Type, and then select a block for Block.
14 Specify the display of the break mark: If you want to... change the style of the break mark
specify a custom shape for the break mark
Then...
select an option for Type. The available options are None, Curved, Zigzag, and Custom Shape.
select Custom Shape for Type, and select the desired name for Block.
15 Click OK.
Specifying the Riser Numbering Display of a Stair Style
Use this procedure to define the display of riser numbers for a stair style. 1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Riser Numbering tab. 8 Select the riser numbering display properties for the stair style:
If you want to...
Then...
change the text style of the riser numbers
select a style for Text Style, or click to edit the text style.
change the alignment of the riser numbers
select an alignment for Text Alignment.
change the orientation of the riser numbers
select an orientation for Text Orientation.
change the text height of the riser numbers
enter a value for Text Height.
change the location to which the numbers are justified
select Left, Center or Right for Justify to.
change the location of the numbers along the length of the enter a value for X Offset. This is relative to the selected
stair flight
position of the riser.
Specifying the Riser Numbering Display of a Stair Style | 1201
If you want to... change the location of the numbers to the left or right
set the first number for the riser numbering number the last riser in the stair
Then... enter a value for Y Offset. This is relative to the selected position of the riser. enter a value for First Riser Number. select Number Final Riser.
9 Click OK twice.
Specifying Classifications for a Stair Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a stair style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to stair styles.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current stair style. 6 Click OK.
Adding Notes and Files to a Stair Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a stair style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files attached to the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a stair tool. 2 Right-click a stair tool, and click Stair Styles. 3 Select the stair style that you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the stair style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Text Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
1202 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Stair Winder Styles
A stair winder style is a group of properties assigned to a stair winder that determines the type of winder used in stairs that contain 1/4 turn or 1/2 turns.
To create, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop for working with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Getting Started with the Style Manager" on page 453.
Creating a Stair Winder Style
Use this procedure to create a stair winder style. You can create a style that uses default style properties by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Stair Winder Styles. 3 Create a stair winder style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Stair Winder Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the stair winder style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new stair winder style. 5 Edit the new stair winder style. For more information, see "Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings" on
page 1203. 6 When you finish specifying the properties of the stair winder style, click OK twice.
Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings
Use this procedure to determine which type of winder is defined for the selected winder style. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Stair Winder Styles. 3 Select a Stair Winder Style. 4 Click the Settings tab.
Stair Winder Styles | 1203
5 Specify the stair winder settings: If you want to... use the riser lines to adjust the winders use the tread lines to adjust the winders have the treads turn continuously along the length of the stair
Then... select Use Riser Line. clear Use Riser Line. select Balanced for Winder Type.
NOTE This is the type used by all earlier-release version stairs with 1/2 or 1/4 turns.
adjust each winder separately
select Manual for Winder Type.
adjust winders based on a single point and a turn zone
select Single Point for Winder Type.
set a number of winders to use when Single Point is selected select Adjust Winder Turn and enter a value for Number of
for Winder Type
Treads in Turn.
NOTE When using the single point type, it is important to clear Use Riser Line if the turn point will be on the edge or corner of the stair. Otherwise, the treads will overlap and the stair will be defective.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the stair winder style, click OK.
Adding Notes and Files to a Stair Winder Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a stair winder style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files attached to the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Stair Winder Styles. 3 Select a Stair Winder Style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the stair style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Text Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Stair Tower Generator
The Stair Tower Generator creates vertically stacked stairs based on a single stair and selected levels in the building. Optionally, slabs and railings can be included in the stair tower.
1204 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Creating a Stair Tower
You create a stair tower from one stair, which is replicated on selected levels in the building. You can create a stair tower with all stair shapes except spiral. The floor-to-floor height and starting elevation of each stair are adjusted to match these values for each selected level. The x,y coordinates for each stair start point are fixed. NOTE The stair must be in a construct with multiple levels for the stair tower to be created. For more information, see "Constructs" on page 214.
1 Create a stair within a construct. 2 Select the stair, right-click, then click Stair Tower Generate. 3 Select any slabs or railings to be added to the stair tower.
NOTE If you select a slab to include in the stair tower, the slab should be at the top of the selected stair. 4 In the Select Levels dialog box, select the levels on which the stair tower generates the stairs.
You can include anchored railings by clicking Include Anchored Railings, even if they have not been selected in step 3. 5 If the stair you created was U-shaped, you can select Keep Landing Location while Adjusting U-Shaped Stair to maintain the landing position instead of the start point of the stair when it is edited. 6 Click OK. The stair tower is created by adding stairs to the selected levels.
Creating a Stair Tower | 1205
Generating a Stair Tower From and Existing U-Shaped Stair Run
NOTE If the stair height is different than the floor to floor height, the height of the stair is changed to match the floor height.
Modifying a Stair Tower
Once a stair tower has been created, you can modify each stair individually. You can also change one stair and propagate that change throughout the stair tower.
1 Select a stair in the tower. 2 Modify the stair.
For more information about modifying stairs, see "Editing Stairs" on page 1115. 3 Select the edited stair, right-click, and then click Stair Tower Generate. 4 Select any slabs or railings to be added to the stair tower.
NOTE If you select a slab to include in the stair tower, the slab should be at the top of the selected stair. 5 In the Select Levels dialog box, select the levels on which to change the existing stairs.
You can include anchored railings by selecting Include Anchored Railings.
1206 | Chapter 24 Stairs
6 If the stair you created was U-shaped, you can select Keep Landing Location while Adjusting U-Shaped Stair to maintain the landing position instead of the start point of the stair when it is edited.
7 Click OK. Each selected stair is changed to match the modified stair. NOTE Rather than deleting existing stairs and creating new ones, any existing stairs are modified to match the selected stair. This preserves any VIZ Render customization that you may have done.
Modifying a Stair Tower | 1207
1208 | Chapter 24 Stairs
Railings
25
Railings are objects that interact with stairs and other objects. You can add railings to existing stairs, or you can create freestanding railings.
1209
Railings
Railings are objects that interact with stairs and other objects. You can add railings to existing stairs, or you can create freestanding railings. Railing Components Railings can have guardrails, handrails, posts, balusters, and one or more bottom rails. Additionally, you can add custom blocks to railings. Railing components
Railing Shapes You can attach railings to one or both sides of a stair, and you can wrap them around a landing. You can also attach railings to any other type of AEC object, like a massing element. You can create a custom railing by converting a polyline. Therefore, railings can have a variety of shapes and can be anchored to a straight stair, a multi-landing stair, a U-shaped stair, or a spiral stair. Custom Railings You can create custom railings by specifying custom blocks and profiles to be used for individual railing components. You can assign profiles to railing components by style so that you can reuse the custom portion to create detailed railings. Railing Styles and Their Properties You can use a railing style to control properties for all railings that use that style, rather than changing properties for each railing in the drawing. Various styles exist in the templates for common railing configurations, such as guardrail pipe, handrail grip, and handrail round. Within the railing style, you can specify the rail locations and height, post locations and intervals, components and profiles, extensions, material assignments, and display properties of the railing. Materials in Railings In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to a railing. These materials are displayed in wireframe and working shade views, or when linked into VIZ Render. Materials have specific settings for the physical components of a railing, such as the various types of rails and posts, and the baluster. You could, for example, create a wooden railing with a stainless steel handrail and bottomrail.
1210 | Chapter 25 Railings
Railing in 2D wireframe model and rendered views
Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a number of predefined materials for common design purposes, which contain settings for railings. You can use these predefined materials "as is", or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials from scratch. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Railing Style" on page 1238.
Using Railing Tools to Create Railings
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place railings using a railing tool with specific predefined properties. You can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change the properties. You can also use railing tools to convert linework to railings and to apply the settings of a railing tool to existing railings. Tool palettes containing railing tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample railing tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain railing tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain railing tools with railing styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating a Railing
Use this procedure to add a new railing that has the properties specified in the railing tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a railing, see "Creating an Attached Railing with User-Specified Settings" on page 1212 and "Creating a Freestanding Railing with User-Specified Settings" on page 1214.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a railing tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Specify the start point of the railing. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
Using Railing Tools to Create Railings | 1211
3 Specify the endpoint of the railing. 4 Continue adding railings, and press ENTER.
Creating an Attached Railing with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create a railing that is attached to a stair and that has the settings that you specify. Creating a railing attached to a stair
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a railing tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Expand Dimensions. 5 Click the setting for Rail Locations.
NOTE If the settings in the Rail Locations worksheet are read-only, the rail locations have been set in the style, and cannot be overridden here. For more information, see "Specifying the Upper Rails of a Railing Style" on page 1232 and "Specifying the Bottom Rails of a Railing Style" on page 1233.
6 Specify the parameters for the guardrail or the handrail:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height of the guardrail or the handrail
enter a value for Horizontal Height.
specify the height of guardrail or the handrail while it is on a enter a value for Sloping Height. stair flight
specify the distance that the guardrail or the handrail is offset enter a value for Offset from Post. from the posts
specify the side of the post for the offset, based on the direction the stair (or railing) was drawn
select Center, Left, Right, or Auto for Side for Offset. Side for Offset is available only when there is an offset value.
Auto is useful only for railings attached to the edges of stairs. A positive value is toward the center of the stair, while a negative value is toward the outside edge. Side for Offset for handrails also has a selection of Both, so you can specify a handrail on both sides of the railing.
If you select Auto, and the railing is not attached to or is along the center of a stair, the offset is to the right.
7 Specify the settings for bottom rails:
If you want to... specify the height of the lowest rail when it is horizontal
Then... enter a value for Horizontal.
1212 | Chapter 25 Railings
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height of the lowest rail when it is on a stair flight enter a value for Sloping.
specify the distance that the bottomrail is offset from the posts
enter a value for Offset from Post.
specify the side of the post for the offset, based on the direction the stair (or railing) was drawn
select Center, Left, Right, or Auto for Side for Offset. (Side for Offset is available only when there is an offset value.)
designate more than one bottom rail
enter a value for Number of Rails. When you designate multiple bottom rails, you can enter a value for Spacing of Rails.
8 If you want to revert to the rail settings defined in the style, click Reset To Style Values. 9 Click OK to return to the Properties palette. 10 Click the setting for Post Locations.
NOTE If the settings in the Post Locations worksheet are read-only, the post locations have been set in the style, and cannot be overridden here. For more information, see "Specifying Posts of a Railing Style" on page 1234.
11 Specify the post locations:
If you want to...
Then...
include fixed posts at the beginning and end of the railing select Fixed Posts.
specify the distance above or below the top rail for all posts enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Top Railing.
specify the height of all posts from the floor
enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Floor Level.
include fixed posts at the corners of the railing
select Fixed Posts at Railing Corners.
include dynamic posts with the railing
select Dynamic Posts. You can then enter a value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
include balusters with the railing
select Balusters.
specify the height of all balusters from the floor
enter a value for Extension of Balusters from Floor Level.
specify the maximum distance between the balusters
enter the appropriate value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
override the number of balusters on each stair tread
select Stair Tread Length Override. You can then enter a value for Number per Tread. (This applies only to railings that are attached to stairs.)
12 If you want to revert to the post settings defined in the style, click Reset To Style Values. 13 Click OK to return to the Properties palette. 14 Expand Location. 15 For Attached to, select Stair or Stair Flight. 16 To offset the railing in or out from the side of the stair, enter an offset value.
Positive values are in toward the center of the stair and negative values are out from the center of the stair. If the railing is center justified, a positive value is to the right and a negative value is to the left.
17 To attach the railing automatically to the full length of the stair or the stair flight, select Yes for Automatic Placement.
NOTE This option is available only if you have selected to attach the railing to a whole stair. If you are attaching the railing to a stair flight, it is always attached to the full length of the stair flight.
Creating an Attached Railing with User-Specified Settings | 1213
18 Select the stair or stair flight in the drawing to which you want to attach the new railing. 19 Select a side of a stair or a stair flight to place the railing. 20 If you have selected no automatic placement for the stair, define the contour of the desired railing by
selecting points in the drawing. Then press ENTER.
Creating a Freestanding Railing with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create a freestanding railing in the drawing. Creating a freestanding railing
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a railing tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Expand Dimensions. 5 Click the setting for Rail Locations.
NOTE If the settings in the Rail Locations worksheet are read-only, the rail locations have been set in the style, and cannot be overridden here. For more information, see "Specifying the Upper Rails of a Railing Style" on page 1232 and "Specifying the Bottom Rails of a Railing Style" on page 1233.
6 Specify the parameters for the guardrail or the handrail:
If you want to... specify the height of the guardrail or the handrail
Then... enter a value for Horizontal Height.
specify the height of the guardrail or the handrail while it is enter a value for Sloping Height. on a stair flight
specify the distance that the guardrail or the handrail is offset enter a value for Offset from Post. from the posts
specify the side of the post for the offset, based on the direction the stair (or railing) was drawn
select Center, Left, Right, or Auto for Side for Offset. (Side for Offset is available only when there is an offset value.)
Auto is useful only for railings attached to the edges of stairs. A positive value is toward the center of the stair, while a negative value is toward the outside edge. Side for Offset for handrails also has a selection of Both, so you can specify a handrail on both sides of the railing.
1214 | Chapter 25 Railings
If you select Auto, and the railing is not attached to or is along the center of a stair, the offset is to the right.
7 Specify the settings for bottom rails:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height of the lowest rail when it is horizontal
enter a value for Horizontal.
specify the height of the lowest rail when it is on a stair flight enter a value for Sloping.
specify the distance that the bottomrail is offset from the posts
enter a value for Offset from Post.
specify the side of the post for the offset, based on the direction the stair (or railing) was drawn
select Center, Left, Right, or Auto for Side for Offset. (Side for Offset is available only when there is an offset value.)
designate more than one bottom rail
enter a value for Number of Rails. When you designate multiple bottom rails, you can enter a value for Spacing of Rails.
8 If you want to revert to the rail settings defined in the style, click Reset To Style Values. 9 Click OK to return to the Properties palette. 10 Click the setting for Post locations.
NOTE If the settings in the Post Locations worksheet are read-only, the post locations have been set in the style, and cannot be overridden here. For more information, see "Specifying Posts of a Railing Style" on page 1234.
11 Specify the post locations:
If you want to...
Then...
include fixed posts at the beginning and end of the railing select Fixed Posts.
specify the distance above or below the top rail for all posts enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Top Railing.
specify the height of all posts from the floor
enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Floor Level.
include fixed posts at the corners of the railing
select Fixed Posts at Railing Corners.
include dynamic posts with the railing
select Dynamic Posts. You can then enter a value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
include balusters with the railing
select Balusters.
specify the height of all balusters from the floor
enter a value for Extension of Balusters from Floor Level.
specify the maximum distance between the balusters
enter the appropriate value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
override the number of balusters on each stair tread
select Stair Tread Length Override. You can then enter a value for Number per Tread. (This applies only to railings that are attached to stairs.)
12 If you want to revert to the post settings defined in the style, click Reset To Style Values. 13 Click OK to return to the Properties palette. 14 Expand Location. 15 For Attached to, select NONE. 16 Specify the start point of the railing. 17 Specify further points for the railing. 18 Press ENTER.
Creating a Freestanding Railing with User-Specified Settings | 1215
Creating a Railing from a Polyline
Use this procedure to convert a polyline to a railing that has the properties of the railing tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the railing.
Converting a polyline to a railing
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Apply Tool Properties Polyline. 3 Select the polyline to convert, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Edit the properties of the railing in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Railing Tool
Use this procedure to create a railing tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own railing tools if you are placing multiple railings of a specific style that all have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a railing in the drawing
Then... select the railing, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a railing style in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Re-open the tool palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
1216 | Chapter 25 Railings
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the railing created from this tool, and click OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select a railing style. 10 Select the drawing file containing the style used for this railing. 11 Select whether railings created from this tool should be attached to a stair, a stair flight, or be freestanding. 12 Click OK.
Editing Railings
You can edit railings by changing the style of the railing, the inclusion and location of various rails and posts, and the insertion point. You can also specify the height and offset of guardrails and handrails, and the extension and spacing of posts. Methods of Editing Railings Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing railings:
You can directly edit railings using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter
a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. You can change railing settings on the Properties palette. You can use editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected railing.
Using Grips to Edit Railings
Use these procedures to edit railings using grips. Editing Railing Dimensions
1 Select the railing. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
Viewing railing Start, End, Location, and Reverse Direction grips
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value.
Editing Railings | 1217
Viewing railing Fixed Post Position and Lengthen grips
Changing the Location or Position of a Railing 1 Select the railing. 2 Move the appropriate grip to change the location of the railing, its start point, or its endpoint.
Reversing the direction of the Railing 1 Select the railing. 2 Click the direction grip (arrow grip).
Adding a Post to a Railing
Use this procedure to add a post to a railing. The post is placed at a selected point on the railing. Adding a post to a railing
1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Post Placement Add. 3 Select a location for a new post. 4 Press ENTER.
Removing a Post from a Railing
Use this procedure to remove posts you have added to railings. You can only remove fixed posts. You cannot remove dynamic posts. The manually added post closest to the selected point is removed from the railing. If two posts are equidistant from the selected point, the post closer to the starting point of the railing is removed. If the current first fixed post is removed, then the next post becomes the first fixed post. Likewise, if the current last fixed post is removed, then the next post from the last becomes the last fixed post. If all but one post is removed from a railing, then the sole remaining post becomes the first fixed post.
1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Post Placement Remove.
1218 | Chapter 25 Railings
Redistributing Posts on a Railing
Use this procedure to reposition dynamic posts to account for posts that have been added or removed. You cannot redistribute displayed posts to account for hidden posts. You may also want to redistribute posts after dragging the endpoints (start and end offset) of a railing attached to a stair. If posts are lost after trimming a railing, use the Redistribute Posts command to restore the posts. If you have created a railing that is so short that only one post can be created, grip-editing and dragging the railing does not create another post. You must use the Redistribute Posts command to add another post to the end of the railing.
1 Select an existing railing. 2 Right-click, and click Redistribute Posts.
Hiding Posts
Use this procedure to hide posts in a railing. It is useful to hide posts in plan view so that the railing is visible as a solid component. These posts are not deleted; they are merely hidden from view. You can only hide fixed posts. You cannot hide dynamic posts. If the current first or last fixed post is hidden, then it remains the first or last fixed post regardless of its visibility.
1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Post Placement Hide.
Showing Hidden Posts
Use this procedure to show hidden posts. 1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Post Placement Show.
Reversing the Direction of the Railing
Use this procedure to reverse the direction of the railing to change the location of railing components. The direction in which the railing is drawn affects the behavior of the railing and its components.
NOTE You can also reverse the direction of a railing by clicking its direction grip (arrow grip).
1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Reverse.
Anchoring an Existing Railing to a Stair
Use this procedure to anchor an existing railing to a stair. Once attached, the railing stays where it is located in the drawing, but it moves when the attached stair is moved. This allows you to create free-form paths for a railing along a stair. For example, you might want to create a curved railing in the middle of a straight stair. Railings attached to stairs respect the stair cut plane. The height of the railing follows the slope of the stair, no matter where the posts are placed on the treads.
Redistributing Posts on a Railing | 1219
Attaching a railing to a stair
Railings that are attached to a stair or to a stair flight when created are anchored to the stair, at either side of the stairs or at the centerline.
1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Railing Anchor Anchor To Stair. 3 Select a stair object, and press ENTER.
Anchoring an Existing Railing to an Object
Use this procedure to anchor an existing railing to an AEC object other than a stair. Once attached, the railing stays where it is located in the drawing, but it moves when the attached object is moved. This allows you to create free-form paths for a railing along a stair or other object. Railings attached to objects other than stairs follow the height of the centerline of each post.
1220 | Chapter 25 Railings
Attaching a railing to an AEC object
1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Railing Anchor Anchor To Object. 3 Select an AEC object other than a stair, and press ENTER. 4 If you want to clean up the railing posts with the surface of the object to which it is attached, enter y (Yes)
on the command line. 5 Define the contour of the railing:
If you want to...
Then...
adapt only the posts to the surface of the attached object, and have straight segments between the posts
select At Post Locations Only for Calculate Height.
adapt the whole railing to the surface of the attached object, select Follow Surface for Calculate Height.
Releasing an Anchored Railing
Use this procedure to release an anchored railing from a stair. After the railing is released, it is independent of the stair. The railing and the stair can then be moved separately.
NOTE When a railing that is anchored to a stair is released, any changes to the railing (such as grip-editing or changing properties) may cause the railing to lose its slope. Be sure to correct the appearance of the railing before releasing it from the stair.
1 Select a railing. 2 Right-click, and click Railing Anchor Release.
The railing is no longer anchored to the stair.
Adding a Custom Profile to a Railing Component
Use this procedure to add a custom profile to a railing component. Guardrails, handrails, bottom rails, and fixed and dynamic posts can be defined by a custom profile. You can add a profile to a railing component either in the railing style, as described in "Specifying the Components of a Railing Style"
Releasing an Anchored Railing | 1221
on page 1235 or directly on screen. When you add a custom profile on screen, the new profile is automatically saved back to the railing style.
1 Create the necessary profile definition, as described in "Creating a Profile for a Custom Railing Component" on page 1236.
2 Select the railing to which you want to add a custom profile, right-click, and click Add Profile. 3 Select the railing component to which you want to add a profile.
You can select guardrails, handrails, bottom rails, fixed posts, and dynamic posts.
NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the correct component, switch to another view that makes the selection easier. For example, to select a bottom rail, switch to a Model view.
Adding a custom profile to a railing post
4 Select the profile for the railing component. 5 Either save the custom profile to the railing style immediately, or proceed with editing the profile:
If you want to...
Then...
save the new profile to the railing style
click OK.
edit the new profile
click Continue Editing, and then click OK. For information on editing a custom profile, see "Editing a Custom Profile of a Railing Component" on page 1222.
Editing a Custom Profile of a Railing Component
Use this procedure to edit a custom profile of a railing component. 1 Select the railing with a custom profile you want to edit. 2 Right-click, and click Edit Profile In Place. This command is available only if you have profile-based components in the railing. 3 Select the component you want to edit.
NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the correct component, switch to another view that makes the selection easier. For example, to select a bottom rail, switch to a Model view.
You have begun an in-place editing session, depicted by the magenta-colored grips and light blue hatch of the temporary in-place editing profile, as well as the faded color of other objects in the drawing. Note that while you are editing in-place, you have limited access to other commands in the drawing. Before working on other objects, you should first end the in-place editing session.
1222 | Chapter 25 Railings
4 Edit the profile: If you want to... use grips to edit the profile
add a vertex to the profile remove a vertex from the profile add a ring to a profile remove a ring from a profile
Then...
move the edge or vertex grips as needed.
The Edge grip has three edit modes: Offset, Add Vertex, and Convert to Arc. The default mode is Offset, which offsets the selected edge in a direction that is perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the profile and the edge you choose to modify, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added as necessary.
Use the Add Vertex edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is an arc as well.
Convert to Arc changes the selected edge to an arc and stretches the midpoint of the edge. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode, so that you can stretch the midpoint of the edge after it has been converted to an arc.
select an Edge grip, and press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location, and click; or enter a value, and press ENTER.
select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to remove, and press CTRL to switch to the Remove edit mode. Move the cursor off the selected vertex, and click.
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Ring. Then select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for an additional ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press ENTER.
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Ring. Then select the ring you want to remove.
NOTE You cannot remove the last ring from a profile.
replace a ring on a profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Then select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle for the replaced ring. Specify if you want to erase the source linework, and press ENTER.
5 Save the changes to the profile:
If you want to...
Then...
change the existing profile definition to reflect the new shape
select the profile, and click
.
create a new profile definition with the shape you have created
select the profile, right-click, and click Save As New Profile. Then enter a name for the new profile, and click OK. The inplace edit session closes and the new profile definition is available in the Style Manager.
discard all changes on the profile and revert to the previous
shape
select the profile, and click
.
Editing a Custom Profile of a Railing Component | 1223
Changing the Style of a Railing
Use this procedure to change the style associated with existing railings. 1 Select the railings for which you want to change the style, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a different style. 4 Click OK twice.
Changing the Upper Rails
Use this procedure to change the following settings for an individual railing:
guardrails handrails height sloping height offset from posts side for offset
NOTE If these settings are unavailable, they are controlled by the railing style. You cannot modify them for individual railings.
1 Double-click the railing for which you want to change the upper rails. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Click the setting for Rail Locations. 4 Select whether to include guardrails or handrails.
NOTE A railing must have a guardrail or a handrail. Both cannot be turned off.
5 Specify the parameters for the guardrail or the handrail:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height of the guardrail or the handrail
enter a value for Horizontal Height.
specify the height of guardrail or the handrail while it is on a enter a value for Sloping Height. stair flight
specify the distance that the guardrail or the handrail is offset enter a value for Offset from Post. from the posts
specify the side of the post for the offset, based on the direction the stair (or railing) was drawn
select Center, Left, Right, or Auto for Side for Offset. (Side for Offset is available only when there is an offset value.)
Auto is useful only for railings attached to the edges of stairs. A positive value is toward the center of the stair, while a negative value is toward the outside edge. Side for Offset for handrails also has a selection of Both, so you can specify a handrail on both sides of the railing.
If you select Auto, and the railing is not attached to or is along the center of a stair, the offset is to the right.
6 If you want to undo your changes and revert to the values set in the railing style, click Reset to Style Values.
7 Click OK.
1224 | Chapter 25 Railings
Changing the Bottom Rails
Use this procedure to change the following settings for the bottom rails of an individual railing:
whether to use bottom rails number of bottom rails distance between rails height of lowest rail
NOTE If these settings are unavailable, they are controlled by the railing style. You cannot modify them for individual railings.
1 Double-click the railing for which you want to change the bottom rails. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Click the setting for Rail Locations. 4 Select Bottomrail to add bottom rails to the railing. 5 Specify the settings for bottom rails:
If you want to... specify the height of the lowest rail when it is horizontal
Then... enter a value for Horizontal.
specify the height of the lowest rail when it is on a stair flight enter a value for Sloping.
specify the distance that the bottomrail is offset from the posts
enter a value for Offset from Post.
specify the side of the post for the offset, based on the direction the stair (or railing) was drawn
select Center, Left, Right, or Auto for Side for Offset. (Side for Offset is available only when there is an offset value.)
designate more than one bottom rail
enter a value for Number of Rails. When you designate multiple bottom rails, you can enter a value for Spacing of Rails.
6 If you want to undo your changes and revert to the values set in the railing style, click Reset to Style Values. 7 Click OK.
Changing the Posts
Use this procedure to change the following settings for the posts of an individual railing:
type of posts number of posts that extend above the railing maximum center-to-center spacing between posts maximum center-to-center spacing between balusters number of balusters per tread for railings that are attached to stairs
NOTE If these settings are unavailable, they are controlled by the railing style. You cannot modify them for individual railings.
1 Double-click the railing for which you want to change the post locations. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Click the setting for Post locations.
Changing the Bottom Rails | 1225
4 Specify the post locations:
If you want to... include fixed posts at the beginning and end of the railing
Then... select Fixed Posts.
specify the distance above or below the top rail for all posts enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Top Railing.
specify the height of all posts from the floor
enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Floor Level.
include fixed posts at the corners of the railing
select Fixed Posts at Railing Corners.
include dynamic posts with the railing
select Dynamic Posts. You can then enter a value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
include balusters with the railing
select Balusters.
specify the height of all balusters from the floor
enter a value for Extension of Balusters from Floor Level.
specify the maximum distance between the balusters
enter the appropriate value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
override the number of balusters on each stair tread
select Stair Tread Length Override. You can then enter a value for Number per Tread. (This applies only to railings that are attached to stairs.)
5 If you want to undo your changes and revert to the values set in the railing style, click Reset to Style Values. 6 Click OK.
Changing the Railing Extensions at Floor Levels
Use this procedure to control the length of the handrail and guardrail extensions at the top and bottom of stair flights. If a bottom rail exists, it extends as far as the railing above it.
NOTE If these settings are unavailable, they are controlled by the railing style. You cannot modify them for individual railings.
1 Double-click the railing for which you want to change the extensions. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Click the setting for Railing Extensions. 4 Specify the railing extension properties:
If you want to...
Then...
use values in this dialog box to specify extensions
clear Use Stair Landing Extension.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the top of enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
an entire stair
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the bottom enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
of an entire stair
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
5 If you want to undo your changes and revert to the values set in the railing style, click Reset to Style Values. 6 Click OK.
Changing the Railing Extensions at Landings
Use this procedure to control the length of the handrail and guardrail extensions at landings. If a bottom rail exists, it extends as far as the railing above it.
NOTE If these settings are unavailable, they are controlled by the railing style. You cannot modify them for individual railings.
1 Double-click the railing for which you want to change the extensions.
1226 | Chapter 25 Railings
2 Expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Click the setting for Railing Extensions. 4 Specify the railing extension properties:
If you want to... use values in this dialog box to specify extensions
Then... clear Use Stair Landing Extension under At Landings.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the top of enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
a flight
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the bottom enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
of a flight
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
5 If you want to undo your changes and revert to the values set in the railing style, click Reset to Style Values. 6 Click OK.
Changing the Anchor Properties of a Railing
Use this procedure to change the justification of a railing and the side, start, and end offsets. These properties apply only to railings attached to stairs.
1 Double-click the railing for which you want to change the anchor properties. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Anchor.
4 Change the justification of the railing. 5 Change the side offset from the stair:
A value of zero places the start and end fixed posts exactly at the ends of the stair. Positive values move the start/end onto the stair. Negative values extend the railing beyond the stair bounds.
NOTE If Automatic is selected, the start and end offset options are not available.
6 Change the start offset from the top of the stair. 7 Change the ending offset at the bottom of the stair. 8 Click Redistribute Posts to change the existing posts.
NOTE If you edit a railing using grips so that the railing does not end on a post, you can use Redistribute Posts to move a post to the end of the edited railing.
Changing the Anchor Properties of a Railing | 1227
9 Click OK.
Specifying Perpendicular Railing Orientation
Use this procedure to specify perpendicular or vertical railing orientation relative to a stair flight. By default, railing have a vertical orientation when you create them. Specifying perpendicular railings
1 Select the railing. 2 On the Properties palette, under Dimensions, select Yes for Perpendicular Posts. Under Location, select Yes
for Automatic Cleanup. Once a perpendicular railing orientation has been specified, you can use grips to change first and last posts to a vertical orientaion. Specifying perpendicular railings
1 Select the perpendicular railing. 2 Select the Make Vertical grip.
The Make vertical grip changes to a Make perpendicular grip once you have specified a vertical orientation for the railing post. Select the Make perpendicular grip to return the post to a perpendicular orientation. Viewing post orientaion grips
When a stair has a landing, you also have the option of specifying the orientation of landing posts.
1228 | Chapter 25 Railings
Specifying landing post orientation
1 Select the railing.
2 On the Properties palette, under Dimensions, select Yes for Perpendicular Posts, then select Yes for Maintain Sloping Posts at Landings. Under Location, select Yes for Automatic Cleanup.
Changing the Location of a Railing
Use this procedure to relocate a railing by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The railing also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the railing are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the railing by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the railing on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
NOTE You can change the location of freestanding railings only. The location of a railing attached to a stair is defined by the stair.
1 Select the railings you want to relocate, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Enter a value for Rotation. 4 Enter a value for Elevation. 5 Click Additional Information for further location properties:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the railing
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
Changing the Location of a Railing | 1229
If you want to... locate the railing on the XY plane locate the railing on the YZ plane locate the railing on the XZ plane change the rotation of the railing
Then...
make the normal of the railing parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
make the normal of the railing parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the railing parallel to the Y axis: enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
6 Click OK.
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Railing
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a railing tool to one or more existing railings. The properties include the railing style and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Railing. 3 Select the railings, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the railing in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Railing
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, text notes, and files to a railing. 1 Double-click the railing to which you want to attach information. 2 Click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. For more information about adding hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click the setting for Notes, and add a note. Then click OK. 5 Click the setting for Reference Documents. 6 Attach or detach reference files:
If you want to ... attach a reference file
Then ...
click
, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
enter text under Description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click
.
7 Click OK.
1230 | Chapter 25 Railings
Railing Styles
A railing style is a group of properties assigned to a railing that determines the appearance and other characteristics of the railing.
Railing Components
In a railing style, you specify the following properties of railing components:
guardrails handrails bottom rails first fixed post last fixed post interior fixed posts dynamic posts balusters
You can specify the height of rails and posts, the spacing between posts, the spacing between rails, and the width and depth of components. You can specify the display of different first and last posts, as well as different interior fixed posts. You can also create custom railing components by assigning custom profiles to replace standard railing components.
Custom Railing Components and Special Conditions
To create custom extruded components (railings, posts, or balusters) in a railing style, you define a profile and select it to replace a component on the Components tab. The resulting component is displayed appropriately in all views and does not have to be added to the display properties. You can create a custom block to represent a complex design for a component that cannot be created from a profile, such as an elaborate wrought iron design in place of balusters, or an unusually shaped component. That block is used to represent the component in model views. You can create a profile to represent the custom component in plan views. You can also use the custom blocks and profiles features of the display properties to represent additional railing components other than posts, rails, and balusters. In such cases, the component is added to the component rather than replacing it. For example, you can create a custom block for Model views and a profile for Plan views of a curved-railing return piece that ends by attaching to a wall. You can then add the block or profile to the rail components.
Using Materials in Railing Styles
You can use materials to control how railings of each style are displayed in a drawing. You assign materials to the railing components in the style. The components are then displayed using the display properties of the assigned materials. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a number of predefined materials for common design purposes. You can use these materials "as is," or modify them for your project requirements. You can also define new materials. For more information about materials and how to define them, see "Materials" on page 464.
Creating Tools from Railing Styles
You can create a railing tool from any railing style. You can drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify default settings for any railing created from the tool. For more information, see "Creating a Railing Tool" on page 1216.
Managing Railing Styles
To create, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop, for working with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Getting Started with the Style Manager" on page 453.
Railing Styles | 1231
Creating a Railing Style
Use this procedure to create a railing style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Railing Styles. 3 Create a railing style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a style with default properties
right-click Railing Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the railing style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new railing style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new railing style:
If you want to...
Then...
specify default dimensions and offsets for upper rails of the see "Specifying the Upper Rails of a Railing Style" on page
style
1232.
specify default dimensions and offsets for bottom rails of the see "Specifying the Bottom Rails of a Railing Style" on
style
page 1233.
specify the location and interval of posts and balusters for the see "Specifying Posts of a Railing Style" on page 1234. style
specify the structural components of the style
see "Specifying the Components of a Railing Style" on page 1235.
specify railing extensions at floor levels and at landings
see "Specifying the Railing Extensions of a Railing Style" on page 1237.
assign materials to the components of the railing style
see "Assigning Materials to a Railing Style" on page 1238.
add classifications to a railing style
see "Specifying Classifications for a Railing Style" on page 1239.
specify display components of the style
see "Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style" on page 1239.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Railing Style" on page 1240.
6 If you want to assign the style to a railing tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette. You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Railing Tool" on page 1216.
7 Click OK.
Specifying the Upper Rails of a Railing Style
Use this procedure to change the following settings for guardrails and handrails in a railing style:
sloping height offset from posts side for offsets
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles.
1232 | Chapter 25 Railings
3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Rail Locations tab.
5 Specify whether upper rail properties of this railing style can be overridden for individual railing objects:
If you want to...
Then...
specify guardrail and handrail properties, such as horizontal select Allow Each Railing to Vary. height, sloping height, and offset distance, when you add or modify railings
require that all railings of this style use the upper rail settings clear Allow Each Railing to Vary. of the style
NOTE Changes to guardrails and handrails do not affect existing railings of this style unless Allow Each Railing to Vary is clear.
6 Select whether to include guardrails and handrails. A railing must have a guardrail or handrail. Both cannot be turned off.
7 Specify the following parameters for the guardrail or the handrail:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the height for the guardrail or the handrail
enter a value for Horizontal Height.
specify the height for the guardrail or the handrail while it is enter a value for Sloping Height. on a stair flight
specify the distance that the guardrail or the handrail is offset enter a value for Offset from Post. from the posts
specify the side of the post for the offset, based on the direction the stair (or railing) was drawn
select Center, Left, Right, or Auto for Side for Offset. (Side for Offset is available only when there is an offset value.)
Auto is useful only for railings attached to the edges of stairs. A positive value is toward the center of the stair, while a negative value is toward the outside edge. Side for Offset for handrails also has a selection of Both, so you can specify a handrail on both sides of the railing.
If you select Auto, and the railing is not attached to a stair or is along the center of a stair, the offset is to the right.
8 Click OK.
Specifying the Bottom Rails of a Railing Style
Use this procedure to change the following settings for bottom rails in a railing style:
number of bottom rails distance between rails height of lowest rail
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
Specifying the Bottom Rails of a Railing Style | 1233
4 Click the Rail Locations tab.
5 Specify whether bottom rail properties of this railing style can be overridden for individual railing objects:
If you want to...
Then...
specify bottom rail properties, such as horizontal height,
select Allow Each Railing to Vary.
sloping height, and number of rails, when you add or modify
railings
require that all railings of this style use the bottom rail settings clear Allow Each Railing to Vary. of the style
6 Select Bottomrail to add bottom rails to the railing.
NOTE Changes to bottom rails do not affect existing railings of this style unless Allow Each Railing to Vary is clear.
7 Specify the parameters for bottom rails:
If you want to... specify the height of the lowest rail when it is horizontal
Then... enter a value for Horizontal.
specify the height of the lowest rail when it is on a stair flight enter a value for Sloping.
designate more than one bottom rail
enter a value for Number of Rails. When you designate multiple bottom rails, you can enter a value for Spacing of Rails.
8 Click OK.
Specifying Posts of a Railing Style
Use this procedure to change the following settings for posts in a railing style:
type of posts (first fixed, last fixed, fixed, dynamic, and balusters) distance the posts extend above railings maximum spacing between posts and balusters number of balusters for each tread for railings that are attached to stairs
First fixed posts and last fixed posts are attached at the beginning and end of each railing, respectively. Additional fixed posts and dynamic posts are added to the railing between the first and last fixed posts. Balusters are closely spaced supports for a railing. You can specify the spacing between dynamic posts and between balusters.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
1234 | Chapter 25 Railings
4 Click the Post Locations tab.
5 Specify whether the post properties of this railing style can be overridden for individual railing objects:
If you want to...
Then...
specify post properties, such as fixed posts, dynamic posts, select Allow Each Railing to Vary. and balusters, when you add or modify railings
require all railings of this style to use the post settings of the clear Allow Each Railing to Vary. style
NOTE Changes to posts do not affect existing railings of this style unless Allow Each Railing to Vary is clear.
6 Specify the post locations:
If you want to...
Then...
include fixed posts at the beginning and end of the railing select Fixed Posts.
specify the distance above or below the top rail for all posts enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Top Railing.
specify the height of all posts from the floor
enter a value for Extension of ALL Posts from Floor Level.
include fixed posts at the corners of the railing
select Fixed Posts at Railing Corners.
include dynamic posts with the railing
select Dynamic Posts. You can then enter a value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
include balusters with the railing
select Balusters. You can then enter a value for Maximum Center to Center Spacing.
override the number of balusters on each stair tread
select Stair Tread Length Override. You can then enter a value for Number per Tread. This applies only to railings that are attached to stairs.
7 Click OK.
Specifying the Components of a Railing Style
Use this procedure to specify the shape of the railing components, and the width, depth, and rotation of each component for each railing style. You can use profiles to create railing components with custom shapes. The custom profile replaces a component on the Components tab of the Railing Styles dialog box. For more information, see "Creating a Profile for a Custom Railing Component" on page 1236.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool.
Specifying the Components of a Railing Style | 1235
2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Components tab.
5 Select the component to change. 6 Select the profile you want to use for the selected component.
The default profiles are circular and rectangular. Any profiles in the current drawing are also displayed. 7 Click Width, and enter a width for the selected component. 8 Click Depth, and enter a depth for the selected component.
Depth is not available for the default circular profile. 9 Click Rotation, and enter a rotation for the selected component.
Rotation is not available for rail components, or when the default circular profile is used for posts. 10 Click OK.
Creating a Profile for a Custom Railing Component
Use this procedure to create a profile from a closed polyline. You can then use the profile to define a custom railing component. The custom shape is extruded from the profile along the length of the component. The height and the width of the polyline you use to create the profile define the height and the width of the railing component. You can change the scale and dimensions of the profile as you add it.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the height and the depth needed for the resulting railing component. 2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 3 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Profiles. 4 Right-click, and click New. 5 Enter a name for the profile. 6 Right-click the new profile, and click Set From. 7 Select the profile in the drawing area. 8 When prompted to add another ring, press ENTER. 9 Press ENTER to accept Centroid as the insertion point of the profile. 10 Click OK.
You can now use the profile to replace a railing component. For more information, see "Adding Custom Railing Blocks and Profiles to a Railing Style" on page 1240.
1236 | Chapter 25 Railings
Specifying the Railing Extensions of a Railing Style
Use this procedure to control the length of the handrail and guardrail extensions at the top and bottom of stair flights. If a bottom rail exists, it extends as far as the railing above it. If railing extensions are not allowed to vary, the endpoint cannot be grip-edited.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool.
2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles.
3 Select the style you want to edit.
4 Click the Extensions tab.
5 Specify whether railing extensions of this railing style can be overridden for individual railing objects:
If you want to...
Then...
specify railing extension properties, such as handrails and guardrails at the top and bottom of entire stairs, when you add or modify railings
select Allow Each Railing to Vary.
require that all railings of this style use the extension settings clear Allow Each Railing to Vary. of the style
NOTE Changes to railing extensions do not affect existing railings of this style unless Allow Each Railing to Vary is clear.
6 Specify the properties of railing extensions:
If you want to... use values in this dialog box to specify extensions
Then... clear Use Stair Landing Extension under At Floor Levels.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the top of enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
an entire stair
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the bottom enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
of an entire stair
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
use values in this dialog box to specify extensions
clear Use Stair Landing Extension under At Landings.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the top of enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
a flight
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
specify the length of the handrail and guardrail at the bottom enter values for Handrail and Guardrail. Select + T next to the
of a flight
value to add the tread length to the extension value.
7 Click OK.
Specifying the Railing Extensions of a Railing Style | 1237
Specifying the Materials of a Railing Style
A railing consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component. You assign one material to each physical component of the railing. For example, you assign a wood material to the balusters of a railing and a stainless steel material to the handrail and bottomrail. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
If you want to use the display properties of the railing style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the railing style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in three dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
Railing Materials and Display Components
The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each railing component.
Railing Component Plan, Plan Screened, Plan High Detail Posts Guardrail Handrail Bottomrail Plan Low Detail Posts Guardrail Handrail Model, Model ByBlock, Model Monochrome Baluster Posts Guardrail Handrail Bottomrail
Material Component
Linework Linework Linework Linework
Linework Linework Linework
3D Body 3D Body 3D Body 3D Body 3D Body
Assigning Materials to a Railing Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a railing style. The component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the railing. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a railing component, you can change the display properties of the railing style as described in "Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style" on page 1239.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
1238 | Chapter 25 Railings
8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK. If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style
Use this procedure to change the following properties of the display components of a railing style:
Visibility (display component is on or off) By Material (material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE If a material assignment determines the display properties of components in the railing style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material. You can also override the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Railing Style" on page 1238.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK.
Specifying Classifications for a Railing Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a railing style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change.
Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style | 1239
4 Click the Classifications tab. By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to area styles.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current railing style. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Railing Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a railing style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a railing style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the railing style, enter the description under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you finish editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK.
Adding Custom Railing Blocks and Profiles to a Railing Style
You can specify custom blocks and profiles to add to or replace individual railing components. You can add to or replace posts, dynamic posts, and balusters can be added to or replaced, and you can add to (but not replace) other railing components.
When you add a custom block and profile, you can specify several rules for positioning and scaling the new component. Each custom block or profile is also added to the display properties so that you can control its layer, color, and linetype. Be sure that the objects used to create the custom blocks are created with their properties designated as ByBlock. Otherwise, they cannot be controlled through the display properties. For more information about ByBlock, see "Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
After you create custom blocks and profiles, you can attach them to railing styles. Using custom blocks and profiles, railing styles can provide a much richer and more flexible set of railing graphics.
Adding a Custom Block to a Railing Style
Use this procedure to add a custom block to a railing style. The block can replace a railing component, such as a baluster, or be added to a component. You attach the block in display representations, such as Model, that show the railing in three dimensions.
1240 | Chapter 25 Railings
Assigning a custom block as a baluster component to a railing
You can use a block to replace a component on the Components tab of the Railing Styles dialog box, or you can use a block to represent additional railing components in the display of railings. You add a block to the display components of a style; a component that you replace on the Components tab is already a part of the display properties.
1 Create a block to represent the component to add to the railing. Create the block in the same plane as the railing to which you will attach it. Be sure that the objects used to create the custom blocks are created with their properties designated as ByBlock. Otherwise, they cannot be controlled through the display properties.
2 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 3 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 4 Select the style you want to edit. 5 Click the Display Properties tab. 6 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
NOTE You can add a custom block to a railing only in Model-based display representations.
7 If necessary, click . 8 Click the Other tab. 9 Click Add. 10 In the Custom Block dialog box, click Select Block. 11 Select the block to use, and click OK. 12 Specify the scale of the custom block:
If you want to... use the block at its drawn size
Then... clear all options under Scale to Fit.
scale the custom block to the width of the object to which it select Width. is attached
scale the custom block to the depth of the object to which select Depth. it is attached
scale the custom block to the height of the object to which select Height. it is attached
lock the XY shape of the object
select Lock Ratio. If the object is scaled in one direction to fit another criterion for Scale to Fit, the whole custom block is scaled equally.
Adding a Custom Block to a Railing Style | 1241
If you want to...
Then...
add the selected block to the railings between the selected select Between Comp. Baluster, Main Post, and Dynamic
components
Posts are the only valid component selections.
13 Specify the Mirror In direction, if necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
create a mirror of the component in the X direction, along select Mirror X. the length of the railing
create a mirror of the component in the Y direction, across select Mirror Y. the width of the railing
create a mirror of the component in the Z direction
select Mirror Z.
14 Specify the location of the insertion point in relation to the object:
If you want to... specify the location of the X insertion point
Then... select Left, Center, or Right for X.
specify the location of the Y insertion point
select Front, Center, or Back for Y.
specify the location of the Z insertion point
select Bottom, Middle, or Top for Z.
Specify the post orientation relative to the up and down directions on a stair run in plan view as shown in the following illustration:
Specify the post orientation relative to the up and down directions on a stair run in elevation view as shown in the following illustration:
15 Specify the insertion offset for the component in the X, Y, and Z directions. 16 Specify the type of railing component that the block represents:
If you want to... represent balusters with the block
Then... select Baluster for Component.
represent main posts with the block
select Main Post for Component.
represent dynamic posts with the block
select Dynamic Post for Component.
replace the current baluster, main post, or dynamic post with select Replace. the block
represent a guardrail with the block
select Guardrail for Component.
represent a handrail with the block
select Handrail for Component.
1242 | Chapter 25 Railings
If you want to... represent a bottom rail with the block
Then... select Bottomrail for Component.
The two groups of components are mutually exclusive, so selecting an object from one column makes the other unavailable. You can select more than one object in each column to apply the block to each selected component. For example, you can use the same block for the main posts and dynamic posts.
17 Specify where the block is applied to the components:
If you want to...
Then...
apply the block to all instances of the selected components select All for Attach to.
apply the block to the first instance of the selected component, based on the direction the railing was drawn
select First for Attach to.
apply the block to the last instance of the selected component, based on the direction the railing was drawn
select Last for Attach to.
apply the block to a selected number of components
select Selection for Attach to. The components are numbered in the order the railing was drawn, beginning with 1.
18 Click OK twice.
After adding the block to the style, you can specify the layer, color, and linetype of the block. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style" on page 1239.
Adding a Custom Profile to a Railing Style
Use this procedure to add a custom profile to a railing style in the Plan display representation. You can replace one or more railing components with a custom profile, or you can assign different custom profiles to different railing components.
You can use a profile to replace a component on the Components tab of the Railing Styles dialog box, or you can use a profile to represent additional railing components in the display of railings. You add a profile to the display properties of a style; a component that you replace on the Components tab is already a part of the display properties.
For more information about creating profiles for railing components, see "Creating a Profile for a Custom Railing Component" on page 1236.
Assigning a profile to a baluster in a railing
1 Create a profile to represent the component to add to the railing. Create the profile in the XY plane. 2 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 3 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 4 Select the style you want to edit.
Adding a Custom Profile to a Railing Style | 1243
5 Click the Display Properties tab. 6 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
NOTE You can add a custom profile to a railing only in Plan-based display representations.
7 If necessary, click . 8 Click the Other tab. 9 Click Add. 10 In the Custom Profile dialog box, click Select Profile. 11 Select the profile, and click OK. 12 Specify the scale of the custom profile:
If you want to...
Then...
use the block at its drawn size
clear all options under Scale to Fit.
scale the custom profile to the width of the object to which select Width. it is attached
scale the custom profile to the depth of the object to which select Depth. it is attached
scale the custom profile to the height of the object to which select Height. it is attached
lock the XY shape of the object
select Lock Ratio. If the object is scaled in one direction to fit another criterion for Scale to Fit, the entire custom profile is scaled equally.
add the selected profile to the railings between the selected select Between Comp. Baluster, Main Post, and Dynamic
components
Posts are the only valid component selections.
13 Specify the Mirror In direction, if necessary:
If you want to...
create a mirror of the component in the X direction, along the length of the railing
Then... select Mirror X.
create a mirror of the component in the Y direction, across select Mirror Y. the width of the railing
14 Specify the angle to rotate the component in the Z direction, if necessary. 15 Specify the location of the insertion point in relation to the object:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the location of the X insertion point
select Left, Center, or Right for X.
specify the location of the Y insertion point
select Front, Center, or Back for Y.
1244 | Chapter 25 Railings
Specify the post orientation relative to the up and down directions on a stair run in plan view as shown in the following illustration:
Specify the post orientation relative to the up and down directions on a stair run in elevation view as shown in the following illustration:
16 Specify the insertion offset for the component in the X andY directions. 17 Specify the type of railing component that the profile represents:
If you want to... represent balusters with the selected profile
Then... select Baluster for Component.
represent main posts with the selected profile
select Main Post for Component.
represent dynamic posts with the selected profile
select Dynamic Post for Component.
replace the current baluster, main post, or dynamic post with select Replace. the selected profile
add a guardrail to the selected profile
select Guardrail for Component.
add a handrail to the selected profile
select Handrail for Component.
add a bottom rail to the selected profile
select Bottomrail for Component.
The two groups of components are mutually exclusive, so selecting an object from one column makes the other unavailable. You can select more than one object in each column, and apply the profile to each selected component. For example, you can use the same profile for the main posts and dynamic posts.
18 Specify where the profile is applied to the components:
If you want to...
Then...
apply the profile to all instances of the selected components select All for Attach to.
apply the profile to the first instance of the selected component, based on the direction the railing was drawn
select First for Attach to.
apply the profile to the last instance of the selected component, based on the direction the railing was drawn
select Last for Attach to.
apply the profile to a selected number of components
select Selection for Attach to. The components are numbered in the order the railing was drawn.
19 Click OK twice.
Turning Off a Custom Block or Custom Profile in a Railing Style
Use this procedure to turn off the display of all custom blocks or profiles without actually removing them from the railing style.
Turning Off a Custom Block or Custom Profile in a Railing Style | 1245
You can selectively turn off the visibility of individual display blocks on the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. This is one way to switch between alternate blocks. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style" on page 1239.
1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
NOTE Custom blocks are added and turned off in Model-based display representations; Custom profiles are added and turned off in Plan-based display representations.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Disable the custom component:
If you want to... turn off a custom block turn off a custom profile
Then... click Disable Custom Blocks. click Disable Custom Profile
9 Click OK.
Removing a Custom Block from a Railing Style
Use this procedure to delete custom components from a railing style. 1 Open a tool palette that has a railing tool. 2 Right-click a railing tool, and click Railing Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
NOTE Custom blocks are added and removed in Model-based display representations; Custom profiles are added and removed in Plan-based display representations.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select the component to remove, and click Remove. 9 Click OK.
1246 | Chapter 25 Railings
Roofs
26
Roofs are AEC objects that model an entire roof surface. You can create roofs independently of other objects, or you can select a polyline shape and place a roof on that shape. You can also select closed walls and place a roof on the walls, change the slope of a roof, and edit its edges and faces.
1247
Roofs
Roofs are AEC objects that you can use to model an entire multiple-face roof surface. You can create roofs independently of other objects, or you can place a roof on a shape defined by a polyline or by a closed set of walls. After creating the roof, you can change its overall dimensions and slope, or edit its edges and faces individually. For more flexibility in customizing a roof, you can convert it to a collection of individual roof slabs. Roof Slabs A roof slab models a single face of a roof. Roof slab objects also differ from roof objects in that each roof slab is a separate entity with no direct connection to other entities. When you use multiple roof slabs to model an entire roof surface, you have more flexibility in editing the roof, but the combined topology (3D geometry) of the roof is not calculated automatically. For this reason, it is recommended that when you design complex roofs, you start with a roof object. Then, when the design is substantially complete, but you need more flexibility for customizing edges and other details, you can convert the roof to individual roof slabs. For information on creating and editing roof slabs, see "Slabs and Roof Slabs" on page 1261. While roof slabs do not dynamically interact with each other, they do allow significant control over the roof geometry. For example, you can trim roof slabs individually, extend them, and miter them with other roof slabs. You can also cut holes in roof slabs, add or subtract mass elements, and apply detailed fascia and soffit profiles to any edge at any angle and orientation. Because roof slabs are style-based, you can apply design changes globally. Materials in Roofs You can assign materials to a roof. Materials are displayed in wireframe and working shade views, or when linked into Autodesk VIZ® Render. Materials have specific settings for the physical components of a roof, such as slab. For more information see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474. Viewing roofs in 2D wireframe and rendered views
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for common design purposes. These materials contain settings for roof components. You can use the predefined materials "as is," or modify them for your designs. You can also create your own materials. Object styles provided with the software have appropriate materials already assigned to them. For more information, see Roof Slab Materials and Display Components and "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
Using Roof Tools to Create Roofs
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place roofs by selecting a roof tool with a specific roof style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with all of its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can create roofs with single or double slopes and gable roofs. You can also use roof tools to create new roofs by applying tool properties to existing polylines and walls.
1248 | Chapter 26 Roofs
Tool palette containing roof tool
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample roof tools that you can use and customize as necessary. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain roof tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Sample Palette catalog Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain roof tools with properties customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating a Slope Roof
Use this procedure to add a slope roof that has the properties specified in the roof tool that you select. You can create a single slope or a double slope roof object. To specify settings when you add a roof, see "Creating a Slope Roof with User-Specified Settings" on page 1251. NOTE To add additional slopes to a roof face, right-click a roof object and click Edit Edges/Faces. Creating a single slope roof
Creating a double slope roof
1 Open the tool palette that contains the roof tool you want to use, and select the tool.
Creating a Slope Roof | 1249
(You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.) 2 On the Properties palette, select Single slope or Double slope for Shape.
TIP After specifying the desired setting, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 In the drawing area, specify points for the corners of the roof. 4 When you are finished specifying points, press ENTER.
Creating a Gable Roof
Use this procedure to add a gable roof that has the properties specified in the roof tool that you select. You can create a single sloped roof and set each edge to gable as needed. You can specify a slope for the gable ends to create a hip. To specify settings when you add a roof, see "Creating a Gable Roof with User-Specified Settings" on page 1252. Viewing a gable roof end
NOTE You can create a gable on an existing roof by gripping any ridge line point and stretching it past the roof edge. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the roof tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.) 2 On the Properties palette, select Single slope for Shape. 3 In the drawing area, specify the first point for the first roof edge. 4 Specify the second point to complete the first sloped roof edge. 5 On the Properties palette, select Gable for Shape. 6 In the drawing area, specify the next point to create a gable roof edge. 7 Select Single slope for Shape. 8 Specify the next point to create a sloped roof edge. 9 Select Gable slope for Shape.
10 Specify additional points as needed to define the roof, and press ENTER. To create a clipped gable roof, you first need to convert the gabled roof to roof slabs. For more information, see "Creating a Roof Slab from a Roof" on page 1268and "Creating a Clipped Gable Roof" on page 1305.
Creating Dormers
To add a dormer to a roof, you must first convert the roof to roof slabs, and then create additional roof slabs, walls, and all other parts of the dormer. For more information, see "Creating a Roof Slab from a Roof" on page 1268and "Creating a Dormer in a Roof Slab" on page 1306.
1250 | Chapter 26 Roofs
Creating a Slope Roof with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a slope roof with settings that you specify. You can create a single slope or a double slope roof object. Creating a single slope roof
Creating a double slope roof
1 Open the tool palette that contains the roof tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Next Edge. 3 Select Single slope or Double slope for Shape. 4 Enter a value for Overhang. 5 Expand Lower Slope, and enter values for Plate Height, Rise, and Slope.
Plate height is the height of the bottom surface of the roof at its lowest edge (where the overhang begins). This is usually the height of the top plate of the wall that the roof sits on.
6 For a double slope roof, expand Upper Slope, and enter values for Upper Height, Rise, and Slope. TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
7 In the drawing area, specify points for the corners of the roof. 8 When you are finished specifying points, press ENTER.
Creating a Slope Roof with User-Specified Settings | 1251
Creating a Gable Roof with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a gable roof with settings that you specify. You create a single sloped roof and set each edge to gable as needed. You can specify a slope for the gable ends to create a hip. TIP You can create a gable on an existing roof by dragging a ridge line grip to the roof edge or beyond, as shown.FSW: How about making this into an example that shows the grip? I'd like to do away with any captions that say "Viewing" unless they illustrate how to make something visible. Viewing a gable roof end
1 Open the tool palette that contains the roof tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Next Edge. 3 Select Single slope for Shape.
TIP You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 4 In the drawing area, specify the first point for the first roof edge. 5 Specify the second point to complete the first sloped roof edge. 6 On the Properties palette, select Gable for Shape. 7 In the drawing area, specify the next point to create a gable roof edge. 8 Select Single slope for Shape. 9 Specify the next point to create a sloped roof edge. 10 Select Gable slope for Shape. 11 Specify additional points as needed to define the roof, and press ENTER.
Creating a Roof from Walls
Use this procedure to create a roof that is based on a selected closed set of walls and has the properties of the roof tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the roof. The roof takes its plate height from the top of each wall segment. NOTE If your walls are not properly cleaned up, the roof conversion is unpredictable. For more information, see "Cleanup Group Definitions" on page 661.
1252 | Chapter 26 Roofs
Creating a roof from walls
1 Open the tool palette that contains the roof tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click a roof tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework and Walls. 3 Select the walls to convert, and press ENTER.
NOTE If the walls you select are not closed, a roof is added to the top of each wall segment. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the wall, or enter y (Yes) to erase it. 5 Edit the properties of the roof on the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Roof from Polylines
Use this procedure to create a roof that is based on a two-dimensional (2D) polyline and has the properties of the roof tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the roof. Creating a roof from a polyline
1 Draw a closed 2D polyline in the shape of the intended roof, in the location where you want to place the roof.
2 Open the tool palette that contains the roof tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
3 Right-click a roof tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework and Walls. 4 Select the polyline to convert, and press ENTER. 5 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it.
Creating a Roof from Polylines | 1253
6 Edit the properties of the roof on the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Roof Tool
Use this procedure to create a roof tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own roof tools if you are placing multiple roofs that have the same properties.
For example, you are creating an office building that has a multi-peaked roof. Although the entire roof is single sloped, each peak has a different slope. To work efficiently, you can create a roof tool for each slope, and select the appropriate tool to place the roofs with the correct slope on each area of the building.
1 Open the tool palette on which to create a tool.
2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a roof in the drawing
Then... select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from the Content Browser
open the Content Browser and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the roof created from this tool, and click OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Specify roof settings:
If you want to...
Then...
change the thickness value
expand Dimensions, and enter a value for Thickness.
change the type of edge
expand Dimensions, and select a new setting for Edge cut.
change the roof shape
expand Next Edge, and select a new setting for Shape.
add or remove the overhang, or change the overhang value expand Next Edge, and enter a value for Overhang.
change the plate height
expand Lower Slope, and enter a value for Plate Height.
change the upper height for a double slope roof
expand Upper Slope, and enter a value for Upper Height.
change the rise or slope angle for each slope
expand Lower Slope, or Upper Slope for a double slope roof, and enter a value for Rise or Slope.
10 Click OK.
Editing Roofs
After placing roofs, you can edit any characteristics of the roof that you specified when you drew the roof. You can change the basic geometry of a roof, apply a different roof shape, and change the roof edge or overhang conditions.
1254 | Chapter 26 Roofs
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing roofs: Edit roofs directly using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. Change roof settings on the Properties palette. Select editing commands from the context menu for a selected roof.
Using Grips to Edit Roofs
Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use roof grips to edit roofs. Editing Roof Dimensions
1 Select the roof. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
Roof grips
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once, or enter a value.
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Roof
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a roof tool to one or more existing roofs. The properties include any settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a roof tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Roof. 3 Select the roof, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Edit the properties of the roof on the Properties palette, if necessary.
Changing the Dimensions of a Roof
Use this procedure to change the dimensions of a roof, including the plate height, the upper height for a double slope (gambrel) roof, the slope, and the depth of the overhang. You can also change the thickness of the roof slabs and the type of roof edge. NOTE You can create a gable end on a roof by gripping any ridge line point and stretching it past the roof edge.
1 Select the roof.
Using Grips to Edit Roofs | 1255
2 On the Properties palette, specify roof settings:
If you want to... change the thickness value
Then... under Dimensions, enter a value for Thickness.
change the type of edge
under Dimensions, select a new setting for Edge cut.
change the number of slopes
under Dimensions, select a new setting for Shape.
add or remove the overhang, or change the overhang value under Dimensions, enter a value for Overhang.
change the plate height
under Lower Slope, enter a value for Plate Height.
change the upper height for a double slope roof
under Upper Slope, enter a value for Upper Height.
change the rise or slope angle for each slope
under Lower Slope, or Upper Slope for a double slope roof, enter a value for Rise or Slope.
Changing the Edges and Faces of a Roof
Use this procedure to edit the edges and faces of a roof. You can edit:
the height and overhang of individual edges the number of segments and the radius for curved segments the height and slope of individual roof faces
1 Select the roof you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Edges/Faces. 2 Select roof edges that you want to change and press ENTER.
As you select edges, they are numbered consecutively, beginning with zero, for display in the dialog box.
3 Specify new values for each roof edge:
If you want to...
Then...
change the height of a roof edge
select Height for the roof edge, and enter the height value.
change the overhang of a roof edge
select Overhang for the roof edge, and enter the overhang value.
change the number of segments in a curved roof for a roof select Segments for the roof edge, and enter the number of
edge
segments.
change the radius of the curved roof edge
select Radius for the roof edge, and enter the radius.
1256 | Chapter 26 Roofs
4 Specify new dimensions for the roof faces of the selected edges:
If you want to... change the height of a roof face
Then... select Height for the roof face, and enter the height value.
change the slope of a roof face
select Slope for the roof face, and enter the slope value.
add a face to the selected edge
click the blank space under the last number in the Face column, and enter values for Height and Slope.
remove a roof face
select the Face column number, and press DELETE.
5 Click OK.
Converting a Roof to Roof Slabs
Use this procedure to convert a roof to one or more roof slabs, each modeling a separate face of the roof. Roof slab objects differ from roof objects in that each roof slab is a separate entity, defined by its perimeter, edge conditions, and style. This gives you more flexibility in controlling to geometry of the roof and its edges. Also, because roof slabs are style based, you can apply design changes globally. For more information about working with roof slabs, see "Slabs and Roof Slabs" on page 1261.
1 Select the roof you want to convert, right-click and click Convert to Roof Slabs. The Convert to Roof Slabs worksheet displays the roof slab styles that exist in your current drawing.
Convert to Roof Slabs worksheet
2 Select a roof slab style. 3 Select Erase Layout Geometry to erase the roof and click OK. 4 Select individual roof slabs and edit them as needed.
Specifying the Material of a Roof
Use this procedure to select a different material for the components of an individual roof.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of the roof component, you can change the properties of the display component as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Roof" on page 1258.
1 Select the roof you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 To verify that the material assignment determines the display properties of the component, click the Display
Properties tab, select the display representation in which to display the changes, and click . 3 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab, verify that By Material is selected for the component, and click OK. 4 Click the Materials tab. 5 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click it to a component.
to create a new one and assign
Converting a Roof to Roof Slabs | 1257
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Roof
Use this procedure to change the following properties of the display components of an individual roof: Visibility (display component is on or off) By material (material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE If a material assignment determines the properties of a roof display component, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Material of a Roof" on page 1257.
1 Select the roof you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current one.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching of a Roof
Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of an individual roof. Hatching is displayed only in the section display representation.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the hatching properties of a roof display component, you can change the hatching of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Material of a Roof" on page 1257.
1 Select the roof you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the Section display representation, and select Style Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Hatching tab. 6 Select the display component, and click the setting for Pattern.
1258 | Chapter 26 Roofs
7 Select the hatching for the display component: If you want to... specify a hatching pattern that is available in the software specify a custom pattern
specify single hatching specify double hatching specify solid fill
Then... select Predefined for Type, and select a pattern.
select Custom for Type, and enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder that contains the custom pattern file.
select User-Defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select User-Defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select Solid Fill for Type.
8 Click OK. 9 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 10 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 11 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
orient the hatching to the roof slab, regardless of the roof slab rotation
Then... select Object.
orient the hatching to the world coordinate system
select Global.
12 Click X Offset and Y Offset, and enter offset values.
13 Click OK twice.
Changing the Location of a Roof
Use this procedure to relocate a roof by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The roof also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the roof are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the roof by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the roof on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the WCS and UCS, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the roof you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the roof:
If you want to... relocate the roof
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the roof on the XY plane
make the normal of the roof parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the roof on the YZ plane
make the normal of the roof parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
Changing the Location of a Roof | 1259
If you want to... locate the roof on the XZ plane
change the rotation of the roof
Then...
make the normal of the roof parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Roof
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a roof. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a roof.
1 Select the roof to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. 4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK. 7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK twice.
1260 | Chapter 26 Roofs
Slabs and Roof Slabs
27
In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, a slab object is a three-dimensional (3D) body that is bounded by a planar polygon (perimeter) of any shape, and has multiple edges. A slab is defined by its perimeter, edge conditions, and style. You can use slabs to draw floors and other building model components that require a flat surface and edge conditions.
Roof slabs are similar to slabs in most respects, but are based on distinct roof slab styles. When modeling a roof, you can convert individual faces of the roof into roof slabs, which give you more flexibility in modeling details of the roof's geometry.
1261
Overview of Slabs and Roof Slabs
Slabs and roof slabs are Autodesk® Architectural Desktop objects that you use to model floors, roof faces, and other flat surfaces where edge conditions need to be specified. The slab or roof slab object is a three-dimensional (3D) body bounded by a planar polygon (perimeter) of any shape, and has multiple edges. The object is defined by its perimeter, edge conditions, and style. Though they share many of the same properties, slabs and roof slabs represent separate style categories and tool types. For instance, you cannot apply the properties of a slab tool to an existing roof slab object.
Roof Slabs
A roof slab models a single face of a roof. Roof slab objects also differ from roof objects in that each roof slab is a separate entity with no direct connection to other entities. When you use multiple roof slabs to model an entire roof surface, you have more flexibility in editing the roof, but the combined topology (3D geometry) of the roof is not calculated automatically. For this reason, it is recommended that when you design complex roofs, you start with a roof object. Then, when the design is substantially complete, but you need more flexibility for customizing edges and other details, you can convert the roof to individual roof slabs.
While roof slabs do not dynamically interact with each other, they do allow significant control over the roof geometry. For example, you can trim roof slabs individually, extend them, and miter them with other roof slabs. You can also cut holes in roof slabs, add or subtract mass elements, and apply detailed fascia and soffit profiles to any edge at any angle and orientation. Like slabs, roof slabs are style-based, so you can apply design changes globally.
Methods of Creating Slabs/Roof Slabs
Using slab and roof slab tools, you can create slabs and roof slabs independently, or you can create them from existing objects, such as walls and polylines. Slabs and roof slabs created from other objects do not maintain a link to the original object.
Pitched roofs are usually designed by specifying a plate line and a slope angle. Roof slabs are designed so that you can use the same approach in laying them out. To add a roof slab, you simply specify two points and an angle.
If you have a traditionally designed roof created from a two-dimensional (2D) plan showing ridge, hip, and valley lines, you can trace over that plan with roof slabs, specifying the desired height and slope. From these values and the specified points, the software creates the correct three-dimensional (3D) model.
Slab/Roof Slab Bodies
The body of a slab or roof slab is an extrusion perpendicular to the plane of the perimeter and is defined by the following geometry:
The perimeter of a slab/roof slab is a planar polygon defined by the X,Y,Z coordinates of its vertices.
A slab/roof slab has 3 or more vertices, with the ability to add or remove vertices. Each pair of vertices defines an edge.
The thickness of a slab/roof slab extrusion is specified either in the object style (when it has a fixed thickness) or for the individual object.
The position of the slab/roof slab bottom, relative to its perimeter plane, is controlled by the thickness offset value in the style.
The baseline of a slab/roof slab is defined by the first two points you select when defining the vertices.
The slab/roof slab insertion point, by default, is the first point on the baseline. You can offset the baseline either horizontally or vertically from the insertion point to allow for precise alignment with walls or structural elements.
A slab/roof slab has a slope (pitch), which you can specify either as an angle or as a rise-to-run ratio. If you change the slope, the slab/roof slab rotates around the slope pivot point.
The pivot point is initially the first vertex of the baseline, but you can move it to any other point, either on or off the slab/roof slab. A small pyramid-shaped marker represents the pivot point.
An imaginary line passing through a slab/roof slab at the perimeter line (in section) is called the slopeline. The slopeline aligns the slab/roof slab with the wall base height. The slopeline is the position of the slab/roof slab baseline relative to its bottom face. The value you enter for the thickness offset in the slab/roof slab style determines the distance between the slab/roof slab baseline and the bottom face of the slab/roof slab.
1262 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Geometry of a roof slab
Slab/Roof Slab Edges The following parameters define a slab or roof slab edge:
edge cut orientation (plumb or square) angle (relative to the orientation) edge style (fascia and soffit) overhang (defines the point at which the fascia begins) You apply a fascia and soffit to slab or roof slab edges with styles that define edge conditions The fascia is defined by a profile, with its insertion point located at the top of the slab/roof slab edge. The local Y
axis of the profile polyline aligns with the slab/roof slab edge angle. The soffit is also defined by a profile, with its insertion point positioned at the X and Y offsets from the fascia
insertion point. Roof slab with fascia and soffit components
Edge Control You can customize each slab or roof slab edge individually, applying styles and making other adjustments as required by your design. A slab/roof slab edge style defines the fascia and soffit design from profiles that you create for these components. You can specify whether the style uses a fascia, a soffit, both, or neither. You also specify how the fascia and soffit are positioned relative to the slab/roof slab.
Overview of Slabs and Roof Slabs | 1263
Slab and Roof Slab Styles Slabs and roof slabs have their own distinct style categories in which individual styles specify the default properties for specific types of slabs/roof slabs. These properties include dimensions, edge styles for the fascia and soffit, and entity properties for layer, color, and linetype. Slab and roof slab styles allow you to use a different edge style for each edge. Materials in Slabs and Roof Slabs You can assign materials to a slab or roof slab. For example, a floor slab can be assigned a material representing tiles with concrete edges. These materials are displayed in wireframe or rendered views. Materials have specific settings for individual components of slabs/roof slabs, such as the body, fascia and soffit.
Slab appearance in different views
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for common design purposes. These materials contain settings for slabs/roof slabs that you can use as provided or modify for special designs. You can also create materials from scratch. If you create a material to use only for slabs, name it accordingly; for example, Slab--Ceramic Tile or Slab Edge--Concrete. This will help in organizing your material definitions. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1312. Editing Tools In addition to the control provided by slab/roof slab styles and edge styles, Architectural Desktop includes a variety of tools that let you edit slabs and roof slabs to fit unique conditions. For example, you can add holes to slabs for structures such as chimneys and vent pipes. You can also use roof slabs to create dormers. For a description of the tools available, see "Editing Slabs and Roof Slabs" on page 1274.
Using Tools to Create Slabs and Roof Slabs
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place slabs or roof slabs by selecting a tool with a specific slab/roof slab style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with all of its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use slab/roof slab tools to create new slabs/roof slabs by applying tool properties to existing linework, walls, and spaces. The Design tool palette contains sample slab and roof slab tools that you can use and customize as needed. Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain slab/roof slab tools with styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards. Tool palette containing slab and roof slab tools
Slab and roof slab tools are also included in the Stock Tool catalog supplied with the Content Browser. For information about using the Content Browser, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
1264 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Creating a Slab or a Roof Slab
Use this procedure to add a new slab or roof slab that has the properties specified in the slab/roof slab tool you select. To specify your own settings when you add a slab or roof slab, see "Creating a Slab/Roof Slab with User-Specified Settings" on page 1265. You add the slab/roof slab by specifying points to define its perimeter as follows:
The first point determines the insertion point of the slab/roof slab and the start of the baseline. This point also locates the default pivot point of the slab/roof slab.
The second point determines the endpoint of the baseline. Subsequent points establish the vertices of the perimeter.
1 Open the Design tool palette, and select the Slab tool or the Roof Slab tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Specify the start point of the slab/roof slab. 3 Specify a second point to define the first edge (baseline) of the slab. 4 Specify further points to finish defining the perimeter:
If you want to...
Then...
close the perimeter by drawing two edges that meet at a right angle
specify a point in the direction in which the perimeter is to close; then enter o (for Ortho). The edge is extended until it meets another edge perpendicular to the first edge.
close the perimeter by adding an edge from the previous point to the start point of the baseline
enter c (for Close).
5 Press ENTER. Drawing a slab
Creating a Slab/Roof Slab with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create a slab or roof slab with settings that you specify. 1 Open the Design palette, and select the Slab tool or the Roof Slab tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.) 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General.
Creating a Slab or a Roof Slab | 1265
3 Select a slab/roof slab style. 4 Specify a value for Bound Spaces:
If you want to...
Then...
allow the slab/roof slab to be used as a bounding object for select Yes. associative spaces
prevent the slab/roof slab from being used as a bounding object for associative spaces
select No.
use the bounding settings from the slab or roof slab style select By Style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 Select Projected or Direct for Mode.
If you select Projected, the X,Y coordinates of the first point you specify are projected to a Z value of the current base height. This establishes the insertion point. The second point establishes the baseline. All subsequent points are projected onto a plane established by the baseline and the specified slope angle. This mode is provided for architects who wish to lay out a slab/roof slab by tracing over a plan drawing.
If you select Direct, the points you specify become the vertices of the slab perimeter.
6 Expand Dimensions. 7 Enter a value for Thickness. 8 Enter a value for the vertical offset distance from the insertion point for Vertical Offset. 9 Enter a value for the horizontal offset distance from the insertion point for Horizontal Offset. 10 Select the justification:
If you want to align the ... top of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point
Then... select Top.
center of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point
select Center.
bottom of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point select Bottom.
slopeline of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point select Slopeline.
NOTE This justification is used only for inserting a slab/roof slab and is not retained as a parameter of the inserted object. Justification is intended primarily for Direct mode.
The slopeline is the position of the slab/roof slab baseline relative to its bottom face. The thickness offset in the style determines the distance between the baseline and the bottom face.
11 Enter a value for the height of the slab/roof slab insertion point for Base Height. This is available only when you select Projected mode.
12 Select a direction, or define how the slab/roof slab is drawn relative to the baseline. 13 Enter a value for the depth of the overhang for Overhang. 14 Select a style for Perimeter edge. 15 If you selected the Projected mode, expand Slope, and enter values for Rise, Run, or Angle to define the
slope of the slab/roof slab. 16 Specify the start point of the slab/roof slab.
The start point is the insertion point and the start of the baseline. The start point also determines the location of the default pivot point for the slab/roof slab.
17 Specify a second point to define the first edge (baseline).
1266 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
18 Specify further points to establish the vertices of the slab/roof slab perimeter:
If you want to...
close the perimeter by drawing two edges that meet at a right angle
Then...
specify a point in the direction in which the perimeter is to close; then enter Ortho. The edge is extended until it meets another edge perpendicular to the first edge.
close the perimeter by adding an edge from the previous point to the start point of the baseline
enter Close.
19 Continue to place slabs/roof slabs, and press ENTER when finished.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from Walls
Use this procedure to create a rectangular slab or roof slab from one or more walls. This is useful when you want a specific alignment between the slab/roof slab baseline and the wall baseline. When you create a slab/roof slab from a single wall, the base height of the wall defines the baseline edge of the slab/roof slab. When you create a slab/roof slab from multiple walls, the top of the first selected wall defines the baseline edge of the slab/roof slab. You can create a flat slab/roof slab that follows the outline of multiple walls by specifying a zero slope. If you select multiple walls and a non-zero slope, multiple slabs/roof slabs are created. If the closed polyline intersects one of the selected walls, the slab/roof slab is invalid and you must select the walls again.
TIP This procedure is useful to place roof slabs on top of existing walls. The Convert to Roof Slabs command, accessed by right-clicking an existing roof object, is useful when you want a specific alignment between the slab baseline and the wall baseline.
Creating a roof slab from a wall
NOTE When selecting multiple walls, if your walls are not properly "cleaned up," the slab/roof slab conversion is unpredictable. For more information, see "Cleanup Group Definitions" on page 661.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the slab or roof slab tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from Walls | 1267
2 Right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework and Walls (or Linework, Walls and Roof, in the case of roof slab tools).
3 Select one or more walls, and press ENTER. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the walls, or n (No) to keep the walls in the drawing. 5 Specify a justification method:
If you want to align the ... top of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point
Then... select Top.
center of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point
select Center.
bottom of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point select Bottom.
slopeline of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point select Slopeline.
NOTE This justification is used only for inserting a slab/roof slab and is not retained as a parameter of the inserted object.
The slopeline is the position of the slab/roof slab baseline relative to its bottom face. The thickness offset in the style determines the distance between the baseline and the bottom face.
6 Specify the justification for edge alignment:
If you want to align the baseline edge of the slab/roof slab to the...
Then...
left side of the wall, based on the direction the wall was drawn enter l (Left).
center of the wall
enter c (Center).
right side of the wall, based on the direction the wall was drawn
enter r (Right).
baseline of the wall
enter b (Baseline).
7 To specify the slope direction, enter l (Left) or r (Right). This is based on the direction the wall was drawn. Creating a slab based on walls
8 Edit the properties of the slab/roof slab in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Roof Slab from a Roof
Use this procedure to convert the faces of an existing roof object to individual roof slabs that have the properties of the roof slab tool you select. You can then edit the roof slabs and their edges individually.
1268 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
You can also convert a roof to roof slabs through its context menu. For more information, see "Converting a Roof to Roof Slabs" on page 1257.
TIP To create roof slabs with the same overhang as the roof, use a roof slab tool defined with a roof slab edge style that has the same default overhang as the roof.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the roof slab tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework, Walls and Roof. 3 Select the roof to convert, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the existing roof, or enter y (Yes) to
erase it. 5 Edit the properties of the roof slabs on the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from a Polyline
Use this procedure to convert a closed polyline to a single slab or roof slab that has the properties of the tool you select. You can edit these properties after the object is created. The first line drawn in the polyline becomes the baseline edge of the slab/roof slab. Creating slabs or roof slabs from polylines is useful when you need to create a complex shape or one with curved edges. The smoothness (tessellation) of curved edges is controlled by 2 AEC display resolution settings called Facet Deviation and Facet Maximum. Beginning with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, you can adjust these settings after the slab/roof slab is created. Also, the individual segments or facets making up a curved edge are no longer treated as separate edges; each arc on the perimeter of a slab/roof slab is treated as a single edge. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116.
1 Draw a closed polyline of the desired shape in the location where you want to place the slab/roof slab. 2 Open the tool palette that contains the slab or roof slab tool you want to use.
(You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.) 3 Right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework and Walls (or Linework, Walls and
Roof, in the case of roof slab tools). 4 Select a closed polyline, and press ENTER. 5 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 6 Specify a mode:
If you enter d (Direct), the polyline vertices become the vertices of the slab/roof slab perimeter. Any slope value specified in the tool properties is ignored.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from a Polyline | 1269
Converting a polyline to a slab using the direct mode
Converting a polyline to a roof slab using direct mode
If you enter p (Projected), you are prompted for the base height of the slab/roof slab. The X,Y coordinates of the first polyline vertex are projected to a Z value of the base height. This establishes the insertion point. The offset values determine the start point of the baseline. All subsequent points are projected to a plane established by the baseline and the specified slope angle. This mode is provided for architects who wish to create a sloped floor slab. Converting a polyline to a slab using the projected mode
1270 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Converting a polyline to a roof slab using projected mode
7 If you specified Projected mode, enter a value for Base Height. 8 Specify a justification method:
If you want to align the slab/roof slab...
Then...
top with the polyline (or base height, when using projected enter t (Top). mode)
center with the polyline (or base height, when using projected enter c (Center). mode)
bottom with the polyline (or base height, when using projected mode)
enter b (Bottom).
slopeline with the polyline (or base height, when using projected mode)
enter s (Slopeline).
NOTE This justification is used only for inserting a slab/roof slab and is not retained as a parameter of the inserted object.
9 Edit the properties of the slab/roof slab in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Slab from a Space
Use this procedure to convert a space to a slab that has the properties of the slab tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the slab. If there is an interference condition on any of the selected spaces, you can specify whether you want these applied as holes in the new slab.
NOTE This procedure is currently available for slab tools only.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Space.
Creating a Slab from a Space | 1271
3 Select one or more spaces, and press ENTER to open the Convert Space to Slab worksheet.
4 If you want to create a slab from the ceiling of the space, select Convert Ceiling to Slab. 5 If you want to create a slab from the floor of the space, select Convert Floor to Slab. 6 If you want interference conditions on any of the spaces you selected to be ignored, clear Apply Interferences
to Slab. 7 Select Erase Layout Geometry to erase the space. 8 Click OK. 9 Edit the properties of the new slab in the Properties palette, if needed.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Tool
Use this procedure to create a slab tool or a roof slab tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own tools if you are placing multiple slabs/roof slabs of specific styles that have the same properties.
For example, you are creating an office building that has a complex roof system. Although all sections of pitched roof use the same roof slab and edge style, each roof slab has a different slope. To work efficiently, you can create a roof slab tool for each slope, and select the appropriate tool to place the roof slabs with the correct slope for each section of the roof.
You can use any of the following methods to create a slab/roof slab tool:
Drag a slab/roof slab that has the properties you want to a tool palette.
Drag a slab/roof slab style from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy an existing slab/roof slab tool, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Drag a slab/roof slab tool from a tool catalog in the Content Browser, and then customize the properties of the tool.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a slab/roof slab in the drawing
select the slab/roof, and drag it to the tool palette.
TIP Drag the slab/roof slab by a point on its perimeter, not by one of its grips.
create a tool from a slab/roof slab style in the Style Manager click Format menu Style Manager, locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool on the current palette
right-click the tool, click Copy, and click Paste.
1272 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
If you want to... copy a tool from another palette
Then...
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
4 Enter a name for the tool.
5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. This description is used as the tool's tooltip on the tool palette, and to describe the tool if it is stored in a tool catalog.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the tool. 8 If you do not want to use the default layer key, select a layer key. 9 If you want to override the default layer names, select a layer override. 10 Select a slab/roof slab style. 11 For Style location, select the drawing file containing the style to be used for this tool, or select Browse and
use a standard file selection dialog box to select the file. 12 Specify a value for Bound Spaces:
If you want to...
Then...
allow the slab/roof slab to be used as a bounding object for select Yes. associative spaces
prevent the slab/roof slab from being used as a bounding object for associative spaces
select No.
use the bounding settings from the slab or roof slab style select By Style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
13 Select Projected or Direct for Mode. 14 Expand Dimensions. 15 Enter a value for Thickness. 16 Enter a value for the vertical offset distance from the insertion point for Vertical Offset. 17 Enter a value for the horizontal offset distance from the insertion point for Horizontal Offset. 18 Select the justification:
If you want to align the ...
Then...
top of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point
select Top.
center of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point
select Center.
bottom of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point select Bottom.
slopeline of the slab/roof slab with the first specified point select Slopeline.
NOTE This justification is used only when inserting the slab and is not retained as a parameter of the slab. Justification is intended primarily for Direct mode.
The slopeline is the position of the slab/roof slab baseline relative to its bottom face. The thickness offset in the style determines the distance between the baseline and the bottom face.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Tool | 1273
19 Select a direction, or define how the slab/roof slab is drawn relative to the baseline. 20 Enter a value for the depth of the overhang for Overhang. 21 Select a style for Perimeter edge. 22 For Edge style location, select the drawing file containing the edge style used for slabs created with this
tool, or select Browse and use a standard file selection dialog box to select the file. 23 Click OK.
Editing Slabs and Roof Slabs
After placing a slab or roof slab object, you can change its style, location, size, shape, slope, edge styles, and other characteristics. You can miter its edges and trim or extend it using another object as a reference. You can also modify slabs and roof slabs using other objects as interference conditions or body modifiers. Depending on the type of editing you want to perform, various methods may be available:
After selecting a slab or roof slab, you can click any non-grip point along the perimeter and drag the entire object to a new location. You can also move the object by clicking a grip, pressing the Space bar, and then moving the object to the new location and clicking again.
You can drag the grips that are displayed on a selected slab/roof slab to reorient it, resize it, or change other physical characteristics.
For grip edits where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter a precise value instead of dragging a grip. (This feature is activated by default; you can toggle it on and off by clicking DYN on the application status bar. For more information, see "Dynamic Dimensions" on page 61.)
You can apply the properties of a slab tool to an existing slab or the properties of a roof slab tool to an existing roof slab.
You can change settings on the object's Properties palette. You can use editing commands from the object's context menu.
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs
Various types of editing grips are displayed for a selected slab or roof slab object. You can drag these grips as needed to reposition or resize the object, or you can enter precise distance or angle values using the Dynamic Input feature. When you select a grip that has multiple functions, you can cycle among them by pressing Ctrl. The types of editing grips available for a selected slab or roof slab depend on the view direction. As shown in the following illustrations, Edge, Edge Overhang, Vertex, and Pivot Point grips are displayed in both plan and three-dimensional (3D) isometric views. Angle, Vertical Offset, Horizontal Offset, and Thickness grips are available only in 3D isometric views.
1274 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Slab Vertex and Edge grips Slab Edge Overhang and Pivot Point grips Slab Angle,Thickness, Horizontal Offset, and Vertical Offset grips
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs | 1275
Roof Slab Vertex and Edge grips
Roof Slab Edge Overhang and Pivot Point grips
Roof Slab Angle,Thickness, Horizontal Offset, and Vertical Offset grips
Using Slab/Roof Slab Edge Grips Edge grips let you change the size, shape, or slope of a selected slab or roof slab by moving one edge at a time. When you move the cursor over an Edge grip, a tooltip lists the available edit modes (see mode descriptions following the procedure below). After you click the Edge grip, you can cycle through the modes by pressing Ctrl. Use the following general procedure to select an Edge grip mode and edit an edge of a slab/roof slab:
1 Select the slab/roof slab you want to edit. Edge grips are displayed.
2 Move the cursor over the Edge grip on the edge you want to edit. The list of available edit modes is displayed. (Modes differ for straight and curved edges; see descriptions below.)
3 Click the Edge grip, and move the cursor slightly in the direction that you want to move the edge. If you want to use the default edit mode, proceed to the next step; otherwise, press Ctrl to cycle through the edit modes to the one you want.
4 Either enter values as needed to specify a distance or position, or move the cursor until the preview is in the desired position, and then click to complete the edit and deselect the grip.
5 Press Esc, or right-click, and click Deselect All to deselect the slab and turn off all grips.
1276 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Normal grip editing maintains the slope angle of the slab/roof slab regardless of the Z value of the specified point. NOTE The pivot point is unaffected by editing the slab/roof slab edges with grips. Edit Modes for Straight Edges Edge grips for straight slab or roof slab edges have the following 6 edit modes:
Move edge - maintain slope Move edge - change slope Add new edges - maintain slope Add new edges - change slope Convert to arc - maintain slope Offset all edges - maintain slope Move edge - maintain slope As you move the edge, adjacent edges stretch or shorten accordingly with no change to the slope. This is the default mode for straight edges.
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs | 1277
Move edge - change slope As you move the edge, adjacent edges stretch or shorten according to the direction of the move, and the slope changes as necessary to maintain the elevation of the edge being moved.
Side view
Add new edges - maintain slope As you move the edge outward, rather than adjacent edges being stretched, new edges are added, each with its own Edge and Edge Overhang grips. There is no change to the slope.
1278 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Add new edges - change slope As you move the edge outward, rather than adjacent edges being stretched, new edges are added, each with its own Edge and Edge Overhang grips. The slope changes as necessary to maintain the elevation of the edge being moved.
Convert to arc - maintain slope Converts the edge to an arc, which you can move inward or outward in the current plane to specify the arc direction and degree. Adjacent edges are not affected.
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs | 1279
Offset all edges - maintain slope All outside perimeter edges move inward or outward in the current plane the same distance as you move the selected Edge grip. The degree of arc is maintained. If holes have been added to the slab/roof slab, their edges are unaffected.
Edge Grip Edit Modes for Curved Edges For curved edges (whether originally created as such, or converted from a straight edge using the Convert to arc mode listed above), the Edge grip has 5 modes, none of which change the slope:
Stretch edge - maintain slope Move edge - maintain slope Add new edges - maintain slope Convert to line - maintain slope Offset all edges - maintain slope Stretch edge - maintain slope Move the Edge grip inward or outward in the current plane to reposition the midpoint of the arc. Adjacent edges are not affected. This is the default mode for curved edges. Move edge - maintain slope As you move the edge Grip inward or outward in the current plane, adjacent edges stretch or shorten according to the direction of the move. The distance between the endpoints of the arc changes, but the degree of arc is maintained. Add new edges - maintain slope As you move the edge Grip outward in its current plane, rather than adjacent edges being stretched or reoriented, new edges are added, each with its own Edge and Edge Overhang grips. The degree of arc and the distance between the arc endpoints are both maintained. Covert to line - maintain slope When you click, the curved edge is converted to a straight line between the endpoints of the arc. Adjacent edges are not affected.
1280 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Offset all edges - maintain slope All outside perimeter edges move inward or outward in the current plane the same distance as you move the selected Edge grip. The degree of arc is maintained. If holes have been added to the slab/roof slab, their edges are unaffected. Using Slab/Roof Slab Edge Overhang Grips Use this procedure to change the overhang of a slab or roof slab edge. (You can also change the overhang using the worksheet available from the object's Properties palette or its context menu. For more information, see "Changing the Edges of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1290.) 1 Select the slab or roof slab. 2 Select an Edge Overhang grip. 3 Enter a value to specify the desired overhang distance, or move the grip until the desired value is displayed.
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs | 1281
Changing the edge overhang of a slab using the Edge Overhang grip
Using Slab/Roof Slab Vertex Grips Use this procedure to change the size or shape of a slab or roof slab by moving one or more of its vertices.
1 Select the slab or roof slab. 2 Select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to move (or press Shift while selecting multiple Vertex grips). 3 Move the vertex to the desired location, and click. Adjacent edges stretch or shorten accordingly. If you
have Shift-selected multiple Vertex grips, drag one of them to the desired location, and click; any other selected Vertex grip also moves, maintaining its position relative to the grip you drag.
1282 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
4 Changing the perimeter of a slab by moving a Vertex grip
Using Slab/Roof Slab Thickness Grips Use this procedure to change the thickness of a slab or roof slab in a 3D isometric view. (To change the thickness of multiple objects at once, regardless of the type of view, see "Changing the Thickness of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1288.)
1 Select the slab/roof slab. 2 Select the Thickness grip. 3 Enter a value to specify the desired thickness, or move the cursor until the desired value is displayed, and
then click. Changing the thickness of a slab using the Thickness grip
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs | 1283
Using Slab/Roof Slab Offset Grips Use this procedure to change the vertical and horizontal offsets of a slab or roof slab object in a 3D isometric view. (To change the horizontal or vertical offsets of multiple objects at once, regardless of the type of view, see "Changing the Offsets of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1288.) The offsets are the vertical and horizontal distances from the insertion point of the slab.
1 Select the slab. 2 Select the Vertical Offset or Horizontal Offset grip. 3 Enter a value to specify the desired offset distance, or move the cursor until the desired value is displayed,
and then click. Changing the horizontal offset of a slab using the Horizontal Offset grip
1284 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Changing the vertical offset of a slab using the Vertical Offset grip
Using Slab/Roof Slab Angle Grips Use this procedure to change the slope of a slab or roof slab in a 3D isometric view. (You can also use the Properties palette to adjust the slope and control the automatic alignment of the fascia. For more information, see "Changing Slab/Roof Slab Slope Settings" on page 1288).
1 Select the slab. 2 Select the Angle grip. If Dynamic Input is turned on, the associated Slope, Rise, and Run values are displayed
in the drawing area. IMPORTANT The Angle grip is available only when you select a slab/roof slab in a 3D isometric view.
Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs | 1285
Using the Angle grip to edit slab slope
1286 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Using the Angle grip to edit roof slab slope
3 Adjust the slope: If you want to... adjust the slope manually
adjust the slope by changing the rise of the slab
Then...
either enter a value, or move the grip until the desired angle is displayed, and then click.
press TAB until the rise value is highlighted, and then either enter a value, or move the grip until the desired rise is displayed, and then click.
4 Click once.
Using Slab/Roof Slab Pivot Point Grips Use this procedure to change the pivot point of a slab or roof slab. (You can also use the Properties palette to change the X, Y, and Z values of the pivot point.) By default, the pivot point is the first vertex of the baseline. However, you can move the pivot point to any other point, either on or off the slab/roof slab.
NOTE If a Hold fascia elevation constraint was set for the object, the pivot point is ignored. For information about setting this option, see "Changing Slab/Roof Slab Slope Settings" on page 1288.
1 Select the slab or roof slab. 2 Select the Pivot Point grip. 3 Move the cursor until the pivot point is in the desired location, and then click.
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Slab/Roof Slab
Use this procedure to modify one or more slabs or roof slabs by applying the properties of a slab or roof slab tool. The properties include the style and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the slab or roof slab tool you want to use.
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Slab/Roof Slab | 1287
(You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Slab or Apply Tool Properties to Roof Slab. 3 Select the slabs or roof slabs to be modified, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the modified slabs/roof slabs in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Changing the Properties of Slabs or Roof Slabs
Many of the slab/roof slab properties that you can edit using grips can also be edited on the Properties palette. In cases where multiple selected objects have the same value for a property, you can change the value for all the objects with a single entry on the Properties palette. The Properties palette also provides access to the Slab Edges and Roof Slab Edges worksheets, and enables you to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to slabs/roof slabs. Changing the Style of Slabs/Roof Slabs Use this procedure to change the style for one or more slabs or for one or more roof slabs in a drawing. Note that the procedure cannot be applied to slabs and roof slabs simultaneously.
1 Select one or more slabs/roof slabs, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General.
If the selected objects are of different styles, the value of the Style property is *VARIES*.
3 For Style, select a new style from the drop-down list. The selected style is assigned to all selected objects.
Changing the Thickness of a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to change the thickness of a slab/roof slab.
1 Select the slab/roof slab you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Click the Thickness value, and enter a new value.
Changing the Offsets of a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to change the vertical or horizontal offset of a slab or roof slab. The offsets are the vertical and horizontal distances from the insertion point of the slab/roof slab.
1 Double-click the slab/roof slab you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions. 3 Click the Vertical offset or Horizontal offset value, and enter a new value.
Changing Slab/Roof Slab Edges Use this procedure to access the Slab Edges or Roof Slab Edges worksheet from the Properties palette.
1 Double-click the slab/roof slab whose edge(s) you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions.
3 Click next to Edges. The Slab Edges and Roof Slab Edges worksheets are identical in function to the Edit Slab Edges and Edit Roof Slab Edges worksheets accessed from the slab/roof slab context menu. For more information on using these worksheets, see "Changing the Edges of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1290
Changing Slab/Roof Slab Slope Settings Use this procedure to change the slope settings of a slab or roof slab, and to specify whether the fascia is to be aligned when the slope is changed. You can also control the adjustment of the overhang or baseline height of the slab. This constraint applies only to the baseline edge, and it works only when the baseline is horizontal.
1288 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
1 Double-click the slab you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Dimensions, and expand Slope. 3 Enter a value for Rise, Run, or Angle to define the slope. 4 Select a setting for Hold fascia elevation:
If you want to...
Then...
force the fascia to align with other slab/roof slab fascias, regardless of style, by adjusting the overhang
select By adjusting overhang.
force the fascia to align with other slab/roof slab fascias, regardless of style, by adjusting the baseline height
select By adjusting baseline height.
ignore fascia alignment
select No.
Changing the Location of a Slab/Roof Slab
Use this procedure to relocate a slab or roof slab by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The slab/roof slab object also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the object are parallel to the XY plane, the object's normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the object by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the object on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the slab or roof slab you want to move. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional Information. 4 Specify the location of the slab/roof slab:
If you want to... relocate the slab/roof slab
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the slab/roof slab on the XY plane
make the normal of the slab/roof slab parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the slab/roof slab on the YZ plane
make the normal of the slab/roof slab parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the slab/roof slab on the XZ plane
make the normal of the slab/roof slab parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the slab/roof slab
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, enter notes, or attach reference files to a slab or roof slab. You can also edit existing notes and edit or detach currently attached reference files.
1 Double-click the slab or roof slab to which to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
Changing the Properties of Slabs or Roof Slabs | 1289
4 To add or edit a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference, click following: If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
next to Reference documents, and then do any of the
Then... click , select a file, and click Open. enter text under Description. double-click the reference file name to start its application. select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools
In addition to grip-editing slabs and roof slabs, or changing values on their Properties palettes, you can edit these objects using the tools available on their context menus. These tools let you trim, extend, and cut an object, edit its edges, add and edit interference conditions and body modifiers, and edit the object display properties.
Changing the Edges of a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to edit one or more edges of a slab or roof slab. For each selected edge, you can change the overhang, style, cut (square or plumb), and angle. A viewer box shows you which edge(s) of the slab you are editing.
1 Select the slab or roof slab to be modified, right-click, and click Edit Slab Edges or Edit Roof Slab Edges. 2 On the Edit Slab Edges or Edit Roof Slab Edges worksheet, select the edges to be modified, and press ENTER.
NOTE Beginning with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, the individual segments or facets making up a curved edge are no longer listed as separate edges on this worksheet. Each arc on the perimeter of a slab/roof slab is treated as a single edge.
3 In the list of edges, select the edge to edit. To modify multiple edges using the same values, press and hold CTRL while selecting each edge. The selected edges are highlighted in the viewer in the right pane of the worksheet.
4 Enter a value for Overhang. 5 Select a slab edge style. 6 Select Square or Plumb for Edge Cut. 7 Enter a value for Angle.
To reset the angle to the slab/roof slab style defaults, right-click the edge number, and click Reset to Style Defaults. This option is available only if an edge style has been assigned, and the value for Angle is different than the default.
8 If desired, select additional edges from the list and edit them as described above. 9 When edits are completed for all edges, click OK.
Trimming a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to trim a slab or roof slab using a polyline, wall, roof slab, or slab to define the trim plane. The trimming object itself does not need to intersect the slab/roof slab, as long as it projects an intersection in the current user coordinate system (UCS). However, the trim plane must intersect the slab/roof slab perimeter line; you cannot trim only the overhang. Any fascia or soffit profile that intersects the trim plane is trimmed at the same angle as the slab/roof slab.
1290 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
If the trimming object is a wall or a slab, the trim plane is at the closest surface. The new edge at the trim plane has its edge angle defined by the trim plane. Trimming a slab to a wall
Trimming a roof slab to a wall
1 Select the slab/roof slab to be trimmed, right-click, and click Trim. 2 Select a wall, a polyline, or another slab or roof slab for the trimming object. 3 Select the side of the slab/roof slab to be trimmed.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools | 1291
Extending a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to extend a slab or roof slab to a plane defined by another slab, roof slab, or wall. This target object itself does not have to intersect with the extended slab/roof slab, as long as it projects an intersection in the current user coordinate system (UCS). Because multiple edges may need to move in an extend operation, you are prompted to select the adjacent edges to lengthen, rather than the specific edges to move. These selected edges retain their current vector (angle) and are stretched until they intersect the plane of the target object. If multiple edges exist between the selected edges, they are joined to form a single edge. The new edge is set to the angle of the target surface. Any fascia or soffit profile on the adjacent edges is extended to the target surface and trimmed to its angle. Extending a slab to a wall
1292 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Extending a roof slab to a wall
1 Select the slab or roof slab to be extended, right-click, and click Extend. 2 Select the target wall, slab, or roof slab to which the slab/roof slab is to be extended. 3 Select the slab/roof slab to be extended. 4 Select the first edge to lengthen. 5 Select the second edge to lengthen. Mitering Roof Slabs by Intersection Use this procedure to miter two intersecting roof slabs. Both roof slabs are trimmed along the intersection of their perimeter lines. Vertices are added or removed as required. The new edges of the roof slabs are set to angles required for a true miter cut. If the slab thicknesses of the two edges are different, the angles are different.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools | 1293
Mitering roof slabs by intersection
1 Select one of the two roof slabs you want to miter, right-click, and click Miter. 2 Enter i (Intersection) to miter at the intersection of the two roof slabs. 3 Select the first roof slab at the side of that slab to keep.
The opposite side is trimmed. 4 Select the second roof slab at the side of that slab to keep.
The opposite side is trimmed. If the new mitered edges do not intersect, you can miter them by edges. For more information, see "Mitering Roof Slabs Using Edges" on page 1294. Mitering Roof Slabs Using Edges Use this procedure to miter two roof slabs that do not intersect. You can select particular edges to miter. You can miter edges of overlapping roof slabs without trimming the entire slab. To accomplish this, however, you may need to insert additional vertices. Only one edge of each roof slab is mitered. If you need to miter multiple edges of a roof slab, stretch them to overlap the other roof slab and then miter them at their intersection. For more information, see "Mitering Roof Slabs by Intersection" on page 1293.
1294 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Mitering roof slabs by edge
1 Select one of the two roof slabs you want to miter, right-click, and click Miter. 2 Enter e (Edges) to miter selected edges of the roof slabs. 3 Select one edge on the first roof slab. 4 Select one edge on the second roof slab. Cutting a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to cut a slab or roof slab into two or more slabs/roof slabs. You can use any 3D object or polyline to define the cutting geometry. If you use a 3D body, such as a wall, slab, mass element, or closed polyline, the slab/roof slab is cut along the intersection lines of the surfaces. The slab/roof slab is cut only when the 3D body or closed polyline intersects its perimeter line. If you use an open polyline, the slab/roof slab is cut along the projection to its surface. In either case, when the intersection line crosses the slab/roof slab multiple times, multiple slabs/roof slabs are created. If the intersection line has multiple edges, multiple edges are added to the new objects. The smoothness (tessellation) of curved edges is controlled by 2 AEC display resolution settings called Facet Deviation and Facet Maximum. Beginning with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, you can adjust these settings after the slab/roof slab is created. Also, the individual segments or facets making up a curved edge are no longer treated as separate edges; each arc on the perimeter of a slab/roof slab is treated as a single edge. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116. 1 Draw an object or polyline for defining the cutting geometry. 2 Select the slab or roof slab to be cut, right-click, and click Cut. 3 Select the objects or polylines that represent the cutting geometry, and press ENTER. 4 Enter n (No) to keep the geometry, or enter y (Yes) to erase the geometry. Adding a Vertex to a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to add a vertex to a slab or roof slab edge. Adding a vertex creates two edges from one edge. 1 Select a slab or roof slab, right-click, and click Add Vertex.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools | 1295
2 Specify a point for the new vertex. To place a new vertex at a precise intersection point, use Intersection or Apparent Intersection object snaps. The new vertex is added to the nearest edge, perpendicular to the specified point. If there is no point perpendicular to the slab/roof slab, no vertex is added. Adding a vertex to a roof slab
3 To see the new vertex, select the slab/roof slab. A new Vertex grip is displayed at the point you specified, and new grips are displayed for the edge that has been added.
Deleting a Vertex from a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to delete a vertex from a slab or roof slab. After the vertex is deleted, the two adjacent vertices connect in a straight line.
1 Select the slab or roof slab, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. 2 Select the vertex to remove. Adding a Hole to a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to add a hole to a slab or roof slab. The hole adds new vertices and edges, which you can edit as you do other slab/roof slab vertices and edges. You can use polylines or three-dimensional (3D) objects, such as walls and mass elements, to create the hole. Holes generated by a closed polyline are projected from the polyline to the slab/roof slab, using the current user coordinate system (UCS). 3D objects must intersect the slab/roof slab without any projection. If the objects contain an interior void, you are prompted to use the inside or outside surface to create the hole. For example, if you create a chimney using four wall objects, you can cut the hole at the inside or outside of the chimney. The new hole faces are aligned with the surfaces of the cutting bodies, and are not necessarily parallel to each other. The smoothness (tessellation) of curved edges is controlled by 2 AEC display resolution settings called Facet Deviation and Facet Maximum. Beginning with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, you can adjust these settings after the slab/roof slab is created. Also, the individual segments or facets making up a curved edge are no longer treated as separate edges; each arc on the perimeter of a slab/roof slab is treated as a single edge. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116.
1296 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Adding a hole to a slab
Adding a hole to a roof slab
1 Draw a closed polyline in the shape and location for the hole, or add an object in the location for the hole. 2 Select the slab or roof slab, right-click, and click Hole Add. 3 Select the closed polyline or the connected objects that define the hole, and press ENTER. 4 Enter n (No) to keep the geometry, or enter y (Yes) to erase the geometry. 5 If you select 3D objects, you are prompted to create the hole at the inside or outside surface of the cutting
objects. Press ENTER to use the outside of the object to define the hole, or enter i (Inside) to use the inside or void of the object to define the hole. This prompt is displayed even if the bodies do not contain an inner void, in which case the Inside option does not create a hole. NOTE If you create a hole that is outside or which overlaps the slab/roof slab baseline or perimeter line at an overhang, the body of the slab/roof slab is cut, but the fascia and soffit remain. In this case, it is better to create a hole by cutting the slab/roof slab. For more information, see "Cutting a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1295. Removing a Hole from a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to remove a hole from a slab or roof slab.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools | 1297
Removing a hole from a slab
1 Select the slab or roof slab, right-click, and click Hole Remove.
2 Select any edge of the hole to remove.
Creating Slab/Roof Slab Interference Conditions
Just as you can use another object to define the perimeter of a hole you want to add to a slab or a roof slab, you can also modify the geometry of a slab/roof slab by using another object to create an interference condition within the slab/roof slab. Unlike the object used to add a hole, which has no connection to the slab/roof slab and can be erased after the hole is added, the object used to create an interference condition remains partially or wholly embedded in the slab/roof slab, cutting out and replacing a part of its geometry. All interference conditions are subtractive in this sense, but the option you use to create the interference condition (Add or Subtract) determines whether the outline of the interference condition is included or excluded from the shrink wrap outline of the slab/roof slab in plan view.
Typically, after creating interference conditions for a slab/roof slab, you freeze the layer where the interfering objects are placed. If you move or edit the objects, the slab/roof slab updates accordingly.
NOTE Objects used as interference conditions are not included for the Area in the LIST command or in a Schedule Query result.
To create interference conditions for a slab or roof slab:
1 Create one or more objects in the actual location where you want the interference condition positioned in relation to the slab/roof slab.
2 Select the slab/roof slab. 3 Select an interference condition option:
If you want to...
Then...
include the interference condition within the shrink wrap outline in plan view
right-click, and click Interference Condition Add.
exclude the interference condition from the shrink wrap outline in plan view
right-click, and click Interference Condition Subtract.
4 Select the objects to use as interference conditions, and press ENTER.
NOTE AEC objects from externally referenced (xref) files can be added to a slab/roof slab as interference conditions so long as the following conditions are met:
The object is a three-dimensional (3D) body The xref is found The xref is read/write The xref is not locked or opened by another user The xref is loaded
1298 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Removing Slab/Roof Slab Interference Conditions Use this procedure to remove an interference condition from a slab or roof slab. Note that only the interference condition is removed; the object from which the interference condition was created remains in the drawing.
1 Select the slab/roof slab, right-click, and click Interference Condition Remove. 2 Select the objects to remove as interference conditions, and press ENTER.
NOTE You can also remove interference conditions through the Interference Conditions worksheet. For more information, see "Editing Slab/Roof Slab Interference Conditions" on page 1299.
Editing Slab/Roof Slab Interference Conditions Objects applied as interference conditions in slabs and roof slabs can be edited like any other objects, using grips, context menu options, or the Properties palette. If you move or edit the objects, the slab/roof slab updates accordingly. You can also change the setting that determines whether an interference condition is added to or subtracted from the shrink wrap outline of the slab/roof slab in plan view by using the following procedure.
1 Select the slab or roof slab, right-click, and click Properties. 2 On the Properties palette, under Advanced, click the value for Interferences.
3 On the Interference Conditions worksheet, click the Shrinkwrap Effect value you want to change, and select a different value from the pull-down menu.
4 Click OK.
NOTE You can also use this worksheet to remove an interference condition by right-clicking its Object or Type value and then clicking Remove. The alternate method is to use the context menu of the slab/roof slab, as explained under "Removing Slab/Roof Slab Interference Conditions" on page 1299. When you remove an interference condition, you remove the association between the slab or roof slab and the object that was used to create the interference condition. The object itself is not removed from the drawing.
Creating Slab/Roof Slab Body Modifiers Like interference conditions, body modifiers let you modify the geometry of a slab or roof slab by incorporating another three-dimensional (3D) object. However, where interference conditions always subtract from the mass of a slab/roof slab and affect only components that they touch, body modifiers can be used to add to, subtract from, or completely replace a specific component. If a slab/roof slab has only one component, then the body modifier applies to the entire slab/roof slab. You can create a body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. After you create a body modifier from an object, you can delete the original object. However, if you have created a complex object, such as a mass group comprising many mass elements, you may want to retain the object in the drawing until you are sure you have the results you want for the slab/roof slab.
NOTE Objects used as interference conditions are not included for the Area in the LIST command or in a Schedule Query result.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools | 1299
To create a body modifier for a slab or roof slab:
1 Create one or more objects in the location where you want the body modifier positioned in relation to the slab/roof slab.
2 Select to slab/roof slab you want to modify, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Add. 3 Select the objects to be applied as body modifiers, and press ENTER.
4 On the Add Body Modifier worksheet, specify the following:
For Slab Component (or Roof Slab Component), select the component to which you want the body modifier applied.
For Operation, select Additive, Subtractive, or Replace, depending on whether you want the body modifier added to the selected component, subtracted from it, or used to replace the entire component.
For Description, enter a text description of the body modifier(s) you are applying.
5 If you do not want the outline of the object(s) to be visible in the drawing, select Erase Selected Object(s).
6 Click OK.
Editing a Slab/Roof Slab Body Modifier in Place Use this procedure to edit the shape of a body modifier that is attached to a slab or a roof slab. You can edit the body using grips to edit faces, using Boolean commands to add or remove other objects from the body modifier, and other editing commands to change its shape.
1 Select the slab or roof slab that has the body modifier you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Edit In Place. A temporary mass element is created for you to edit the geometry of the body modifier. If the slab/roof slab contains multiple body modifiers, a mass element is created for each body modifier. If an object was not originally a mass element (for example, if you used a structural member as a body modifier), the object becomes a temporary Free Form mass element with faces that you can edit.
2 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the context menu, you may need to select a profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the context menu, select a profile, and right-click to display the context menu.
Edit the body modifier:
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the shape of a body modifier that is a Free Form mass select the body modifier. Select a Face grip to activate edge
element
grips for the face. Move the grips to the desired locations.
Continue editing other faces in the same manner.
change the shape of a body modifier that is a conventional mass element
select the body modifier. Select grips and move them to change the shape of the body modifier. The grips that are available depend on the type of mass element used as a body modifier and the current view direction.
1300 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
If you want to ...
Then ...
add an object to a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Union. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
subtract an object from a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Subtract. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
create a body modifier that is the intersection of the original body modifier with another object
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Intersect. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
trim a body modifier
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Trim. Specify the points that define the trim plane, and select the side of the body modifier to be trimmed. The trimmed body modifier is converted to a Free Form mass element.
divide the face of a body modifier into two faces
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Split Face. Specify the points that define the edge created by splitting the faces.
join two faces that are on the same plane into a single face select the body modifier, right-click, and click Join Faces. Select the edge that separates the coplanar faces.
remove a body modifier
select the object that forms the body modifier, and press DELETE.
3 Save or discard the changes: If you want to ... restore the body modifier to its original shape
save the changes to the body modifier
Then ...
select the body modifier, and click
.
select the body modifier, and click
. The body modifier
uses the edited mass element to define its geometry.
Managing Slab/Roof Slab Body Modifiers Use this procedure to edit or remove three-dimensional (3D) body modifiers from a slab or a roof slab. You can change the component to which the body modifier is applied or the way it is applied (whether it adds to, subtracts from, or replaces the selected component). You can also enter or edit the descriptions of body modifiers.
NOTE To remove a body modifier from a slab/roof slab component and restore the modifier as a mass element that you can edit or apply to other slabs/roof slabs, see "Restoring a Slab/Roof Slab Body Modifier to a Mass Element" on page 1302.
1 Double-click the slab or roof slab you want to change.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools | 1301
2 On the Properties palette, under Advanced, click the value for Body Modifiers.
3 Select a body modifier, and change its settings:
If you want to ...
apply the body modifier to a different slab/roof slab component
Then ... select a different component for Component.
change the operation used to apply the body modifier to the slab/roof slab component
select a different operation for Operation: Select Additive to add the body modifier to the component.
Select Subtract to subtract the shape of the body modifier from the component.
Select Replace to replace the component with the body modifier.
delete the body modifier from the slab/roof slab component select the body modifier, and click click Remove.
, or right-click, and
enter a description of the body modifier
click Description, enter text, and press ENTER.
4 Click OK.
Restoring a Slab/Roof Slab Body Modifier to a Mass Element Use this procedure to remove a body modifier from a slab or a roof slab and add it to the drawing as a mass element. Restoring a body modifier to a mass element enables you to modify the shape as a mass element and then add it to the slab/roof slab again as a body modifier. You can also restore the body modifier to a mass element while leaving the body modifier still applied to the slab/roof slab. This is useful if you want to create other slabs/roof slabs with the same shape.
If the object used to create the body modifier was a conventional mass element, it is restored to that mass element. For example, a Gable mass element is restored as a Gable mass element. However, if the body modifier was created from another object, such as a structural member, or was edited using Boolean operations or face editing commands, the body modifier is restored as a Free Form mass element.
1 Select the slab or roof slab you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Restore.
2 NOTE This procedure restores all body modifiers attached to a slab/roof slab.
Create mass elements from the body modifiers:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create mass elements from the body modifiers while keeping press ENTER. the body modifiers attached to the slab/roof slab
remove all body modifiers from the slab/roof slab, and create enter y (Yes), and press ENTER. mass elements from their shapes
1302 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Specifying the Material of a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to select a different material for components of an individual slab or roof slab. To change the materials assigned to all slabs/roof slabs of the same style, see "Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1312.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of the component, you can change the properties of the display component as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1303.
1 Select the slab or roof slab you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 To verify that the material assignment determines the display properties of the component, click the Display
Properties tab, select the display representation on which to display the changes, and click . 3 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab, verify that By Material is selected for the component, and click OK. 4 Click the Materials tab. 5 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING When you edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make will apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to change the following properties of the display components of an individual slab or roof slab:
Visibility (display component is on or off) By Material (material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
To change these display properties for all slabs/roof slabs of the same style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1314.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the display properties of a component, you can change the properties by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Material of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1303.
1 Select the slab or roof slab you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation on which to display the changes, and select Object Override.
(The display representation in bold is the current display representation.)
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools | 1303
6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching of a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of a slab or roof slab. Hatching is displayed only in display representations that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing. To change the hatching for all slabs/roof slabs of the same style, see "Specifying the Hatching of a Slab/Roof Slab Style" on page 1315.
NOTE If a material assignment determines the hatching properties of a slab display component, you can change the hatching of the display component by clearing By Material or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Material of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1303.
1 Select the slab or roof slab you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
2 On the Display Properties tab, select the display representation for which you want to change a property, and select Style Override.
3 If necessary, click . 4 On the Hatching tab, select the display component, and click the setting for Pattern. 5 Select the hatching for the display component:
If you want to...
Then...
specify a hatching pattern that is available in the software select Predefined for Type, and select a pattern.
specify a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
specify single hatching
select User-Defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
specify double hatching
select User-Defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
specify solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
6 Click OK. 7 Click the setting for Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 8 Click the setting for Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 9 Click the setting for Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
orient the hatching to the slab/roof slab, regardless of its rotation
Then... select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
10 Click the setting for X Offset, and enter an offset value. 11 Click the setting for Y Offset, and enter an offset value. 12 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Cut Plane Height of a Slab/Roof Slab Use this procedure to specify the cut plane height of a slab or roof slab. If the value you specify for the cut plane height is greater than zero, you must specify the layer, color, and linetype for the elements above and below the cut plane height. This is especially important for slabs/roof slabs with interference conditions or body modifiers.
1304 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
To change the cut plane height for all slabs/roof slabs of the same style, see "Specifying the Cut Plane Height of a Slab/Roof Slab Style" on page 1316.
1 Select the slab or roof slab you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation on which to display the changes, and select Style Override. 4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Other tab. 6 Select Override Display Configuration Cut Plane, and enter a value for Cut Plane Height. 7 Click OK twice.
Creating a Clipped Gable Roof
Use this procedure to modify two roof slabs to add a third slab, creating a clipped gable roof. 1 Create a gable roof with two roof slabs. 2 In an isometric view, draw a 3D polyline in the shape and location of the clipped roof slab. 3 Enter roofslab. 4 Enter e (Edit). 5 Enter x (Xcut). 6 Select the two roof slabs and press ENTER. 7 Select the 3D polyline and press ENTER twice. Creating a clipped gable roof
NOTE You can edit the outside edge of the new roof slab to change it from square to plumb. For more information, see "Changing Slab/Roof Slab Edges" on page 1288.
Creating a Clipped Gable Roof | 1305
Creating a Dormer in a Roof Slab
Use this procedure to add a dormer to a roof slab. You must first create the roof slabs, walls, and all other parts of the dormer, so that an appropriate hole can be cut in the roof slab. The walls you create for the dormer must include a back segment, so that a complete hole for the dormer can be cut in the roof slab. Adding a dormer to a roof slab
1 Create the walls for the dormer, including a closing rear wall. 2 Open the tool palette that contains the roof slab tool you want to use.
(You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.) 3 Right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework, Walls and Roof. 4 Select the walls, and press ENTER. 5 Miter the roof slab edges as required. 6 Move the structure so that the walls and roof slabs of the dormer fully penetrate the existing roof slab in
the correct position. 7 Select the roof slab to add the dormer to, right-click, and click Roof Dormer. 8 Select the objects that form the dormer, and press ENTER. 9 When prompted to slice the walls with the roof slab, press ENTER to slice the walls, or enter n (No) to leave
the walls as they are. 10 Erase the wall at the rear of the dormer.
Slab and Roof Slab Styles
A slab or roof slab style is a set of parameters that determines the appearance and other characteristics of the slab or roof slab object to which it is assigned. By editing a style, you can control the properties of all objects that use that
1306 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
style, without having to change the properties of each such object in a drawing. For slabs and roof slabs, the style controls the following properties:
default dimensions, including thickness default edge conditions, including fascia and soffit styles default display properties, including fascia and soffit physical components (concrete, metal deck, and so on) materials assigned to components of slabs
The default slab and roof slab tools provided with the software use standard styles. You can use these as provided, edit the standard styles in the Style Manager, or create your own styles and use them to make new tools.
Using Materials in Slab/Roof Slab Styles
You can control how slabs/roof slabs of a particular style are displayed in a drawing by assigning materials to the slab/roof slab components in the style. The components are then displayed using the display properties of the assigned materials. For more information see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for common design purposes. You can use these materials as provided, modify them to meet your project requirements, or define new materials. For more information about materials and how to define them, see "Creating and Editing Material Definitions" on page 487 and "Specifying the Material of a Slab/Roof Slab" on page 1303.
Creating Tools from Slab/Roof Slab Styles
You can create a slab or roof slab tool from a slab or roof slab style by dragging the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. The default settings provided by the style are then applied to any object created with that tool. For more information, see "Using Tools to Create Slabs and Roof Slabs" on page 1264.
Managing Slab/Roof Slab Styles
To create, copy, edit, or purge styles for slabs and roof slabs, you use the Style Manager, which you can access from the Format menu or from the Properties palette for slab/roof slab tools or objects. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Style
Use this procedure to create a slab or roof slab style. You can start by using the default properties of the standard style, or you can copy an existing style to use as your template. You then edit the style properties to customize the style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles.
3 Create a style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then ... right-click Slab/Roof Slab Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the slab/roof slab style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new style, and press ENTER.
5 To specify or edit the properties of the new style, use the tabs on the right pane of the Style Manager as described in the following table.
If you want to ...
Then ...
enter a description of the style
click the General tab, and enter a description.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Style | 1307
If you want to ... specify the physical components of the slab/roof slab
specify either a fixed or variable thickness or offset for the slab/roof slab or its components assign materials to the display components of the style
add classifications to the style
specify hatching, cut plane properties, and other display properties of the style add notes and files to the style
Then ...
see "Specifying the Components of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1308.
see "Specifying the Thickness and Offset of a Slab/Roof Slab Component" on page 1311.
see "Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Style" on page 1313 and "Turning on Materials for a Slab/Roof Slab Style" on page 1314.
see "Adding Classifications to a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1316.
see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1314.
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1317.
6 If you want to create a tool that uses the new style, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette. You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Tool" on page 1272.
7 Click OK.
Specifying the Components of a Slab or Roof Slab Style
Slab or roof slab components are the physical structures of the slab/roof slab, such as concrete, metal deck, insulation, and so on.
Slab/Roof Slab Components and Their Properties
Each component in a slab or roof slab style corresponds to a structural component or material of a slab/roof slab. When you create a component, you specify values for the following properties of the component:
Name (generally identifies the material used, such as concrete, metal deck, or insulation) Thickness (analogous to the Width property of a wall component; can be a fixed value or a variable) Thickness Offset (specifies the position of the component within the slab/roof slab, relative to the slab/roof slab
baseline or to adjacent slab/roof slab components; can be a fixed value or a variable)
Using Components from Other Slab/Roof Slab Styles
In addition to creating new components from scratch within a slab or roof slab style, you can also paste in components you have copied from a different style of the same type. That is, you can paste components from one slab style into another slab style, or components from one roof slab style into another roof slab style.
Components Tab Use the Components tab of the Style Manager for the following tasks:
Add or remove slab/roof slab components and edit their properties. View the components as you create and configure them. Change the order of components relative to other components in the style.
1308 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Specifying the properties of slab components
Creating or Editing a Component in a Slab/Roof Slab Style Use this procedure to create a slab or roof slab component, or to edit existing components in a slab/roof slab style. You can also add components to a style by pasting in components you have copied from other styles of the same type.
TIP Only the first 20 components of a slab/roof slab style are controlled by the display system. It is suggested that you limit the number of components to 20, since any additional components would be controlled by material assignment only.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Components tab.
5 To add a new component, click
.
If no existing component was selected, the new component is assigned an Index number of 2, but otherwise has the same values as the first component in the list. If an existing component was selected, the new component is a duplicate of the selected component, except that its Index number is 1 higher. In either case, you can edit the properties of the new component as described in the following steps.
6 To edit the name of a selected component, click in the Name column, and enter a new name. 7 To specify the thickness of a component, double-click its Thickness value, and then do one of the following:
If you want to ...
Then ...
specify a fixed thickness that cannot be edited when you add enter a new value for Thickness. or edit objects of this style
specify a variable thickness based on a Base Thickness (BT) value that can be determined when you add or edit objects of this style
click
to display text boxes that let you specify a formula
that defines how the Base Thickness variable is used to
calculate component thickness. For more information, see
"Specifying the Thickness and Offset of a Slab/Roof Slab
Component" on page 1311.
Specifying the Components of a Slab or Roof Slab Style | 1309
8 To specify the offset distance between the component and the slab/roof slab baseline, double-click the Thickness Offset value for the component, and then do one of the following:
If you want to ...
Then ...
move the component up or down by a specified increment
click
or
in the lower-left corner of the Components
tab to offset the component by the Offset Increment value
that you specify. The selected component is highlighted in
green in the viewer.
let the software calculate the offset
select Auto Calculate Thickness Offset.
specify a fixed offset
enter a value for Thickness Offset.
specify a variable offset that is calculated from values that you specify
click
in the Thickness Offset column to display text
boxes that let you specify a formula that defines how the Base
Thickness variable is used to calculate component thickness.
For more information, see "Specifying the Thickness and
Offset of a Slab/Roof Slab Component" on page 1311.
9 Repeat steps 5 through 8 to add more components to the style.
10 To change the order of components in the style, select a component, and click or at the upper-right side of the tab to move the component to the desired position relative to the other components. The Index numbers update to reflect the new order.
11 Click OK.
Adding a Component from Another Slab or Roof Slab Style Use this procedure to copy a slab/roof slab component from one style and add it to another style of the same type that you are creating or editing.
TIP Only the first 20 components of a slab/roof slab style are controlled by the display system. It is suggested that you limit the number of components to 20, since any additional components would be controlled by material assignment only.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style that contains the component you want to copy:
If you want to ... view the components for a style in the current drawing
Then ...
in the left pane of the Style Manager, select a style. The right pane lists the components and their properties and displays the style in the viewer.
view the components for a style in another drawing
click
, navigate to the drawing you want, click Open,
and then select a style in the left pane of the Style Manager.
4 On the Components tab for the selected style, right-click the desired component, and click Copy. 5 In the left pane of the Style Manager, select the style to which you want to add the component: 6 Move the cursor onto the Components tab, right-click, and click Paste.
You can now edit or delete the new components as needed. For more information, see "Creating or Editing a Component in a Slab/Roof Slab Style" on page 1309 and "Removing a Component from a Slab/Roof Slab Style" on page 1312.
7 Click OK to save the style with the new component.
1310 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Specifying the Thickness and Offset of a Slab/Roof Slab Component
When you create or edit a slab or roof slab component in a style, you can enter values that establish a fixed thickness and a fixed offset from the slab/roof slab baseline. If all the components in a slab/roof slab style use these fixed values, then you cannot change the thickness for an object of that style when you add one to a drawing. (The Thickness value on the Properties palette is read-only, and no Thickness grip is available on the object itself.)
Specifying slab component offsets
Alternatively, when you specify the Thickness or Thickness Offset values for a slab/roof slab component, you can use a variable called Base Thickness (BT), which has a default value of 4'' but can be changed at the time you add the slab/roof slab to a drawing or subsequently, either through the Properties palette or by grip editing. You can use the Base Thickness variable by itself, or as part of a formula that will be used to calculate the component thickness or offset.
For example, if you want to create a style in which a 2'' paving component is positioned directly above a paving base of variable thickness whose bottom edge is the same as the slab baseline, you would specify the Thickness and Thickness Offset values as follows:
For more complicated positioning relationships involving the Base Thickness variable, you can construct formulas for calculating the Thickness and Thickness Offset values. For example, if you know you want .5'' rebar to be positioned in the middle of a concrete layer with a fixed thickness of 6'', you might configure the components in the slab style as follows:
However, if you want the rebar to be positioned in the middle of the concrete component, regardless of its thickness, you can configure the components as follows, where the concrete thickness is specified as a variable (BT), and the offset of the rebar component is specified as one half of the concrete thickness, whatever that may be, minus half the thickness of the rebar (1/4'').
To specify a formula using the Base Thickness variable, click the Thickness or Thickness Offset value for the component,
and then click
to display the text boxes for the formula as shown.
The formula can be as simple as the one shown, in which only the Base Thickness is used, or it can specify a value to be added to the Base Thickness, or a further mathematical operation involving the Base Thickness. (Note that the operation drop-down menu and the operand box at the far right are only available if Base Thickness is selected.) In the case of the 1/2'' rebar positioned in the middle of a variable thickness concrete slab, the formula for the rebar Thickness Offset would be constructed as follows:
Specifying the Components of a Slab or Roof Slab Style | 1311
After you have entered the desired formula, press Enter to dismiss the text boxes and transfer the formula to the Thickness or Thickness Offset value for the selected component.
Removing a Component from a Slab/Roof Slab Style Use this procedure to delete a component from a slab or roof slab style. When you remove a component from a style, the component is also removed from all existing objects that use that style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Components tab.
5 Select the slab/roof slab component you want to remove, and click
.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style
A slab or roof slab object consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to them.
You assign one material to each display component of the object. For example, you might assign a floor tile material to a slab body and a concrete material to a slab edge.
If you want to use the display properties of a slab/roof slab object or style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the object or its style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in Plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in 3D model views and elevations.
For a complete list of material components and their description, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
Roof slabs with assigned materials
Slab/Roof Slab Materials and Display Components The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each slab/roof slab component.
Display Representations
Slab/Roof Slab Display Component
Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Below Cut Plane Body
Reflected Plan, Screened
Above Cut Plane Body
Below Cut Plane Outline
Above Cut Plane Outline
Cut Line
Hatch
Material Display Component None None None None Linework None
1312 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Display Representations Model
Slab/Roof Slab Display Component Baseline Fascia Soffit Pivot Point Warning Warning Baseline Slab Fascia Soffit Pivot Point
Material Display Component None Linework Linework None None None None 3D Body 3D Body 3D Body None
Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a slab or roof slab style. The components will then use the display properties of the materials instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the slab/roof slab. Custom components and components that are only symbolic do not use materials for their display properties. For example, the slab/roof slab body is a physical component, while the pivot point is a symbolic component.
NOTE Although fascias and soffits are physical components of slabs/roof slabs, they are defined in the slab or roof slab edge style, and not in the slab or roof slab style. For information on assigning materials to edge styles, see "Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style" on page 1324.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a slab/roof slab component, you can change the display properties of the style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1314.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Click the component you want to change, click its current material definition, and select a different material
definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style | 1313
WARNING Any changes you make to the material definition in this dialog will apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab or Roof Slab Style
In most cases, you want the appearance of slabs or roof slabs that use the same style to be consistent throughout a drawing. To achieve this, you specify the following display properties in each style:
The layer, color, and linetype of slab/roof slab components The hatching used for the surface of the slab/roof slab in plan views The cut plane height
Components with display properties include dimensions for slab/roof slab thickness, edge conditions for the fascia and soffit, line work, cut planes, cut lines, 3D shading factors, defect warning, baseline, and pivot point. The display properties of the fascia and soffit are also controlled by the slab or roof slab style, although the geometry of these components is controlled through edge styles. You can also use materials to control the display properties of the physical components of a slab/roof slab. Symbolic components, such as the pivot point, are not controlled by materials. For more information about using materials in slabs and roof slabs, see "Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1312. Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Slab/Roof Slab Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties for display components of a slab or roof slab style:
Visibility (component is on or off) By material (material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype Scale
NOTE If a material assignment determines the properties of components in the slab/roof slab style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material, or by overriding the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Style" on page 1313.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK.
Turning on Materials for a Slab/Roof Slab Style Use this procedure to turn on material assignments for individual display representations in a slab or roof slab style.
1314 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
For more information about using materials to control the display of slab/roof slab components, see "Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1312.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for each component to be controlled by the material. The By Material check box is
unavailable for components that cannot be assigned a material. When you select By Material for a display component, all other settings in the dialog box are unavailable. Since the display properties are now taken from the material definition, you can no longer set them directly in the display properties of the slab/roof slab style.
9 Click OK.
Specifying the Hatching of a Slab/Roof Slab Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of a slab or roof slab style. Hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching pattern:
If you want to... select a hatching pattern that is available in the software select a custom pattern
select single hatching select double hatching select solid fill
Then... select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select User-defined for Type, and then clear Double Hatch.
select User-defined for Type, and then select Double Hatch.
select Solid Fill for Type.
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab or Roof Slab Style | 1315
13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is to be oriented:
If you want to...
orient the hatching to the slab/roof slab, regardless of its rotation
Then... select object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select global.
14 Click OK 3 times.
Specifying the Cut Plane Height of a Slab/Roof Slab Style Use this procedure to specify the cut plane height of a slab or roof slab style. If the value you specify for the cut plane height is greater than zero, you must specify the layer, color, and linetype for the elements above and below the cut plane height. This is especially important when interference conditions or body modifiers are present.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Override Display Configuration Cut Plane, and enter a value for Cut Plan Height. 9 Click OK twice.
Adding Classifications to a Slab or Roof Slab Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a slab or roof slab style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to slab/roof slab styles.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current style. 6 Click OK.
Defining a Slab/Roof Slab Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a slab or roof slab style that can bound associative spaces. When a style is set as bounding, by default all objects of that style will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding setting for the style in an individual slab or roof slab if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Slab Styles. 3 Select a slab style.
1316 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the checkbox for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab or Roof Slab Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a slab or roof slab style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from the style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a slab or roof slab tool. 2 Right-click the tool, and click Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the style, enter it under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add or edit a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note or edits. 8 To attach, edit, or detach a reference file, click the Reference Docs tab:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you are finished editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK.
Slab and Roof Slab Edge Styles
Slab and roof slab edge styles control the appearance of the edges of slab and roof slab objects. Using edge styles, you can specify dimensions, such as the overhang length, and the orientation and angle of the edges. You can also specify a fascia and soffit for the edge style.
Components of Slab/Roof Slab Edge Styles
The slab/roof slab edge style defines the appearance of slab/roof slab edges. Each style consists of two optional components: a fascia and a soffit.
A fascia is a shape applied to the outside face of a slab/roof slab edge. A soffit is a shape applied to the underside of an edge overhang.
You can create fascia and soffit components by defining profiles that provide the two-dimensional (2D) geometry of the component whose shape is then extruded along the slab/roof slab edge.
The fascia component follows the orientation of the slab edge (plumb or square cut). The soffit component, however, is always oriented to the horizontal. Either component can have a positive or negative angle, relative to its base orientation.
The +/- directions for edge component angles remain the same regardless of their orientation in the XY plane. They always follow the slab/roof slab slope, so that, for example, a +30° soffit and a +30° slab/roof slab would be parallel to each other. Similarly, a +10° (plumb cut) fascia and a -10° soffit would meet at a right angle. Mirroring a slab/roof slab maintains the same angle signs for all components.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab or Roof Slab Style | 1317
Controlling the Placement of the Fascia and Soffit on Slab/Roof Slab Edges
The fascia profile is drawn at actual size, except when you select Auto-Adjust. If the slab/roof slab edge is sloped relative to the ground plane, then the length is measured parallel to that slope, and not plumb with the ground. When you select Auto-Adjust to Edge Height, the fascia profile is scaled about its insertion point so that its lowest Y axis point aligns with the bottom of the slab/roof slab edge.
NOTE Slope offsets are measured relative to the slab/roof slab edge angle from the ground plane, and not relative to the world UCS.
The soffit profile is drawn at actual size, except when you select Auto-Adjust. The soffit angle is measured about its insertion point, using the local X axis of the profile. When you select Auto-Adjust to Overhang Depth, the soffit profile is scaled about the insertion point, so that the furthest X axis point aligns with a plumb line from the slab/roof slab baseline or perimeter line. Auto-Adjust scaling is adjusted by the horizontal offset from the baseline dimension.
Display Properties of the Fascia and Soffit
In most cases, you want the appearance of fascias or soffits that use the same edge style to be consistent throughout a drawing. To achieve this, you specify the following display properties in each slab/roof slab edge style:
The layer, color, and linetype of slab/roof slab edge components The hatching used for the surface of slab/roof slab edges in plan views The cut plane height
Slab edge components with display properties include dimensions for slab thickness, fascia and soffit, vertical and horizontal offsets, line work, cut planes, cut lines, 3D shading factors, defect warning, baseline, slab, and pivot point. The display properties of the fascia and soffit are also controlled by slab/roof slab style, although the geometry of these components is controlled through slab/roof slab edge styles.
Materials in Slab/Roof Slab Edges
You can assign materials to a slab or roof slab edge. These materials are then displayed in wireframe or rendered views. Materials have specific settings for individual components of a slab or roof slab edge, such as the fascia and soffit. Viewing Slab Edge detail in 2D wireframe and rendered views
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides predefined materials for common design purposes. These materials contain settings for slabs and slab edges that you can use "as is" or modify for special designs. You can also create materials from scratch. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1312.
Managing Slab/Roof Slab Edge Styles
To create, import, export, or edit styles, you use the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Edge Style
Use this procedure to create a new slab or roof slab edge style. You can start by using the default properties of the standard style, or you can copy an existing style to use as your template. You then edit the style properties to customize the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
1318 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Slab Edge Styles or Roof Slab Edge Styles. 3 Create a slab/roof slab edge style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a style with default properties
right-click Slab Edge Styles or Roof Slab Edge Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the style you want to copy, and click Copy. Rightclick, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new style, and press ENTER.
5 To specify or edit the properties of the new style, use the tabs on the right pane of the Style Manager as described in the following table:
If you want to...
Then...
enter a description of the style
click the General tab, and enter a description.
specify the overhang, edge cut, and angle for the style
see "Specifying the Overhang, Edge Cut, and Angle of a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style" on page 1319.
specify soffits and fascias for the style
see "Specifying a Fascia and a Soffit for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style" on page 1322.
assign materials to the display components of the style
see "Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style" on page 1324.
turn on materials for the style
see "Turning on Materials for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style" on page 1325.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style" on page 1325.
6 When you finish specifying the properties of the style, click OK twice.
Specifying the Overhang, Edge Cut, and Angle of a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style
Use this procedure to specify the default overhang depth, edge cut, and edge angle for slab or roof slab edges using this edge style.
1 Select a slab or roof slab, right-click, and click Edit Slab Edge Style or Edit Roof Slab Edge Style. 2 Select an edge of the slab/roof slab. 3 Click the Defaults tab.
Specifying the Overhang, Edge Cut, and Angle of a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style | 1319
4 Specify the overhang, edge cut, and angle of the edge:
If you want to... specify the overhang of the slab/roof slab
Then... enter a value for Overhang.
specify the orientation of the edge cut
select a setting for Edge Cut: Select Square to cut the edge 90 degrees with the plane of the slab/roof slab.
Select Plumb to cut the edge perpendicular to the ground.
specify the angle of the edge Specifying square and plumb edges
enter a value for Angle. A positive value moves the bottom of the edge out and a negative value moves the bottom of the edge in.
5 Click OK.
Creating Profiles for the Fascia and Soffit
Use this procedure to create a profile for the fascia and soffit.
The profile is made up of closed polylines. To represent solid fascia or soffits, such as a wood fascia, you can create a profile from a single polyline. To represent fascia or soffits that are extruded, such as aluminum soffits, you can create a profile from concentric polylines that can include one or more voids. The outer polyline, or ring, becomes the exposed shape, and the inner polyline, if used, becomes the void. You can create multiple voids by adding more inner closed polylines. The polylines are proportional in size and shape to each other and to the slab.
You can draw these polylines anywhere in the drawing and use any convenient scale relative to your final fascia or soffit size. One method for sizing the polylines relative to the slab/roof slab edge is to draw them by snapping to an existing fascia, and then move your completed polylines to an open area of the drawing to create the profile.
Assigning a profile as a fascia
1320 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Assigning a profile as a soffit
1 Draw closed or open polylines representing the fascia or soffit. 2 Select the polylines, right-click, and click Convert to Profile Definition. 3 Select the outermost polyline. 4 Enter a (Add ring) as needed. 5 Select an inner polyline as needed. 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed to add more voids to the profile. 7 Specify the insertion point for the fascia or soffit. (The insertion point is typically the lower-left corner.) 8 Enter n (New), enter a name for the profile, and click OK.
Controlling Profile Edges and Extrusion
Use this procedure to specify the following parameters for a profile:
the position of each edge in a profile (left, right, back, discard, none) the axis along which an object is extruded from the shape of a profile
These settings determine how surface hatching is applied to objects created from the profile and how the objects are extruded from the two-dimensional (2D) profile.
NOTE Objects already created from the profile change when you change profile edges or the axis of extrusion.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Profile Definition. 3 Select the profile you want to change. 4 Click the Profile Edges tab. 5 Select an edge, and specify its position:
If you want to...
Then...
let the software determine the position of edges
click Calculate Default Edge Positions. You can then override the position of individual edges, if necessary.
select a position for an edge
select the setting for Edge, and select a new position.
exclude an edge from surface hatching
select the setting for Edge, and select None.
discard an edge
select the setting for Edge, and select Discard.
6 Specify the axis of extrusion based on the type of object created from the profile:
If you want to...
Then...
create a roof slab or slab fascia
select X for Extrusion Direction.
Controlling Profile Edges and Extrusion | 1321
If you want to... create a slab soffit extrude mass elements
Then... select Y for Extrusion Direction. select Z for Extrusion Direction.
7 Click OK.
Specifying a Fascia and a Soffit for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style
Use this procedure to specify a fascia and a soffit for a slab or roof slab edge style. The drawing must contain profiles for the fascia and soffit. For more information, see "Creating Profiles for the Fascia and Soffit" on page 1320.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Slab Edge Styles or Roof Slab Edge Styles. 3 Select the slab/roof slab edge style that you want to edit. 4 Click the Design Rules tab.
5 Select Fascia, and select a profile that defines the geometry of the fascia.
If you select *NONE*, display component settings apply to the slab/roof slab edge line or plane where the fascia is located.
6 Specify how the fascia is to be scaled on the slab/roof slab edge:
If you want to...
Then...
scale the fascia to fit the height of the edge
select Auto-Adjust to Edge Height to scale the fascia to edge height.
use the fascia at its drawn size
clear Auto-Adjust to Edge Height.
7 Select Soffit, and select a profile that defines the geometry of the soffit.
If you select *NONE*, display component settings apply to the slab/roof slab edge line or plane where the soffit is located.
8 Specify how the soffit is to be scaled on the slab/roof slab overhang:
If you want to...
Then...
scale the soffit to fit the depth of the overhang
select Auto-Adjust to Overhang Depth.
use the soffit at its drawn size
clear Auto-Adjust to Overhang Depth.
1322 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
9 Specify the placement of the soffit:
If you want to... specify the soffit angle of the slab/roof slab edge
Then...
enter a value for the Angle, with zero being horizontal. A positive value slopes the soffit up from the insertion point, and a negative value slopes the soffit down.
specify the horizontal offset from the slab/roof slab baseline or perimeter line for the slab edge
enter a value for Horizontal Offset from [Slab/Roof Slab] Baseline. (This option is available only if you select Auto-Adjust to Overhang Depth.)
specify the soffit offsets from the insertion point of the fascia enter a value for "X" Direction and "Y" Direction.
10 Click OK.
Editing the Geometry of Fascia and Soffits
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of the profile used to define the fascia and soffit of a slab or roof slab edge style. You can also add a profile to the fascia or soffit of an edge style that does not currently use a profile to define its shape.
NOTE If you want to replace the geometry of the profile with newly drawn polylines, draw them before you start this procedure.
1 Select the slab or roof slab that has the style you want to change. 2 Add or edit a profile:
If you want to... add an existing profile to the style
Then...
right-click, and click Add Edge Profiles. Select an edge. Select the name of the profile for the fascia or soffit, and click OK.
create a profile and add it to the style
right-click, and click Add Edge Profiles. Select an edge. Select Start from scratch for Fascia or Soffit Profile Definition, enter a name for the new profile, and click OK. A rectangle profile is created for you to edit.
edit the existing profile for the style
select the slab, right-click, and click Edit Edge Profile in Place.
NOTE If you are prompted about the selected edge not having an edge style and overhang, click Yes.
3 If you receive a message that the profile is not drawn to size, click Yes. The area of the slab/roof slab edge defined by the profile is selected and hatched in the drawing.
NOTE After you perform an editing task from the context menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the context menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the context menu.
Editing the Geometry of Fascia and Soffits | 1323
4 Edit the profile as necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
change the shape of the perimeter of the profile or its rings
select the profile, and use edge and vertex grips to adjust the shape. The Edge grip has two edit modes: Stretch and Move. The default mode is Stretch, and the direction of the stretch depends on the orientation of edges connected to the selected edge. For example, if the edges at both ends of the selected edge are parallel to each other, the grip edit mode is Stretch (Parallel) and the stretch direction is limited to the direction of the parallel edges. If the connected edges are not parallel, the grip edit mode is Stretch (Offset) and the stretch direction is perpendicular to the direction of the selected edge. The Move edit mode allows an unconstrained move of the selected edge.
add vertices to the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Vertex. Select a point for each new vertex, and press ENTER.
remove vertices from the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. Select each vertex to remove, and press ENTER.
replace an existing ring of the profile with new geometry
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Select the ring to replace, and select the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
5 Save or discard the changes: If you want to... restore the profile to its original shape save the changes to the current profile
save the changes to a new profile definition
Then...
select the profile, and click .
select the profile, and click . The slab/roof slab style uses the edited profile to define its geometry. Any other objects or styles that use this profile are also updated with the edited geometry.
select the profile, right-click, and click Save as New Profile. Enter a name for the new profile definition, and click OK. The slab/roof slab uses the new profile to define its geometry. Any other objects of this style are updated with the new geometry. Other styles or objects that use the original profile are not affected.
Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to individual components of a slab or roof slab edge style. 1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Slab Edge Styles or Roof Slab Edge Styles. 3 Select the style to which to assign materials. 4 Click the Materials tab. 5 Select the edge component to which to assign a material, and click its current material definition. 6 Select a material definition from the list.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
1324 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
WARNING Any changes you make to the material definition in this dialog will apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
7 Click OK.
Turning on Materials for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style
Use this procedure to turn on material assignments for individual display representations in a slab or roof slab edge style. Display components for edges are not turned on in the edge style, but rather in the slab or roof slab style that uses them. For information on creating and assigning materials, see "Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style" on page 1312.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Slab Styles or Roof Slab Styles. 3 Select the style that contains the edges you want to turn on. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for each component to be controlled by the material.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a slab or roof slab edge style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from the style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Slab Edge Styles or Roof Slab Edge Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the edge style, enter it under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add or edit a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 To attach, edit, or detach a reference file, click the Reference Docs tab:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you are finished editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK.
Turning on Materials for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style | 1325
1326 | Chapter 27 Slabs and Roof Slabs
Structural Members
28
A structural member is an object that can represent a beam, brace, or column in a drawing. All the beams, braces, and columns that you create are sub-types of a single structural member object.
1327
Structural Members
A structural member is an object that can represent a beam, brace, or column in a drawing. All the beams, braces, and columns that you create are sub-types of a single structural member object. Creating Structural Members You create a structural member in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop by extruding a structural shape along a path. The style that you use to create the structural member provides the shape. The shape, similar to a profile, is a 2-dimensional cross-section of a structural member. You define the extrusion path (axis) of the member when you specify start and endpoints for the member or when you convert linework to a member. Creating a structural member
Connecting Structural Members Connections between structural members are supported. Structural members are considered connected when an endpoint of one member lies on an endpoint or along the axis of another. With some exceptions, you have the option of maintaining or breaking these connections when you move a member using its Location grip. Connections between structural members are also recognized across external reference (xref) drawings, and you can use objects in an xref to position and establish trim planes for members you are adding. For example, while working in one drawing, you can open an xref containing a column grid and use it to lay out columns or beams. If you edit the xref in-place, connections between structural members are maintained just as they would be in the host drawing. For more information on the behavior of connections during edits, see "Using Grips To Edit Structural Members" on page 1358. Creating Styles with the Structural Member Catalog and Structural Member Style Wizard To create styles for most standard beams, braces, and columns, you can use the Structural Member Catalog included in Autodesk Architectural Desktop. The catalog contains specifications for industry-standard concrete, steel, and timber structural shapes organized in a Windows® Explorer-like tree view. You can browse the catalog, select a shape, and create a style.
Structural Member Catalog
If you know the type, shape, and shape dimensions of the member that you want to create, you can quickly enter the information in the Structural Member Style wizard to create a style. You can create a structural member shape within a style that is based on any of the nineteen different member shapes in the catalog.
1328 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Structural Member Style Wizard
After you create structural member styles, you can drag them from the Style Manager onto tool palettes to create structural member tools. Adding Graphics to Structural Members You can add blocks to the display of structural members as components in display representations. For example, you can create blocks that represent stiffener plates and add them to beams or create blocks that represent clip angles and add them to members. Beam with added stiffener plates
Trimming Structural Members Structural members are trimmed using objects called trim planes, which let you clean up joints between multiple structural members or between structural members and other objects. Using the Properties palette for a structural member tool, you can create specific trim planes that are applied when you add a new member with the tool. Or you can specify that trim planes be created automatically when you connect the new member to an existing structural member in a drawing. Once a member has been added to a drawing, you can edit its trim planes or add new ones. Additional trim planes can be defined on the member itself or in relation to an edge of another object. For more information, see "Trimming Structural Members" on page 1368.
Structural Members | 1329
Trimming a structural member with a trim plane
Creating Column Grids When you create a column, you can attach it to a grid. You can also create a column grid with the structural column grid tool that is included in Autodesk Architectural Desktop. The tool creates a grid with columns pre-anchored to nodes on the grid. For more information, see "Creating a Column Grid" on page 1455. Materials in Structural Members In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to a structural member. These materials are displayed in wireframe and working shade views, or when linked into VIZ Render. Materials have specific settings for the physical components of a structural member. Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a large number of predefined materials for all common design purposes, which contain settings for structural members. You can use these predefined materials, or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials from scratch. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Structural Member Style" on page 1383. Creating Custom Structural Members You can use the styles from the Structural Member Catalog and Structural Member Style wizard to create structural members for most of your design needs. However, your project requirements may require you to create structural members that cannot be created from a shape in the catalog or created with the wizard. For example, you may want to create:
a column with a shape that tapers from start to end a composite column created from a steel shape encased in a concrete shape a rigid frame created from multiple tapering shapes extruded along the path of the frame a structural member with a custom shape that cannot be created in the catalog or with the wizard
1330 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
To create custom structural members, you use the design rules within a structural member style to extrude one or more shapes along the path of the member. You can use shapes created in the catalog or with the wizard, or you can create your own custom shapes. Predefined Custom Structural Member Styles You can access predefined styles for custom structural members from the Member Styles and Bar Joists Styles drawings located in the \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial folder.
Process Overview: Creating Structural Members with the Structural Member Catalog or Structural Member Style Wizard
This process overview describes how you can create structural members with styles that you create in the Structural Member Catalog or with the Structural Member Style wizard. This overview assumes that you need to create your own structural member styles and tools to create structural members. If you have a tool palette of structural member tools, see "Using Structural Member Tools to Create Structural Members" on page 1342. The process of creating a structural member from the catalog or with the wizard has three steps: Step 1: Create a structural member style in the Structural Member Catalog or with the Structural Member Style wizard.
If you know the type, shape, and shape dimensions of the member that you want to create, you can quickly enter the information in the Structural Member Style wizard to create a style.Alternatively, browse the Structural Member Catalog and select a shape to create a style. Step 2: Drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette to create a structural member tool. Step 3: Create a structural member or convert linework to a structural member with the tool that you created in step 2.
Creating Structural Member Styles in the Structural Member Catalog
The Structural Member Catalog contains specifications for different types and sizes of standard structural shapes. You can browse the catalog, select a shape, and create a structural member style that contains the selected shape. When you create a structural member with the style, the style provides the shape of the member. Organization of the Structural Member Catalog The left pane of the Structural Member Catalog contains standard structural shapes organized in a Windows® Explorer-like tree view. Several industry standard specifications are organized in the tree, first by imperial or metric units, and then by material. Structural Member Catalog
Browsing the Catalog You can open all the levels in the tree pane under a unit and material to view the different structural shape types available in the catalog. When you select a shape type in the tree view, a preview image of the shape with its dimensions displays in the upper right pane. All the available sizes of the shape type display in the lower right pane.
Process Overview: Creating Structural Members with the Structural Member Catalog or Structural Member StyleWizard | 1331
If you have a structural member in a drawing with a style created in the catalog, you can locate the catalog shape contained in that style from the member. Creating Structural Member Styles from Catalog Shapes When you create a structural member style in the catalog, the dimensions of the catalog shape that you select define and store the shape in the style. For example, the dimensions of the steel beam selected in the previous illustration include its depth (d), flange width (bf), flange thickness (tf), and web thickness (tw). When you create a style, these dimensions create the following shape that is stored in the style. Wide-flange structural shape cross-sectional parameters
When you create a beam in your drawing with this style, the style provides the shape of the beam. You determine the length, start and end offsets, justification, and roll of the beam when you create the beam. Contents of the Structural Member Catalog When you display the Structural Member Catalog, a default catalog file, -AecStructural.apc, provides the catalog content. This file is located in: C:\Program Files\Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007\Catalogs\Structural. In the future, additional catalog files that you can open in the catalog may become available on the Autodesk web site, or you may create your own catalog files.
Opening the Structural Member Catalog
Use this procedure to open the Structural Member Catalog. 1 On the Format menu, click Structural Members Catalog. Opening the Structural Member Catalog
2 Move and resize the Structural Member Catalog, or resize the left and right panes within the catalog as needed to view catalog information.
3 Click to close the Structural Member Catalog.
1332 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Creating a Style from a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog
Use this procedure to create a structural member style from a shape that you select in the Structural Member Catalog. 1 On the Format menu, click Structural Members Catalog. A tree view in the left pane of the catalog lists the available shapes. 2 Expand Imperial or Metric in the tree view. 3 Expand the type of material (Concrete, Steel, or Timber) for the structural shape that you want to create with the style. 4 Expand the shape that you want to create. Depending on the member, you may need to expand one or more levels in the tree. 5 Select the shape type of the member that you want to create. In the top right pane, a preview of the shape displays. In the bottom right pane, a list of the available sizes of the selected shape display. The following shapes may take a significant amount to time to display:
Imperial Steel AISC HSS and Pipes HSS, Small Hollow Structural Sections Metric Steel CISC Angles L, Angle Shapes Metric Steel CISC I-Shaped W, Wide Flange Shapes Metric Steel CISC I-Shaped WWF, Welded Wide Flange Shapes Metric Steel CISC Structural Tees WT, Tee Shapes
6 Under Shape Designation in the bottom right pane, select the shape size that you want to use to create your style, right-click, and click Generate Member Style.
7 Enter a style name, if necessary, and click OK. The name of the shape is used as the default style name. Special characters in the shape name, such as quotation marks, are substituted with underscores. If you change the default style name, you cannot use any of the following special characters in your style name:
Less-than and greater-than symbols (< >) Forward slashes and backslashes (/ \) Quotation marks (") Colons (:) Semicolons (;) Question marks (?) Commas (,) Asterisks (*) Vertical bars (|) Equal signs (=) Back quotes (`)
8 Continue creating structural member styles, or click to close the Structural Member Catalog. You can access the style that you created in the Style Manager, create a new structural member tool from the style, modify an existing tool to use that style, or apply the style to an existing member.
Creating a Style from a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog | 1333
Locating a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog from a Structural Member in a Drawing
Use this procedure to locate a shape in the Structural Member catalog from a shape contained in the style of a structural member in a drawing. You may find this command useful if you created a style from a shape in the catalog and did not name it with the same name as the catalog shape.
1 On the Format menu, click Structural Members Catalog. 2 On the Tools menu in the Structural Member Catalog, click Locate. 3 Select the structural member in the drawing that you want to select in the catalog.
The shape that you located from the existing member is selected in the Structural Member Catalog.
Opening a Catalog File in the Structural Member Catalog
Use this procedure to open a new catalog file in the Structural Member Catalog.
1 On the Format menu, click Structural Members Catalog. 2 Specify the location of the new catalog file:
If you... know the location and name of the catalog file
Then...
enter the full path and name of the catalog file in the Catalog bar under the Structural Member Catalog toolbar.
want to browse your hard disk or server for a catalog
on the File menu in the Structural Member Catalog, click Open. Select a new catalog file, and click Open.
Creating a Structural Member Style with the Structural Member Style Wizard
Use this procedure to create a structural member style with the Structural Member Style wizard. You can create a structural member shape within the style that is based on any of the nineteen different shape types in the Structural Member Catalog. The current drawing units determine the units of the style that you create.
1 On the Format menu, click Structural Members Wizard. 2 Select the type of structural member shape that you want to create, and click Next.
Selecting a structural member shape type
3 Enter dimensions for the shape, and click Next.
1334 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Entering the structural member dimensions
4 Enter a name for the structural member style, and click Finish. Entering a structural member style name
You cannot use the following special characters in your style names: Less-than and greater-than symbols (< >) Forward slashes and backslashes (/ \) Quotation marks (") Colons (:) Semicolons (;) Question marks (?) Commas (,) Asterisks (*) Vertical bars (|) Equal signs (=) Back quotes (`)
You can access the style that you created in the Style Manager, create a new structural member tool from the style, modify an existing tool to use that style, or apply the style to an existing member.
Creating Structural Member Tools
You can create structural member tools and add them to tool palettes. Tool palettes in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place beams, braces, and columns by selecting a structural member tool with a specific style and other predefined properties. If you created structural member styles in the Structural Member Catalog or with the Structural Member Style wizard, you can drag the styles from the Style Manager to tool palettes and then customize the properties of the new tools.
Creating Structural Member Tools | 1335
You can also use any of the following methods to create structural member tools:
Drag a structural member that has the properties you want to a tool palette. Copy an existing tool in the current palette, paste it onto the current palette or a different palette, and then
customize the properties of the new tool. Drag a tool from the Content Browser to a tool palette and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Creating a Beam Tool
Use this procedure to create a structural beam tool and add it to a tool palette. 1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a structural member style in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
create a tool from a beam in the drawing
select the beam, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from the Content Browser
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
4 Enter a name for the tool.
5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. The description displays in the tooltip when you select the tool from the tool palette, and describes the tool if you store it in a tool catalog in the Content Browser.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the beams that you can create using this beam tool. 8 If you do not want to use the layer assignments specified in the layer key style used in the drawing, specify
a layer key and any layer key overrides. 9 Select a structural member style, and select a style location, if not the current drawing.
The style provides the shape of the beam.
10 If you want the endpoints of the new beam to be trimmed to any other structural members to which they are logically connected, select Yes for Trim automatically.
11 Expand Dimensions.
12 Specify offsets:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the beam on its extruded axis at the start point of the enter a value for Start offset. A positive value shortens the
beam
beam on its axis, while a negative value lengthens the beam
on its axis.
offset the beam on its extruded axis at the endpoint of the beam
enter a value for End offset. A positive value lengthens the beam on its axis, while a negative value shortens the beam on its axis.
1336 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
13 Enter a value for Roll.
This value specifies the orientation of the beam relative to its extruded axis in terms of degrees of roll. A positive value rolls the beam counterclockwise when viewed from its end to its start.
14 If Layout type is Fill, and you want beams to be added to the selected edge of a column grid, slab, roof slab, or wall at an angle other than the default of 90 degrees, enter a value for Angle relative to selected object.
15 Select a Layout type to specify how a beam is positioned in relation to a highlighted edge of a column grid, slab, roof slab, or wall:
If you want to position the beam... along the highlighted edge of the object
Then... select Edge for Layout type.
within the boundaries of the object (from one edge to an opposite edge or edges)
select Fill for Layout type.
16 Specify the beam justification, which positions the beam shape in relation to its extruded axis when you draw the beam:
If you want to...
Then...
position the axis of the beam along the centroid of the beam shape
select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
position the axis of the beam along one of nine positions on the beam shape
select one of the nine positions for Justify.
NOTE These positions are defined at a roll of zero, viewing the beam from the end to the start.
Justification options for a beam
Creating a Beam Tool | 1337
17 To specify the justification of members with multiple shapes and segments created with this tool, select a setting for Justify using overall extents:
If you want to justify the member...
Then...
based on the largest cross-sectional extent of the member's lowest priority shapes
select Yes. The justification is applied ONLY to the lowest priority shape definitions, and is calculated based on the node (vertex) of the member with the greatest cross section.
at each node, based on all shapes
select No. The justification is calculated based on the crosssectional extents at each node, and applied to all the shapes without regard to priority.
For more information about members with multiple shapes and segments, see "Creating Custom Structural Members" on page 1391.
18 If Layout type is Fill, and you want to array multiple beams between two existing beams or within a column grid, slab, roof slab, or wall, expand Layout and select Yes for Array.
19 Specify the layout method for the array:
If you want to array beams...
Then...
so that they create a specific number of equal-sized bays
select Space evenly for Layout method, and enter a value for Number of bays.
at a specific distance from each other
select Repeat for Layout method, and enter a value for Bay size.
20 Click OK.
Creating a Brace Tool
Use this procedure to create a structural brace tool and add it to a tool palette. 1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
create a tool from a structural member style in the Style Manager
Then...
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
create a tool from a brace in the drawing
select the brace, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from the Content Browser
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
The description displays in the tooltip when you select the tool from the tool palette, and describes the tool if you store it in a tool catalog in the Content Browser.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the braces that you can create using this brace tool.
1338 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
8 If you do not want to use the layer assignments specified in the layer key style used in the drawing, specify a layer key and any layer key overrides.
9 Select a structural member style, and select a style location, if not the current drawing. The style provides the shape of the brace.
10 If you want the endpoints of the new brace to be trimmed to any other structural members to which they are logically connected, select Yes for Trim automatically.
11 Expand Dimensions.
12 Specify offsets:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the brace on its extruded axis at the start point of the brace
enter a value for Start offset. A positive value shortens the brace on its axis, while a negative value lengthens the brace on its axis.
offset the brace on its extruded axis at the endpoint of the brace
enter a value for End offset. A positive value lengthens the brace on its axis, while a negative value shortens the brace on its axis.
13 Enter a value for Roll.
This value specifies the orientation of the brace relative to its extruded axis in terms of degrees of roll. A positive value rolls the brace counterclockwise when viewed from its end to its start.
14 Specify the brace justification, which positions the brace shape in relation to its extruded axis when you draw the brace:
If you want to...
Then...
position the axis of the brace along the centroid of the brace shape
select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
position the axis of the brace along one of nine positions on the brace shape
select one of the nine positions for Justify.
NOTE These positions are defined at a roll of zero, viewing the beam from the end to the start.
Creating a Brace Tool | 1339
Justification options for a brace
15 To specify the justification of braces with multiple shapes and segments created with this tool, select a setting for Justify using overall extents:
If you want to...
Then...
justify the brace based on the largest cross-sectional extent of the member's lowest priority shapes
select Yes. The justification is applied ONLY to the lowest priority shape definitions, and is calculated based on the node (vertex) of the member with the greatest cross section.
justify the brace at each node, based on all shapes
select No. The justification is calculated based on the crosssectional extents at each node, and is applied to all the shapes without regard to priority.
For more information about members with multiple shapes and segments, see "Creating Custom Structural Members" on page 1391.
16 Specify the rise, which is the vertical distance between the start point and endpoint of the brace:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the rise of the brace before you draw it
select No for Specify Rise on Screen. For Method, select either Angle, Distance, or Height. If you select Angle, enter a value for Distance along first member (measured from the point where the two members are connected to the point on the first member where you want the brace to start) and a value for Angle from first member. If you select Distance, enter values for both Distance along first member and Distance along second member. If you select Height, enter a value for Rise.
specify the rise of the brace by specifying a 3D endpoint for select Yes for Specify Rise on Screen. the end of the brace
17 Click OK.
Creating a Column Tool
Use this procedure to create a structural column tool and add it to a tool palette. 1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool.
1340 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
2 Create the tool: If you want to... create a tool from a structural member style in the Style Manager
create a tool from a column in the drawing copy a tool in the current palette copy a tool from another palette
copy a tool from the Content Browser
Then...
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
select the column, and drag it to the tool palette.
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
4 Enter a name for the tool.
5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. The description displays in the tooltip when you select the tool from the tool palette, and describes the tool if you store it in a tool catalog in the Content Browser.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the columns that you can create using this column tool. 8 If you do not want to use the layer assignments specified in the layer key style used in the drawing, specify
a layer key and any layer key overrides. 9 Select a structural member style, and select a style location, if not the current drawing.
The style provides the shape of the column.
10 If you want the endpoints of the new column to be trimmed to any other structural members to which they are logically connected, select Yes for Trim automatically.
11 Expand Dimensions.
12 Specify offsets:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the column on its extruded axis at the start point of the column
enter a value for Start offset. A positive value shortens the column on its axis, while a negative value lengthens the column on its axis.
offset the column on its extruded axis at the endpoint of the enter a value for End offset. A positive value lengthens the
column
column on its axis, while a negative value shortens the column
on its axis.
13 Specify the roll of the column (how it is oriented relative to its extruded axis):
If you want to...
Then...
specify the roll of the column before you insert it
select No for Specify on Screen, and enter a value for Roll.
specify the roll of the column when you insert it
select Yes for Specify on Screen.
This value specifies the orientation of the column relative to its extruded axis in terms of degrees of roll. A positive value rolls the column counterclockwise when viewed from the end (top) to the start (bottom) of the column.
Creating a Column Tool | 1341
14 Specify the column justification, which positions the column shape in relation to its extruded axis when you draw the column:
If you want to...
Then...
position the axis of the column along the centroid of the column shape
select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
position the axis of the column along one of nine positions on the column shape
select one of the nine positions for Justify.
NOTE These positions are defined at a roll of zero, viewing the column from the top to the bottom.
15 To specify the justification of members with multiple shapes and segments created with this tool, select a setting for Justify using overall extents:
If you want to...
Then...
justify the member based on the largest cross-sectional extent select Yes. The justification is applied ONLY to the lowest
of the member's lowest priority shapes
priority shape definitions, and is calculated based on the node
(vertex) of the member with the greatest cross section.
justify the member at each node, based on all shapes.
select No. The justification is calculated based on the crosssectional extents at each node, and is applied to all the shapes without regard to priority.
For more information about members with multiple shapes and segments, see "Creating Custom Structural Members" on page 1391.
16 Click OK.
Using Structural Member Tools to Create Structural Members
Tool palettes in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place beams, braces, and columns by selecting a structural member tool with a specific style and other predefined properties. You can also use structural member tools to convert linework to structural members and to apply the settings of a structural member tool to existing structural members.
Custom palettes created by you or your CAD manager may contain structural member tools from styles created in the Structural Member Catalog or Structural Member Style wizard. These palettes may be customized for your projects or office standards.
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample structural member tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain structural member tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog
Sample Palette catalog
My Tool catalog
When you create structural members using structural member tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you can specify settings for any structural member properties that are not controlled by the style.
IMPORTANT Columns grids that have numerous columns attached to them can take longer than expected to display on screen. This is because structural members carry additional information that may be used for structural analysis.
1342 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Creating a Beam
Use this procedure to add one or more new beams that have the property settings specified in the structural beam tool that you select. You can add a beam anywhere in the drawing area by specifying a start point and an endpoint, or you can position and size a beam in relation to an edge of an existing object. The style specified in the tool provides the beam shape, which is extruded along the path you define in the drawing area.
To specify settings when you add a beam, see "Creating Beams with User-Specified Settings" on page 1343.
Creating a beam
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural beam tool you want to use, and select the tool.
TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 If you want to offset the new beam(s) from the elevation of the current level, double-click the Elevation value on the application status bar at the bottom of the workspace, enter an elevation value (or specify a point on an existing object in the drawing area), click OK, and then click the Z-snap button to the right of the Elevation Value.
3 Position the new beam(s) in the drawing area:
If you want to...
Then...
create a single beam independent of other objects
specify a start point and an endpoint for the beam, and then press ENTER.
create multiple beams independent of other objects but
specify a start point and an endpoint, and then specify
connected to each other using the endpoint of one beam as additional endpoints as required. Press ENTER to end the
the start point of the next beam
command.
create a beam that is connected to an existing structural member
specify a start point and an endpoint, one of which must be on the axis or the endpoint of the existing member. Press ENTER to end the command.
add beams along one or more edges of a slab, roof slab, or wall
move the cursor over an edge of the object to display a preview of the beam, and then click to add a beam along that edge, or press Ctrl and click to add beams along all edges of the object. Press ENTER to end the command.
add beams along one or more segments of a column grid
move the cursor over a segment of the grid to display a preview of the beam, and then click to add a beam along that segment; or press Ctrl and click to add beams along all segments in that grid line; or press Ctrl twice and click to add beams along all segments in the grid. Press ENTER to end the command.
NOTE If you want to add a beam that spans an object from edge to edge rather than lying along one of its edges, you can change the Layout type setting from Edge to Fill on the Properties palette. For more information on property settings for beam tools, see "Creating Beams with User-Specified Settings" on page 1343.
Creating Beams with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add one or more new beams with property settings that you specify. You can add a beam anywhere in the drawing area by specifying a start point and an endpoint, or you can position and size a beam in relation to an
Creating a Beam | 1343
existing object. You can also create multiple beams, either one at a time (connected endpoint to start point) or arrayed within boundaries defined by other beams or by column grids, slabs, roof slabs, or walls. The style specified in the tool provides the beam shape, which is extruded along the paths you define in the drawing area. Creating a beam
Optionally, offset the beam from its start point or endpoint. Offsetting a beam
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural beam tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool).
2 On the Properties palette, under General, click Style, and select a structural beam style. 3 Under Bound Spaces, define if this beam can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this beam can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this beam cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this beam will use the bounding settings from the structural member style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
4 If you want the endpoints of the new beam to be trimmed to any other structural members to which they are logically connected, select Yes for Trim automatically.
5 Expand Dimensions.
6 Specify offsets:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the beam on its extruded axis at the start point of the enter a value for Start offset. A positive value shortens the
beam
beam on its axis, while a negative value lengthens the beam
on its axis.
offset the beam on its extruded axis at the endpoint of the beam
enter a value for End offset. A positive value lengthens the beam on its axis, while a negative value shortens the beam on its axis.
7 Enter a value for Roll.
This value specifies the orientation of the beam relative to its extruded axis in terms of degrees of roll. A positive value rolls the beam counterclockwise when viewed from its end to its start.
1344 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
8 Specify the beam justification, which positions the beam shape in relation to its extruded axis when you draw the beam:
If you want to...
Then...
position the axis of the beam along the centroid of the beam shape
select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
position the axis of the beam along one of nine positions on the beam shape
select one of the nine positions for Justify.
NOTE These positions are defined at a roll of zero, viewing the beam from the end to the start.
Justification options for a beam
9 Select a Layout type to specify how a beam is positioned in relation to a highlighted edge of a column grid, slab, roof slab, or wall:
If you want to position the beam...
Then...
along the highlighted edge of the object
select Edge for Layout type.
within the boundaries of the object (from one edge to an opposite edge or edges)
select Fill for Layout type.
10 If Layout type is Fill, and you want to array multiple beams between two existing beams or within a column grid, slab, roof slab, or wall, expand Layout and select Yes for Array.
Creating Beams with User-Specified Settings | 1345
11 Specify the layout method for the array: If you want to array beams... so that they create a specific number of equal-sized bays
at a specific distance from each other
Then...
select Space evenly for Layout method, and enter a value for Number of bays.
select Repeat for Layout method, and enter a value for Bay size.
TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
12 If you want to offset the new beams from the elevation of the current level, double-click the Elevation value on the application status bar at the bottom of the workspace, enter an elevation value (or specify a point on an existing object in the drawing area), click OK, and then click the Z-snap button to the right of the Elevation value.
Adding a beam to a single segment
Adding beams to one grid line
Adding beams to all grid lines
1346 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Adding a beam to a specified point
Adding a beam array to a single cell
Adding a beam array to all cells
13 Position the new beams in the drawing area:
If you want to...
Then...
create a single beam independent of other objects
specify a start point and an endpoint for the beam, and then press ENTER.
create multiple beams independent of other objects but
specify a start point and an endpoint, and then specify
connected to each other using the endpoint of one beam as additional endpoints as required. Press ENTER to end the
the start point of the next beam
command.
create a beam that is connected to an existing structural member
specify a start point and an endpoint, one of which must be on the axis or the endpoint of the existing member. Press ENTER to end the command.
Creating Beams with User-Specified Settings | 1347
If you want to...
Then...
add a beam along one or more edges of a slab, roof slab, or wall (assuming Layout type is Edge)
move the cursor over an edge of the object until a preview of the beam is displayed, and then click to add a beam along that edge, or press Ctrl and click to add beams along all edges of the object. Press ENTER to end the command.
add a beam along one or more segments of a column grid (assuming Layout type is Edge)
move the cursor over a segment of the grid until a preview of the beam is displayed, and then click to add a beam along that segment; or press Ctrl and click to add beams along all segments in that grid line; or press Ctrl twice and click to add beams along all segments in the grid. Press ENTER to end the command.
add a beam that spans a slab, roof slab, wall, or column grid cell from edge to edge at an angle of 90 degrees (assuming Layout type is Fill)
move the cursor over the object edge or column grid segment until a preview of the beam is displayed in the desired position perpendicular to the edge/segment, and then click. Press ENTER to end the command.
add a beam that spans a slab, roof slab, wall, or column grid cell from edge to edge at an angle other than 90 degrees (assuming Layout type is Fill)
move the cursor over the object edge or column grid segment until a preview of the beam is displayed, enter a value for the desired angle, press ENTER, and then click. Press ENTER to end the command.
array beams between two structural members (assuming Array is Yes)
move the cursor over one of the structural members until its baseline is displayed, click that member, specify a point on the second member, and press ENTER. New beams are arrayed according to the Layout Method selected on the Properties palette and at an angle determined by the point you specify on the second member. Press ENTER to end the command.
array beams perpendicularly within a slab, roof slab, wall, or one or more cells of a column grid (assuming Array is Yes)
move the cursor over an edge until a preview of the array is displayed, and click. New beams are arrayed perpendicular to the selected edge according to the Layout Method selected on the Properties palette. If you want to add the array to all cells of a column grid, press Ctrl before clicking. Press ENTER to end the command.
array beams at an angle other than 90 degrees within a slab, roof slab, wall, or one or more cells of a column grid (assuming Array is Yes)
move the cursor over an edge until a preview of the array is displayed, enter a value for the desired angle, press ENTER, and then click. New beams are arrayed at the specified angle according to the Layout Method selected on the Properties palette. If you want to add the array to all cells of a column grid, press Ctrl before clicking. Press ENTER to end the command.
Creating a Brace
Use this procedure to add a new brace that has the properties specified in the structural brace tool that you select. The style specified in the tool provides the brace shape, which is extruded along the path you define by specifying a start point and an endpoint.
To specify your own settings when you add a brace, see "Creating a Brace with User-Specified Settings" on page 1349.
1348 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Creating a brace
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural brace tool you want to use, and select the tool.
You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Specify the start point of the brace. 3 Specify an endpoint:
If you want to...
Then...
create a single brace
specify the endpoint of the brace, and press ENTER.
create additional braces
continue to specify brace start points and endpoints, and press ENTER.
Creating a Brace with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a new brace with property settings that you specify. The style specified in the tool provides the brace shape, which is extruded along the path you define by specifying a start point and an endpoint.
Creating a brace
Optionally, offset the brace from its start point or endpoint.
Creating a Brace with User-Specified Settings | 1349
Offsetting a brace
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural brace tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool).
2 On the Properties palette, under General, click Style, and select a structural brace style. 3 Under Bound Spaces, define if this brace can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this brace can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this brace cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this brace will use the bounding settings from the structural member style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
4 If you want the brace to be trimmed to other structural members to which it may be logically connected, select Yes for Trim automatically.
5 Expand Dimensions.
6 Specify offsets:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the brace on its extruded axis at the start point of the brace
enter a value for Start offset. A positive value shortens the brace on its axis, while a negative value lengthens the brace on its axis.
offset the brace on its extruded axis at the endpoint of the brace
enter a value for End offset. A positive value lengthens the brace on its axis, while a negative value shortens the brace on its axis.
7 Enter a value for Roll.
This value specifies the orientation of the brace relative to its extruded axis in terms of degrees of roll. A positive value rolls the brace counterclockwise when viewed from its end to its start.
8 Specify the brace justification, which positions the brace shape in relation to its extruded axis when you draw the brace:
If you want to...
Then...
position the axis of the brace along the centroid of the brace shape
select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
1350 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
If you want to...
Then...
position the axis of the brace along one of nine positions on the brace shape
select one of the nine positions for Justify.
NOTE These positions are defined at a roll of zero, viewing the beam from the end to the start.
Justification options for a brace
9 Specify the rise, which is the vertical distance between the start point and endpoint of the brace:
If you want to... specify the rise of the brace before you draw it
Then...
select No for Specify rise on screen. For Method, select either Angle, Distance, or Height. If you select Angle, enter a value for Distance along first member (measured from the point where the two members are connected to the point on the first member where you want the brace to start) and a value for Angle from first member. If you select Distance, enter values for both Distance along first member and Distance along second member. If you select Height, enter a value for Rise.
specify the rise of the brace by specifying a 3D endpoint select Yes for Specify Rise on Screen. for the end of the brace.
TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
10 In the drawing area, specify the start point of the brace.
Creating a Brace with User-Specified Settings | 1351
11 Specify an endpoint for the brace: If you entered a value for Rise in step 8, then the endpoint of the brace is the X and Y coordinates of the endpoint that you selected. The Z coordinate equals the Z coordinate of the start point plus the value for the rise. If you selected Specify rise on screen in step 8, the endpoint of the brace is the 3D point that you selected.
12 Continue adding braces, and press ENTER.
Creating a Freestanding Column
Use this procedure to add a new freestanding column that has the property settings specified in the structural column tool that you select. The style specified in the tool provides the column shape. When you specify an insert point for the column, the shape is extruded in a positive direction along the current UCS Z-axis to a height determined by the Start offset, End offset, and Logical length properties of the tool. To specify settings when you add a column, see "Creating a Freestanding Column with User-Specified Settings" on page 1352. Creating a column
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural column tool you want to use, and select the tool. You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Specify the insert point for the column. 3 If the Properties palette value for Specify roll on screen is Yes, move the cursor to roll the column around
its extruded axis as desired, and then click; or enter a value for the roll angle, and press ENTER. A positive value rolls the column counterclockwise around its extruded axis when viewed from its end (top) to its start (bottom). 4 Specify an insert point for another column, or press ENTER to end the command.
Creating a Freestanding Column with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create a new freestanding column with property settings that you specify. The style specified in the tool provides the column shape. When you specify an insert point for the column, the shape is extruded in a positive direction along the current UCS Z-axis to a height determined by the Start offset, End offset, and Logical length properties you specify.
1352 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Creating a free-standing column
Optionally, offset the column from its start point or endpoint. Offsetting a column
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural column tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool).
2 On the Properties palette, under General, click Style, and select a structural column style. 3 Under Bound Spaces, define if this column can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this column can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this column cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this column will use the bounding settings from the structural member style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
4 If you want the endpoints of the new column to be trimmed to any other structural members to which they are logically connected, select Yes for Trim automatically.
5 Expand Dimensions.
6 Specify offsets
If you want to...
offset the column on its extruded axis at the start point of the column
Then...
enter a value for Start offset. A positive value shortens the column on its axis, while a negative value lengthens the column on its axis.
offset the column on its extruded axis at the endpoint of the enter a value for End offset. A negative value lengthens the
column
column on its axis, while a positive value shortens the column
on its axis.
Creating a Freestanding Column with User-Specified Settings | 1353
: 7 Enter a value for Logical length.
The logical length of the column is the length (height) of the column before offsets are applied.
8 Select Yes or No for Specify roll on screen:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the roll of the column before you insert it
select No for Specify Roll on Screen, and enter a value for Roll.
specify the roll of the column when you insert it
select Yes for Specify Roll on Screen, and specify the roll as explained in step 10.
A positive value rolls the column counterclockwise around its extruded axis when viewed from its end (top) to its start (bottom).
9 Specify the column justification, which positions the column shape in relation to its extruded axis when you draw the column:
If you want to...
Then...
position the extruded axis of the column at the centroid of the column shape
select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
position the extruded axis of the column along one of nine positions on the column shape
select one of the nine positions for Justify.
NOTE These positions are defined at a roll of zero, viewing the column from the top to the bottom.
TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
10 In the drawing area, specify the insert point for the column. 11 If you selected Yes for Specify roll on screen, move the cursor to roll the column around its extruded axis
as desired, and then click; or enter a value for degrees of roll, and press ENTER.
12 Specify an insert point for another column, or press ENTER to end the command.
Creating a Grid-Anchored Column
Use this procedure to create a column that is anchored to a grid and has the property settings specified in the structural column tool that you select. The style specified in the tool provides the column shape. When you specify an insert point on the grid, the shape is extruded in a positive direction along the current UCS Z-axis to a height determined by the Start offset, End offset, and Logical length properties of the tool. To specify your own settings when you anchor a column to a grid, see "Creating a Grid-Anchored Column with User-Specified Settings" on page 1355. To create a column grid with pre-anchored columns, see "Creating a Column Grid" on page 1455.
1354 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Creating a column grid with specified column shapes
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural column tool you want to use, and select the tool. You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Select the grid. 3 Specify the insert point for the column on the grid. 4 Continue adding columns to the grid, and press ENTER.
IMPORTANT Columns grids that have numerous columns attached to them can take longer than expected to display on screen. This is because structural members carry additional information that may be used for structural analysis.
Creating a Grid-Anchored Column with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to anchor a column to a grid as you create it, with property settings that you specify. The style specified in the tool provides the column shape. When you specify an insert point on the grid, the shape is extruded in a positive direction along the current UCS Z-axis to a height determined by the Start offset, End offset, and Logical length properties of the tool. To create a column grid with pre-anchored columns, see "Creating a Column Grid" on page 1455. Add a column to a single node of a column grid
Creating a Grid-Anchored Column with User-Specified Settings | 1355
Add columns to all nodes of a column grid
Add a column to a single point on a column grid
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural column tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool).
2 Select the grid. 3 On the Properties palette, under General, click Style, and select a structural column style. 4 Under Bound Spaces, define if this column can be used as a bounding object for associative spaces.
You can select three options here:
Yes: this column can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this column cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this column will use the bounding settings from the structural member style.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
5 If you want the endpoints of the new column to be trimmed to any other structural members to which they are logically connected, select Yes for Trim automatically.
6 Expand Dimensions.
7 Specify offsets:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the column on its extruded axis at the start point of the column
enter a value for Start offset. A positive value shortens the column on its axis, while a negative value lengthens the column on its axis.
offset the column on its extruded axis at the endpoint of the enter a value for End offset. A negative value lengthens the
column
column on its axis, while a positive value shortens the column
on its axis.
8 Enter a value for Logical length.
1356 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
The logical length of the column is the length (height) of the column before offsets are applied.
9 Select Yes or No for Specify roll on screen:
If you want to... specify the roll of the column before you insert it
Then...
select No for Specify Roll on Screen, and enter a value for Roll.
specify the roll of the column when you insert it
select Yes for Specify Roll on Screen, and specify the roll as explained in step 11.
A positive value rolls the column counterclockwise around its extruded axis when viewed from its end (top) to its start (bottom).
10 Specify the column justification, which positions the column shape in relation to its extruded axis when you draw the column:
If you want to...
Then...
position the axis of the column along the centroid of the column shape
select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
position the axis of the column along one of nine positions select one of the nine positions for Justify. on the column shape
TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
11 Specify the insert point of the column on the grid. 12 If you selected Yes for Specify roll on screen, move the cursor to roll the column around its extruded axis
as desired, and then click; or enter a value for degrees of roll, and press ENTER. 13 Continue adding columns to the grid, and press enter.
NOTE Columns grids that have numerous columns attached to them can take longer than expected to display on screen. This is because structural members carry additional information that may be used for structural analysis.
Creating a Structural Member from Linework
Use this procedure to convert any of the following objects to structural members with structural member tools:
Arcs Lines Open polylines Open polylines with arc segments
NOTE Converting an arc to a structural member is the only method of creating a curved structural member. For more information about curved structural members, see "About Curved Structural Members" on page 1367.
When you use a tool to convert linework to a structural member, the style specified in the tool provides the shape of the member. The linework defines the extrusion path for the shape. You can convert multiple lines to create multiple members, convert curved lines to create curved members, and convert multi-segmented lines to create multi-segmented members.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural member tool you want to use.
Creating a Structural Member from Linework | 1357
(You may have to scroll to display the desired tool). 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework. 3 Select the linework to convert, and press ENTER.
NOTE You cannot convert a closed polyline (a polyline with a start node that coincides with its end node) to a structural member.
A worksheet opens appropriate to the tool you selected.
4 Clear One Member Per Polyline Segment to create a structural member for each segment. 5 Select Erase Layout Geometry to erase the linework, and click OK.
If you created a structural member by converting a polyline, the initial orientation of the structural member is set to the UCS that was current when you drew the polyline. You can change the orientation by adjusting the Roll property of the member.
Editing Structural Members
After you create a structural member, you can change any properties of the member that you specified when you created it and make additional modifications. You can change the start and end offsets of a member, or add or remove them. You can change the length, justification, and location of a member, specifying whether its connections with other structural members are maintained. For a curved structural member, you can change the radius. You can change the geometry of a structural member by trimming it. By changing the structural member type, you can change a brace to beam, or a column to a brace. By changing the style of a structural member, you can change its shape. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing structural members:
You can directly edit structural members using grips for dimensions and other physical characteristics. For grip edit operations where you are changing a dimension or an angle, the Dynamic Input feature lets you enter
a precise value instead of moving a grip. When this feature is active (click DYN on the application status bar), selecting a grip displays a text box in which you can enter the desired value for the associated dimension or angle. For more information, see "Use Dynamic Input" in AutoCAD Help. You can change structural member settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the context menu for a selected structural member.
Using Grips To Edit Structural Members
Refer to the illustrations and steps in this topic to use grips to edit structural members. Editing Structural Member Dimensions
1 Select the structural member. 2 Select the grip for the dimension you want to change.
1358 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Grips for length, start offset, and end offset of a straight beam or brace
Grips for length, start offset, and end offset of a straight column
Grips for start and end angles, radius, and start and end offsets of a curved beam or brace
Grips for start and end angles, radius, and start and end offsets of a curved column
3 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. Changing the Location of a Structural Member
1 Select the structural member.
Using Grips To Edit Structural Members | 1359
Select the Location grip to change the location of the structural member, or the Roll grip to change its roll (the rotation of the member around its extruded axis). Location and roll grips for a straight beam or brace Location and roll grips for a straight column
Location and roll grips for a curved beam or brace
1360 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Location and roll grips for a curved column
In Model view, the Location grip has six edit options you can cycle through by pressing CTRL. For each plane in which you can move the member (XY, YZ, or XZ), you have the option of maintaining or breaking connections with other structural members.
When you choose to maintain connections, all connections are not necessarily maintained for every type of move. Maintenance of connections depends on whether the move is in or out of plane, how the members are connected, and which type of members are involved. Generally, columns take precedence over beams and braces in determining how connected members behave when one is moved. This behavior is summarized in the following table:
If you specify Maintain Then ... Connections when moving ...
a column
other columns, beams, and braces connected to an endpoint of the column will also move, changing length and orientation as necessary to maintain the connection. (This is also true for any other members connected along the length of a member that is endpoint-connected to the column.) Structural members connected along the length of the column will only extend or shorten to remain connected; they will not change orientation unless the column is moved out of plane. For example, if a column is moved in the XY plane, beams or braces connected along its length will stay connected, even though their orientation changes.
a beam or a brace
other beams and braces connected to an endpoint of the beam or brace will also move, changing length and orientation as necessary to maintain the connection. Structural members connected along the length of the beam or brace will only extend or shorten to remain connected; they will not change orientation unless the beam is moved out of plane. For example, if a ridge beam is moved vertically, rafters connected along its length will stay connected, even though their orientation changes.
The default edit mode is to maintain connections for moves along the XY plane. In Plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane, but you still have the option to maintain or break connections.
2 Move the grip until the dimension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value and press ENTER.
If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction.
You can also lock the movement of the structural member along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either of the dimension directions in the current edit mode and then press TAB, the movement of the structural member is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the structural member is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
3 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Using Grips To Edit Structural Members | 1361
NOTE When you shift-select the Location grips of end-connected beams, the common endpoint moves approximately twice as far as the grip you move. In the example shown below, if you shift-select the two vertical beams in the structure on the left, and then move a grip toward the right, the result is a configuration like the one at the top right. To get a configuration like the one at the bottom right, you would select all five beams using a crossing selection or a crossing polygon, and then use the Stretch command. (For more information, see "STRETCH Command" and "SELECT Command" in AutoCAD Help.) Beams may also move twice as far as you might expect when they are attached to columns on a column grid, and the grid, columns, and beams are all selected. If you select and move only the grid, the columns and beams will move with it, maintaining their same relative positions. For instructions on selecting one object when other objects are superimposed on it, see "Select Objects Individually" in AutoCAD Help.
Changing the Structural Member Length
Use this procedure to change the length of a structural member. You can also change the structural member length on the Properties palette.
1 Select the structural member. 2 Select a Lengthen grip, move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once.
1362 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Changing the length of a beam structural member with grips
After selecting a grip, you can also enter a value to increase or decrease the length of the structural member.
Changing the Structural Member Start and End Offsets
Use this procedure to offset a structural member from the start point or endpoint of its path. You can remove or change existing offsets, or add new offsets to the start point or endpoint of a structural member. You can also change the structural member start and end offsets on the Properties palette.
1 Select the structural member. 2 Select a Start Offset grip, move the grip until the start offset value you want is displayed, and click once.
A positive start offset value shortens the member on its axis (path), while a negative start offset value lengthens the member on its axis.
Changing the Structural Member Start and End Offsets | 1363
Change the end offset of a beam structural member with grips
3 Select an End Offset grip, move the grip until the end offset value you want is displayed, and click once. A positive end offset lengthens the member on its axis, while a negative end offset shortens the member on its axis. After selecting a grip, you can also enter a value to increase or decrease the start or end offset of the structural member.
Changing the Structural Member Start Point and Endpoint
Use this procedure to change a structural member start point or endpoint. You can also change the structural member start and endpoints on the Properties palette.
1 Select the structural member. 2 Select a Start or End grip, move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once.
Moving the Start grip in the positive direction shortens the member on its axis (path), while moving the Start grip in the negative direction lengthens the member on its axis. Moving the End grip in the positive direction lengthens the member on its axis (path), while moving the End grip in the negative direction shortens the member on its axis.
1364 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Change the end of a beam structural member with grips
3 Select a Start or End grip, move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once. After selecting a grip, you can also enter a value to increase or decrease the length of the structural member.
Changing the Structural Member Roll
Use this procedure to change the orientation of a structural member relative to its extruded axis by specifying a number of degrees to roll it. A positive value rolls the member counterclockwise when viewed from its end to its start.
1 Select the structural member. 2 Select the Roll grip, move it until the desired number of degrees is displayed, and click once; or enter a
value, and press ENTER. A positive value rolls the member about its axis in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from its end to its start.
Changing the Structural Member Roll | 1365
Changing beam orientation with the Roll grip
Changing the Radius of a Curved Structural Member
Use this procedure to change the radius of a curved structural member. You can also change the structural member radius on the Properties palette. For more information about curved structural members, see "About Curved Structural Members" on page 1367.
1 Select the structural member. 2 Select a Curve Radius grip, move the grip until the radius value you want is displayed, and click once.
Change the curve radius of a curved beam structural member with grips
1366 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
About Curved Structural Members
The smoothness (tessellation) of curved edges is controlled by the FACETDEV variable. This variable sets the number of facets to display on curved AEC objects. The default value is 1/2'' for drawings created from imperial templates and is 12.7 mm for drawings created from metric templates. The number you specify for facet deviation defines the maximum distance from the chord to the arc--the chord being an edge that is created from faceting the curve to the true mathematical arc. The facet deviation has a range of greater than zero (0) and no upper limit. The minimum number of facets is 8. For example, if you create a cylinder mass element to have a 1' radius, and specify 1' for FACETDEV, the cylinder has 8 faces. The plan representation of individual curved components of columns uses the true curved representation of the member shapes. The above and below cut components will always be faceted. The maximum number of facets is controlled by the FACETMAX variable. This variable can be set from 100 to 10,000. Note that using a small value for FACETDEV and a large value for FACETMAX will adversely affect drawing performance. To specify the facet deviation values for the current drawing, see "Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets" on page 116. The settings apply to all curved objects in the drawing, including curved structural members.
Changing the Structural Member Justification
Use this procedure to change the justification of a structural member. Justification positions the shape of a structural member in relation to its extruded axis. Changing the justification of an existing member moves the member and can affect how the member relates to other objects, such as how a column is positioned in relation to a column grid when it is anchored to the grid. Justification options for a beam
You can also specify the justification of structural members with multiple shapes and segments. For more information about these members, see "Creating Custom Structural Members" on page 1391.
1 Select the structural member to change, and double-click it. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions.
About Curved Structural Members | 1367
3 Select a setting for Justification:
If you want to... position the axis of the member along the centroid of the member shape
Then... select Baseline for Justify.
NOTE This applies to members created with styles from the Structural Member Catalog only.
position the axis of the member along one of nine positions select one of the nine positions for Justify. on the member shape
4 To specify the justification of members with multiple shapes and segments created with this tool, select a setting for Justify using overall extents:
If you want to...
Then...
justify the member based on the largest cross-sectional extent select Yes. The justification is applied ONLY to the lowest
of the member's lowest priority shapes
priority shape definitions, and is calculated based on the node
(vertex) of the member with the greatest cross section.
justify the member at each node, based on all shapes.
select No. The justification is calculated based on the crosssectional extents at each node, and is applied to all the shapes without regard to priority.
Changing the Structural Member Type
Use this procedure to change the type of one or more structural members. Because beams, braces, and columns are sub-types of a single structural member object, you can change a beam to a brace, a column to beam, or a brace to a beam.
1 Select the structural members to change, and double-click one of them.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General.
3 Select a setting for Member type: Beam, Brace, or Column.
Trimming Structural Members
You can use trim planes to trim structural members in your drawings. A trim plane is a cutting plane that trims a structural member to a location that you define, either on the structural member itself, or in relation to another member, an architectural object of another type, or linework.
1368 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Trimming a structural member with a trim plane
You can use trim planes to clean up joints between multiple structural members. For example, use multiple trim planes to angle both ends of a brace in a diagonally braced frame. NOTE Because trim planes are infinite planes, you cannot use them to notch, cope, or cut holes in structural members. You can add one or more trim planes to a structural member, change trim planes, and remove trim planes from a structural member to restore it to its original dimensions. In addition to defining trim planes directly on structural members (using the Trim Planes worksheet available from the Properties palette), you can also generate trim planes for structural members based on a plane defined (or implied) by another structural member, an architectural object of another type, or linework. Adding a Trim Plane to a Structural Member You can add any number of trim planes to a structural member. When you add a trim plane to one or more structural members, you define the position of the trim plane relative to the structural member that you are trimming. When defining trim planes, you can:
Define the position of the trim plane relative to the start or end of the extruded axis of the member. Offset the trim plane in the X direction to move the origin of the trim plane along the extruded axis of the member.
Trimming Structural Members | 1369
Offsetting a trim plane in the X direction
Offset the trim plane in the Y and Z directions to move the origin of the trim plane perpendicular to the extruded axis of the member in the Y and/or Z direction.
Rotate the trim plane around its Y axis to specify a cutting plane angle.
1370 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Rotating a trim plane about its Y axis Rotate the trim plane around its Z axis to specify a cutting plane angle.
Trimming Structural Members | 1371
Rotating a trim plane about its Z axis
1 Select the structural member you want to change, and double-click. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced. 3 Click the setting for Trim planes.
4 Click
.
5 Specify settings to position the trim plane:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the trim plane from the start point or endpoint of the select Start or End under Offset. member
offset the trim plane in the X direction along the extruded axis of the member
enter an X value for Offset.
offset the trim plane in the Y and Z directions to position the enter Y and Z values for Offset. trim plane perpendicular to the extruded axis of the member
rotate the trim plane around its Y or Z axis
enter Y and Z values for Rotation.
6 To copy a trim plane, select the trim plane, and click Copy. 7 Continue adding trim planes, and click OK.
Adding a Trim Plane Based on Another Object or Linework Use this procedure to generate trim planes for one or more structural members based on a plane defined (or implied) by another structural member, an architectural object of another type, linework, or any two points you specify. The edge, face, or line that defines the trim plane does not have to intersect the members selected for trimming. The trim
1372 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
plane is projected perpendicular to the current UCS XY plane. Selected members are extended or trimmed to the trim plane, depending on whether they intersect it.
Extending a structural member to another structural member
1 Select the structural member(s) you want to extend or trim. 2 Right-click, and click Trim Planes Add Trim Plane. 3 Define the trim plane:
If you want to...
Then...
define a trim plane independent of any existing objects
press ENTER, specify the start point and endpoint of the trim plane, and then click the side on which you want to remove members.
use the edge or face of an existing object or linework as the trim plane
select the object or linework, and then click the side on which you want members removed. If you want to trim to the face of an object rather than its edge, press Ctrl before selecting the object.
Mitering Structural Members with Trim Planes Use this procedure to generate trim planes that produce a mitered joint between two structural members that are connected at their endpoints.
Mitering two structural members with coincident endpoints
1 Select one of the structural member(s) you want to miter. 2 Right-click, and click Trim Planes Miter. 3 Select the other structural member.
Changing a Structural Member Trim Plane After you add one or more trim planes to a structural member, you can change the orientation of the trim planes. You can also grip-edit trim planes to move and rotate them.
1 Select the structural member you want to change, and double-click. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced.
Trimming Structural Members | 1373
3 Click the setting for Trim planes. 4 Change any of the trim plane settings:
If you want to...
Then...
change the start or end offset of the trim plane
select Start or End under Offset.
change the trim plane offset in the X direction along the extruded axis of the member
change the X value for Offset.
change the trim plane offset in the Y and Z directions to
change the Y and Z values for Offset.
position the trim plane perpendicular to the extruded axis of
the member
change the rotation of the trim plane around the Y or Z axis change Y and Z values for Rotation.
NOTE If you rotate a trim plane between 90 and 270 degrees, the opposite end of the structural member is completely removed.
5 Click OK.
Removing a Trim Plane from a Structural Member You can remove a trim plane from a structural member. When you remove all trim planes from a structural member, the structural member is restored to its original dimensions.
1 Select the structural member you want to change, and double-click. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced. 3 Click the setting for Trim planes. 4 Select the trim plane that you want to remove. 5 Click Remove. 6 Click OK.
Changing the Style of a Structural Member
Use this procedure to select a different structural member style for one or more structural members. The style of a structural member provides its shape, so changing the style of a member changes its shape.
1 Select the structural members to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a different style.
Applying Tool Properties to a Structural Member
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a structural member tool to one or more members of the same tool type (beam, brace, or column) in a drawing. The properties include any settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to <Beam, Brace, or Column>. 3 Select the structural members that coincide with the tool, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the structural member on the Properties palette, if needed.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Structural Member
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach hyperlinks and reference files to a structural member. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a structural member.
1 Double-click the structural member.
1374 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
2 In the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 Click the setting for Hyperlink. 4 Specify the link, and click OK. 5 Click the setting for Notes. 6 Enter the note, and click OK. 7 Click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click
, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
enter your comments under Description for the document you are describing.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start the application needed to edit it.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK.
Working with Structural Member Body Modifiers
Body modifiers use the three-dimensional (3D) geometry of an object, such as a mass element or a mass group, to add to or subtract from a structural member. You can also use a body modifier to replace a structural member.
After you create a body modifier from an object, you can delete the original object. However, if you have created a complex object, such as a mass group comprising many mass elements, you may want to retain the object in the drawing until you are sure you have the results you want for the structural member.
Adding a Body Modifier to a Structural Member
Use this procedure to create a body modifier and add it to a structural member.
You can create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier.
The following illustration shows you how to use an angle as a body modifier to add to a beam.
Adding a body modifier to a structural member
1 Place the object in the location where you want to add the body modifier to the structural member. 2 Select the structural member you want to change with the body modifier, right-click, and click Body
Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to add to the structural member.
Working with Structural Member Body Modifiers | 1375
4 In the Add body Modifier dialog box, select Additive for Operation.
5 Enter a description for the body modifier. 6 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep
the object in the drawing. 7 Click OK.
Subtracting a Body Modifier from a Structural Member
Use this procedure to create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier and subtract it from a structural member. You can create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. The following illustration shows you how to use a box mass element as a body modifier to cope a beam. Subtracting a body modifier from a structural member
1 Place the object in the location where you want to subtract the body modifier from the structural member. 2 Select the structural member you want to change with the body modifier, right-click, and click Body
Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to subtract from the structural member. 4 In the Add body Modifier dialog box, select Subtractive for Operation.
5 Enter a description for the body modifier. 6 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep
the object in the drawing. 7 Click OK.
1376 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Replacing a Structural Member with a Body Modifier
Use this procedure to create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier and replace a structural member with the modifier. You can create a three-dimensional (3D) body modifier from a mass element, a mass group, or any other AEC object with mass. You can also create body modifiers from ACIS solids or blocks that form 3D bodies. You must place the object in the location you want in the drawing before defining the object as a body modifier. The following illustration shows you how to use a mass group as a body modifier to replace a beam. Replacing a structural member with a body modifier
1 Place the object in the location where you want to replace the structural member with the body modifier. 2 Select the structural member you want to change with the body modifier, right-click, and click Body
Modifiers Add. 3 Select the object to replace the structural member. 4 In the Add body Modifier dialog box, select Replace for Operation.
5 Enter a description for the body modifier. 6 Select Erase Selected Object(s) if you do not want to keep the original object, or clear this option to keep
the object in the drawing. 7 Click OK.
Editing the Geometry of a Body Modifier
Use this procedure to edit the shape of a body modifier that is attached to a structural member. You can edit the body using grips to edit faces, using Boolean commands to add or remove other objects from the body modifier, and other editing commands to change its shape.
1 Select the structural member that has the body modifier you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Edit in Place. A temporary mass element is created for you to edit the geometry of the body modifier. If the wall contains multiple body modifiers, a mass element is created for each body modifier. If object was not originally a mass element (for example, if you used a slab as a body modifier), the object becomes a temporary Free Form mass element with faces that you can edit.
Replacing a Structural Member with a Body Modifier | 1377
2 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the shortcut menu, you may need to select a profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the shortcut menu, select a profile, and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
Edit the body modifier:
If you want to ...
Then ...
change the shape of a body modifier that is a Free Form mass select the body modifier. Select a Face grip to activate edge
element
grips for the face. Move the grips to the desired locations.
Continue editing other faces in the same manner.
change the shape of a body modifier that is a conventional mass element
select the body modifier. Select grips and move them to change the shape of the body modifier. The grips that are available depend on the type of mass element used as a body modifier and the current view direction.
add an object to a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Union. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
subtract an object from a body modifier
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Subtract. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
create a body modifier that is the intersection of the original body modifier with another object
place the object in the location where it is needed. Select the body modifier, right-click, and click Boolean Intersect. Select the object, and press ENTER. Enter y (Yes) to keep the object in the drawing, or press ENTER to erase it.
trim a body modifier
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Trim. Specify the points that define the trim plane, and select the side of the body modifier to be trimmed. The trimmed body modifier is converted to a Free Form mass element.
divide the face of a body modifier into two faces
select the body modifier, right-click, and click Split Face. Specify the points that define the edge created by splitting the faces.
join two faces that are on the same plane into a single face select the body modifier, right-click, and click Join Faces. Select the edge that separates the coplanar faces.
remove a body modifier
select the object that forms the body modifier, and press DELETE.
3 Save or discard the changes: If you want to ... restore the body modifier to its original shape
save the changes to the body modifier
Then ...
select the body modifier, and click
.
select the body modifier, and click
. The body modifier
uses the edited mass element to define its geometry.
Managing Body Modifiers
Use this procedure to edit or remove three-dimensional (3D) body modifiers from a structural member. You can select a different operation, or you can enter or edit the descriptions of body modifiers.
1378 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
NOTE To remove a body modifier from a structural member and restore the modifier as a mass element that you can edit or apply to other structural members, see "Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element" on page 1379.
1 Double-click the structural member you want to change. 2 Expand Advanced, and expand Worksheets. 3 Click the setting for Body modifiers. 4 Select a body modifier, and change its settings:
If you want to ... apply the body modifier to a different structural member
Then ... select a different structural member.
change the operation used to apply the body modifier to the structural member
select a different operation for Operation: Select Additive to add the body modifier to the structural member
Select Subtract to subtract the shape of the body modifier from the structural member
Select Replace to replace the structural member with the body modifier.
delete the body modifier from the structural member enter a description of the body modifier
select the body modifier, and click . click Description, enter text, and press ENTER.
5 Click OK.
Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element
Use this procedure to remove a body modifier from a structural member and add it to the drawing as a mass element. Restoring a body modifier to a mass element enables you to modify the shape as a mass element and then add it to the structural member again as a body modifier. You can also restore the body modifier to a mass element while leaving the body modifier still applied to the structural member. This is useful if you want to create other structural members with the same shape.
If the object used to create the body modifier was a conventional mass element, it is restored to that mass element. For example, a cylinder mass element is restored as a cylinder mass element. However, if the body modifier was created from another object, such as a slab, or was edited using Boolean operations or face editing commands, the body modifier is restored as a Free Form mass element.
1 Select the structural member you want to change, right-click, and click Body Modifiers Restore.
2 NOTE This procedure restores all body modifiers attached to a structural member.
Create mass elements from the body modifiers:
If you want to ...
Then ...
create mass elements from the body modifiers while keeping press ENTER. the body modifiers attached to the structural member
remove all body modifiers from the structural member, and enter y (Yes), and press ENTER. create mass elements from their shapes
Working with Structural Member Interference Conditions
You can modify the geometry of a Structural Member by using another object to create an interference condition within the structural member. For example, you can create a hole in a structural member. Unlike the object used to add a hole, which has no connection to the structural member and can be erased after the hole is added, the object used to create
Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element | 1379
an interference condition remains partially or wholly embedded in the structural member, cutting out and replacing a part of its geometry. All interference conditions are subtractive in this sense, but the option you use to create the interference condition (Add or Subtract) determines whether the outline of the interference condition is included or excluded from the shrink wrap outline of the structural member in plan view.
Creating Structural Member Interference Conditions
Use the following procedure to create structural member interference conditions. Typically, after creating interference conditions for a structural member, you freeze the layer where the interfering objects are placed. If you move or edit the objects, the structural member updates accordingly.
NOTE Objects used as interference conditions are not included for the Area in the LIST command or in a Schedule Query result.
To create interference conditions for a structural member:
1 Create one or more objects in the actual location where you want the interference condition positioned in relation to the structural member.
2 Select the structural member. 3 Select an interference condition option:
If you want to...
include the interference condition within the shrink wrap outline in plan view
Then... right-click, and click Interference Condition Add.
exclude the interference condition from the shrink wrap outline in plan view
right-click, and click Interference Condition Subtract.
4 Select the objects to use as interference conditions, and press ENTER.
1380 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
NOTE AEC objects from externally referenced (xref) files can be added to a structural member as interference conditions so long as the following conditions are met:
The object is a three-dimensional (3D) body The xref is found The xref is read/write The xref is not locked or opened by another user The xref is loaded
Removing Structural Member Interference Conditions
Use this procedure to remove an interference condition from a structural member. Note that only the interference condition is removed; the object from which the interference condition was created remains in the drawing.
1 Select the structural member, right-click, and click Interference Condition Remove. 2 Select the objects to remove as interference conditions, and press ENTER.
NOTE You can also remove interference conditions through the Interference Conditions worksheet. For more information, see "Editing Structural Member Interference Conditions" on page 1381.
Editing Structural Member Interference Conditions
Objects applied as interference conditions in structural members be edited like any other objects, using grips, context menu options, or the Properties palette. If you move or edit the objects, the structural member updates accordingly. You can also change the setting that determines whether an interference condition is added to or subtracted from the shrink wrap outline of the structural member in plan view by using the following procedure.
1 Select the structural member, right-click, and click Properties. 2 On the Properties palette, under Advanced, click the value for Interferences.
3 On the Interference Conditions worksheet, click the Shrinkwrap Effect value you want to change, and select a different value from the pull-down menu.
4 Click OK.
NOTE You can also use this worksheet to remove an interference condition by right-clicking its Object or Type value and then clicking Remove. The alternate method is to use the context menu of the structural member, as explained under "Removing Slab/Roof Slab Interference Conditions" on page 1299. When you remove an interference condition, you remove the association between the structural member and the object that was used to create the interference condition. The object itself is not removed from the drawing.
Structural Member Styles
A structural member style is a group of properties assigned to a structural member that determines the shape and other characteristics of the structural member. You can use structural member styles to represent standard structural member
Removing Structural Member Interference Conditions | 1381
types for specific jobs and drawings or for office standards. When you create or modify a structural member style, the structural members using the style have the settings and characteristics of the style.
Usually you create structural member styles from the Structural Member Catalog or with the Structural Member wizard and drag them from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can also create your own structural member styles for custom structural members that you cannot create from the catalog or with the wizard. For more information, see "Creating Custom Structural Members" on page 1391.
Creating Tools from Structural Member Styles
You can create a structural member tool from any structural member style. Usually, you want to create structural members tools from styles that you create in the Structural Member Catalog or with the Structural Member Style wizard. However, you can also create a structural member tool from a style that you create in the Style Manager. You can save the style to a drawing file and create a structural member tool with the style. You can then specify default settings for any structural member created with that tool. For more information, see "Creating Structural Member Tools" on page 1335.
Managing Structural Member Styles
To create, edit, copy, or purge structural member styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Structural Member Style in the Style Manager
Use this procedure to create a structural member style in the Style Manager. You can create a style using default style properties, by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Structural Member Styles.
3 Create a structural member style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Structural Member Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the structural member style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new structural member style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new structural member style:
If you want to... enter a description of the style
Then... click the General tab, and enter a description.
change the design rules of the style to create a custom structural member
see "Creating Custom Structural Members" on page 1391.
specify materials for the components of the style
see "Specifying the Materials of a Structural Member Style" on page 1383.
specify hatching, cut plane properties, and other display properties of the style
see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style" on page 1384.
add classifications to a structural member style
see "Specifying Classifications for a Structural Member Style" on page 1390.
add notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Structural Member Style" on page 1390.
6 Click OK.
1382 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
7 If you want to assign the style to a structural member tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette.
You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating Structural Member Tools" on page 1335.
8 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Structural Member Style
A structural member consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component. When you assign materials to a structural member style, you assign one material to each physical component of the structural member. You assign materials to components in each display representation where you want the materials to be used.
If you want to use the display properties of the structural member style, instead of using material display properties, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the structural member style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in three dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
Structural Member Materials and Display Components
The following table identifies the material component that corresponds to each structural member component:
Structural Member Component Elevation, Elevation High Detail Visible Comp 1-10 Model, Model High Detail, Model Low Detail Component 1 - 10 Plan, Plan Low Detail, Plan High Detail, Plan Presentation, Plan Screened Visible Comp 1-10 Hatch 1 - 20 Reflected, Reflected Screened Visible Comp 1-10
Material Component Plan Linework 3D Body
Plan Linework Plan Hatch Plan Linework
Assigning Materials to a Structural Member Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to the individual components of a structural member style. When you assign a material to a structural member component, the component uses the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the structural member. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, all structural member components are physical components that you can assign materials. The connection marker and axis are symbols, and you cannot assign materials to them.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a structural member component, you can change the display properties of the structural member style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style" on page 1384.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
Specifying the Materials of a Structural Member Style | 1383
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
9 Click the Materials tab. 10 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Although you can edit a material definition from this dialog box, any changes you make to the material definition apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
11 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style
In most cases, you can assign materials to structural member components so that the appearance of structural members that belong to the same style is consistent throughout a drawing and with other structural members and objects that use the same materials.
If a component cannot be assigned a material, or if you do not want to use materials but still want consistency among structural members of the same style, you can specify the display properties of the structural member components in the structural member style:
Layer, color, and linetype of structural member components
Hatching used with each component
Cut plane height and the display of components relative to the cut plane
Other specific structural member display information, such as whether custom blocks are added to the display of the structural member
About Structural Member Display Representations Structural member geometry is created by a shape contained in the style of the structural member that is extruded along the axis of the member. Each shape can have different levels of detail in its geometry, allowing different displays of the structural member that the shape is defining. If you look at the display representations of a structural member, you see that there may be more than one of the same representation. Each representation displays the structural shape in a different level of detail.
For example, you can use the Plan, Plan High Detail, and Plan Low Detail structural member representations to display a plan view of a structural member.
1384 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Displaying a structural member with the Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, and Plan display representations
The Plan Low Detail display representation displays the member with simple lines and arcs. You can use this display representation to create a top view framing plan where you want a single line representation of a column. The Plan Low Detail display representation includes two display components, Beam Sketch and Brace Sketch. You can change the display properties of these components, such as layer, color, and linetype, to differentiate the display of beams and braces. On the Other tab of the style override dialog box for this display representation, you can also add offsets between members to display them as you typically would in a top view framing plan. Note that the Use Member Offsets check box applies only to the start and end offsets. The Offset value below the check box applies only to structural braces, and allows you to offset them horizontally so that they are visible even when positioned directly underneath a beam.
The Plan and Plan High Detail display representations display the previous column using closed polylines. Both representations display the column geometry, but the Plan High Detail representation is more detailed, including fillets in the column display. Use the Plan representation to improve performance while modeling, and the Plan High Detail representation to display an added level of detail for detail drawings.
The following table lists the structural member display representations and their uses:
Use this display representation... Elevation Elevation High Detail Logical
Model Model High Detail Plan
Plan High Detail
To...
display an elevation view of a structural member with simplified geometry for better performance when modeling.
display an elevation view of a structural member in full detail.
display the extruded axis of a structural member and connections between members. Connections are automatically established between members when they touch endpoint to endpoint or endpoint to a point on the extruded axis of another member.
display a 3D structural member with simplified geometry for better performance when modeling.
display a 3D structural member in full detail for large scale details.
display a 2D structural member in less detail than the Plan High Detail representation to improve performance. Members display as closed polylines, rather than lines and arcs as in the Plan Low Detail representation.
display a 2D structural member in full detail.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style | 1385
Use this display representation... Plan Low Detail
Plan Presentation Plan Screened
Reflected Reflected Screened
To...
display a 2D structural member with simple lines and arcs to create a top view framing plan. Includes a Beam Sketch and Brace Sketch display component to differentiate beams and braces in plan view.
display a 2D structural member with solid hatching (poche) for plan view presentation drawings.
display a 2D structural member in the screened portion of a screened floor plan, with components and hatching visibly lighter than some other objects.
display a 2D structural member in a reflected ceiling plan.
display a 2D structural member in the screened portion of a screened reflected ceiling plan with components and hatching visibly lighter than some other objects.
Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a Structural Member Style Use this procedure to change the following display properties of the components of a structural member style:
Visibility (component is on or off) By material (material assigned to the display component determines its display properties) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE If a material assignment determines the display properties of components in the structural member style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material. You can also override the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Assigning Materials to a Structural Member Style" on page 1383.
NOTE For multi-component structural members, hidden lines are calculated one component at a time.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the structural member style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Structural Member Style Use this procedure to specify the hatching of the components of a structural member style. Structural member hatching is displayed only in display representations, such as Plan, that are used in the Top view (plan view) of a drawing.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the structural member style that you want to change.
1386 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Select a component, and click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching for the component:
If you want to...
Then...
select a hatching pattern that is available in the software
select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
select a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
Then...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
14 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Cut Plane Elevation of a Structural Member Style Use this procedure to specify the cut plane elevation of a structural member style. The cut plane settings you specify in the structural member style override the cut plane settings in any display configuration applied to a viewport.
NOTE If the cut plane does not intersect the structural member, all visible and hidden components display. If the cut plane does intersect the member, only the cross section of the components of the structural member displays. These are the actual member shapes unless you select Do True Cut.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the structural member style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Cut Plane tab. 8 Select Override Display Configuration Cut Plane. 9 Enter a value for Cut Plane Elevation.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style | 1387
10 Click OK twice.
Using Custom Blocks to Add Graphics to a Structural Member Style You can add custom blocks to the display of a structural member as a component in a display representation. For example, you can add stiffener plates to beams as a custom blocks or add clip angles to members as a custom blocks. Adding striffener plates to a beam
Custom blocks can be either 2D or 3D. When you add a custom block, you can specify several rules for positioning and scaling the new component. Each custom block also appears in the display properties component list so that you can control its layer, color, and linetype. For more information, see "Adding Custom Blocks as a Display Component in a Structural Member Style" on page 1388. Be sure to set the properties of the objects used to create your custom blocks to ByBlock. Otherwise, you cannot control these objects through the display properties. For more information about ByBlock, see "Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
To change these display properties for all structural members of the same structural member style, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style" on page 1384. Adding Custom Blocks as a Display Component in a Structural Member Style Use this procedure to add or edit custom block components in the display representation of a structural member style.
1 Create a 2D or 3D block for the component that you want to add to the structural member. Create the block in the same plane as the structural member that you use to represent structural member. For more information about custom blocks, see "Using Custom Blocks to Add Graphics to a Structural Member Style" on page 1388.
2 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 3 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 4 Select the structural member style that you want to change. 5 Click the Display Properties tab.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation. 6 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
7 If necessary, click . 8 Click the Other tab. 9 Under Custom Block Display, click Add. 10 Click Select Block and select the block you created. 11 Select a setting for Position Along (x) to position the block in a location along the X-axis of the member. 12 Specify an insertion offset of the block in the X, Y, and Z directions.
1388 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
13 Specify whether you want repeat the block display along the X-axis of the member:
If you want to...
Then...
repeat the display of the block along the X-axis of the member select Repeat Block Display.
offset the repeated blocks from the start or endpoint of the enter values for Start Offset and End Offset. member
specify the space between the repeated blocks
enter a value for space between.
increase the spacing between repeated blocks so the insertion select Fit, and select Space Evenly. point of the last block is at the end offset distance from the end of the member
scale the block so the extents of all the blocks fit between the select Fit, and select Scale to Fit. start and end offset distances
14 Specify whether to mirror the block in the X,Y, or Z direction:
If you want to...
Then...
create a mirror of the block in the X direction
select Mirror X.
create a mirror of the block in the Y direction
select Mirror Y.
create a mirror of the block in the Z direction
select Mirror Z.
15 Click OK twice.
Turning Off Custom Blocks in a Structural Member Style Use this procedure to turn off the display of custom blocks without removing them from the structural member style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the structural member style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation. 5 Select the display representation where you want to turn off custom blocks, and select Object Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 Under Custom Block Display, select Disable Custom Blocks. 9 Click OK twice.
Removing Custom Blocks from a Structural Member Style Use this procedure to remove custom blocks from the display of a structural member.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the structural member style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation. 5 Select the display representation where you want to turn off custom blocks, and select Object Override.
6 If necessary, click .
Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style | 1389
7 Click the Other tab. 8 Under Custom Block Display, select the block and click Remove. 9 Click OK twice.
Specifying Classifications for a Structural Member Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a structural member style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to structural member styles. 5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current structural member style. 6 Click OK.
Defining a Structural Member Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a structural member style that can bound associative spaces. When a structural member style is set as bounding, by default all beams, braces, and columns that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the structural member style in an individual beam, brace, or column, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Structural Member Styles. 3 Select a structural member style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the check box for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Structural Member Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a structural member style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a structural member style.
1 Open a tool palette that has a structural member tool. 2 Right-click a structural member tool, and click Structural Member Styles. 3 Select the structural member style you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the structural member style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Text Notes tab, and enter the note.
1390 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
Creating Custom Structural Members
You can specify design rules within a structural member style to create a custom structural member. The design rules allow you to specify one or more shapes to extrude along the path (axis) of a structural member. You can assign and position a start and end shape for each segment of a structural member.
Creating Single-Segmented Custom Structural Members
A single-segment member can start and end with the same shape, or you can specify different start and end shapes. For example, you can create a tapered column by assigning different start and end shapes to a single-segment column.
Creating a tapered column
You can also assign different shapes to the same single-segment member by adding a component to the member. By adding a component in the design rules and assigning different shapes to the same segment, you can create a structural member with overlapping shapes. For example, you can create a concrete encased steel column by adding a component with a steel column shape to a concrete column.
Creating Custom Structural Members | 1391
Creating a composite steel and concrete column
Creating Multi-Segmented Custom Structural Members For multi-segmented structural members, you can assign different shapes to each segment of the member as components of the member. A series of nodes (starting at 0 at the start point of the member) correspond to each vertex of the member path. By assigning different shapes to segments between nodes on the member path, you can create a structural member that transforms from one shape to different shapes along the member path. For example, you can use this method to create a rigid frame.
Creating the rigid frame
Creating Custom Shapes for Structural Members When you create custom structural members, you can use the shapes contained in styles that you create from the Structural Member Catalog or Structural Member Style wizard, or you can create your own custom shapes. When you create a custom shape, you can only add it to a structural members in the design rules of the structural member style. Understanding the Design Rules of a Structural Member Use this procedure to access and understand the options in the design rules of a structural member.
1 Select a structural member, right-click, and click Edit Member Style. 2 Click Design Rules. 3 On the Design Rules tab, click Show Details.
1392 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
You can use the following options in the design rules to create custom members:
This option... Component
Allows you to...
add multiple components to a structural member. Each component includes a name and can include a start and end shape and a priority. You can remove and copy the components of a structural member.
Start Shape and End Shape
select a shape and a set of parameters to the start and end of a structural member component. The component shapes can be the same shape or a different shape. If End Shape is using the Start Shape, an asterisk (*) displays next to the end shape. To transform the shape of the member along the member path, the end shape must be explicitly set.
Priority
assign a priority to a component. Components that start and end at a common node are mitered based on their priorities. Components with the same priority are factored into the miter angle between the components. Components with different priorities are not factored into the miter angle. Components with the lowest priority will affect the justification of the member when Justify Overall Extents is cleared on the Dimensions tab in the properties of the member.
Name
select shapes that you assign to the start and end of the member or member segment. You can select shapes contained in structural member styles, or custom shapes that you create.
Relative to
define the position of the shape relative to the start or end of the member.
Node
place shapes on the member path relative to the start or end of the member. To place shapes on the member path, assign them to nodes on the member path. A single segment member has two nodes; the start point and the endpoint of the member. Multi-segmented members have additional nodes located at each vertex of the member path, allowing you to assign different shapes to the start and end of each segment of the member. If you place shapes on the member path relative to the start of the member, then the start point of the member path is Node 0. The first vertex on the member path is Node 1, and so on until the endpoint of the member path is defined as the final node. If you place shapes on the member path relative to the end of the member, then the endpoint of the member is Node 0.
Scale
scale the shape.
Mirror
mirror the shape.
Rotation
rotate the shape.
X
offset the shape in the X direction along the member path.
Y
offset the shape in the Y direction perpendicular to the
member path.
Z
offset the shape in the Z direction perpendicular to the
member path.
4 Click Add to add a component to a structural member. A component with the same values as the preceding component is added to the design rules.
5 Click Copy to copy a component.
Understanding the Design Rules of a Structural Member | 1393
6 Click Remove to remove a component. 7 Click OK.
Changing the Shape in the Style of a Structural Member
Use this procedure to change the shape that is extruded along the axis of a structural member created from a single shape. You can create a new shape for the structural member by creating a custom shape, or by creating a new style from the Structural Member Catalog that contains a shape.
1 Create a structural member with a single shape.
For more information, see "Using Structural Member Tools to Create Structural Members" on page 1342.
2 Create a new shape for the structural member:
If you want to create...
Then...
a custom shape for the member
create a custom shape. See "Creating a Custom Shape for a Structural Member " on page 1404.
a shape from the Structural Member Catalog
create a structural member style in the Structural Member Catalog that contains the shape. See "Creating a Style from a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog" on page 1333.
3 Select the structural member, right-click, and click Edit Member Style.
4 Click Design Rules.
5 In the Name list under Start Shape, select the shape that you created in step 2. If you created a custom shape in step 2, the name of the shape displays in the Name list. If you created a style from the Structural Member Catalog, the shape displays in the Name list with the name of the shape that you selected in the catalog to create the style, not with the style name that you created.
6 Click OK.
Adding a Shape to a Structural Member
Use this procedure to add one or more shapes to a structural member in the design rules of the structural member style. You can create a new shape to add to the structural member by creating a custom shape, or by creating a new style from the Structural Member Catalog that contains a shape.
1 Create a structural member with a single shape.
For more information, see "Using Structural Member Tools to Create Structural Members" on page 1342.
2 Create a new shape to add to the structural member:
If you want to... create a custom shape for the member
Then...
create a custom shape. See "Creating a Custom Shape for a Structural Member " on page 1404.
create a shape from the Structural Member Catalog
create a structural member style in the Structural Member Catalog that contains the shape. See "Creating a Style from a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog" on page 1333.
3 Select the structural member, right-click, and click Edit Member Style. 4 Click Design Rules. 5 Click Add.
A new component is added to the structural member.
6 Type a name for each component under Component. 7 For the new component, from the Name list under Start Shape, select the shape that you created in step
2.
1394 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
If you created a custom shape in step 2, the name of the shape is displayed in the Name list. If you created a style from the Structural Member Catalog, the shape is displayed in the Name list with the name of the shape that you selected in the catalog to create the style, not with the style name that you typed. 8 Click OK. The structural member is redrawn with the new shape added to its geometry.
Process Overview: Creating a Single-Component Structural Member (Tapered Column)
Use this example to create a tapered column, a single-component structural member that starts with one shape and ends with another. Creating a tapered column
The process of creating this tapered column has four steps: Step 1: Create two structural member styles in the Structural Member Catalog that contain the start and end shapes
to taper over the length (height) of the column. Step 2: Create a Tapered Column tool. Step 3: Create a column with the tapered column style. Step 4: Specify design rules in the tapered column style to add the start and end shapes in the styles that you created
in step 1 to the tapered column. Creating Start and End Shapes for the Tapered Column Use this procedure to create two styles that contain the start and end shapes for the tapered column. The first style contains the start shape for the column and the second style contains the end shape for the column.
1 On the Format menu, click Structural Member Catalog. 2 Expand Imperial in the tree view in the left pane of the Structural Member Catalog. 3 Expand Steel, AISC, and then I-Shaped. 4 Select Wn, Wide-Flange Shapes. 5 Right-click W8X31 in the lower right pane of the Structural Member Catalog, and click Generate Member
Style. 6 Enter W8X31, and click OK. 7 Select W1n, Wide-Flange Shapes in the tree view in the left pane. 8 Right-click W14X43 in the lower right pane of the Structural Member Catalog, and click Generate Member
Style. 9 Enter W14X43 and click OK. 10 Click to close the Structural Member Catalog.
Process Overview: Creating a Single-Component Structural Member (Tapered Column) | 1395
Creating the Tapered Column Tool Use this procedure to create a tapered column tool. Save the style for the tapered column in the Member Styles (Imperial).dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 On the File menu, click Open drawing. 3 Open Member Styles (Imperial).dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial. 4 Expand Architectural Objects, right-click Structural Member Styles, and click New. 5 Enter Tapered Column for the name, and press ENTER. 6 Click OK to close the Style Manager. 7 Click OK to save changes to the Member Styles (Imperial).dwg.
8 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click New Palette. 9 Enter Structural, and press ENTER. 10 Open the Design palette, select the Structural Column tool, right-click, and click Copy. 11 Open the Structural palette, right-click, and click Paste. 12 Select the new tool, right-click, and click Properties. 13 Enter Tapered Column for the Name. 14 Click the setting for Description. 15 Enter Creates a tapered column, and click OK. 16 Expand Basic, and expand General. 17 Click Style location. 18 Select Browse, select the Member Styles.dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial, and click Open. 19 Click Style and select Tapered Column. 20 Click OK.
Creating a Column with the Tapered Column Tool Use this procedure to create a column with the tapered column tool that you created.
1 Select the Tapered Column tool from the tool palette. 2 Press ENTER to create a column that is not anchored to a grid. 3 Specify the insert point of the column. 4 Specify the roll, which is the rotation around the extruded axis of the column, and press ENTER.
Adding the Start and End Shapes to the Tapered Column Use this procedure to add the start and end shapes to the tapered column and transform them along the member path.
1 Select the column, right-click, and click Edit Member Style. 2 Click Design Rules. 3 Click Show Details. 4 Select Unnamed under Component, and enter Component 1. 5 Under Start Shape, select W8X31 from the Name list. 6 Scroll to the end of the Design Rules dialog box to display the End Shape parameters. 7 Under End Shape, select W14X43 from the Name list. 8 Click OK.
1396 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
The complete tapered column displays in your drawing.
Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member (Composite Column)
Use this example to create a steel column encased in concrete, a multi-component structural member with a single segment. The steel column shape is one component of the member, the concrete column shape another. Creating a composite steel and concrete column
The process of creating this composite column has four steps: Step 1: Create two structural member styles: one that contains the shape for the concrete column and one that contains
the shape for the steel column. Step 2: Create a Composite Column tool. Step 3: Create a column with the composite column style. Step 4: Specify design rules in the composite column style to add the concrete and steel shapes to the column. Creating the Steel and Concrete Shapes for the Composite Column Use this procedure to create two styles: one that contains the steel shape and one that contains the concrete shape.
1 On the Format menu, click Structural Member Catalog. 2 Expand Imperial in the tree view in the left pane of the Structural Member Catalog. 3 Expand Steel, AISC, and then I-Shaped. 4 Select Wn, Wide-Flange Shapes. 5 Right-click W8X31 in the lower right pane of the Structural Member Catalog, and click Generate Member
Style. 6 Enter W8X31, and click OK. 7 Expand Concrete, and then Pre-Cast. 8 Select Rectangular Columns. 9 Right-click 16X16 in the lower right pane of the Structural Member Catalog, and click Generate Member
Style. 10 Enter 16X16 and click OK. 11 Click to close the Structural Member Catalog.
Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member (Composite Column) | 1397
Creating the Composite Column Tool Use this procedure to create a composite column tool. Save the style for the composite column in the Member Styles (Imperial).dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 On the File menu, click Open drawing. 3 Open Member Styles (Imperial).dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial. 4 Expand Architectural Objects, right-click Structural Member Styles, and click New. 5 Enter Composite Column for the name, and press ENTER. 6 Click OK to close the Style Manager. 7 Click OK to save changes to the Member Styles (Imperial).dwg.
8 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click New Palette. 9 Enter Structural, and press ENTER. 10 Open the Design palette, select the Structural Column tool, right-click, and click Copy. 11 Open the Structural palette, right-click, and click Paste. 12 Select the new tool, right-click, and click Properties. 13 Enter Composite Column for the Name. 14 Click the setting for Description. 15 Enter Creates a composite column, and click OK. 16 Expand Basic, and expand General. 17 Click Style location. 18 Select Browse, select the Member Styles.dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial, and click Open. 19 Click Style and select Composite Column. 20 Click OK.
Creating a Column with the Composite Column Tool Use this procedure to create a column with the composite column tool that you created.
1 Select the Composite Column tool from the tool palette. 2 Press ENTER to create a column that is not anchored to a grid. 3 Specify the insertion point of the column. 4 Specify the roll, or rotation around the extruded axis of the column, and press ENTER.
Adding the Steel and Concrete Shapes to the Composite Column Use this procedure to add the steel and concrete shapes to the composite column.
1 Select the column, right-click, and click Edit Member Style. 2 Click Design Rules. 3 Click Show Details. 4 Select Unnamed under Component, and enter Component 1. 5 Under Start Shape, select 16X16 from the Name list. 6 Click Add.
A new component is added to the design rules of the column. By default, the start and end shapes are the same as the preceding component.
1398 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
7 Select Unnamed under Component, and enter Component 2. 8 Under Start Shape for Component 2, select W8X31 from the Name list.
Do not change the other Start Shape parameters. 9 Click OK.
The composite column displays in your drawing.
Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member Using Multiple Segments (Rigid Frame)
Use this example to create a rigid frame, a multi-segmented structural member created from multiple shapes that transform at each vertex of the structural member path. To create the rigid frame, you convert a multi-segmented polyline to a structural member and assign different start and end shapes to each segment of the member as components in the design rules of the rigid frame style. A series of nodes correspond to the start point, vertices, and the endpoint of the member path. By assigning different shapes to segments between nodes on the member path, the rigid frame transforms from one shape to several shapes along its path. Assign shapes to the rigid frame member relative to the start of the member. The start point is defined as Node 0. The first vertex of the member is defined as Node 1, the next vertex is Node 2, and so on until the endpoint of the member, which is defined as the end node. NOTE If you assign shapes relative to the end of the member, the endpoint of the member is defined as Node 0. Identifying nodes on the member path
Creating the rigid frame
The process of creating this rigid frame has seven steps: Step 1: Create two styles in the Structural Member Catalog that contain the shapes that transform over the path of
the rigid frame. Step 2: Create a rigid frame style and tool. Step 3: Draw a multi-segmented polyline path for the rigid frame and use the rigid frame tool to convert the path to
a structural member. Step 4: Create the first leg of the rigid frame by assigning start and end shapes to the first segment of the frame. Step 5: Create the first rafter of the rigid frame by assigning start and end shapes to the second segment of the frame. Step 6: Create the second rafter of the rigid frame by assigning start and end shapes to the third segment of the frame.
Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member Using Multiple Segments (Rigid Frame) | 1399
Step 7: Create the second leg of the rigid frame by assigning start and end shapes to the fourth segment of the frame.
Creating Shapes for the Rigid Frame Use this procedure to create two styles that contain the two shapes that transform over the path of the rigid frame.
1 On the Format menu, click Structural Member Catalog. 2 Expand Imperial in the tree view in the left pane of the Structural Member Catalog. 3 Expand Steel, AISC, and then I-Shaped. 4 Select Wn, Wide-Flange Shapes. 5 Right-click W8X31 in the lower right pane of the Structural Member Catalog, and click Generate Member
Style. 6 Enter W8X31, and click OK. 7 Select W1n, Wide-Flange Shapes in the tree view in the left pane. 8 Right-click W14X43 in the lower right pane of the Structural Member Catalog, and click Generate Member
Style. 9 Enter W14X43 and click OK.
10 Click
to close the Structural Member Catalog.
Creating the Rigid Frame Tool Use this procedure to create a rigid frame tool. Save the style for the rigid frame in the Member Styles (Imperial).dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 On the File menu, click Open drawing. 3 Open Member Styles (Imperial).dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial. 4 Expand Architectural Objects, right-click Structural Member Styles, and click New. 5 Enter Rigid Frame for the name, and press ENTER. 6 Click OK to close the Style Manager. 7 Click OK to save changes to the Member Styles (Imperial).dwg.
8 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click New Palette. 9 Enter Structural, and press ENTER. 10 Open the Design palette, select the Structural Column tool, right-click, and click Copy. 11 Open the Structural palette, right-click, and click Paste. 12 Select the new tool, right-click, and click Properties. 13 Enter Rigid Frame for the Name. 14 Click the setting for Description. 15 Enter Creates a rigid frame, and click OK. 16 Expand Basic, and expand General. 17 Click Style location. 18 Select Browse, select the Member Styles.dwg located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial, and click Open. 19 Click Style and select Rigid Frame. 20 Click OK.
1400 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Drawing the Rigid Frame Path and Converting it to a Structural Member Use this procedure to draw a polyline path in the shape of the rigid frame, and then convert it with the Rigid Frame tool you created in Step 2.
1 In plan view, draw a polyline path for the rigid frame. Drawing the rigid frame path
2 On the Structural palette, select the Rigid Frame tool. 3 Right-click, select Apply Tool Properties to, and select Linework. 4 Select the polyline that you created in step 1. 5 Enter y (Yes) to leave the original polyline in the drawing and press ENTER. Creating the First Leg of the Rigid Frame Use this procedure to create the first leg of the rigid frame by assigning a different start and end shape to the first segment of the rigid frame member. Creating the first leg of the rigid frame
1 Select the rigid frame, right-click, and click Edit Member Style. 2 Click Design Rules. 3 Click Show Details. 4 Select Unnamed under Component, and enter Leg 1. 5 Under Start Shape, in the Name list, select W8X31. 6 Select Start for Relative to. 7 Enter 0 for Node.
Node 0 is relative to the start point of the member path. 8 Enter 90 for Rotation. 9 Scroll to the end of the Design Rules dialog box to display the End Shape parameters for Leg 1. 10 Under End Shape, in the Name list, select W14X43. 11 Select Start for Relative to.
Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member Using Multiple Segments (Rigid Frame) | 1401
12 Enter 1 for Node. Node 1 corresponds to the vertex formed by the endpoint of the first segment of the member path and the start point of the second segment of the member path.
Creating the First Rafter of the Rigid Frame Use this procedure to create the first rafter of the rigid frame by assigning a different start and end shape to the second segment of the rigid frame member. Creating the first rafter of the rigid frame
1 Click Add to add a second component to the structural member. 2 Select Unnamed under Component, and enter Rafter 1. 3 Under Start Shape, in the Name list, select W14X43. 4 Select Start for Relative to. 5 Enter 1 for Node. 6 Scroll to the end of the Design Rules dialog box to display the End Shape parameters for Rafter 1. 7 Under End Shape, in the Name list, select W8X31. 8 Select Start for Relative to. 9 Enter 2 for Node. Creating the Second Rafter of the Rigid Frame Use this procedure to create the second rafter of the rigid frame by assigning a different start and end shape to the third segment of the rigid frame member. Creating the second rafter of the rigid frame
1 Click Add to add a third component to the structural member. 2 Select Unnamed under Component, and enter Rafter 2. 3 Under Start Shape, in the Name list, select W8X31. 4 Select Start for Relative to. 5 Enter 2 for Node. 6 Scroll to the end of the Design Rules dialog box to display the End Shape parameters for Rafter 2. 7 Under End Shape, in the Name list, select W14X43.
1402 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
8 Select Start for Relative to. 9 Enter 3 for Node. Creating the Second Leg of the Rigid Frame Use this procedure to create the second leg of the rigid frame by assigning a different start and end shape to the final segment of the rigid frame member. Creating the second leg of the rigid frame
1 Click Add to add a fourth component to the structural member. 2 Select Unnamed under Component, and enter Leg 2. 3 Under Start Shape, in the Name list, select W14X43. 4 Select Start for Relative to. 5 Enter 3 for Node. 6 Scroll to the end of the Design Rules dialog box to display the End Shape parameters for Leg 2. 7 Under End Shape, in the Name list, select W8X31. 8 Select Start for Relative to. 9 Enter 4 for Node. 10 Click OK. The complete rigid frame displays in your drawing.
Creating Custom Shapes for Structural Members
If you want to design a member with one or more shapes that are not available from the Structural Member Catalog and cannot be created using the Structural Member Style Wizard, you can use the Style Manager to create custom shapes. When you create a custom shape, you can define three separate geometries (Low Detail, Medium Detail, and High Detail) to accommodate the different levels of detail in different display representations (for example, Plan Low Detail, Plan, and Plan High Detail). The geometries for the new shape can be set entirely from linework in the drawing area, or you can use an existing custom shape definition as a template and edit it to redefine any of its geometries. Hollow core concrete plank display representations example
Once you have created a custom shape, it is added to the list of Structural Member Shape Definitions in the Style Manager. You can then create a new style from the shape, or you can assign the shape to an existing structural member style by adding it as a component in the design rules of the style. You can also edit, copy, paste, and purge shape definitions just as you can other styles. For more information on these operations, see "Style Manager" on page 451.
Creating Custom Shapes for Structural Members | 1403
Creating a Custom Shape for a Structural Member Use this procedure to create a custom shape for a structural member based on linework you have drawn or otherwise inserted in the drawing area.
1 In the drawing area, create three geometries to define the Plan Low Detail, Plan, and Plan High Detail display representations of the shape. You can draw entirely new geometries, or you can insert geometries from existing shape definitions (see "Inserting a Custom Shape in a Drawing" on page 1405.) For Plan Low Detail, you can use lines, arcs, circles, or polylines. For Plan and Plan High Detail, use closed polylines, splines, ellipses, or circles. Note that these entities must not intersect.
2 On the Format menu, click Structural Members Member Shapes. The Style Manager is displayed with the Architectural Objects folder open and Structural Member Shape Definitions selected
3 Right-click Structural Member Shape Definitions, and click New
4 In the right pane of the Style Manager, click the General tab.
5 Enter a name and description for the new shape, and then click the Design Rules tab.
6 For Shape Geometry, select Low Detail, and then click
.
7 In the drawing area, select the line(s), arc(s), circle(s), or polyline(s) to define the Plan Low Detail display representation for the new shape, and then press ENTER.
8 Select an insertion point.
The low detail shape is displayed in the viewer under the Design Rules tab.
9 For Shape Geometry, select Medium Detail, and then click
.
10 In the drawing area, select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle to define the Plan display representation for the selected shape designation.
11 Select an insertion point, or enter c (Centroid) or p (Previous Point) to position the selected shape in the viewer.
12 For Shape Geometry, select High Detail, and then click
.
13 In the drawing area, select a closed polyline, spline, ellipse, or circle to define the Plan High Detail display representation for the shape.
1404 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
14 Select an insertion point, or enter c (Centroid) or p (Previous Point) to position the selected shape in the viewer.
15 If you want to create a new structural member style from the shape, click style, and click OK.
, enter a name for the new
16 Click OK to add the new shape to the list of Structural Member Shape Definitions and dismiss the Style Manager.
The new shape can now be added to existing structural member styles. For more information, see "Adding a Shape to a Structural Member" on page 1394.
Inserting a Custom Shape in a Drawing
Use this procedure to insert one or more of the geometries defined for a custom shape into a drawing. The geometry can then be edited or used as is to define one of the display representations for another custom member shape you are creating or editing.
1 On the Format menu, select click Structural Members Insert Member Shape.
2 In the right pane of the Insert Member Shapes worksheet, select a custom member shape. 3 Click one or more of the Shape Geometry check boxes.
The geometry for each selected shape designation is highlighted in the viewer.
4 Click Insert. The geometry defined for each of the selected shape designations is inserted into the drawing area.
Creating Custom Shapes for Structural Members | 1405
1406 | Chapter 28 Structural Members
Design Utilities
4
1407
1408 | Chapter 29 Design Utilities
Anchors
29
Anchors create links between different objects within Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. Anchors are often used to connect an object, such as a column or a structural element, to a grid or layout curve. Anchors can also be used to anchor architectural objects to each other, or to AutoCAD® objects like lines and circles.
1409
Anchors
An anchor links an AEC object to another object or to a layout curve or grid. You can create anchors between objects and also remove anchors from objects. AEC objects can be anchored to each other, to AutoCAD® objects like lines and circles, or to layout curves or grids.
Automatic and user-defined anchors in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop enable you to use anchors for many different purposes.
Automatic and User-Defined Anchors
Automatic anchors are set by the program. Certain objects are by default anchored to other objects. For example, doors and windows are usually anchored to walls or space boundaries. Curtain wall units or window assemblies might be anchored to curtain walls. Although these anchors are inserted automatically, when you place the objects their behavior can differ slightly. For example, a door that is anchored to a wall can be moved to an unconnected wall. The door cannot, however, be moved outside a wall and stand alone. To do this, you must remove the anchor between door and wall. The anchor of a column to a column grid behaves differently: you can move the column inside the grid, but you cannot move the column to another grid without first removing the anchor.
User-defined anchors are manual links that you can create between two objects. Most anchors are used with layout curves, layout grids, or volumes. You can also attach anchors to other AEC objects or AutoCAD objects.
Anchoring objects to a layout curve can be useful for positioning washbasins along a wall or rafters along a roof. Anchoring objects to layout grids can help you to position columns on a column grid, planters on a sidewalk grid, or tile accents on a floor tile grid. For information about layout curves or grids, see "Using Layout Curves" on page 1430 and "Using Layout Grids" on page 1438.
Types of User-Defined Anchors
There are six different types of anchors that you can use to attach objects:
If you want to...
Then...
attach AEC objects to other AEC objects
use object anchors.
attach AEC objects to the base curve of other objects, such as lines, use curve anchors. arcs, circles, mass elements, polylines, roofs, or walls
attach objects to nodes on layout curves or grids with leaders
use leader anchors.
attach objects to nodes on layout curves or grids
use node anchors.
attach objects to cell positions on 2D layout grids and 3D volume use cell anchors. grids
attach objects to volumes on 3D grids
use volume anchors.
Working with Object Anchors
You can use object anchors to attach an AEC object to the base curve of another AEC object. When an AEC object is anchored to another AEC object, it will be moved together with the anchoring object. When the anchoring object is deleted, the anchored object will be deleted, too. Changes that are made to the anchored object, however, will not be replicated in the anchoring object.
When the anchored object is selected, a temporary graphic displays the anchor. The temporary anchor graphic contains a trigger grip to release the object anchor.
1410 | Chapter 29 Anchors
Mass element anchored to a wall
Adding Object Anchors
Use this procedure to create an object anchor between two AEC objects. Creating an object anchor
1 On the command line, enter ObjectAnchorAttach. 2 Select the AEC object that should be anchored to another AEC object, and press ENTER. 3 Select the anchoring AEC object.
An object anchor is added. When you select the anchored object, you can see the anchoring connection.
Releasing Object Anchors
Use this procedure to release an object anchor between two AEC objects.
Adding Object Anchors | 1411
Releasing an object anchor
1 Select the AEC object that is anchored to another AEC object. 2 Click the Release Object Anchor grip on the anchor line.
The object anchor is removed.
Working with Curve Anchors
You can use curve anchors to attach AEC objects to the base curve of other AEC objects or AutoCAD objects, such as lines, arcs, circles, mass elements, polylines, roofs, or walls. The movement of an object that is anchored to another object with a curve anchor is constrained by the object to which it is anchored. Curve anchors are best suited for attaching objects to linear objects like lines, arcs, or walls as opposed to grids or layout volumes.
Adding Curve Anchors
Use this procedure to add a curve anchor to attach objects to the base of other objects.
1412 | Chapter 29 Anchors
Anchoring an object to a layout curve
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Curve Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. A Curve Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Curve Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78. NOTE Alternatively, enter CurveAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter at (Attach object), and select the object to be anchored. 3 Select a point on the curve that you want to anchor the object to.
The object is anchored to the curve at the X position. When the object is first placed, the Y and Z positions are 0. 4 Press ENTER.
Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Curves
Use this procedure to change the position of objects anchored to curves. You can change the position of an anchored object relative to the curve in the X, Y, and Z directions. You can also rotate and flip the object along its axes.
Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Curves | 1413
Moving an object along a layout curve in the X direction Moving an object along a layout curve in the Y direction
1414 | Chapter 29 Anchors
Moving an object along a layout curve in the Z direction
NOTE The positioning of multi-view blocks assumes that the insertion point of the multi-view block is at its midpoint.
1 Double-click the anchored object. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location on Curve. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Change the position along the X axis:
If you want to...
Then...
change the X reference point on the curve
select Start of curve, Midpoint of curve, or End of curve for From.
specify the X distance between the reference point on the curve and the anchored object
enter a value for Distance.
select from which point on the anchored object the X distance select Start edge of object, Center of object, or End edge of
to the curve is measured
object for To.
Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Curves | 1415
5 Change the position along the Y axis:
If you want to...
Then...
change the Y reference point on the curve
select Left edge of curve width, Center of curve width, or Right edge of curve width for From.
specify the Y distance between the reference point on the curve and the anchored object
enter a value for Distance.
select from which point on the anchored object the Y distance select Front of object, Center of object, or Back of object for
to the curve is measured
To.
6 Change the position along the Z axis (vertical):
If you want to...
Then...
change the Z reference point on the curve
select Bottom of curve height, Center of curve height, or Top of curve height for From.
specify the Z distance between the reference point on the curve and the anchored object
enter a value for Distance.
select from which point on the anchored object the Z distance select Bottom of object, Center of object, or Top of object
to the curve is measured
for To.
7 To change the rotation of the anchored object, enter values for the X and Z rotation. 8 To flip the object along one of the axes, select Flip X, Flip Y, or Flip Z. 9 Click OK.
Anchoring Objects to New Curves
Use this procedure to anchor objects to new curves. You can anchor an object to a new object without first releasing the previous anchor. The new anchor is of the same type as the previous one; in this case, it is a curve anchor.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Curve Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. A Curve Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Curve Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
NOTE Alternatively, enter CurveAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter s (Set curve), and select anchored objects. NOTE You can select only AEC objects here.
3 Press ENTER. 4 Select a new object to anchor the object to.
NOTE You can select AEC objects and AutoCAD objects here.
5 Press ENTER.
1416 | Chapter 29 Anchors
Working with Leader Anchors
You can use leader anchors to anchor objects to nodes on layout curves or grids with leaders. The movement of the anchored object is constrained by the leader on the anchor.
For information about creating layout curves or grids and nodes, see "Using Layout Curves" on page 1430 and "Using Layout Grids" on page 1438.
Adding Leader Anchors
Use this procedure to add leader anchors to your drawing. An object can be anchored to only one node at a time. When you try to anchor it to a second node, the object is released from the first node. You can, however, anchor any number of objects to a single layout node.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Leader Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
A Leader Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Leader Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
NOTE Alternatively, enter LeaderAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter a (Attach object), select the object to be anchored, and then specify a point on or near a node on a layout curve, layout grid, or volume grid.
The object is anchored to the node that you selected. By default, the leader anchor is created at a direction of 0 from the node and has first and second extensions of 1 inch (25.4 mm). These extensions are measured from the node to the center of the anchored object.
3 Press ENTER.
Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Layout Nodes with Leader Anchors
Use this procedure to change the position of objects anchored to layout nodes with leader anchors. You can change the coordinate system, orientation, and rotation of an object anchored to a layout node. You can also define offsets from the node.
1 Double-click the object anchored to a layout node.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location from Node.
3 Click Anchor.
4 Specify changes in the position or orientation of anchored objects:
If you want to...
Then...
specify an offset from the object to the node
specify insertion offset values for the X, Y, or Z position.
anchor the object to the center of the node
select Center on Node.
have the anchored object use the coordinate system of the select Use Node Coordinate System. node
not have the anchored object use the coordinate system of specify X, Y, or Z normals for the anchored object. the node
change the rotation angle of the anchored object
specify values for the X, Y, or Z rotation angles.
flip the object along the X, Y, or Z axes
select Flip X, Flip Y, or Flip Z.
change the angle of the leader to the node
specify a value for Angle to Node.
change the offset of the leader start grip from the center of enter an offset value for First Extension. the base curve of the layout node
Working with Leader Anchors | 1417
If you want to...
Then...
change the offset of the leader end grip from the center of the base curve of the anchored object
enter an offset value for Second Extension.
NOTE By default the leader extensions are slightly offset so as not to overlap the leader grip with the object location grip.
5 Click OK.
Grip-Editing Leaders
Use this procedure to grip-edit leaders. A leader anchor connects an object to a layout node with a leader between the two. You can change the length and shape of the leader. A leader consists of one segment or several segments. You can change the leader shape by grip-editing the object. You can use grips to add segments to existing leaders.
1 Select the anchored object. 2 Move the leader grip to move the leader in the appropriate direction. 3 After you release the leader, select the anchored object again.
An additional leader grip is added at the point from which the leader originally started.
4 Move the leader grip at the start of the leader line to add another segment to the leader. 5 Repeat this procedure until the leader has all the segments you need.
You can later edit the leader in the same way you edit an AutoCAD polyline.
Extending Leaders
Use this procedure to extend the leader line beyond the first and last grip points on the leader line. 1 Double-click the anchored object. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location from Node. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Edit the leader line:
If you want to extend...
Then...
the start point of the leader line
in the First Extension field, enter the extension value.
the endpoint of the leader line
in the Second Extension field, enter the extension value.
5 Click OK.
Copying Objects to All Layout Nodes
Use this procedure to copy objects to all layout nodes. You can select an AEC object and, instead of manually anchoring it to a layout node, you can copy the object and anchor one copy to each node on a layout curve or grid.
TIP If you want the leader to be displayed in the same way at every node, first anchor the object to a single node. Adjust the leader attributes (direction, extension, or properties), and then use the Copy to Nodes option. Next, select the object that is anchored to the single node, and select the layout curve or grid.
1 Anchor an object to a layout node, as described in "Adding Leader Anchors" on page 1417. 2 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Leader Anchor tool.
If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
1418 | Chapter 29 Anchors
A Leader Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Leader Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78. NOTE Alternatively, enter LeaderAnchor on the command line.
3 To copy the anchored object to every node on the layout curve or grid, enter c (Copy to Nodes). 4 Select the object that you want to copy and anchor to every node on the layout curve or grid. 5 Select the layout curve or grid.
If an existing object is anchored to any of the nodes, you are prompted to specify whether you want to skip nodes that already have something anchored to them. Enter y to avoid duplicate anchored objects on those nodes.
Working with Node Anchors
You can use node anchors to attach objects to nodes on layout curves or grids. Anchoring objects to a layout curve might be useful for positioning washbasins along a wall or rafters along a roof. Anchoring objects to layout grids might help you to position columns on a column grid, planters on a sidewalk grid, or tile accents on a floor tile grid. WARNING When you change the position of an object that is anchored to a curve, the anchored object needs to stay on the curve. Keeping the association between the object and the node prevents all objects that are being moved from attaching to the same node.
Adding Node Anchors
Use this procedure to add node anchors. You can add as many node anchors in your drawing as you have layout nodes. An individual object can be anchored to only one layout node. If you try to anchor an object to a second node, the first anchor is released. You can, however, anchor several objects to the same layout node and edit them individually. Anchoring an object to a layout curve node
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Node Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. A Node Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Node Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
Working with Node Anchors | 1419
NOTE Alternatively, enter NodeAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter a (Attach object), and select the object to be anchored. 3 Specify a point on or near a node on a layout curve or grid. 4 Press ENTER.
Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Layout Nodes with Node Anchors
Use this procedure to change the position of objects anchored to layout nodes with node anchors. You can change the coordinate system and orientation of an object anchored to a layout node. You can also define offsets from the node.
1 Double-click the anchored object. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location from Node. 3 Click Anchor. 4 Change the position or orientation of the anchored object:
If you want to...
Then...
specify an offset from the object to the node
specify offset values for the X, Y, or Z position.
anchor the object to the center of the node
select Center on Node.
have the anchored object use the coordinate system of the select Use Node Coordinate System. node
not have the anchored object use the coordinate system of specify X, Y, or Z normals for the anchored object. the node
flip the object along the X, Y, or Z axes
select Flip X, Flip Y, or Flip Z.
5 Click OK.
Anchoring Objects to Different Nodes
Use this procedure to anchor objects to different nodes. You can attach an anchored object to another node on the same layout curve or grid, or to another layout curve or grid altogether. Moving an anchored object to another layout curve node
NOTE If you want to move an anchored object to a different node on the same layout curve or grid, you can also drag the object to the node.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Node Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
1420 | Chapter 29 Anchors
A Node Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Node Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78. NOTE Alternatively, enter NodeAnchor on the command line. 2 Enter s (Set node), and select the anchored object. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Select the node you want to anchor the object to. 5 Press ENTER.
Copying Objects to All Layout Nodes
Use this procedure to copy objects to all layout nodes. You can select an AEC object and, instead of manually anchoring it to a layout node, you can copy the object and anchor one copy to each node on the layout curve or grid. Copying an object to all layout curve nodes
1 Anchor an object to a layout node, as described in "Adding Node Anchors" on page 1419. 2 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Node Anchor tool.
If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. A Node Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Node Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78. NOTE Alternatively, enter NodeAnchor on the command line. 3 To copy the object to every node on the layout curve or grid, enter c (Copy to each node). 4 Select the object that you want to copy and anchor to every node on the layout curve or grid. 5 Select the layout curve or grid. If an object is already anchored to any of the nodes, you are prompted to specify whether you want to skip nodes that already have something anchored to them. Enter y (Yes) to avoid duplicate anchored objects on those nodes.
Copying Objects to All Layout Nodes | 1421
Working with Cell Anchors
A cell is a subdivision of a layout grid or volume grid. A cell anchor attaches objects to cell positions on layout grids and volume grids. When an object is anchored to a cell, the object is resized to fit the cell size. When the grid or volume itself is resized, you can decide whether the anchored object is updated accordingly or remains its original size.
Adding Cell Anchors
Use this procedure to add cell anchors. You can add cell anchors to objects to connect them to cells in layout grids and volume grids.
Anchoring an object to a layout grid cell
NOTE There is no rule that determines which cell the object attaches to when you anchor it. You can turn on the Node display component to display the cell nodes of the layout grid or volume for easier cell selection. You can also move the object after you anchor it to the layout grid or volume.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Cell Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
A Cell Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Cell Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
NOTE Alternatively, enter CellAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter a (Attach object), and select the object to be anchored. 3 Specify a point on or near a cell of a layout grid or volume grid.
The object is automatically scaled to fill the entire cell.
4 Press ENTER.
Changing the Position and Size of Objects Anchored to Layout Cells
Use this procedure to change the position and size of objects anchored to layout cells. You can change the coordinate system and orientation of an object anchored to a layout cell. You can also define insertion and size offsets and indicate whether the object should be resized when the cell is resized.
1 Double-click the anchored object.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location in Cell.
3 Click Anchor.
4 Change the position or orientation of anchored objects:
If you want to...
Then...
specify an offset from the object to the cell
specify offset values for the X, Y, or Z position.
anchor the object to the center of the cell
select Center on Cell.
have the anchored object use the coordinate system of the select Use Cell Coordinate System. cell
1422 | Chapter 29 Anchors
If you want to...
Then...
not have the anchored object use the coordinate system of clear Use Cell Coordinate System, and specify X, Y, or Z
the cell
normals for the anchored object.
flip the object along the X, Y, or Z axes
select Flip X, Flip Y, or Flip Z.
5 Specify how an anchored object is resized to fit the edges of the cell:
If you want to... resize the object every time the cell is resized
Then... select Apply Resize.
not resize object every time the cell is resized
clear Apply Resize.
specify a distance between the anchored object and the cell enter an appropriate negative value for Size Offset.
extend the anchored object beyond the cell edges
enter an appropriate positive value for Size Offset.
6 Click OK.
Anchoring Objects to a Different Cell
You can attach an anchored object to another cell in the same layout grid or volume grid, or to another grid altogether.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Cell Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. A Cell Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Cell Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
NOTE Alternatively, enter CellAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter se (Set cell), and select the object. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Select the cell you want to anchor the object to.
The object is moved to the new cell. If the new cell is different in size from the original one, the object is resized accordingly.
NOTE You can also drag the object if you want to move an anchored object to a different cell on the same layout grid or volume grid.
Copying Objects to All Layout Cells
Use this procedure to copy objects to all layout cells. You can select an AEC object and, instead of manually anchoring it to a layout cell, you can copy the object and anchor one copy to each cell on the layout grid or volume grid.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Cell Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. A Cell Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Cell Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
NOTE Alternatively, enter CellAnchor on the command line.
2 To copy the anchored object to every cell in the layout grid or volume grid, enter c (Copy to each cell).
Anchoring Objects to a Different Cell | 1423
3 Select the object. 4 Select the layout grid or volume grid that you want to copy and anchor the object to.
If an object is already anchored to any of the cells, you are prompted to specify whether you want to skip cells that already have something anchored to them. Enter y (Yes) to avoid duplicate anchored objects appear in those cells.
Working with Volume Anchors
You can use volume anchors to attach objects to volumes in 3D volume grids. The movement of an object that is anchored to a volume grid is constrained by that volume grid. When an object is anchored to a volume inside a volume grid, the object is resized to fit the volume size. When the volume itself is resized, you can decide whether the anchored object is updated accordingly or remains its original size.
Adding Volume Anchors
Use this procedure to add volume anchors. You can add volume anchors to objects to connect them to volume grids.
Anchoring an object to a volume grid
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Volume Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
A Volume Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Volume Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
NOTE Alternatively, enter VolumeAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter a (Attach object), and select the object to be anchored. 3 Specify a point on or near a volume in a volume grid.
The object is scaled to fill the entire volume.
4 Press ENTER.
Changing the Position and Size of Objects Anchored to Volumes
Use this procedure to change the position and size of objects anchored to volumes. You can change the coordinate system and orientation of an object anchored to a volume. You can also define insertion and size offsets and indicate whether the object should be resized when the volume is resized.
1 Double-click the anchored object.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location in volume.
3 Click Anchor.
4 Change the position or orientation of anchored objects:
If you want to...
Then...
specify an offset from the object to the volume
specify offset values for the X, Y, or Z position.
1424 | Chapter 29 Anchors
If you want to...
Then...
anchor the object to the center of the volume
select Center on Node.
have the anchored object use the coordinate system of the select Use Node Coordinate System. volume grid
not have the anchored object use the coordinate system of clear Use Node Coordinate System, and specify X, Y, or Z
the volume grid
normals for the anchored object.
flip the object along the X, Y, or Z axes
select Flip X, Flip Y, or Flip Z.
5 Specify how an anchored object is resized to fit the edges of the volume:
If you want to...
Then...
resize the object every time the volume is resized
select Apply Resize.
not resize the object every time the volume is resized
clear Apply Resize.
specify a distance between the anchored object and the volume
enter an appropriate negative value for Size Offset.
extend the anchored object beyond the volume edges
enter an appropriate positive value for Size Offset.
6 Click OK.
Anchoring Objects to a Different Volume
Use this procedure to anchor objects to a different volume. You can attach an anchored object to another volume in the same volume grid, or to another volume grid.
NOTE If you want to move an anchored object to a different volume on the same volume grid, you can also drag it there.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Volume Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
A Volume Anchor tool is located in the Content Browser in the Stock Tool Catalog. Open the Content Browser and select the Stock Tool Catalog. Browse to the Parametric Layout and Anchoring category, and drag the Volume Anchor tool into the drawing area or to a tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
NOTE Alternatively, enter VolumeAnchor on the command line.
2 Enter s (Set volume), and select the anchored object. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Select the volume you want to anchor the object to.
The object is moved to the new volume. If the new volume is different in size from the original one, the object is resized accordingly.
Copying Objects to All Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to copy objects to all layout volumes. You can select an AEC object and, instead of manually anchoring it to a volume, you can copy the object and anchor one copy to each volume on the volume grid.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a Volume Anchor tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use. A Volume Anchor tool is located in the Parametric Layout and Anchoring Tools category in the Stock Tool catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
Anchoring Objects to a Different Volume | 1425
2 To copy the anchored object to every volume in the volume grid, enter c (Copy to each volume).
3 Select the object that you want to copy and anchor to every volume in the volume grid.
4 Select the volume grid.
If an object is already anchored to any of the volumes, you are prompted to specify whether you want to skip volumes that already have something anchored to them. Enter y (Yes) to avoid duplicate anchored objects on those volumes.
Releasing and Positioning Anchored Objects
You can release and position anchored objects. Release an anchored object from another object to remove the relationship between the objects. Position an anchored object to offset it from the object it is anchored to.
Releasing Anchored Objects
Use this procedure to release objects from anchors and remove the anchoring relationship. Any anchored object can be released, including a railing that is anchored to a stair object or a window that is anchored to a wall.
Right-click the anchored object, and click Anchor Release.
Positioning Anchored Objects
Use this procedure to position anchored objects. You can position an object with anchors to offset it from the object that it is anchored to.
1 Right-click the anchored object, and change the position of the anchored object:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the X position
click Set X Position.
specify the Y position
click Set Y Position.
specify the Z position
click Set Z Position.
specify the end position
click Set Anchored End.
specify the rotation
click Set Rotation.
flip the X position
click Flip X.
flip the Y position
click Flip Y.
flip the Z position
click Flip Z.
2 Enter an XYZ coordinate value for the desired offset position.
Entering a coordinate for the offset distance is equivalent to setting all three of the individual position offsets.
Creating an Anchor Tool
Use this procedure to create an anchor tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own anchor tools if you are placing multiple anchors of specific styles with additional properties that you want to be the same every time you add an anchor of each type. You can use any of the following methods to create an anchor tool:
Drag a copy of a tool from another palette to the current palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy an existing tool in the current palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool. Drag a tool from the Content Browser to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
1426 | Chapter 29 Anchors
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from the Content Browser
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Click OK.
Creating an Anchor Tool | 1427
1428 | Chapter 29 Anchors
Layout Curves and Grids
30
Three types of layout objects help you to position objects relative to each other: layout curves, two-dimensional (2D) layout grids, and three-dimensional (3D) layout volumes (also called volume grids). Each type of layout object has anchors to which you can attach objects. All use nodes as anchor points. Layout grids and layout volumes also provide cells as anchoring points for cell anchors and volume anchors. For more information, see "Anchors" on page 1410.
1429
Layout Curves and Grids
Three types of layout objects help you to position objects relative to each other: layout curves, two-dimensional (2D) layout grids, and three-dimensional (3D) layout volumes (also called volume grids). Each type of layout object has anchors to which you can attach objects. All use nodes as anchor points. Layout grids and layout volumes also provide cells as anchoring points for cell anchors and volume anchors. For more information, see "Anchors" on page 1410.
Layout Curve
By defining an object as a layout curve and placing nodes along the curve, you can position objects precisely along a path. Layout curves are useful for positioning wash basins along a wall or rafters along a roof.
Layout Grid
A layout grid is an arrangement of rectangular or radial spaces, called bays, that are delineated with parallel or radial lines. Use a two-dimensional (2D) layout grid to position objects in a grid pattern. Anchoring objects to layout grids might help you to position planters in a sidewalk grid, or tile accents in a floor tile grid.
Layout Volume
A layout volume (also called a volume grid) is a three-dimensional (3D) arrangement of rectangular spaces. Use three-dimensional (3D) layout volumes to position objects on a multilevel grid. Changing the size of a layout volume changes the spacing of objects attached to that grid and can also change the size and height of objects attached to that grid.
Using Layout Curves
Use a layout curve to anchor objects along a path. You can define the following objects as layout curves:
Walls Curtain walls Window assemblies Spaces Mass elements Roofs Lines Arcs Circles Ellipses Polygons Polylines Splines
Layout curves are best suited for objects with linear geometry, such as polylines, walls, or splines. If you need nodes on a two-dimensional (2D) object, consider using a layout grid instead.
Creating a Layout Curve Tool
Use this procedure to create a layout curve tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own layout curve tools if you are placing multiple layout curves of a specific style and they all have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to add the tool.
1430 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
2 Create the tool: If you want to... create a tool from a layout curve in the drawing copy a tool in the current tool palette copy a tool from another tool palette
copy a tool from the Content Browser
Then...
select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 For Name, enter the name you want displayed for this tool's tooltip. This name will also be displayed with
the tool if it is published to a catalog in the Content Browser. 5 For Description, click in the text box, and then enter the description you want displayed for this tool's
tooltip. This description will also be displayed with the tool if it is published to a catalog in the Content Browser. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Under General, click the Description text box, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 8 For Layer key, click the text box, select a layer key, and click OK. 9 For Layer overrides, click the text box, select a layer key override, and click OK. 10 Under Dimensions, specify a Layout type 11 Specify the number of nodes, or enter a spacing value. 12 Click OK.
Adding Layout Curves
Use this procedure to define an object as a layout curve. The spacing between anchor nodes determines the spacing between objects that you attach to the layout curve, even if you change the geometry of the layout curve. The following spacing options are available:
Manual: You specify the position of each node along the layout curve.
Manually placing a node on a layout curve
Adding Layout Curves | 1431
Repeat: You specify equidistant spacing between nodes along the layout curve. The number of anchor nodes is determined by the length of the layout curve. As the length of the curve changes, nodes are added or subtracted accordingly. The spacing of the nodes remains fixed. Placing nodes at repeat spacing on a layout curve
Space Evenly: You specify the number of nodes along the curve. The space between nodes is determined by the length of the layout curve. As the length of the curve changes, the spacing between nodes is lengthened or shortened accordingly. The number of nodes remains fixed. Placing nodes at even spacing on a layout curve
1432 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
1 Open the tool palette that contains the layout curve tool you want to use, and select the tool.
TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
If there are no layout curve tools available on tool palettes in the workspace, you can use the Content Browser to access the Stock Tool catalog, which contains a layout curve tool under Parametric Layout and Anchoring Tools. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 Select the object to define as a layout curve. 3 Place nodes along the layout curve:
If you want to... Place nodes at locations that you specify
Then...
press ENTER. Enter the number of nodes, and specify the locations of nodes by selecting them or by entering distances from the start point of the curve.
Repeat nodes at fixed intervals along the curve
enter r (Repeat). Specify the start and end offsets of the first and last nodes, and specify the spacing between nodes.
Space a fixed number of nodes along the curve
enter s (Space evenly). Specify the start and end offsets of the first and last nodes, and specify the number of nodes.
Adding Nodes to Layout Curves
Use this procedure to add nodes to layout curves. Layout curve with evenly spaced node grips
You can add nodes only to those layout curves that have manually spaced or evenly spaced nodes. Layout curves with nodes at fixed repeated spacing cannot be changed without changing either the length of the curve or the spacing of the first node. For more information, see "Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Curves" on page 1436.
Adding a node to a layout curve using grips
1 Select the layout curve by selecting one of the node anchors. 2 Click an Add Node grip.
If you have added a node to a layout curve with manually spaced nodes, the new node is inserted at the specified position. The position of the other nodes remains unchanged.
Adding Nodes to Layout Curves | 1433
If you have added a node to a layout curve with evenly spaced nodes, the new node is added and all nodes are recalculated, so that they are evenly spaced again.
3 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Removing Nodes from Layout Curves
Use this procedure to remove nodes from layout curves. You can remove nodes from only those layout curves that have manually spaced or evenly spaced nodes. Layout curves with nodes at fixed repeated spacing cannot be changed without changing either the length of the curve or the spacing of the first node. Removing a node from a layout curve using grips
1 Select the layout curve by selecting one of the node anchors. 2 Click a Remove Node grip.
If you have removed a node from a layout curve with manual nodes, the node is removed from the specified position. The position of the other nodes remains unchanged.
If you have removed a node from a layout curve with evenly spaced nodes, the node is removed from the specified position and the remaining nodes are recalculated, so that they are evenly spaced again.
3 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the Offsets of Layout Curves
Use this procedure to change the start and end offsets of layout curves. You can change the offsets for evenly spaced and repeated layout curves. By repositioning the offset grips, you can move the start or end offset to any position on the layout curve. You cannot extend an offset beyond the bounds of the curve.
1434 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
Changing the start offset node location of a layout curve using grips
1 Select a layout curve by selecting one of the node anchors. 2 Click an Offset grip. 3 Move the grip to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value on the command line, and press
ENTER. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the Node Spacing of a Layout Curve
Use this procedure to change the spacing between nodes on a layout curve with fixed repeated spacing. Layout curve with evenly spaced node grips
Changing the node spacing of a layout curve using grips
1 Select a layout curve by selecting one of the node anchors. 2 Click the Spacing grip.
Changing the Node Spacing of a Layout Curve | 1435
The Spacing grip is attached to the first node of the layout curve. 3 Move the grip to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value on the command line, and press
ENTER. If you move the grip to the left to decrease the space between nodes, the number of nodes increases. If you move the grip to the right to increase the space between nodes, the number of nodes decreases. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the Node Positions on a Layout Curve
Use this procedure to change the positions of nodes on a layout curve with manual node placement. Changing a node position on a layout curve using grips
1 Select a layout curve by selecting one of the node anchors. 2 Click a Node Distance grip. 3 Move the grip to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value on the command line, and press
ENTER. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Curves
Use this procedure to change how modes are positioned along a layout curve. For more information, see "Adding Layout Curves" on page 1431. For example, you can change the mode so that a curve with manually spaced nodes becomes a curve with evenly spaced nodes. If you want to add nodes to a layout curve with a fixed number of nodes, you must first convert the layout curve to manually spaced or evenly spaced mode. You can also change the layout mode on the Properties palette.
1 Select the layout curve by selecting one of the node anchors. 2 Right-click, and click Layout Mode. 3 Select the desired mode, and press ENTER.
If you are changing a layout curve with manually spaced nodes to a curve with nodes at fixed repeated spacing, you are prompted for start and end offsets, and the distance between nodes. If there are too few nodes on the curve to fill it, new nodes are created at the specified distance.
If you are changing a layout curve with manually spaced nodes to a curve with evenly spaced nodes, you are prompted for start and end offsets for the curve. The existing nodes are distributed evenly on the curve.
1436 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
If you are changing a curve with nodes placed at a fixed repeated spacing value to a curve with manually spaced nodes, there is no visible change. However, the nodes have been converted to manual nodes, so that you now can add nodes to and remove nodes from the curve.
If you are changing a curve with nodes placed at a fixed repeated spacing value to a curve with evenly spaced nodes, you are prompted for start and end offsets. The existing nodes are then recalculated and distributed evenly. You can now add nodes to and remove nodes from the curve.
If you are changing a curve with evenly spaced nodes to a curve with manually spaced nodes, there is no visible change. If you change the curve, however, the nodes remain fixed and are no longer redistributed evenly.
If you are changing a curve with evenly spaced nodes to a curve with nodes placed at fixed repeated spacing, you are prompted for start and end offsets, and the distance between nodes. If there are too few nodes on the curve to fill it, new nodes are created at the specified distance.
Switching Layout Curves
Use this procedure to move a layout curve from one object to another object. The layout mode is retained in this action. If the layout curve was inserted originally with evenly spaced nodes, the nodes remain evenly spaced on the new object. If you switch the curve to an object that already contains a layout curve, the two curves are not merged. They are still separate objects and can be edited separately. Switching nodes from one layout curve to another
1 Select the layout curve by selecting one of the node anchors. 2 Right-click, and click Switch Curve. 3 Select the object to which to attach the layout curve. The layout curve is moved to the new object.
Changing the Display Properties of Layout Curves
Use this procedure to change the display properties of the nodes on a layout curve. Display properties you can change include the following:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight
Switching Layout Curves | 1437
Linetype scale Node size
1 Select the layout curve that you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Curve
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a layout curve. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a layout curve.
1 Select the layout curve to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK. 7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK.
Using Layout Grids
Use a layout grid to arrange objects in a 2D grid pattern. You can create a radial or rectangular layout grid. You can anchor objects to the intersection of the grid lines (node anchors) or to the center of the grid bays (cell anchors).
NOTE By default, the markers for node anchors and cell anchors are not displayed when you insert a grid. To display them, turn these components on in the Entity Display. For information about turning on display components, see "Changing the Display Properties of Layout Curves" on page 1437.
1438 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
Changing the size of a grid changes the spacing of objects anchored to that grid and can also change the size of objects anchored to that grid. You can use a clipping profile to define a boundary around a layout grid or to make a hole in a layout grid. The layout grid is not displayed outside a boundary or inside a hole. Use closed polylines to define the boundary or hole. For example, you can use a clipping profile to cut a hole in a reflected ceiling grid.
Creating a Layout Grid Tool
Use this procedure to create a 2D layout grid tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own layout grid tools if you are placing multiple layout grids of a specific style and they all have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to add the tool.
2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a layout grid in the drawing
Then... select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the tool palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from the Content Browser
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 For Name, enter the name you want displayed for this tool's tooltip. This name will also be displayed with
the tool if it is published to a catalog in the Content Browser. 5 For Description, click in the text box, and then enter the description you want displayed for this tool's
tooltip. This description will also be displayed with the tool if it is published to a catalog in the Content Browser. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Under General, click the Description text box, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 8 For Layer key, click the text box, select a layer key, and click OK. 9 For Layer overrides, click the text box, select a layer key override, and click OK. 10 Expand Dimensions. 11 Click Yes to specify the dimension of the grid on the drawing screen as you are creating it. 12 Click No to specify numerical values for the Width, Depth, and Height of the grid. 13 Expand X Axis, and specify a Layout type, a Bay size, and Start and End offsets. 14 Expand Y Axis, and specify a Layout type, a Bay size, and Start and End offsets. 15 Click OK.
Adding Radial Layout Grids
Use this procedure to create a 2D radial layout grid.
Creating a Layout Grid Tool | 1439
Radial layout grid parameters
1 Open the tool palette that contains the layout grid 2D tool you want to use, and select the tool. TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. If there are no layout grid 2D tools available on tool palettes in the workspace, you can use the Content Browser to access the Stock Tool catalog, which contains a layout grid 2D tool under Parametric Layout and Anchoring Tools. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the grid, and click OK. 4 Select Radial for Shape. 5 Specify the boundary object attached to the grid. 6 Expand Dimensions. 7 Select Yes to specify dimensions on the drawing screen. 8 Select No to specify dimensions on the Properties palette.
Enter the width of the grid. Enter the angular dimension of the grid. 9 Expand X Axis. 10 Select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays. 11 Select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size. 12 Enter a value for Inside radius. 13 Enter a value for End offset. 14 Expand Y Axis. 15 Select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays. 16 Select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay angle.
1440 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
17 Enter a value for Start angle offset. 18 Enter a value for End angle offset. 19 Specify an insertion point in the drawing for the center of the radial layout grid. 20 Specify the rotation of the radial grid about the insertion point.
Changing Radial Layout Grids
Use this procedure to change the angle or size of a radial layout grid. You can also change the number and size of the grid bays. If you use grips to stretch a radial layout grid, the behavior of the radial layout grid depends on the spacing type of each axis. The overall size of the grid "jumps" in directions that are specified to use a certain bay size with repeat spacing because the exact bay size is maintained. The overall size changes in directions that are specified to be evenly spaced or manually spaced.
1 Select one or more 2D layout grids, right-click, and click Modify Layout Grid (2D). 2 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Enter a new value for the radius, angle, and inside radius. 4 Enter a new value for the X bay size. 5 Change the repeat spacing value, or enter a new value for the bay angle.
Adding Rectangular Layout Grids
Use this procedure to add rectangular layout grids. Rectangular layout grid parameters
1 Open the tool palette that contains the layout grid 2D tool you want to use, and select the tool. TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. If there are no layout grid 2D tools available on tool palettes in the workspace, you can use the Content Browser to access the Stock Tool catalog, which contains a layout grid 2D tool under Parametric Layout and Anchoring Tools. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
Changing Radial Layout Grids | 1441
2 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select Rectangular for Shape. 4 Enter a value for the X width and the Y depth. 5 Select the repeat spacing option and enter a value, or enter a value for the X and Y bay size. 6 Specify an insertion point in the drawing for the lower-left corner of the rectangular layout grid. 7 Specify the rotation of the rectangular grid about the insertion point.
Changing Rectangular Layout Grids
Use this procedure to change the angle or size of a rectangular layout grid. You can also change the number and size of the grid bays. If you use grips to stretch a rectangular layout grid, the behavior of the rectangular layout grid depends on the spacing type of each axis. The overall size of the grid "jumps" in directions that are specified to use a specific bay size with repeat spacing because the exact bay size is maintained. The overall size changes in directions that are specified to be evenly spaced or manually spaced.
1 Select one or more 2D layout grids, right-click, and click Modify Layout Grid (2D). 2 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Enter a new X width and Y depth value. 4 Select the repeat spacing option and enter a value, or enter a new X and Y bay size value.
Adding Grid Lines to Layout Grids
Use this procedure to add grid lines to a grid. You can separately add grid lines on the X plane and on the Y plane.
NOTE You can add lines only to grids inserted with manually spaced lines or evenly spaced lines. Layout grids with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value cannot be changed manually. For information about grid modes, see "Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids" on page 1443.
1 Select the layout grid, right-click, and add a grid line:
If you want to add...
Then...
a grid line to the X plane of the grid
select X-axis on the shortcut menu, and then click Add Grid Line.
a grid line to the Y plane of the grid
select Y-axis on the shortcut menu, and then click Add Grid Line.
2 Specify the distance of the new grid line from the start of the grid.
If you have added a line to a layout grid with manually spaced lines, the new line is inserted on the specified position. The position of the other lines remains unchanged. The grid size changes accordingly.
If you have added a line to a layout grid with evenly spaced lines, the new line is inserted and all lines are recalculated, so that they are evenly distributed again. The grid size remains unchanged.
Removing Grid Lines from Layout Grids
Use this procedure to remove individual grid lines from a grid. You can separately remove grid lines from the X plane and the Y plane.
NOTE You can remove lines only from grids that have been inserted with manually spaced lines or evenly spaced lines. Layout grids with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value cannot be changed. For information about grid modes, see "Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids" on page 1443.
1442 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
1 Select the layout grid, right-click, and remove a grid line:
If you want to remove... a grid line from the X plane of the grid
Then...
select X-axis on the shortcut menu, and then click Remove Grid Line.
a grid line from the Y plane of the grid
select Y-axis on the shortcut menu, and then click Remove Grid Line.
2 Click the grid line to be removed from the grid.
If you have removed a line from a layout grid with manually spaced lines, the specified line is removed from the grid. The position of the other lines remains unchanged.
If you have removed a line from a layout grid with evenly spaced lines, the specified line is removed from the grid. All remaining lines are recalculated, so that they are evenly distributed again.
Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids
Use this procedure to change the spacing mode of a radius or rectangular layout grid. Layout grids can have three different spacing modes. These modes are set separately for the X and Y planes:
Manual: You specify the position of each line on the layout grid.
Repeat: You specify equidistant spacing between lines on the layout grid. The number of lines is determined by the size of the layout grid. As the size of the grid changes, lines are added or subtracted accordingly. The distance between the lines remains fixed.
Space Evenly: You specify the number of lines on the grid. The space between the lines is determined by the size of the layout grid. As the size of the grid changes, the spacing between the lines is lengthened or shortened accordingly. The number of lines remains fixed.
By default, layout grids are inserted with evenly spaced lines. 1 Select the layout grid, right-click, and specify a spacing mode:
If you want to change...
Then...
the spacing mode of the X plane of the grid
select X-axis on the shortcut menu, and then click Layout Mode.
the spacing mode of the Y plane of the grid
select Y-axis on the shortcut menu, and then click Layout Mode.
2 Select the desired mode, and press ENTER.
If you are changing a layout grid with manually spaced lines to a grid with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value, you are prompted for start and end offsets, and the distance between the lines. If there are too few lines on the grid to fill it according to your specifications, new lines are created.
If you are changing a layout grid with manually spaced lines to a grid with evenly spaced lines, you are prompted for start and end offsets for the grid. The existing lines are distributed evenly on the grid.
If you are changing a layout grid with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value to a grid with manually spaced lines, there is no visible change, but the lines have been converted to manual lines, so that you now can add lines to and remove lines from the grid.
If you are changing a layout grid with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value to a grid with evenly spaced lines, you are prompted for start and end offsets. The existing lines are then recalculated and distributed evenly. You can now add lines to and remove lines from the grid.
If you are changing a grid with evenly spaced lines to a grid with manually spaced lines, there is no visible change. However, if you change the grid, the lines remain fixed and are not distributed evenly anymore.
Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids | 1443
If you are changing a grid with evenly spaced lines to a grid with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value, you are prompted for start and end offsets, and the distance between the lines. If there are too few lines on the grid to fill the grid according to your specifications, new lines are created.
Changing the Display Properties of Layout Grids
Use this procedure to change any of the following display properties of the nodes on a layout grid:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale Node size
1 Select the layout grid that you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Creating and Removing Boundaries for Layout Grids
Use this procedure to create a boundary around a 2D layout grid. Areas of the grid outside the boundary are not shown. However, objects anchored to the grid outside the boundary are still displayed. Boundaries are useful when you need to create a grid in an irregularly shaped area. You can also remove a boundary to redisplay the entire grid.
1 Draw a closed polyline to define the grid boundary. 2 Select a layout grid, right-click, and click Clip. 3 Enter s (Set boundary), select the layout grid, and press ENTER. 4 Select the closed polyline for the boundary of the layout grid, and press ENTER. 5 To remove a grid boundary, erase the polyline that defines the boundary.
Creating Holes in Layout Grids
Use this procedure to create a hole in a layout grid. The area of the grid within the hole is not displayed. 1 Draw a closed polyline to define the hole. 2 Select a layout grid, right-click, and click Clip. 3 Enter a (Add hole), select the layout grid, and press ENTER. 4 Select the closed polyline for the hole, and press ENTER.
A hole is cut in the layout grid.
Removing Holes from Layout Grids
Use this procedure to remove holes that you have created in layout grids.
1444 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
1 Select a layout grid, right-click, and click Clip.
2 Enter r (Remove hole), select a layout grid, and press ENTER.
3 Select the closed polyline of the hole.
Changing the Location of Layout Grids
Use this procedure to change the location of layout grids. You can relocate a layout grid by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The layout grid also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the layout grid are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the layout grid by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the layout grid on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about WCS and UCS, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the layout grid that you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the layout grid:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the layout grid
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the layout grid on the XY plane
make the normal of the layout curve parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the layout grid on the YZ plane
make the normal of the layout grid parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the layout grid on the XZ plane
make the normal of the layout grid parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the layout grid
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Grid
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a layout grid. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a layout grid.
1 Select the layout grid to which to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK.
Changing the Location of Layout Grids | 1445
7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK.
Using Layout Volumes
Use a layout volume to arrange objects in a 3D grid. Changing the size of a layout volume changes the spacing of objects attached to that volume and can also change the size and height of objects attached to that volume.
Creating a Layout Volume Tool
Use this procedure to create a layout volume tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own layout volume tools if you are placing multiple layout volumes of a specific style and they all have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to add the tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a layout volume in the drawing
Then... select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from the Content Browser
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 For Name, enter the name you want displayed for this tool's tooltip. This name will also be displayed with
the tool if it is published to a catalog in the Content Browser. 5 For Description, click in the text box, and then enter the description you want displayed for this tool's
tooltip. This description will also be displayed with the tool if it is published to a catalog in the Content Browser. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Under General, click the Description text box, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 8 For Layer key, click the text box, select a layer key, and click OK. 9 For Layer overrides, click the text box, select a layer key override, and click OK. 10 Expand Dimensions. 11 Click Yes to specify the dimension of the grid on the drawing screen as you are creating it. 12 Click No to specify numerical values on the Properties palette, and enter values for Width, Depth, and Height 13 Expand X Axis. 14 Select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
1446 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
15 Select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size. 16 Enter a value for Start offset. 17 Enter a value for End offset. 18 Expand Y Axis. 19 Select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays. 20 Select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay angle. 21 Enter a value for Start offset. 22 Enter a value for End offset. 23 Expand Z Axis. 24 Select Space evenly or Repeat for Layout type. 25 Enter a value for Start offset. 26 Enter a value for End offset. 27 Click OK.
Adding Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to add a layout volume, which is a three-dimensional (3D) layout grid. Layout volume parameters
1 Open the tool palette that contains the volume layout tool you want to use, and select the tool.
Adding Layout Volumes | 1447
TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
If there are no volume layout tools available on tool palettes in the workspace, you can use the Content Browser to access the Stock Tool catalog, which contains a volume layout tool under Parametric Layout and Anchoring Tools. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 Select the volume layout tool. 3 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 4 Enter a value for the X width, Y depth and the Z height. 5 Select the repeat spacing option and enter a value, or enter a value for the X, Y, and Z bay size. 6 Specify an insertion point in the drawing for the lower-left corner of the rectangular layout grid. 7 Specify the rotation of the rectangular grid about the insertion point.
Changing Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to change the angle or size of three-dimensional (3D) layout volumes. You can also change the number and size of the grid bays. If you use grips to stretch a layout volume, the behavior of the layout volume depends on the spacing type of each axis. The overall size of the grid "jumps" in directions that are specified to use a certain bay size with repeat spacing because the exact bay size is maintained. The overall size changes in directions that are specified to be evenly spaced or manually spaced.
1 Select one or more 3D volume grids, right-click, and click Modify Layout Volume (3D). 2 In the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Enter a new X width, Y depth, and Z height value. 4 Select the repeat spacing option and enter a value, or enter a new X, Y, and Z bay size value.
Adding Grid Lines to Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to add grid lines to a layout volume. You can add grid lines on the X, Y, and Z planes separately.
NOTE You can add lines only to volumes inserted with manually spaced lines or evenly spaced lines. Layout volumes with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value cannot be changed. For information about grid modes, see "Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids" on page 1443.
1 Select the layout volume. 2 Specify the axis to which to add the grid line:
If you want to add... a grid line to the X plane of the volume a grid line to the Y plane of the volume a grid line to the Z plane of the volume
Then... right-click, and click X axis Add Grid Line. right-click, and click Y axis Add Grid Line. right-click, and click Z axis Add Grid Line.
3 Specify the distance of the new grid line from the start of the grid.
If you have added a line to a layout volume with manually spaced lines, the new line is inserted at the specified position. The position of the other lines remains unchanged. The grid size changes accordingly.
If you have added a line to a layout volume with evenly spaced lines, the new line is inserted and all lines are recalculated, so that they are evenly distributed again. The grid size remains unchanged.
1448 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
Removing Grid Lines from Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to remove individual grid lines from a volume. You can remove grid lines from the X, Y, and Z planes separately.
NOTE You can remove lines only from volumes which have been inserted with manually spaced lines or evenly spaced lines. Layout volumes with lines placed at a fixed repeated spacing value cannot be changed. For information about grid modes, see "Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids" on page 1443.
1 Select the layout volume. 2 Specify the axis from which to remove the grid line:
If you want to remove...
Then...
a grid line from the X plane of the volume
right-click, and click X axis Remove Grid Line.
a grid line from the Y plane of the volume
right-click, and click Y axis Remove Grid Line.
a grid line from the Z plane of the volume
right-click, and click Z axis Remove Grid Line.
3 Click the grid line to be removed from the volume.
If you have removed a line from a layout volume with manually spaced lines, the specified line is removed from the volume. The position of the other lines remains unchanged.
If you have removed a line from a layout volume with evenly spaced lines, the specified line is removed from the volume. All remaining lines are recalculated, so that they are evenly distributed again.
Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to change how modes are positioned along a layout volume. For more information, see "Adding Layout Volumes" on page 1447.
For example, you can change the mode so that a volume with manually spaced nodes becomes a volume with evenly spaced nodes. If you want to add nodes to a layout volume with a fixed number of nodes, you must first convert the layout volume to the manually spaced or evenly spaced mode.
You can also change the layout mode on the Properties palette.
1 Select the layout volume by selecting one of the node anchors.
2 Right-click, and click Layout Mode.
3 Select the desired mode, and press ENTER.
If you are changing a layout volume with manually spaced nodes to a volume with nodes placed at a fixed repeated spacing value, you are prompted for start and end offsets, and the distance between the nodes. If there are too few nodes on the curve to fill it, new nodes are created at the specified distance.
If you are changing a layout volume with manually spaced nodes to a volume with evenly spaced nodes, you are prompted for start and end offsets for the volume. The existing nodes are distributed evenly on the volume.
If you are changing a volume with nodes placed at a fixed repeated spacing value to a volume with manually spaced nodes, there is no visible change. However, the nodes have been converted to manual nodes, so that you now can add nodes to and remove nodes from the volume.
If you are changing a volume with nodes placed at a fixed repeated spacing value to a volume with evenly spaced nodes, you are prompted for start and end offsets. The existing nodes are than recalculated and distributed evenly. You can now add nodes to and remove nodes from the volume.
If you are changing a volume with evenly spaced nodes to a volume with manually spaced nodes, there is no visible change. If you change the volume, however, the nodes remain fixed and are no longer redistributed evenly.
Removing Grid Lines from Layout Volumes | 1449
If you are changing a volume with evenly spaced nodes to a volume with nodes placed at a fixed repeated spacing value, you are prompted for start and end offsets, and the distance between the nodes. If there are too few nodes on the curve to fill it, new nodes are created at the specified distance.
Changing the Display Properties of Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to change any of the following display properties of the nodes on a layout volume:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale Node size
1 Select the layout volume that you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click .
5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property.
7 Click OK twice.
Changing the Location of Layout Volumes
Use this procedure to change the location of layout volumes. You can relocate a layout volume by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The layout volume also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the layout volume are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the layout volume by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the layout volume on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about WCS and UCS, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the layout volume that you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the layout volume:
If you want to... relocate the layout volume
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the layout volume on the XY plane
make the normal of the layout volume parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
1450 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
If you want to... locate the layout volume on the YZ plane locate the layout volume on the XZ plane change the rotation of the layout volume
Then...
make the normal of the layout volume parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the layout volume parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Volume
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a layout volume. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a layout volume.
1 Select the layout volume to which to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK. 7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Volume | 1451
1452 | Chapter 30 Layout Curves and Grids
Grids
31
Grids are AEC objects on which you can anchor other objects, such as columns, and constrain their locations.
1453
Grids
Grids are AEC objects on which you can anchor other objects, such as columns, and constrain their locations. Grids are useful in the design and documentation phases of a project.
Types of Grids There are several types of grids, each with its own purpose: Layout grids help you position objects relative to each other in your building design. For more information about layout grids, see "Layout Curves and Grids" on page 1430. Column grids are layout grids that place a column at each intersection of the grid as you add it to your drawing. They are unique also in that they have automatic labeling tools. For more information about columns, see "Creating a Freestanding Column" on page 1352 or "Creating a Grid-Anchored Column" on page 1354. Ceiling grids are specialized layout grids that represent suspended ceiling systems or cassette ceilings. They can be anchored to a space object at ceiling height. All of these grid types share some common features.
Layout Types for Grids There are 3 different layout types that control the spacing of lines in a grid. Layout type is specified separately for the X and Y planes.
Manual: You specify the position of each line on the grid. Repeat (Fixed Bay Size): You specify equidistant spacing between lines on the grid. The number of lines is
determined by the size of the grid. As the size of the grid changes, lines are added or subtracted accordingly. The distance between lines remains fixed. Space Evenly: You specify the number of lines on the grid. The space between lines is determined by the size of the grid. As the size of the grid changes, the spacing between lines is lengthened or shortened accordingly. The number of lines remains fixed.
NOTE By default, grids are inserted with evenly spaced lines.
Anchoring Objects to Grids Grids can be used to anchor other objects. This is most visible in column grids, where special functionality allows you to anchor columns to the grid during insertion. Once the grid is inserted, you can add other objects to it as well. Two anchoring mechanisms are available for grids:
Anchoring objects to a grid cell (Cell Anchor) Anchoring objects to a grid intersection (Node Anchor)
For more information about anchoring objects, see "Anchors" on page 1410.
Using Column Grid Tools to Create Column Grids
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place column grids using a structural column grid tool with specific predefined properties. You can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change the properties. You can also use structural column grid tools to convert linework to column grids, and to apply the settings of a structural column grid tool to existing column grids.
1454 | Chapter 31 Grids
Tool palettes containing structural column grid tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample structural column grid tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain structural column grid tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog My Tool catalog Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain structural column grid tools with column grid properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating a Column Grid
Use this procedure to add a new column grid that has the properties specified in the structural column grid tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a column grid, see "Creating a Column Grid with User-Specified Settings" on page 1455.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the structural column grid tool you want to use, and select the tool. TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Specify the insertion point of the column grid. 3 Specify the rotation of the column grid. 4 Continue adding column grids, and press ENTER.
Creating a Column Grid with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a column grid with settings that you specify. Column grids can be either rectangular or radial. Rectangular grid
Creating a Column Grid | 1455
Radial grid
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a structural column grid tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a shape, either Rectangular or Radial. 4 Expand Dimensions. 5 If you have selected a rectangular grid shape, specify the settings:
If you want to...
Then...
define the width of the grid
expand Dimensions, and enter a value for X - Width.
define the depth of the grid
expand Dimensions, and enter a value for Y - Depth.
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the X direction expand X Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay size along the X direction
expand X Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size.
specify the offset distance from the start point along the X expand X Axis, and enter a value for Start offset. The offset
direction of the grid
distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
specify the offset distance from the end point along the X direction of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for End offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the Y direction expand Y Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay size along the Y direction
expand Y Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size.
specify the offset distance from the start point along the Y direction of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Start offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
specify the offset distance from the end point along the Y direction of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for End offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
6 If you have selected a radial grid shape, specify the settings:
If you want to... define the width of the grid
Then... expand Dimensions, and enter a value for X - Width.
define the angle of the grid
expand Dimensions, and enter a value for A - Angle.
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the X direction expand X Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay size along the X direction
expand X Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size.
specify the inside radius of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for Inside radius.
1456 | Chapter 31 Grids
If you want to...
Then...
specify the offset distance from the end point along the X direction of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for End offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the Y direction expand Y Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay angle along the Y direction expand Y Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay angle.
specify the offset angle from the start angle along the X direction grid curve
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Start angle offset. The offset angle may be used to reduce the grid size.
specify the offset angle from the end angle along the X direction grid curve
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for End angle offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the grid size.
7 To add columns to the grid intersection during insertion, expand Column, and specify a style for the structural member. If you choose to add columns, you can specify the dimensions of the column:
Start offset End offset Logical length Justify Justify using overall extents
TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
8 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the column grid. 9 Specify the rotation angle of the grid. 10 Continue adding column grids, and press ENTER.
Creating a Column Grid from a Layout Grid
Use this procedure to convert a two-dimensional (2D) layout grid to a column grid that has the properties of the structural column grid tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the column grid.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the column grid tool you want to use.
TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Right-click the tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Layout Grid 2D. 3 Select the layout grid to convert, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Edit the properties of the column grid in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Creating a Column Grid from Linework
Use this procedure to convert custom linework to a column grid that has the properties of the structural column grid tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the column grid.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the column grid tool you want to use.
Creating a Column Grid from a Layout Grid | 1457
TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Right-click a structural column grid tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework. 3 Select the linework to convert, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original linework, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Edit the properties of the column grid in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Creating a Column Grid Dynamically
Use this procedure to create column grids dynamically by specifying their dimensions on screen as you draw them. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the column grid tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 In the Properties palette, expand Dimensions, and select Yes for Specify on screen. 3 To add columns to the grid during insertion, expand Column, and select the desired column style.
TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
4 Specify the insertion point for the grid in the drawing. 5 Specify the overall size of the grid by dragging the cursor to the desired size and clicking once. 6 Drag the crosshairs inside the resulting shape vertically and horizontally to define the correct number of
bays in the column grid.
NOTE The closer the crosshairs go to the left and bottom of the grid, the more spaces are created.
7 Click once to confirm the number of vertical and horizontal bays. 8 Specify the rotation angle of the grid. 9 Press ENTER.
The column grid is inserted into the drawing according to your specifications.
Creating a Structural Column Grid Tool
Use this procedure to create a structural column grid tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own structural column grid tools if you are placing multiple column grids of a specific style, and they all have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a column grid in the drawing
Then... select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
1458 | Chapter 31 Grids
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the column grid created from this tool, and click
OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select a column grid shape. 10 Specify the settings for the dimensions of the grid.
For more information, see "Creating a Column Grid with User-Specified Settings" on page 1455.
11 Click OK.
Working with Column Grids
After you have created column grids in your drawing, you can customize them for your project. You can add labels, extend grid lines, and add dimensions to the grids.
Labeling Column Grids
You can label existing column grids in the X direction and the Y direction.
1 Select the column grid you want to label, right-click, and click Label. 2 Specify the grid location for labels:
If you want to... add labels to the X axis of the grid
Then... click the X - Labeling tab.
add labels to the Y axis of the grid
click the Y - Labeling tab.
3 Enter a starting number or letter for the label under Number in the table.
Each grid line in the X direction or the Y direction is listed in the table. If Automatically Calculate Values for Labels is selected, numbers or letters are consecutively assigned to the remaining grid lines in the order you specify (ascending or descending).
NOTE To renumber a grid, enter a new value in the first location. The remaining values are updated if Automatically Calculate Values for Labels is selected.
4 If you do not want to use certain characters in the sequence, select Never Use Characters, and enter the characters, separated by commas.
5 To change the label symbol, click Bubble.
6 Select a new label symbol from the MvBlockDef Select dialog box, and click OK. Any multi-view block currently defined in the drawing can be used.
7 Click Generate New Bubbles On Exit to update the bubbles. 8 Specify the location of bubbles:
If you want to...
Then...
place bubbles in the X direction of the grid
select Top and/or Bottom.
place bubbles in the Y direction of the grid
select Left and/or Right.
Working with Column Grids | 1459
9 Enter a value for Extension. Extension is the length of the bubble lines from the grid to the bubble.
10 Click OK. Labeling a column grid
Extending Column Grid Lines Beyond the Grid Boundary or Limits
Use this procedure to label two sides of a column grid and have the lines of the other two sides extend beyond the edge of the column grid rectangle.
1 Label the two sides of the column grid. For more information, see "Labeling Column Grids" on page 1459.
2 Create a multi-view block definition that has no view blocks. For more information, see "Creating a New Multi-View Block Definition" on page 1516.
3 Select the column grid, right-click, and click Label. 4 Click the Labeling tab for the axis you wish to extend. 5 Under Bubble Parameter, select the side (Left or Right, Top or Bottom) that has not been labeled, but do
not clear a side that is already labeled, or the bubbles will be removed from that side. 6 Click Bubble, select the new multi-view block you created, and then click OK. 7 Clear Generate New Bubbles On Exit. 8 Click OK.
Dimensioning Column Grids
Use this procedure to dimension column grids and set the distance between the dimensions and the grid. For this, you can use the automatic AEC Dimension. Dimensioning Column Grids with Automatic AEC Dimension When you dimension a column grid with an automatic AEC dimension, the resulting dimension is associative. When you update the grid, the dimension is updated accordingly. Also, you can choose an AEC dimension style. For more information, see "AEC Dimensions" on page 1740. With an AEC dimension, you cannot display angle dimensions or edit individual dimension chains.
1 Select the column grid you want to dimension. 2 Right-click, and click AEC Dimension. 3 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 4 Select a style.
1460 | Chapter 31 Grids
NOTE Be sure to select an AEC dimension style that contains dimensioning points for grids. For more information about AEC dimension contents, see "Associative Dimensions from Objects" on page 1743.
5 Click to specify the position of the AEC dimension. The dimension can, for example, be placed above or below the column grid.
To set the direction of the dimension, drag the mouse. The extension lines are drawn in the opposite direction.
If you want to align the dimension, enter a on the command line, and select the geometry to align to.
If you want a user-defined angle for the dimension, enter r and enter the rotation angle on the command line.
NOTE The angle you specify here is calculated in relation to the UCS, and not to the dimensioned grid.
Editing Column Grids
You can change column grids by modifying the overall dimensions of the grid, the number and position of grid lines, as well as the location of the grid within the drawing. You can also set a clipping boundary for the grid and use that to mask the grid or insert a hole into the grid.
NOTE You cannot change the shape of an existing column grid. You cannot change a radial grid to a rectangular grid, or vice versa.
Changing the Dimensions of a Column Grid
Use this procedure to change the overall dimensions of a column grid. A rectangular grid is defined by its width and depth. A radial grid is defined by its radius, angle, and optionally, its inner radius.
1 Double-click the column grid to which you want to make changes. 2 Expand General, and expand Dimensions. 3 Modify the desired settings:
If you want to...
Then...
change the dimensions of a rectangular column grid
enter new values for X - Width and Y - Depth.
change the dimensions of a radial column grid
enter new values for X - Width and A - Angle.
TIP You can also change the size of a grid by dragging its grip points. When you have a manual grid, you drag the individual lines, and not the grid.
Changing the Lines of a Column Grid
Apart from the overall dimensions of a column grid, you can also change the number and position of grid lines on the X and Y axes. There are 3 different layout types that control the spacing of lines in a grid. Layout type is specified separately for the X and Y planes on the Properties palette for the grid.
Manual: You specify the position of each line on the grid.
Repeat (Fixed Bay Size): You specify equidistant spacing between lines on the grid. The number of lines is determined by the size of the grid. As the size of the grid changes, lines are added or subtracted accordingly. The distance between lines remains fixed.
Editing Column Grids | 1461
Space Evenly: You specify the number of lines on the grid. The space between lines is determined by the size of the grid. As the size of the grid changes, the spacing between lines is lengthened or shortened accordingly. The number of lines remains fixed.
NOTE By default, grids are inserted with evenly spaced lines.
The procedures for adding or removing grid lines vary depending on the Layout type in effect, as explained in the following sections.
Adding Lines to a Column Grid In some cases, you need to add lines to an existing grid. Depending on the Layout type in effect, you do this in different ways.
Adding Lines to a Column Grid with Evenly Spaced Lines Use this procedure to add lines to a grid with evenly spaced lines. The lines will always be distributed evenly along the grid axis. If you need non-regular lines with different spacing between them, open the grid's Properties palette, and change the Layout type to Manual.
1 Double-click the column grid to which you want to add lines.
2 Expand Dimensions.
3 Add grid lines:
If you want to... add grid lines to the X axis of the grid
Then...
expand X Axis, and enter a value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines increases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
add grid lines to the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines increases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
Adding Grid Lines to a Manual Column Grid Use this procedure to add lines to a manual grid. A manual grid allows maximum control over the grid, but requires that you define the exact number and position of grid lines.
1 Double-click the column grid to which you want to add lines. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Add grid lines:
If you want to...
Then...
add grid lines to the X axis of the grid
expand X Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click on the value for Bays.
add grid lines to the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click on the value for Bays.
The Bays worksheet lists all bays on the selected axis, their distance from the start point of the grid, and the spacing between the grid lines that define the bays.
4 To add a line, click under the last number in the Bays list.
A new line is inserted with default values for distance and spacing. You can edit these values by clicking them and entering new values.
NOTE You cannot enter a line number for the new line. The line number is provided by the application after you close the worksheet.
5 Click OK.
1462 | Chapter 31 Grids
Adding Grid Lines to a Column Grid with Fixed Bay Size Use this procedure to add lines to a grid with bays of a fixed size. Normally, in a grid with fixed bays, the distance between the grid lines is more important than the number of grid lines. To add lines to a grid with a fixed bay size, you have two options:
Enlarge the overall grid size (for more information, see "Changing the Dimensions of a Column Grid" on page 1461).
Decrease the size of the bays.
TIP In cases where the number of lines is important for the grid, change the Layout type of the grid from Repeat to Space evenly or Manual.
1 Double-click the column grid to which you want to add lines. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Add grid lines:
If you want to...
Then...
add grid lines to the X axis of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
add grid lines to the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
If you enter a value that reduces the size of the bays, the number of grid lines increases as the extra bays are added to the grid.
Removing Lines from a Column Grid You can remove individual grid lines from column grids. The method used will depend on the layout type of the specific column grid.
Removing Lines from a Column Grid with Evenly Spaced Lines Use this procedure to remove lines from a grid with evenly spaced lines. The lines will always be distributed evenly along the grid axis. To remove a particular line and have all the other lines stay in their original places, open the grid's Properties palette, and change the Layout type to Manual.
1 Double-click the column grid from which you want to remove lines.
2 Expand Dimensions.
3 Remove grid lines:
If you want to...
Then...
remove grid lines from the X axis of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a smaller value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines decreases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
remove grid lines from the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a smaller value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines decreases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
Removing Grid Lines from a Manual Column Grid Use this procedure to remove grid lines from a manual grid. On a manual grid, you can remove each line individually.
1 Double-click the column grid from which you want to remove lines. 2 Expand Dimensions.
Changing the Lines of a Column Grid | 1463
3 Remove grid lines: If you want to... remove grid lines from the X axis of the grid
remove grid lines from the Y axis of the grid
Then...
expand X Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click the value for Bays.
expand Y Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click the value for Bays.
The Bays worksheet lists all bays on the selected axis, their distance from the start point of the grid, and the spacing between the grid lines that define the bays.
4 To remove a line, click the bay number in the Bays list, and click Remove. 5 Click OK.
The bay is deleted from the grid, and the grid size is reduced accordingly.
Removing Lines from a Column Grid with Fixed Bay Size Use this procedure to remove lines from a grid with fixed bays. Normally, in a grid with fixed bays, the distance between the grid lines is more important than the number of grid lines. To remove lines from a grid with a fixed bay size, you have two options:
Decrease the overall grid size (for more information, see "Changing the Dimensions of a Column Grid" on page 1461).
Increase the size of the bays
TIP In cases where the number of lines is important for the grid, change the Layout type of the grid from Repeat to Space evenly or Manual.
1 Double-click the column grid from which you want to remove lines. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Remove grid lines:
If you want to...
Then...
remove grid lines from the X axis of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
remove grid lines from the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
If you enter a value that increases the size of the bays, the number of grid lines decreases as the extra bays are removed from the grid.
Changing the Position of Column Grid Lines
You can change the position of individual lines in column grids for which the Layout type is Manual. (Grids with a Layout type of Repeat or Space evenly calculate line position according to the number of bays or the size of the grid.) A manual grid has grip points for every line. You can use either the grip points or the Bays worksheet to change the position of a grid line.
Using Grip Points to Move Column Grid Lines
Use this procedure to move a column grid line by dragging the grip points of the line. Manual grids have a pair of grip points for the start point and endpoint of each line.
1 Select the grid where you want to move grid lines.
For each line in the grid, a pair of grip points (start point and endpoint) is displayed.
TIP If your grid displays only four lines for the corners of the grid, the Layout type needs to be changed to Manual on the grid's Properties palette.
1464 | Chapter 31 Grids
2 Use the grip points to drag the lines in either a horizontal or vertical direction. If you move a grid line beyond the grid border, the grid is enlarged accordingly. If you move one of the border lines to the inside of the grid, the grid is decreased accordingly.
Changing the Position of Column Grid Lines by Editing Grid Bays Use this procedure to reposition grid lines by editing the number and spacing of grid bays using the Bays worksheet.
1 Double-click the column grid where you want to move lines. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Edit grid bays:
If you want to...
Then...
edit grid bays along the X axis
expand X Axis, and click the value for Bays.
edit grid bays along the Y axis
expand Y Axis, and click the value for Bays.
The Bays worksheet lists all bays on the selected axis, their distance from the start point of the grid, and the spacing of each bay.
4 To change a bay, click one of its measuring values in the list, and edit the value. 5 Click OK.
The line positions have changed according to your specifications.
Attaching Clipping Profiles to Column Grids
You can attach a clipping profile to define a mask around a column grid or to make a hole in a column grid. You could, for example, create a mask to define a column grid for an irregularly shaped room, or exclude parts of a room from the column grid.
NOTE To attach a clipping profile, you must first draw a closed polyline with the desired boundary or hole shape.
Masking Column Grids Use this procedure to mask a column grid. A mask is a polyline shape that defines the boundaries of a column grid. Those parts of the grid outside the boundary are not displayed.
1 Draw a closed polyline with the boundary or hole shape you want. 2 Select the grid you want to mask. 3 On the Properties palette, expand General. 4 Choose Select object for Boundary. 5 Select the closed polyline you want to use as a mask. 6 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off the grid grips. The parts of the column grid that are outside the masking polyline are no longer displayed.
TIP If columns are connected to the invisible part of the grid, they are still displayed after masking. If necessary, you can delete them.
TIP If you want to restore the original grid shape, select None for Boundary in the Properties palette.
Creating Holes in Column Grids Use this procedure to create a hole in an existing column grid. The hole is created from a closed polyline placed within the boundaries of the grid. Any parts of the grid inside the hole are not displayed.
Attaching Clipping Profiles to Column Grids | 1465
1 If it does not already exist within the boundaries of the grid, draw a closed polyline in the shape of the desired hole.
2 Select the grid, right-click, and click Clip. 3 Enter a (Add Hole), and press ENTER. 4 Select the grid again, and press ENTER. 5 Select a closed polyline for the hole.
A hole is cut in the column grid.
6 Press ENTER to end the command.
TIP If columns are connected to the hole in the grid, they are still displayed. If necessary, you can delete them.
Removing Holes from Column Grids Use this procedure to remove holes you have created in column grids.
1 Select the grid from which you want to remove holes, right-click, and click Clip. 2 Enter r (Remove Hole) and press ENTER. 3 Select the grid again, and press ENTER. 4 Select the closed polyline of the hole. The hole is removed from the layout grid. The polyline, however, remains in the drawing. If necessary, you can delete it.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Column Grid
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a column grid. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a column grid.
1 Select the column grid to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK. 7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK twice.
1466 | Chapter 31 Grids
Changing the Location of Column Grids
Use this procedure to change the location of column grids. You can relocate a column grid by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The column grid also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the column grid are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the column grid by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the column grid on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For more information about the world coordinate system, see "Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the column grid that you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the column grid:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the column grid
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the column grid on the XY plane
make the normal of the column grid parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the column grid on the YZ plane
make the normal of the column grid parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the column grid on the XZ plane
make the normal of the column grid parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the column grid
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Display of Column Grids
Use this procedure to change any of the following display properties for lines, node markers, or cell markers in a column grid:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
1 Select the column grid you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
Changing the Location of Column Grids | 1467
6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Changing the Node Radius Display of Column Grids
Use this procedure to change the node radius display for an individual column grid. 1 Select the column grid you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the Model display representation, and select Object Override. The display representation in bold is the current display representation. 4 Click the Other tab. 5 Specify a node radius. 6 Click OK twice.
Using Ceiling Grid Tools to Create Ceiling Grids
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place ceiling grids using a ceiling grid tool with a specific ceiling grid style and other predefined properties. You can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change its properties. You can also use ceiling grid tools to convert linework to ceiling grids and to apply the settings of a ceiling grid tool to existing ceiling grids. Tool palettes containing ceiling grid tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample ceiling grid tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain ceiling grid tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog My Tool catalog Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain ceiling grid tools with ceiling grid properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating a Ceiling Grid
Use this procedure to add a new ceiling grid that has the properties specified in the ceiling grid tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a ceiling grid, see "Creating a Ceiling Grid with User-Specified Settings" on page 1469.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the ceiling grid tool you want to use, and select the tool.
1468 | Chapter 31 Grids
TIP You may have to scroll to display the desired tool. After selecting it, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
2 Specify the insertion point of the ceiling grid. 3 Specify the rotation of the ceiling grid. 4 Continue adding ceiling grids, and press ENTER.
Creating a Ceiling Grid with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a ceiling grid with settings that you specify. 1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a ceiling grid tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a boundary. 4 Expand Dimensions. 5 Specify the settings:
If you want to...
Then...
define the width of the grid
expand Dimensions, and enter a value for X - Width.
define the depth of the grid
expand Dimensions, and enter a value for Y - Depth.
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the X direction expand X Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay size along the X direction
expand X Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size.
specify the offset distance from the start point along the X expand X Axis, and enter a value for Start offset. The offset
direction of the grid
distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
specify the offset distance from the endpoint along the X direction of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for End offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the Y direction expand Y Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay size along the Y direction
expand Y Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size.
specify the offset distance from the start point along the Y direction of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Start offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
specify the offset distance from the endpoint along the Y direction of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for End offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
TIP After specifying the desired settings, you can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
6 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the ceiling grid. 7 Specify the rotation angle of the grid. 8 Continue adding ceiling grids, and press ENTER.
Creating a Ceiling Grid from a Layout Grid
Use this procedure to convert a two-dimensional (2D) layout grid to a ceiling grid that has the properties of the ceiling grid tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the ceiling grid.
Creating a Ceiling Grid with User-Specified Settings | 1469
1 Open the tool palette that contains the ceiling grid tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click the ceiling grid tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Layout Grids. 3 Select the layout grid to convert, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to erase the linework, or enter n (No) to keep
it. 5 Edit the properties of the ceiling grid in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Creating a Ceiling Grid from Linework
Use this procedure to convert custom linework to a ceiling grid that has the properties of the ceiling grid tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the ceiling grid.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the ceiling grid tool you want to use. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click a ceiling grid tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework. 3 Select the linework to convert, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original linework, press ENTER to keep the linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. 5 Edit the properties of the ceiling grid in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Creating a Ceiling Grid Dynamically
Use this procedure to create ceiling grids dynamically by specifying their dimensions on screen as you draw them. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the ceiling grid tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 In the Properties palette, expand Dimensions, and expand X Axis and Y Axis:
If you want to...
Then...
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the X direction expand X Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay size along the X direction
expand X Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size.
specify the offset distance from the start point along the X expand X Axis, and enter a value for Start offset. The offset
direction of the grid
distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
specify the offset distance from the endpoint along the X direction of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for End offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
lay out the grid with evenly spaced bays along the Y direction expand Y Axis, select Space evenly for Layout type, and enter a value for Number of bays.
lay out the grid with a fixed bay size along the Y direction
expand Y Axis, select Repeat for Layout type, and enter a value for Bay size.
specify the offset distance from the start point along the Y direction of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Start offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
specify the offset distance from the endpoint along the Y direction of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for End offset. The offset distance may be used to reduce the effective grid size.
3 Under Dimensions, select Yes for Specify on screen. 4 Specify an insertion point in the drawing. 5 Specify the overall size of the grid by dragging the cursor to the desired size and clicking once.
1470 | Chapter 31 Grids
6 Specify the rotation angle for the grid. 7 Press ENTER.
Creating a Ceiling Grid with a Clipping Boundary
Use this procedure to create a ceiling grid within a polyline or a space object. If the ceiling grid is within a space, the grid is created at the ceiling height of the space.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the ceiling grid tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Click the setting for Boundary. 4 Click Select object, and then select an existing space or a closed polyline in the drawing. 5 Specify an insertion point in the drawing.
NOTE The insertion point of the ceiling grid is the lower-left corner of the ceiling grid if the rotation is set to 0 degrees.
6 Specify the overall size of the grid by dragging the cursor to the desired size and clicking once. Drag the cursor along the X axis to specify the number of bays along the X direction, and drag the cursor along the Y axis to specify the number of bays along the Y direction.
7 Specify the rotation angle of the grid. 8 Press ENTER.
The grid is displayed only within the space or closed polyline.
Creating a ceiling grid from a polyline
NOTE In some templates, the ceiling grid object is turned off in a number of plan views. It is displayed in most model views, however, so if you cannot see your grid in top view, switch to a model view to make sure it is there. For more information about turning on the display of ceiling grids in plan view, see "Display System" on page 411.
Creating a Ceiling Grid Tool
Use this procedure to create a ceiling grid tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own ceiling grid tools if you are placing multiple ceiling grids of a specific style, and they all have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a ceiling grid in the drawing
Then... select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, rightclick, and click Paste.
Creating a Ceiling Grid with a Clipping Boundary | 1471
If you want to... copy a tool from a tool catalog
Then...
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the ceiling grid created from this tool, and click
OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Specify the settings for the dimensions of the grid.
For more information, see "Creating a Ceiling Grid with User-Specified Settings" on page 1469.
10 Click OK.
Editing Ceiling Grids
You can change existing ceiling grids in different ways. You can change the overall dimensions of the grid, the number and position of grid lines, and the location of the grid within the drawing. You can also specify a clipping boundary for the grid and use that to mask the grid or insert a hole into the grid.
Changing the Dimensions of a Ceiling Grid
Use this procedure to change the overall dimensions of a ceiling grid. A ceiling grid is defined by its width and depth. 1 Double-click the ceiling grid you want to change. 2 Expand General, and expand Dimensions. 3 Modify the values for X - Width or Y - Depth.
TIP You can also change the size of a grid by dragging its grip points. Note that when you have a manual grid, you are dragging the individual lines, and not the grid.
Changing the Lines of a Ceiling Grid
Apart from the overall dimensions of a ceiling grid, you can also change the number and position of grid lines on the X and Y axes. There are 3 different layout types that control the spacing of lines in a grid. Layout type is specified separately for the X and Y planes on the Properties palette for the grid.
Manual: You specify the position of each line on the grid. Repeat (Fixed Bay Size): You specify equidistant spacing between lines on the grid. The number of lines is
determined by the size of the grid. As the size of the grid changes, lines are added or subtracted accordingly. The distance between lines remains fixed. Space Evenly: You specify the number of lines on the grid. The space between lines is determined by the size of the grid. As the size of the grid changes, the spacing between lines is lengthened or shortened accordingly. The number of lines remains fixed.
NOTE By default, grids are inserted with evenly spaced lines.
The procedures for adding or removing grid lines vary depending on the Layout type in effect, as explained in the following sections.
1472 | Chapter 31 Grids
Adding Lines to a Ceiling Grid In some cases, you need to add lines to an existing grid. Depending on the Layout type in effect, you do this in different ways.
Adding Lines to a Ceiling Grid with Evenly Spaced Lines Use this procedure to add lines to a grid with evenly spaced lines. The lines will always be distributed evenly along the grid axis. If you need non-regular lines with different spacing between them, open the grid's Properties palette, and change the Layout type to Manual.
1 Double-click the ceiling grid to which you want to add lines.
2 Expand Dimensions.
3 Add grid lines:
If you want to... add grid lines to the X axis of the grid
Then...
expand X Axis, and enter a value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines increases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
add grid lines to the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines increases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
Your grid has been updated accordingly, with the new number of grid lines distributed evenly along the grid axis.
TIP To add lines to the ceiling grid, you can also right-click the grid, and click X Axis/Y Axis Add Grid Line.
Adding Lines to a Manual Ceiling Grid Use this procedure to add lines to a manual grid. A manual grid allows maximum control over the grid, but requires that you specify the exact number and position of grid lines.
1 Double-click the ceiling grid to which you want to add lines. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Dimensions. 3 Add grid lines:
If you want to...
Then...
add grid lines to the X axis of the grid
expand X Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click on the value for Bays.
add grid lines to the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click on the value for Bays.
The Bays worksheet lists all of the bays on the selected axis, their distance from the start point of the grid, and the spacing between the grid lines that define the bays.
4 To add a line, click under the last number in the Bays list.
A new line is inserted with default values for distance and spacing. You can edit these values by clicking them and entering new values.
NOTE You cannot enter a line number for the new line. The line number is provided by the application after you close the worksheet.
5 Click OK.
TIP To add lines to the ceiling grid, you can also right-click the grid, and click X Axis/Y Axis Add Grid Line.
Changing the Lines of a Ceiling Grid | 1473
Adding Lines to a Ceiling Grid with Fixed Bay Size Use this procedure to add lines to a grid with fixed bays. Normally, in a grid with fixed bays, the distance between the grid lines is more important than the number of grid lines. To add lines to a grid with a fixed bay size, you have two options:
Enlarge the overall grid size (for more information, see "Changing the Dimensions of a Ceiling Grid" on page 1472). Decrease the size of the bays
TIP In cases where the number of lines is important for the grid, change the Layout type of the grid from Repeat to Space evenly or Manual.
1 Double-click the ceiling grid to which you want to add lines. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Add grid lines:
If you want to...
Then...
add grid lines to the X axis of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
add grid lines to the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
If you enter a value that reduces the size of the bays, the number of grid lines increases as the extra bays are added to the grid.
A number of new lines have been added by decreasing the size of the individual bays.
Removing Lines from a Ceiling Grid In the same way that lines can be added to a ceiling grid, they can also be removed.
Removing Lines from a Ceiling Grid with Evenly Spaced Lines Use this procedure to remove lines from a grid with evenly spaced lines. The lines will always be distributed evenly along the grid axis. To remove a particular line and have all the other lines stay in their original places, open the grid's Properties palette, and change the Layout type to Manual.
1 Double-click the ceiling grid from which you want to remove lines. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Remove grid lines:
If you want to... remove grid lines from the X axis of the grid
Then...
expand X Axis, and enter a smaller value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines decreases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
remove grid lines from the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a smaller value for Number of bays. The number of grid lines decreases to create the specified number of bays, while the overall size of the grid remains the same.
Your grid has been updated accordingly, with the new number of grid lines distributed evenly along the grid axis.
TIP To remove lines from a ceiling grid, you can also right-click the grid, and click X Axis/Y Axis Remove Grid Line.
Removing Lines from a Manual Ceiling Grid Use this procedure to remove grid lines from a manual grid. On a manual grid, you can remove each line individually.
1 Double-click the ceiling grid from which you want to remove lines. 2 Expand Dimensions.
1474 | Chapter 31 Grids
3 Remove grid lines: If you want to... remove grid lines from the X axis of the grid
remove grid lines from the Y axis of the grid
Then...
expand X Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click on the value for Bays.
expand Y Axis, select Manual for Layout type, and click on the value for Bays.
The Bays worksheet lists all the bays on the selected axis, their distance from the start point of the grid, and the spacing between the grid lines that define the bays.
4 To remove a line, click the bay number in the Bays list, and click Remove. 5 Click OK. The bay is deleted from the grid, and the grid size is reduced accordingly.
TIP To remove lines from a ceiling grid, you can also use right-click the grid, and click X Axis/Y Axis Remove Grid Line.
Removing Lines from a Ceiling Grid with Fixed Bay Size Use this procedure to remove lines from a grid with bays of fixed size. Normally, in a grid with fixed bays, the distance between the grid lines is more important factor than the number of grid lines. To remove lines from a grid with a fixed bay size, you have two options:
Decrease the overall grid size (for more information, see Changing the Dimensions of a Ceiling Grid). Increase the size of the bays.
TIP In cases where the number of lines is important for the grid, change the Layout type of the grid from Repeat to Space evenly or Manual.
1 Double-click the ceiling grid from which you want to remove lines. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 Remove grid lines:
If you want to...
Then...
remove grid lines from the X axis of the grid
expand X Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
remove grid lines from the Y axis of the grid
expand Y Axis, and enter a value for Bay size.
If you enter a value that increases the size of the bays, the number of grid lines decreases as the extra bays are removed from the grid.
A number of lines have been removed by increasing the size of the individual bays.
Changing the Position of Ceiling Grid Lines
You can change the position of individual lines in ceiling grids for which the Layout type is Manual. (Grids with a Layout type of Repeat or Space evenly calculate line position according to the number of bays or the size of the grid.) A manual grid has grip points for every line. You can use either the grip points or the Bays worksheet to change the position of a grid line.
Using Grip Points to Move Ceiling Grid Lines
Use this procedure to move a ceiling grid line by dragging the grip points of the line. Manual grids have a pair of grip points for the start point and end point of each line.
1 Select the grid where you want to move grid lines.
For each line in the grid, a pair of grip points (start point and end point) is displayed.
Changing the Lines of a Ceiling Grid | 1475
TIP If your grid displays only four lines for the corners of the grid, the Layout type needs to be changed to Manual on the grid's Properties palette.
2 Use the grip points to drag the lines in either horizontal or vertical direction. If you move a grid line beyond the grid border, the grid is enlarged accordingly. If you move one of the border lines of the grid to the inside of the grid, the grid is decreased accordingly.
Changing the Position of Ceiling Grid Lines by Editing Grid Bays Use this procedure to reposition grid lines by editing the number and spacing of grid bays using the Bays worksheet.
1 Double-click the ceiling grid where you want to move lines. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Dimensions. 3 Edit grid bays:
If you want to...
Then...
edit grid bays along the X axis
expand X Axis, and click the value for Bays.
edit grid bays along the Y axis
expand Y Axis, and click the value for Bays.
The Bays worksheet lists all bays on the selected axis, their distance from the start point of the grid, and the spacing of each bay.
4 To change a bay, click one of its measuring values in the list, and edit the value.
5 Click OK.
The line positions have changed according to your settings.
Attaching Clipping Profiles to Ceiling Grids
You can attach a clipping profile to define a mask around a ceiling grid or to make a hole in a ceiling grid. You could, for example, create a mask to define a ceiling grid for an irregularly shaped room, or exclude parts of a room from the ceiling grid.
For a mask, you can use closed polylines and spaces. For more information, see "Creating a Ceiling Grid with a Clipping Boundary" on page 1471.
NOTE To attach a clipping profile, you must first draw a closed polyline or space with the desired boundary or hole shape.
Masking Ceiling Grids Use this procedure to mask a ceiling grid. A mask is a polyline shape or space that defines the boundaries of a ceiling grid. Those parts of the grid outside the boundary are not displayed.
1 Draw a closed polyline with the boundary or hole shape you want. 2 Select the grid you want to mask. 3 On the Properties palette, expand General. 4 Choose Select object for Boundary. 5 Select the closed polyline or space you want to use as a mask. 6 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off the grid grips. The parts of the ceiling grid that are outside the masking polyline or space are no longer displayed.
TIP If you want to restore the original grid shape, select None for Boundary on the Properties palette.
1476 | Chapter 31 Grids
Creating Holes in Ceiling Grids Use this procedure to create a hole in an existing ceiling grid. The hole is created from a closed polyline or AEC object placed within the boundaries of the grid. Any parts of the grid inside the hole are not displayed.
1 If it does not already exist within the boundaries of the grid, draw a closed polyline in the shape of the desired hole.
2 Select the grid, right-click, and click Clip. 3 Enter a (Add Hole), and press ENTER. 4 Select the grid again, and press ENTER. 5 Select a closed polyline or AEC object for the hole.
A hole is cut in the ceiling grid. 6 Press ENTER to end the command. Adding a hole to a ceiling grid
Removing Holes from Ceiling Grids Use this procedure to remove holes you have created in ceiling grids.
1 Select the grid from which you want to remove holes, right-click, and click Clip. 2 Enter r (Remove Hole) and press ENTER. 3 Select the desired ceiling grid, and press ENTER. 4 Select the closed polyline of the hole. The hole is removed from the ceiling grid. The polyline, however, remains in the drawing. If necessary, you can delete it. Removing a hole from a ceiling grid
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Ceiling Grid
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a ceiling grid. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a ceiling grid.
1 Select the ceiling grid to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Ceiling Grid | 1477
5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note.
6 Click OK.
7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK twice.
Changing the Location of Ceiling Grids
Use this procedure to change the location of ceiling grids. You can relocate an existing ceiling grid by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The ceiling grid also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the ceiling grid are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the ceiling grid by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the ceiling grid on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For more information about the world coordinate system, see "Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the ceiling grid that you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Select Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the ceiling grid:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the ceiling grid
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the ceiling grid on the XY plane
make the normal of the ceiling grid parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the ceiling grid on the YZ plane
make the normal of the ceiling grid parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the ceiling grid on the XZ plane
make the normal of the ceiling grid parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the ceiling grid
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Display of Ceiling Grids
Use this procedure to change any of the following display properties for lines, node markers, or cell markers in a ceiling grid:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer
1478 | Chapter 31 Grids
Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
1 Select the ceiling grid you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation. 4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Changing the Display of Ceiling Grids | 1479
1480 | Chapter 31 Grids
Detail Drafting Tools
32
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop includes a number of easily accessible tools designed to help you work more intuitively and effectively with linework in detail drawings.
1481
Construction Lines
Construction lines (also known as xlines) are temporary linework entities that can be used as references when creating and positioning other objects or linework. For example, you can use construction lines to prepare multiple views of the same item, or create temporary intersections to serve as object snaps. Construction lines are either circles or straight lines that extend to infinity in both directions. In either case, they do not change the total area of the drawing and have no effect on zooming or viewports. You can move, rotate, copy, or delete construction lines just like other objects. The regular AutoCAD® construction line functionality is still available via the XLINE command. However, the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop construction line feature is designed to give you a more intuitive way of drawing construction lines based on the geometry of existing objects or linework. No command line entry is required. You access the Construction Line command by clicking the button on the Shapes toolbar. The XLINE layer key is used by default for all construction lines created with this command. In most cases, you would probably want to draw construction lines based on segments of existing objects, but you can also draw them by specifying any two points in the drawing area, without regard to existing objects or linework.
Creating Construction Lines From Existing Objects/Linework
Use this procedure to create a construction line based on the geometry of any straight, arced, or circular segment of any object or linework, except hatches, splines, and ellipses. If based on a straight segment, the resulting construction line is a straight line that extends to infinity in both directions; if based on an arced or circular segment, the construction line is a circle.
1 On the Shapes toolbar, click . 2 In the drawing area, move the cursor over the segment on which you want to base your construction line
(the "construction line base"). A preview of the construction line is displayed. 3 Click to display an offset indicator, which dynamically shows the distance between the preview line and the construction line base. 4 Either drag the preview line to the desired distance, and click to position the construction line, or enter the desired distance and press ENTER. Drawing a construction line at a zero offset based on a straight wall segment
1482 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Drawing a construction line at a zero offset based on a arc wall segment
Drawing a construction line at a specified offset based on a straight wall segment
The resulting construction line displays three grips when selected. You can move the line by moving the middle grip, or you can change its orientation by moving either of the end grips.
Creating Construction Lines Independently
Use this procedure to create a straight construction line that passes through any two points of your choice. 1 On the Shapes toolbar, click . 2 Press ENTER. 3 In the drawing area, specify the first point that you want the construction line to pass through. (This will be the root or conceptual midpoint of the construction line.) 4 Specify a second point.
Creating Construction Lines Independently | 1483
Drawing a construction line by specifying points
The construction line is displayed. If you select it, three grips are displayed. You can move the line by moving the middle grip, or you can change its orientation by moving either of the end grips.
Hatch Productivity Tools
The context menu for hatches includes options that allow you to easily reposition hatches relative to their origins, generate AEC Polygons to provide boundaries for non-bounded hatches, and redefine hatch boundaries based on other selected closed-boundary linework.
Repositioning a Hatch
Use this procedure to align brick and masonry hatch patterns within a boundary so that whole units display along a particular edge.
1 Select the hatch. 2 Right-click, and click Set Origin. 3 Specify an endpoint on the boundary, and press ENTER.
The hatch is repositioned with its origin at the endpoint you specified. Repositioning a hatch within a boundary
1484 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Generating a Hatch Boundary
Use this procedure to generate a boundary for a hatch whose original boundary has been deleted or moved during the course of other drawing operations. The boundary generated by this procedure is an AEC Polygon, which is created with the POLYGON layer key. AEC Polygons are also created for any islands within the selected hatch. These AEC Polygons remain selected after you generate the boundary, so you can directly manipulate them into the desired configuration. You can then apply the hatch to the new boundary configuration using the Set Boundary option, as described under "Redefining a Hatch Boundary" on page 1485.
1 Select the hatch. 2 Right-click, and select Generate Boundary.
All grips are displayed for any AEC Polygons created. TIP If you want to generate a polyline copy of an AEC Polygon created by this process, select the AEC Polygon, right-click, and click Convert To Polyline. Generating a hatch boundary
Redefining a Hatch Boundary
Use this procedure to redefine the boundaries of associative or non-associative hatches based on any selected closed-boundary linework. In cases where a non-associative hatch originally filled closed-boundary linework, but the linework was subsequently stretched or moved, this procedure lets you expand or reposition the hatch to fill the new boundary. You can also use this procedure to extend or move a hatch from one boundary to others. (If you do not also select the linework currently bounding the hatch, the hatch is moved from the original boundary to the other boundaries that you select.) The linework you select for the new hatch boundaries can be AEC Polygons, closed polylines, circles, text, or multiline text (Mtext).
1 Select the hatch. 2 Right-click, and click Set Boundary. 3 Select the linework, and press ENTER. 4 Press ENTER to keep the selected linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
The selected hatch is applied within all selected boundaries.
Generating a Hatch Boundary | 1485
Transferring a hatch from one boundary to another Moving a hatch back to original boundary
1486 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Resizing a hatch to fill a boundary
Copying a hatch from one boundary to another
NOTE If a hatch was originally created as associative, its associativity is not transferred to other linework to which the hatch is applied using the Set Boundary option. And if the original boundary itself is one of the boundaries selected during the operation, the association between the boundary and the hatch is discontinued.
Redefining a Hatch Boundary | 1487
AEC Modify Tools
You can perform a variety of editing operations on linework components and certain architectural objects using AEC Modify tools. Some of these tools, such as Trim, Obscure and Merge, can be used on any of the following objects and are available from the context menu regardless of whether any objects of these types are selected:
Hatches Polylines Circles Arcs Text/Multiline text (Mtext) Spaces AEC Polygons Mass element extrusions
Any of the above when embedded in blocks Although some of the AEC Modify Tools can only be applied to the types of objects listed above, objects of any type can be used as reference points or boundaries for the editing operations. For example, linework can be trimmed or extended in relation to architectural objects such as walls. Likewise, architectural objects can be used to define a cropping boundary or an area to subtract from linework. Architectural objects can also be included as part of a collection of objects for which a shrinkwrap outline is generated. When you work with architectural objects, such as windows and doors, you can use Array, Reposition From, Space Evenly, and Center tools in this suite in addition to linework and profile-based objects. When you select an architectural object and right-click, the AEC Modify tool that is available for the object displays on the context menu.
Trimming Linework or Profile-Based Objects
Use this procedure to trim hatches, lines, polylines, arcs, circles, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, or any block-based content (including detail components) made up of these types of linework or objects.
1 Select the linework, object, or block to trim. 2 Right-click and click AEC Modify Tools Trim. 3 Specify two points to establish the trim line.
The trim line changes color once the second point is selected, as does all linework (except hatches) on the side of the trim line where the cursor is positioned. 4 Click the side of the trim line where the region you want to remove is located. All linework on the selected side of the trim line is removed, and boundaries for any closed polylines on the other side are redrawn along the trim line.
1488 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Trimming a block
Trimming Linework or Profile-Based Objects to an Edge
Use this procedure to trim one or more lines, polylines, arcs, circles, hatches, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, or spaces precisely to a selected edge or side of any straight segment of AEC linework. This feature lets you easily trim linework to components of walls. TIP If you need to trim linework to the edge of an arced segment of an object, use either the Crop option (see "Cropping Linework or Profile-Based Objects" on page 1495) or the Subtract option (see "Subtracting from Linework and Profile-Based Objects" on page 1492). The Crop option removes linework outside the implied boundary of the arc, while the Subtract option removes linework inside the implied boundary of the arc.
1 Select the linework or object to trim. 2 Right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Trim. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Move the cursor over the edge or line to which you want to trim the selected linework or object. 5 Click when the trim line displays. 6 Click the side of the trim line you want trimmed.
All selected linework is trimmed to the edge you selected.
Trimming Linework or Profile-Based Objects to an Edge | 1489
Trimming linework to the edge of a wall
Extending Linework to an Edge
Use this procedure to extend one or more lines, open polylines, or arcs precisely to an implied edge of a straight or arced segment of any object, or to an implied extension of that segment.
1 Select the linework you want to extend. 2 Right-click and click AEC Modify Tools Extend. 3 Move the cursor over the edge or line to which you want to extend the selected linework, and click when
a temporary line is displayed extending along and beyond the edge/line in both directions. 4 Click any point on the linework you want to extend, or click the edge or line to which you want to extend
the linework. The linework is extended to the edge. If you selected multiple lines, clicking on any one of them extends them all.
1490 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Extending linework to the edge of a wall
Dividing Linework and Profile-Based Objects
Use this procedure to divide linework, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, or a block containing any of these objects into two (or more) parts defined by a divide line you draw. The parts on either side of the line are then separately selectable. If a closed-boundary object is divided into two parts using this option, both parts are recreated as closed. If an open polyline in a zigzag pattern is divided along its length, many selectable segments are created.
1 Select the linework, object, or block you want to divide. 2 Right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Divide. 3 Specify two points to establish the divide line. In the case of a closed-boundary object, the points can be
inside or outside the boundaries; the divide line is automatically extended until it intersects all boundaries of the selected object. The divided parts of the linework or object on either side of the divide line are now selectable. Note that the divide line is no longer visible once the second point is selected.
Dividing Linework and Profile-Based Objects | 1491
Dividing a space object
Subtracting from Linework and Profile-Based Objects
Use this procedure to subtract a selected part from linework, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, or from a block containing any of these objects, without having to redraw any of the remaining components. You can also specify the corners of a rectangle as the subtraction. The part to be subtracted can contain or be delineated by lines, polylines (closed or open), arcs, circles, text, or hatches. If the subtraction removes part of a closed polyline, the polyline is recreated as closed. If the subtraction bisects a closed polyline, both parts are recreated as separate closed polylines. However, in cases where the subtraction bisects a hatch, the hatch remains a single linework entity that you can select by clicking either "part." NOTE Anything subtracted by this operation is actually deleted from the drawing. If you only want to hide linework from view, you may want to use the Obscure command instead. For more information, see "Obscuring Regions of Linework" on page 1493.
1 If it does not already exist, draw the linework that delineates what you want to subtract. 2 Select the linework or object from which to subtract the delineated part. 3 Right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Subtract. 4 Press ENTER and specify a rectangular shape to be subtracted from the object. 5 Alternately, select the linework delineating the part you want to subtract and press ENTER. 6 Press ENTER to keep the selected linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
1492 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Subtracting part of a block with an existing polyline
Subtracting part of a block by specifying rectangle corners
Obscuring Regions of Linework
Use this procedure to obscure or "hide" a region of linework in relation to other linework. This feature is chiefly useful when you want to indicate that one entity extends behind or beneath another entity that you want to display in the foreground. The obscured linework is placed on the layer specified by the HIDDEN layer key. Once you have begun the Obscure command, you can also specify two corners of a rectangle to use.
1 Select the linework to hide (the linework "being obscured"). 2 Right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Obscure. 3 Select the "obscuring linework" (that is, the linework behind which you want to hide the originally selected
linework), and press ENTER. The obscured region is delineated with a dashed line. You can select it (or its component segments) separately from the linework it was part of before being obscured.
Obscuring Regions of Linework | 1493
Obscuring linework with a block
4 Alternately, press ENTER and specify a rectangular shape to obscure the object.
Merging Linework or Profile-Based Objects
Use this procedure to merge contiguous closed polylines, circles, hatches, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, or blocks into a single closed-boundary object or linework entity.
1 Select the linework or object to which you want to add one or more other linework entities or objects. 2 Right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Merge. 3 Select the linework/object(s) you want to merge with the originally selected linework/object, and press
ENTER. 4 Press ENTER to keep the selected linework, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
All selected linework and/or objects are merged into a single entity of the type you selected first. That is, if you select an AEC Polygon in Step 1 and a space object in Step 3, the resulting entity is an AEC Polygon.
1494 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Merging a region with a block
5 Alternately, press ENTER after Step 2 and specify a rectangular shape to merge with the linework or object.
Cropping Linework or Profile-Based Objects
Use this procedure to crop linework or a profile-based object to a smaller area with a boundary you define. You can crop hatches, lines, polylines, arcs, circles, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, and/or blocks. Neither the linework to be cropped nor the linework that defines the new boundary needs to have closed boundaries. For example, you can use a v-shaped polyline to crop a circle, or you can use a circle to crop a v-shaped polyline. Once you have begun the Crop command, you can also specify two corners of a rectangle to crop the linework or objects.
1 Draw the linework that defines the new boundary to which you want to crop the existing linework. 2 Right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Crop. 3 Select the linework to crop and press ENTER. 4 Select the linework you want to define the new boundary (the linework you drew in Step 1), and press
ENTER. 5 Press ENTER to keep the selected linework (the crop boundary), or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
All of the originally selected linework outside the crop boundary is erased. If you choose to erase the crop boundary, boundaries are redrawn for any closed-boundary entities inside the crop area, but any open-boundary objects that have been cropped remain open. Cropping a block with a polyline
6 Alternately, press ENTER after Step 2 and specify a rectangular shape to crop the linework or object.
Cropping Linework or Profile-Based Objects | 1495
Shrinkwrapping Linework
Use this procedure to automatically create a profile or shrinkwrap outline around any collection of contiguous linework entities, including architectural objects. The visual result of the procedure is similar to merging the entities (see "Merging Linework or Profile-Based Objects" on page 1494), but in this case the outline you create is a separately selectable entity. Unlike the other AEC Linework Tools, the Shrinkwrap tool is accessed from the General tool palette. The AecLineworkShrinkwrap command the tool invokes is wrapped in a DesignCenter command to accommodate layer keying (that is, shrinkwrap polylines created using this tool are automatically placed on a particular layer as specified by the associated layer key).
1 Open the Basic tool palette, and click the Shrink Wrap tool. 2 Select all of the objects you want to shrinkwrap. 3 Press ENTER.
All objects within the shrinkwrap remain selected. You can now select and move the shrinkwrap profile independently of the linework it encloses.
Creating Arrays
Use this procedure to create an array of identical linework (such as hatches and polylines), architectural objects (such as doors and walls), AEC polygons, or profile-based objects (such as mass element extrusions, and spaces). You can also array any block-based content (including detail components) made up of these types of linework and objects.
1 Select the linework, object, or block to array. 2 Right-click and click AEC Modify Tools Array. 3 Select an edge and drag the cursor to specify the direction of the array for a rectangular array.
The number of objects you are adding to the array is displayed in the tooltip as Array Count.
1496 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Arraying a block
4 Enter a value for the distance offset between each instance of the linework or object, and press ENTER. Alternately, for a polar array, specify two points to establish the angle of the array, enter a value for the distance offset between the linework or object, and press ENTER.
5 Click in the drawing area to specify the endpoint of the array. For more information on arrays, see "Array Dialog Box" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Repositioning from a Reference Point
Use this procedure to reposition architectural objects, linework, or blocks from a specific reference point in your drawing. For example, if you have a kitchen island that you want repositioned 6'-0" from existing cabinetry, you can place the island using the interior edge of the cabinet as a reference point. You can also use this procedure with hatches, lines, polylines, arcs, circles, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, or any block-based content (including detail components and DesignCenter content) made up of these types of linework or objects.
1 Select the linework, object, or block to reposition. 2 Right-click and click AEC Modify Tools Reposition From. 3 Select an existing edge from which to reposition the object, or specify two points to define a reference
edge. 4 Select the object to be repositioned, and enter a value for the distance between it and the reference edge. 5 Press ENTER.
Evenly Spacing Linework or Objects
Use this procedure to space a collection of existing architectural objects, linework, or blocks at an equal distance from each other. For example, if you have windows along walls that are not colinear, you can space the windows evenly across the entire facade by specifying points along an axis. You can use this procedure with hatches, lines, polylines, arcs, circles, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, or any block-based content (including detail components) made up of these types of linework or objects.
1 Select the linework, object, or block to space. 2 Right-click and click AEC Modify Tools Space Evenly. 3 Select an edge as the axis along which to space all the objects evenly, and specify a start point and an
endpoint along the edge; or press ENTER, and specify two points between which the objects will be spaced evenly from each other.
Repositioning from a Reference Point | 1497
NOTE For example, if you select two objects to be spaced between two points, the spacing of the objects is from the specified start point to the center of the first object, from the center of the first object to the center of the second object, and from the center of the second object to the specified endpoint.
Centering Linework or Objects
Use this procedure to center any of the following between two points: architectural objects, hatches, lines, polylines, arcs, circles, AEC Polygons, mass element extrusions, spaces, or any block-based content (including detail components) made up of these types of linework or objects.
1 Select the linework, object or block to center. 2 Right-click and click AEC Modify Tools Center. 3 Select an existing edge as an axis, and then specify two points between which to center the object on that
axis; or press ENTER, and specify any two points between which to center the object.
1498 | Chapter 32 Detail Drafting Tools
Mask Blocks
33
A mask block is a two-dimensional (2D) block that covers, or "masks," part of the graphic display of an AEC object in a plan view. You can use mask blocks to clean up or correct objects in your drawings or to create custom 2D shapes from predefined drawing objects, such as walls or grids.
1499
Mask Blocks
A mask block is a two-dimensional (2D) block that covers, or "masks," part of the graphic display of an AEC object in a plan view. You can use mask blocks to clean up or correct objects in your drawings or to create custom 2D shapes from predefined drawing objects, such as walls or grids.
For example, attach a light fixture as a mask block to a ceiling grid in a plan view. If the light fixture is bigger than one or more of the ceiling grid bays, the light fixture masks, or covers, the ceiling grid lines that would visibly pass through the light fixture if it had been defined as a regular AutoCAD® block.
Before you can begin to mask objects in your plan view drawings, you must have an existing mask block or a mask block definition created in your drawing. You can find predefined mask blocks on the Drafting tool palette and in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog. You can also create a mask block with the AEC Content Wizard. For more information about custom content, see "Creating an AEC Content Masking Block for DesignCenter" on page 2019.
After you have selected a mask block, add it to your drawing in plan view. Adding the mask block to your drawing is like adding a regular AutoCAD® block: specify an insertion point or scale factors and a rotation angle. The mask block and the object that you want to mask must be coplanar; that is, for the mask object to cover the other object, they must be on the same plane.
After you insert a mask block in your drawing, attach the objects to be masked. The mask block clips the graphics of the objects that you are masking when the objects regenerate themselves in a plan view. Only the objects that you attach to the mask block are clipped. The masked objects are plotted as you see them on your screen.
If you change your drawing from a 2D view to a three-dimensional (3D) view, the mask block is still displayed, but it no longer masks the objects that are attached to it. You can detach the mask block from the objects at any time. You can also import and export mask block definitions. If you create a mask block definition that you decide not to use in your drawings, you can purge it.
Creating Mask Block Definitions
You can define a mask block by selecting a closed polyline in the drawing and defining it as a mask block, by copying and editing an existing mask block, or by using the AEC Content Wizard.
Use the AEC Content Wizard to save mask blocks in content drawings for convenient reuse. For more information, see "Creating an AEC Content Masking Block for DesignCenter" on page 2019.
Managing Mask Block Definitions
To create, edit, copy, or purge mask block definitions, use the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, where you can work with definitions and styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Mask Block Definition from a Polyline
Use this procedure to create a mask block definition from one or more closed polylines. If you use more than one polyline to create your mask block definition, the polylines must be completely within or completely outside each other: they cannot overlap or touch. Polylines that are within each other can be specified as void areas that become holes when the mask block is created. After you create the definition, edit the definition properties to customize the characteristics of the definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, right-click Mask Block Definitions, and click New.
3 Enter a name for the new mask block definition, and press ENTER.
4 Right-click the new mask block definition name, and click Set From.
5 Select the closed polyline to use to create the mask block definition.
6 Do one of the following to complete the mask block definition:
Press ENTER to create the mask block definition from a single polyline.
1500 | Chapter 33 Mask Blocks
Enter y (Yes) to select additional polylines to add to the mask block definition. These polylines must be entirely within or outside each other; they cannot overlap or touch. Polylines that are within other rings can be specified as void areas that become holes in the mask block.
7 Specify an insertion base point for the mask block. 8 Select additional graphics to include in the mask block definition, or press ENTER if you do not want to
include additional graphics.
NOTE You can select text or symbols to include in the mask block definition.
9 Click OK. A mask block definition is created from the polyline or polylines that you selected. The new mask block definition is listed in the mask block definition tree and can be viewed in the graphics screen of Style Manager. The original polylines remain in the drawing.
Creating a Mask Block Definition from an Existing Mask Block Definition
Use this procedure to create a mask block definition from a mask block definition that already exists in a drawing. After you create the new definition, you edit the definition properties to customize the characteristics of the definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mask Block Definitions. 3 Right-click the mask block definition to copy, and click Copy. 4 Right-click, and click Paste. 5 Right-click the new mask block definition, and click Rename. 6 Enter a name, and press ENTER. 7 Click OK.
Importing Mask Block Definitions
Use this procedure to import a mask block definition from another drawing. After you create the definition, you edit the definition properties to customize the characteristics of the definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 On the File menu, click Open drawing to browse for the drawing that contains the definition that you want to copy to your current drawing.
3 Select the drawing with the definition to copy, and click Open. 4 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mask Block Definitions. 5 Right-click the mask block definition to copy, and click Copy. 6 Select the current drawing, and expand Multi-Purpose Objects. 7 Right-click Mask Block Definitions, and click Paste.
The definition is copied into the current drawing. If the current drawing already contains a definition with the same name, the duplicate names are displayed in the Import/Export - Duplicate Names Found dialog box.
8 To resolve duplicate names, select one of the following options:
To not replace the existing definition in the drawing with the new definition of the same name, select Leave Existing, and click OK.
To replace the existing definition in the drawing with the new definition, select Overwrite Existing, and click OK.
Creating a Mask Block Definition from an Existing Mask Block Definition | 1501
To rename the new definition so both definitions exist in the drawing, select Rename to Unique, and click OK. New definition names are appended with a numeral in the Style Manager.
9 Click OK.
Exporting Mask Block Definitions to a New Drawing
Use this procedure to copy mask block definitions from your current drawing to a new drawing. After you create the definition, you edit the definition properties to customize the characteristics of the definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 On the File menu, click New drawing to create the drawing to which you want to copy the definition. 3 Enter a name for the new drawing, and click Save.
The new drawing opens in the Style Manager. 4 In the current drawing, Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mask Block Definitions. 5 Right-click the mask block definition to copy to the new drawing, and click Copy. 6 Select the new drawing, and expand Multi-Purpose Objects. 7 Right click Mask Block Definitions, and click Paste. 8 Click OK.
Exporting Mask Block Definitions to an Existing Drawing
Use this procedure to copy mask block definitions from your current drawing to another drawing. After you create the definition, you edit the definition properties to customize the characteristics of the definition.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 On the File menu, click Open drawing to browse for the drawing to which you want to copy the definition. 3 Select the drawing that you want to copy the definition to, and click Open.
The drawing opens in the Style Manager. 4 In the current drawing, Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mask Block Definitions. 5 Right-click the mask block definition to copy to the second drawing, and click Copy. 6 Select the second drawing, and expand Multi-Purpose Objects. 7 Right-click Mask Block Definitions, and click Paste. 8 The definition is copied into the second drawing. If the drawing already contains a definition with the
same name, the duplicate names are displayed in the Import/Export - Duplicate Names Found dialog box. 9 To resolve duplicate names, select one of the following options:
To not replace the existing definition in the drawing with the new definition of the same name, click Leave Existing, and click OK.
To replace the existing definition in the drawing with the new definition, click Overwrite Existing, and click OK.
To rename the new definition so both definitions exist in the drawing, click Rename to Unique, and click OK. New definition names are appended with a numeral in the Style Manager.
10 Click OK.
1502 | Chapter 33 Mask Blocks
Editing a Mask Block Definition
Use this procedure to make any of the following types of modifications to a mask block definition:
Change the objects or styles to which the mask block can be attached. Add and remove properties. Change the name, description, type, and format of properties.
Changes that you make to a mask block definition are immediately applied to any objects or styles to which the mask block created from the definition is attached.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mask Block Definitions. 3 Select the mask block definition. 4 Click the Classification tab. 5 Select a classification for the classification definition.
For more information, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
6 Click the Display Properties tab. 7 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
8 If necessary, click . 9 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 10 Select the component to change, and select a different setting. 11 Click OK. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Enter text for Description. 14 Click Notes. 15 Click the Notes tab, and enter a note. 16 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
17 To attach or edit schedule data, click Property Sets. For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956 and "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956.
18 Click OK.
Adding Classifications to a Mask Block Definition
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a mask block definition. Classifications enable you to track objects by construction status, vendor, or other criteria. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
Editing a Mask Block Definition | 1503
1 Open a tool palette that has a mask block definition tool. 2 Right-click a mask block definition tool, and click Mask Block Definitions. 3 Select the definition that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to mask block definitions.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current mask block definition.
6 Click OK.
Purging Mask Block Definitions
Use this procedure to purge mask block definitions from your drawing. You have the option to purge any mask block definition unless it is currently applied as a mask block in the drawing.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed, with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Mask Block Definitions. 3 Purge mask block definitions:
If you want to...
Then...
purge one unused mask block definition style
right-click the style you want to remove, and click Purge.
purge all unused mask block definition styles
right-click Mask Block Definitions, and click Purge. When prompted, verify that the styles you want to purge are selected, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
Using Mask Block Tools to Create Mask Blocks
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place mask blocks using tool with a specific mask block definition and other predefined properties. You can use the default settings of tool, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the definition. You can also create new mask blocks by applying tool properties to existing mask blocks or to closed polylines. For more information, see "Creating a Mask Block Tool" on page 1506.
Mask block tools are found in the following locations:
Location Drafting tool palette Drafting Tools category in the Stock Tool catalog
custom tool palettes created by your CAD manager
Tool
a mask block tool for the Standard mask block definition style and default settings for other mask block properties
a mask block tool for the Standard mask block definition style and default settings for other mask block properties. For more information on accessing tools in this catalog, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
Mask block tools with mask block definition styles and properties customized for your projects or office standards
NOTE The Standard mask block definition style is imported if you create your drawing with a template. It will not be present if you start your drawing without using a template. For more information, see "About Templates" on page 106.
Adding a Mask Block
Use this procedure to add a new mask block that has the properties specified in the mask block tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a mask block, see "Adding a Mask Block with User-Specified Settings" on page 1505. You
1504 | Chapter 33 Mask Blocks
can add a mask block to a drawing if the drawing contains a mask block definition. For more information, see "Creating Mask Block Definitions" on page 1500.
TIP When you add mask blocks to your drawing, insert them on a separate layer. You can turn the layer off in 3D views, where the mask blocks no longer mask any objects.
1 If a mask block does not already exist in the current drawing, then create or import a mask block definition. For more information, see "Importing Mask Block Definitions" on page 1501.
2 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a mask block tool. A mask block tool is located on the Drafting tool palette and in the Drafting Tools category in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
3 Specify the insertion point of the mask block. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
NOTE If you are using a mask block to mask a wall, the mask block must be located at the baseline of the wall (Z = 0). Even though the wall components are at different heights, the plan display representation draws them at the height of the baseline, as they would be drawn on paper.
4 Continue adding mask blocks, and press ENTER. The mask blocks are displayed in the drawing at the insertion point you specified. To use a mask block to clean up or correct an object in the drawing, attach the object to the mask block.
Adding a Mask Block with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a mask block with settings that you specify. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the mask block tool you want to use, and select the tool. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.) 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a definition. 4 Expand Scale. 5 Enter the X, Y, and Z scale of the mask block. The X, Y, and Z scales represent the distance from the insertion point. 6 Alternately, expand Location, and select Yes for Specify scale on screen. Use your pointing device to designate the scale of the mask block. 7 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the mask block. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 8 Continue adding mask blocks, and press ENTER. To use a mask block to clean up or correct an object in the drawing, attach the object to the mask block.
Creating a Mask Block from Polylines
Use this procedure to create a mask block reference from one or more closed polylines. If you use more than one polyline to create your mask block, the polylines must be completely within or completely outside each other; they cannot overlap or touch. Polylines that are within each other can be specified as void areas that become holes when the mask block is created.
1 Select the polylines, right-click, and click Convert To Mask Block.
Adding a Mask Block with User-Specified Settings | 1505
The Convert to Mask Block worksheet is displayed.
2 Enter a name for the new mask block. 3 Clear Mask AEC Objects Automatically to avoid masking existing AEC objects overlapping the polylines
being converted. 4 To select existing AEC objects for masking with the new mask block, make sure Select AEC Objects to Mask
is selected. 5 Select Erase Layout Geometry to erase the original polylines, and click OK. 6 Edit the properties of the mask block in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Creating a Mask Block Tool
Use this procedure to create a mask block tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own mask block tools if you are placing multiple mask blocks of a specific style and they all have the same properties. You can use any of the following methods to create a mask block tool:
Drag a mask block that has the properties you want to a tool palette.
IMPORTANT Make sure that the mask block is in a drawing that has been saved and that will be available in the future.
Drag a mask block definition from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Drag a copy of a tool from another palette to the current palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy an existing tool in the current palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Drag a tool from a tool palette in the Content Browser to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a mask block in the drawing
select the mask block, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a mask block definition in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the mask block definition you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool palette in the Content Browser
open the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
1506 | Chapter 33 Mask Blocks
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
4 Enter a name for the tool.
5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. This description is used as the tooltip on the tool palette, and to describe the tool if it is stored in a tool catalog.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Specify properties for the mask block created from the tool:
If you want to...
enter a description of the mask block that you can create using this tool
Then...
click Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
specify a unique layer key for the object type
click Layer Key, select a layer key, and click OK.
specify a layer override for the tool
click Layer Overrides, clear Do not specify Layer Overrides, specify the override, and click OK.
specify a definition
click Definition, select a mask block definition, and click OK.
specify a definition location
click Definition location, select the file containing the mask block definition you want to use, click Open, and click OK.
8 Expand Scale. 9 Specify the scale for the mask block created from the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
use your pointing device to designate the scale for the mask click Yes for Specify scale on screen. block
specify the scale of the mask block on the Properties palette click No for Specify scale on screen, and enter the X, Y, and Z scale for the mask block.
10 Expand Location. 11 Specify the rotation for the mask block created from the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
use your pointing device to designate the angle for the mask click Yes for Specify rotation on screen. block
specify the angle of the mask block on the Properties palette click No for Specify rotation on screen, and enter the angle for Rotation.
12 Click OK.
Attaching Mask Blocks to Objects
Use this procedure to mask an object by attaching the mask block to the object after you have the mask block placed correctly.
1 Select the mask block or blocks that you want to attach to an object. 2 Right-click, and click Attach Objects. 3 Select the object that you want to mask. 4 Select a display representation from the list of current display representations, and click OK.
Attaching Mask Blocks to Objects | 1507
Attaching a mask block to an object
The object is now hidden by the mask block. Mask blocks mask Autodesk®Architectural Desktop objects only and mask them only in plan views. Mask blocks are visible in 3D views, but they do not mask the objects that are attached to them.
Detaching Mask Blocks from Objects
Use this procedure to unmask an object in plan view by detaching the object from the mask block. 1 Select the mask block that you want to detach from an object, right-click, and click Detach Objects. 2 Select the object that you want to detach from the mask block. Detaching an object from a mask block
The object is detached from the mask block and is no longer hidden by the mask block.
Editing Mask Blocks
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing mask blocks: Change the location using grips. Change settings on the Properties palette. Edit the profile. Select commands from the context menu. Change how a mask block is displayed.
Using Grips to Move Mask Blocks
Use this procedure to change the location of a mask block with grips. 1 Select the mask block.
1508 | Chapter 33 Mask Blocks
2 Select the highlighted grip. Viewing Mask Block Location grip
3 Move the grip until the door is in the desired location, and click once.
Changing the Location of a Mask Block
Use this procedure to change the rotation, elevation, and location of the mask block on the Properties palette.
You can relocate a mask block by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The mask block also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the mask block are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the mask block by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the mask block on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the mask block you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Specify the placement of the mask block:
If you want to...
Then...
change the rotation
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
change the elevation
enter a new value for Elevation.
4 Click Additional information to specify location of the mask block:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the mask block
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the mask block on the XY plane
make the normal of the mask block parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the mask block on the YZ plane
make the normal of the mask block parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the mask block on the XZ plane
make the normal of the mask block parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the mask block
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
Editing the Profile of a Mask Block
Use this procedure to edit the geometry of a mask block.
NOTE If you want to replace the geometry of the mask block with newly drawn polylines, ellipses, or circles, draw them before you start this procedure.
1 Select the mask block that you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Profile In Place.
Changing the Location of a Mask Block | 1509
2 If prompted that the profile is not drawn to size, click Yes. A temporary profile is created for you to edit the geometry of the mask block.
3 NOTE After you perform an editing task from the context menu, you may need to select the profile again to perform another editing task. If you do not see the editing commands that you expect on the context menu, select the profile, and right-click to display the context menu.
Edit the profile:
If you want to...
Then...
change the shape of the perimeter of the profile or its rings
select the profile, and use edge or vertex grips to adjust the shape. The Edge grip has two edit modes: Stretch and Move. The default mode is Stretch, and the direction of the stretch depends on the orientation of edges connected to the selected edge. For example, if the edges at both ends of the selected edge are parallel, the grip edit mode is Stretch (Parallel) and the stretch direction is limited to the direction of the parallel edges. If the connected edges are not parallel, the grip edit mode is Stretch (Offset) and the stretch direction is perpendicular to the direction of the selected edge. The Move edit mode allows an unconstrained move of the selected edge.
add vertices to the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Vertex. Select a point for each new vertex, and press ENTER.
remove vertices from the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Vertex. Select each vertex to remove, and press ENTER.
replace an existing ring of the profile with new geometry
select the profile, right-click, and click Replace Ring. Select the ring to replace, and select the new geometry. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
add a ring to the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Add Ring. Select the geometry to define the ring. Press ENTER to keep the geometry, or enter n (No) to erase it.
remove a ring from the profile
select the profile, right-click, and click Remove Ring. Select the ring to remove, and press ENTER.
4 Save or discard the changes: If you want to... restore the mask block to its original shape
save the changes to the current mask block
Then...
select the profile, and click
.
select the profile, and click . The mask block uses the edited profile to define its geometry. Any other objects or styles that use this profile are also updated with the edited geometry.
Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Mask Block Reference
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a mask block tool to one or more existing mask blocks. The properties include the mask block definition and any other settings specified in the tool you select.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click a mask block tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Mask Block Reference.
1510 | Chapter 33 Mask Blocks
3 Select the mask block reference, and press ENTER. 4 Edit the properties of the mask blocks in the Properties palette, if necessary.
Changing Display Properties of Mask Blocks
In most cases, you want the appearance of objects that belong to the same style to be consistent throughout a drawing. To achieve this, you specify the display properties of the mask blocks in each mask block definition style. However, in certain instances, you may need to override a display property for an individual mask block to achieve a specific result. All the display properties that you can specify in mask block definition styles are available for individual mask blocks:
The visibility of mask block components The layer, color, and linetype of mask block components The lineweight, linetype scale, and plot style of mask block components
NOTE If the mask block is attached to a grid, you can change the anchor properties as well.
When you change the display properties of a mask block, the changes apply only to that mask block. Other mask blocks of the same definition style are not affected. To change the display properties of all mask blocks of a specific definition style, see "Creating Mask Block Definitions" on page 1500. Changing the Display Properties of a Mask Block Use this procedure to change any of the following properties of the display components of an individual mask block:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
1 Select the mask block you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Mask Block
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, enter notes, or attach reference files to a mask block in a drawing. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a mask block.
1 Double-click the mask block to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 To add a hyperlink, click next to Hyperlink, and specify the link. For more information about adding hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
Changing Display Properties of Mask Blocks | 1511
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add or edit a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference file, click If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
next to Reference documents: Then...
click
, select a file, and click Open.
enter text under Description.
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
select the file name, and click
.
1512 | Chapter 33 Mask Blocks
Multi-View Blocks
34
A multi-view block is an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop object that can have different representations in different view directions. You create a multi-view block from AutoCAD® blocks that represent the different views of the custom object that you are creating.
1513
Multi-View Blocks
A multi-view block is an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop object that can have different representations in different view directions. You create a multi-view block from AutoCAD® blocks that represent the different views of the custom object that you are creating.
Understanding Multi-View Blocks
Multi-view blocks can represent different types of objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop. They are typically used to represent the following items:
Furniture and fixtures, such as tables and kitchen sinks Annotation components, such as revision clouds or fire rating signs Schedule tags, such as door numbers
Multi-view blocks can be displayed differently in each view direction and each display representation. For example, the top view of a multi-view block representing a kitchen sink shows the top of the sink; the bottom view shows the bottom of the sink; and there are representations for left, right, front, and back views. Additionally, you can define a different group of displays for each display representation, so that you can have one set of views for Plan view and another for Reflected view.
You can use a multi-view block as a cutout in objects such as walls, slabs, and curtain walls. You create a view block to represent the cutting body. The block forms the body that will be subtracted from objects by applying the multi-view block as interference. For example, you can create a skylight as a multi-view block and specify the block as a subtractive Boolean in a slab.
Predefined Multi-View Blocks
The content folders of Autodesk Architectural Desktop contain predefined multi-view blocks for various design purposes, such as furniture, electrical appliances, annotation symbols, schedule tags, and other useful elements. You can access these multi-view blocks from DesignCenterTM. For more information, see "AEC Content and DesignCenter" on page 2009.
Creating Multi-View Block Definitions
Each multi-view block in a drawing is based on a definition that specifies the display representations in which the block can be viewed, as well as the views available in each representation. From a multi-view block definition, you can create as many multi-view blocks as you need. Multi-view blocks typically represent 3D architectural objects. For example, you can create customized cabinetry by drawing plan, elevation, and model views, and saving each view as an individual AutoCAD® block. You assign each block to a view when you create the multi-view block definition. The blocks (top, bottom, front, back, left, right, and model views) are used to define the custom object as a single multi-view block. Prior to defining the block, you can add points on the Defpoints layer to identify additional insertion points for the view block. You set the display representations and view directions in the process of defining the multi-view block. You can see the individual blocks of your custom object as one assembly in plan, elevation, and isometric views after inserting them in the drawing as a multi-view block. For more information about working with blocks, see "Overview of Blocks" in AutoCAD Help. For more information about display representations, see "Display Representations" on page 413.
1514 | Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Process Overview: Creating Multi-View Block Definitions
There are four general steps for creating a multi-view block:
Step 1: Create a set of view blocks for each view direction in every display representation you need.
For example, if you need a multi-view block definition that displays in Model view and Reflected Plan view, create a set of views for each representation. You create views only for those view directions where you want a different result. For example, if the top and bottom views are supposed to look the same in the Reflected Plan display representation, you draw the view block only once, and assign it to both view directions.
Step 2: Create a multi-view block definition in which you assign the view blocks to view directions in individual display representations.
Step 3: If you want the new multi-view block definition to be available through DesignCenterTM, add the definition to DesignCenter.
Step 4: If you want the new multi-view block definition to be available from a tool palette, add it to a palette.
Creating View Blocks
Use this procedure to create AutoCAD blocks to represent each view of the multi-view block definition in display representations.
1 Draw the views you need for a specific display representation:
If you want to... create views for the front and back directions
Then... draw them on the XZ plane.
create views for the left and right directions
draw them on the YZ plane.
create views for the top and bottom directions
draw them on the XY plane.
create a block for an interference condition
create a block containing objects, such as mass elements, to be used as the subtractive body.
2 Specify additional insertion points on the Defpoints layer through the AutoCAD point command, if necessary.
NOTE The points added to view blocks are cumulative. For example, if you add one point to a view block used for the top view and two points to the view block used for the model view, you have a total of four points to cycle through. The fourth point is the regular base point defined during the creation of the block.
3 Select the World Coordinate System before making blocks from these individual views. For more information about coordinate systems, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Define each view as a block, and coordinate the location of the insertion base point as you define each block.
For example, if you specify the insertion base point of the model view block as the midpoint of the bottom edge on the back side, the front and back view blocks have an insertion base point at the midpoint of the bottom edge. Then, the left and right view blocks have an insertion base point at the bottom corner on the back side, with the insertion base point for the top and bottom view blocks at the midpoint of the back edge.
Process Overview: Creating Multi-View Block Definitions | 1515
For more information about blocks, see "Create and Use Blocks (Symbols)" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Creating individual blocks for multi-view block definition
TIP It is helpful to have a naming convention for saving views as blocks. For example, name the plan view block desk-p, and name the right view block desk-r.
Creating a New Multi-View Block Definition
Use this procedure to create a multi-view block definition from the view blocks you created to represent different views of a custom object.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects. 3 Right-click Multi-View Block Definitions, and click New. 4 Enter a name for the new multi-view block definition, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the new multi-view block definition:
If you want to...
Then...
connect view blocks to the view directions of the different display representations
see "Connecting View Blocks to View Directions" on page 1517.
add notes and files to the multi-view block definition
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Multi-View Block Definition" on page 1518.
add classifications to a multi-view block definition
see "Adding Classifications to a Multi-View Block Definition" on page 1518.
specify a cut body for the multi-view block when the block is used as interference in other objects (for example, walls, curtain walls, spaces, slabs)
click Set Interference Block, select a block, and click OK.
6 Click OK.
1516 | Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks
Connecting View Blocks to View Directions
Use this procedure to connect view blocks to the view directions of individual display representations. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Multi-View Block Definitions. 3 Select the multi-view block definition to which you want to connect view blocks. 4 Click the View Blocks tab. 5 Select the display representation to which to connect view blocks. Six display representations are available for multi-view blocks:
Display Representation
Purpose
General
Plan views, Section views, and Sketch views
Model
Model views
Plan
Plan views
Plan High Detail
Plan High Detail views
Plan Low Detail
Plan Low Detail views
Reflected
Reflected views
6 Click Add, and select a view block for the display representation. 7 Click OK. 8 Select the view directions that correspond to the selected block.
For example, to connect the view block to the left side of the multi-view block definition, select Left and clear all other directions. You can connect a view block to multiple view directions. For example, if you have a symmetrical element that looks identical from left and right, you can select Left and Right. The Other view direction represents a view that displays the block three-dimensionally. It is used for non-orthogonal (isometric or perspective) views of the custom object. To ensure that the multi-view block is visible in all views, assign a block to every view direction.
9 To specify view blocks in other display representations, continue from step 5. 10 Click OK.
Defining a Multi-View Block Definition as Bounding for Associative Spaces
Use this procedure to define a multi-view block definition that can bound associative spaces. When a multi-view block definition is set as bounding, by default all multi-view blocks that have the definition assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. For more information about associative spaces see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. You can override the bounding settings from the smulti-view block definition in an individual multi-view block, if necessary.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Multi-View Block Definitions. 3 Select a structural member style. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Select the check mark for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces. 6 Click OK.
Connecting View Blocks to View Directions | 1517
Attaching Notes and Files to a Multi-View Block Definition
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a multi-view block definition. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a multi-view block.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Multi-View Block Definitions. 3 Select the multi-view block definition to which you want to attach notes or files. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the multi-view block, enter the description under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 On the Notes tab, add or edit a note, as applicable. 8 On the Reference Docs tab, attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you are done editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK twice.
Adding Classifications to a Multi-View Block Definition
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a multi-view block definition. For more information, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a multi-view block definition tool. 2 Right-click a multi-view block definition tool, and click Multi-View Block Definitions. 3 Select the definition that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to multi-view block definitions.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current multi-view block definition.
6 Click OK.
Adding a Multi-View Block Definition to DesignCenter
Use this procedure to add a multi-view block to DesignCenterTM. You can then create new multi-view blocks by dragging and dropping them from DesignCenter to your drawing. To add a multi-view block definition to DesignCenter, you need to create a DWG file using the AEC Content Wizard. For a detailed description of the AEC Content Wizard, see "Overview of AEC Content" on page 2010.
1 On the Format menu, click AEC Content Wizard. 2 Select Multi-View Block. 3 Under Current Drawing, select a multi-view block definition, and click Add to add it to the Content File
list. 4 Click Next.
1518 | Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks
5 Select the layer key to use when the multi-view block is inserted, and specify any additional properties:
If you want to...
Then...
explode the multi-view block when it is inserted in a drawing select Explode on Insert.
specify an elevation for the multi-view block
enter a value for Preset Elevation.
associate an anchor with the multi-view block
select an anchor type.
specify the scale for the multi-view block
under Scale, enter X, Y, and Z scale values, and select an option for Additional Scaling.
scale the multi-view block based on the drawing units specified in the Drawing Setup dialog box
select Enable AEC Unit Scaling.
specify properties for attributes associated with the multi-view select options for Attribute Text Style and Attribute Text
block
Angle.
6 Click Next. 7 Specify the drawing file in which to store the multi-view block definition:
If you want to store the multi-view block...
Then...
in the current drawing
select Current Drawing.
in a different drawing
clear Current Drawing, and then either enter a file name or click Browse to specify a file.
8 Select the icon to represent the multi-view block in DesignCenter:
If you want to...
Then...
use a bitmap of the drawing as the icon
click Default Icon.
specify a bitmap (.bmp) file containing the image to be used click New Icon, and select a bitmap file. as the icon
9 Enter a description of the multi-view block. The description is displayed in DesignCenter, along with the icon representing the multi-view block.
10 Select Save Preview Graphics to enable previewing in DesignCenter, or clear Save Preview Graphics to disable previewing.
11 Click Finish.
Creating a Multi-View Block Tool
Use this procedure to create a multi-view block tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own multi-view block tool for customized multi-view blocks you plan to use repeatedly. For example, you might create an office floor plan in which each conference room and office contains a floor lamp. Conference rooms and executive offices get the deluxe model floor lamp, and all other rooms get the standard model. You could define a multi-view block to represent each type of floor lamp, and then create a floor lamp tool for each type. You would then select the appropriate tool to place a floor lamp in each room.
You can use any of the following methods to create a multi-view block tool:
Drag a multi-view block that has the properties you want to a tool palette.
Drag a multi-view block definition from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy an existing multi-view block tool, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Drag a multi-view block tool from a tool catalog in the Content Browser, and then customize the properties of the tool.
Creating a Multi-View Block Tool | 1519
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to add a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a multi-view block in the drawing
select the multi-view block and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a multi-view block definition in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the definition you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a multi-view block tool from a tool catalog
in the Content Browser, locate the multi-view block tool you
copy a tool on the current tool palette copy a tool from another tool palette
want to copy, then click the
icon associated with the
tool and drag it to the tool palette in the workspace.
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK.
This description is used as the tool's tooltip on the tool palette, and to describe the tool if it is stored in a tool catalog.
6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the tool. 8 If you do not want to use the default layer key for multi-view blocks, select a Layer Key. 9 If you want to override the default layer name for multi-view blocks, select a Layer Override. 10 Select a multi-view block definition. 11 For Style location, select the drawing file containing the definition used for this multi-view block, or select
Browse and use a standard file selection dialog box to select the file. 12 Under Bound Spaces, define if this multi-view block tool can be used as a bounding object for associative
spaces. You can select three options here:
Yes: this multi-view block tool can be used as bounding object for associative spaces. No: this multi-view block tool cannot be used as bounding object for associative spaces. By style: this multi-view block tool will use the bounding settings from the multi-view block definition.
NOTE For more information on associative spaces, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
13 Expand Scale. 14 Specify the scale of the multi-view block:
If you want to...
Then...
specify fixed values for the scale
select No for Specify scale on screen, and enter X, Y, and Z values for the scale.
allow users to specify the scale of the object upon insertion select Yes for Specify scale on screen.
15 Expand Location.
1520 | Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks
16 Specify the rotation of the multi-view block:
If you want to... specify a fixed value for the rotation
Then...
select No for Specify rotation on screen, and enter a value for Rotation.
allow users to specify the rotation of the object upon insertion select Yes for Specify rotation on screen.
17 Expand Advanced. 18 Click Insertion offset, and enter X, Y, and Z offsets for each view block in the multi-view block, as necessary. 19 Click OK. 20 Click Attributes, and edit the prompt and value of each attribute, as necessary. 21 Click OK twice.
Adding Multi-View Blocks to a Drawing
Multi-view blocks are inserted in a drawing by referencing their definitions in one or more of the following locations: DesignCenterTM Tool palettes Tool catalogs
Predefined multi-view blocks supplied with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop are available with DesignCenter. These blocks represent items such as furniture, electrical appliances, pipes, ducts, annotation symbols, and schedule tags.
A generic multi-view block reference tool is supplied in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog. This tool is in the Helper Tools category.
How you access a custom multi-view block definition--for example, blocks that you or someone else in your organization defined--depends on what you do with the block after you define it. You can use the multi-view block definition to create AEC content in DesignCenter, or to create a multi-view block tool that can be stored in a tool palette or tool catalog.
When you insert a multi-view block reference in a drawing, you are prompted to specify the insertion point for the block. Depending on how the multi-view block was defined, you may be prompted to specify rotation angle and scale values.
Inserting a Multi-View Block
Use this procedure to add a multi-view block to a drawing.
1 Find the multi-view block definition and begin the insertion process:
If the multi-view block is... stored as AEC content
Then...
use DesignCenter to locate the AEC content, and double-click the content.
inserted using a tool on a tool palette
open the tool palette containing the multi-view block tool, and click the tool.
inserted using a tool stored in a tool catalog
use the Content Browser to locate the tool, click the icon for the tool, and drag it to the drawing area.
2 Specify the insertion point for the block. If you added insertion points to the view blocks, you can cycle through the points with the CTRL key.
Adding Multi-View Blocks to a Drawing | 1521
3 Specify the scale, if prompted:
If you want to... specify a scale value
Then... enter a value at the Command prompt.
dynamically set the scale
use the pointing device, and click when you see the appropriate scale.
set the scale to match that of another multi-view block in the enter m (match) at the Command prompt, and select a multi-
drawing
view block to match the scale.
4 Specify the rotation angle, if prompted:
If you want to... specify a rotation value
Then... enter a value at the Command prompt.
dynamically set the rotation
use the pointing device, and click when you see the appropriate rotation.
set the rotation to match that of another multi-view block in enter m (match) at the Command prompt, and select a multi-
the drawing
view block to match the rotation.
5 To insert additional references to the multi-view block, continue from step 2. 6 Press ENTER to finish inserting blocks.
Modifying Multi-View Blocks
You can change the attributes of a multi-view block in a drawing. For example, you can change the rotation or the scaling factor.
Changing the Rotation of a Multi-View Block
Use this procedure to change the rotation of a multi-view block. 1 Double-click the multi-view block whose rotation you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Enter a value for Rotation.
Changing the Associated Multi-View Block Definition
Use this procedure to change the multi-view block definition associated to the multi-view block. For information about the relationship between multi-view blocks and multi-view block definitions, see "Creating Multi-View Block Definitions" on page 1514.
1 Double-click the multi-view block you want to change.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General.
3 Click Definition, and select a new multi-view block definition for the multi-view block.
Changing the Scale Factor of a Multi-View Block
Use this procedure to change the scale factor of a multi-view block. 1 Double-click the multi-view block you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Scale. 3 Change the scale factor as needed:
If you want to...
Then...
change the X scale factor
enter a new value for X.
1522 | Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks
If you want to... change the Y scale factor change the Z scale factor
Then... enter a new value for Y. enter a new value for Z.
Changing the Offset of a Multi-View Block Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the offset of a multi-view block using the Location grip. When you first add a multi-view block to a drawing, the offset value is set to 0. You can change the position of the multi-view block by offsetting it from its original insertion point. You can also change the offset of a multi-view block using the Properties palette.
1 Select the multi-view block you want to change.
2 Select the Location grip, right-click, and click Edit View Block Offsets.
3 Select the view block to change.
In Model view, the Location grip has three possible edit modes: Edit Along XY Plane, Edit Along XZ Plane, and Edit Along ZX Plane. Press CTRL to cycle among modes until you are in the desired mode. The default edit mode is along the XY plane. In Plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane. 4 Offset the multi-view block to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the multi-view block along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the multi-view block is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the multi-view block is constrained to the Y dimension direction. 5 Right-click, and click Exit Edit View Block Offsets.
The selected view block is offset from the original insertion point.
Changing the Location of a Multi-View Block Using Grips
Use this procedure to relocate an existing multi-view block using the Location grip. In Model view, the Location grip has three possible edit modes: Edit Along Object's XY Plane, Edit Along Object's YZ Plane, and Edit Along Object's XZ
Changing the Offset of a Multi-View Block Using Grips | 1523
Plane. Press CTRL to cycle among modes until you are in the desired mode. The default edit mode is along the XY plane. In Plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane. You can also change the location of a multi-view block using the Properties palette.
1 Select the multi-view block you want to relocate. 2 Select the Location grip.
3 Move the multi-view block to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the multi-view block along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the multi-view block is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the multi-view block is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Multi-View Block
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, enter notes, or attach reference files to a multi-view block in a drawing. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a multi-view block.
1 Double-click the multi-view block to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information about adding hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1524 | Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks
4 To add or edit a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference file, Click If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
next to Reference documents: Then...
click
, select a file, and click Open.
enter text under Description.
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
select the file name, and click
.
Editing the Location and Rotation of Attributes in a Multi-View Block
Use this procedure to change the location and rotation of attributes within a multi-view block.
NOTE The location and rotation of an attribute in a multi-view block can only be modified if the attributes have not been inserted with the Lock position in block option selected during attribute creation. For more information, see "Attribute Definition Dialog Box" in AutoCAD Help.
Rotating a tag attribute in Plan view
1 Select the multi-view block whose attributes you want to edit. 2 Right-click, and click Edit Attribute Orientations.
Each attribute has a grip for location and for rotation. In Model view, the Location grip has three possible edit modes: Edit Along Object's XY Plane, Edit Along Object's YZ Plane, and Edit Along Object's XZ Plane. Press CTRL to cycle among modes until you are in the desired mode. The default edit mode is along the XY plane. In Plan view, the Location grip is restricted to movement in one plane. If there is more than one attribute with the same offset value, the attribute location grips reposition themselves according to their priority over other offset grips.
3 To change the location of an attribute relative to the multi-view block, select the Location grip, move the block attribute to the desired location and click once, or enter a value and press ENTER. If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction. You can also lock the movement of the block attribute along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either dimension direction in the current edit mode, and then press TAB, the movement of the block attribute is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the block attribute is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 To change the rotation of an attribute relative to the multi-view block, select the Rotation grip, rotate the block attribute to the desired angle and click once, or enter a value and press ENTER.
5 To exit the attribute editing mode, right-click, and click Exit Edit Attribute Orientations. Alternatively, you can deselect the multi-view block.
Editing the Location and Rotation of Attributes in a Multi-View Block | 1525
Updating Multi-View Block Attributes
Use this procedure to update the attributes of blocks in your drawing, using the current attributes defined for the view blocks upon which each multi-view block is based. You need to do this if you change attribute definitions in one or more of the block definitions on which the multi-view block is based.
1 On the Format Menu, click Multi-View Block, and click Multi-View Block Update. 2 Select the multi-view blocks to be updated. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Enter y (Yes) to include text style properties (for example, width factor, oblique, mirroring) when updating
attributes, or n (No) to update all attributes properties except those relating to text style. 5 Press ENTER to end the update process.
1526 | Chapter 34 Multi-View Blocks
Documentation
5
1527
1528 | Chapter 35 Documentation
Spaces
35
Spaces are 2-dimensional or 3-dimensional style-based architectural objects that contain spatial information about a building, including floor area, wall area, volume, engineering properties, and more. Spaces are also used for organizing reports such as statements of probable construction cost, energy requirements and analysis, leasing documents, operating costs and fixtures, and lists of furniture and equipment.
1529
Unifying Spatial Objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop
Spaces are 2-dimensional or 3-dimensional style-based architectural objects that contain spatial information about a building, including floor area, wall area, volume, engineering properties, and more.
In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, spaces, areas, and space boundaries in have been unified into one space object which contains the properties formerly associated with other these objects, as well as new and enhanced features designed to provide a comprehensive solution for spatial design within the building model.
The table below maps objects from earlier releases to their newer counterparts.
Prior Releases Spaces Space boundaries Areas Area groups Area name definitions Area group templates Area evaluation
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 Spaces Spaces Spaces Zones List definitions Zone templates Space evaluation
Spaces
Spaces now contain the properties associated with spaces and areas prior to Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, as well as engineering properties for working in Autodesk® Building Systems. Spaces can be associatively generated as 3D freeform objects from bounding objects like walls and slabs. A space object has individual boundaries for base area, net area, usable area, and gross area. You can define the offsets between the boundaries by style or manually. Spaces can be grouped into zones and processed in space evaluations.
Components of an extruded space
Space Boundaries
Space boundaries are now part of the space object, and not separate objects as they were prior to Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007. A space has a base boundary, net boundary, usable boundary, and a gross boundary. Space boundaries created prior to Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 will be converted to walls when the drawing that contains them is opened in the current version of the software. Managed spaces will be converted to associative spaces. Space boundaries include a number of scheduling properties.
For information about converting space boundaries to walls and spaces, see "Conversion of Space Boundaries to Walls and Spaces" on page 1656.
1530 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Space boundaries
Areas Areas have been integrated into spaces, which now include the properties formerly specific to areas. Among the area-specific features are the decomposition view, name definitions, calculation modifiers, and space evaluation. When you open a drawing that contains areas, the areas are automatically converted to spaces, with all area properties being converted to the corresponding space properties. For new properties, default values are used. Area tools are no longer needed and are omitted. For information about converting areas to spaces, see "Auto-Converting Legacy Areas to Spaces" on page 1561.
Area Groups and Zones Area groups have been converted to zones. When you open a drawing that contains area groups, the area groups are automatically converted to zones, with all area group properties being converted to the corresponding zone properties. For new properties, default values are used. Area group tools are no longer needed and are omitted. Zones are a new object as of Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 and serve as a grouping mechanism for spaces. Zones can be created to group spaces according to function, location, or any user-defined system. You can attach specific calculation modifiers and schedule properties to a zone. You can also build hierarchical zone structures that represent the structure of your building, a space categorization standard, or any user-defined grouping structure. For information about converting area groups to zones, see "Converting Area Groups to Zones" on page 1633.
Area Name Definitions and List Definitions Area name definitions have been converted to list definitions. A list definition is a list of names that can be assigned to a space or zone style to ensure consistent naming of spaces and zones across a project. For example, a list definition could contain entries for bedroom, living room, bathroom, and so on. When you open a drawing that contains area name definitions associated to an area or area group, the area name definition is automatically converted to a list definition. You can assign the list definition to the converted space or zone through its style.
Area Group Templates and Zone Templates Area group templates have been converted to zone templates, which provide structure definitions for zone hierarchies. You define a zone template with a set of subzones and content restrictions, and use it to create the zone structure in the drawing. When you open a drawing that contains area group templates, the area group templates are automatically converted to zone templates.
Area Evaluation and Space Evaluation The area evaluation feature has been converted to the space evaluation feature. Space evaluation is a documentation feature that calculates the area and perimeter information for your finished floor plan. This information is displayed in a separate file that you export from Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to a spreadsheet or text processing application. Evaluation templates ensure that the information is displayed in a consistent, structured way. Architects need the space evaluation feature for submitting floor plans to the building authorities and customers. Space evaluation can also be used for performing cost estimates, assigning jobs to contractors, or organizing the facility management of buildings.
Unifying Spatial Objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop | 1531
Other Space Features
In addition to integrating functionality formerly provided by other spatial objects, spaces offer the following features beginning with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007. Associative Spaces Spaces can be generated from bounding objects and be associative to them. When the bounding objects change, you can update the space accordingly. For example, if you have generated spaces from the walls in a floor plan, and then move some walls to another location, you perform an update and the space is recalculated according to the new geometry. Associative spaces
Associative spaces can be 2D spaces, extruded 3D spaces, or 3D freeform spaces. 2D and extruded 3D spaces can be associative to walls, AutoCAD linework, and object profiles. 3D freeform spaces can be bounded by a number of AEC objects. Valid bounding objects for 3D freeform spaces are all common building objects, like walls, curtain walls, roofs, roof slabs, slabs, and structural members. For a complete listing, see "Bounding Objects for Associative 3D Freeform Spaces" on page 1544. 3D Freeform Spaces 3D freeform spaces can model irregular 3D shapes. They can be generated associatively from bounding building objects, or converted from mass elements. Freeform spaces can be useful for modelling non-extrusion shaped rooms. Some examples for 3D freeform spaces
Each surface of a 3D freeform space can be grip-edited individually, making it possible to create complex space forms. Space Adjacencies Spaces can automatically establish adjacencies between faces of neighboring spaces. Space adjacencies are important when exporting and processing a building plan to an engineering application like Autodesk Building Systems.
Space Types
The following types of spaces can be modeled in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop: Associative and Non-Associative Spaces When a space is generated from bounding objects, it is associative to the bounding objects. When the bounding objects change, you can update the space accordingly. If a bounding wall is dragged, you can update the space so that it becomes correspondingly larger or smaller. The associativity of a space to its bounding objects can be disconnected after creation. You could do this, if you want to freeze the shape of the space and not have it react to any subsequent changes in the bounding objects. 2D Spaces 2D spaces display spatial information in 2 plan dimensions.
1532 | Chapter 35 Spaces
2D spaces in Plan view
The Z direction is by default set to 0 and ignored during creating, editing, and scheduling the space. 2D spaces can be rectangular or polygonal. 2D spaces can either be drawn as non-associative spaces or be generated associatively from bounding walls, AutoCAD linework, or AEC object profiles. Extruded 3D Spaces An extruded 3D space is similar to a 2D space, but has a user-defined extrusion height. Extruded spaces are useful for regularly shaped 3D spaces like uniform-height rooms in a building. Extruded spaces can have floor and ceiling thickness and heights above the ceiling and below the floor. Height above the ceiling is often used to place ductwork, cables and electrical installations in a room. Space height parameters
Space ceiling and floor parameters
Extruded 3D spaces can be associative to bounding walls, AutoCAD linework, or AEC object profiles, but they are bounded only in the X and Y directions. The Z direction is defined by the extrusion height. If you need a space that is fully bounded by objects in all 3 spatial dimensions, you need to generate a 3D freeform space. Additional space dimensional parameters
3D Freeform Spaces 3D freeform spaces are usually generated from bounding objects, like walls, roofs and slabs, and are associative to them. Associative 3D freeform spaces must be bounded in all directions to form a valid bounding shape. Another way to create a 3D freeform space is to convert a non-extrusion type mass element to a space. If freeform spaces are generated
Space Types | 1533
from bounding objects, they are by default associative to the bounding geometry and can be updated when the bounding geometry changes. Some examples for 3D freeform spaces
Space Workflows
Spaces are a powerful tool to create any type of room-based object, schedule it and create calculations for it. The following sections outline some high-level workflows for working with spaces.
Working with Spaces (High Level Overview)
The following high-level steps are involved in using spaces in your floor plan: Step 1: Create Spaces in one or more of the following ways: Create non-associative 2D and extruded 3D spaces. For more information, see "Drawing a Non-Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Space " on page 1554 and "Converting Objects, Profiles, and Polylines to Non-Associative Spaces" on page 1559. Generate associative spaces from bounding objects. For more information, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. Step 2: Prepare the space evaluation: Define the space boundary offsets. For more information, see "Changing the Boundary Offset Type" on page 1565. Set up calculation cut planes for 3D freeform spaces. For more information, see "Setting Calculation Cut Planes for 3D Freeform Spaces" on page 1606. Define and apply property set information to spaces and zones. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963. Create zones for grouping spaces and attach spaces to them. For more information, see "Zones" on page 1627 and "Attaching a Space to a Zone" on page 1607. Define and apply calculation modifier styles to spaces and zones. For more information, see "Calculation Modifiers" on page 1621. Step 3: Calculate the space values: Insert a space schedule in the drawing. For more information, see "Managing Schedule Tables" on page 1932. Generate a space evaluation. For more information, see "Space Evaluation" on page 1650.
Working with Associative Spaces - Overview
Associative spaces can be generated from bounding building objects and can be updated as the building geometry changes.
Step 1: Create the building geometry from which you want to generate associative spaces. Step 2: Start the Autogenerate Spaces tool, as described in "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. Step 3: Select the geometry from which the space is to be generated.
The generated space is associative to its bounding objects.
1534 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Step 4: Change the building geometry, if necessary. Step 5: Update the space to conform to the changed building geometry. For more information, see "Updating
Associative Spaces" on page 1588.
Working with Boundary Offsets
Spaces have 4 separate boundaries representing the base area, net area, usable area, and gross area. You can define the offsets and the calculation of space boundaries with a space style or manually. Defining boundary offsets in the space style
Step 1: Create a new space style. For more information, see "Creating a Space Style" on page 1608. Step 2: In the style properties, define the offsets that the net, usable, and gross boundaries of spaces with that style
should have in relation to the base boundary.
Step 3: Set the style in a space tool, as described in "Creating a Space Tool" on page 1562. Step 4: Set the Offset boundaries setting in the space tool to By Style. For more information, see "Changing the
Boundary Offset Type" on page 1565. Step 5: Insert spaces with the space tool.
The new spaces display the boundary offsets defined in the style. Spaces with style-defined boundary offsets
Working with Boundary Offsets | 1535
Defining boundary offsets manually Step 1: Insert a space in the drawing. Step 2: In the Properties palette, set the Offset boundaries setting to Manual. Grips for all four boundaries are displayed.
Grips for manual space boundaries
Step 3: Grip-edit the boundaries, as described in "Grip-Editing Space Boundaries" on page 1570.
Working with Calculation Cut Planes - Overview
If you are working with 3D freeform spaces, you can calculate their area at 2 different cut plane heights. This is useful for attics, where different heights are calculated differently.
Step 1: Create a 3D freeform space, as described in "Generating Associative 3D Freeform Spaces" on page 1547 or "Converting Mass Elements to Spaces" on page 1559.
Step 2: Define the calculation cut planes of the space, as described in "Setting Calculation Cut Planes for 3D Freeform Spaces" on page 1606.
Step 3: Define the display properties for the 2 calculation cut planes and the cut plane hatches, as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style" on page 1613.
Step 4: Generate and apply a property set definition with automatic properties for calculation cut planes. Then, create a schedule table with the calculated cut plane values. For more information, see "Basic Schedules" on page 1920.
1536 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Working with List Definitions - Overview
List definitions are name lists for spaces and zones. You can attach a list definition to a space style or to a zone style to ensure that all spaces or zones inserted with that style use names from the list. List definitions can be created for a number of purposes, for example to enforce consistent naming of spaces according to a building standard.
Step 1: Create a list definition in Style Manager, as described in "List Definitions" on page 1624.
Step 2: Attach the list definition to a space or zone style, as described in "Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style" on page 1610 and "Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style" on page 1641.
Step 3: Add a space or zone to the drawing, and select a name from the list.
Working with Calculation Modifiers - Overview
A calculation modifier is a value or formula you can add to the area and perimeter values of each boundary of a space to modify values for certain calculations. For example, you can specify a 3% plaster deduction for all interior walls, or calculate a balcony at only 50% of its square meters for renting.
Step 1: In Style Manager, create a new calculation modifier style, as described in "Creating a Calculation Modifier Style" on page 1622.
Step 2: Define a formula with which to calculate the value of the base area or base perimeter of the space.
Step 3: Add the calculation modifier to a space or to a zone, as described in "Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers for Spaces" on page 1606 and "Changing Calculation Modifiers for a Zone" on page 1637.
Working with List Definitions - Overview | 1537
Step 4: To apply the modifier to the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space, create and apply a property set definition that contains properties for the calculated area and perimeter values of the net, usable and gross boundaries. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
Step 5: Use the modified values in a schedule table or in a space evaluation. For more information, see "Basic Schedules" on page 1920 and "Space Evaluation" on page 1650.
Working with Zones - Overview
Zones are objects that can be used to group spaces. Zones can have spaces attached to them and can contain other zones in an hierarchical structure. For example, you can create a zone called Office Building with sub-zones for the individual offices in the building. Each workplace within an office can be represented by a space. Zones in a building
Step 1: Create a zone style in Style Manager, as described in "Creating a Zone Style" on page 1640. Step 2: If necessary, restrict the allowed content in the zone style.
You can define that spaces can only be attached to one zone of the same style. This could be useful to prevent spaces from getting attached to multiple zones of the same type and being calculated multiple times. You can also prevent a zone of the selected style from being attached to another zone of a different style. Step 3: If you have a zone structure that you want to use again because it represents a standard, create a zone template, as described in "Creating a Zone Template" on page 1647.
1538 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Zones based on DIN277 template
Step 4: Add a zone or zone template to the drawing. Step 5: If necessary, attach calculation modifiers to the zone. A calculation modifier attached to a zone is used for
all spaces and zones attached to the zone. Step 6: Attach spaces or other zones to the zone, as described in "Attaching a Space to a Zone" on page 1607.
Zone with attached subzones and spaces
Working Space Evaluations - Overview
After creating spaces and zones in your floor plan, you can generate a space evaluation report.
Step 1: Generate the spaces and zones you need for the space evaluation. Step 2: Attach calculation modifiers as necessary, as described in "Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers
for Spaces" on page 1606. Step 3: Select an evaluation template and the values and preview graphics you want to display in the evaluation
file. For more information, see "Preparing the Space Evaluation" on page 1651.
Working Space Evaluations - Overview | 1539
Step 4: Generate the evaluation file either as an MS Excel document or a TXT text document. For more information, see "Creating the Space Evaluation Document" on page 1655.
Space Properties
The properties of space objects are illustrated and described below. Note that some properties are limited to specific space types. For example, a 2D space does not have an extrusion height.
Property General Category Description Layer Style Name
Tag
Associative
Space Type
Description
All
User-defined description of the space.
All
Specifies the layer on which the space is placed. By default the layer
assignment is defined in the space style.
All
Specifies the space style. The style defined in the space tool is the default.
All
The name of the space. If a list definition has been specified in the space
style, the defined list of names is available as a drop-down list. For more
information, see "Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style" on page
1610.
All (only available during Specifies a space tag to be inserted when adding the space. Space tags
space add and in tool are available in the sample drawings shipped with the software. You can
properties)
also create your own space tags.
All
Indicates whether the space is associative. An associative space is
generated from bounding objects like walls and slabs. You can disconnect
the associativity of a space after adding it.
NOTE If you insert a non-associative space, the Associative field reads No and is read-only. To change the space associativity, see "Changing the Associativity of a Space" on page 1605.
Offset Boundaries
All
Specifies the offset type by which the 4 space boundaries (base boundary, net boundary, usable boundary, and gross boundary) are calculated.
Manual: you use the grips on the individual boundaries to move them to the desired offsets.
By Style: you define the offsets between the space boundaries in the space style.
Calculation Modifiers
Space/Zone Manager Create Type
1540 | Chapter 35 Spaces
All
Identifies any calculation modifiers for the space. A calculation modifier
is a formula that modifies area and perimeter values of the boundaries
of the space.
NOTE To apply the modifier to the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space, you need to create and apply a property set definition that contains properties for the calculated area and perimeter values for those 3 boundaries. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
All
Accesses the Space/Zone Manager worksheet, in which you enter
information used to process spaces in engineering applications. For more
information, see "Editing Space Surface Properties with the Space/Zone
Manager Worksheet (Extruded 3D Spaces)" on page 1601.
Non-Associative Spaces (only available during adding a space and in tool properties)
Specifies the type of space to be created:
Insert: inserts a space according to the target dimension settings in the space style. For information on setting target dimensions of a space in the space style, see "Specifying Target Dimensions for the Space" on page 1609.
Property
Segment type Component Dimensions Category Geometry Type
Overall Space Height
Ceiling height
Floor thickness Ceiling thickness Height above ceiling Height below floor Default Surface Height Justification
Space Type
Description
Rectangle: lets you create a rectangular space with user-defined dimensions.
Polygon: lets you create a space composed of user-defined line and arc segments.
Non-associative polygonal spaces (only available during adding a space and in tool properties)
Specifies whether the individual segments of a polygonal space are lines or arcs.
All
3D spaces
3D spaces 3D spaces 3D spaces 3D spaces 3D spaces 3D spaces 3D spaces
Specifies the geometry type of the space to be created: 2D: creates a 2D space. Any converted area objects from older versions of the software are initially converted to 2D spaces. Extrusion: creates a 3D space with a height extruded from the 2D geometry. Extruded 3D spaces have floor and ceiling components and can have room above the ceiling and below the floor. Freeform: creates a 3D freeform space. A 3D freeform space can only be generated from bounding objects or be converted from a non-extruded mass element shape. You can also convert an existing 2D or extruded 3D space to a 3D freeform space.
Specifies the overall height of the space, including floor to ceiling height, floor thickness, ceiling thickness, space above ceiling, and space below floor.
NOTE This value is read-only for associative 3D freeform spaces.
Specifies the ceiling height of the space.
NOTE This height is calculated from the top of the floor to the bottom of the ceiling. You can define additional floor and ceiling thickness.
Specifies the thickness of the floor. If the floor thickness is set to 0, no floor is displayed.
Specifies the thickness of the ceiling. If the ceiling thickness is set to 0, no ceiling is displayed.
Specifies the distance between the top of the space ceiling to the top of the space. Specifies the distance between the bottom of the space floor and the bottom of the space. Specifies the combined height of ceiling height, ceiling thickness, and height above ceiling. Specifies the relative vertical position of the space insertion point on the space as one of the following:
Top of floor Bottom of floor Bottom of space below floor (available only if the height of the space
below the floor is greater than 0.)
Space Properties | 1541
Property Actual Dimensions Category Length Width Base area
Space Type
All All All
Base Perimeter
All
Description
Specifies the length of the space. Specifies the width of the space. Displays the base area of the space. NOTE The base area was the net area in older versions of the software. When inserting a space based on target dimensions, you can enter a base area value if you have not chosen to constrain the area.
Displays the base perimeter of the space. NOTE The base perimeter was the net perimeter in older versions of the software.
Base Volume Advanced Dimensions Calculation Plane 1 + 2 Height
Target Dimensions Target area
Maximum area
Minimum area
Location Rotation Elevation Additional Information
3D spaces
Displays the base volume of the space.
3D freeform spaces
Specifies the height for calculating the areas of a 3D freeform space on 2 different calculation planes. This would be useful to calculate the rentable area of room directly under the roof at two different room heights.
Non-associative spaces based on target dimensions
Non-associative spaces based on target dimensions
Non-associative spaces based on target dimensions
Displays the target area defined in the space style. Displays the maximum area defined in the space style. Displays the minimum area defined in the space style.
Non-associative spaces Non-associative spaces Non-associative spaces
Specifies the rotation of the space. Specifies the elevation of the space. Specifies the location and coordinate system of the space.
The following additional properties for spaces are available as automatic scheduling properties and can be attached to a space or space style through a property set definition:
Property Calculated (Base) Area
Net Area Net Calculated Area
Usable Area Usable Calculated Area
Space Type All
All All
All All
Description
Displays the base area of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
Displays the net area of the space.
Displays the net area of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
Displays the usable area of the space.
Displays the usable area of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
1542 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Property Gross Area
Gross Calculated Area Calculated (Base) Perimeter Net Perimeter Net Calculated Perimeter Usable Perimeter Usable Calculated Perimeter Gross Perimeter Gross Calculated Perimeter Volume overall Volume below floor Volume above ceiling
Space Type All
All All All All All All All All 3D spaces 3D spaces 3D spaces
Description
Displays the gross area of the space.
NOTE The offsets between base, net, usable, and gross areas can be defined by the space style or by manual editing. For more information, see "Changing the Boundary Offset Type" on page 1565.
Displays the gross area of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
Displays the base perimeter of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
Displays the net perimeter of the space.
Displays the net perimeter of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
Displays the usable perimeter of the space.
Displays the usable perimeter of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
Displays the gross perimeter of the space.
Displays the gross perimeter of a space including modifications by calculation modifiers.
Displays the overall volume of a space.
Displays the volume for the space below the floor minus the floor thickness.
Displays the volume for the space above the ceiling minus the ceiling thickness.
Using Space Tools to Create Spaces
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place spaces by selecting a space tool with a specific space style and other predefined properties. You can use the tool with its default settings, or you can change any properties that are not controlled by the style. You can also use space tools to create new spaces by applying tool properties to existing objects.
Tool palette containing space tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain space tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain space tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Sample Palette catalog Design Tool catalog
Using Space Tools to Create Spaces | 1543
For more information on accessing tools in these catalogs, see "Content Browser" on page 77.
Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain space tools with space styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Generating Associative Spaces
Associative spaces are spaces that are bounded by objects that enclose the space. If the bounding objects change, you can update the space, too. You would typically work with associative spaces if you have created your floor plan with walls, slabs, and roofs, and you need to generate spaces for the documentation phase of the project.
Geometry Types of Associative Spaces
Associative spaces can be 2D spaces, extruded 3D spaces, or 3D freeform spaces. An associative 2D or extruded 3D space is bounded only by objects in the X and Y direction of the floor plan. The height is either 0 or set to a user-defined extrusion height. A 3D freeform space is associative to the objects bounding it in all 3 spatial dimensions.
2D and extruded 3D spaces can be associative to walls, AutoCAD linework, and AEC object profiles. 3D freeform spaces can be associative only to a number of selected AEC objects. For a list of bounding AEC objects for 3D freeform spaces, see "Bounding Objects for Associative 3D Freeform Spaces" on page 1544.
External References
A space can be associative to bounding objects in external references. If the bounding objects in the external reference change, the space in the host drawing can be updated accordingly. However, spaces that have been generated in an external reference do not interact with bounding objects in the host drawing.
Associative Spaces and Bounding Objects
You can disconnect an associative space from its bounding objects, so that it is not affected by future modifications to those objects. Similarly, you can select a previously non-associative space and associate it with a set of bounding objects you select.
When you make a previously non-associative space associative to the bounding objects around it, the geometry of the space is then defined by those objects, and the grips for modifying the space boundaries are removed.
When an associative space is disconnected from its bounding objects, the space boundaries display grips and can be edited individually. If the surrounding objects change after the space is disconnected from them, the space cannot be updated anymore.
Associative Spaces and Boundary Offset Types
Each space has 4 individual boundaries: base boundary, net boundary, usable boundary, and gross boundary. The offsets between the boundaries can be determined either by the space style or by manually grip-editing the boundaries.
When you generate a space that is associative to bounding objects, the base boundary of the space is determined automatically from the geometry of the bounding objects; therefore, the base boundary of the space is not editable. If you define your offsets by style, the other boundaries are not directly editable either. If you define your offsets manually, you can edit the net boundary, usable boundary, and gross boundary independently from the base boundary.
Bounding Objects for Associative 3D Freeform Spaces
The following building objects can be selected as bounding objects for 3D freeform spaces:
Object Wall Curtain wall/Curtain wall unit Door/Window assembly Door/Window/Opening Mass element Roof
Location of the generated space base boundary Near face of wall body (at base curve) Curtain wall body Near face of frame (at base curve) Shape defines openings in space surfaces Near face of mass element body (at bottom for 2D and 3D extrusion) Near face of roof body
1544 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Object Roof slab Slab Structural member Multi-view block
Location of the generated space base boundary Near face of roof slab body (at cut plane) Near face of slab body (at cut plane) Near face of member body (at base curve) Model geometry (at bottom)
Additionally, there are some special considerations for the geometry of the following objects:
Object Walls
Curtain walls/Curtain wall units
Special Geometry Considerations
If a wall that is set to not bound spaces intersects a wall that does bound spaces, and both are in the same cleanup group, the resulting space can be invalid and flow through the cleanup holes. If the walls are put on different cleanup groups, a valid space can be generated.
Interferences, roof line, floor line, and frame profiles are included in the geometry of the generated space boundary.
NOTE Empty cells are ignored when the placement of the space boundary is determined. The space will be divided at the empty cell. If a modifier creates a hole or gap through the curtain wall, the gap is ignored also.
Door/Window assemblies
Interferences and frame profiles are included in the geometry of the generated space boundary.
NOTE Empty cells are ignored when the placement of the space boundary is determined. The space will be divided at the empty cell. If a modifier creates a hole or gap through the assembly, the gap is ignored also.
Roof slabs
Body modifiers, fascia, and soffit bodies are included in the geometry of the generated space boundary.
NOTE Interferences and holes in the roof slab will be ignored when the space is generated.
Slabs
Body modifiers, fascia, and soffit bodies are included in the geometry of the generated space boundary.
NOTE Interferences and holes in the slab will be ignored when the space is generated.
Walls
Plan modifiers, body modifiers, interferences, sweeps, end caps, and opening end caps are included in the geometry of the generated space boundary.
NOTE If a modifier creates a hole or gap through the wall, then the gap will be ignored when the placement of the space is determined.
Structural members Custom display blocks Multi-view blocks
Holes or gaps in the structural member are ignored when the placement of the space boundary is determined.
When custom display blocks that alter the body of a bounding object are attached to the model display representation, it affects the geometry of an associative space.
Bodies stored in the model view block are used for the geometry of the generated space boundary.
For objects that can bound spaces, you can specify whether that use is permitted. You can do this for the object or for the object style. For example, if walls of a specific style - like toilet stall walls or half-high kitchen counter walls - are
Bounding Objects for Associative 3D Freeform Spaces | 1545
never considered as bounding a space, you can set the style to be non-bounding, so that any walls of that style are ignored when you select a set of walls from which to generate a space. All walls set to bounding
Lower closet wall set to non-bounding
For information on how to set an object or style as bounding see "Setting an Object Style as Bounding" on page 1546 and "Setting an Object Instance as Bounding" on page 1547.
Setting an Object Style as Bounding
Use this procedure to set in an object style that it can bound associative spaces. When an object style is set as bounding, by default all objects that have the style assigned will be used in the selection set for an associative space. You can override the bounding settings from the object style in the object settings, if necessary. NOTE Most bounding objects can be used only to generate 3D freeform spaces. For example, if you set the bounding setting of a slab style to "yes" that setting will only be applied if the slab is used in the selection set for a 3D freeform space. If you try to generate an extruded 3D space, the slab will not be used as a bounding object, regardless of the setting in the style. IMPORTANT If you want to intersect walls with different style-defined bounding conditions, make sure to put the wall instances in different cleanup groups. If a wall that has a non-bounding style, intersects with a wall that has a bounding style, and they are in the same cleanup group, the wall that has a bounding style will be considered "leaking" because of its cleanup with the wall with the non-bounding style. As a result, no spaces can be generated even if the geometry would otherwise be valid.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects. 3 Select an object category for valid bounding objects. 4 Expand the desired object category, and select the style you want to set as bounding. 5 Click the General tab. 6 Select the checkbox for This style may act as a boundary for automatic spaces.
1546 | Chapter 35 Spaces
7 Click OK.
Setting an Object Instance as Bounding
Use this procedure to define an object instance as bounding. In the object style, you specify whether you want to allow objects of that style to be able to bound associative spaces. You can override that setting in the object properties of an individual object. NOTE Most bounding objects can be used only to generate 3D freeform spaces. For example, if you set the bounding setting of a slab to "yes" that setting will only be applied if the slab is used in the selection set for a 3D freeform space. If you try to generate an extruded 3D space, the slab will not be used as a bounding object, regardless of the setting in the Properties palette.
IMPORTANT If you want to intersect walls with different bounding conditions, make sure to put the walls in different cleanup groups. If a wall that is set to non-bounding intersects with a wall that is set to bounding, and they are in the same cleanup group, the wall that is set to bounding will be considered "leaking" because of its cleanup with the non-bounding wall. As a result, no spaces can be generated even if the geometry would otherwise be valid.
1 Select the object for which you want to set the bounding behavior, and double-click. 2 In the Properties palette, expand General. 3 For Bound Spaces, select one of the following options:
By Style: This option uses the bounding behavior defined in the object style. This is the default setting. Yes: If this object is included in the selection set for an associative space, it will bound the space. No: If this object is included in the selection set for an associative space, it will not bound the space.
Generating Associative 3D Freeform Spaces
Use this procedure to create an associative 3D freeform space from bounding objects. To create an associative 3D freeform space, the space must be fully bounded by objects on all surfaces. In a 3D freeform space, you cannot define gaps in the bounding geometry. The 3D freeform geometry is too complex for the software to correctly extrapolate values for missing segments.
Setting an Object Instance as Bounding | 1547
Some examples for 3D freeform spaces
1 Verify that your drawing is displayed in a 3D Isometric view. IMPORTANT You cannot generate 3D freeform spaces in Plan views or other 2D views.
2 Select a Space tool on a tool palette, right-click, and click Apply Tool Properties to Auto generate. The Generate Spaces dialog box is displayed. IMPORTANT The Generate Spaces dialog does not contain the same settings as the Properties palette that is used to insert non-associative spaces. For properties you cannot set in the Generate Spaces dialog, the values defined in the selected space tool or the last-used space settings in the Properties palette are used. You can change space properties on the Properties palette after generating the space.
3 Select a style for the space. If you generate multiple spaces within one command sequence, all spaces will use the same style.
4 For Type, select Freeform. 3D freeform spaces can only be generated from bounding AEC objects. Therefore, the Filter drop-down list on the right is read-only. The objects that can be used to generate a 3D freeform space are listed under "Bounding Objects for Associative 3D Freeform Spaces" on page 1544. NOTE If an object has been defined as non-bounding in its style, or object properties, it will be filtered out.
IMPORTANT If your object selection set contains walls with different bounding conditions, make sure to put the walls in different cleanup groups. If a wall that is set to non-bounding intersects with a wall that is set to bounding, and they are in the same cleanup group, the wall that is set to bounding will be considered "leaking" because of its cleanup with the non-bounding wall. As a result, no spaces can be generated even if the geometry would otherwise be valid. 5 For Offset boundaries, select how the 4 space boundaries (base, net, usable, and gross boundary) are offset from each other:
By Style: The boundary offsets are determined by the offset settings in the space style. For more information, see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
Manual: the boundary offsets are 0 by default, and can be manually determined by grip-editing the boundaries.
1548 | Chapter 35 Spaces
NOTE An associative space generated from bounding AEC objects has no grips for the base boundary, as the base boundary is determined by the bounding objects. If you select Manual for Offset boundaries, the net, usable, and gross boundaries can be grip-edited.
Defining a tag for the space 6 Click Tag Settings.
7 If there are space tags in the drawing, select Add Tag to New Spaces, and select a tag multi-view block for Tag Definition.
8 To add a property set to the new space, select Add property Set to New Spaces. 9 For Property Set, select the property set definition from which to select properties when adding the space.
NOTE You can select only property sets containing manual properties here. The property set is attached to the space in its entirety.
10 Select 2 manual properties that you want to be displayed in the Generate Spaces dialog.
11 If you have chosen numeric properties, such as room numbers, you can increment them if you select the Auto-Increment Numeric Properties checkbox.
12 Click OK.
13 In the Generate Spaces dialog for Properties, enter values for the 2 manual properties you selected. These values will be automatically attached to the space during creation.
Defining the Boundary Detection Method
14 For Boundary Set, specify how the bounding objects for the space should be selected:
If you want to...
Then...
automatically select bounding objects visible in the drawing area
select Automatic.
select bounding objects manually in the drawing
select Manual.
By default, you cannot generate a new space in a boundary that already contains a space. However, a situation can arise where you want to establish an interference between 2 spaces and therefore need to generate a space within a boundary that already contains a space.
15 If you need to generate spaces within boundaries that already contain a space, select Allow overlapping spaces.
Generating Spaces
16 In the drawing, generate the spaces:
If you...
Then...
have selected Automatic for Boundary Set on the command line, enter a (Generate All).
Generating Associative 3D Freeform Spaces | 1549
If you... have selected Manual for Boundary Set
Then...
select the desired bounding objects, and then enter a (Generate All) on the command line.
NOTE If you are generating a large number of spaces with the Autogenerate command, especially if any of them are in external references, the Analyze Spaces progress dialog is displayed. The dialog can appear to be non-responsive when you are working on a large dataset. Do not try to cancel the process in this case, but wait until it is finished.
17 Click Close.
Generating Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Spaces from Bounding Walls, Linework, and Object Profiles
Use this procedure to generate an associative 2D or extruded 3D space from bounding walls, AutoCAD linework, or AEC object profiles. When you create an associative 2D or extruded 3D space, the space is associative only to objects in the X and Y directions of a plan. For example, you can create an associative 2D space from 4 closed walls without a roof or a floor slab.
Generating an 2D or Extruded 3D Space from Walls
When you generate an associative 2D or extruded 3D space exclusively from bounding walls, the bounding walls determine the extents of the space geometry in the X and Y directions, and the space is associative to them. You can define an allowed gap size between the bounding walls. The software will extrapolate the missing geometry from the existing wall segments.
NOTE Openings in walls, like doors and windows, are ignored regardless of whether you allow gaps.
Generating a 2D or Extruded 3D Space from Bounding Walls and AutoCAD linework
You can generate an associative 2D or extruded 3D space from a combination of walls and AutoCAD linework (lines, arcs, polylines, circles), or from AutoCAD linework alone. When you generate a 2D or extruded 3D space from walls and AutoCAD linework, you can define an allowed gap size between bounding walls or linework segments. This would be useful for example if you have created a representation of a building with AutoCAD lines, and represented doors and windows as line gaps. To ignore those gaps when generating the space, you need to set the allowed gap size to a value larger than your largest gap. The software will extrapolate the missing geometry from the existing line segments.
1550 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Generating an extruded 3D space from an AutoCAD polyline
Generating 2D and Extruded 3D Spaces from Object Profiles You can generate an associative 2D or extruded 3D space from the profiles of AEC objects and linework in a drawing. In this case, the object base line will be used as the base boundary of the new space. For example, if you generate spaces from wall profiles, spaces will be generated from the wall outlines. You would typically use this option to generate spaces that are deducted from another space, as in the case of deducting stairs or columns from the rentable area of a space.
Walls (left) and space generated from wall profiles (right)
1 Select a Space tool on a tool palette, right-click, and click Apply Tool Properties to Auto generate. The Generate Spaces dialog box is displayed. IMPORTANT The Generate Spaces dialog does not contain the same settings as the Properties palette that is used to insert non-associative spaces. For properties you cannot set in the Generate Spaces dialog, the values defined in the selected space tool or the last-used space settings in the Properties palette are used. You can change space properties on the Properties palette after generating the space.
2 Select a style for the space. If you generate multiple spaces within one command sequence, all spaces will use the same style.
3 For Type, select 2D or Extrusion. 4 For Offset boundaries, select how the 4 space boundaries (base, net, usable, and gross boundary) are offset
from each other: By Style: The boundary offsets are determined by the offset settings in the space style. For more information, see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
Generating Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Spaces from Bounding Walls, Linework, and Object Profiles | 1551
Manual: The boundary offsets are 0 by default, and can be manually determined by grip-editing the boundaries.
NOTE An associative space generated from bounding walls, AutoCAD linework, or the profile of an AEC object has no grips for the base boundary, as the base boundary is determined by the bounding outline. If you select Manual for Offset boundaries, the net, usable, and gross boundaries can be grip-edited.
Defining a tag for the space 5 Click Tag Settings.
6 If there are space tags in the drawing, select Add Tag to New Spaces, and select a tag multi-view block for Tag Definition.
7 To add a property set to the new space, select Add property Set to New Spaces. 8 For Property Set, select the property set definition from which to select properties when adding the space.
NOTE You can select only property sets containing manual properties here. The property set is attached to the space in its entirety.
9 Select 2 manual properties that you want to be displayed in the Generate Spaces dialog. 10 If you have chosen numeric properties, such as room numbers, you can increment them if you select the
Auto-Increment Numeric Properties checkbox. 11 Click OK. 12 In the Generate Spaces dialog for Properties, enter values for the 2 manual properties you selected. These
values will be automatically attached to the space during creation.
Defining the extrusion height
13 If you have selected Extrusion for Type, click
.
14 In the Space Properties dialog, click the Dimensions tab.
15 Enter the height dimension values for the generated space:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the overall height of the space, including floor to enter a value for Overall Space height. ceiling height, ceiling and floor thickness, and space above ceiling and below floor
specify the ceiling height of the space
enter a height value.
specify a floor thickness
enter a value for Floor thickness.
specify a ceiling thickness
enter a value for Ceiling Thickness.
specify the distance between the top of the space ceiling enter the appropriate value for Height above Ceiling. to the top of the space
1552 | Chapter 35 Spaces
If you want to...
specify the distance between the bottom of the space floor and the bottom of the space
specify the combined height of ceiling height, ceiling thickness, and height above ceiling
Then... enter the appropriate value for Height below Floor.
enter a value for Default Surface Height.
16 Click OK.
Selecting boundary detection and gap settings
17 For Boundary Set, specify how the bounding objects for the space should be selected:
If you want to...
automatically select bounding objects visible in the drawing area
Then... select Automatic.
select bounding objects manually in the drawing
select Manual.
18 To determine which objects should be used as bounding objects, select an option for Filter:
Walls only: A space is generated only from bounding walls. If a wall has been defined as non-bounding in its style or its object properties, it will be filtered out. For more information, see "Setting an Object Style as Bounding" on page 1546 and "Setting an Object Instance as Bounding" on page 1547.
IMPORTANT If your walls have different bounding conditions, make sure to put the walls in different cleanup groups. If a non-bounding wall intersects with a bounding wall, and they are in the same cleanup group, the bounding wall will be considered "leaking" because of its cleanup with the non-bounding wall. As a result, no spaces can be generated even if the geometry would otherwise be valid.
Walls, lines, arcs, circles, and polylines: A space is generated from bounding walls and AutoCAD lines, arcs, polylines, and circles.
All Linework: This option creates spaces from the 2D profile of each selected object.
19 If you have selected to generate a space from bounding walls, or from a combination of walls and AutoCAD linework, specify if the space detection should allow for gaps between the bounding objects:
If you want to...
create a space from lines and objects that contain one or more coplanar gaps
Then...
specify a value for Max. gap size. Any gap smaller than this value will be ignored when generating the space.
create a space from closed sets of lines and specify 0 (zero) for Max. gap size. objects only
20 If you have selected to generate a space from bounding walls, or from a combination of bounding walls and AutoCAD linework, specify whether you want to ignore objects or linework enclosed within in the boundary set:
If you want to...
Then...
generate a space from the selected walls and select Ignore holes. linework only, and disregard any linework or objects within the boundary set
generate space boundaries for objects or linework within the boundary set
deselect Ignore holes.
Generating Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Spaces from Bounding Walls, Linework, and Object Profiles | 1553
By default, you cannot generate a new space in a boundary that already contains an existing space. However, a situation can arise where you want to establish an interference between 2 spaces and therefore need to generate a space within a boundary that already contains a space.
21 If you need to generate spaces within boundaries that already contain a space, select Allow overlapping spaces.
Generating Spaces
22 In the drawing, generate the spaces:
If... generate one space at a time
Then... generate spaces by picking internal points within the desired boundary sets.
autogenerate all spaces
on the command line, enter a (Generate All).
you have selected to create spaces from the select each object that you want to generate a space from, and then enter
2D profiles of objects
a (Generate All) on the command line.
NOTE If you are generating a large number of spaces with the Generate All command, especially if any of them are in external references, the Analyze Spaces progress dialog is displayed. The dialog can appear to be non-responsive when working on a large dataset. Do not try to cancel the process in this case, but wait until it is finished.
23 Click Close.
Creating Non-Associative Spaces
Non-associative spaces are freestanding spaces with user-defined geometry. You can either draw a space or convert linework, object outlines, mass elements, or slabs to spaces, which you can then modify according to your needs.
Drawing a Non-Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Space
You can draw non-associative 2D and extruded 3D spaces. When you draw a space, you can either base it on target dimensions taken from the space style, or draw rectangular or polygonal spaces with dimensions that you define.
NOTE Area objects from older versions of the software are converted to 2D spaces. You can convert them to extruded 3D spaces, if necessary.
Drawing a Space with Style-Defined Target Dimensions Use this procedure to draw a non-associative space based on target dimensions set in the space style. For information about setting target dimensions in the space style, see "Specifying Target Dimensions for the Space" on page 1609.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Space tool you want to use, and select it. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Enter a name for the space.
If the space style has a list definition associated to it, you can select a name from the drop-down list. For information about list definitions, see "Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style" on page 1610.
5 Select a tag for the space. If no space tags are contained in the list, you can drag a tag into the drawing from the Content Browser. You can also create your own space tags from multi-view blocks.
NOTE For user-drawn spaces, the Associative setting is read-only and set to No.
1554 | Chapter 35 Spaces
6 For Offset boundaries, select how the 4 space boundaries (base, net, usable, and gross boundary) are offset from each other:
Manual: The boundary offsets are 0 by default, and can be manually edited with grips. Each boundary has its own set of grips.
By Style: The boundary offsets are defined in the space style. For more information, see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
7 For Create type, select Insert.
8 To add a calculation modifier to the space, click the setting for Calculation modifiers, and select one or more calculation modifiers to add to the space.
For information about calculation modifiers, see "Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers for Spaces" on page 1606.
9 Expand Component Dimensions. 10 Specify the geometry type of the new space:
If you want to... create a 2D space
Then... select 2D from the list.
create an extruded 3D space
select Extrusion from the list.
11 If you have selected Extrusion, enter the parameters for the height of the space:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the overall height of the space, including floor to enter a value for Overall Space height. ceiling height, ceiling and floor thickness, and space above ceiling and below floor
specify the ceiling height of the space
enter a height value.
specify a floor thickness
enter a value for Floor thickness.
specify a ceiling thickness
enter a value for Ceiling thickness.
specify the distance between the top of the space ceiling enter the appropriate value for Height above Ceiling. to the top of the space
specify the distance between the bottom of the space floor and the bottom of the space
enter the appropriate value for Height below Floor.
specify the combined height of ceiling height, ceiling thickness, and height above ceiling
enter a value for Default Surface Height.
12 Select one of the following options for Justification to specify the vertical position of the space insertion point relative to the space:
Top of floor
Bottom of floor
Bottom of space below floor (available only if the height of the space below the floor is bigger than 0.)
13 Expand Actual Dimensions. 14 To specify the geometry of the space within the boundaries of the target dimensions on screen, select Yes
for Specify on screen. To specify the geometry of the space by entering values in the Properties palette, select No for Specify on Screen.
Drawing a Non-Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Space | 1555
15 Specify which dimension of the space is to be constrained during insertion:
If you want to... fix the space area value during insertion
Then...
select Area for Constrain. This lets you change the length and width of the space, but only within the range of the target dimensions. For example, if you constrain the area to 9m2, you can still choose to make both length and width 3m, or to make the length 4m, and the width 2.25 meters, as both combinations result in an area of 9 m2.
fix the space length during insertion
select Length for Constrain. If you constrain the length of a space, then any change to the space area will only change the width dimension of the space, and vice versa.
fix the space width during insertion
select Width for Constrain. If you constrain the width of a space, then any change to the space area will only change the length dimension of the space, and vice versa.
do not fix a specific dimension during insertion
select *NONE* for Constrain. In this case no individual dimension is constrained, and you can specify any geometry as long as it is within the target dimensions.
16 If you have selected to not specify the space on screen, enter values for the non-constrained dimensions for Base Area, Length, and Width.
17 Insert spaces in the drawing:
If...
Then...
you have selected to specify the space on screen,
click in the drawing to define the insertion point of the space. Then, drag and click to define the space dimension, and specify a rotation.
you have entered values for the space geometry in the Properties palette
click in the drawing to define the insertion point of the space, and then specify a rotation.
18 Continue adding spaces, and press ENTER.
Drawing a Rectangular Space Use this procedure to draw a non-associative rectangular 2D or extruded 3D space.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Space tool you want to use, and select it. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Enter a name for the space.
If the space style has a list definition associated to it, you can select a name from the drop-down list. For information about list definitions, see "Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style" on page 1610.
5 Select a tag for the space. If no space tags are contained in the list, you can drag a tag into the drawing from the Content Browser. You can also create your own space tags from multi-view blocks.
NOTE For user-drawn spaces, the Associative setting is read-only and is set to No.
6 For Offset boundaries, select how the 4 space boundaries (base, net, usable, and gross boundary) are offset from each other:
Manual: The boundary offsets are 0 by default, and can be manually edited with grips. Each boundary has its own set of grips.
1556 | Chapter 35 Spaces
By Style: The boundary offsets are defined in the space style. For more information, see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
7 For Create type, select Rectangle.
8 To add a calculation modifier to the space, click the setting for Calculation modifiers, and select one or more calculation modifiers to add to the space.
For information about calculation modifiers, see "Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers for Spaces" on page 1606.
9 Expand Component Dimensions. 10 Specify the geometry type of the new space:
If you want to... create a 2D space
Then... select 2D from the list.
create an extruded 3D space
select Extrusion from the list.
11 If you have selected Extrusion, enter the parameters for the height of the space:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the overall height of the space, including floor to enter a value for Overall Space height. ceiling height, ceiling and floor thickness, and space above ceiling and below floor
define the ceiling height of the space
enter a height value.
define a floor thickness
enter a value for Floor thickness.
define a ceiling thickness
enter a value for Ceiling Thickness.
specify the distance between the top of the space ceiling enter the appropriate value for Height above Ceiling. to the top of the space
specify the distance between the bottom of the space floor and the bottom of the space
enter the appropriate value for Height below Floor.
specify the combined height of ceiling height, ceiling thickness, and height above ceiling
enter a value for Default Surface Height.
12 In the drawing area, specify the start point of the space, and drag and click to define the opposite corner. 13 Continue adding spaces, and press ENTER.
Drawing a Polygonal Space Use this procedure to draw a non-associative polygonal 2D or extruded 3D space. A polygonal space is composed of line and arc segments and can be used to represent non-rectangular rooms.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Space tool you want to use, and select it. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Enter a name for the space.
If the space style has a list definition associated to it, you can select a name from the drop-down list. For information about list definitions, see "Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style" on page 1610.
5 Select a tag for the space. If no space tags are contained in the list, you can drag a tag into the drawing from the Content Browser. You can also create your own space tags from multi-view blocks.
Drawing a Non-Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Space | 1557
NOTE For user-drawn spaces, the Associative setting is read-only and set to No.
6 For Offset boundaries, select how the 4 space boundaries (base, net, usable, and gross boundary) are offset from each other:
Manual: The boundary offsets are 0 by default, and can be manually edited with grips. Each boundary has its own set of grips.
By Style: The boundary offsets are defined in the space style. For more information, see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
7 For Create type, select Polygon.
8 For Segment type, select if the first space segment should be a line or an arc.
9 To add a calculation modifier to the space, click the setting for Calculation modifiers, and select one or more calculation modifiers to add to the space.
For information about calculation modifiers, see "Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers for Spaces" on page 1606.
10 Expand Component Dimensions. 11 Specify the geometry type of the new space:
If you want to... create a 2D space
Then... select 2D from the list.
create an extruded 3D space
select Extrusion from the list.
12 If you have selected Extrusion, you can now enter the parameters for the height of the space:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the overall height of the space, including floor to enter a value for Overall Space height. ceiling height, ceiling and floor thickness, and space above ceiling and below floor
specify the ceiling height of the space
enter a height value.
specify a floor thickness
enter a value for Floor thickness.
specify a ceiling thickness
enter a value for Ceiling Thickness.
specify the distance between the top of the space ceiling enter the appropriate value for Height above Ceiling. to the top of the space
specify the distance between the bottom of the space floor and the bottom of the space
enter the appropriate value for Height below Floor.
specify the combined height of ceiling height, ceiling thickness, and height above ceiling
enter a value for Default Surface Height.
13 If you have selected Line for Segment type, specify the start and end point of the first linear segment on screen.
14 If you have selected Arc for Segment type, specify the start point, a point on the arc, and the endpoint of the segment on screen.
15 Proceed with adding segments for the space. By default, for each new segment the segment type of the previous segment is used. If necessary, you can change the segment type in the Properties palette.
16 Close the space and press ENTER.
1558 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Converting Objects, Profiles, and Polylines to Non-Associative Spaces
Various objects can be converted to non-associative spaces. If you are converting a non-extruded mass element, you can convert its geometry to a 3D freeform space. If you are converting other AEC objects or polylines, the 2D profile of the object or polyline is converted to a 2D space or an extruded 3D space. Converting Mass Elements to Spaces Use this procedure to convert a mass element to a space. Converting a Mass Element to a 3D Freeform Space When you convert a non-extrusion type mass element to a space, it is created as a 3D freeform space, unless the space tool you use has its geometry type set expressly to Extrusion. Non-extrusion type mass elements include:
Arch Barrel Vault Isosceles Triangle Right Triangle Pyramid Cone Dome Sphere Gable Freeform
Converting a Mass Element to an Extruded 3D Space When you convert an extrusion type mass element to a space, it is created as an extruded 3D space. Non-extrusion type mass elements include: Mass elements that can be converted to an extruded 3D space include:
Box Cylinder Extrusion
NOTE To make sure that the converted space uses the mass element geometry, verify that the space tool used has its geometry type set to Undefined (--). If it is set to Extrusion, a mass element is converted based on its profile shape and extruded from that. A non-extruded mass element shape, like for example a pyramid, will be converted to an extruded box shape with the pyramid profile.
Converting Objects, Profiles, and Polylines to Non-Associative Spaces | 1559
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Space tool you want to use, and select it. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click the space tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Mass Element. 3 Select the mass element that you want to convert to a space, and press ENTER. 4 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the mass element or enter y (Yes) to
erase it. 5 Edit the properties of the space in the Properties palette as needed. Converting Mass Groups to Spaces Use this procedure to convert a mass group to a space.
IMPORTANT If the mass group contains multiple mass elements that do not intersect, one space with multiple profiles will be created. In most cases, this is not the desired result, so it is recommended that you disconnect each mass element from the mass group first, and convert it individually.
1 On the command line, enter SpaceConvertMassElement. 2 Select the mass group you want to convert to a space, and press ENTER. 3 When prompted to erase the original geometry, press ENTER to keep the mass group or enter y (Yes) to erase
it. Converting Polylines, Profiles, and Object Outlines to Spaces Use this procedure to convert polylines or 2D profiles of objects to spaces. This can be useful for defining construction spaces that usually consist of the outlines of walls, columns, stairs, and other building objects. The new space generated from the profile of the object will be created with the properties defined in the space tool. If a specific setting has been set to Undefined (--) in the space tool properties or cannot be set in the tool properties, the last used setting on the Properties palette will be used. You can use the following object outlines as space boundaries:
Walls/Curtain walls Columns/Braces/Beams/Slabs Doors/Windows/Window assemblies Roofs/Roof slabs/Slabs Stairs/Railings Mass elements/Mass groups AEC polygons Profiles Closed polylines
Column objects (left), converted to spaces (right)
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Space tool you want to use, and select it.
1560 | Chapter 35 Spaces
(You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 Right-click a space tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to Linework and AEC Objects. 3 Select the objects and closed polylines to convert, and press ENTER. 4 In the Convert to Space worksheet, under Cut Plane Height, the height at which the object should be cut
to generate the profile of the new space. 5 If you want to erase the underlying object, select Erase Layout Geometry. To keep the object in the drawing,
verify that the option is cleared. 6 If you want to define the cut plane height on screen, select Specify on Screen. 7 Click OK. 8 If necessary, select the cut plane height in the drawing.
Auto-Converting Legacy Areas to Spaces
If you have legacy drawings created prior to Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, and they contain area objects, these areas will automatically be converted to spaces when you open the drawing with the current software. The following table maps area properties to space properties.
Area property Name Description Layer Style
Calculation modifiers
Space property Name Description Layer Style
Calculation modifiers
Value/Default value
Existing value
Existing value
Existing layer (A-Area-G)
Area style is converted to space style. Properties are matched where possible; new properties have default values. For more information, see "Converting Area Styles to Space Styles" on page 1616.
Existing modifiers
NOTE By default, converted calculation modifiers are applied only to the base area and base perimeter of the space.
N/A Base Area Calculated Area Base Perimeter Calculated Perimeter Rotation Elevation Additional Information (Location) N/A N/A
Geometry Base Area Calculated Area Base Perimeter Calculated perimeter Rotation Elevation Additional Information (Location) Length Width
2D Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing values Existing value Existing value
NOTE Subtracted areas and hatches will be ignored when converting a legacy area to a space in Architectural Desktop 2007. If necessary, you can re-subtract any void portions, as described in "Creating a Hole in a Space" on page 1581.
If the legacy area has no override for display properties at the style level, then one will be created on the migrated space to mimic the drawing default display properties of the legacy areas. This is intended to preserve visual fidelity for legacy areas that do not have display property overrides. Existing style or object display property overrides on legacy areas will carry forward to the migrated spaces.
Converting Objects, Profiles, and Polylines to Non-Associative Spaces | 1561
Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2006 allowed users to create areas that self-intersect. Spaces cannot self-intersect. During migration, a self-intersecting area is converted into a self-intersecting space with a defect marker.
Creating a Space Tool
Use this procedure to create a space tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own tools if you frequently place multiple spaces of specific styles that have the same properties.
For example, you might create an office plan with spaces for cubicles. Although all cubicles use the same space style in your floor plan, the cubicle walls in administrative areas are lower than the walls in office areas. To work efficiently, you can create a space tool for each space height. You can then select the appropriate tool to place the cubicles with the correct height in each area of the floor plan.
NOTE You can use space tools only to draw non-associative spaces or to convert objects and linework to spaces. Associative spaces are generated with a different process. For more information, see "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from a space in the drawing
Then... select the space, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a space style in the Style Manager
click Format menu Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. Defining space tool properties
4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 To add keywords to the tool, click More Info. 7 Enter the keywords, and click OK. Defining space properties in the space tool
8 Expand Basic, and expand General. 9 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the space created from this tool, and click OK. 10 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 11 Select a space style. 12 Select the drawing file containing the style used for this space tool. 13 Enter a name for spaces inserted with the tool. 14 Select a space tag. 15 Select the drawing file containing the tag used for this space tool.
1562 | Chapter 35 Spaces
NOTE A space tool is always non-associative.
16 For Offset boundaries, select how the 4 space boundaries (base, net, usable, and gross boundary) are offset from each other:
Manual: The boundary offsets are 0 by default, and can be manually edited with grips. Each boundary has its own set of grips.
By Style: The boundary offsets are defined in the space style. For more information, see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
17 Select the Create type of the space. You can choose one of these options:
Insert: Inserts a space according to the target dimensions in the space style. Rectangle: Inserts a rectangular space with user-defined length and width. Polygon: Inserts a polygonal space with user-defined segments.
18 If you selected Polygon for Create type, define the shape of the first space segment for Segment Type. You can select a line or an arc segment.
19 Expand Component Dimensions. 20 Specify the geometry type of the space tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a 2D space tool
select 2D from the list.
create an extruded 3D space tool
select Extrusion from the list.
create a space tool to convert mass elements select Undefined (--) from the list. to spaces
NOTE 3D freeform is not available as geometry type in the Space tool properties, but if you select Undefined (--), any non-extrusion type mass elements that are converted with the tool are converted to 3D freeform spaces.
Defining the extrusion height in the space tool
21 If you have selected Extrusion, enter the parameters for the height of the space tool:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the overall height of the space, including floor to enter a value for Overall Space height. ceiling height, ceiling and floor thickness, and space above ceiling and below floor
specify the ceiling height of the space
enter a height value.
specify a floor thickness
enter a value for Floor thickness.
specify a ceiling thickness
enter a value for Ceiling Thickness.
specify the distance between the top of the space ceiling enter the appropriate value for Height above Ceiling. to the top of the space
specify the distance between the bottom of the space floor and the bottom of the space
enter the appropriate value for Height below Floor.
specify the combined height of ceiling height, ceiling thickness, and height above ceiling
enter a value for Default Surface Height.
Creating a Space Tool | 1563
22 Select one of the following options for Justification to specify the vertical position of the space insertion point relative to the space:
Top of floor Bottom of floor Bottom of space below floor (available only if the height of the space below the floor is bigger than
0.)
Defining target dimensions in the space tool
23 Expand Actual Dimensions.
NOTE The settings for target dimensions of a space are visible only if you have selected Insert as the Create type. Rectangular and polygonal spaces do not observe target dimensions. The range of values allowed here depends on the target dimensions defined in the space style.
24 To specify the geometry of the space within the boundaries of the target dimensions on screen, select Yes for Specify on Screen.
To specify the geometry of the space by entering values in the Properties palette, select No for Specify on Screen.
25 Specify which dimension of the space should be constrained during insertion:
If you want to...
Then...
fix the space area value during insertion
select Area for Constrain. This lets you change the length and width of the space, but only within the range of the target dimensions. For example, if you constrain the area to 9m2, you can still choose to make both length and width 3m, or to make the length 4m, and the width 2.25 meters, as both combinations result in an area of 9 m2.
fix the space length during insertion
select Length for Constrain. If you constrain the length of a space, then any change to the space area will only change the width dimension of the space, and vice versa.
fix the space width during insertion
select Width for Constrain. If you constrain the width of a space, then any change to the space area will only change the length dimension of the space, and vice versa.
do not fix a specific dimension during insertion
select *NONE* for Constrain. In this case no individual dimension is constrained, and you can specify any geometry as long as it is within the target dimensions.
26 If you selected No for Specify on screen, enter values for the non-constrained dimensions for Base Area, Length, and Width.
27 Click OK.
Editing Spaces
You can edit spaces in a drawing. Depending on the geometry type, associativity, and boundary offset type, modifications can be unavailable for specific space types.
Changing the geometry of a space: The geometry of a space can be edited with grips or by changing values on the Properties palette. With grips, you can change the shape of a space and its boundaries, edit the location and height of a space, and edit space surfaces. Directly changing the geometry of a space is limited to non-associative spaces.
Boolean operations: Non-associative spaces can be modified with various Boolean operations, like merging, intersecting, subtracting, trimming, and dividing. For non-associative 3D freeform spaces, surface editing operations are available.
1564 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Editing space boundaries: Spaces have 4 different boundaries that can be used to represent different types of space values. You can change boundaries individually, or define offsets in the space style.
Changing the associativity of a space: Spaces can be associative to bounding objects, or they can be freestanding and non-associative. Depending on your needs, you can disconnect an associative space from its bounding objects, or you can make a freestanding space associative to bounding objects.
Changing the calculated value of a space: With the help of calculation modifiers you can change area and perimeter values calculated from a space. For example, you can add a calculation modifier for a 3% plaster deduction for all spaces in an office. For 3D freeform spaces you can define 2 different calculation cut planes at which the space area is calculated.
Space surface data: Extruded 3D spaces can carry engineering data on their surfaces, such as the surface type, and surface dimension values. Many of these values are used when processing architectural plans in engineering applications like Autodesk® Building Systems.
Space interactions with zones: Spaces can be attached to zones. Zones help to group spaces into functional structures, like a building, an apartment, or construction groups. Zones can be used for space evaluations and for scheduling.
Editing General Space Properties
The following procedures can be used to edit general properties of a space:
Renaming a Space
Use this procedure to rename a space.
1 Double-click the space you want to rename. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 For Name, do one of the following:
If a list definition has been attached to the space style, select a name from the list. If no list definition has been attached to the space style, enter a name in the Name field.
For more information, see "List Definitions" on page 1624.
Changing the Style of a Space
Use this procedure to assign a different space style to a space. The space style defines the list definition used, boundary offsets, and the display properties of the space. For more information, see "Space Styles" on page 1608.
1 Double-click the space you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, select a new style for Style.
When you change the space style, and the new space style has a different list definition in which the existing space name is not contained, it is possible that the existing space name is deleted and the space name defaults to the first name in the new list definition. For more information, see "List Definitions" on page 1624.
Changing the Boundary Offset Type
Spaces have 4 different boundaries that can be offset from each other. Boundary offset values can be taken from two different sources:
Manual: when you set the boundary offset type to manual, by default new spaces are inserted with a 0 offset between the individual boundaries, and can be grip-edited as described in "Activating Manual Space Boundaries" on page 1569 and "Grip-Editing Space Boundaries" on page 1570.
By Style: you can define offsets between the individual boundaries in the space style. For more information, see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
Use this procedure to change the source from which the offsets between the individual space boundaries are determined.
Editing General Space Properties | 1565
The following table summarizes the effects of switching from one source to another:
Switch from By Style Manual
Switch to Manual By Style
Effect
The boundaries keep their offsets but become editable.
The boundaries are re-calculated according to the style offsets, and become non-editable.
In the example below, a space that had its boundary offsets determined by the space style has changed to manual boundaries. The boundary shapes remain the same, but they are now editable and do not react to any subsequent changes to the boundary offsets in the style.
1 Select the space for which you want to change the boundary offset type, and double-click to display the Properties palette.
2 For Offset boundaries, select one of the following:
Manual By Style
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Space
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, notes, or files to a space. You can also edit hyperlinks and notes, and edit or detach reference files from a space.
1 Double-click the space to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. 4 Click OK. 5 To add a note, click the setting for Notes, and enter the note. 6 Click OK. 7 To add a reference file, click the setting for Reference documents, and attach, edit, or detach a reference
file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK twice.
Changing the Geometry of a Space
the commands and features available for editing the geometry of a space depend on two main factors: Geometry type (2D space, extruded 3D space, and 3D freeform space) Associativity (Associative and non-associative space)
1566 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Each of the procedures in this section indicates the types of spaces it is available for.
Changing the Geometry Type of a Space
You can create 2D spaces, extruded 3D spaces, and 3D freeform spaces in Autodesk Architectural Desktop. The following table shows the results of changing a space from one geometry type to another.
Original Geometry Type
2D
New Geometry Type Extruded 3D
Result
The space reacts to the following new property values: Overall space height Ceiling height Floor thickness Ceiling thickness Height above ceiling Height below floor Base volume Justification
In the drawing, the space is updated with the display components for an extruded 3D space.
2D
3D freeform
The space reacts to the following new property values: Overall space height Ceiling height Floor thickness Ceiling thickness Height above ceiling Height below floor Base volume Justification Calculation plane 1+2 height
Extruded 3D
2D
Extruded 3D
3D freeform
The space no longer uses the following properties: Overall space height Ceiling height Floor thickness Ceiling thickness Height above ceiling Height below floor Base volume Justification
The insertion point and justification of the space will be set to the top of the floor.
The space reacts to the following new properties: Calculation plane height 1+2
Changing the Geometry Type of a Space | 1567
Original Geometry Type
3D Freeform
New Geometry Type 2D
3D Freeform
Extruded 3D
Changing geometry type of a space
Result
The space no longer uses the following properties: Overall space height Ceiling height Floor thickness Ceiling thickness Height above ceiling Height below floor Base volume Justification Calculation plane 1+2 height
The insertion point and justification of the space will be set to the top of the floor.
The space will not use the following properties any more: Calculation plane 1+2 height Any geometry of a 3D freeform space that are not compatible with an extruded 3D shape will be deleted. For example, if you convert a pyramid-shaped 3D freeform space to an extruded space, it will be converted to a box shape.
Use this procedure to change the geometry type of a space.
1 Select the space for which you want to change the geometry type, and double-click to display the Properties palette.
2 Expand Basic, and expand Component Dimensions. 3 For Geometry type, select the desired geometry.
The space geometry is updated in the drawing.
Editing Space Boundaries
Spaces have 4 different boundaries, each of which displays a different aspect of the space and can be scheduled and edited individually.
Base boundary: Normally representing the inner volume of a room covered by a space, this boundary is often used for maintenance and operations in a building. For example, if you need to determine the hiring of cleaning personnel for an office, you would use the base space as the calculation basis.
Net boundary: This boundary can be used for special applications when the calculated area of a space is smaller than the base boundary. If you calculate the rentable area of an attic room, most standards require that only those areas of the space reaching a certain height are included in the calculation. For example, the SIS standard requires that the rentable space needs to reach at least 1.90 m, and adds an additional offset of 60 cm to that. In that case, your base area could be 20 square meters, whereas the net area could be 12 square meters, and the usable area would be offset by an additional 60 cm.
1568 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Usable boundary: Many calculation standards use this boundary for planning and detailed design, renting calculations, tax and other duty calculations, statistical calculations, maintenance, pricing, and more. The usable boundaries extend from the inside of the exterior walls to the middle of the interior walls (or a specified distance into the interior walls).
Gross boundary: This boundary is used in connection with cost calculation, price estimation, calculation of tax and other duties, key numbers for the building or a specific floor, and more. Normally, the gross boundary is measured from the outside of the exterior walls to the middle of the interior walls.
IMPORTANT The net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space can only be displayed in plan views. In model views, only the base boundary and the base body of the space are displayed. Trigger grips for space boundaries
Activating Manual Space Boundaries
Use this procedure to activate boundaries of a space with manual boundary offsets. You can activate manual space boundaries for all space geometry types and for associative and non-associative spaces. NOTE Activating boundaries is a precondition for many Boolean operations, like merging and dividing space boundaries, as well as for grip-editing the boundary.
1 If necessary, switch to a Plan view. The net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space can only be activated and displayed in Plan views.
2 Select a space for which you want to display a boundary. Activated boundary grips
3 Verify that Offset Boundaries in the Properties palette is set to Manual. 4 Use the trigger grip for the appropriate boundary to activate and deactivate the grip set.
By default, grips for all 4 boundaries are activated. Alternatively, you can right-click a space, click Edit Boundaries on the context menu, and then select a boundary from the submenu to activate or deactivate.
Activating Manual Space Boundaries | 1569
Grip-Editing Space Boundaries
Use this procedure to edit a space boundary using grips.
Depending on which type of space you have created and which boundary offset type you use, different boundaries can be edited with grips:
Space Type
Boundary Offset Type
Associative
Manual
Associative
By Style
Non-Associative 2D or extruded 3D Manual
Non-Associative 2D or extruded 3D By Style
Non-Associative 3D Freeform
Manual
Non-Associative 3D Freeform
By Style
Editable Boundaries Net, Usable, Gross None Base, Net, Usable, Gross Base Net, Usable, Gross None
The Edge grip has 4 edit modes:
Offset: This is the default. Use it to offset the selected edge in a direction perpendicular to the midpoint of the edge. Depending on the shape of the boundary and the edge, neighboring lines are extended or trimmed, and new lines are added as necessary.
1570 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Offsetting the edge of a space boundary using the Edge grip
Add Vertex: Use this edit mode to add a vertex to the selected edge, and create a new edge. If the selected edge is an arc, the new edge is also an arc.
Grip-Editing Space Boundaries | 1571
Adding a vertex to the edge of a space boundary using the Edge grip
Convert to Arc: Use this edit mode to convert the selected edge to an arc and stretch the midpoint of the arc. The edge grip for an arc also has a Stretch mode. You can use it to stretch the midpoint of the arc, thus increasing the size of the arc.
1572 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Converting the edge of a space boundary to an arc using the Edge grip
Offset all: Use this option to move all edges of a space boundary an identical distance. When you drag one edge, all other edges are repositioned accordingly. This option is very useful for regular resizing operations, like scaling a space boundary.
Grip-Editing Space Boundaries | 1573
Offsetting all edges of a space boundary using the Edge grip
Changing the edge of a space boundary 1 Activate the boundary where you want to change an edge. 2 Select the Edge grip for the edge you want to change. 3 Specify the new edge location:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the edge
move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
add a vertex and create an edge
press CTRL to switch to the Add Vertex edit mode. Move the edge to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
change a selected edge to an arc/change a selected arc to a line
press CTRL twice to switch to the Convert to Arc/Convert to Line edit mode. Stretch the midpoint to the desired location and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
offset all edges at an identical distance
press CTRL three times to switch to the Offset All edit mode. Move the selected edge to the desired location for all edges and click, or enter a value and press ENTER.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing the vertex of a space boundary 1 Activate the boundary where you want to change a vertex. 2 Select the Vertex grip for the vertex you want to change.
1574 | Chapter 35 Spaces
The Vertex grip has 3 edit modes: Move: This is the default. Use it to move the selected vertex in any direction. The neighboring segments are stretched if necessary. Moving the vertex of a space boundary using the Vertex grip
Remove: Use this edit mode to remove a vertex. The neighboring segments are replaced with a line. Removing the vertex of a space boundary using the Vertex grip
Offset Edges: Use this edit mode to move a vertex and the adjacent edges of the space boundary with it. Offsetting edges of a space boundary using the Vertex grip
Grip-Editing Space Boundaries | 1575
3 Edit the vertex as necessary: If you want to... move the vertex
remove the vertex
move the vertex and the adjacent edges
Then...
move the vertex to the desired location and click; or enter a value, and press ENTER.
press CTRL to switch to the Remove Vertex edit mode, and click to confirm the removal.
press CTRL twice to switch to the Offset Edges edit mode. Move the vertex to the desired location, and click; or enter a value, and press ENTER.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Resetting Manual Space Boundaries
Use this procedure to cancel all changes made by grip-editing the net, usable, or gross boundaries of a space. The boundaries will revert back to the geometry of the base boundary.
1 Select the space the boundaries of which you want to reset. 2 Right-click, and click Edit Boundary Reset.
Changing the Location of a Manual Space Boundary
Use this procedure to move an individual manual space boundary to a different location with grips. For associative spaces, only the net, usable, and gross boundaries can be moved. The base boundary is tied to the bounding geometry. For information about moving a space with the location worksheet, see "Changing the Location of a Space" on page 1587.
1 Select the space for which you want to move an individual boundary. 2 Move a boundary as necessary:
If you want to...
Then...
move the entire space
move space to the desired location and click to release it.
move the base boundary of the space
click and hold the location grip, and press CTRL to switch to Move base boundary mode. Then, move the base boundary to the desired location and click to release it.
move the net boundary of the space
click and hold the location grip, and press CTRL twice to switch to Move net boundary mode. Then, move the net boundary to the desired location and click to release it.
move the usable boundary of the space
click and hold the location grip, and press CTRL three times to switch to Move usable boundary mode. Then, move the usable boundary to the desired location and click to release it.
move the gross boundary of the space
click and hold the location grip, and press CTRL four times to switch to Move gross boundary mode. Then, move the gross boundary to the desired location and click to release it.
1576 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Changing the Height Dimensions of a Space
Use this procedure to change the height settings of a space.
1 Double-click the space you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Component Dimensions. 3 Modify the height of the space:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the overall height of the space, including floor to enter a value for Overall space height. ceiling height, ceiling and floor thickness, and space above ceiling and below floor
specify the ceiling height of the space
enter a height value. The value you enter here is applied uniformly to the space.
specify a floor thickness
enter a value for Floor thickness.
specify a ceiling thickness
enter a value for Ceiling thickness.
specify the distance between the top of the space ceiling enter the appropriate value for Height above ceiling. to the top of the space
specify the distance between the bottom of the space floor and the bottom of the space
enter the appropriate value for Height below floor.
specify the combined height of ceiling height, ceiling thickness, and height above ceiling
enter a value for Default surface height.
The overall height of an associative space is determined by its bounding objects. However, you can change some height settings for an associative space:
The overall space height is fixed and read-only. The only way to change the overall space height is to edit the space in-place, and change the height there. In most cases, this is not recommended as the height then will differ from the actual bounded height.
You can change the ceiling thickness and the height above the ceiling for an associative space. However, if the ceiling thickness is set to 0, the height above ceiling is 0 and read-only.
You can change the floor thickness and the height below the floor for an associative space. However, if the floor thickness is set to 0, the height below floor is 0 and read-only.
If both ceiling thickness and floor thickness are 0, the ceiling height is read-only.
The justification of an associative space is always set to Top of Floor.
If you put the bottom of the ceiling to the same height as the top of the space, then the ceiling is situated above the actual bounded volume, and will not be drawn. You cannot, however put the bottom of the ceiling above the top of the space.
If you put the top of the floor to the same height as the bottom of the space, then the floor is situated below the actual bounded volume, and will not be drawn. You cannot, however put the top of the floor below the bottom of the space.
Changing the Height Dimensions of a Space | 1577
The ceiling height of an associative space ranges from the bottom of the ceiling to the top of the floor. In cases where the ceiling and floor are set to 0, the ceiling height ranges from the top of the space to the bottom of the space.
Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces
You can change a number of geometric parameters of non-associative spaces. Creating Interference Conditions for a Space Use this procedure to place objects such as mass elements in a space in order to create custom openings or cutouts. For example, a column grid structure might have columns within the space. Once defined as interference conditions, the columns cut out an area at the floor and ceiling of the space. Any AEC object that has a 3D body can be used as an interference condition, as can AutoCAD polylines. NOTE Interference conditions are deducted only from the base boundary of a space. You can add the automatic property Base Area Minus Interference to schedule the value of the area with without the interference condition. When another object, such as a ceiling grid, is attached to a space object, it recognizes the interference condition. For example, if you add a column to the space as an interference condition, as long as the ceiling grid is anchored to the space object, the ceiling grid is cut. If you move the column, the ceiling grid is updated with the new column location.
Adding an interference condition to a space 1 Place the object you want to use as the interference condition in a location intersecting the space as needed. 2 Select the space to which you want to add the interference condition, right-click, and click Interference Condition Add. 3 Select the objects intersecting the space as the interference condition, and press ENTER.
Removing an Interference Condition from a Space Use this procedure to remove interference conditions from spaces. NOTE Make sure that the interference object is visible in the drawing so you can select it.
1 Select the space with the interference condition, right-click, and click Interference Condition Remove. 2 Select the object(s) functioning as the interference condition, and press ENTER. Merging Spaces Use this procedure to merge 2 or more spaces in a drawing. When you merge spaces that overlap each other, their boundaries are combined to form the boundaries of the merged space. You can merge a non-associative 3D freeform space into a 2D space or extruded 3D space, but you cannot merge a 2D or extruded 3D space into a 3D freeform space.
1578 | Chapter 35 Spaces
The following properties of the first selected space are applied to subsequent spaces merged into it: Name Description Layer Style Tag Calculation modifiers Zone attachments Space height Floor thickness Ceiling thickness Height above ceiling Height below floor Default Surface height Justification Boundary offset type Rotation Display properties Schedule properties
Merging Spaces with Manual Boundary Offsets If you merge spaces that have manual boundary offsets, each activated boundary on the first space is merged with the corresponding boundary on the other space (base with base, net with net, and so on). If a manual space boundary on the first space is not activated (displaying its grips), it is not included in the merge operation. Whether the boundaries on the second space are activated is not relevant for the merge. They are merged if their corresponding boundary on the first space is activated. If a boundary on the first space is not activated, the existing boundary on the first space will remain as it is, and the corresponding boundary on the second space will be deleted. This can result in irregular space boundaries. To avoid this, make sure that on the first space all relevant boundaries are activated, and can be merged. For information on activating manual space boundaries, see "Activating Manual Space Boundaries" on page 1569 The display properties of the boundaries of the first selected space are applied to the resulting merged boundary. For example, if the net boundary of the first space is red with a lineweight of 0.18 mm, the net boundary of the resulting merged space will be red with a lineweight of 0.18 mm.
Merging spaces with manual boundaries
Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces | 1579
Merging Spaces with Style-Defined Boundary Offsets If you merge spaces with style-defined boundary offsets, the base boundaries of both spaces are merged, and the boundary offsets defined in the style of the first space are applied to the resulting merged space.
Merging spaces with style-defined boundaries
Merging Spaces with Different Boundary Offsets If the space boundaries of the merging spaces are determined by different methods, the method used for the first selected space is used for the resulting space. Example 1: The boundaries of the first space are offset by style, and the style defines an offset between boundaries of 0.25 m. The boundaries of the second space are offset manually, and have 0 offset between the individual boundaries. If the first space is merged with the second space, the boundaries previously belonging to the second space are recalculated by the style of the first space, and offset from each other by 0.25 m.
Merging spaces with different boundary offset types
Example 2: The boundaries of space 1 are offset manually, and have 0.3 offset between the individual boundaries. The boundaries of space 2 are offset by style, and the style defines an offset between boundaries of 0.25 m. If space 1 is merged with space 2, the value of the Offset boundaries property for the resulting space will be Manual. Since the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space with style-based offsets are not grip-editable, only the base boundaries of both spaces will be merged. The boundaries of the second space are deleted from the drawing.
1 Select one of the spaces to be merged, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Merge. 2 Select the space to merge with the first space.
NOTE You can merge only those spaces that lie on the same Z-plane. Spaces with different Z-positions in the same coordinate system cannot be merged. 3 Enter y (Yes) to erase the second space or n (No) to leave the space in the drawing. Dividing a Space Use this procedure to divide a non-associative space into smaller spaces by using a divide line. The space is split at the line.
1580 | Chapter 35 Spaces
You cannot divide a non-associative 3D freeform space. If necessary, convert it to an extruded 3D space first. All properties - like for example property data, calculation modifiers, or boundary offset types - will be applied to both resulting spaces. IMPORTANT If you are dividing a space with manual boundary offsets, verify that the all boundaries are activated. Boundaries that are not activated are not divided. For information about activating manual boundaries, see "Activating Manual Space Boundaries" on page 1569.
1 Select a space to divide, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Divide. 2 Specify the divide line start point. 3 Specify the divide line endpoint.
Depending on the boundary offset type, the divide line will create different results for the net, usable, and gross, boundaries.
Creating a Hole in a Space Use this procedure to subtract spaces from one another in order to create a hole in a space. You cannot create a hole in a non-associative 3D space. If necessary, convert it to an extruded 3D space first. To create a hole, you need to select spaces that intersect one another. Alternatively, you can select a closed polyline as the shape to subtract. You can choose whether to keep the subtracted space or polyline in the drawing as a separate unit. For example, you may want to keep the space if you need to subtract the same shape from other spaces. When you subtract one space from another, the base boundary of the subtracted space is subtracted from all boundaries of the first space. The other boundaries of the subtracted space are just deleted without interacting with the first space. Depending on whether the first space has style-defined offsets or manual offsets, the boundaries around the hole are either re-calculated according to the style offsets or cut off at the intersection. IMPORTANT Before subtracting a space from another space with manual boundary offsets, verify that all boundaries you want to be cut are activated. If a boundary is not activated, the hole will not cut through it. For information about activating manual boundaries, see "Activating Manual Space Boundaries" on page 1569
Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces | 1581
Subtracting spaces with style-defined boundary offsets
Subtracting spaces with manual boundary offsets
1 Create a space in which to create a hole. 2 Create a second, smaller space to be subtracted from the larger space.
You can draw the second space within or overlapping the first space, or you can draw it in another location and then move it onto the larger space. Alternatively, you can select a closed polyline to subtract from the space. 3 Select the larger space, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Subtract. 4 Select the smaller space to subtract from the larger space. 5 Enter y (Yes) to erase the subtracted space, or n (No) to leave the space in the drawing. Creating Spaces from the Intersection of Other Spaces Use this procedure to create a new space from the overlapping portion of 2 intersecting spaces. You can choose whether to retain the original geometry after creating the new intersection space. You cannot create an intersection from non-associative 3D freeform spaces. If necessary, convert them to extruded 3D spaces first, or edit them in-place. When a space is created from 2 intersecting spaces, the following properties of the first selected space are applied to the resulting intersection space: Name Description Layer Style Tag Calculation Modifiers
1582 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Zone attachments Space height Floor thickness Ceiling thickness Height above ceiling Height below floor Default surface height Justification Boundary offset type Rotation Display properties Schedule properties Intersecting Spaces with Manual Boundary Offsets If you intersect spaces with manual boundary offsets, each activated space boundary is intersected with the corresponding space boundary on the other space (base to base, net to net, and so on.) Intersecting spaces with all boundaries activated
If a manual space boundary on the first space is not activated (displaying its grips), it is not included in the intersecting operation. This will effect the existing boundary on the first space to remain as it is, and the corresponding boundary on the second space to be deleted. This can result in irregular space boundaries. To avoid this, make sure that all relevant boundaries on the first space are activated. Intersecting spaces with only base boundary activated
For information on activating manual space boundaries, see "Activating Manual Space Boundaries" on page 1569
Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces | 1583
The display properties of the boundaries of the first selected space are applied to the resulting intersection boundary. For example, if the net boundary of space 1 is red with a lineweight of 0.18 mm, the net boundary of the resulting space will be red with a lineweight of 0.18 mm. Intersecting Spaces with Style-Defined Boundary Offsets If you intersect spaces with style-defined boundary offsets, the base boundaries of both spaces are intersected with each other, and the boundary offsets defined in the style of the first space are applied to the resulting intersection space. Intersecting spaces with style-defined boundary offsets
Intersecting Spaces with Different Boundary Offsets If the space boundaries of the 2 spaces are calculated with different offset types, the method used by the first selected space is also used for the resulting space. Example 1: The boundaries of space 1 are offset by style, and the style defines an offset between boundaries of 0.25 m. The boundaries of space 2 are offset manually, and have 0 offset between the individual boundaries. If space 1 is intersected with space 2, the base boundaries of the 2 spaces are intersected with each other, and the remaining boundaries are recalculated by the offsets of the style of space 1, and offset from each other by 0.25 m.
Intersecting style-based boundaries (left) with manual boundaries (right)
Example 2: The boundaries of space 1 are offset manually, and have 0.3 offset between the individual boundaries. The boundaries of space 2 are offset by style, and the style defines an offset between boundaries of 0.25 m. If space 1 is merged with space 2, the value of the Offset boundaries property for the resulting space will be Manual. Since the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space with style-based offsets are not grip-editable, only the base boundaries of both spaces will be intersected. The boundaries of the second space are deleted from the drawing.
1584 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Intersecting manual boundaries (left) with style-based boundaries (right)
1 Create 2 overlapping spaces. 2 Select the first overlapping space, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Crop. 3 Select the second overlapping space. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the original spaces, or n (No) to leave the spaces in the drawing. Trimming a Space Use this procedure to trim a space with a trim line. You cannot trim a non-associative 3D freeform space. If necessary, convert it to an extruded 3D space first. IMPORTANT If you are trimming a space with manual boundary offsets, verify that the all boundaries are activated. Boundaries that are not activated are not trimmed. For information about activating manual boundaries, see "Activating Manual Space Boundaries" on page 1569.
Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces | 1585
Trimming spaces with different boundary offset types
1 Select the space to be trimmed, right-click, and click AEC Modify Tools Trim. 2 Specify a start point for the trim line. 3 Specify an endpoint for the trim line. 4 Select the side of the space to be trimmed. Removing Voids from Spaces Use this procedure to remove individual voids from a space with multiple rings. You can remove voids only from 2D or extruded 3D spaces. Voids can be created in the following cases: You cut a hole in a space as described in "Creating a Hole in a Space" on page 1581. You generate a space from bounding objects that have interference objects within their boundaries. For example, you can generate a space for a room with a row of columns in it. In that case, the boundaries for the room would be defined as the outer space ring and the columns would be deducted as holes from the generated room. If you decide that the holes created by the columns are not relevant for your calculations and should be removed, you can remove them from the overall space. NOTE To remove space rings from an associative space, you first need to disable associativity for the space, as described in "Changing the Associativity of a Space" on page 1605. Alternatively, you can remove voids in associative spaces by selecting the object that created the void - for example a column - and set its Bound spaces property to No. For more information, see "Setting an Object Instance as Bounding" on page 1547.
1586 | Chapter 35 Spaces
A legacy multi-ring area is converted to a space using the current software.
1 Select a space with voids, right-click, and click Remove Void. 2 Select the void you want to remove from the space.
The void is removed.
3 Press ENTER.
Reversing Space Rings Use this procedure to reverse the value of an individual space ring, so that a positive ring (space) can be transformed into a negative ring (hole), or a negative ring back into a positive ring. Reversing a space ring value may be desirable for legacy area objects that have been converted to spaces.
1 Select a space of which you want to reverse a ring. 2 On the command line, enter SpaceReverseRing. 3 Select the space ring you want to reverse.
Reversing All Rings in a Space Use this procedure to reverse all rings of a space at once. When you reverse the space rings, all positive rings are transformed into negative rings and all negative rings are transformed into positive rings. Reversing the value of all space rings may be desirable for legacy area objects that have been converted to spaces.
1 Select the space you want to reverse. 2 On the command line, enter SpaceReverseProfile. 3 Select further spaces for reversing. 4 Press ENTER to end your selection.
Changing the Location of a Space Use this procedure to relocate a space by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The space also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the space are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the space by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the space on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about moving individual space boundaries, see "Changing the Location of a Manual Space Boundary" on page 1576. For more information about the WCS and the UCS, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the space you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional information. 4 On the Location worksheet, specify the location of the space:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the space
enter new coordinate values for Insertion Point.
locate the space on the XY plane
make the normal of the space parallel to the Z axis: for Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces | 1587
If you want to... locate the space on the YZ plane locate the space on the XZ plane change the rotation of the space
Then...
make the normal of the space parallel to the X axis: for Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the space parallel to the Y axis: for Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Geometry of an Associative Space
The geometry of an associative space is largely generated from its bounding objects. To change the geometry, you need to change the bounding objects and then update the space accordingly. For complex space modifications, like changing the surface geometry or Boolean operations, the associativity of the space needs to be disabled, as described in "Changing the Associativity of a Space" on page 1605.
Updating Associative Spaces When the bounding objects of an associative space change, the space needs to be updated to reflect the new geometry.
1 Select the associative space for which you want to update the geometry. 2 Right-click, and click Update Space Geometry.
If the space geometry can be updated, it will reflect the update. If the space geometry could not be updated, for example because the bounding objects are not closed, or an xref drawing could not be read in, a defect marker will be displayed on the space.
NOTE If you are updating a large number of spaces with the Update Space Geometry command, especially if some or all of them are in external references, the Analyze Spaces progress dialog is displayed. The dialog can appear to be non-responsive when working on a large dataset. Do not try to cancel the process in this case, but wait until it is finished.
Dividing an Associative Space with Bounding Objects
Use this procedure to divide an associative space by adding new bounding objects, and then updating the space accordingly.
The resulting enclosed areas need to be valid for the space geometry type. A 2D space or an extruded 3D space needs to be closed on all sides, but can contain a user-defined allowed gap. A 3D freeform space needs to be enclosed on all surfaces and can have no gaps.
Dividing a and updating an associative space
1 Create a new bounding object in the place where you want to divide an existing associative space.
1588 | Chapter 35 Spaces
2 To make sure that the new object will create a new associative space, verify the following conditions: The bounding object must be one of the objects listed in "Bounding Objects for Associative 3D Freeform Spaces" on page 1544. The bounding object must create an enclosed area. The object must be defined as a bounding object in the object style or in the object properties. For more information, see "Setting an Object Style as Bounding" on page 1546 and "Setting an Object Instance as Bounding" on page 1547.
3 Select the space that now spans two interior rooms, right-click, and click Update Space Geometry. The existing space is updated to fit into one of the two new enclosed areas.
4 To create a second space in the second new enclosed area, do one of the following: Select a space tool, right-click, and click Apply Tool Properties to Auto generate, and add a new associative space, as described in "Generating Associative Spaces" on page 1544. Copy the existing associative space, and paste it into the newly created empty enclosure. Then, right-click, and click Update Space Geometry.
Merging Associative Spaces Use this procedure to merge associative spaces by removing interior bounding objects, and then updating the space inside the boundaries.
Merging associative spaces 1 Select the object that is dividing the 2 spaces you want to merge, and remove it. 2 Verify that the resulting area is still enclosed on all sides. 3 Select one of the two spaces, and delete it. 4 Select the remaining space, right-click, and click Update Space Geometry.
Changing Space Surfaces
3D spaces are composed of individual surfaces.
Changing Space Surfaces | 1589
3D space surfaces
Surfaces allow you to manipulate and schedule a 3D space according to your needs: Editing the geometry of the space: You can change the shape of a space by modifying individual surfaces with grips. You can also split surfaces, join surfaces, and move surfaces within the space. This allows you to model any shape you need. Editing engineering properties: Surfaces carry information about engineering properties of the space, like the surface location type, surface opening values, or space adjacencies. These properties can be used to process an architectural plan in a downstream engineering application like Autodesk Building Systems.
NOTE You can change space surfaces only on non-associative spaces.
Trimming a Space by Plane
You can trim a part of an existing 3D space. NOTE You can edit surfaces for 3D freeform spaces. Once you start editing the geometry of space surfaces on an extruded 3D space, it is automatically converted to a 3D freeform space. You can convert it back to an extruded 3D space, but you will loose any geometry changes that are not compatible with extruded 3D spaces.
1590 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Trimming a 3D space
1 If necessary, switch to a 3D isometric view. 2 Select the 3D space you want to trim along the horizontal or vertical plane, right-click, and click Edit in
Place.
3D space (left) in in-place editing mode (right)
3 Re-select the space, right-click, and click Trim by Plane. 4 Specify the trim plane either on screen or by entering 3 points on the command line.
TIP Use a Front view to generate a horizontal trim plane and a Plan view to generate a vertical trim plane.
5 To save the changes to the space, click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
Splitting the Surface of a Space
You can split a surface of a 3D space. This is useful when you need to change the geometry of only one part of a space surface, as when creating a cable channel in a space ceiling.
NOTE You can edit surfaces for 3D freeform spaces. Once you start editing the geometry of space surfaces on an extruded 3D space, it is automatically converted to a 3D freeform space. You can convert it back to an extruded 3D space, but you will loose any geometry changes that are not compatible with extruded 3D spaces.
Splitting the Surface of a Space | 1591
Splitting a surface
1 Select the space where you want to split a surface, right-click, and click Edit in Place. 3D space (left) in in-place editing mode (right)
2 Re-select the space, right-click, and click Split Face. 3 Select the start point of the splitting line. 4 Select the endpoint of the splitting line.
5 To save the changes to the space, click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
Joining Surfaces of a Space
Use this procedure to join 2 previously split surfaces of a 3D space. Joining 2 space surfaces
1 If necessary, switch to a 3D isometric view. 2 Select the space where you want to join 2 surfaces. 3 Right-click, and click Edit in Place.
1592 | Chapter 35 Spaces
3D space (left) in in-place editing mode (right)
4 Re-select the space, right-click, and click Join Faces. 5 Select the edge separating the 2 surfaces, and press ENTER.
6 To save the changes to the space, click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
Grip-Editing the Surfaces of a 3D Space
Use this procedure to grip-edit individual surfaces of a 3D space.
NOTE You can edit surfaces for 3D freeform spaces. Once you start editing the geometry of space surfaces on an extruded 3D space, it is automatically converted to a 3D freeform space. You can convert it back to an extruded 3D space, but you will loose any geometry changes that are not compatible with extruded 3D spaces.
When you select a space surface grip, the following tooltip is displayed.
You have 6 choices while editing a surface of a space. A tooltip indicates the current option.
As you cycle through the options by pressing CTRL, the tooltip advances sequentially to indicate the current option. Pressing CTRL more than 5 times returns you to the first option, allowing you to continue cycling through the edit choices.
The cursor is constrained when you choose an orthogonal option and unconstrained when you choose a free option.
Moving a space surface orthogonally while stretching adjacent surfaces
Grip-Editing the Surfaces of a 3D Space | 1593
Moving a space surface freely while stretching adjacent surfaces Moving a space surface orthogonally while maintaining the planes of adjacent surfaces Pulling a space surface orthogonally while adding adjacent surfaces Pulling a space surface freely while adding adjacent surfaces
1594 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Pulling a space surface orthogonally while adding adjacent surfaces
Pushing a space surface orthogonally to create a hole
1 If necessary, switch to a 3D isometric view. 2 Select the space you want to edit, right-click, and click Edit in Place. 3 Select the surface grip to edit.
The tooltip displays the available edit operations:
4 Select the grip edit operation you want to perform:
If you want to...
move the surface orthogonally while stretching adjacent surfaces
Then... click and drag the surface grip to the new position.
move the space surface freely while stretching adjacent surfaces
click and hold the surface grip, press CTRL once, and specify the new location.
move the space surface orthogonally while maintaining the click and hold the surface grip, press CTRL twice, and specify
planes of adjacent surfaces
the new location.
pull the space surface orthogonally while adding adjacent surfaces
click and hold the surface grip, press CTRL three times, and specify the new location.
pull the space surface freely while adding adjacent surfaces click and hold the surface grip, press CTRL four times, and specify the new location
NOTE The location of the current UCS is temporarily moved to coincide with the original position of the surface grip that you select when you are working with this option. Only the UCS origin is changed, not its orientation.
push or pull the space surface orthogonally while either adding adjacent surfaces or creating a hole
click and hold the surface grip, press CTRL five times, and specify the new location.
Push into the space to create a hole, or pull out of the space to add adjacent faces.
Grip-Editing the Surfaces of a 3D Space | 1595
NOTE You cannot pull the space surface at such an angle, either horizontally or vertically, that the adjacent surfaces become non-planar. If this distorted condition occurs, the space surface automatically returns to its original position and an error message is displayed on the command line.
5 To save the changes to the space, click
on the In-Place Edit toolbar.
Changing Surface Data (Extruded 3D Spaces)
Space surfaces can be assigned a number of properties important for processing spaces in a downstream engineering or facility management application. You can define these properties in the architectural plan, and later export the plan or open it in an engineering application to perform calculations, such as determining the heating/cooling load on a building.
IMPORTANT Surface data can be changed only for extruded 3D spaces. If you perform a change like editing the surface height, or adding a surface opening to an extruded 3D space, and convert that space to a 3D freeform space, the changes will be lost. When you open an associative 3D freeform space in Autodesk Architectural Building Systems, however, the styles of its bounding objects, as well as openings in bounding objects will be reported.
Changing the Height of a Space Surface (Extruded 3D Spaces) Use this procedure to grip-edit the height of an individual surface of an extruded 3D space.
1 If necessary, switch to a 3D isometric view. 2 Select the space, and click the Edit Surfaces grip. 3 Select the Surface Height grip you want to edit, and drag it to the desired height or enter a value for the
height.
1596 | Chapter 35 Spaces
NOTE Further options to edit surfaces of extruded 3D spaces are available on the Space/Zone Manager worksheet. For more information, see "Editing Space Surface Properties with the Space/Zone Manager Worksheet (Extruded 3D Spaces)" on page 1601. Adding an Opening to a Space Surface (Extruded 3D Spaces) Use this procedure to add a window or door opening to the surface of an extruded 3D space. Adding openings to space surfaces can be important for building systems calculations when the drawing in opened in Autodesk Building Systems. You can also assign names to surface openings in the Space/Zone Manager worksheet.
Doors and windows are added to a space surface with grips. 1 Select the space to which you want to add surface openings, and click the Edit Surfaces grip.
Changing Surface Data (Extruded 3D Spaces) | 1597
2 Click the Add Window grip on the surface to which you want to add an opening. By default, a window opening is created.
1598 | Chapter 35 Spaces
3 To add a door, hold down CTRL while clicking the Add Window grip.
NOTE Properties for surface openings are available in the Space/Zone Manager worksheet. For more information, see "Editing Space Surface Properties with the Space/Zone Manager Worksheet (Extruded 3D Spaces)" on page 1601. Stretching, Moving, and Copying Openings in Space Surfaces (Extruded 3D Spaces) Use this procedure to stretch, move or copy a surface opening in an extruded 3D space.
1 Select the space where you want to change a surface opening, and click the Edit Surfaces grip. 2 Select one of the corner grips of the surface opening.
Changing Surface Data (Extruded 3D Spaces) | 1599
Stretching a surface opening Moving a surface opening
1600 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Copying a surface opening
3 Edit the opening:
If you want to... stretch an edge of the opening
Then... move the corner grip to the desired position.
move the opening to a new position on the click CTRL, and move the opening to the desired position. surface
copy the opening on the surface
click CTRL, and copy the opening to the desired position.
Removing an Opening from a Space Surface (Extruded 3D Spaces) Use this procedure to remove an opening from the surface of an extruded 3D space.
1 Select the space from which you want to remove a surface opening, and click the Edit Surfaces grip. 2 Click the Remove Opening grip for the opening you want to remove.
Editing Space Surface Properties with the Space/Zone Manager Worksheet (Extruded 3D Spaces) The Space/Zone Manager worksheet lets you edit all settings of surfaces of extruded 3D spaces in one location. Use this procedure to edit any of the following surface properties for an extruded 3D space:
Surface name
Changing Surface Data (Extruded 3D Spaces) | 1601
Surface location type Surface style Surface height Surface openings Opening name Opening type Opening style Opening dimensions
1 Select the space for which you want to edit surfaces, and click the Edit Surfaces grip. 2 Click the Edit Surface Properties grip or double-click the space, and click the setting for Space/Zone Manager
in the Properties palette.
Space/Zone Manager worksheet
3 Verify that Show Space Surfaces is selected.
Editing Surface Properties
4 In the Space/Zone Manager, select a surface and make any of the following changes:
If you want to... change the surface name
Then... enter a new name for Name.
change the location type of the surface
For Type, select a new type from the drop-down list. These types are available: Interior Wall Exterior Wall Shade Air Underground Wall
change the assigned wall or curtain wall style
select a style for Style. All wall styles and curtain wall styles in the drawing are listed.
change the height of the surface
select Override Default Surface Height, and then, enter a new value for either Height or Area. Both of these fields change only the height of the surface; changing the width would result in an invalid space shape.
1602 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Editing Surface Openings
5 To add a new opening to a surface, select the surface, right-click, and click Add Opening. The new opening is inserted with default properties.
6 To change the properties of an opening, select the opening, and make the desired changes:
If you want to... change the opening name
Then... enter a new name for Name.
change the opening type
For Type, select a new type from the drop-down list. Depending on whether the opening is a door or window opening, different types are available:
Fixed Window Operable Window Fixed Skylight Operable Skylight Non sliding Door Sliding Door Air
change the assigned window or select a window style, door style, or door/window assembly style from the list. The list door/window assembly style of the contains all styles available in the drawing. opening
change the area of a surface opening
enter values for Area, Height, or Width of the opening.
7 To remove an opening from a surface, select the opening, right-click, and click Remove Opening. Editing Ceiling and Floor Surfaces
8 Select the ceiling surface of a space, and make the necessary changes:
If you want to... change the name of the ceiling
Then... enter a new one for Name.
change the ceiling location type
select a new type for Type. These types are available: Ceiling Roof Underground ceiling
change the assigned roof slab style of the ceiling
select one for Style. The list displays all roof slab styles available in the drawing.
9 Select the floor of a space, and make the necessary changes:
If you want to... change the name of the floor change the floor location type
Then... enter a new one for Name. select a new type for Type. These types are available:
Interior Floor Raised Floor Slab on Grade Underground Slab
Changing Surface Data (Extruded 3D Spaces) | 1603
If you want to...
Then...
change the assigned slab style of the floor
select one for Style. The list displays all slab styles available in the drawing.
10 To add an opening to a ceiling or floor, select the ceiling or floor, right-click, and click Add Opening. 11 To remove an opening from a ceiling or floor, select the opening, right-click, and click Remove Opening. 12 Click OK.
Setting Up Adjacency Relations between Space Surfaces Spaces in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop can detect adjacencies between surfaces of neighboring spaces. This is important for processing a building plan in an engineering application like Autodesk® Building Systems. You can define the maximum allowed adjacency distance between space surfaces.
1 Click Format menu Options. 2 Click the AEC Object Settings tab.
3 For Maximum Automatic Adjacency select the maximum allowed distance between 2 surfaces that should be considered adjacent to each other.
4 Click OK.
Displaying Adjacency Relations between Space Surfaces In most cases, adjacency relations between space surfaces are important for exporting and processing building plans to an engineering application. If you need to check the status of adjacency relations within Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can make the adjacency relations visible in the drawing.
Displaying surface adjacencies
1 On the command line, enter AecShowSpaceAdjacencies. 2 Adjacent space surfaces are displayed with lines.
1604 | Chapter 35 Spaces
3 To hide the surface adjacency lines, press ENTER.
Changing the Associativity of a Space
A space can be associative to bounding objects, or it can be freestanding and non-associative. Associative spaces have only very limited editing capabilities; the geometry and most of its properties are defined by the bounding objects the space is associated with. However, you can edit the geometry and other properties of a non-associative space as needed. For detailed information, see "Changing the Geometry of Non-Associative Spaces" on page 1578 and "Changing the Geometry of an Associative Space" on page 1588.
Making a Non-Associative Space Associative
If you make a non-associative space associative, the software searches for objects that can bound the space. The centroid of the space will be used as the virtual pick point. If the centroid of the space lies outside the original space, then the closest point to the centroid of the space will be used. The objects visible in the view port will be used as the boundary set. If a valid boundary is detected, then the space geometry is updated to reflect that boundary, and the grips of the space are disabled. If a valid boundary is not found, the space remains non-associative, and the geometry and the grips remain unchanged. Making a space associative to bounding walls
1 Select the non-associative space you want to make associative to bounding objects. 2 Right-click, and click Make Associative.
If a valid set of bounding objects is detected, the space geometry is updated to these bounding objects, and the Associative property on the Properties palette is set to Yes. If no valid bounding set is detected, the space geometry remains unchanged and the space i remains non-associative.
NOTE If you are making a large number of spaces associative with the Make Associative command, especially if any of them are in external references, the Analyze Spaces progress dialog is displayed. The dialog can appear to be non-responsive when you are working with a large dataset. Do not try to cancel the process in this case, but wait until it is finished.
Making an Associative Space Non-Associative
If you make an associative space non-associative, the space no longer interacts with its bounding objects. The space geometry retains its current shape after the associativity is disabled, but its grips are enabled. Disabling the associativity of a space to the bounding walls
1 Select the space for which you want to disable associativity. 2 On the Properties palette, select No for Associativity.
Changing the Calculated Values of a Space
You can change the values calculated from a space so that they reflect not the actual space values, but modifications for different purposes.
Changing the Associativity of a Space | 1605
Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers for Spaces
Use this procedure to attach, detach, or sort calculation modifiers for spaces. Calculation modifiers are values and formulas that can be applied to the area and perimeter values of a space to modify them. By default, a calculation modifier is applied only to the base area and base perimeter of a space. To apply the modifier to the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space, you need to create and apply a property set definition that includes properties for these boundaries. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963
1 Select the spaces you want to attach a calculation modifier to, and double-click one of them.
NOTE This procedure can be applied to multiple spaces only when they all have the same modifiers attached in exactly the same order.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Click the setting for Calculation modifiers. 4 Attach or detach calculation modifiers:
If you want to... attach a calculation modifier
Then ... for Available, select the desired calculation modifier, and click
detach a calculation modifier
. for Name, select the desired calculation modifier, and click
rearrange the order of attached calculation modifiers
. for Name, select the calculation modifier you want to move
to a different position. Click
to move the calculation
modifier up in the list, or click modifier down in the list.
to move the calculation
NOTE Calculation modifiers are processed in the same topdown order in which they are listed on this worksheet.
5 Click OK.
Setting Calculation Cut Planes for 3D Freeform Spaces
Use this procedure to set calculation either or both of the cut planes available for 3D freeform spaces. These can be useful for rooms under a roof where the space area can be calculated only for the parts of a space with a specific height. Calculation planes can be automatically scheduled.
1 Select the spaces for which you want to define the 2 calculation cut planes, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand Advanced Dimensions. 3 For Calculation plane height 1 and Calculation plane height 2, enter the desired values for the calculation
cut plane height.
TIP You can activate display components for the calculation cut planes and the calculation cut plane hatches in Plan view. For more information, see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style" on page 1613.
1606 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Attaching Spaces to Zones
Zones are used to group spaces according to different functions. For example, you can create a zone for each apartment in a building, or zones for functional groups, such as offices, common areas, etc. For detailed information about zones, see "Zones" on page 1627.
Attaching a Space to a Zone
Use this procedure to attach a space to a zone.
NOTE You can attach spaces to zones inside blocks, or attach a space inside a block to a zone, but if the blocks are exploded the attachments will be removed.
1 Select the space you want to attach to a zone, right-click, and click Attach to Zone. 2 Select the zone to which the space should be attached, and press ENTER.
Alternatively, you can select the zone to which the space should be attached to, click its Plus grip, and select the space.
Detaching a Space from a Zone
Use this procedure to detach a space from a zone.
1 Select the space you want to detach from a zone, right-click, and click Detach from Zone.
2 If the space is attached only to a single zone, the zone connection is immediately disconnected.
3 If the space is attached to multiple zones, select the zone from which the space should be detached, and press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select the zone from which the space should be detached, and click the Minus grip on the connection line to the space.
Viewing Information About Spaces
Use this procedure to view the total base area used by each space, as well as the number of spaces of each style in the drawing. For individual spaces, you can view the space style, description, area, and maximum and minimum size.
NOTE The results of the Space Info command are limited. Better and more detailed reporting on spaces can be achieved either by running a space evaluation, as described in "Space Evaluation" on page 1650 or by creating a schedule table for space properties, as described in "Basic Schedules" on page 1920.
1 On the command line, enter SpaceInfo. 2 Specify the information you want to view:
If you want to... view information about all spaces in the drawing
Then... click the Space Info Total tab.
view information about the individual spaces in the drawing click the Space Information tab.
3 Click OK.
Attaching Spaces to Zones | 1607
Exporting Space Information to a Database
Use this procedure to create a database file from in the space information retrieved. 1 On the command line, enter SpaceInfo. 2 Click either the Space Info Total tab or the Space Information tab. 3 Click Create MDB. 4 Enter a name for the database file. The default name is the current drawing name. 5 Click Save, and then click OK. 6 Press ENTER.
Space Styles
A space style is a set of parameters that determines the appearance and other characteristics of the space object to which it is assigned. Depending on the scope of the drawing, you may want to create different space styles to represent different types of spaces, such as different room types in an office building.
Within the space style you can set up the space decomposition. Decomposition geometrically divides an existing space into triangular or trapezoid subparts. In some countries, such as Germany and Japan, the visual decomposition of spaces into subdivisions is needed for the space proof that must be presented to the building administration for approval.
You can use styles for controlling the following aspects of spaces:
Boundary offsets: You can specify the distance that a space's net, usable, and gross boundaries will be offset from its base boundary. Each boundary has its own display components that you can set according to your needs.
Name lists: You can select a list of allowed names for spaces of a particular style. This helps you to maintain consistent naming schemes across a building project.
Target dimensions: You can define a target area, length, and width for spaces inserted with a specific style. This is helpful when you have upper and lower space limits for a type of room that you want to insert.
Displaying different space types: You can draw construction spaces, demolition spaces, and traffic spaces with different display properties. For example, you might draw all construction areas in green and hatched, and the traffic areas in blue with a solid fill.
Displaying different decomposition methods: You can specify how spaces are decomposed (trapezoid or triangular). If you are not working with space decomposition extensively, you will probably set it up in the drawing default. For information about space decomposition, see "Space Decomposition" on page 1617.
Creating a Space Style
Use this procedure to create a space style. You can start by using the default style or you can copy an existing style to use as your template. You then edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Create a space style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a style with default properties
right-click Space Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the space style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new space style, and press ENTER.
1608 | Chapter 35 Spaces
5 Edit the new space style:
If you want to... define target dimensions for the space base boundary
Then...
see "Specifying Target Dimensions for the Space" on page 1609.
specify style-based offsets for the net, usable, and gross boundaries
see "Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style" on page 1609.
add a list definition to the style
see "Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style" on page 1610.
specify materials for space components
see "Specifying the Materials of a Space Style" on page 1611.
add a classification to the style
see "Specifying Classifications for a Space Style" on page 1611.
set the display of space boundaries and calculation cut planes see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style" on page 1613.
define the hatching of the space
see "Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Space Style" on page 1615.
define the cut plane for the space
see "Setting the Object Cut Plane of a Space Style" on page 1616.
attach notes and files to the style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Space Style" on page 1616.
specify a space decomposition view
see "Space Decomposition" on page 1617.
6 When you finish specifying properties, click OK.
Specifying Target Dimensions for the Space
Use this procedure to specify a target area for the space in the space style. Target dimensions can be useful when dimension requirements for a space are already known and cannot be exceeded. If the area, length, or width of a space you insert falls outside the sizes specified in the style, the dimension is truncated to the target size, and a warning is displayed.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 Specify the target dimensions for the space style:
If you want to...
Then...
specify a different area
enter a new value for Target Area, Min Area, or Max Area.
specify a different length
enter a new value for Target Length, Min Length, or Max Length.
specify a different width
enter a new value for Target Width, Min Width, or Max Width.
Target values must fall between the set minimum and maximum values. 6 Click OK twice.
Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style
Use this procedure to define the offsets of the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space from the base boundary in the space style. Space boundary offsets can also be set manually. When the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space
Specifying Target Dimensions for the Space | 1609
are determined manually, they can be grip-edited. When they are determined from the space style, they cannot be grip-edited. For information about applying style-based offsets to a space, see "Changing the Boundary Offset Type" on page 1565.
Space boundaries by style
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 Specify the distance to offset the net, usable, and gross boundaries from the base boundary:
If you want to...
Then...
offset the net boundary from the base boundary
enter a value for Net Offset.
NOTE In many calculations, the net boundary is identical to the base boundary. If you enter 0 for the Net Offset, the net boundary is not offset from the base boundary.
offset the usable boundary from the base boundary offset the gross boundary from the base boundary
enter a value for Usable Offset. enter a value for Gross Offset.
6 Click OK.
Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style
Use this procedure to attach a list definition to a space style so that spaces using the style are named consistently according to a defined list of names. List definitions can be created according to government standards, company standards, or any other naming system you want to implement. For information about creating list definitions, see "List Definitions" on page 1624.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 For Space Names, select a list definition from the drop-down list.
NOTE The drop-down list displays only list definitions that apply to spaces. For more information, see "Specifying the Application for a List Definition" on page 1626.
6 Click OK.
When you change the name list in the space style, it is possible that the new space style has a different name list. In this case, the space name can interact with the new list definition in the following ways:
The name of an existing space is also included in the new list definition. In this case, no change to the name is made.
The name of an existing space is not included in the new list definition, but the list definition allows individual names to differ from the list. In this case, the existing name is retained as a non-standard name.
1610 | Chapter 35 Spaces
The name of an existing space is not included in the new list definition, and the list definition does not allow individual names to differ from the list. In this case, the existing name is removed and the space name defaults to the first name in the new list definition.
Specifying Classifications for a Space Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a space style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to space styles.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current space style. 6 Click OK.
Specifying the Materials of a Space Style
A space consists of a number of components whose display properties can be determined by the materials assigned to each component.
When you assign materials to a space style, you assign one material to each physical component of the space. For example, you assign a wood material to the floor and a ceiling tile material to the ceiling.
If you want to use the display properties of the space style, you can turn off the material assignments in the display properties of the space style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework in plan view. The Surface Hatch component is used to hatch all object surfaces in 3 dimensional (3D) model views and in elevations.
Space Materials and Display Components
The following table lists space components and the material components that determine them in specific views.
Display Representation
Space Component
Plan, Plan High Detail, Plan Low Detail, Plan Presentation, Plan Screened, Reflected, Reflected Screened
Base Boundary
Base Hatch
Net Boundary
Net Hatch
Usable Boundary
Usable Hatch
Gross Boundary
Gross Hatch
Cut Plane
Cut Plane Hatch
Above Cut Plane
Below Cut Plane
Material Component
Plan Linework Plan Hatch No material No material No material No material No material No material No material No material No material No material
Specifying Classifications for a Space Style | 1611
Display Representation Model
Space Component Defect Marker Calculation Plane 1 Calculation Plane 1 Hatch Calculation Plane Calculation Plane Hatch
Floor Ceiling Net Volume Surfaces Surface Components Usable Volume Gross Volume
Material Component No material No material No material No material No material
3D Body 3D Body No material No material No material No material No material
Assigning Materials to a Space Style
Use this procedure to assign materials to individual components of a space style. The component may use the display properties of the material instead of the style display properties.
You can assign a material to any physical component of the space. Custom components and components that are only symbolic graphics do not use materials for their display properties. For example, the floor and ceiling are physical components. The gross boundary is a symbolic component.
NOTE If a material assignment does not determine the display properties of a space component, you can change the display properties of the space style as described in "Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style" on page 1613.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Materials tab. 5 Select the component you want to change, and select a different material definition.
You can select any material definition in the current drawing, or click and assign it to a component.
to create a new material definition
WARNING Any changes you make to the material definition in this dialog will apply to all objects that are assigned the material.
6 Click the Display Properties tab. 7 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
8 If necessary, click . 9 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 10 Select By Material for any component to which you want to assign a material, and click OK.
If the setting for By Material is not available, the display of this component cannot be determined by a material.
11 Click OK.
1612 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style
Use this procedure to define any of the following display components of a space in the style: Space boundaries (Plan views): You can set the display of the base, net, usable, and gross boundaries. If boundaries are offset from each other, it is a good idea to differentiate them by color, linetype, or lineweight. If you do not need boundary offsets, you could also hide the net, usable, and gross boundaries and their respective hatches, so as not to clutter the drawing.
Boundary hatches (Plan views): Each space boundary has an associated hatch that you can display.
Above and Below Cut Plane components (Plan views): If the space is cut by an object cut plane, you can define different visuals for the parts that lie above the cut plane and below the cut plane.
Calculation cut planes and hatches (Plan views): For 3D freeform spaces, 2 calculation cut planes can be set. This helps to create evaluations of non-uniform space heights. For each of the calculation cut planes, you can set a boundary display and a hatch.
Floor and ceiling components (Model views): 3D spaces can have floors and ceilings with a user-specified thickness. You can display them in a model view. NOTE If the thickness of the ceiling or floor component is set to 0, it does not display in the drawing.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style | 1613
Floor and ceiling components in Model view
Surfaces and surface components (Model views): 3D freeform spaces are composed of individual surfaces, which can have additional components like door and window openings. Space surface with surface openings
NOTE If a material assignment determines the display properties of components in the space style, you can change the properties of the display component by clearing By Material. You can also override the material assignment with a different material. For more information, see "Specifying the Materials of a Space Style" on page 1611.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override. 6 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 7 Select the space component to change, and change the following settings:
Material: If you select By Material, all display settings are taken from the assigned material. Components that cannot be set by material have the check box deactivated.
Visibility Layer Color Linetype/Lineweight/Linetype Scale Plot Style 8 Click OK.
1614 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Space Style
Use this procedure to specify the hatching for display components of a space style. Space hatching is displayed only in display representations that represent a Plan view. The following hatch components are available for spaces:
Base hatch: the hatch component for the base boundary of a space. Net hatch: the hatch component for the net boundary of a space. Usable hatch: the hatch component for the usable boundary of a space. Gross hatch: the hatch component for the gross boundary of a space. Cut Plane hatch: the hatch for the object cut plane. This cut plane is different from the calculation cut planes you
can set for 3D freeform spaces. Calculation Cut Plane Hatch (1 and 2): If you define calculation cut planes for a 3D freeform space, you can add
a hatch to the calculation cut plane boundary.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 Click the Hatching tab. 7 Select a display component, and click the setting for Pattern. 8 Select the hatching for the display component:
If you want
Then...
a hatching pattern that is available in the software
select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
a custom pattern
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
single hatching
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
double hatching
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
solid fill
select Solid Fill for Type.
9 Click OK. 10 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 11 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 12 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
Then...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
13 Click OK.
Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Space Style | 1615
Setting the Object Cut Plane of a Space Style
Use this procedure to set the object cut plane of a space style. The object cut plane of a space is used to display the space in Plan views at a defined cut height. It is unrelated to the calculation cut planes you can set for 3D freeform spaces. The object cut plane cannot, for example, be used in scheduling properties or in a space calculation. In most cases the cut plane of a space is determined by the cut plane of the display configuration of the current view. You can set up a different cut plane for individual spaces, if necessary.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and click Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
6 Click the Other tab. 7 To use the cut plane defined in the display configuration, verify that Override Display Configuration Cut
Plane is cleared. 8 To define a cut plane differing from the cut plane of the display configuration, select Override Display
Configuration Cut Plane, and enter the desired height for Cut Plane Height. 9 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Space Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a space style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a space style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Space Styles. 3 Select the space style that you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the space style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK twice.
Converting Area Styles to Space Styles
If you open a drawing from a previous version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop that has area styles in it, the area styles will be automatically converted to space styles. The following settings will be converted:
Area style property Name
Space style property Name
Value/Default value Existing value
1616 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Area style property Description Keynote Notes/Reference Docs Property Sets
N/A
Space style property Description Keynote Notes/Reference Docs Property Sets
List Definition
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Classifications
Target Area Target Length Target With Net Offset Usable Offset Gross Offset Floor Material Ceiling Material Classifications
Display Representations N/A Plan Plan High Detail Plan Low Detail N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Decomposed
Model Plan Plan High Detail Plan Low Detail Plan Presentation Plan Screened Reflected Reflected Screened Volume Decomposed
Value/Default value Existing value Existing value Existing notes and attached documents Area property sets are converted to space property sets and attached to the converted space style Standard
NOTE In older versions of Architectural Desktop, list definitions were attached to area groups or area group templates. Now, list definitions are attached either to the space style or to the zone style.
Default Default Default 0 0 0 Standard Standard Existing classification values.
NOTE Area classification definitions from older versions of Architectural Desktop are converted to space classification definitions and applied to converted space styles.
Drawing Default Existing settings Existing settings Existing settings Drawing Default Drawing Default Drawing Default Drawing Default Drawing Default Existing settings
Space Decomposition
In some countries, such as Germany and Japan, an important part of space evaluation is the visual decomposition of spaces into subdivisions for the proof that must be approved by the cognizant administrative authority.
Space Decomposition | 1617
A space decomposition is a Plan display representation in which the spaces are displayed as triangles or trapezoids, depending on the decomposition method. Additionally, the decomposition shows height lines, and edge and height dimensions. Architects need space decomposition for calculation proof.
Decomposition is set in the display properties of the space object, the space style, or in the drawing defaults.
With styles, you can control how the decomposition is displayed, the decomposition method used, color settings for decomposition components, and tags.
Different space decomposition methods
Displaying the Space Decomposition
In the Plan High Detail and Plan Low Detail display configurations, the space decomposition is displayed by default in the bottom view direction. If the space decomposition is not displayed in the desired display configuration, use the following steps to display it:
1 Click Format menu Display Manager. 2 Select the display configuration where you want to display the space decomposition. 3 Expand the display configuration. 4 Select the display set in which you want to display the space decomposition. 5 Click the Display Representation Control tab. 6 Scroll through the list of objects until you reach the Space object. 7 Select the check box for the Decomposed display representation. 8 Click OK.
Specifying Layer/Color/Linetype Settings of the Space Decomposition
Use this procedure to change the properties of the display components of the space decomposition view for a space style.
The following decomposition display components are available:
Component Additive Edge
Description Decomposition lines of a space with a positive value, such as a room
1618 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Component Subtractive Edge Additive Tag Subtractive Tag Additive Height Subtractive Height Edge Dimension Text Height Dimensions Defect Marker
Description Decomposition lines of a space with a negative value, or a hole Tag for a space subdivision with a positive value Tag for a space subdivision with a negative value Height lines of a space subdivision with a positive value Height lines of a space subdivision with a negative value Label for a space edge displaying its length Label for a height line displaying its length Marker that appears when a display component cannot be displayed.
1 Open a tool palette that has a space tool. 2 Right-click a space tool, and click Space Styles. 3 Select the style that has the decomposition settings you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the Decomposed display representation, and select either Style Override or Drawing Default, depending
on which display source you want for the decomposition.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the space decomposition component to change, and change the following settings:
Visibility Layer Color Linetype/Lineweight/Linetype Scale Plot Style
9 Click OK twice.
Specifying the Type of Space Decomposition
In the decomposition view of the space style, you set into which subentities the space will be decomposed (trapezoid or triangulated) and the AutoCAD entities the decomposed space is converted to when exploded (lines or closed polyline faces).
Specifying the Type of Space Decomposition | 1619
Trapezoid and triangulated space decompositions
1 Open a tool palette that has a space tool. 2 Right-click a space tool, and click Space Styles. 3 Select the style that has the decomposition settings you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the Decomposed display representation, and select either Style Override or Drawing Default, depending
on which display source you want for the decomposition.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Decomposition tab. 8 Select a value for Decomposition Type:
If you want to...
Then...
display a trapezoid decomposition
select Trapezoid.
display a triangular decomposition without overlapping triangles
select Triangle.
display a triangular decomposition with overlapping triangles select Triangle (overlap).
9 Choose a value for Explode Result:
If you want to...
Then...
change the decomposed space into single lines after exploding
select Lines.
change the decomposed space into closed polylines for each select Faces. decomposed part
10 Click OK twice.
1620 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Specifying Text Settings for Space Decomposition
Use this procedure to modify the numbers of the space subdivisions as well as the edge and height annotations.
1 Open a tool palette that has a space tool. 2 Right-click a space tool, and click Space Styles. 3 Select the style that has the decomposition settings you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the Decomposed display representation, and select either Style Override or Drawing Default, depending
on which display source you want for the decomposition.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Proof tab. 8 Define the prefix settings:
If you want to... display a prefix for the numbers of the space subdivisions change the style of the numbers of the space subdivisions
Then...
enter a prefix.
either select a text style from the list or click the Browse button and create a new text style. For more information, see "Text Style Dialog Box" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
change the height of the numbers in the space subdivisions enter a value for Height.
9 Define the edge dimension settings: If you want to... change the style of the edge dimensions
change the height of the edge dimensions
Then...
either select a text style from the list or click the Browse button and create a new text style. For more information, see "Text Style Dialog Box" in AutoCAD Help.
enter a value for Height.
10 Click OK twice.
Calculation Modifiers
A calculation modifier is a formula that you can apply to a space to change the calculated results of its associated area or perimeter values. Calculation modifiers can also be applied to a zone to change the calculated results of all spaces attached to that zone. You might want to change calculated results for number of purposes; for example, to account for plaster deductions or the tiling in a bathroom.
By default, a calculation modifier is applied only to the base area and base perimeter of the space. To apply the modifier to the net, usable, and gross boundaries of a space, you need to create and apply a property set definition that contains properties for the calculated area and perimeter values of the those boundaries. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
Calculation modifiers work cumulatively. When you apply several different modifiers to a space or a zone, they are all applied. Therefore, it is important to define the order in which they are used.
Specifying Text Settings for Space Decomposition | 1621
Example: You have a space area of 25 square meters. You want to apply 2 different calculation modifiers to it. Calculation modifier A deducts a value of 0.3 square meters for a column. Calculation modifier B divides the space by 2 (in some international calculation schemes, this is used for calculating balconies).
If you apply the plaster deduction first and the division second, you get the following result: Calculation Modifier A: 25 m2 - 0.3 m2 = 24.7 m2 Calculation Modifier B: 24.7 m2 / 2 = 12.35 m2
If you apply the division first and the plaster deduction second, you get the following result: Calculation Modifier B: 25 m2 / 2 = 12.5 m2 Calculation Modifier A: 12.5 m2 - 0.3 m2 = 12.2 m2
You can set the order of calculation modifiers in the properties of the space. For information about ordering calculation modifiers, see "Adding and Removing Calculation Modifiers for Spaces" on page 1606.
Creating a Calculation Modifier Style
Use this procedure to create a calculation modifier style. You can start by using the default style or you can copy an existing style to use as your template. You then edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Calculation Modifier Styles. 3 Create a new calculation modifier style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a new modifier style with default properties
right-click Calculation Modifier Styles, and click New.
create a new modifier style from an existing style
right-click the calculation modifier you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new calculation modifier style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the properties of your new calculation modifier style:
If you want to...
Then...
define the calculation type of the modifier style
see "Specifying the Application for a Calculation Modifier Style" on page 1622.
define the formula of the modifier style
see "Defining the Formula for a Calculation Modifier " on page 1623.
add notes, files, or documents to the modifier style
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Calculation Modifier Style" on page 1624.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Application for a Calculation Modifier Style
A space contains 2 values that can be affected by a calculation modifier: the area and the perimeter. You can choose to have a calculation modifier apply to either or both of these calculations. For example you might want to set up a modifier that reduces the calculated base area by 50 percent. (This is obligatory for several space types in various international architectural standards.) Or you might want a modifier that deducts length from the perimeter of a room for openings and stairs. This would be helpful in calculating the amount of baseboard material needed for this room.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Calculation Modifier Styles. 3 Select the modifier for which you want to set the calculation type.
1622 | Chapter 35 Spaces
4 Click the Apply To tab. 5 Select whether you want to apply the modifier to the (base) area or (base) perimeter of the space. You can
also select both values here. 6 Click OK.
Defining the Formula for a Calculation Modifier
Use this procedure to define or edit the formula for a calculation modifier style. Variable and formula for modifier
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Calculation Modifier Styles. 3 Select the modifier for which you want to define a formula. 4 Click the Definition tab. 5 Add a variable to the calculation modifier.
A variable consists of the variable name and its value. For example, to create a plaster deduction of 3 percent, click Add, and enter Plaster_Deduction for Variable and 0.97 for Value. You should use a descriptive name as a variable name to add transparency to your formulas. To set up formulas, you can also enter direct mathematical values. The following characters and words are not allowed:
Special characters such as ?()*- (You may, however use an underscore). Spaces Accent marks such as ä, ö, ü, ê, è, å Key words from Visual Basic®. For information about Visual Basic key words, refer to the Visual Basic Reference. One of the following values is displayed for Data depending on current selections on the Apply To tab: AreaValue (if Area is selected) PerimeterValue (if Perimeter is selected) Value (if both Area and Perimeter are selected) You cannot edit this value; if you want to change it, click the Apply To tab and change the current selections there as desired. 6 For Expression, enter the formula for calculating the modifier. You can enter direct mathematical values and operators, variables you have created, and Visual Basic key words, such as Mod, Exp, or Log. For example, if you want to set up a plaster deduction of 3 percent, and you have defined a variable called Plaster_Deduction with a value of 0.97, enter AreaValue * Plaster_Deduction.
Defining the Formula for a Calculation Modifier | 1623
NOTE It is important to enter the variable names AreaValue and PerimeterValue exactly as they are displayed in the Data field. Alternative spellings such as "Area Value" or "perimetervalue" are not recognized.
7 To test your formula, enter a sample value for Input, press ENTER, and check the result for Output. 8 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Calculation Modifier Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a calculation modifier style. You can also edit reference files attached to the style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Calculation Modifier Styles. 3 Select the modifier to which you want to attach notes or files. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the modifier, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Close the application when you are done editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK.
List Definitions
A list definition is a list of names that may be used as allowed names for spaces or zones. List definitions can be attached to a space style or a zone style, so that the list of names is available on the Properties palette when you create or edit a space or zone with that style.
For more information see "Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style" on page 1610 and "Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style" on page 1641.
1624 | Chapter 35 Spaces
List definition for a space
For a description of the typical workflow for list definitions, see "Working with List Definitions - Overview" on page 1537.
List definitions are useful when you create spaces according to government or company standards.
When you change the name list in a space or zone style, a space or zone name can interact with the new list definition in the following ways:
The existing name is also included in the new list definition. In this case, no change to the space name is made.
The existing name is not included in the new list definition, but the list definition allows individual names to differ from the list. In this case, the existing name is retained as a non-standard name.
The existing name is not included in the new list definition, and the list definition does not allow individual names to differ from the list. In this case, the existing name is removed and the name defaults to the first name in the new list definition.
Creating a List Definition
Use this procedure to create a list definition that can be attached to a space or zone style to specify the allowable values for the name property.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand List Definitions. 3 Create a new list definition:
If you want to...
Then...
create a new list definition with default properties
right-click List Definitions, and click New.
create a new list definition from an existing list definition
right-click the list you want to copy, and click Copy. Rightclick, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the list definition, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the properties of your new list:
If you want to...
Then...
define the objects the list definition applies to
see "Specifying the Application for a List Definition" on page 1626.
edit the list definition
see "Editing a List Definition" on page 1626.
add notes or files to the definition
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a List Definition" on page 1626.
6 Click OK.
Creating a List Definition | 1625
Specifying the Application for a List Definition
You can create list definitions that apply to spaces names, to zone names, or that can be used as drop-down lists for manual scheduling properties. For information on manual scheduling properties, see "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand List Definitions. 3 Select the definition you want to edit. 4 Click the Applies to tab. 5 Select one or more of the following options:
Spaces: (If you want the list to be available for space names) Zones: (If you want the list to be available for zone names) Manual Property Definition: (If you want the list to be available for manual schedule properties)
6 Click OK.
Editing a List Definition
Use this procedure to edit a list definition. 1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand List Definitions. 3 Select the list you want to edit. 4 Click the Items tab. 5 Add, delete, or rename entries in the list definition:
If you want to... add a new entry to the list
Then... click Add, and enter the name of the entry.
delete an entry from the list
select the entry, and click Remove.
rename an entry in the list
select the entry, and enter the new name.
6 If you want users to have the alternative of entering a non-list name for the space or zone, select Allow individual property values to vary from this list.
7 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a List Definition
Use this procedure to attach text notes and files to a list definition.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand List Definitions. 3 Select the list definition for which you want to add a note or file. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the list, enter the description for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click Open.
1626 | Chapter 35 Spaces
If you want to... edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file 9 Click OK.
Then...
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Close the application when you are done editing.
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
Zones
In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, a zone is a container in which you can group spaces and other zones. You need zones to create an evaluation of your floor plan. With zones, you structure spaces into various groups, according to different schemes. For example, you can have functional zones (construction, traffic, and so on) or zones for building units (Apartment 1 Ground Floor, Apartment 2 Ground Floor, and so on.)
Spaces can be contained in more than one zone. For example, you can attach a balcony space to both the Construction Spaces group and the Apartment 1 Ground Floor group. You can set up a restriction in the zone style, so that a space can only be attached to one zone of a specific style.
Spaces attached to zones
A zone can have list definitions and calculation modifiers attached. List definitions are attached through the zone style, whereas calculation modifiers are attached directly to the zone.
Zone Templates
Zones can be connected and nested into complex structures. A zone structure for a building, for example, may have one top-level zone named "Building." Below that zone would a be a number of zones for apartments-- the apartment 1 zone, the apartment 2 zone, and so on. The individual apartment zones can contain other zones like a construction areas zone, a 50% deduction zone, or spaces like the living room, the bedroom, and so on.
When you often need a complex zone structure, you can create a zone template that defines the necessary zones and their grouping. For example, when designing a new building, you can insert a zone structure based on a Building zone template, which would contain the main building zone plus all subordinate zones. A number of predefined zone templates are provided with the software.
Zones in the Space Evaluation
When you create a space evaluation of the floor plan, you can specify which zones are included.
For example, if you wanted to create a space evaluation for a single apartment in a building to determine the area and set the rent accordingly, you would select the zone representing that apartment. Within the same drawing you might also want to create an evaluation that contains only bathrooms, to determine how many tiles to order from a supplier. To do this you would first create a bathrooms zone, add all bathrooms from all apartments to it, and then evaluate the overall area of that zone.
For information about space evaluations of the floor plan, see "Space Evaluation" on page 1650.
Zones | 1627
Zone Attachments Across External References
You can attach spaces or zones from an external reference to a zone in the current drawing. You cannot however, attach spaces and zones in the current drawing to zones in an external reference. If you detach an external reference from which spaces or zones have been attached to a zone in the current drawing, those spaces or zones are also detached. If you re-attach the external reference to the current drawing, you would need to manually re-attach the spaces and zones from the external reference, if desired.
Using Zone Tools to Create Zones
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place zones by selecting a zone tool with a specific zone style and other predefined properties. When you place zones using zone tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change settings for the zone properties. You can also use zone tools to apply the settings of a zone tool to existing zones.
Tool palettes containing zone tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample zone tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain zone tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Sample Palette catalog
Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain zone tools with zone styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Zone Properties
In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, a zone is a documentation object that is used to group and organize spaces. The following table describes the properties that are displayed for a zone in the Properties palette.
Zone Property General Category Description Layer
Style Name
Tag
Description
User-specified description of the zone object
Specifies the layer on which the zone is placed. By default, the layer assignment is defined in the zone style.
Specifies the zone style. The style defined in the zone tool is the default.
The name of the zone. If a list definition has been specified in the zone style, the list is available as a drop-down list. For more information, see "Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style" on page 1641.
Specifies a zone tag to be inserted when adding the zone. Zone tags are available in the sample drawings shipped with the software. You can also create your own zone tags.
NOTE This property is available only during adding a zone.
1628 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Zone Property Calculation Modifiers
Number of Spaces Total number of spaces
Number of Zones Total number of zones Space/Zone Manager
Dimensions Category Base area Calculated area Base perimeter Calculated perimeter Base volume Zone Boundary Offset Calculation Category Calculate area Calculate perimeter Content Can contain spaces Can contain zones
Location Rotation Elevation Additional Information
Description Identifies any calculation modifiers for the zone. A calculation modifier is a formula that modifies selected values of spaces attached to the zone. For more information, see "Calculation Modifiers" on page 1621. Displays the number of spaces that are directly attached to the zone. Displays the number of spaces that are directly attached to the zone plus the number of spaces that are attached indirectly through subzones of the zone. Displays the number of zones that are directly attached to the zone. Displays the number of zones that are attached directly to the zone plus the number of zones that are attached through subzones of the zone. An icon providing access to the Space/Zone Manager worksheet where you can rename zones, attach spaces and zones, define the content model of the zone, and attach calculation modifiers.
Displays the combined base area of all spaces attached to the zone. Displays the base area of all spaces attached to the zone processed with any calculation modifiers attached to the zone. Displays the combined base perimeter of all spaces attached directly or indirectly to the zone. Displays the base perimeter of all spaces attached to the zone processed with any calculation modifiers attached to the zone. Displays the combined base volume of all spaces attached directly or indirectly to the zone. Specifies the offset distance for the zone boundary that is drawn around any space attached to the zone to show the space/zones relationship.
Specifies whether the area of spaces that are attached to the zone will be calculated using any applicable calculation modifiers. Specifies whether the perimeter of spaces that are attached to the zone will be calculated using any applicable calculation modifiers.
This property defines that the zone is allowed to have spaces directly attached. This property defines that the zone is allowed to have zones attached.
NOTE If you select both content options, the zone can contain spaces and zones.
Specifies the rotation of the zone. Specifies the elevation of the zone. Specifies the location and coordinate system of the zone.
Creating a Zone
Use this procedure to add a new a zone that has the properties specified in the zone tool that you select. To specify settings when you add a zone, see "Creating Zones with User-Specified Settings" on page 1630.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Zone tool you want to use, and select it.
Creating a Zone | 1629
(You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.) 2 Specify the insertion point of the zone.
You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area. 3 Continue adding zones as needed, and then press ENTER.
Creating Zones with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add a zone with settings that you specify.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Zone tool you want to use, and select it. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Enter a name for the zone.
If you have assigned a list definition to the zone style, you can select a name from the drop-down list. 4 Select a style. 5 Select a tag for the zone.
NOTE If no zone tags are contained in the list, you can drag a tag into the drawing from the Content Browser. You can also create your own tags from multi-view blocks. 6 To add a calculation modifier to the zone, click the setting for Calculation Modifiers, and select one or more calculation modifiers for the zone. If you assign a calculation modifier to a zone, the area and perimeter values of spaces attached to the zone will be modified with the calculation modifier. For information about calculation modifiers, see "Calculation Modifiers" on page 1621. 7 Expand Dimensions. 8 For Zone boundary offset, enter a value to specify the distance you want between the zone boundary and the base boundary of any attached space. If you select 0 offset, the zone boundary is identical to the base boundary of the space. Zone boundary offset at 0 (left) and at an offset value (right)
1630 | Chapter 35 Spaces
TIP If you cannot see the zone boundary, the display component for the zone boundary may not be activated in the zone style. For more information, see "Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype Properties of a Zone Style" on page 1642.
9 Expand Calculation. 10 Specify which space values should be calculated in the zone:
If you want to ...
Then...
calculate the area values of attached spaces including any applicable calculation modifiers
select Yes for Calculate Area.
calculate the perimeter values of attached spaces including select Yes for Calculate Perimeter. any applicable calculation modifiers
For information about space evaluations, see "Space Evaluation" on page 1650.
11 Expand Content. 12 Define the content allowed in the zone:
If you want to ...
Then...
allow spaces to be attached to the zone
select Yes for Can Contain Spaces.
allow zones to be attached to the zone
select Yes for Can Contain Zones.
13 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the zone. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
14 Continue adding zones as needed, and then press ENTER.
Creating Zone Structures from a Zone Template
Use this procedure to create zone structures based on a zone template. This procedure is recommended if you use the same zone structure frequently.
When you add a zone structure, all zones that are connected in that structure are inserted in the drawing. Depending on the style settings for the zone template, you can display individual zones with different color and hatch. You can also display zone connection lines. Below is an example for a zone structure representing the DIN 277 building norm.
Zones according to DIN277 zone template
For information about creating zone templates, see "Zone Templates" on page 1647. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the Zone from Template tool you want to use, and select it. (You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.)
Creating Zone Structures from a Zone Template | 1631
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select the zone template you want to create a structure of zones from. 4 Define the offsets between individual zones in the structure:
If you want to... define the offset between rows of the zone structure
Then... enter a value for Row Offset.
define the offset between columns of the zone structure
enter a value for Column Offset.
5 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the zone structure. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
6 Continue adding zone structures from the template as needed, and then press ENTER.
Creating a Zone Tool
Use this procedure to create a zone tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own zone tools if you are placing multiple zones with specific properties that you want to be the same for each instance.
For example, if you are creating an office floor plan with different calculation types for zones, you can create a zone tool for each calculation type.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool.
2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a zone in the drawing
select the zone, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from an zone style in the Style Manager
click Format menu Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new zone tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the zone created from this tool, and click OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select a zone style. 10 Select the drawing file containing the style used for this zone tool. 11 Select a tag for the zone. 12 Select the drawing file containing the tag used for this zone tool. 13 Expand Dimensions.
1632 | Chapter 35 Spaces
14 Enter the distance you want the zone boundary to be offset from attached spaces. 15 Expand Calculation. 16 Specify which values will be calculated for zones created from this tool:
If you want to ... calculate the area of attached spaces
Then... select Yes for Calculate Area.
calculate the perimeter of attached spaces
select Yes for Calculate Perimeter.
17 Expand Content. 18 Define the allowed content in the zone tool:
If you want to ...
Then...
allow spaces to be attached to zones created from this tool select Yes for Can contain spaces.
allow zones to be attached to zones created from this tool select Yes for Can contain zones.
For information about zone content, see "Changing the Content Rules of a Zone " on page 1637. 19 Click OK.
Converting Area Groups to Zones
Area groups in legacy drawings are automatically converted to zones when you open the drawing in the current version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The following table maps area group properties to zone properties:
Legacy area group property Name
New zone property Name
Value/Default Value Existing value
NOTE Name lists that were attached to the area group are not re-attached to the zone. To use a converted legacy name list, you must attach it to the zone style.
Description Layer Style
Calculation modifiers N/A N/A N/A N/A Net area Calculated area Net perimeter Calculated perimeter N/A
Description Layer Style
Calculation modifiers Number of spaces Total number of spaces Number of zones Total number of zones Base area Calculated area Base perimeter Calculated perimeter Base volume
Existing value Existing layer Area group style is converted to zone style. Properties are matched where possible; new properties have default values. For more information, see "Converting Area Group Styles to Zone Styles" on page 1646. Existing modifier Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value 0
Converting Area Groups to Zones | 1633
Legacy area group property N/A Calculate area Calculate perimeter Can contain areas Can contain area groups Rotation Elevation Additional information (Location)
New zone property Zone boundary offset Calculate area Calculate perimeter Can contain spaces Can contain zones Rotation Elevation Additional information (Location)
Value/Default Value Default value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing values
NOTE If you are converting a legacy zone structure, and connections between zones are not converted correctly, it is possible that the source drawing contained an error in the content rules for the parent zone. In cases like this, verify that the content rules of the parent zone allow attaching zones, as described in "Changing the Content Rules of a Zone " on page 1637, and then re-attach the lost zones as described in "Attaching Spaces and Zones to Zones" on page 1634.
Zones and Spaces
Zones are used to group spaces and subordinate zones.
Attaching Spaces and Zones to Zones
Use this procedure to attach spaces and zones to a selected zone.
NOTE You can attach spaces and zones to zones inside blocks, or attach spaces or zones inside a block to a zone outside the block, but if the blocks are exploded the attachments will be removed.
Connections of spaces and zones are not unique. You can attach a space or a zone to any number of different zones, unless you place restrictions on space/zone and zone/zone attachments in the zone, style:
You can specify that a space can only be attached to one zone of the same style. That would prevent a space from being calculated multiple times, as in a case where you do not want the same room to be attached to multiple apartment zones.
You can specify that zones of this style can only be attached to other zones of the same style. This would be useful for Building Systems applications where you want to generate HVAC and Lighting zones, but do not want to allow a zone of one kind to be attached to a zone of the other kind.
For more information, see "Restricting the Content of a Zone Based on the Zone Style" on page 1641. In the properties of a zone, you can restrict the type of objects can be attached to the zone, allowing only spaces or only zones. For more information, see "Changing the Content Rules of a Zone " on page 1637. When you attach a zone to another zone, it is attached as a subzone to the first zone.
1634 | Chapter 35 Spaces
1 Select the zone to which you want to attach a space or zone. 2 Attach the space or zone to the selected zone in one of the following ways:
Click the Add (Plus) grip on the zone, and select spaces and zones to attach. Right-click, and click Attach Spaces/Zones, and then select the spaces and zones to attach. 3 Press ENTER.
Detaching Spaces and Zones from Zones
Use this procedure to detach spaces and zones from a zone. You can detach only directly attached spaces or zones.
1 Select the zone from which you want to detach a space or zone. 2 Detach the space or zone in one of the following ways:
Click the Detach (Minus) grip on the connection line to the attached space or zone. Right-click, and click Detach Spaces/Zones. Then select the space or zone you want to detach from the
zone, and press ENTER.
Selecting Spaces and Zones Attached to a Zone
Use this procedure to select the spaces and zones that are attached to a zone. 1 Select a zone that has zones or spaces attached to it. 2 Right-click, and click Select Attached Spaces/Zones. The spaces and zones that are attached to the zone are selected in the drawing. NOTE Spaces and zones that are located in an external reference will be highlighted, but not selected.
Editing Zones
You can use either of the following methods to change zone properties such as the ones that control the allowed content for the zone, the types of calculation performed, and the calculation modifiers applied:
You can change zone settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the context menu for a selected zone.
Renaming a Zone
Use this procedure to rename a zone. If a list definition has been attached to the zone style, you can choose a name from the list. A list definition can either be restrictive and allow only names selected from the list, or it can allow you to enter a name of your choice. For more information, see "List Definitions" on page 1624.
Detaching Spaces and Zones from Zones | 1635
1 Double-click the zone you want to rename. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 For Name, do one of the following:
Select a name from the list. Enter a name.
Changing the Zone Style
Use this procedure to change the style associated with a zone. Zone styles contain information about the content rules of the zone and the display of the zone and its attached zones and spaces. You can also add classifications here. For information about how to define zone styles, see "Zone Styles" on page 1640.
1 Select one or more zones, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a new zone style. When you change the zone style, it is possible that the new zone style has a different name list definition. In this case, the zone name can interact with the new list definition in the following ways: The existing name of the zone is also included in the new list definition. In this case, no change to the zone name is made. The existing name of the zone is not included in the new list definition, but the list definition allows individual names to differ from the list. In this case, the existing zone name is retained as a non-standard name. The existing name of the zone is not included in the new list definition, and the list definition does not allow individual names to differ from the list. In this case, the existing zone name is removed and the zone name defaults to the first name in the new list definition.
For more information about list definitions, see "List Definitions" on page 1624.
Changing the Zone Boundary Offset
Use this procedure to redefine the offset of the zone boundary from its attached spaces. The zone boundary is a boundary around a space attached to a zone. It helps to display the connections between spaces and zones. You can use it in addition to the zone connection line, or instead of it. For information on displaying and hiding the zone connection line and the zone boundary, see "Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype Properties of a Zone Style" on page 1642. Zone boundary offset at 0 (left) and at an offset value (right)
If you define a zone boundary offset at 0, the boundary is drawn on top of the space base boundary. Depending on the draw order, it is possible that the zone boundary is invisible because it is underneath the space base boundary. To avoid this effect, define an offset greater than 0.
1 Select one or more zones, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Dimensions. 3 For Zone boundary offset, enter the desired offset from the base boundary of the attached spaces.
1636 | Chapter 35 Spaces
TIP If you cannot see the zone boundary, the display component for the zone boundary may not be activated in the zone style. For more information, see "Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype Properties of a Zone Style" on page 1642.
Changing the Content Rules of a Zone
Use this procedure to redefine the allowed content for the zone as spaces only, zones only, or both types of object.
NOTE You can set additional content restrictions in the zone style. For more information, see "Restricting the Content of a Zone Based on the Zone Style" on page 1641.
1 Select one or more zones, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Content. 3 Define the allowed content in the zone:
If you want to ... allow spaces to be attached to the zone
Then... select Yes for Can Contain Spaces.
allow zones to be attached to the zone
select Yes for Can Contain Zones.
Changing the Calculation Type of a Zone
Use this procedure to change the type of calculation (area, perimeter, or both) to be performed for spaces attached to a zone. When you create zones from a zone template, the calculation type for each zone is predefined in the zone template. For more information, see "Zone Templates" on page 1647.
1 Select one or more zones, and double-click one of them.
2 Expand Calculation.
3 Specify the types of calculation to be performed for this zone:
If you want to ...
Then...
calculate the base area values of attached spaces
select Yes for Calculate Area.
calculate the base perimeter values of attached spaces
select Yes for Calculate Perimeter.
4 Click Close.
Changing Calculation Modifiers for a Zone
Use this procedure to add, remove, or sort calculation modifiers for a zone. By default, a calculation modifier is applied only to the base area and base perimeter of spaces attached to a zone. To apply the modifier to the net, usable, and gross boundaries of an attached space, you need to create and apply a property set definition that contains properties for the calculated area and perimeter values of these 3 boundaries. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963 For information about creating calculation modifiers, see "Calculation Modifiers" on page 1621.
1 Select the zones you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Click the setting for Calculation modifiers.
NOTE This setting can be edited for multiple zones only if these zones have the same modifiers attached in the same order.
Changing the Content Rules of a Zone | 1637
4 Attach or detach calculation modifiers: If you want to... attach a calculation modifier style
Then ... for Available, select the desired calculation modifier style, and
detach a calculation modifier style
click
.
for Attached, select the desired calculation modifier style, and
rearrange the order of attached calculation modifier styles
click
.
for Attached, select the calculation modifier style to move to
a different position. Click
to move the calculation
modifier style up in the list, or click
to move the
calculation modifier style down in the list.
5 Click OK.
Ordering Zone Structures
Use this procedure to sort zones according to their hierarchy when you have a complex zone structure with many levels, and it has become difficult to recognize the hierarchy of the zones. To sort the zones according to their hierarchical positions, Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers you an easy-to-use command.
Ordering zone structures
1 Select the top node of the zone structure you want to sort, right-click, and click Zone Layout. 2 Specify the vertical (column) and horizontal (row) distance between the entries in the zone structure, and
press ENTER.
Creating Polylines from Zones
Use this procedure to create polylines from a zone, in cases such as the following: You want to export the floor plan to an application that can process only polylines. You need the space profile for other operations.
1638 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Creating polylines from zones
After converting spaces to polylines, you can convert the polylines back to spaces, as described in "Converting Polylines, Profiles, and Object Outlines to Spaces" on page 1560. NOTE If the net, usable, and gross boundaries are offset from the base boundary, a polyline is created for each boundary.
1 Select the zone containing spaces you want to convert to polylines, right-click, and click Create Polyline. 2 Specify the source of the polylines:
To create polylines only from directly attached spaces, enter D (Directly Attached Spaces) on the command line.
To create polylines from all attached spaces, regardless of whether they are attached directly or through subzones, press ENTER.
Polylines are created on top of the specified spaces. You can edit them as any other polyline.
TIP When polylines lie above spaces, it can be difficult to select the space without the polyline. Try one of the following: Press CTRL, and click the boundary. Then click until the space is highlighted. If the space hatch is displayed, click the hatch. Enter qselect on the command line and filter for spaces.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Zone
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, text notes, or files to a zone. 1 Double-click the zone you want to attach information to. 2 Click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. For more information about adding hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics. 4 Click the setting for Notes, and add a note. Then, click OK. 5 Click the setting for Reference Documents.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Zone | 1639
6 Attach or detach reference files: If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
7 Click OK.
Then...
click
, select a file, and click Open.
enter text for Description.
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
select the file name, and click
.
Zone Styles
The zone style can be used to control the display of the zone object, the zone and space connection lines, the zone boundary, and the zone hatch. If you add a hatch to a zone, the hatch is also displayed in spaces attached to the zone to indicate the relationship.
You can use zone styles to create zones with different display properties for construction spaces, rentable rooms, traffic spaces, or other space types. For example, you might draw and hatch all spaces in the construction zone, create the traffic zone in blue with a solid fill, and so on.
Living rooms and construction spaces with different styles
Properties in the zone style can also be used to set content restrictions for zones. Zones are very useful for determining what is included or excluded when space evaluations are performed.
Creating a Zone Style
Use this procedure to create a zone style. You can start by using the default style or you can copy an existing style to use as your template. You then edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Zone Styles. 3 Create a new zone style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a new style with default properties
right-click Zone Styles, and click New.
create a new style from an existing style
right-click the zone style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new zone style, and press ENTER.
1640 | Chapter 35 Spaces
5 Edit the style properties of your new zone style: If you want to... enter a description of the style attach a list definition to the style
restrict the allowed content of the style
add classifications to the style
change the display of the zone
add notes, files, or documents to the style
Then...
click the General tab, and enter a description.
see "Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style" on page 1641
see "Restricting the Content of a Zone Based on the Zone Style" on page 1641.
see "Specifying Classifications for a Zone Style" on page 1642.
see "Specifying the Display Properties of a Zone Style" on page 1642.
see "Attaching Notes or Files to a Zone Style" on page 1645
6 If you want to assign the style to a zone tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette. You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating a Zone Tool" on page 1632.
7 Click OK.
Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style
Use this procedure to attach a list definition to a zone style, so that zones using that style are named consistently according to a user-defined list of names. List definitions can be created according to government or company standards or other systematics. For information about creating list definitions, see "List Definitions" on page 1624.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Zone Styles. 3 Select the zone style that you want to change. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 For Zone Names, select a list definition from the drop-down list.
NOTE Only those list definitions that apply to zone names will appear here. For more information, see "Specifying the Application for a List Definition" on page 1626.
6 Click OK.
Restricting the Content of a Zone Based on the Zone Style
You can set content restrictions for zones based on the zone style. Content restrictions can help you to ensure that only valid zone structures are built.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Architectural Objects, and expand Zone Styles. 3 Select the zone style that you want to change. 4 Click the Design Rules tab. 5 For Exclusivity, select either or both of the following options:
Space Exclusive: Define that spaces can be attached only to one zone of the style. This would be useful for zones that represent real-world space compounds, like for example a zone style for apartments. In that case, you need to prevent that individual spaces can be attached to multiple zones of that style and be calculated more than once. If you attach a space to a second zone of the same style, it is disconnected from the first zone.
Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style | 1641
Zone Exclusive: Define that zones of the style can only be attached to other zones of the same style. This would be useful for Building Systems applications where you want to generate HVAC and Lighting zones and want to ensure that an HVAC zone only can get attached to another HVAC zone, and a Lighting zone only to another Lighting zone.
If you try to attach a zone of the style to a zone with another style the connection is not created, and an error message is displayed on the command line.
IMPORTANT Zone content restrictions are observed in external references.
6 Click OK.
Specifying Classifications for a Zone Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a zone style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Open a tool palette that has a zone tool. 2 Right-click a zone tool, and click Zone Styles. 3 Select the style that you want to change. 4 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to zone styles.
5 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current zone style. 6 Click OK.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Zone Style
You can change the display of zones and their attached spaces in the zone style. Specifying the Layer, Color, and Linetype Properties of a Zone Style You can specify these display properties for the following display components of a zone in the style:
Display components in plan views Component Zone boundary Hatch
Name Marker Zone Connection Line
Description
The boundary around any spaces attached to the zone
Hatch component of the zone symbol and of any spaces connected to the zone. The zone hatch is drawn on top of the space hatch if both are visible.
Zone label
Zone symbol
Connecting line between the zone and any attached zones
1642 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Display components in plan views Component Space Connection Line
Description Connecting line between the zone and any attached spaces
1 Open a tool palette that has a zone tool. 2 Right-click a zone tool, and click Zone Styles. 3 Select the zone style you want to change. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override. 6 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 7 Select the zone component to change, and change the following settings:
Visibility Layer Color Linetype/Lineweight/Linetype Scale Plot Style
8 Click OK.
Specifying the Hatching of a Zone Style Use this procedure to specify the hatch settings of a zone style. The specified hatch is applied to the zone symbol and to any spaces attached to the zone, allowing you to easily detect the structure in your drawing if you have many spaces and zones. The hatch is also important if you want to create a coding legend from the zone.
1 Open a tool palette that has a zone tool. 2 Right-click a zone tool, and click Zone Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Hatching tab. 8 Select a component, and click the setting for Pattern. 9 Select the hatching for the component:
If you want to...
Then...
select a hatching pattern that is available in the software
select Predefined for Type, and then select a pattern.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Zone Style | 1643
If you want to... select a custom pattern
select single hatching select double hatching select solid fill
Then...
select Custom for Type, and then enter the name of the custom pattern. If necessary, click Browse, and navigate to the folder where the custom pattern file is located.
select User-defined for Type, and clear Double Hatch.
select User-defined for Type, and select Double Hatch.
select Solid Fill for Type.
10 Click OK. 11 Click Scale/Spacing, and enter a value that determines how the selected pattern is repeated. 12 Click Angle, and enter the angle for the selected pattern. 13 Click Orientation, and specify how the hatching is oriented:
If you want to...
Then...
orient the hatching to the object, regardless of the object rotation
select Object.
orient the hatching to the World Coordinate System
select Global.
14 Click OK twice.
Inheriting the Zone Hatch to Different Levels of Attached Spaces Use this procedure to specify to which level of attached spaces the hatch of the zone should be inherited. The zone hatch can either be inherited only to the directly attached spaces, or it can be inherited to all attached spaces, directly or indirectly through subzones.
Inheriting zone hatch to all attached spaces (top) or only to directly attached spaces (bottom)
1 Open a tool palette that has a zone tool. 2 Right-click a zone tool, and click Zone Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab.
1644 | Chapter 35 Spaces
8 Define whether the hatch of the zone should be used only for directly attached spaces, or to all spaces:
If you want to... use the zone hatch only for directly attached spaces
Then... clear Draw All.
use the zone hatch for all directly attached spaces and all spaces attached through another zone
select Draw All.
9 Click OK.
Specifying Text Style, Marker Size, and Arrow of a Zone Style Use this procedure to define the text style, zone marker size, and the zone connection line arrow of a zone.
1 Open a tool palette that has a zone tool. 2 Right-click a zone tool, and click Zone Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click .
7 Click the Other tab.
8 Change the width and height of the zone marker by selecting User Defined Scaling and then entering a width and height. To display the zone marker always in 1/50 of the screen size, clear User Defined Scaling.
9 Change the appearance of the zone name.
If you want to...
Then...
change the height of the zone name
enter a new height.
change the text style of the zone name
either select a text style from the list, or click the Browse button and create a new text style. For more information, see "Text Style Dialog Box" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
10 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes or Files to a Zone Style
Use this procedure to attach text notes and files to a zone style. 1 Open a tool palette that has a zone tool. 2 Right-click a zone tool, and click Zone Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit.
Attaching Notes or Files to a Zone Style | 1645
4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the zone style, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Close the application when you are done editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 Click OK twice.
Converting Area Group Styles to Zone Styles
If you open a drawing from a previous version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop that has area group styles in it, the area group styles will be automatically converted to zone styles. The following table maps area group style properties to zone style properties:
Area group style property Name Description Keynote Notes/Reference Docs Property Sets
N/A
Zone style property Name Description Keynote Notes/Reference Docs Property Sets
List Definition
Value/Default value Existing value Existing value Existing value Existing notes and attached documents Area group property sets are converted to zone property sets and attached to the converted zone style Standard
NOTE Prior to Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, list definitions were attached to zones or zone templates. They are now attached to the space style or the zone style.
Exclusivity N/A N/A Classifications
Allow a space to only be attached to one zone of this style
'Allow a zone of this style to only be attached to other zones of this style
Classifications
Not selected Not selected Existing classification values.
NOTE Area group classification definitions from legacy drawings are converted to zone classification definitions and applied to converted zone styles.
Display Representations Plan Plan High Detail
1646 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Plan Plan High Detail
Existing settings Existing settings
Area group style property Plan Low Detail N/A N/A
Zone style property Plan Low Detail Plan Presentation Plan Screened
Value/Default value Existing settings Drawing Default Drawing Default
Zone Templates
A zone template is a structure definition for zones with multiple hierarchical levels. You define the zone template as a hierarchy with certain properties, and use it to create the zone structure in the drawing.
Zones according to DIN277
You use a zone template only to insert a zone structure. Later changes to the zone template are not copied to existing zones based on this template.
Similarly, when you change a zone structure that is based on a zone template, those changes do not affect the template.
You can create zone templates for structures you need frequently, and make them available through Autodesk® Architectural Desktop style drawings.
NOTE Area group templates from legacy drawings are automatically converted to zone templates when the drawings are opened in with the current version of the software. Area name definitions that were attached to an area group template will be disconnected from the zone template, as name definitions are now attached to the space style or the zone style rather than the zone template. For information about attaching list definitions to a zone style, see "Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style" on page 1641.
Creating a Zone Template
Use this procedure to create a zone template. You can start by using the default template or you can copy an existing template and modify it.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Zone Templates. 3 Create a new zone template:
If you want to...
Then...
create a new template with default properties
right-click Zone Templates, and click New.
create a new template from an existing template
right-click the template you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new zone template, and press ENTER.
Zone Templates | 1647
5 Edit the style properties of your new zone template:
If you want to... define the content of the zone template
Then...
see "Building the Structure of a Zone Template" on page 1648.
add notes or files to the zone template
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Zone Template" on page 1649.
6 Click OK.
Building the Structure of a Zone Template
When you create a zone template, you set the following properties:
structure of contained zones zone style (for each contained zone) zone content (for each contained zone) zone calculation type (for each contained zone) calculation modifier styles (for each contained zone)
For information about creating zones from a zone template, see "Creating Zone Structures from a Zone Template" on page 1631.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Zone Templates.
3 Select the template you want to edit.
4 Click the Content tab. In the left pane of the Content tab, a tree structure displays the structure of the zone template with all zones and subzones. If you are creating a new zone template, only the top level zone node is present. All other subzones are yet to be inserted.
5 Add the desired subzones to your zone template.
If you want to...
Then...
add a subzone to the template
select the zone that will contain the subzone, right-click, and click New.
rename a zone
select the zone, right-click, and click Rename.
delete a zone
select the zone, right-click, and click Delete.
NOTE To rearrange zones within the structure, drag-and-drop them within the tree.
1648 | Chapter 35 Spaces
6 Select a zone. 7 Enter a description for the zone. 8 Select a style for the zone. For information about zone styles, see "Zone Styles" on page 1640.
TIP If you select a style that requires zone exclusivity, you will be able to add only subzones that are of the same style. If you try to attach a subzone of a different style, you will receive an error message. For information on setting exclusivity rules for zone styles, see "Restricting the Content of a Zone Based on the Zone Style" on page 1641.
9 Specify the types of objects that can be attached to the zone (spaces, zones, or both.) 10 Select the types of calculations performed for the zone in the evaluation of the floor plan.
For example, you might want to have a Carpet zone node to calculate how much carpet you need and Base board zone node to calculate how much baseboard you need. For the Carpet zone node, you would select Yes for Calculate area. For the Baseboard zone node, you would select Yes for Calculate perimeter. You can select both calculation types if you want both values to appear in the evaluation.
11 Select one or more calculation modifiers to apply to the zone. For example, if you have a Balconies zone node, you can attach a calculation modifier that reduces all calculated space values in this zone by 50 percent.
NOTE By default, a calculation modifier is applied only to the base area and base perimeter of spaces attached to the zone. To apply the modifier to the net, usable, and gross boundaries of spaces attached to a zone, you need to create and apply a property set definition that contains properties for the calculated area and perimeter values of these 3 boundaries.
Calculation modifiers are applied accumulatively. If you attach a 50 percent calculation modifier to a space directly, and then attach the space to a zone that also has a 50 percent calculation modifier, the resulting space value is 25 percent, because both calculation modifiers are applied. Calculation modifiers are processed top-down, with the first style in the list processed first, the second style after that, and so on. Depending on your calculation formulas, you can receive different result values. To change the order of calculation modifiers, drag them to the correct positions within the list. For an example of how the order of calculation modifiers can affect the calculation results, see "Calculation Modifiers" on page 1621.
12 Click Attach. 13 In the Select a Space Calculation Modifier Style worksheet, select a calculation modifier to attach to the
zone node, and click OK. 14 To detach a calculation modifier, select it, and click Detach. 15 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Zone Template
Use this procedure to attach text notes and files to a zone template.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Zone Templates. 3 Select the template for which you want to add a note or file. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the zone template, enter the description for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Zone Template | 1649
8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Close the application when you are done editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK twice.
Converting Area Group Templates to Zone Templates
If you open a drawing from a previous version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop that has area group templates in it, the area group templates will be automatically converted to zone templates. The following table maps area group template properties to zone template properties:
Area group template property Zone template property
Name
Name
Description
Description
Notes/Reference Docs
Notes/Reference Docs
List Definition
N/A
Value/Default value Existing value Existing value Existing notes and attached documents
NOTE Prior to Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, name definitions could be attached to zone templates. Now, list definitions are attached to the space style or the zone style.
Style
Content
Calculation types Calculation Modifier Styles
Style
Content
Calculation types Calculation Modifier Styles
Area group styles from legacy drawings are automatically converted to zone styles and attached to the corresponding node in the zone template.
Existing content permissions. Area permissions are now space permissions, and area group permissions are zone permissions.
Existing values
Existing calculation modifiers
Space Evaluation
The space evaluation is a documentation feature that calculates and evaluates the space information of your finished floor plan. This information is stored in a separate file that you can export to a spreadsheet or word processing application. Evaluation templates ensure that the information is formatted and arranged in a consistent, structured way.
Examples for Using the Space Evaluation
Architects need the space evaluation feature for submitting floor plans to the building plan approval authorities and to customers. Space evaluation can also be used for performing cost estimates, assigning jobs to contractors, or organizing facility management. You can create evaluations for
Selected spaces and zones in the current drawing Selected spaces and zones from multiple open drawings All spaces and zones in a drawing
1650 | Chapter 35 Spaces
All spaces and zones from all open drawings Spaces and zones from external references Transitioning from Area Evaluation to Space Evaluation Prior to Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, areas and area groups could be evaluated with the area evaluation feature. Areas are now converted to spaces, area groups to zones, and the area evaluation has been converted to the space evaluation. If you attempt to use a legacy tool or run a legacy command to start the area evaluation, the following message will appear:
If you click Run Space Evaluation, the space evaluation will be started instead. You should remove area evaluation tools from your palettes and exchange area evaluation commands for space evaluation commands in your scripts. For a listing of obsolete commands and their corresponding new commands, see "Appendix 1: Command Changes for Spaces and Areas" on page 1657.
Preparing the Space Evaluation
Before you create an evaluation file, you select the spaces and zones to include, and you set a number of options that control the output for export.
Selecting Spaces and Zones for Evaluation
Use this procedure to select spaces and zones to include in the evaluation. 1 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Space Evaluation tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool. Selecting space and zones for an evaluation
In the left pane, all open drawings are listed with spaces and zones in a tree structure. When you highlight one of the spaces or zones, the following information is displayed on the right side:
Name Description Base Area Calculated Area (base space after application of calculation modifiers) Base Perimeter Calculated Perimeter (base perimeter after application of calculation modifiers) Calculation Type (Area or Perimeter) Calculation Modifier Styles
Preparing the Space Evaluation | 1651
2 To include spaces and zones from external references in the list view, click
.
NOTE Spaces and zones from external references are displayed with the External References icon ( can select them in the same way as spaces and zones from open drawings.
). You
3 Select the spaces and zones you want to include in the evaluation of the floor plan by selecting their check boxes.
NOTE There are different colors for the check box marks. A black check mark means that you have selected this space or zone directly for evaluation. You can clear that mark directly. A gray check mark means that you have selected a space or zone contained in the gray-marked zone. This does not mean that the gray-marked zone is included in the evaluation; if you want to include it, select it directly. A blue check mark on a space or zone means that you have selected the zone these items are contained in. These zones and spaces are included in the evaluation because their containing zone is included.
Evaluation Content
Use this procedure to specify which of the following components to include in the evaluation file. You select components for spaces and zones separately.
1 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Space Evaluation tool. 2 Click Evaluation Options. 3 Click the Evaluation tab. 4 Select Space for Select. 5 In the list displayed, select the components you want to appear in the evaluation file.
You can choose these components:
Component
Description
Name
Name of the space or zone
Description
Description of the space or zone
Overview Image
Graphic image of the space or zone in bitmap format
Base Area Label
Fixed prefix for the base area value of the space or zone
Base Area Result
Base area value of space or zone without calculation modifiers applied
Calculated Area Label
Fixed prefix for the area of the space or zone after applying calculation modifiers
Calculated Area Result
Area value of the space or zone with calculation modifier styles applied
(Area) Modifier Label
Prefix showing the name of a modifier applied to space area
(Area) Modifier Expression
Formula of calculation modifier applied to the space area
(Area) Modifier Result
Resulting value of applied calculation modifier
(Area) Proof Label - Spaces only
Number of the space subdivisions plus any prefixes you may have set
(Area) Proof Expression - Spaces only
Formula of the decomposition method applied to the space
(Area) Proof Result - Spaces only
Result of the space decomposition
(Area) Decomposed Image - Spaces only
Preview image of the space decomposition
1652 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Component Base Perimeter Label Base Perimeter Result
Calculated Perimeter Label
Calculated Perimeter Result
(Perimeter) Modifier Label (Perimeter) Modifier Expression (Perimeter) Modifier Result
Description Fixed prefix for the space or zone base perimeter value
Base value of the space or zone perimeter without calculation modifier styles applied
Fixed prefix for the base perimeter of the space or zone after calculation modifiers are applied
Perimeter value of the space or zone after calculation modifiers are applied
Prefix showing the name of perimeter modifier
Formula of calculation modifier applied to perimeter
Resulting value of any applied perimeter calculation modifiers
6 If necessary, repeat the component selection for zones. 7 Click OK.
Image Display Properties
Use this procedure to specify display settings for any preview images you want to include in your evaluation file. 1 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Space Evaluation tool. 2 Click Evaluation Options. 3 Click the Image Display tab. Image display for space evaluation document
4 Select the drawing for which you want to set image properties.
NOTE If you want to create include several open drawings in the evaluation, you need to set the image properties for each open drawing separately.
5 Choose the desired color depth for the images in the evaluation file. Not that a high resolution enhances the quality of the images but also enlarges the file size.
6 For each object category (Spaces, Spaces Decomposed, and Zones) select the desired display configuration, and specify the desired width and height for the image size:
NOTE In the list, you will see only those display configurations in which display representations for spaces, zones, or decomposed spaces are turned on.
7 Click OK.
Data Format Style Properties
You can set different data format styles for different components of the evaluation file.
Image Display Properties | 1653
NOTE For information about creating data format styles, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
1 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Space Evaluation tool. 2 Click Evaluation Options. 3 Click the Data Format Styles tab. 4 In the tree view under Apply To, select the element to which you want to assign a data format style. You
can choose from these elements:
Area Result (Area) Modifier Expression (Area) Proof Expression Perimeter Result (Perimeter) Modifier Expression
5 Select the drawing from which you want to take a data format style.
6 Select the desired data format style.
7 For Area Result and Perimeter Result, if you want to include the exact, unrounded values as additional information in the evaluation file, select Additional Exact value. The area or perimeter result will then displays with the precision set in the data format style and, in an extra column, with their exact precision without rounding.
Example:
Calculated Perimeter = 33.778 m
Exact Calculated Perimeter = 33.777692 m
Calculated Area = 88.532 m2
Exact Calculated Area = 88.5321423 m2
8 Click OK.
Setting the Default Templates
An evaluation document is saved as a spreadsheet (XLS) file or as an ASCII text format (TXT) file. To create an XLS file, you need an XLT template, and to create a TXT document, you need a TXT template. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop includes preset templates for both formats. You can use those templates as provided or you can modify them according to your needs. You can also create your own XLT and TXT templates in Microsoft® Excel or any word processor, like NotePad or Microsoft® Word. After a default template is set, it is used for all evaluations until you change the default settings again. If no default template has been set, you are prompted for a template each time you create an evaluation.
1 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Space Evaluation tool.
2 Click Evaluation Options.
3 Click the Templates tab.
1654 | Chapter 35 Spaces
4 Set a default template for evaluations: If you want to... set a default template for XLS evaluation files To set a default template for TXT evaluation files
Then... enter a file name and directory path for Excel Template File. enter a file name and directory path for Text Template File.
NOTE The evaluation templates shipped with the software are located under \\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template\Evaluation Templates\.
5 Click OK.
Creating the Space Evaluation Document
When you perform a space evaluation, a separate file that contains the space information from the specified drawing files. This file is saved as an XLS file or a TXT file, depending on your settings.
Creating an XLS Evaluation Document
Use this procedure to export a space evaluation to an Excel spreadsheet. One of the most frequently used formats for space evaluation documents is XLS, the native file format of Microsoft® Excel. It is a powerful spreadsheet file format with numerous calculation and formatting abilities. You can easily export data from Excel to formats like HTML, XML, CSV (comma-delimited) or DBF (dBase).
You can export text (results, modifier expressions, and labels) and images (bitmap previews of spaces and zones). For a detailed list of elements that can be exported, see "Evaluation Content" on page 1652.
You can create your own XLT templates into which the evaluation is integrated. For more information, see "Creating XLT Templates" on page 1656.
1 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Space Evaluation tool.
2 Prepare the space evaluation as described in "Preparing the Space Evaluation" on page 1651.
3 In the Space Evaluation dialog box, click
.
If you did not select a default XLT template in the Evaluation Properties dialog box, you are prompted to select a template now.
4 Select a file directory, and enter a name for the XLS evaluation file. 5 Click Save. 6 When the export is finished, click Close.
The space evaluation file is saved to the specified directory. You can open it with Microsoft Excel or any other spreadsheet application that can read XLS.
Creating a TXT Evaluation Document
Use this procedure to export a space evaluation to a text file.
NOTE In TXT format, you can export text (results, modifier expressions, and labels), but not images. If you need to export images in the evaluation, use XLS format instead.
You can create your own TXT templates into which the evaluation is then integrated. 1 Open the Scheduling tool palette, and select the Space Evaluation tool. 2 Prepare the evaluation as described in "Preparing the Space Evaluation" on page 1651.
3 In the Space Evaluation dialog box, click
.
Creating the Space Evaluation Document | 1655
If you did not select a default TXT template in the Evaluation Properties dialog box, you are prompted to select a template now.
4 Select a file directory, and enter a name for the space evaluation file. 5 Click Save. 6 When the export is finished, click Close. The space evaluation file is saved to the specified file directory. You can open it with any word processor.
Creating XLT Templates
Use this procedure to create the XSLT template file needed for exporting a space evaluation to an Excel spreadsheet. You can use the following predefined field settings to format your XLT templates:
Field name AREA_EVALUATION_BEGIN AREA_COLUMN_IMAGE AREA_COLUMN_LABEL AREA_COLUMN_EXPRESSION
AREA_COLUMN_RESULT AREA_COLUMN_EXACT_VALUE
Description The row in which the space evaluation begins The column in which the exported space images are placed The column in which the space labels and descriptions are placed The column in which the space decomposition expressions and modifier formulas are placed The column in which all space results are placed The column in which the unrounded space results are placed
1 Open Microsoft Excel. 2 Select the table cell in which you want to place a special type of information, such as pictures or results. 3 Click the name box in the upper-left corner of the Excel sheet, and enter the desired field definition. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all field settings you want to place. 5 Define additional settings for your template. Settings in an XLT file include
Header and footer information Company logos Company fonts Special cell formatting (borders, colors)
6 Save the resulting file with the extension XLT (Excel Template) to the default directory you are using for templates. The template is then available for selection next time you create a space evaluation.
Conversion of Space Boundaries to Walls and Spaces
Beginning with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, space boundaries from previous versions of the software will not persist as independent objects. When a legacy drawing is opened in the current version of the software, the legacy space boundaries will be converted to walls. If the legacy space boundary manages contained spaces, these will be converted to spaces associative to the converted walls.
All legacy space boundary edges are converted to walls. Edges of the boundary type Separation or edges of the boundary type Solid with 0 width are converted to 0 width walls. If the legacy space boundary manages contained spaces, those spaces are associative to the converted walls.
Legacy property set definitions that apply to legacy space boundaries will automatically be migrated to property set definitions that apply to walls. Legacy property data attached to space boundaries will be attached to the walls that are optionally created from the space boundary during drawing migration.
1656 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Appendix 1: Command Changes for Spaces and Areas
Since the merge of areas and spaces in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop 2007, a number of commands have become obsolete or have been changed to other names.
Area Commands
The following area-related commands are obsolete. Corresponding current space commands are listed where applicable:
Previous command AecSpaceConvertArea AecAreaAdd AecAreaConvert AecAreaDetect AecAreaStyle AecNameDef AecArea AecAreaAddSelected AecAreaAttach AecAreaCreatePline AecAreaDetach AecAreaDivide AecAreaEvaluation AecAreaOpIntersect AecAreaOpJoin AecAreaOpSubtract AecAreaProps N/A AecAreaRemoveRing AecAreaReverseProfile AecAreaReverseRing AecAreaStyle AecAreaStyleEdit AecAreaToolToAutoDetection AecAreaToolToLinework AecAreaTrim AecAreaVertexModify AecSlabConvertArea
New command N/A AecSpaceAdd N/A AecSpaceAutoGenerate AecSpaceStyle AecListDefinition AecSpace AecSpaceAddSelected AecSpaceAttach AecSpaceCreatePline AecSpaceDetach AecLineworkDivide AecSpaceEvaluation AecLineworkCrop AecLineworkMerge AecLineworkSubtract AecSpaceProps AecSpaceProperties AecSpaceRemoveVoid AecSpaceReverseProfile AecSpaceReverseRing AecSpaceStyle AecSpaceStyleEdit N/A N/A AecLineworkTrim AecSpaceVertexModify AecSlabConvertSpace
Area Group Commands
The following area group-related commands are obsolete. Corresponding current zone commands are listed where applicable:
Previous command AecAreaGroupAdd
New command AecZoneAdd
Appendix 1: Command Changes for Spaces and Areas | 1657
Previous command AecAreaGroupStyle AecGroupCreateFromTemplate AecGroupTemplate AecAreaGroup AecAreaGroupAddSelected AecAreaGroupAttach AecAreaGroupCreatePline AecAreaGroupDetach AecAreaGroupLayout AecAreaGroupProps N/A AecAreaGroupStyleEdit
New command AecZoneStyle AecZoneCreateFromTemplate AecZoneTemplate AecZone AecZoneAddSelected AecZoneAttach AecZoneCreatePline AecZoneDetach AecZoneLayout AecZoneProps AecZoneProperties AecZoneStyleEdit
Space Boundary Commands
The following space boundary commands are now obsolete:
Previous command AecSpaceBoundary AecSpaceBoundaryAdd AecSpaceBoundaryConvert AecSpaceBoundarySplit AecSpaceBoundaryProps AecSpaceBoundaryAddEdges AecSpaceBoundaryRemoveEdges AecSpaceBoundaryConvertEdges AecSpaceBoundaryInsertJoint AecSpaceBoundaryMerge AecSpaceBoundaryMergeSpace AecSpaceBoundaryGenerateWalls AecSpaceBoundaryEdge -AecSpaceBoundaryModify AecSpaceBoundaryConvertSpace AecSpaceBoundaryConvertSlice AecSpaceBoundaryConvertEdge AecSpaceBdyToolToEdges AecSpaceBdyToolToSpace AecSpaceBdyToolToSlice AecSpaceBoundaryAddSelected
New command AecWall AecWallAdd N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1658 | Chapter 35 Spaces
Sections
36
A section represents a building model as if the model were cut vertically to show interior detail. You can create two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D) section objects, or a live section view of the model. You can control the size and shape of the section you generate and assign materials to the section for an optimal visual representation of the sectioned objects. Section objects remain linked to the building model that you used to create them, unless you explode the section. Because of this link between the section and the building model, any changes to the building model can be reflected in the section as well.
1659
Sections
A section represents a building model as if the model were cut vertically to show interior detail. You can create two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D) section objects, or a live section view of the model. You can control the size and shape of the section you generate and assign materials to the section for an optimal visual representation of the sectioned objects. Section objects remain linked to the building model that you used to create them, unless you explode the section. Because of this link between the section and the building model, any changes to the building model can be reflected in the section as well. Section Line and Marks The section line defines the extents of the section that you extract from the building model. Sections lines can be straight or jogged. You can also specify the length and the height of the area defined by the section line. Section marks, which typically contain a letter or number and indicate the direction of the section, appear at each end of the section line. After you draw the section line, you can create a section object or a live section view from the line. Creating a Section
2D Sections 2D sections are created by cutting a number of objects with a section line and then creating a 2D section object from them. The section object is drawn without hidden and overlapping lines. You can edit a 2D section by changing its object display properties or its style display properties. The 2D section style lets you add display components to the display representation of the section and create rules that assign different parts of the section to different display 1660 | Chapter 36 Sections
components. You can control the visibility, layer, color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale of each component. You can also choose whether materials, such as brick or concrete hatches, are used to display individual components of the section object or the 2D section style. Furthermore, you can use linework editing commands to assign individual lines in a 2D section to different display components, and merge geometry into a 2D section. You can dimension 2D sections. 2D section with surface and shrinkwrap hatch detail
3D Sections 3D sections are created by cutting a number of objects with a section line and then creating a 3D isometric section object from them. 3D sections do not use styles. However, you can control the display of subdivisions within 3D sections. Using the Hidden Line Projection command, you can create 2D hidden line projections of any view of the 3D section that you can explode and edit or hatch. For more information about using this command, see "Creating a Hidden Line Projection" on page 1738.
3D section in 3D view
Section Subdivisions A 2D or 3D section object can have a number of subdivisions partitioning the section object. This feature is useful when you want to create a view of the object in which the parts that are closer to the viewer are drawn with darker and stronger lines, and parts that are farther off are drawn lighter.
3D section with subdivisions and assigned colors in perspective view
Sections | 1661
Live Section View A live section view is a special view of a 3D section where the objects that are sectioned are not converted to a 3D section object. Instead, the existing model objects are displayed as a 3D section. The parts of the objects within the bounding box of the section line keep their individual display components while the parts of the objects outside of the section line can optionally be displayed or hidden. To control the appearance of the object parts outside of the section line, you need to assign a material to the sectioned objects. When you render a live section, you can show the outside part as a half-transparent addition, for example. For more information, see "Creating and Editing a Live Section View" on page 1675.
Rendered live section view with transparent body component
Materials in Sections In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to different components of an object. These materials are displayed when you create a 2D or 3D section object or a live section view. Materials have specific settings for sections, such a as a 2D section hatch setting and a sectioned boundary for live section views. In a 2D or 3D section object, you can specify whether to use the display properties of the materials or the display properties of the section object.
2D section with different surface hatches
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a large number of predefined materials for all common design purposes. You can use these predefined materials, or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials from scratch. For more information, see "About 2D and 3D Section Display Components and Materials" on page 1691. Subdivisions in 2D Section Styles and Materials When you create subdivisions in your style, you usually want the objects in them to be visually distinct from other subdivisions. When you assign materials to the objects, you can set the 2D section style so that it uses the hatch pattern from the material, but uses the color and linetype from the subdivision display properties. 3D section with subdivisions and assigned colors in 3D view
For more information see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles" on page 1695.
1662 | Chapter 36 Sections
Material Boundaries in 2D Sections Material boundaries allow you to erase or limit portions of a 2D section or elevation. For example, you might do the following:
Limit the amount of hatching to produce cleaner CDs. Highlight a region in an elevation or section.
2D section with highlighted hatching region detail
Mask out a portion of a section so that more detail can be drawn. 2D section with hatch masked
Crop an irregular-shaped portion of a section or elevation. 2D section with cropped material display detail
For more information, see "Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Section" on page 1681.
Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Section
Creating a 2D or 3D section from a building model entails the following steps: Step 1: Draw a section line and mark.
The section line defines the extents of the section (its width, height, and length) to extract from the building model. The section line also determines other characteristics of the section. You can also use the section line to define graphic subdivisions, in order to add levels of depth to the section object created from the section line.
Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Section | 1663
A section line with graphic subdivisions
Step 2: Create a 2D or 3D section. You select the section line, right-click, and click Generate Section to create a 2D or 3D section object. At this time, you select the objects to include in the section. You also select the display representation for the selected objects, and the insertion point of the section in the drawing. If you create a 2D section, you also select a 2D section style, which determines the visual characteristics of the section. 2D section created from the section line shown above
Step 3: Edit the section or the building model. You can edit the section line and the section object to refine the appearance of the section by doing the following: Edit the section line to change the area defined by the section and to add, remove, or modify graphic subdivisions. Edit the 2D section style, which determines how the linework in a 2D section is displayed. Edit existing material assignments, such as hatch patterns. Add a material boundary, so that only selected parts of the section are displayed with materials. This can improve performance and make the drawing clearer. Edit a 2D section object to change the display of selected linework or to add linework and detail that are not part of the building model. You can continue to modify the building model as needed.
Step 4: Update the section. You update a section to apply changes you made to the section line, the section object (including style changes to a 2D section), and the building model. When you update a section, you can also make any of the following changes: Select a different style for a 2D section. Select different objects to include and exclude from the section. Select a different display representation. Replace the existing section or add a new section showing the changes you made. You can also refresh one or more sections to quickly apply changes you made to the section line, the section object, or the model.
1664 | Chapter 36 Sections
Process Overview: Creating a Live Section View
Creating a live section view of a building model entails the following: Step 1: Draw a section line.
For more information, see "Drawing a Section Line and Marks" on page 1666. Step 2: Switch into a 3D model view. Step 3: Enable the live section view.
Drawing and Editing Section Lines
The first step in creating a section is to draw a section line through the building model. The section line defines the extents of the section to extract from the building model.
NOTE You can create vertical sections and horizontal sections.
Creating a Section Object from a Section Line
When you generate a section from a section line, you specify the type of section object that is created.
When you create... a 2D section object a 3D section object or a live section
The result is... an orthographic projection from the building model. the area of the building model defined in the section line.
Creating a Live Section View from a Section Line
When you create a live section view from a section line, you do not create a new section object but instead switch to a special view of the 3D building model. You do not select objects to include in the section; the live section view includes all objects in the drawing. The section line controls how objects are displayed in a live section view. Objects or parts of objects that are within the bounding box of the section line retain their original display properties. Objects or parts of objects that are outside of the section line are either not displayed at all or are displayed with a special display component for the sectioned body.
Viewing the Section Line
In plan view, the section line is displayed as you would expect on a construction document. The section marks point in the direction that the section is cut.
Viewing the section line and mark in plan view
In an isometric view, the same section line is displayed with a boundary that defines the extents of the section.
Process Overview: Creating a Live Section View | 1665
Viewing a section line in isometric view
Changing the Section Line You can change the section line to control the section that you create. Using the section line, you can change the height and shape of the section. You can also add a lower extension to the section and create section subdivisions. You can change section line properties before or after you create a section. After changing section line properties, you can apply the changes to a section that you previously created with the section line. For information about updating existing sections, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685. For information about updating existing live section views, see "Updating a Live Section View" on page 1676. Using Subdivisions in Sections You can set up graphic subdivisions in section line properties. These subdivisions are added to the 2D or 3D section you create. Subdivisions are specified at distances from the cutting plane of the section line. You can control the lineweight and other display properties of subdivisions to add levels of depth to sections. For example, you can display one subdivision with a heavy lineweight and another subdivision with a lighter lineweight to suggest that the first subdivision is in front of the second subdivision. You can use the display properties of a subdivision together with the display properties of a material. For more information, see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles" on page 1695. Drawing a Section Line and Marks Use this procedure to draw a section line with a section mark at each end. You draw a section line by specifying a start point, an endpoint, a length, and a height for the section. You can specify additional points between the start point and the endpoint to create jogs in the section. The section line acts as a cutting plane, slicing a section from the building model. NOTE If you are working with a drawing set where several xrefs are linked to a main drawing, draw the section line in the main drawing.
1 On the default tool palette set, click the Design tab, and then click the Vertical Section tool. If necessary, scroll the palette to display the tool that you need.
2 Specify the start point of the section line. 3 Continue to specify points to define the section line, if needed.
You can create jogs in the section line to cut through portions of the building model that you want to show in the section, but which are not along a single straight path. 4 Specify the endpoint of the section line, and press ENTER.
1666 | Chapter 36 Sections
Specifying section line start and end points in 3D view
5 Specify the length of the section, or press ENTER to accept the length taken from the endpoints of the line.
The section line is displayed in the drawing. Depending on the direction in which you drew the section line, the section marks point in the direction of the section.
The section marks are multi-view blocks, anchored to the section line. You can edit the section marks to change the information displayed in the bubbles. For more information, see "Changing Section Mark Attributes" on page 1671.
The height of the section line is set to the extents of the selected objects. You can change the properties of the line to change the height and depth of the section, add a lower extension, or add subdivisions. For more information, see "Changing the Height of a Section Using Grips" on page 1667.
Changing the Height of a Section Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the height of any section connected to the section line. You can change the height of the section line before or after you create a connected section. If you change the height after creating the section, you need to update the section to show the changes.
You can also change the height of a section using the Properties palette.
1 Click
on the Views flyout on the Navigation toolbar to switch to a SW isometric view.
2 Select the section line you want to change.
3 Select the Model Extents grip to turn off use of model extents for section height.
4 Select the Height grip.
NOTE If you use model extents for height mode, the height of the section is determined by the height of the objects in the section and is not available to modify dynamically.
Changing the Height of a Section Using Grips | 1667
Viewing Section Grips in 3D View
5 Move the grip until the height value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. The objects are cut at this height when you create or update a section.
6 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. To update a 2D or 3D section created from this section line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Changing the Lower Extension of a Section Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the lower extension of any section connected to the section line. You can change the lower extension of the section line before or after you create a connected section. If you change the lower extension after creating the section, you need to update the section to show the changes. You can also change the lower extension of a section using the Properties palette.
1 Click on the Views flyout on the Navigation toolbar to switch to a SW isometric view. 2 Select the section line you want to change. 3 Select the Model Extents grip to turn off model extents for height. 4 Select the Lower Extension grip.
NOTE If you turn off model extents, the default for the lower section is 1 foot below the XY plane. Viewing Section Grips in 3D View
5 Move the grip until the lower extension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value.
1668 | Chapter 36 Sections
6 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. To update a 2D or 3D section created from this section line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Changing the Length of a Section Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the length of any section boundary connected to the section line. You can change the length of the section as a whole, or you can change the length of the sides of the section boundary individually. You can change the length of the section boundary before or after you create a connected section. If you change the length after creating the section, you need to update the section to show the changes. You can also define the depth of a section (its length) by changing the length of the sides of a section boundary on the Properties palette.
1 Select the section line you want to change. 2 Select the Length grip.
Viewing Section Grips in Plan View
3 Move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once. The entire section boundary length is updated.
4 To change the length of side 1 of the section boundary, click the Side 1 Endpoint grip. Side 1 starts from the first point specified for the section line.
5 Move the grip to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value on the command line, and press ENTER. Viewing Section Grips in Plan View
6 To change the length of side 2 of the section boundary, click the Side 2 Endpoint grip. Side 2 starts from the endpoint of the section line.
7 Move the grip to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value on the command line, and press ENTER.
8 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. To update a 2D or 3D section created from this section line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Changing the Length of a Section Using Grips | 1669
Changing the Angle Dimensions of a Section
Use this procedure to change the angle of the sides of the building section boundary. You can change the angle dimensions before or after you create a connected section. If you change the angles after creating the section, you need to update the section to show the changes.
1 Double-click the section line you want to change.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Component Dimensions.
3 Specify values for Angle 1 and Angle 2. These values define the angles of the two sides from the section line to create the section box. The apex of Angle 1 is the start point of the section line. The apex of Angle 2 is the endpoint of the section line. Values for these angles must be between 0 and 90 degrees.
Specifying section angle parameters
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
To update a 2D or 3D section created from this section line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Sections
Use this procedure to define subdivisions that are created when you generate a section. Each subdivision is specified as a distance from the cutting plane of the section line. You can control the lineweight and other display properties of the subdivisions to add different levels of depth to sections. You can use the display properties of a subdivision together with the display properties of a material. For more information, see "Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1663 and "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles" on page 1695.
1 Double-click the section line you want to change.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions.
3 Click the setting for Subdivisions, and then add or modify subdivisions:
If you want to... create a subdivision
Then...
click . To change the default distance from the section line, select the subdivision, click the value, and enter a new one.
change the length of a subdivision
select the subdivision, click its value, and enter a new one.
delete a subdivision
select the subdivision, and click .
4 Click OK.
1670 | Chapter 36 Sections
Changing a Subdivision Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the distance of a subdivision, as measured from the section line. You can drag the constrained grip to the desired distance, or you can enter a specific value for the distance measurement.
Viewing Section Subdivision Grips
1 Select the section line you want to change. 2 Select the Distance grip for the subdivision you want to modify. 3 Move the grip until the distance value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. 4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing Section Mark Attributes
Use this procedure to change the information displayed in the section mark. The section mark is a multi-view block.
1 Double-click the section mark you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced. 3 Click Attributes. 4 Select the existing attribute under Value, and enter the new information to include in the bubble. 5 Click OK.
Changing the Location of a Section Line
Use this procedure to relocate a section line by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The section line also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the section line are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the section line by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the section line on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the section line you want to relocate. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional Information. 4 Specify the location of the section line:
If you want to... relocate the section line
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the section line on the XY plane
make the normal of the section line parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
Changing a Subdivision Using Grips | 1671
If you want to... locate the section line on the YZ plane locate the section line on the XZ plane change the rotation of the section line
Then...
make the normal of the section line parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the section line parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK. To update an existing section created from this section line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Modifying a Section Line Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the start point, endpoint, edge, or vertex of a section line. You can drag the grip to the desired location, or you can enter a specific value for the measurement.
1 Select the section line you want to change. 2 Select a section line grip, and move it to the desired location.
You can also move the grip in the desired direction and enter a specific value on the command line.
Viewing Section Grips in Plan View
3 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Section Line
Use this procedure to add hyperlinks, enter notes, and attach reference files to a section line. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a section line.
1 Double-click the section line you want to attach notes or files to. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
4 To add a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference file, click following: If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file
next to Reference documents, and then do any of the
Then...
click , select a file, and click Open. enter text under Description. double-click the reference file name to start its application.
1672 | Chapter 36 Sections
If you want to... detach a reference file
6 Click OK.
Then... select the file name, and click .
Creating a 2D or 3D Section
Use this procedure to create a 2D or 3D section. After you draw a section line, you extract a section from the section line and the objects you select in the building model.
TIP Before you create a section, thaw and turn on all layers containing objects that you want to include in the section. Objects on layers that are off or frozen cannot be part of the selection set for the section. To enhance performance, turn off the layers of the objects that you do not need to include in the section.
WARNING If you want to insert a 2D section in a Plan view, make sure that the display set used for the Plan view does not section object by display range. In that case, the section result would not be displayed in the Plan view. To make sure that this is not the case, click Display Manager on the Format menu. Select the Plan display set for the currently used display configuration. On the Display Options tab, verify that Section AEC Objects by Display Range defined in Display Configuration is cleared.
1 Draw a section line in the drawing. For more information, see "Drawing a Section Line and Marks" on page 1666.
2 Select the section line, right-click, and click Generate Section. 3 Select the type of section object you want to create:
If you want to create...
Then...
a 2D section
select 2D Section/Elevation Object with Hidden Line Removal.
a 3D section
select 3D Section/Elevation Object.
4 For Style to Generate, select a style for a 2D section. If you want to use a particular style, select it from Style to Generate. Otherwise, use the Standard style. For more information, see "2D Section Styles" on page 1689.
3D sections do not use styles.
5 Under Selection Set, click (Select Objects), and select the objects that you want to include in the section. Press ENTER when you finish selecting objects.
NOTE If you select an object that you do not want to include in the section, hold down SHIFT and select the object again to remove it from the selection set.
6 Under Display Set, select a display set for the section object. The display set controls the representation of the section.
7 Under Placement, select New Object, and specify where to place the section:
If you want to...
Then...
specify a location graphically
click (Pick Point), and specify the location for the new section object in the drawing.
Creating a 2D or 3D Section | 1673
If you want to...
Then...
specify the coordinates of the insertion point for the section enter X, Y, and Z coordinates for the location of the new section object.
8 Click OK.
A 2D or 3D section is created from the section line properties and the selected objects in the building model. The section is linked to the building model. If you make changes to the building model after you create the section, you can update the section to reflect the changes. For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
You can edit certain characteristics of the section to control its placement and appearance. For more information, see "Editing a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1678.
You can also use a 2D section style to control the display of selected objects in a 2D section, and you can control the display of individual lines in a 2D section. For more information, see "2D Section Styles" on page 1689 and "Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Section" on page 1684.
Creating a Horizontal 2D Section
Use this procedure to create a horizontal section or elevation of a plan view.
The Hidden Line control available in Autodesk Architectural Desktop makes it possible to create horizontal sections and elevations of Plan views. With a horizontal section or elevation, you can look "down" on the model. Previously, users could achieve that effect only by manually changing the UCS. Now, a tool enables you to create a horizontal section or elevation. This feature could be useful for creating a detailed display of sill components in tapered walls.
The illustration below displays a horizontal section line for an irregularly shaped building.
Horizontal section line
The illustration below displays the section results. Note the sill displays of the tapered walls and the correct representation of the sloped curtain walls.
1674 | Chapter 36 Sections
1 On the default tool palette set, click the Design tab, and then click the Horizontal Section tool. If necessary, scroll the palette to display the tool that you need.
2 Specify the first point of the section plane. 3 Specify the second corner of the section plane. 4 Specify the elevation of the section plane, and press ENTER. 5 Specify the depth of the section, and press ENTER. 6 Proceed with creating the section, as described in "Creating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1673.
Creating and Editing a Live Section View
A live section view is a special view of a 3D model section. A live section view is always applied to all objects in the drawing. Unlike a 2D or 3D section, you do not choose a selection set of objects to be contained in the section. All objects are contained in the live section view. Their display properties are determined by whether or not they are situated within the bounding box of the section line. The objects contained in the live section view are not converted into a section object, but are retained as objects in the drawing. They keep all of their properties and display components, and can be edited. The area of objects that lie outside of the section line, or objects that lie completely outside of the section line, can be displayed or hidden. The appearance of these objects, and of parts of objects outside of the section line, is controlled by the Sectioned Body component. When you render a live section, you can show the outside part as a half-transparent addition, for example. The live section view can be turned on and off in a drawing.
Creating and Editing a Live Section View | 1675
Rendered live section view with transparent outside material
NOTE When a live section view contained in a project view drawing is dragged onto a project sheet, and the live section view should be displayed in the sheet view, the external reference of the view needs to be selected in the sheet, and have a display configuration override applied to it, as described in "Using the External Display Configuration" on page 290.
Creating a Live Section View
Use this procedure to create a live section view of your building model. 1 Draw a section line through the building model.
NOTE You do not need to select objects for the live section view. The live section view is created from the whole drawing.
2 Switch to a 3D view, such as SW Isometric. 3 Select the section line, right-click, and click Enable Live Section.
Updating a Live Section View
When you create a live section view, the sectioned objects are not converted into a section object. Instead, the objects remain in the drawing. The objects and object areas which are inside the section line retain their previous display properties. A brick wall inside a section line retains its brick pattern and its dark red linework. The objects and object areas outside of the section line change their display properties, since they are now placed on the Sectioned Body display component and use its display properties. The live section updates interactively when you change the objects associated with it. If you drag a wall outside of the section line, the wall uses the display properties of the Sectioned Body component. If you drag a wall inside of the section line, the wall uses its own display properties. When you change the material assignment of an object in a live section view, the new material is automatically used in the live section.
NOTE If you change from a material in which the Sectioned Boundary and Sectioned Body components are turned on, to a material in which these components are turned off, it might look as if objects outside of the section line disappear. You can edit the current material definition to display objects outside of the section line, as described in "Displaying the Sectioned Body in a Live Section View" on page 1676.
Displaying the Sectioned Body in a Live Section View
Use this procedure to display the parts of the drawing in a live section view that are outside the section. Whether objects and areas of objects outside the section line are displayed in the live section view depends on the material settings for each object and object style. The sectioned objects inside the section are displayed with their regular display components and material assignments. For example, a brick wall inside a section displays its regular brick surface hatch.
1676 | Chapter 36 Sections
Objects or object parts that are outside of the section are displayed differently. You can either hide them completely, or display them on the Sectioned Body display component. The Sectioned Body display component is specified in the material assigned to the object.
The sectioned body is often displayed in a lighter, half-transparent color, or as dotted linework.
Live section view with sectioned body displayed as light blue linework
In a material definition, the Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary display components influence the display of the live section view. The Sectioned Body includes the objects or object parts outside of the section line. The Sectioned Boundary is the cut line created by the section line.
1 Select the object for which you want to display the sectioned body, right-click and click Edit Object Display.
2 Click the Materials tab.
3 Select the material definition you want to change, and click .
4 Select the display representation of the material, and click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Change the display of the sectioned body and sectioned boundary:
If you want to... hide the sectioned body
Then...
set Visible off for the Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary components.
display the sectioned body
set Visible on for the Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary components, and assign them display properties as needed.
7 Click OK three times.
NOTE When the Sectioned Body component is set to visible and the material display component is on, you can turn the display of the sectioned body on and off by right-clicking the section line and clicking Toggle Sectioned Body Display.
Removing a Live Section View
Use this procedure to turn off a live section view. You can also remove the live section view by deleting the section line that was used to create it.
1 Select the section line that was used to create the live section view. 2 Right-click, and click Disable Live Section.
After turning off the live section view, you see the regular 3D building model again. You can turn live section view on and off as long as the section line remains in the drawing.
Removing a Live Section View | 1677
Editing a 2D or 3D Section
After you create a 2D or 3D section, you can edit the section line and the section object to refine the appearance of the section in any of the following ways:
Add, remove, or modify graphic subdivisions. Reverse the section to display a different area of the building. Relocate the section. Add notes or reference files. Select a different style. A section style determines how the linework in a 2D section is displayed. Change the display properties of selected linework. Add linework and details that are not part of the building model. In addition, you can continue to modify the building model and then update the section to incorporate the changes. You can also create and edit material boundaries for 2D sections. For more information, see "Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Section" on page 1681. For information about switching from a view other than a section to a temporary section view to edit objects, see "Isolating Objects to Edit in a Section View" on page 71.
Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Section
Use this procedure to edit linework in a 2D section. You can assign selected linework to fixed display components that determine the display of every section that you generate, or you can assign linework to display components that you have defined. For information about adding custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style" on page 1691. After you assign linework to display components, you can change the display properties (visibility, color, layer, lineweight, linetype, and linetype scale) to change the display of lines.
1 Select the section to be changed. 2 Select the Edit Linework grip.
The In-Place Edit toolbar opens.
3 Click to zoom to the section. 4 Select the linework to edit, right-click, and click Modify Component.
1678 | Chapter 36 Sections
5 Select the component you want to put the lines on. For example, if you want to make the lines invisible, select Erased Vectors for Linework Component.
You can also click (Match existing linework), and select linework in the elevation whose display component you want to match.
6 Click OK.
7 To finish the linework editing process, click the linework and exit in-place edit mode.
to save all changes, or click
to discard all changes to
Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 2D Section
Use this procedure to change the display of subdivisions in a 2D section by changing its display properties.
You create subdivisions by adding them to the section line. You can then change their length using grips or by editing the values in the section line properties. For more information, see "Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Sections" on page 1670.
Each subdivision in a 2D section is assigned to a numbered subdivision display component in the display properties of the section or the 2D section style. You can control the visibility, layer, color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale of each subdivision by changing the display properties of each component. You can apply these changes to the selected section, to the current 2D section/elevation style, or to all 2D sections and elevations in the drawing that do not have a style override.
1 Select the 2D section in the drawing, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select the property source to edit:
If you want to edit graphic subdivisions for...
Then...
all 2D sections and elevations in the current drawing (except select Drawing Default. those that have a 2D -Section/Elevation Style override),
all 2D sections and elevations that use the current style,
select 2D Section/Elevation Style, and click Object Override.
the selected 2D section
Select 2D Section/Elevation, and click Object Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab to list all the components that contribute to the display of the object.
Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 2D Section | 1679
The defining line represents the cutting plane of the section line. The numbered subdivision components correspond to subdivisions added to the section line. For example, the display component Subdivision 1 corresponds to the subdivision closest to, but not on, the cutting plane of the section line.
6 Turn the visibility on or off, and change the layer, color, linetype, lineweight, or linetype scale as needed for each subdivision component.
7 Click the Hatching tab to change the shrinkwrap hatch pattern of the s
8 Click the Other tab to add a custom display component to the display of the 2D section. For more information about adding custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style" on page 1691.
9 Click OK twice.
Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 3D Section
Use this procedure to change the display of subdivisions in a 3D section by changing its display properties.
You create the subdivisions by adding them to the section line. You can then change their length using grips or by editing the values in the section line properties. For more information, see "Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Sections" on page 1670.
Each subdivision in a 3D section is assigned to a numbered subdivision display component in the display properties of the 3D section. You can control the visibility, layer, color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale of each subdivision by changing the display properties of each component. You can apply these changes to the selected 3D section or to all 3D sections in the drawing.
1 Select the 3D section in the drawing, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select the Sub-divisions display representation.
4 Select the property source to edit:
If you want to edit graphic subdivisions for...
Then...
all 3D sections in the current drawing
select Drawing Default.
the selected 3D section
select Bldg Section, and click object Override.
5 If necessary, click . 6 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab to list all the components that contribute to the display of the object.
The defining line represents the cutting plane of the section line. The numbered subdivision components correspond to subdivisions added to the section line. For example, the display component Subdivision 1 corresponds to the subdivision closest to, but not on, the cutting plane of the section line.
7 Turn the visibility on or off, and change the layer, color, linetype, lineweight, or lineweight scale as needed for each subdivision component.
8 Click OK twice.
Reversing a 2D or 3D Section
Use this procedure to reverse the direction of a section by reversing the section line and refreshing the section. The direction of the section is determined by the direction in which you drew the section line. You can select the section line in plan view to see the bounding box that defines the area of the model included in the section. If the box does not include the area of the model that you intended, you can reverse the section line. If you have already created a section from the section line, update the section after reversing the section line.
1 Select the section line that you used to create the section, right-click, and click Reverse. The section line is mirrored about its own axis, as is the bounding box with its original parameters.
2 Select the existing section, right-click, and click Regenerate.
1680 | Chapter 36 Sections
NOTE If you do not need to respecify the objects to include in the section, you can click Refresh instead of Regenerate. This immediately updates the section.
3 If you want to include different objects in the updated section, click objects. Press ENTER when you finish selecting objects.
4 Click OK.
(Reselect Objects), and select the
Changing the Style of a 2D Section
Use this procedure to select a different style for a 2D section. A 2D section/elevation style controls the appearance of any 2D section object to which the style is applied.
1 Double-click the section you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a new style for the section.
Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Section
Use this procedure to create a material boundary in a 2D section. For more information, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
1 Draw a polyline around the area in the section that you want to mask or to highlight. 2 Select the section, right-click, and click Material Boundary Add. 3 Select the polyline. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 5 Specify the settings of the material boundary:
If you want to... highlight the area inside the polyline
Then... select Limit for Purpose.
mask (erase) the area inside the polyline
select Erase for Purpose.
apply the highlight or mask only to specific parts of the section
select the appropriate parts for Apply to. You can choose Surface and Section Hatching, Section Hatching Only, Surface Hatching Only, Edge Linework Only, and All Linework.
apply the material boundary to all materials used in the section
select All Materials for Material Selection.
apply the material boundary only to selected materials
select Specific Materials for Material Selection and then select the desired materials in the list below.
apply the highlighting or masking within the polyline to the select Apply to Section Shrinkwrap Linework. For information
shrinkwrap linework
on section shrinkwrap, see "Shrinkwrap" on page 1693 and
"Shrinkwrap Hatch" on page 1693.
apply the highlighting or masking within the polyline to the select Apply to Section Shrinkwrap Hatching. For information
shrinkwrap hatching
on section shrinkwrap, see "Shrinkwrap" on page 1693 and
"Shrinkwrap Hatch" on page 1693.
6 Click OK.
Editing a Material Boundary
You can edit existing material boundaries in a number of different ways:
Change the content within the material boundary. For example, you can determine if you want to see only surface hatching, or both surface and section hatching.
Changing the Style of a 2D Section | 1681
Change the shape of the material boundary. For example, you can make the boundary bigger or smaller, or add additional rings and vertex points to it.
For more information, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
Editing the Content of a Material Boundary Use this procedure to change the content of a material boundary. The content includes such settings as materials displayed, hatch types, and boundary type.
1 Select the 2D section with the material boundary, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in in-place edit mode. The material boundary is highlighted, and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Edit Material Boundary. 3 Specify the content of the material boundary:
If you want to...
Then...
highlight the area inside the boundary
select Limit for Purpose.
mask (erase) the area inside the boundary
select Erase for Purpose.
apply the highlight or mask only to specific parts of the section
select the appropriate parts for Apply to. You can choose Surface and Section Hatching, Section Hatching Only, Surface Hatching Only, Edge Linework Only, and All Linework.
apply the material boundary to all materials used in the section
select All Materials for Material Selection.
apply the material boundary only to selected materials
select Specific Materials for Material Selection, and then select the desired materials from the list below.
4 Click OK. 5 Select the material boundary, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or click
Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Adding a Vertex to a Material Boundary Use this procedure to add a vertex to a material boundary.
1 Select the 2D section with the material boundary to change, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in in-place edit mode. The material boundary is highlighted, and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Add Vertex. 3 Specify the point at which to add a vertex. 4 Specify additional vertex points as needed. 5 Press ENTER. 6 Select the material boundary again, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or
click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Removing a Vertex from a Material Boundary Use this procedure to remove a vertex from a material boundary.
1 Select the 2D section with the material boundary to change, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in in-place edit mode. The material boundary is highlighted, and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Remove Vertex. 3 Specify the vertex points to remove.
1682 | Chapter 36 Sections
4 Press ENTER. 5 Select the material boundary, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or click
Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Adding a Ring to a Material Boundary Use this procedure to add a ring to a material boundary. A material boundary can consist of more than one closed polyline. For example, you could use one polyline to highlight a wall detail and another polyline to highlight a window detail in another location.
1 Draw a polyline for the new material boundary ring. 2 Select the material boundary to add a new ring to, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place.
You are now in in-place edit mode. The material boundary is highlighted, and the grips are displayed. 3 Right-click, and click Add Ring. 4 Select the polyline you drew in Step 1. 5 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 6 Select the material boundary, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or click
Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Removing a Ring from a Material Boundary Use this procedure to remove a ring from a material boundary. A material boundary can consist of more than one closed ring. You can remove each ring individually.
NOTE You cannot remove the last ring from a material boundary.
1 Select the 2D section with the material boundary to change, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in in-place edit mode. The material boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Remove Ring. 3 Select the ring you want to remove. 4 Select the material boundary, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or click
Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Replacing a Ring from a Material Boundary with Another Use this procedure to replace a ring from a material boundary with a different ring.
1 Draw the polyline to replace one of the existing material boundary rings. 2 Select the 2D section with the material boundary to change, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit
In Place. You are now in in-place edit mode. The material boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed. 3 Right-click, and click Replace Ring. 4 Select the ring to be replaced. 5 Select the closed polyline you drew in Step 1. 6 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 7 Select the material boundary, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Editing a Material Boundary | 1683
Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Section
After you create a 2D section, you can edit the display of individual lines that make up the section. For example, you may want to assign linework for small details to a display component with a lighter lineweight, so that the details are not obscured when plotted. You can also merge existing geometry into the section.
Editing Linework in a 2D Section Use this procedure to edit individual lines in a 2D section by assigning them to display components in the section. For information about the Edit Linework grip, see Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Elevation . You can assign selected linework to fixed display components that determine the display of every section that you generate, or you can assign linework to display components that you have defined. For information about adding custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style" on page 1691. After you assign linework to display components, you can change the display properties (visibility, color, layer, lineweight, linetype, and linetype scale) to change the display of lines.
1 Select the section to be changed, right-click, and click Linework Edit. The In-Place Edit toolbar is displayed.
2 Select the lines that you want to assign to a display component, right-click, and click Modify Component. A list of available display components is displayed.
3 Select the component on which to put the lines. For example, to make the lines invisible, select Erased Vectors for Linework Component.
You can also click (Match existing linework) and select linework in the section whose display component you want to match.
4 Click OK.
5 To finish the linework editing process, click the linework and exit in-place edit mode.
to save all changes, or click
to discard all changes to
Merging Linework into a 2D Section Use this procedure to merge geometry into a 2D section. When you merge linework into a section, you assign additional linework to a display component of a section. Use this feature to add detail, or to add linework that you did not model.
1 Draw the geometry that you want to merge into a 2D section. 2 Select the 2D section to be changed, right-click, and click Linework Merge. 3 Select the geometry to merge into the section, and press ENTER. 4 Select the display component to assign the linework to.
You can also click (Match existing linework) and select linework in the section whose display component you want to match.
5 Click OK. The linework is merged into the 2D section. When you select the section, the linework is selected with it.
Changing the Location of a 2D or 3D Section
You can relocate a section by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The section also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the section are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the section by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the section on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
1684 | Chapter 36 Sections
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the section you want to move. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional information. 4 Specify a new location or rotation:
If you want to... relocate the section
Then... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the section on the XY plane
make the normal of the section parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the section on the YZ plane
make the normal of the section parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the section on the XZ plane
make the normal of the section parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the section
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a 2D or 3D Section
Use this procedure to add hyperlinks, enter notes, and attach reference files to a 2D or 3D section. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a 2D or 3D section.
1 Double-click the 2D or 3D section you want to attach notes or files to. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 To add a hyperlink, click next to Hyperlink, and specify the link.
4 To add a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 To attach, detach, or edit a reference file, click following: If you want to... attach a reference file
edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
next to Reference documents, and then do any of the
Then... click , select a file, and click Open. enter text under Description. double-click the reference file name to start its application. select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK.
Updating a 2D or 3D Section
Use this procedure to update a 2D or 3D section to reflect changes you have made to the building model or to section line properties. For 2D sections, you also update the section to show changes made to the 2D section style. You can update a 2D or 3D section if you have not exploded the section, which destroys the link between the section and the building model.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a 2D or 3D Section | 1685
When you update a section, you can add or remove objects from the section, change the location of the section in the drawing, and change the display set of the section.
If you do not need to change the section definition in any way, you can skip the following procedure. Instead, right-click the section you want to update, and click Refresh.
1 Select the section you want to update, right-click, and click Regenerate.
2 Select a result type:
If the section is...
Then...
a 2D section object
select 2D Section/Elevation Object with Hidden Line Removal.
a 3D section object
select 3D Section/Elevation Object.
3 To change the style of a 2D section, select a new style for Style to Generate.
4 If you edited linework in the 2D section, select a style in which to save the changes you made that cannot be reapplied. Choose a style that will distinguish the unapplied changes in the section.
5 Under Selection Set, specify the objects that you want to include in the section:
If you want to...
Then...
use the objects in the selection set you specified when you proceed to the next step. created the section or when you previously updated it
add new objects to the selection set that you specified when click Select Additional Objects, select the new objects in the
you created the original section
drawing, and press ENTER.
select a new selection set of objects for the section
click Reselect Objects, select a new selection set of objects for the section, and press ENTER.
NOTE If you select an object that you do not want to include in the section, hold down SHIFT, and select the object again to remove it from the selection set.
6 Under Display Set, select a display set for the section. 7 Under Placement, locate the section in the drawing:
If you want to...
Then...
create a new section object without overwriting the original object
select New Object, and either click to specify an insertion point in the drawing area, or enter X, Y, and Z coordinates for the new section.
replace the original section with the updated section
select Replace Existing.
8 Click OK.
Globally Updating 2D Sections
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop makes it possible for you to globally update all sections and elevations within a project or a specified folder.
Updating Sections and Elevations in a Project
Autodesk Architectural Desktop includes the Drawing Management feature that allows users to combine their floor plans, section and elevation views, construction sheets, and reusable components in one building project. A project consists of a number of drawings linked together with a powerful external referencing mechanism. Autodesk Architectural Desktop makes working with projects even easier by enabling the user to open a project and update all 2D sections and elevations included in that project in one comfortable workflow. For information on which project file types can be updated, see "Supported Project Drawing Types" on page 1687.
1686 | Chapter 36 Sections
Updating Sections and Elevations in a Specific Folder When you are working without a project, you can also globally update sections and elevations by specifying a folder and updating all sections and elevations in that folder. When you select a specific folder for updating, you can also include its subfolders in the update.
Section of a building project
For more information about building projects, see "Drawing Management" on page 145.
Supported Project Drawing Types
When you are updating a project, you can globally update all 2D sections and elevations within the views and sheets of the project. You cannot globally update elements and constructs, because these project drawings usually contain reusable elements and individual parts of the building project. They normally do not contain sections or elevations. For more information about project drawing types, see "Views" on page 240 and "Plotting Sheets" on page 258. NOTE When you globally update the sections and elevations in a project drawing, all model and paperspace layouts are updated. When you are updating a specified folder within a project, or a folder outside of a project, all sections and elevations in that folder are updated regardless of their type. For example, if you choose to update a specific folder within the Constructs category of a project, the sections and elevations in that folder will be updated, even though they are Construct drawings. If you do not specify a folder, but choose to update the whole project, these construct drawings are not updated.
Globally Updating 2D Sections and Elevations in a Project or a Folder
Use this procedure to globally update all 2D sections and elevations in a project or a specified folder. NOTE To update all 2D sections and elevations in a project, the project must be defined as current. If no project is current, you receive an error message if you try to globally update 2D sections and elevations. For information on setting a project current, see "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
1 On the View menu, click Refresh Sections/Elevations.
Supported Project Drawing Types | 1687
2 Select if you want to update the 2D sections and elevations in the current project, or only the 2D sections and elevations in a specific folder.
If you want to...
Then...
update the 2D sections and elevations in the current select Current Project. project
update the 2D sections and elevations in a specific folder
select Folder. Then click the Browse button , select the folder containing the files you want to update, and click OK.
3 If you have specified a folder, you can specify whether the subfolders of that folder should be updated as well. To update the subfolders, select Process subfolders.
NOTE When you are working with a large building project, updating all sections and elevations can be a time-consuming process. In this case, you might consider updating only a selected subfolder of your project and thereby improve system performance.
4 Click Start. Globally updating all sections and elevations may take a while. A status window lets you know which drawing is currently being updated. When you start the global update, the Stop button is available. If you want to interrupt the global update, click Stop. When the global update is finished, the Start button is available.
Updating Drawings from an Earlier Version of Autodesk Architectural Desktop
During the global update of 2D sections and elevations, each drawing in the project or specified folder is opened, updated, and saved again. If you are updating drawings from an earlier version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, the drawings are converted to the current version of the software. Before you convert the drawings, a warning message notifies you of the conversion. To update the drawings to the new version, click OK. To cancel the update of all sections and elevations, press CTRL+BREAK.
Update Exceptions
There are a number of cases in which a 2D section or elevation cannot be updated with the global update.
The drawing containing the 2D section or elevation is read-only.
1688 | Chapter 36 Sections
The 2D section or elevation is placed on a locked layer. There have been user edits to a 2D section or elevation that could not be reapplied to the 2D section or elevation.
When a 2D section or elevation cannot be updated, an error message is displayed in the status window. To fix the problem, you can set the drawing to read/write instead of read-only, you can unlock the section layer, or you can undo a specific user edit to a 2D section or elevation.
2D Section Styles
A 2D section/elevation style is a group of properties assigned to a 2D section or to an elevation that determines the appearance and other characteristics of that object. Using 2D Section Styles A 2D section/elevation style controls the linework in a section, using design rules that determine how different parts of the section are displayed. You can apply the style to one or more sections to control their appearance. You can also change the display of individual lines in the section, and save the changes in a 2D section/elevation style. Display Components and Design Rules Display components determine the graphical characteristics, such as color and linetype, of linework assigned to each display component. Design rules determine how the linework in a section is assigned to display components. When you create a design rule, you specify the part of the 2D section to control based on the color of those objects in the building model and their context in the section. You then select the display component to use for linework that meets the criteria you specified. You can assign the linework to a default display component or to a custom display component that you have added to the style. For example, you might define a rule that assigns all objects that are color 150 in the model and that are located along the section line (the defining line) to a custom display component named Darker that you created in the style. Or you might hide a staircase behind a wall using a rule that assigns all blue linework to the Hidden display component. Managing 2D Section Styles To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452. Materials and 2D Section Styles You can use 2D section styles to specify which section components will have their display controlled by materials and which will not. Custom components cannot use materials. Subdivisions in 2D Section Styles and Materials When you are creating subdivisions in your style, you usually want the objects in them to be visually distinct from other subdivisions. When you assign materials to the objects, you can set the 2D section style so that it uses the hatch pattern from the material, but the color and linetype from the subdivision display properties.
2D Section Styles | 1689
Section subdivision surface hatching with color assignments
Creating a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to create a 2D section style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand 2D Section/Elevation Styles. 3 Create a 2D section style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a style using default properties
right-click 2D Section/Elevation Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the 2D section style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new 2D section style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the 2D section style:
If you want to...
Then...
add display components to the style
see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style" on page 1691.
remove display components from the style,
see "Removing a Display Component from a 2D Section Style" on page 1691.
use the subdivision properties of the section for the display, see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles" on page 1695.
use the 3D Body component of the material for the section see "Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the
linework,
2D Section Linework" on page 1695.
add design rules to the style
see "Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Section Style" on page 1696.
change design rules in the style
see "Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Section Style" on page 1697.
add classifications to a style
see "Adding Classifications to a 2D Section Style" on page 1697.
change the display properties of the display components in see "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D
the style
Section Style" on page 1698.
1690 | Chapter 36 Sections
If you want to... add notes, files, or documents to the style
Then...
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Section Style" on page 1698.
6 Click OK.
Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to add a custom display component to a 2D section style. After you add a component, you assign linework in the section to the new component. To apply these style changes to existing 2D sections, you must update the section. 2D sections include the following default display components: Defining Line, Hidden, Erased, Unknown, and Subdivision.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Components tab. 3 Click Add. 4 Enter a name and a description for the new component.
To enter a name, click Unnamed and enter a new name. To enter a description, click in the Description column next to the name, and enter a description.
5 Click the Display Properties tab. 6 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
7 If necessary, click . 8 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 9 Specify the display properties of the new component. 10 Click OK twice.
To create a design rule that uses the new display component, see "Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Section Style" on page 1696. To manually assign linework to the display component, see "Editing Linework in a 2D Section" on page 1684.
Removing a Display Component from a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to remove a custom display component from a 2D section style. Removing a display component also removes any design rules that use the component. You cannot remove the default display components.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Components tab. 3 Select the component that you want to remove, and click Remove.
If the component is used in a design rule, a dialog box is displayed, warning you that the associated design rule is removed as well.
4 Click OK. 5 Update the section to apply the style changes to the section.
For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
About 2D and 3D Section Display Components and Materials
2D and 3D section object consist of a number of display components which can be determined by materials.
When you assign materials to an object, you assign one material to each display component of a object. For example, you assign a wood material to the frame of window and a glass component to the glass of a window.
When you create a 2D or 3D section object from building objects, the material assignments of the source objects are applied to the section. You do not assign a material directly to a 2D/3D section. The section takes its material assignments
Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style | 1691
from the objects sectioned. For example if you create a section through a wall with a window, the section hatch you have defined in the glass, wood, and brick materials of the wall and the window are displayed in the section.
If you do not want to use the material display properties, but instead use those of the 2D or 3D section object, or the 2D section style, you can deactivate the material assignments in the display properties of the section or the section style.
Material Component Assignments
Material definitions consist of display components which correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework of objects in Plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in 3D model views and elevations.
For a complete list of material components and their description, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
The following table lists all section components plus information about the material components that determine them.
NOTE Keep in mind that materials are not assigned directly to 2D section objects, but that the assignment of materials happens indirectly via the sectioned objects. For example, if a brick material has a surface hatch component with a red brick pattern, this surface hatch determines the display of the surface hatch in a brick wall. When you create a 2D section from that wall, the resulting section object will inherit the red brick pattern from the wall. When you change the material of the wall from brick to concrete, and then update the 2D section, it will now display with a grey concrete pattern.
2D Section Component Defining Line
Outer Shrinkwrap Inner Shrinkwrap Shrinkwrap Hatch Surface Hatch Linework Section Hatch Linework Hidden Erased
1692 | Chapter 36 Sections
Material Component
2D Section/Elevation Linework or 3D Body. For information on switching between these material components, see "Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Section Linework" on page 1695.
No Material
No Material
No Material
Surface Hatch
Section Hatch
No Material
No Material
2D Section Component Subdivision 1-10
Material Component
2D Section/Elevation Linework or 3D Body. For information on switching between these material components, see "Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Section Linework" on page 1695.
Defining Line
The defining line determines where the section cuts the objects it contains. The material component which controls the display of the Defining Line is the Linework component. The defining line is a display component of both 2D and 3D section objects.
For example, if you cut a brick wall that contains a window, you can specify one uniform color for the defining line, or use different colors where the section line cuts the wall and where it cuts the window. If you want to use a uniform color for the Defining Line component, assign a color to it and do not use the properties of the material. If you want the color of the defining line to be influenced by the objects in the section, use the material properties. In the case of a section through a brick wall with a window, you might use a red defining line where the wall is cut and a blue defining line where the window is cut.
Specifying cut line colors for different materials
Shrinkwrap The shrinkwrap displays the union of all object faces cut by the section line. The Outer Shrinkwrap component represents the outline of solid, filled components, such as a wall shrinkwrap. The Inner Shrinkwrap component represents the outline of holes which have been cut, such as a space. These components are specific to 2D sections. You can exclude individual objects from contributing to the shrinkwrap. For example, you might do this for glass components in windows. For information on excluding objects from the 2D shrinkwrap, see "Excluding a Material Definition from 2D Section Shrinkwrap" on page 492. 2D section with red outer shrinkwrap
Window glass excluded from shrinkwrap
The Outer and Inner Shrinkwrap components cannot be defined by a material component. Shrinkwrap Hatch The Shrinkwrap Hatch component hatches the union of all object faces cut by a section line. The Shrinkwrap Hatch is defined by either an outer or an inner shrinkwrap line component. This component is specific to 2D sections.
About 2D and 3D Section Display Components and Materials | 1693
Shrinkwrap Hatch with glass excluded from shrinkwrap detail
The Shrinkwrap Hatch component cannot be defined by a material component. NOTE The Shrinkwrap Hatch and Section Hatch components overlap each other. This could result in two different hatches in the same location. To avoid a conflict, either assign a solid hatch for Shrinkwrap Hatch, or do not use the Shrinkwrap and Section Hatch components simultaneously. Surface Hatch Linework The Surface Hatch Linework component draws all linework coming from surface hatches of the objects cut. Surface hatches appear in faces of the section object that are not cut by the section line. This component is specific to 2D sections. NOTE Surface hatches that you have assigned to objects will display in a 3D section object. However, you cannot set them separately in a 3D section; you can do that only in a 2D section object. The surface hatch linework component is controlled by the surface hatch component of the material. For information about the surface hatch component of the material, see "Surface Hatch Material Component" on page 475. 2D section with roof surface hatch
Section Hatch Linework The Section Hatch Linework component draws all linework coming from section hatches. Section hatches appear on all faces that are cut by the section line. A section hatch is similar to a shrinkwrap hatch. The difference is that in a section hatch the sectioned faces are not merged into one shrinkwrap component. Use either a section hatch or a shrinkwrap hatch on a 2D section. For information on shrinkwrap hatches see "Shrinkwrap Hatch" on page 1693. The Section Hatch Linework display component is specific to 2D section. Section hatches on walls, roof and door
The Section Hatch Linework component is controlled by the Section Hatch component of the material. For information about the Section Hatch component of the material, see "Creating a Hidden Line Projection" on page 1738.
1694 | Chapter 36 Sections
Hidden Component The Hidden component contains all linework that is hidden in the 2D projection because other components are in front of it. By default, this component is turned off. You can use design rules to achieve special effects, such as a see-through effect, using the Hidden component. The Hidden component is specific to 2D sections. The Hidden component cannot be defined by a material component. You can only set it in the display properties of the 2D section. For information on setting the display properties of a 2D section, see "Creating a Hidden Line Projection" on page 1738.
Erased Component The Erased component contains linework in the section object that you do not want to see. For example, if you have a section of a multi-story building in which you want to hide the lines between each floor, you can edit the linework of the section and assign the floor lines to the Erased component. Since the Erased component is turned off by default, the floor lines do not display. For information on linework editing of a section, see "Editing Linework in a 2D Section" on page 1684. The Erased component is specific to 2D sections. The Erased component cannot be defined by a material component.
Subdivision Components The subdivision components partition a section object. They are useful to create perspective effects, where parts closer to the viewer are drawn with darker, stronger lines and parts which are farther from the user are drawn with lighter, thinner lines. Subdivisions can have no individual material assignments. However the display properties of the subdivisions can be used for the surface hatching of the subdivisions by selecting "Use Subdivision Properties for Surface Hatching" in the Other tab of the 2D section display properties. For information on using the subdivision display properties to display the section divisions, see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles" on page 1695. Subdivisions are a display component of both 2D and 3D section objects. The subdivision components are either controlled by the 2D Section/Elevation Linework component of the material or by the 3D Body component of a material. For information how to switch between these component assignments, see "Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Section Linework" on page 1695.
Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles
Use this procedure to use the display properties of materials together with the display properties of section subdivisions.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
4 If necessary, click .
5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
6 To set a subdivision to use the surface hatch of the material, while using the layer, color, and linetype display properties of the subdivision, perform the following steps:
Clear By Material.
Specify the layer, color and linetype settings of the subdivision as desired. For example, the first subdivision could have a darker color and stronger linetype the second subdivision.
7 Click the Other tab.
8 Select Use Subdivision properties for surface hatching.
9 Click OK twice. For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Section Linework
Use this procedure to use the 3D Body component of a material for the linework in a 2D section.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles | 1695
2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
4 If necessary, click .
5 Click the Other tab.
6 Determine if the 3D body component of the selected material should control the display of the linework in the 2D section:
If you want to...
Then...
control the display of the 2D section linework by the 3D Body select Use 3D Body display component for By Material
component of the material,
linework.
control the display of the 2D section linework by the 2D Section/Elevation Linework component of the material,
clear Use 3D Body display component for By Material linework. This is the default behavior.
7 Click OK twice. For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to add a design rule to a 2D section style. A design rule has four fields of information that identify lines in the section and determine how to display them:
Field Color
Context
Component Description
Description
Identifies the color of the objects in the building model represented by lines in the section.
Identifies the context of the lines in the 2D section, such as on the defining line (the cutting plane) or in a graphic subdivision.
Identifies the display component to which the lines are assigned.
Contains a description of the design rule.
For example, a design rule has the color 50, a context of Within Subdivision 2, and a component of New. This rule assigns any lines in the section representing objects that have the color 50 in the building model and that are within subdivision 2 in the section to the user-defined display component, New.
On the Design Rules tab, you can also specify that all hidden linework that is not handled by a specific design rule will be assigned to the Hidden display component. You could use this option if you want to generate a section of an object or a set of objects and see all edges, for example, if you are creating foundations and formwork.
NOTE Alternatively, you can define which hidden linework should be displayed by object material. For more information, see "Controlling the Display of Hidden Lines by Material" on page 493.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Design Rules tab, and click Add.
A new design rule is created with default color, context, and component values.
3 Specify settings for the new design rule:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the color of objects in the building model that are affected by this rule
click the default color, select a new color, and click OK.
specify the context in which the linework for the objects appears in the section
click the default context, and select a new context.
select the display component for the linework
click the default component, and select a new component.
1696 | Chapter 36 Sections
If you want to... enter a description of the rule
Then...
click the Description field, enter a description, and press ENTER.
4 To place all hidden linework on the Hidden display component, select Keep all hidden linework. 5 Click OK. 6 Update the section to apply the style changes to the section.
For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to change the settings in the fields that define a design rule. 1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Design Rules tab. 3 Specify settings for the design rule you want to change:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the color of objects in the building model that are affected by this rule
click the current color, select a new color, and click OK.
specify the context in which the linework for the objects appears in the section
click the current context, and select a new context.
select the display component for the linework
click the current component, and select a new component.
edit the description of the rule
click the description, edit the description, and press ENTER.
4 Click OK. 5 Update the section to apply the style changes to the section.
For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Removing a Design Rule from a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to remove a design rule from a 2D section style. 1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Design Rules tab. 3 Select the rule that you want to remove, and click Remove. 4 Click OK. 5 Update the section to apply the style changes to the section. For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Section" on page 1685.
Adding Classifications to a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a 2D section style. For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Classifications tab.
By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to 2D section styles.
3 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current 2D section style.
Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Section Style | 1697
4 Click OK twice.
Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to change the following display properties of a 2D section style:
Visibility (component is on or off) Display properties by materials Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE The custom display components in the display properties are identical to those listed on the Components tab of the 2D Section/Elevation Styles dialog box. For more information about custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style" on page 1691.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation in which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Select By Material for any component that you want to use the display properties of the materials assigned
to the sectioned objects.
NOTE Not all display components of a 2D section have an associated material definition. For example, Hidden and Erased cannot be set by material. For a list of all display components and their associated material components, see "About 2D and 3D Section Display Components and Materials" on page 1691.
8 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Section Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a 2D section style. You can also edit reference files attached to the style.
1 Select a section that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the General tab. 3 To add a description to the 2D section, enter the description under Description. 4 Click Notes. 5 To add or edit a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 6 To attach, edit, or detach a reference file, click the Reference Docs tab:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
1698 | Chapter 36 Sections
If you want to... edit a reference file
detach a reference file 7 Click OK twice.
Then...
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you are done editing.
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Section Style | 1699
1700 | Chapter 36 Sections
Elevations
37
You can create elevations of the building models in your drawings by first drawing an elevation line and mark, and then creating a 2D or 3D elevation based on that line. You can control the size and shape of any elevation that you create, and you can update an existing elevation when the objects included in the elevation are modified. 2D elevations are created with hidden and overlapping lines removed. You can control the appearance of 2D elevations by applying rules that are controlled by the style and display properties of the 2D elevation.
1701
Working With Elevations
You can create elevations of the building models in your drawings by first drawing an elevation line and mark, and then creating a 2D or 3D elevation based on that line. You can control the size and shape of any elevation that you create, and you can update an existing elevation when the objects included in the elevation are modified. 2D elevations are created with hidden and overlapping lines removed. You can control the appearance of 2D elevations by applying rules that are controlled by the style and display properties of the 2D elevation. Elevation Line and Marks The elevation line defines the extents of the elevation view of your building model. Elevation lines can be straight or jogged. You can also specify the length and the height of the area defined by the elevation line. Elevation marks, which typically contain a letter or number and indicate the direction of the elevation, appear at each end of the elevation line. After you draw the elevation line, you create an elevation object from the line. Viewing the elevation line and mark
2D Elevations 2D elevations are created by drawing an elevation line in front of a number of objects and then creating a 2D elevation object from them. The elevation object is drawn without hidden and overlapping lines. You can edit a 2D elevation by changing its object display properties or its style display properties. The 2D elevation style lets you add display components to the display representation of the elevation and create rules that assign different parts of the elevation to different display components. You can control the visibility, layer, color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale of each component. You can also assign a material, such as a brick or concrete hatch, to individual components of the object or the style. Furthermore, you can use linework editing commands to assign individual lines in a 2D elevation to different display components, and merge geometry into a 2D elevation. You can dimension 2D elevations.
2D building elevation
3D Elevations 3D elevations are created by drawing an elevation line in front of a number of objects and then creating a 3D isometric elevation object from them. 3D elevations do not use styles. However, you can control the display of subdivisions within 3D elevations. Using the Hidden Line Projection command, you can create 2D hidden line projections of any 1702 | Chapter 37 Elevations
view of the 3D elevation that you can explode and edit or hatch. For more information about using this command, see "Creating a Hidden Line Projection" on page 1738. 3D elevation in 3D view
Elevation Subdivisions A 2D or 3D elevation object can have a number of subdivisions partitioning the elevation object. This feature is useful when you want to create a perspective view of the object, in which the parts that are closer to the viewer are drawn with darker and stronger lines, and parts that are farther off are drawn lighter.
3D elevation with subdivisions in perspective view
Live Section View A live section view is a special view of a 3D section where the objects that are sectioned are not converted to a 3D section object, but remain in the drawing as objects. The parts of the objects within the bounding box of the section line keep their individual display components while the parts of the objects outside of the section line can be displayed or hidden. To control the appearance of the object parts outside of the section line, you need to assign a material to the sectioned objects. When you render a live section, you can show the outside part as a half-transparent addition, for example. You can use the live section view in an elevation in order to clip out just the region you need momentarily and to focus on that specific area. This can accelerate performance and make working with the building model easier. For information on creating live section views, see "Creating a Live Section View" on page 1676.
Rendered live section view with transparent body component
Working With Elevations | 1703
Materials in Elevations In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can assign materials to different components of an object. These materials are displayed when you create a 2D or 3D elevation object. You can specify whether to use the display properties of the materials or the display properties of the elevation object.
2D elevation with different surface hatches
Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a large number of predefined materials for all common design purposes. You can use these predefined materials or modify them to your special designs. You can also create your own materials. For more information, see "About 2D and 3D Elevation Display Components and Materials" on page 1730. Subdivisions in 2D Elevation Styles and Materials When you are creating subdivisions in your style, you usually want the objects in them to be visually distinct from other subdivisions. When you have assigned materials to the objects, you can set the 2D elevation style so that it uses the hatch pattern from the material, but uses the color and linetype from the subdivision display properties. Elevation subdivisions with assigned surface hatching
For more information see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Elevation Styles" on page 1732. Material Boundaries in 2D Elevations Material boundaries allow you to erase or limit portions of a 2D elevation:
Limit the amount of hatching to produce cleaner CDs. Highlight a region in an elevation.
1704 | Chapter 37 Elevations
Mask out a portion of an elevation so that more detail can be drawn.
Crop an irregular-shaped portion of an elevation.
For more information, see "Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Elevation" on page 1720.
Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation
Creating a 2D or 3D elevation from a building model involves the following steps: Step 1: Draw an elevation line and mark.
The elevation line defines the extents of the elevation (its width, height, and length) that you extract from the building model. The elevation line also determines other characteristics of the elevation. For example, you can define graphic subdivisions to add levels of depth to the elevation object created from the elevation line. An elevation line with graphic subdivisions
Step 2: Create a 2D or 3D elevation.
Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation | 1705
You select the elevation line, right-click, and click Generate Elevation to create a 2D or 3D elevation object. At this time, you select the objects to include in the elevation. You also select the display representation for the elevation and the insertion point of the elevation in the drawing. If you create a 2D elevation, you also select a 2D elevation style, which determines the visual characteristics of the elevation. 2D elevation created from the elevation line shown above
Step 3: Edit the elevation or the building model. You can edit the elevation line and the elevation object to refine the appearance of the elevation: Edit the elevation line to change the area defined by the elevation and to add, remove, or modify graphic subdivisions. Edit the 2D elevation style, which determines how the linework in a 2D elevation is displayed. Edit existing material assignments, like hatch patterns. Edit a 2D elevation object to change the display of selected linework or to add linework and detail that are not part of the building model. You can continue to modify the building model as needed.
Step 4: Update the elevation. You update an elevation to apply changes you made to the elevation line, the elevation object (including style changes to a 2D elevation), and the building model. When you update an elevation, you can also make any of the following changes: Select a different style for a 2D elevation. Select different objects to include and exclude from the elevation. Select a different display representation. Replace the existing elevation or add a new elevation showing the changes you made. You can also refresh one or more elevations to quickly apply changes you made to the elevation line, the elevation object, or the model. Refreshing a 2D elevation after changes to the building model
1706 | Chapter 37 Elevations
Drawing and Editing Elevation Lines
The first step in creating elevations is to draw an elevation line relative to your building model. The elevation line defines the extents of the elevation view of the building model.
NOTE You can create vertical elevations and horizontal elevations.
Creating an Elevation Object from an Elevation Line
When you generate an elevation from an elevation line, you specify the type of elevation object that is created.
When you create... a 2D elevation object a 3D elevation object
The result is... an orthographic projection from the building model. the area of the building model defined in the elevation line.
Viewing the Elevation Line In plan view, the elevation line is displayed as you would expect on a construction document.
Creating an Elevation
In an isometric view, the same elevation line is displayed with a boundary that defines the depth of elevation view.
Drawing and Editing Elevation Lines | 1707
Drawing an elevation line in 3D view
Resulting elevation line in 3D view
Changing the Elevation Line You can change the elevation line to control the elevation that you create. Using the elevation line's grips, you can change the height and shape of the elevation. You can also add a lower extension to the elevation and create elevation subdivisions. You can change elevation line properties before you create an elevation. You can also change elevation line properties and update an elevation that you have already created. For more information about updating existing elevations, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724. Using Subdivisions in Elevations You can set up graphic subdivisions in elevation line properties. These subdivisions are then added to the 2D or 3D elevation you create. Subdivisions are specified at distances from the elevation line. You can control the lineweight and other display properties of subdivisions to add levels of depth to elevations. For example, you can display one subdivision with a heavy lineweight and another subdivision with a lighter lineweight to suggest that the first subdivision is in front of the second subdivision. Drawing an Elevation Line and Mark Use this procedure to draw an elevation line with an elevation mark at each end. You draw an elevation line by specifying a start point and an endpoint for the line in relation to your building model. 1708 | Chapter 37 Elevations
NOTE If you are working with a drawing set in which several xrefs are linked to a main drawing, draw your elevation line in the main drawing.
1 On the default tool palette set, click the Design tab, and then click the Elevation Line Object tool. If necessary, scroll the palette to display the tool that you need.
2 Specify the elevation line start point. NOTE Specify the start point and endpoint for the elevation line so that it extends past the face or segment of your building model view, thus ensuring that all objects are included in the elevation view.
3 Specify the elevation line endpoint. The elevation line is displayed in your drawing with an elevation mark. The elevation line boundary is drawn using the elevation line as its left side and forming a box with the elevation line. This is the area that defines the elevation. Drawing an elevation line in 3D view
Drawing an elevation line in 3D view
Depending on the direction in which you drew the elevation line, the elevation mark points in the direction of the elevation view.
Drawing an Elevation Line and Mark | 1709
The elevation mark is a multi-view block, anchored to the elevation line. You can edit the elevation mark to change the information that is displayed in the bubble. For more information, see "Changing Elevation Mark Attributes" on page 1713. Once you have an elevation line in your drawing, you can change the properties of the line to change the elevation.
Changing the Height of an Elevation Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the height of any elevation connected to the elevation line. You can change the height of the elevation line before or after you create a connected elevation. If you change the height after creating the elevation, you need to update the elevation to show the changes. You can also change the height of an elevation using the Properties palette.
1 Click on the Views flyout on the Navigation toolbar to switch to a SW isometric view. 2 Select the elevation line you want to change. 3 Select the Model Extents grip to turn off model extents mode.
If you use model extents for height, the height of the elevation is determined by the height of the objects in the elevation and is not available to modify dynamically. 4 Select the Height grip. Viewing Elevation Grips in 3D View
5 Move the grip until the height value you want is displayed, and then click once, or enter a value. The objects are cut at this height when you create or update an elevation.
6 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. To update an elevation created from this elevation line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Changing the Lower Extension of an Elevation Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the lower extension of any elevation connected to the elevation line. You can change the lower extension of the elevation line before or after you create a connected elevation. If you change the lower extension after creating the elevation, you need to update the elevation to show the changes. You can also change the lower extension of an elevation using the Properties palette.
1 Click on the Views flyout on the Navigation toolbar to switch to a SW isometric view. 2 Select the elevation line you want to change. 3 Select the Model Extents grip to turn off model extents for height mode.
If you use model extents, the default for the lower elevation is 1 foot below the XY plane. 4 Select the Lower Extension grip.
1710 | Chapter 37 Elevations
Viewing Elevation Grips in 3D View
5 Move the grip until the lower extension value you want is displayed, and click once; or enter a value. 6 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. To update an elevation created from this elevation line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Changing the Length of an Elevation Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the length of any elevation boundary connected to the elevation line. You can change the length of the elevation as a whole, or you can change the length of the sides of the elevation boundary individually. You can change the length of the elevation boundary before or after you create a connected elevation. If you change the length after creating the elevation, you need to update the elevation to show the changes. You can also define the depth of an elevation (its length) by changing the length of the sides of an elevation boundary on the Properties palette.
1 Select the elevation line you want to change. 2 Select the Length grip.
View Elevation Grips in Plan View
3 Move the grip until the length value you want is displayed, and click once. The entire elevation boundary length is updated.
4 To change the length of side 1 of the elevation boundary, click the Side 1 Endpoint grip. Side 1 starts from the first point specified for the elevation line.
5 Move the grip to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value on the command line, and press ENTER.
Changing the Length of an Elevation Using Grips | 1711
6 To change the length of side 2 of the elevation boundary, click the Side 2 Endpoint grip. Side 2 starts from the endpoint of the elevation line.
7 Move the grip to the desired location, and click once; or enter a value on the command line, and press ENTER.
8 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
To update an elevation created from this elevation line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Changing the Angle Dimensions of an Elevation
Use this procedure to change the angle of the sides of the building elevation boundary. You can change the angle dimensions before or after you create a connected elevation. If you change the angles after creating the elevation, you need to update the elevation to show the changes.
1 Double-click the elevation line you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Component Dimensions. 3 Specify values for Angle 1 and Angle 2.
These values define the angles of the two sides from the elevation line to create the elevation box. The apex of Angle 1 is the start point of the elevation line. The apex of Angle 2 is the endpoint of the elevation line. Values for these angles must be between 0 and 90 degrees.
Specifying section angle parameters
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips. To update an elevation created from this elevation line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Elevations
Use this procedure to define subdivisions that are created within the elevation when you generate it. Each subdivision is specified as a distance from elevation line.
You can view the location of a subdivision by viewing the elevation line with its boundary in an isometric view. In this view, you can use grips to relocate a subdivision.
You can control the lineweight and other display properties of the subdivisions to add different levels of depth to elevation.
1 Double-click the elevation line you want to change.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Dimensions.
3 Click the setting for Subdivisions, and then add or modify subdivisions:
If you want to...
Then...
create a subdivision
click . To change the default distance from the elevation line, select the subdivision, click the value, and enter a new value.
change the length of a subdivision
select the subdivision, click its value, and enter a new value.
1712 | Chapter 37 Elevations
If you want to... delete a subdivision
Then... select the subdivision, and click .
4 Click OK.
Changing Elevation Mark Attributes
Use this procedure to change the information displayed in the elevation mark. The elevation mark is a multi-view block.
1 Double-click the elevation mark you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced. 3 Click Attributes. 4 Select the existing attribute under Value, and enter the new information to include in the bubble. 5 Click OK.
Changing the Location of an Elevation Line
Use this procedure to relocate an elevation line by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The elevation line also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the elevation line are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the elevation line by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the elevation line on its plane by changing the rotation angle. For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the elevation line you want to relocate. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional Information. 4 Specify the location of the elevation line:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the elevation line
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the elevation line on the XY plane
make the normal of the elevation line parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0for X and Y.
locate the elevation line on the YZ plane
make the normal of the elevation line parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the elevation line on the XZ plane
make the normal of the elevation line parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the elevation line
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
To update an existing elevation created from this elevation line, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Modifying an Elevation Line Using Grips
Use this procedure to change the start point, end point, or edge of an elevation line. You can drag the grip to the desired location, or you can enter a specific value for the measurement.
Changing Elevation Mark Attributes | 1713
1 Select the elevation line you want to change. 2 Select an elevation line grip and move it to the desired location.
You can also move the grip in the desired direction and enter a specific value on the command line.
View Elevation Grips in Plan View
3 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes and Files to an Elevation Line
Use this procedure to add hyperlinks, enter notes and attach reference files to an elevation line. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from an elevation line.
1 Double-click the elevation line you want to attach notes or files to. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 Click next to Reference documents, and then attach, detach, or edit a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click , select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
enter text under Description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK.
Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation
Use this procedure to create a 2D or 3D elevation. After you draw an elevation line, you extract an elevation from the elevation line and the objects you select in the building model.
1714 | Chapter 37 Elevations
When you create a 2D elevation, the object that is created is a 2D Section/Elevation object. Both 2D sections and elevations share the same object type and style.
TIP Before you create an elevation, thaw and turn on all layers of objects in the building model that you want to include in the elevation. Objects on layers that are off or frozen cannot be part of the selection set for the elevation. To speed performance, turn off the layers of the objects that you do not need to include in the elevation.
1 Draw an elevation line in the drawing. For more information, see "Drawing an Elevation Line and Mark" on page 1708.
2 Select the elevation line, right-click, and click Generate Elevation. 3 Select the type of elevation object you want to create:
If you want to create... a 2D elevation
Then... select 2D Section/Elevation Object with Hidden Line Removal.
a 3D elevation
select 3D Section/Elevation Object.
4 For Style to Generate, select a style for a 2D elevation. If you want to use a particular style, select it from Style to Generate. Otherwise, use the Standard style. For more information, see "2D Elevation Styles" on page 1728.
3D elevations do not use styles.
5 Under Selection Set, click and press ENTER.
(Select Objects), select the objects that you want to include in the elevation,
NOTE If you select an object that you do not want to include in the elevation, press and hold SHIFT and select the object again to remove it from the selection set.
6 Under Display Set, select a display set for the elevation object. The display set controls the representation of the elevation.
7 Under Placement, select New Object, and specify where to place the elevation:
If you want to...
Then...
specify a location graphically
click (Pick Point), and specify the location for the new elevation object in the drawing.
specify the coordinates of the insertion point for the elevation enter X, Y, and Z coordinates for the location of the new elevation object.
8 Click OK.
A 2D or 3D elevation is created from the elevation line properties and the selected objects in the building model. The elevation is linked to the building model. If you make changes to the building model after you create the elevation, you can update the elevation to reflect the changes. For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
You can edit certain characteristics of the elevation to control its placement and appearance. For more information, see "Editing a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1717.
You can also use a 2D section/elevation style to control the display of selected objects in a 2D elevation, and you can control the display of individual lines in a 2D elevation. For more information, see "2D Elevation Styles" on page 1728 and "Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Elevation" on page 1722.
Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation | 1715
Creating a Horizontal 2D Elevation
Use this procedure to create a horizontal section or elevation of a plan view. The Hidden Line control available in Autodesk Architectural Desktop makes it possible to create horizontal sections and elevations of Plan views. With a horizontal section or elevation, you can look "down" on the model. Previously, users could achieve that effect only by manually changing the UCS. Now, a tool enables you to create a horizontal section or elevation. This feature could be useful for creating a detailed display of sill components in tapered walls. The illustration below displays a horizontal section line for an irregularly shaped building. Horizontal elevation line
The illustration below displays the view results. Note the sill displays of the tapered walls and the correct representation of the sloped curtain walls.
1 On the default tool palette set, click the Design tab, and then click the Horizontal Section tool. If necessary, scroll the palette to display the tool that you need.
2 Specify the first point of the elevation plane. 3 Specify the second corner of the elevation plane. 4 Specify the elevation of the plane, and press ENTER. 5 Specify the depth of the elevation, and press ENTER. 6 Proceed with creating the elevation, as described in "Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1714.
1716 | Chapter 37 Elevations
Editing a 2D or 3D Elevation
After you create an elevation, you can edit the elevation line and the elevation object to refine the appearance of the elevation in any of the following ways:
Edit the elevation line to add, remove, or modify graphic subdivisions. Display a different area of the building model by reversing the elevation. Place the elevation in a different location in the drawing. Add notes or reference files to the elevation. Select a different style for 2D elevations. An elevation style determines how the linework in a 2D elevation is
displayed. Edit a 2D elevation object to change the display properties of selected linework or to add linework and details that
are not part of the building model. In addition, you can continue to modify the building model, updating the elevation later to incorporate the changes. For information about switching from a view other than an elevation to a temporary elevation view to edit objects, see "Isolating Objects to Edit in an Elevation View" on page 71.
Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Elevation
Use this procedure to edit linework in a 2D elevation. You can assign selected linework to fixed display components that determine the display of every elevation that you generate, or you can assign linework to display components that you have defined. After you assign linework to display components, you can change the display properties (visibility, color, layer, lineweight, linetype, and linetype scale) to change the display of lines. For information about adding custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1730.
1 Select the elevation. 2 Select the Edit Linework grip.
The In-Place Edit toolbar opens.
3 Click to zoom to the elevation. 4 Select the linework to edit, right-click, and click Modify Component.
Editing a 2D or 3D Elevation | 1717
5 Select the component you want to put the lines on. For example, if you want to make the lines invisible, select Erased Vectors for Linework Component.
You can also click (Match existing linework), and select linework in the elevation whose display component you want to match.
6 Click OK.
7 To finish the linework editing process, click the linework and exit in-place edit mode.
to save all changes, or click
to discard all changes to
Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 2D Elevation
Use this procedure to change the display of subdivisions in a 2D elevation by changing its display properties.
You create subdivisions by adding them to the elevation line. You can then change their length using grips or by editing the values in the elevation line properties. For more information, see "Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Elevations" on page 1712.
Each subdivision in a 2D elevation is assigned to a numbered subdivision display component in the display properties of the elevation or the 2D elevation style. You can control the visibility, layer, color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale of each subdivision by changing the display properties of each component. You can apply these changes to the selected elevation, to the current 2D section/elevation style, or to all 2D sections and elevations in the drawing that do not have a style override.
You can use the display properties of a subdivision together with the display properties of a material. For more information, see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Elevation Styles" on page 1732.
1 Select the 2D elevation in the drawing, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select the property source to edit:
If you want to edit graphic subdivisions...
Then...
for all 2D sections and elevations in the current drawing
select Drawing Default.
(except those that have a 2D Section/Elevation Style override)
for all 2D sections and elevations that use the current style select 2D Section/Elevation Style, and click Object Override.
for the selected 2D elevation
Select 2D Section/Elevation, and click Object Override.
4 If necessary, click .
1718 | Chapter 37 Elevations
5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab to list all the components that contribute to the display of the object.
6 Turn the visibility on or off, and change the layer, color, linetype, lineweight, or linetype scale as needed for each subdivision component.
7 Click the Other tab to add a custom display component to the display of the 2D elevation. For more information about adding custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1730.
8 Click OK twice.
Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 3D Elevation
Use this procedure to change the display of subdivisions in a 3D elevation by changing its display properties.
You create the subdivisions by adding them to the elevation line. You can then change their length using grips or by editing the values in the elevation line properties. For more information, see "Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Elevations" on page 1712.
Each subdivision in a 3D elevation is assigned to a numbered subdivision display component in the display properties of the elevation. You can control the visibility, layer, color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale of each subdivision by changing the display properties of each component. You can apply these changes to the selected 3D elevation or to all 3D elevations in the drawing.
1 Select the 3D elevation in the drawing, right-click, and click Edit Object Display.
2 Click the Display Properties tab.
3 Select the Subdivisions display representation.
4 Select the property source to edit:
If you want to edit graphic subdivisions...
Then...
for all 3D elevations in the current drawing
select Drawing Default.
for the selected 3D elevation
select Bldg Section, and click Object Override.
5 If necessary, click . 6 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab to list all the components that contribute to the display of the object.
The defining line represents the cutting plane of the elevation line. The numbered subdivision components correspond to subdivisions added to the elevation line. For example, the display component Subdivision 1 corresponds to the subdivision closest to, but not on, the cutting plane of the elevation line.
7 Turn the visibility on or off, and change the layer, color, linetype, lineweight, or lineweight scale as needed for each subdivision component.
8 Click OK twice.
Reversing a 2D or 3D Elevation
Use this procedure to reverse the direction of an elevation by reversing the elevation line and updating the elevation. The direction of the elevation is determined by the direction in which you drew the elevation line. You can select the elevation line in plan view to see the bounding box that defines the area of the model included in the elevation. If the box does not include the area of the model that you intended, you can reverse the elevation line. If you have already created an elevation from the elevation line, update the elevation after reversing the elevation line.
1 Select the elevation line that you used to create the elevation, right-click, and click Reverse. The elevation line is mirrored about its own axis, as is the bounding box with its original parameters.
2 Select the existing elevation, right-click, and click Regenerate.
NOTE If you do not need to respecify the objects to include in the elevation, you can click Refresh instead of Regenerate. This immediately updates the elevation.
Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 3D Elevation | 1719
3 If you need to include different objects in the updated elevation, click objects, and press ENTER.
4 Click OK.
(Reselect Objects), select the
Changing the Style of a 2D Elevation
Use this procedure to select a different style for a 2D elevation. A 2D section/elevation style controls the appearance of any 2D elevation object to which the style is applied.
1 Double-click the elevation you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a new style for the elevation.
Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Elevation
Use this procedure to create a material boundary in a 2D elevation. 1 Draw a polyline around the area in the elevation that you want to mask or to highlight. 2 Select the elevation, right-click, and click Material Boundary Add. 3 Select the polyline. 4 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 5 Specify the settings of the material boundary:
If you want to... highlight the area inside the polyline
Then... select Limit for Purpose.
mask (erase) the area inside the polyline
select Erase for Purpose.
apply the highlight or mask only to specific parts of the elevation
select the appropriate parts for Apply to. You can choose Surface Hatch, Edge Linework, and All Linework.
apply the material boundary to all materials used in the elevation
select All Materials for Material Selection.
apply the material boundary only to selected materials
select Specific Materials for Material Selection and then select the appropriate materials in the list below.
6 Click OK.
Editing a Material Boundary
You can edit existing material boundaries in two ways:
Change the content within the material boundary. For example, you can determine of you want to see only brick hatching, or both brick and glass hatching.
Change the shape of the material boundary. For example, you can make the boundary bigger or smaller, or add additional rings and vertex points to it.
Editing the Content of a Material Boundary Use this procedure to change the content of a material boundary. The content includes such settings as materials displayed, hatch types, and boundary type.
1 Select the material boundary to change, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in the in-place edit mode. The selected boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Edit Material Boundary.
1720 | Chapter 37 Elevations
3 Specify the content of the material boundary:
If you want to... highlight the area inside the boundary mask (erase) the area inside the boundary apply the highlight or mask only to specific parts of the elevation apply the material boundary to all materials used in the elevation apply the material boundary only to selected materials
Then... select Limit for Purpose. select Erase for Purpose. select the appropriate parts for Apply to. You can choose Surface Hatch, Edge Linework, and All Linework. select All Materials for Material Selection.
select Specific Materials for Material Selection, and then select the appropriate materials from the list below.
4 Click OK. 5 Select the material boundary again, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or
click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Adding a Vertex to a Material Boundary Use this procedure to add a vertex to a material boundary.
1 Select the material boundary to which you want to add a vertex, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in the in-place edit mode. The selected boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Add Vertex. 3 Specify the point at which to add a vertex. 4 Specify additional vertex points. 5 Press ENTER. 6 Select the material boundary again, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or
click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Removing a Vertex from a Material Boundary Use this procedure to remove a vertex from a material boundary.
1 Select the material boundary from which you want to remove a vertex point, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in the in-place edit mode. The selected boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Remove Vertex. 3 Specify the vertex points to remove. 4 Remove additional vertex points as needed. 5 Press ENTER. 6 Select the material boundary again, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or
click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Adding a Ring to a Material Boundary Use this procedure to add a ring to a material boundary. A material boundary can consist of more than one closed polyline. For example, you could use one polyline to highlight a wall detail, and another polyline to highlight a window detail in another location.
1 Draw a polyline for the new material boundary ring. 2 Select the material boundary to add a new ring to, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place.
Editing a Material Boundary | 1721
You are now in the in-place edit mode. The selected boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed.
3 Right-click, and click Add Ring. 4 Select the polyline you drew in step 1. 5 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 6 Select the material boundary again, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or
click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Removing a Ring from a Material Boundary Use this procedure to remove a ring from a material boundary. A material boundary can consist of more than one closed ring. You can individually remove each ring.
NOTE You cannot remove the last ring from a material boundary.
1 Select the material boundary to change, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit In Place. You are now in the in-place edit mode. The selected boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed.
2 Right-click, and click Remove Ring. 3 Select the ring you want to remove. 4 Select the material boundary again, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or
click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Replacing a Ring from a Material Boundary with Another Use this procedure to replace a ring from a material boundary with a different ring.
1 Draw the polyline to replace one of the existing material boundary rings. 2 Select the material boundary where you want to replace a ring, right-click, and click Material Boundary Edit
In Place. You are in the in-place edit mode now. The selected boundary is highlighted and the grips are displayed.
3 Right-click, and click Replace Ring. 4 Select the ring to be replaced with another ring. 5 Select the closed polyline you drew in step 1. 6 Enter y (Yes) to erase the polyline, or n (No) to keep the polyline in the drawing. 7 Select the material boundary again, right-click, and click Save Changes to save the changes you made, or
click Discard All Changes to undo the changes to the material boundary.
Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Elevation
After you create a 2D elevation, you can edit the display of individual lines that make up the elevation. For example, you may want to assign linework for small details to a display component with a lighter lineweight, so that the details are not obscured when plotted. You can also merge existing geometry into the elevation.
Editing Linework in a 2D Elevation Use this procedure to edit linework in a 2D elevation. You can also edit individual lines in a 2D elevation by assigning them to display components in the elevation. For information about the Edit Linework grip, see Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Elevation . You can assign selected linework to fixed display components that determine the display of every elevation that you generate, or you can assign linework to display components that you have defined. For information about adding custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1730. After you assign linework to display components, you can change the display properties (visibility, color, layer, lineweight, linetype, and linetype scale) to change the display of lines.
1722 | Chapter 37 Elevations
1 Select the elevation to be changed, right-click, and click Linework Edit. 2 Select the lines that you want to assign to a display component, right-click, and click Modify Component.
A list of available display components is displayed.
3 Select the component you want to put the lines on. For example, if you want to make the lines invisible, select Erased Vectors for Linework Component.
You can also click (Match existing linework), and select linework in the elevation whose display component you want to match.
4 Click OK. 5 To finish the linework editing process, select any line in the elevation, right-click, and select Edit in
Place Save Changes to save the changes you made, or click Edit in Place Discard Changes to undo your linework changes.
Merging Linework into a 2D Elevation Use this procedure to merge geometry into a 2D elevation. When you merge linework into an elevation, you assign additional linework to a display component of an elevation. Use this feature when you want to add detail, or add linework that you did not model.
1 Draw the geometry that you want to merge into a 2D elevation.
2 Select the 2D elevation to be changed, right-click, and click Linework Merge. 3 Select the geometry to merge into the elevation, and press ENTER. 4 Select the display component to which you want to assign the linework.
You can also click (Match existing linework) and select linework in the elevation whose display component you want to match.
5 Click OK.
The linework is merged into the 2D elevation. When you select the elevation, the linework is selected with it.
Changing the Location of a 2D or 3D Elevation
You can relocate an elevation by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The elevation also has an orientation with respect to the WCS or the current UCS. For example, if the top and bottom of the elevation are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the elevation by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the elevation on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For information about the world coordinate system (WCS) and the user coordinate system (UCS), see "Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the elevation you want to move. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional Information. 4 Specify a new location or rotation:
If you want to...
Then...
relocate the elevation
enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
Changing the Location of a 2D or 3D Elevation | 1723
If you want to... locate the elevation on the XY plane locate the elevation on the YZ plane locate the elevation on the XZ plane change the rotation of the elevation
Then...
make the normal of the elevation parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
make the normal of the elevation parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X, and enter 0 for Y and Z.
make the normal of the elevation parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a 2D or 3D Elevation
Use this procedure to add hyperlinks, enter notes, and attach reference files to a 2D or 3D elevation. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a 2D or 3D elevation.
1 Double-click the 2D or 3D elevation you want to attach notes or files to. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link.
For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 Click next to Reference documents, and then attach, detach, or edit a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click , select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
enter text under Description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click .
6 Click OK.
Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation
Use this procedure to regenerate a 2D or 3D elevation to reflect changes you have made to the building model or to elevation line properties. For 2D elevations, you also update the elevation to show changes made to the 2D elevation style. You can update a 2D or 3D elevation if you have not exploded the elevation, which destroys the link between the elevation and the building model. When you update an elevation, you can add or remove objects from the elevation, change the location of the elevation in the drawing, and change the display set of the elevation. If you do not need to change the elevation definition in any way, you can skip the following procedure. Instead, right-click the elevation you want to update, and click Refresh.
1 Select the elevation you want to update, right-click, and click Regenerate.
1724 | Chapter 37 Elevations
2 Select a result type: If the elevation is... a 2D elevation object a 3D elevation object
Then... select 2D Section/Elevation Object with Hidden Line Removal. select 3D Section/Elevation Object.
3 To change the style of a 2D elevation, select a new style for Style to Generate.
4 If you edited linework in the 2D elevation, select a style in which to save the changes you made that cannot be reapplied. Select a style that distinguishes the unapplied changes in the elevation.
5 Under Selection Set, specify the objects that you want to include in the elevation:
If you want to...
Then...
use the objects in the selection set you specified when you proceed to the next step. created the elevation or when you previously updated it
add new objects to the selection set that you specified when click Select Additional Objects, select the new objects in the
you created the original elevation
drawing, and press ENTER.
select a new selection set of objects for the elevation
click Reselect Objects, select a new selection set of objects for the elevation, and press ENTER.
NOTE If you select an object that you do not want to include in the elevation, press and hold SHIFT and select the object again to remove it from the selection set.
6 Under Display Set, select a display set for the elevation. 7 Under Placement, locate the elevation in the drawing:
If you want to...
Then...
create a new elevation object without overwriting the original object
select New Object, and either click to specify an insertion point in the drawing area, or enter X, Y, and Z coordinates for the new elevation.
replace the original elevation with the updated elevation select Replace Existing.
8 Click OK.
Globally Updating 2D Elevations
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop makes it possible for you to globally update all sections and elevations within a project or a specified folder.
Updating Sections and Elevations in a Project
Autodesk Architectural Desktop includes the Drawing Management feature that allows users to combine their floor plans, section and elevation views, construction sheets, and reusable components in one building project. A project consists of a number of drawings linked together with a powerful external referencing mechanism. Autodesk Architectural Desktop makes working with projects even easier by enabling the user to open a project and update all 2D sections and elevations included in that project in one comfortable workflow. For information on which project file types can be updated, see "Supported Project Drawing Types" on page 1726.
Globally Updating 2D Elevations | 1725
Updating Sections and Elevations in a Specific Folder When you are working without a project, you can also globally update sections and elevations by specifying a folder and updating all sections and elevations in that folder. When you select a specific folder for updating, you can also include its subfolders in the update.
Section of a building project
For more information about building projects, see "Drawing Management" on page 145.
Supported Project Drawing Types
When you are updating a project, you can globally update all 2D sections and elevations within the views and sheets of the project. You cannot globally update elements and constructs, because these project drawings usually contain reusable elements and individual parts of the building project. They normally do not contain sections or elevations. For more information about project drawing types, see "Views" on page 240 and "Plotting Sheets" on page 258. NOTE When you globally update the sections and elevations in a project drawing, all model and paper space layouts are updated. When you are updating a specified folder within a project, or a folder outside of a project, all sections and elevations in that folder are updated regardless of their type. For example, if you choose to update a specific folder within the Constructs category of a project, the sections and elevations in that folder will be updated, even though they are Construct drawings. If you do not specify a folder, but choose to update the whole project, these construct drawings are not updated.
Globally Updating 2D Sections and Elevations in a Project or a Folder
Use this procedure to globally update all 2D sections and elevations in a project or a specified folder. NOTE To update all 2D sections and elevations in a project, the project must be defined as current. If no project is current, you receive an error message if you try to globally update 2D sections and elevations. For information on setting a project current, see "Setting a Project Current" on page 171.
1 On the View menu, click Refresh Sections/Elevations.
1726 | Chapter 37 Elevations
2 Select if you want to update the 2D sections and elevations in the current project, or only the 2D sections and elevations in a specific folder.
If you want to...
Then...
update the 2D sections and elevations in the current select Current Project. project
update the 2D sections and elevations in a specific folder
select Folder. Then click the Browse button , select the folder containing the files you want to update, and click OK.
3 If you have specified a folder, you can specify whether the subfolders of that folder should be updated as well. To update the subfolders, select Process subfolders.
NOTE When you are working with a large building project, updating all sections and elevations can be a time-consuming process. In this case, you might consider updating only a selected subfolder of your project and thereby improve system performance.
4 Click Start. Globally updating all sections and elevations may take a while. A status window lets you know which drawing is currently being updated. When you start the global update, the Stop button is available. If you want to interrupt the global update, click Stop. When the global update is finished, the Start button is available.
Updating Drawings from an Earlier Version of Autodesk Architectural Desktop
During the global update of 2D sections and elevations, each drawing in the project or specified folder is opened, updated, and saved again. If you are updating drawings from an earlier version of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, the drawings are converted to the current version of the software. Before you convert the drawings, a warning message notifies you of the conversion. To update the drawings to the new version, click OK. To cancel the update of all sections and elevations, press CTRL+BREAK.
Update Exceptions
There are a number of cases in which a 2D section or elevation cannot be updated with the global update.
The drawing containing the 2D section or elevation is read-only.
Updating Drawings from an Earlier Version of Autodesk Architectural Desktop | 1727
The 2D section or elevation is placed on a locked layer. There have been user edits to a 2D section or elevation that could not be reapplied to the 2D section or elevation.
When a 2D section or elevation cannot be updated, an error message is displayed in the status window. To fix the problem, you can set the drawing to read/write instead of read-only, you can unlock the section layer, or you can undo a specific user edit to a 2D section or elevation.
2D Elevation Styles
A 2D section/elevation style is a group of properties assigned to a 2D elevation that determines the appearance and other characteristics of that object. Using 2D Elevation Styles A 2D section/elevation style controls the linework in an elevation, using design rules that determine how different parts of the elevation are displayed. You can apply the style to one or more elevations to control their appearance. You can also change the display of individual lines in the elevation, and save the changes in a 2D section/elevation style. Display Components and Design Rules Display components determine the graphical characteristics, such as color and linetype, of linework assigned to each display component. Design rules determine how the linework in an elevation is assigned to display components. When you create a design rule, you specify the part of the 2D elevation to control based on the color of those objects in the building model and their context in the elevation. You then select the display component to use for linework that meets the criteria you specified. You can assign the linework to a default display component or to a custom display component that you have added to the style. For example, you might define a rule that assigns all objects that are color 150 in the model and located along the elevation line to a custom display component named Darker that you created in the style. Or you might hide a staircase behind a wall using a rule that assigns all blue linework to the Hidden display component. Managing 2D Elevation Styles To create, edit, copy, or purge styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk Architectural Desktop to work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452. Materials and 2D Elevation Styles Two-dimensional elevation styles offer an easy way to assign materials to 2D elevation objects. You can specify which section components should have its display controlled by materials and which do not. Custom components cannot have any material assignments. Subdivisions in 2D Elevation Styles and Materials When you are creating subdivisions in your style, you usually want the objects in them to be visually distinct from other subdivisions. When you have assigned materials to the objects, you can set the 2D elevation style so that it uses the hatch pattern from the material, but the color and linetype from the subdivision display properties.
1728 | Chapter 37 Elevations
Elevation subdivisions with assigned surface hatching
Creating a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to create a 2D elevation style. You can create a style using default style properties or by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand 2D Section/Elevation Styles. 3 Create a new 2D elevation style:
If you want to create a style...
Then...
using default properties
right-click 2D Section/Elevation Styles, and click New.
style from an existing style
right-click the 2D elevation style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new 2D elevation style, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the 2D elevation style:
If you want to...
Then...
add display components to the style
see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1730.
remove display components from the style
see "Removing a Display Component from a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1730.
use the subdivision properties of the elevation for the display see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Elevation Styles" on page 1732.
use the 3D Body component of the material for the elevation see "Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the
linework
2D Elevation Linework" on page 1733.
add design rules to the style
see "Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1733.
change design rules in the style
see "Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1734.
add classifications to a style
see "Adding Classifications to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1734.
change the display properties of the display components in see "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D
the style
Elevation Style" on page 1735.
Creating a 2D Elevation Style | 1729
If you want to... add notes, files, or documents to the style
Then...
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1735.
6 Click OK. You can click Apply instead of OK to save the changes and continue working in the Style Manager.
Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to add a custom display component to a 2D elevation style. After you add a component, you assign linework in the elevation to the new component. To apply these style changes to existing 2D elevations, you must update the elevation.
2D elevations include the following default display components: Defining Line, Hidden, Erased, Unknown, and Subdivision.
1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Components tab
3 Click Add.
4 Enter a name and a description for the new component. To enter a name, click Unnamed and enter a new name. To enter a description, click in the Description column next to the name, and enter a description.
5 Click the Display Properties tab.
6 Select 2D Section/Elevation Style for the property source, and click .
7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
8 Specify the display properties of the new component.
9 Click OK twice. To create a design rule that uses the new display component, see "Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1733. To manually assign linework to the display component, see "Editing Linework in a 2D Elevation" on page 1722.
Removing a Display Component from a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to remove a custom display component from a 2D elevation style. Removing a display component also removes any design rules that use the component. You cannot remove the default display components.
1 Select a elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Components tab. 3 Select the component that you want to remove, and click Remove.
If the component is used in a design rule, the associated design rule is removed as well.
4 Click OK. 5 Update the elevation to apply the style changes to the elevation.
For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
About 2D and 3D Elevation Display Components and Materials
A 2D and 3D elevation object consists of a number of display components that can be determined by materials. When you assign materials to an object, you assign one material to each display component of the object. For example, you assign a wood material to the frame of a window and a glass component to the glass of a window.
1730 | Chapter 37 Elevations
When you create a 2D or 3D elevation object from building objects, the material assignments of the source objects are applied to the elevation. You do not assign a material directly to a 2D/3D elevation. The elevation takes its material assignments from the objects. For example, if you create an elevation of a wall with a window, the surface hatches you have defined in the glass, wood, and brick materials of the wall and the window are displayed in the elevation object.
If you do not want to use the material display properties, but instead use those of the 2D or 3D elevation object or the 2D elevation style, you can deactivate the material assignments in the display properties of the elevation or the elevation style.
Material definitions consist of display components that correspond to component types of objects. For example, the Linework component of a material is used for all linework of objects in Plan view. The Surface Hatch component of a material is used to hatch all object surfaces in 3D model views and elevations.
For a complete list of material components and their description, see "Material Components and Display Properties" on page 474.
The following table lists elevation components plus information about the material components that determine them.
NOTE An elevation is technically the same object as a section, and has the same display components as a section. The following topics describe the display components most relevant to elevations. For a complete list of all section and elevation components, see "About 2D and 3D Section Display Components and Materials" on page 1691.
2D Elevation Component Surface Hatch Linework HIdden Erased Subdivision 1-10
Material Component
Surface Hatch
No Material
No Material
2D Section/Elevation Linework or 3D Body. For information on switching between these material components, see "Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Elevation Linework" on page 1733.
Surface Hatch Linework in Elevations
The Surface Hatch Linework component draws all linework coming from surface hatches of the objects in the elevation. This component is specific to 2D elevations.
NOTE Surface hatches you have assigned to objects display in a 3D elevation object. However, you cannot set them separately in a 3D elevation; you can do that only in a 2D elevation object.
About 2D and 3D Elevation Display Components and Materials | 1731
The surface hatch linework component is controlled by the surface hatch component of the material. For information about the surface hatch component of the material, see "Surface Hatch Material Component" on page 475.
2D elevation with building roof, wall, and foundation surface hatching
Hidden Component The Hidden component contains all linework that is hidden in the 2D projection because other components are in front of it. By default, this component is turned off. You can use design rules to achieve special effects, such as a see-through effect, using the Hidden component. The Hidden component is specific to 2D elevations. The Hidden component cannot be defined by a material component. You can only set it in the display properties of the 2D elevation. For information on setting the display properties of a 2D elevation, see "Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1735. Erased Component The Erased component contains linework in the elevation object that you do not want to see. For example, if you have an elevation of a window front with three windows, but you want to display only one (for a higher level of abstraction), edit the linework of the elevation and assign the linework of the remaining two windows to the Erased component. Because the Erased component is turned off by default, the two windows do not display. For information on linework editing of an elevation, see "Creating a Hidden Line Projection" on page 1738. The hidden component is specific to 2D elevations, and cannot be defined by a material component. Subdivision Components The subdivision components partition an elevation object. They are useful to create perspective effects, where parts closer to the viewer are drawn with darker, stronger lines and parts farther from the user are drawn with lighter, thinner lines. Subdivisions can have no individual material assignments. However the display properties of the subdivisions can be used for the surface hatching of the subdivisions by selecting Use Subdivision Properties for Surface Hatching in the Other tab of the 2D elevation display properties. For information on using the subdivision display properties to display the elevation divisions, see "Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Elevation Styles" on page 1732. Subdivisions are a display component of both 2D and 3D elevation objects. The subdivision components are either controlled by the 2D Section/Elevation Linework component of the material or by the 3D Body component of a material. For information on how to switch between these component assignments, see "Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Elevation Linework" on page 1733.
Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Elevation Styles
Use this procedure to use the display properties of materials together with the display properties of elevation subdivisions. 1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select 2D Section/Elevation Style for the property source, and click Style Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 To set a subdivision to use the surface hatch of the material, while using the layer, color, and linetype
display properties of the subdivision, clear By Material, and specify the layer, color and linetype settings of the subdivision. For example, the first subdivision could have a darker color and stronger linetype the second subdivision.
7 Click the Other tab. 8 Select Use Subdivison Properties for Surface Hatching.
1732 | Chapter 37 Elevations
9 Click OK twice.
Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Elevation Linework
Use this procedure to use the 3D Body component of a material for the linework in a 2D elevation. 1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select 2D Section/Elevation Style for the property source, and click Style Override.
4 If necessary, click .
5 Click the Other tab.
6 Determine if the 3D body component of the selected material should control the display of the linework in the 2D elevation:
If you want to control the display...
Then...
of the 2D elevation linework by the 3D Body component of select Use 3D Body Display Component for By Material
the material
Linework.
of the 2D elevation linework by the 2D Section/Elevation Linework component of the material
deselect Use 3D Body Display Component for By Material Linework. This is the default behavior.
7 Click OK twice.
Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to add a design rule to a 2D elevation style. A design rule has four fields of information that identify lines in the elevation and determine how to display them:
Field Color
Context
Component Description
Description
Identifies the color of the objects in the building model presented by the lines in the elevation
Identifies the context of the lines in the elevation, such as in a graphic subdivision
Identifies the display component to which the lines are assigned
Contains a description of the design rule
For example, a design rule has the color 50, a context of Within Subdivision 2, and a component of New. This rule assigns any lines in the elevation representing objects that have the color 50 in the building model and that are within subdivision 2 in the elevation to the user-defined display component, New.
On the Design Rules tab, you can also specify that all hidden linework that is not handled by a specific design rule will be assigned to the Hidden display component. You could use this option if you want to generate an elevation of an object or a set of objects and see all edges, for example, if you are creating foundations and form work.
NOTE Alternatively, you can define which hidden linework should be displayed by object material. For more information, see "Controlling the Display of Hidden Lines by Material" on page 493.
1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Design Rules tab, and click Add. A new design rule is created with default color, context, and component values.
Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Elevation Linework | 1733
3 Specify settings for the new design rule:
If you want to... specify the color of objects in the building model that are affected by this rule specify the context in which the linework for the objects appears in the elevation select the display component for the linework enter a description of the rule
Then... click the default color, select a new color, and click OK.
click the default context, and select a new context.
click the default component, and select a new component. click the Description field, enter a description, and press ENTER.
4 Click OK. 5 Update the elevation to apply the style changes to the elevation.
For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to change the settings in the fields that define a design rule.
1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Design Rules tab. 3 Specify settings for the design rule you want to change:
If you want to...
Then...
specify the color of objects in the building model that are affected by this rule
click the current color, select a new color, and click OK.
specify the context in which the linework for the objects appears in the elevation
click the current context, and select a new context.
select the display component for the linework
click the current component, and select a new component.
edit the description of the rule
click the description, edit the description, and press ENTER.
4 Click OK. 5 Update the elevation to apply the style changes to the elevation.
For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Removing a Design Rule from a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to remove a design rule from a 2D elevation style.
1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Design Rules tab. 3 Select the rule that you want to remove, and click Remove. 4 Click OK. 5 Update the elevation to apply the style changes to the elevation.
For more information, see "Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation" on page 1724.
Adding Classifications to a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to specify classifications for any classification definition applied to a 2D elevation style.
1734 | Chapter 37 Elevations
For more information about creating and applying classification definitions, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990.
1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Classifications tab. By default, the classification for all classification definitions is Unspecified. If no classification definitions are listed, none are applied to 2D elevation styles.
3 For each classification definition, select the classification you want to apply to the current 2D elevation style.
4 Click OK twice.
Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to change the following display properties of a 2D elevation style:
Visibility (component is on or off) Display properties by materials Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
NOTE The custom display components in the display properties are identical to those listed on the Components tab of the 2D Section/Elevation Styles dialog box. For more information about custom display components, see "Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style" on page 1730.
1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select 2D Section/Elevation Style for the property source, and click Style Override.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Select By Material for any component that you want to use the display properties of the materials assigned
to the elevation objects.
NOTE Not all display components of a 2D elevation have an associated material definition. For example, Hidden and Erased cannot be set by material. For a list of all display components and their associated material components, see "About 2D and 3D Elevation Display Components and Materials" on page 1730.
8 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Elevation Style
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a 2D elevation style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files attached to the style.
1 Select an elevation that has the style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit 2D Section/Elevation Style.
Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Elevation Style | 1735
2 Click the General tab. 3 To add a description to the 2D elevation, enter the description under Description. 4 Click Notes. 5 To add or edit a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 6 To attach, edit, or detach a reference file, click the Reference Docs tab:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you are done editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
7 Click OK twice.
1736 | Chapter 37 Elevations
Hidden Line Projection
38
You can create flat 2D projections with hidden background lines from a 3D view of objects in your drawing. The Hidden Line Projection command produces quick sections and elevations of objects in your drawings that are not updated automatically when you make changes to your 3D model.
1737
Hidden Line Projection
You can create flat 2D projections with hidden background lines from a 3D view of objects in your drawing. The Hidden Line Projection command produces quick sections and elevations of objects in your drawings that are not updated automatically when you make changes to your 3D model.
Creating a Hidden Line Projection
Use this procedure to create a 2D graphic from a 3D view of one or more objects in your drawing. The 2D graphic that you create is a flattened representation of the objects in the current 3D view, with hidden background lines. Use the Hidden Line Projection command to create quick 2D elevations and sections. After you create an elevation or section hidden line projection, you can hatch or shade the cut areas. You can also use hidden line projections to create detail drawings. For more information about creating elevations and sections, see "Working With Elevations" on page 1702 and "Sections" on page 1660. When you create hidden line projections, the 3D objects that you select are copied and collected into an unnamed (also called anonymous) 2D block. The unnamed block can be placed in your drawing in the current 3D view, or placed parallel to the XY plane to be viewed in plan view. You can edit or explode the inserted block. If you want to insert the block in another drawing as a named block, define the block. For more information about inserting blocks, see "Insert Blocks" in AutoCAD help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
NOTE Your 2D hidden line projections are not dynamically linked to the objects in the 3D view. Therefore, if you edit the original object or objects in 3D view, the 2D graphic does not change. You must edit or re-create the 2D hidden line projection to reflect any changes that you make to the original objects.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select a hidden line projection tool. A hidden line projection tool is located with the Helper Tools in the Stock Tool Catalog. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 In a 3D view select one or more objects that you want to use to create your hidden line projection, and press ENTER.
3 Specify an insertion point in your current drawing for the 2D hidden line projection. 4 Specify the insertion point for the 2D hidden line projection into your drawing:
Press ENTER to insert the 2D block in plan view. Enter n (No) to insert the 2D block in the current view.
1738 | Chapter 38 Hidden Line Projection
AEC Dimensions
39
AEC dimensions are associative annotation objects used to display the relevant measurements of a building object, like the width of a wall or the length of a beam. The appearance of dimensions is controlled through styles and can be adjusted for different drawing views or to accommodate the standards of a particular company or country.
1739
AEC Dimensions
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers different ways of dimensioning objects and points in a drawing. AEC dimensions can be associative to objects or be used to dimension user-specified points in the drawing. If you create an associative dimension, the dimension value changes when the object changes its measurements. Components of an AEC dimension
Using Grips to Modify AEC Dimensions When you select an AEC dimension, various grips are displayed. You can use the grips to add and remove dimension points, move dimension chains, change the offset of extension lines, and override wall component dimensions.
AEC dimension grips
Dimensioning Wall Components When dimensioning wall components, you have the option of using the center of the component or either side as the dimension point. For example, you can dimension a wall component from its center or from one of its edges. You can also dimension wall components according to their structural function. Grips for the individual component dimension points allow you to override style-defined dimension points on walls to accommodate special cases.
Wall component dimension grips
Overriding Dimension Values The dimension values in an AEC dimension are calculated from the actual current dimensions of associated objects. You can override a value with a manually inserted value. For detailed information, see "Overriding Dimension Values and Hiding Dimension Segments" on page 1770.
Overriding dimension text with a new value
1740 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Dimension Options and Uses
In Autodesk Architectural Desktop, you can dimension object points specified in the AEC dimension style, points on objects picked in the drawing, or user-specified points in the drawing. AEC dimensions associated with objects update when the object changes. User-specified points are not associative and have to be changed manually, if necessary. In addition to AEC dimensions, you can also use AutoCAD dimensions. The following table lists the differences between the different dimension methods: An AEC dimension can contain both associative and non-associative points. For example, you can create an AEC dimension that dimensions a wall, a multi-view block representing a floor drain, and user-specified points selected anywhere in the drawing.
Associative Dimensions from Selecting Objects
Associative AEC dimensions are style-based annotation objects that update automatically when the associated object changes. The AEC dimension style defines the dimension points that determine which measurements are displayed for each object that the style can be used to dimension. In the example below, walls lengths, opening widths, and wall intersections are set as the dimensioned points in the style. If a door is made wider, the dimensions update to reflect the new measurements. Associative wall dimensions
You can define styles for specific object types. For example, one AEC dimension style might specify that for walls, dimensions will be displayed for lengths, maximum opening widths of windows in walls, and wall intersections. Another AEC dimension style for mass elements might specify the mass element edges and center as dimension points. For a complete list of objects for which you can specify dimension points in AEC dimension styles, see "Associative Dimensions from Objects" on page 1743.
NOTE AEC objects can be associatively dimensioned in external references, even when they are nested multiple levels deep. This is useful for large drawing projects, where the parts of the building are distributed over various drawing files.
You can also define different dimension points for different views. For example, in Plan Low Detail, you might want to dimension only the outer boundaries of a building, whereas in Plan High Detail you might want to dimension wall lengths and openings in walls as well. In the AEC dimension style, you can define up to ten dimension chains, each with different dimension points. For example, the first chain can dimension wall lengths and openings in walls, while the second chain dimensions structural components of multi-component walls. In the AEC dimension style, you can also specify whether to use superscripting in dimensions, and whether the extension line length is fixed or variable.
Associative Dimensions from Picked Points
When you use an AEC dimension tool, the Pick points option lets you select the base point and OSNAP points on an AEC object to create an associative dimension. In addition, you can define an offset from a selected point, so that virtually any point on an object can be dimensioned. This option lets you dimension AEC objects for which dimension points cannot be set in the AEC dimension style, like multi-view blocks or 2D building sections, or objects for which the dimension point you need is not settable in the style. For example, you cannot dimension the location of a pilaster
Dimension Options and Uses | 1741
in a wall in the AEC dimension style, but you can pick an endpoint on the wall, and then offset it so that becomes a dimension point for the pilaster location. Because a dimension generated by picking points on objects is associative, if you move the object, the dimension points are updated accordingly, observing any offsets you have specified. For a list of objects that can only be dimensioned associatively by picking points on them, see "Associative Dimensions From Picked Points" on page 1748. Picking associative points to dimension
Non-Associative Dimensions from Picked Points
You can create non-associative dimensions from points you pick anywhere in the drawing. For each point you pick, a location point is generated and dimensioned. If the point is used to dimension an object, and the object is moved, the non-associative point is not updated. You have to manually move the non-associative point to reflect the change. Non-associative grip points on AEC dimension
You can convert AutoCAD® dimensions to non-associative AEC dimensions. The AutoCAD dimension points are converted to location points on the AEC dimension. For more information, see "Converting an AutoCAD Dimension to an AEC Dimension" on page 1758.
AutoCAD Dimensions
AutoCAD® dimensions can be associated with AutoCAD objects like polylines. Additionally you can create non-associative AutoCAD dimensions. Associative AutoCAD dimensions are turned on by default in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. To work with traditional non-associative AutoCAD dimensions, set the system variable DIMASSOC to 1 (Non-Associative Dimensions). To create AutoCAD object dimensions, set DIMASSOC to 2 (Associative Dimensions). For more information about AutoCAD dimensions, see "Dimensions and Tolerances" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the exact AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Process Overview: Creating AEC Dimensions
An AEC dimension consists of a number of components and settings to make it the optimal tool for dimensioning objects.
TIP Autodesk Architectural Desktop ships with predefined dimension tools for many uses. Before you create a new tool or AEC or AutoCAD dimension style, look through the templates to find an existing tool or style that contains most or all of your desired settings. You can then modify it for your purposes, if necessary.
The general process for creating AEC dimensions involves the following steps: Step 1: Specify the drawing options for the AEC dimension, as described in "Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences"
on page 1749.
1742 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Important settings include the dimension unit, superscripting preferences, and the automatic scaling of AutoCAD dimension styles.
Step 2: Verify that there is an AutoCAD dimension style that has the settings you need. If necessary, create a new AutoCAD dimension style that defines the color of the dimension lines, size and font of the dimension text, arrows, unit format, and unit precision. For more information, see "Use Dimension Styles" in the AutoCAD help.
Step 3: If you are dimensioning walls, create or modify a wall style with dimension settings for wall components. For more information, see "Defining the Dimension Settings for Wall Components" on page 695.
Step 4: Create an AEC dimension style that specifies the desired values for the following settings:
number of dimension chains object types to be dimensioned (for example, walls or mass elements) object points to be dimensioned (for example, wall components and wall intersections) underlying AutoCAD dimension style
For more information, see "AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1773.
Step 5: Use a dimension tool and dimension objects and points in the drawing. For more information, see "Creating an AEC Dimension with User-Specified Settings " on page 1751.
Associative Dimensions from Objects
The AEC dimension style defines the dimension points that determine which measurements are displayed for each type of object to which the AEC dimension can be applied. You can either create a dimension style that defines dimension points for multiple object types, or you can create separate styles for individual object types.
For information about how to define dimension points in AEC dimension styles, see "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777.
Dimension Points for Walls
The following wall dimension points can be specified in the AEC dimension style:
Wall Dimension Points Selection Overall
Description
Examples
Dimensions the two outer points of all dimensioned walls.
Length of Wall: Outer Boundaries Dimensions the outer boundaries of every selected wall. When wall boundaries overlap, only those facing the dimension direction are dimensioned.
Length of Wall: Wall Length
Dimensions the length of each wall in the selection set.
Wall Width: Overall
Dimensions the overall width of a wall.
Wall Width: All Components
Dimensions the width of each component in a wall.
Wall Width: Center
Dimensions the center line of a single-component or multicomponent wall
Associative Dimensions from Objects | 1743
Wall Dimension Points
Selection
Description
Examples
Wall Width: From Style
Dimensions the wall components according to the settings in the wall style. For more information, see "Defining the Dimension Settings for Wall Components" on page 695.
Wall Width: Structural from Style
Dimensions the structural wall components according to the settings in the wall style. For more information, see "Defining the Dimension Settings for Wall Components" on page 695.
Wall Intersections
Dimensions the intersection points of walls that are connected to the selected walls.
Dimension Points for Wall Components
The dimensioning of wall components can be specified in 2 different locations: in the wall style and in the AEC dimension style.
In the wall style, you can set following information that is relevant to the dimension:
Component side to dimension: In the wall style, you can define for each wall component whether it should be dimensioned to its positive or negative side, or to the center of the component. The positive and negative sides of a wall are determined by the direction in which the wall is drawn: if you draw a wall from left to right, the positive side is the left (top). If you draw a wall from the right side to the left, then the positive side is the right (bottom). If you determine that a wall component is only dimensioned to one side, you can select either the positive or negative side of the wall
. Structural function: You can define a wall component as structural or non-structural. When you set up the AEC
dimension style you can define that only structural wall components, or all wall components should be dimensioned. In the AEC dimension style you can define the following additional or overriding settings for dimensioning wall components:
By Style: the dimension points selected in the wall style are used to dimension the wall components width. Structural by Style: the dimension points specified for the structural components of the wall style are used. All Components: each component of the wall is dimensioned. Overall: the overall width of the wall is dimensioned. Center: the center of the wall is dimensioned.
1744 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Dimension Points for Wall Openings
The following wall opening dimension points can be specified in the AEC dimension style:
Window, Door, and Opening Dimension Points
Selection
Description
Opening Max. Width
Dimensions the maximum width of a window, door or opening in a wall.
Examples
Opening Min. Width
Dimensions the minimum width of a window, door, or opening in a wall.
Center of Opening
Dimensions the center point of a window, door, or opening in a wall.
NOTE If you click Options on the Format menu, and then click AEC Object Settings, there are two options under Wall settings: Dimension to Center of Opening and Dimension to Outer Frame of Opening. These settings have no influence on how openings are dimensioned in AEC dimensions.
Dimension Points for Grids
You can set dimension points for the following grid types in the AEC dimension style:
Column grids Ceiling grids 2D layout grids
NOTE 3D layout volumes have no style-based associative dimension points.
The following grid dimension points can be specified in the AEC dimension style:
Grid Dimension Points Selection Overall
Description
Dimensions the two outermost grid lines of all selected grids
Examples
Outer Grid Lines
Dimensions the outer grid lines of selected grids
All Grid Lines
Dimensions all grid lines in selected grids
Dimension Points for Wall Openings | 1745
Dimension Points for Other Object Types
The same set of dimension points can be specified individually in the AEC dimension style for these objects:
Mass elements/mass groups Curtain walls Window assemblies Structural members (columns/braces/beams) Standalone windows/doors/openings Others
Stairs Railings Spaces Roofs/roof slabs/slabs
TIP If you need different dimension points for individual items from the Other group, it is recommended that you create different dimension styles containing the varying settings. For example, you can create an AEC dimension style for stairs where you dimension the bounding box only, and another dimension style for spaces that dimensions the space edges.
The following dimensions points an be specified in the AEC dimension style for the objects in this category:
Other Building Object Dimension Points
Selection
Overall
Description Dimensions the two outer points of selected objects
Examples
Bounding Box Edges: All Edges
Dimensions the bounding box of each object in the selection set
Dimensions all edges in an object
Edges: Facing Edges Center
Dimensions the edges of the object that are visible from the direction of the dimension line
Dimensions the center point of an object
AutoCAD Dimension Points
You can define points for most AutoCAD linework objects in the AEC dimension style. Dimensioning line endpoints and midpoints example
1746 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Dimensioning polyline endpoints and midpoints example
Dimensioning circle centers and quadrants example
Use an AEC dimension style to dimension the following AutoCAD linework objects:
Lines Arcs Circles Open and closed polylines AutoCAD polygons Rectangles
The following AutoCAD points can be associatively dimensioned in the AEC dimension style:
AutoCAD Linework Dimension Points
Selection
Extents
Description
Dimensions the two overall outer points of all selected objects.
Examples
Endpoints Midpoints Center Quadrant
Dimensions the endpoints of selected objects. If you selected a polyline with multiple segments, the endpoints of each segment are measured. Endpoints can be measured for all AutoCAD linework objects listed above except circles.
Measures the midpoints of all segments of the selected object that are lying in the direction of the dimensions. Midpoints can be measured for all AutoCAD linework objects listed above except circles.
Measures the center of the curve of circular objects. Centers can be measured for circles, arcs, and curved polyline segments.
Measures the quadrants of circles, arcs, and curved polylines segments.
AutoCAD linework objects include line-based objects, such as lines and open polylines, as well as non-linear geometry, such as closed polylines and circles. The results of using AEC dimensions to dimension these objects can be quite different. For example, for a single line, the options Overall, Bounding Box, All Edges, and Facing Edges return exactly the same dimension points. Some objects, like circles, have no edges to dimension.
AutoCAD Dimension Points | 1747
TIP The best way to handle the different dimension points for AutoCAD linework is to create a number of AEC dimension styles for the individual objects. For example, you can create a style named "Line," which has only one dimension chain for dimensioning line edges, or a dimension style named "Circle," which dimensions only circle centers and circle quadrants. For more information on creating AEC dimension styles, see "AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1773.
You cannot define associative dimension points for the following AutoCAD linework objects in the AEC dimension style:
Multilines Splines Ellipses Blocks AutoCAD dimensions Leaders Text Surfaces Images OLE frames Proxies Solids
Associative Dimensions in External References
You can associatively dimension objects from external references in the following cases:
Attach an external reference drawing to a host drawing, and dimension objects from the external reference and the host drawing in the host drawing.
Attach a nested external reference drawing to a host drawing, and dimension objects from the external reference, its nested external reference and from the host drawing in the host drawing.
Objects from external references are dimensioned in the same way and with the same dimension points as objects from the host drawing. You can create any level of nesting inside the external reference and still dimension all nested referenced objects. You will need the ability to dimension external references often when you are working in a project environment. For detailed information on using dimensions in a project, see "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293.
Associative Dimensions From Picked Points
For AEC objects that cannot have associative dimension points specified in the AEC dimension style, you can pick points on the object in the drawing to generate an associative dimension; points that are picked on the object remain associative to the object. You can pick either the base point of an object to dimension or any of its OSNAP points. For each point, you can additionally define an offset from the picked point to the dimension point, so that you can dimension virtually any point on an object. You can also pick a point on an object that can be set in the dimension style, in case you want to dimension a point that is not included in the style-based points. For example, if you want to dimension a recess in a wall with an individual dimension point, you can pick a point on the desired location on the wall.
NOTE You cannot pick associative points on AutoCAD objects.
1748 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
The following AEC objects can be dimensioned associatively only by picking points on them: Multi-view blocks
NOTE You cannot dimension multi-view blocks that have Xdata attached to them.
Curtain wall units AEC polygons Mask blocks 2D Sections/Elevations Entity references Layout curves 3D layout volumes
Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences
Use this procedure to specify dimension preferences before you add AEC dimensions to your drawing. Settings for AEC dimensions include the following:
Superscript for millimeters Dimension display unit Automatic rescale of existing AutoCAD® dimension styles Update behavior of points added or removed
1 Click Format menu Options. 2 Click the AEC Dimension tab.
Settings for AEC dimensions
3 Specify how dimension chains are updated when you remove or add dimension points:
If you want to...
Then...
update the display after every point you remove from or add select Update Added / Removed Points Immediately. to a dimension chain
update the display only after you have finished removing or clear Update Added / Removed Points Immediately. adding dimension points
For more information, see "Adding Non-Associative Dimensions from Picked Points to an AEC Dimension" on page 1762 and "Removing Object Points Set in the AEC Dimension Style" on page 1763.
Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences | 1749
4 Set the global behavior of manually overridden dimension values:
If you want to...
Then...
have an automatic underline for each manually overridden select Override Display of Underlined Text, and then select
dimension value
Underline All.
have no underline for any overridden dimension value
select Override Display of Underlined Text, and then select Underline None.
set underlines for each overridden dimension value manually clear Override Display of Underlined Text.
For more information, see "Overriding Dimension Values and Hiding Dimension Segments" on page 1770.
5 Under Units, for Dimension in, select the unit in which dimensions are to be displayed. This unit can differ from the drawing unit. For example, you can create a drawing in meters, but have the dimensions displayed in centimeters.
6 If meters or centimeters are your drawing units, and you want to display the millimeters as superscripted text, select Use Superscript mm.
Millimeters superscripted (left) and millimeters not superscripted (right)
7 If you do not want zeros at the end of superscripted numbers, select Trailing Zeros Suppression for Superscript. You can select this option only if you have selected Use Superscript mm.
Trailing zeros not suppressed (left) and suppressed (right)
8 Under Automatic Scale of AutoCAD Dimstyles, select the AutoCAD dimension styles to be rescaled when you change the drawing units.
For example, you change the drawing units from meters to millimeters. You have selected the AutoCAD dimension style "AEC-Dimension 1:100."
The following settings in the AutoCAD dimension style "AEC-Dimension 1:100" are rescaled:
Description
Variable
AutoCAD Dimstyle
Meters
Millimeters
Dimension line spacing
DIMDLI
0.5000
500.0000
Dimension line extension
DIMDLE
0.1250
125.0000
Extension line length
DIMEXE
0.1250
125.0000
Text offset from dimension line
DIMGAP
0.1000
100.0000
Dimension text height
DIMTXT
0.2000
200.0000
Creating AEC Dimensions Using AEC Dimension Tools
Tool palettes provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place AEC dimensions by selecting an AEC dimension tool with a specific AEC dimension style and other predefined properties. You can also use the AEC
1750 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
dimension tools to convert AutoCAD dimensions to AEC dimensions and to apply the settings of an AEC dimension tool to an existing AEC dimension. Tool palette containing AEC dimension tools
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample AEC dimension tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain AEC dimension tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain AEC dimension tools with AEC dimension styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating an AEC Dimension
Use this procedure to add a new AEC dimension that has the properties specified in the AEC dimension tool that you select. To specify settings when you add an AEC dimension, see "Creating an AEC Dimension with User-Specified Settings " on page 1751.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select the tool. You may have to scroll to display the desired tool.
2 Select the objects or points you want to dimension, and press ENTER. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 Click where you want to insert the AEC dimension.
Creating an AEC Dimension with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to create an AEC dimension with the settings that you specify. TIP To ensure that the Properties palette is displayed before you select a tool, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. An AEC dimension can include associative dimensions from objects, associative dimensions from picked points on objects, and non-associative dimensions from points anywhere in the drawing.
Creating an AEC Dimension | 1751
Associative wall dimensions Associative dimension picked on multi-view block
Non-associative dimension
NOTE Prior to Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, non-associative dimension points were marked by an AutoCAD point to which the dimension was linked or by a static point that was fixed in the drawing. Beginning with Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007, non-associative dimensions are created with a location grip connected to the dimension. If you open a drawing from a previous release of Autodesk Architectural Desktop, and it contains non-associative AEC dimensions, their dimension points are converted to location grips on the AEC dimension.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select an AEC dimension tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a style. 4 Specify which objects or points to dimension:
If you want to...
dimension objects specified in the AEC dimension style (creates an associative dimension)
Then...
select objects in the drawing that have been specified in the AEC dimension style.
dimension the base point of objects that cannot be set in select multiple objects of the object list in "Associative the AEC dimension style (creates an associative dimension) Dimensions From Picked Points" on page 1748.
dimension OSNAP points on objects (creates an associative verify that OSNAP is turned on. Enter p (Pick Points) on the
dimension)
command line, and select points on objects by snapping to
them.
dimension non-associative points in the drawing (creates a verify that OSNAP is turned off. Enter p (Pick Points) on the
non-associative dimension)
command line, and specify points in the drawing.
1752 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
NOTE During adding an AEC dimension, you cannot select objects specified in the style and non-associative points in the same command. You can however, once a dimension is added to the drawing, attach objects and points as necessary. For more information, see "Adding Points to an AEC Dimension" on page 1760.
5 Press ENTER. 6 Specify the style, position, rotation, and direction of the new dimension:
If you want to...
Then...
change the style of the AEC dimension
enter s (Style) on the command line, and press ENTER; then, enter the style name and press ENTER again.
insert the AEC dimension parallel or perpendicular to drag the cursor in the desired direction, and click at the desired
the dimensioned object
insertion point.
NOTE If your selection set contains objects with different directions, the direction of the first selected object defines the parallel and perpendicular directions.
insert the AEC dimension at a specified rotation
enter r (Rotation) on the command line, and press ENTER.Then, enter a rotation angle, either by clicking in the drawing or by entering it on the command line. Press ENTER, and click at the desired insertion point. Alternatively, pressing the SPACE bar rotates the dimension by 90°.
NOTE If your selection set contains objects with different directions, the rotation is calculated with reference to the first selected object.
insert the AEC dimension parallel to an object other than the dimensioned object in the drawing
enter a (Align) on the command line, and press ENTER. Then, select the object to which to align the AEC dimension. Press ENTER, and click in the drawing at the desired insertion point.
NOTE The direction of the AEC dimension is dependent on the rotation of the chosen object. The drawing direction of the object has no influence on the AEC dimension direction.
Use Cases for AEC Dimensions
AEC dimensions give you the freedom to dimension your model according to your needs. The following sections outline some frequently used use cases for your work with AEC dimensions.
Creating an Interior Dimension
Use this procedure to create an interior wall dimension. When you are dimensioning a set of interior walls and want to place the dimension inside the walls, you need a dimension without extension lines, as shown in the graphic below.
Use Cases for AEC Dimensions | 1753
Dimension string without extension lines
1 Create a single-component wall style for interior walls and define in the wall style that only one side of the wall component should be dimensioned. For detailed information, see "Specifying the Components of a Wall Style" on page 690.
2 Create an AEC dimension style that has the following settings: Single dimension chain: For detailed information, see "Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style" on page 1775. Wall width dimension "By Style:" This setting ensures that wall components will be dimensioned according to the points you have set in the wall style. For more information, see "Dimension Points for Walls" on page 1743 and "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777. Extension line length of 0. For detailed information, see "Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1778.
3 Use the AEC dimension style to dimension a set of interior walls in your plan, as described in "Creating an AEC Dimension with User-Specified Settings " on page 1751. Use the preview graphic to place the AEC dimension within the walls as desired. NOTE You can reposition the AEC dimension later with grips.
Dimensioning the Overall Building Length for Multiple Walls You can use any of the following methods to dimension the overall length of a building consisting of multiple walls.
You can use an AEC dimension style that is designed to create an associative dimension for the overall length of a building.
You can pick the outside points of the two outermost walls by snapping to them, and create an associative AEC dimension.
You can manually specify two points representing the outermost extents of the building and create a non-associative dimension to these points.
Dimensioning the outer length of a building with an AEC dimension style 1 Create an AEC dimension style that dimensions the outer length of all selected walls. For more information, see "Dimension Points for Walls" on page 1743 and "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777. 2 Select an AEC dimension tool with the style created in the previous step. 3 Select only those walls facing the direction where you want to create the AEC dimension, and insert the dimension in the drawing.
1754 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
TIP Do not select any walls that are perpendicular to the dimension. This creates additional unwanted dimension points. Dimensioning the outer length of a building with points picked on the walls
1 Select an AEC dimension tool, and verify that OSNAP is turned on. 2 Enter p (Pick Points) on the command line and press ENTER. 3 Select the two outermost snap points on the building you want to dimension. 4 Place the AEC dimension in the drawing.
TIP You can select the associative dimension points later and offset them from their original position on the wall. Dimensioning the outer length of a building with non-associative points
1 Select an AEC dimension tool, and verify that OSNAP is turned off. 2 Enter p (Pick Points) on the command line and press ENTER. 3 Specify two points in the drawing you want to dimension, press ENTER, and place the AEC dimension.
The points you selected are not associative to the walls in the building. If you move the walls, you have to move the location points accordingly to bring the dimension up to date.
Use Cases for AEC Dimensions | 1755
Dimensioning Wall Components in the Wall Length Wall components are a part of the wall width, not the wall length. To generate an AEC dimension that displays wall components in the wall length, you have to select the walls vertically intersecting the wall for which you want to dimension the components in the length.
Dimensioning wall components on wall length
Creating Dimensions to OSNAP Points When you are using an AEC dimension tool with the OSNAP setting turned on, and select ia point that snaps to an AEC object, you create a dimension point that is associated with the selected point on the object. For example, if you pick an Endpoint, then an associative dimension to the Endpoint of the object is generated. This allows you to create an AEC dimension that dimensions multiple associative points on one object. Example: Dimensioning a 2D Building Section A 2D building section is one of the objects for which dimension points can not be specified in the AEC dimension style. When you start an AEC dimension tool, and select a building section, its base point is the default dimension point. However, because you need at least 2 points to dimension you need to select 2 or more OSNAP points on the 2D section.
Dimensioning a 2D building section
1 Verify that OSNAP is turned on. 2 Select an AEC dimension tool. 3 On the command line, enter P (Pick Points). 4 Select the snap points on the 2D building section you want to dimension. 5 Press ENTER to create the dimension.
The OSNAP points you selected on the section object are inserted as associative points on the dimension. Creating Dimensions Associated with the Object Base Point When you create associative dimensions for points on objects for which dimension points cannot be set in the AEC dimension style, one associative point is created for each object you select. The point is placed at the base point of the object.
1756 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Example: Dimensioning Multi-View Blocks
Associative dimensions for multi-view blocks
1 Verify that OSNAP is turned off. 2 Select an AEC dimension tool. 3 Select at least 2 multi-view blocks. If you select only one, the dimension will display as a defect marker. 4 Insert the dimension in the drawing.
For each selected object, an associative dimension point is inserted at the base point of the object. Dimensioning Points in Multi-Chain Dimensions When you create a multi-chain dimension for which you select points in the drawing, the same points are included in every chain on the dimension. This may be the desired behavior in a case where you are dimensioning a point of reference that should appear on every chain. If you need a particular point on one chain only, you can do either of the following: Dimension multi-view blocks with a two-chain dimension
Delete the superfluous points by clicking their Remove grips. Add points to individual dimension chains, as described in "Adding Associative Dimensions from Picked Points
to an AEC Dimension" on page 1762and "Adding Non-Associative Dimensions from Picked Points to an AEC Dimension" on page 1762.
Use Cases for AEC Dimensions | 1757
Converting an AutoCAD Dimension to an AEC Dimension
Use this procedure to create an AEC dimension from an AutoCAD® dimension. For each AutoCAD dimension point, a non-associative AEC dimension point is created. The resulting AEC dimension has the properties of the AEC dimension tool you select. You can edit these properties after creating the AEC dimension.
For detailed information about non-associative AEC dimension points, see "Non-Associative Dimensions from Picked Points" on page 1742.
Converting an AutoCAD dimension to an AEC dimension
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Right-click an AEC dimension tool, and click Apply Tool Properties to AutoCAD Dimension. 3 Select the AutoCAD dimensions, and press ENTER. 4 Do one of the following:
If you selected one AutoCAD dimension to convert, proceed to Step 7. If you selected multiple AutoCAD dimensions to convert, proceed to Step 5.
5 Specify the position of the AEC dimension by clicking the desired position in the drawing. The AEC dimension can, for example, be placed above or below the object.
6 Do any of the following:
Drag the mouse to set the direction of the dimension. The extension lines are drawn into the opposite direction.
To place the AEC dimension perpendicular to a point in the drawing, enter perp (Perpendicular) on the command line, and specify the point the dimension is perpendicular to.
To set a user-specified angle for the AEC dimension, enter the desired angle on the command line.
NOTE The angle you specify here is calculated in relation to the UCS, and not to the dimensioned object.
7 When prompted to erase the original AutoCAD dimension, press ENTER to keep the AutoCAD dimension, or enter y (Yes) to erase it.
The resulting AEC dimension is displayed as follows:
If...
Then...
you selected only one AutoCAD dimension
the new AEC dimension is inserted at the same position as the AutoCAD dimension. If you did not erase the original AutoCAD dimension, the AEC dimension is placed on top of it.
you selected more than one AutoCAD dimension
the new AEC dimension is inserted according to your specifications from steps 6 and 7. If you did not erase the original AutoCAD dimensions, they remain in their original positions.
1758 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Copying Properties of AEC Dimensions to AutoCAD Dimensions
Use this procedure to copy the display properties of an AEC dimension to an AutoCAD® dimension without converting the AutoCAD dimension. In this case, a number of display attributes are changed while the functionality and behavior of the AutoCAD dimension are not changed.
NOTE When you copy the properties of an AEC dimension to an AutoCAD object dimension (DIMASSOC = 2), the associativity of the resulting AutoCAD dimension is lost. Therefore, copy properties to an associative AutoCAD dimension only as the last step in your drawing process, or use traditional, non-associative AutoCAD dimensions (DIMASSOC = 1).
The following dimension display properties are copied from the AEC dimension to the AutoCAD dimension:
AutoCAD dimension style: AEC dimensions have an underlying AutoCAD dimension style, defining settings for the dimension not explicitly set in the AEC dimension style. When you copy the properties of an AEC dimension to an AutoCAD dimension, the underlying AutoCAD dimension style of the AEC dimension is applied to the AutoCAD dimension. For detailed information about the connection between AutoCAD dimension styles and AEC dimension styles, see "AEC Dimension Styles and AutoCAD Dimension Styles" on page 1773.
Superscript settings: If you have specified superscripted millimeters for AEC dimensions, this is applied to the AutoCAD dimension. For more information about superscripts, see "Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences" on page 1749.
Extension line length: The extension length you have specified for your AEC dimension is applied to the AutoCAD dimension. When you copy the properties of an AEC dimension to an AutoCAD dimension that has a different extension line length, the definition points of the AutoCAD dimension are adjusted to the new length.
The AutoCAD dimension style and length of the extension lines are view-dependent settings. When you copy the properties of an AEC dimension to an AutoCAD dimension, the settings for the current view are applied.
1 On the command line, enter AecDimMatch. 2 Select the AEC dimension to copy properties from. 3 Select the AutoCAD dimensions to copy properties to. 4 Press ENTER.
Creating an AEC Dimension Tool
Use this procedure to create an AEC dimension tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own AEC dimension tools if you are placing multiple AEC dimensions of specific styles with additional AEC dimension properties that you want to be the same each time you add an AEC dimension of that type.
1 Open the tool palette where you want to create a tool.
2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from an AEC dimension in the drawing
select the AEC dimension, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from an AEC dimension style in the Style Manager
on the Format menu, click Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Open the other palette, and click Paste.
Copying Properties of AEC Dimensions to AutoCAD Dimensions | 1759
If you want to... copy a tool from a tool catalog
Then...
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the AEC dimension created from this tool, and click
OK. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides if you do not want to use the layer assignments specified
in the layer key style used in the drawing. 9 Select an AEC dimension style. 10 Select the drawing file containing the style used for this AEC dimension tool. 11 Click OK.
Editing AEC Dimensions
You can change the attributes of an AEC dimension, such as the objects and points dimensioned or the dimension display. You can add dimension points to an AEC dimension. You can reverse the dimension direction and manually change the length of extension lines. You can also move individual dimension text in crowded plans and override dimension values with "false" values. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers several methods for editing AEC Dimensions:
You can directly edit AEC dimensions using grips.
You can change AEC dimension settings on the Properties palette.
You can select editing commands from the context menu for the selected AEC dimension.
Adding Points to an AEC Dimension
You can add points to an AEC dimension in the following ways:
You can attach a new object to the dimension; if dimension points have been defined for that object type in the dimension style, corresponding associative points are added to the dimension.
You can add associative points to the dimension by picking base points or OSNAP points on AEC objects.
You can add non-associative points to the dimension by picking points selected anywhere in the drawing. These points are not connected to objects and are therefore not associative. To change their position, you need to move the location grips generated on the dimension.
When you attach an object for which dimension points have been specified in the AEC dimension style, the points are dimensioned and added to the appropriate dimension chains. For example, if you add a wall to an AEC dimension that has style settings for wall components in 2 chains, component dimensions are added to these 2 chains.
If an object is not specified in the AEC dimension style, you can either dimension the base point of the object or pick any of its OSNAP points as dimension points. These dimension points can be manually offset while retaining the associativity to the object. For example, you can dimension the base point of a multi-view block and offset the dimension from the base point. If the multi-view block is moved or rotated, the dimension moves and rotates with it while observing the offset.
To add non-associative dimension points in a drawing, you specify points, which are added as location grips, and are dimensioned on the selected dimension chain. When the location grip is moved, the dimension point is updated accordingly. Non-associative dimension points can be useful if you want to dimension a component not represented by an AEC object, like a property line, or AutoCAD objects like blocks.
1760 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Moving a non-associative location point and updating an AEC dimension
Adding Associative Dimensions to Objects Defined in the AEC Dimension Style Use this procedure to add associative dimensions by attaching an object for which dimension points have been defined in the AEC dimension style. Attaching objects to an AEC dimension
You can also attach AEC objects for which dimension points are not specified in the AEC dimension style. In that case, the base point of the selected object is added as a dimension point.
1 Select the AEC dimension to which you want to attach objects, and click the Add grip ( AEC dimension, right-click, and click Add Objects.
) or select an
2 Select the objects for which you want dimension points to be added to the AEC dimension, and press ENTER.
Any dimension points specified in the style for the selected objects are added to the chains of the AEC dimension.
If a selected object has no dimension points specified in the AEC dimension style, a dimension point is added at the base point of the object.
3 If you want to offset a dimension point from an object not specified in the AEC dimension style, select its location grip on the dimension, and move it to the desired location.
Adding Points to an AEC Dimension | 1761
Adding Associative Dimensions from Picked Points to an AEC Dimension Use this procedure to add associative dimensions to an AEC dimension by picking OSNAP points on an AEC object. Adding and offsetting non-style defined dimension point to an AEC dimension
1 Verify that OSNAP is turned on. 2 Select the AEC dimension to which you want to add associative points, right-click, and click Add Extension
Lines. 3 Select the AEC object OSNAP points you want to dimension.
NOTE OSNAP points on AutoCAD objects will be filtered out of the dimension. 4 Press ENTER. 5 Select the AEC dimension chain to which the points should be added. Adding Non-Associative Dimensions from Picked Points to an AEC Dimension Use this procedure to add non-associative points picked in the drawing to an AEC dimension. 1 Select the AEC dimension to which you want to add points, right-click, and click Add Extension Lines. 2 Select the points in the drawing that you want to dimension, and press ENTER. 3 Select the dimension chain to which the points should be added.
For each added point, a location grip is added at the end of the extension line, and the dimensions on the chain are updated.
Detaching Dimension Points from an AEC Dimension
You can detach dimension points from an AEC dimension. Detaching Objects from an AEC Dimension Use this procedure to detach objects from an AEC dimension. When you detach the object, all style-specified dimension points for the object are removed from the dimension.
1762 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Detaching objects from a dimension
1 Select the AEC dimension from which you want to detach objects, right-click, and click Remove Objects. 2 Select the objects to detach from the AEC dimension. 3 Press ENTER. The dimension points belonging to the selected objects are removed from the AEC dimension. Removing Object Points Set in the AEC Dimension Style Use this procedure to remove object points set in the AEC dimension style from an AEC dimension. Removing these dimension points creates an override to the AEC dimension style.
IMPORTANT Removing points from an object dimension is not identical to detaching an object from an AEC dimension. Even if you remove all extension lines pointing to dimensioned points on an object, the object is still invisibly attached to the dimension through the AEC dimension style. If you turn on the display component Removed Points Marker in the AEC dimension style, you can see that the object points still exist and can be restored. If you want to detach an object from an AEC dimension completely, use the procedure in "Detaching Objects from an AEC Dimension" on page 1762.
1 Select the AEC dimension from which you want to remove style-defined points.
2 Click the Remove grip (
) on the extension line of the point you want to remove.
Alternatively, you can select an AEC dimension, right-click, click Remove Extension Lines, and then remove the desired extension line.
3 Proceed to remove points.
NOTE Make sure to select only extension lines referring to objects that are specified in the AEC dimension style. Only these points can be restored later.
If you remove object points using the context menu, the behavior of the removal can differ according to your preference settings:
If the Update Added/Removed Points Immediately setting is selected, the selected points are deleted immediately.
If the Update Added/Removed Points Immediately setting is cleared, the selected points are deleted after you end the command.
For more information, see "Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences" on page 1749.
NOTE If the deleted points are still visible as a crossed circle, the display component Removed Points Marker is turned on. If you do not want the removed points marker to appear, turn off the component. For more information, see "Restoring Object Points Set in the AEC Dimension Style" on page 1764. When you remove multiple points, some removed points may reappear. This can happen when you have selected the option Update Added/Removed Points Immediately, and the entity display component Removed Points Marker is turned off. The reason for this behavior is that during your current removal operation, you accidentally selected an invisible removed point marker for a dimension point already removed. Removing an already removed point restores it. To avoid this effect, turn on the Removed Points Marker component in the entity display. For more information about turning components on and off, see "Changing the AEC Dimension Display Components" on page 1775.
Detaching Dimension Points from an AEC Dimension | 1763
Restoring Object Points Set in the AEC Dimension Style
Use this procedure to restore dimension points that have been removed from an AEC dimension and that are set in the AEC dimension style. Because the object points are set in the AEC dimension style, information about the type and position of the removed point is still present in the AEC dimension style.
1 Select the dimension chain on which to restore a removed object point.
2 Verify that the removed point is visible:
If... the point removed is still visible as a crossed circle
Then... proceed to step 9.
the point removed is not visible as a crossed circle
make it visible by following steps 3 through 9.
3 Right-click, and click Object Display. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation on which the changes should appear, and select Object Override.
The display representation in bold is the current one.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the Removed Points Marker component, and turn on the setting for Visibility. 9 Click OK twice.
The removed dimension point on the dimension chain is now visible as a crossed circle.
10 If necessary, select the AEC dimension again, right-click, and click Remove Extension Lines. 11 Click the center of the circle for the dimension points to restore.
If the Update Added/Removed Points Immediately setting is selected, the selected points are deleted immediately.
If the Update Added/Removed Points Immediately setting is cleared, the selected points are deleted after you end the command.
For more information, see "Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences" on page 1749.
Removing and restoring object points on an AEC dimension
Removing Non-Style Defined Dimension Points
Use this procedure to remove dimension points that are not set in the AEC dimension style from an AEC dimension. These can be points that are generated by picking object OSNAP points or by picking non-object associated points in the drawing. Unlike style-defined dimension points, they cannot be restored once they are deleted, however, you can recreate them if desired.
1764 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Removing a point from an AEC dimension
1 Select the AEC dimension from which to remove dimension points.
2 Click the Remove grip(
) on the extension line of each point to remove.
Alternatively, you can select an AEC dimension, right-click, click Remove Extension Lines, and then remove the desired extension line.
Reversing the Direction of an AEC Wall Dimension
You can reverse the direction of an AEC dimension that is associated with walls. Reversing the dimension direction can change the points on the wall that are dimensioned. For an AEC dimension to be reversible, these conditions must be met:
The dimensioned wall has either two interior or two exterior sides.
TIP If you want to reverse the dimensioned points on a wall with an interior and exterior side, you need to reverse the wall direction.
Wall components must be dimensioned on only one side, either on the positive or the negative side.
For example, if you dimension one side of a wall component of a wall that has two interior or two exterior sides, reversing the dimension direction will dimension the opposite side of the component. For information on defining the dimensioning of wall components, see "Defining the Dimension Settings for Wall Components" on page 695 and "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777.
Reversing the Direction of an AEC Wall Dimension | 1765
Reversing an AEC dimension
1 Select the dimension for which you want to reverse the direction, and click
.
Alternatively, you can right-click, and click Reverse.
Overriding Associative Wall Component Dimension Points
If you have specified wall component dimension points in the AEC dimension style, you can override individual component dimension points on the dimension so that they override their style settings. You can make the following overrides to a wall component dimension point:
Move a dimension point from one location on the component to another: For example, you can move a dimension point from the center of the component to the left side or to the right side.
Modify an existing wall component dimension
Move a dimension point from one component to another: For example, you can move a dimension point from the stud component to the gyp board component on the same wall.
1766 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Add a new dimension point for a component: You can add a dimension point to the edges or to the center of the selected component, in a case where this dimension point is not specified in the AEC dimension style or wall style.
Adding wall component dimension point
Remove overrides and revert back to the component dimension settings specified in the style. Overriding a component dimension
1 Select the AEC dimension on which you want to override a wall component dimension point.
2 Select the Override grip (
) for the desired component.
When you select the Override grip, the associated component is highlighted in the drawing.
3 Move the grip to the desired position on the component, or onto another component. A red temporary line shows you the position on the component.
Add a new dimension point for a component 1 Select the AEC dimension to which you want to add a wall component dimension point.
2 While pressing control, click the Override grip ( to the desired location.
) for the desired component, and drag the new point
You can add a dimension point in 3 locations on a component: the positive edge, the negative edge, and the center.
Modifying an overridden component dimension 1 Select the AEC dimension on which you want to modify a wall component override. 2 Select an overridden component dimension.
When a component dimension point is overridden, it is marked with a yellow grip ( ).
Overriding Associative Wall Component Dimension Points | 1767
3 Drage the grip to the desired position.
Remove overrides from a component dimension 1 Select the AEC dimension from which you want to remove a wall component dimension override. 2 Do one of the following:
If you want to...
Then...
move a component back to its style-defined position
drag the override grip (
) to the original position on the
component. When you release and re-select the grip its color changes
to cyan (
).
remove a component you have added through an
override
click the Remove Extension line grip ( ).
reset all overrides
right-click, and click Remove Override All Components.
Repositioning Dimension Texts, Extension Lines, and Dimension Chains
Use this procedure to reposition individual dimension texts, extension lines, and dimension chains on an AEC dimension.
The length of extension lines and the distance between dimension chains are set in the AEC dimension style, and are identical for all chains and all extension lines in the dimension. In some cases, you need to override those settings, and display varying extension lines or chain distances. Also, you might need to move individual dimension texts to a different location.
Viewing AEC Dimension Move All Chains and Edit in Place grips
AEC dimensions offer you the ability to change the display of a dimension with direct editing via grips.
NOTE You can only display and move the in-place grips of an AEC dimension if the underlying AutoCAD dimension style has the correct text placement settings. To ensure this, select the AEC dimension, right-click, and click AEC Dimension Style. Then,
select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override. If necessary, click , and click the Other tab. Click Edit, and in the Dimension Style Manager click Modify. Click the Fit tab, and select Over the dimension line, without a leader for Text Placement.
1 Select the AEC dimension on which to reposition individual texts, extension lines or dimension chains, and click its Edit In Place grip. The dimension now displays grip points for
individual texts individual extension lines individual dimension chains
Viewing AEC Dimension Edit In Place grips
2 Use the grips to reposition dimension texts, lengthen or shorten extension lines, and reposition dimension chains.
1768 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
NOTE Alternatively, you can select the AEC dimension, right-click, and click Edit In Place.
Resetting Repositioned Dimension Texts, Extension Lines and Dimension Chains
Use this procedure to reset repositioned dimension texts, extension lines and dimension chains. Repositioning text in a dimension
NOTE You can only reset those dimension texts that you have manually moved to a different place. If dimension texts are offset from their positions because they do not, for example, fit on the appropriate dimension segment, you cannot automatically reset them here. To make sure that your dimension texts are always placed on the dimension segment, set this in the underlying AutoCAD dimension style. Select the AEC dimension, right-click, and click AEC Dimension Style. Then, select the display
representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override. If necessary, click , and click the Other tab. Click Edit, and in the Dimension Style Manager click Modify. Click the Fit tab, and select Always keep text between ext lines under Fit Options.
1 Select the AEC dimension with repositioned components to be reset. 2 Set the components to their original positions:
If you want to...
Then...
set the extension lines to their style settings
Right-click, and click Remove Overrides All Extension Lines.
set the text strings to their original position
Right-click, and click Remove Overrides All Text Positions.
NOTE To reset the distance between dimension chains, set the distance between chains to the original value in the AEC dimension style. For information, see "Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1778.
Resetting Repositioned Dimension Texts, Extension Lines and Dimension Chains | 1769
Overriding Dimension Values and Hiding Dimension Segments
The dimension values in an AEC dimension are the real-life calculated values taken from the objects that are dimensioned. When the dimensioned object is updated, the dimension value is updated accordingly. In some cases you might want to override that value and exchange it for a manually inserted value. Overriding dimension text with a new value
In other cases, you might want to retain the original value, but supplement it with a prefix or suffix. Overriding dimension text with a suffix
Sometimes, you need to hide a dimension text or a whole dimension segment. Overriding dimension text by hiding text
Overridden dimension values can be marked in different ways: Each manually overridden value, hidden text, or prefixed/suffixed value, is marked by a short overline. For information on how to hide the overline, see "Hiding the Overline of Overridden Dimension Values" on page 1772. You can add an underline to each overridden value. For information, see "Hiding the Overline of Overridden Dimension Values" on page 1772. You can specify in the drawing setup to underline each override automatically. For information, see "Global Underline Options for Overrides" on page 1771.
When you manually override a dimension value, the correct automatic value still exists. You can remove the override, and restore the correct value again. Overriding Dimension Values Use this procedure to exchange an automatic dimension value for a manually inserted one, to add prefixes and suffixes to dimension values, and to hide dimension texts and segments.
1 Select the dimension on which to override a dimension value, right-click, and click Override Text & Lines. 2 Click the value to override.
1770 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
3 Specify the value override: If you want to... hide the selected dimension text hide the selected dimension segment override the dimension value
Then... select Hide Text. select Hide Text and Lines. enter a value for Text. NOTE You can enter all alphanumeric characters here.
mark an overridden value with an underline add a prefix to a dimension value add a suffix to a dimension value
select Underline Text. enter one for Prefix. enter one for Suffix.
4 Click OK.
Removing Overrides from Dimension Values Use this procedure to remove overrides from dimension values. The results of removing overrides are as follows:
Overridden values are reset to their correct value. Underlines and overlines are removed. Prefixes and suffixes are removed. Hidden text and hidden segments are redisplayed.
1 Select the dimension from which to remove an override, right-click, and click Override Text & Lines.
2 Click the value or segment from which to remove an override.
3 Click Remove Override.
4 Click OK.
Global Underline Options for Overrides Use this procedure to set the underlines of overridden dimension values globally in the drawing. Documentation guidelines of a company or regional office may require underlining all overridden dimension values. It would be cumbersome to underline each overridden value individually. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers you the ability to set underlining of overridden values as the default behavior. This means that whenever you override a dimension value, it is automatically underlined. Similarly, you might need a quick way to remove all underlines from a plan; for example, to create a preview sheet from a not-yet-finished plan. In this case, you can set global underlining instead of underlining or removing underlines from individual overrides.
NOTE The global underline setting is applied to existing overrides and new overrides.
1 On the Format menu, click Options. 2 Click the AEC Dimension tab. 3 Select Override Display of Dimensioned Text.
Overriding Dimension Values and Hiding Dimension Segments | 1771
4 Set the global underline behavior:
If you want to...
underline all overridden dimension values in the drawing, regardless of individual settings
Then... Select Underline All.
remove the underline from all overridden dimension values Select Underline None. in the drawing, regardless of individual settings
Hiding the Overline of Overridden Dimension Values
Use this procedure to hide the overline of overridden dimension values.
When you create an override for a dimension value--entering a different value, hiding a text or a segment, adding a prefix/suffix--the override is marked by a small overline above the changed value. The overline is useful for seeing at a glance which values have been overridden.It is also useful when you have hidden texts and segments, to select the hidden segment.
In some cases, however, you might want to hide the overline. The overline is placed on the DEFPOINTS layer, and by default is not plotted. If you want to hide it in the Autodesk Architectural Desktop session as well, you need to hide the DEFPOINTS layer.
1 In the Layer Properties toolbar, select the DEFPOINTS layer.
2 Click the light bulb icon to hide the layer.
NOTE Alternatively, you can hide the DEFPOINTS layer in the Layer Manager.
Changing the AEC Dimension Style
Use this procedure to change the style associated to an AEC dimension. AEC dimension styles contain information about the objects to dimension, the number of chains, and the display of the dimension. For information about how to define AEC dimension styles, see "AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1773.
1 Select one or more AEC dimensions and double-click one of them. 2 Expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select an AEC dimension style.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an AEC Dimension
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, text notes, and files to an AEC dimension. 1 Double-click the AEC dimension to which to attach information. 2 Click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. For more information about adding Hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" the AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the exact AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click the setting for Notes, and add a note. Then, click OK. 5 Click the setting for Reference Documents. 6 Attach or detach reference files:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then...
click
, select a file, and click Open.
1772 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
If you want to... edit the description of a reference file edit a reference file detach a reference file
7 Click OK.
Then... enter text under Description. double-click the reference file name to start its application.
select the file name, and click
.
AEC Dimension Styles
The AEC dimension style defines objects to dimension in the AEC dimension, and the display of the AEC dimension. You can create and edit AEC dimension styles, import and export AEC dimension styles between drawings, and purge AEC dimension styles that are not in use. When you create, purge, import, export, or edit styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop where you can work with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452. You can create an AEC dimension tool from any AEC dimension style. You can drag the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify default settings for any AEC dimensions created from the tool. For more information, see "Creating an AEC Dimension Tool" on page 1759.
AEC Dimension Styles and AutoCAD Dimension Styles
Every AEC dimension style has an underlying AutoCAD® dimension style, which controls settings that are not set directly in the AEC dimension style. The AutoCAD dimension style defines the following properties:
Color of dimension lines and extension lines Lineweight of dimension lines and extension lines Shape and size of dimension arrowheads Dimension text height and color Units, precision, and decimal separator symbol
The AEC dimension style defines the following properties:
Number of dimension chains Dimensioned objects Distance between dimension chains Fixed or variable extension lines Display of opening height dimensions
The AEC Dimension Style Wizard
There are two ways of editing a dimension style:
You can edit the dimension style in the Style Manager. The advantage of this method is that you can edit all AEC dimension style settings here.
You can edit the dimension style with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard. The advantage of this method is that you can edit the most important display settings of the style in a fast and uncomplicated way. However, you can not change all settings here; for example, the number of chains and the objects to dimension can be edited only with the AEC Dimension Styles Properties dialog box. For more information about the AEC Dimension Style Wizard, see "Changing Style Properties with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard" on page 1779.
AEC Dimension Styles | 1773
Creating AutoCAD Dimension Styles
You need to create an underlying AutoCAD® dimension style before you create an AEC dimension style. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop comes with a number of preset AutoCAD dimension styles specifically designed for use in AEC dimensions. To save time, look at these, to see if you can use them directly or with modifications. To create an AutoCAD dimension style for use with AEC dimension styles, be sure to specify the following settings:
Dimension line and extension line settings Arrowhead settings Text display settings Unit settings
1 On the Format menu, click Dimension Style. 2 In the Dimension Style Manager, click New. 3 Follow the instructions for creating a new AutoCAD dimension style, as described in "Use Dimension
Styles" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the exact AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
For more information about connecting the AutoCAD dimension style to an AEC dimension style, see "Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1778.
Creating an AEC Dimension Style
Use this procedure to create an AEC dimension style. You can create a new style with default style properties, or you can create a new style by copying an existing style. After you create the style, you edit the style properties to customize the characteristics of the style.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand AEC Dimension Styles.
3 Create a new AEC dimension style:
If you want to...
Then...
create a new style with default properties
right-click AEC Dimension Styles, and click New.
create a new style from an existing style
right-click the AEC dimension style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new AEC dimension style, and press ENTER.
5 To edit the style properties of your new AEC dimension style, select the style and edit it in the Style Manager tabs:
If you want to... change the Layer/Color/Linetype properties
Then...
see "Changing the AEC Dimension Display Components" on page 1775.
change the number of chains in an AEC dimension style
see "Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style" on page 1775.
specify objects and points to dimension change the AutoCAD® dimension style and other settings
see "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777.
see "Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1778.
1774 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
If you want to...
change an existing AEC dimension style with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard
add notes, files, or documents to the style
Then...
see "Changing Style Properties with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard" on page 1779.
see "Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Dimension Style" on page 1781.
6 When you have finished changing the AEC dimension style properties, click OK.
7 If you want to assign the style to an AEC dimension tool, drag the style from the Style Manager to a tool palette. You can later rename the tool and specify other properties for it as described in "Creating an AEC Dimension Tool" on page 1759.
8 Click OK.
Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style
Use this procedure to change the number of dimension chains in an AEC dimension style. To set the contents of chains, see "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777.
1 Open a tool palette that has an AEC dimension tool. 2 Right-click an AEC dimension tool, and click AEC Dimension Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Chains tab. 5 Enter the number of dimension chains to define for this dimension style. 6 Click OK twice.
Changing the AEC Dimension Display Components
Use this procedure to change the properties of the display components of an AEC dimension style. The following AEC dimension display components are available:
Display components of AEC dimensions Component AEC Dimension Group
Removed Points Marker
AEC Dimension Group Marker Override Text & Lines Marker
Description
Use this component only to turn the visibility of an AEC dimension on or off for a specific view. All the other settings, like color, linetype, and lineweight are specified in the underlying AutoCAD® dimension style; any changes you enter here are not displayed.
This component shows removed associative dimension points. Make it visible if you want to restore removed dimension points, as described in "Restoring Object Points Set in the AEC Dimension Style" on page 1764.
Marker of the dimension base point.
This component is displayed when a dimension segment is hidden or a dimension text hidden or overwritten. For more information, see "Overriding Dimension Values and Hiding Dimension Segments" on page 1770.
1 Open a tool palette that has an AEC dimension tool. 2 Right-click an AEC dimension tool, and click AEC Dimension Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style | 1775
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 8 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 9 Click OK twice.
Defining Dimensioned Objects in the AEC Dimension Style
In an AEC dimension style, you can define points on objects that are dimensioned associatively with this AEC dimension style. The points that are available for each object are dependent on the object features. For example, in a wall you can dimension length, width, wall components, and openings in the wall. In a window, you can dimension the maximum and minimum opening widths, and the window center. For a complete list of objects that can be specified in the AEC dimension style, see "Associative Dimensions from Objects" on page 1743. Each AEC dimension can have up to ten dimension chains. Each chain can contain dimension points for the objects specified in the style. For more information, see "Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style" on page 1775. Example 1: You create an AEC dimension style that contains only one chain. This chain contains wall lengths and wall intersections and the maximum opening width of openings within the wall. Single AEC dimension chain example
Example 2: You create an AEC dimension style designed exclusively to dimension walls, but the wall dimension points are distributed on four individual chains:
Chain 1 dimensions the wall lengths and the wall widths. Chain 2 dimensions the wall lengths, wall widths and wall intersections. Chain 3 dimensions only the wall lengths. Chain 4 dimensions the outer boundaries of all selected walls. Four AEC dimension chains example
Example 3: You create an AEC dimension style that dimensions the length of walls in a building on one chain, and a row of structural columns within the building on a second chain.
1776 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Two AEC dimension chains example
The following guidelines can help you to create AEC dimension styles: Create a separate dimension style for each use. For example, create a style that dimensions window assemblies and curtain walls, and another one that dimensions walls and openings in walls. Do not include too many dimension points in one dimension chain. Do not include too many objects within one dimension style.
Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles
Use this procedure to specify the objects and points to be dimensioned associatively in an AEC dimension style. 1 Open a tool palette that has an AEC dimension tool. 2 Right-click an AEC dimension tool, and click AEC Dimension Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override. 6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Contents tab. Selecting the contents of dimension chains
Under Apply To, you find the list of objects that can be dimensioned associatively. Refer to "Associative Dimensions from Objects" on page 1743 for a complete list of objects and their dimension points. Below the Apply To list, you find the list of available chains in this AEC dimension style. For information on changing the number of chains, see "Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style" on page 1775. 8 For Apply To, select a object you want to dimension.
Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles | 1777
Example: In the first chain, you want to dimension the length of walls and wall intersections. For Apply To, you select Wall.
9 Under Chains, select the chain on which the dimension points appear. Example: In the first chain, you want to dimension the length of walls. In the previous step, you selected Wall. Now, you select Chain 1.
NOTE "Selecting" in this context means highlighting the desired chain, and not selecting the check mark. The check mark is set automatically depending on whether dimension points for this chain are selected. Example: If you clear all possible dimension points for a chain, its check is automatically cleared.
10 On the right side, select the points to include in the highlighted chain. Example: In the first chain, you want to dimension the length of walls and wall intersections. In the previous steps, you selected Walls and highlighted Chain1. Now, you select the check box for Length of Wall and choose Wall Length. Then, you select the check mark for Wall Intersections.
NOTE Under Wall Width, you have two settings that override the AEC dimension style settings for the dimensioning of wall components: From Style and Structural from Style. If you select From Style, the dimensioning of wall components is done according to the settings in the wall style. If you select Structural from Style, the dimensioning of wall components is done according to the settings in the wall style, but takes into account only components that have been marked as Structural in the wall style. For information on setting the dimensioning of wall components in the wall style, see "Defining the Dimension Settings for Wall Components" on page 695.
11 Repeat steps 79 until your dimension contains all objects and points you want to dimension with this style.
12 Click OK three times.
Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles
Use this procedure to select the AutoCAD® dimension style underlying the AEC dimension style and these other settings that affect the appearance of the AEC dimension:
Distance between dimension chains Length of extension lines Dimension layer Display of height of openings
NOTE Activating the display of the opening height takes effect only if you select dimension points for openings in one or more chains of this dimension style. For information on selecting opening dimension points, see "Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1777.
1 Open a tool palette that has an AEC dimension tool. 2 Right-click an AEC dimension tool, and click AEC Dimension Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the Display Properties tab. 5 Select the display representation where you want the changes to appear, and select Style Override.
6 If necessary, click . 7 Click the Other tab. 8 To change the underlying AutoCAD dimension style of the AEC dimension style, select an AutoCAD
dimension style. 9 To edit the AutoCAD dimension style, click Edit.
1778 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
For more information about AutoCAD dimension styles, see "AEC Dimension Styles and AutoCAD Dimension Styles" on page 1773. To return to the Other tab in the Display Properties dialog box, click Close. 10 Specify the distance between the single dimension chains in the AEC dimension. Different distances between dimension chains
11 Specify whether you want fixed or variable extension lines. Fixed extension lines have the same length. Variable extension lines adapt to the outline of the object they dimension. AutoCAD dimensions use variable extension lines by default. Fixed extension lines (left) and variable extension lines (right)
12 If you select fixed extension lines, enter the length of the extension lines. Different lengths of extension lines
13 Specify whether to display the height of openings. NOTE This opening dimension is used specifically for European working plans, where you need a detailed description of measurements.
14 Click Layer to select the layer on which to place the AEC dimension and click OK. 15 Click OK twice.
Changing Style Properties with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard
Use this procedure to change a number of AEC dimension style properties with the help of a wizard. The AEC Dimension Style Wizard offers you a fast way of changing these properties of a style:
Arrowhead shape and size Length and color of extension lines Color of dimension lines Distance between dimension chains
Changing Style Properties with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard | 1779
Dimension text style, size, and color Rounding-off value Layer assignment
1 On the Format menu, click AEC Dimension Style Wizard.
2 Select the AEC dimension style to edit and click Next. IMPORTANT If you choose a dimension style that has its property source set to System Default, you get a warning message. If you want to edit the style, close the Wizard, open the style in the Style Manager, and set the display property source to a style override. For more information about working with the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
3 Select the display representation to change. NOTE If the AEC dimension style you choose to edit is based on the same AutoCAD® dimension style for different display representations, the edits you make apply to all display representations. To avoid this, make sure that the AEC dimension style uses different AutoCAD dimension styles for different display representations. For more information about assigning AutoCAD dimension styles to AEC dimension styles, see "Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles" on page 1778.
4 Specify line and arrow settings: Select new arrowhead symbols. Change the size of the arrowheads. Define a new length for the extension lines. Define a new distance between the individual dimension chains.
5 Click Next. 6 Specify text settings:
Select a new text style. Enter a new text height. Define a new round-off precision for dimension values. 7 Click Next. 8 Specify Color and Layer settings: Select a new text color.
1780 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Select a new dimension line color. Select a new extension line color. Select a new layer for the dimension.
9 Click Finish.
Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Dimension Style
Use this procedure to attach text notes and files to an AEC dimension style. 1 Open a tool palette that has an AEC dimension tool. 2 Right-click an AEC dimension tool, and click AEC Dimension Styles. 3 Select the style you want to edit. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the AEC dimension style, enter the description under Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Edit the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application. Click OK when you are done editing.
detach a reference file
select the file name, click Delete, and click OK.
9 Click OK twice.
Q and A for Working with AEC Dimensions
This topic contains questions and answers that can help you to achieve the results you want when working with AEC dimensions.
Changing Color,Text Size and Arrowheads How do I change the color, text size, and arrowheads of an AEC dimension?
Those settings are specified in the AutoCAD® dimension style that underlies the AEC dimension style. To access them easily, use the AEC Dimension Style Wizard. For more information, see "The AEC Dimension Style Wizard" on page 1773.
Updating AEC Dimensions On Demand How can I specify that AEC dimensions are updated only on demand?
If you freeze the layer on which an AEC dimension is placed, the AEC dimension is updated only when the layer is thawed again or if you execute the REGEN command. When you switch to another view, for example, a three-dimensional (3D) view, and then back to a Plan view, the AEC dimension is not updated. Freezing the dimension layer can enhance drawing performance, especially for big drawings. You can add new AEC dimensions even when the layer is frozen. However, you can edit them only after the layer has been thawed again.
Changing the Text Height of Superscripted Numbers How can I change the text height of superscripted numbers in an AEC dimension?
Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Dimension Style | 1781
By default, the text height of superscripted numbers in AEC dimensions is set to 50 percent of the text height of the underlying AutoCAD dimension style (DIMTXT). To change this default, you must change the corresponding value in the Registry file. WARNING Making changes in the Registry file can have far-reaching consequences for the whole application. Before you change anything here, make sure that this is what you really want to do. If you are not sure, consult your CAD manager or IT department.
1 Open the Windows Registry Editor. 2 Navigate to
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Autodesk\AutoCAD\R17.0\ACAD-5004:409\AEC\5.0\AecArchDACHBase50\ObjectDefaults\AEC Dimension\SuperscriptScaleFactor. 3 Enter the desired value. The value here is relative to the AutoCAD dimension text height (DIMTXT).
Fixing the Error Symbol The AEC dimension for a wall 1 meter high is displayed only with an error symbol. How can I get a correct dimension display?
The cut plane of the AEC dimension is taken from the cut plane of the dimensioned wall in the current display configuration. If the cut plane is set to a higher value, you must change it to include the lower wall into the dimension. For information on setting the wall cut plane, see "Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Wall Style" on page 701.
Finding More Dimension Points than Expected I am dimensioning the intersection points of walls and receive more dimension points than expected on the dimension. How can I check if this dimension is correct?
When you receive more wall intersection dimension points than you expect, it is possible that the walls you are dimensioning intersect with other walls that are not included in this dimension chain. To see if this is so, and if your dimension is correct, you can prolong the extension lines so that they actually meet the point they dimension. You can then verify that the dimension points on your chain are placed correctly.
1782 | Chapter 39 AEC Dimensions
Elevation Labels
40
Elevation labels are used to dimension height values in plan and section views.
1783
Elevation Labels
Elevation labels are used to dimension height values in plan and section views. They are a component of the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop dimensioning features, which include AEC dimensions, dimension labels and elevation labels. Elevation Labels and Coordinate Systems Elevation labels are interactive multi-view blocks used for dimensioning heights in a drawing. They are anchored to either the world coordinate system (WCS) or a named user coordinate system (UCS). Elevation labels are used primarily for measuring the heights of building elements like walls or windows, but they can be used to measure every point in your drawing. You can add elevation labels in plan and section views. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop offers a number of predefined blocks for commonly used elevation labels. You can also define your own elevation labels. When elevation labels are moved along the Z-axis, their Z-values change accordingly. Elevation labels can, however, be anchored only to a named UCS or the WCS; not to any building object. If the object height is changed, the value of the elevation label is not updated automatically. An elevation label measures the height of a point with relation to the reference height. The reference height can be taken from the Z-coordinate of the WCS or the Z-coordinate of a named UCS. Frequently used elevation labels
Using Elevation Label Tools to Create Elevation Labels
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place elevation labels using an elevation label tool with specific predefined properties. You can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change the properties. Tool palettes containing elevation label tools
1784 | Chapter 40 Elevation Labels
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample elevation label tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain elevation label tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog My Tool catalog
Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain elevation label tools with multi-view block definitions and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating an Elevation Label
Use this procedure to add a new elevation label that has the properties specified in the elevation label tool that you select. To specify settings when you add an elevation label, see "Creating Elevation Labels with User-Specified Settings" on page 1785.
1 Open the Annotation tool palette, and select an elevation label tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 Specify the insertion point of the elevation label. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 Click OK.
Creating Elevation Labels with User-Specified Settings
Use this procedure to add an elevation label with settings that you specify. 1 Open the Annotation tool palette, and select an elevation label tool. If necessary, scroll to display the tool that you want to use.
2 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point of the elevation label. You can move or hide the Properties palette to expose more of the drawing area.
3 Select the coordinate system for the elevation label:
If you want to...
Then...
select an existing coordinate system from the drawing
under UCS, select the coordinate system from the list.
create a new named user coordinate system (UCS)
click
(Define UCS), and define the new UCS on screen.
For more information about creating user coordinate systems,
see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD
help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
use the UCS of an existing elevation label
click
(Match UCS) and select the elevation label on
screen.
4 Enter the elevation value of your label.
The value you enter here is always calculated in relation to the coordinate system you have selected. When you redefine the coordinate system, the Z-value of the elevation label is recalculated accordingly.
Creating an Elevation Label | 1785
For example, you have a UCS named "First Floor," with its Z-origin at 3 m. When you insert an elevation label in WCS and set it to 2 m, and then change the coordinate system to "First Floor" the Z-value of the elevation label is changed to -1 m.
5 If necessary, enter a prefix and suffix for the elevation label.
6 Click OK.
Creating an Elevation Label Tool
Use this procedure to create an elevation label tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own elevation label tools if you are placing multiple elevation labels of a specific style and they all have the same properties.
Elevation labels consist of a multi-view block definition connected to a custom AEC command. Therefore, the process of creating an elevation label tool differs from the process of creating a regular object tool, like a door tool.
To create an elevation label tool, you need a multi-view block definition with a custom command that is placed in DesignCenterTM. Predefined elevation labels are available in DesignCenter, so check to see if the desired elevation label is already there.
If you find no elevation label meeting your needs, create one, as described in "Creating User-Defined Elevation Labels" on page 1788, and place it into AutoCAD DesignCenter.
From AutoCAD DesignCenter, you create an elevation label tool.
1 Open the AutoCAD DesignCenter and navigate to the folder containing the elevation label from which you want to create a tool.
2 Open the tool palette on which you want to add the elevation label tool.
3 Create the tool:
If you want to... create a tool from the AutoCAD DesignCenter
Then...
drag the desired elevation label from the AutoCAD DesignCenter to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the tool palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from a tool catalog
open the catalog in the Content Browser, and locate the tool you want to copy. Position the cursor over the i-drop handle, and drag the tool to the tool palette.
4 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 5 Enter a name for the tool. 6 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK twice.
Modifying Elevation Labels
You can change the attributes of an elevation label, such as the associated UCS or the scaling factor. You can change elevation label settings on the Properties palette. You can select editing commands from the shortcut menu for a selected elevation label.
Changing the Elevation of an Elevation Label
Use this procedure to change the value for the elevation of an elevation label. The value of an elevation label is always calculated in relation to the coordinate system of the label.
1 Select the elevation label you want to change, right-click, and click Elevation Label Modify. 2 Enter the new elevation value.
1786 | Chapter 40 Elevation Labels
3 Click OK.
Changing the Coordinate System of an Elevation Label
Use this procedure to change the coordinate system of an elevation label. For more information on how elevation labels are dependent on coordinate systems, see "Elevation Labels" on page 1784.
1 Select the elevation label you want to change, right-click, and click Elevation Label Modify. 2 Select a new coordinate system for the elevation label from the list. 3 Click OK.
Changing the Associated Multi-View Block Definition
Use this procedure to change the multi-view block definition associated to an elevation label. For information about multi-view block definitions and elevation labels, see "Creating User-Defined Elevation Labels" on page 1788.
1 Select the elevation labels you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Select a different multi-view block definition for Definition.
Changing the Scale Factor of an Elevation Label
Use this procedure to change the scale factor of an elevation label. 1 Select the elevation labels you want to change, and double-click one of them. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Scale. 3 Change the scale factor of the elevation label:
If you want to... change the X scale factor
Then... enter a new value for X.
change the Y scale factor
enter a new value for Y.
change the Z scale factor
enter a new value for Z.
Changing the Offset of an Elevation Label
Use this procedure to change the offset of the elevation label from its insertion point. When you add an elevation label to a drawing, the offset value is set to 0. You can change the position of the elevation label in the drawing by offsetting it from its original insertion point.
1 Double-click the elevation label you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced. 3 Click Insertion Offsets. 4 Select the view block for the appropriate view. For example, to change the offset in Plan 1:100, select a
view block to indicate that it belongs to that view (for example, ElevationLabel100). 5 Change the offset of the elevation label from its insertion point:
If you want to... change the offset from the X insertion point
Then... enter a new value for X offset.
change the offset from the Y insertion point
enter a new value for Y offset.
change the offset from the Z insertion point
enter a new value for Z offset.
6 Click OK.
Changing the Coordinate System of an Elevation Label | 1787
Display the View Blocks and Attributes of an Elevation Label
Use this procedure to display the blocks and attributes contained in an elevation label. An elevation label is created from a multi-view block definition which, in turn, is built from blocks and attributes. You can display the blocks and attributes to understand how the label is structured.
1 Double-click the elevation label for which to display blocks and attributes. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced. 3 Click Attributes.
In the Multi-view Blocks Attributes worksheet, the blocks from which your elevation label is composed are displayed. The list on the right shows the attributes of the blocks and their current values. For more information about multi-view blocks, blocks, and attributes, see "Creating User-Defined Elevation Labels" on page 1788.
NOTE Although you can edit the values in the list, those modifications are not applied; your modified values are overwritten by the values the elevation label gets from its coordinate system.
4 Click OK.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to an Elevation Label
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, text notes, and files to an elevation label. 1 Double-click the elevation label to which you want to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 To add a hyperlink, click the setting for Hyperlink, and specify the link. For more information, see "Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Click the setting for Notes, add a note, and then click OK. 5 Click the setting for Reference Documents. 6 Attach or detach reference files:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click
, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
enter text under Description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click
.
7 Click OK.
Creating User-Defined Elevation Labels
The Autodesk® Architectural Desktop templates provide a number of predefined elevation labels.You may, however, want to create specific labels that are not included in any of the templates.
1788 | Chapter 40 Elevation Labels
You can choose attributes for your own elevation labels, combine them into blocks, and create elevation labels from them.
Process Overview: Creating User-Defined Elevation Labels
Creating a user-defined elevation label consists of these basic steps:
Step 1: Determine the location of the property set definition of the custom label. Step 2: If necessary, create a new property set definition to use in the custom label. Step 3: Create a graphic symbol. Step 4: Add attributes from the property set definition to the drawing. Step 5: Create a block from the attributes. Step 6: Create a multi-view block from the block. Step 7: Add the elevation label to DesignCenterTM.
Creating a Graphic Symbol
Elevation labels usually consist of a graphic symbol and attributes that define elevation height and other information. You can create a graphic symbol with any of the drawing commands in AutoCAD®, or you can import a symbol from another drawing or from a symbol library. For information about drawing objects in AutoCAD, see "Create and Use Blocks (Symbols)" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Adding Attributes
Use this procedure to add attributes to an elevation label.
An elevation label usually contains attributes for displaying the elevation, prefixes, and suffixes.
Elevation label attributes come from a property set definition. Predefined attributes are available when you start with one of the templates, or when you start from scratch and drag a predefined elevation label from DesignCenterTM into the drawing.
Elevation label attributes Attribute/Tag ELEVATION ELEVATION:MM PREFIX
SUFFIX
Description
Displays the height of an elevation label in relation to the coordinate system chosen.
Displays the millimeters of the elevation value in superscript. You need this attribute only when working with metric units.
To enter a prefix for the elevation label, you must add this attribute. For more information about entering prefixes, see "Creating Elevation Labels with User-Specified Settings" on page 1785.
To enter a suffix for the elevation label, you must add this attribute. For more information about entering suffixes, see "Creating Elevation Labels with User-Specified Settings" on page 1785.
To use different attributes in elevation labels, create your own Property Set Definition for elevation labels. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
1 On the command line, enter ddattdef.
2 For Tag, enter one of the attributes from the table. For example, to create an attribute for the height of the elevation, enter -ELEVATION.
3 Proceed with creating the attribute. For more information, see "Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)" in AutoCAD help.
Creating a Graphic Symbol | 1789
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 Repeat steps 13 for each attribute you want to add to the elevation label.
Creating a Block
Use this procedure to create a block from the attributes you have created. 1 On the Draw menu, click Block Make. 2 Enter a name for the block. 3 Click Select Objects, and select the graphic symbol and the attributes to include in the elevation label. 4 For Insert Units, select Unitless. 5 Proceed with creating the block as described in "Block Definition Dialog Box" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Creating a Multi-View Block
Use this procedure to create a multi-view block for the elevation label. For detailed information about multi-view blocks, see "Multi-View Blocks" on page 1514.
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Multi-View Block Definitions. 3 Right-click Multi-View Block Definitions, and click New. 4 Enter a name for the new multi-view block definition. 5 Select the new multi-view block definition. 6 Click the View Blocks tab. 7 Select a display representation for the elevation label. 8 Click Add. 9 Select the block you defined in "Creating a Block" on page 1790, and click OK. 10 Select the view directions for the block. 11 Repeat steps 69 for each display representation where you want the elevation label to display. 12 Click OK.
Adding the Elevation Label to the AutoCAD DesignCenter
Use this procedure to add user-defined elevation labels to DesignCenterTM. To add the elevation label to AutoCAD® DesignCenter, you need to create a DWG file in the AEC Content Wizard. For a detailed description of the AEC Content Wizard, see "Using the AEC Content Wizard" on page 2014.
1 On the Format menu, click Create AEC Content to open the Create AEC Content Wizard. 2 Select Custom Command. 3 Select the multi-view block you created in "Creating a Multi-View Block" on page 1790, and click Add to add
it to the Content File. 4 On the command line, enter AecAnnoScheduleTagAdd, followed by a space and then the name of the
multi-view block, and its parameters. The command is built as follows:
1790 | Chapter 40 Elevation Labels
_AecAnnoScheduleTagAdd <name of the drawing containing the property set definition>.dwg _SYMBOL <name of the multi-view block created> _LEADER _None _DIMSTYLE _Current In our example, the custom command could look like this: _AecAnnoScheduleTagAdd ElevationLabelPropertySetDefs.dwg _SYMBOL ElevationLabelMVBlock _LEADER _None _DIMSTYLE _Current 5 Click Next. 6 Select Enable AEC Unit Scaling. 7 Select a layer key for the label. NOTE The default layer key for elevation labels is DIMLINE. 8 Click Next. 9 Enter a file name and a folder for the label. NOTE Be sure to save the custom label in a folder one level below the used property set definition drawing. If the property set definition drawing is saved in \\ADT 2007\enu\AEC Content\<Metric Imperial Metric DACH>\Documentation\Elevation Labels, then the custom label could be saved in \\ADT 2007\enu\AEC Content\<Metric Imperial Metric DACH>\Documentation\Elevation Labels\Custom Labels. 10 Click Finish.
Adding the Elevation Label to the AutoCAD DesignCenter | 1791
1792 | Chapter 40 Elevation Labels
Fields
41
A field is a multiline text object consisting of a field name and a field value which can be automatically updated to show the latest value for data that may change during the lifecycle of the project. Fields enhance the documentation capabilities within a drawing file and add value to the drawing data.
1793
Fields Overview
Fields are updatable data units within an Autodesk® Architectural Desktop drawing. Fields can be entered into the drawing as standalone multi-text elements, as components of AutoCAD text elements or table cells, as attribute values or as part of Architectural Desktop property set data. You can choose from a number of field types specific to architectural processes and tasks. For a complete list, see "Autodesk Architectural Desktop Field Types" on page 1803. You can update field values on demand or specify various automatic update mechanisms, for example updating a field when the drawing is opened or saved. For detailed information about AutoCAD field types, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics. You can use fields in the following drawing components: AutoCAD Text Elements You can insert fields into AutoCAD text, multi-line text, table cells and attributes. When you insert fields in attributes, you can create interactive annotation that displays sheet numbers, project details, and other important information. For an example, see "Creating New Callout Tools" on page 1910. Property Set Data Fields can be inserted in property set data. You can insert a field into a property set definition, thereby adding it to any object or object style to which the property set is attached. You can also insert a field in any manual property attached to an object or style, using the manual property as a placeholder for the field. Property set data can be used to create schedule tables of objects and drawings, or to build tags, annotation, and other content. Schedule reports can be placed in a Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing, or they can be exported to XLS, tab-delimited text, or comma-separated text. Annotation Tools Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides a number of predefined annotation tools that use different kinds of fields. For example, keynote tools use keynote fields, while callout tools use sheet set fields. You can also use fields to create your own annotation tools. For an example, see "Creating New Callout Tools" on page 1910. Callout tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop
1794 | Chapter 41 Fields
Inserting Fields
Fields can be inserted directly into drawings, or as components of other elements. When a field is inserted directly, it is entered as a multiline text element. You can also insert it in existing text and multiline text, tables cells, attributes, and property set definitions.
Inserting Fields in a Drawing
You can create field anywhere in a drawing. When a field is inserted directly, and not within another element, it is created as a multiline text element.
1 On the Insert menu, click Field.
2 Select a field category to choose from. 3 Select a field, and if necessary, specify additional information regarding this field.
For example, if you want to insert a Plot Date field, you need to specify the date format.
4 Click OK. 5 Insert the field in the drawing.
If you want to... insert the field directly
Then... click where the field should be inserted in the drawing area.
change the height of the field
enter h (Height) on the command line and press Enter. Enter the new height and press Enter again. Then, select the insertion point.
change the orientation of the preview cursor,
enter j (Justify) and press Enter. Enter the combination for the desired orientation, and press Enter. Then, select the insertion point.
Date field inserted in drawing
Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions
Use this procedure to insert a field in a property set definition. When you insert a field in a property set definition, the field will appear in the properties of any object or object style that has the property set attached.
NOTE Fields are always contained in manual properties.
Inserting Fields | 1795
Wall properties with keynote, date, and sheet number fields
For information on how to attach fields to an individual object's properties, see Inserting Fields in Object Properties. 1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 In the Style Manager, expand Documentation Objects, and then expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Either click an existing property set definition, or right-click, and click New. 4 Click the Definition tab.
5 Click
to create a manual property.
6 Enter a name for the manual property, such as Keynote.
7 Verify that DEFAULT is selected for Start With.
8 Click OK.
9 Verify that Text is selected for Type.
10 Right-click in the Default field, and select Insert Field.
1796 | Chapter 41 Fields
11 Define and insert the field and its format. If you want to insert a ... date/time, document, hyperlink, object, system variable, Diesel expression, or plot field project field sheet set field keynote field database field
Then... see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help.
see "Selecting a Project Field" on page 1804. see "Selecting a Sheet Set Field" on page 1806. see "Selecting a Keynote Field" on page 1808. see "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties
Use this procedure to insert a field placeholder in the properties of an individual object. You can add a field to the properties of an individual object by creating a manual property as a placeholder for the field, to be filled when necessary. This would be useful if you want to add information that is different for each object and needs to be updatable.
Creating the placeholder
1 On the Format menu, click Style Manager. 2 In the Style Manager, expand Documentation Objects, and then expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Either click an existing property set definition, or right-click, and click New. 4 Click the Definition tab.
5 Click
to create a manual property.
6 Enter a name for the manual property, such as LinkedFile.
7 Verify that DEFAULT is selected for Start With.
8 Click OK.
9 Verify that Text is selected for Type.
NOTE Do not enter any text in the Default field.
10 Click OK.
11 Double-click the object in the drawing, and on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette, click .
12 Select the property set containing the manual property, and click OK.
13 Right-click in the empty manual property, and click Insert Field.
Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties | 1797
14 Define and insert the field and its format. If you want to insert a... date/time, document, hyperlink, object, system variable, Diesel expression, or plot field project field sheet set field keynote field database field
Then... see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help.
see "Selecting a Project Field" on page 1804. see "Selecting a Sheet Set Field" on page 1806. see "Selecting a Keynote Field" on page 1808. see "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
15 Define and insert the field and its format.
If you want to...
Then...
insert a date/time, document, hyperlink, object, system see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help. variable, Diesel expression, or plot field,
insert a project field
see "Selecting a Project Field" on page 1804.
insert a sheet set field
see "Selecting a Sheet Set Field" on page 1806.
insert a keynote field
see "Selecting a Keynote Field" on page 1808.
insert a database field
see "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
In this example, you would likely insert a hyperlink to another file. selecting Linked for Field category and then selecting a file as the hyperlink.
Adding Fields to Object Style Properties
Use this procedure to add fields to object style properties. Once a field has been inserted into a property set, you can add the field to an object style by attaching the property set to the style. All objects of that style will then have the property set attached.
1 Create a property set definition containing the necessary fields, as described in Inserting Fields in ADT PSDs.
2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager.
3 In the Style Manager, expand Architectural Objects, and expand the object type for which you want to add a field.
4 Click an existing object style.
5 Click the General tab, and click Property Sets.
1798 | Chapter 41 Fields
6 Click click
.
7 Select the property set that contains the field.
8 Click OK three times.
NOTE You can view and edit the style property set data on the object's Properties palette, just like the object property set data. To edit property set data from a style on the Properties palette, click the worksheet button (
).
Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements
You can insert fields in the following types of AutoCAD text elements:
Text Multiline text (mtext) Attributes Table cells
Inserting Fields in AutoCAD text Use this procedure to insert fields into AutoCAD text elements. For information on creating text elements, see "Create Single-Line Text" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the AutoCAD text in which you want to insert a field. 2 Right-click, and click Text Edit. 3 Right-click at the point within the text where you want to insert a field, and click Insert Field. 4 Define and insert the field and its format.
If you want to insert a ...
Then...
date/time, document, hyperlink, object, system variable, Diesel expression, or plot field
see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help.
project field
see "Selecting a Project Field" on page 1804.
sheet set field
see "Selecting a Sheet Set Field" on page 1806.
keynote field
see "Selecting a Keynote Field" on page 1808.
database field
see "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Multiline Text Use this procedure to insert fields into AutoCAD multiline text. For information on creating Multiline text elements, see "Create Multiline Text" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the AutoCAD multiline text in which you want to insert a field.
Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements | 1799
2 Right-click, and click Mtext Edit.
3 In the Multiline Text Editor, right-click within the Text at the point where you want to insert the field, and click Insert Field.
4 Define and insert the field and its format.
If you want to insert a ...
Then...
date/time, document, hyperlink, object, system variable, Diesel expression, or plot field
see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help.
project field
see "Selecting a Project Field" on page 1804.
sheet set field
see "Selecting a Sheet Set Field" on page 1806.
keynote field
see "Selecting a Keynote Field" on page 1808.
database field
see "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Attributes Use this procedure to insert fields into AutoCAD attributes. Attributes are often used to provide design and documentation content for tools. When combined with graphics, they can be used as annotation symbols.
Field attributes in callout symbol
1 On the Format menu, click Blocks Define Attributes. 2 Enter a name in the Tag field.
3 Under Value, click
.
4 Define and insert the field and its format.
If you want to insert a ... date/time, document, hyperlink, object, system variable, Diesel expression, or plot field
Then... see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help.
1800 | Chapter 41 Fields
If you want to insert a ... project field sheet set field keynote field database field
Then... see "Selecting a Project Field" on page 1804. see "Selecting a Sheet Set Field" on page 1806. see "Selecting a Keynote Field" on page 1808. see "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Table Cells Use this procedure to insert fields into AutoCAD table cells. For information on creating AutoCAD tables, see "Create and Modify Tables" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Select the AutoCAD table cell in which you want to insert a field. 2 Right-click, and click Edit Cell Text. 3 Right-click, and click Insert Field. 4 Define and insert the field and its format.
If you want to insert a...
Then...
date/time, document, hyperlink, object, system variable, Diesel expression, or plot field
see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD help.
project field
see "Selecting a Project Field" on page 1804.
sheet set field
see "Selecting a Sheet Set Field" on page 1806.
keynote field
see "Selecting a Keynote Field" on page 1808.
database field
see "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
Editing Fields
Use this procedure to edit a field. Fields can be contained in AutoCAD text, multiline text (mtext), table cells, attributes, property set definitions, object properties, and object styles. For information on inserting fields, see "Inserting Fields" on page 1795. When you edit a field, you can change the field value, the field category, and the field format.
1 Navigate to the field you want to edit.
If you want to... edit a field in AutoCAD text
Then...
select the text element, right-click, and click Text Edit. Then, select the field, right-click, and click Edit Field.
edit a field in multiline text
select the multiline text element, right-click, and click MText Edit. In the Multiline Text Editor, select the field, right-click, and click Edit Attribute.
edit a field in an attribute
select the tool or block containing the attribute field, right-click, and click Edit Attributes. In the Enhanced Attribute Editor, select the field value, right-click, and click Edit Field.
edit a field in a table cell
select the table cell, right-click, and click Edit Field.
Editing Fields | 1801
If you want to... edit a field in a property set definition
edit a field in an object style
edit a field in the properties of an object
Then...
open the property set definition in Style Manager, and click the Definition tab. Select the field property. Right-click the field value in the Default field, and click Edit field.
open Style Manager and open the style. On the General tab, click Property Sets. In the Edit Property Set Data worksheet, select the field value you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Field.
select the object and double-click it. In the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. Select the field value you want to change, right-click, and click Edit field.
2 Change the field as necessary.
The editable parameters of a field vary depending on the type of field. In date related fields, for example, you can change the date format of the field.
If you want to... change the field category
Then...
select a new the category under Field category, and then select a new field under Field name.
change the field
select a new field under Field name.
change the field formatting
select a different format under Format.
3 Click OK.
Editing the Field Display
You can choose if you want to display a field in your drawing with a grey background rectangle or with a transparent background. A grey background helps you identify field values within your drawings easily. In some cases however when you want to display the field value just like other text or attribute values, you can turn off the grey background.
Field display with grey background (left) and transparent (right)
1 On the command line, enter FIELDDISPLAY.
1802 | Chapter 41 Fields
2 Select a value for the display of field backgrounds. To display the background of a field value in grey, enter 1. To display the background of a field value as transparent, enter 0.
TIP By default the field display value is set to 1.
Updating Fields
Use this procedure to update a field manually. By default fields are updated automatically when the drawing is opened, saved, plotted, regenerated, or sent via e-transmit. For more information, see "Update Fields" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
If you have changed that default, or want to update a field without performing any of the operations listed above, you can do so by updating the field manually.
1 Navigate to the field you want to update. Fields can be contained in AutoCAD text, multiline text (mtext), table cells, attributes, property set definitions, object properties, object styles., and project details. For information about inserting fields in text components, see "Inserting Fields" on page 1795.
2 Select the field, right-click, and click Update Field.
Converting Fields to Text
Use this procedure to convert a field to text.
NOTE This procedure cannot be reversed.
1 Navigate to the field you want to convert to text. Fields can be contained in AutoCAD text, multiline text (mtext), table cells, attributes, property set definitions, object properties, object styles., and project details. For information about inserting fields in text components, see "Inserting Fields" on page 1795.
2 Select the field, right-click, and click Convert Field to Text.
Autodesk Architectural Desktop Field Types
There are a number of field types that have been created specifically for Autodesk Architectural Desktop users. These fields are generated by information from Architectural Desktop projects, keynotes, and databases connected to an Architectural Desktop drawing.
Project Fields
Autodesk Architectural Desktop has a number of fields for project-specific information. You could use project fields for example in title blocks on plotting sheets. The following project-specific fields are available in Autodesk Architectural Desktop:
Project Name Project Number
Updating Fields | 1803
Project Description
Project Location
Project Details: When you create a project, you can create user-defined detail categories and details relevant to the project. These details can be inserted as fields into the drawing. For information on creating project details, see "Adding Project Details" on page 182.
Number of Levels
Number of Divisions
Selecting a Project Field
Use this procedure to select a project field to insert into a drawing. 1 Open the Field dialog box from one of the following components:
If you want to... insert a project field into a text element
Then... see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements" on page 1799.
insert a project field into a multiline text (mtext) see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Multiline Text" on page 1799. element
insert a project field into an AutoCAD table cell see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Table Cells" on page 1801.
insert a project field into an attribute definition see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Attributes" on page 1800.
insert a project field into a property set definition see "Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions" on page 1795.
insert a project field into an object property
see "Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties" on page 1797.
insert a project field into an object style
see "Adding Fields to Object Style Properties" on page 1798.
2 Under Field Category, select AEC Project.
Under Field Names, all project-related fields are displayed. 3 Select the field you want to insert. 4 If you have selected Project Details, you need to select the detail from the categories listed under Project
Information. 5 Under Format, select a text format for the field. You can choose between Uppercase, Lowercase, First Capital,
and Title case. 6 Click OK.
Sheet Set Fields
Autodesk Architectural Desktop has a number of fields for sheet set information.
1804 | Chapter 41 Fields
NOTE Sheet set fields can be used for Autodesk Architectural Desktop project sheet sets and for AutoCAD sheet sets. For information about Autodesk Architectural Desktop project sheet sets, see "Plotting Sheets" on page 258. For information about AutoCAD sheet sets, see "Work with Sheets in a Sheet Set" in AutoCAD help.
The following sheet set fields are available: Current Sheet Custom: You can select an AutoCAD custom property defined for the current sheet here.
NOTE When you are working with an Architectural Desktop project sheet set, you will in most cases use Project Details instead of Custom Properties.
Current Sheet Description Current Sheet Number Current Sheet Number and Title Current Sheet Set Current Sheet Set Custom: You can select an AutoCAD custom property defined for the current sheet here. Current Sheet Set Description Current Sheet Subset Current Sheet Title Sheet Set: You can select any sheet from a sheet set as the field content here. Available sheet properties for display
are the sheet title, sheet number and sheet description. Sheet Set Placeholder: In the Sheet Set Placeholder field category, you can define a field as a placeholder for sheets
and sheet views. You often use that functionality in callouts referenced to model space views, that are later referenced into sheets. The field placeholder in the callout is resolved when the model space view is linked into a sheet. For more information, see "Creating New Callout Tools" on page 1910. The following fields are available as placeholders:
Sheet Number and Title Sheet Title Sheet Number Sheet Description Sheet custom: You can select an AutoCAD custom property defined for the referenced sheet here. (Model Space) View Number and Title (Model Space) View Title (Model Space) View Number (Model Space) Viewport Scale
NOTE The fields for sheet title, sheet number, sheet description, view title, and view number can be associated with a hyperlink that jumps to the sheet or model space view referenced.
Sheet Set Fields | 1805
Callout symbol with sheet set placeholder
Resolved sheet set placeholders
Selecting a Sheet Set Field
Use this procedure to select a sheet set field to insert into a drawing. 1 Open the Field dialog box from one of the following components:
If you want to... insert a sheet set field into a text element
Then... see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements" on page 1799.
insert a sheet set field into a multiline text (mtext) element
see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Multiline Text" on page 1799.
insert a sheet set field into an AutoCAD table cell see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Table Cells" on page 1801.
insert a sheet set field into an attribute definition see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Attributes" on page 1800.
insert a sheet set field into a property set definition
see "Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions" on page 1795.
insert a sheet set field into an object property see "Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties" on page 1797.
insert a sheet set field into an object style
see "Adding Fields to Object Style Properties" on page 1798.
2 Under Field Category, select SheetSet.
1806 | Chapter 41 Fields
Under Field Names, all sheet set-related fields are displayed. 3 Select the field you want to insert. 4 If you have selected CurrentSheetSetCustom or CurrentSheetCustom, select the desired property under
Custom property name. 5 If you have selected SheetSet, you can select any sheet set and any sheet to be displayed in the field. You
can insert the sheet set or sheet field as a hyperlink, so that clicking on the field in the drawing will open the sheet or sheet set associated to the field. If necessary, browse to a different sheet set. 6 If you have selected SheetSetPlaceholder, select the correct placeholder under Placeholder Type. NOTE The fields for sheet title, sheet number, sheet description, view title, and view number can be created as a hyperlink that jumps to the sheet or model space view referenced.
7 Under Format, select a text format or data format for the field. 8 Click OK.
Keynote Fields
Keynoting is a consistent way of annotating the different types of drawings in a set of construction documents to identify building materials or to provide special instructions or explanations. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a flexible tool-based method of inserting keynotes that are linked to a keynote database and thus can be modified globally as well as individually. This method supports both reference keynoting (where the keynote key corresponds to a section in an accompanying specification and may appear on different drawings) and sheet keynoting (where keynote keys are sequentially numbered for each drawing). Autodesk Architectural Desktop supplies pre-specified keynotes for its size-specific default detail components and for architectural objects that represent assemblies with multiple components (for example, 8" CMU wall). In cases where no keynotes are pre-specified, you can configure a keynote insertion tool containing a keynote field. Keynotes with field
Keynote Fields | 1807
The following keynote fields are available in Autodesk Architectural Desktop:
Reference Key only Reference Note only Reference Key and Note Sheet Key only Sheet Note only Sheet Key and Note
You can also insert keynote fields as placeholders that are filled in when they are connected to a building object. For detailed information on keynotes, see "Keynoting Tools" on page 1857.
Selecting a Keynote Field
Use this procedure to select a keynote field into a drawing. 1 Open the Field dialog box from one of the following components:
If you want to...
Then...
insert a keynote field into a text element
see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements" on page 1799.
insert a keynote field into a multiline text (mtext) see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Multiline Text" on page 1799. element
insert a keynote field into an AutoCAD table cell see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Table Cells" on page 1801.
insert a keynote field into an attribute definition see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Attributes" on page 1800.
insert a keynote field into a property set definition
see "Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions" on page 1795.
insert a keynote field into an object property see "Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties" on page 1797.
insert a keynote field into an object style
see "Adding Fields to Object Style Properties" on page 1798.
2 Under Field Category, select AEC Keynotes.
Under Field Names, all keynote-related fields are displayed. 3 Under Field Names, select the type of keynote field you want to insert. 4 Click Select Keynote to select a keynote from a database. 5 If you want to insert pre-specified keynotes or prompt for manual keynote selection when the keynote is
inserted, select Insert as placeholder. 6 If you have selected Reference Key and Note or Sheet key and Note, select a keynote format. 7 Under Format, select a text format for the keynote field.
1808 | Chapter 41 Fields
8 Click OK.
Database Fields
Database fields allow the user to insert a formatted cell from a database into a drawing. A database field consists of a single field of a query or table in a database. This enables users to work with data in a full database environment, creating reports, queries, links to other databases, and link that data into any drawing.
Supported Data Types
The following data types are supported in Architectural Desktop database fields:
Text Memo Date/Time Integer Real Boolean
All other data types are ignored and will not display in the drawing. Supported Database Providers and Data Sources The following database providers are supported in Autodesk Architectural Desktop:
Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider (Access) Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers
These database providers let you link to the following data sources:
Microsoft Access database (MDB) Microsoft Excel file (XLS) Microsoft Text file (TXT, CSV)
The database fields support secure databases in as far at the Microsoft Data Link feature supports them. They may need to encrypt the connection information so as to prevent the wrong users from inadvertently gaining knowledge of the passwords.
The database fields support multi-user access.
Selecting a Database Field
Use this procedure to select a database field to insert into a drawing. 1 Open the Field dialog box from one of the following components:
If you want to...
Then...
insert a database field into a text element
see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements" on page 1799.
insert a database field into an multiline text (mtext) element
see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Multiline Text" on page 1799.
insert a database field into an AutoCAD table cell see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Table Cells" on page 1801.
insert a database field into an attribute definition see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Attributes" on page 1800.
insert a database field into a property set definition
see "Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions" on page 1795.
insert a database field into an object property see "Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties" on page 1797.
Database Fields | 1809
If you want to... insert a database field into an object style
Then... see "Adding Fields to Object Style Properties" on page 1798.
2 Under Field Category, select AEC Database.
3 Under Field Names, select DatabaseField.
4 To select an existing database link file (UDL), click
.
In the Select Data Link dialog box, browse for the required UDL file.
5 To create a new database link file (UDL), click
.
For more information, see"Creating a Data Link to an ODBC Source" on page 1811
6 Under Path Type, specify whether you want a full path to the database or a relative path. 7 Under Select a table or query from the database, select a table or query.
To select a database table, expand Tables and click on the desired table entry. To select a database query, expand Queries and click on the desired query.
8 Under Select a record and a field from the table, select the database field you want to insert in the drawing.
NOTE You can preview the database field value in the static text field on the top right of the Field dialog. You can preview the field expression under Field expression at the bottom of the dialog.
9 Under Format, select a text format. If you have selected a field or query that does not retrieve a text string, you can format the value with an existing property data format.
10 Click Set From Property Data format.
11 Select a property data format, and click OK. The settings of the selected property data format are copied to the format codes in the field.
12 Click OK to insert the database field in the drawing.
1810 | Chapter 41 Fields
Creating a Data Link to an ODBC Source
You can link data from a number of data sources to an Autodesk Architectural Desktop drawing. You can use the following database providers for linking to data sources:
Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider (Access) Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers
These database providers let you link to the following data sources:
Microsoft Access database (MDB) Microsoft Excel file (XLS) Microsoft Text file (TXT, CSV)
NOTE The instruction below describes the process of creating a link to a data source from a Microsoft Excel file. In the same way, can create data links to Microsoft Access databases, plain ASCII text files, and comma-separated files.
1 Open the Field dialog box from one of the following components:
If you want to... insert a database field into a text element
Then... see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements" on page 1799.
insert a database field into an multiline text (mtext) element
see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Multiline Text" on page 1799.
insert a database field into an AutoCAD table cell see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Table Cells" on page 1801.
insert a database field into an attribute definition see "Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Attributes" on page 1800.
insert a database field into a property set definition
see "Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions" on page 1795.
insert a database field into an object property see "Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties" on page 1797.
insert a database field into an object style
see "Adding Fields to Object Style Properties" on page 1798.
2 Under Field Category, select AEC Database.
3 Under Field Names, select DatabaseField.
4 Click
.
5 Click the Provider tab.
Creating a Data Link to an ODBC Source | 1811
6 Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers, and click Next. 7 In the Connection tab, click Use connection string.
8 Click Build.
9 Click New to build to a new DSN file.
10 In the Create New Data Source dialog box, select the Microsoft Excel Driver (*.xls). NOTE The other supported drivers here are Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb) and Microsoft Text Driver (*.txt, *.csv). You can use these to create a link to an Access database, a plain ASCII text file, or a comma-separated file.
11 Click Next.
1812 | Chapter 41 Fields
12 Enter a name for the new DSN file, and click Next. 13 Confirm that your data source settings are correct, and click Finish.
14 In the ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup dialog box, select the version of Microsoft Excel that the DSN file should support.
15 Click Select Workbook.
16 Select an XLS file that should be used as your data source, and click OK three times until you are back in the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box.
The Microsoft Excel file you have selected as your data source is displayed under Connection String. 17 To verify that the connection to the data source is working correctly, click Test Connection. 18 Enter a user name and optionally a password for the database connection. 19 Under Enter the initial catalog to use, select the Excel file from the drop-down list. 20 Optionally, you can click the Advanced tab to define network and permission settings. 21 If you have selected a data source on a network server, you can define the network settings. 22 Define the access permissions for the data source. 23 Optionally, you can click the All tab to view and edit the OLE DB initialization properties available for the
selected OLE DB provider.
Creating a Data Link to an ODBC Source | 1813
24 Click OK. 25 In the Field dialog box, the selected Excel file is displayed as the data source.
You can select data tables and entries as described in "Selecting a Database Field" on page 1809.
1814 | Chapter 41 Fields
Detail Components
42
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop uses a tool-based system for managing the components that make up detail drawings. In addition to the wide selection of pre-configured detail component insertion tools provided on the sample tool palettes and in the Sample Palette Catalog, an extensive database of components can be accessed through the Detail Component Manager. These components can be inserted directly into a drawing, or dragged and dropped onto tool palettes. All tools can be customized and are fully integrated with the keynoting feature. You can also use your own databases.
1815
Understanding Detail Components
Detail components represent specific building materials and products, and are made up of simple two-dimensional (2D) linework entities such as lines, polylines, arcs, circles, and hatches. In most cases, the detail component is a collection of such entities grouped as a block, which can be easily copied or moved like a single entity. The following are examples of detail components that are inserted as blocks:
Bolt heads
Fixed-length nails
Section views of beams and columns
Most section views of framing members
Units such as CMUs, bricks, and pavers
Connectors
Materials with views generated from interrelating parameters; for example, trusses, precast concrete, and hollow metal frames
Other detail components are inserted as loose linework entities if they represent material of variable length, amorphous shape, or something that would likely be cut or otherwise modified in the field. This is the case for views showing the length of a material, such as framing members, sheathing material, or fasteners, for which the detail component database does not include a fixed-length table.
Detail components are inserted into drawings parametrically, using a tool that prompts you for the information needed to perform the drawing routine associated with a particular component. Once inserted into a drawing, the components are largely static: although they can be rescaled or repositioned using Properties palette settings, they do not have object-like intelligence that allows for parameter modifications to the extent that architectural objects do. You can, however, perform various editing operations on detail components using the tools available from the context menu.
The Detail Component Manager provides a centralized location for storing and accessing detail components. Its filter mechanism lets you quickly locate a particular component in a database. You can then insert the component directly into a drawing, or, if you are likely to use it frequently, you can drag and drop it onto a tool palette for even more convenient access.
Many detail components are also available as tools on the default Detailing tool palettes, which can be transferred to the workspace from the Sample Palette Catalog. You can also create a tool by dragging a detail component from a drawing and dropping it onto a tool palette. Because detail component tools can be moved between tool palettes and tool catalogs, or copied over the Internet using i-drop functionality, they are easily shared by project team members. Tools can be modified using the associated Tool Properties worksheet. You can also apply detail component tool properties to any linework within a drawing so that it can be reference-keynoted according to the organizational system you are using.
In addition to the database supplied with the software (based on the CSI MasterFormat ) you can add and access your own detail component databases as needed (see "Configuring Detail Component Database Availability" on page 1846). The Detail Component Manager includes a wizard that lets advanced users define the drawing routines and other parameters required to add new component tables to a database.
Inserting Detail Components
All detail components are inserted into drawings using the same basic tool, which performs the insertion routine associated with a selected component. Each detail component tool provided on the sample tool palettes represents a different configuration of the basic tool. You can activate the detail component insertion tool in five different ways:
Select a component in the Detail Component Manager, and click Insert Component (or double-click the component).
Click a detail component tool icon on a tool palette.
Drag and drop a detail component tool from a Content Browser tool catalog directly into a drawing.
Select a component in a drawing, right-click, and click Add Selected. This reruns the tool with the same property settings used to insert the existing component, so that you can quickly insert additional copies of the same component.
1816 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Select a component in a drawing, right-click, and click Replace Selected. This erases the selected component and reruns the tool with the same property settings used to insert the erased component; however, you can modify the tool to insert a different component by changing the Component properties (Category, Type, Description, or View) on the Properties palette.
Once the tool is activated, the procedure for inserting the detail component varies according to the type of material or product the component represents and the viewing direction. Some components are available only in one viewing direction. For example, a backfill component, such as gravel, is always oriented for a section view. On the other hand, a steel beam component is available in elevation view, section view, and plan view. The different drawing routines involve different prompts for user input. When depicting a variable-length material with a repeating pattern, such as corrugated sheet metal, you need to specify the start point and endpoint. In the case of bricks, you have the option of specifying a number of courses. For other products, such as screws or bolts, you may want to flip or rotate the component to change its orientation. The procedures described in the following sections offer examples of the basic insertion routines and options for detail components.
Stamp Components
Use this procedure to insert detail components that may need to be depicted multiple times at a particular orientation, such as nails or screws. In this example, the tool for inserting a steel beam has the View property set to Section.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for the component using any of the methods described under "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
2 Click an insertion point in the drawing area to insert the component at the default orientation, or select one of the following options:
If you want to... specify a different base point
Then...
enter b (for Base point), select the new base point, and press ENTER to insert the component using the new base point.
change the default orientation angle of the component
enter r (for Rotate), and then either enter the number of degrees to rotate the component in a counterclockwise direction, or manually rotate the component to the desired angle and click to set the new orientation. Click again to insert the component at the specified angle.
flip the component along its X axis enter x (for Xflip), and click to insert the component.
flip the component along its Y axis enter y (for Yflip), and click to insert the component.
3 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to "stamp" additional copies of the component, either at the default orientation or as specified in Step 2.
Steel beam component inserted at default orientation
Linear Array Components
Use this procedure to insert detail components that consist of a pattern repeated as a linear array, such as shingles or corrugated sheet metal. In this example, the tool for inserting corrugated sheet metal has the View property set to End, but the same user prompts are displayed if the View setting is Side.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for the component using any of the methods described under "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
Stamp Components | 1817
2 Click a start point in the drawing area to insert the component at the default orientation, or select one of the following options:
If you want to...
Then...
flip the component along its X axis
enter x (for Xflip), and then click to specify the starting point for the component.
flip the component along its Y axis
enter y (for Yflip), and then click to specify the starting point for the component.
position the component to the left of enter l (for Left), and then click to specify the starting point for the component. the baseline when drawn vertically
position the component to the right of enter r (for Right), and then click to specify the starting point for the component. the baseline when drawn vertically
center the component on the baseline enter c (for Center), and then click to specify the starting point for the component. when drawn in any direction
3 Click the desired endpoint to insert the component. Corrugated sheet metal in end view
Backfill Components
Use this procedure to insert backfill detail components, such as gravel or soil, that are positioned within a boundary provided by existing linework or an existing object. In this example, the tool for inserting Undisturbed Soil has the View property set to Section, which is the only view available for this type of component.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for the component using any of the methods described under "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
2 Select the object you want to be the boundary for the backfill.
3 Click within the boundary of the selected object to insert the backfill component.
Backfill component inserted within polyline boundary
1818 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Bookends Components
Use this procedure to insert detail components, such as louvers and vents, that consist of a pattern repeated as a linear array but bounded by unique items at each end. In this example, the tool for inserting louvers has the View property set to Section, which is the only view available for this type of component.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for a particular component.
2 Click a start point in the drawing area to insert the component at the default orientation, or select one of the following options:
If you want to...
Then...
flip the component along its X axis
enter x (for Xflip), and then click to specify the starting point for the component.
flip the component along its Y axis
enter y (for Yflip), and then click to specify the starting point for the component.
3 Specify the desired endpoint to insert the component. Bookends component inserted in section view
Countable Linear Array Components
Use this procedure to insert detail components that need to be depicted multiple times in a linear array, such as bricks. In this example, the tool for inserting bricks has the View property set to Section. The same prompts are displayed if the View setting is Plan. If the setting is Elevation, the prompts described under "Stamp Components" on page 1817 are used. If the setting is Elevation (Pattern), the prompts described under "Backfill Components" on page 1818 are used.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for the component using any of the methods described under "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
2 Click an insertion point in the drawing area.
3 Orient the component image, and then click to insert it, or select one of the following options:
If you want to... flip the component along its X axis
Then... enter x (for Xflip), and then click to specify the insertion point for the component.
Bookends Components | 1819
If you want to...
Then...
flip the component along its Y axis
enter y (for Yflip), and then click to specify the insertion point for the component.
insert a specific number of components enter c (for Count), enter the number of units to insert, and click to specify the starting point for the array. Note that the x and y options are still available at this point.
4 Orient the component or the array of components, and then click to complete the insertion. Course of bricks inserted in section view
Surface Components
Use this procedure to insert rectangular detail components of a specific depth that have a hatch, such as base courses. In this example, the tool for inserting the base course has the View property set to Section, which is the only view available for this type of component.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for the component using any of the methods described under "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
2 Specify a start point in the drawing area to insert the component at the default orientation, or select one of the following options:
If you want to...
Then...
flip the component along its X axis
enter x (for Xflip), and then click to specify the starting point for the component.
flip the component along its Y axis
enter y (for Yflip), and then click to specify the starting point for the component.
position the component to the left of enter l (for Left), and then click to specify the starting point for the component. the baseline when drawn vertically
position the component to the right of enter r (for Right), and then click to specify the starting point for the component. the baseline when drawn vertically
center the component on the baseline enter c (for Center), and then click to specify the starting point for the component. when drawn in any direction
1820 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
3 Click the desired endpoint to insert the component. Base course inserted in section view
Dynamically Sized Surface Components
Use this procedure to insert rectangular detail components, such as concrete joists or slabs with metal decking, for which you determine the dimensions. In this example, the tool for inserting a concrete slab with metal decking has the View property set to Plan. If the setting is Section or Elevation, the prompts described under "Linear Array Components" on page 1817 are used.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for the component using any of the methods described under "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
2 Specify the first corner of the rectangle. 3 Specify the opposite corner to insert the component.
Concrete slab in plan view
Bolt Components
Use this procedure to insert bolt components when you need to specify the distance between the bolt head and the nut. In this example, the tool for inserting the bolt has the View property set to Side. If the setting is Head or Nut, you are not prompted to perform the first two steps.
1 Activate the detail component insertion tool for the component using any of the methods described under "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
2 Specify the center bearing point for the bolt head. 3 Orient the component image, and then specify the center bearing point for the nut to insert the component.
Dynamically Sized Surface Components | 1821
4 If desired, you can "stamp" additional components into the drawing at the same orientation, or you can change the orientation for subsequent insertions:
If you want to...
Then...
specify a different base point
enter b (for Base point), select the new base point, and press ENTER to insert the component using the new base point.
change the default orientation angle of the component
enter r (for Rotate), and then either enter the number of degrees to rotate the component in a counterclockwise direction, or manually rotate the component to the desired angle and click to set the new orientation. Click again to insert the component at the specified angle.
flip the component along its X axis
enter x (for Xflip), and click to insert the component.
flip the component along its Y axis
enter y (for Yflip), and click to insert the component.
Bolt inserted in side view
Editing Detail Components in a Drawing
Once a detail component has been inserted into a drawing, you can edit the component using the AEC Modify Tools option on its context menu. (For detailed instructions on using these tools, see "Detail Drafting Tools" on page 1481.) Using these tools on block-based detail components creates unique block definitions for edited inserts, so that the edits will not affect inserts of the same block in other locations. However, if you use the context menu option Edit Block in-place to edit a block definition used in multiple locations, you can use the Copy Block Definition and Assign option (also on the context menu) to create a unique block definition for the block insert you want to edit.
You can view and modify certain properties of a detail component by clicking Properties on its context menu. The following illustrations show examples of the Design and Extended tabs of the Properties palette for a detail component. You can modify many of the settings on the Design tab by inserting text or through an associated drop-down list. On the Extended Data tab, you can specify hyperlinks, insert text notes, or set references using the worksheet icons under Documentation, but the Component data is read-only, as it displays live data from the detail components database.
NOTE When either the Add Selected or Replace Selected context menu option is selected, the Component data is displayed on the Design tab of the Properties palette (instead of the Extended Data tab) and is modifiable. For more information on these two options, see "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
1822 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Detail component Design properties
Detail component Extended Data properties
Using Detail Component Tools
Like other Autodesk® Architectural Desktop tools, the tools for inserting detail components offer great flexibility in the ways you can create, customize, store, and apply them. This section includes topics that pertain to the configuration and management of these tools. For descriptions of the various ways to insert detail components using these tools, refer to "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
Adding Detail Component Tools to a Tool Palette
Tools for inserting specific detail components can be added to a tool palette from three main sources: the Detail Component Manager, the Content Browser, and linework in a drawing. Creating Tools from the Detail Component Manager Use this procedure to drag and drop a selected detail component from the Detail Component Manager to a tool palette in the workspace, thus instantiating the basic detail component insertion tool for that component).
Using Detail Component Tools | 1823
1 Open the tool palette to which you which you want to add a detail component tool. 2 On the Insert menu, click Detail Component Manager (or right-click any detail component tool, and click
Detail Component Manager). The Detail Component Manager
3 Navigate the tree view or use the Filter mechanism to display the desired detail component in the table at the bottom of the dialog box. (To view the entire contents of large component tables, you can use the vertical scroll bar to the right of the table.)
4 Click the selector column to the left of the desired table row, and drag the selected component to the tool palette. You can now use the tool to insert the component into a drawing. For more information, see "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
Copying Tools from the Content Browser Use this procedure to copy a detail component insertion tool or a palette of tools from the Sample Palette Catalog in the Content Browser to your tool palettes set in the workspace. Most of these palettes are also included on the sample tool palettes set available in the workspace, but this catalog in the Content Browser serves as a backup tool repository and a source of tools you can customize without changing tools that are already on a workspace palette. Generally these tools are preset to insert a particular type and size of component, but once they are on a palette in the workspace, they can be customized to insert a different size of component, or even a component in a different category. For more information, see "Modifying Detail Component Tools" on page 1825. The same basic procedure can be used to copy tools or palettes from catalogs you create to hold tools that are preconfigured and grouped for particular projects.
1824 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Content Browser showing Details palettes in Sample Palette Catalog
1 Confirm that your tool palettes set is open in the workspace. If you want to copy a particular tool to a particular palette, make sure that palette is open.
2 From the Windows menu, select Content Browser. 3 Double-click the Sample Palette Catalog in your catalog library. 4 Double-click the Detailing folder. 5 Click the i-drop® icon for the palette (or double-click the palette, and click the i-drop icon for a tool on
that palette), and then drag the palette or tool onto the open palette in the workspace. If you are copying an entire palette from the Content Browser, a new palette is added to the set. Creating Tools from Linework in a Drawing You can create a detail component insertion tool from linework in a drawing simply by dragging and dropping the linework onto a tool palette. The linework can be a detail you have drawn using two-dimensional (2D) AutoCAD® commands, or it can be a detail component inserted from a tool or from the Detail Component Manager. Once added to the tool palette, the new tool can be renamed or otherwise modified through its Tool Properties worksheet. For more information, see "Modifying Detail Component Tools" on page 1825.
Modifying Detail Component Tools
Detail component tools on a tool palette in the workspace can be modified through the Tool Properties worksheet. You access the Tool Properties worksheet by right-clicking the tool and clicking Properties. To modify a tool in a catalog in the Content Browser, you must first copy the tool to a palette in the workspace. The appearance of the Tool Properties worksheet varies depending on the type of component and the current configuration of property settings. The following illustrations show two configurations of the Tool Properties worksheet for the 04 - Masonry tool that is included on the sample Basic tool palette. The tool is set to add standard 3/8" joint brick in both cases, but the first configuration has the View property set to Section, while the second has this property set to Elevation (Pattern). For detail components that can be oriented differently in different views, the View setting determines the particular drawing routine used to insert the image into the drawing. Note that the different View settings result in different orientation illustrations on the worksheet. Note also that the Mortar specifications are not applicable for the Elevation (Pattern) setting and are not displayed for that configuration. The properties displayed under Specifications may also vary depending on other settings. For example, if the Show Mortar property is No when the View setting is Section, no other Mortar properties are displayed. For some detail components, no Specifications apply, and the heading is not displayed.
Modifying Detail Component Tools | 1825
Detail component Tool Properties worksheet configurations
The following table describes the Tool Properties worksheet categories and settings that are common to most detail component insertion tools.
Property/Category Name Image Name
Description
Description
Displays the image specified for the component in its table in the database. If no image is specified, then the image for the table is displayed. You can right-click the image and click Refresh Image to recall the stock image for the tool from the database, or you can right-click and click Specify Image to browse for a different image.
The name of the tool. This may be the name originally assigned to one of the tools on the sample palettes, or, if you have copied the tool from the Detail Component Manager, it is the name specified in the Description column of its parent size table. Note that the name is not updated if you change the Category, Type, or Size properties under Component. However, you can edit the name.
This is the tool description used if the tool is published to a catalog. You can change this description by clicking the worksheet icon to open a Description editing box.
1826 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Property/Category Name Component
Category Type Description View
Specifications
Description
Clicking the worksheet icon on this line accesses the Detail Component Manager through the Select Component dialog box and allows you to change the settings for the Description, Description and Type, or Description, Type, and Category. Note that if you change the Category setting, the Name, Description, and Image properties are not updated automatically.
Specifies the group or subgroup that is the parent of the table containing the component specified by the Description property. If other groups or subgroups exist at the same hierarchical level within the same parent group, they are selectable from a drop-down list.
Specifies the table containing the particular component specified by the Description property. A drop-down list lets you select other tables within the same parent group or subgroup.
Specifies a particular component of the specified Type and Category. Other components within the same table can be selected from the drop-down list.
Specifies the type of view for which the component is oriented. Possible values are Section, Plan, Elevation, and Elevation (Pattern). For components such as bolts, component-specific terminology is used, such as Head, Side, Bolt, or Nut. A drop-down list is present if more than one view is applicable for the specified component. This setting determines the drawing routine and the command line prompts for the insertion process. For more information, see "Inserting Detail Components" on page 1816.
Clicking the icon on this line displays of an image depicting the orientation at which the detail component will be inserted (determined by the View property). Other properties displayed here provide the top-level parameters required to insert the component with the specified View setting. For components with only one possible View setting, no Specification properties are displayed.
Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework
Linework that you have drawn using two-dimensional (2D) AutoCAD commands can be keynoted using a keynoting tool to select a keynote from the database. If you have multiple occurrences of the linework, and you want them to have the same keynote, you can specify a keynote by applying the properties of the detail component for which the desired keynote is already specified. If a tool for inserting the component already exists, you can apply the tool properties to the linework. If no such tool exists, you can use the DtlComp and ASsign commands to select a component from the Detail Component Manager and assign its properties to the linework.
Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework from a Tool
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a detail component insertion tool to linework in a drawing so that the linework can be keynoted with the keynote of the component the selected tool inserts.
1 Draw the linework.
2 Right-click a tool on a tool palette, and click Apply Detail Component Data to Linework.
3 Select the linework, and press ENTER.
The linework can now be keynoted just as if it were a component inserted using the selected tool.
Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework from the Detail Component Manager
Use this procedure to apply the properties of a selected detail component to linework in a drawing so that the linework can be keynoted with the keynote for that component.
1 Draw the linework.
2 On the command line, enter DtlComp.
3 Enter as (for ASsign).
4 Select the linework, and press ENTER.
5 In the Select Component dialog box, select the component whose properties you want to assign to the linework, and click Select Component. For more information, see "Locating a Detail Component" on page 1828. The linework can now be keynoted just as if it were a component inserted directly from the Detail Component Manager.
Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework | 1827
Using the Detail Component Manager
Using the Detail Component Manager dialog box, you can navigate among different detail component databases. A hierarchical tree view and a filter feature make it easy to locate individual components within a database. Once you find the component you need, you can insert it into a drawing, or you can drag and drop it onto a tool palette for repeated use. Note that the five buttons arranged vertically in the middle of the dialog box are unavailable unless you have edit privileges for the selected database. For more information, see "Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases" on page 1830.
You can access the Detail Component Manager in the following ways:
On the Insert menu, click Detail Component Manager.
Right-click any detail component insertion tool on a tool palette in the workspace, and then click Detail Component Manager.
On the Tool Properties worksheet for a detail component tool, click the worksheet icon ( line.Enter DtlComp or ASsign at the command line.
) on the Component
NOTE When accessed from the Tool Properties worksheet, the Detail Component Manager is displayed in read-only mode, and the dialog box is titled "Select Component." The hierarchical tree view is expanded to highlight the component currently specified for the tool, and the component table is open at the bottom of the dialog box. Note also that the Insert Component button is replaced by a Select Component button.
The Detail Component Manager dialog box
Locating a Detail Component
Use this procedure to locate a detail component in the Detail Component Manager dialog box (or the Select Component dialog box, if accessed from a Tool Properties worksheet, or by using the DtlComp and ASsign commands).
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu or the context menu of a detail component tool, or open the Select Component dialog box by clicking the worksheet icon on the Component line in a Tool Properties worksheet.
2 For Current detail component database, select a database from the drop-down list. The database provided with the software is the AEC Detail Component database (AecDtlComponents(US).mdb), which is based on the CSI MasterFormat standard. You may also access other locally installed databases. For more information, see "Configuring Detail Component Database Availability" on page 1846.
1828 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
3 Navigate to the detail component table level of the hierarchy for the selected database using either of the following methods: Expand nodes in the hierarchical tree view until you reach the table level; then select a table name to display its contents in the grid at the bottom of the dialog box. Expanding detail component hierarchy nodes manually
Type a word or character string in the Filter box, and then click the adjacent Filter button, or press Tab, or press ENTER. This expands all nodes under any node whose name includes the string you entered, and displays the component table for the first table name that contains that string. This is a quick way to navigate to a component whose name you know, but it may expand multiple groups or subgroups in multiple divisions. If you know the division or group containing the component table you want, it is faster to expand the nodes yourself. Using the Detail Component Manager filter
Locating a Detail Component | 1829
4 Once the components for the selected table are displayed in the bottom panel of the dialog box, you can use the vertical scroll bar or your mouse scroll wheel to locate a particular component. Clicking anywhere on a row selects that component. Note that the number of column headings varies from one component table to another. For some tables, you need to expand the window or use the horizontal scroll bar to view all columns.
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop uses Microsoft® Access for its detail component databases. You can create and modify detail component databases using Microsoft Access directly if you are familiar with that product and with the structure of detail component databases. (For more information, see "Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components" on page 2037.) If you have edit privileges, you can also create and modify detail component databases through the Detail Component Manager, without using Microsoft Access. Nonetheless, before attempting advanced edits using the Detail Component Manager, you should be familiar with the schema for detail component databases, as described in the above-referenced topic.
NOTE If you are working in a multi-user environment, it is recommended that you modify a keynote database only when no other users are accessing it.
Detail Component Manager edit controls
Editing Detail Component Database Properties Use this procedure to edit a component in a detail component database.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Right-click the root node in the tree view, and click Edit.
1830 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
The Details Database Properties dialog box is displayed for the selected database.
5 Edit the following database properties as applicable.
Property Name
Description/Instructions
Image
Right-click the Image box, and click Specify Image to browse images available for the selected group in the location specified by its Path Key value. The image you select will be displayed on the Image tab of the Detail Component Manager when the database node is selected. This is an optional field.
Display Name
The name from the database Fingerprint table.
Description
The description displayed for this database on the Information tab in the Detail Component Manager. This is an optional field.
Author/Manufacturer
The name of the person or other entity responsible for this database. This is an optional field.
Web Address
The URL for the author/manufacturer. This is an optional field.
6 Click OK.
Editing Groups in a Detail Component Database Use this procedure to edit a component group in a detail component database.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the group you want to edit.
5 Right-click the group, and click Edit.
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1831
The Component Group Properties dialog box is displayed.
6 Edit the following properties as applicable:
Property Name Image
Description/Instructions
The image displayed on the Image tab of the Detail Component Manager when this group is selected. To change the image, right-click the Image box, and click Specify Image to browse images available for the selected group in the location specified by its Path Key value. This is an optional field.
Group Name
The name from the database Groups table displayed for this group in the Detail Component Manager.
Path Key
An entry from the database DirKeys table, this value is a shortcut alias identifying the location of drawing and image files external to the database for this group.
Filter Keywords
A comma-delimited list of keywords to be used when searching for components within this group in the Detail Component Manager. This is an optional field.
7 Click OK.
Editing Components in a Detail Component Database
Use this procedure to edit the properties of individual components within a detail component database. The properties on the General and Parameters tabs of the Component Properties dialog box are the basis for one or more recipes the software uses to draw the component in different views. Each recipe specifies the type of jig, or drawing routine, for placing the component in a specific view. The recipe may also contain information pertaining to layer and hatch pattern (for more information, see "Recipe Specifications" on page 2043). You can also use this procedure to customize components in the default imperial and metric detail component databases supplied with the software, or to edit components in databases that you create.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the component you want to edit.
5 Right-click the component, and click Edit.
1832 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
The Component Properties dialog box is displayed. The read-only ID field shows the database identifier for the group to which the component belongs. In most cases, you can edit values on the General tab and the Parameters tab within this dialog box. For components that use a jig other than one of the six supported types (Stamp, Bookends, Linear Array, Surface, Surface Linetype, and Surface Top), no parameters are displayed on the Parameters tab. For information on editing this type of component, see "Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components" on page 2037.
6 On the General tab, edit the following values as applicable:
Property Name
Description/Instructions
Image
The image displayed on the Image tab of the Detail Component Manager when this component is selected. To change the image, right-click the Image box, and click Specify Image to browse images available for the selected group in the location specified by its Path Key value. This is an optional field.
Display Name
The name displayed for this component in the Detail Component Manager.
Table Name
The name of the size table for this component, as specified in the TableName field in the database Components table.
Units
The unit of measurement for this component.
Recipe
The name of the RecipeSpec XML file containing the recipes for drawing this components.
Description
The description displayed for this component on the Information tab in the Detail Component Manager.
Keynote
The default keynote key for this component. Click Select Keynote to browse for or create a different keynote. This is an optional field.
Filter Keywords
A comma-delimited list of keywords to be used in searching for this component. This is an optional field.
Author/Manufacturer
The name of the person or other entity responsible for this component, as specified in the Author field in the database Fingerprint table. This is an optional field.
Web Address
The address specified in the URL field in the Fingerprint table for the database containing this component. This is an optional field.
Date Created
This read-only property shows the creation date for the component if it was created using the Detail Component Manager.
Date Modified
This read-only property shows the date of the last modification for this component if it was modified using the Detail Component Manager.
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1833
7 If the Parameters tab is available for the selected component, you can change the jig type, if desired, and then edit parameter values according to the instructions following the illustration below. You can also
change the specified view by renaming it (click
), or you can create additional views by clicking
. Any views you create or rename are then available from the drop-down list.
NOTE You can specify only one jig type for each view.
To define a recipe using this jig type... Stamp Bookends Linear Array Surface Surface Linetype Surface Top
See...
"Parameters for Recipes Using Stamp Jigs" on page 1841. "Parameters for Recipes Using Bookends Jigs" on page 1842. "Parameters for Recipes Using Linear Array Jigs" on page 1843. "Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Jigs" on page 1844. "Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Linetype Jigs" on page 1845. "Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Top Jigs" on page 1845.
8 Click OK.
Deleting Groups or Components from a Detail Component Database Use this procedure to delete a group, subgroup, or component from a detail component database. Note that deleting a group also deletes any subgroups and components within that group.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 In the tree view, select the node representing the group, subgroup, or component you want to delete.
5 Click
.
1834 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
The selected node and all its children are deleted from the hierarchical tree view in the Detail Component Manager.
Moving Groups or Components in a Detail Component Database Use this procedure to move a group, subgroup, or component to a different group or level within the database hierarchy. Note that moving a group also moves any subgroups and components within that group.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Select the node (group, subgroup, or component) to move, and drag it to the desired location in the hierarchical tree view.
Editing Component Size Tables
A component size table is displayed in the pane at the bottom of the Detail Component Manager whenever a component is selected in the tree view. If you have edit privileges for the currently selected database, you can add rows to the table, remove rows, or edit individual cells. You can also add or remove columns and change column names.
Adding a Row to a Component Size Table
Use this procedure to add a row to the size table for a selected component in the Detail Component Manager.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the component you want to edit.
5 If necessary, scroll to the bottom of the table, and then click anywhere in the blank row that has an asterisk (*) in the first column.
The row is selected and a null value is added to each cell in the row.
6 Enter text as required for cells in the row.
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1835
As you begin to edit a cell, an edit symbol appears in the first column, and the blank row is displayed again below the row you are editing.
NOTE The Keynote column is not directly editable. Right-click in the cell, and click Edit to open the Select Keynote dialog box. For more information, see "Specifying Keynotes for Detail Components" on page 1870.
7 Click Close when you finish editing individual cells in the row, and then click OK when prompted to save changes. If you forgot to enter a required value, you are prompted to go back and enter it.
Removing a Row from a Component Size Table Use this procedure to remove a row from the size table for a selected component in the Detail Component Manager.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the component you want to edit.
5 If necessary, resize the window or use the vertical scroll bar to find the row that you want to remove. Then click the gray cell in the first column of the row, and press Delete to remove the row.
6 Click Close, and then click OK when prompted to save the changes to the table.
Editing Values Within a Component Size Table Row Use this procedure to edit individual cells in the size table for a selected component in the Detail Component Manager.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the component you want to edit.
5 If necessary, resize the window or use the scroll bars to find the cell that you want to edit. You can add or change existing text within a cell, or you can click a cell and press Delete to clear the cell and then add new text.
NOTE To edit the Keynote column, right-click in the cell, and click Edit to open the Select Keynote dialog box. For more information, see "Specifying Keynotes for Detail Components" on page 1870.
6 Click Close, and then click OK when prompted to save the changes to the table. If you forgot to enter a required value, you are prompted to go back and enter it.
1836 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Adding a Column to a Component Size Table Use this procedure to add a column to the size table for a selected component in the Detail Component Manager.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the component you want to edit.
5 Right-click any column title, and click Add Column.
6 In the Add New Column dialog box, enter a name for Field Name. If the name you enter matches one of the GlobalName values in the ColumnDisplay table for this database, the LocalName value associated with that global name will be displayed when you click in the Display Name field. You can use this as the display name for the new column, or you can enter a different name, in which case a new entry will be added to the ColumnDisplay table to reflect the new LocalName value you have created for an existing GlobalName value. (A new ColumnDisplay table entry will also be created if the name you enter for Field Name does not match an existing GlobalName value.)
7 Select a data type (String, Memo, Integer, or Real), specify a length (up to 255 characters), and click OK.
The specified column is added to the right of any existing columns.
Removing a Column from a Component Size Table Use this procedure to remove a column from the size table for a selected component in the Detail Component Manager.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the component you want to edit.
5 Right-click the title of the column you want to remove, and click Delete Column.
6 Click OK when prompted to confirm that you want to delete the column.
Editing a Column in a Component Size Table
Use this procedure to edit the name of a column in the size table for a selected component in the Detail Component Manager.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click 2 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
on the toolbar.
3 Click
to enter edit mode.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary to locate the component you want to edit.
5 Right-click the title of the column you want to edit, and click Edit Column.
6 In the Rename Column dialog box, enter a new name for the column in the Display Name field, and click OK. Note that the Field Name displays the GlobalName value for this column from the ColumnDisplay table for this database. When you change the display name, a new entry is added to the ColumnDisplay table to reflect the new display name you have created for an existing GlobalName value.
Creating a Detail Component Database Using the Detail Component Manager to create a new detail component database requires the following basic steps:
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1837
Step 1: Create a blank Microsoft® Access database by copying and renaming the detail component database template (AecDtlComponents-Template.mdb) located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template\Details and Keynotes.
Step 2: Add the renamed database to the list of available databases. (For detailed instructions, see "Adding a Detail Component Database to Available Databases" on page 1846.)
Step 3: Using the Detail Component Manager, add groups and subgroups to reflect the major and minor divisions within the detailing scheme. (For detailed instructions, see "Adding Groups to a Detail Component Database" on page 1838.)
Step 4: Add individual components within groups and subgroups as applicable. (For detailed instructions, see "Adding Components to a Detail Component Database" on page 1839.)
Step 5: Add rows to the size tables as applicable for each group/subgroup, editing table columns as desired. (For detailed instructions, see "Adding a Row to a Component Size Table " on page 1835.)
When you exit the Detail Component Manager, the new database is available to other users with access privileges.
Creating a Blank Detail Component Database
Use this procedure to create a blank Microsoft® Access database with all required tables and queries for detail component storage and retrieval. This is the first step in the process of creating a new detail component database using the Detail Component Manager.
1 Navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Template\Details and Keynotes.
2 Copy the file AecDtlComponents-Template.mdb and rename it as desired.
3 Add the new blank database to the list of active databases, as described under "Adding a Detail Component Database to Available Databases" on page 1846.
Adding Groups to a Detail Component Database
Use this procedure to add a group to a detail component database. You can use the same basic procedure to add various subgroups within a group.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click
on the toolbar.
2 Click
to enter edit mode.
3 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
4 Select the root node for the selected database if you want to add a top-level group, or expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary until you can select the node to which you want to add a subgroup.
5 Click
.
The Add Component Group dialog box is displayed with the read-only ID field showing the value assigned to this group in the Groups table in the database.
6 For Group Name, enter the name you want displayed in the Detail Component Manager for this group. This value will be added to the database Groups table entry.
1838 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
7 If you are using the standard database, select a Path Key from the drop-down list to specify a shortcut alias identifying the location of drawing and image files for this group. Path Key values are retrieved from the database DirKeys table. You can add new key values to this table manually using Microsoft® Access. If you are creating a new database from the template file, no Path Key values will be available for selection in this dialog box unless you have first populated the DirKeys table using Microsoft® Access. For more information, see "Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components" on page 2037.
8 Enter a comma-delimited list of keywords to be used when searching for components in this group.
9 Click OK.
The group or subgroup you have defined is displayed as a new node in the hierarchical tree view.
Adding Components to a Detail Component Database
Use this procedure to add a component to a detail component database and create a blank size table to which you can then add rows representing the sizes in which the component is available. When you add a component, the values you specify on the General and Parameters tabs of the New Component dialog box are used to create one or more recipes for drawing the component in different views. Each recipe specifies the type of jig, or drawing routine, for placing the component in a specific view. The recipe may also contain information pertaining to layer and hatch pattern (for more information, see "Recipe Specifications" on page 2043). Note that this procedure can be used to add components to the default imperial and metric detail component databases supplied with the software, or to populate databases that you create.
1 Open the Detail Component Manager from the Insert menu, or click
on the toolbar.
2 Click
to enter edit mode.
3 Select a database from the Current detail component database list.
4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary until you can select the node to which you want to add a component table.
5 Click
.
The New Component dialog box is displayed.
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1839
6 On the General tab, specify the following values as applicable for the component you are adding:
Value Name Image
Description/Instructions
Right-click the Image box, and click Specify Image to browse images available for the selected group in the location specified by its Path Key value. The image you select will be displayed on the Image tab of the Detail Component Manager when this component is selected.
Display Name
Enter the name you want displayed for this component in Detail Component Manager.
Table Name
Enter the name of the size table for this component.
Units
Select a unit from the drop-down list.
Recipe
Enter a name for the RecipeSpec XML file to contain the recipes you specify for drawing this component.
Keynote
Click Select Keynote to browse for or create a keynote to be the default for this component.
Filter Keywords
Enter a comma-delimited list of keywords to be used in searching for this component.
Author/Manufacturer
Enter the name of the person or other entity responsible for this component.
Web Address
Enter the URL for the author/manufacturer.
Description
Enter the description you want to display for this component on the Information tab in the Detail Component Manager.
NOTE The ID property on the General tab is a read-only value identifying a particular Groups table in the selected database. These values are assigned automatically as groups are added to a database.
7 On the Parameters tab, if desired, select a jig type other than the default (Stamp) for the default Section view, and then specify parameter values to define the component according to instructions referenced in
the table following the illustration below. You can also change the default view by renaming it (click
), or you can create additional views by clicking from the drop-down list.
. Any views you create or rename are then available
1840 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
NOTE You can specify only one jig type for each view.
To define a recipe using this jig type... Stamp Bookends Linear Array Surface Surface Linetype Surface Top
See...
"Parameters for Recipes Using Stamp Jigs" on page 1841. "Parameters for Recipes Using Bookends Jigs" on page 1842. "Parameters for Recipes Using Linear Array Jigs" on page 1843. "Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Jigs" on page 1844. "Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Linetype Jigs" on page 1845. "Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Top Jigs" on page 1845.
8 Click OK.
You can now add a table row for each available component size. You can also add, edit, or delete columns as needed. For detailed instructions, see "Editing Component Size Tables" on page 1835.
Parameters for Recipes Using Stamp Jigs
Stamp jigs are used to insert components that consist of a single block. Refer to the following table if you are adding a new detail component (or editing one that was created using the New Component option) and you want to define a recipe that uses a stamp jig to insert the component in the specified view.
Parameter Name Layer key
Block drawing location Block type
Block
Description/Instructions
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component will be assigned in the specified
view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
The name of the drawing file (a DWG, DWT or DWS file) containing the blocks for the component table.
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter will apply to every row in the size table for this component. If you select Database, a column will be added to the table allowing values to be entered for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Block type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the block definition to be inserted for this component.
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1841
Parameter Name Block field Scaling type
Scale Scale field Allow scaling Allow Rotation Allow X flip Allow Y flip Allow Base point
Description/Instructions
Displayed only if Block type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the block to be inserted is specified for each size.
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you supply will apply to every row in the size table for this component. If you select Database, a column will be added to the table allowing values to be entered for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Scaling type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the scaling value for the block.
Displayed only if Scaling type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the scaling value for the block is specified for each size.
Specifies whether the command-line option for specifying scaling is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for specifying rotation is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its X axis is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its Y axis is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for specifying an alternate base point is displayed for this component.
Parameters for Recipes Using Bookends Jigs
Bookends jigs are used to insert components that consist of a pattern repeated as a linear array but bounded by unique items at each end. Thus, the recipe must define a start block, a repeat block, and an end block. Refer to the following table if you are adding a new detail component (or editing one that was created using the New Component option) and you want to define a recipe that uses a bookends jig to insert the component in the specified view.
NOTE Parameters preceded by an asterisk (*) are specified separately for the start block, the repeat block, and the end block.
Parameter Name Layer key
Block entire component Block drawing location *Block type
*Block *Block field *Layer key
Description/Instructions
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component will be assigned in the specified
view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies whether the blocks comprising the component are inserted as a single block.
Specifies the drawing file (a DWG, DWT, or DWS file) containing the blocks for the component table.
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Block parameter will apply to every row in this component's size table. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Block field parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing different block definitions to be specified for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Block type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the block definition to be used for all sizes.
Displayed only if Block type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the block definition is specified for each size.
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the block will be assigned in the specified view.
To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( the Select Layer Key dialog box.
) to access
1842 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Parameter Name *Scaling type
*Scale *Scale field *Width type
*Width *Width field Gap Start prompt End prompt Block orientation Jig orientation Allow X flip Allow Y flip
Description/Instructions
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Scale parameter will apply to every row in this component's size table. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Scale field parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing values to be entered for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Scaling type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the scaling value for the block.
Displayed only if Scaling type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the scaling value for the block is specified for each size.
A drop-down list lets you specify Fixed value, Database, or Block extents. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Width parameter will apply to every row in the size table for this component. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Width field parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing values to be entered for individual sizes. If you select Block extents, then block width is calculated dynamically as the block is inserted.
Displayed only if Width type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the width for the block.
Displayed only if Width type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the block width is specified for each size.
Specifies the distance between repeat blocks. A negative value causes blocks to overlap.
Specifies the string to display for the start point prompt.
Specifies the string to display for the endpoint prompt.
Specifies whether the block is oriented along the X axis or the Y axis.
Specifies whether the jig is oriented along the X axis or the Y axis.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its X axis is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its Y axis is displayed for this component.
Parameters for Recipes Using Linear Array Jigs
Linear Array jigs are used to insert multiple copies of a block in a line along the X or Y axis. Refer to the following table if you are adding a new detail component (or editing one that was created using the New Component option) and you want to define a recipe that uses a linear array jig to insert the component in the specified view.
Parameter Name Layer key
Block entire component Block drawing location Block type
Block Block field
Description
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component will be assigned in the specified
view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies whether the blocks comprising the component are inserted as a single block.
Specifies the drawing file (a DWG, DWT, or DWS file) containing the blocks for the component table.
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Block parameter will apply to every row in this component's size table. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Block field parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing different block definitions to be specified for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Block type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the block definition to be used for all sizes.
Displayed only if Block type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the block definition is specified for each size.
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1843
Parameter Name Scaling type
Scale Scale field Width type
Width Width field Gap Start prompt End prompt Display count option Count prompt Block orientation Jig orientation Allow X flip Allow Y flip
Description
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Scale parameter will apply to every row in this component's size table. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Scale field parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing values to be entered for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Scaling type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the scaling value for the block for all sizes.
Displayed only if Scaling type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the scaling value for the block is specified for each size.
A drop-down list lets you specify Fixed value, Database, or Block extents. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Width parameter will apply to every row in the size table for this component. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Width field parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing values to be entered for individual sizes. If you select Block extents, then block width is calculated dynamically as the block is inserted.
Displayed only if Width type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the width for the block for all sizes.
Displayed only if Width type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the block width is specified for each size.
Specifies the distance between repeat blocks. A negative value causes blocks to overlap.
Specifies the string to display for the start point prompt.
Specifies the string to display for the endpoint prompt.
Specifies whether the command-line options for specifying a count are displayed (see Count prompt parameter below).
Displayed only if the Display count option parameter is Yes, this parameter specifies the command-line prompt to be displayed.
Specifies whether the block is oriented along the X axis or the Y axis.
Specifies whether the jig is oriented along the X axis or the Y axis.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its X axis is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its Y axis is displayed for this component.
Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Jigs
Surface jigs are used to insert components that have a specified depth and a hatch-filled rectangular boundary with user-specified start points and endpoints. Refer to the following table if you are adding a new detail component (or editing one that was created using the New Component option) and you want to define a recipe that uses a surface jig to insert the component in the specified view.
Parameter Name Layer key
Layer key (for hatching)
Hatching type
Description
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component boundary will be assigned in the specified view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet
icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component hatch infill will be assigned in the specified view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet
icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Hatch alias parameter will apply to every row in this component's size table. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Hatching parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing values to be entered for individual sizes.
1844 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
Parameter Name Hatch alias
Hatching
Start prompt End prompt Allow X flip
Allow Y flip
Description
Displayed only if Hatching type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the hatch alias (from the Hatches table for this database) for all sizes of the component.
Displayed only if Hatching type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the hatch is specified for each size.
Specifies the string to display for the start point prompt.
Specifies the string to display for the endpoint prompt.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its X axis is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its Y axis is displayed for this component.
Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Linetype Jigs
Surface linetype jigs are similar to surface jigs in that they are used to insert components that have a specified depth and a rectangular boundary with user-specified start points and endpoints. Instead of a hatch-filled boundary, however, the surface linetype jig fills the boundary with a wide polyline of a specified linetype. Refer to the following table if you are adding a new detail component (or editing one that was created using the New Component option) and you want to define a recipe that uses a surface linetype jig to insert the component in the specified view.
Parameter Name Layer key
Linetype/Layer key
Linetype type
Linetype Linetype field Start prompt End prompt Allow X flip Allow Y flip
Description
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component boundary will be assigned in the specified view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component infill will be assigned in the specified view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Linetype parameter will apply to every row in this component's size table. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Linetype field parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing values to be entered for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Linetype type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the linetype alias for all sizes of the component.
Displayed only if Linetype type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the linetype is specified for each size.
Specifies the string to display for the start point prompt.
Specifies the string to display for the endpoint prompt.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its X axis is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its Y axis is displayed for this component.
Parameters for Recipes Using Surface Top Jigs
Surface top jigs are similar to surface jigs in that they are used to insert components with a specified depth and a hatch-filled rectangular boundary. However, the surface top jig is designed for components such as concrete topping that are poured onto or bounded by another entity, which provides the bottom edge of the rectangle. Thus, the surface top jig draws only the top and side edges of the rectangle. Refer to the following table if you are adding a new detail
Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases | 1845
component (or editing one that was created using the New Component option) and you want to define a recipe that uses a surface top jig to insert the component in the specified view.
Parameter Name Layer key
Layer key (for hatching)
Hatching type
Hatch alias Hatching Start prompt End prompt Allow X flip Allow Y flip
Description
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component boundary will be assigned in the specified view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the component hatch infill will be assigned in the specified view. To specify a layer key or change the existing one, click the worksheet icon ( ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
A drop-down list lets you specify either Fixed value or Database. If you select Fixed value, the value you enter for the corresponding Hatch alias parameter will apply to every row in this component's size table. If you select Database, a column (with the name specified for the corresponding Hatching parameter) will be added to the component table, allowing values to be entered for individual sizes.
Displayed only if Hatching type is Fixed value, this parameter specifies the hatch alias (from the Hatches table for this database) for all sizes of the component.
Displayed only if Hatching type is Database, this parameter specifies the name of the component table column in which the hatch is specified for each size.
Specifies the string to display for the start point prompt.
Specifies the string to display for the endpoint prompt.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its X axis is displayed for this component.
Specifies whether the command-line option for flipping the block on its Y axis is displayed for this component.
Configuring Detail Component Database Availability
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a detail component database (AecDtlComponents.mdb), which is based on the CSI MasterFormat standard. You can add other detail component databases to accommodate your office standards or other project-specific requirements. You can also remove databases from the active list, depending on whether you want them available to a particular project. For a given project, you can also control whether users can see and access all detail component databases or only those associated with the project. For more information, see "Setting the Detail Component and Keynote Databases for a Project" on page 180.
Adding a Detail Component Database to Available Databases
Use this procedure to add a database to the list of active detail component databases from which components can be selected for insertion, copied to a tool palette, or used to modify an existing tool.
1 On the Format menu, select Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, click the AEC Content tab.
3 On the AEC Content page, click the Add/Remove button for Detail Component Databases.
4 In the Configure Detail Component Databases dialog box, click Add.
1846 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
5 In the Select Component Database browser window, locate the database you want to add, and click Open.
The selected database is added to the bottom of the list in the Configure Detail Component Databases dialog box. 6 Click OK twice.
Removing a Detail Component Database from Available Databases
Use this procedure to remove a database from the list of active detail component databases. 1 On the Format menu, select Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click the AEC Content tab. 3 On the AEC Content page, click the Add/Remove button for Detail Component Databases. 4 In the Configure Detail Component Databases dialog box, select the database you want to remove from the list, and click Remove.
5 Click OK twice. Note that if you remove the top database in the list, the next database listed becomes the current selection in the Detail Component Manager dialog box.
Removing a Detail Component Database from Available Databases | 1847
Setting Detail Component Database Permissions in a Multi-User Environment
If you are working in a multi-user network environment with keynote and detail content on a remote server, you may want to allow some users to edit databases and others to have read-only access. For this to work properly, all users must have write permission to the folder where the databases are installed. Without write permission to the folder, a user will not be able to open any database within the folder, because the necessary lock file cannot be generated on that user's behalf, regardless of whether the user has write permission to the database itself. Once all users have write permission to the folder, permissions for individual databases (*.mdb files) can then be set on a per-user basis. Note, however, that this arrangement allows users to access and edit other content within the folder, such as drawing, image, and XML recipe files, unless you set permissions on these files individually to prevent it. For this reason, you may want to keep the folders containing keynote and detail content separate from other content installed with Architectural Desktop so that write permission is not available to all users for all content.
Merging Old and New Detail Component Databases
If you have modified one of the default detail component databases supplied with a previous release of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, and you want to migrate your modifications to the corresponding database in the current release, you can do so using the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration utility. For detailed instructions, see "Migrating Detail Component and Keynote Databases" on page 2069.
1848 | Chapter 42 Detail Components
43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Some basic annotation tools have replaced and expanded the functionality of the legacy AEC Content routines available through DesignCenter. These tools let you easily insert multiline text annotations with or without leaders, keynotes that scale and layer key automatically, and cut lines with single or double breaks that can mask or trim underlying objects. The keynote tools support both reference keynoting and sheet keynoting. You can manually select keynotes to insert, or you can apply pre-specified keynotes at various levels: object, object component, two-dimensional (2D) section/elevation linework, or detail component.
1849
The Basic Annotation Tool
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop uses the same basic customizable tool for adding the following types of annotations to drawings:
Multiline text notes Symbol-based notes with attributes Reference keynotes Sheet keynotes Break marks The specific type of annotation, its appearance, and other characteristics are determined by editable values on the Tool Properties worksheet, which is accessed from the context menu of the tool. Several default versions of this annotation tool are provided with the software, each representing a different configuration of the Tool Properties worksheet. Depending on how your system is set up, you may find one or more of these tools (or locally customized versions of them) on the sample Annotation tool palette in the workspace. These tools are also available from the Stock Tools Catalog and the Documentation Tool Catalog in the Content Browser. Using the i-drop® feature, you can copy any of these tools to a tool palette in the workspace and customize it to meet your needs. The basic annotation tool lets you insert either text-based or block-based annotations. In both cases, the annotation can be created with or without a leader that connects it visually to a particular object or point in the drawing. The annotation tool also supports keynoting, where a predefined keynote is retrieved from a database, either through direct selection or automatically, based on a selected object within the drawing. Generally, text-based annotations are used for reference keynoting, and block-based annotations are used for sheet keynoting. However, the annotation tool accommodates many different styles of drawing annotation, such as break marks. Annotation Tool Properties The following illustrations show the Tool Properties worksheet settings for two of the default versions of the annotation tool: the text-based Text (Straight Leader) tool and the block-based Square (Straight Leader) tool. Note the different values for Content type under the General category. When the content type is multiline text (Mtext), additional settings are displayed under the Text category. Likewise, when the content type is Block, settings are displayed for Symbol and Symbol location. The settings available under the Leader category also vary based on the current value for Leader type. MText annotation tool properties
1850 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Block annotation tool properties
The following table lists and describes the annotation tool properties that can be configured through the Tool Properties worksheet. Once an annotation is inserted into a drawing, properties of the annotation or its leader can be modified using the associated Properties palette. For more information on modifying the text of an existing annotation, see "Editing a Text-Based Annotation" on page 1855.
Property Category/Name General/Layer key General/Layer override General/Content type General/Symbol
General/Symbol location Leaders/Leader type Leaders/Leader dimension style Leaders/Leader dimension style location
Leaders/Limit points Leaders/Maximum points
Description
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which annotation is assigned. To change, click the current value (default is ANNOBJ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies one or more layer key overrides. Click the worksheet icon to access the Select Layer Overrides dialog box.
Possible values are Mtext (for basic multiline text notes and reference keynotes) or Block (for symbols with attributes and sheet keynotes). When inserting an Mtext object using default settings, you are prompted to specify text width.
Displayed only if Content type is Block, this property specifies the block-based symbol to be used for the annotation. For sheet keynotes, the block contains an automatically updatable field value that determines keynote format and either specifies a particular keynote or serves as a placeholder. The placeholder value is then replaced by whatever keynote is associated with the selected object or component or by a keynote selected manually during the insertion process. For more information, see "Configuring the Annotation Tool for Keynoting" on page 1857.
The location of the drawing file containing the specified symbol. Click the property and use the Browse option from the drop-down list to locate and enter the path to the file. If this property is unspecified (--), then only those blocks in the current drawing file are listed.
Possible values are None, Straight, or Spline.
By default, this property is unspecified (--), and the dimension style for the current drawing is used. Or you can click the property and select a style from the drop-down list. The style controls the leader arrow head as well as the text options as set on the Text tab of the style.
Specifies the location of the dimension style if different from the current drawing dimension style. Click the property and use the Browse option from the drop-down list to locate and enter the path to the selected style. If this property is unspecified (--), then only those styles in the current drawing are used.
Displayed only if a leader type is specified, this property indicates whether there is a limit to the number of points in the leader. If unspecified (--), the corresponding leader setting for the current drawing is used.
Displayed only if the Limit points setting is yes, this property specifies the maximum number of points allowed in the leader before the text or symbol is inserted. If unspecified, the corresponding leader setting for the current drawing is used, if applicable.
The Basic Annotation Tool | 1851
Property Category/Name Text/Default text
Text/Angle Text/Attribute style Text/Prompt for width Text/Always left justify Text/Left side attachment Text/Right side attachment Text/Underline bottom line Text/Frame Text/Mask background
Description
Displayed only if Content type is Mtext. For basic text notes, this value is unspecified (--), and you enter the text upon insertion. For reference keynotes, the value should be a placeholder keynote field. The placeholder value is then replaced by whatever keynote is associated with the selected object or component, or by a keynote selected manually during the insertion process. For more information, see "Configuring the Annotation Tool for Keynoting" on page 1857.
Specifies the angle for multiline text or attribute text. The default is Force horizontal. Other drop-down list options are As inserted (which sets text rotation at the angle of the last leader segment) and Right reading (which keeps the text right-side up regardless of rotation angle).
Displayed only if Content type is Block, this property specifies whether attribute text within the symbol uses the target drawing text style or the style defined by the attribute tag.
Indicates whether you are prompted to specify a width for the annotation. If unspecified (--), the corresponding leader setting for the current drawing is used.
Displayed only if Content type is Mtext and Leader type is other than None, this property specifies whether each word in the annotation text is always left-justified. If unspecified (-), the corresponding leader setting for the current drawing is used.
Displayed only if Content type is Mtext and Leader type is other than None, this property specifies where text attaches to a leader positioned to its left. This setting can be selected from a drop-down list. If unspecified (--), the corresponding leader setting for the current drawing is used.
Displayed only if Content type is Mtext and Leader type is other than None, this property specifies where text attaches to a leader positioned to its right. Setting can be selected from drop-down list. If unspecified (--), the corresponding setting for the current drawing is used.
Displayed only if Content type is Mtext and Leader type is other than None, this property specifies whether a leader attaches to text as an underline below the bottom line of text. If unspecified (--), the corresponding leader setting for the current drawing is used.
Displayed only if Content type is Mtext and Leader type is other than None, this property specifies whether text is enclosed in a frame. If unspecified (--), the corresponding leader setting for the current drawing is used.
Displayed only if Content type is Mtext, this property specifies whether text has an opaque background to mask out objects below it. The default setting is No.
Break Mark Tool Properties
Block-based break mark tools are used to mask or trim underlying objects with a polyline and an AEC Polygon. The default break mark tool is the Cut Line tool provided on the Annotation tool palette. Additional types of break marks
1852 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
are available from the Stock Tool and Documentation Catalogs of the Content Browser. For more information about working with AEC Polygons, see "AEC Polygon Styles" on page 951.
NOTE The option to mask objects with a break mark is not available in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop releases prior to 2006.
The following table lists and describes tool properties for break marks that can be configured through the Tool Properties worksheet. Once a break mark is inserted into a drawing, its properties can be modified using the associated Properties palette.
Property Category/Name Layer key Layer override Symbol
Symbol location
Symbol behavior
AEC Polygon style AEC Polygon style location
Description
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the break mark is assigned. To change, click the current value (default is ANNSYMOBJ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies one or more layer key overrides. Click the worksheet icon to access the Select Layer Overrides dialog box.
Specifies the block-based symbol to be used for the break mark. For sheet keynotes, the block contains an automatically updatable field value that determines keynote format and either specifies a particular keynote or serves as a placeholder. The placeholder value is then replaced by whatever keynote is associated with the selected object or component or by a keynote selected manually during the insertion process. For more information, see "Configuring the Annotation Tool for Keynoting" on page 1857.
The location of the drawing file containing the specified break mark symbol. Click the property and use the Browse option from the drop-down list to locate and enter the path to the file. If this property is unspecified (--), then only those blocks in the current drawing file are listed.
Specifies whether the break mark inserts as Scaled or Stretched. If Stretched is selected, the cut line is stretched to correspond with the start point and endpoint, but the graphic of the cut remains the same. If Scaled is selected, the graphic in the cut line is scaled to correspond with the start point and endpoint of the cut line.
Specifies whether the break mark has masking properties. If this property is unspecified (-), the style defaults to the standard style.
Specifies the location of the drawing file containing the AEC Polygon. Click the property and use the Browse option from the drop-down list to locate and enter the path to the file. If this property is unspecified (--), then only those AEC Polygons in the current drawing file are listed.
The Basic Annotation Tool | 1853
Property Category/Name Break mark behavior
Type
Description
Specifies whether the break mark masks or trims the underlying object. An AEC Polygon and a polyline together represent the mask behavior of a break mark and do not modify the underlying object. A polyline represents the trim behavior of a break mark and clips the underlying object.
This property specifies whether the cut line is represented by a single edge of an AEC Polygon (single break) or two parallel edges of an AEC Polygon (dual break).
Creating a Text-Only Annotation
Use this procedure to add a multiline text object (without a leader) anywhere in the drawing area. The annotation does not have to be associated with any object or linework.
NOTE These instructions are based on one of the annotation tool configurations provided with the software. Depending on customization, the same tool may or may not appear on your Annotation tool palette. However, the same basic procedure applies to any annotation tool configuration in which the Content type is set to Mtext, the Leader type is set to None, and the Default text is unspecified (--). A basic Text Tool is also included in the Stock Tool Catalog in your Content Browser.
1 On the Annotation tool palette, click the Text Tool.
2 In the drawing area, specify the point where you want the annotation to begin.
3 Press ENTER to accept the default width for the annotation, or specify a width either by entering a value or by specifying a second point.
4 Enter the first line of text, and press ENTER to indicate the end of the line.
5 Press ENTER again to indicate the end of the annotation, or repeat Step 3 for each subsequent line of text. Each line of text is displayed on the command line as you enter it. The completed annotation is displayed horizontally in the drawing area when you press ENTER twice in succession.
Creating a Text-with-Leader Annotation
Use this procedure to add a multiline text object with a leader that points to any point you specify in the drawing area. Leaders are drawn in the same manner as polylines: you specify two points to insert a straight line segment. Or, depending on the setting for the Limit points property, you can specify additional points to insert an angled leader consisting of two or more segments.
NOTE These instructions are based on one of the annotation tool configurations provided with the software. Depending on customization, the same tool may or may not appear on your Annotation tool palette. However, the same basic procedure applies to any annotation tool configuration in which the Content type is set to Mtext, the Leader type is set to Straight, and the Default text is unspecified (--). Leader properties can be modified on the Tool Properties worksheet of the annotation tool. Any unspecified properties use the leader settings in effect for the current drawing, which can be modified using the Leader Settings dialog box. A basic Text Tool is also included in the Stock Tool Catalog in your Content Browser.
1 On the Annotation tool palette, click the Text (Straight Leader) tool. 2 Specify the starting point for the leader. (This determines where the leader arrow is displayed.) 3 Specify one or more additional points to create the desired leader, and then press ENTER.
4 Press ENTER to accept the default width for the annotation, or specify a width either by entering a value or by specifying a second point.
5 Enter the first line of text, and press ENTER to indicate the end of the line.
6 Press ENTER again to indicate the end of the annotation, or repeat Step 4 for each subsequent line of text. Each line of text is displayed on the command line as you enter it. When you press ENTER twice in succession, the completed annotation is displayed in the drawing area.
Creating a Break Mark
Use this procedure to add a new break mark that has the properties specified in the break mark tool that you select.
1854 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
NOTE These instructions are based on the default Cut Line tool provided with the software. Depending on customization, the same tool may or may not appear on your Annotation tool palette. However, the same basic procedure applies to any break mark tool.
1 On the Annotation tool palette, click the Cut Line Tool. 2 In the drawing area, specify the point where you want the cut line to begin. 3 Specify the point where you want the cut line to end. 4 Specify the extents of the break.
Creating a Block-Based Annotation with a Leader
Use this procedure to add a block-based symbol with a leader that points to any point you specify in the drawing area.
NOTE These instructions are based on one of the annotation tool configurations provided with the software. Depending on customization, the same tool may or may not appear on your Annotation tool palette. However, the same basic procedure applies to any annotation tool configuration in which the Content type is set to Block, the Leader type is set to Straight, and the Symbol and Symbol location properties specify a block-based symbol that is accessible to the tool. Leader properties can be modified on the Tool Properties worksheet of the annotation tool. Any unspecified properties use the leader settings in effect for the current drawing, which can be modified using the Leader Settings dialog box.
1 On the Annotation tool palette, click the Square (Straight Leader) tool. 2 Specify the starting point for the leader. (This determines where the leader arrow is displayed.) 3 Specify one or more additional points to create the desired leader, and then press ENTER.
The symbol and its default attribute value are inserted at the end of the leader, and the Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed. (If a limit has been set for the number of leader points, this happens as soon as you specify the last point within the limit.) 4 In the Edit Attributes dialog box, edit the ID attribute text as desired, and then click OK. The edited attribute text is displayed within the symbol.
Editing a Text-Based Annotation
Use this procedure to edit a text-based annotation or change its typographical characteristics using the Multiline Text Editor.
1 Double-click the annotation (or select it, right-click, and click Mtext Editor) to display the Multiline Text Editor. Multiline Text Editor dialog box
2 Edit the text as desired in the text editing box, or change the text style, font, height, color, or other characteristics using the drop-down lists and buttons on the toolbar.
3 Click OK on the toolbar or click anywhere in the drawing area to close the Multiline Text Editor and implement your changes.
Creating a Block-Based Annotation with a Leader | 1855
NOTE The Multiline Text Editor also lets you add automatically updatable fields (such as a date and time stamp or other project information) to an annotation by right-clicking the annotation and clicking Insert Field (or Edit Field, if the annotation already includes such a field). This will display the Field dialog box. For more information, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD Help. The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Editing a Masking Break Mark
Use this procedure to hide or show the boundary of a break mark that masks an underlying object. A masking break mark is defined by an AEC Polygon style and a polyline.
NOTE To see these options you must select the AEC Polygon, not the polyline (which defines the cut line).
1 Select the break mark, and right-click.
If you want to...
Then...
show an edge
click Show Edge. The boundary edge of the break mark (represented by the AEC Polygon) highlights. Select the edge to show, and press ENTER.
hide an edge
click Hide Edge. The boundary edge of the break mark (represented by the AEC Polygon) highlights. Select the edge to hide, and press ENTER.
Since the masking behavior of a break mark depends on an AEC Polygon, many of the same editing options available for AEC Polygons can also be applied to masking break marks. For more information, see "Editing AEC Polygons" on page 940 and "Masking Underlying Objects with AEC Polygons" on page 953.
Editing a Block-Based Annotation
Use this procedure to edit a block-based annotation or change its typographical characteristics and other properties using the Enhanced Attribute Editor.
1 Double-click the annotation (or select it, right-click, and click Edit Attributes) to display the Enhanced Attribute Editor.
Enhanced Attribute Editor
2 Specify the changes you want to make to the annotation:
If you want to change...
Then...
the text
edit the text under Value on the Attribute tab.
text style, height, justification or other orientation settings
click the Text Options tab and adjust the settings as desired.
layer, linetype, lineweight, color, or click the Properties tab and adjust the settings as desired. plot style
1856 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
3 Click OK to dismiss the Enhanced Attribute Editor and implement any changes you have made to the annotation.
NOTE The Enhanced Attribute Editor also lets you add automatically updatable fields (such as a date and time stamp or other project information) to an annotation by right-clicking the current Value setting and clicking Insert Field (or Edit Field, if the annotation already includes such a field). This will display the Field dialog box. For more information, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD Help. The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Keynoting Tools
Keynoting is a consistent way of annotating the different types of drawings in a set of construction documents to identify building materials or to provide special instructions or explanations. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a flexible tool-based method of inserting keynotes that are linked to a keynote database and thus can be modified globally as well as individually. This method supports both reference keynoting (where the keynote key corresponds to a section in an accompanying specification and may appear on different drawings) and sheet keynoting (where keynote keys are sequentially numbered for each drawing).
Autodesk Architectural Desktop supplies pre-specified keynotes for its size-specific default detail components and for architectural objects that represent assemblies with multiple components (for example, 8" CMU wall). For variable-size objects and material definitions, a keynote classification group is pre-specified, and you specify a size when the keynote is inserted. For detail components, these keynotes and groups are based on the widely used MasterFormat standard maintained by the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). For assemblies, the CSI Uniformat standard is used. However, because the software accommodates multiple keynote databases, it also supports other common or locally developed keynoting systems, so your localized version of Autodesk Architectural Desktop may vary. Whatever the source of the keynote, you can also associate it with a particular object style or material definition (see "Specifying Keynotes" on page 1869). This lets you use the keynote insertion tools on individual components of an object or on linework in two-dimensional (2D) sections or elevations. In cases where no keynotes are pre-specified, you select a keynote from the available database(s). You can also configure a keynote insertion tool to insert a particular keynote, regardless of the insertion point (see "Inserting or Editing an AEC Keynotes Field" on page 1858).
In addition to tools for inserting keynotes (derived from the basic annotation tool), the software includes tools for generating keynote legends that list selected keynotes from one or more drawing sheets and help you to quickly locate all instances of a particular keynote. You can also generate a keynote legend for a drawing prior to inserting keynotes; in this case the legend would include all keynotes that are likely to be used.
Other keynoting features include the ability to toggle the format for all keynotes within a drawing to display keys only, notes only, or both keys and notes. An Object Inspect tool lets you view keynote text without having to toggle the format or zoom in.
NOTE The keynoting feature supports automatic updating of keynotes to reflect changes to the corresponding entry in the keynote database. However, automatic updating of a keynote to reflect changes to a keynoted object is not currently supported. Changes in objects can be addressed using the re-keynoting option described in "Viewing and Editing Keynotes in a Drawing" on page 1866.
Configuring the Annotation Tool for Keynoting
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides several default tools for inserting keynotes into a drawing. If your software has not been customized locally, these tools can be found on the sample Annotation tool palette. They are also accessible from the Documentation Tool Catalog in the Content Browser and can be copied to any tool palette using the i-drop® feature. These keynote insertion tools are derived from the basic annotation tool and can be further customized through the Tool Properties worksheet available from their context menus.
The mechanism that allows the annotation tool to insert keynotes is the AEC Keynotes field. This is an Mtext object that specifies the type and format of the keynote annotation to be inserted and includes an automatically updatable field value that serves as a placeholder for the actual keynote. The keynote itself is obtained from a database, and can be pre-specified for a selected object or selected manually from the Select Keynote dialog box. For more information, see "Using Keynote Insertion Tools" on page 1859. In cases where the same keynote needs to be inserted frequently, you can configure the AEC Keynotes field to specify a particular keynote rather than serve as a placeholder.
For reference keynote insertion tools, the AEC Keynotes field value is specified as the Default text property on the Tool Properties worksheet. For a sheet keynote insertion tool, the AEC Keynotes field value is specified as an attribute
Keynoting Tools | 1857
definition within the block identified by the Symbol and Symbol location properties. In either case, you can insert an AEC Keynotes field or edit an existing one using the Field dialog box. For specific instructions, see "Inserting or Editing an AEC Keynotes Field" on page 1858.
AEC Keynotes field for a reference keynote
AEC Keynotes field for a sheet keynote
Inserting or Editing an AEC Keynotes Field Use this procedure to insert an AEC Keynotes field or edit an existing one for a reference keynote tool or a sheet keynote tool.
1 Open the Tool Properties palette for the tool. 2 Open the Field dialog box:
If...
Then...
the Content type is Mtext
double-click the Default text property. If the property is unspecified, right-click and click Insert Field.
the Content type is Block
open the drawing specified by the Symbol location property and select the symbol. Then right-click and click Edit Block in-place. In the Reference Edit dialog box, click OK. Double-click the KEY tag in the symbol to open the Edit Attributes Definition dialog box, and then double-click the Default value. If the value is not an updatable field, right-click and click Insert Field.
3 In the Field dialog box, confirm that the Field category is AEC Keynotes.
1858 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Field dialog box
4 From the Field names list, select the type and form of keynote you want to insert. 5 If the selected Field name is Reference Key and Note or Sheet Key and Note, select a Keynote Format to
determine how the key and the note are separated typographically. 6 Select a Format to determine case and capitalization for the keynote text. 7 Confirm that Insert as placeholder is selected if you want to insert pre-specified keynotes or prompt for
manual keynote selection, as applicable. Otherwise, the keynote indicated by the Key and Note values is inserted. You can select a particular keynote by clicking Select Keynote. 8 Click OK to close the Field dialog box and implement the AEC Keynotes field you have specified.
Using Keynote Insertion Tools
The keynote insertion tools provided on the sample Annotation palette (also available from the Documentation Tool Catalog in the Content Browser) represent two basic kinds of keynotes: reference and sheet. The tool for sheet keynotes is configured to let you draw a leader that connects the keynote to the selected object or point. For reference keynotes, two tools are provided: one that inserts a leader and one that inserts only the keynote. For both sheet and reference keynotes, you have the option of keynoting either a particular object or "nothing" (that is, a point within an empty region of the drawing area). Both tools insert any keynote that is pre-specified for a selected object, unless there is ambiguity, as when keynotes are specified for the components of an object. In that case, you must select a component or use the keynote that is pre-specified for the object as a whole. You can also choose a different keynote from the Select Keynote dialog box. This dialog box is presented if no keynote is pre-specified for a selected object or its components. The Select Keynote Dialog Box The Select Keynote dialog box provides a hierarchical tree view of a keynote database. You can select a keynote to insert into a drawing or to associate with an object style, a material definition, or a detail component. This dialog box is displayed if you attempt to keynote an object for which no keynote is specified. You can also select it from the Field dialog box and from the dialog boxes used to specify keynotes for architectural objects or their components. When generating a keynote legend, you can access the Select Keynote dialog box during the insertion process by right-clicking and clicking from Database, or by entering d (for database) at the command line. You select a keynote database at the top of the dialog box. The AEC Keynote database is the default for keynoting detail components, while the AecKeynote-Assemblies database is the default for keynoting architectural objects that are assemblies of multiple components. You can expand nodes in the tree view to find individual components, or you can type text into the Filter box below the tree view. Clicking the Filter button, pressing TAB, or pressing ENTER expands all nodes under any node whose name includes the text you enter. When a keynote is highlighted, clicking OK completes the selection.
Using Keynote Insertion Tools | 1859
Select Keynote dialog box
NOTE The Save button at the bottom of the dialog box and the 5 buttons arranged vertically along the right side are displayed only if you have read-write privileges for the currently selected keynote database. These buttons let you modify a database by adding, editing, or deleting keynotes and keynote groups. The buttons function in the same manner as they do in the Keynote Editor dialog box. For detailed information, see "Creating and Modifying Keynote Databases" on page 1873.
Inserting a Keynote Use this procedure to annotate a drawing with either a sheet keynote or a reference keynote. If using a tool configured to insert a leader, you can select an object for the leader to point to, or you can specify a point in an empty region of the drawing.
1 On the Annotation tool palette, click the tool for the type of keynote you want to include. The tools included on the sample palette include Reference Keynote, Reference Keynote w/Straight Leader, and Sheet Keynote (which also inserts a leader).
NOTE The default leader is a straight line. You can change the leader type and other properties using the Tool Properties palette, which is accessed from the context menu of the tool.
2 Select the object/component/linework you want to keynote, or press ENTER and specify a point in the drawing area.
If a keynote is already associated with your selection, you can finish drawing the leader as explained in Step 4. Otherwise, a dialog box is displayed.
3 Specify the keynote you want to insert:
If...
Then...
no keynote is associated with the selected object (or if you specified a point rather than selecting an object)
the Select Keynote dialog box is displayed. Make sure the currently selected database is the one you want. Then navigate the hierarchical tree view to find the keynote you want, select it, and click OK.
one or more keynotes are already associated with the object style or with the material definitions of the selected objects components
the Select Element to Keynote dialog box is displayed. If you want to keynote an object component, select it in the Component column, and click OK.
If you want to keynote the object as a whole, and a keynote is specified for the object style, select Style, and then click OK.
1860 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
If...
Then...
If you do not see the keynote you want, click Select Keynote to display the Select Keynote dialog box. Select a keynote and click OK. The keynote is now displayed in the Select Element to Keynote dialog box. Click OK to complete the selection process.
Select Element to Keynote dialog box
4 To insert a leader, specify one or more additional points to create the desired leader, and then press ENTER. The pre-specified keynote (or the keynote you specified in Step 3) is displayed. If you also inserted a leader, the keynote is attached to the leader.
NOTE Sheet keynotes are not resolved at the time of insertion. The attribute to be displayed inside the symbol is determined when a sheet keynote legend is generated. Until then, sheet keynotes display a question mark as shown in the following illustration. The sequential numbering for resolved keynotes is based on group order and keynote order within the source keynote database.
Sheet keynote before and after sheet keynote legend is generated
Repeating a Keynote Insertion
After you have inserted a keynote into a drawing with a keynote insertion tool, you can activate the same tool again by pressing ENTER, pressing the spacebar, or right-clicking and clicking Repeat. If you have used other tools since the one you want to repeat, you can activate the tool by right-clicking any keynote it inserted and then clicking Add Selected.
Using Keynote Legends
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop lets you insert or view keynotes in three formats: key only, note only, or both key and note. By using keys only, you can reduce the amount of annotation in a drawing. However, keys alone are not
Using Keynote Legends | 1861
likely to be useful unless the reader also has access to the corresponding notes. The keynote legend tool enables you to easily annotate a drawing with a keynote legend that lists keys along with their corresponding notes. All keys and column headings in the keynote legend can be validated at any time through a simple context menu selection. Moreover, when viewing a drawing in model space or paper space, you can select a keynote in the legend and quickly locate all instances of that keynote in the drawing.
Keynote Legend Tool Properties
The following illustrations show the Tool Properties worksheet settings for two versions of the keynote legend tool (sheet and reference) that are included on the sample Annotation tool palette. Under the General category, note the different settings for Table style, Legend type, Table title, Grouping level, and Blank rows.
Tool properties for the sheet and reference keynote legend tools
The following table describes the keynote legend tool properties that can be configured through the Tool Properties worksheet. For information on modifying an existing keynote legend, see "Editing a Keynote Legend" on page 1864.
Property Name Layer key Layer override Table style
Description
Specifies the layer key for the layer to which the legend is assigned. To change, click the current value (default is ANNOBJ) to access the Select Layer Key dialog box.
Specifies one or more layer key overrides. Click the field to access the Select Layer Overrides dialog box.
Specifies the AutoCAD table style for the keynote legend. Possible values are Reference Keynote Legend, Sheet Keynote Legend, and Standard. When this property is unspecified (--), the current table style for the drawing is used.
1862 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Property Name Table style location Legend type Display symbol Table title Grouping level
Blank rows Data delimiter Group delimiter
Description
Specifies the location of the drawing file containing the table style. Click the property and use the Browse option from the drop-down list to locate and enter the path to locations other than the default.
Possible values are Reference Keynote Legend, Sheet Keynote Legend, and Basic Table.
Specifies whether the symbol inserted for block-based sheet keynotes also appears in the keynote legend. (Not displayed if Legend type is Basic Table).
The title that appears for keynote legend in the drawing. You can edit the default value as needed.
Specifies the number of keynoting standard organizational levels (such as division, group, and subgroup) for which headings will appear in the legend. For example, if three levels are specified for a legend containing keynotes for metal studs from the Aec Keynote Database, the metal stud keynotes are listed under three headers: DIVISION 9 - FINISHES, 09100 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES, and 09110 NONLOADBEARING WALL FRAMING. For the Sheet Keynote Legend tool, the default setting for this property is zero. (Not displayed if Legend type is Basic Table).
Specifies the number of blank rows, if any, to be inserted between headers in the keynote legend. (Not displayed if Legend type is Basic Table).
Unspecified (--) by default. You can add a delimiter to appear between the name of the group and its description. Use of a delimiter adds a column to the table. (Not displayed if Legend type is Basic Table.)
Specifies a delimiter to appear between the key and the note. The default for both reference and sheet keynote legends is a dash (-). Use of a delimiter adds a column to the table. (Not displayed if Legend type is Basic Table.)
Generating a Keynote Legend
Use this procedure to generate and position a keynote legend within the current drawing. Keynotes to include in the legend can be selected individually from the current drawing, or you can specify one or more sheets from which all keynotes of the selected type (sheet or reference) will be included. You can also generate a legend containing keynotes that have not yet been inserted. In this case, you select the keynotes from a database.
1 On the Annotation tool palette, click either the Sheet Keynote Legend tool or the Reference Keynote Legend tool.
2 Specify the keynotes to be included in the keynote legend:
If you want to...
Then...
include only selected keynotes from the select each keynote you want to include, and press ENTER. current drawing
include all keynotes from other sheets
right-click, and click Sheets to display the Select Sheets for Keynote Legend dialog box. The left pane lists sheets in the current project. Select sheets as desired and move them to the right pane by clicking Add. You can also click Browse to find and retrieve sheets from other projects or drawings that have not been saved as sheets. When the right pane shows all the drawings/sheets from which you want to include keynotes, click OK.
include selected keynotes from a keynote database
right-click, and click from Database to display the Select Keynote dialog box. To select multiple keynotes, press CTRL while you click consecutive keynotes. You can repeat this technique in different groups within the hierarchy. When all selections are made, click OK.
NOTE If you select keynotes of a type other than the type specified for the keynote legend, they will be filtered from the resulting keynote legend.
Using Keynote Legends | 1863
Selecting sheets to include in keynote legend
NOTE If your selections include keynotes from databases that do not share the same group hierarchy, you are prompted to select one database. Only keynotes from that database are included in the resulting legend. To include other keynotes, you can create additional legends by rerunning the keynote legend command and specifying different databases.
3 Specify an insertion point for the upper-left corner of the keynote legend table.
The keynote legend is displayed in the drawing area, automatically layer keyed and scaled to 1:1 in paper space, or to the scale of the current drawing in model space.
Editing a Keynote Legend Although keynote legends are actually AutoCAD® tables, they are similar to other Autodesk® Architectural Desktop schedule tables in that the size, location, color, and other aspects of the keynote legends appearance can be modified using the Properties palette or the Basic Modify Tools option on the context menu. Individual rows, columns, and cells can also be edited through their context menus. The topics in this section describe editing functions that apply to the keynote legend as a whole and are available from its context menu.
Reselecting Keynotes for a Keynote Legend
Use this procedure to regenerate a keynote legend with a different selection of keynotes. You might like this method better than adding or removing keynotes individually, or deleting the legend and generating a new one, especially if you have modified the size, location, or appearance of the existing one.
1 Select the keynote legend, right-click, and click Selection Reselect.
2 Specify the keynotes to include in the keynote legend.
If you want to...
Then...
include only selected keynotes from the select each keynote you want to include, and press ENTER. current drawing
include all keynotes from other sheets
right click, and click Sheets to display the Select Sheets to Keynote dialog box. The left pane lists sheets in the current project. Select sheets as desired and move them to the right pane by clicking Add. You can also click Browse to find and retrieve sheets from other projects or drawings that have not been saved as sheets. When the right pane shows all the drawings/sheets from which you want to include keynotes, click OK.
include selected keynotes from a keynote database
right-click, and click from Database to display the Select Keynote dialog box. You can select multiple keynotes by pressing TRL key while clicking consecutive keynotes. You can repeat this technique in different groups within the hierarchy. When all selections are made, click OK.
The keynote legend is regenerated to include only your new selections. It may be larger or smaller, depending on whether keynotes were added or removed, but the location and other characteristics remain unchanged.
1864 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
NOTE If your selections include keynotes from databases that do not share the same group hierarchy, you are prompted to select one database. Only keynotes from that database are included in the resulting legend. To include other keynotes, you can create additional legends as necessary by rerunning the keynote legend command and specifying different databases.
Updating a Keynote Legend
Use this procedure to validate a keynote legend against the database on which it was based. (All keynotes in a keynote legend must be from the same database.) Any keynotes not found in the database are invalid and are removed from the keynote legend.
1 Select the keynote legend.
2 Right-click, and click Update Keynote Legend.
The keynote legend is updated to include only valid keynotes, and the number of rows removed is reported on the command line.
Adding Keynotes to a Keynote Legend
Use this procedure to add keynotes to a keynote legend. The procedure is similar to generating a keynote legend, but the prompts vary depending on whether the legend was created from selected drawings/sheets or from selected keynotes.
1 Select the keynote legend, right-click, and click Selection Add. 2 Specify the keynotes to include in the keynote legend.
If ...
Then...
the keynote legend was based on keynotes select each keynote you want to include, and press ENTER. selected only from the current drawing
the keynote legend was based on keynotes from other sheets
right-click, and click Sheets to display the Select Sheets to Keynote dialog box. The left pane lists sheets in the current project. Select sheets as desired and move them to the right pane by clicking Add. You can also click Browse to find and retrieve sheets from other projects or drawings that have not been saved as sheets. When the right pane shows all the drawings/sheets from which you want to include keynotes, click OK.
the keynote legend was based on keynotes selected from a database.
right-click, and click from Database to display the Select Keynote dialog box. To select multiple keynotes, press CTRL while you click consecutive keynotes. You can repeat this technique in different groups within the hierarchy. When all selections are made, click OK.
NOTE If your selections include keynotes from databases that do not share the same group hierarchy, you are prompted to select one database. Only keynotes from that database are included in the resulting legend. To include other keynotes, you can create additional legends by rerunning the keynote legend command and specifying different databases.
Removing Keynotes from a Keynote Legend You can remove keynotes from a keynote legend simply by selecting them and pressing DELETE. Likewise, you can select and delete the rows/cells that contain keynote division and group names.
Using a Keynote Legend to Locate Keynotes Use this procedure to locate all instances of a selected sheet or reference keynote in a drawing for which a keynote legend has been generated.
1 Select the keynote legend, right-click, and click Selection Show. 2 Hover the cursor above the row containing the keynote you want to locate.
Using Keynote Legends | 1865
All instances of the selected keynote are highlighted in the drawing and a tooltip displays the total number of instances. Only those keynotes of the same type as the selected keynote legend (sheet or reference) are highlighted or included in the count. Alternatively, press CTRL and click a row in the legend to zoom to a magnification that bounds all instances of the selected keynote. Editing Keynote Legend Table Styles Keynote legends use AutoCAD table styles. Use this procedure to modify the available table styles. 1 On the Format menu, click Table Style. 2 In the Styles list, select the style you want to modify, and then click Modify. 3 Adjust the settings under the Data, Column Heads, and Title tabs as desired, and then click OK. For more detailed explanations of style settings, see "New and Modify Table Style Dialog Boxes" in AutoCAD help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and then click List Topics. Table Style and Modify Table Style dialog boxes
Viewing and Editing Keynotes in a Drawing
This section describes editing operations that can be performed on keynotes once they have been inserted in a drawing.
1866 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Viewing Keynotes with the Object Inspect Tool Use this procedure to view the full text of any keynote or other text annotation in a drawing without having to zoom in. Both the key and the note are displayed, regardless of the format in which they were inserted.
1 On the toolbar, click (Object Inspect). 2 Place the cursor over the annotation or keynote you want to view.
The text of the keynote or annotation is displayed in a tooltip.
Re-Keynoting Use this procedure to change a keynote so that it references a different keynote. The new keynote can be from the same database as the original or from a different one.
1 Select the keynote, right-click, and click Re-Keynote. 2 Select the keynoted object, or press ENTER if the keynote does not apply to a specific object. 3 In the Select Keynote dialog box, select the keynote you want to use, and then click OK.
The new keynote is added to the drawing in place of the old one. Note that the change is not reflected in keynote legends that include the original keynote. If the new keynote is from the same database as the original one, you can update any associated keynote legends by adding and deleting individual entries. However, if different databases are involved, you must regenerate keynote legends for each of them. In any case, if you have performed more than a few re-keynotings, it may be preferable to use the Reselect option on the keynote legend context menu, or to regenerate the keynote legend. See "Generating a Keynote Legend" on page 1863 and "Reselecting Keynotes for a Keynote Legend" on page 1864.
Editing Keynotes Use the following procedure to edit a keynote after it has been inserted into a drawing. You cannot directly edit the key or the note, but you can add text before or after the keynote using the Multiline Text Editor, and you can change the keynote or its format using the Field dialog box.
1 Double-click the keynote (or select it, right-click, and click Mtext Editor) to display the Multiline Text Editor. Multiline Text Editor
2 Add text before or after the keynote, or double-click the keynote to change the format or specify a different keynote using the Field dialog box (see "Inserting or Editing an AEC Keynotes Field" on page 1858).
3 Click OK to close the Field dialog box, if necessary. 4 Click OK on the toolbar or click anywhere in the drawing area to close the Multiline Text Editor and
implement your changes.
NOTE You can also add automatically updatable fields (such as a date and time stamp or other project information) before or after the keynote by right-clicking and clicking Insert Field.
Changing Keynote Formats Keynotes can be displayed in three formats: key only, note only, or both key and note. When using both keys and notes, you can also specify the typographical device used to separate the key from the note (for example, key - note as opposed to key:note).
Viewing and Editing Keynotes in a Drawing | 1867
You can change keynote formats individually or globally within a single drawing. For example, you may want to display both keys and notes while you are keynoting a drawing, but display only keys when you finish. Changing Individual Keynote Formats Use this procedure to change the format of a keynote that has been inserted in a drawing.
1 Double-click the keynote to display the Multiline Text Editor. 2 In the Text Formatting box, right-click the selected keynote. 3 In the Field dialog box, make sure the current Field category is Aec Keynotes, and then select a keynote
format under Field names. If one of the key-and-note options is selected, you can select an option under Keynote Format. You can also change the setting under Format, if desired. Keynote format options in the Field dialog box
4 Click OK twice. The selected keynote is reformatted.
Globally Changing Keynote Formats Use this procedure to change the format of all keynotes of a given type (reference or sheet) within a drawing.
1 On the View menu, select Keynote Display Reference Keynotes, or Keynote Display Sheet Keynotes. 2 In the Select Reference Keynote Display or Select Sheet Keynote Display dialog box, select an option for
Field names. If you select the Key and Note option, you can also select an option for Keynote Formats. You can change the Format setting regardless of the Field name selection. Select Reference Keynote Display dialog box (identical for sheet keynotes)
3 Click OK to implement the format changes for all keynotes of the selected type within the drawing.
1868 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Changing Databases for Existing Keynotes Autodesk® Architectural Desktop keynoting functionality includes a tool that lets you globally change database references for existing keynotes within a drawing, provided the same keys exist in both the currently referenced database and the one you want to use instead. When you run the tool, it identifies all currently referenced databases for selected keynotes in the drawing, and then prompts you to identify the database you want to switch from and the database you want to switch to. This capability is useful in situations where it is discovered that project team members have inadvertently used two different databases to keynote a drawing, or when you decide to switch from an office standard keynote database to a project standard keynote database. The tool can be run from the command line by entering AecKeynoteDatabaseReselect, or you can set it up as a menu selection, as in the following procedure.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Reselect Keynote Database.
3 Select the keynotes you want to run the tool against and press ENTER.
All databases referenced by the selected keynotes are listed on the command line.
4 Enter the full path or the Globally Unique ID (GUID) for the database currently referenced by the keynotes you want to change.
5 Enter the full path or the Globally Unique ID (GUID) for the database you want to be referenced.
The number of keynotes updated by the tool is displayed on the command line.
Specifying Keynotes
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides pre-specified keynotes for detail components and many architectural objects that are included with the software. You can change these associations to specify different keynotes from either the AecKeynotes or AecKeynotes-Assemblies databases or from a database that you have loaded. You can also specify keynotes for individual components of architectural objects by associating keynotes with material definitions. Because material definitions supplied with the software are not size-specific, individual keynotes are not pre-specified. Instead, each material definition is pre-associated with a particular group from the MasterFormat scheme. This streamlines the process of locating the appropriate keynote when you want to specify one for the material.
The method used to specify a keynote depends on the type of object. For architectural objects and their components, you associate keynotes with individual styles and material definitions using the Style or Material Definition Properties dialog box, which can be accessed through the Style Manager or from the context menu of the object. For detail components, you use the Detail Component Manager to access and edit the Keynote field values.
Specifying Keynotes for Object Styles
Use this procedure to specify a keynote for an architectural object by associating the keynote with the object style. The same procedure applies whether you are specifying a keynote association for the first time or changing an existing one. Note, however, that if you change the keynote association for an object style, it does not affect previously inserted keynotes for objects created using that style. Those objects must be re-keynoted if you want them to reflect the newly specified keynote. If you are establishing keynote associations for a number of the object styles that are included with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you may find it most efficient to work from the Styles drawing files (located at C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles).
1 On the Format menu, select Style Manager.
2 In the left pane of the Style Manager, expand Architectural Objects and any subcategories as necessary to locate the object style for which you want to specify a keynote.
3 Select the desired object style.
4 On the General tab of the Style Properties dialog box, click Select Keynote.
5 In the Select Keynote dialog box, make sure the correct database is displayed in the Keynote Database field (if you are using the default keynote databases, it should be AecKeynote-Assemblies), and then select the desired keynote from the hierarchical tree view.
6 Click OK twice.
The keynote is specified for the selected object style and will be used for subsequent keynote insertions for objects using that style.
Specifying Keynotes | 1869
Specifying Keynotes for Object Components Use this procedure to specify a keynote for a particular component of an architectural object by associating the keynote with the material definition for that component. The same procedure applies, whether you are specifying a keynote association for the first time or changing an existing one. Note, however, that if you change the keynote association for a material definition, it does not affect previously inserted keynotes for object components using that material definition. Those object components must be re-keynoted if you want them to reflect the newly specified keynote. If you are establishing keynote associations for a number of material definitions that are included with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you may find it most efficient to work from the material definitions drawing file (located at C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles).
1 On the Format menu, select Style Manager. 2 In the left pane of the Style Manager, expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Material Definitions.
Locate the material definition for which you want to specify a keynote. 3 Select the desired material definition. 4 On the General tab of the Material Definition Properties dialog box, click Select Keynote. 5 In the Select Keynote dialog box, make sure the correct database is displayed in the Keynote Database field
(if you are using the default keynote databases, it should be Aec Keynote), and then select the desired keynote from the hierarchical tree view. 6 Click OK twice. The keynote is specified for the selected material definition and will be used for subsequent keynote insertions for object components with that material definition.
Specifying Keynotes for Detail Components Use this procedure to specify a keynote for a detail component. The same procedure applies, whether you are specifying a keynote association for the first time or changing an existing one. Note, however, that if you change the keynote association for a detail component, it does not affect previously inserted keynotes for that detail component. Those detail components must be re-keynoted if you want them to reflect the newly specified keynote.
1 On the Insert menu, select Detail Component Manager. 2 In the Detail Component Manager, make sure the Current detail component database field displays the
correct database. 3 In the hierarchical tree view, select the group that contains the detail component for which you want to
specify a keynote, and then select the detail component in the size table at the bottom of the window. 4 Resize the Detail Component Manager window, or use the scroll bar at the bottom of the window as
necessary so that the Keynote column is visible. 5 Select the Keynote field for the selected detail component, right-click, and click Edit. 6 In the Select Keynote dialog box, make sure the correct database is displayed in the Keynote Database field,
and then select the desired keynote from the hierarchical tree view. 7 Click OK.
The key for the selected keynote is displayed in the Keynote field.
8 Click Close, and click Yes when prompted to save changes. The keynote is specified for the selected detail component and will be used for subsequent keynote insertions for that component.
NOTE If no keynote is specified for the detail component, the Select Keynote dialog box is displayed. If a keynote is specified for the components table or group to which the detail component belongs, the node representing that group is highlighted within the tree view. Keynotes cannot be specified at the table level using Autodesk® Architectural Desktop functionality. This requires customization of the detail component database using Microsoft® Access.
1870 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Working with Keynote Databases
Keynotes used in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop are stored in Microsoft® Access databases. There are two default keynote databases:
AecKeynotes: This database is used for keynoting individual detail components and materials according to the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) MasterFormat standard.
AecKeynotes-Assemblies: This database is used for keynoting architectural objects that are assemblies of multiple components. These keynotes are based on the CSI Uniformat standard.
To accommodate proprietary office standards and other project-specific keynoting schemes, you can modify the default databases or you can create your own databases using either Microsoft® Access or the editing functionality provided with the software. You can also configure keynote databases to control which ones are available for assigning to individual projects and to specify the order in which they are searched. Configuring Keynote Databases Autodesk® Architectural Desktop supports multiple keynote databases, which you can assign to individual projects (see "Setting the Detail Component and Keynote Databases for a Project" on page 180). When you are working within a given project, only those databases assigned to that project are accessible through the Select Keynote dialog box. Before a database can be assigned to a project, however, it must be on the list of available databases. Both keynote databases provided with the software (AecKeynotes and AecKeynotes-Assemblies) are included on this list by default. You can add databases to the list or remove them. If a particular keynote exists in multiple databases, you can specify the order in which the databases are searched to find a keynote that has been specified for an object. (Only the key is stored with the object style; the corresponding note must be retrieved from a database at the time of insertion.) Adding a Keynote Database Use this procedure to add a database to the list of available keynote databases.
1 On the Format menu, select Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click the AEC Content tab. 3 On the AEC Content page, click the Add/Remove button for Keynote Databases. 4 In the Add/Remove Keynote Databases dialog box, click Add.
5 In the Select Component Database browser window, locate the database you want to add, and click Open.
Working with Keynote Databases | 1871
The selected database is added to the bottom of the list in the Add/Remove Keynote Databases dialog box. You can specify the order in which databases are searched by clicking the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the position of a selected database within the list. Moving a database to the top of the list makes it the default selection for the Select Keynote dialog box. 6 Click OK twice. Removing a Keynote Database Use this procedure to remove a database from the list of available keynote databases. 1 On the Format menu, select Options. 2 In the Options dialog box, click the AEC Content tab. 3 On the AEC Content page, click the Add/Remove button for Keynote Databases. 4 In the Add/Remove Keynote Databases dialog box, select the database you want to remove from the list, and click Remove.
5 Click OK twice. Note that if you remove the top database in the list, the next database listed becomes the default selection in the Select Keynote dialog box.
Merging Old and New Keynote Databases If you have modified one of the default keynote databases supplied with a previous release of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, and you want to migrate your modifications to the corresponding database in the current release, you can do so using the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration utility. For detailed instructions, see "Migrating Detail Component and Keynote Databases" on page 2069. Setting Keynote Database Permissions in a Multi-User Environment If you are working in a multi-user network environment with keynote and detail content on a remote server, you may want to allow some users to edit databases and others to have read-only access. For this to work properly, all users must have write permission to the folder where the databases are installed. Without write permission to the folder, a user will not be able to open any database within the folder, because the necessary lock file cannot be generated on that user's behalf, regardless of whether the user has write permission to the database itself. Once all users have write
1872 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
permission to the folder, permissions for individual databases (*.mdb files) can then be set on a per-user basis. Note, however, that this arrangement allows users to access and edit other content within the folder, such as drawing, image, and XML recipe files, unless you set permissions on these files individually to prevent it. For this reason, you may want to keep the folders containing keynote and detail content separate from other content installed with Architectural Desktop so that write permission is not available to all users for all content. Creating and Modifying Keynote Databases You can create and modify keynote databases using Microsoft® Access directly if you are familiar with that product and with the structure of keynote databases in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop (for more information, see "Keynote Database Schema" on page 1878). However, the preferred method is to use the Keynote Editor provided with the software. For databases to which you have read/write access, most of the Keynote Editor functions are also available from the Select Keynote dialog box.
NOTE If you are working in a multi-user environment, it is recommended that you modify a keynote database only when no other users are accessing it.
The Keynote Editor The Keynote Editor is a standalone application that lets you create and modify keynote databases. Accessed from the CAD Manager menu, the Keynote Editor dialog box provides a hierarchical tree view of the currently selected database, which displays as a root node. For an existing database, you can expand the root node to display groups, and then expand group nodes to display sub-groups or individual keynotes. Alternatively, you can type text into the Filter box below the tree view. Clicking the Filter button, pressing TAB, or pressing ENTER expands all nodes under any node whose name includes the text you enter. If you are creating a new database, you add the root node using the New Database button, and then add groups and keynotes using the buttons along the right side of the dialog box. These buttons (Add Group, Delete, Add Keynote, Edit, and Specify Keysort) are also available from the Select Keynote dialog box for databases to which you have read-write access.
Creating a Keynote Database Using the Keynote Editor to create a new keynote database entails the following basic steps:
Step 1: Create a blank database by specifying a name and location. (For detailed instructions, see "Creating a Blank Keynote Database" on page 1874.)
Step 2: Add groups and subgroups to reflect the major and minor divisions within the keynoting scheme. (For detailed instructions, see "Adding Groups to a Keynote Database" on page 1875.)
Step 3: Add individual keynotes within groups and subgroups as applicable. (For detailed instructions, see "Adding Keynotes to a Keynote Database" on page 1875.)
Step 4: Save the new database.
Working with Keynote Databases | 1873
After saving the new database, you can add it to the list of available databases (see "Adding a Keynote Database" on page 1871) and assign it to projects (see "Setting the Detail Component and Keynote Databases for a Project" on page 180).
Creating a Blank Keynote Database Use this procedure to create a blank Microsoft® Access database with all required tables and queries for keynote storage and retrieval. This is the first step in creating a new keynote database using the Keynote Editor.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown.
2 On the CAD Manager menu, select Keynote Editor.
3 At the bottom of the Keynote Editor dialog box, click New Database. The Create a new keynote database browser window is displayed.
4 In the browser window, navigate to the location for the new database. 5 Enter a name for the new database in the File name field. 6 Click Save.
A node named New Keynote Database is displayed in the Keynote Editor.
7 Select the new database node, and click
.
8 In the Keynote Database Properties dialog box, enter the Display Name, Description, and Author for the new database, and click OK.
A blank Microsoft® Access database is created with all required tables and queries for keynote storage and retrieval. The new database has the global unique identifier shown in the GUID field and is displayed in the Keynote Editor as a root node with the display name you provided. 9 Click Save. You can now begin populating the database by using the Keynote Editor to add groups and individual keynotes.
1874 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Adding Groups to a Keynote Database Use this procedure to add a group to a keynote database. You can use the same basic procedure to add as many levels of subgroups as you want within a group.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Keynote Editor.
NOTE The rest of this procedure can also be performed from the Select Keynote dialog box.
3 Select a database from the Keynote Database list. 4 Select the root node for the database if you want to add a top-level group, or expand the root node and
group/subgroup nodes as necessary until you can select the node to which you want to add a subgroup.
5 Click
.
The Add Group dialog box is displayed with the read-only ID field showing the database identifier for the group you are adding.
6 Enter a Group Name and a Description, and click OK. The group or subgroup you have defined is displayed as a new node in the hierarchical tree view.
Adding Keynotes to a Keynote Database Use this procedure to add a keynote to a group or subgroup within a keynote database.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Keynote Editor.
NOTE The rest of this procedure can also be performed from the Select Keynote dialog box.
3 Select a database from the Keynote Database list. 4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary until you can select the node to which you
want to add a keynote.
5 Click
.
The Add Keynote dialog box is displayed with the read-only ID field showing the database identifier for the keynote you are adding.
Working with Keynote Databases | 1875
6 Enter a key and a note, and click OK.
The keynote you have defined is displayed as a new node in the hierarchical tree view.
TIP If you need to add a series of keynotes within a group or subgroup, you can save time by adding the first keynote, right-clicking it, and clicking Copy Series. You then specify the number of copies to make and click OK. The specified number of sequentially numbered keys are added to the group. For example, if you create key A1001 and then use the Copy Series option to add 10 copies, keys A1002 through A1011 are added. You can then edit keynote nodes individually to add the notes, as explained under "Adding Components to a Detail Component Database" on page 1839.
Editing Groups in a Keynote Database Use this procedure to change the name or description of a group within a keynote database.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Keynote Editor.
NOTE The rest of this procedure can also be performed from the Select Keynote dialog box.
3 Select a database from the Keynote Database list. 4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary, and select the group/subgroup you want
to edit.
5 Click
.
The Group Properties dialog box is displayed with the read-only ID field showing the database identifier for the group you are editing.
6 Edit the Group Name and Description values as desired, and click OK. Editing Keynotes in a Keynote Database Use this procedure to change the key or the note for a keynote within a database.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Keynote Editor.
NOTE The rest of this procedure can also be performed from the Select Keynote dialog box.
3 Select a database from the Keynote Database list. 4 Expand the root node and group/subgroup nodes as necessary, and select the keynote you want to edit.
5 Click
.
1876 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
The Keynote Properties dialog box is displayed with the read-only ID field showing the database identifier for the keynote you are editing.
6 Edit the Key and Note values as desired, and click OK.
Deleting Keynotes or Groups from a Keynote Database Use this procedure to delete one or more groups, subgroups, or keynotes from a keynote database. Note that deleting a group also deletes any subgroups and keynotes within that group.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Keynote Editor.
NOTE The rest of this procedure can also be performed from the Select Keynote dialog box.
3 Select a database from the Keynote Database list. 4 Select the nodes representing keynote groups, subgroups or keynotes you want to delete.
TIP To select multiple nodes, hold down the CTRL key while clicking the nodes.
5 Click
.
The selected nodes are deleted from the hierarchical tree view in the Keynote Editor.
Moving Keynotes or Groups in a Keynote Database Use this procedure to move a keynote, group, or subgroup to a different group or level within the database hierarchy. Note that moving a group also moves any subgroups and keynotes within that group.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Keynote Editor.
NOTE The rest of this procedure can also be performed from the Select Keynote dialog box.
3 Select a database from the Keynote Database list.
4 Select the node (group, subgroup, or keynote) to move and drag it to the desired location in the hierarchical tree view.
Specifying Sort Order for Keynotes
Use this procedure to specify the order in which keynotes in a given database are listed when displayed in the Keynote Editor, the Select Keynote dialog box, or keynote legends. To specify the sort order, you enter one or more masks that correspond to the patterns used for keys in the database. Keynotes are sorted on a field-by-field basis within each pattern. In other words, all keynotes having the same key pattern as the first mask you enter will be listed before any keynotes having the second pattern you enter.
Working with Keynote Databases | 1877
When entering a mask, use the following conventions to represent the fields, characters, and delimiters that comprise the key pattern:
Enclose sortable fields in brackets [ ] and delimiters in curly brackets { }. Example: [field]{delimiter}[field]. Delimiters can be any character except a backslash (\) or any character string that does not begin with a backslash.
(The backslash is reserved for system use.) Use a pound sign (#) to indicate a numeric character and a question mark (?) to indicate an alphanumeric character
(digit, letter, or punctuation mark). For fixed-length fields, use the specified number of characters. Example: [###] indicates a 3-digit fixed-length field. Use [#...#] to indicate a variable-length numeric field, and [?...?] for a variable-length alphanumeric field. A variable-length field is always followed by a delimiter unless it is the final field in the mask.
As an example, the AecKeynotes database uses keys that consist of a 5-digit field, followed by a delimiter (.), a 1-character alphanumeric field, and a variable-length numeric field (for example, 09250.A101). The mask representing this pattern would be [#####]{.}[?][#...#]
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Keynote Editor. 3 Select a database from the Keynote Database list.
4 Click
to display the Specify Key Sort dialog box.
5 In the Specify Key Sort dialog box, enter a key sort mask for each key pattern in the selected database. Use a different line for each mask.
6 Click OK. Keynote Database Schema To create or modify a keynote database by using Microsoft® Access (rather than using the Keynote Editor), you need to be familiar with the database schema used in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. A keynote database contains four tables:
Fingerprint Groups Keynotes KeySort
1878 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Fingerprint Table
The Fingerprint table uniquely identifies a keynote database and contains the following fields: GUID: The GUID is the global unique identifier for a particular keynote database. When you insert an AEC Keynotes field to specify a keynote, a link to the keynote database is established using this GUID and the row ID of the keynote in the Keynotes table. If you leave this field empty when creating a database, a GUID is generated when the database is loaded using the Add/Remove Keynote Databases dialog box. Type: For a keynote database, this field must contain the string "Keynote." (For a detail component database, the string must be "Component.") Author, Display Name, and Description: The values for these fields are displayed in the corresponding fields in the Add/Remove Keynote Databases dialog box.
Groups Table
The Groups table defines the hierarchical organization of keynotes within the database. This hierarchy determines the order in which divisions, groups, subgroups and individual keynotes are displayed in the Keynote Editor, the Select Keynote dialog box, and keynote legends. The following fields apply to each row in the table:
ID: A sequential number identifying a particular row in the table. This number should never change. Parent: Identifies the parent of the group identified in the Group field. Group: Identifies a particular division, group, or subgroup. Note that the root parent group (\-*) is special and its
ID is zero. Description: Provides the descriptive name of the group. Modified: When the box is checked, it indicates that the row has been modified and prevents the row from being
overwritten if the database is migrated when new content is released by Autodesk. You must click the box to enable this protection for any row you modify.
Working with Keynote Databases | 1879
Keynotes Table
This table defines the individual keynotes for all the groups identified in the Groups table. The following fields are included:
ID: A sequential number identifying a particular row in the table. This number should never change. This ID, combined with the GUID of the database, is tracked by the AEC Keynotes field when you insert a keynote into a drawing. This enables keynotes in a drawing to be updated when changes are made to the keynote database.
Parent Group: Identifies the parent of the keynote, displaying the Group and Description field values from the Groups table. TIP If you want a flat (non-hierarchical) keynote list, you can assign the root parent group (\-*) to all keynotes in this table.
Key: Specifies the key for the keynote. If you are creating a database and have already created the Groups table, this field displays the value from the Group field. The delimiter and suffix are user-definable.
Note: Provides the note for the specified key. Modified: When the box is checked, it indicates that the row has been modified and prevents the row from being
overwritten if the database is migrated when new content is released by Autodesk. You must click the box to enable this protection for any row you modify. For more information on database migration, see "Migrating Detail Component and Keynote Databases" on page 2069. KeySort Table
This table contains key sort masks that represent the different key patterns used in the database. The order in which the masks are listed in this table determines the order in which key patterns are listed in the Keynote Editor, the Select Keynote dialog box, and keynote legends; that is, all keynotes with keys using the pattern identified by the mask in record 1 are listed before keynotes with key patterns identified by subsequent records in the table. The illustration above shows the key sort mask for the AecKeynotes database provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The following conventions are used for key sort masks:
Enclose sortable fields in brackets [ ] and delimiters in curly brackets { }. Example: [field]{delimiter}[field]. Delimiters can be any character except a backslash (\) or any character string that does not begin with a backslash.
(The backslash is reserved for system use.)
1880 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Use a pound sign (#) to indicate a numeric character and a question mark (?) to indicate an alphanumeric character (digit, letter, or punctuation mark).
For fixed-length fields, use the specified number of characters. Example: [###] indicates a 3-digit fixed-length field. Use [#...#] to indicate a variable-length numeric field, and [?...?] for a variable-length alphanumeric field. A variable-length field is always followed by a delimiter unless it is the final field in the mask. Examples of keys using the pattern defined by the [#####]{.}[?][#...#] mask in the illustration above would include 03250.A1, 07250.B102, and 09250.C1007. You can also specify key sort masks using the Keynote Editor. as explained in "Specifying Sort Order for Keynotes" on page 1877.
Working with Keynote Databases | 1881
1882 | Chapter 43 Annotation and Keynoting Tools
Callouts
44
Details, sections, and elevations are views of the building model and part of the construction documentation. They can be created with callouts. Callouts tools create a callout that is referenced to a model space view containing a user-defined part of the building model, such as a section, an elevation or a detail. They are coordinated across the complete construction document set with the help of projects and sheet sets.
1883
Working with Callouts
Callout tools allow you to define portions of the building model as details, sections, and elevations. These portions are placed in model space views created for the callout. A model space view is a portion of a view drawing that may be displayed in its own viewport on a layout tab of a drawing. A model space view has its own name, description, display configuration, layer snapshot, drawing scale, layer state, and view direction. Model space views are an evolution of the Named Views concept of AutoCAD, but as opposed to Named Views, model spaces views have a defined boundary. You can place a model space view containing a detail, section, or elevation in the current view drawing, an existing project view drawing, or a new project view drawing. The New View Drawing Types View drawings have been enhanced for Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. In addition to the existing general view drawings, users may now access some specialized drawing types designed for saving details, sections, and elevations in a project. All of these view types are organized in the Project Navigator. These are the types of view drawings in the Drawing Management feature:
General view drawings: A general view drawing contains referenced constructs from the project, representing a specific view on the building model. General view drawings are based on the general view template defined in the project settings. 3D view of entire building view
Detail view drawings: A detail view drawing can contain one or more model space views that show a defined portion of the building model. This could be a detail or an enlarged part of a plan. You can specify the level of detail with the help of the display configuration and the 2D Section/elevation style. A model space view containing a detail can be created with a callout. Detail view drawings are based on the detail view template defined in the project settings. Detail view in callout
1884 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Section/Elevation view drawings: A section/elevation view drawing can contain one or more model space views that show a section/elevation of the building model. A model space view containing a section or elevation can be created with a callout. Specific callout tools have been added to make the creation of four-way exterior and interior elevations easier and better. Section/elevation view drawings are based on the section/elevation view template defined in the project settings. Elevation view drawing with four model space views
For more information on the view system in Autodesk Architectural Desktop, see "Views" on page 240. Using Fields in Callout Tools Fields enhance the documentation capabilities within a drawing file. A field is updatable text that is set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. Fields can be inserted into attribute definitions and can be used to create callout tools. For more information, see "Fields" on page 1793 and "Creating New Callout Tools" on page 1910. Callouts and Projects Callouts and their referenced model space views are closely linked to projects in the Drawing Management feature. Although you can use callouts to some degree outside a project, to use them optimally, you need to be working within a project. For information on working outside a project, see "Working with Callouts Outside a Project" on page 1909.
Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop
Plans, sections, elevations, and details are typically referenced to a callout. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a number of predefined callout tools for the various view types. You can also place a callout that is not referenced to a view, and reference it later.
Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop | 1885
Callout tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop
The default tool palettes in the workspace contain sample callout tools that you can use and customize as needed. In addition, the following catalogs provided with the software contain callout tools that you can add to your tool palettes:
Stock Tool catalog Autodesk Architectural Desktop Sample Palette catalog Documentation Tool Catalog
Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain callout tools with properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
The following callout tools are provided with the software:
Tool
Description
A detail callout tool with a circular boundary that can optionally insert a title mark. The callout symbol has field placeholders for the sheet number and the detail number, which are resolved when the detail is placed on a sheet.
A detail callout tool with a rectangular boundary that can optionally insert a title mark. The callout symbol has field placeholders for the sheet number and the detail number, which are resolved when the detail is placed on a sheet.
A detail callout tool with a freeform boundary that can optionally insert a title mark. The callout symbol has field placeholders for the sheet number and the detail number, which are resolved when the detail is placed on a sheet.
A detail tool with a leader line. The callout symbol has a field placeholder for the detail number that gets resolved when the detail is placed on a sheet.
A detail tool with a leader line and a tail. The callout symbol has a field placeholder for the detail number that gets resolved when the detail is placed on a sheet.
A detail tool with a leader line. The callout symbol has field placeholders for the detail number and the sheet number that get resolved when the detail is placed on a sheet.
A detail tool with a leader line and a tail. The callout symbol has field placeholders for the detail number and the sheet number that get resolved when the detail is placed on a sheet.
1886 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Tool
Description A single elevation mark tool. The elevation mark has a field placeholder for the elevation number that gets resolved when the elevation is placed on a sheet. NOTE This tool is just a variation of the other single elevation mark tools, using a different symbol style.
A single elevation mark tool. The elevation mark has field placeholders for the elevation number and the sheet number that get resolved when the elevation is placed on a sheet. NOTE This tool is just a variation of the other single elevation mark tools, using a different symbol style.
A four-way interior elevation mark tool in the format 1/2/3/4. The elevation marks contain a field placeholder for the sheet number that gets resolved when the elevation are placed on a sheet.
A four-way interior elevation mark tool in the format N/S/E/W. The elevation marks contain a field placeholder for the sheet number that gets resolved when the elevation are placed on a sheet.
A four-way exterior elevation mark tool. The elevation marks contain a field placeholder for the sheet number that get resolved when the elevation are placed on a sheet.
A single interior elevation mark tool. The elevation mark contains field placeholders for the sheet number and the elevation number that get resolved when the elevation is placed on a sheet.
A single interior elevation mark tool with inverted text. The elevation mark contains field placeholders for the sheet number and the elevation number that get resolved when the elevation is placed on a sheet.
A single section mark tool with a leader line. The section mark contains a field placeholder for the section number that gets resolved when the section is placed on a sheet.
A single section mark tool with a leader line and a tail. The section mark contains a field placeholder for the section number that gets resolved when the section is placed on a sheet.
A single section mark tool with a leader line. The section mark contains field placeholders for the section number and the sheet number that get resolved when the section is placed on a sheet.
A single section mark tool with a leader line and a tail. The section mark contains field placeholders for the section number and the sheet number that get resolved when the section is placed on a sheet.
A double section mark tool with a section line. The section marks contain field placeholders for the section number and the sheet number that get resolved when the section is placed on a sheet.
A title mark with fields for view title, viewport scale and view number.
A title mark with fields for view title and viewport scale.
Process Overview: Placing a Callout
The following general steps need to be performed to place a callout in a project drawing. Step 1: Open the view drawing in which a callout should be placed.
Process Overview: Placing a Callout | 1887
For more information, see "Opening and Closing a View Drawing" on page 249.
Step 2: Place a callout tool of the desired type in the drawing:
If you want to... create a callout without a referenced view create a detail callout create a section callout create an elevation callout
Then... place the callout tool of the desired type in the drawing. place one of the detail boundary or detail mark tools. place one of the section mark tools. place one of the elevation mark tools.
NOTE There are predefined tools for interior and exterior elevations, as well as for single and four-way elevations.
For a list of callout tools shipped with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, see "Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 1885.
The Place Callout worksheet is the central place for creating callouts. Here, you define whether you want to connect the callout with a model space view, where the model space view should be placed, and what its scale should be. For example, if you have selected a section callout tool, and choose to place the resulting model space view in a new drawing, a drawing based on the section view template is created, containing a model space view with the section, as specified in the tool. For detailed information about tool settings, see "Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool" on page 1892. Step 3: Define the location for the new model space view generated by the callout. You can choose from these locations:
in the current drawing in an existing project view drawing in a new project view drawing
Step 4: Place the model space view on a sheet.
NOTE When the model space view is placed on a sheet, field placeholders in the callout like the view number or the sheet number, are resolved. For more information, see "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
The Properties of a Callout Tool
You can use callout tools to create section views, elevation views, and detail views that are referenced to a callout. Depending on the view type you want to create, you need to set different options in the callout tool.
1888 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Properties of a detail callout
The Properties of a Callout Tool | 1889
Properties of an elevation callout
Properties of a title mark tool
The following table lists the properties you can set for the individual tool types.
Property General Category Layer Key
Layer Overrides
Callout type
Tool Type
Description
General (all callout types) General
General
Here, you specify the layer key in which the callout symbol should be inserted.
If necessary, you can specify a layer key override for the callout symbol here.
Here, you define the type of callout tool you want to insert. You can choose between these types:
Detail Boundary: a tool consisting of a detail boundary and a detail mark
1890 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Property
Callout boundary type Four way elevation type
Tag name Tag and arrow location Arrow Attribute text style Attribute text angle Dimensions Category Corner Radius Boundary linetype Boundary width View Defaults Category View Type
Generate Section/Elevation Section/Elevation style
Tool Type
Description
Detail Mark: a tool consisting of only a detail mark
Elevation Single: a tool consisting of a single elevation mark
Elevation Four-Way: a tool consisting of four elevation marks and lines
Section Tag and Tail: a tool consisting of a section line with a tag and a tail
Section Tag and Tag: a tool consisting of a section line with two tags on start and end
Detail Boundary Elevation Four Way
General General Section/ Elevation General General
You can choose the shape of the detail boundary. Available options are circular, rectangular, and freeform.
You can select the type of four-way elevation the tool should create. Available options are interior and exterior elevations.
NOTE For an interior elevation, you can select spaces as the elevation region.
Here, you define the block that is used as the callout tag.
Defines the location of the available callout symbol tags, and, if applicable, the location of the available tag arrows.
Define the block for the section/elevation mark arrow.
Here you select if the text style for attributes in the callout should be the text style of the callout tag (Content) or the current text style of the drawing (Target).
Here, you select the text angle of the attribute text. You can choose to insert the attribute text at the same angle as the callout symbol (As Inserted), horizontal in the drawing (Horizontal), or to be read from the right side (Right Reading).
Detail Boundary Detail Boundary Detail Boundary
Defines the corner radius of rectangular and freeform detail boundaries. Defines the linetype of the detail boundary. Defines the line width of the boundary lines.
General
General General
This setting determines the type of view generated by the callout tool. You can choose between the following:
Detail View: If you have selected Detail View for type, and create a model space view in a new drawing, the Detail View template set in the project will be used for the new drawing.
Section/Elevation View: If you have selected Section/Elevation View for type, and create a model space view in a new drawing, the Section/Elevation View template set in the project will be used for the new drawing.
General View: If you have selected General View for type, and create a model space view in a new drawing, the General View template set in the project will be used for the new drawing.
Here, you can choose if the tool should create a 2D section elevation.
If you have selected to generate a 2D section/elevation from the tool, you need to set a 2D section/elevation style.
The Properties of a Callout Tool | 1891
Property Section/Elevation style location Display set Display set location Scale
Tool Type General General General General
Name
Increment
Place a titlemark Title mark Category Layer Key
Layer Overrides Justify Tag Tag location Title Title location Attribute Text Style
Polyline width
General
General
General
General
General General General General General General General
General
Description
Sets the drawing or template file from in which the available 2D section/elevation styles reside.
If you have selected to generate a 2D section/elevation from the tool, you need to set a display set for the 2D section/elevation here.
Sets the drawing or template file from in which the available display sets reside.
In this setting, you define the scale of the model space view generated from the tool, as well as the scale of sheet views generated from the model space view.
NOTE You can override the scale set in the tool during insertion of the callout in the drawing.
Sets a default name for model space views that are created by this tool. You can override the name set in the tool when inserting a callout in the drawing.
Sets a default incrementing method for naming multiple model space views created with this callout tool. Available options are Integer and Character.
Here, you can select if a title mark should be attached to model space views created with this tool.
By default, a title mark that is associated to a callout tool is inserted on the same layer as the model space view generated. You can however define a different layer for the title mark by selecting a different layer key here.
If necessary, you can specify a layer key override for the title mark here.
This setting specifies the justification of the title mark in relation to the title mark line. Available options are Left and Right.
In this list, you select the block used for the title mark symbol.
Sets the drawing or template file from in which the available blocks reside.
Here, you define the title symbol.
Sets the drawing or template file from in which the available title symbols reside.
Here you select if the text style for attributes in the title should be the text style of the title tag (Content) or the current text style of the drawing (Target).
This setting specifies the width of the polyline separator. The value is measured in plotting units and scaled appropriately based on the current annotation scale.
Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool
Use this procedure to set the properties of a callout tool.
1 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 2 Click the Callouts palette. 3 Select the callout tool for which you want to change properties, right-click, and click Properties. 4 Change the properties as necessary. For a description of the available properties, see "The Properties of a
Callout Tool" on page 1888.
1892 | Chapter 44 Callouts
5 Click OK.
Placing Title Marks
You can place title marks in a drawing. A title mark can contain fields for information about model space views and sheet views. A title mark cannot be used to create a model space view, but it can be connected to an existing one. This is useful when working with legacy drawings or when annotating drawings at a later stage. You can connect title marks to any type of model space view, like details, sections, and elevations.
Placing a Title Mark
Use this procedure to place a title mark in a drawing. NOTE The title marks shipped with Autodesk Architectural Desktop contain fields for (model) view number, (model) view title, and (model) viewport scale. To display that information, they need to be associated with a model space view.
1 Open the view drawing containing the model space view to which you want to add the title mark. 2 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 3 Click the Callouts palette. 4 Select a title mark tool. 5 Select the model space view you want to associate the title mark to.
NOTE When you hover over the a model space view, its boundaries are highlighted. 6 Click to place the start point of the title mark. 7 Click to specify the end point of the title mark.
The title mark is inserted with the view fields filled in. If your title mark contains fields for sheet information, the model space view might need to be associated with a sheet before resolving these fields.
Placing Detail Callouts
You can use callouts to create specific, enlarged views of the building model. Typically, you detail components to a detail to call out items that are not included as part of the building model, like bolts and connectors, or detailed brick hatches. You can also use callouts to generate sections or elevations of an existing section or elevation. For example, you could create a section of the building model, and then create an enlarged detail from part of the section. To that detail, you could then add detail components for the construction document. For more information about detail components, see "Detail Components" on page 1815. Detail of section with slab and flange details
Placing Title Marks | 1893
Creating a Detail in the Current View Drawing
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a detail in the current view drawing. Defining a detail boundary in a drawing
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place the detail callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a detail callout tool.
, and click Document.
If you want to ...
Then ...
create a callout with a detail boundary and select one of the detail boundary tools. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop
a detail mark
provides tools for circular, rectangular, and freeform detail boundaries.
create a callout without a detail boundary
select one of the detail mark tools. Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides tools for regular detail marks, detail marks with a tail, and detail marks with a sheet number attribute.
7 If you selected a detail boundary tool, specify the extents of the detail boundary. 8 Specify the detail leader line, and press ENTER.
1894 | Chapter 44 Callouts
9 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view containing the detail.
10 If necessary, select Generate Section/Elevation.
11 If you want to add a title mark to the model space view, select Place Titlemark.
12 Select the scale for the model space view.
13 Click Current Drawing.
14 If you selected to create a detail with a section/elevation, specify the insertion point of the 2D section/elevation result.
15 If you selected to create a detail without a section/elevation, specify the extents of the model space view containing the area being detailed.
The extents of the model space view will dictate the default sheet view size, so if the model space boundary is too small, you may have problems placing annotations in it.
Once the model space view has been placed in the drawing, the field placeholders in the callout change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space view needs to be placed onto a sheet, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
The model space view is displayed in the Project Navigator under the view drawing in which you have created it.
Creating a Detail in an Existing Drawing
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a detail in an existing project view drawing. 1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place the detail callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a detail callout tool:
, and click Document.
If you want to...
Then...
create a callout with a detail boundary and select one of the detail boundary tools. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop
a detail mark
provides tools for circular, rectangular, and freeform detail boundaries.
create a callout without a detail boundary
select one of the detail mark tools. Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides tools for regular detail marks, detail marks with a tail, and detail marks with a sheet number attribute.
7 If you selected a detail boundary tool, specify the extents of the detail boundary. 8 Specify the detail leader line, and press ENTER.
Creating a Detail in an Existing Drawing | 1895
9 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view containing the detail. 10 If necessary, select Generate Section/Elevation. 11 If you want to add a title mark to the new model space view, select Place Titlemark. 12 Select the scale for the model space view. 13 Click Existing Drawing.
Select a drawing to place the detail
14 Select the project view drawing in which to place the model space view, and click OK.
15 If you selected to create a detail with a section/elevation, specify the insertion point of the 2D section/elevation result.
16 If you selected to create a detail without a section/elevation, specify the extents of the model space view containing the area being detailed. The extents of the model space view will dictate the default sheet view size, so if the model space boundary is too small, you may have problems placing annotations in it.
Once the model space view has been placed in the drawing, the field placeholders in the callout change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space view needs to be placed onto a sheet, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
17 To display the model space view in the Project Navigator, navigate to the target drawing, and expand it. The model space view is listed under the drawing.
For information on opening the model space view, see "Opening a Model Space View" on page 1906.
Creating a Detail in a New Drawing
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a detail in a new project view drawing. You can place each detail in its own detail drawing. The Detail View template set in the project is used to create the new drawing. For more information, see "Creating a New Project" on page 171. When you create a new drawing for a detail, it contains by default the same constructs, levels, and divisions as the drawing from which the detail is taken. You can change that assignment, if necessary.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place a detail callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a detail callout tool:
, and click Document.
If you want to...
Then...
create a callout with a detail boundary and select one of the detail boundary tools. Autodesk® Architectural Desktop
a detail mark
provides tools for circular, rectangular, and freeform detail boundaries.
1896 | Chapter 44 Callouts
If you want to... create a callout without a detail boundary
Then...
select one of the detail mark tools. Autodesk Architectural Desktop provides tools for regular detail marks, detail marks with a tail, and detail marks with a sheet number attribute.
7 If you selected a detail boundary tool, specify the extents of the detail boundary. 8 Specify the detail leader line, and press ENTER. 9 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view containing the detail. 10 If necessary, select Generate Section/Elevation. 11 If you want to add a title mark to the new model space view, select Place Titlemark. 12 Select the scale for the model space view. 13 Click New View Drawing. 14 Define the properties of the new view drawing, as described in "Creating a New General View Drawing"
on page 245. 15 Click Finish.
Once the model space view has been placed in the new view drawing, the field placeholders in the callout change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space view needs to be placed onto a sheet, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
Placing Section Callouts
You can use callouts to create sections of the building model. A section can be used as the basis for a detail, containing information about components such as insulation, materials, and finishes.
Detail of a section
Creating a Section in the Current Drawing
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a 2D section in the current project view drawing.
NOTE The 2D section style and the display set for the model space view containing the section are set in the callout tool. For more information, see "Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool" on page 1892.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place the section callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a section callout tool.
Placing Section Callouts | 1897
For a description of the section callout tools included with the software, see "Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 1885.
7 In the drawing area, specify the first point of the section line.
8 Continue to add points to the section line. When you have finished the shape of the section line, press ENTER.
9 Specify the direction of the section mark arrow.
10 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view containing the section. 11 Verify that Generate Section/Elevation is selected. 12 If you want to add a title mark to the new model space view, select Place Titlemark. 13 Select the scale for the model space view. 14 Click Current Drawing. 15 In the drawing area, select the insertion point for the model space view.
Once the model space view has been placed, the field placeholders in the section callout change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space view needs to be placed onto a sheet, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
2D Section view
Creating a Section in an Existing Drawing
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a 2D section in an existing project view drawing. Sections are often placed into a designated section drawing. Whenever a new section is created, it is added to that drawing.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place a section callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a section callout tool.
, and click Document.
1898 | Chapter 44 Callouts
For a description of the section mark tools included with the software, see "Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 1885. 7 In the drawing area, specify the first point of the section line. 8 Continue to add points to the section line. When you have finished the shape of the section line, press ENTER. 9 Specify the direction of the section mark arrow.
10 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view containing the section. 11 Verify that Generate Section/Elevation is selected. 12 If you want to add a title mark to new model space view, select Place Titlemark. 13 Select the scale for the model space view. 14 Click Existing Drawing.
Select a drawing to place the section
15 Select the project view drawing in which the model space view should be placed, and click OK. 16 In the drawing area, select the insertion point of the generated section.
NOTE Although you select the insertion point in the current drawing, it will be used in the target drawing where the section result is placed. That way, you have control over the insertion point of the 2D section without opening the target drawing. You can change the location of the 2D section later, when you open the drawing in which the 2D section was placed, and change it there. Once the model space view has been placed, the field placeholders in the section callout change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space view needs to be placed onto a sheet, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907. 17 To display the section view in the Project Navigator, navigate to the target drawing, and expand it. The model space view is listed under the drawing.
Creating a Section in an Existing Drawing | 1899
For information on opening the model space view, see "Opening a Model Space View" on page 1906.
Creating a Section in a New Drawing
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a 2D section in a new project view drawing. When you create a section view in a new drawing, the building model is referenced into the new drawing. A 2D section is based on the geometry of the objects cut by the section line. If you place a callout in your First Floor Plan view drawing, and create a 2D section in that drawing, then the section will only contain the first floor geometry - only those building model objects that are present either as drawing objects or external references it the current drawing. When you create a new section view drawing for the 2D section, you can control which levels, divisions, and constructs are included in the section. This affords you enhanced control over what objects will be included in the section. You could, for example, deselect the Furniture construct from the First Floor Plan view drawing, to avoid cluttering up the section with unnecessary building components. In the same way, you can add constructs, levels or divisions not present in the current view drawing, for example, to create background graphics. Building section (right) and referenced model (left)
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place a section callout, right-click, and click Open. 4 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a section mark tool.
For a description of the section mark tools provided with the software, see "Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 1885. 7 In the drawing area, specify the first point of the section line. 8 Continue to add points to the section line. When you have finished the shape of the section line, press ENTER. 9 Specify the direction of the section mark arrow. 10 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view containing the section. 11 Verify that Generate Section/Elevation is selected. 12 If you want to add a title mark to the new model space view, select Place Titlemark. 13 Select the scale for the model space view. 14 Define the properties of the new view drawing, as described in "Creating a New General View Drawing" on page 245.
1900 | Chapter 44 Callouts
NOTE By default, all constructs, levels, and divisions are preselected here. 15 Click Finish. 16 In the drawing area, select the insertion point of the generated section.
NOTE Although you select the insertion point in the current drawing, it will be used in the target drawing where the section result is placed. That way, you have control over the insertion point of the 2D section without opening the target drawing. You can change the location of the 2D section later, when you open the drawing in which the 2D section was placed, and change it there. Once the model space view has been placed in the new view drawing, the field placeholders in the section callout change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space view needs to be placed onto a sheet, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
Placing Elevation Callouts
You can use callouts to create elevations of the building model. With the callout tools of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can create interior and exterior elevations. When you create an interior elevation, you can select spaces as the elevation boundary. Four-way interior elevation
Four-way exterior elevation
Autodesk Architectural Desktop comes with a number of predefined elevation callout symbols. For a list, see "Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 1885.
Placing a Single Elevation Callout
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a single elevation.
Placing Elevation Callouts | 1901
NOTE The 2D section/elevation style and the display set for the model space view containing the elevation are set in the elevation callout tool. For more information, see "Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool" on page 1892.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place an elevation callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a single elevation callout tool. 7 Select the location for the elevation mark in the drawing. 8 Specify the direction of the elevation.
9 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view containing the elevation. 10 Verify that Generate Section/Elevation is selected. 11 If you want to add a title mark to the new model space view, select Place Titlemark. 12 Select the scale for the model space view. 13 Select where to place the elevation:
If you want to...
Then...
place the elevation in the view drawing in which you click Current Drawing. placed the callout
place the elevation in an existing elevation view drawing
click Existing View Drawing and follow the instructions in "Creating a Section in an Existing Drawing" on page 1898.
place the elevation in a new elevation drawing
click New View Drawing and follow the instructions in "Creating a Section in a New Drawing" on page 1900.
14 In the drawing, select the first corner of the elevation region. 15 Select the opposite corner of the elevation region. 16 Define the insertion point of the elevation result.
NOTE If you chose to place the elevation in a different drawing, you still select the insertion point in the current drawing. The elevation view however, will be inserted in the drawing you have specified.
Once the model space view has been placed, the field placeholders in the elevation tool change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space view needs to be placed onto a sheet, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
1902 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Placing a Four-Way Interior Elevation Callout
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a four-way interior elevation. When you create a four-way interior elevation, you can define the elevation region either by specifying its corner points in the drawing, or by selecting spaces as the elevation boundary.
NOTE The 2D section/elevation style and the display set for the model space views containing the elevations are set in the elevation callout tool. For more information, see "Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool" on page 1892.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place an elevation callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a four-way interior elevation callout tool. 7 Select the location for the elevation mark in the drawing. 8 Specify the direction of the first elevation number.
9 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the model space view containing the first of the four elevations.
10 Verify that Generate Section/Elevation is selected. 11 If you want to add a title mark to the new model space view, select Place Titlemark. 12 Select the scale for the model space view. 13 Select where to place the elevation:
If you want to...
Then...
place the elevation in the view drawing in which you click Current Drawing. placed the callout
place the elevation in an existing elevation view drawing
click Existing View Drawing and follow the instructions in "Creating a Section in an Existing Drawing" on page 1898.
place the elevation in a new elevation drawing
click New View Drawing and follow the instructions in "Creating a Section in a New Drawing" on page 1900.
14 In the drawing, select the elevation region: If you want to... define the elevation region with a space
Then... select the space, and press ENTER.
Placing a Four-Way Interior Elevation Callout | 1903
If you want to...
define the elevation region by picking two boundary points
Then...
press ENTER. Then, select the two boundary points of the elevation region.
15 Specify the depth of the elevations. 16 Specify the height of the elevations. 17 Specify the insertion point of the elevations.
NOTE If you chose to place the elevations in a different drawing, you still select the insertion point in the current drawing. The elevations, however, will be inserted in the drawing you specified.
18 Specify the distance between the elevations and their orientation.
Once the model space views have been placed, the field placeholders in the elevation callouts change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space views need to be placed onto sheets, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
Placing a Four-Way Exterior Elevation Callout
Use this procedure to place a callout that creates a four-way exterior elevation.
NOTE The 2D section/elevation style and the display set for the model space views containing the elevations are set in the elevation mark tool. For more information, see "Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool" on page 1892.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place an elevation callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a four-way exterior elevation callout tool. 7 Specify the first corner of the elevation region. 8 Specify the opposite corner of the elevation region.
9 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the model space view containing the first elevation. 10 Verify that Generate Section/Elevation is selected. 11 If you want to add a title mark to the new model space views, select Place Titlemark. 12 Select the scale for the model space view.
1904 | Chapter 44 Callouts
13 Select where to place the elevation:
If you want to...
Then...
place the elevation in the view drawing in which you click Current Drawing. placed the callout in
place the elevation in an existing elevation view drawing
click Existing View Drawing and follow the instructions in "Creating a Section in an Existing Drawing" on page 1898.
place the elevation in a new elevation drawing
click New View Drawing and follow the instructions in "Creating a Section in a New Drawing" on page 1900.
14 Specify the height of the elevations. 15 Specify the insertion point of the elevations.
NOTE If you chose to place the elevations in a different drawing, you still select the insertion point in the current drawing. The elevations however, will be inserted in the drawing you specified.
16 Specify the distance between the elevations and their orientation.
Once the model space views have been placed, the field placeholders in the callout change to a question mark. To resolve them, the model space views need to be placed onto sheets, as described in "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
Placing a Callout Without a Model Space View
Use this procedure to place a callout that is not connected to a model space view. Placing a callout that is not referenced to a model space view might be useful if you have legacy view drawings that are not yet referenced to a callout. You can create a standalone callout in a building model, and then reference it to an existing model space view or sheet view in the project. When you insert a callout without a referenced model space view in a drawing, the field placeholders in the callout are not connected to a view. Therefore, the field placeholders are displayed in the callout by their names; for example "Viewnumber," or "Sheetnumber."
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing in which you want to place a callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 5 Click the Callouts palette. 6 Select a callout tool.
For a description of the callout tools shipped with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, see "Callout Tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop" on page 1885.
7 Add the callout tool to the drawing, following the instructions for the type of tool you selected.
Placing a Callout Without a Model Space View | 1905
8 Click Callout Only. An unconnected callout symbol is inserted in the drawing.
Referencing a Callout to an Existing View
Use this procedure to reference a callout to an existing model space view or to an existing sheet view in the project. For information on creating model space views, see "Creating a Model Space View" on page 253. For information on creating sheet views, see "Creating a New Sheet View" on page 269.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette.
2 Click the Views tab.
3 Select the view drawing that contains the callout, right-click, and click Open.
4 Select the callout.
5 In the Project Navigator, navigate to the model space view or sheet view you want to reference to the callout:
If you want to...
Then...
reference the callout to an existing model space click the Views tab, and navigate to the view drawing containing the
view
model space view. Then, expand the view drawing.
reference the callout to an existing sheet view
click the Sheets tab, and click . Navigate to the sheet containing the sheet view, and expand the sheet.
NOTE If a sheet view already exists, you can reference the callout to either the sheet view or the model space view.
6 Drag the callout from the drawing onto the model space view or the sheet view in the Project Navigator.
If you referenced the callout to a model space view, the field placeholders in the callout change to question marks. For information on resolving field placeholders in callouts, see "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
If you have connected the callout to a sheet view, the field placeholders in the callout are resolved with the sheet information.
Opening a Model Space View
Use this procedure to open a model space view. When you create a model space view that is referenced to a callout, the model space view can be placed in the drawing in which the callout was placed, into an existing project view drawing, or in a new project view drawing.
1906 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Model space views are displayed and opened in the Views tab of the Project Navigator. Model space views in Project Navigator
1 In the Project Navigator, navigate to the view drawing containing the model space view. It is not important whether the drawing is already open.
2 If necessary, expand the view drawing to display the model space views contained in it. 3 Select the model space view you want to open, and double-click it.
Alternatively, you can select the model space view in the Project Navigator, right-click, and click Open.
Deleting a Model Space View
Use this procedure to delete a model space view. When you delete a model space view, any callout symbols and title marks associated with the view are not deleted automatically. After deleting the model space view, you need to manually delete the callout symbol and title mark from the source drawing.
1 On the Window menu, click Project Navigator Palette. 2 Click the Views tab. 3 Select the view drawing that contains the model space view you want to delete, and expand it. 4 Select the model space view to delete, right-click, and click Delete.
Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols
Use this procedure to place a model space view on a sheet and resolve its field placeholders. The predefined callout tools in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop contain field placeholder information about the sheet number and the view number. This information can be resolved only when the model space view created by the callout is referenced into a sheet. As long as the model space view is not placed on a sheet, the information is unresolved, and a question mark is displayed.
Deleting a Model Space View | 1907
Unresolved callout symbol in view drawing
Resolved callout symbol after placing model space view on sheet
Once the model space view is placed on a sheet, and the sheet information in the callout is resolved, a link is created between the field information in the model space view and the sheet on which it is placed. When you CTRL-click the sheet number, the corresponding sheet drawing is opened.
1 Create a model space view referenced to a callout, as described in "Placing Detail Callouts" on page 1893, "Placing Section Callouts" on page 1897, or "Placing Elevation Callouts" on page 1901.
2 In the Project Navigator, click the Sheets tab, and click . 3 In the Sheet Set View, locate the sheet onto which you want to place the model space view. 4 Open the sheet in one of these ways:
Select the sheet, right-click, and click Open. Double-click the sheet. The drawing containing the sheet is opened in the drawing area of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. The sheet you selected is the active layout. 5 In the Project Navigator, click the Views tab. 6 Select the model space view you want to place onto the sheet, and place it in one of these ways: Select the model space view, and drag it from the Project Navigator to the drawing area of the sheet. Select the model space view, right-click, and click Place on Sheet. Then, select an insertion point on
the sheet. When you open the model space view, you can see that the sheet information has been updated.
1908 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Working with Callouts Outside a Project
Model space views are based on the concepts of the Drawing Management feature. A model space view normally is created from a project view drawing and referenced into a project sheet drawing. You can use a part of the callout functionality outside a project, in a standalone DWG file, with the following limitations:
You can place model space views only within the current drawing. You can access model space views only from the Named Views dialog of AutoCAD. You cannot templates for details, sections, or elevations. Field placeholders containing information about views and sheets are not automatically resolved. You must enter
values manually.
Placing a Callout in a Non-Project Drawing File
Use this procedure to place a callout in a drawing that does not belong to a Drawing Management project.
1 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 2 Click the Callouts palette. 3 Select a callout tool. 4 Insert the callout into the drawing.
If you want to... place a detail callout
Then...
insert the tool as described in "Creating a Detail in the Current View Drawing" on page 1894.
place a section callout
insert the tool as described in "Creating a Section in the Current Drawing" on page 1897.
place a single elevation callout
insert the tool as described in "Placing a Single Elevation Callout" on page 1901.
place a four-way interior elevation callout
insert the tool as described in "Placing a Four-Way Interior Elevation Callout" on page 1903.
place a four-way exterior elevation callout
insert the tool as described in "Placing a Four-Way Exterior Elevation Callout" on page 1904.
5 Under New Model Space View Name, enter a name for the new model space view. 6 If you want to add a title mark to your model space view, select Place Titlemark. 7 Select the scale for the model space view. 8 Under Create in, select Current Drawing.
Working with Callouts Outside a Project | 1909
A model space view is placed in the current drawing.
Opening Model Space Views in a Non-Project Drawing File
Use this procedure to open a model space view in a drawing that does not belong to a Drawing Management project. 1 Place a callout in the drawing, as described in "Placing a Callout in a Non-Project Drawing File" on page 1909. 2 On the View menu, click Named Views.
3 Click the Named Views tab. The model space view you created is listed under Named Views.
4 Select the model space view you want to open, and click Set Current. 5 Click OK.
Deleting Model Space Views in a Non-Project Drawing File
Use this procedure to delete a model space view from a drawing that does not belong to a Drawing Management project. 1 Open the drawing containing the model space view you want to delete. 2 On the View menu, click Named Views. 3 Click the Named Views tab. The model space view contained in the drawing are listed under Named Views. 4 Select the model space view you want to delete, right-click, and click Delete. 5 Click OK.
Creating New Callout Tools
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a number of predefined callout tools. You can also create callout symbols with user-defined visuals and content.
Using Fields in Callout Tools
Fields enhance the documentation capabilities within a drawing file. A field is updatable text that is set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. Usually, you use property set data for this type of updatable information about the building model. However, property set data can be used only in MV-blocks. Fields can be inserted into manual properties in property set definitions, text, MText, attribute definitions and AutoCAD table cells. For detailed information about fields, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1910 | Chapter 44 Callouts
There are a number of predefined fields for sheet set information. Most of the fields refer to the current sheet, and should be inserted only in a sheet drawing. When you are creating a callout tool, you will often use a field from the Sheet Set Placeholder category: These fields let you define a field as a placeholder in a callout for a referenced sheet. The fields are resolved when the callout is referenced into a sheet. For more information, see "Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols" on page 1907.
Current Sheet Custom: You can select an AutoCAD custom property defined for the current sheet here. Current Sheet Description Current Sheet Number Current Sheet Number and Title Current Sheet Set Current Sheet Set Custom: You can select an AutoCAD custom property defined for the current sheet here. Current Sheet Set Description Current Sheet Subset Current Sheet Title Sheet Set: You can select any sheet from a sheet set as the field content; available properties are sheet title, sheet
number and sheet description. Sheet Set Placeholder: You can insert a placeholder representing information of a sheet. This placeholder is resolved
when the callout is referenced into a sheet. The following fields are available as placeholders:
Sheet Number and Title Sheet Title Sheet Number Sheet Description Sheet custom: You can select an AutoCAD custom property defined for the referenced sheet here. (Model Space) View Number and Title (Model Space) View Title (Model Space) View Number (Model Space) Viewport Scale
NOTE The fields for sheet title, sheet number, sheet description, view title, and view number can be associated with a hyperlink that jumps to the sheet or model space view referenced.
Sheet View: You can select any sheet view from a sheet set as the field content here; available properties are sheet view number, sheet view title, and sheet view viewport scale.
NOTE The fields for sheet view number and sheet view title can be associated with a hyperlink that jumps to the sheet view referenced.
Creating a Callout Tool
You can create callout tools that display information specific to the sheet set. Callouts can be referenced to model space views and can contain fields that point to a sheet or sheet view. When the model space view is placed onto into a sheet, the field is resolved and displays the sheet information.
For a list of available project and sheet set related fields, see "Using Fields in Callout Tools" on page 1910.
Process Overview: Creating a Callout Tool Creating a callout tool consists of these basic steps:
Step 1: Open the drawing in which you want to store the callout block.
Creating a Callout Tool | 1911
NOTE By default, callout blocks are placed in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial\Callouts (Imperial).dwg. You can save your callout blocks there, or create your own callout drawings.
Step 2: Add callout attributes to the drawing. Step 3: Create a block from the attributes. Step 4: Create a callout tool on a tool palette.
Adding Callout Attributes Use this procedure to create attributes for a callout tool.
1 On the Format menu, click Blocks Define Attributes. 2 Define the first attribute for the callout tool. 3 Enter a name in the Tag field.
4 Under Value, click
.
5 Under Field category, select the desired category.
TIP The Sheet Set category contains fields for views and sheets.
6 Under Field names, select the field you want to insert. Some fields require additional information, like a file name or property information.
7 Select the text format for the field text. 8 Click OK. 9 Proceed to adding the attribute as described in "Attribute Definition Dialog Box" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
NOTE An attribute can contain only one sheet set field. If you want to create a callout line that reads, for example, View Number - View Title, you must define two separate attributes.
10 Repeat steps 13 for each attribute to add to the callout tool. 11 Complete the attribute block with lines, borders, and other desired components.
1912 | Chapter 44 Callouts
The result is have a number of attributes and graphic elements in your drawing. Your callout attributes might look like this: Callout attribute block
Creating a Callout Block Use this procedure to create a block that contains the attributes you added in the previous step.
1 On the Format menu, click Blocks Block Definition. 2 Enter a name for the block. 3 Click Select Objects, and select the attributes and additional graphics to include in the title block. 4 From the Drag-and-drop units list, select Unitless. 5 Proceed to creating the block as described in "Block Definition Dialog Box" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
6 Save the drawing containing the callout block. NOTE If you are creating a callout tool that will be used by multiple users, make sure that the drawing is located in a folder all users have access to. Otherwise, the tool won't be able to be used by all users.
Creating a Callout Tool on a Tool Palette Use this procedure to create the callout tool on a tool palette.
1 On the Tools Palette, click , and click Document. 2 Click the Callouts palette. 3 Select the callout tool most similar to the tool you want to create.
For example, if you want to create a detail tool, select one of the existing detail tools. 4 Right-click, and click Copy. Then, right-click, and click Paste.
A copy of the selected tool is placed on the Callouts palette. 5 Select the copied tool, right-click, and click Properties. 6 Rename the tool as desired. 7 Under Tag location, select the drawing you have saved the callout block in. 8 Under Tag name, select the block you created. 9 Change other properties as needed; for example, add a new title mark or change the 2D section/elevation
style. 10 Click OK.
Creating a Callout Tool | 1913
1914 | Chapter 44 Callouts
Schedules and Display Themes
45
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop lets you easily insert schedule tables in your drawings to display information about selected components in your building model. The information is extracted from objects in the drawing based on property set data you attach to objects and object styles.
Display themes provide another way to present data that is typically not visible in a drawing by using color, fills, and hatches to indicate objects that have the properties identified in the display theme legend. For example, you can specify that all 2-hour fire-rated walls appear with a red fill.
Data for display themes is also extracted from property set data attached to the objects or object styles. Display themes and schedule tables are style-based annotation objects, for which styles can be created and modified in the Style Manager.
1915
Overview of Schedules
Schedules are tables you can insert in drawings to list information about selected objects in your building model. Objects are made up of properties that contain the data that displays in schedule tables. You can create schedules with varying levels of detail by defining and attaching sets of properties to object styles or to individual objects and then extracting and displaying the data in a schedule table. When you first start Autodesk® Architectural Desktop you can produce basic schedule tables using the default tools. Before you perform more complex tasks such as creating your own schedule tables, classifications, or working with formulas in your project, it is important to understand how property data, property sets, and property set definitions interact. We recommend the following topics:
"Property Sets and Property Set Definitions" on page 1918 "Property Data Formats" on page 1951 "Property Set Data" on page 1956 "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963
If you want to add simple schedules for common objects like doors using one of the default tools provided with the software, refer to the following topics:
"Basic Schedules" on page 1920 "Schedule Tags" on page 1924
If you want to manage the format and other display properties of schedules, refer to the following topics about schedule table styles:
"Working with Schedule Table Styles" on page 1933 "Specifying the Display Properties of a Schedule" on page 1946
If you want to work with more advanced scheduling tasks, such as adding classifications and formulas, refer to the following topics for information about identifying and collecting detailed information from your objects:
"Property Set Data" on page 1956 "Understanding Formulas" on page 1967 "Classification Definitions" on page 1990
Each section gives you conceptual as well as procedural information for the tasks you want to accomplish. Cross-references to additional supporting information are provided throughout. For answers to various questions about working with schedules, see "Troubleshooting Schedule Tables" on page 2005 and "Troubleshooting Schedule Table Styles" on page 2006.
Schedule Table Terminology in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop
You can add basic schedules to your drawings using tools provided with the software. These tools have predefined styles and properties. You can schedule additional details about objects, such as door hardware, by customizing an existing schedule table style or creating a new style. The following terms apply to creating and managing schedules:
schedule table tools schedule table styles property data property sets property set definitions property data formats schedule tags
1916 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Schedule Tools
The software provides default tools for basic wall, door, and window schedules on the Scheduling tool palette and in the Content Browser. Selecting one of these tools that has a style and other properties predefined, lets you quickly place a schedule table in your drawing. You can also apply the properties of a schedule table tool to existing schedule tables. You can create schedule table tools from schedule table styles. For more information, see "Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools" on page 1921.
Schedule Styles
A schedule table style specifies the properties that can be included in a table for a particular object type. The style also controls the table formatting, such as text height and spacing, columns, and headers. Display properties in the style control the visibility, layer, color, linetype, lineweight, and linetype scale of table components. For more information, see "Working with Schedule Table Styles" on page 1933. Options in schedule table styles let you create both regular and matrix schedules (also called dot schedules). You can also specify a matrix format for individual columns in a regular schedule.
Property Data
Property data is information about properties of an object. For example, width and height are typical properties of a door. The data collected on these properties might reflect 3'-0" for width and 7'-0" for height. This property data is contained within a property set. For more information, see "Property Sets and Property Set Definitions" on page 1918.
NOTE Property data values are not contained in the schedule or schedule tag, but on the object itself. The schedule and schedule tag simply displays values retrieved directly from the object to which it is anchored.
Property Sets
A property set is a user-definable group of related object properties. When you attach a property set to an object or a style, the property set becomes the container for the property data associated with the object. Property sets are specified using property set definitions (see below). For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963 and "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
Property Set Definitions
A property set definition is a documentation object that specifies the characteristics of a group of properties that can be tracked with an object or style. For example, you could create a property set definition named DoorProps that contains property definitions for DoorNumber, DoorWidth, and FireRating. Each property has a name, description, data type, data format, and default value. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
Property Data Formats
A property data format is specified for each property definition within a property set definition to control how the data for that property displays in a schedule table, in a schedule tag, or on the property palette. For example, you can use property data formats to display a door that is three feet wide, with a raw value of 36 units in a drawing, with inch units as 3'-0", or 3', or 3 ft. Property set definitions and schedule table styles use property data formats to control the display format of values for each property. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
Schedule Tags
You can use schedule tags in your drawings to graphically display the property data of an object. By linking the schedule tag to a property in a property set, such as the width of a door, you report property data of the object, such as 3'-0''. When you anchor the tag to an object to which the property set is applied, the value of the property displays in the tag. The information in the tag is updated if the object or property change. For more information, see "Schedule Tags" on page 1924.
Process Overview: Using Schedule Tables
If you create schedule tables from schedule table styles provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, the property set definitions and property data formats are already created for you, and you can begin the process of adding a schedule table to your drawing from Step 4.
Process Overview: Using Schedule Tables | 1917
To create schedules, use the following steps: Step 1: Create or modify property data formats.
These styles determine how data is displayed in a schedule table. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951. Step 2: Create or modify property set definitions for objects or object styles. Property set definitions determine the data listed for each object. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963. Step 3: Create or modify schedule table styles. Schedule table styles determine the types of objects listed in a schedule table, what data is displayed, and how the data is organized. For more information, see "Working with Schedule Table Styles" on page 1933. Step 4: Add a schedule table to the drawing with a schedule table tool or from the command line. For more information, see "Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools" on page 1921. Step 5: Attach property set data to the objects and object styles in your schedule table. You can also attach schedule tags to these objects. For more information, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956 and "Adding Property Set Data to All Objects" on page 1951. Step 6: Edit the schedule table as needed. Changes you make to objects and styles are reflected in the schedule table. You can also edit schedule tables directly in the following ways:
Edit individual table cells to change values of manual properties. For more information, see "Editing Table Cell Data" on page 1950.
Add, remove, reselect, and show relationships with items from the table. For more information, see "Basic Schedules" on page 1920.
Renumber property data. For more information, see "Renumbering Property Set Data" on page 1931. Export the finished schedule table to an external file, if necessary. For more information, see "Exporting
a Schedule" on page 1945.
Property Sets and Property Set Definitions
The data reported in a schedule table is collected from property sets that you attach to the objects or object styles you are scheduling. The properties contained in a property set are determined by the property set definition, which also specifies the object type, style, and definition to which the property set can be applied.
NOTE If you are using both Autodesk Architectural Desktop and Autodesk Building Systems, locks may appear on some property set definitions and property definitions when you open legacy engineering drawings. Data that is programmatically set cannot be modified and is protected and identified by locks:
selections on the Applies To tab and names for property set definitions anything that affects the value of underlying data and names for property definitions
A property set definition is a group of related properties of the objects and object styles to be reported in the schedule. Once attached to an object or its style, a property set becomes the container for the property data associated with the object. Values for properties are obtained directly from the object or are entered manually for the object or the style.
1918 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
A property set definition for a door object
Automatic and Manual Properties Properties for AEC object types fall into two categories:
Automatic properties are built into objects and styles when you create the object. Examples are width, length, height, and data retrieved from other sources, such as the project or the object's material. For more information, see "Understanding Automatic Properties" on page 1965.
Manual properties are those that you enter explicitly, such as fire rating, manufacturer, or finish. For more information, see "Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1975.
Automatic properties are available to include in your property set definitions. You create and enter values for manual properties. Applying Property Set Definitions to Objects and Styles You can create a property set definition for either objects or styles and definitions (like multi-view block definitions). Manual properties that are likely to be different for each instance of an object belong in an object-based property set definition that is applied by object. Property set definition that applies to door objects
Manual properties that will be the same for all instances of a style belong in a style-based property set definition that is applied to a style (such as a wall style) or a definition (such as a multi-view block definition).
Property Sets and Property Set Definitions | 1919
Property set definition that applies to multi-view block definition
Automatic properties are dynamically retrieved from the object. Most automatic properties should be put in a style-based property set definition, even if values may vary for each instance of the object. For example, the properties "Door Width" and "Door Height" are extracted automatically from door objects. Placing these properties in a style-based property set definition provides a value for each door object of that style, and is more efficient than putting them in an object-based property set definition that you then attach to each door.
Fields in Property Set Data
You can enter AutoCAD fields in a manual property attached to an object or style. Fields enhance the documentation capabilities within a drawing file because the values they display update whenever the associated property changes. Fields can also be associated with hyperlinks. For example, if you insert a field pointing to a drawing using a hyperlink in a manual property, and create a schedule table that contains that property, you can jump from the table cell with the field property in it to the drawing to which it is linked.
For more information, see "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956 and "Adding a Field to a Property Set Definition" on page 1976.
Lists in Property Set Data
List items are created in a list definition and are attached to a manual property definition. With a predefined list of valid items, you can select an item from the list for a manual property either in the property set definition or on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. This reduces the redundancy of entering values that are commonly used. For more information, see "Creating a List Definition for a Manual Property Definition" on page 1988 and "Adding a Field to a Property Set Definition" on page 1976.
Predefined Content for Schedules
There are predefined styles and properties for schedule table tools, schedule tag tools, and property set definitions provided with the software. The tools are located on the Scheduling tool palette in the Document tool palette set, and the property set definitions are in Style Manager under Documentation Objects.
You can also access default schedule table styles, schedule tags, and property set definitions in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric\Schedule Tables.dwg. You can use any of this content to create additional schedules or as the basis for creating custom schedules, tags, and property set definitions.
Basic Schedules
When you open Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you have everything you need to add schedule tables and perform common documentation tasks, such as tagging objects. Schedule tables are objects. As with other objects in your drawing, properties of schedule tables are displayed on the Properties palette when you add a schedule or if you select a schedule. For more information, see "The Properties Palette" on page 54.
Schedule table tools with predefined styles and properties are provided with the software. Using these tools you can add door, window, space, and room schedules to your drawing. They are located on the Scheduling tool palette in the Document tool palette set.
1920 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Additional schedule table tools are located in the Documentation Tool Catalog in the Content Browser. You can add tools from the Content Browser to any tool palette. For more information, see "Content Browser" on page 77.
IMPORTANT The context menu for schedule tables includes a Convert to Table option, which creates a copy of your Architectural Desktop schedule table that can be inserted as an AutoCAD® table. Architectural Desktop commands, such as
Update Schedule Table or Add All Property Sets cannot be used on the converted table. Also be aware that you may get unexpected results if you use special characters in your schedule headings, such as equal signs (=). Avoid this problem by adding an apostrophe (`) in front of the character before doing the conversion. For more information about working with AutoCAD® tables, see "Create and Modify Tables" in AutoCAD Help.
Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools
Use this procedure to add a schedule table to a drawing with a schedule table tool. You can specify properties on the Properties palette when you add a schedule table, or you can modify the schedule table later.
When you use default tools, it is not necessary to make changes to the style before you begin to capture data in your drawing. Property set data is already attached to objects. For more information, see "Working with Schedule Table Styles" on page 1933 and "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the schedule table tool you want to use.
2 Select the objects to include in the schedule table, or press ENTER to schedule an external drawing. For more information, see "Changing External Source Properties of a Schedule" on page 1948.
You can use a selection window or a crossing window to select objects. Objects that are not of the type specified for the schedule table are filtered out.
3 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point for the upper-left corner of the schedule table.
4 Specify the lower-right corner of the table, or press ENTER to scale the schedule table to the current drawing scale.
If the schedule table contains question marks in any cells, the property set containing that property is not attached to an object or style.
Empty cells or dashes in cells indicate that the property set is attached, but data is not available or is not entered for that object or style.
For more information about attaching property sets for property set data, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
Creating a Schedule Table Tool
Use this procedure to create a schedule table tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own schedule table tools if you are placing multiple schedule tables of specific styles that have the same properties.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a schedule table in the drawing
select the object, and drag it to the tool palette.
create a tool from a schedule table style in the Style Manager click Format menu Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool.
Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools | 1921
5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand General, and specify general properties for the schedule table:
If you want to...
Then...
add a description
enter text for Description.
specify the layer key
select Layer Key.
specify layer overrides
select Layer Overrides.
specify the schedule table style
select Style.
specify an external drawing file source for the style
select Style Location or Browse to specify a location.
change the schedule table scale
enter a value for Scale.
automatically update the schedule table when data in the drawing changes
select Yes for Update automatically.
manually update the schedule table when the drawing changes
select No for Update automatically.
NOTE Turning on the automatic update feature may slow drawing performance, especially in large drawings. For information about updating schedules manually, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
7 Expand Selection, and specify how to add objects to the schedule table:
If you want to...
Then...
automatically add new objects to the schedule table as they select Yes for Add new objects automatically. are added to the drawing
manually add new objects to the schedule table
select No for Add new objects automatically.
include objects from xref drawings in the schedule table
select Yes for Scan xrefs.
exclude objects from xref drawings in the schedule table
select No for Scan xrefs.
include objects from block references in the schedule table select Yes for Scan block references.
exclude objects from block references in the schedule table select No for Scan block references.
apply a layer filter to the table
specify a layer wild card.
NOTE When adding a schedule table that must scan xrefs or blocks, use a layer filter that includes both the name of the layer that contains the xref or block and the name of the layer of the object inside the xref or block. You can separate multiple layer wild cards with a comma. You cannot select individual objects within an xref drawing or a block reference. For more information, see "Working with Layer Groups" on page 386.
8 Click OK.
Adding Objects to a Schedule
Use this procedure to add objects to an existing schedule table. 1 Select the schedule, right-click, and click Selection. 2 Click Add. 3 In the drawing, select the objects to add to the schedule, and press ENTER. Use a window or a crossing window to select multiple objects. Objects that are already in the table are not added.
1922 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
NOTE You cannot add objects to a schedule table through RefEdit. Although the command appears to work during the RefEdit session, as soon as changes are saved back, the rows disappear from the schedule table. This is because you are actually selecting temporary copies of the objects in the file. In order to have objects that are in an xref or block display in a schedule table, select the xref. To include only selected objects from the xref or block, use a layer filter with the schedule table. For more information, see "Editing Style-Based Property Sets Attached to Objects in External References" on page 1960.
Removing Objects from a Schedule
Use this procedure to remove objects from a schedule table. 1 Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Selection. 2 Click Remove. 3 In the drawing, select the objects to remove from the table, and press ENTER.
Reselecting Objects for a Schedule
Use this procedure to reselect objects to include in a schedule table. After reselection, the table contains only the newly-selected objects.
1 Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Selection. 2 Click Reselect. 3 In the drawing, select the objects to include in the table, and press ENTER.
Turning Off the Out-of-Date Marker
Use this procedure if you do not want the out-of-date marker to display when an object, object style, or attached property set data has changed but the schedule is not updated. This appears by default. With the out-of-date marker display component turned on in the General schedule display representation of your drawing, a line is drawn through the schedule to indicate that the information tracked by the schedule has changed. For example, a line is drawn through the schedule if an object tracked in the schedule is moved or deleted, or if its dimensions are edited. The line is removed when you update the schedule. For more information about display components, see "Display System Structure" on page 412. Displaying an out-of-date schedule
NOTE If this display component is on, it can slow drawing performance, especially in large drawings.
1 Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the General display representation.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Scroll to display the Out-of-Date Marker component, and click Visible. 6 Click OK twice.
Updating a Schedule Manually
You can update a schedule table at any time by selecting it, right-click, and clicking Update Schedule Table. This updates the values in a schedule table when the automatic update option is turned off. Always update schedule tables before plotting the drawings that contain them.
Removing Objects from a Schedule | 1923
When you update a table manually, the table is refreshed to reflect any changes to objects or to property set data attached to objects or object styles. Objects added to the drawing after creating the schedule table are not included in the table unless Add Objects Automatically is specified in the table properties. To add objects manually, see "Adding Objects to a Schedule" on page 1922. To change the numbering in a schedule table, see "Renumbering Property Set Data" on page 1931. To ensure that the table contains accurate information, close and re-open your drawing before plotting schedule tables. Certain changes to drawings, such as reference editing, are reflected in schedule tables only when a drawing is reopened.
NOTE You can specify that a schedule table updates automatically whenever changes are made to data for scheduled objects. This is managed on the Properties palette. For more information, see "Changing General Schedule Properties" on page 1947.
Locating and Viewing Scheduled Objects in a Drawing
Use this procedure to highlight objects in the drawing that are included in a schedule table.
1 Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Selection Show.
2 Select the border of the schedule table to show all the objects in the table, or select a specific cell to show only the object contained on that row.
The selected objects are highlighted in the drawing.
Schedule Tags
Schedule tags are symbols that connect building model components with lines of data in a schedule table. Schedule tags display data about the objects to which they are attached. There are schedule tag tools with predefined properties provided with the software. There are tag tools on the Scheduling tool palette in the Document tool palette set and a more extensive selection in the Documentation Tool Catalog in the Content Browser. You can add tools from the Content Browser to any tool palette. For more information, see "Content Browser" on page 77.
The schedule tags you create display property set data about objects based on the data you specify. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Tag" on page 1927. After you create a schedule tag, you can drag it to any tool palette to create a schedule tag tool. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Tag Tool" on page 1928. When you use the same schedule tag tool to tag multiple objects, it ensures that the same property set is attached to each object.
When you define a schedule tag with a symbol and attributes, it becomes a multi-view block definition. Schedule tags are organized as multi-view block definitions under Multi-Purpose Objects in the Style Manager.
Tags are constrained, or anchored, to objects by default. This is controlled in the properties for the tag tool. It is possible to turn on the graphic that displays the connection between tags and objects. The Anchor Tag To Entity graphic controls the display for tags that are not constrained to objects, and the Anchor Extended Tag to Entity graphic controls the display for tags that are constrained to objects. For more information, see "Viewing the Connection Between Tags and Objects" on page 1931 and "Tools" on page 43.
When adding schedule tags to objects in an external reference (xref), you can avoid broken links by selecting Attach as the Reference Type instead of Overlay. For more information, see "Reference Other Drawing Files" in AutoCAD Help.
Adding Tags Using Schedule Tag Tools
Adding schedule tags to your drawings can be done simply and quickly with schedule tag tools that are provided with the software. These tools have predefined properties. Each tag is a multi-view block with attributes. Values from the property set data of the object can be transferred to the tag attributes if, when the tag is added, the tag attributes include the names of the property set definition and the property definition. An example of an attribute definition tag for a door is DoorStyles:DoorHeight.
Attribute definition tags cannot have extended names (names that contain spaces). If you use extended names for your property set or property definitions, you cannot display those objects automatically through the use of a tag anchor.
Because tag attributes are linked to property set data, the tag attributes change when the property set data changes. For example, the number displayed in a door tag associated with a door is updated when the number property of the door is renumbered. To edit the information that displays in the tag, edit the property set data. For more information, see "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956.
When you are tagging multiple objects, tag a single object first. The placement of the first tag relative to the object you are tagging is used to determine the placement of subsequent tags. Select one object at a time when using the multiple tag option in order to control the numbering sequence of the tags. The sequence of auto-incrementing is undefined if you use a crossing window or another multiple selection tool.
1924 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Tags are positioned relative to the objects being tagged.
For walls, the tag (or the end of its leader) is positioned relative to the midpoint of the wall. For spaces, the tag (or the end of its leader) is positioned relative to the center of the geometric extents of the space. For all other objects, a tag with a leader is placed with the end of the leader at the geometric center of the object.
Tags without leaders are placed at the same distance and direction as the first tag, relative to the center of the object.
NOTE When you insert schedule tags into drawings, use the appropriate base units for the tag to match the drawing scale properly. For more information, see "Units in Property Data Formats" on page 1952.
Turning Off the Edit Property Set Data Worksheet Use this procedure to prevent the Edit Property Set Data worksheet from displaying each time you add a schedule tag. Depending on the property set definitions that are attached to the object, you can edit or enter new property set data when this worksheet displays. This option is turned on in the software by default. If you are adding tags that contain only automatic properties, it is more efficient to turn off this option. For more information, see "Turning Off the Edit Property Set Data Worksheet" on page 1925.
1 At the command line, right-click, and click Options. 2 Click the AEC Content tab. 3 Clear Display Edit Property Data Dialog During Tag Insertion, and click OK.
Adding Door and Window Schedule Tags Use this procedure to add schedule tags to doors and windows in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. You can use one of the predefined door and window tag tools provided with the software, or you can create a new tool for a tag you define. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Tag" on page 1927.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the door or window schedule tag tool you want to use, and select the tool. Predefined door and window tag tools are located in the Documentation Catalog in the Content Browser. You can add these tools to any tool palette.
2 Select the door or window to which to attach the tag. 3 Specify the location of the tag. 4 If prompted, enter property set data for the door or window, and click OK.
If property set data is not yet attached to the object, you can attach an appropriate property set from the current drawing or the Schedule Tables.dwg file in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric. For more information about property sets, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
5 Enter m, press ENTER, and select multiple doors or windows to tag. 6 Alternatively, press ENTER, and add schedule tags one at a time.
Adding Object Schedule Tags Use this procedure to add schedule tags to a block reference or a multi-view block reference, such as equipment or furniture. You can use one of the predefined tag tools provided with the software, or you can create a new tool for a tag you define. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Tag" on page 1927.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the schedule tag tool you want to use, and select the tool. Predefined object tag tools are located in the Documentation Catalog in the Content Browser. You can add these tools to any tool palette.
2 Select the object to which to attach the tag. 3 Specify the location of the tag.
Adding Tags Using Schedule Tag Tools | 1925
NOTE Different object tags may have different prompts. The steps below may not correspond exactly to those for the object tag you are placing.
4 If prompted, enter property set data for the object, and click OK. If property set data is not yet attached to the object, you can attach an appropriate property set from the current drawing or the Schedule Tables.dwg file in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric. For more information about property sets, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
5 Enter m, press ENTER, and select multiple objects to tag. 6 Alternatively, press ENTER, and add schedule tags one at a time.
Adding Room and Room Finish Schedule Tags Use this procedure to add schedule tags to rooms and room finishes. You can use one of the predefined tag tools provided with the software, or you can create a new tool for a tag you define. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Tag" on page 1927.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the schedule tag tool you want to use, and select the tool. Predefined room and room finish tag tools are located in the Documentation Catalog in the Content Browser. You can add these tools to any tool palette.
2 Select the room or room finish to which to attach the tag. 3 Specify the location of the tag.
NOTE Different tags may have different prompts. The steps below may not correspond exactly to those for the tag you are placing.
4 If prompted, enter property set data for the room or room finish, and click OK. If property set data is not yet attached to the object, you can attach an appropriate property set from the current drawing or the Schedule Tables.dwg file in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric. For more information about property sets, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
5 Enter m, press ENTER, and select multiple rooms or room finishes to tag. 6 Alternatively, press ENTER, and add schedule tags one at a time.
Adding Wall Schedule Tags Use this procedure to add schedule tags to walls. You can use one of the predefined tag tools provided with the software, or you can create a new tool for a tag you define. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Tag" on page 1927.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the wall schedule tag tool you want to use, and select the tool. Predefined wall tag tools are located in the Documentation Catalog in the Content Browser. You can add these tools to any tool palette.
2 Select the wall to which to attach the tag. 3 Specify the location of the tag. 4 If prompted, enter property set data for the wall, and click OK.
If property set data is not yet attached to the wall, you can attach an appropriate property set from the current drawing or the Schedule Tables.dwg file in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric. For more information about property sets, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
5 Enter m, press ENTER, and select multiple walls to tag. 6 Alternatively, press ENTER, and add schedule tags one at a time.
1926 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Adding Structural Schedule Tags Use this procedure to add schedule tags to a beam, brace or a column. You can use one of the predefined tag tools provided with the software, or you can create a new tool for a tag you define. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Tag" on page 1927.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the schedule tag tool you want to use, and select the tool. Predefined structural tag tools are located in the Documentation Catalog in the Content Browser. You can add these tools to any tool palette.
2 Select the beam, brace, or column to which to attach the tag. 3 Specify the location of the tag.
NOTE Different tags may have different prompts. The steps below may not correspond exactly to those for the tag you are placing.
4 If prompted, enter property set data for the structural object, and click OK.
If property set data is not yet attached to the structural object, you can attach an appropriate property set from the current drawing or the Schedule Tables.dwg file in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu\Styles\Imperial or Metric. For more information about property sets, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
5 Enter m, press ENTER, and select multiple structural objects to tag.
6 Alternatively, press ENTER, and add schedule tags one at a time.
Creating a Schedule Tag
Use this procedure to create a schedule tag that captures and displays property set data for a particular object in your drawing.
The property set attached to the object must contain the property or properties for the information that you want to display in the tag. For more information, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
You can create the schedule tag by drawing a symbol and adding text as a placeholder for attributes or by exploding and customizing an existing schedule tag. When you create a schedule tag, each attribute is assigned a unique name (called an attribute tag), which is formed by combining the names of the associated property set definition and property definition. When the schedule tag is anchored to objects to which the property set definition applies, the tag displays the value of the property identified by the attribute tag.
For example, you have a property set definition named DoorProps, which contains a property definition named FireRating. The FireRating property contains fire rating information for door objects. To create a door tag that displays the fire rating of a door to which the tag is anchored, you must first create a schedule tag that contains an attribute definition whose attribute tag is DoorProps:FireRating.
1 Draw a symbol for the tag, and add text as necessary to designate the property data you want displayed as an attribute of the tag.
Tags may have multiple attributes and be linked to multiple property definitions.
2 Create the schedule tag:
If you want to...
Then...
create a schedule tag from your custom graphic and text
click Format menu Define Schedule Tag. Select the objects from which to create the tag, and press ENTER.
create a schedule tag from an existing tag
enter explode, select the object, and press ENTER. Repeat until all nested blocks are exploded, and click Format menu Define Schedule Tag. Select the objects from which to create the tag, and press ENTER.
Creating a Schedule Tag | 1927
3 On the Define Schedule Tag worksheet, enter a name to identify the new tag.
4 Click to select additional objects. 5 Select the attributes of the tag:
If you want the label to... collect property data from the objects tagged
display as the text you entered
Then...
select Property for Type, select a Property Set and a Property Definition, and click OK.
select Text for Type and click OK.
6 Specify a point on the tag as the insertion point.
Creating a Schedule Tag Tool
Use this procedure to create a schedule tag tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create tools that display different information as attributes for different types of objects.
For example, your floor plan has space allocated to specific functions. To efficiently view the total area of space used by the different functions, you can create a schedule tag that displays the property data of the base area of each space. For more information, see "Property Sets and Property Set Definitions" on page 1918.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to create a tool.
2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a schedule tag in the drawing
select the schedule tag, and drag it to the tool palette.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
1928 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to... copy a tool from another tool palette
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties.
Then...
open the other tool palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the value for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Click More Info to add keywords for the tool, and click OK. 7 Expand General, and specify general properties for the schedule tag:
If you want to...
Then...
identify the type of tool
click Type, and select Tag to identify the tool as a schedule tag, or select Property set data to specify that the tool attaches property data without displaying a tag. When property set data is attached to an object, properties display in the schedule and on the Properties palette without displaying a tag on the object.
attach property set data
click the value for Property Data, select the property set definitions, and click OK.
specify an external drawing file source for the property definition location
select Property def location, and Browse to specify a location.
8 If you selected Tag as the tool type, expand Tag to edit the tag properties.
If you want to... specify an alternative layer key
Then...
click the value for Layer key, select the layer key, and click OK.
specify layer key overrides
click the value for Layer key overrides, select overrides, and click OK.
Creating a Schedule Tag Tool | 1929
If you want to...
Then...
select a different name for the schedule tag
click Tag name, and select the name.
specify a source file location from which to import the property set definition
select Tag location, and Browse to specify a location.
specify that the tag moves with the object to which it is anchored
select Yes for Constrain to object.
specify that the tag does not move when the object to which select No for Constrain to object. it is anchored moves
specify that the rotation of the tag is oriented to the object select Yes for Rotate to object. to which it is anchored
specify that the rotation of the tag is not oriented to the object to which it is anchored
select No for Rotate to object.
9 If you selected Tag as the tool type, expand Leader to edit the leader properties.
If you want to...
Then...
add the schedule tag without a leader
click Leader type, and select None.
add the schedule tag using a straight line as the leader
click Leader type, and select Straight.
add the schedule tag using a spline as the leader
click Leader type, and select Spline.
10 If you selected Tag as the tool type, expand Text to edit the text properties.
If you want to...
Then...
add text in the schedule tag as defined in the source drawing click Attribute text style, and select As defined by content.
add text in the schedule tag as it is defined in the target drawing
click Attribute text style, and select Target drawing text style.
determine the angle of the text when you insert the schedule click Attribute text angle, and select As inserted. tag
consistently display the text in the schedule tag horizontally click Attribute text angle, and select Force horizontal.
consistently display the text in the schedule tag right justified click Attribute text angle, and select Right reading.
11 Click OK.
Anchoring an Existing Schedule Tag to an Object
Use this procedure to anchor an existing schedule tag to an object or re-anchor a tag to a new object. If you copy a tag from one object to another, the tag remains anchored to the original object. Use this procedure to re-anchor the tag to the new object.
NOTE You can view the current relationship between schedule tags and objects. For more information, see "Viewing the Connection Between Tags and Objects" on page 1931.
1 Select a tag, right-click, and click Tag Anchor Set Object. 2 Select an object to which to anchor the tag.
1930 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Releasing an Anchored Schedule Tag
Use this procedure to release a tag that is anchored to an object. After you release the tag, you can anchor it to another object.
Select the anchored tag, right-click, and click Tag Anchor Release.
Viewing the Connection Between Tags and Objects
Use this procedure to view the current link between a schedule tag and an object. If you have many tags and are not sure how they are attached, it is useful to see this link displayed. This procedure turns on the General display representation for Anchor Tag To Entity and Anchor Extended Tag to Entity in the current view.
1 On the Format menu, click the Display Manager. 2 Expand Sets. 3 Select the current display set, which appears in bold in the list under Sets. 4 Click the Display Representation Control tab. 5 In the Objects list, locate Anchor Tag To Entity and Anchor Extended Tag to Entity, and select the General
display representation for both. 6 Click OK. 7 Regenerate the drawing, if necessary.
The link between the schedule tag and the object is displayed as an arc. The tag and object are attached from insertion point to insertion point.
Renumbering Property Set Data
Use this procedure to renumber objects that are included in a schedule or linked to schedule tags. You may want to do this if you moved them in the building model or if you have deleted objects. Only those property definitions with a Type of Auto Increment--Integer or Auto Increment--Character can be renumbered with this procedure. For more information, see "Adding Tags Using Schedule Tag Tools" on page 1924.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select the Renumber Data tool. A Renumber Data tool is located with the Scheduling and Reporting Tools in the Stock Tool Catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Content Browser" on page 77.
2 In the Data Renumber dialog, select the property set to renumber. You select the property set that contains the number property. For example, if you renumber doors, you select the DoorObjects property set.
3 Select the start number. 4 Select an increment value.
Each number in the drawing is increased by this amount in the drawing when the property set data is renumbered. For example, if the start number is 1 and the increment is 3, the sequence would number 1, 4, 7, 10, and so on. 5 Select Attach New Property Set to add a new property set to the numbering sequence. 6 Click OK.
Releasing an Anchored Schedule Tag | 1931
7 Select the object or schedule tag to which you want to assign the new start number, continue renumbering, and press ENTER.
NOTE Under certain circumstances, such as after Renumber Data during RefEdit, you may see duplicate property set definition names. For example, the property set definition name may be preceded by "$1$." Modify these property set definitions by opening the attached drawing and making the changes. For more information, see "Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks" in AutoCAD Help.
Managing Schedule Tables
You can customize the content and appearance of schedule tables. You can also export schedule table data.
IMPORTANT The context menu for schedule tables includes a Convert to Table option, which creates a copy of your Architectural Desktop schedule table that can be inserted as an AutoCAD® table. Architectural Desktop commands, such as Update Schedule Table or Add All Property Sets cannot be used on the converted table. Also be aware that you may get unexpected results if you use special characters in your schedule headings, such as equal signs (=). Avoid this problem by adding an apostrophe (`) in front of the character before doing the conversion. For more information about working with AutoCAD® tables, see "Create and Modify Tables" in AutoCAD Help.
Using Schedule Table Styles
Schedule table styles control the content and appearance of schedule tables. A drawing must contain a schedule table style for the type of schedule table you want to create. When you copy a schedule table style into a drawing, property set definitions and data formats specified in the style are also copied. For more information, see "Working with Schedule Table Styles" on page 1933.
Updating Schedules
Because the property set data is attached to objects and styles, you can create and update schedules at any stage of a project. Rather than waiting until the end of a project to create schedules, you can create preliminary schedules and update them to reflect changes in your drawings. For more information, see "Updating a Schedule Manually" on page 1923.
Attaching Property Set Data
Before creating schedule tables, you attach the property sets referenced in the schedule table style to the objects and object styles. The attached property sets become the containers for data. For more information, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
NOTE A schedule table extracts data from objects and displays the data in the table. No data is saved in the table itself.
Updating Property Set Data
When you add a schedule table to a drawing, you specify whether new objects are added to the table as they are added to the drawing and whether the data in the schedule table is updated when objects or styles are modified. If you do not select these automatic updating options, you can update a schedule manually at any time. For more information, see "Adding Property Set Data to All Objects" on page 1951. You can also directly edit the data in individual cells and columns for any manual properties included in the table. After you add, remove, or change objects in a schedule, you can renumber the objects and their schedule tags. For more information, see "Renumbering Property Set Data" on page 1931.
Exporting Property Set Data
You can export data directly to external files in the following formats:
Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (XLS) files (2 formats) Comma-separated values (CSV) files
1932 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Tab-delimited text (TXT) files
For more information, see "Exporting a Schedule" on page 1945 and "Exporting Schedule Data for Selected Objects" on page 1946.
Working with Schedule Table Styles
Schedule table styles determine the content and appearance of schedule tables you add to drawings. You can customize a schedule table by adding headings, organizing columns, or specifying the sort order. The schedule table tools provided with the software have predefined styles and properties. You can customize these styles or create new ones.
Content and Format of Schedule Tables
Use schedule table styles to specify the following characteristics of schedule tables:
Objects that can be included Property data to be tracked Sequence and format of columns Property data format of schedule values Format of table titles, column headers, and table cells Sorting sequence of rows Display properties of tables
Flagging Out-of-Date Schedules
In a schedule table style, you can specify whether a schedule is updated when objects included in the schedule change. If you turn off the automatic update option, you can still determine whether data in the schedule reflects changes in the drawing. The display properties of the schedule style include an out-of-date marker. When this marker is turned on, a diagonal slash is drawn through the table when the schedule has not been updated. Updating the schedule removes the out-of-date marker.
NOTE You should always update your schedules before plotting and not rely completely on the out-of-date-marker.
What You Need to Create a Schedule Table Style
Your drawings must contain the following information for you to create a new schedule table style:
Property set definitions for any property data to be included in the tables created from the style. Each column in a schedule table corresponds to one property in a property set for an object or an object style. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
Property data formats to control the format of values in each column of a schedule table. Typically, you use the same data format specified in property set definitions. However, you can override those formats in the schedule table style. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
The content and tools included with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop include schedule table styles for typical schedules, such as door and window schedules or room finish schedules. You can customize these styles for your projects.
Creating Styles for Matrix Schedules
In Architectural Desktop, a matrix schedule is a table in which column headings identify object properties. A symbol, such as a dot or a cross, is displayed in cells to indicate that an object has the property identified. Matrix schedules are also called dot schedules. You can define schedule table styles to include matrix columns for specific properties. In addition, you can control the following characteristics of matrix schedules or matrix columns in regular schedules:
The symbol used in each cell containing the property listed in the column header
Working with Schedule Table Styles | 1933
The maximum number of columns for each matrix property. If the unique property values in the column exceed this maximum number, the column is displayed as a normal column.
If the property data displayed in a matrix column is a string containing a semicolon-delimited list of values, each value in the list will be displayed separately. You can use this format to assign multiple values to the same property, such as multiple floor materials in the same space.
Creating Tools from Schedule Table Styles
You can create a schedule table tool from a schedule table style by dragging the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify settings for the tool properties. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Table Tool" on page 1921.
Managing Schedule Table Styles
To create, edit, copy, or purge schedule table styles, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location for working with styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Creating a Schedule Table Style
Use this procedure to create a schedule table style. You can either use the default style properties or copy an existing style and then customize the properties. After creating the style, you can create a schedule table tool, and use the tool to add the schedule to your drawing. For more information, see "Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools" on page 1921.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Create a new schedule table style:
If you want to... create a style with default properties
Then... right-click Schedule Table Styles, and click New.
create a style from an existing style
right-click the schedule table style you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new style, and press ENTER. 5 Click the General tab, and enter a description. 6 Edit the options for the new schedule table style:
If you want to...
Then...
change the default format for the style
see "Specifying the Default Format of a Schedule Table Style" on page 1935.
specify the objects to be tracked in schedules using this see "Specifying Objects for a Schedule Table Style" on page 1936. style
use classifications to filter the objects in a schedule
see "Filtering Scheduled Objects by Classification in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1937.
add columns for properties to be reported for tracked see "Adding Columns to a Schedule" on page 1937. objects
add formula columns to display calculations
see "Including a Formula Column in a Schedule Table" on page 1940.
add headings that span columns
see "Spanning Schedule Table Columns with a Heading" on page 1941.
1934 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to...
Then...
edit column placement settings and formats for column see "Editing Columns in a Schedule Table" on page 1942. data
specify the sort order of rows
see "Specifying the Sort Order in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1943.
specify the formats of the table title, column headings, see "Specifying Title Formats in a Schedule Table Style" on page
and matrix column headings
1943.
specify visibility, layer, linetype, and other display properties
see "Specifying Display Properties in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1944.
enter notes and attach, edit, or delete reference files see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Schedule Table Style" on page 1945.
7 Click OK.
Specifying the Default Format of a Schedule Table Style Use this procedure to specify the default text format and placement for table columns and their contents. You can also specify the default symbol used in matrix schedules and for true/false values in regular schedules. If necessary, you can override these settings for individual columns and table titles.
NOTE Most schedule table styles provided by Architectural Desktop have overrides applied to their titles and column headers. You can access these settings on the Layout tab in the Schedule Table Style Properties dialog.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Default Format tab.
5 For Text Appearance, specify the following:
For Style, select an AutoCAD® text style already defined in the drawing. To use a font other than those available from the drop-down list, you must first define an AutoCAD text style that uses the font. For more information, see "Overview of Text Styles" in AutoCAD Help.
For Alignment, select positioning for the text. For more information about aligning text using the Multiline Text Editor, see "Justify Multiline Text" in AutoCAD Help.
For Height, enter the text height that you want. Height is normally specified as the size you want to use when plotting the drawing containing the schedule.
For Gap, enter the space between the text and the schedule table lines that you want. Gap is normally specified as the size you want to use when plotting the drawing containing the schedule table.
Working with Schedule Table Styles | 1935
For Rotation, select the desired orientation for text within cells. For the table title and group titles, Rotation also controls the orientation of these cells relative to the rest of the table.
6 Select a symbol (Check, Dot, Cross, or Slash) for use in matrix columns and, optionally, for true/false values. 7 Select or clear Use for True/False to control whether matrix symbols or the text in the property data format
is used for true/false values. 8 Enter a fixed width for all columns, or enter 0.0 if you want columns to adjust to fit the data within them.
Fixed Width is normally specified as the size you want to use when plotting the drawing containing the schedule table. NOTE Cell Size Height is a read-only field. Its value is calculated from the Height and Gap values.
9 Click OK. Specifying Objects for a Schedule Table Style Use this procedure to specify which objects to track in schedules created from a schedule table style. You can specify more than one object type. For example, you can create a schedule table style for windows that tracks both individual windows and window assemblies. The property sets must apply to all object types specified in the style. For example, in a schedule table style for windows and window assemblies, the window assembly styles property set is not available because it does not apply to windows. In addition, limiting the number of object types in a schedule table style improves drawing performance.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Applies To tab.
5 Select the object types to be tracked for schedule tables using this style. You can select any objects on the list. The area above the list displays the objects that are currently selected. If you click Select All or Clear All, you can include any object in this schedule table style. The right pane lists all classification definitions that apply to any of the selected object types. You can select multiple classifications in multiple classification definitions. If classifications are selected, schedule tables of this style can include objects selected on the left only if they have been classified with the selected classifications. For more information, see "Classification Definitions" on page 1990 and "Filtering Scheduled Objects by Classification in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1937.
6 Click OK.
1936 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Filtering Scheduled Objects by Classification in a Schedule Table Style Use this procedure to specify the classification criteria that an object must satisfy to be included in schedules created from a schedule table style. You can specify more than one classification for an object type. For example, if you want to schedule only doors with a New construction classification and a vendor with preferred classification, you can specify those criteria in the schedule table style. Only doors that meet both criteria can be included in the schedule table. For more information, see "A Classification Use Case" on page 1991.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Applies To tab, and select the object types to be tracked for schedule tables using this style. 5 To specify classification criteria, expand a classification definition, and select one or more classifications.
For example, you can select a construction classification of New and 2 preferred vendors. For an object to be included in schedules of this style, its object style must specify New for the construction classification, and the classification for Vendor must be 1 of the 2 vendors selected. Specifying multiple classification criteria in a schedule table style
6 Click OK. Adding Columns to a Schedule Use this procedure to add columns for each property to be reported in schedule tables created from a schedule table style. Each column contains the values for one property in a property set. The property set definitions for the properties you specify must exist in the drawing before you can create columns for them. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963. You must also specify the objects that the schedule table style applies to before you add columns. For more information, see "Specifying Objects for a Schedule Table Style" on page 1936.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Columns tab. 5 Click Add Column to add a column to the right of the last column.
Working with Schedule Table Styles | 1937
The Add Column worksheet opens.
6 Select the property to track for the new column from the pane on the left. Properties that have already been designated for another column are unavailable in the properties list.
7 Enter the heading for the column. The property description is the default text for the column header.
1938 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
8 Select the property data format, or use the default format from the property set definition.
The data format selected here takes precedence if it does not match the format specified in the property set definition for this property, and any formatted value stored in the property set definition is converted to display in the data format selected for this column. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
9 Specify additional settings for the column:
If you want to...
Then...
specify a format and orientation for cells in this column
click Override Cell Format, and specify format settings that apply only to data cells in this column.
specify a format and orientation for the column heading
click Override Header Format, and specify format settings that apply only to data cells in this column.
use a matrix format for the values in the column
select Matrix, and enter the maximum number of columns used to report the values for the selected property.
report a total value from all the values in this column
select Total.
hide the column from view in the drawing
select Hide.
When you edit property data to be displayed in a matrix column, you can assign multiple values by using a text data type and separating the values with semicolons. Each value is displayed in a separate column in the matrix column.
10 Specify the placement of the new column relative to existing columns. You can change the location of a column by dragging it to a new location in the schedule table. For more information, see "Editing Columns in a Schedule Table" on page 1942
11 Click OK twice.
Including a Quantity Column in a Schedule
Use this procedure to include a quantity column in schedules created from a schedule table style. If you include a quantity column, the objects in the table with the same values in every column are displayed in one row, with the number of objects displayed in the Quantity column. Quantity columns are inserted as the first column in the schedule table by default. For more information, see "Adding Columns to a Schedule" on page 1937. For information about repositioning quantity columns, see "Editing Columns in a Schedule Table" on page 1942.
Include Quantity Column must be selected if you want to use quantities in a formula column. For more information, see "Including a Formula Column in a Schedule Table" on page 1940.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
Working with Schedule Table Styles | 1939
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Columns tab, and select Include Quantity Column.
The Quantity column is inserted as the first column in your schedule table style.
5 Click OK.
Repeating the First Column of a Schedule Use this procedure to insert a copy of the first column in a schedule as the last column in the schedule table style. This is helpful if you have a very wide schedule table, and you want the information in the first column repeated at the end for ease of use. For more information, see "Adding Columns to a Schedule" on page 1937.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Columns tab, and select Repeat First Column. 5 Click OK.
Including a Formula Column in a Schedule Table Use this procedure to include a formula column in schedules created from a schedule table style. Property definitions in the formula dialog are limited to the objects or styles to which the schedule table applies. For more information, see "Adding Columns to a Schedule" on page 1937 and "Understanding Formulas" on page 1967. Use the formula column to create an expression based on the quantity or any other property set definition included in the schedule table style. For example, you can use a formula column to multiply a unit cost for an object by the number of objects to get a total cost. For more information, see "Understanding Formulas" on page 1967.
NOTE There is no conversion made between units for a formula result.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Columns tab, and click Include Quantity Column if you want to insert quantities in your formula
column. 5 Click Add Formula Column. 6 On the Add Formula Column worksheet, specify properties for the formula:
If you want to... identify the formula column with a heading
Then... enter text for Heading.
specify a data format for the formula result
select a data format.
change the format and orientation for cells in the column
click Override Cell Format, and specify format settings that apply only to data cells in this column.
change the format and orientation for the column heading click Override Header Format, and specify format settings that apply only to data cells in this column.
report a total value from all the values in this column
select Total.
hide the column from view in the drawing
select Hide.
1940 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to...
create a formula that calculates a total using property data from all columns
Then... click Apply Formula to Total.
NOTE Hiding a column does not change the data displayed in it or any other column in the table. It only affects the display of the data.
7 Enter the formula:
If you want to...
Then...
use a value that you supply
click in the Formula pane, and enter the value.
use the value of another property definition in the formula
locate and double-click (or right-click and click Insert) the definition in the Insert Property Definitions list. You can also select the definition, and press INSERT.
use a VBScript function
locate and double-click (or right-click and click Insert) the function in the Insert VBScript code list. You can also select the function, and press INSERT.
evaluate the formula as a VBScript function
enter RESULT anywhere in the formula.
The property definitions available for use in the formula must be applied to the same objects as the property set definition containing the formula.
The names of property definitions used in the formula are displayed within brackets, such as [Width]. If a property definition belongs to a property set definition other than the one containing the formula, that name is displayed as well, such as [DoorObjects:Height].
The formula property definition cannot be used in the formula it defines, as indicated by the and the addition of [Self] after its name. Property definitions that end up using the value of the formula cannot
be used in the formula, as indicated by the and the addition of [Circular Reference] after their names.
NOTE If you enter the name of a property definition directly in the formula string, or copy and paste between formulas, the property definition is displayed as normal text. For property values of property definitions to be inserted correctly, they must be selected from the list in the Insert Property Definitions pane.
For more information, see "Adding a Formula Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1967 and "Use Case for the Formula Property Definition Worksheet" on page 1970.
8 Enter a value in the Enter Sample Values pane. The property value you enter displays in the current format specified.
9 Select a property data format to specify how the property value is formatted in the formula. The format you select becomes the default format in a formula when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column on the Definition tab shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
10 Click OK.
Spanning Schedule Table Columns with a Heading Use this procedure to add a heading that spans multiple adjacent columns in a schedule table style. For example, you can create a Hardware heading to span the columns for hinges, handles, and locks in a door schedule. You can also remove a heading that spans multiple columns.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
Working with Schedule Table Styles | 1941
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Columns tab. 5 Select the first column you want to include under a heading, and press CTRL while you select the other
columns. Columns must be adjacent.
6 Click Add Header. 7 Enter a title for the heading, and press ENTER. 8 To remove a heading, select it, and click Delete. 9 Click OK twice.
Editing Columns in a Schedule Table Use this procedure to change placement and formats for columns in schedule tables created from a schedule table style. You can also delete a column. When you modify columns within a schedule table style, changes apply to all schedule tables of the same style and override the default format settings.
To change the format of all column headings, see "Specifying Title Formats in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1943.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Columns tab. 5 Select a column, and click Modify. 6 Specify properties for the column:
If you want to... change the column heading
Then... enter the new column heading for Heading.
change the format and orientation for cells in the column
click Override Cell Format, and specify format settings that apply only to data cells in this column.
change the format and orientation for the column heading click Override Header Format, and specify format settings that apply only to data cells in this column.
use a matrix format for the values in this column
select Matrix, and enter the maximum number of columns used to report the values for the selected property.
report a total value from all the values in this column
select Total.
hide the column from view in the drawing
select Hide.
NOTE Hiding a column does not change the data displayed in it or any other column in the table. It only affects the display of the data.
7 Click OK. 8 Change the order of columns:
If you want to... move an individual column
Then...
select the column heading, and drag the column to a new location.
1942 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to...
Then...
move a group of columns that have a common heading that select the common heading, and drag the column group to
spans the columns
a new location.
remove a column from a column group
select the heading for the column group, and click Delete. Hold down SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple columns. In the Remove Columns/Headers dialog, select the columns or headers to be deleted, and click OK.
add a column in a column group
Select the columns to include in the column group, and click Add Header. Hold down SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple columns. In the Add Header dialog, enter the heading name. If you want to change the header format, click Override Header Format. For more information, see "Specifying Title Formats in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1943.
9 To delete a column, select the column, and click Delete.
10 To use a different property in a column, delete the column, and add a new column with the property you want to use.
11 Click OK.
NOTE Property data format styles, property set definitions, and schedule table styles cannot be changed through RefEdit. Changes seem to work, but will revert to the previous settings when saved back to the xref file. Open the xref drawing directly, and make the changes there.
Specifying the Sort Order in a Schedule Table Style
Use this procedure to specify the sort order of rows in a schedule table style. You can sort rows in ascending or descending order of the values in one or more columns.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Sorting tab. 5 Specify the sort order of the rows:
If you want to...
Then...
add a property to sort by
click Add, select a property to sort by, and click OK. The Select Property dialog lists all properties defined on the Columns tab but not already selected for sorting.
specify the sorting method for a property
select the property, and select Ascending or Descending for Sort Order.
remove a property from the sorting list
select the property, and click Remove.
change the location of a property in the sort order
select the property, and click Move Up or Move Down, as needed.
6 Click OK.
Specifying Title Formats in a Schedule Table Style Use this procedure to enter the title of a schedule table, and to specify the formats of the table title, column headings, and matrix column headings. The formats that you specify in this procedure for regular and matrix column headings override the default format settings. Value overrides display in red in the Cell Format Override dialog.
Working with Schedule Table Styles | 1943
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the Layout tab. 5 Enter the title of the schedule table for Table Title. 6 Select Override Cell Format next to the type of title format you want to change. 7 In the Cell Format Override dialog, select a text style.
For Style, select an AutoCAD® text style already defined in the drawing. To use a font other than those available from the drop-down list, you must first define an AutoCAD text style that uses the font. For more information, see "Overview of Text Styles" in AutoCAD Help.
8 For Alignment, select positioning for the text. For more information about aligning text using the Multiline Text Editor, see "Justify Multiline Text" in AutoCAD Help.
9 For Height, enter the text height that you want. Height is normally specified as the size you want to use when plotting the drawing containing the schedule table.
10 For Gap, enter the space between the text and the schedule table lines that you want. Gap is normally specified as the size you want to use when plotting the drawing containing the schedule table.
11 For Rotation, select the desired orientation for text within cells. For the table title and group titles, Rotation also controls the orientation of these cells relative to the rest of the table. For the table title and group titles, this option also controls the location of the cell relative to the rest of the table.
NOTE Cell Size Height is a read-only field. Its value is calculated from the Height and Gap values.
12 Click OK. 13 To remove an override, clear the check box next to the title format you want to restore to the default
format. 14 Click OK.
Specifying Display Properties in a Schedule Table Style Use this procedure to change the following properties of the display components in a schedule table style:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
You can specify display properties for the table outer frame, lines between rows and columns, the table title, column headers, and the data in table cells. You can also turn on an out-of-date marker that indicates when the data in a schedule table created from the schedule table style does not show the latest changes. This component is turned off by default. Turning it on can slow drawing performance, especially in large drawings.
1 Select the schedule table style you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation on which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
1944 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
The display representation in bold is the current display representation.
4 If necessary, click .
5 On the Layer/Color/Linetype tab, select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. Use Data Major Row Lines for every fifth row and Data Minor Row Lines for all other rows to control the display properties for lines separating each row of data. This is useful for long schedule tables.
6 Click OK twice.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Schedule Table Style Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a schedule table style. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a schedule table style.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Schedule Table Styles. 3 Select the schedule table style that you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 Click Notes. 6 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 7 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to... attach a reference file
Then... click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK.
Exporting a Schedule
Use this procedure to export the contents of a schedule table to a separate file. You can export the data in the following file formats:
Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (XLS) files (2 formats) Comma-separated values (CSV) files Tab-delimited text (TXT) files
NOTE You must have Microsoft Excel installed to export a file to Excel format.
1 Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Export. 2 Select a file type to Save As. 3 Enter a name for the file, or click Browse to select a file. 4 Select Use Existing Table, and click OK.
Exporting a Schedule | 1945
NOTE Architectural format (6'-0") is not supported by Microsoft Excel. If you export to Microsoft Excel, you are prompted to convert the schedule values to decimal values or text format in the exported file. The format of values does not change in the drawing file.
5 Select the schedule table to export, and press ENTER. If a file already exists with the name you specified, a warning is displayed with the options to overwrite the existing file, specify a unique name, or cancel the export command.
Exporting Schedule Data for Selected Objects
Use this procedure to export selected property set data from a schedule table to a separate file. You can export the data in the following file formats:
Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet (XLS) files (2 formats) Comma-separated values (CSV) files Tab-delimited text (TXT) files
NOTE You must have Microsoft Excel installed to export a file to Excel format.
Using this procedure, you can create a file with property set data for selected objects even if the schedule table does not exist in the drawing. To export all the data in a schedule table, see "Exporting a Schedule" on page 1945.
1 Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Export. 2 Select a file type to Save As. 3 Enter a name for the file, or click Browse to select a file. 4 Clear Use Existing Table. 5 Select the table style to use in the exported file.
Columns included in the schedule table style determine the property set data that is exported for the objects. For more information, see "Creating a Schedule Table Style" on page 1934. 6 Select the layer wild card to use as a filter in the exported file. 7 Specify whether to scan for xrefs or block references. 8 Click OK.
NOTE Architectural format (6'-0") is not supported by Microsoft Excel. If you export to Microsoft Excel, you are prompted to convert the schedule values to decimal values or text format in the exported file. The format of values does not change in the drawing file.
9 Select the objects to include in the exported table, and press ENTER. If a file already exists with the name you specified, a warning is displayed with options to overwrite the existing file, specify a unique name, or cancel the export command.
Specifying the Display Properties of a Schedule
Use this procedure to change the following properties of display components for a schedule table:
Visibility (display component is on or off) Layer Color Linetype Lineweight Linetype scale
1946 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
To change these display properties for all schedule tables of the same style, and to see additional information about schedule table style display components, see "Specifying Display Properties in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1944.
1 Select the schedule table you want to change, right-click, and click Edit Object Display. 2 Click the Display Properties tab. 3 Select the display representation on which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current one.
4 If necessary, click . 5 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab. 6 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property. 7 Click OK twice.
Changing General Schedule Properties
Use this procedure to change general properties of basic schedule table settings for a specific schedule table on the Design tab of the Properties palette.
1 Double-click the schedule table you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand General. 3 Specify general properties for the schedule table:
If you want to...
Then...
change the description
enter text for Description.
change the layer
click Layer, and select a layer from the drop-down list.
change the schedule table style
click Style, and select a style from the drop-down list.
change the schedule title
click Title, and enter new text for Title.
change the schedule table scale
click Scale, and enter a value for Scale.
automatically update the schedule table when data in the drawing changes
select Yes for Update automatically.
manually update the schedule table when the drawing changes
select No for Update automatically.
NOTE Turning on the automatic update feature may slow drawing performance, especially in large drawings. For information about updating schedules manually, see "Updating a Schedule Manually" on page 1923.
Changing the Selection Criteria for a Schedule
Use this procedure to change how objects are added to the schedule table. 1 Double-click the schedule table you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Selection. 3 Change how objects are added to the schedule table:
If you want to...
Then...
automatically add new objects to the schedule table as they select Yes for Add new objects automatically. are added to the drawing
manually add new objects to the schedule table
select No for Add new objects automatically.
include objects from xref drawings in the schedule table
select Yes for Scan xrefs.
Changing General Schedule Properties | 1947
If you want to...
Then...
exclude objects from xref drawings in the schedule table
select No for Scan xrefs.
include objects from block references in the schedule table select Yes for Scan block references.
exclude objects from block references in the schedule table select No for Scan block references.
apply a layer filter to the table
specify a layer wild card.
NOTE When adding a schedule table that must scan xrefs or blocks, use a layer filter that includes both the name of the layer that contains the xref or block, and the name of the layer of the object inside the xref or block. You can separate multiple layer wild cards with a comma.
Changing the Location of a Schedule Using Grips
Use this procedure to relocate a schedule table using the Location grip. For schedule tables, the Location grip is restricted to movement in the XY plane. You can enter specific values for distance for both the X and Y dimensions.
You can also change the location of a schedule table using the Properties palette.
1 Select the schedule table you want to change.
2 Select the Location grip.
3 Move the schedule table to the desired location, and click; or enter a value, and press ENTER.
If you want to enter a specific value for the second direction in any edit mode (for example, in the Y direction when editing along the XY plane), press TAB to cycle to the second direction.
You can also lock the movement of the schedule table along a specific direction. If you enter a value for either of the dimension directions in the current edit mode and then press TAB, the movement of the schedule table is constrained to the second dimension direction. When editing along the XY plane, for example, you can enter a value for the X dimension, and then press TAB. The X dimension is locked at that value, and movement of the schedule table is constrained to the Y dimension direction.
4 Right-click, and click Deselect All to turn off grips.
Changing External Source Properties of a Schedule
Use this procedure to create a schedule table that contains property data from an external drawing such as a project drawing.
Schedule tables can contain information from external references and block references if it exists in the same drawing as the schedule table. Optionally, schedule tables can specify an external drawing. The information is scheduled as if it were an external reference in the same drawing as the table. The advantage is that the graphics of the external drawing do not need to be generated in order to fill out the data in the table.
1 Double-click the schedule table you want to change.
2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand External Source.
3 Specify the external drawing you want to schedule:
If you want to...
Then...
schedule an external drawing
select Yes for Schedule external drawing. The External drawing property is displayed.
not schedule an external drawing
select No for Schedule external drawing. The External drawing property is hidden.
specify the external drawing to schedule
click the value for External drawing, select a drawing, or click Browse, and in the Select a drawing file dialog, browse to select a drawing, and click OK.
1948 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
The External drawing property is displayed with a drop-down list containing all drawings in the View directory of the current project. Each drawing corresponds to a view defined in the project. If no project is active, the list contains all drawings in the last directory browsed.
TIP If you want to schedule the entire project, you can set up one drawing as a container file, and xref in all project drawings. Then select the name of this drawing for the external drawing source.
Adding Table Breaks to a Schedule
Use this procedure to split long tables into a series of shorter pages. 1 Double-click the schedule table you want to change. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Advanced, and expand Table Breaks. 3 Specify how you want to display the pages of tables:
If you want to... display pages horizontally to the right of one another
Then... select Right for Direction.
display pages vertically below one another
select Down for Direction.
display the title on each page
select Yes for Repeat title.
display the column headers on each page
select Yes for Repeat Headers.
hide the column headers on each page
select No for Repeat Headers.
control the height of each page individually
select Yes for Manual heights.
have all pages approximately the same height
select No for Manual heights.
specify the maximum height of each page when Manual heights is No
enter a value for Maximum height, or select and drag the Maximum Page Height grip at the bottom of the table.
specify the distance between each page
enter a value for Spacing.
You can control the height of all pages by setting one value if Manual heights is set to No. If the table contains more than one object, select and drag the Maximum Page Height grip at the bottom of the table.
You can control the height of each page individually if Manual heights is set to Yes. If the table contains more than one object, it will have one Insert Page grip at the bottom of the last page and one Page Height grip at the bottom of all other pages. Select the Insert Page grip, and drag it up to insert a new page. Select a Page Height grip, and drag it up or down to set the height of that page. Continuing to drag a Page Height grip down reduces the height of the last page, and could possibly remove it.
Adding Documentation Information to a Schedule
Use this procedure to add hyperlinks, notes, and reference documents to the schedule table. 1 Double-click the schedule table to which to add documentation. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Documentation. 3 Specify documentation information:
If you want to...
Then...
add a hyperlink
click . Select the file, and click Open.
edit notes
click , and enter text.
change an attached reference document
click . Click Add, and select a file. Click Open, and click OK.
Adding Table Breaks to a Schedule | 1949
If you want to... edit the reference document attached
edit the description of a reference file
detach a reference file
Then...
click . Select the document, right-click, and click Edit. Select a new document, click Open, and click OK.
click . Select the description, enter the new description, and click OK.
click . Select the file name, and click Remove.
Editing Table Cell Data
Use this procedure to highlight scheduled objects in a drawing and edit manual property set data in a schedule table.
Automatic property set data cannot be edited in a schedule table. You must edit the object, style, or other data to change the values of automatic property data. For more information about property set data, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
You can use this procedure to troubleshoot problems between a table cell and a source object. If the object is not currently visible in your drawing area, press CTRL while selecting the cell to zoom to display the source object. The changes you make to the manual property set data in the table cell are saved with the object. If the schedule table cell references several objects in a quantity cell, making your selection while pressing CTRL displays an area that includes all the source objects. Holding the cursor over a quantity cell highlights the objects counted by that cell.
If you are working in a table that schedules a drawing from an external source, you cannot edit table cells.
1 Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Edit Table Cell.
2 Position the cursor over the cell.
The source object is highlighted if it is visible. A tooltip is displayed regardless of whether the cell can be edited, what type of data is presented in the table cell, or any potential problems with the data in that cell.
Viewing tooltips for editing table cell objects
An external reference icon is displayed if the cell data is from an object in an externally referenced drawing. If you edit this cell, the externally referenced drawing is modified. If the drawing is locked by another user, you cannot edit it.
3 Identify the different views:
If you want to...
Then...
view all source objects associated with the schedule table cell press CTRL, and select the data in the schedule table cell. The drawing changes to show the source objects associated with the cell.
restore the previous view
click Zoom Previous.
1950 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
4 Edit the data in the schedule table: If you want to... edit the value in an individual table cell
edit the value for all instances of a property
Then...
select the individual cell, and enter a new value on the Edit Referenced Property Set Data worksheet.
select the border of the schedule table, and enter a value for the selected property on the Edit Referenced Property Set Data worksheet.
NOTE Cells that display property set data attached to styles may affect multiple objects. Editing one cell changes the value for all objects of that style in the schedule table.
Adding Property Set Data to All Objects
Use this procedure to add property set data to all objects for which a question mark (?) in a schedule table cell is displayed. This symbol indicates that the property set containing that required property data has not been attached to the object. You can attach these property sets individually, as described in "Editing Table Cell Data" on page 1950, or you can attach the property sets to all of the objects at once.
1 Select the schedule table. 2 Right-click, and click Add All Property Sets.
NOTE If you are working in a table that schedules an external drawing, you cannot add property sets to those objects. For more information, see "Changing External Source Properties of a Schedule" on page 1948.
Property Data Formats
Property data formats are style-based documentation objects that control how data is displayed in schedule tables, schedule tags, the Edit Property Set Data worksheet, and on the Properties palette. Property data formats are created and modified using the Style Manager. For information about overriding a format, see "Units in Property Data Formats" on page 1952.
Data Types
Each property data format contains separate settings for formatting each of the following data types:
Text True/False values Integers Real numbers
When you apply a data format to schedule data, the value for each property is displayed using the specified settings for that property's data type. For example, the same schedule data format can specify that a dimension value uses the real number settings, while a remark uses the settings for text.
Adding Property Set Data to All Objects | 1951
Using Different Data Formats
You can specify different data formats for the same property in property set definitions, schedule table styles, and schedule tags. This enables you to display the same value differently in different contexts. For example, you may want to use a data format with greater precision for real numbers in a property set, and display fewer digits in a schedule table.
Managing Data Formats
To create, edit, copy, or purge data formats, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location for working with data formats from multiple drawings and templates. For more information, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
Applying Property Data Formats
Property data is retrieved from an object as raw, unformatted values. Property set definitions, schedule table styles, schedule tags, and the Properties palette use data formats to display property data as formatted values. The Edit Property Set Data worksheet uses the data formats from property set definitions to format values.
You typically apply the same data format to similar properties and then select a data format that is appropriate for each property, such as the width, height, and thickness of a door. The software includes several default data formats. You can customize one of these, or you can create new data formats, to display units in a specific manner. For example, when you want to show the length of a wall in feet, you can select Length for Type, Feet for Units, and Architectural for Format. Real numbers for costing properties, however, require a monetary format. You can create different property data formats for these situations.
The data formats available for property set definitions, schedule table styles, and tags are those stored in the current drawing. When you copy property set definitions or schedule table styles into a drawing, data formats used in the definitions and styles are also copied into the drawing.
If you modify a data format, the display of the property data is affected in any property set, schedule table, or schedule tag that uses the format.
Units in Property Data Formats
Property data formats control how units display in schedule tables, schedule tags, the Edit Property Set Data worksheet, and on the Properties palette. Units behave differently with real numbers in manual properties than they do with automatic properties. For more information, see "Applying Property Data Formats" on page 1952.
Units for Automatic Properties
Units for automatic properties are collected directly from the objects. An automatic property, such as width, uses the units specified on the Units tab in the Drawing Setup dialog by default. Using different property data formats allows you to override the default format.
When you use a property data format, the AutoCAD units are converted to display as defined in the property data format. You can specify a property data format on the Definition tab of a property set definition.
1952 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Units for Manual Properties
Units specified for manual properties in the property set definition control what is stored in the drawing. The Extended Data tab of the Properties palette displays the units as defined in the property data format. When the type of unit is Real, you can select a format and type of unit in the property set definition to override the property data format when entering units. For more information, see "Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1975.
Creating a Property Data Format Use this procedure to create a property data format. You can create a format using default properties or by copying an existing data format. You can then edit the properties to customize the characteristics of the new data format.
NOTE Certain automatic properties cannot be formatted with property data formats because their values are formatted from within the automatic query.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Data Formats. 3 Right-click Property Data Formats, and click New. 4 Enter a name for the new property data format, and press ENTER. 5 Select the new property data format. 6 On the Formatting tab, specify general formatting values:
If you want to... specify a prefix
Then...
enter a string to be placed in front of data for Prefix. For example, tolerances might require a preceding plus/minus symbol; a tolerance of 10 could be displayed as +10. A currency string could be prefixed with a dollar sign.
specify a suffix
enter a string to be placed after data for Suffix. For example, a door leaf thickness of 35 could have a millimeter suffix (35mm).
NOTE If you override the unit type in a manual property set definition, change the suffix here to display the units correctly.
specify text for a property that is undefined
specify text for a property that is not applicable
7 Specify the case for the schedule text: If you want to... use no case formatting convert all text to uppercase convert all text to lowercase capitalize the first letter of the first word
enter a text string to be displayed when the requested property has not been attached to an object for Undefined. A typical undefined string is "?." enter a text string to be displayed when the requested property does not apply to an object for Undefined. For example, the rise property does not apply to a door with a rectangular opening, but it does apply to one with an arched opening. A typical not applicable string is "NA."
Then... select As Is for Case. select Upper for Case. select Lower for Case. select Sentence for Case.
Property Data Formats | 1953
If you want to... capitalize the first letter of each word
Then... select Title for Case.
8 Enter the maximum number of digits, including leading zeroes, for integers.
Zero padding is the expansion of integer values to include leading zeros. The value entered specifies the maximum length of a numeric value after it has been padded with leading zeros. For example, with Zero Padding at 3, the number 6 would become 006. This option primarily is intended for identity numbers, such as those used by door and window tags. For example, to number doors as D01 through to D99, the raw value of the data would be saved as a simple integer, but the prefix would be D and Zero Padding would be 2. Entering zero for Zero Padding applies no zero padding.
9 Enter the values for True and False.
For example, you can specify Yes for True and No for False.
10 Enter data to display a sample of your current settings for Result.
11 For formatting that can be specified by dimension style, click Set from Dimension Style, select a dimension style, and click OK.
Undefined, Not Applicable, Case, Zero Padding, and True/False are not defined by dimension styles.
12 Select the unit type, format, numerical precision, fraction format, and scale for real numbers. Definitions of these items are as follows:
Unit Type: The format in which to display the type of units, such as length, area, and volume.
Units: The drawing units in which the unit is stored. For example, if you select Volume for Unit Type, options to select from include cubic inches, cubic feet, cubic millimeters, cubic centimeters, and cubic meters.
Unit Format: The drawing unit format in which the value is displayed. The AutoCAD® conversion units (Architectural, Scientific, Decimal, Engineering, and Fractional) are used when converting numeric values into strings. For example, a value of 14.25 is displayed as 1'2 1/4" in architectural units.
Precision: The number of decimal places used to display floating point numbers (for example, 0, 0.0, 0.00, and so on).
Fraction Format: If the unit format is Architectural or Fractional, set the format used to display fractions (Horizontal, Diagonal, or Not Stacked). Note that all fonts do not support all fraction formats.
Scale: The value by which the real number is scaled before it is displayed. For example, if the current drawing units are inches, a scale of 2.54 converts a dimension to centimeters.
13 Select the Round Off value for real numbers: If you want to... round to the nearest value round to the nearest greater value round to the nearest lesser value
Then... select Nearest. select Up. select Down.
If you enter a value of 0.25, all numeric values are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you enter a value of 1.0, all numeric values are rounded to the nearest integer. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the precision specified. No round-off occurs for a value of 0.0.
14 Specify the rules for suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and feet and inches of floating point numbers:
If you want to...
Then...
suppress leading zeros in all decimal numeric values
select Leading for Zero Suppression. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
suppress trailing zeros in all decimal numeric values
select Trailing for Zero Suppression. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5.
1954 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to...
Then...
suppress the feet portion of a feet-and-inches numeric value select 0 Feet for Zero Suppression. For example, 0'6 1/2"
when the value is less than one foot
becomes 6 1/2".
suppress the inches portion of a feet-and-inches numeric value when the value is an integral number of feet
select 0 Inches for Zero Suppression. For example, 2'0" becomes 2'.
For more information, see "New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
15 Select the decimal separator. 16 Select the whole number separator. 17 Click OK.
Attaching Notes and Reference Files to a Property Data Format
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a property data format. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a property data format.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Data Formats. 3 Select the property data format that you want to change. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the property data format, enter it for Description. 6 To add a note, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 7 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, click Open, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK.
Expanding the Scope of Scheduled Data
The data that can be collected and graphically presented in a schedule table in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop is extensive. To effectively customize schedule tables to meet your needs, you need to understand the following elements which control how data is displayed and which data is collected.
Property set data Property set definitions Automatic properties Manual properties
Expanding the Scope of Scheduled Data | 1955
Formula definitions Classification definitions Material definitions Project definitions Anchor definitions Graphic definitions
Property Set Data
Objects to be included in schedule tables or linked to tags must have property set data attached to them. Schedule tables and tags do not store any data, but extract and display property set data from the associated objects.
Property set data is collected from one or more property sets attached to an object or a style. Some property data, such as a dimension, comes from automatic properties of the object or the object style and cannot be manually entered, such as dimensions. Other property data consists of manual properties for which you must enter values for each object or object style, such as manufacturer's name.
IMPORTANT If an entity or style containing a property set is copied from a source drawing into a target drawing that already contains a property set with the same name, the property set in the target drawing does not change. There is a potential for a loss of data in this case. For example, assume a property set in one drawing has a number of manual properties defined and is attached to a door style with manual property values set. This door style is then copied into another drawing that contains a duplicate property set that does not have the same manual properties defined. In the target drawing the door style will contain the target drawing's property set, not the source drawing's property set. Any data values associated with the source drawing's manual properties will be lost.
Attaching Property Set Data to Objects
Use this procedure to attach property set data to objects that you want to include in a schedule table or link to schedule tags.
You attach property set data to objects by attaching one or more property sets, defined by a property set definition. After property sets are attached, the values for automatic properties are determined from the object, and you can enter values for the manual properties.
For information about attaching property set data to an object style, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Styles and Definitions" on page 1958. For information about property sets and external references, see "Attaching Property Sets to Objects from External References" on page 297.
1 Double-click the object(s) for which you want to attach property set data.
NOTE If you select more than one type of object, you can attach only the property set definitions that apply to all the selected objects. For example, if you select doors and windows, you can attach only those property sets that apply to both doors and windows.
2 On the Properties Palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 Click
.
4 Select the property set you want to attach, and click OK.
Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects
Use this procedure to enter values for manual properties for one or more objects. For example, to enter a remark that applies to several doors in a drawing, you can select the doors and enter the remark as data for Notes.
You can insert fields into manual properties. Fields enhance the documentation capabilities within a drawing file because the values they display update whenever the associated property changes. You can also enter AutoCAD fields into manual properties attached to objects or styles.
1956 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
NOTE Fields can be associated with hyperlinks. For example, if you insert a field pointing to a drawing using a hyperlink in a manual property, and create a schedule table that contains that property, you can jump from the table cell with the field property in it to the drawing to which it is linked. For detailed information about fields, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD Help.
1 Select the object(s) for which you want to add a manual property or field, right-click, and click Properties. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
NOTE If no property set data appears, no property sets are attached to the objects. To attach property sets, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956.
3 Enter a value for a manual property.
If you want to...
Then
specify an alphanumeric value
select the property, and enter the value.
insert a field
right-click in the current value for the property, and click Insert Field. Select a field from one of the available categories, specify the desired format, and click OK.
NOTE You can also define a default field for the manual property in the property set definition. For example, if you want all walls to have a field that displays the last save date of the drawing, you can enter the "SaveDate" field in the property set definition, so that it will be displayed for each object connected to the property set. For more information, see "Adding a Field to a Property Set Definition" on page 1976.
Editing or Updating Fields in Manual Properties
Use this procedure to update or edit field values in a manual property. When you edit a field, you can change the field formatting and other settings. For more information, see "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956.
1 Double-click the object(s) for which you want to edit the fields.
2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 Place the cursor in the row containing the field to update.
If you want to...
Then...
update the field value
right-click, and click Update Field.
change the field format or other settings
right-click, and click Edit Field.
Converting Fields in Manual Properties to Text
Use this procedure to convert fields in manual properties to text. When you convert a field to text, it loses its connection to the referenced information. For example, if the field had a hyperlink to a drawing, the hyperlink to the drawing will be lost. For more information, see "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956.
1 Double-click the object(s) for which you want to convert field properties to text. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
Editing or Updating Fields in Manual Properties | 1957
3 Place the cursor in the row containing the field you want to convert to text, right-click, and click Convert Field to Text.
Removing Property Set Data from an Object
Use this procedure to remove one or more property sets from an object. If an object is included in a schedule table, any data in the table obtained from the removed property set displays question marks in the table.
1 Double-click the objects from which to remove property set data. 2 On the Properties Palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 Click
.
4 Select property sets to remove, and clear any property sets to remain attached to the object.
5 Click OK.
Attaching Property Set Data to Styles and Definitions
Use this procedure to attach data to object styles and definitions, such as space styles, curtain wall styles, door styles, and multi-view block definitions.
You attach data to a style or a definition by attaching one or more property sets to it. Objects that use the style or definition inherit its property set data. The values for automatic properties, which may be different for each instance of the style, are determined from the objects, and you can enter values for manual properties. For more information, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956. For information about attaching property set data to individual objects, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and locate the style or definition to which to attach property set data.
3 Select the style or definition.
4 Click the General tab, and click Property Sets.
5 Click
.
6 Select the property sets that you want to attach.
7 Click OK twice.
Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Styles and Definitions
Use this procedure to enter values for manual properties in the property set data for a style or definition. The values you enter apply to all instances of objects associated with the style or definition.
You can insert fields into manual properties. Fields enhance the documentation capabilities within a drawing file because the values they display update whenever the associated property changes. You can also enter AutoCAD fields into manual properties attached to objects or styles.
NOTE Fields can be associated with hyperlinks. For example, if you insert a field pointing to a drawing using a hyperlink in a manual property, and create a schedule table that contains that property, you can jump from the table cell with the field property in it to the drawing to which it is linked. For detailed information about fields, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
If the property you want to edit is not listed in the property set data for the style or definition, it may be in a property set attached directly to the objects. To enter values for manual properties attached to objects, see "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956.
1958 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and locate the style or definition for which to add manual properties. 3 Select the style or definition. 4 Click the General tab, and click Property Sets.
NOTE If no data appears, no property sets are attached to the style or definition. To attach property sets, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Styles and Definitions" on page 1958.
5 Enter a value for a manual property.
If you want to...
Then...
specify a alphanumerical value
select the property, and enter the value.
insert a field
right-click the current value for the property, and click Insert Field. Select a field from one of the available categories, specify the desired format, and click OK.
NOTE You can also define a default field for the manual property in the property set definition. For example, if you want all walls of a specific style to have a field that displays the last save date of the drawing, you can enter the SaveDate field in the property set definition, so that it will be displayed for each wall of that style. For more information, see "Adding a Field to a Property Set Definition" on page 1976.
6 Click OK twice.
Editing Style-Based Property Sets
Use this procedure to edit values of manual, style-based property set data attached to objects in your drawing. For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Styles and Definitions" on page 1958.
1 Double-click the object for which you want to edit property set data. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
If object-based and style-based property sets are attached to the object, both display on the Extended Data tab.
Editing Style-Based Property Sets | 1959
3 Click (Edit style property set data) next to Property Sets From Style.
4 On the Edit Property Set Data worksheet, enter new values for the property set data and click OK.
5 Click OK.
Editing Style-Based Property Sets Attached to Objects in External References
Use this procedure to edit values of manual, style-based property set data attached to objects that are referenced externally (xrefs) in your drawing. For more information on attaching property data across xrefs, see "Attaching Property Sets to Objects from External References" on page 297.
1960 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
1 Double-click the xref in your drawing.
2 In the Reference Edit dialog, on the Identify Reference tab, select Prompt to select nested objects, and click OK.
3 Select the object in the xref, and press ENTER. 4 Double-click the object to make changes to the property set data. 5 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
If object-based and style-based property sets are attached to the object, both display on the Extended Data tab. 6 Next to Property Sets From Style, click (Edit style property set data). 7 On the Edit Property Set Data worksheet, enter new values for the property set data, and click OK.
8 On the Refedit toolbar, select Save back changes to reference to save the changes made to property set data in the xref, or select Discard changes to reference to cancel them, and click OK.
9 Click OK to verify your selection.
Removing Property Set Data from a Style or Definition
Use this procedure to remove one or more property sets from a style or definition. If objects using the style or definition are included in a schedule table, the cells for data obtained from the removed property set display questions marks.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Architectural Objects, and locate the style or definition from which to remove property set data.
Removing Property Set Data from a Style or Definition | 1961
3 Select the style or definition. 4 Click the General tab, and click Property Sets.
5 Click
.
6 Select property sets to remove, and clear any property sets that should remain attached.
7 Click OK three times.
Browsing Property Data
Use this procedure to access and view the data for all property sets in a drawing.
For more information about browsing property sets attached to objects scheduled from external references, or to override property sets for those objects, see "Attaching Property Sets to Objects from External References" on page 297.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Browse Property Data tool, and select it. This tool is located with the Scheduling and Reporting Tools in the Stock Tool Catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Content Browser" on page 77.
2 Specify view options:
If you want to...
Then...
allow an object to be highlighted in the drawing when you select Highlight. select a property set that is attached to the object or its style
prevent an object from being highlighted in the drawing clear Highlight. when you select a property set that is attached to the object or its style
display objects in the left pane regardless of whether the selected property set definition is attached
clear Hide objects without property set definitions.
display only objects that have the selected property set definition attached
select Hide objects without property set definitions.
view the raw, unformatted data in the property set
clear Format data.
3 View property sets and the objects or styles to which they are assigned:
If you want to...
Then...
view the object or style type to which a property set applies select the property set. The right pane lists the property values, if available, and the objects or the styles to which the property set can be attached.
1962 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to... view the list of objects or styles to which a property set is attached
view the property values for a specific property set and a specific object or style
Then...
apply the object filter to the property set. The left pane lists objects or styles to which the property set is attached. If Highlight is selected, any objects to which the property set is attached (directly or through a style) are highlighted in the drawing.
under the property set, select the object or style. The right pane shows the values for the selected object or style.
Viewing property values for objects with property sets attached
4 Select the object or style from the left pane to edit property sets and values, and click OK. 5 Remove property sets from objects or styles:
WARNING If you detach a property set from an object or style, any manually entered values are lost. If you mistakenly detach a property set, click OK, and then immediately click Edit Undo to undo the remove action.
If you want to... detach a property set from a object or style add a property set to objects or styles
Then... clear the selection of the object or style. select the object or style.
6 Click Zoom to to view the selected object in the drawing 7 Click OK.
Property Set Definitions
A property set definition specifies the characteristics of a group of properties that can be tracked with an object. For example, you could create a property set definition named DoorProps that contains property definitions for DoorNumber, DoorWidth, and FireRating. Each property has a name, description, data type, data format, and default value.
Property Sets and Property Data
A property set is an object created from a property set definition. It contains a user-definable group of related object properties. When you attach a property set to an object or a style, the property set becomes the container for the property data associated with the object.
Property Set Definitions | 1963
Creating Property Set Definitions for Objects or Styles
When you create a property set definition, you specify whether the property set can be attached to objects or to styles, depending on which of the following kinds of properties you want to track:
Automatic properties generally belong in style-based definitions. Automatic properties, even when attached to a style, can vary for each instance of the object. It is more efficient to include automatic properties in a style-based definition because the properties are immediately associated with any object that uses the style.
Manual properties can belong to either style-based or object-based definitions. The value of a manual property associated with a style is the same for every object. For example, a Manufacturer property will probably be the same for every instance of a particular door style, so it should be in a style-based property. However, a Door Number property is different for each instance of a door, so it should be in an object-based property.
Fields enhance the documentation capabilities within a drawing file. A field is updatable text that is set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. You can insert fields in a manual property in the property set definition or in a property attached to an object or style.
NOTE Fields can be associated with hyperlinks. For example, if you insert a field pointing to a drawing in a manual property, and create a schedule table that contains that property, you can jump from the table cell with the field property in it to the drawing it is linked to. For detailed information about fields, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Automatic and Manual Properties
Property sets, whether attached to objects or to styles, can include both manual and automatic properties.
Automatic properties cannot be edited directly because they are obtained from the object or other source. For example, the physical characteristics of an object, such as its dimensions or material, are automatic properties. To change the value of an automatic property, you must modify its source. The change then appears in the property set data for the object.
Manual properties must be edited in the property set data for the object or style. For example, object numbers (for tagging) and notes or remarks are manual properties. The value entered for a manual property in an object-based property set is saved with the object. The value entered for a manual property in a style-based property set is saved with the style and is available to all objects using that style.
Fields are used with manual properties and are selected from a list of available fields in the software. Fields contain values that update when the value changes and can also contain hyperlinks to other drawings or other files. For detailed information about fields, see "Use Fields in Text" in AutoCAD Help.
Using Property Data Formats in Property Set Definitions
Property data formats control how values for numbers and text display. Both property set definitions and schedule table styles use property data formats. For more information about creating property data formats, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
Managing Property Set Definitions
To create, edit, copy, or purge property set definitions, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location where you can work with definitions and styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452.
1964 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
WARNING If you overwrite one property set definition with another, you may lose data. For example, a drawing might contain a property set definition with a number of manual properties. The property set is attached to doors with the manual properties entered, and is included in a schedule table. If you overwrite this property set definition with one that does not have the same properties, the values entered for the manual properties are lost. In addition, any columns in the schedule table that reference these manual properties are flagged as invalid. Changes to the schedule table that result from changes to the property set definition are displayed the next time the table is updated manually or automatically.
Understanding Automatic Properties
The data in an automatic property is obtained from individual objects or their styles and is not entered manually. For example, a number of doors might have the same style but different widths. The automatic property Width may be different for each door. However, those doors have the same thickness, because thickness is a property of the style. The automatic property Thickness has the same value for all doors of the same style. For more information, see "Adding an Automatic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1977. More than a 1,000 automatic properties are available in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop. Most are self-explanatory, but a few need additional explanation.
Wall Area Properties The following 4 automatic properties provide data for wall area calculations:
Area--Right Gross Area--Right Net Area--Left Gross Area--Left Net
The right and left sides of a wall are determined as if you were standing on the start point of the wall and facing the endpoint. Gross area is the area of one side without allowing for holes for openings such as doors and windows. Net Area is the area of one side of a wall after holes are cut for openings. Gross Area might be used to determine the quantity of gypsum board needed for a wall, while Net Area might be used to determine the quantity of brick.
WARNING The area of a wall is determined by adding the union of the wall components (not including body modifiers or interferences) to the area of all faces that point to the right (for right areas) or the left (for left areas). If a particular wall style has multiple components with air space between them, the wall area may not be reported as expected. For example, a wall typically used in construction has a brick exterior, an air space, and a CMU interior. A style defined for this wall might have a component for the brick and a component for the CMU, but no component for the air space. If the wall was drawn with the brick on the left side, the wall area computed for the right side would include the right face of the CMU as well as the right face of the brick. The area reported would be twice the actual area. To avoid this situation, create components for interior air spaces in wall styles, so that no interior faces exist when the wall components are unioned.
The shape of a wall can be modified by adding or subtracting body modifiers. Automatically calculating appropriate areas for every possible wall shape is practically impossible. Because of this, body modifiers and interferences are not currently included in wall area calculations. Wall areas for unusually shaped walls must be computed manually.
Wall Volume Properties The following 4 automatic properties provide data for wall volume calculations:
Volume--Gross Volume--Net Volume--Gross With Mods Volume--Net With Mods
Gross volume is the volume of wall components without allowing for holes for openings such as doors or windows. Net volume is the volume after holes are cut for openings. You can obtain the wall volume with or without wall body modifiers.
Gross and net show the volume of the wall components as if no body modifiers exist.
Understanding Automatic Properties | 1965
Gross With Mods and Net With Mods include body modifiers.
Wall Length Property Like wall area, wall length is practically impossible to calculate automatically when body modifiers are present. Because of this, the Wall Length property returns only the distance between the start point and endpoint of the wall. To get a more accurate report for the length of a wall, you may have to reposition the endpoint of the wall. The visible length of a wall may differ from the distance between the endpoints due to wall cleanups.
Slab and Roof Slab Volume Properties Volumes for slabs and roof slabs do not include the volumes of fascias or soffits.
Slab and Roof Slab Elevation Properties Slabs and roof slabs have the following elevation properties:
Elevation--High Elevation--Low
These properties provide the highest and lowest elevation value of all slab and roof slab vertices, including fascias and soffits.
Door Size Properties
Values for the dimension properties of Width, Height, and Thickness can be combined in 3 additional Door Size properties. The table below shows how these properties appear for a number of different doors, each with a width of 3'-0", a height of 6'-8", and a thickness of 2", but differing in the number and size of individual door panels.
Property Door Size - W x H Door Size - 2 @ W x H Door Size - PR W x H
Single Door 3'-0"x6'-8" 3'-0"x6'-8" 3'-0"x6'-8"
Double Door 3'-0"x6'-8" 2@1'-6"x6'-8" PR 1'-6"x6'-8"
Uneven Door 3'-0"x6'-8" 2'-0"(1'-0")x6'-8" 2'-0"(1'-0")x6'-8"
NOTE Try using a formula property definition if you need more control in formatting multiple door size properties. For more information, see "Adding a Formula Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1967.
Door Swing Direction Properties
Different countries have different conventions for specifying the swing direction of a door. For example, the door shown below is considered a left-swinging door in the United States and Great Britain, but a right-swinging door in Australia, Russia, and most of Europe. To accommodate these differences, Architectural Desktop includes a property called Swing Direction - Reverse. You can select the door swing property you want to use when you create or modify a property set definition.
Structural Member Properties The length of a structural member is its logical length--the length between its grip points--rather than the actual length, which can be difficult to compute. Structural members with offsets and cut planes give a visible length that is different from the logical length. The location properties of a structural member (X, Y, Z) give information about the coordinates on which a structural member has been inserted. This is important for downstream applications in the structural engineering field.
1966 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Understanding Formulas
Formulas in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop are user-defined equations for calculating the value of a property. You can use a formula to add data about a selected group of objects or object styles to a schedule table after you define the formula property set definition. and then add the formula property definition to a property set definition. For more information about property sets and property set definitions, see "Property Sets and Property Set Definitions" on page 1918.
The worksheet you use to specify the formula also lets you evaluate sample results. Formulas can contain variables, operators, and functions allowed in VBScript. For more detailed information about VBScript, go to http://msdn.microsoft.com and search for "VBScript Language Reference." Additionally, in the Formula Property Definition worksheet, links to online Help are available from the Insert VBScript code and Formula context menus for VBScript items used in the formula.
Adding a Formula Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a formula property definition to a property set definition. Formula property values can be computed based on the values of other property data. (For more information about how a formula is evaluated, see "Formula Evaluation" on page 1969.) For example, width and height are automatic door properties, which you can use to compute the perimeter of the door. Defining (2 * [Width]) + (2 * [Height]) as a formula for a 36" x 84" door results in a value of 240. A formula property definition is a type of automatic property, because the value it displays is determined automatically, based on its definition, and cannot be edited directly.
NOTE There is no conversion made between units for a formula result.
Formulas can be simple mathematical expressions, such as 2+2. They can also contain variables, operators, and functions allowed in VBScript, as shown in the examples below.
Statements Call Statement Class Statement Const Statement Dim Statement Do...Loop Statement Erase Statement Execute Statement
For Each...Next Statement For...Next Statement Function Statement If...Then...Else Statement On Error Statement Option Explicit Statement Private Statement
Property Get Statement Property Let Statement Property Set Statement Public Statement Randomize Statement ReDim Statement Select Case Statement
Set Statement Sub Statement While...Wend Statement Set Statement With Statement
Functions Abs Array Asc Atn CBool CByte CCur CDate CDbl Chr CInt CLng Conversions
Escape Eval Exp Filter FormatCurrency FormatDateTime FormatNumber FormatPercent GetLocale GetObject GetRef Hex Hour
LBound LCase Left Len LoadPicture Log LTrim Maths Mid Minute Month MonthName MsgBox
ScriptEngineMinorVersion Second SetLocale Sgn Sin Space Split Sqr StrComp String Tan Time Timer
Understanding Formulas | 1967
Functions Cos CreateObject CSng Date DateAdd DateDiff DatePart DateSerial DateValue Day Derived Math
InputBox InStr InStrRev Int, Fix IsArray IsDate IsEmpty IsNull IsNumeric IsObject Join
Now Oct Replace RGB RTrim Right Rnd Round ScriptEngine ScriptEngineBuildVersion ScriptEngineMajorVersion
TimeSerial TimeValue Trim TypeName UBound UCase Unescape VarType Weekday WeekdayName Year
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition to change.
4 On the Definition tab, Click . 5 On the Formula Property Definition worksheet, enter a name for the formula property.
6 If you do not want to use the formula as the description of the property, clear Use formula for description. 7 Enter the formula:
If you want to...
Then...
use a value that you supply
click in the Formula pane, and enter the value.
use the value of another property definition in the formula
locate and double-click (or right-click and click Insert) the definition in the Insert Property Definitions list. You can also select the definition, and press INSERT.
use a VBScript function
locate and double-click (or right-click and click Insert) the function in the Insert VBScript code list. You can also select the function, and press INSERT.
1968 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to... evaluate the formula as a VBScript function
Then... enter RESULT anywhere in the formula.
The property definitions available for use in the formula must be applied to the same objects as the property set definition containing the formula.
The names of property definitions used in the formula are displayed within brackets, such as [Width]. If a property definition belongs to a property set definition other than the one containing the formula, that name is displayed as well, such as [DoorObjects:Height].
The formula property definition cannot be used in the formula it defines, as indicated by the and the addition of [Self] after its name. Property definitions that end up using the value of the formula cannot
be used in the formula, as indicated by the and the addition of [Circular Reference] after their names.
NOTE If you enter the name of a property definition directly in the formula string, or copy and paste between formulas, the property definition is displayed as normal text. For property values of property definitions to be inserted correctly, they must be selected from the list in the Insert Property Definitions pane.
8 Enter a value in the Enter Sample Values pane. The property value you enter displays in the current format specified.
9 Select a property data format to specify how the property value is formatted in the formula. The format you select becomes the default format in a formula when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column on the Definition tab shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
10 Click OK twice.
Formula Evaluation Use this procedure to evaluate that result of the formula. After you complete the formula property definition and add the property set to objects, you can use the result of the formula in schedule tables and schedule tags.
1 Confirm that for each property definition in the formula, the value of the property is:
retrieved from the object or style.
formatted using the property data format defined in the sample value format.
inserted into the formula in place of the property definition name and the brackets surrounding it.
2 Evaluate the formula string: If the formula string... contains the word "RESULT"
does not contain the word "RESULT"
Then...
it is evaluated as a VBScript function, and the value displayed for the property is the result of that evaluation.
it is evaluated as a mathematical expression.
NOTE Make sure that all property sets used in the formula have been applied to the object or style. Otherwise, a question mark (?) is displayed in the schedule table.
For more information, see "Adding a Formula Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1967. There is access to online Help for VBScript code from the context menu in the Formula Property Definitions worksheet.
Understanding Formulas | 1969
Use Case for the Formula Property Definition Worksheet Creating a formula that returns valid data can be a complex task. As the following example shows, you can simplify the process by using the Formula Property Definition worksheet to construct the formula with VBScript Code. You then insert sample values into the formula and evaluate the result. Example of Completed Formula The space object has a single numeric value for its height, which is adequate for the majority of spaces in a room schedule. However, to get more control over how space heights are displayed for rooms without flat ceilings, you can create a formula that returns a text override, such as "Vaulted" for a cathedral ceiling, or return the actual height. The completed worksheet for such a formula is shown below.
Process Used to Complete Example Using primarily the default property set definitions in the Style Manager, the following process was completed. Added SpaceStyles as a new property set definition
Imported space styles from schedule table styles drawing. On the Definition tab for the SpaceObjects property set definition
Added a manual text property definition called HeightOverride. Added a formula property definition called HeightDisplayed.
Edited the HeightDisplayed formula property definition on the Formula Property Definition worksheet On the first line under Formula, entered strHeightOverride = "".
1970 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
As you make changes to the formula, you can view a sample result. For example, entering the formula "2+3" displays "5" in the Sample Result pane. This lets you correct a formula that fails to evaluate as expected. Under SpaceObjects with the cursor between the double quotes, selected HeightOverride.
When a property definition is first inserted in a formula, its sample value is taken from an object in the current drawing that uses the formula's property set definition or from a default object. With the cursor after the second quotation mark, pressed ENTER twice to insert 2 lines. From Statements under Insert VBScript code, added If...Then..Else (Block). When you move the cursor over an item, a tooltip displays the text that appears in the formula when it is inserted.
After you add VBScript code to the formula, red or gray text may be inserted to help construct the formula. Red indicates fields where additional code must be added. To remove a red field, select it, and enter text, insert a property definition, or insert other VBScript code.
Gray fields surrounded by brackets indicate optional fields. Typing anywhere within the gray brackets, or deleting one bracket, will remove the brackets and convert the code from optional to required.
Understanding Formulas | 1971
You can save a formula containing red and gray fields for future editing, but a warning dialog displays because the formula will not be evaluated correctly. You can access online Help for VBScript code in the formula for more information on its proper usage. Selected red condition field, and entered strHeightOverride = "". Selected red statements field, and entered RESULT = CDbl( ). With the cursor between the parentheses, selected Height under SpaceStyles.
Deleted the ElseIf line and the line below it.
Selected red "elseStatements" field, and entered RESULT = strHeightOverride.
Entered Vaulted for sample value of HeightOverride. Every time a sample value is changed a new sample result displays.
Entered 108 for sample value of SpaceStyles:Height. Selected Length - Long for Format.
1972 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Sample values are formatted and inserted into the formula in place of the corresponding property definition names with brackets surrounding them. The entire sample formula is evaluated, and the result displays in the Sample Result pane.
Because this formula contains the word RESULT, it is evaluated as a function instead of an expression, and the value of the formula property is the last value assigned to RESULT. The result of this valid formula is Vaulted.
Creating a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to create a property set definition. You can create a new property set definition by copying an existing definition. You then edit the definition properties to customize the characteristics of the definition. For more information, see "Editing a Property Set Definition" on page 1985.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Create a property set definition:
If you want to...
Then...
create an empty property set definition with default properties right-click the style or definition, and click New. Enter a name for the new property set definition, and press ENTER.
create a property set definition from an existing property set right-click the property set definition to copy, and click Copy.
definition
Right-click, and click Paste. Right-click the new property set
definition, and click Rename. Enter a name, and press ENTER.
NOTE If this property set definition will be used with schedule tags, do not enter spaces in the name.
4 Click OK.
Attaching Notes or Reference Files to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a property set definition. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a property set definition.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition to which you want to attach notes or reference files. 4 Click the General tab. 5 To add a description to the property set definition, enter it for Description. 6 To add a note, click Notes, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 7 Click Notes, click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
Creating a Property Set Definition | 1973
If you want to... edit the description of a reference file
edit a reference file detach a reference file
Then... select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK. double-click the reference file name to start its application. select the file name, and click Delete.
8 Click OK twice.
Specifying How the Property Set Definition is Applied
Use this procedure to specify whether a property set definition applies to objects or to styles and definitions. You also select the objects or the styles and definitions that can use the property sets created from this definition.
If the property set that you define contains properties that are the same for all objects created using a specific style, select a style-based property set. This eliminates the need to attach data for each instance of the object that you create. Objects created using the style with the property set assigned have access to the associated style-based property set.
In general, use automatic properties only within property set definitions that are applied to styles or definitions.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition that you want to change. 4 Click the Applies To tab. 5 Specify how the property set definition is applied:
If you want to apply it to...
Then...
objects
select Objects. The list of objects becomes available.
styles and definitions
select Styles and Definitions. The list of styles and definitions becomes available.
6 Select the objects or the styles and definitions to which the property set applies.
If you want to... define an object-based property set definition
Then... select the objects from the list in the left pane.
define a style- or definition-based property set definition
select the styles or definitions from the list in the left pane.
select all objects or style and definitions
click Select All.
clear the current selection
click Clear All.
If all the objects or none of the objects are selected, your property set definition can be added to any object or style. The area above the list displays the objects that are currently selected.
7 To specify classification criteria, expand a classification definition, and select one or more classifications.
For example, you can select a construction status of New and two preferred vendors. To meet the criteria, the classification in the object style must be New for construction status and the Vendor classification must be one of the two vendors selected.
1974 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Specifying multiple classification criteria in a property set definition
All classification definitions that apply to the same objects to which the property set definition applies are displayed on the right with a list of their classifications. If classifications are selected, the property set definition can be applied only to those objects or styles and definitions selected on the left that have all the classifications selected on the right.
8 Click OK.
Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a manual property definition to a property set definition. Manual properties are those that must be entered rather than obtained directly from the object. You can define a list of manual property values to use in property definitions. For example, you could predefine the values for paint color or manufacturer to avoid repeatedly typing the information. For more information, see "Creating a List Definition for a Manual Property Definition" on page 1988.
When you use real numbers for Type in manual property definitions, you specify only how units are entered and stored for properties of the object or style. How units are displayed is controlled by the property data format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions.
3 Select the property set definition for which to add a manual property.
4 On the Definition tab, click
.
5 Enter the Name for the property.
NOTE If this property is for use with schedule tags, do not enter spaces in the property name.
6 To define a property by using existing properties, select a property from the Start With list. 7 Click OK, and continue working on the property set definition on the Definition tab of the Property Set
Definition dialog. 8 Enter a description of the property, and click OK.
The default description is the same as the property definition name. This text is for a column header in a schedule table that uses this property.
NOTE The description does not change if you edit the property name. Edit the description separately.
9 Specify the type of data the property contains.
Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition | 1975
Select List to associate a list definition with this manual property. For more information, see "Creating a List Definition for a Manual Property Definition" on page 1988.
Changing the data type of a definition for property data already stored in the drawing will set the data to the default value, possibly removing data previously edited.
For property definitions to be displayed in a matrix column in a schedule table, you can assign multiple values to the same property by using a text data type and separating the values with semicolons. Each value will be displayed in a separate matrix column.
10 Select a property data format to specify how the data included in the property set definition is displayed.
The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format.
11 Select how units are entered.
If you assign a type of unit other than the default for Format, an override is applied to the property data format. The type of units specifies how they are stored in the drawing. on the Extended Data tab of the Properties Palette.
12 Enter a default value.
Values for Default are used in the example fields and as example data for schedule table columns. The Extended Data tab of the Properties palette displays units in the same format as they appear for Example.
NOTE If you create a manual property, it is helpful to enter neutral characters, such as "--," as the default value. When you create a schedule table, the characters fill the cells for which you have not entered values. You can edit the characters in each cell later. If you leave the default value blank in the property set definition, the corresponding cells are blank. You cannot select and edit blank cells.
13 Clear Visible if you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
14 Enter a number for Order if you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order. For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
15 Click OK.
NOTE When you attach property set data to an xref drawing or block using RefEdit and the property set includes Auto Increment--Integer or Auto Increment--Character, then you must set the default value to the first number to be used in the xref or block to avoid creating duplicate numbers.
Adding a Field to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a field to a property set definition. Fields contain updatable values or hyperlinks, and are selected from a list. You can create a manual property as a placeholder for a field. In that case, you enter the field in the property once it is attached to an object or style. If you enter a field as a default value for a manual property in the definition, all objects or styles that have the property attached already contain the field.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition to which you want to add a field.
4 On the Definition tab, click
.
1976 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
5 Enter the name for the property. NOTE If this property will be used with schedule tags, do not enter spaces in the property name.
6 Select *DEFAULT* for Start with. 7 Click OK. 8 Enter a short description of the property.
The default description is the same as the property definition name. This text is for a column header in a schedule table that uses this property. NOTE The description does not change if you edit the property name. You can edit the description. 9 Under Type, select Text. 10 If you want to create a field placeholder property that can be filled when the property set is attached to an object or style, do not enter a value for Default. For information about adding fields to properties attached to objects, see "Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects" on page 1956. 11 If you want to set a default field used for every object or style attached to the property set, right-click the Default column, and click Insert Field.
12 Under Field Category, select the desired category. 13 Under Field names, select the field you want to enter.
Some field names require additional information, like a file name or field property information. 14 Select the text format of the field text. 15 Click OK.
Adding an Automatic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add an automatic property definition to a property set definition. The values for automatic properties are obtained directly from an object or its style. Selecting a format for this property definition controls how these values display. For general information about automatic properties and additional explanation about some properties for walls, slabs, roof slabs, doors, and structural members, see "Understanding Automatic Properties" on page 1965. NOTE Ensure that the property data formats you want to use are stored in the current drawing. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
Adding an Automatic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition | 1977
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition to which to add the automatic property. 4 Click the Definition tab.
5 Click
.
6 Select one property for each object to which the property set definition applies.
For example, if the definition applies to windows and window assemblies, you can select the Width property for windows and the Width property for window assemblies. A warning is displayed if you select different properties from different object types.
NOTE If the property set definition applies to only one object, you can create multiple automatic property definitions at the same time by selecting multiple items on the Automatic Property Source worksheet. If the property set definition applies to more than one object, you can only create one property definition at a time. Typically, you would like to select items with the same name for every object the property set definition applies to. Selecting or clearing an item for one object selects or clears items with the same name for all other objects. You can control the selection of individual items by pressing CTRL.
7 Click OK. 8 Click on the value for Description, enter a short description of the property definition, and click OK.
The default description is the same as the property definition name. This is the default text for a column header in a schedule table that uses this property.
NOTE The description does not change if you edit the property name.
9 Select a format to specify the how the data displays. The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
10 Clear Visible if you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
11 Enter a number for Order if you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order. For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
12 Click OK.
Adding a Location Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a location property definition to a property set definition. Location property values are obtained from property data on AEC polygons or spaces in or near an object. When a selected object has a property set that contains a location property, a Data Location grip is displayed along with its other grips. If the location property is defined to retrieve property data from a space object, for example, and the property data comes from the space underneath the grip, then the grip moves when the object is moved. If an MvBlock representing a piece of furniture is moved from one space to another, it has access to the space's property data, which might include the occupant of a room.
A location property definition is a type of automatic property, because the value it displays is determined automatically, based on its definition, and cannot be edited directly. To create a location property definition, you select a property definition contained in a property set definition that can be applied to AEC polygons or space objects.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
1978 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition that you want to change.
4 On the Definition tab, click
.
5 Enter a name for the location property.
6 Clear Use property name for description if you do not want to use the location property as the description of the property.
7 Expand AEC Polygon or Space.
8 Expand a property set definition.
9 Select the property data you wish to retrieve.
10 Click OK.
To change the name of the property definition, click Name and double-click the property definition in the table, or select Edit Location. If Use property name for description is not set, edit the description.
11 Select a property data format to specify the method used to display the data included in the definition.
The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format.
12 Clear Visible if you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette.
For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
13 Enter a number for Order if you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order.
For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
14 Click OK.
Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a classification property definition or its properties to a property set definition. Including classifications or classification properties in a property set definition for schedules enables you to report classification data for the objects in a schedule table.
For example, if you have a classification definition for vendors, you can specify the vendor for different object types. You can then include the vendor classification or its properties in a property set definition and use the classification properties in a schedule table for the objects. For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Definitions to a Classification Definition" on page 1995.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions.
3 Click the property set definition that you want to change.
For example, if you want to include classifications in a door schedule, select a property set definition that applies to door styles.
4 Click the Definition tab.
5 Click
.
The Classification Property Definition dialog is displayed. The pane on the left lists classification definitions that apply to the object style for the current property set definition. For example, if the current property set definition applies to door styles, the Classification pane lists all the classification definitions that apply to door styles.
The pane on the right lists all the properties that apply to the classification definitions.
Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition | 1979
Example of the Classification Property Definition dialog
6 Enter a name for the property. The name identifies the property in the property set definition.
7 Clear Use classification name for description if you do not want to use the classification name for the description of the property.
By default, schedule table styles use the description for the column heading. The default description for classification properties comprises the names of the classification definition, the property set definition, and the property (such as Vendor - Vendor Class - Delivery Date).
8 Select the classification or the classification property to add to the property set:
If you want to...
Then...
include the value specified for each object for a classification in the left pane, select the classification definition. definition
include the value of a property that is attached to a classification
in the left pane, select the classification definition. In the right pane, select Classification Property, expand the property set, and select the property.
Selecting a classification property
9 Click OK, and continue working on the property set definition on the Definition tab of the Property Set Definition dialog.
10 If Use classification name for description was not selected, enter a description for the new property by selecting the empty value, entering text for Description, and clicking OK. To change the name of the property definition, double-click the value for Name.
11 Select a format to specify the how the data displays.
1980 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
12 Clear Visible if you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
13 Enter a number for Order if you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order. For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
14 Click OK.
Adding a Material Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a material property definition to a property set definition. Material property values are obtained from an object's component materials or from property data specified for an object's component materials. A material property definition is a type of automatic property, because the value it displays is determined automatically, based on its definition, and cannot be edited directly.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition that you want to change.
4 On the Definition tab, click
.
5 Enter a name for the material property.
6 Clear Use material name for description if you do not want to use the material property as the description of the property.
7 Select a material:
If you want to...
Then...
retrieve the name of a material specified for a component on select a Material in the left pane. an object or style
retrieve property data for the material specified for a component on an object or style
select Material Property in the right pane.
8 Click OK, and continue working on the property set definition on the Definition tab of the Property Set Definition dialog.
9 If Use material name for description was not selected, enter a description for the new property by selecting the empty value, entering text for Description, and clicking OK. To change the name of the property definition, double-click the value for Name.
10 Select a format to specify the how the data displays. The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
11 Clear Visible if you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
12 Enter a number for Order if you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order.
Adding a Material Property Definition to a Property Set Definition | 1981
For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
13 Click OK.
Adding a Project Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a project property definition to a property set definition. Project property values are obtained from the drawing management project in which an object is located. Project properties let you collect and display specific project details in a schedule table, such as:
mobile, fax, and telephone numbers of the project principal, manager, and architect contact information for public services sources for site information
A project property definition is a type of automatic property. The values displayed are determined by the information previously entered in the project and cannot be edited directly in the property definition. If, while working in the project, you modify project details that are included in the property definition and a schedule, the schedule displays the out-of-date marker. For more information, see "Turning Off the Out-of-Date Marker" on page 1923. In order for a project property definition to return correct project data, a drawing management project must be currently open, and the drawing containing the object must be part of that project. Not meeting either of these conditions has the following consequences:
The data on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette and on similar dialogs is displayed as "No Project." Attributes of schedule tags that display project data are not updated. Attributes display data as updated from the
last time the conditions were met and the drawing was saved. In this case, the data displayed may not be accurate. Schedule tables that display project data in one or more cells are not updated. Schedule tables display data as
updated from the last time the conditions were met and the drawing was saved. In this case, the data displayed may not be accurate.
These conditions allow drawings that contain project data to be viewed and plotted when drawing management is not available.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition that you want to change.
4 On the Definition tab, click
.
5 Enter a name for the project property.
6 Clear Use project information for description if you do not want to use the project property as the description of the property.
7 Select the project information to include in the property definition.
8 Click OK, and continue working on the property set definition on the Definition tab of the Property Set Definition dialog.
9 If Use project information name for description was not selected, enter a description for the new property by selecting the empty value, entering text for Description, and clicking OK.
To change the name of the property definition, double-click the value for Name.
10 Select a format to specify the how the data displays.
The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
11 Clear Visible if you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette.
1982 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
12 Enter a number for Order if you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order. For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
13 Click OK.
Adding an Anchor Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add an anchor property definition to a property set definition. Anchor property definitions allow one object to get data from another object to which it is anchored. For example, an anchor property of a door in a 2-hour fire-rated wall could display the 2-hour fire-rating of the wall with an anchor property definition specified. The information displayed cannot be edited directly.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition that you want to change.
4 On the Definition tab, click
.
5 Enter a name for the anchor property.
6 If you do not want to use the property name for the description, clear Use property name for description.
7 Select the property definition to be associated with this property set.
8 Click OK, and continue working on the property set definition on the Definition tab of the Property Set Definition dialog.
9 If Use property name for description was not selected, enter a description for the new property by selecting the empty value, entering text for Description, and clicking OK.
To change the name of the property definition, double-click the value for Name.
10 Select a format to specify the how the data displays.
The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
11 Clear Visible if you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette.
For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
12 Enter a number for Order if you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order.
For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
13 Click OK.
Adding a Graphic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to add a graphic property definition to a property set definition. Graphic property values can be blocks in the current drawing or image files, such as BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, or TIF. The image displayed cannot be edited directly.
Schedules display blocks as graphic properties only if the blocks exist in the current drawing. If you copy a schedule or a schedule table style to a new drawing, make sure that you also copy all blocks.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions.
3 Select the property set definition that you want to change.
4 On the Definition tab, click .
Adding an Anchor Property Definition to a Property Set Definition | 1983
5 Enter a name for the graphic property.
6 Specify a source for the graphic property: If you want to... select a block from the current drawing
select a block from outside of the current drawing select a drawing file select an image file
Then...
select Block, and select the block name from the drop-down list.
select Block, click Browse, select a block, and click Open.
select Block, click Browse, select a drawing, and click Open.
select Image, and click Browse. In the Select Image File dialog, browse to select the image, and click Open. Select the path type from the drop-down list. Using relative paths makes your project more portable.
7 If you want to enter a new description in the property set definition, clear Use block or image name for property description.
8 For Rotation, enter an angle for the graphic.
9 If you want to change the layer key, click Select Layer Key.
10 Click OK, and continue working on the property set definition on the Definition tab of the Property Set Definition dialog.
11 If Use graphic name for description was not selected, enter a description for the new property by selecting the empty value, entering text for Description, and clicking OK. To change the name of the property definition, double-click the value for Name.
12 Select a format to specify the how the data displays. The format you select becomes the default format of a column when this property is added to a schedule table style. It can be changed at any time. The Example column shows how the default value is displayed using the selected format. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
NOTE Images and blocks are uniformly scaled to fit within the table cell. The cell dimension is determined by the row height and column width.
13 If you do not want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette, clear Visible.
For more information, see "Hiding Properties" on page 1985.
1984 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
14 If you want this property definition to appear on the Extended Data tab in a particular order, enter a number for Order. For more information, see "Sequencing Property Definitions" on page 1985.
15 Click OK.
Sequencing Property Definitions
Use this procedure to specify the order in which properties are listed on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. When you have many object properties in a property set definition, it can be helpful to see the most important properties first rather than the default alphabetical order. Items with numbers appear before items without numbers.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition that you want to change. 4 On the Definition tab, select the property, and enter a number value for Order to specify the sequence in
which the property is to appear on the Properties palette. 5 Click OK.
Hiding Properties
Use this procedure to prevent properties from being listed on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. If the object has many properties associated with it, it could be helpful to exclude some of the less important properties from displaying on the Properties palette.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions. 3 Select the property set definition that you want to change. 4 Click the Definition tab, select the property, and clear Visible if you do not want the property to display
on the Properties palette. 5 Enter a name for the graphic property. 6 Click OK.
Editing a Property Set Definition
Use this procedure to perform any of the following edits on a property set definition.
change the objects or styles to which the property set can be attached. add and remove properties. change the name, description, and format of properties. change additional items for each type of property definition. change the visibility and the display order on the Properties palette.
Changes are immediately applied to any objects or styles attached to the property set that was created from the definition. If automatic update is specified for a schedule table, the changes also appear in the schedule table. If automatic update is not specified, you need to update the table.
NOTE If you remove a property that is used in a schedule table, INVALID is displayed for value in the table.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, and expand Property Set Definitions.
Sequencing Property Definitions | 1985
3 To change how the property set is applied, click the Applies To tab, and specify objects or styles:
If you want to...
Then...
apply the property set created from this definition to objects select Objects, and select the objects to which the property set can be attached. For more information, see "Specifying How the Property Set Definition is Applied" on page 1974.
apply the property set created from this definition to styles select Styles and Definitions, and select the styles and
or definitions
definitions to which the property set can be attached.
4 Click the Definition tab. 5 Edit the characteristics for each property definition:
If you want to... edit the name of a manual property definition
Then...
click Name. Enter a new name, and press ENTER. For more information, see "Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1975.
edit a manual property definition description
select the description, enter new text, and click OK.
edit the type of data, default value, format, visibility, or order select type, default, format, visibility, or order and make your
of a manual property definition
changes. If a property definition is not visible, you cannot
enter a value for Order.
edit how the units display for a manual property definition after the format is assigned, select a new value for Units.
edit an automatic property definition
select definition, source, format, visibility or order and make your changes. You cannot change the data type or default value of automatic properties.For more information, see "Adding an Automatic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1977.
edit a formula property definition
double-click the formula property definition. Change the name, clear or select Use formula for description, and modify the formula by entering data or selecting property definitions. Click OK. Select the source, format, visibility, or order and make your changes. For more information, see "Adding a Formula Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1967.
edit a location property definition
double-click the location property definition. Change the name, clear or select Use property name for description, and select a property definition. Click OK. Select the source, format, visibility, or order and make your changes. For more information, see "Adding a Location Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1978.
edit a classification property definition
double-click the classification property definition. Change the name, clear or select Use classification name for description, select from the classification definitions available in the left pane, and select a classification property from the right pane with Classification Property selected. Click OK. Select the source, format, visibility, or order and make your changes. For more information, see "Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1979.
1986 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
If you want to... edit a material property definition
edit a project property definition edit an anchor property definition edit a graphic property definition remove a property from the property set definition 6 Click OK.
Then...
double-click the material property definition. Change the name, clear or select Use material name for description, select from the materials available in the left pane, and select a material property from the right pane with Material Property selected. Click OK. Select the source, format, visibility, or order and make your changes. For more information, see "Adding a Material Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1981.
double-click the project property definition. Change the name, clear or select Use project information name for description, select from the project information available, and click OK. Select the source, format, visibility, or order and make your changes. For more information, see "Adding a Project Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1982.
double-click the anchor property definition. Change the name, clear or select Use property name for description, select a property definition, and click OK. Select the source, format, visibility, or order and make your changes. For more information, see "Adding an Anchor Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1983.
double-click the graphic property definition. Change the name, select a new block or image for Source, clear or select Use block (or image) name for description, change the scale and rotation, and click OK. Select the format, visibility, or order and make your changes. For more information, see "Adding a Graphic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1983.
select a property, and click
. For more information, see
"Removing All Property Sets from Objects and Styles" on
page 1987.
NOTE Property data format styles, property set definitions, and schedule table styles cannot be changed through RefEdit. Changes seem to work, but will revert to the previous settings when saved back to the xref file. Open the xref drawing directly, and make the changes there.
Removing All Property Sets from Objects and Styles
Use this procedure to remove a property set that no longer applies to the objects and object styles to which it is attached. If you remove an object or style from the Applies To list in a property set definition after the property set based on the definition is attached to the object, the property set is not automatically removed. This allows you to retrieve data that might have been entered for manual properties.
1 On the command line, enter PropertySetClean, and press ENTER. 2 Enter the name of the property set that you want to remove, or press ENTER to remove all the property sets
from all objects or styles.
Merging Property Set Definitions
Use this procedure to replace one property set definition with another for all objects or object styles. 1 On the command line, enter PropertySetDefMerge, and press ENTER. 2 Enter the name of the property set definition that you want to keep, and press ENTER.
Removing All Property Sets from Objects and Styles | 1987
3 Enter the name of the property set definition that you want to merge, and press ENTER. 4 Specify whether to purge the merged property set definition:
If you want to...
Then...
purge the property set definition that you merged
enter y (yes), and press ENTER.
keep the merged property set definition in the drawing
press ENTER.
If you keep the merged property set definition in the drawing, it is not attached to any objects.
5 Specify whether to remove property sets:
If you want to...
Then...
remove the property sets that do not apply after the merge enter y (yes), and press ENTER.
keep the property sets attached to objects and styles even though they may not apply
press ENTER.
List Definitions
A list definition is a multi-purpose object that lets you create a list of items to use in a manual property definition. After you create a list definition, values can be selected from the list without having to enter them manually each time.
For example, if you create a predefined list of acceptable values for paint color or manufacturers, you remove the risk of forgetting a correct name or making a typographical error when setting up manual properties. Create the list once, copy it into the appropriate project files as needed, and then you can easily select values for manual properties when you add them to property definitions. For more information, see "Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1975.
Creating a List Definition for a Manual Property Definition
Use this procedure to create a list definition with a list of items that can be used for manual properties.
NOTE List definitions can also be created for space and zone names. For more information, see "Creating a List Definition" on page 1625.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, right-click List Definitions, and click New. 3 Create a list definition:
If you want to...
Then...
create a definition with default properties
right-click List Definitions, and click New.
create a definition from an existing definition
right-click the list definition you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new list definition, and press ENTER. 5 On the General tab, enter a description for the list definition under Description. 6 Click the Applies To tab, and select Manual Property Definition.
1988 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
You can clear the list definition from applying to a manual property definition only if it is not in use.
7 Click the Items tab. 8 Select Allow individual property values to vary from this list if you want to allow values other than those
specified here to be displayed on the Properties palette. 9 Click Add, and enter a value for Name.
10 Enter a value for Description. 11 Continue to add values to this list definition. 12 Click OK.
Editing List Definitions
Use this procedure to edit or remove items in a list definition. You can remove only those items that are not currently in use.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand List Definitions. 3 Select the list definition. 4 Click the Items tab, and edit the list:
If you want to... edit the name of the property
Then... select the property and edit the text under Name.
edit the property description
select the property and edit the text under Description.
5 Click OK. 6 To remove an item from the list definition, select the item, and click Remove.
If the Remove button is unavailable, you cannot delete the property because it is currently assigned to an object, or it is in a property set definition that is in use.
7 Click OK.
Editing List Definitions | 1989
Changing the List Item for an Object
Use this procedure to change a list item on the Properties palette for an object. If you specified that property values for the item could vary from the list, you can enter a new value on the Properties palette.
1 Double-click the object to select a different list item.
2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 Select a different list item, or enter a new value. If entering a new value is not an option on the Properties palette, open the list definition and select Allow individual property values to vary from this list. For more information, see "Creating a List Definition for a Manual Property Definition" on page 1988.
Attaching Notes or Reference Files to a List Definition
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a list definition. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a list definition.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand List Definitions. 3 Select the list definition to which to attach notes or reference files. 4 On the General tab, enter a description for the list definition under Description 5 To add a note, click Notes, click the Notes tab, and enter the note. 6 Click Notes, click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
7 Click OK twice.
Classification Definitions
A classification definition is a group of named properties or characteristics that you can assign to building objects such as walls and doors. Classifications enable you to track objects by construction status, project phase, building element, vendor, or other criteria. A classification definition is applied to an object type. The definition contains classification names and descriptions. Each classification can have property sets attached to it.
Classifications and Schedule Tables
Classifications provide additional control over the content of schedule tables. You can include:
only those objects that meet the classification criteria. classification definitions as columns. additional information from property sets you create and attach to individual classifications.
1990 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Uses for Classifications
Here are some examples of classification definitions:
Classifications for multi-view blocks enable you to distinguish among blocks to use for furniture, appliances, fixtures, and equipment
Classifications for project phases can call out changes specified for new or demolition work and existing structure to remain
Classifications for door types let you filter partition doors in bathrooms from door schedules
Classifications and the Display System
You can modify display sets in a display configuration to show or hide objects based on their classification. For more information, see "Displaying Objects by Classification" on page 434.
Managing Classification Definitions
Classifications are organized in a hierarchical view in the Style Manager. Classification names must be unique within classification property definitions. To create, edit, copy, or purge classification definitions, you access the Style Manager. The Style Manager provides a central location for working with definitions and styles from multiple drawings and templates. For more information about using the Style Manager, see "Style Manager" on page 452. After classifications are applied to objects in the classification definition, they display on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette when the object is selected. You can change the classification for an object from the Extended Data tab in the Select Classification worksheet. If the classification change results in an object not displaying in your drawing window, a warning dialog displays. You can also open the object style in the Style Manager and make changes on the Classifications tab. For more information, see "Changing the Classification of an Object" on page 1997.
Process Overview: Including Classification Data in Schedules
The process of including classification data for objects in a schedule table has the following major steps:
Step 1: Create a classification definition, and specify the object type to which it is applied. For more information, see "Creating a Classification Definition" on page 1993.
Step 2: Create and attach property sets to the classifications in the classification definition. For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Definitions to a Classification Definition" on page 1995.
Step 3: Specify the classification for each object type that you want to schedule. For more information, see "Specifying the Object Types for a Classification Definition" on page 1994.
Step 4: Add the classification or its properties to a property set definition for the object type. For more information, see "Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1979.
Step 5: Add the classification or its properties as columns in a schedule table style that uses the property set definition you edited in step 4. For more information, see "Adding Columns to a Schedule" on page 1937.
Step 6: If necessary, specify filtering options for classifications in the schedule table style. For more information, see "Filtering Scheduled Objects by Classification in a Schedule Table Style" on page 1937.
Step 7: Create the schedule table. For more information, see "Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools" on page 1921.
The classification information for each object is included in the columns you added to the schedule table style.
A Classification Use Case
You can create a classification definition that contains a classification for each construction status, such as Existing, Demo, and New.
Process Overview: Including Classification Data in Schedules | 1991
Creating a classification definition for construction status
You also specify the objects to which the classification definition applies. Specifying object types in the classification definition
The classification definition is listed on the Classifications tab in the object style properties. You select a classification, such as New, in the object style. For example, your drawing might contain certain door styles for existing doors, and different styles for new construction. All doors created from these styles have the classification specified in their style. Door style with the classification specified
When you are ready to schedule doors, you can specify in the schedule table style that only those doors with the New classification will be included. Any other doors included in the selection set are filtered from the table.
1992 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Specifying classification criteria in a schedule table style
You can also include classifications as a column in your schedule tables. You can create and attach property sets to individual classifications to track additional data, and you can include this data in schedule tables. In addition, you can modify settings in the display system to filter the display of objects based on their classification. You can change the classification of a specific object on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. If this change causes an object to not display, a warning dialog appears on your drawing screen. Changing classification on the Extended Data tab
Creating a Classification Definition
Use this procedure to create a classification definition. You can create a definition using default properties or by copying an existing definition.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Classification Definitions. 3 Create a classification definition:
If you want to... create a definition with default properties
Then... right-click Classification Definitions, and click New.
Creating a Classification Definition | 1993
If you want to... create a definition from an existing definition
Then...
right-click the classification definition you want to copy, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
4 Enter a name for the new classification definition, and press ENTER. 5 Edit the classification definition:
If you want to...
Then...
enter a description of the classification definition
click the General tab, and enter the description.
specify the object types to which the definition applies
see "Specifying the Object Types for a Classification Definition" on page 1994.
enter classifications
see "Adding Classifications to a Classification Definition" on page 1995.
attach property sets to the individual classifications in the definition
see "Attaching Property Set Definitions to a Classification Definition" on page 1995.
add notes or files to the definition
see "Attaching Notes and Files to a Classification" on page 1997.
6 Click OK.
Specifying the Object Types for a Classification Definition
Use this procedure to specify the object types to which a classification definition applies. The classification will be listed on the style's Classification tab for all object types you specify. For example, if you specify that a classification definition applies to doors and windows, the classification is listed on the Classifications tab for all door and window styles in the drawing. You can also select an individual classification appropriate for each door and window object on the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette. For more information about specifying a classification for a particular type of object, see the topic for that object type in the online Help and "Displaying Objects by Classification" on page 434.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager.
2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Classification Definitions.
3 Select the classification definition.
4 On the Applies To tab, select the object types to which the classification definition will apply.
5 Selecting object types to which a classification definition applies
6 Click OK.
1994 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Adding Classifications to a Classification Definition
Use this procedure to add classifications to an existing classification definition. Classifications are individual entries organized hierarchically within a classification definition. For example, a classification definition for construction status may contain the classifications existing, demo, and new. Lower-level classifications can be added to each of these classifications.
NOTE Be sure to specify the object types to which the classification definition applies. The classifications are not available until you specify the object types in the classification definition. For more information, see "Specifying the Object Types for a Classification Definition" on page 1994.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Classification Definitions. 3 Select the classification definition. 4 On the Classifications tab, click Add. 5 Select the new classification, and enter a name under Item. 6 Under Description, enter a description of the classification.
Adding classifications to a classification definition
7 Continue adding classifications. 8 Select any of the classifications added, and drag and drop them to organize the hierarchy as desired. 9 Click OK.
Attaching Property Set Definitions to a Classification Definition
Use this procedure to add property set definitions to individual classifications in a classification definition. When you add property set definitions, you can track additional information. For example, if you create a classification definition for vendors, you can attach a property set to each vendor classification. The property sets can contain any properties that you specify, such as a vendorspecific part number. The properties are then associated with each object to which the classification is applied. These properties can then be included in the schedule table when the objects are scheduled. For more information about creating property sets, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963. For more information about adding classification property data to property set definitions, see "Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1979.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Classification Definitions. 3 Select the classification definition. 4 On the Classifications tab, select one or more classifications, and click Property Sets.
Adding Classifications to a Classification Definition | 1995
Selecting a classification to which you attach property sets
5 Click
.
6 Clear property sets that you do not want to attach to the classification, and click OK.
Clearing property sets you do not want to attach to classifications
7 Enter values for the property data, and click OK. You can enter or edit values later, if necessary. Entering data for a property set attached to a classification
8 Continue attaching property sets to other classifications. 9 Click OK.
Editing a Classification Definition
Use this procedure to edit or remove classifications in a classification definition, to add or edit data in property sets attached to classifications, and to detach property sets from classifications. NOTE You can remove only those classifications not currently applied to an object type. You cannot delete classifications that are in use.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Classification Definitions. 3 Select the classification definition.
1996 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
4 On the Classifications tab, edit classifications:
If you want to... edit the classification name
Then...
select the classification, edit the text under Item, and click OK.
edit the classification description
select the classification, edit the text under Description, and click OK.
add or edit property set data in property sets already attached select the classification, and click Property Sets. Enter or edit
to a classification
property data, and click OK.
5 To detach property sets from a classification, select the classification, and click Property Sets.
6 Click
.
7 Clear the property sets you do not want to remove, and click OK.
Removing property sets from a classification
8 Click OK. 9 To remove a classification, select the classification, and click Remove.
If the Remove button is unavailable, you cannot delete the classification because it is currently assigned to an object type.
10 Click OK.
Changing the Classification of an Object
Use this procedure to change the classification of an object in your drawing. Only classifications defined for and applied to that specific object are available for selection. For more information, see "Creating a Classification Definition" on page 1993. Classifications, but not their descriptions, are listed for objects and styles on the Classifications tab in the Style Manager. If descriptions have been entered, you can view them in the classification definition under Multi-Purpose Objects in the Style Manager.
1 Double-click the object for which you want to change a classification. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab. 3 Select the classification you want to change. 4 On the Select Classification worksheet, select a different classification, and click OK.
Attaching Notes and Files to a Classification
Use this procedure to enter notes and attach reference files to a classification definition. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from a definition.
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. 2 Expand Multi-Purpose Objects, and expand Classification Definitions. 3 Select the classification definition that you want to change. 4 Click the General tab.
Changing the Classification of an Object | 1997
5 To add a description to the definition, enter it for Description. 6 Click Notes. 7 Enter the note on the Notes tab. 8 Click the Reference Docs tab, and attach, edit, or detach a reference file:
If you want to...
Then...
attach a reference file
click Add, select a file, and click OK.
edit the description of a reference file
select the file, and click Edit. Enter the description, and click OK.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click Delete.
9 When you finish making changes to the classification definition, click OK.
Display Themes
Display themes use color, fills, and hatches to present data that is not typically visible in a drawing. For example, you can specify that all 2-hour fire-rated walls appear with a red fill. The display theme legend activates the display theme in the drawing and identifies the meaning of the different colors, fills, or hatches used in the theme.
The data for display theme legends is collected from the property set data attached to the objects or object styles. Styles for display themes are specified in the Style Manager under Documentation Objects.
Process Overview: Creating Display Themes
Typically, manual properties of an object--such as a wall's fire rating or a door's manufacturer--are not visible in a drawing. Display themes let you incorporate such non-graphic data in your drawing by using certain colors, fills, or hatches to highlight objects that meet criteria (theme rules) you establish in a display theme style. For example, you might define a property named Function for room objects, and then set up a theme rule specifying that rooms with a Function value equal to "storage" will be displayed with a solid yellow fill.
You activate a display theme in a drawing by using a display theme tool to insert a display theme legend, which explains the meaning of color, fills, or hatches specified in the theme.
If you use display theme styles provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, the property set definitions and property data formats for the style are already created for you. You can begin the process of creating a display theme from Step 4.
Create and implement a display theme by following these basic steps:
Step 1: Create property data formats (or modify existing ones as necessary) to specify formats for properties you want to include in the theme. For more information, see "Creating a Property Data Format" on page 1953.
These formats determine how data is displayed in the display theme legend.
Step 2: Create or modify property set definitions for objects or object styles incorporating formats from Step 1. For more information, see "Creating a Property Set Definition" on page 1973.
Step 3: Create or modify a display theme style. For more information, see "Creating a Display Theme Style" on page 2003.
The legend is a key that incorporates the property set definitions from Step 2 to specify which visual indicator will be applied to which objects in the drawing and what the content of the display theme legend will be.
Step 4: Attach property set data to the objects and object styles to be included in your display theme. For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956.
Step 5: Activate the display theme by adding the display theme legend to the drawing or right-click an existing legend. For more information, see "Adding a Display Theme to a Drawing" on page 2001.
1998 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Creating and Editing Display Themes
When you use a display theme in a drawing, you can show data that is not typically visible. For example, you can use different hatches to designate different functional areas within a building. Typically, manual properties of an object--such as a wall's fire rating or a door's manufacturer--are not visible in a drawing. Display themes let you incorporate such non-graphic data in your drawing by using certain colors, fills, or hatches to highlight objects that meet criteria (theme rules) you establish in a display theme style. For example, you might define a property named Function for room objects, and then set up a theme rule specifying that rooms with a Function value equal to "storage" will be displayed with a solid yellow fill. You activate a display theme in a drawing by using a display theme tool to insert a display theme legend or by right-clicking an existing legend. The legend explains the meaning of color, fills, or hatches specified in the theme.
Display themes are an effective way to present information during the conceptual design phase of a project, or when working with construction documents. With display themes you can identify changes to a project that are not in the contract, identify the staging of a project, and identify objects that meet or do not meet specific standards. For example, you may choose to specify that all fire-rated walls are displayed with red fills. The criteria for the display theme are based on the property data attached to the objects or object styles. The property data overrides the display properties to produce the visual effects produced by inserting a display theme. For more information about how objects display and their property data, see "Display Configurations" on page 417 and "Property Sets and Property Set Definitions" on page 1918. If you use the drawing as an external reference (xref) in a project, the display theme is imported into the host drawing by default. If the host drawing already contains a display theme, then the display theme in the host drawing overrides the display theme in the xref. A marker appears over the disabled display theme legend. Attaching Property Set Data Before applying a display theme to a drawing, the property sets referenced in the display theme style must be attached to the objects or object styles in the drawing. The attached property sets are the source of the data for the display theme. For more information, see "Property Sets and Property Set Definitions" on page 1918. Using Display Theme Styles Display theme styles control the visual change to the objects as well as the content and appearance of the display theme legend in the drawing. A drawing must contain a display theme style to effect the visual changes or to add a display theme legend. When you copy a display theme style into a drawing, property set definitions and data formats specified in the style are also copied. For more information, see "Display Theme Styles" on page 2002. Creating a Display Theme Legend Using Display Theme Tools A display theme legend provides a key to the display theme, mapping specific colors, fills, or hatches to properties of objects in a drawing. You insert a display theme legend into a drawing to activate a display theme and visually change the appearance of objects by overriding the current display properties.
Creating and Editing Display Themes | 1999
Tools provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop let you quickly place display theme legends by selecting a display theme tool with a specific display theme style and other predefined properties. When you place display theme legends using display theme tools, you can use the default settings of the tool, or you can change settings for the display theme properties. You can also use display theme tools to apply the settings of a display theme tool to existing display themes.
The default Scheduling palette in the Tool palette set contains three sample display theme tools that you can use and customize as needed. Custom palettes created by your CAD manager or other users may also contain display theme tools with display theme styles and properties that are customized for your projects or office standards.
Creating a Display Theme Tool
Use this procedure to create a display theme tool and add it to a tool palette. You may want to create your own display theme tools if you are creating multiple display themes of specific display theme styles. The display theme is activated when the display theme legend is inserted in the drawing with the display theme tool. For more information, see "Creating a Display Theme Style" on page 2003.
You can use any of the following methods to create a display theme tool:
Drag a display theme style from the Style Manager to a tool palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy a tool from another palette to the current palette, and then customize the properties of the new tool.
Copy an existing tool in the current palette and then customize the properties of the new tool.
1 Open the tool palette on which you want to create a tool. 2 Create the tool:
If you want to...
Then...
create a tool from a display theme style in the Style Manager click Format menu Style Manager. Locate the style you want to copy, and drag it to the tool palette. Click OK to close the Style Manager.
copy a tool in the current tool palette
right-click the tool, and click Copy. Right-click, and click Paste.
copy a tool from another tool palette
open the other palette, right-click the tool, and click Copy. Reopen the palette where you want to add the tool, rightclick, and click Paste.
3 Right-click the new tool, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand General. 7 Specify general properties for the display theme:
If you want to...
Then...
add a description
enter text for Description.
specify the layer key
click the setting for Layer key, select a layer key, and click OK.
specify layer overrides
click the setting for Layer overrides. Clear Do not specify Layer Overrides, select an override, and click OK twice.
specify the display theme style
click the setting for Style, and select a style.
specify an external drawing file source for the style
click the setting for Style location, and click Browse to specify a location.
change the scale of the display theme legend
enter a value for Scale.
8 Click OK.
2000 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Adding a Display Theme to a Drawing
Use this procedure to add a display theme to a drawing by inserting a display theme legend. The display theme legend activates the display theme in the viewport and identifies the meaning of the different colors, fills, or hatches used in the theme. The data for the display theme legend is collected from the property set data attached to the objects or object styles, as specified in the display theme style. When you add new objects to a drawing, data is added to the legend if it meets the criteria you specified in the display theme style. For more information, see "Display Theme Styles" on page 2002. If you insert a display theme legend while working in paper space, the legend is attached to a viewport. If you insert a display theme legend while working in model space, all model space viewports are affected. Legend for display theme based on Space Size property
To ensure that the display theme can be implemented, verify that: The drawing contains a display theme style that specifies theme settings and establishes conditions (theme rules) for those objects that you wish to display differently. For more information, see "Creating a Display Theme Style" on page 2003. Property set data is attached to the objects or object styles for objects to which you want the display theme style applied. For more information, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956.
1 Open the tool palette containing the Display Theme tool you want to use, and select the tool. Three sample Display Theme tools are located on the default Scheduling palette in the Tool palette set. There are additional Display Theme tools located in the Documentation Tool Catalog and with the Scheduling and Reporting Tools in the Stock Tool Catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Working with Tool Palettes" on page 33.
2 In the drawing area, specify the insertion point for the upper-left corner of the display theme legend. 3 Specify the lower-right corner of the legend, or press ENTER to scale the display theme legend to the current
drawing scale. The objects affected by the display theme visually change in the drawing as indicated by the legend.
Disabling Display Themes
Use this procedure if you want to manually disable a display theme. A disabled display theme is indicated by a marker through the legend. This does not prevent the display theme legend from plotting on your sheet. For more information about display properties for the legend, see "Accessing the Default Display Properties of an Object" on page 425. If you attach or overlay a drawing as an external reference (xref) in a project, all display themes in the xref are imported into the host drawing by default. If the host drawing has existing display themes, then the active display theme in the host drawing overrides any active display theme in the xref.
1 Select an active display theme legend. 2 Right-click and click Disable Display Theme.
Adding a Display Theme to a Drawing | 2001
Disabled display theme
Activating Display Themes
Use this procedure if you want to activate a different theme. Regardless of how many display themes you add to your drawing, only one theme at a time can be active. If you add a display theme to a drawing that has existing themes, the other themes are disabled. A disabled display theme is indicated by a marker through the legend. If you attach or overlay a drawing as an external reference (xref) in a project, all display themes in the xref are imported into the host drawing by default. If the host drawing has existing display themes, then the active display theme in the host drawing overrides any active display theme in the xref.
1 Select a disabled display theme legend. 2 Right-click and click Apply Display Theme.
The marker is removed from the selected legend and applied to any others in the drawing. Active display theme legend
Display Theme Styles
A display theme style defines a particular display theme for incorporating non-graphic data in a drawing by highlighting objects that meet criteria you specify. The type of highlighting is controlled through one or more theme settings, each of which specifies a particular color fill, hatch, or linetype. For each theme setting, there are one or more theme rules that determine which objects will be highlighted using that setting. The display theme style also specifies the format and display properties for the display theme legend that identifies the data represented by the highlighted objects.
As you work with different display theme styles within a project, you can synchronize the versions with your project standards. For more information, see "Synchronizing Selected Styles and Display Settings with AEC Standards" on page 359.
2002 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
What You Need to Create a Display Theme Style
Your drawings must contain the following information to create a new display theme style:
Property set definitions for any property data to be included in the display theme created from the style. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
Property data formats to control the format of values of display theme rules. Typically, you use the data format for values that the property set definition uses. However, you can override data formats. For more information, see "Property Data Formats" on page 1951.
Creating Tools from Display Theme Styles
You can create a display theme tool from a display theme style by dragging the style from the Style Manager onto a tool palette. You can then specify properties for the tool. For more information, see "Creating a Display Theme Tool" on page 2000.
Creating a Display Theme Style
Use this procedure to create design rules for display theme styles and to specify the format for the legend of the display theme in the Style Manager. A display theme changes how objects or object styles display in your drawing based on the criteria you specify. For more information, see "Creating and Editing Display Themes" on page 1999. Property set definitions must already be defined in your drawing before you can specify one for a theme rule. For more information, see "Property Set Definitions" on page 1963.
Specify the design rules for the display theme
1 Click Format menu Style Manager. The Style Manager is displayed with the current drawing expanded in the tree view.
2 Expand Documentation Objects, right-click on Display Theme Styles, and click New. 3 Enter a name for the new display theme style and press ENTER. 4 To add a description of the display theme style, enter it for Description. 5 Click the Design Rules tab.
6 Click
to create a new display theme setting.
An unnamed display theme setting is created with the index number of 1.
7 Create the settings for the display theme.
If you want to...
Then...
specify a name for the display theme
select Unnamed and enter text for Name.
turn off the visibility of the identifying color click the light bulb. If the light bulb is yellow, the identifying color or hatch or hatch for this display theme in the display and the name of the display theme are visible in the display theme legend. theme legend
add a color to the display theme
click BYBLOCK, and select a color from the Select Color worksheet. For more information, see "Choose Hatch Patterns and Solid Fills" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
add a hatch pattern to the display theme
click SOLID, select a Type from the Hatch Pattern worksheet, and click OK. For more information, see "Choose Hatch Patterns and Solid Fills" in AutoCAD Help.
Creating a Display Theme Style | 2003
If you want to...
Then...
scale a hatch pattern for the display theme enter a value for Scale/Spacing. For more information, see "Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)" in AutoCAD Help.
change the angle of the hatch pattern
enter a value for Angle. For more information, see "Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)" in AutoCAD Help.
specify the orientation of the hatch pattern click global. from global to object
specify the X offset of the hatch pattern
enter a value for X Offset.
specify the Y offset of the hatch pattern
enter a value for Y Offset.
specify a Linetype for the hatch pattern
click ByBlock, select a linetype, and click OK. For more information, see "Custom Hatch Patterns" in AutoCAD Help.
specify a Lineweight for the hatch pattern
click ByBlock, select a lineweight, and click OK. For more information, see "Overview of Lineweights" in AutoCAD Help.
specify a Linetype Scale for the hatch pattern enter a value for Lt Scale. For more information, see "Work with Linetypes" in AutoCAD Help.
specify a Plot Style for the hatch pattern
click ByBlock, select a plot style, and click OK. For more information, see "Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects" in AutoCAD Help.
8 Under Theme Rules for selected Theme Settings, click
.
A display theme rule is created with the index number of 1.1. This corresponds with the display theme setting. You can create multiple rules for each display theme.
9 Select a property set definition. Property set definitions that exist in the drawing appear in the drop-down list.
10 Select a property. The properties available are contingent upon the property set definition you selected.
11 Select a condition. The conditions available are contingent upon the property set definition and property you selected.
12 Enter a value appropriate to the condition you selected. 13 Select an operator appropriate to the formula you are creating for the display theme rules. 14 Click the Legend Format tab. 15 For Title, enter the text you want to appear on the heading of the display theme legend. 16 Select the shape of the symbol for the legend key as either round or square. 17 Select a style for the text in the legend. 18 Enter the height for the text in the legend. 19 Enter the gap between words in the legend. 20 Click the Legend Display Properties tab. 21 Select the display representation on which to display the changes, and select Style Override.
The display representation in bold is the current display representation. For more information, see "Display Representations" on page 413.
22 If necessary, click . 23 Click the Layer/Color/Linetype tab.
2004 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
24 Select the component to change, and select a different setting for the property.
25 Click OK twice.
Troubleshooting Schedule Tables
This topic provides answers to some common questions about schedule tables and their data:
Question Marks in Cells
I added a schedule table, but all the cells contain question marks.Why did this happen? Question marks appear in table cells when property sets are not attached to the objects included in the table, or to the object styles for objects in the table. When attached to an object or a style, a property set becomes the container for the property data. The schedule table stores no data. For more information about attaching property sets to objects and styles, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
To attach property sets to objects and styles individually, select the table, right-click, selecting Edit Table Cell, and selecting the cell. For more information, see "Editing Table Cell Data" on page 1950.
To attach property sets to all objects and styles that need them, select the table, right-click, and select Add All Property Sets. For more information, see "Adding Property Set Data to All Objects" on page 1951.
For more information about attaching property sets to objects and styles, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956 and "Attaching Property Set Data to Styles and Definitions" on page 1958.
Object not Listed
Why is an object I added to the drawing not listed in the schedule table? Objects added to a drawing after you add a schedule table are not added to the table unless the Add New Objects Automatically option is selected in the table properties. However, you can manually add objects to a table schedule. For more information, see "Adding Objects to a Schedule" on page 1922.
If the schedule table style uses classifications to filter objects, review the troubleshooting information in "Troubleshooting Classification Definitions" on page 2006.
Which Property Sets to Attach
How do I know which property sets to attach to objects or styles to remove question marks from columns in a schedule table? You can find this information by viewing the column definitions in the schedule table style used to create the schedule table. Select the schedule table, right-click, and click Edit Table Style. Click the Columns tab. You can view the property assigned to each column and the property set from which the property is obtained. Click Cancel to return to the drawing. Property sets provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop use the words Object and Style in their names to identify how the property set can be attached. For example, you can attach the DoorObjects property set to doors. You can attach the DoorStyles property set to any door style.
To attach property sets to objects and styles individually, select the table, right-click, select Edit Table Cell, and select the cell. For more information, see "Editing Table Cell Data" on page 1950.
To attach property sets to all objects and styles that need them, select the table, right-click, and select Add All Property Sets. For more information, see "Adding Property Set Data to All Objects" on page 1951.
For more information about attaching property sets to objects and styles, see "Attaching Property Set Data to Objects" on page 1956.
Changing Data in the Schedule Tables
Why doesn't the data in the schedule table show the changes I made to objects in the drawing? Changes that you make to objects--whether through graphically modifying the object, editing the object properties or style, or editing property data--automatically appear in a schedule table only when the Automatic Update option is specified in the schedule table properties. However, you can manually update a table to reflect the changes. For more information, see "Updating a Schedule Manually" on page 1923.
Object Numbers Out of Order
After adding and removing objects, I updated the schedule table.Why are the object numbers still out of order? Updating a schedule table does not change the numbers assigned to the objects.
Troubleshooting Schedule Tables | 2005
To renumber objects in a schedule table, see "Renumbering Property Set Data" on page 1931.
Locating an Object
Is there an easy way to locate an object that is listed in a schedule table? Yes. You can select a row in the schedule table to highlight the object that corresponds to the row. For more information, see "Locating and Viewing Scheduled Objects in a Drawing" on page 1924.
Selecting an Empty Cell
Why can't I select an empty cell in the schedule table to enter a value for a manual property? A table cell must contain at least one character for you to be able to select an individual cell. If the property was defined without a default entry and no data for that property was entered before the table was created, the cell is blank. You can enter the value by accessing the property data directly in the object or the object style, depending on where the property is attached. For more information, see "Property Set Data" on page 1956.
INVALID in a Table Cell
Why do all the cells of one column in a schedule table show a value of INVALID? A property value appears as invalid in a schedule table if the property was deleted from a property set that is used in the schedule table. To edit the schedule table style to remove the property from the table, see "Editing Columns in a Schedule Table" on page 1942. To edit the property set definition to restore the property, see "Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1975 or "Adding an Automatic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1977.
Troubleshooting Schedule Table Styles
This topic provides answers to the following questions:
Add Column Button Unavailable
Why is the Add Column button unavailable when I try to add columns to a schedule table style? This button is unavailable if the drawing does not contain any property sets that apply to the same objects or styles that the schedule table style is applied to. For more information, see "Specifying Objects for a Schedule Table Style" on page 1936 and "Adding Columns to a Schedule" on page 1937.
Property Sets Unavailable
Why are the property sets I want to use unavailable when I try to add a column? Property sets are listed only if property set definitions are stored in the current drawing. Also, only property sets that apply to all the objects you selected on the Applies To tab are available to use in schedule table columns. A property set that applies only to some of the selected objects cannot be included in the schedule table. For example, a window schedule that applies to windows and window assemblies cannot contain columns for properties that apply only to window assemblies.
Quantity Column not Totalling
Why is the Quantity column in my schedule table style not totalling objects that are the same. Objects that are the same, such as all doors of a certain style with identical dimensions, are not grouped and totaled if values for any cell are different. For example, the objects are not totalled if the table contains object numbers or if some objects have remarks and some do not.
Matrix Column Displaying Data Instead of a Matrix Symbol
Why does the matrix column I formatted for a property show data values instead of the matrix symbol? If the property specified in the column can have multiple values, you need to add columns to the matrix format to accommodate all possible values. For example, in a finish schedule in which walls may be assigned one of four finishes, you need to enter a number greater than three for Max Columns to create a column for each finish. When you then create a table from the style, the matrix symbol appears in the finish column for the finish value entered in the property data for the walls of each space.
Troubleshooting Classification Definitions
This topic answers the following questions about troubleshooting classification definitions:
2006 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
Empty Classification Tab in Style Properties
Why does the Classifications tab in the style properties have nothing in it? The Classifications tab in the object style properties contains no data if no classification definitions are defined for styles of that object type. For example, if the drawing contains no classification definitions that apply to wall styles, the Classifications tab in the Wall Style Properties dialog does not contain any classification information. You specify the object styles to which a classification definition applies when you create the definition. For more information, see "Specifying the Object Types for a Classification Definition" on page 1994.
Long Title for a Classification Property
My schedule table contains an extremely long title for a classification property. How can I fix this? The default column header in schedule table styles is the description of the property selected in the property set definition. The default description for classification properties comprises the names of the classification definition, the classification property set, and the classification. In the schedule table style, you can edit the column header to create a shorter header. For more information, see "Adding Columns to a Schedule" on page 1937.
If you clear Use classification name for description when you add or edit a classification property in the property set definition, you can enter a shorter description. For more information, see "Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1979.
Classifications Property to a Property Set Definition
Why are no classification property sets listed when I try to add a classification property to a property set definition? No classification property sets are listed if there are no classification property sets for the classification definitions that apply to the object or object style specified in the current property set definition.
Including Classifications in a Schedule Table
I want to include classifications in a schedule table.Why do I not see an option for them in the schedule table style? The schedule table style must use property sets that contain classification properties. The classification properties are then available to include in a schedule table style.
Objects Not Included in the Schedule
Why were numerous objects in my drawing not included in a schedule table? If you use classification filters in the schedule table style, only objects of the specified type that meet all the classification criteria are included in the schedule table. For example, if you create a door schedule for doors that are classified new and exterior, only doors that meet both criteria are included in the schedule table. If an object meets only some of the classification criteria, it is not included in the schedule table.
Classifications Selected but Object Not Included
I selected all the classifications for a classification definition in the schedule table style, but many objects were not included in the schedule.Why did this happen? If a classification was not selected in the object style for the classification definition used in the schedule table style, objects of that style are not included in the schedule. The classification for such objects is Unspecified, and they are filtered from the schedule table. To include all objects in a schedule table, regardless of classification, do not select any classifications on the Applies To tab in the schedule table style.
Troubleshooting Schedule Tags
This topic answers the following questions about troubleshooting schedule tags:
Difference Between Schedule Tags and Project Schedule Tags
When do I select a project-based schedule tag instead of basic schedule tag? The difference between a standard schedule tag and a project-based schedule tag is that a project-based schedule tag recognizes the level in the project in which the object is located. When you want this additional information captured, use a project-based schedule tag. For more information, see "Adding Tags Using Schedule Tag Tools" on page 1924 and "Annotating a Building Project" on page 293.
Empty Classification Tab in Style Properties | 2007
Troubleshooting Units
This topic answers the following question about troubleshooting units:
Values on the Extended Data Tab Why does the display change for the units of a manual property when I select the value on the Extended Data tab?
An override was applied in the property set definition that is attached to the object. Property data formats control how units are edited and displayed. If you assign a type of unit other than the default in the property set definition, an override is applied to the property data format. Units specified in the property set definition controls what is stored in the drawing. The Extended Data tab of the Properties palette displays the units as defined in the property data format. For example, with units specified as inches and unit format specified as Architectural in the property data format for LengthLong, when you select LengthLong for Format in the property set definition, Inches displays for Units by default. You can select any other type of unit that is identified for LengthLong (such as feet and millimeters). If you select Feet in place of Inches in the property set definition, and select a door with a manual property called HeightOverride, and enter 84 on the Extended Data tab, the value displays 7'-0''. For more information, see "Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition" on page 1975 and "Units in Property Data Formats" on page 1952.
2008 | Chapter 45 Schedules and Display Themes
46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
Architectural, engineering and construction (AEC) content consists of drawing files, architectural symbols, object styles, and annotation routines that you add to drawings to design and document your project. In Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, predefined AEC content can be accessed from the Content Browser and from the AEC Content tab in DesignCenterTM. You can also create custom content using the AEC Content Wizard.
2009
Overview of AEC Content
AEC (architectural, engineering and construction) content consists of drawing files, architectural symbols, object styles, and annotation routines. You use AEC content to create and annotate your drawings. Doors and windows are examples of design content, while schedule tables and keynotes are examples of documentation content. You can access AEC content from either the Content Browser or the AEC Content tab in DesignCenterTM. DesignCenter AEC Content tab
In some design situations, you may want to create custom content for a unique piece of construction, or you may want to create a custom command to insert AEC content by following a series of procedures. You can make your own content by modifying existing content or by constructing new content using the AEC Content Wizard. For more information, see "Creating Custom AEC Content" on page 2014. In addition to AEC content, Autodesk® Architectural Desktop includes other types of predefined content, including layers, templates, and materials. This content is located in \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\ADT 2007\enu.
Predefined AEC Content
With the AEC content provided in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can begin the design process for imperial and metric drawings immediately. You can access AEC content from either the Content Browser or the AEC Content tab in DesignCenterTM. The Content Browser holds a collection of tool catalogs for predefined AEC content and sample object styles. Design, Documentation, and Stock Tool catalogs are available for both metric and imperial tools. The content in DesignCenter supplements AEC content in the Content Browser. In some situations, content such as elevation labels provides alternatives to tools in the Content Browser. Each method of accessing AEC content is unique and has advantages and disadvantages. Some AEC content appears in both the Content Browser and DesignCenter. For example, there are schedule tag tools in the Content Browser and schedule tags in DesignCenter. For more information, see "Adding AEC Content to Drawings" on page 2012.
AEC Content in the Content Browser
The Content Browser has the most comprehensive collection of content. You store, organize, share, exchange, and insert AEC content into drawings using tools. For example, because windows are governed by styles, the window tool specifies the location of the external drawing file from which to import the style of the window. For more information, see "Exploring the Content Browser" on page 79. Tools in the Content Browser are organized within tool catalogs by category. There are imperial and metric Design, Documentation and Stock Tool catalogs in the Content Browser. When you first open Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, a collection of tools appears in the drawing area. The tools are organized on tool palettes by type. For example, the Walls Tool Palette contains a variety of commonly used wall styles. Tools on the tool palettes reference the content organized in the Content Browser. For more information, see "Working with Tool Palettes" on page 33. The Content Browser is also the most flexible method of organizing and adding content to your drawing. You can easily customize your own tool palettes by dragging and dropping frequently used tools onto a palette. Because the
2010 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
Content Browser runs independently of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can exchange tools and tool palettes with other Autodesk applications. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
AEC Content in DesignCenter
Like the Content Browser, DesignCenterTM also lets you store, organize, share, and exchange AEC content that can be inserted into drawings. Instead of being tool-based, however, AEC content in DesignCenter is organized in a hierarchical tree view, and once you select an AEC content item, you can preview it, edit it, or drag it onto a tool palette or directly into a drawing.
When you open DesignCenter from the Navigation toolbar or the Insert menu, and click the AEC Content tab, the Custom Applications tree view is displayed in the left pane with Architectural Desktop as the root node. Within the Imperial and Metric folders under the root node, there are folders for categories that roughly approximate the CSI MasterFormat divisions. At the lowest level of the tree view, each folder points to one or more external drawing files,
each containing one piece of AEC content. You can toggle the tree view on and off by clicking the top of the DesignCenter window.
There are three panes on the right side of the AEC Content tab.
on the toolbar at
The top pane is the content area, which displays the contents of the folder currently selected in the tree view. The Views drop-down list at the upper-right corner of the window provides four content display options: Large Icons, Small Icons, List, and Details. The Large Icons option displays an image of the content item. All other options display the generic DWG icon. Regardless of whether the content item is displayed as an image or an icon, it can be dragged and dropped into a drawing or onto a tool palette.
The middle pane displays a higher resolution preview of the AEC content item currently selected in the top pane and behaves like the Object Viewer. For more information, see "Using the Object Viewer" on page 600. You can
toggle the preview pane on or off by clicking on the toolbar at the top of the window.
The bottom pane displays a text description of the AEC content item currently selected in the top pane. You can
toggle the description on or off by clicking on the toolbar at the top of the window.
The AEC Content tab in DesignCenter
Fixture Layouts in DesignCenter
Fixture layouts are located in the Plumbing Fixtures folder (under Imperial/Design/Mechanical). They are unique because you can drag them into your drawings and then use the Edit Block in-place option on the context menu to edit the components of the layout. For more information, see "Adding Fixture Layouts from DesignCenter" on page 2013 and "Modifying Fixture Layouts" on page 2022.
Fixture layouts are intended to provide samples from which to create your own office standards for restroom design. All the components can be modified to meet project and code requirements, and then added to DesignCenterTM for access. The samples provided do not necessarily meet jurisdictional regulations or ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) requirements.
AEC Content in DesignCenter | 2011
The following notes and hints apply when working with the fixture layouts available in DesignCenter. For more information, see "Modifying Fixture Layouts" on page 2022.
The layout files are custom content set to the Drawing content type. The layout files have no layer key because all objects have hard-coded layers within the file. You can change the
layers as required. The layout files are not set to Explode on Insert because you can place them at only one rotation and orientation
(not mirrored) when you drag them into a drawing, and it is easier to reposition them as unexploded blocks. To set rotation and mirroring before insertion, double-click the icon to display the standard AutoCAD Insert dialog
box instead of dragging the content. The rotation angle and scale (for mirroring) can be set in the Insert dialog box or on the command line. If you use
the command line, you can see the result of each option before actually inserting the content. You can apply multiple settings on the command line, even though the prompt says "Specify insertion point:" after the first one. You can still type another X, Y, or R. Use X = -1 or Y = -1 to mirror the content. Use the node object snap to position individual stall and urinal layouts next to each other. The toilet partitions and screens are inserted with centered baselines, so the node snap places them correctly. After insertion, select Edit Block in-place from the context menu to adjust the layout, extend partitions, or to move doors, fixtures, or grab bars. Stall partitions are wall objects placed in the wall group "Toilet_Ptn." They do not clean up with other walls. Urinal screens are in the "Standard" group, but set to "Do Not Cleanup." Each lavatory layout consists of a counter, made of a wall object with the cleanup group "Toilet_Counter" with lavatory MV Blocks anchored as follows: Lavs (1) Wall anchor; centered along curve Lavs (2) - (4) Layout Curve (on counter); even spacing (1'-6'' start and end offset) Lavs (5) Layout Curve (on counter); repeat at 3'-0'' (1'-6'' start and end offset)
Use the endpoint object snap to position a counter against a stall or urinal screen. After exploding, the lavatory counters can be trimmed or extended to the restroom walls. The lavatory counters
adjust appropriately, depending on the anchoring mode. The restroom files are preconfigured assemblies of individual layouts, arranged as typical men's and women's
rooms.
For more information, see "Detail Components" on page 1815and "Layout Curves and Grids" on page 1429.
Adding AEC Content to Drawings
You add AEC content to drawings from tools in the Content Browser or from files in the content area of the AEC Content tab in DesignCenterTM. Although you can drag and drop content from DesignCenter onto a tool palette to create tools for the content, you cannot drag tools from the Content Browser into DesignCenter.
Adding Content from the Content Browser
Use this procedure to add AEC content to a drawing using tools from the Content Browser. When you drag a tool directly into the drawing area from the Content Browser, the Properties palette opens so that you can enter properties for the new object. Tools can have preset parameters so that you can add an object with one click. There is no need to change properties before placement. For detailed information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
1 Click on the Navigation toolbar to open the Content Browser. The Content Browser opens in a window outside the drawing area. To see both the drawing and the Content Browser, reduce the size of drawing and the Content Browser on your screen.
2 Click the catalog that contains the category of tools you want to use. 3 Click the category that contains the tool.
2012 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
4 Drag the i-drop® icon for the tool into the drawing area to add the content to your drawing. 5 Define properties for the content on the Properties palette, if necessary.
For more information, see "Properties Palette" on page 21. 6 Press ENTER.
Adding Content from DesignCenter
Use this procedure to add DesignCenter content to a drawing. You can also drag AEC content onto a tool palette for direct access or to create a custom tool. For more information see "Moving Content Between DesignCenter and the Content Browser" on page 2013.
1 Click on the Navigation toolbar to open DesignCenter. 2 Click the AEC Content tab. 3 Under Custom Applications, expand Architectural Desktop, and expand Imperial or Metric. 4 Expand the folder containing the content you want to place in the drawing. 5 Drag the desired image or file icon from the content area (the top right pane) to the desired location in
the drawing area. (Alternatively, you can double-click the content item, or right-click it and click Insert, and then specify a location in the drawing area.) The content is placed in your drawing using the current display configuration. For more information about display configurations, see "Display System Structure" on page 412.
Adding Fixture Layouts from DesignCenter
Use this procedure to place fixture layouts in your drawing. For more information, see "Fixture Layouts in DesignCenter" on page 2011 and "Modifying Fixture Layouts" on page 2022.
1 Click on the Navigation toolbar to open DesignCenter. 2 Click the AEC Content tab. 3 Under Custom Applications, expand Architectural Desktop, and expand Imperial or Metric. 4 Expand Design, and expand one of the following layouts:
For imperial content, expand Mechanical\Plumbing Fixtures\Layouts. For metric content, expand Bathroom\Layouts.
5 Double-click a layout. 6 Use the Insert dialog box to control the placement of the layout. 7 Specify a rotation angle or a scale to mirror the layout.
Enter -1 for X or -1 for Y to mirror the content. 8 Click OK. 9 Specify a location for the fixture layout.
NOTE You can also add the layout by dragging it to the drawing, or by right-clicking and clicking Insert. You have the most control over the insertion if you use the double-click or right-click methods.
Moving Content Between DesignCenter and the Content Browser
When you want to create a tool from AEC content in DesignCenterTM, you drag and drop the selected content item from the AEC Content tab in DesignCenter onto a tool palette. From the tool palette, you can drag and drop the newly created tool into a catalog in the Content Browser. You cannot drag AEC content from a DesignCenter folder directly into the Content Browser or drag tools from the Content Browser into DesignCenter.
Adding Content from DesignCenter | 2013
For more information about creating your own tool palettes or working with content in catalogs, see "Working with Tool Palettes" on page 33.
Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter
Use this procedure to create a tool by dragging an AEC content item from DesignCenterTM onto a tool palette. NOTE You can also create tools from blocks in DesignCenter, but they have slightly different tool options. Adding AEC DesignCenter content to a tool palette
1 Open the tool palette where you want to add a new tool. 2 On the Insert menu, click DesignCenter, and navigate to the folder for the AEC content from which you
want to create a tool. 3 Drag the content onto the tool palette.
A new tool is inserted on the tool palette. To change the icon of the tool, see "Changing a Tool Icon" on page 46. 4 Define additional properties for the tool, if necessary. For more information, see "Changing the Tool Properties" on page 45.
Creating Custom AEC Content
When you want to create custom content to represent unique or frequently used objects that are not currently included in either the Content Browser or DesignCenterTM, use the AEC Content Wizard to construct the content. The AEC Content Wizard is designed specifically for working within DesignCenter. After you create the content in DesignCenter, you can move it onto a tool palette. For more information, see "Adding AEC Content to Drawings" on page 2012.
Using the AEC Content Wizard
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides a wizard to help you create custom content. You can create blocks, drawings, and commands from data existing in the current drawing.
2014 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
AEC Content Wizard
To create custom content, you first select the content type. Next, you set options to be used when content is inserted into a drawing. The final step is to specify the output file and other parameters that control how DesignCenterTM displays the content.
When creating content in an existing AEC file (that is, a drawing generated from the AEC Content Wizard), the default values for each page of the wizard are set to the value used to create the drawing. The default settings provide an easy way for you to make small modifications to existing content files.
Creating an AEC Content Block for DesignCenter Use this procedure to create an AEC content block and add it to DesignCenterTM. You create the new block from an existing block in the current drawing. The block is saved in a new drawing that can be accessed from DesignCenter.
1 On the Format menu, click AEC Content Wizard.
2 Select Block for Content Type.
All the defined blocks in the current drawing are displayed under Current Drawing.
3 Select a block for Current Drawing, and click Add. Only one block at a time can be selected for Current Drawing and added to Content File.
4 Click Next. 5 Specify an insertion method for Insert Options:
If you want to... explode the block when you add it to your drawing
Then... select Explode on Insert.
have the block remain a block when you add it to your drawing
clear Explode on Insert.
specify an elevation for the block when you add it to your drawing
enter a value for Preset Elevation.
specify an anchor type to use when you add the block to your select a type of anchor for Anchor Type. drawing
6 Specify an insertion scale factor for Scale:
If you want to...
Then...
scale the block instance using a coordinate (X, Y, Z) direction enter values for X, Y, and Z for Scale.
Using the AEC Content Wizard | 2015
If you want to...
Then...
apply no additional scaling method to the block instance select None for Additional Scaling.
scale the block instance by the annotation scale of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Annotation for Additional Scaling.
scale the block instance by the drawing units of the drawing select Drawing for Additional Scaling. you are adding the block to
scale the block definition by the drawing units of the drawing select Enable AEC Unit Scaling. you are adding the block to
7 If the block has attributes, specify a text style for Attribute Text Style:
If you want to...
Then...
use the default text style of content in the current drawing select As Defined by Content.
use the text style of the target drawing
select Target Drawing Text Style.
8 If the block has attributes, specify an angle for Attribute Text Angle:
If you want to...
Then...
use the rotation angle of the block as the attribute text angle select As Inserted.
set the angle of the attribute text to zero
select Force Horizontal.
be able to read the attribute text from the right direction select Right Reading.
9 Click Select Layer Key, select a layer key, and click OK. You can also enter a layer name for Layer Key.
10 Click Next. 11 Enter a name for File Name, or click Browse.
If you want to save the current drawing as the content file, select Current Drawing.
12 Select an image for Icon to represent the block in DesignCenter:
If you want to... specify an existing bitmap image
Then... click New Icon, select an image, and click OK.
specify the default image of the block itself
click Default Icon.
13 Enter a description for Detailed Description. 14 If you want to save the drawing objects in the content file, select Save Preview Graphics. 15 Click Finish.
Creating an AEC Content Drawing for DesignCenter Use this procedure to create an AEC content drawing and add it to DesignCenterTM. The content drawing can then be inserted into a drawing with all of its content, including styles, blocks, layers, and linetypes.
1 On the Format menu, click AEC Content Wizard. 2 Select Drawing for Content Type, and click Next. 3 Specify an insertion method for Insert Options:
If you want to... specify an elevation
Then... enter a value for Preset Elevation.
2016 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
If you want to... specify an anchor type
Then... select a type of anchor for Anchor Type.
4 Specify an insertion scale factor for Scale:
If you want to...
Then...
scale the drawing instance using a coordinate (X, Y, Z) direction
enter values for X, Y, and Z for Scale.
apply no additional scaling method to the drawing instance select None for Additional Scaling.
scale the drawing instance by the annotation scale of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Annotation for Additional Scaling.
scale the drawing instance by the drawing units of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Drawing for Additional Scaling.
scale the drawing definition by the drawing units of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Enable AEC Unit Scaling.
5 Specify an angle for Attribute Text Angle:
If you want to...
Then...
assign the angle of the attribute text to be the same as the select As Inserted. rotation angle of the drawing
set the angle of the attribute text to zero
select Force Horizontal.
be able to read the attribute text from the right direction select Right Reading.
6 Click Select Layer Key, select a layer key, and click OK. You can also enter a layer name for Layer Key.
7 Click Next. 8 Enter a name for File Name, or click Browse.
If you want to save the current drawing as the content file, select Current Drawing.
9 Select an image for Icon to represent the drawing in DesignCenter:
If you want to... specify an existing bitmap image
Then... click New Icon, select an image, and click OK.
specify the default image of the drawing itself
click Default Icon.
10 Enter a description for Detailed Description. 11 Click Finish.
Creating an AEC Content Multi-View Block for DesignCenter Use this procedure to create an AEC multi-view block and add it to DesignCenterTM. You define the multi-view block from view blocks created in your drawing that represent different views of your custom object. The block is saved in a new drawing that can be accessed from DesignCenter. For more information, see "Creating View Blocks" on page 1515.
1 On the Format menu, click AEC Content Wizard. 2 Select Multi-View Block for Content Type.
All the defined blocks in the current drawing are displayed in Current Drawing.
3 Select a multi-view block under Current Drawing, and click Add. Only one block at a time can be selected for Current Drawing and added to Content File.
Using the AEC Content Wizard | 2017
4 Click Next. 5 Specify an insertion method for Insert Options:
If you want to...
Then...
explode the multi-view block when you add it to your drawing select Explode on Insert.
have the multi-view block remain a block when you add it to clear Explode on Insert. your drawing
specify an elevation for the multi-view block when you add enter a value for Preset Elevation. it to your drawing
specify an anchor type to use when you add the multi-view select a type of anchor for Anchor Type. block to your drawing
6 Specify an insertion scale factor for Scale:
If you want to...
Then...
scale the multi-view block instance using a coordinate (X, Y, enter values for X, Y, and Z for Scale. Z) direction
apply no additional scaling method to the multi-view block select None for Additional Scaling. instance
scale the multi-view block instance by the annotation scale select Annotation for Additional Scaling. of the drawing you are adding the block to
scale the multi-view block instance by the drawing units of select Drawing for Additional Scaling. the drawing you are adding the block to
scale the multi-view block definition by the drawing units of select Enable AEC Unit Scaling. the drawing you are adding the block to
7 If the block has attributes, specify a text style for Attribute Text Style:
If you want to...
Then...
use the default text style of content in the current drawing select As Defined by Content.
use the text style of the target drawing
select Target Drawing Text Style.
8 If the block has attributes, specify an angle for Attribute Text Angle:
If you want to...
Then...
use the rotation angle of the multi-view block as the attribute select As Inserted. text angle
set the angle of the attribute text to zero
select Force Horizontal.
be able to read the attribute text from the right direction select Right Reading.
9 Click Select Layer Key, select a layer key, and click OK. You can also enter a layer name for Layer Key.
10 Click Next. 11 Enter a name for File Name, or click Browse.
If you want to save the current drawing as the content file, select Current Drawing.
2018 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
12 Select an image for Icon to represent the multi-view block in DesignCenter:
If you want to... specify an existing bitmap image
Then... click New Icon, select an image, and click OK.
specify the default image of the multi-view block itself
click Default Icon.
13 Enter a description for Detailed Description. 14 Click Finish.
Creating an AEC Content Masking Block for DesignCenter Use this procedure to create a custom AEC masking block that you can add to your drawing using DesignCenterTM. You create the new masking block from an existing masking block in the current drawing. The masking block is saved in a new drawing that can be accessed from DesignCenter. For more information about using masking blocks, see "Mask Blocks" on page 1500.
1 On the Format menu, click AEC Content Wizard.
2 Select Masking Block for Content Type.
All the defined blocks in the current drawing are displayed in Current Drawing.
3 Select a masking block for Current Drawing, and click Add. Only one block at a time can be selected for Current Drawing and added to Content File.
4 Click Next. 5 Specify an insertion method for Insert Options:
If you want to...
Then...
specify an elevation
enter a value for Preset Elevation.
specify an anchor type
select a type of anchor for Anchor Type.
6 Specify an insertion scale factor for Scale:
If you want to...
Then...
scale the masking block instance using a coordinate enter values for X, Y, and Z for Scale. (X, Y, Z) direction
apply no additional scaling method to the masking select None for Additional Scaling. block instance
scale the masking block instance by the annotation select Annotation for Additional Scaling. scale of the drawing you are adding the block to
scale the masking block instance by the drawing units select Drawing for Additional Scaling. of the drawing you are adding the block to
scale the masking block definition by the drawing units of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Enable AEC Unit Scaling.
7 If the block has attributes, specify a text style for Attribute Text Style:
If you want to...
Then...
use the default text style of content in the current drawing
select As Defined by Content.
use the text style of the target drawing
select Target Drawing Text Style.
Using the AEC Content Wizard | 2019
8 If the block has attributes, specify an angle for Attribute Text Angle:
If you want to...
use the rotation angle of the masking block as the attribute text angle
Then... select As Inserted.
set the angle of the attribute text to zero
select Force Horizontal.
be able to read the attribute text from the right direction
select Right Reading.
9 Click Select Layer Key, select a layer key, and click OK. You can also enter a layer name for Layer Key.
10 Click Next. 11 Enter a name for File Name, or click Browse.
If you want to save the current drawing as the content file, select Current Drawing.
12 Select an image for Icon to represent the masking block in DesignCenter:
If you want to...
Then...
specify an existing bitmap image
click New Icon, select an image, and click OK.
specify the default image of the drawing itself
click Default Icon.
13 Enter a description for Detailed Description. 14 Click Finish.
Creating an AEC Content Custom Command for DesignCenter Use this procedure to create a custom command that you can add to your drawing environment using DesignCenterTM. In the AEC Content Wizard, select one or more content blocks, specify a command string, and save a new drawing that contains all the content of the current drawing. When the custom command is added to a target drawing from DesignCenter, the set of content blocks is copied into the target drawing and the routine is executed, enabling the custom command. Following is a detailed example of a custom command that you can create in the AEC Content Wizard. This custom command string adds a schedule tag to a room symbol and creates the leader and tag with the desired style. $HF$QQR6FKHGXOH7DJ$GG &?'RFXPHQWV DQG 6HWWLQJV?$OO 8VHUV?$SSOLFDWLRQ 'DWD?$XWRGHVN?$'7 ?HQX?6W\OHV?,PSHULDO?6FKHGXOH 7DEOHV ,PSHULDO GZJ BV\PERO DHFBURRPBWDJ BOHDGHU BQRQH BGLPVW\OH BFXUUHQW The equivalent prompts on the command line are as follows; however, entering text for custom commands on the command line is not recommended. Custom commands should be created with the AEC Content Wizard.
$QQR6FKHGXOH7DJ$GG
3URSHUW\ VHW GHILQLWLRQV GUDZLQJ ?'RFXPHQWV DQG 6HWWLQJV?$OO 8VHUV?$SSOLFDWLRQ 'DWD?$XWRGHVN?$'7 ?HQX?6W\OHV?,PSHULDO?6FKHGXOH 7DEOHV ,PSHULDO GZJ!
6HOHFW REMHFW WR WDJ >6\PERO/HDGHU'LPVW\OH(GLW&RQVWUDLQ5RWDWLRQ@6\PERO
(QWHU WDJ V\PERO QDPH ! $HFB5RRPB7DJB
6HOHFW REMHFW WR WDJ >6\PERO/HDGHU'LPVW\OH(GLW&RQVWUDLQ5RWDWLRQ@/HDGHU
(QWHU OHDGHU W\SH >1RQH67UDLJKW63OLQH@ 1RQH!1RQH
6HOHFW REMHFW WR WDJ >6\PERO/HDGHU'LPVW\OH(GLW&RQVWUDLQ5RWDWLRQ@'LPVW\OH
(QWHU OHDGHU GLPVW\OH &855(17 $HF$UFK,! &XUUHQW
6HOHFW REMHFW WR WDJ >6\PERO/HDGHU'LPVW\OH(GLW@
1 On the Format menu, click AEC Content Wizard. 2 Select Custom Command for Content Type.
2020 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
All the defined blocks in the current drawing, regardless of type, are displayed in Current Drawing.
3 Select one or more blocks for Current Drawing, and click Add.
4 Enter the command string for Custom String. You can also click Expand to display the Custom Command String dialog box, and enter the command string.
The command string is limited to 255 characters.
5 Click Next. 6 Specify an insertion method for Insert Options:
If you want to... specify an elevation
Then... enter a value for Preset Elevation.
specify an anchor type
select a type of anchor for Anchor Type.
7 Specify an insertion scale factor for Scale:
If you want to...
scale the drawing instance using a coordinate (X, Y, Z) direction
Then... enter values for X, Y, and Z for Scale.
apply no additional scaling method to the drawing instance select None for Additional Scaling.
scale the drawing instance by the annotation scale of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Annotation for Additional Scaling.
scale the drawing instance by the drawing units of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Drawing for Additional Scaling.
scale the drawing definition by the drawing units of the drawing you are adding the block to
select Enable AEC Unit Scaling.
8 Specify an angle for Attribute Text Angle:
If you want to...
Then...
assign the angle of the attribute text to be the same as the select As Inserted. rotation angle of the drawing
set the angle of the attribute text to zero
select Force Horizontal.
be able to read the attribute text from the right direction select Right Reading.
9 Click Select Layer Key, select a layer key, and click OK. You can also enter a layer name for Layer Key.
10 Click Next. 11 Enter a name for File Name, or click Browse.
If you want to save the current drawing as the content file, select Current Drawing.
12 Select an image for Icon to represent the drawing in DesignCenter:
If you want to...
Then...
specify an existing bitmap image
click New Icon, select an image, and click OK.
specify the default image of the drawing itself
click Default Icon.
13 Enter a description for Detailed Description.
Using the AEC Content Wizard | 2021
14 Click Finish.
Editing AEC Content
You can edit AEC content that was added to the drawing from DesignCenterTM. For information about editing tools in the Content Browser, see "Customizing a Tool" on page 98.
Modifying DesignCenter Content with the AEC Content Wizard
Use this procedure to edit DesignCenter content with the AEC Content Wizard.
1 Click on the Navigation toolbar to open DesignCenter. 2 Click the AEC Content tab. 3 Under Custom Applications, expand Architectural Desktop, and expand Imperial or Metric. 4 Expand the folder containing the content you want to edit. 5 Select the content item you want to modify, right-click and click Edit.
The AEC Content Wizard opens and the content type is displayed. 6 Follow the screens in AEC Content Wizard to make your modifications.
Modifying Fixture Layouts
Use this procedure to modify the components of fixture layouts with the Edit Block in-place option. This method is more efficient than exploding the layout. For example, if you drop a toilet stall into your drawing and then explode it, the stall walls are wall objects, the door to the stall is a door object, and the toilet is a multi-view block. When you use Edit Block in-place, the layout remains a single piece of content. You can also drag the fixture layouts onto a tool palette to create custom tools.
NOTE After you create your custom fixture layout, save the layout as Custom Design Content for easy placement in future drawings.
For more information about fixture layout content, see "Fixture Layouts in DesignCenter" on page 2011. 1 Select a layout, right-click, and click Edit Block in-place. The Reference Edit dialog box opens. 2 Click OK. The components can now be edited separately. For more information, see "Reference Edit Dialog Box" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Turning Off the Dimension Scale Override
Use this procedure to prevent the software from automatically applying an override to the current dimension scale style in the drawing. This control is on by default, and it overrides the active dimension scale style. With the override on, dimensions added to the drawing are scaled based on the current drawing scale. For more information, see "Set Plot Scale" in AutoCAD Help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
2022 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
If you want to make the dimension scale match your drawing scale, leave Automatically Create Dimscale Override selected. The override applies a scale factor to the dimension style properties. WARNING Any time you close the Drawing Setup dialog box by selecting OK or Apply, an override is applied if Automatically Create Dimscale Override is selected, regardless of the tab that was originally opened. AEC dimensions added with tools in Autodesk Architectural Desktop are not affected by the dimension scale override because an AEC dimension style depends on which display representation is active. For more information about AEC Dimensions, see "Dimension Options and Uses" on page 1741.
1 On the Format menu, click Drawing Setup. 2 Click the Scale tab. 3 Clear Automatically Create Dimscale Override.
When you clear this setting, you can adjust the dimension scale independently of the drawing scale. 4 Select Save As Default if you want subsequent drawings to use these settings, or clear Save As Default to
save your settings in the current drawing only. 5 Click OK.
Turning Off the Dimension Scale Override | 2023
2024 | Chapter 46 AEC Content and DesignCenter
Other Utilities
6
2025
2026 | Chapter 47 Other Utilities
Cameras
47
In Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2007 , the AEC Camera tool has been replaced with the AutoCAD Camera tool. However, the Architectural Desktop Camera Adjust tool is still used to adjust the camera view. For more information about AutoCAD Camera, see AutoCAD Help.
2027
Adjusting the Camera Position
Use this procedure to change the camera view incrementally in various directions. 1 On the View menu, click Cameras Adjust. 2 Select the camera to adjust.
3 Click the appropriate button to adjust the view. Change the Step value: This value controls how far each click of the following buttons moves the camera: Forward, Back, Left, Right, Up, and Down. Change the Angle value: This value controls how far each click of the following buttons moves the camera angle: Turn Left, Turn Right, Look Up, and Look Down. Change the Zoom percentage: This value controls how far each click of the button zooms the camera for Zoom In and Zoom Out. Click Hide to view the drawing with hidden lines removed.
If the view in the drawing wasn't the camera's view, then the first selected button places the drawing into the camera's view. As you click each button, the view changes in increments determined by values in the Adjustment Increments section. If Auto View is selected, you can see the change after you click each button. If Auto View is cleared, click View to see the changes. 4 Click OK.
2028 | Chapter 47 Cameras
48 Converting Objects to 3D Solids
You can convert objects to 3D solids when preparing to use CNC machining applications to create a physical building model from a computer-generated building model. You may also want to convert objects to 3D solids if the objects are to interact with other 3D solids.
2029
Converting Objects to 3D Solids
You can convert objects to 3D solids when preparing to use CNC machining applications to create a physical building model from a computer-generated building model. You may also want to convert objects to 3D solids if the objects are to interact with other 3D solids. You cannot convert the following objects or blocks:
Objects with no integral 3D presence, such as building grids or cameras 3D sections Objects in a block or an external reference Multi-view blocks and multi-view parts (MvParts) Custom display blocks created from 3D solids For more information, see "Create 3D Solids" in AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
Converting Objects to 3D Solid Objects
Use this procedure to convert objects such as walls, doors, and mass elements into three-dimensional (3D) solid AutoCAD® objects. TIP Convert custom display blocks to Free Form mass elements, and then convert the mass elements to 3D solids.
1 Open the tool palette that contains the Convert to 3D Solid tool you want to use, and select the tool. A default Convert to 3D Solid tool is located with the Modeling Tools in the Autodesk® Architectural Desktop Stock Tools catalog. You can add this tool to any tool palette. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 Select the objects to convert, and press ENTER. 3 Enter y (Yes) to erase the selected geometry after conversion, or enter n (No) to keep the geometry in the
drawing Any selected objects that cannot be converted are filtered out during the conversion. Highly-faceted objects, such as curved railings and stairs, may take a longer time to convert. After you convert an object to a solid, you can convert it to a Free Form mass element and modify it using grips or the Properties palette. You can then convert the Free Form mass element back to a 3D solid. For more information, see "Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models" on page 587.
2030 | Chapter 48 Converting Objects to 3D Solids
Visual Audit
49
Visual Audit is a utility that helps you manage the integrity of your design data by identifying non-AEC objects, such as AutoCAD® objects and exploded AEC objects, in your drawings.
2031
Working with Visual Audit
When you perform a visual audit, all of the AEC objects in the drawing are temporarily removed from the display, leaving only non-AEC objects in view. You can inspect the remaining objects more closely to see if they should be replaced with AEC objects.
To add clarity to the audit, a visual audit also removes single and multi-line text, leaders, and dimension objects from the display. Attribute text remains visible in the drawing. All objects are displayed again when you end the visual audit.
In the following illustration, the railing, door, and the framed opening are exploded AEC objects.
Performing a visual audit with AEC and non-AEC objects in the drawing
Performing a Visual Audit
Use this procedure to perform a visual audit on your drawing.
NOTE For best results, perform a visual audit in a 2D wireframe view.
1 On the Window menu, click Pulldowns, and click CAD Manager Pulldown. 2 On the CAD Manager menu, click Visual Audit.
All AEC objects are removed from the display. Attribute text remains visible in the drawing.
3 Pan and Zoom to inspect the drawing:
If you want to... access zoom options
Then...
enter `z (Zoom). You can use real time zoom or right-click to access additional zoom options.
access pan options
enter `p (Pan). You can pan or right-click to access pan options.
4 Press ENTER. All objects are restored to the display.
2032 | Chapter 49 Visual Audit
Reference AEC Objects
50
You can create reference copies of objects that are updated automatically when you change the original object. You can add identical objects, such as columns, to your drawing.
2033
Creating an AEC Entity Reference
You can create an entity reference from all Autodesk® Architectural Desktop and AutoCAD® objects. These entity references are automatically updated when you change the original object. When you select an object to reference, you must specify a point on the original object as an insertion point for the marker of the entity reference. A reference marker is displayed in the drawing to mark the insertion point. You can place the entity reference in the drawing at any location or rotation angle. The distance between the entity reference and the reference marker remains equal to the distance between the original object and the insertion point specified. You can change this distance by specifying a new insertion point at a new location in relation to the original object. When you change the properties of the original object or edit it with grips, the reference object reflects the changes. For example, if you want to add custom-shaped mass elements to a drawing, you can add one mass element and reference it. If you make changes to the original, the entity reference is updated.
Adding a Reference to an Object
Use this procedure to create a entity reference from another object.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select an AEC entity reference tool. An AEC entity reference tool is located in the Helper Tools category of the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 Enter ad (Add), and press ENTER. 3 Select the object that you want to reference. 4 Specify a point on the original object to use as the insertion point for the entity reference marker. 5 Specify a location for the entity reference in the drawing.
The distance between the entity reference and the reference marker is equal to the distance between the original object and the insertion point that you specified.
6 Enter a rotation angle for the entity reference, or press ENTER for zero rotation. 7 Press ENTER.
The entity reference and reference mark are placed in the drawing at the specified location and rotation angle. If you edit the original object, the same changes are made to the entity reference.
Attaching an Object to an Existing Entity Reference
Use this procedure to attach an object to an existing entity reference.
1 Open the tool palette that you want to use, and select an AEC entity reference tool. An AEC entity reference tool is located in the Helper Tools category of the Autodesk Architectural Desktop Stock Tool catalog. For more information, see "Understanding the Content Browser" on page 78.
2 Enter at (Attach), and press ENTER. 3 Select the reference marker that you want to use. 4 Select the new object that you want to use to replace the entity referenced, and press ENTER.
The new entity reference replaces the former entity reference. The original object is unchanged.
Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an Entity Reference
Use this procedure to attach hyperlinks, enter notes, or attach reference files to an entity reference in a drawing. You can also edit notes and edit or detach reference files from an entity reference.
1 Double-click the entity reference to which to attach information. 2 On the Properties palette, click the Extended Data tab.
3 To add a hyperlink, click next to Hyperlink, and specify the link. For more information about adding hyperlinks, see "Add Hyperlinks in a Drawing" in AutoCAD help.
2034 | Chapter 50 Reference AEC Objects
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
4 To add or edit a note, click next to Notes, enter text, and click OK.
5 Click next to Reference documents, and attach, detach, or edit a reference file:
If you want to ... attach a reference file
Then ...
click
, select a file, and click Open.
edit the description of a reference file
enter text under Description.
edit a reference file
double-click the reference file name to start its application.
detach a reference file
select the file name, and click
.
6 Click OK twice.
Changing the Location of an Entity Reference
Use this procedure to relocate an existing entity reference by changing the coordinate values of its insertion point. The entity reference also has an orientation with respect to the world coordinate system (WCS) or the current user coordinate system (UCS). For example, if the top and bottom of the reference object are parallel to the XY plane, its normal is parallel to the Z axis. You can change the orientation of the entity reference by aligning its normal with another axis. You can also rotate the entity reference on its plane by changing the rotation angle.
For more information about the world coordinate system and the user coordinate system, see "Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems" in AutoCAD help.
TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in Autodesk Architectural Desktop Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics.
1 Double-click the entity reference you want to relocate or reorient. 2 On the Properties palette, expand Basic, and expand Location. 3 Click Additional information. 4 Specify the location of the entity reference:
If you want to ... relocate the entity reference
Then ... enter new coordinate values under Insertion Point.
locate the entity reference on the XY plane
make the normal of the entity reference parallel to the Z axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Z, and enter 0 for X and Y.
locate the entity reference on the YZ plane
make the normal of the entity reference parallel to the X axis: under Normal, enter 1 for X and enter 0 for Y and Z.
locate the entity reference on the XZ plane
make the normal of the entity reference parallel to the Y axis: under Normal, enter 1 for Y, and enter 0 for X and Z.
change the rotation of the entity reference
enter a new value for Rotation Angle.
5 Click OK.
Changing the Location of an Entity Reference | 2035
2036 | Chapter 50 Reference AEC Objects
51 Customizing and Adding New
Content for Detail Components
The details feature in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop has a framework for content that can be customized and extended in several different ways. Detail components are stored in Microsoft® Access databases, which end users can modify or even create using the Detail Component Manager, as described under "Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases" on page 1830. Developers may prefer to work on detail component databases using Microsoft Access directly, in which case they will definitely need to refer to the descriptions and code samples in this appendix. However, it is recommended that any user be familiar with this information before attempting to create or customize a detail component database.
2037
Introduction
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop detail components are not custom objects in AutoCAD. They are made up of simple entities like line, arc, polyline, block, and hatch. Usually, the various entities that make up a detail component are grouped as an anonymous block so that they can easily be copied or moved like a single entity. But a detail component can also be as simple as a polyline boundary with a hatch interior. This accommodates the type of component for which it is natural to use the STRETCH command. The exact makeup of the component is left to the discretion of the developer. Each Detail Component is also stamped with "Xdata" (Extended Entity Data) that identifies where it came from in the original database of components. This data can be used later to retrieve additional information or create another component of the same type. Detail components are integrated with the Property palette and Tool palette systems. However, the details framework handles this interaction automatically, and an author of a new detail component only has to provide a simple description of what type of data should appear. The details framework includes four main components:
Database of Components and Sizes Recipe Specification Recipe Implementation Framework Utilities
These framework components are described individually in the following sections.
Database of Components and Sizes
The AEC Detail Component database is a Microsoft® Access database, which contains a size table for each available component, as well as several related tables that support the overall structure of the database. End users can add or modify existing component tables through the user interface provided by the Detail Component Manager dialog box, but more advanced customization requires Microsoft Access.
Recipe Specification
A Recipe Specification (RecipeSpec) is an XML file that describes the different Recipes that can be used to create a particular component in AutoCAD. For each Recipe, it identifies the types of controls (prompts) that should appear in the Properties palette and specifies how to call the function that implements the given Recipe. The RecipeSpec also provides view-specific information such as the layers and hatch patterns to use when creating the component.
Recipe Implementation
A Recipe Implementation is (usually) a small piece of code that creates the component in AutoCAD. The Recipe Implementation can be written in ObjectARX C++, VBA (Visual Basic for Applications), or any Microsoft .NET language (such as C# or Visual Basic .NET). The Recipe can be as easy as a simple block insert, or it can involve more complex operations, such as bringing up a dialog box with many choices.
Framework Utilities
The Framework utilities make the job of implementing a Recipe much easier. They provide many of the common functions to look up data from the database and from the user controls that populate the Properties palette. These utilities also provide a number of common "Jigs" that help place the component once it is created. For more information on Jigs, see "Jigs and JigEnts" on page 2055.
A Walkthrough of the Process
As with a real recipe, the ingredients for a detail component Recipe can come from many places. As the recipe author, you have the freedom to put the ingredients together however you choose. Nonetheless, the following walkthrough
2038 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
of the process the user goes through to insert a detail component in a drawing should help give you a better understanding of how all the pieces fit together. Step 1: The user chooses a detail component to create, either by selecting one from the Detail Component Manager
dialog box, or by clicking on a tool that has been configured to insert that component.
Step 2: The RecipeSpec that is assigned to the selected detail component is read, and the information within it is displayed on the Properties palette, as shown below. The Category, Type, and Description values all come from the user's selection of the component. The Receipe can then retrieve other information it needs directly from the database. The user can change any of the values displayed on the Properties palette to affect the currently running Recipe.
A Walkthrough of the Process | 2039
Step 3: The RecipeSpec may have one or more Recipes defined within it, each associated with a different View setting on the Properties palette. By selecting a View (or accepting the default) the user in effect selects the Recipe that is responsible for creating that view of the component. When a particular Recipe is selected, the Recipe Implementation function described in the XML RecipeSpec is called.
The three controls shown under Specifications (Hatch block, Grout fill cores, and Show mortar) are defined by the <Controls> section of the RecipeSpec. Their values can be retrieved by the Recipe function and used to control the basic parameters of the component.
In this example, Mortar is a subcomponent of the CMU component, as specified in its RecipeSpec. Values and options for all mortar components are retrieved from the database and displayed on this section of the Properties palette. The final three controls under Mortar (Left joint type, Right joint type, and Hatch mortar), are specified in the subcomponent's RecipeSpec, and their values can be retrieved by the subcomponent's Recipe function.
Step 4: The Recipe Implementation then does whatever it needs to in order to create the component. It has access to the size data in the database, the data in the RecipeSpec, and user input provided through the Properties palette. It also has access to a host of utility functions that can help create and place the component.
The layering and hatch properties for the component come from the <Data> section of the ReceipeSpec. Specific options for the Jig to use come from the <Options> section of the RecipeSpec.
Component Databases
A detail component database contains a size table for each available component and several related tables that support the overall structure of the Microsoft® Access database. A component database has references to external files, such as Recipe Specifications and preview image files. For this reason, it is suggested that the database and all of its external references be located in the same tree structure of the file system. For example:
0\&RQWHQW 0\&RPSRQHQW'EPGE 0DMRU&RPSRQHQW*URXS
[PO
GZJ
SQJ HWF VXSSRUWLQJ WKLV JURXS RI FRPSRQHQWV 0DMRU&RPSRQHQW*URXS
[PO
GZJ
SQJ HWF VXSSRUWLQJ WKLV JURXS RI FRPSRQHQWV
2040 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
Such a structure makes installing or moving the content a much easier task because all of the external content can use relative paths from the main database.
Database Schema
Several tables must be present in order for the Recipe system to function correctly. When creating a new database, you should start with either the standard database (AecDtlComponents.mdb) or with the empty template database (AecDtlComponents-Template.mdb).
Fingerprint Table
This table uniquely identifies a component (or keynote) database with a Global Unique IDentifier (GUID). It also provides information that can be displayed in the user interface. All detail components placed in a drawing, and all detail component tools used in Tool palettes record this database GUID. If your database changes location in the directory structure, the tools and components can still find the database using the unique GUID.
The Type field should contain either the string "Component" or "Keynote" depending on which type of database you are creating.
To obtain a GUID for your database, simply delete the existing GUID from the database you are using as a template, and a new GUID will be generated automatically.
Groups Table
The Groups table defines the hierarchical organization of components within the database. This hierarchy determines the order in which component groups are displayed in the tree view of the Detail Component Manager dialog box. To set up this table, you simply need to make a Group entry for each collection of like components, and then, for each Group, define its Parent, which is either another Group or the root node (\ - *). The following fields apply to each row in the table:
ID A unique number within the given table that identifies the particular row in the table used to create a component. Once created, this number should never change. Components that have already been placed in the drawing are stamped with this ID and must be able to consistently reference this row in the database.
Parent The group that is the parent of the group identified in the Group field.
Group The text string used to display the name of this group.
PathKey An entry from the DirKeys table (described later in this section). DirKeys tell the system where to find the files external to the database for this given component.
SearchKey A comma-delimited list of keywords used by the Detail Component Manager to search for components. When a keyword is specified for a group, any component within that group is considered a match for a search on that keyword.
MODIFIED A Boolean flag indicating whether this row has been changed since it was originally created. If the user modifies the row using the Detail Component Manager dialog box, this field is marked so that future versions of the database can merge in the changes. The notion of "modified" is relative to the version of the database. For instance, if you are copying an existing database and changing all the values, it would be considered the first version of the new database, and all MODIFIED fields should be set to FALSE.
PICTURE This column allows you to specify a unique picture when this Group node is selected in the Detail Component Manager. It is recommended that you use an image file of type PNG. The location of the image file is usually specified by appending the filename to the path assigned to the DirKey for this Group.
Components Table
The Components table is the main "map" of how all the information about a given component is tied together. The following fields apply to each row in the table:
ID A unique number within this table that identifies the particular component within this database. Once created, this number should never change. Components that have already been placed in the drawing are stamped with this ID and must be able to consistently reference this row in the database.
GroupName The parent Group of this component. This establishes the place of the component in the overall hierarchy of components.
Component Databases | 2041
Name The text string used for display purposes in the Detail Component Manager and on the Properties palette.
TableName The name of the size table for this component (Component Size Tables are described in the following section).
Keynote This value references an entry in a keynotes database. This is the default keynote to be used for all sizes of this component, but it can be overridden if a size-specific keynote is defined in the size table.
SubComponentKey This value identifies the component as a valid subcomponent for the context specified. For example, the Recipes for Brick and CMU allow for a subcomponent of mortar. The Recipe system will search for all components in the database that identify themselves as being valid subcomponents for mortar.
RecipeSpec This value specifies the XML file to use as the RecipeSpec for this component. The RecipeSpec has instructions for how to actually create and place the component in the drawing. The RecipeSpec is found by searching in the directory specified by the PathKey for the Group in which this component resides. For more information, see the subsequent section on Recipe Specifications.
SearchKey A comma-delimited list of keywords used by the Detail Component Manager to search for components.
Units This value specifies the unit of measure for the size table for this component.
MODIFIED A Boolean flag indicating whether this row has been changed since it was originally created. If the user modifies the row using the Detail Component Manager, this field is marked so that future versions of the database can merge in the changes. The notion of "modified" is relative to the version of the database. For instance, if you are copying an existing database and changing all the values, it would be considered the first version of the new database, and all MODIFIED fields should be set to FALSE.
PICTURE This column allows you to specify a unique picture to display when this particular row is selected in the Detail Component Manager. If the field is left blank, then the picture specified at the Component level is used. If no picture is specified in the Components table, the picture specified for the component's Group is used. It is recommended that you use an image file of type PNG.
Component Size Tables
For each component in the database, there should be a corresponding size table. A size table can be named anything you desire, but must include the following columns:
Description A textual description of the item, which is used as a display string in the Properties palette.
ID A unique number within the given table that identifies the particular row in the table used to create a component. Once created, this number should never change. Components that have already been placed in the drawing are stamped with this ID and must be able to consistently reference this row in the database.
MODIFIED A Boolean flag indicating whether this row has been changed since it was originally created. If the user modifies the row using the Detail Component Manager, this field is marked so that future versions of the database can merge in the changes. The notion of "modified" is relative to the version of the database. For instance, if you are copying an existing database and changing all the values, it would be considered the first version of the new database, and all MODIFIED fields should be set to FALSE.
PICTURE This column allows you to specify a unique picture to display when this particular row is selected in the Detail Component Manager. If the field is left blank, then the picture specified at the Component level is used. If no picture is specified in the row of a given size table, the picture specified for the Component in general is used. It recommended that you use an image file of type PNG. The location of the image file is usually specified by appending the filename to the path assigned to the DirKey for this component's Group. If the component is created by doing a simple Block insertion, you can have the preview image created dynamically by drawing the referenced block. For these types of components, set the Picture value to _blockthumbnail.
Keynote This value references an entry in a Keynotes database. As with the PICTURE column, if no value is specified here at the Size level, the one specified at the Component level is used.
2042 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
Units Table This table defines the units of measure available to assign to individual component size tables. It currently includes only inches and millimeters. However, centimeters, meters, and feet should also work. In the Components table, each entry must specify the unit in which the assigned size table is defined.
DirKeys Table This table defines directory keys, which are shortcut aliases to use in identifying the directory structure of the user's file system. Typically, there is one directory for each major division in your component hierarchy. You can match the component hierarchy in the database with the external files stored on the file system. DirKeys are referenced in the PathKey field of the Groups table and from the XML RecipeSpec files. They are intended to allow you to easily reorganize the internal hierarchy, the external hierarchy, or both.
ColumnDisplay Table Column names used in component size tables cannot be localized in other languages because these names are referenced programmatically. However, these column names also need to appear in the user interface. The ColumnDisplay table serves as a lookup for user interface components, so that user-friendly, localized names for the columns can be displayed. GlobalName This is the fixed name of the column in a given component size table. It is the lookup key used to find the local name. LocalName This is the translated, user-friendly display string to use for a column of this global name. TableId If left blank, then any column with the given GlobalName uses the LocalName for display purposes. In some cases, however, the same column name may have two different translations depending on its context. Specify a size table if the translation only applies to a specific context. Hidden Some columns, such as ID and MODIFIED, are not intended to be seen by the user in the Detail Component Manager. These can be hidden by checking this box. Note, however, that this only applies when the database is marked as read-only. A database that is being edited from the Detail Component Manager must show all columns so that a valid row can be entered. Modified A Boolean flag indicating whether this row has been changed since it was originally created.
Hatches Table This table defines a set of hatch aliases. Individual components that create hatches can reference an alias instead of specifying the pattern, scale, and angle directly. This allows you to standardize the look of certain materials across the entire database. For instance, you can have all components that are made of concrete use the "concrete" alias. If you want to change the look of all concrete components, simply edit the entry in the Hatches table to change the look of any component that references that alias.
NOTE For a description of the database schema for keynotes, see "Keynote Database Schema" on page 1878.
Recipe Specifications
A Recipe Specification (RecipeSpec) is an XML file that describes which views (section, elevation, and so on) are available for a given detail component and how those views are to be created and placed within the drawing. Here is a simple example of a RecipeSpec.
Recipe Specifications | 2043
"[PO YHUVLRQ HQFRGLQJ 87)"! $HF5HFLSH6SHF GHIDXOW8QLW LQ!
5HFLSH LG6WU VLGH! /DEHO!6LGH/DEHO! ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF'WO$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!$HF'WO5FS&ROXPQ&DS&&6LGH5FS)XQF! 2EMHFW$5;! ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 'DWD! ,WHP LG6WU EORFN! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU UHI OD\HU.H\!7+,1/D\HU! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU ERXQGDU\! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU KROHV! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU KLGGHQ! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU UHI OD\HU.H\!),1(/D\HU! /LQHW\SH!+,''(1/LQHW\SH! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! ,WHP! 'DWD!
5HFLSH!
5HFLSH LG6WU HQG! /DEHO!(QG/DEHO! ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF'WO$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!$HF'WO5FS&ROXPQ&DS&&(QG5FS)XQF! 2EMHFW$5;! ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 'DWD! ,WHP LG6WU EORFN! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU UHI OD\HU.H\!7+,1/D\HU! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU ERXQGDU\! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU KROHV! ,WHP! 'DWD!
5HFLSH! $HF5HFLSH6SHF!
A RecipeSpec is composed of one or more Recipes. Each Recipe is responsible for creating a single view of the component. In the example above, the first Recipe creates a side view of the drawing, and the second creates an end view. When the component is inserted in a drawing, the user-configurable View setting on the Properties palette determines which recipe is used.
Each Recipe contains the following four major sections:
Implementation: This section identifies the function to call and includes information specific to the particular language in which it is implemented. In short, it specifies how to call the Recipe function (RcpFunc).
Controls: This section defines controls that will be added to the Properties palette. The control can be defined directly here, or it can reference a globally defined control in the <ControlDefs> section that is part of the overall RecipeSpec.
Data: This section has customization data that the Recipe function can retrieve to help control how the component is drawn, such as layer and hatch pattern information.
Options: This section specifies options for the Jig or JigEnt that is used to place the component.
2044 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
In short, the <Data> and <Controls> sections help define what the basic component looks like, and the <Options> section helps define how the component is placed. In many cases, you will not need an <Options> section, because the default behavior of the Jig is sufficient. Each of these sections is described in more detail further on in this section.
Id Strings
Everything in the RecipeSpec that needs to be identifiable programmatically has an idStr attribute. The idStr value should never change and should be unique within the file (or at least within a given element type). The Rcp function will be expecting ID strings with certain values, so when writing a RecipeSpec, you need to know the implied contract from the Rcp function.
NOTE One way to find out the implied contract of the Rcp function is to turn on logging. For more information, see "Recipe Logging" on page 2060.
Display Strings
Elements with the tag <Label> or <Description> are intended to be translated. These will be displayed in the Properties palette and other user interface constructs, but will never be used to refer to anything and will never be referenced from the code (that is the job of the idStr).
References
Within the Recipe Spec, the value of an item appears between the element tags. It is taken as a literal value unless the ref attribute is specified. In this case, the value between the element tags is considered a lookup value and is used to retrieve the actual value.
ref [Optional]
Specifies that the value between the element tags is to be used as a lookup key. It can have one of the following values:
layerKey
(Autodesk® Architectural Desktop LayerKey)
dbTable
(Column in the table from component database)
control
(idStr of a <Control>)
NOTE The layerKey reference type is only valid within the element <Layer>.
The dbTable reference will use the value as the column name within the size table for the current component. Consider the following two examples.
'DWD! ,WHP LG6WU EORFN! $FDG%ORFN3URSV! %ORFN1DPH GZJ/LE GZJV$HF'WO/LEB%ORFN7HVWGZJ!-LPER%ORFN1DPH! 6FDOH!6FDOH! $FDG%ORFN3URSV! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU!'225/D\HU! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! ,WHP!
'DWD!
In the first case, the <Scale> and <Layer> values have been specified literally. This component, regardless of what row was selected in the database, will have a scale factor of 6.0. Likewise, regardless of what Layer Key style is current within Architectural Desktop, this component will go on the DOOR layer (not the layer assigned to the LayerKey "DOOR").
Recipe Specifications | 2045
'DWD! ,WHP LG6WU EORFN! $FDG%ORFN3URSV! %ORFN1DPH GZJ/LE GZJV$HF'WO/LEB%ORFN7HVWGZJ!-LPER%ORFN1DPH! 6FDOH UHI GE7DEOH!6&$/(6FDOH! $FDG%ORFN3URSV! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU UHI OD\HU.H\!'225/D\HU! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! ,WHP!
'DWD! In this example, references were used to look up the values dynamically. The <Scale> will be set to the value in the SCALE column of the current row in the component's size table. Likewise, the reference "DOOR" is the Layer Key to use to look up the Layer, not the actual Layer name itself. There is also a reference of type "control," which lets you use the idStr of a control defined within the Recipe. The value of that control is then used as the actual value of the Element.
Units
Each Recipe Spec has a default unit that applies to the entire XML file. Any unit-dependent value that appears within the XML file is automatically converted from the default unit to the current drawing unit when the value is retrieved from XML.
To specify the default unit, use the following syntax in the root node of the RecipeSpec.
"[PO YHUVLRQ HQFRGLQJ 87)"! $HF5HFLSH6SHF GHIDXOW8QLW PP!
5HFLSH LG6WU VHFWLRQ! « RPLWWHG «!
5HFLSH!
$HF5HFLSH6SHF! The defaultUnit attribute must be one of the values: in, ft, mm, cm, dm, or m. If no value is speciifed, "in" is used by default.
In some cases, a simple hard conversion from Metric to Imperial (or vice versa) is not good enough. For instance, the <GapSpacing> between paver bricks should be a logical distance for each measurement system instead of an arbitrary distance created by a hard conversion. You can specify a unit-specific element by including the "unit" attribute, as in the following example.
'DWD! ,WHP LG6WU EORFN! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU UHI OD\HU.H\!7+,1/D\HU! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU KHDG! 3DUDPV! 2YHUKDQJ XQLW LQ!2YHUKDQJ! 2YHUKDQJ XQLW PP!2YHUKDQJ! 'HSWK XQLW LQ!'HSWK! 'HSWK XQLW PP!'HSWK! 3DUDPV! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU WLS! 3DUDPV! 'HSWK XQLW LQ!'HSWK! 'HSWK XQLW PP!'HSWK! 3DUDPV! ,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU VKDIW! ,WHP LG6WU KLGGHQ! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /LQHW\SH!+,''(1/LQHW\SH! RYHUULGH WKH /LQHW\SH IRU KLGGHQ FRPSRQHQWV ! $FDG(QWLW\3URSV! ,WHP!
'DWD! In this case, different values are given depending upon whether the current drawing is Imperial or Metric.
2046 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
NOTE if you have unit-specific values, you must include an element for both Imperial and Metric. You cannot include two entries from the same unit system (for example, "mm" and "cm"). A hard conversion will be done for any units specified within the same unit system.
<Implementation> Section
The Implementation section can look like any of the following examples (<ObjectARX>, <VBA>, and <ManagedDotNet>):
<ObjectARX>
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF'WO$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!$HF'WO5FS&ROXPQ&DS&&6LGH5FS)XQF! 2EMHFW$5;!
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
Where...
Is...
AppName
the logical appname that appears in the Registry for an ObjectARX application.
<RcpFunc>
the name of a Recipe function that is implemented within the ObjectARX module and is registered using the AecRcpBase framework object AecRcpFuncTable. The function signature should take no arguments and must return a value of type RcpStatus
<VBA>
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 9%$ SURMHFW1DPH 0-XQHDXELQ7HVW'WOB9%$GYE PDFUR1DPH 'UDZ5HFWDQJOH!
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
Where...
Is...
projectName
the pathname of the VBA project file that contains the macro. This can be a full pathname, a partial path relative to the location of the XML file, or it can use the "dirKey" attribute to specify a path from the DirKeys table in the component database.
macroName
The VBA macro name to call. This macro should take no arguments and returns no value. It needs to call the function aecDtlSetRcpReturnStatus()before returning.
<ManagedDotNet>
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 0DQDJHG'RW1HW PRGXOH1DPH 0-XQHDXELQ7HVW'WOB9%GOO IXQF5FS 'UDZ5HFWDQJOH!
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
Where...
Is...
moduleName
the DLL pathname where the function exists. This can be a full pathname, a partial path relative to the location of the XML file, or it can use the "dirKey" attribute to specify a path from the DirKeys table in the component database.
funcRcp
the name of a Recipe function that is implemented within the ObjectARX module and is registered usingn the AecRcpBase framework object AecRcpFuncTable. The function signature should take no arguments and must return a value of type RcpStatus
<Controls> Section
The Controls section contains a list of control definitions that will be added to the Properties palette, or prompted for on the command line. All controls must have an idStr attribute that the program can use to reference it. It must also have a <Label> element to display in the Properties palette. Optionally, controls can have a <Description> element to use as a "tip" string in the bottom of the Properties palette when this control has focus. If no <Description> element is present, the <Label> element will be used.
Recipe Specifications | 2047
Each specific type of control is listed below.
<ComboBox>
This type of control is used to present a list of choices. It is a simple single-selection list.
&RPER%R[ LG6WU KHDG! /DEHO!+HDG W\SH/DEHO! 'HVFULSWLRQ!+HDG W\SH WR XVH IRU EROW'HVFULSWLRQ! &RPER%R[9DOXH LG6WU EON+HDG+H[! /DEHO!+H[/DEHO! &RPER%R[9DOXH! &RPER%R[9DOXH LG6WU EON+HDG6T! /DEHO!6TXDUH/DEHO! &RPER%R[9DOXH! &RPER%R[9DOXH LG6WU EON+HDG5QG! /DEHO!5RXQG/DEHO! &RPER%R[9DOXH! 'HIDXOW!EON+HDG+H['HIDXOW!
&RPER%R[! A ComboBox has a list of <ComboBoxValue> nodes that simply specify an idStr used to uniquely identify that item in the list. Each <ComboBoxValue> must also have a <Label> element to display within the list.
If the <ComboBox> has a <Default> element, the listed idStr will be used as the default <ComboBoxValue>. If no <Default> element is present, the first <ComboBoxValue> will be used as the default.
<Default> [Optional]
The <ComboBoxValue> idStr to use as the default selection in the list.
<CheckBox>
This type of control is used for Boolean values.
&KHFN%R[ LG6WU GR6WDJJHU! /DEHO!6WDJJHU FROXPQV/DEHO! 'HIDXOW!'HIDXOW!
&KHFN%R[! It can have the following elements:
Element <Default> [Optional]
Description
The default Boolean value. It can be specified as any of the following values: "1", "0", "true", or "false.".
<EditBoxAngle>
This type of control corresponds to the AecEditBoxAngle class in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop and has the same basic options.
(GLW%R[$QJOH LG6WU VORSH! /DEHO!6ORSH DQJOH/DEHO! 'HIDXOW!'HIDXOW! 9DOLGDWLRQ!UDQJH9DOLGDWLRQ! 5DQJH/RZ!5DQJH/RZ! 5DQJH+LJK!5DQJH+LJK!
(GLW%R[$QJOH!
It can have the following elements:
Element <Default> [Optional] <Validation> [Optional]
<RangeLow> [Optional, except when validation="Range"] <RangeHigh> [Optional, except when validation="Range"]
Description
The default angle value. This value is specified in degrees:
Specifies what type of validation rule is used. Possible values are: "Any", "NoZero", or "Range". If not specified, "Any" is used by default.
The lower end of the range of allowable values.
The high end of the range of allowable values.
<EditBoxDistance>
2048 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
This type of control corresponds to the AecEditBoxDist class in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop and has the same basic options.
(GLW%R['LVWDQFH LG6WU URZ6SDFLQJ XQLW'HS WUXH! /DEHO!<$[LV/DEHO! 'HVFULSWLRQ!6SDFLQJ EHWZHHQ EROWV LQ < GLUHFWLRQ'HVFULSWLRQ! 'HIDXOW!'HIDXOW! 9DOLGDWLRQ!1R1HJ9DOLGDWLRQ!
(GLW%R['LVWDQFH!
It can have the following attributes:
Attribute unitDep [Optional]
Description
This attribute indicates whether the value of this control needs to be scaled to the current unit in the drawing. A value of "1" or "true" will cause the value to be scaled. A value of "0" or "false" will leave the value as specified
The <EditBoxDistance> control can have the following elements:
Element <Default> [Optional] <Validation> [Optional]
<RangeLow> [Optional, except when validation="Range"] <RangeHigh> [Optional, except when validation="Range"]
Description
The default distance value.
Specifies what type of validation rule is used. Possible values are: "Any", "NoNeg", "NoZero", or "Range". If not specified, "Any" is used by default.
The lower end of the range of allowable values.
The high end of the range of allowable values.
<EditBoxInt>
This type of control corresponds to the AecEditBoxDist class in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop (with precision set to "0") and has the same basic options.
(GLW%R[,QWHJHU LG6WU FROV! /DEHO!&ROXPQV/DEHO! 'HVFULSWLRQ!1XPEHU RI EROWV LQ < GLUHFWLRQ'HVFULSWLRQ! 'HIDXOW!'HIDXOW! 9DOLGDWLRQ!1R1HJ1R=HUR9DOLGDWLRQ!
(GLW%R[,QWHJHU! It can have the following elements:
Element <Default> [Optional] <Validation> [Optional]
<RangeLow> [Optional, except when validation="Range"] <RangeHigh> [Optional, except when validation="Range"]
Description
The default integer value.
Specifies what type of validation rule is used. Possible values are: "Any", "NoNeg", "NoZero", "NoNegNoZero", or "Range". If not specified, "Any" is used by default.
The lower end of the range of allowable values.
The high end of the range of allowable values.
<Picture>
A Picture control is used to display a static image in the Properties palette. It has a list of <PictureValue> elements that may be used to fill the Picture control under certain conditions.
Recipe Specifications | 2049
3LFWXUH LG6WU HQGBFRQGLWLRQVBLOOXVWUDWLRQ URZ+HLJKW ! /DEHO!(QG FRQGLWLRQV LOOXVWUDWLRQ/DEHO! 'HIDXOW!SODLQBSODLQ'HIDXOW! 9DULHV!SODLQBSODLQ9DULHV! 3LFWXUH9DOXH LG6WU UHJXODUBUHJXODU LG)LOH ,PDJHVFPXBUHJXODUBUHJXODUSQJ! 3DUHQW&RQWURO LG5HI OHIW(QG6W\OH LG6WU UHJXODU! 3DUHQW&RQWURO LG5HI ULJKW(QG6W\OH LG6WU UHJXODU! 3LFWXUH9DOXH! 3LFWXUH9DOXH LG6WU UHJXODUBSODLQ LG)LOH ,PDJHVFPXBUHJXODUBSODLQSQJ! 3DUHQW&RQWURO LG5HI OHIW(QG6W\OH LG6WU UHJXODU! 3DUHQW&RQWURO LG5HI ULJKW(QG6W\OH LG6WU SODLQ! 3LFWXUH9DOXH!
3LFWXUH!
A Picture control can have the following attributes:
Attribute rowHeight [Optional]
Description
The number of rows that this control should occupy in the Properties palette. The default value is 3.
A Picture control can have the following elements: Element <Default> [Optional] <Validation> [Optional]
Description
The idStr of the <PictureValue> to show by default.
The idStr of the <PictureValue> to show under a multiple selection condition in the Properties palette. If not specified, the <Default> is used.
Specifying Controls
When the same control is used by different Recipes within the same RecipeSpec, you can define them in the <ControlDefs> section and then reference them within the <Controls> section of a specific Recipe.
&RQWURO5HI LG5HI KHDG!
Simply use the idRef attribute to refer to the idStr of the Control that is defined in the <ControlDefs> section.
The following example shows a control defined at the <RecipeSpec> level that can be referenced from any <Recipe>. It also shows a control that is defined local to a specific <Recipe>.
"[PO YHUVLRQ HQFRGLQJ 87)"! $HF5HFLSH6SHF GHIDXOW8QLW LQ!
&RQWURO'HIV! &KHFN%R[ LG6WU KDWFK%ORFN! /DEHO!+DWFK EORFN/DEHO! 'HVFULSWLRQ!6SHFLILHV ZKHWKHU WR KDWFK WKH EORFN 'HVFULSWLRQ! 'HIDXOW!'HIDXOW! &KHFN%R[!
&RQWURO'HIV!
5HFLSH LG6WU VHFWLRQ! /DEHO!6HFWLRQ/DEHO! ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF'WO$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!&RQFUHWH8QLW&RUH6HFWLRQ5FS)XQF!
2EMHFW$5;! ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! &RQWUROV!
&RQWURO5HI LG5HI KDWFK%ORFN! &KHFN%R[ LG6WU KDWFK&RUHV!
/DEHO!*URXW ILOO FRUHV/DEHO! 'HVFULSWLRQ!6SHFLILHV ZKHWKHU WR KDWFK WKH FRUHV VROLG ZLWK JURXW'HVFULSWLRQ! 'HIDXOW!'HIDXOW! &KHFN%R[! &RQWUROV!
2050 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
<Data> Section
This section has customization data that is used by the Rcp function. This includes things like simple Layer/Color/Linetype properties, hatch pattern information, spacing parameters, and so on. It is the Rcp function's responsibility to look back to this section and find any data that may be relevant. There is an implicit contract between the Rcp function and the RecipeSpec. The Rcp function can decide what is allowed to be in the <Data> section, but it will usually contain a set of commonly seen elements. You can put virtually anything in the <Data> section, but if the Rcp function is not expecting it, it will be ignored. The data within this section is divided into <Item> sections. Each Item section can contain virtually anything that the Recipe dictates. An Item section usually defines the data for a portion of the overall component, such as "boundary", "infill", and "hidden". The following standard types of information appear regularly within an Item section:
<AcadEntityProps>
<AcadBlockProps>
<AcadMInsertProps>
<AcadHatchProps>
<Params>
These standard information elements are described individually in the following sections. <AcadEntityProps> This Element specifies the Layer/Color/Linetype properties of an entity. All the items are optional and are only used if specifically listed. If they are not listed, the Rcp function should use either ByBlock or ByLayer (or whatever the appropriate setting is) as the default. Here are four examples:
$FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU UHI OD\HU.H\!),1(/D\HU! /LQHW\SH!+,''(1/LQHW\SH!
$FDG(QWLW\3URSV!
$FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU!-LPER/D\HU! &RORU,QGH[!&RORU,QGH[! /LQHW\SH!'$6+('/LQHW\SH! /LQHW\SH6FDOH!/LQHW\SH6FDOH! /LQHZHLJKW!/LQHZHLJKW!
$FDG(QWLW\3URSV!
$FDG(QWLW\3URSV! /D\HU!-LPER/D\HU! &RORU! 5HG!5HG! *UHHQ!*UHHQ! %OXH!%OXH! &RORU! /LQHW\SH!'$6+('/LQHW\SH!
$FDG(QWLW\3URSV! The following Elements can be specified within <AcadEntityProps>:
<Layer> [Optional]
<ColorIndex> [Optional]
<Color> [Optional]
<Linetype> [Optional]
<LinetypeScale> [Optional]
<Lineweight> [Optional]
Recipe Specifications | 2051
NOTE Either <Color> or <ColorIndex> can appear, but not both. If <Color> is used, it should have <Red>, <Green>, and <Blue> sub-elements, as in the example above.
<AcadBlockProps>
This Element specifies the properties of a block reference. Here are a few examples:
$FDG%ORFN3URSV! %ORFN1DPH GZJ/LE GZJV$HF'WO/LEB%ORFN7HVWGZJ UHPDS/D\HUV WUXH!-LPER%ORFN1DPH! 6FDOH; UHI GE7DEOH!6&$/(B;6FDOH;! 6FDOH< UHI GE7DEOH!6&$/(B<6FDOH<! 6FDOH= UHI GE7DEOH!6&$/(B=6FDOH=!
$FDG%ORFN3URSV!
$FDG%ORFN3URSV! %ORFN1DPH GZJ/LE GZJV$HF'WO/LEB%ORFN7HVWGZJ UHPDS/D\HUV WUXH!-LPER%ORFN1DPH! 6FDOH!6FDOH! 7KLV RQH XVHV XQLIRUP VFDOH!
$FDG%ORFN3URSV!
$FDG%ORFN3URSV! %ORFN1DPH GZJ/LE GZJV$HF'WO/LEB7UHQFK'UDLQVGZJ UHPDS/D\HUV WUXH UHI GE7DEOH!5B%/2&.%ORFN1DPH!
$FDG%ORFN3URSV! The following Elements can be specified within <AcadBlockProps>:
<BlockName>
<Scale> [Optional]
<ScaleX> [Optional]
<ScaleY> [Optional]
<ScaleZ> [Optional]
<Rotation> [Optional]
The <BlockName> element tells the name of the block definition to use and can include the following attributes providing instructions on how to load the block if it is not found in the current drawing:
Attribute dwgLib [Optional] dirKey [Optional] remapLayers [Optional]
ref [Optional]
Description
The pathname of the library DWG file where the block is defined. If a relative path is specified, it is relative to the XML RecipeSpec's location.
A directory key to look up in the detail component database. The dwgLib attribute value is then appended to the dirKey value to form the full pathname.
A Boolean value specifying whether the layers for entities within the block are to be searched for LayerKeys. If a LayerKey is found as the value of the Layer, the Layer is remapped to that LayerKey. This value should only be specified as true if you know for certain that there are LayerKeys defined within the block.
If specified, the block name is a lookup value to find the real block name.
If <Scale> is used, it is a uniform scale for each axis of the block reference.
<AcadMInsertProps>
This element specifies the additional values that an MInsert can have above and beyond a Block Reference. Anything common to both MInserts and Block References will thus appear in the <AcadBlockProps> section.
2052 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
$FDG0,QVHUW3URSV! 5RZV!5RZV! 5RZ6SDFLQJ!5RZ6SDFLQJ! &ROXPQV!&ROXPQV! &ROXPQ6SDFLQJ!&ROXPQ6SDFLQJ!
$FDG0,QVHUW3URSV!
$FDG0,QVHUW3URSV! 5RZV UHI GE7DEOH!52:65RZV! 5RZ6SDFLQJ!5RZ6SDFLQJ! &ROXPQV UHI GE7DEOH!&2/8016&ROXPQV! &ROXPQ6SDFLQJ!&ROXPQ6SDFLQJ!
$FDG0,QVHUW3URSV! The following Elements can be specified within <AcadMInsertProps>:
<Scale> [Optional]
<Rows> [Optional]
<RowSpacing> [Optional]
<Columns> [Optional]
<ColumnSpacing> [Optional]
<AcadHatchProps>
This Element specifies the properties of a hatch. Here are a few examples:
$FDG+DWFK3URSV! +DWFK$OLDV!EULFN+DWFK$OLDV!
$FDG+DWFK3URSV!
$FDG+DWFK3URSV! +DWFK$OLDV UHI GE7DEOH!3$7B$/,$6+DWFK$OLDV!
$FDG+DWFK3URSV!
$FDG+DWFK3URSV! 3DWWHUQ1DPH!(VFKHU3DWWHUQ1DPH! 3DWWHUQ6FDOH!3DWWHUQ6FDOH! 3DWWHUQ$QJOH!3DWWHUQ$QJOH!
$FDG+DWFK3URSV! The following Elements can be specified within < AcadHatchProps >:
Element <HatchAlias> [Optional]
<PatternType> [Optional] <PatternName> [Optional] <PatternScale> [Optional] <PatternMultiplier> [Optional] <PatternAngle> [Optional] <PatternDouble> [Optional] <PatternSpace> [Optional]
Description
The name of an Alias from the Detail Component database's Hatches table. This table is used so that you can centrally define the Pattern, Scale, and Angle for representative materials used throughout the database. Most RecipeSpecs will use a Hatch Alias to define all the parameters of the Hatch. However, you can specify these values directly by using the other elements.
Possible values are: "PreDefined" (the default), "User", or "Custom".
If the <PatternName> specified (or indirectly referenced from <HatchAlias>) does not exist, the pattern "ANSI31" is used.
<Params>
This Element specifies the parameters specific to this particular Recipe. These are typically values that the Recipe needs, but that are not hardwired into the code, and thus are customizable. Here are a few examples:
Recipe Specifications | 2053
,WHP LG6WU ERXQGDU\! 3DUDPV! 7RQJXH!7RQJXH! *URRYH6SDFLQJ!*URRYH6SDFLQJ! 3DUDPV!
,WHP! ,WHP LG6WU ERXQGDU\!
3DUDPV! &KDPIHU!&KDPIHU!
3DUDPV! ,WHP! The Element names are defined by the Rcp function itself and must be known in advance of editing them in the Recipe Spec. NOTE One way to find out the implied contract of the Rcp function is to turn on logging. For more information, see "Recipe Logging" on page 2060.
<Options> Section This section provides customization data that is used by the placement phase (Jig) of the Rcp function. In most cases, Recipe functions divide their labor into two phases:
1 Creation of the component 2 Placement of the component The job of placing the component is usually handled by a standard Jig that may be controlled by elements specified in the <Options> section. You must, of course, have advanced knowledge of which Jig and JigEnt are used by a Recipe function in order to take advantage of this. The example below is from the Brick Pavers component group. It uses the LinearArrayJig to repeat a row of blocks at a specified spacing.
2054 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
"[PO YHUVLRQ HQFRGLQJ 87)"! $HF5HFLSH6SHF GHIDXOW8QLW LQ!
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
5HFLSH!
$HF5HFLSH6SHF!
In the <Options> section, it tells the JigEnt to put a ¼" spacing between each paver, and it changes the prompt string for one of the prompts issued by the Jig.
For more information about which options are available for specific Jigs and JigEnts, see "Jigs and JigEnts" on page 2055.
Jigs and JigEnts
A "Jig" is a programming construct that defines how the user adds objects to the drawing. You can think of it as an "Add" command that gives visual feedback as you are specifying what the object looks like. For instance, the simple Arc Jig in AutoCAD dynamically sketches out the potential arc while you input various values.
A "JigEnt" is the object used to draw the visual feedback. In AutoCAD and Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, this is usually the same type of object that is being created (for example, the Wall Jig would use a Wall object). In the Recipe framework, most components are not represented by an object type, but by a collection of AutoCAD primitive objects such as hatch, polyline, and block. In this case, a JigEnt is a temporary in-memory object that is used to draw during the lifetime of the Jig, but is then thrown away when the real objects are added to the drawing.
The Recipe framework uses a system that plugs specific JigEnts into common Jigs. This allows a single Jig that is responsible for linear components (that is, one that prompts for "Start point" and "Endpoint") to look completely different depending upon the JigEnt being used (for example, a row of bricks vs. a metal joist).
Although development of new Jigs and JigEnts is currently available only to ObjectARX programmers, many aspects of the existing Jigs and JigEnts can be controlled via lightweight customization techniques. In order to understand this, it is helpful to have an idea of how the existing Jigs and JigEnts are programmed.
Jigs and JigEnts | 2055
Hierarchy of Jigs
$HF(G-LJ5FS $HF(G-LJ&LUFOH $HF(G-LJ/LQH $HF(G-LJ/LQH%ORFN%DVHG $HF(G-LJ/LQHDU$UUD\ $HF(G-LJ6WUHWFK $HF(G-LJ/LQH2ULHQWHG $HF(G-LJ/LQH([WHQG $HF(G-LJ6XUIDFH $HF(G-LJ5HFWDQJOH $HF(G-LJ6WDPS
NOTE The level of indentation shows the inheritance. For example, if you want to know the behavior and options for AecEdJigLinearArray, you can see that it inherits all the behavior and options for AecEdJigLineBlockBased, AecEdJigLine, and AecEdJigRcp.
Hierarchy of JigEnts
$HF(G-LJ5FS $HF(G-LJ(QW&LUFOH $HF(G-LJ(QW/LQH $HF(G-LJ(QW/LQH%ORFN%DVHG $HF(G-LJ(QW%RRNHQGV $HF(G-LJ(QW/LQHDU$UUD\ $HF(G-LJ(QW6WUHWFK $HF(G-LJ(QW/LQH2ULHQWHG $HF(G-LJ(QW/LQH([WHQG $HF(G-LJ(QW6XUIDFH $HF(G-LJ(QW6XUIDFH+OLQHV $HF(G-LJ(QW0HDVXUH $HF(G-LJ(QW5HFWDQJOH
As you can see, Jigs and JigEnts correspond pretty closely at the upper levels. However, there are extra JigEnts that can re-use the same Jig. The ones listed here are only the common JigEnts. There are many specific JigEnts derived off of these. For example, there is a specific JigEnt for each type of wood and metal joist, all derived off AecEdJigEntLineExtend to get the majority of their behavior. No special Jig is needed for each of these, because they all ask for the same sequence of information. If all the internal programmed objects for detail components were listed, you would see many more JigEnts, but not many more Jigs.
Common Jigs
The common Jigs and JigEnts listed in the hierarchy above have options that can be specified in the <Options> section of the Recipe Spec, and in some cases, they have common Recipes that can be utilized without writing any new code.
Brief descriptions for some of the common Jigs are provided below, along with information on the <Options> or Recipe func that can be used with each one, if applicable.
Stamp Jig
The Stamp Jig is similar to the INSERT command in that it does a basic block insertion (with a few extra controls). Here is an example showing how the Options section is used to control the Jig's behavior.
2SWLRQV! -LJ! $OORZ6FDOLQJ!IDOVH$OORZ6FDOLQJ! $OORZ5RWDWLRQ!WUXH$OORZ5RWDWLRQ! $OORZ;)OLS!WUXH$OORZ;)OLS! $OORZ<)OLS!WUXH$OORZ<)OLS! $OORZ%DVH3W!WUXH$OORZ%DVH3W! -LJ!
2SWLRQV! In each case, the value listed is the default, which would be used if nothing was specified.
2056 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
The following table lists the options for Stamp Jigs
Option <AllowScaling> <AllowRotation> <AllowXFlip> <AllowYFlip> <AllowBasePt>
Comment
Boolean value specifying whether the common command line options of the Jig are valid options for this Recipe.
To use this Jig directly from a common recipe function, use the following section of RecipeSpec:
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF5FS%DVH$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!6WDPS5FS)XQF! 2EMHFW$5;!
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
Linear Array Jig
The Linear Array Jig puts multiple copies of a block reference in a line, oriented in either the X or Y direction, with a specified spacing between each instance. Here is an example showing how the Options section is used to control the Jig's behavior.
2SWLRQV! -LJ! ,V2ULHQWHG;!WUXH,V2ULHQWHG;! 3URPSW6WDUW!6WDUW SRLQW3URPSW6WDUW! 3URPSW(QG!(QG SRLQW3URPSW(QG! 3URPSW&RXQW!&RXQW3URPSW&RXQW! $OORZ;)OLS!WUXH$OORZ;)OLS! $OORZ<)OLS!WUXH$OORZ<)OLS! $OORZ&RXQW!WUXH$OORZ&RXQW! -LJ! -LJ(QW! ,V2ULHQWHG;!WUXH,V2ULHQWHG;! :LGWK!:LGWK! *DS6SDFLQJ!*DS6SDFLQJ! -LJ(QW!
2SWLRQV!
In each case, the value listed is the default and would be used if nothing was specified.
The following table lists the Jig options for Linear Array Jigs
Jig Option <IsOrientedX>
<PromptStart> <PromptEnd> <PromptCount> <AllowXFlip> <AllowYFlip> <AllowCount>
Comment Boolean value specifying whether items along the line are oriented in the X direction or the Y direction. Text string to use for the start point prompt. Text string to use for the endpoint prompt. Text string to use for the count prompt.
Boolean value specifying whether the common command line options of the Jig are valid options for this Recipe.
Common Jigs | 2057
The following table lists the JigEnt options for Linear Array Jigs
JigEnt Option <IsOrientedX> <Width>
<GapSpacing>
Comment
Boolean value specifying whether items along the line are oriented in the X direction or the Y direction.
Specifies the exact width of the Block Reference being arrayed. If you do not know this value and leave this element out, the extents of the block will be dynamically measured. If you know this value, you should specify it, because measuring the extents dynamically can sometimes introduce rounding errors that can affect the overall dimensions of the array.
The distance between each arrayed item. You can use a negative value to get items to overlap.
To use this Jig directly from a common recipe function, use the following section of Recipe Spec.
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF5FS%DVH$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!/LQHDU$UUD\5FS)XQF! 2EMHFW$5;!
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
When using this function, you can also specify an <RcpFunc> directive that will allow you to package all the individual blocks in the array into a single block reference. By default, this value is set to "false" and each item in the array will be its own block reference.
2SWLRQV! 5FS)XQF! 3DFNDJH$V%ORFN!WUXH3DFNDJH$V%ORFN! 5FS)XQF!
2SWLRQV!
Bookends Jig
The Bookends Jig is similar to the Linear Array Jig, but allows for a different block on each end as well as a block that is arrayed to fill the gap between the two ends. The "start" and "end" blocks are used once, and the "repeat" block is used however many times it needs to be in order to fill the space between. Here is an example usage:
2SWLRQV! -LJ! ,V2ULHQWHG;!WUXH,V2ULHQWHG;! 3URPSW6WDUW!6WDUW SRLQW3URPSW6WDUW! 3URPSW(QG!(QG SRLQW3URPSW(QG! $OORZ;)OLS!WUXH$OORZ;)OLS! $OORZ<)OLS!WUXH$OORZ<)OLS! -LJ! -LJ(QW! ,V2ULHQWHG;!WUXH,V2ULHQWHG;! :LGWK6WDUW!:LGWK6WDUW! :LGWK5HSHDW!:LGWK5HSHDW! :LGWK(QG!:LGWK(QG! *DS6SDFLQJ!*DS6SDFLQJ! -LJ(QW!
2SWLRQV!
In each case, the value listed is the default and would be used if nothing was specified.
The following table lists the Jig options for Bookends Jigs
Jig Option <IsOrientedX>
<PromptStart> <PromptEnd> <PromptCount>
Comment Boolean value specifying whether items along the line are oriented in the X direction or the Y direction. Text string to use for the start point prompt. Text string to use for the endpoint prompt. Text string to use for the count prompt.
2058 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
Jig Option <AllowXFlip> <AllowYFlip>
Comment
Boolean value specifying whether the common command line options of the Jig are valid options for this Recipe.
The following table lists the JigEnt options for Bookends Jigs
JigEnt Option <IsOrientedX> <WidthStart>
<WidthEnd> <WidthRepeat> <GapSpacing>
Comment
Boolean value specifying whether items along the line are oriented in the X direction or the Y direction.
Specifies the exact width of the Block Reference at the beginning of the array. If you do not know this value and leave this element out, the extents of the block will be dynamically measured. If you know this value, you should specify it, because measuring the extents dynamically can sometimes introduce rounding errors that can affect the overall dimensions of the array.
Same as above, but for the ending block of the array.
Same as above, but for the repeating block of the array
The distance between each arrayed item.
To use this Jig directly from a common recipe function, use the following section of RecipeSpec.
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF5FS%DVH$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!%RRNHQGV5FS)XQF! 2EMHFW$5;!
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
When using this function, you can also specify an <RcpFunc> directive that will allow you to package all the individual blocks in the array into a single block reference. By default, this value is set to "false" and each item in the array will be its own block reference.
2SWLRQV! 5FS)XQF! 3DFNDJH$V%ORFN!WUXH3DFNDJH$V%ORFN! 5FS)XQF!
2SWLRQV!
Surface Jig
This Jig creates a basic rectangular boundary of a given depth, where the user is asked for an arbitrary start and endpoint (similar to adding Walls in Autodesk® Architectural Desktop). Here is an example usage:
2SWLRQV! -LJ! 3URPSW6WDUW!6WDUW SRLQW3URPSW6WDUW! 3URPSW(QG!(QG SRLQW3URPSW(QG! $OORZ;)OLS!WUXH$OORZ;)OLS! $OORZ<)OLS!WUXH$OORZ<)OLS! -LJ!
2SWLRQV!
In each case, the value listed is the default and would be used if nothing was specified.
To use this Jig directly from a common recipe function, use the following section of RecipeSpec.
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ! 2EMHFW$5;! $SS1DPH!$HF5FS%DVH$SS1DPH! 5FS)XQF!6XUIDFH5FS)XQF! 2EMHFW$5;!
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ!
StampMInsert Jig
The StampMInsert Jig is the same as the Stamp Jig, except that it uses an MInsert instead of a simple Block Reference.
Common Jigs | 2059
SurfaceBound Jig The SurfaceBound Jig is the same as the Surface Jig, except that it keeps only the top three edges of the rectangle. It is used for components that are poured onto or bounded by another entity that provides the bottom edge of the rectangle. For an example, see Concrete Topping. SurfaceLtype Jig The SurfaceLType Jig is the same as the Surface Jig, except that it fills with a wide polyline of a given linetype, instead of a hatch. ApplyToLinework Jig The ApplyToLinework Jig is used when you simply need to "brand" existing linework geometry as a specific component. For example, you could draw a detail using basic AutoCAD commands and then use this Jig to apply the Xdata and keynote for a particular component in the database. It will move the selected geometry to a new layer, if specified, but will not create any geometry of its own.
Recipe Logging
Without knowing the implied contract of a Recipe function, it is hard to know (or debug) where all the values are supposed to come from. In some cases, there may be values for an existing Recipe that you could customize if you just knew they were there (and currently not specified). Recipe Logging is a mechanism that will print to the command line every piece of data that is being retrieved by the Recipe. It will give the source of the data (for example, the component database, the Recipe Section, the Properties palette prompt), and whether the value was found or not. Using this information, you can reverse-engineer what data is expected by the Recipe. The following is an example produced by running the 02/Brick Paver Recipe with Recipe Logging turned on.
2060 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
&RPPDQG GWOFRPSPDQDJHU
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWDEDVH
)LHOG :,'7+
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG 7UXH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWDEDVH
)LHOG /(1*7+
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG 7UXH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWDEDVH
)LHOG 7+,&.1(66
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG 7UXH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
ERXQGDU\
@3DUDPV
7DJ
&KDPIHU
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 3URPSW
)LHOG FRDUVH2XWOLQH
7\SH
ERRO
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 3URPSW
)LHOG GR+DWFK
7\SH
ERRO
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH 7UXH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG+DWFK3URSV
7DJ
+DWFK$OLDV
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH EULFN
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG+DWFK3URSV
7DJ
3DWWHUQ7\SH
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG+DWFK3URSV
7DJ
3DWWHUQ1DPH
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG+DWFK3URSV
7DJ
3DWWHUQ$QJOH
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
Recipe Logging | 2061
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG+DWFK3URSV
7DJ
6FDOH0XOWLSOLHU
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG+DWFK3URSV
7DJ
3DWWHUQ6FDOH
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/D\HU
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH $'HWO3DWW
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
&RORU,QGH[
7\SH
ORQJ
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/LQHW\SH
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/LQHW\SH6FDOH
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
LQILOO
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/LQHZHLJKW
7\SH
ORQJ
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
EORFN
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/D\HU
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH $'HWO0HGP
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
EORFN
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
&RORU,QGH[
7\SH
ORQJ
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
EORFN
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/LQHW\SH
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
2062 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
EORFN
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/LQHW\SH6FDOH
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 'DWD!
&RQWH[W ,WHP>#LG6WU
EORFN
@$FDG(QWLW\3URSV
7DJ
/LQHZHLJKW
7\SH
ORQJ
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ
7DJ
,V2ULHQWHG;
7\SH
ERRO
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ
7DJ
3URPSW6WDUW
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ
7DJ
3URPSW(QG
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ
7DJ
$OORZ;)OLS
7\SH
ERRO
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ
7DJ
$OORZ<)OLS
7\SH
ERRO
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ
7DJ
$OORZ&RXQW
7\SH
ERRO
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ
7DJ
3URPSW&RXQW
7\SH
VWU
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH 1XPEHU RI FRXUVHV
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ(QW
7DJ
,V2ULHQWHG;
7\SH
ERRO
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
Recipe Logging | 2063
&RQWH[W -LJ(QW
7DJ
:LGWK
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG )DOVH
5&3 /2* ! 6RXUFH 2SWLRQV!
&RQWH[W -LJ(QW
7DJ
*DS6SDFLQJ
7\SH
GRXEOH
5HTXLUHG )DOVH
)RXQG 7UXH
9DOXH
6WDUW SRLQW RU >;IOLS<IOLS&RXQW@ (QG SRLQW RU >;IOLS<IOLS&RXQW@ 2UWKR RQ! 6WDUW SRLQW RU >;IOLS<IOLS&RXQW@ To turn Recipe Logging on, use the REGEDIT program to change a value in the Win32 Registry. The entry can be found in:
+.(<B&855(17B86(5?6RIWZDUH?$XWRGHVN?$XWR&$'?5?$&$';;;;?3URILOHV?$UFKLWHFWXUDO 'HVNWRS?3UHIHUHQFHV?$HF5FS%DVH?5HFLSH/RJ Change this value to "1" to turn it on.
Change this value to "0" to turn it off.
Blocks and Block Libraries
Libraries of block content for detail components should be created and stored according to the following guidelines, each of which is discussed in more detail subsequently.
Block content should be drawn with the current style of geometry. (See "Using Optimal Geometry" on page 2064.) Blocks should have namespace prefixes. (See "Naming Blocks" on page 2065.) Base points for inserting blocks should be positioned logically. (See "Base Points for Blocks" on page 2065.) Similar blocks should be stored in the same DWG file. (See "Collecting Similar Blocks" on page 2065.) Properties of block entities should be set to ByBlock. (See "Block Properties" on page 2066.) All unnecessary objects should be removed from block library drawings. (See "Removing Unnecessary Objects" on
page 2066.)
Using Optimal Geometry
Many block libraries that were created in legacy versions of AutoCAD contain geometry that is non-optimal in that it can result in performance problems, incorrect snap points, or tolerance discrepancies that cause errors when Aec Modify tools or other AutoCAD editing commands are used. You should avoid using this old-style geometry when creating new blocks, and you should remove or replace it whenever you encounter it in existing block content. The following sections describe five main areas in which you should strive to use optimal geometry.
Polylines
Prior to AutoCAD Release 14, the polyline entity consisted of multiple vertex entities and was not stored in a compact form. You can identify these old-style polylines by running the LIST command, which identifies them as type POLYLINE. Any such entities should be recreated as new-style polylines by tracing over them manually with the Polyline tool. The LIST command identifies new-style polylines as LWPOLYLINE.
Hatch Patterns
Be sure to use actual hatch entities when creating blocks that require hatch patterns. Prior to AutoCAD Release 14, hatches were anonymous blocks with all of the entities comprising the pattern stored in the drawing. If you run the LIST command on an entity that appears to be a hatch, and the entity is identified as a BLOCK REFERENCE and has a name beginning with *X, then it is an old-style hatch. Remove and replace with a new, equivalent HATCH entity.
2064 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
NOTE In addition to the old-style hatch patterns described above, some blocks have been found to contain multiple individual line segments repeated so as to simulate an actual hatch. In such cases, the line segments should be erased and replaced with an appropriate hatch at the appropriate scale.
Unjoined Polylines
When the endpoints of line or arc segments that form a boundary coincide, it is vastly more efficient to represent the boundary by using a single polyline. For example, a rectangle made of four separate lines should be converted to a single polyline. To do this, use the following procedure:
1 Run the PEDIT command, and select one of the lines. 2 When prompted to turn the line into a polyline, enter y (for Yes). 3 Enter j (for Join), select the other three lines, and press ENTER. In some cases, the join will fail because the endpoints
are not coincident, even though they appear to be. If this occurs, use object snaps to carefully reposition the endpoints so that they do coincide.
Pixelized Line Segments
Some conversion programs create a literal translation of what was on the screen at the time of conversion. This can result in thousands of tiny line segments placed end-to-end, where there should be a single line segment. In such cases, you should trace over the entire course of the end-to-end segments to create a single segment, and then erase all the original pixelized line segments.
Imprecise Geometry
As is the case with unjoined polylines, any endpoints that appear to coincide should actually do so. Small tolerance discrepancies can cause other editing operations to fail. Make sure that geometry that meets visually also meets at a high degree of precision. One way to ensure coincidence is to turn on Nearest, Endpoint, and Midpoint object snap modes, and then adjust the geometry using its grip points.
Naming Blocks
The names of blocks containing detail component content should have a namespace prefix to avoid conflicts with other blocks. For example, all blocks in libraries provided with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop use "AecDtl_" as the namespace prefix. If you are creating your own blocks, you should use a unique prefix.
Base Points for Blocks
Each block should have a base point that is logically positioned for inserting the block in relation to other geometry in a drawing; that is, the base point location should allow the user to insert the block using an object snap on some other piece of geometry as an insertion point. If possible, the base point location should also facilitate repeated placement of the item. For example, a block representing a paver should not have the base point in the middle of the block, because you would not likely want the middle of the block inserted at any object snap on existing geometry. Likewise, a base point in the upper-left corner only makes sense if the item is to be placed under some other geometry. However, if the base point is at the lower-left corner, the user can snap to the ground plane, and repeated insertions are easy.
Collecting Similar Blocks
Similar or closely related block definitions should be collected in a single DWG file. For example, in the details block library supplied with Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, the block definitions for all the different sizes of nails are collected in a block library drawing file called AecDtlLib_Nails.dwg, and all block definitions detailing carpet accessories are in a file called AecDtlLib_CarpetAcc.dwg. As shown below, for each block definition, the drawing should include a
Naming Blocks | 2065
block reference inserted on a horizontal line to show how the block's base point is used to position the block in relation to other geometry. For each block reference, there should also be a text label containing the name of the block.
Setting up block library drawings this way makes it easy for the user to quickly survey the entire library. It also helps you in the process of cleaning up the drawing, which is explained in a subsequent section (see "Removing Unnecessary Objects" on page 2066).
Block Properties
In most cases, blocks should be defined to have their component entity properties set as follows: /D\HU &RORU %<%/2&. /LQHW\SH %<%/2&. /LQHW\SH 6FDOH /LQHZHLJKW %<%/2&.
To accomplish this after a block has been defined, right-click the block reference, and click Set Nested Objects to ByBlock.
Layer Keys
You can use a layer key to map specific entities within a block to a layer in the drawing into which the block is inserted. For example, the millwork blocks depicted earlier (see "Collecting Similar Blocks" on page 2065) have the hatch entity assigned to the layer "HATCH." If the Recipe Specification (XML file) that references this block library has the attribute "remapLayers" set to true, as shown below, then any layer that matches a layer key in the current drawing will be replaced with the layer that is assigned to that layer key. In the case of a drawing using the standard Autodesk® Architectural Desktop template file, in which the HATCH layer key is mapped to the AecDtl-Patt layer, any block library entities that were assigned to the HATCH layer will end up on the AecDtl-Patt layer when inserted into the drawing.
$FDG%ORFN3URSV! %ORFN1DPH GZJ/LE GZJV$HF'WO/LEB:RRG0LOOZRUNGZJ UHPDS/D\HUV ´WUXH´!$HF'WOBPLOOZRUN%ON%ORFN1DPH! 6FDOH!6FDOH!
$FDG%ORFN3URSV!
Removing Unnecessary Objects
Once you have ensured that a block library drawing conforms to all the previously explained guidelines, the final step is to remove all unnecessary objects (unused layers, text styles, block definitions, and so on) by performing the following procedure.
1 Use the ZOOM, EXTENTS command to display the extents of the current drawing. 2 Enter wblock (for Write Block). 3 In the Write Block dialog box, under Source, select Objects. 4 Under Base point, click the Pick point button, and then select a base point in the lower-left corner of the drawing
extents. 5 Under Objects, with Retain selected, click the Select Objects button, specify a crossing window over the entire
contents of the drawing, and then press ENTER.
2066 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
6 Under Destination, enter the name of the drawing to be created (for example, enter the name of the current drawing with a "2" appended), and click OK.
7 Close the drawing. 8 Using Windows Explorer, delete the original drawing. 9 Rename the new drawing by removing the "2" you appended.
The new drawing now contains only the entities you selected and any other entities directly or indirectly referenced by the selected entities. In other words, the drawing contains only the absolute minimum set of objects that it needs.
Removing Unnecessary Objects | 2067
2068 | Chapter 51 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components
52 Migrating Detail Component and
Keynote Databases
If you have modified one of the default keynote or detail component databases supplied with a previous release of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop, you can migrate your modifications to the corresponding database in the current release using the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration utility.
2069
Migrating Your Database Modifications
Autodesk® Architectural Desktop provides default Microsoft® Access databases for detail components and keynotes. If you have modified either of these databases in a previous release (or created your own databases using the same schema), you can migrate your modifications to the corresponding database in the current release using the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration utility. Accessed from the CAD Manager menu, this utility compares the modified database (the source) with its counterpart in the current release (the target) and updates the current database to reflect your modifications.
IMPORTANT Using the Database Migration utility to update an older database with data from a current-release database is not supported. The utility is designed only for migrating modifications in the other direction; that is, from the older database to the database in the current release.
The migration utility operates according to the following assumptions and rules:
Both the source and target databases must be of the same type (either Component or Keynote), as identified by the first record in their Fingerprint tables. (For more information on the tables and records included in these databases, see "Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components" on page 2037 and "Keynote Database Schema" on page 1878.)
If a table in the source database has no counterpart in the target database, the table and all its records are added to the target database.
Tables of the same type (as identified by their ID fields) are compared, and source records that differ from their counterparts in the target database (or have no counterparts) are processed as shown in the following matrix.
Corresponding target record exists No corresponding target record exists
Modified field in source record source record overwrites target record = true
source record added to target table
Modified field in source record source record is not migrated; target record source record added to target table
= false
is not changed
NOTE If you have added a detail component size table or keynote of your own in the previous release, and it happens to have the same table name or keynote key as a new table or keynote supplied in the current release, it will not be processed by the migration utility, because its ID will differ from its namesake in the current release. If this scenario seems likely in your case, it is recommended that you check to see if the name you assigned is present in the current release. If so , you should change the name of your table or keynote key before running the migration utility.
If a source database record has been modified using the Detail Component Manager or the Keynote Editor, its Modified field value is set to true automatically, and the record will overwrite the corresponding record in the target database, or be added to the target database if there is no corresponding record present.
If a source database record has been modified using Microsoft® Access directly, and the Modified field value was not set to true manually, the record will be added to the target database if there is no corresponding record present.
The migration utility processes only tables and records as described above; it does not migrate any associated XML or DWG content files, nor does it migrate default values specified for particular fields in tables. Preserving such information requires manually updating the target database.
NOTE If migrated records were created using Microsoft® Access directly (rather than through the Detail Component Manager), and they do not have a valid record ID (equal to or greater than 100000), it may result in a conflict with records in the target database.
Running the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration Utility
Use this procedure to migrate modifications from a detail component database or keynote database supplied with a previous release of Autodesk® Architectural Desktop to the corresponding database in the current release.
2070 | Chapter 52 Migrating Detail Component and Keynote Databases
NOTE Be sure to create a backup copy of the target database before running the migration utility. If the migration process is terminated before completion, the target database may not be usable.
1 On the Start menu (Windows), click Programs Autodesk Autodesk Architectural Desktop Detail Component - Keynote Database Migration Utility.
2 For Merge from, click
, select the modified detail component or keynote database (the source) you
want to migrate, and click Open.
3 For Merge into, click
, select the database to which you want to migrate your modifications (the
target), and click Open.
NOTE The target database selected in this step must be the same type (either detail component or keynote) as the source database selected in Step 2.
4 Click OK.
The utility compares the two specified databases and displays the results for each table processed, including which tables have been added and how many records have been modified or added for each table in the target database.
Running the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration Utility | 2071
2072 | Chapter 52 Migrating Detail Component and Keynote Databases
2073
2074
2076
Index
2D DWF 135, 139 publishing 139
2D elevation styles 1704, 17281730, 17321735 classifications 1734 creating 1729 design rules 17331734 display components 1730 adding 1730 removing 1730 display properties 1732 layer, color, and linetype 1735 notes and reference files 1735 subdivisions, display of 1704 See Also 2D section styles
2D elevations 476, 17021705, 1712, 1714, 17161720, 17221725, 17301733
3D body component of materials 1733 creating 1705, 1714 direction, reversing 1719 editing 1717 erased component 1732 globally updating 1725 hidden component 1732 horizontal 1716 hyperlinks, notes, and reference files 1724 linework 1717, 17221723 location 1723 material boundaries 1704, 1720 materials 476, 1704, 1730 styles, changing 1720 subdivisions 1703, 1712, 1718, 1732 surface hatch linework 1731 updating 1724 2D plan view materials 474475 2D section styles 16891691, 16951698 display properties 1698 classifications 1697 creating 1690 design rules 16961697
adding 1696 changing 1697 removing 1697 display components 1691 materials 1689, 1695 notes and reference files 1698 subdivisions 1689, 1695 2D sections 476, 492, 1660, 1663, 1665, 16731674, 1678 1681, 16841686, 1691, 1695 creating 1663, 1673 defined 1660 direction, reversing 1680 display components 1691 editing 1678 globally updating 1686 horizontal 1674 hyperlinks, notes and reference files 1685 linework 1678, 1684, 1695 location 1684 materials 476, 492 section lines 1665
styles, changing 1681 subdivision display 1679 updating 1685 See also 2D section styles 2D spaces 1550, 1554 3D body material components 475 3D DWF 135, 139 publishing 139 3D elevations 17021705, 1712, 1714, 1717, 1719, 1723
1724, 1730, 1732 creating 1705, 1714 direction, reversing 1719 editing 1717 hyperlinks, notes, and reference files 1724 location 1723 materials 1704, 1730 subdivisions 1703, 1712, 1719, 1732 updating 1724 3D extruded spaces. See extruded 3D spaces 3D freeform spaces 1544, 1547 3D model view materials 475 3D sections 16601661, 1663, 1665, 1673, 1678, 1680, 1684
1685, 1691 creating 1663, 1673 defined 1661 direction, reversing 1680 display components 1691 editing 1678 hyperlinks, notes, and reference files 1685 location 1684 section lines 1665 subdivision display 1680 updating 1685 3D solids, converting objects to 2030
A
addendums, alternates, and as-builts within projects 315 adding objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop 25 additive mass elements 579, 591 AEC content 115, 20102020, 2022
adding from Content Browser 2012 adding from DesignCenter 2013 adding to drawings 2012 AEC blocks 2015 Content Browser 2010 custom commands 2020 custom content 2014 DesignCenter 2011, 2022
content, modifying 2022 editing 2022 file locations 115 insert options 2015, 2018 insertion scale factor options 2015 masking blocks 2019 moving between Content Browser and
DesignCenter 2013 multi-view blocks 2017 overview 2010 predefined 2010
2077 | Index
preview graphics 2016 wizard 2014 AEC dimension chains 1775, 1779 AEC dimension styles 1775 distance 1779 extension line length 1779 height of openings display 1779 AEC dimension style wizard 1779 AEC dimension styles 17721779, 1781 AEC dimension style wizard 1773 AutoCAD dimension styles 1773, 1778 chain distance 1779 chain properties, changing 1775 changing 1772 creating 1774 dimension chain contents 1777 display components, changing 1775 extension lines 1779 new 1774 notes 1781 opening height 1779 selecting dimensioned objects 17761777 AEC dimension tools 1750, 1759 creating 1759 finding in palettes 1750 AEC dimensions 316, 17401743, 17451746, 17481751,
17581765, 17681772, 1777, 1781 adding dimensions from objects 1761 adding dimensions from points 1762 AEC dimension tools, creation with 1751 associative 1741, 1743, 17451746, 1748, 1751
2D sections 1748 AEC polygons 1748 AutoCAD linework 1746 creating 1751 curtain walls 1746 doors 1745 elevations 1748 external references 1748 grids 1745 mask blocks 1748 mass elements 1746 multi-view blocks 1748 objects (list) 1743 openings 1745 railings 1746 roof slabs 1746 roofs 1746 slabs 1746 spaces 1746 structural members 1746 walls 1743 window assemblies 1746 windows 1745 converting from AutoCAD dimensions 1758 copying properties of AEC dimensions to AutoCAD
dimensions 1759 creating 1751 detaching objects 1762 detaching objects (associative) 1762 dimension chains 17681769
moving 1768 resetting 1769 dimension options 1741 dimensions from associative points 1741
2078 | Index
dimensions from non-associative points 1741 dimensions from objects 1741 dimension texts 17681769 moving 1768 resetting 1769 extension lines 17681769 moving 1768 resetting 1769 external references 316 files 1772 global underlines for overrides 1771 hiding overline of overridden values 1772 hiding segments 1770 hyperlinks 1772 modifying 1760 multiple, with same style 1759 non-associative 17411742, 1751 creating 1751 notes 1772 options 1749 overriding dimension values 1770 overview 1740 preferences 1749 Q&A 1781 redrawing 1749 removing overrides from dimension values 1771 removing points 1762 removing points (associative and non-associative) 1764 removing points (associative) 1763 rescaling 1750 restoring points (associative) 1764 reversing direction 1765 selecting objects in style 1777 stairs 1746 superscript 1750 trailing zero suppression 1750 units 1750 AEC drawings, creating 2016 AEC Editor settings 114 AEC modify tools 14881498 array 1496 center 1498 crop 1495 divide 1491 extend 1490 merge 1494 obscure 1493 Reposition From 1497 shrinkwrap 1496 space evenly 1497 subtract 1492 trim 1488 trim to edge 1489 AEC objects 113, 115, 121, 394395, 412, 2034 adding a reference 2034 anchoring. See object anchors attaching to reference 2034 creating reference copies 2034 default display representations 113 default layer keys 395 display system 412 exploding 115, 121 layer keying 394 mask blocks. See mask blocks referencing 2034
See Also objects AEC polygon grips 940 AEC polygon styles 946, 951953, 955957
changing 946 classifications 957 creating 952 defined 951 display properties 953 edge justification 953 edge width 953 files 956 hatching 955 masking objects 953 notes 956 true color display 956 AEC polygon tools 937, 939 creating 939 finding in palettes 937 AEC polygons 754, 900, 936940, 946951, 955958 3D graphics system display 957 ambient light intensity 958 color, changing 955 components 936 creating 937938 creating polylines from 949 creating profiles from 949 curtain walls 936 defeating lighting and shading effects 957 dividing 948 editing 940 elevation, changing 950 global rendering material 958 holes 946 hyperlinks 951 inserting 754, 900
into curtain walls 754 into door assemblies 900 into window assemblies 900 intersections, creating from 947 layer, changing 955 linetype, changing 955 location 950 mask blocks 956 merging 946 multiple, with same style 939 notes 951 polylines, creating from 938 profiles, creating from 939 reference files 951 rendering exact colors 957 rotation, changing 950 straight line segments, creating from 937 subtracting one from another 946 trimming 948 true colors, hiding 956 vertices 949 adding 949 removing 949 AEC standards 327 AecDtlComponents.mdb 1846 AecPurgeLayerStyles command 409 AIA layer key style 394 AIA Long Format layer standard 402, 404 aligning UCS to faces 69 Always on Top, Content Browser option 99
anchors 977978, 10301031, 10781079, 1147, 1410, 1426 doors, changing position of 977978 multiple, with same style 1426 openings, changing position of 10781079 overview 1410 stair to landing 1147 tools, creating 1426 windows, changing position of 10301031 See Also object anchors, cell anchors, curve anchors, leader anchors, node anchors, volume anchors
annotation 293294, 1793, 1850, 18541857 block-based 18551856 editing 1856 configuring for keynoting 1857 fields 1793 project 293294 text-only 1854 text-with-leader 1854 tool 1850
annotation tool 1850 annotation tool properties 1850
annotation 1850 tool properties 1850
APJ project files 170, 315 deleted or corrupted 315
appearance of objects, setting 452 See Also styles
application status bar 23 arc constraints, spiral stairs 1107 arch mass elements 543, 555 archiving a sheet set 278 area evaluation. See space evaluations area group styles 1646
converting to zone styles 1646 area group templates 1650
converting to zone templates 1650 area group templates See zone templates area groups 1633
converting to zones 1633 area groups. See zones area groups. See zoning area name definitions. See list definitions area styles 1616
converting to space styles 1616 areas (ADT) 1561
converting to spaces 1561 areas (ADT). See spaces Array command 1496 array linework 1496 array profile-based object 1496 associative AEC dimensions 1741, 1743, 17451746, 1748
2D sections 1748 AEC polygons 1748 AutoCAD linework 1746 curtain walls 1746 doors 1745 elevations 1748 external references 1748 from objects 1741 from points 1741 grids 1745 mask blocks 1748 mass elements 1746 multi-view blocks 1748 objects (list) 1743
2079 | Index
openings 1745 railings 1746 roof slabs 1746 roofs 1746 slabs 1746 spaces 1746 stairs 1746 structural members 1746 walls 1743 window assemblies 1746 windows 1745 associative spaces 1544, 15461547, 1550, 15881589 2D 1550 3D freeform 1547 bounding object styles 1546 bounding objects 1544, 1547 changing geometry 1588 dividing 1588 extruded 3D 1550 generating 1550
from bounding objects 1550 from linework 1550 from object profiles 1550 merging 1589 updating 1588 attributes 1800 fields 1800 audit of non-AEC objects 2032 auditing 365 projects 365 AutoCAD 117118, 2032 exporting drawings to 117118 objects, identifying 2032 AutoCAD dimensions 1758 converting to AEC dimensions 1758 AutoCAD standards 328, 336 in ADT projects 336 AutoCAD tables 1801 fields 1801 Autodesk Architectural Desktop 1803 field types 1803 Autodesk DWF Viewer 135 publishing DWF 135 Autodesk Envision 130131 publishing drawings to 130131 data structure 131 Autodesk MapGuide 130131 publishing drawings to 130131 data structure 131 Autodesk VIZ Render 464 automatic synchronization 334
B
barrel vault mass elements 543 base boundary 1568 base height, wall 621 basepoints, project 315 beams 1336, 1343
creating 1343 tools 1336 See Also structural members block references, adding object tags 1925 block references, adding to 1925
2080 | Index
block-based annotation 18551856 creating 1855 editing 1856
blocks 223, 990, 1043, 1085, 16711672, 1713, 2015, 2017, 2019
AEC content 2015 door components 990 elevation marks 1713 inserting into constructs 223 masking 2019 multi-view 2017 opening components 1085 section marks 16711672 window components 1043 bolt components 1821 bookends-type components 1819 boundaries material. See material boundaries boundary filling components 1818 boundary offset type 1565 boundary offsets 1570, 1609 by style 1609 manual 1570 bounding object styles 1546 for spaces 1546 bounding objects 1547 for spaces 1547 box mass elements 544 braces 1338, 13481349 creating 13481349 tools 1338 See Also structural members break mark 1854, 1856 creating 1854 editing 1856 break mark tool properties 1852 BS1192 layer key style 394 BS1192 layer standard 402, 404405 building projects. See projects
C
calculation cut planes 1606 calculation formula 1623
spaces 1623 calculation modifier styles 16211624, 1637
attaching to zones 1637 calculation formula 1623 calculation type 1622 creating 1622 defined 1621 detaching from zones 1637 notes and reference files 1624 calculation modifiers 1606 adding 1606 removing 1606 calculation rules 1093, 1097, 1102, 1106 multi-landing stairs 1097 spiral stairs 1106 straight stairs 1093 u-shaped stairs 1102 calculation type 1622, 1637 spaces 1622 zones 1637
callout symbols 1884, 1910, 19121913 attributes 1912 blocks 1913 creating 1910 creating a callout tool 1913 fields 1910, 1912
callout tools 1885, 1892, 1913 creating 1913 properties 1892
callout views 148149, 240241 detail views 148, 240 section views 149, 241
callouts 18841885, 18871888, 1893, 1897, 1901, 1905 1907, 1909
model space views 19061907 deleting 1907 opening 1906
callout tools 1885 details 1884, 1893 elevations 1885, 1901 outside project 1909 placing in non-project drawing 1909 placing in project drawing 1887 projects 1885 properties 1888 referencing to model space views 1906 resolving fields 1907 sections 1885, 1897 standalone 1905 title marks 1885, 1893 callouts tools 1911 creating 1911 cameras 2028 position 2028 catalog libraries, tool. See tool catalog libraries catalog library 82, 86, 89 adding catalogs from registry 86 managing 82 opening a web page 89 catalog types 90 creating 90 catalogs 90 filtering 90 sorting 90 catalogs, tool. See tool catalogs categories, in tool catalogs 92 categories, project 152, 170, 207213 benefits of 209 changing 213 creating by dragging folders 210 creating in Project Navigator 209 default folder structure 170, 207 deleting 213 mixing types 208 overview 152 redirecting top-level 211212 subcategories 212 user-defined 208 ceiling grid tools 1468, 1471 creating 1471 finding in palettes 1468 ceiling grids 14691478 clipping boundaries, creating with 1471 clipping profiles, attaching 1476
creating 14691470 dynamically 1470 from layout grids 1469
dimensions, changing 1472 display, changing 1478 holes 1477 hyperlinks 1477 layout grid, creating from 1469 lines 14731476
adding 14731474 moving 14751476 removing 14741475 linework, creating from 1470 location 1478 masking 1476 modifying 1472 multiple, with same style 1471 notes 1477 reference files 1477 ceilings 1601 in space surfaces 1601 cell anchors 14221423 adding 1422 anchoring to different cells 1423 copying objects to all layout cells 1423 defined 1422 position of objects attached to, changing 1422 size of objects attached to, changing 1422 cell infills, curtain wall units 817, 826, 829 assigning 826 panels 829 removing 817, 829 cell infills, curtain walls 739, 749, 753754, 802 alignment of objects in cells 802 assigning 749 editing objects in cells 802 inserting objects 754 offset of objects in cells 802 orientation of objects in cells 802 panel 753 releasing anchored objects in cells 802 removing 739, 754 cell infills, door assemblies 885, 895, 898, 900, 933934 alignment of objects in cells 934 assigning 895 editing objects in cells 933 offset of objects in cells 934 orientation of objects in cells 934 panel 898 releasing anchored objects in cells 934 removing 885, 900 cell infills, window assemblies 885, 895, 898, 900, 933934 alignment of objects in cells 934 assigning 895 editing objects in cells 933 offset of objects in cells 934 orientation of objects in cells 934 panel 898 releasing anchored objects in cells 934 removing 885, 900 Center command 1498 center linework 1498 chamfering walls 637 circular mass elements 557
2081 | Index
classifications 434, 1611, 19901991, 19931997, 2006 changing 1997 creating 1993 definitions, adding 1995 displaying objects by 434 editing 1996 examples of 1991 in space style 1611 notes and reference files 1997 object types, specifying 1994 property set definitions, attaching 1995 schedules, including in 1991 troubleshooting 2006
cleanup circles in walls 653 cleanup group definitions, in Style Manager 452 cleanup priorities, walls 654 cleanup radius, changing 657 clipping profiles 1465, 1476
ceiling grids 1476 column grids 1465 CNC machining applications 2030 COGO points 124 importing 124 column grid tools, finding in palettes 1454 column grids 1455, 14571467, 1472, 1475 clipping profiles 1465 creating 1455, 14571458
dynamically 1458 from layout grid 1457 from linework 1457 dimensioning 1460 with AEC dimensions 1460 display, changing 1467 holes 14651466 hyperlinks 1466 labeling 14591460 extending lines 1460 layout grid, creating from 1457 lines 14611465, 1472, 1475 adding 14621463 changing 1461, 1472 moving 14641465, 1475 removing 14631464 removing from manual grids 1463 linework, creating from 1457 location 1467 masking 1465 modifying 1461 notes 1466 overall dimensions 1461 reference files 1466 columns 1340, 1352, 13541355, 1397 anchoring to grids 13541355 freestanding 1352 steel and concrete 1397 tools 1340 See Also structural members command line 313314 drawing management commands 313 new project environment, selecting 314 Project Browser 313 Project Navigator 313314 projects, refreshing 314 views, regenerating 314 command line in Autodesk Architectural Desktop 22
2082 | Index
commands, custom AEC 2020 communication center 24 components. See individual component names conceptual models 540
See Also mass models cone mass elements 545 configurations, display. See display configurations construction lines 1122, 1126, 14821483
creating 1483 creating from existing objects 1482 creating from linework 1482 multi-landing stairs, changing 1122 u-shaped stairs, changing 1126 constructs, project 147, 214216, 218219, 221229, 292 blocks, inserting 223 content of 216 creating 216, 228 deleting 226, 228 display configurations 292 divisions 214 dragging objects into 221 electronically transmitting 226 elements 227, 229
compared to 229 converting to 227 external references 222224 attaching 222 displaying 224 overlaying 223 interactions with project 228 legacy drawings, converting 214, 218219 levels 214 levels and divisions 228 levels, copying to 215, 218 names 228 opening and closing 221 overview 147 properties 225 referencing elements into 222 referencing elements into multiple 224 templates 215 views, compared to 214 when to start with 215 XML files 215 Content Browser 40, 50, 7880, 82, 84, 99, 102104, 177, 341342, 345, 2010 AEC content 2010 Always on Top option 99 catalog items 103 dragging 103 opening 103 command prompt, starting from 104 multiple windows 102 overview 78 project library 177, 345 rows, specifying number of 80 tool catalogs, opening 102 tool palettes 40 tools 50, 82, 84, 341342 adding from styles 84, 342 creating from styles 82, 341 user interface 79 window, keeping on screen 99 See also tool catalog libraries, tool catalogs, tool
packages, tool palettes
Content Browser library 157, 200, 344 activating for projects 200 for projects 157 project catalog, adding 344
context menus 19 contours 128
generating from LandXML 128 copying and assigning object styles 458 copying,projects 172 countable linear repeating pattern components 1819 Create AEC Content wizard 1500 creating objects with tools 44 Crop command 1495 curtain wall cells 736, 753755
cell assignments 755 filling with panels 753 infills 736, 754 objects, inserting 754 curtain wall components 762764 custom graphics 764 display 762 hatching 763 layer, color, and linetype 763 curtain wall dimensions 718 curtain wall frames 743, 756 assigning definitions 756 curtain wall grids 715, 721, 728735, 744745, 747749,
756758 cells 730732, 749
fixed numbers 731 fixed size 730 manually defining number and size 732 custom 721 divisions 728729, 734, 748 frame edges 757758 frames, adding 756 gables, excluding 733 mullions 744745, 747 nested grids 749 offset 735 polylines 734 steps, excluding 733 curtain wall grips, editing curtain walls using 783 curtain wall properties 767, 842 curtain wall styles 725728, 730, 735, 737742, 744745, 747749, 756, 758760, 765767, 782, 787788 assigning 748749, 758 definitions to elements 748 definitions to mullions 758 divisions to grids 748 infills to cells 749 assignments, removing 756 cell infills 739, 749 changing 787 creating 727 cut planes 765 defined 725 division definitions 735 elements of 727, 748 frames 740742 offsets 742 profiles 741742 grid cells 728, 730 infills 738, 767 alignment 738
offset 738 overriding 767 matching styles 788 modifying element definitions 782 mullions 744745, 747, 759760 assignments 759 offsets 747 profiles 745 removing definitions 747 removing from grid 760 width and depth 744 notes and reference files 766 overrides 766 overview 726 panel infills 737 curtain wall tools 724 curtain wall unit cells 815, 829830 cell assignments 830 filling with panels 829 infills 815, 829 curtain wall unit components 837839 custom graphics 839 display 837 hatching 838 layer, color, and linetype 838 curtain wall unit frames 821, 831 assigning definitions 831 curtain wall unit grids 803, 806, 809810, 812813, 821 823, 825826, 831833 cells 810, 812813, 826 fixed number 812 fixed size 810 manually defining number and size 813 custom 806 divisions 809 frame edges 832833 frames 831 mullions 821823, 825 offset 813 curtain wall unit grips 857 curtain wall unit styles 807810, 814826, 831, 833835, 840842, 859860 assigning 825826, 833 definitions to elements 825 definitions to mullions 833 infills to cells 826 assignments 831 cell infills 817, 826 changing 859 creating 808 cut planes 840 defined 807 division definitions 814 elements of 808, 825 frames 818820 defining 818 defining by profile 819 offsets 820 profiles 819 grid cells 809810 infills 816, 842 alignment 816 offset 816 overriding 842 matching styles 860
2083 | Index
mullions 821825, 834835 assignments 834 defining 821 defining by width and depth 822 offsets 824 profiles 823 removing definitions 825 removing from grid 835
notes and reference files 841 overrides 842 panel infills 815 curtain wall units 804, 811, 826, 836837, 842, 844, 848,
850851, 853854, 857, 859862, 900 alignment of anchored 862 auto-adjusting cells 811 base height 859 cell markers 842 components 836 creating 804 dimensions 860 display of 837 division overrides 853854 door assemblies, inserting into 900 editing 857 frame and mullion overrides 848 frame edges 850 hyperlinks 862 in-place editing 851 infill overrides 844 length 859 location 861 matching properties 860 merging cells 842 mitered corners 860 moving 857 mullion edges 850 nested grids 826 notes and reference files 862 offset 862 overrides, removing 857 window assemblies 900 curtain walls 716, 718722, 724, 731, 737, 749, 751, 761
762, 767, 771774, 776, 778, 781782, 785794, 796797, 802, 836, 842, 936 AEC polygon infills 936 alignment of objects in cells 802 anchored objects in cells 802 auto-adjusting cells 731 base height 785 cell and edge assignments 767, 842 cell markers 767 cells, merging 767 creating 716, 718, 722 from walls 722 curved 719720 curves, referencing 720 custom grids 721 dimensions 788 direction, reversing 787 display of 762 divisions, overriding 778 editing 782 editing objects in cells 802 floor lines 791794, 797 editing 793
2084 | Index
height 794 modifying 791 shape 794 frame edges 774 frames and mullions, overriding 772773 gables, adding 796 hyperlinks 790 in-place editing 776 infills 737, 771 for inserting objects 737 overrides 771 interference conditions 789 length 785 matching properties 788 materials 761, 836 mitered corners 789790 moving 782, 788 mullion edges 774 multiple, with same style 724 nested grids 749, 751 notes and reference files 790 offset of objects in cells 802 orientation of objects in cells 802 overrides, removing 781 radius 786 roof lines 791, 793794, 797 editing 793 height 794 modifying 791 shape 794 straight 720 swapping two objects 802 curve anchors 14121413, 1416 adding 1412 anchoring to new 1416 changing position of objects 1413 defined 1412 curved surfaces, hatching 478 custom blocks, railing components 1240 custom commands, AEC content 2020 custom shapes for structural members 1403 cut planes 153, 304305, 311313, 650, 701, 1186, 1387, 1616 anchoring objects 312 display range 305 global 304 in space style 1616 and levels 305 manual 313 object-specific 305, 311 overriding for walls 311 overview 153 stairs 1186 structural members 1387 wall styles 701 walls 650 cut planes, object-specific overrides 311 cylinder mass elements 546
D
data format styles 137 publishing to DWF 137
database fields 18091811 ASCII data link 1811 comma-separated data link 1811 creating data link 1811 inserting 1809 Microsoft Access link 1811 Microsoft Excel link 1811 ODBC drivers 1811 supported data sources 1811 supported data types 1809 supported database providers 1809 udl files 1810
default display sets 432 specifying 432
default project options 157 default standards folder 337 defining lines, sections 1693 defining mullions 890 definitions 452
mask block 452 multi-view block 452 profile 452 property set 452 dependent files 97 design rules 983, 1038, 16961697, 17331734 2D elevation styles 17331734 2D section styles 16961697 door styles 983 window styles 1038 DesignCenter 115, 1518, 2011, 2013, 2016, 2022 AEC content 2011 AEC drawings 2016 content file locations 115 fixture layout 2011, 2013, 2022
modifying 2022 moving content to Content Browser 2013 multi-view block definitions, adding 1518 detail component database 18461848, 2038, 2043, 2055 adding 1846 configuring 1846 jigs 2055 merging 1848 recipe specification 2038, 2043 removing 1847 detail component database (project) 180 Detail Component Manager 1828, 1835 component group tables 1835 locating a component in 1828 using 1828 detail component table 18351837 adding rows 1835 editing values 1836 removing rows 18361837 detail component tools 18231825, 1827 adding to tool palette 1823 applying to linework 1827 copying from Content Browser 1824 creating from linework 1825 modifying 1825 using 1823 detail components 18161822, 2038, 2055, 2070 bolts 1821 bookends-type 1819 boundary filling 1818 countable linear repeating pattern 1819
dynamically-sized rectangular 1821 editing 1822 inserting 1816 jigs 2055 linear array 1817 migrating 2070 multiple insertion 1817 recipe specification 2038 rectangular predefined-depth surface 1820 detail pane 194 detail tools 1885, 1888 properties 1888 detail views, creating 250 details 182, 18931896 creating with callouts 18931896
in current drawing 1894 in existing project drawing 1895 in new drawing 1896 for a project 182 diagnostic messages 114 dialog boxes, placement of 114 diamond pattern in window muntins 1050 dimension column grids 1460 dimension scale overrides 2022 dimensions 303, 783, 788, 857, 860, 869, 928, 930, 1667 1670, 17101712 AEC. See AEC dimensions curtain wall units 857, 860 curtain walls 783, 788 door assemblies 869, 930 door. See door dimensions elevations 17101712 project 303 sections 16671670 stair. See stair dimensions window assemblies 928, 930 window. See window dimensions direct editing 58 dynamic dimensions 58 grips 58 display configurations 292, 412, 417, 419, 421, 426427, 431433, 436439 copying between drawings 438 creating 426427 default 419, 432 deleting 436 emailing 438439 managing 436 notes 437 predefined, in templates 412 project 292 purging 439 reference files 437 renaming 436 templates 412 tips for working with 426 view direction 431 viewing 421 viewports 432 xrefs 433 display management 383 layers 383 See Also display system Display Manager 419421, 436, 440442, 444447 left pane 420
2085 | Index
opening 421 right pane 420 standard settings 440442, 444447
adding 445 excluding from synchronization 442 purging version history 446 purging version information 447 synchronizing 441 synchronizing standards 447 updating 442 updating from drawings 444 view direction icons 420 See Also display system, display representations, display
sets, display configurations display overrides 365 display representations 113, 413, 415, 423426, 428430,
436438, 440, 477, 1384 assigning to display sets 429 comparing between display sets 430 copying between drawings 438 creating 428 customizing display of objects 415 default 113, 415, 425 deleting 437 editing 428 materials 477 purging 440 renaming 436 structural members 1384 tips for working with 426 viewing 423 viewing objects that use 424425 display sets 416417, 422, 425427, 429430, 432, 434, 436
439 classifications 434 comparing display representations 430 copying between drawings 438 creating 427 default 417 deleting 436 display representations 416, 425, 429
assigning 429 viewing 425 notes 437 purging 439 reference files 437 renaming 436 specifying a default display set 432 tips for working with 426 view direction 417 viewing 422 display settings 413, 435, 440442, 444447 adding standard settings 445 excluding from synchronization 442 external references 413 live sections 435 materials 435 standard 440 synchronizing standards 447 synchronizing with project standards 441 updating standards 442, 444 version history 446 editing 446 purging 446 version information, purging 447
2086 | Index
display system 412, 447448 elements of 412 materials definition 412 troubleshooting 447448 See Also display representations, display sets, display configurations, Display Manager
display theme legend 2001 display theme tool 2000
creating 2000 display themes 19982002
activating 2002 adding to a drawing 2001 creating 19981999 disabling 2001 editing 1999 legend 1999 legend, inserting 2001 styles 1999, 2002 tools 1999 tools, creating 2000 display themes style 2003 creating 2003 Divide command 1491 dividing 1580 spaces 1580 divisions 152, 205207, 728729, 809, 876877 curtain wall units 809 curtain walls 728729 door assemblies 876877 interaction with projects 207 project 152, 205207
changing 206 creating 205, 207 deleting 206207 ID 207 name 207 overview 152 window assemblies 876877 documentation 1530 spaces 1530 dome mass elements 546 door assemblies 661, 754, 867869, 871872, 879, 883, 895, 897, 907908, 913914, 918, 920921, 923924, 926934 alignment of objects in cells 934 anchored objects in cells 934 auto-adjusting cells 879 cell markers 913 cells, merging 913 centering in walls from xref drawings 661 creating 867868 curtain walls, inserting into 754 custom grids 871 dimensions 930 display of 908 divisions, overriding 923924 door assembly tools, creation with 868 editing 927 editing objects in cells 933 frame edges 920 frames and mullions, overriding 918 freestanding 931 height 928929 hyperlinks 933 in-place editing 921
infills 883, 914 for inserting objects 883 overrides 914
interference conditions 932 matching properties 930 materials 907 mitered corners 932933 moving 927, 930 mullion edges 920 multiple, with same style 872 nested grids 895, 897 notes and reference files 933 offset of objects in cells 934 orientation of objects in cells 934 overrides, removing 926 positioning 869 sizes 928 swapping two objects 934 width 928 door assembly cells 881, 898, 900901 cell assignments 901 filling with panels 898 infills 881, 900
defining 881 removing 900 objects, inserting 900 door assembly components 908910 custom graphics 910 display 908 hatching 909 layer, color, and linetype 909 door assembly dimensions 869 door assembly frames 889, 902 assigning definitions 902 door assembly grids 866, 871, 876877, 879880, 890895, 903904 cells 877, 879880, 895 fixed number 879 fixed size 877 manually defining number and size 880 custom 871 divisions 876877, 894 elements 866 frame edges 903904 frames, adding 903 mullions 890893 nested grids 895 offsets 880 door assembly grips 928 door assembly height 928 door assembly styles 873877, 881882, 884887, 889895, 902, 904906, 911912, 927, 930931 assigning 894895, 904 definitions to elements 894 definitions to mullions 904 divisions to grids 894 infills to cells 895 assignments 902 cell infills 895 changing 930 creating 875 cut planes 911 defined 873 division definitions 881 element definitions 927
elements of 875, 894 frame offsets 889 frames 886887
profiles 887 width and depth 886 grid cells 876877 infills 884885, 912 alignment 884 definitions 885 offset 884 overriding 912 matching styles 930 mullions 890893, 905906 assignments 905 offsets 893 profiles 891892 removing definitions 893 removing from grid 906 width and depth 890 notes and files 911 overrides 912 overview 874 panel infills 882 shape 931 door assembly tools, creating 872 door assembly width, changing custom 928 door components 989992 custom blocks for 990 display of, turning off 991 door styles, removing from 992 layer, color, and linetype 989 door dimensions 983 changing for door styles 983 door frames, assigning materials 988 door head height, aligning doors by 963 door height, changing custom 966 door hinges, changing location 970 door leaf, changing 972 door measurements. See door dimensions door muntins 988, 996997, 1001, 1004, 1007, 10111012 display of, turning off 1012 editing 1011 glass 996 materials 988 prairie-lights 1001 rectangular or diamond 997 removing 1012 starburst 1004 sunburst 1007 void for 996 door panels, assigning materials 988 door sizes 963, 966, 1966 changing 966 properties 1966 specifying 963 door stops, assigning materials 988 door styles 964, 972, 981985, 988992, 994, 1012 changing 972 classifications 988 components 990, 992 creating 982 creating door tools from 964 custom shapes 984 defined 981 dimensions 983
2087 | Index
display of components, turning off 991 display properties 989 door swings 992 files, attaching 994 geometry 985 materials 989 muntins, removing 1012 notes, attaching 994 opening percentage 992 shapes, replacing 985 specifying design rules for 983 standard sizes 984 door swings 970, 973, 992, 1966 angles 973 direction 970 direction properties 1966 displaying as straight line 992 location 970 opening percent 973 door thresholds 963, 993 aligning doors by 963 display properties 993 symbols 993 door tools 964 creating 964 doors 661, 754, 900, 960966, 971972, 974, 976981, 983
985, 987989, 992, 1597, 1601, 1925 centering in walls from xref drawings 661 creating 962964
from assemblies 964 from openings 964 from windows 964 in door and window assemblies 963 in walls 962 curtain walls, inserting into 754 custom shapes 984 display components and materials 987 display properties, specifying 989 door and window assemblies, inserting into 900 door assemblies, inserting into 900 door tools, creating with 961 editing 965 freestanding 980 geometry 985 grips, using to edit 966 height 966 horizontal position 977 in space surfaces 1597, 1601 adding 1597 removing 1601 materials 961, 988 assigning 988 predefined 961 moving 965966, 974, 976, 980 along walls 966, 974 to a different wall 980 within walls 966, 976 multiple, with same style 964 notes and reference files 981 opening endcap styles 980 opening percents, specifying 992 overview 960 positioning 963, 966, 974, 976, 979 along walls 966, 974 horizontally 979
2088 | Index
within walls 966, 976 properties of 966 releasing from walls 980 rise, changing 971 schedule tags, adding 1925 shapes 985 standard sizes 984 threshold or head height, alignment by 963 type and shape 983 vertical alignment 960, 974
changing 974 overview 960 vertical orientation 979 vertical position 978 width 966, 972 grips, using to edit 966 how measured 972 doric column mass elements 548 dormers in roof slabs 1250, 1306 drape mass elements 547 drawing 1795 fields 1795 Drawing Explorer 193 drawing management 146, 313314 command line 313 concepts 146 frequently asked questions 314 overview 146 drawing templates, for projects 175 drawing window status bar 22 drawings 106108, 110111, 113, 116118, 120, 189, 350, 383, 454, 456457, 1702, 2016, 2023 AEC, creating 2016 closing in Style Manager 457 creating 106107, 457 from scratch 107 from templates 106 in Style Manager 457 default display representations 113 displaying objects with facets 116 dragging in Style Manager 457 elevations 1702 exporting 117118, 120 to AutoCAD 117118 to DXF files 117, 120 layer key styles 111 layer management 383 layer standards 111 legacy, opening 107 opening in Style Manager 456457 project-related information, removing 189 proxy graphics 117118 read-only status indicator 454 scale 110, 2023 setting up 108 sharing with other users 117118 methods 118 standards, adding 350 status of 456 units, specifying 108 DWF 135, 137, 139, 285 2D 139 3D 139 data format styles 137 PPL file 137
publishing options 137 publishing property set data 135 sheet set 285 DXF files, exporting drawings to 117, 120 dynamic dimensions 58, 61 dynamically-sized rectangular components 1821
E
editing 1801 fields 1801
electronically transmitting a project 184 elements 147, 228240
constructs 229, 238 compared to 229 converting to 238
creating 231 deleting 236, 240 dragging objects into 235 electronically transmitting 236 external references, displaying 238 interactions with projects 239 legacy drawings, converting 229, 232233 name 239 opening and closing 234 overview 147 projects, adding to 239 properties 235 referencing in multiple constructs 230 referencing into other elements 237 templates 229 uses for 230 when to use 230 XML files 229 elevation labels 17841790 DesignCenter 1790 attributes 17881789 blocks 1788, 1790 coordinate systems 1787 creating 1785 defined 1784 elevation values 1786 graphic symbols 1789 hyperlinks 1788 modifying 1786 multi-view blocks 1787, 1790 notes 1788 offset 1787 reference files 1788 scale factor 1787 tools 1784, 1786
creating 1786 creating with 1784 user-defined 1788 user-specified settings 1785 elevation lines 1702, 17071708, 17121714 changing 1708 drawing with elevation marks 1708 hyperlinks, notes, and reference files 1714 location 1713 subdivisions 1708, 1712 viewing 1707 elevation marks 1702, 1708, 1713 attributes 1713
drawing 1708 elevation tools 1885, 1888
properties 1888 elevations 17021704, 17101712, 1716, 1901, 19031904
creating with callouts 1901, 19031904 four-way exterior elevations 1904 four-way interior elevations 1903 single elevations 1901
dimensions, changing 17101712 horizontal 1716 live section views 1703 materials 1704 subdivisions 1703, 1712 See Also 2D elevations, 3D elevations, elevation lines,
elevation marks endcap styles, walls 704 endcaps 980, 1034, 1076
door opening 980 opening 1076 window opening 1034 entity references 20342035 hyperlinks 2034 location 2035 notes 2034 reference files 2034 equipment, adding to 1925 erased component, sections 1695 exploded objects, identifying 2032 exporting 438 display configurations 438 display representations 438 display sets 438 Extend command 1490 extension lines, AEC dimension styles 1779 external references (xrefs) 74, 146, 153154, 175, 222, 290
291, 316, 433, 660661 constructs, attaching to 222 dimensioning 316 display configurations 290291, 433 display settings 290 full paths 175 insertion method 175 isolating objects in 74 overview 146 paths, in projects 154 relative paths 175 troubleshooting 660661 within a project 153 extruded 3D spaces 1550, 1554 extrusion mass elements 549 extrusions, hatching 479
F
faces 69 aligning UCS 69
faces, hatching multiple 479 facet deviation 863 FACETDEV variable 711, 1367 fascia 1263, 1317
in slab edges 1263 fields 17931795, 17971804, 1807, 1809, 1811, 1910, 1956
1958, 1964, 1976 adding to a property set definition 1976
2089 | Index
annotation 1793 Autodesk Architectural Desktop 1803 background color 1802 converting to text 1803 creating database links 1811 editing 1801, 1957 FIELDDISPLAY variable 1802 in callout symbols 1910 in manual properties 1956 in property set data 1964 in styles and definitions 1958 inserting 1795, 17971801
attributes 1800 AutoCAD table cells 1801 multiline text 1799 object properties 1797 object styles 1798 property set definitions 1795 text elements 1799 ODBC drivers 1811 overview 1794 supported database providers 1811 types 18031804, 1807, 1809 database fields 1809 keynote fields 1807 project fields 1803 sheet set fields 1804 updating 1803, 1957 fields, layer standards 403406 AIA Long Format 404 BS1192 405406 files, LY 394 files, reference. See reference files filleting walls 635 filters, layer. See layer filters floor lines 639, 641643, 646647, 791792, 797798 curtain walls 791792, 797798 changing 791, 797 changing vertices 798 editing 643 offsetting 641 projecting 641 reversing 646 steps, adding 642 walls 639, 641642, 647 changing 639, 642 changing vertices 647 floor settings 1097, 1103, 1107, 1144 changing, for stairs 1144 multi-landing stairs 1097 spiral stairs 1107 u-shaped stairs 1103 floorplates. See slices floors 1601 in space surfaces 1601 formulas 1967, 19691970 evaluating results 1969 Formula Property Definition worksheet 1970 in schedule tables 1967 property set definition 1967 use case 1970 VBScript code 1970 four-way exterior elevations 1904 four-way interior elevations 1903
2090 | Index
frames 988, 1041 door, assigning materials to 988 window, assigning materials to 1041
frames, curtain wall units 818821 offsets 820 profiles 819 removing 821 width and depth 818
frames, curtain walls 740, 742743 offsets 742 profiles 742 removing 743 width and depth 740
frames, door assemblies 886887, 889 profiles 887 removing 889 width and depth 886
frames, window assemblies 886887, 889 offsets 889 profiles 887 removing 889 width and depth 886
free form mass element 562 editing faces 562
freestanding columns 1352 freestanding door assemblies 931 freestanding doors 962, 980
creating 962 location 980 freestanding window assemblies 931 freestanding windows 1016, 1034 creating 1016 location 1034 full xref paths in projects 154 furniture, adding to 1925
G
gable mass elements 547, 556557 gable roof lines 641, 796, 799
curtain walls, adding to 796 settings 799 in walls 641 gable roofs 1250, 1252 creating 1252 creating with roof tools 1250 geometry 985, 1039 door, editing 985 window, editing 1039 glass, door muntins 996 global cut planes 304, 306309 clipped model view 309 display range 306307 displaying different levels 308 globally updating 2D sections and elevations 16861687,
17251726 in a folder 1686, 1725 in a project 1686, 1725 updating 1687, 1726 gothic pattern in window muntins 1061 graphics path 1122, 1126 multi-landing stairs, changing 1122 u-shaped stairs, changing 1126 graphics, preview 2016
graphlines in walls 653 grids 721, 805, 870, 1410, 14541455, 1461, 1464, 1468,
1472, 1475 anchoring objects to 1454 anchoring to objects 1410 ceiling grid tools, creation with 1468 column grid tools, creation with 1455 curtain wall units 805 curtain walls 721 door assemblies 870 fixed baysize 1454, 1461, 1472 layout modes 1454 window assemblies 870 See Also ceiling grids, column grids, curtain wall unit
grids, curtain wall grids, door assembly grids, layout grids, window assembly grids grids, door assembly 890 grids, window assembly 890 grips 5861, 6364, 578579, 620, 783, 857, 928, 940, 966, 1020, 1074, 1115, 1217, 1255, 1274, 1358, 1768 AEC dimensions 1768 dimension text, moving 1768 extension lines, moving 1768 AEC polygon 940 CTRL grips 60 curtain wall 783 curtain wall unit 857 direct editing 58 door 966 door assembly 928 dynamic dimensions 61 grip color 59 grip constraints 63 grip tips 59 mass group 578579 attaching mass element 578 detaching mass element 579 opening 1074 railing 1217 roof 1255 roof slab 1274 slab 1274 stair 1115 structural members 1358 temporary coordinate systems 64 trigger grips 60 wall 620 window 1020 window assembly 928 gross boundary 1568 GUID 369 version 369
H
hatch 14841485 generating boundary 1485 repositioning 1484
hatch boundary 1485 creating 1485 redefining 1485
hatch productivity tools 1484 hatches 475, 478479, 481, 569, 574, 701, 955, 1615
AEC polygon styles 955
curved surfaces 478 extrusions 479 free form mass elements 481 mass element styles 574 mass elements 569 material components 475 multiple faces 479 space styles 1615 wall styles 701 See Also surface hatches head height 963, 1017, 1068 door 963 openings 1068 window 1017 height 621, 928, 966, 1577, 1596 door 966 door assembly 928 space surfaces 1596 spaces 1577 wall 621 help 9 finding 9 online 9 hidden component, sections 1695 hidden line projection 1738 creating 1738 overview 1738 hinges 970, 1024 door, changing location 970 window, changing location 1024 horizontal elevations 1716 horizontal orientation 1100, 1105 spiral stairs 1105 u-shaped stairs 1100 horizontal sections 1674
I
i-drop icon for tool catalogs 80 importing 438
display configurations 438 display representations 438 display sets 438 in-place editing 6465, 6768, 776, 851, 921 3D body modifiers 67 curtain wall units 851 curtain walls 776 door assemblies 921 material hatches 68 polyline-based components 65 profile-based components 65 window assemblies 921 insertion point 963, 1017, 1069 of doors 963 of openings 1069 of windows 1017 installing tool catalogs in libraries 86 integration 75 Autodesk Architectural Desktop and AutoCAD 75 interference conditions 687, 1166, 1168, 11701171, 1173
1174, 1578 adding to walls 687 removing from walls 687
2091 | Index
spaces 1578 adding 1578 removing 1578
stairs 1166, 1168, 11701171, 11731174 in curtain walls 1171, 1173 in door assemblies 11731174 in slabs 1168 in slabs, removing from 1170 in spaces 11701171 in walls 1166, 1168 in window assemblies 11731174
intersections 1582 spaces 1582
isolating objects 70, 7374 ending object isolation 73 hiding selection 73 saving selection 74 selecting objects 70
isosceles triangle mass elements 544
J
joining walls 635
K
keynote database (project) 180 keynote databases 18711873, 18751878
adding 1871 configuring 1871 creating 1873 groups 18751877
adding 1875 deleting 1877 editing 1876 moving 1877 keynotes 18751877 adding 1875 deleting 1877 editing 1876 moving 1877 merging old and new 1872 modifying 1873 overview 1871 permissions 1872 removing 1872 schema 1878 Keynote Editor 1873 keynote database 1873 keynote fields 18071808 inserting 1808 keynote insertion tools 1859 using 1859 keynote legend styles 1866 editing 1866 keynote legends 1861, 18631865 adding keynotes 1865 editing 1864 generating 1863 removing keynotes 1865 reselecting keynotes for 1864 updating 1865 using 1861
2092 | Index
keynotes 18591861, 18631871, 1877, 2070 changing databases 1869 changing formats 18671868 globally 1868 individually 1868 configuring database 1871 databases 1871 editing 18661867 inserting 1860 insertion tools 1859 legends 1861, 18631865 adding keynotes 1865 editing 1864 generating 1863 removing keynotes 1865 updating 1865 using 1861 migrating 2070 object inspect tool 1867 repeat insertion 1861 sort order 1877 specifying 1869 specifying for detail components 1870 specifying for object components 1870 specifying for object styles 1869 viewing 1866
keynoting tools 1857 overview 1857
keys, layer. See layer keys
L
l-shaped stairs 1098 creating 1098
landing shapes 1125 LandXML, importing 124, 127129
clipping surface model 128 COGO points 124 contours 128 drawing units 127 layer keys 129 options 127 parcels 124 parcels as polylines 128 parcels as spaces 128 schema version 124 selecting model base thickness 128 surfaces 124 validating 127 layer filters 388389 layer colors 389 layer names 389 linetype 389 lineweight 389 specifying 388 layer groups 386387, 390391 filter groups 387 filters 386387, 390391
converting property to group 391 creating 387 property 387 standard 390 layers, adding 390 overview 386
properties, changing 391 renaming and deleting 391 rules for 386 types of 386 layer key styles 111, 382, 394, 398400, 452 AIA 394 BS1192 394 creating 398 creating from LY files 398 defined 382 editing 399 in Style Manager 452 notes and reference files 400 overrides to 394 properties of 394 specifying 111 layer keying 382, 397 defined 382 values for new layer keys 397 layer keys 129, 382, 394395, 397, 400402 default 395, 402 default values 397 defined 382, 394 overrides 400401
specifying 401 turning on and off 401 remapping 401 selecting for LandXML 129 Layer Manager 382386, 391392, 402 layer filters 386 layer groups 391 properties 391 layer snapshots 392 layer standards 402 layers 383385 creating 383384 creating nonstandard 384 deleting 385 making current 383 renaming 384 opening 383 overview 382 layer snapshots 392394 creating 392 deleting 393 editing 392 exporting 393 importing 394 overview 392 restoring 393 layer standards 111, 382383, 385, 402409 AIA Long Format 402, 404 assigning layers to 385 BS1192 402, 404405 component fields 403 creating 406 creating layers conforming to 383 defined 382 editing 406408 exporting 409 fields 403 importing 409 included with Layer Manager 402 match description 403 purging 408
specifying 111 layers 114, 383385
adding with same name 384 AEC Editor 114 current 383 deleting 385 description 385 display management 383 layer standards 383, 385 nonstandard 384 object display 385 renaming 384 See Also Layer Manager layout curves 1410, 14291431, 14331438 adding 1431 adding nodes 1433 anchoring objects 1430 anchoring to objects 1410 changing node positions 1436 changing node spacing 1435 changing offsets 1434 changing spacing mode 1436 display properties 1437 notes and files 1438 switching 1437 tools 1430 layout grids 721, 749, 805, 870, 895, 1429, 14381439,
14411445 adding and removing boundaries 1444 adding grid lines 1442 adding notes and files 1445 changing spacing mode 1443 creating holes 1444 curtain wall units 805 curtain walls 721, 749 display properties 1444 door assemblies 870, 895 location 1445 radial 1439, 1441
adding 1439 changing 1441 rectangular 14411442 adding 1441 changing 1442 removing grid lines 1442 tools 1439 window assemblies 870, 895 layout modes (grids) 1454, 1461, 1472 fixed baysize 1454, 1461, 1472 layout volumes 14461451 adding 1447 adding grid lines 1448 changing 1448 changing spacing mode 1449 creating 1446 location 1450 notes and files 1451 removing grid lines 1449 leader anchors 14171418 adding 1417 changing position of objects anchored to 1417 copying objects to all layout nodes 1418 defined 1417 extending leaders 1418 grip editing 1418
2093 | Index
leaf, door 972 legacy drawings, opening 107 length 621, 11451146
limits for stairs 11451146 wall 621 levels 152, 200205 copying 201202 creating 201, 204 cut planes 201 defaults 201 deleting 204205 floor-to-floor height 205 IDs 205 interaction with projects 204 name 205 overview 152 properties 203 linear repeating pattern components 1817 lines 14611462, 14721473 ceiling grids 1473 column grids 14611462, 1472 linetype scale 449 display properties of AEC objects and LTSCALE 449 troubleshooting 449 linetype settings, AEC Editor 114 linework 1357, 1678, 1684, 16941695, 1717, 17221723,
17311732 2D elevations 1717, 17221723 2D sections 1678, 1684, 1695 erased component (2D elevations) 1732 hidden component (2D elevations) 1732 section hatch 1694 section surface hatch 1694 structural members, creating 1357 surface hatch (2D elevations) 1731 linework material components 474 linking objects. See object anchors list definitions 1610, 16241626, 1641, 19881990 creating 1625, 1988 defined 1624 editing 1626, 1989 files 1626 for spaces 1626 for zones 1626 list items 1988 name lists 1626 notes 1626 notes and reference files 1990 setting in space style 1610 setting in zone style 1641 type 1626 live section views 435, 477, 1662, 1665, 16751677, 1703 creating 1665, 16751676 display settings 435 editing 1675 in elevations 1703 materials 477 removing 1677 section lines, creating from 1665 sectioned body, displaying 1676 updating 1676 location 1587 spaces 1587 location type 1601 space surfaces 1601
2094 | Index
LY files, creating layer key styles from 394
M
manual properties 1958 fields in 1958 styles and definitions 1958
manual synchronization 335 mapped drives 154, 157
for projects 154 for remote locations 157 opening projects on 157 mask block definitions 452, 15001504 creating 15001501
from existing definitions 1501 from polylines 1500 editing 1503 exporting 1502 importing 1501 purging 1504 Style Manager 452, 1500 mask blocks 1500, 15041511, 2019 adding 1504 AEC content 2019 attaching to objects 1507 definitions. See mask block definitions detaching from objects 1508 display properties 1511 editing 1508 grips, editing with 1508 hyperlinks, notes, and reference files 1511 location 1509 profiles, editing 1509 tool properties 1510 tools 1504, 1506 adding using 1504 creating 1506 user-specified settings 1505 mass element styles 571575 creating 572 display properties 574 hatching 574 materials 572 materials and display components 573 materials, assigning 573 notes 575 reference files 575 mass elements 481, 540562, 568571, 578580, 585586, 590593 additive 579, 591 arch 543, 555 barrel vault 543 Boolean operations 558 box 544 circular 557 cone 545 converting from 561 objects 561 converting to 560561 3D solid 560 roof slabs 561 slabs 561 spaces 561 walls 560
creating 542 creating with massing tools 541 cylinder 546 display components 585 display properties 569 dividing 559 dividing face of 561 dome 546 doric column 548 drape 547
Delaunay triangulation 547 rectangular 547 regular 547 editing 552 editing with grips 552 faces 561562 dividing 561 joining 562 free form element 560 freeform 562 faces, editing 562 gable 547, 556557 rise 557 roof height 556 grips 552 hatching 569 hatching free form 481 height 555 hyperlinks 571 intersections 580, 593 isosceles triangle 544 joining faces of 562 location 570 mass groups 558, 578579, 591 adding to 578 attaching objects to 591 detaching from 579 materials 540, 568, 585586 Model Explorer 590 moving 593 notes 571 order within mass group 593 profiles 549550 extruding 549 revolving 549550 pyramid 544 rectangular 553554 area 553 edge 554 reference files 571 right triangle 545 shapes 542, 558 size 542, 558 sphere 546 subtractive 580, 592 tools, creating 551 trimming 559 user-specified settings 542 mass groups 540, 558, 576579, 581586, 591, 593 anchors 582 Boolean operations 577 changing 558 creating 576 display components 585 hyperlinks 584
location, changing using grips 581 markers 578 mass elements 578579, 591
adding 578 attaching 578, 591 detaching 579 mass group markers 577 materials 577, 585586 materials, assignng 578 Model Explorer 591 moving 593 nested, creating 581 nested, removing 581 notes 584 reference files 584 tools 576, 584 creating with 576 working with 583 mass models 540, 587 Model Explorer 587 massing studies 540 See Also mass groups massing tools 541, 576 mass elements 541 mass groups 576 material boundaries 1663, 16811683, 17201722 creating 1681 editing 1681, 1720 highlights 1681 masks 1681 rings 1683, 17211722 adding 1683 removing 1683 replacing 1683 vertices 1682, 1721 adding 1682 removing 1682 material components 474477, 488 2D section and elevation linework 476 3D body 475 linework 474 patterns 488 plan hatch 475 section hatch 476 sectioned body and sectioned boundary 477 surface hatch 475 material definitions 487, 494 creating 487 notes and reference files 494 materials 412, 435, 464466, 477, 485487, 491492, 540, 577, 585586, 761, 836, 907, 987989, 10401041, 1043, 1210, 1257, 13121314, 13241325, 1330, 1383, 16111612, 1662, 1689, 1691, 1695, 1704 2D section shrinkwrap 492 2D section styles 1689, 1695 Autodesk VIZ rendering 464 creating 486 curtain wall styles 761, 836 display settings 412, 435 door assembly styles 907 door components 988 door styles 989 doors 987 in display representations 477 in elevations 1704
2095 | Index
listing 485 mass elements 540, 585586 mass groups 577, 585586 naming 486 objects 466, 486 objects that support 465 overview 464 properties, defining 487 queries 486 railings 1210 rendering 491 roof slab components 1313, 1324 roof slab edge style 1325 roof slab styles 1312, 1314 roofs 1257 section components 1691 sections 1662 slab components 1313, 1324 slab edge style 1325 slab styles 1312, 1314 space styles 16111612 structural member styles 1383 structural members 1330 styles 487 window assembly styles 907 window components 1041 window styles 1043 windows 1040 See also material boundaries MDB 132, 135 file structure 132 exporting property set data 135 Merge command 1494 merging 1578 spaces 1578 messages, diagnostic 114 migrating 2070 detail components 2070 keynote database 2070 mitered corners 790, 860, 933 curtain wall units 860 curtain walls 790 door assemblies 933 window assemblies 933 Model Explorer 540, 587591, 600 display commands 589, 600 left pane 588 mass commands 590 mass elements 590591
attaching 591 mass groups 591 mass models 587 menu bar and toolbar 588 opening 588 position of object 590 right pane 588 toolbar commands 590 viewing objects 590 zoom percentage 590 model space views 253, 255257, 1910 creating 253 deleting 257 outside project 1910
deleting 1910 opening 1910
2096 | Index
properties 256 referencing into sheet 255 modify tools 1488 AEC 1488 modifying objects in Autodesk Architectural Desktop 31 mullions, curtain wall units 822823, 825 definitions, removing 825 profiles 823 width and depth 822 mullions, curtain walls 744745, 747 definitions, removing 747 profiles 745 width and depth 744 mullions, door assemblies 890893 definitions, removing 893 offsets 893 profiles 891892 width and depth 890 mullions, window assemblies 890893 definitions, removing 893 offsets 893 profiles 891892 width and depth 890 multi-landing stairs 10941097 calculation rules 1097 creating 1094 floor settings 1097 terminating with 1096 turn types 1095 vertical orientation 1096 multi-view block definitions 452, 1503, 15141518 classifications 1503, 1518 creating 15141515 DesignCenter, adding to 1518 in Style Manager 452 notes 1518 reference files 1518 view blocks 15151517
connecting 1517 creating 1515 creating from 1516 multi-view block references, object tags 1925 multi-view block tool 1519 creating 1519 multi-view blocks 1514, 15211526, 16711672, 1713, 2017 adding to drawings 1521 AEC content 2017 attributes 15251526 editing 1525 updating 1526 definitions, changing associated 1522 elevation marks 1713 hyperlinks 1524 location 1523 modifying 1522 notes 1524 offset 1523 predefined 1514 reference files 1524 rotation 1522 scale factor 1522 section marks 16711672 types of objects represented 1514 See Also multi-view block definitions
multiline text 1799 fields 1799
muntins, door. See door muntins muntins, window. See window muntins MWX file 131
N
napkin sketch 604606 appearance of objects 604 changing 606 creating 605 line formats 604 lock settings 606 napkin sketch tools, creation with 605 nested objects 606 overview 604
net boundary 1568 new zoning 1627 node anchors 14191421
adding 1419 anchoring to different nodes 1420 changing position of objects anchored to 1420 copying objects to all layout nodes 1421 defined 1419 non-AEC objects, identifying 2032 non-associative AEC dimensions 1742 non-associative spaces 1554, 1578 2D 1554 changing geometry 1578 converted 3D freeform 1554 extruded 3D 1554
O
object anchors 14101411, 1426 adding 1411 defined 1410 positioning 1426 released 1411 releasing 1426 types, user-defined 1410 See Also cell anchors, curve anchors, leader anchors, node anchors, volume anchors
object inspect tool 1867 object properties 1797
fields 1797 object styles 1798
fields 1798 object tags, adding 1925 Object Viewer 600 objects 25, 31, 33, 7074, 114, 116, 412, 418, 425, 448, 561,
682, 802, 933934, 1162, 13751376, 15071508, 1741, 2030 adding 25 adding to structural members 1375 alignment 802, 934 in curtain walls 802 in door assemblies 934 in window assemblies 934 converting to 561 mass elements 561 converting to 3D solids 2030 default display properties 425
detaching mask blocks 1508 dimensioning 1741 display system 412 displaying in viewports 418 editing 802, 933
in curtain walls 802 in door assemblies 933 in window assemblies 933 existence in drawings 448 facets, displaying 116 isolating 70 isolating in external references 74 isolating to display 72 isolating to edit in elevation view 71 isolating to edit in plan view 72 isolating to edit in section view 71 isolating to hide 73 isolating, saving 74 layer, color, and linetype settings 114 mask blocks, attaching 1507 modifying 31 offset 802, 934 in curtain walls 802 in door assemblies 934 in window assemblies 934 orientation 802, 934 in curtain walls 802 in door assemblies 934 in window assemblies 934 releasing 802, 934 anchored objects in curtain walls 802 anchored objects in door assemblies 934 anchored objects in window assemblies 934 selecting similar 33 stairs, adding to 1162 subtracting from stairs 1162 subtracting from structural members 1376 subtracting from walls 682 walls, adding to 682 Obscure command 1493 ODBC drivers 1811 online help 9 opening 1068 sizes 1068 opening components 10851086 custom blocks for 1085 display of, turning off 1086 opening styles, removing from 1086 opening endcap styles 708710 applying 709 creating 709 notes and files 710 walls 708 opening endcaps 1076 opening grips, editing openings using 1074 opening height, AEC dimension styles 1779 opening percents 992, 1045 door, specifying 992 window, specifying 1045 opening tools 1066, 10721073 copying 1073 creating 1072 finding in palettes 1066
2097 | Index
openings 661, 10661069, 10711076, 10781086, 1597, 1599, 1601
aligning by threshold or head height 1073 centering in walls from xref drawings 661 components 10851086
custom blocks 1085 creating 1068 creating from 1069
assemblies 1069 doors 1069 windows 1069 creating in walls 1068 custom shapes 1069, 1071 dimensions 1075 display components 1083, 1086 display properties 1083 editing 1074 endcap style 1076 flipping 1075 hatching 1084 head height 1068 horizontal position 1078 hyperlinks 1083 in space surfaces 1597, 1599, 1601 copying 1599 moving 1599 removing 1601 stretching 1599 insertion 1069 location 1082 moving 1074 multiple, with same style 1072 notes 1083 opening tools, creation with 1067 overview 1066 positioning 1068, 1073, 1080 horizontally 1080 profiles 1069 reference files 1083 repositioning 1076 shape 1075 sill display 1082 threshold or head height, alignment by 1068 thresholds 1068 tool properties 1076 vertical orientation 1081 vertical position 1079 optimization 114 limiting snap points 114 Ortho Close option 710 overrides 365 display 365
P
palettes, default folders 116 panels, door 988 parcels 124, 128
importing 124 importing as polylines 128 importing as spaces 128 performance. See optimization plan elevations 1716 plan hatch material components 475
2098 | Index
plan sections 1674 plan views, dimensioning. See elevation labels planes, cut. See cut planes plot stamps, assigning 284 plotting sheet sets 285 plotting sheets 150, 258264, 266271, 273275, 278, 282,
284285, 288 annotation 259 categories 260 changing 288 DWF publishing 285 external references, displaying 271 interactions with projects 288 managing page setups 284 overview 150 plot stamp settings 282 project sheet set 261 publishing 285 sheet 264, 266269, 275
creating 264 deleting 269 electronically transmitting 275 importing in sheet set 266 opening and closing 267 properties 268 registering 267 removing from sheet set 268 sheet drawings 258 sheet list 271, 273 changing 273 inserting 271 updating 273 sheet selection 274275 activating 274 creating 274 deleting 275 sheet set 273, 275, 278, 282 archiving 278 electronically transmitting 275 publishing 282 refreshing 273 sheet subset 263264 creating 264 removing 264 sheet template 262 sheet view 258, 269270 creating 269 deleting 270 numbering 270 opening 270 plotting 258 sheets 258 subsets 260 when to start with 260 XML files 259 points 1741 dimensioning 1741 Polyline Close option 710 polyline outline 598 creating from objects 598 polylines 674, 1269, 1638 converting to wall modifiers 674 from zones 1638 roof slabs 1269 slabs 1269
PPL file 137139 adding property set definitions 138 DWF 137 new 139 removing property set definitions 138
prairie-12 lights in window muntins 1054 prairie-9 lights in window muntins 1052 preliminary studies. See mass models preview graphics 2016 preview pane 194 profile definitions in Style Manager 452 profiles 985, 1039, 1240, 1243
door geometry 985 railing components 1240, 1243 window geometry 1039 Project Browser 167168, 170, 174, 183184, 188, 313, 315 closing 188 command line 313 details, exporting 315 Internet Explorer view 170 navigation bar 168 overview 167 project header 168 project selector 168 projects 183184, 188
closing 184 deleting 188 moving 183 renaming 184 properties 174 using 167 project bulletin board 175 project fields 18031804 inserting 1804 project image 175 Project Navigator 153, 189194, 197198, 209, 289, 313 314, 316 AutoCAD undo commands 190 categories, creating 209 command line 313314 closing 314 context menu 194 details pane 194 drag-and-drop operations 198 Drawing Explorer 193 MDI compliance 316 opening 190 preview pane 194 project status bar 198 tabs 190192 Constructs 190 Project 190 Sheet Explorer View 192 Sheet Set View 192 Sheets 192 Views 191 toolbar 197 views 289 refreshing 289 project sheet set, properties 261 project standard styles 370 adding 370 changing 370 deleting 370 renaming 370
project standards 146, 181, 325, 327, 329331, 334339, 341, 345, 347348, 350356, 362363, 365370, 378
accessing in Content Browser 351 accessing in Display Manager 352 accessing in Style Manager 351 accessing in tool palettes 350 activating 338 auditing 365 AutoCAD standards 336 changing 370 commands 378 configuring 331, 334, 336
AutoCAD standards 336 display settings 331 styles 331 synchronization 334 Content Browser library 345 copy from project 337 creating tool catalogs 341 default standards folder 337 defining 181 defining standards drawings 331 display settings 327 editing drawings outside of projects 366 overview 327 prerequisistes 330 project template 330 saving 367 selecting standards tool palettes 347 setting up synchronization 335 setup 330 setup report 339 styles 327 synchronization 334, 354355, 362363 conditions 354 options 334 order 354 report 362 settings 334 status 355 with AutoCAD standards 363 synchronizing 353, 356 tool catalog 345, 348 creating 348 tool content root path 345 updating 368 version 368369 exceptions 369 history 369 new 369 workflow 327, 329 project standards display drawings 367 project standards drawings 331, 333, 366367, 371, 373 377 adding styles and display settings 374 adding to projects 331 associating styles 333 creating 366 editing outside of project 377 editing version history 375 purging version 376 purging version history 376 removing from project 331 saving 367
2099 | Index
synchronizing 377 updating 371 updating from project drawings 373 versioning 375 project standards style drawings 367 project template 156, 172173, 330 overview 156 setup 330 projects 116, 146147, 153157, 169175, 177, 180184,
188189, 199200, 212, 288, 293296, 298299, 301309, 311316, 325, 329, 331, 337, 353, 356, 362363, 365, 368 defining standards drawings 331 activating project tool palettes 199 addendums, alternates, and as-builts 315 AEC dimensions and external references 316 annotating 293294 schedules 294 tagging 293 archiving 315 auditing 365 basepoints 315 closing 184 command line 314 command line, new project environment 314 configuring standards 181, 331 constructs 316 copying 316 moving 316 Content Browser library 157, 177 copying 171172 copying standards 337 creating 171174 from scratch 174 from template 172173 with existing structure 173 current, selecting 171 cut planes 153, 304305, 311313 anchoring objects 312 display range 305 and levels 305 manual 313 object-specific 305, 311 overriding for walls 311 overview 153 default folders 116 default options 157 deleting 188 detail component database 180 details, adding 182 dimensioning 303 disk space needed for project files 315 displaying 169 by folder structure 169 by history 169 drawing templates 156 electronically transmitting 184 elements 316 copying 316 locking 316 external references 153, 316 global cut planes 304, 306309 clipped model view 309 display range 306307 displaying different levels 308
2100 | Index
keynote database 180 mapped drives 154, 157 moving 183 new 171 opening project library 200 overview 146 paths 288 process overview 154 project (APJ) file 170 project standards 325 project tool catalog 177 project-related information, removing 189 properties 174175
bulletin board 175 defining 174 drawing templates 175 project image 175 xref insertion method 175 property set definitions 296 property sets 294295, 299, 316 example of using 299 renaming 184 schedule tables 298 schedule tags 316 setting up standard display settings 331 setting up standard styles 331 settings 174175, 177, 180182 bulletin board 175 Content Browser library 177 detail component database 180 keynote database 180 project details 182 project image 175 project standards 181 templates 175 tool palettes 177 xref insertion method 175 sheet set 170 sheet set template 156 standards drawings 156 structure 173 subcategories 212 support files 155 synchronization report 362 synchronizing overview 329 synchronizing with AutoCAD standards 363 synchronizing with standards 353, 356 tips for working with 154 title blocks 301303 creating tools 303 inserting 303 multi-view blocks 302 project attributes 301 project blocks 302 tool palettes 156 updating standards 368 user access 154, 315 wall cleanup work 316 XML files 147, 153, 314315 corrupted 315 xref paths 154 full 154 relative 154 See Also categories, constructs, divisions, Project
Browser, Project Navigator
properties 966, 1020, 1671, 1775, 1956, 1958, 1985 AEC dimension styles 1775 door 966 fields, for objects 1956 manual, for objects 1956 on Extended Data tab, hiding 1985 on Extended Data tab, sequencing 1985 section lines 1671 styles and definitions 1958 window 1020
Properties palette 5457 adjusting transparency 55 appearance 55 Design tab 56 docking 55 Extended Data tab 56 hiding 55 opening 54 transparency 55 worksheets 57
Properties palette in Autodesk Architectural Desktop 54 property data formats 19511953, 1955, 1964
applying 1952 creating 1953 managing 1952 notes and reference files 1955 property set definitions 1964 units 1952 using different 1952 property set data 135, 1925, 1931, 1946, 19501951, 1956,
1958, 19611962, 1999 exporting to MDB 135 adding 1951, 1956 attaching to objects and styles 1999 attaching to styles and definitions 1958 browsing 1962 edit property set data worksheet 1925 editing 1950, 1956 exporting 1946 objects and styles, attaching to 1956 publishing to DWF 135 removing 1958 renumbering 1931 styles and definitions, removing from 1961 property set definitions 452, 1795, 1918, 19631967, 1973
1979, 19811983, 1985, 1987, 1995 anchor property definitions 1983 automatic properties 1965 automatic property definition 1977 classification property definitions 1979 classifications 1995 creating 1973 defining 1964 door size properties 1966 door swing direction properties 1966 editing 1985 fields 1795, 1976 formula property definitions 1967 graphic property definitions 1983 in Style Manager 452 location property definitions 1978 managing 1964 manual property definitions 1975 material property definitions 1981 merging 1987
notes and reference files 1973 project property definitions 1982 property data formats 1964 slab and roof slab properties 1966 specifying application of 1974 structural member length properties 1966 wall area properties 1965 wall length properties 1966 wall volume properties 1965 property sets 297, 1918, 19561958, 19631964, 1969, 1987 attaching to objects in xrefs 297 fields 19561957
converting to text 1957 editing 1957 properties 1956 updating 1957 formulas 1969 evaluating results 1969 inserting VBScript code 1969 manual and automatic properties 1964 removing 1958, 1987 schedule tables 1918 proxy graphics 117118 publishing 139 2D DWF 139 3D DWF 139 publishing drawings to Autodesk MapGuide and Autodesk Envision 130134 blocks and MVblocks 131 default map file 131 exported data types 130 external references 131 graphic data 130 MDB file 132 point databases 131 prerequisites 130 project data 134 property set data 130 publishing 133 SDF Component Toolkit 130 SDF Loader 131 publishing options 137 DWF 137 pulldown menus 17 pyramid mass elements 544
Q
queries, material 486 Quick Slice 598
creating 598 Quick Slice tool 598
R
radial layout grids 1439 radius, wall 621 railing styles 1224, 12311240, 1243, 12451246
bottom rail location 1233 changing 1224 classifications 1239 components 1235 creating 1232
2101 | Index
custom blocks 1240, 12451246 adding 1240 removing 1246 turning off 1245
custom blocks and profiles 1240 custom profiles 1243, 1245
adding 1243 turning off 1245 defined 1231 display components 1239 extensions 1237 files 1240 materials 1238 notes 1240 post location 1234 profile from closed polyline 1236 upper rail location 1232 railing tools 1211, 1216 creating 1216 finding in palettes 1211 railings 12101212, 1214, 12161221, 12241227, 1229 1230 anchor properties, changing 1227 anchoring 12191220 to objects 1220 to stairs 1219 bottom rails, changing 1225 custom profile 1221 direction, reversing 1219 editing 1217 freestanding 1214 grips, using to edit 1217 hyperlinks 1230 location 1229 materials 1210 multiple, with same style 1216 notes 1230 polylines, creating from 1216 posts 12181219, 1225 adding 1218 changing 1225 hiding 1219 redistributing 1219 removing 1218 showing hidden 1219 railing extensions 1226 railing tools, creation with 1211 reference files 1230 releasing anchored 1221 stairs, attaching to 1212 tool properties 1230 upper rails, changing 1224 ramps, creating 1113 read-only drawings, status indicator 454 rectangular components 1821 dynamically-sized 1821 rectangular layout grids 1441 rectangular mass elements 553554 rectangular pattern in window muntins 1048 rectangular predefined-depth surface components 1820 reference files 652, 662, 681, 703, 708, 710, 766, 841, 911, 956, 994, 1047, 1240, 1317, 1325, 1616, 1624, 1626, 1645, 1649, 1781 AEC dimension styles 1781 AEC polygon styles 956
2102 | Index
calculation modifiers 1624 curtain wall units 841 curtain walls 766 door assemblies 911 doors 994 list definitions 1626 opening endcap styles 710 railing styles 1240 slab edges 1325 slabs 1317 space styles 1616 wall cleanup definitions 662 wall endcap styles 708 wall modifier styles 681 wall styles 703 walls 652 window assemblies 911 windows 1047 zone styles 1645 zone templates 1649 referencing AEC objects 2034 relative xref paths in projects 154 removing frame 743, 821, 889 removing from style 743, 821, 889 curtain wall styles 743 curtain wall unit styles 821 door assembly styles 889 window assembly styles 889 rendering materials, assigning 491 renumbering objects for schedules 1931 repathing projects 288 repeated components. See elements reports 1608 space totals 1608 Reposition From command 1497 reposition linework 1497 reposition profile-based object 1497 representations, display. See display representations reverse in place 639 revolution mass elements 549 right triangle mass elements 545 rigid frame structural members 1399, 14021403 first and second rafter 1402 second segment 1403 rise 971, 1025 door 971 window 1025 roof dormers 1250, 1306 roof grips, editing roofs using 1255 roof lines 623, 640, 642643, 646 editing 643 offsetting 640 projecting 640 reversing 646 steps, adding 642 wall 623 roof lines, curtain walls 791, 797798 changing 791, 797 offsetting 791 projecting 791 vertices, changing 798 roof lines, walls 639640, 642, 647 changing 639, 642 vertices, changing 647
roof slab body modifiers 1300 editing in place 1300
roof slab edge styles 1321, 1323, 1325 materials 1325 profile edges and extrusion 1321 soffits 1323 geometry 1323
roof slab grips 1274 roof slab offsets 1288 roof slab styles 1312, 1314
display components and materials 1312 materials 1314 roof slab thickness 1288 changing 1288 roof slabs 1248, 1250, 1257, 1262, 12681269, 1274, 1288,
12931299, 13051306, 1313, 1324, 1966 adding objects to 12981299 clipped gable 1305 creating 1257, 1268
from roofs 1257, 1268 creating from 1269
polylines 1269 cutting 1295 defined 1248, 1262 dormers 1250, 1306 editing 1274 holes 12961297 materials 1313, 1324 mitering 12931294 moving 1274 polylines 1269 properties 1966 removing objects from 1299 styles 1288 vertices 12951296 xcut 1305 roof tools 1248, 1254 creating 1254 finding in palettes 1248 roofs 12521260 dimensions 1255 display components and materials 1257 display properties 1258 edges and face 1256 editing 1254 hatching 1258 hyperlinks 1260 location 1259 moving 1254 multiple, with same style 1254 notes 1260 polylines, creating from 1253 reference files 1260 roof slabs, converting to 1257 tool properties 1255 walls, creating from 1252 room and room finish tags, adding 1926 root path 178 tool content 178 rules, design. See design rules
S
sash, window 1041
scale 110 specifying in drawings 110
schedule table styles 19331937, 19391945, 2006 columns 1937, 19391942 adding 1937 editing 1942 formula 1940 quantity 1939 repeating 1940 spanning with a heading 1941 creating 1934 default format of 1935 display properties 1944 filtering by classification 1937 headings 1941 notes and reference files 1945 sort order 1943 specifying objects 1936 title formats 1943 troubleshooting 2006
schedule tables 19201924, 19321933, 19451951, 1967, 2005
adding objects 1922 adding to drawing 1921 basic 1920 cell data, editing 1950 convert to table option 1932 creating 1932 customizing appearance 1932 default tools 1920 display properties 1946 editing 1932 exporting 1945 exporting data for objects 1946 external source properties 1948 formulas 1967 general properties 1947 hyperlinks, notes, and reference files 1949 managing 1932 markers, turning off 1923 out-of-date, flagging 1933 placement 1948 property set data, adding 1951 removing objects 1923 reselecting objects 1923 selection criteria 1947 showing objects 1924 table breaks 1949 tools, creating 1921 troubleshooting 2005 updating 1923 See Also schedule table styles schedule tag tool,creating 1928 schedule tags 19241927, 19301931, 2007 adding 1924 anchoring to objects 1930 connection to objects 1931 creating 1924, 1927 doors and windows, adding to 1925 property set data worksheet 1925 releasing anchored objects 1931 rooms and room finishes, adding to 1926 structural members, adding to 1927 troubleshooting 2007 walls, adding to 1926
2103 | Index
schedules 19161917, 1931, 1933, 1991 classifications in 1991 creating 1917 matrix 1933 overview 1916 renumbering objects for 1931 terminology 1916 See Also schedule tables
SDF Component Toolkit 130 SDF Loader 131 section hatch linework 1694 section hatch material components 476 section lines 1660, 16651666, 16701672
changing 1666 defined 1660 graphic subdivisions 1670 hyperlinks, notes and reference files 1672 location properties 1671 and section marks 1666 viewing 1665 section marks 1660, 1666, 16711672 attributes 16711672 defined 1660 and section lines 1666 section subdivisions. See subdivisions, section section tools 1885, 1888 properties 1888 section views 250 creating 250 section views, dimensioning. See elevation labels sectioned bodies in live section views 1676 sectioned body material components 477 sectioned boundary material components 477 sections 476, 16621663, 16661671, 16741675, 1681,
16911695, 18971898, 1900 creating with callouts 18971898, 1900
in current drawing 1897 in existing drawing 1898 in new drawing 1900 defining lines 1693 dimensions, changing 16671670 display components 1691 erased component 1695 hidden component 1695 horizontal 1674 live section views 1662, 1675 location properties 1671 material boundaries 1663, 1681 materials 476, 1662, 1692 section hatch linework 1694 shrinkwrap 1693 shrinkwrap hatch 1693 subdivisions 1662, 1666, 1695 surface hatch linework 1694 See also 2D sections and 3D sections semi-automatic synchronization 334 separator lines 40 in tool palettes 40 sheet drawings 269 deleting 269 Sheet Explorer View 192 sheet index 271 sheet list 271 sheet selection 274275 activating 274
2104 | Index
deleting 275 sheet set 151, 170, 278, 282, 285
archiving 278 DWF 285 for projects 170 overview 151 plotting 285 publishing 282, 285 sheet set fields 1804, 1806 inserting 1806 sheet set manager, overview 152 sheet set template 156, 159, 163, 183 consolidating inconsistent project information 183 creating 159, 163
from existing drawings 163 from existing sheet set 159 for projects 156 Sheet Set View 192 sheet subset 263 sheet table of contents 260 sheet template in projects 262 sheet views 258 sheets 269 deleting 269 shrinkwrap 650, 701, 1693 cut plane display 650, 701 shrinkwrap hatch 1693 sills 1082 sills of openings, changing 1082 sills of windows, changing 1046 sizes 928, 963, 966, 1017, 1068 door 966 door assemblies 928 doors 963 openings 1068 window assemblies 928 windows 1017 slab body modifiers 13001302 editing 1301 editing in place 1300 removing 1301 restoring to mass element 1302 slab edge styles 13171320, 13221323, 1325 angles 1319 creating 1318 defined 1317 edge cuts 1319 fascia 1318, 13221323 geometry 1323 placement 1318 specifying 1322 materials 1325 notes and reference files 1325 overhang 1319 profiles 1320 fascia 1320 soffits 1320 soffits 1318, 1322 placement 1318 specifying 1322 slab edges 1263, 1281, 1290 defined 1263 editing 1290 overhang 1281 slab grips 1274
slab styles 1288, 1306, 1312, 13141317 changing 1288 classifications 1316 cut plane height 1316 defined 1306 display components and materials 1312 display properties 1314 hatching 1315 materials 1314 notes and reference files 1317
slab tools 1264, 1272 creating 1272 finding in palettes 1264
slabs 1262, 12651267, 1269, 12711272, 1274, 12831285, 12871290, 1292, 12951299, 13121314, 1317, 1324, 1966
adding objects to 12981299 based on walls 1267 bodies 1262 components 1314 creating 1262, 1265, 1271
from spaces 1271 overview 1262 creating from 1269 polylines 1269 creating with slab tools 1265 cutting 1295 edge styles 1317 editing 1274 extending 1292 holes 12961297 hyperlinks 1289 justification 1266 location 1289 material components 1312 materials 1313, 1324 moving 1274, 1289 multiple walls 1267 multiple with same style 1272 notes 1289 offsets 1284 pivot points 1287 polylines 1269 properties 1966 reference files 1289 removing objects from 1299 slopes 1285, 1288 thickness 1283 tool properties 1287 trimming 1290 vertices 12951296 slices 594596 attaching objects 595 converting 595 to polylines 595 detaching objects 595 elevation 594 generating 594 hyperlinks 596 location 595 notes 596 reference files 596 sloped roofs 1249, 1251 creating 1251 creating with roof tools 1249
snapshots, layer. See layer snapshots soffits 1263, 1317
slab edge 1263 space boundaries 15681570, 1576, 1578, 15801582, 1585,
1656 converting to spaces 1656 converting to walls 1656 displaying 1569 dividing 1580 editing 1568 grip-editing 1570 intersecting 1582 merging 1578 moving 1576 subtracting holes 1581 trimming 1585 space calculation modifier styles. See calculation modifier
styles space decomposition 16171619, 1621
defined 1617 display settings 1618 displaying 1618 layer, color, linetype settings 1618 methods 1619 text settings 1621 trapezoid 1619 triangulated 1619 space evaluation document formats 1655 TXT (ASCII text) 1655 XLS (spreadsheet) 1655 space evaluations 16501654, 1656 content, defining 1652 creating XLT template 1656 data format style properties 1653 default templates 1654 defined 1650 documents. See space evaluation document formats image display 1653 preparing the evaluation 1651 selecting spaces 1651 selecting zones 1651 Space Evenly command 1497 space geometry 1566 changing 1566 space linework evenly 1497 space profile-based object evenly 14971498 space styles 1543, 16081613, 16151616 boundary offsets 1609 classifications 1611 converting from area styles 1616 creating 1608 cut plane 1616 defined 1608 display properties 1613 hatching 1615 list definitions 1610 materials 16111612 notes 1616 reference files 1616 target dimensions 1609 tools, creating with 1543 space surfaces 15891593, 15961597, 1599, 1601 ceilings 1601 doors 1597, 1601
adding 1597
2105 | Index
removing 1601 floors 1601 grip-editing 1593 height 1596 joining 1592 location type 1601 openings 1597, 1599, 1601
copying 1599 moving 1599 removing 1601 stretching 1599 properties 1601 splitting 1591 trimming by plane 1590 windows 1597, 1601 adding 1597 removing 1601 space types 1532, 1544, 1547, 1550, 1554 associative 1544, 1547, 1550 non-associative 1554 spaces 561, 1530, 1532, 1540, 15431544, 1554, 15561557, 15591562, 15641570, 15771578, 15801582, 1585, 15871589, 16051608, 1611, 16221623, 16341636, 1644, 1657 associative 1544 attaching to zones 1607, 1634 base boundary 1568 boundary offset type 1565 calculating and evaluating information. See space
evaluations calculation cut planes 1606 calculation formula 1623 calculation modifiers 1606 calculation type 1622 changing geometry 1567, 1578, 1588
associative spaces 1588 non-associative spaces 1578 changing styles 1565 commands 1657 converting from 15591561 areas 1561 mass elements 1559 mass groups 1560 object outlines 1560 polylines 1560 profiles 1560 converting mass elements 561 creating 1554, 15561557, 1559 2D 1554 converting from objects 1559 extruded 3D 1554 polygonal 1557 rectangular 1556 with target dimensions 1554 decomposition. See space decomposition detaching from zones 1607, 1635 display components 1611 dividing 1580 dividing with bounding objects 1588 editing 15641566, 1568, 1589, 1605 associativity 1605 boundary offset type 1565 calculated value 1605 geometry 1566 space boundaries 1568
2106 | Index
surfaces 1589 grip-editing 1570 gross boundary 1568 height 1577 hyperlinks 1566 inheriting zone hatch 1644 interference conditions 1578
adding 1578 removing 1578 intersections 1582 location 1587 merging 1578 merging (associative) 1589 net boundary 1568 notes 1566 planning 1530 properties 1540 reference files 1566 renaming 1565 reports 1608 space boundaries 15681570 displaying 1569 grip-editing 1570 space calculation modifier styles. See calculation
modifier styles subtracting holes 1581 surfaces. See space surfaces tools 1543, 1562 trimming 1585 types 1532 updating 1588 usable boundary 1568 viewing information 1607 zone boundary offset 1636 special conditions in a wall 665 sphere mass elements 546 spiral stairs 11041107, 11401141 arc constraints 1107 calculation rules 1106 constraints, changing 1140 creating 1104 drawn direction, changing 1140 floor settings 1107 horizontal orientation 1105 outside edge, changing 1141 terminating with 1106 vertical orientation 1105 stair 1108, 1110 custom from linework 1108 custom from tread profiles 1110 stair anchors 11471148 landing 1147 releasing 1148 stair body modifiers 11611166 editing 1165 geometry 1164 removing 1165 restoring to mass element 1166 stair components 11621163
adding to 1162 replacing 1163 subtracting from 1162 working with 1161 stair dimensions 1116, 1119, 1123, 1127, 1129, 1139 height, changing 1139
justification, changing 1139 multi-landing stairs, changing 1119 spiral, changing 1127 straight stairs, changing 1116 u-shaped, changing 1123 width, changing 1129 stair flights 1130, 1176 components, changing 1176 shape 1130 stair height 1118, 11221123, 1126, 1128 multi-landing stairs, changing 11221123 spiral stairs, changing 1128 straight stairs, changing 1118 u-shaped stairs, changing 1126 stair interference conditions 1166, 1168, 11701171, 1173
1174 curtain walls 1171, 1173 door assemblies 11731174 size, changing 1174 slabs 1168, 1170 spaces 11701171 walls 1166, 1168 window assemblies 11731174 stair landings 1131, 1176, 1178 components, changing 1176 extensions, changing 1178 shape 1131 stair location 1117, 1120, 1124, 1127 multi-landing stairs, changing 1120 spiral stairs, changing 1127 straight stairs, changing 1117 u-shaped stairs, changing 1124 stair sides, changing shape 1132, 1134, 11361138 generating polyline 1137 offsetting side 1136 projecting side 1134 removing changes 1138 stair styles 1139, 11901192, 11951196, 11981202 changing 1139 classifications 1202 color 1199 components 1195, 1198 creating 1191 defined 1190 dimension properties 1192 display properties 11991200 editing 1192 files 1202 landing extensions 1196 layer 1199 linetype 1199 materials 1198 notes 1202 riser numbering display 1201 stringers 1192 stair tools 1091, 1114 creating 1114 finding in palettes 1091 stair tower 12051206 creating 1205 modifying 1206 Stair Tower Generator 1204 stair winder styles 12031204 creating 1203 defined 1203
files 1204 notes 1204 settings 1203 stair winders 11481149, 1151, 1153, 1155, 1157, 1159 adding a tread 1155 aligning a tread edge 1151 editing 1148 lengthening a flight to align tread edge 1149 manual editing 1157, 1159 moving tread ends 1159 removing a tread 1153 straightening treads 1157 StairFit 1145 stairs 10901091, 11141115, 1121, 1143, 11621163, 1179,
11831189, 1212 adding and subtracting objects 1162 AEC options 1090 attaching railings 1212 components 1186 cut planes 1186 dimensions 1143 display properties 1187 display properties, changing 1186 editing 1115 files 1189 grips 1115 hyperlinks 1189 location 1184 materials, specifying 1185 multiple, with same style 1114 notes 1189 overlapping 1179, 1183 replacing stairs with objects 1163 riser numbers, displaying 1188 shape 1121 stair tools, creation with 1091 tool properties 1184 stamp-type components 1817 standard display settings 352, 440 accessing 352 standard sets See default display sets standard styles 351 accessing 351 standard tools 328, 339 project 339 standards drawings 156 for projects 156 standards, layer. See layer standards starburst pattern in window muntins 1057 starting Autodesk Architectural Desktop 16 status indicator for read-only drawings 454 steps, adding to roof or floor line 642, 800 Stock Tool catalog 79, 92 categories 92 viewing 79 stops, door 988 straight curtain walls 717 curtain wall tools, creation with 717 straight stairs 10921093 calculation rules 1093 creating 1092 terminating with 1093 vertical orientation 1092 structural column grid tools 1458
2107 | Index
structural column grids 1458 structural member body modifiers 1375, 13771379
adding 1375 editing 1378 geometry 1377 removing 1378 restoring to mass element 1379 structural member components 1377
replacing 1377 working with 1375 Structural Member Catalog 1328, 13311334 browsing 1331 content of 1332 locating shapes 1334 opening 1332 opening catalog files 1334 organization of 1331 structural member styles, creating 13311333 structural member length properties 1966 Structural Member Style wizard 1328, 1334 structural member styles, creating 1334 structural member styles 455, 13311334, 1374, 13811384,
13861390 catalog shapes, creating from 13321333 changing 1374 classifications 1390 custom blocks 13881389
adding 1388 removing 1389 turning off 1389 cut plane elevation 1387 display components 1383 display problems 455 display properties 1384 hatching 1386 layer, color, and linetype 1386 materials 1383 assigning 1383 notes 1390 overview 1381 reference files 1390 Structural Member Catalog 1331 Structural Member Style wizard 1334 Style Manager 1382 structural members 1328, 13301331, 13351336, 1338, 1340, 1342, 13571358, 13621369, 13721374, 13761377, 1379, 1381, 1384, 13911392, 1394, 1397, 1399, 14031404, 1927 adding objects to 1379 creating 1331 curved structural members 1367 custom 1391 custom shape 1404 custom shapes 1394, 1403 adding 1394 creating 1403 design rules 1392 display representations 1384 editing 1358 endpoint 1364 grips, editing with 1358 hyperlinks 1374 justification 1367 length 1362 linework, creating from 1357
2108 | Index
materials 1330 modifying 1394 multi-component 1397, 1399 notes 1374 overview 1328 radius of curved 1366 reference files 1374 removing objects from 1381 replacing structural members with objects 1377 rigid frames. See rigid frame structural members roll 1365 shapes, adding 1394 start and end offsets 1363 start point 1364 styles 1374 subtracting objects 1376 tags, adding 1927 tool properties 1374 tools 13351336, 1338, 1340, 1342
beam tools 1336 brace tools 1338 column tools 1340 trim planes 13681369, 13721374 adding 1369 adding, based on object or linework 1372 changing 1373 mitering 1373 overview 1368 removing 1374 type of 1368 structural members body modifiers 1376 structural members 1376 subtracting from 1376 Style dialog box 453 Style Manager 452458, 1382 drawings and templates 456457 closing 457 creating new 457 determining status of 456 dragging 457 opening 456457 left pane 453 menu bar and toolbar 453 opening 454 overview 452 right pane 453 status bar 453 structural member styles 1382 styles 452, 454455, 458 creating 458 dragging to tool palettes 452 sorting 454 viewing 455 styles 328, 452456, 458460, 466, 487, 632, 704, 708, 1608, 1958, 1961 attaching property set data 1958 cleanup group definitions 452 copying and assigning 458 copying between drawings 459 creating 458 creating tools from 452, 458 displaying 453 entering properties 1958 layer key 452 materials 466, 487
opening endcaps 708 predefined 452 previewing 453 removing property set data 1961 renaming 459 sending to other users 460 sorting 454 spaces 1608 standard tools 328 structural member 455 unused, removing 460 viewing 455 viewing across multiple drawings 456 wall endcaps 704 walls 632 See also individual component names, Style Manager styles locations 74 subcategories. See categories, project subdivisions, section 16611662, 1666, 1670, 16791680,
1695 components 1695 display of 16791680 section lines 1670 Subtract command 1492 subtracting 1581 spaces 1581 subtractive mass elements 580, 592 sunburst pattern in window muntins 1059 support files 155 for projects 155 support files locations 74 surface hatch linework, sections 1694 surface hatch material components 475 surface hatches 478479, 481485, 489 curved surfaces 478 extrusions 479 free form mass elements 481 hidden, displaying 483 hiding 482 multiple faces 479 offset, horizontal and vertical 484 overrides, editing 485 overriding 481 patterns 489 rotation 483 surfaces 124, 128, 1589 importing 124, 128 spaces 1589 swings, door 970, 973, 992 angle 973 direction 970 displaying as straight line 992 location 970 swings, window 1024, 1026 angles 1026 direction 1024 location 1024 synchronization 334335, 356359, 361364 automatic 334 display settings 359 exceptions 357 excluding display settings 362 excluding styles 362 individual display settings 362 individual styles 361
manual 335 of project standards 334 performing 356 project drawing 364 project drawing with standards 358 report 362 selected styles 359 semi-automatic 334 setup 335 with AutoCAD standards 363 synchronizing project standards 353
T
target dimensions 1609 for spaces 1609
technical support 11 templates 106, 116, 412, 456457, 1654
closing in Style Manager 457 creating drawings from 106 creating in Style Manager 457 default folders 106, 116 defined 106 dragging in Style Manager 457 opening in Style Manager 456457 predefined display configurations 412 space evaluation documents 1654 terminating with 1093, 1096, 1101, 1106 multi-landing stairs 1096 spiral stairs 1106 straight stairs 1093 u-shaped stairs 1101 text 40, 1799 fields 1799 in tool palettes 40 text-based annotation 1855 editing 1855 text-only annotation 1854 creating 1854 text-with-leader annotation 1854 creating 1854 thresholds, door 993 display properties 993 symbols 993 title blocks 301303 inserting 303 multi-view blocks 302 project attributes 301 project blocks 302 tools, creating 303 title marks 1885, 1888, 1893 inserting 1893 properties 1888 tool catalog libraries 7879, 82, 85, 8789, 91 catalogs 79, 82, 85, 87, 89, 91
adding 85 copying 87 creating 82 editing properties 89 removing 91 viewing 79 opening 91 renaming 91 websites, adding 88
2109 | Index
tool catalogs 7882, 8487, 89, 9192, 9495, 97102, 341 342, 345
adding tools from drawings 84, 342 catalog libraries 85 categories, definition of 92, 94 copying 87, 100101
tool packages 101 tool palettes 100 creating 82 creating a catalog install file 86 creating from drawings 82, 341 creating from projects 341 customizing tools 98 deleting items 98 dragging items to workspace 81 for projects 345 i-drop icon 80 linked 89 linked and unlinked items 99 moving tools between 97 name limitations 82 opening in Content Browser 102 properties, editing 89 publishing 87 read-only 80 refresh options for tool palettes 102 removing 91 searching 9192 supplied with Autodesk Architectural Desktop 78 tool packages, adding 95 tool palettes, adding 95 tools 95, 99 adding 95 using 99 unlinked 89 viewing 79 tool content 178 root path 178 tool content root path 345 in projects 345 tool packages 9497, 101, 103 adding to tool catalogs 95 adding tools 95 copying 96, 101 moving 96 moving tools between 97 opening in Content Browser 103 overview 94 tool palettes 20, 33, 38, 4042, 75, 81, 9497, 100, 102103, 156, 199, 347, 349 activating for projects 199 adding from Content Browser 41 adding to tool catalogs 95 adding tools 95 appearance 38 AutoCAD tool palettes 75 central location 40 copying 96, 100 creating 38 dragging to workspace 81 for projects 156 in Content Browser 40 moving 96 moving tools between 97 opening in Content Browser 103
2110 | Index
overview 94 project profile, adding 349 refreshing 102 selecting project standards 347 separator lines 40 setting the appearance 38 text 40 updating from Content Browser 42 working from central location 40 tool palettes group 34, 38 creating 38 tool palettes set 3437 adjusting transparency 36 appearance 35 creating 37 different palette combinations 36 docking 35 hiding 36 opening 35 renaming 36 setting appearance 35 specifying tool palettes 36 toolbars in Autodesk Architectural Desktop 18 tools 35, 4350, 5254, 75, 97, 101, 452, 458, 614, 618, 724,
872, 937, 939, 961, 964, 1015, 1018, 1066, 1072, 1091, 1114, 1211, 1216, 1248, 1254, 1264, 1272, 1426, 1454, 1458, 1468, 1471, 1519, 1632, 1750, 1759, 1786, 2014 AEC dimension 1750, 1759 AEC polygon 937, 939 anchor 1426 applying properties to object 53 AutoCAD tools 75 ceiling grid 1468, 1471 column grid 1454 command tools 49 copying from tool palette 48 creating from DesignCenter 49, 2014 creating from objects 47 creating from Style Manager 48 creating from styles 452, 458 creating objects 44 curtain wall 724 deleting 54 dependencies 97 door 961, 964 door assembly 872 elevation label 1786 from a central location 50 icon 4647 changing 46 refreshing 47 in Content Browser 50 linking from Content Browser 50 multi-view blocks 1519 openings 1066, 1072 properties, changing 45 railing 1211, 1216 re-importing styles 53 refreshing 101 removing link to Content Browser 53 roof 1248, 1254 slab 1264, 1272 stair 1091, 1114 structural column grid 1458
style location 43 tool types 44 updating from Content Browser 52 updating in Content Browser 52 wall 614, 618 window 1015, 1018 window assembly 872 zone 1632 top-level categories, specifying location of 211 Trim command 14881489 trim linework 1488 trim linework to edge 1489 trim planes, structural members 13681369, 1373 trim profile-based object 1488 trim profile-based object to edge 1489 trimming 1585 spaces 1585 troubleshooting 114, 447449, 658, 20052008 AEC Editor 114 classifications 2006 display changes upon dragging 448 display system 447 existence of objects in drawings 448 linetypes 449 schedule table styles 2006 schedule tables 2005 schedule tags 2007 units, on extended data tab 2008 viewports 448 wall cleanups 658 true colors 956 AEC polygons 956 masking in AEC polygons 956 turn types 1095, 1100 multi-landing stairs 1095 u-shaped stairs 1100
U
u-shaped stairs 11001103, 1175 alignment, changing 1175 calculation rules 1102 constraints 1103 creating 1100 floor settings 1103 horizontal orientation 1100 terminating with 1101 turn types 1100 vertical orientation 1101
UCS 69 aligning to object face 69
units 1952, 2008 property data formats 1952 troubleshooting 2008
units, specifying in drawings 108 updating 1803
fields 1803 usable boundary 1568 user interface 25
guidelines to 25 utilities 2034
referencing AEC objects 2034
V
validating LandXML 127 version 368369, 375376
editing 375 exceptions 369 GUID 369 history 369 new 369 project standards 368 project standards drawing 375 purging 376 purging history 376 version history 375 vertical orientation 1092, 1096, 1101, 1105 multi-landing stairs 1096 spiral stairs 1105 straight stairs 1092 u-shaped stairs 1101 vertices in roof and floor lines 647, 801 view directions 424, 431 and display representations 424 assigning display sets 431 viewers, placement of 114 viewport layer mapping 121 viewports 412, 417418, 432, 448 display configurations 417, 432
assigning 432 default 432 displaying objects 412, 418 troubleshooting 448 views 148, 240245, 247, 249253, 257258, 314 and sheet views 242 annotation 243 changing 257 and constructs 241 content 258 creating 245, 247 assigning levels and divisions 247 defining properties 245 selecting constructs 247 deleting 253, 258 electronically transmitting 252 external references, displaying 249 interactions with projects 257 layer snapshots 242 model space 241 names and categories 257 opening and closing 249 overview 148, 240 plotting sheets 242 projects, adding to 257 properties 251 regenerating 252, 314 specialized view drawings 250 templates 244 updating 243 when to start with 244 XML files 244 Visual Audit utility 2032 performing 2032 volume anchors 14241425 adding 1424 anchoring to different volumes 1425 copying objects to all layout volumes 1425
2111 | Index
defined 1424 position of objects attached to, changing 1424 size of objects attached to, changing 1424
W
wall area properties 1965 wall base height 621 wall body modifiers 682686
editing 685 geometry 684 removing 685 restoring to mass element 686 wall components 682683
adding to 682 replacing 683 subtracting from 682 working with 682 wall cleanup definitions, notes and reference files 662 wall cleanup groups 656, 661662 assigning different definitions 656 creating 662 definitions 661 wall cleanups, troubleshooting 658 wall component index 692 wall components 649, 692, 698, 700 cleanup priorities of 692 hatching 649, 700 layer, color, and linetype 649, 700 material components 698 wall endcap styles 633, 704, 706708 applying 704 creating 704 geometry 707 notes and files 708 overriding graphically 633 polylines used in 704 polylines, creating from 706 wall endcap profile 706 wall grips 620 wall interference conditions 686 wall length 621, 1966 changing 621 properties 1966 wall modifier styles 681 creating 681 notes and files 681 wall modifiers 673674, 676677, 679, 687 adding 676 apply opposite face 673 bump-outs or chases 673 converting polylines to 674 editing 677 placement 679 removing 687 working with 673 wall properties 687 wall radius 621 wall roof lines 623 wall styles 688, 690691, 693694, 698703, 712 adding component from another style 694 classifications 703 complex endcaps 702
2112 | Index
components 690691, 693, 698, 700, 702, 712 creating 693 hatching 700 miters 702 removing 698 viewing 691 width and offset 712
components browser 691 creating 688 cut planes 701 defined 688 display properties 699 endcap styles 690 information 702 materials 698699 notes and reference files 703 wall sweeps 667668, 673 adding to walls 667 editing 673 geometry 668 mitering 673 profiles, creating for 667 removing 673 wall tools 614, 618 creating 618 finding in palettes 614 wall volume properties 1965 wall width 621 walls 610, 613618, 620, 624635, 637641, 647648, 650
658, 661, 663668, 673674, 676677, 679, 681 683, 687, 704, 708709, 711712, 722, 980, 1252, 1926, 19651966 3D objects, creating from 618 adding and subtracting objects 682 anchoring objects to 665 base height, changing 627 chamfering 637 cleanup 652, 656 cleanup circles 653 cleanup guidelines 655 cleanup priorities 654 cleanup radius 657 converting 674 polylines to wall modifiers 674 converting to curtain walls 722 creating 615 creating roofs from 1252 curved walls 711 customized surfaces 665 cut plane display 650 defaults 613 direction 610, 639 display properties 648, 651 door assemblies, adding 664 doors, adding to 664 duplicated in xref drawings 661 editing 620 endcap styles 704 filleting 635 floor line vertices 711 floor lines 639, 641 gable roof lines 641 graphlines 653, 657 interference conditions 687 interference objects, modifying 687
joining 635 justification 616, 629 length properties 1966 length, changing 628 linework, creating from 617 location 633 materials 648 merging 633 modifier styles 681 modifiers 673, 677 moving 620, 630 multiple, with same style 618 notes and reference files 652 objects 663, 665
adding 663 detaching 665 removing 665 offsets 616, 630 opening endcap styles 708709 openings 663 position 631 profiles for sweeps 667 releasing doors from 980 removing all merged 635 removing individual merged 634 replacing walls with objects 683 repositioning 630 reverse baseline 639 roof line vertices 711 roof lines 639640 shape, changing 624 special conditions 665 start and end points 639 styles 632 sweeps 666668, 673 adding to 667 editing 673 geometry 668 mitering 673 removing 673 tags, adding 1926 tool properties 632 trimming 638 true length 711 vertices in roofs and floors 647 volume properties 1965 wall component priorities, changing 658 wall modifiers 676, 679 wall styles, width 712 wall tools, creation with 614 width, changing 625626 window assemblies, adding 664 windows, adding 663 websites, adding to tool catalog libraries 88 width 621, 928, 966, 972, 1020, 1026 door 966, 972 door assembly 928 wall 621 window 1026 window¶ 1020 winders 1148, 1157, 1159 editing 1148 manual editing 1157, 1159
window assemblies 661, 754, 867869, 871872, 879, 883, 895, 897, 907908, 913914, 918, 920921, 923 924, 926934
alignment of objects in cells 934 auto-adjusting cells 879 cell markers 913 centering in walls from xref drawings 661 creating 867868 curtain walls, inserting into 754 custom grids 871 dimensions 930 display of 908 division overrides 923924 editing 927 editing objects in cells 933 frame and mullion overrides 918 frame edges 920 frames and mullion overrides 918 freestanding 931 height 929 hyperlinks 933 in-place editing 921 infills 883, 914
for inserting objects 883 overrides 914 interference conditions 932 matching properties 930 materials 907 merging cells 913 mitering 932933 moving 927, 930 mullion edges 920 multiple, with same style 872 nested grids 895, 897 notes and reference files 933 offset of objects in cells 934 orientation of objects in cells 934 positioning 869 releasing anchored objects in cells 934 removing overrides 926 sizes 928 swapping two objects 934 width 928 window assembly tools, creation with 868 window assembly cells 881, 898, 900901 cell assignment 901 filling with panel 898 infills 881, 900 defining 881 removing 900 objects, inserting 900 window assembly components 908910 custom graphics 910 display 908 hatching 909 layer, color, and linetype 909 window assembly dimensions 869 window assembly frame 889 window assembly frames 902 window assembly grids 866867, 871, 876877, 879880, 890895, 903904 cells 877, 880, 895 fixed size 877 manually defining number and size 880 custom 871
2113 | Index
divisions 876877, 894 elements 866867 fixed number 879 frame edges 903904 frames, adding 903 mullions 890893 nested grids 895 offset 880 window assembly grips 928 editing window assemblies using 928 window assembly properties 912 window assembly styles 873877, 881882, 884887, 889
895, 902, 904906, 911912, 927, 930931 assigning 894895, 904
definitions to elements 894 definitions to mullions 904 divisions to grids 894 infills to cells 895 assignments 902 cell infills 895 changing 930 creating 875 creating cut planes 911 defined 873 division definitions 881 element of 927 elements of 875, 894 frame offsets 889 frames 886 width and depth 886 grid cells 876877 infills 884885, 912 alignment 884 definitions 885 offset 884 overriding 912 matching styles 930 mullions 890, 893, 905906 assignments 905 definitions 893 offsets 893 removing from grids 906 width and depth 890 notes and reference files 911 overrides 912 overview of creating 874 panel infills 882 profiles 887, 891892 frames 887 mullions 891892 shape 931 window assembly tools 872 window components 10421043, 1045 custom blocks for 1043 display of, turning off 1045 layer, color, and linetype 1042 window styles, removing from 1045 window dimensions 1036 changing for window styles 1036 window frames, assigning materials 1041 window hinges, changing location 1024 window measurements. See window dimensions window muntins 1041, 10471048, 1050, 1052, 1054, 1057, 1059, 1061, 10631064 creating 1047
2114 | Index
diamond pattern 1050 display of, turning off 1063 editing 1063 gothic pattern 1061 materials 1041 prairie-12 lights 1054 prairie-9 lights 1052 rectangular pattern 1048 starburst pattern 1057 sunburst pattern 1059 window styles, removing from 1064 window sash materials 1041 window sills 1017, 1046 height 1017 specifying display 1046 window styles 1018, 1026, 10351039, 10421043, 1045,
1047, 1064 changing 1026 components 1043, 1045 creating 1035 creating window tools from 1018 custom window shapes 1037 defined 1035 design rules for 1038 dimensions 1036 display of components, turning off 1045 display properties 1042 geometry 1039 materials 1043 muntins 1064 notes and files 1047 opening percentage 1045 standard sizes 1037 window swings 1024, 1026 angles 1026 direction 1024 location 1024 opening percent 1026 windows 661, 754, 900, 10151020, 10251027, 10291034,
10371042, 1045, 1597, 1601, 1925 aligning by head height or sill height 1017 centering in walls from xref drawings 661 creating 10151018
from door and window assemblies 1018 from doors 1018 from openings 1018 in door and window assemblies 1017 in walls 1016 custom shapes 1037 display components and materials 1040 display properties, specifying 1042 door and window assemblies, inserting 900 into 900 editing 1020 freestanding 1034 geometry, editing 1039 head height, aligning 1017 horizontal position 1030 in space surfaces 1597, 1601 adding 1597 removing 1601 inserting 900, 1017 into door assemblies 900 inserting into curtain walls 754 materials, assigning 1041
moving 1020, 1027, 1029 along walls 1027 within walls 1029
multiple with same style 1018 notes and reference files 1034 opening endcap styles 1034 opening percents, specifying 1045 positioning 1017, 1019, 1032
horizontally 1032 properties of 1020 rise, changing 1025 schedule tags, adding 1925 sizes 1017 sizes, standard 1037 tools, creating 1018 type and shape 1038 vertical alignment, changing 1027 vertical orientation 1033 vertical position 1031 width 1020, 1026
changing how measured 1026 grips, using to edit 1020 window tools, creating with 1015 wings. See divisions wizard, Create AEC Content 1500 worksheets 57 workspace 14, 1625, 31, 3335, 43, 54, 76 adding objects 25 application status bar 23 command line 22 communication center 24 components 17 context menus 19 drawing window status bar 22 interdependencies with AutoCAD 76 modifying objects 31 overview 14 Project Navigator palette 24 Properties palette 21, 54 pulldown menus 17 starting Autodesk Architectural Desktop 16 tool palettes 20, 33 tool palettes group 34 tool palettes set 34 toolbars 18 tools 35, 43
X
XML files 147, 215, 229, 259, 314315 constructs 215 corrupted or deleted 315 elements 229 plotting sheets 259 project 147, 314
xrefs 1748 associatively dimensioning 1748
xrefs. See external references (xrefs)
Z
zone boundary offset 1636
zone hatch 1644 inheriting to spaces 1644
zone styles 16401646 arrow 1645 classifications 1642 component hatching 1643 content restrictions 1641 converting from area group styles 1646 creating 1640 defined 1640 display properties 1642 files 1645 hatching components 1643 inheriting hatch to spaces 1644 layer, color, linetype 1642 list definitions 1641 marker size 1645 notes 1645 text style 1645
zone templates 16471650 contents 1648 converting from area group templates 1650 creating 1647 defined 1647 files 1649 notes 1649 properties 1648
zone tools 1628, 1632 creating 1632 zones, creating 1628
zones 16271639, 1641, 1657 attaching to zones 1634 calculation modifier styles 1637 calculation type 1637 changing style 1636 commands 1657 content restrictions 1641 content rules 1637 converting from area groups 1633 creating 16291630 defined 1627 detaching from zones 1635 hyperlinks 1639 modifying 1635 multiple, with same style 1632 notes 1639 ordering structure 1638 polylines, creating 1638 properties 1628 reference files 1639 renaming 1635 selecting attached spaces 1635 selecting attached zones 1635 structure 1638 templates 1627, 1631 See Also zone templates tools 1628 zone boundary offset 1636 zone templates, creating from 1631
zoning 1627 zoning. See new zoning
2115 | Index
2116 | Index
Mac OS X 10.6.8 Quartz PDFContext